Group Viii Projects Final R FP 497221223

RFP FOR EPC_GROUP VIII PROJECT AT IIM INDORE
भारतीय प्रबंध संस्थान इं दौर

INDIAN INSTITUTE OF MANAGEMENT
INDORE
Prabandh Shikhar, Rau-Pithampur Road, Indore – 453556
(M.P.), India
Ph. 0731-2439620 Email: [email protected]
Tender Notice No. IIMI/Project/15/2023/150 File No.497
REQUEST FOR PROPOSAL

FOR
APPOINTMENT OF ENGINEERING,
PROCUREMENT & CONSTRUCTION (EPC)
CONTRACTOR FOR
CONSTRUCTION OF
GROUP VIII PROJECTS

COMPRISING OF MULTISTOREY HOSTEL BLOCKS,
ACADEMIC BUILDING, FACULTY OFFICES & APARTMENTS
AND OTHER ASSOCIATED INFRASTRUCTURE AT IIM
INDORE.
Page 1 of 1358
INDEX
Chapter No. Description Page No.

Chapter 1 Press Notice 5
Chapter 2 Invitation of RFP & Instruction to bidders 7
Chapter 3 Brief Detail and Objective of the Work 22
Chapter 4 List of personnel, Plant & Machinery 25
Eligibility criteria, Evaluation and Selection of EPC
Chapter 5
Contractor 31
Chapter 6 Scope of works 38
Chapter 7 Milestone Payment 71
Chapter 8 General Conditions of Contract 105
Part I Preliminary 107
Article 1 Definitions and Interpretation 110
Part II Scope of the Project 114
Article 2 Scope of the project 115
Article 3 Obligations of the EPC contractor 116
Article 4 Obligations of the IIM Indore 120
Article 5 Representations and warranties 121
Article 6 Disclaimer 124
Part III Construction 125
Article 7 Performance security 126
Article 8 Right of way 128
Article 9 Utilities 130
Design and construction of the
Article 10 131
project
Quality and safety assurance and
Article 11 137
Technical supervision
Article 12 Completion Certificate 143
Bid
Article 13 Change of scope 146
Article 14 Traffic regulation 147
Article 15 Defects liability 148
Article 16 Authority engineer 150
Part IV Financial Covenants 151
Article 17 Payments 152
Article 18 Insurance 162
Part V Force Majeure and Termination 166
Article 19 Force Majeure 167
Suspension of EPC contractor’s
Article 20 172
rights
Article 21 Termination 174
Part VI Other Provisions 180
Article 22 Assignment and charges 181
Article 23 Liability and Indemnity 182
Article 24 Dispute resolution 185
Article 25 Miscellaneous 186
Article 26 Definitions 191
Page 2 of 1358
Schedules 199
Schedule A Site of the project 200
Schedule B Development of the project 205
Schedule C Project facilities 207
Schedule D Specifications and standards 208
Schedule E Applicable permits 210
Schedule F Form of bank guarantee 211
Schedule G Contract price weightages 216
Schedule H Drawings 218
Schedule I Project completion schedule 219
Schedule J Tests On Completion 18
220
Schedule K Provisional certificate 221
Schedule L Selection of authority engineer 223
Schedule M Forms of payment statements 225
Schedule N Insurance 226
Chapter 9 Special Conditions of Contract 228
9.1 Preamble 229
9.2 General Scope of Works 229
9.3 Order of Precedence 229
9.4 Access 230
9.5 Deviation Limits 231
9.6 Maintenance Liability 231
9.7 Samples 232
9.8 Mock-up 234
9.9 Transportation 234
9.10 EPC Contractor’s Labour 235
9.11 Engagement of Apprentices 235
9.12 As-Built Drawings 236
9.13 Method Statement 237
EPC Contractor responsible for sufficiency of
9.14 237
resources
9.15 Temporary Works 238
9.16 Pumping Out Water 239
9.17 Steel for Reinforcement / Cement 240
9.18 Fire Precautions 241
9.19 Use of Site 241
Protection / Safety of adjacent Structures, trees and
9.20 242
shrubs
9.21 Cleaning of Works 242
9.22 Site Drainage 243
9.23 Testing Facilities at the Site Laboratory 243
9.24 On-site and Off-site Testing 246
9.25 Quality Assurance 246
9.26 Pre - Installation Requirements 247
9.27 Pre - Delivery Inspection 247
9.28 Acceptance Testing Procedure 247
9.29 Warranty 248
Page 3 of 1358
9.30 Preventive Maintenance 249

9.31 Training 249
9.32 Tender Programme 249
9.33 Progress Reporting 250
9.34 Standard Codes / IS Codes 251
9.35 Site Conditions 252
9.36 Hoisting, Transportation etc. 252
9.37 Multiple Visits 252
9.38 Protection / Preservation of Trees 252
9.39 Shop Drawings 253
9.40 Documents 253
9.41 Operation and Maintenance Manuals 254
9.42 Obtaining Clearances / Certificates from Authorities 255
9.43 Manufacturing 255
9.44 Manufacturer Instruction 255
9.45 Import License 255
Interference / Co-ordination if any with Other
9.46 255
Services
9.47 Make of Materials 256
9.48 Sample Submission and Approval 256
9.49 Substitute Material 257
9.50 Material Testing 257
9.51 Interchangeability 257
9.52 Works Inspection 257
9.53 Inspection and Testing 258
9.54 Material & Equipment Supplied by The Authority 258
9.55 Safety of Material 258
9.56 Tendered Quoted price all Inclusive 258
9.57 Partial Occupancy of Services 259
9.58 Equipment 259
9.59 License and Permit 260
9.60 Working Programmes 260
9.61 Record Keeping 264
9.63 Office Facility 265
9.64 Final Bill 267
9.65 Mechanisation 267
9.66 Minimum Technical Parameters 268
9.67 Taxes and GST Compliances 268
9.68 GRIHA compliances 268
9.69 Handing Over 276
9.70 Disposal of Debris and waste material 277
9.71 Contribution of PF and ESI 277
Summary of Consequential Clauses in case of non-
279
performance
Forms 283
Annexure 305
Financial Bid 1356
Page 4 of 1358
CHAPTER-1
PRESS NOTICE
Page 5 of 1358
CHAPTER 1
भारतीय प्रबंध संस्थान इं दौर
प्रेस नोटिस
प्रस्ताव के टिए अनुरोध (ई-टनटवदा) संदभभ NIT No. IIMI/Project/15/2023/150 फाइि संख्या 497
ईपीसी ठे केदार की टनयुक्ति

भारतीय प्रबंध संस्थान इं दौरमें बहुमंजिला छात्रावास ब्लाक ,ं अकादजमक भवन, संकाय कायाालय ं तथाअपार्ा मेंर् और अन्य
संबद्ध अवसंरचनाओं के समूह आठवीं पररय िनाओं के ईपीसी हे तु ठे केदार की जनयुक्ति के जलए पात्र फमों से ऑनलाइन
जनजवदा आमंजत्रत की िाती हैं ।
ई-जनजवदा के माध्यम से ब ली िमा करने की अंजतम जतजथ 16 जनवरी 2024 तक और समय अपराह्न 03:00 बिे तक है ।
ब ली फॉमा और अन्य जववरण ई-प्र क्य रमेंर् प र्ा ल वेबसाइर् https://eprocure.gov.in/eprocure/app.या

आईआईएम इं दौर की वेबसाइर् से: http://www.iimidr.ac.inसे दे खे और डाउनल ड जकए िा सकते हैं
ह /-
निदे शक
INDIAN INSTITUTE OF MANAGEMENT INDORE

PRESS NOTICE
Request for Proposal (E-Tendering) vide NIT No. IIMI/Project/15/2023/150 File No.497
APPOINTMENT OF EPC CONTRACTOR

Online bids are invited from the eligible firms/agency/enterprise for appointment of EPC
Contractor for Construction of Group VIII Projects comprising of multistorey hostel blocks,
academic building, faculty offices & apartments and other associated Infrastructure at IIM Indore.
Last date & time of submission of bid through e-tendering is 16th January 2024, up to 03:00 P.M.
The Bid forms and other details can be seen and downloaded from e-procurement portal namely
CPP having URL- https://eprocure.gov.in/eprocure/app OR from IIM Indore website:
http://www.iimidr.ac.in
sd/-
Director
Page 6 of 1358
CHAPTER 2
Invitation of RFP &

Instruction to Bidders
Page 7 of 1358
CHAPTER 2
Invitation of RFP & Instruction to Bidders
Director, Indian Institute of Management Indore invites online bids in two bid system (i.e.,
Technical bid & Financial bid) from the eligible “EPC Contractor firms/agency/enterprise”. Details
are as follows:
A.1 Information Related to Bid
A.1.1 NIT No.: IIMI/Project/15/2023/150 File No.497
“Appointment of EPC Contractor for Construction of Group VIII

Projects comprising of multistorey hostel blocks, academic
A.1.2 Name of Work
building, faculty offices & apartments and other associated
Infrastructure at IIM Indore.”
A.1.3 Estimated cost Rs. 458 Crore (excluding GST)
27 Calendar Months, including monsoon periods (1 month for

A.1.4 Contract period Design and 26 months for Engineering, procurement, and
Construction & Handing over and Project Closure) or till the
completion / Finalization / complete documentation of Group
VIII Projects, whichever is later.
(Contract Period includes the Engineering, procurement,
Construction and Handing over of the work as per design
intent and scope of work mentioned in this EPC RFP within
stipulated timelines, following good standard practices, high
Quality, and high safety Construction standards.)
Compensation for @ 0.75% per month subject to a maximum of 5% of the accepted
A.1.5
delay Tendered Value under this clause, to be computed on a per day
basis after the contract period. Further details for levying the
compensation are as follows:
• If the EPC Contractor fails to adhere the timelines to complete
the respective deliverables as mentioned in this RFP on or before
the period mentioned or justified extended date of completion
of the respective deliverables i.e. excluding any extension given
without compensation, he shall, without prejudice to any other
right or remedy available under the law to the IIM Indore on
account of such breach, pay as compensation the amount
calculated at the rates stipulated above.
• The Director IIM Indore will be the sole authority who may
decide on the amount of accepted Tendered Value of the work
for every completed day/month (as determined) that the
progress remains below the specified or that the Work remains
Page 8 of 1358
incomplete.
• Provided always that the total amount of compensation for

delay to be paid under this condition shall not exceed 5 % (five
percent) of the accepted Tendered Value. In case no
compensation of delay has been imposed by the Director IIM
Indore during the pendency of the contract, there shall be no
waiver of right to levy compensation by the Director IIM Indore
if the Work remain incomplete on final justified extended date
of completion. If the institute decides to give further extension
of time allowing performance of services/works beyond the
justified extended date, the EPC Contractor may be liable to pay
compensation for such an extended period.
• Provided that compensation during the progress of Work

before the justified extended date of completion for delay
under this clause shall be for non-achievement of sectional
completion or part handing over of Work on stipulated/justified
extended date for such part work or if delay affects any other
works/services. This is without prejudice to the right of action
by the institute for levying compensation in respect of delay in
performance and claim of compensation. In case action has not
been finalized and the works/services has been
determined/terminated under the respective clause of this
RFP, the right of action under this clause shall remain post
determination of contract but levy of compensation shall be for
days the progress is behind the schedule on date of
determination, as assessed by the competent authority, after
due consideration of justified extension. Compensation for the
delay, if not decided before the determination of contract, shall
be decided after the determination of contract. The amount of
compensation may be adjusted or set off against any sum
payable to the EPC Contractor under this RFP or any other
contract with IIM Indore.
Only On-Line mode

(Note- Hard copy of technical bid (for both the stages i.e.
Mode of
A.1.6 Technical Bid stage-1 & Technical Bid stage-2) shall also be
submission of Bid
submitted with duly signed by Authorized Signatory within 7
days of last date of submission.)
Page 9 of 1358
A.1.7 Bid Security

Rs. 9.16 Crores /- (Rupees Nine Crore Sixteen Lakh only)
Note:
1. Bid Security shall be refunded after the selection process is
over.
2. Normally in the case of unsuccessful bidders it gets refunded
on or before the 30th day after the award of the contract.
3. The bid security deposited along with bid by the successful
bidder shall be returned after receiving the requisite performance
guarantee.
4. Bid security may be forfeited -
• if any bidder withdraws or modify their Bids during the period
of validity, or
• if the successful bidder, after being awarded the contract, fails

to sign the contract, or to submit a performance Guarantee
before the deadline defined in the RFP or as per the instruction
of IIM Indore, whichever is later. In this case the action of
forfeiture shall be undertaken without any notice. Also, the
bidder shall not be allowed to participate in the re-tendering
process of the services. Along with the aforesaid, they will be
suspended for a period of two years from being eligible to
submit Bids for contracts with IIM Indore.
5. 5. Bid not accompanied by the requisite bid security shall be
considered as non-responsive and shall be rejected.
Page 10 of 1358
A.2 Key Events and Dates
A.2.1 Publishing Date 09:00 AM on 24th December 2023
A.2.2 Document Download Start Date From 09:00 AM on 24th December 2023
11:00 AM on 4th January 2024, at Conference Hall,

A.2.3 Pre-Bid Meeting & Site Visit. Administration Block, IIM Indore. (Prospective
bidder has to request for entry permission in
advance through email on [email protected]
on or before 03:30 PM on 3rd January 2024)
Note:
1. Normally for this kind of project, in the first half
the participants used to be briefed about the
Project & taken to the project site as well as to
one of the existing building for a better
understanding of the requirement. And in the
second half the Pre-bid queries related
discussion takes place.
2. Participation by Authorized representative of
prospective bidder for physical Prebid meeting
and to joint site visit is required to understand
the requirement of the IIM Indore.
A.2.4 Uploading of clarifications on By 8th January 2024, on IIM Indore website.

queries
A.2.5 Last date and time of Up to 03:00 PM on 16th January 2024

submission of RFP
Date & Time of online opening of
A.2.6 03:30 PM on 17th January 2024
Technical bid Stage-1
Date & Time of online opening of
A.2.7 To be intimated later
Technical Bid stage – 2 & Financial
bid
A.3 Other Important Information Related to Bid
5 % of accepted tendered value (Awarded Value) to be

A.3.1 Security Deposit recovered from running bills. Alternatively, Bank
Guarantee (BG) Or fixed deposit receipts from a
scheduled commercial bank may be submitted, to be
payable at Indore. And it must be valid up to 60 days after
the defect liability period or till the final completion of
performance of the contract, whichever is later. The
Security Deposit of 5% will be released as follows –
a. After successful completion of the first year
Defect Liability Period : 50% of the Security
Page 11 of 1358
Deposit will be released.

b. After successful completion of the second year
Defect Liability Period : Balance 50% of the
Security Deposit will be released.
A.3.2 Performance Guarantee 5 % of accepted tendered value (Awarded Value) on

acceptance of bid. The performance guarantee may be
submitted in the form of bank guarantee OR demand
draft OR fixed deposit receipt from a scheduled
commercial bank which shall be refunded after 60 days
of completion of contract/services as per complete scope
of this RFP/issue of completion certificate whichever is
later.
Note:
1. The time period for submission will be governed
by following clauses:
i. Time allowed for submission of Performance

Guarantee will be 15 Days from the date of
issue of “Letter of Intent”.
ii. Maximum allowable extension will be with
late fee @ 0.1% per day of Performance
Guarantee amount beyond the period
provided in (i) above: 15 days.
2. Performance Guarantee shall be forfeited.

• If the successful bidder, after being awarded, the EPC
contractor fails to start the Mobilization of resources
as per agreed schedule at site within 15 days as
mentioned in this RFP or as directed by competent
Authority of IIM Indore.
• Upon Determination / termination of the contract. In
the case of determination / termination along with
the performance guarantee, security deposit already
recovered shall also be forfeited.
3. The decision of director IIM Indore shall be final &
binding in case of the forfeiture.
Page 12 of 1358
A.3.3 Mode of payment of Bid Bidders will have to deposit the Bid Security through NEFT
Security or RTGS or Bank guarantee from scheduled commercial
bank in the prescribed format. Other instruments are not
accepted on this account. Bank Details for the same are
as below:
Name of beneficiary: Indian Institute of Management
Indore Address : Rau-Pithampur Road,
Indore-453556, M.P.
Account No. 53018623445
Name of the Bank : State Bank of India,
IIM Indore Campus
IFSC Code : SBIN0030525
GST No. :23AAAJI0057R1Z3
PAN No. : AAAJI0057R
Bidders will have to upload scanned copy of Payment
details towards cost of Bid Security during the submission
of RFP and the same will be accepted only on verification
& confirmation by the Institute. Any delay in credit will not
be entertained by the Institute. In the absence of these
instruments the bids will summarily be rejected.
A.3.4 Method of Selection Quality and Cost Based Selection.
A.3.5 Indemnity Bond Bidder to submit professional indemnity insurance policy

after award to indemnify the institute against losses and
damages incurred due to EPC Contractor’s act @0.2% of
accepted tendered value (Awarded Value) per annum till
the currency of the agreement.
A.3.6
Bid Validity 90 days from the date of opening of Financial Bid
Page 13 of 1358
Note: General Information and bid submission
Online bids from amongst the eligible EPC Contractor firms/agency/enterprise having average
annual financial turnover of Rs. 1000 Crores on construction works (The average would be taken
as the best of three years among the last five years ending 31st March 2023) are invited under
two bids system for Appointment of EPC Contractor For construction of Group VIII Projects
Comprising of multi-storey hostel blocks, academic building, faculty offices & Apartments and
other associated Infrastructure at IIM Indore.
The eligible EPC Contractor firms/agency/enterprise having experience in executing works for a
similar project during the last 7 years ending the previous day of last date of submission of RFP
are requested to participate in the tendering process. A similar project here means “Execution
including Design/Engineering, Procurement and Construction / development of projects
comprising of RCC multi – storied Commercial/ Institutional/ Hospital/ Airport Buildings/Metros
Buildings/Railway Buildings/ Public office/ Corporate Office/ Head quarter building.
Eligibility of bidding agencies shall be evaluated on the basis of their overall past performance,
turnover, solvency, past legal records, timely completion of Projects, experience in executions of
similar projects, availability of skilled and unskilled manpower, availability of advance plant &
machinery, available technical manpower, their qualification & experience and further detailed
under Chapter 5. The Bidders are requested to submit correct information and give
documentary evidence as asked in the RFP document in support of their eligibility.
Page 14 of 1358
B. Guidelines for Online Bid Submission Through CPP Portal (As per the requirement
given to IIM Indore by CPP Portal)
B.1 It is mandatory for all the applicants to have class II or III digital signature certification
from licensed certifying agency like NIC, MTNL, e-mudra, TCS, safescrypt, GNFC etc.
B.2 Detailed RFP can be viewed free of cost on IIM Indore website under the URL
http://www.iimidr.ac.in/tenders/ . Financial bid form can be downloaded only from
https://eprocure.gov.in/eprocure/app. Uploading of the tender will be possible only after
making payment of Bid Security.
B.3 The tender shall be submitted online in the prescribed format before the date and time
as mentioned in RFP. Also, hard copy of only technical bid should be submitted by speed
post only. It will be the prospective bidders’ responsibility to post the hard copy in such
a way / date so that it should reach IIM Indore by the given due date.
B.4 The applicant have to upload the details of e-payment of Bid Security before the last date
& time and download the tender documents form the e-tendering portal
https://eprocure.gov.in/eprocure/app.
B.5 Tenderer are advised to upload their documents well in time to avoid last minute rush
on the server or complication in uploading. IIM Indore will not be responsible for any
type of problem in uploading the documents. No hard copies for tender submission shall
be entertained.
B.6 Online bid documents submitted by intending bidders shall be opened only of those
bidders, who has deposited e-Tender Bid Security and other documents scanned and
uploaded are found in order.
B.7 Information and Instructions for bidders posted on the website shall form part of bid
document.
B.8 The bid document consisting of plans, Tender drawings, DBR’s, specifications of various
types of items to be executed and the set of terms and conditions of the contract to be
complied with and other necessary documents can be seen and downloaded from
website https://eprocure.gov.in/eprocure/app free of cost.
B.9 Those bidders not registered on the website mentioned above, are required to get
registered beforehand. If needed the intending bidders may get acquainted with the
process online from the www.eprocure.gov.in site itself.
B.10 On opening date, the bidder can login and see the bid opening process. After opening
of bids, he will receive the competitor bid sheets.
B.11 Bidder can upload documents in the form of JPG format and PDF format.
B.12 The price bid format is provided in a spread sheet file like Financial bid.xls, the offer
should be entered in the allotted space only and uploaded after filling the relevant
columns. Financial Bid must not be modified/replaced by the bidder; else the bid
submitted is liable to be rejected for this tender.
B.13 Bidder must ensure to quote each item. Therefore, if any cell is left blank and no rate is
Page 15 of 1358
quoted by the bidder, rate of such item shall be treated as “0” (ZERO) although the item
have to be executed as per scope of contract.
B.14 The technical bid (stage-1) will be opened online first on due date and time, as mentioned
above. The time and date of opening of Technical bid (stage-2) and financial bid of
bidders qualifying the technical bid (stage-1) & financial bid respectively will be uploaded
on CPPP.
B.15 Completed Tenders containing technical bid and Financial bid will be received ONLINE
only on CPP Portal website https://eprocure.gov.in/eprocure/app at the fixed time and
date indicated in the RFP. The Tenderer will be at liberty to be present either in person
or through an authorized representative at the time of opening of the Technical Bid with
the Bid Acknowledgement Receipt or they can view the bid opening event online at their
remote end.
B.16 If there are any clarifications, this may be obtained online through the tender site, or
through the contact details. Bidder should take into account the corrigendum published
before submitting the bids online.
B.17 It is construed that the bidder has read all the terms and conditions before submitting
their offer. Bidder should go through the tender schedules carefully and upload the
documents as asked; otherwise, the bid will be rejected.
B.18 The bidder has to digitally sign and upload the required bid documents one by one as
indicated. Bidders to note that the very act of using DSC for downloading the bids and
uploading their offers shall be deemed to be a confirmation that they have read all
sections and pages of the bid document including General conditions of contract without
any exception and have understood the entire document and are clear about the
requirements of the tender requirements.
B.19 The bidders are requested to submit the bids through online e-tendering system to the
Tender Inviting Authority (TIA) well before the bid submission end date & time (as per
Server System Clock). The TIA will not be held responsible for any sort of delay, or the
difficulties faced during the submission of bids online by the bidders at the eleventh
hour. Tenderers are advised to upload their documents well in time to avoid last minute
rush on the server.
B.20 The time settings fixed in the server side & displayed at the top of the tender site, will be
valid for all actions of requesting, bid submission, bid opening etc., in the e-tender
system. The bidders should follow this time during bid submission.
B.21 The maximum size of file to be uploaded during submission of tender through online
mode will be governed by the CPP Portal provisions.
B.22 For any queries regarding e-tendering process, the bidders are requested to contact as
provided in the tender document. Parallelly for any further queries, the bidders are
asked to contact over phone: 0120-4200462, 0120-4001002, 91 8826246593 or send a
mail over to [email protected]
Page 16 of 1358
C. Other Information and terms & conditions
C.1 Time schedule
Time for completion of this construction as per the scope detailed in this document will
be as per the clause A.1.4 of this RFP. The contract will remain valid for the period
covered under the referred clause A.1.4 or till the completion / Finalization / complete
documentation or actual date of handing over/completion of work whichever is later.
The basic consideration and the essence of the contract shall be adherence to the time
schedule for performing the services as detailed under the scope.
C.2 Technical Bid
The Technical Bid need to be submitted by the bidder after duly considering the
requirements stipulated in this RFP.
C.3 List of Documents for Technical Bid to be uploaded on CPP Portal
I. Technical Bid Stage-1:
The following documents should be duly attested, and scanned copies uploaded on CPP
portal on or before the due date mentioned in RFP:
i. Letter of transmittal (form-01)
ii. Technical bid (RFP duly signed and sealed to be uploaded)
iii. E-payment details towards cost of bid security.
iv. Should have had average annual financial turnover of Rs. 1000 Crores on
construction works. The average would be taken as the best of three years among
the last five years ending 31st March 2023. (Scanned copy of certificate from CA with
Unique Document Identification Number (UDIN) to be uploaded.
v. Audited Profit & loss account for five financial years 2018-19, 2019-20, 2020-21,
2021-22 & 2022-23. (Should not have incurred any loss (profit after tax should be
positive) in more than two years during the last five years ending 31st March 2023.
vi. Solvency certificate from scheduled commercial bank for an amount equal to min.
Rs. 184 Crore i.e., Rs. One hundred and Eighty-four crores only. (Date of issue
should be during the period of this RFP submission or else the validity period should
be mentioned on the Solvency Certificate & this should cover up the RFP submission
period).
vii. Completion certificate where in contract value, job value on completion, scheduled
and actual completion date should be mentioned, has to be uploaded for this
purpose. Certificates of Work Experience/Completion Certificates issued by officer
of the Department not below the rank of an Executive Engineer in case of
PSUs/Government or senior officer/ manager in case of an autonomous body /
organization / Institutions. (Sample/indicative format for Completion certificate(s)
for similar projects completed during last seven years is given for reference purpose
under forms section of the RFP).
Page 17 of 1358
viii. Litigation & Arbitration cases Completed & Pending/in progress with details during
last 7 Years (Form-2).
ix. Certificate(s) in respect of LEED/GRIHA/IGBC certified projects.
x. PAN (Permanent Account Number).
xi. Income Tax Return for five financial years 2018-19, 2019-20, 2020-21, 2021-22 &
2022-23.
xii. GST (Goods & Services Tax) Registration Certificate.
xiii. EPF/ESI registration certificates.
xiv. Authorization letter of officer(s) who is uploading the tender & who will be signing
agreement / making communication etc. To be filled in attached format “Format
for Power of Attorney for signing of BID” as attached in this RFP.
xv. Undertaking on the letter head having gone through and its acceptance for the RFP
terms & conditions and corrigendum (if any).
xvi. Integrity Agreement (as prescribed in the RFP should duly be signed and sealed by
the authorized signatory and uploaded. However, the actual execution of
agreement on non-judicial stamp paper of requisite value will be done immediately
after furnishing of performance guarantee).
xvii. Bank details for refund of bid security (format attached).
xviii. Bidder to submit an undertaking for “Local Content certification” as attached in this
RFP.
xix. Any other document that bidder felt necessary in support of his candidature.
II. Technical Bid (Stage-2) (Presentation) –
All those Bidders, who qualify in Technical Bid (Stage-I) will have to make a presentation
before the jury constituted by IIMI as per the details / heading explained in chapter-5.
The copy of presentation to be uploaded on the CPP portal while submission of technical
bid (stage-2) envelope. The presentation by each bidder should be of a minimum of 30
minutes in duration. Bidders have to make their own arrangements for making the
presentations.
The following documents should be duly attested, and scanned copies uploaded on
CPP portal on or before the due date mentioned in RFP. Further, hard copies of these
documents are also required to be submitted as per the modality & due date mentioned
in the RFP:
Copy of presentation proposed to be made before jury (time limit – within or

maximum 30 minutes.; language – Hindi/English).
Page 18 of 1358
III. Financial Bid
i. The Financial Bid shall be for the EPC Contract for construction of Group VIII Projects
Comprising of multi-storey hostel blocks, academic building, faculty offices &
Apartments and other associated Infrastructure at IIM Indore & other requisites as
per this RFP. The Consolidated Price shall be for the total Scope of works as detailed
in the RFP. The Bidders are required to quote a consolidated amount quoted for
the entire scope of this RFP excluding GST. GST, PF & ESIC would be reimbursed, as
applicable at actuals during currency of this contract. PF,ESIC shall be reimbursed
as per Clause 9.71 of SCC. GST shall be reimbursed as per Clause 9.67 of SCC.
ii. The price shall remain firm during the currency of the contract subjected to Clause
17.8 of GCC “Price adjustment for Works” read with other terms and conditions of
this RFP.
iii. The quoted amount shall be deemed to include inter alia the cost of necessary Plant
& equipment, Qualified Technical staff, Expert technical consultants, third party
structural audit for project health by IIT, third party proof check by IIT, skilled & un
skilled labours, necessary liaisoning approvals, insurances, policy, labour
compliances, CAR Policy, WCP policy, BOCW, Labour Cess and all other
expenditures, which the EPC Contractor may incur in the course of the execution of
the contract. The EPC Contractor shall not be entitled to any payment or
remuneration, whatsoever, over and above the Agreed Contract Price, only GST, PF
& ESIC shall be reimbursable as per actual and “Price adjustment for Works” vide
Clause 17.8 of GCC read with other terms of this RFP.
iv. All necessary statutory deductions as per laws of the Local Bodies / State
Government/ Government of India shall be made from the bills payable to the EPC
Contractor and No extra payment / claim will be entertained in this regard.
v. In the event of delay attributable to the EPC Contractor & if there is an increase in
GST, PF & ESIC , then the reimbursement towards GST, PF & ESIC may be restricted
to the rate as prevailing during currency of the original contract.
C.4 Signature of Bidder
The bid must contain the name and place of business of the Bidder. Significant evidence
of the authority of the person signing on behalf of the Bidder shall be furnished with the
bid as per the prescribed format in FORMS of this RFP. All the pages of this document
must be initialed/signed by the Authorized Signatory as a token of acceptance of all
terms & conditions of this RFP and submitted online. All eligible bidders shall also submit
hard copies within the stipulated time frame mentioned in Para A 1.6.
C.5 Validity
The bid shall remain valid for a period of 90 (Ninety) days from the date of opening of
the financial bid.
Page 19 of 1358
C.6 The bid submitted shall become invalid if:
i. The Bidder is found ineligible.
ii. The bidder does not submit the bid security.
iii. The Bidder does not upload all the documents as stipulated in the RFP.
iv. If any discrepancy is noticed between the documents as uploaded at the time of
submission of bid and hard copies as submitted.
v. If the bidder is found irresponsive at any stage of evaluation.
vi. If a debarred OR blacklisted bidder submits the bid.
vii. If Bidder is bankrupt or with legal cases (under IBC) registered under the principal
and parent company.
C.7 IIM Indore reserves the right to reject any bid(s) or all bids or this RFP, without assigning
any reason at any stage. IIM Indore also does not bind itself to accept H1or any other
bid and reserves to itself the authority to reject any or all the bids received without the
assignment of any reason. All bids in which any of the prescribed condition is not fulfilled
or any condition including that of conditional rebate is put forth by the bidders shall be
summarily rejected.
C.8 IIM Indore also reserves the right to restrict the list of qualified bidders to any number
deemed fit by shortlisting the bids with higher marks in order of merit.
C.9 Any discrepancy, error, ambiguity in the RFP and its contents must be brought to the
notice of the project department, IIM Indore in writing through e-mail to
[email protected] or in pre-bid meeting. No communication in this regard will be
entertained after the pre-bid meeting.
C.10 No individual response shall be given to any of the communication. Clarification for all
the prospective bidders, if any will be notified on the institute website after the date of
pre-bid meeting.
C.11 Request for change of date or terms and conditions shall not be entertained.
C.12 All provisions in this document are supplementary and complementary to each other
and are not to be read in isolation.
C.13 If any information furnished by the Bidder is found to be incorrect at a later stage, they
shall be liable to be debarred from tendering/ taking up works in IIM INDORE for a period
of 2 years or as per the central govt. notifications issued in this respect, whichever is later
besides forfeiture of bid security and performance guarantee as mentioned in this RFP.
C.14 Short listing of the agencies shall be subject to thorough verification of their credentials
and inspection of works carried out by them, through a Technical Evaluation committee
of experts, constituted by IIM Indore, if required.
C.15 Canvassing, whether directly or indirectly, in connection with bidders is strictly
prohibited and the bids submitted by the EPC Contractor who resorts to canvassing will
be liable for rejection.
Page 20 of 1358
C.16 The bid for the works shall remain open for acceptance for a period of ninety (90) days
from the date of opening of the financial bid. If any bidders withdraw his bid before the
said period or issue of letter of intent/acceptance, whichever is earlier, or makes any
modifications in the terms and conditions of the bid which are not acceptable to the IIM
Indore, then the IIM Indore shall, without prejudice to any other right or remedy, be at
liberty to forfeit 100% of the said bid security as aforesaid. Further the bidders shall not
be allowed to participate in the rebidding process of the work.
C.17 This notice inviting the Bid shall form a part of the contract. The successful Bidders, on
acceptance of his bid by the Accepting Authority shall within 15 days from the stipulated
date of start of the work, sign the contract consisting of: -
• This RFP and corrigendum if any, all the documents including additional conditions,
specifications, General Conditions of Contract and Tender drawings, if any, forming part
of the bid as uploaded at the time of invitation of bid and the accepted price and
acceptance thereof together with any correspondence leading thereto.
• Any other Standard C.P.W.D. Form / other forms as required by IIM Indore.
C.18 For any queries regarding e-tendering process, the bidders are requested to contact as
provided in the RFP Document.
C.19 The specifications, Terms & Conditions, other regulations which are not herein
mentioned will be guided by relevant CPWD guidelines, latest NBC guidelines, manual,
specifications/ BIS / IS/ Other Central Govt. norms to the extent applicable for IIM Indore
& the decision in this regard will be guided by the decision of the respective competent
authority of IIM Indore which shall be final and binding to the EPC Contractor.
C.20 The documents submitted by the successful bidder shall be verified with the originals
before the award of work.
C.21 The bidder should not have been blacklisted or debarred by any Central/ State/
Autonomous/ Public Agency during the last five financial years. In case blacklisted/
debarred bidder fills/ submits the bid/ being successful in bidding process awarded the
job or during the execution of job the fact of being blacklisted/ debarred surfaced then
the
• Bid (during the evaluation process) will be considered as invalid &
• During the execution, if the fact of debarment/ blacklisting emerges and is established,
then the contract will be liable to be terminated at risk and cost of the bidder.
C.22 The Consultant / Architect/ Authority Engineer, who has already worked / working for
the Group-VIII Project directly or indirectly should not participate in the bidding process.
In the event of the fact of their participation emerges during the evaluation process or
even during the execution of contract after been successful in evaluation process, the
bids will be considered invalid, the contract will be liable to be terminated respectively.
This clause is hereby kept ensuring a fair & unbiased checking / review of the submission
of Bids.
C.23 Joint Venture and Consortium is not permitted.
Page 21 of 1358
CHAPTER 3
BRIEF DETAIL & OBJECTIVE OF THE

WORK
Page 22 of 1358
CHAPTER 3
Brief Detail and Objective of the Work
1. Group-VIII Project
Under the expansion plan, it is envisioned to build academic building & multistorey hostel blocks
for 870 nos. students, offices for 70 nos. faculty & 70 nos. staff/associates, residential quarters/
apartment for 32 nos. of faculty and other associated Infrastructure like seminar halls, parking,
food court, lounges, cafeteria cum holding areas, internal & external MEP services, sewage
treatment plants, water treatment plant & sumps, electrical sub-stations, establishing RMU &
SCADA in the grid, fire-fighting services, etc. The tentative building typology is as follows: -
No of
Sl. Name of Buildings& Salient Features
No. buildings Floors
6 classrooms of 150 capacity,

Academic Building 6 classrooms of 75 capacity,
1
including Faculty & 3 classrooms of 30 capacity, 70 faculty
(G+4)
staff /AA offices offices and faculty lounge, Office for Academic
1
Associates and Admin offices with Cafeterias.
Incubation Centre, 3 MDP classrooms of 50

MDC Academic Block
1 capacity, Studio and Classroom for VLPE, FPM
2 &Incubation
(G+2) workplace and congregation spaces
MDC Accommodation for 100 capacity (with

MDC possibility for accommodationof twin sharing in
1
3 Accommodation 20 rooms) and MDC Dining having capacity of
(G+10)
120 people at a time
Type V 1
4 Residences (G+8) 32 flats
3 870 single occupancy rooms with

5 Hostels
(G+14) Attached toilets and associated facilities
Dining facility for 300 students at a time & a

6 Mess 1 (G)
Food Court on Mess terrace.
Note: -
Apart from the above, services / utilities like Electrical substations, STP, ETP, UGT, WTP,
OHT, Pump House, Roads, Pathways, External Development, Solar power, solar water heating
system, horticulture including irrigation system, landscaping, hardscape, separate system for
brown & grey water etc. shall also be forming part of the scope. The scope shall also include
any and all other requisite services/ infrastructure to make this additional expansion plan
fully operational. The electric substations have to be constructed as per the requirement.
Page 23 of 1358
Tentative site of Group-VIII Project: earmarked as “1” in the following key plan of the
Institute.
The land earmarked above shall be available from day one of the date of issuance of LOA.
Page 24 of 1358
CHAPTER-4
LIST OF PERSONNEL, PLANT &
MACHINERY
Page 25 of 1358
Chapter 4 Manpower Schedule
A. Minimum number of Personnel to be deployed on site by EPC Contractor during

execution of the Project of Group-VIII Project.
Requirement of technical staff from EPC Contractor

Min.
S.No. Designation Department Qualification Number Experien
ce
Core Team
1 Project Head Team Leader Degree in Civil Engineering 1 20 years
2 Design Manager Design Degree in Architecture 1 12 years
Civil
3 Construction Manager Degree in Civil Engineering 1 12 years
Construction
Degree in Electrical
4 MEP Manager MEP 1 12 years
Engineering
Degree in Civil Engineering,
5 Quality Manager Quality out of which 10 years’ 1 12 years
experience in Quality
7 years
Safety Manager (EHS Degree or Diploma in Fire
6 EHS 1 (10
Manager) and Safety Engineering
years)
Degree in Civil Engineering
Planning and Scheduling
7 Planning with expertise in MS 1 15 years
Manager
Projects/Primavera
8 Billing Manager Billing Degree in Civil Engineering 1 15 years
Procurement,
Degree in Civil/Mechanical
9 Contracts, P&M Contracts 1 15 years
Engineering
Manager
Design Team
10 BIM Modeller Design Expertise in BIM, LOD 500 1 7 years
Graduate and Computer
11 Draftsmen - Civil Design 1 10 years
Skills
Graduate and Computer
12 Draftsmen - MEP Design 1 10 years
Skills
Construction Team
Asst. Project Manager – Civil
13 Degree in Civil Engineering 7 8 years
Civil Construction
Infra* Construction
Finishes* Construction
Civil Degree or Diploma in Civil 5 years
16 Engineer Civil 14
Construction Engineering (7 years)
Page 26 of 1358
Civil Degree or Diploma in Civil 5 years

17 Engineer Civil – Infra* 4
Construction Engineering (7 years)
Civil
18 Surveyor Similar Experience 2 10 years
Construction
MEP Team
Asst. Project Manager - Degree in Electrical
19 MEP 4 8 years
Electrical Engineering
Asst. Project Manager - Degree in Mechanical
20 MEP 1 8 years
Mechanical/ HVAC Engineering
Degree in Electrical
21 Asst. Manager – ELV MEP 1 8 years
Engineering
Engineer MEP – Degree or Diploma in 5 years
22 MEP 7
Electrical Electrical Engineering (7 years)
Specialist Team - IT
and Networking
Asst. Manager -
Degree in Computer
23 Computer Hardware IT 1 10 years
Engineering
Engineer *
Degree in IT/Computer 6 years
Engineer - Computer
24 IT Engineering (Or Diploma in 1 (10
Hardware*
IT/Computer) years)
Specialist Team -
Audio Video
Degree in Electronics
Asst. Manager - Audio
25 AV Engineering with experience 1 10 years
Visual Engineer*
in Audio Visual
Degree in
Engineer - 6 years
Electrical/Electronics
26 Electronics/Audio AV 1 (10
Engineering (Or Diploma in
Visual* years)
Electrical/Electronics)
Quality Team
Diploma in Civil
27 Lab Assistant Quality 1 10 years
Engineering
Diploma in Civil
28 Quality Engineer Quality 1 5 years
Engineering
Environment, Health,
and Safety Team
29 Safety Engineer EHS OSHAS Certified. 2 7 years
30 Safety Stewards EHS Experience in Safety. 7 5 years
71
Page 27 of 1358
Note: * here means the staff highlighted shall be deployed as per the start of the specific activity.
The EPC Contractor to submit a manpower deployment schedule in accordance with detailed
Program Chart after award of work.
Note:
1. Sr. Project Manager/ Team Leader should not preferably be changed till the contract
period is over & He / She should be deployed from the first day of the execution of
contract.
2. The manpower proposed to be deployed on a full-time basis on site for proper and
effective monitoring.
3. The above said manpower is minimum requirement for technical staff from EPC
Contractor and shall not be limited to the same.
4. For any absenteeism of the aforesaid respective manpower during the execution of the
contract period, the EPC Contractor to make sure the necessary alternative without any
absenteeism. Any absenteeism more than a week shall be liable to penalize. (to be
computed on per day basis of the respective absenteeism) –
▪ For Sr. No. 1 to 2 – Rs. 1 Lakh per person per month.
▪ For Sr. No. 3 to 10 – Rs. 70 thousand per person per month.
▪ For Assistant Project Manager/AM in the above table – Rs. 50 thousand per person per
month.
▪ For Balance manpower – Rs. 20 thousand per person per month.
5. In case of Poor performance of any of the aforesaid manpower, action shall be taken
by Authority Engineer as directed by IIM Indore.
6. The prospective bidder neither during the process of bidding nor during the execution
should propose to deploy / deploy any manpower already worked or associated with
the Consultant / Architect & associates of the Consultant / Architect already worked /
working for the Group-VIII Project directly or indirectly.
Page 28 of 1358
B. Minimum month wise indicative number of skilled and unskilled resources to be

deployed by EPC Contractor during the execution of the Group-VIII Project as
mentioned below but not limiting to-
INDICATIVE MANPOWER
Indicative Manpower
2500 235623072372
2141
2023
2000
1666 1719
1500 1399
1315
1219 1199
937 9951002 917
1000 811 812 817
737
542 599
427 427 427
500
280
203 175
0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
Page 29 of 1358
C. Minimum number of Plants and Equipment’s to be deployed by EPC Contractor

during execution of the Group-VIII Project as mentioned below but not limiting to -
Requirement of P&M min. for Group VIII Projects.
S. No. Plant & Machinery Capacity Number
2 tonnes at 20 m tip
1 Tower Crane with Concrete Bucket 5
load capacity
2 RMC Batching Plant 30 cum/ hrs. 1
3 Mobile Boom Placer 1
4 Excavator 2
5 Tipper/Dumper 2
6 Passenger Hoist/ Material Hoist 3
7 Kerb Laying machine 1
8 Concrete pumps with required pipeline 2
9 Vibrators (Needle Vibrator) 10
10 Bar Bending & Cutting Machine 3
Fabrication yard with welding, cutting, and grinding
11 1
Facility.
12 Total Station/ Auto Level 2
13 Transit Mixer 4
Note – The above quantities are only guiding quantities. However, for executing the work in the
approved time frame, if more equipment of the above said is required, then the contractor shall
plan and procure within the required time frames and at no additional costs to the Institute.
D. The EPC Contractor shall make arrangements for sufficient shuttering material to
meet the milestones dates. The shuttering material shall be complied with BIS and
in order to expedite the completion.
Page 30 of 1358
CHAPTER 5
Eligibility Criteria, Evaluation and

Selection of EPC Contractor
Page 31 of 1358
CHAPTER 5
Eligibility Criteria, Evaluation and Selection of EPC Contractor
1. Eligibility Criteria: Prospective bidder should have the following for making oneself eligible
for participation in the bidding process –
a. Should possess the experience of EPC Contracts/ Design & Build Contracts of requisite value in
the field of Design, Procurement, Engineering and Construction of Project comprising of
planning and development of RCC multi – storied Commercial/ Institutional/ Hospital/ Airport
Buildings/Metros Buildings/Railway Buildings/ Public office/ Corporate Office/ Head quarter
building.
b. Project Specific Eligibility –
• Completed EPC contract/ Design & Build Contracts of similar scope (i.e., design, detail
engineering, procurement, construction, preparation of drawings, interpretation of
drawings, modifying drawings where necessary, preparation of estimates,
supervision/monitoring/fortnightly progress review/ project overall management till
completion etc. complete ensuring quality & safety at works) for the work of similar nature
& value having project cost (excluding GST) at completion as per the following guidelines -
o Three similar completed works costing not less than the amount equal to 40% of
the estimated cost.
OR
o Two similar completed works costing not less than the amount equal to 50% of
the estimated cost.
OR
o One similar completed works costing not less than the amount equal to 80% of
the estimated cost.
• Project Executed with Building G+9 structure or height of 30 meter. (For Calculation of
Storey, Machine Room and Mumty will not be counted/ considered as a Storey whereas, Stilt
and Basement shall be considered)
• Completed work shall be considered for qualifying and the contractor shall submit the work
completion certificate along with the work value.
• Work experience as a prime contractor will only be considered.
• Should have had average annual financial turnover of Rs. 1000 Crores on construction
works. The average would be taken as the best of three years among the last five years
ending 31st March 2023. (Scanned copy of certificate from CA with Unique Document
Identification Number (UDIN) to be uploaded.
• Solvency certificate from scheduled commercial bank for an amount equal min. Rs. 184
Crore i.e., Rs. One hundred and Eighty-Four crores only.
• Should not have incurred any loss (profit after tax should be positive) in more than two years
during the last five years ending 31st March 2023.
Page 32 of 1358
2. OVERALL EVALUATION PROCESS & SELECTION
Bidding Process will be a two-bid system which comprises of technical bid and financial bid.
Further the technical bid will be subdivided into two stages namely technical bid stage-1 and
technical bid stage–2. The ratio of weightages for technical score and financial evaluation will
be 30:70 (Thirty: Seventy)
The Method of selection will be Quality and Cost Based Selection (QCBS). As is said earlier the
technical bid will be evaluated in two stages,
a. Technical Bid
• Stage-1 (Bidder’s profile/credentials/work experience) =10%
• Stage-2 (Presentation) = 20%
b. Financial Bid (i.e., cost) = 70%
The bidder scoring the highest marks after final evaluation will be considered for selection as
an EPC Contractor after due negotiation, if considered prudent by IIM Indore.
Note:
i. The broad methodology brief is as follows:
“Proposal with the lowest cost may be given a financial score of 100 (Hundred) and other
proposals given financial scores that are inversely proportional to their prices with respect
to the lowest offer.
Similarly, proposals with the highest technical marks (as allotted by the evaluation committees)
shall be given a score of 100 (Hundred) and other proposals be given technical score that are
proportional to their marks with respect to the highest technical marks.
The total score, both technical and financial, shall be obtained by assigning respective
weightages as mentioned in this RFP and they will be ranked based on the combined score.
The proposal obtaining the highest total combined score in evaluation of quality and cost will
be ranked as H-1 followed by the proposals securing lesser marks as H-2, H-3 etc. The
proposal securing the highest combined marks and ranked H-1will be considered for further
processing and may be considered for recommendation for award of contract.”
ii. In the event two or more bids have the same score in final ranking, the bid with highest
technical score will be H-1.
Page 33 of 1358
3. TECHNICAL BID (STAGE-1)
3.1 The eligible bidder will be shortlisted by IIM Indore based on the marks obtained against
the under-mentioned parameters.
S. Maximum
Criteria
No. Marks
Completed EPC contract/ Design & Build Contracts of similar scope
(i.e., design, detail engineering, procurement, construction,
preparation of drawings, interpretation of drawings, modifying
drawings where necessary, preparation of estimates,
supervision/monitoring/fortnightly progress review/ project overall
management till completion etc. complete ensuring quality & safety
at works) for the work of similar nature & value having project cost
(excluding GST) at completion as per the following guidelines -
➢ Three similar completed works costing not less than the
amount equal to 40% of the estimated cost.
Experience of OR
having ➢ Two similar completed works costing not less than the
successfully amount equal to 50% of the estimated cost.
completed OR
similar projects’ ➢ One similar completed works costing not less than the
execution of amount equal to 80% of the estimated cost.
EPC Contracts/ Note:
Design & Build 1. Similar works shall mean the works detailed at Sl.1 of this chapter 40
Contracts 5. marks
during last 2. Value of Rs. 458 Cr. mentioned above should not include cost of
Seven years land.
ending on 3. Completion certificate where in contract value, job value on
previous day of completion, scheduled and actual completion date should be
i) last day of mentioned, has to be uploaded for this purpose. Certificates of Work
submission of Experience/Completion Certificates issued by officer of the
tender. Department not below the rank of an Executive Engineer in case of
PSUs/Government or senior officer/ manager in case of an
autonomous body / organization / Institutions.
4. The value of executed works shall be brought to current costing
level by enhancing the actual value of work at simple rate of 7% per
annum; calculated from the date of completion to previous day of last
day of submission of bids.
5. Work experience as a prime contractor will only be considered.
Page 34 of 1358
Achievement of having completed certified Institutional buildings/

multi-storied buildings/ group of certified buildings in a campus of
area not less than 45,000 sqmtr. (Certification of GRIHA/LEED/IGBC for
Green building/
relevant category)
campus for
1. Platinum Rating (as per LEED or IGBC) 10
any institutional
or GRIHA-V(as per Indian standard): 10 marks each marks
work
ii) certification.
2. Gold Rating (as per LEED or IGBC)
or GRIHA-IV (as per Indian standard): 5 marks each
3. Silver Rating (as per LEED or IGBC) or
GRIHA-III (as per Indian standard): 3 marks each
2.5 marks per year for the bidders which had been profit making in
any two years during the last five financial years ending 31st March
5
2023 (to be supported by audited profit & loss account). (Should
iii) marks
not have incurred any loss (profit after tax should be positive) in more
than two years during the last five years ending 31st March 2023.)
Average annual financial turnover of Rs. 1000 Crores being the
Financial average for the three years. However, the average of any three years
Credential amongst the last five years to be considered. The average annual
10
turnover of Rs. 1000 Cr. should be from Construction related activity
iv) marks
only. The last five years will be considered from 1-04-2023 backward.
This average turnover needs to be corroborated with a certificate from
a practicing Chartered Accountant with UDIN number.
Solvency certificate from scheduled commercial bank for an amount
5
v) equal min. Rs. 184 Crore i.e., Rs. One hundred and Eighty-Four crores
marks
only.
Project Executed with Building G+9 structure or height of 30 meter.
(For Calculation of Storey, Machine Room and Mumty will not be
10
vi) counted/ considered as a Storey whereas, Stilt and Basement shall be
marks
considered)
Bidder having previous Experience of executing an EPC project for IIT,

Project Specific
IIM, AIIMS, of similar scope having minimum value of Rs. 458 Cr. For a
vii) 10
Single EPC Project/ Design & Build Project.
marks
Ownership of Plants & Machinery (as per the list mentioned in Chapter
5
viii) 4 - C) to be deployed for this Project.
marks
Bidder should possess all ISO certificates and latest audited report
ISO 45001
mentioned underneath and valid as on date.
- 2 marks
- ISO 45001 ISO 9001- 2
ix) ISO Compliance
- ISO 9001 marks
ISO 27001
- ISO 27001
- 1 mark
Total Marks 100 marks
Page 35 of 1358
3.2 All those bidders who score 60% and above marks in the Evaluation of Technical Bid (stage 1)
will be invited to make a presentation before the Committee / jury constituted for the purpose.
Presentation only to be made by the proposed team leader for this project.
3.3 The weightage of the Technical Bid (Stage-1) towards final evaluation shall be 10%.
4. Technical bid (STAGE-2)
i. The tentative project detail as given in chapter-3 to follow but not limited to that. All
prospective bidders are advised to visit the site before submitting their proposal for
Engineering, Procurement and Construction of Group VIII Project. The prospective bidders are
requested to give prior intimation for their site visit on any of the working days during office
hours. Normally the working hours observed in the Institute are 9.00 AM to 05.30 PM & the
working days are Monday to Friday (except Central Govt. Holidays). The communication can
be made on [email protected] .The prospective bidder’s representative who will be
presenting would be covering the following aspects in his/her presentations and the respective
marking will be as follows:
a. Methodology adopted for handling EPC Contract of a project of similar type, size and
magnitude bringing out the complex nature of the project and the expertise in handling
it, illustrated through sample BIM modelling from successfully executed projects in the
past.
Maximum Marks 15
b. Company’s overview in handling a project of this nature, specifically the extent to which
the agency can offer value addition to the project to improve cost controls, adherence
to timelines, efficiency, and quality.
Maximum Marks 15
c. The broad vision and resource management (man, material and machinery) planning to
be adopted for execution and completion of this project keeping in view the minimum
manpower requirement laid down by IIM Indore at Chapter 4. The manpower proposed
to be deployed on a fulltime basis on site for proper and effective monitoring.
Maximum Marks 40
d. Use of Project Management software and tools and scheduling through MS Project/
Primavera or any other latest software. (To be presented citing any past project
completed by the agency). 5D BIM Modelling with LOD 500 in any EPC contract of similar
nature to be illustrated.
Maximum Marks 10
e. Monitoring Mechanism to overcome time & cost overrun. salient elements/ features and
its respective advantages to be presented.
Maximum Marks 05
Page 36 of 1358
f. Other common attributes such as

Maximum Marks 15
1. Organizational setup of the firm
2. Innovative suggestion for the project and requirements of the Owner.
3. Concept and method of quality management envisaged.
4. Mode of implementation of health, safety, and environment at site of work.
5. Method of risk management.
6. Adoption of Lean Construction philosophy.
ii. The presentation by each bidder should be of a minimum of 30 minutes in duration. Bidders
have to make their own arrangements for making the presentations. Bidders should ensure
that the presentation of their proposal should only be madeby the proposed team leader who
is going to be deployed for this project, in case of being successful in bidding process/award.
iii. IIM Indore reserves the right to go for site inspection of the completed works involving
Engineering, Procurement and Construction of project by the prospective bidder and it may
have the bearing on the selection decision.The expenditure in this connection shall be borne
by IIM Indore.
iv. The weightage of marks scored in the Presentation shall contribute to 20% towards the final
evaluation.
5. Financial Bid
The weightage of marks scored in the financial bid shall contribute 70% towards the final
evaluation.
Page 37 of 1358
CHAPTER 6
SCOPE OF WORKS
Page 38 of 1358
Chapter 6
Scope of Works
Description of Works
The project involves Engineering, Procurement and Construction of Group VIII projects
comprising of multistorey hostel blocks, academic building, faculty offices & apartments and
other associated Infrastructure, to be developed within IIM Indore campus. The brief of
Infrastructure to be developed as mentioned in Chapter 3 of this document. However, the broad
scope for completion of the facility for intended use but not limited to, is mentioned underneath
–
• The general character and the scope of work is Engineering, Procurement and Construction of
Group VIII Project as per design intent by IIM Indore to be carried out under this contract. The
brief is illustrated through Drawings, Design Information, Master Development Plan,
Specifications, DBR etc.
• The EPC Contractor shall carry out and complete the said work within the stipulated timelines
under this contract in every respect in conformity with the contract documents and in
accordance with the direction of & to the satisfaction of the competent Authority of IIM Indore.
• In case of any deviation happens in respect of design, drawing, specification, procedure,

methodology, timelines etc. from the approved one & without the respective approval of IIM
Indore then in that case onus lies with EPC Contractor and the respective cost will be borne by
the EPC Contractor only.
• Stage wise scope is tabulated underneath:
Page 39 of 1358
Stagewise Scope of Work of EPC Contractor for Group-VIII Project

Stage Scope of Works Description
Deployment of minimum required Resources

Pre, During & (manpower And Equipment) as desired by IIM
Post Deployment of Resources Indore (as detailed in chapter-4 of this RFP) and
Construction (Manpower and Equipment) any additional in case the prospective bidder feels
Stage necessary, as is stipulated in this RFP for different
phases.
After signing of agreement with IIMI, EPC

Contractor shall prepare an integrated
programme chart in MS Project/Primavera
software for the execution of work, showing
clearly all activities from the start of work to
completion, with details of manpower, equipment
Preparation of Programme Chart and machinery required for the fulfilment of the
programme within the stipulated period or earlier
and submit the same for approval to the IIM
Indore within ten days of award of the contract. A
recovery of Rs. 1000/- shall be made on per day
basis in case of delay in submission of the above
programme.
Pre- After signing of agreement with IIMI, EPC

Construction Contractor shall prepare Building Information
Stage Model (BIM) for the Scope of work as per RFP. BIM
(LOD 500) for Architectural, Structural, Interior,
MEP, ELV, BMS, Networking services, External
Development, External services, etc., to be
created in line with the Design drawings,
specification, DBR's and the other technical
details. The said BIM (LOD 500) should include but
BIM Modelling LOD 500 not limited to the following - Drawings, BOQ,
Elements, progressive coordinated drawings,
clash detection work, walkthrough, rendering, as
built drawings, etc. EPC Contractor to submit the
same for approval to the IIM Indore within 45 days
from the date of commencement. In the BIM
modelling Virtual built can be presented, whereas
actual as built drawings shall be prepared only
after the completion of the project. A recovery of
Rs. 1000/- shall be made on per day basis in case
of delay in submission of the above programme.
Page 40 of 1358
EPC Contractor should review the Concept design,

Master Development Plan (MDP) and all
Architectural layout for execution and further
development of their GFCs. These GFCs may
further be submitted for Authority Engineers’/ IIM
Indore’s approval.
EPC Contractor has to develop detailed Structural

design and drawing as per the relevant codal
stipulations & in line with the DBRs/
Drawings/grids/ numerations given in RFP. After
the development the same need to be vetted by
any of the IIT for its correctness, stability, safety,
Master Design Scope durability, etc. EPC Contractor has to carry out
detailed soil investigation as per the requirement/
for further development of the structural design/
upon requirement given by IIT's for vetting/
checking/ as per the codal stipulation. All the
designs and developments must encompass the
provision for future expansions as detailed in the
DBR (normally additional two floors provision has
Pre-
to be made in each building etc.) This activity has
Construction
to be carried out by the EPC Contractor on its own
Stage
risk and cost.
Note – The structural design of the buildings
under the scope of work shall be as per BIS
1893(Draft version in circulation for comments by
BIS vide letter no. CED 39/T10 dated 26th April
2023).
EPC Contractor should ensure that the proposed

design must follow the approval norms in effect
and changes to the existing design as well within
the purview of the norms.
The Group VIII Project is proposed to be executed
Fulfilment of requirements for
inside the premise of IIM Indore. Necessary
Obtaining necessary statutory
approvals and obtaining respective certificates/
and other approvals from Local,
clearances will be obtained by the Institute.
State & Central Government
However, the preparation and submission to the
agencies, etc.
Institute of required drawings to process for
necessary approvals and the expenditure
towards appointing required consultants for
certification shall be under the EPC Contractors
purview. The EPC Contractor scope shall also
include the cost of modifications if any as may be
Page 41 of 1358
suggested by any approving statutory/

Government authorities. The exhaustive list of
approvals/ certifications/ clearances required is
enlisted in Chapter 6 Clause 6.6 but not limited to.
The exhaustive list included is dynamic and it may
change as per government rules and regulations
during the currency of the Contract. The EPC
Contractor before submitting the quote shall
consider/ factor in the financial implication for
preparation of required drawings and appointing
of required consultants for obtaining requisite
statutory approvals/ certifications/clearances as
required in their quoted price. Any additional new
approvals from Government/ statutory agencies
during the currency of contract and up until
handing over of the Group VIII Project, which has
not been enlisted, shall be forming the part of EPC
Contractor’s scope. Necessary documentation,
simulations, etc. shall be forming the part of the
EPC Contractor’s scope.
The Institute has initiated for necessary approvals
for Group VIII Projects from Local Authority/
Panchayat by paying necessary initial payments.
With regards to the correctness of the design,

drawings, and execution process etc. as per RFP,
the EPC Contractor will be solely responsible for
Pre-
To ensure if design is satisfying all their correctness and technical soundness. EPC
Construction
the norms Contractor shall ensure compliance of all
Stage
architectural norms, statutory and regulatory
norms on their own risk & cost and bear full
responsibility of the same.
Based the approved concept design, EPC

Contractor to proceed with all General
Arrangement drawings of all Group VIII Blocks
using existing and revised information’s as below.
Pre-
Construction Schematic Design
Stage
Schematic Design of Architectural, Structural &
MEP drawings. All Electrical and Mechanical
Engineering Services should be designed
as “NET ZERO ENERGY” Services.
Page 42 of 1358
Site Master Plan indicating all Group VIII projects

comprising of multistorey Hostel Blocks,
Academic Buildings, Faculty Offices and
Apartments and other associated Infrastructure.
Each blocks drawings including but not limiting to

following-
Buildings
1) Floor layouts including Terrace & Roof plans.
2) Sectional Drawings
3) Elevational Drawings – All sides including level
indicator.
4) Structural Drawings – Framing for all RCC
Members like Footing/ Raft, Columns, Beams,
Slabs, RCC Walls, RCC Pardi, etc.
5) Services/ MEP General arrangement at each
level with coordinated layout of all services
6) Individual block related Infrastructure work.
7) Acoustic, AVIT.
8) Furniture Layout.
9) Power Backup System as intended.
Infrastructure
1) Drainage system
2) Electrical trenches including Cable trenches.
3) Firefighting system
4) Sewage And Water treatment plant
5) Power Distribution-Electrical High side
including HT & LT work.
6) Power Back up in case of emergency (DG Set)
7) Light poles & Streetlights including power
back up system,
8) Traffic management system
9) Security system (CCTV surveillance with
central control room) with UPS backup
covering entire area.
10) External electrification
11) Roads and pathways (As per Drawing)
12) Parking areas with designated parking
markings and signage’s.
13) Softscape & Hardscape development
14) Waterbodies - Lakes and ponds
15) Signage’s (directional and destination,
Internal & External, etc.)
16) Organic Water Composer
17) Solar System for Sustainable Energy
Page 43 of 1358
18) EV Charging Point

19) Under Ground Water Tank.
20) Raw water Underground collection tank –
approx. 30 lakhs litre.
21) Electrical Sub Station
22) Data and Networking Line
23) Storm Water Drains
24) Retaining Walls
25) Net Zero Energy Services
26) Stone Crating for Slope Protection of natural
slopes.
Based on the approved Schematic Design, EPC

Contractor should develop the detail design and
drawings of all sub structure, superstructure for
all buildings/structures including external
development works.
The Drawings and Specifications shall contain
Pre- sufficient information and details to determine
Construction Detail Design the nature, quality and quantity of labour and
Stage materials required for each portion of the work
and so as to enable them for carrying out and
completing such work.
The Drawings prepared by the EPC Contractor
shall be good enough to execute the work at site
with all details, specifications and to the
satisfaction of Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore.
EPC Contractor to maintain the set of drawings

Drawings readily available at site for immediate reference
of Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore.
EPC Contractor shall prepare Cash flow

Cash Flow requirements & submit to Authority Engineer/ IIM
Construction Indore as per the periodicity conveyed.
Stage
EPC Contractor shall prepare and submit an

execution plan and methodology and submission
Daily/Weekly/Fortnightly/Monthly of Daily/Weekly/Fortnightly/Monthly Progress
Report report as required by the Authority Engineer/ IIM
Indore. A recovery of Rs. 1000/- shall be made on
per day basis in case of delay in submission of the
aforesaid.
Page 44 of 1358
Monitor, supervise, and manage execution of

works at site and to ensure quality in all
dimensions of work, quantity of consumables
used, workmanship and progress. Carryout
mandatory tests on materials and finished
product.
Carry out quality assurance checks and should

maintain quality. Records should be maintained
Quality for inspection by Authority Engineer/IIM Indore at
any point of time during or after execution.
Drawing up and putting in place a Quality

Assurance Plan as well as Health & Safety
Assurance Plan along with an appropriate and
efficient mechanism to ensure their effective
implementation at site. Nonadherence to the
same will attract penalty as decided by the
competent Authority of the institute, which shall
be final & binding.
EPC Contractor to comply all statutory and

regulatory norms including safety, health and
Statutory, Regulatory incl. SHE environmental (SHE) guidelines stipulated under
norms/ guidelines these categories by CPWD/ other Central
Government/ statutory Authority which is
mandatory for observance.
The construction will be happening inside the

campus which is protected by the compound wall.
Entries and exits are regulated by security. All the
construction workers including Senior Staff of EPC
Contractor should produce police clearance,
COVID Vaccination Certificate and an ID card
Campus Rules And Regulations
issued by them. Security/project department of
IIM will randomly check the police clearance,
COVID Vaccination Certificate and if anyone
employed without a clearance will be debarred
from entry. Following of COVID protocol is
mandatory.
Page 45 of 1358
EPC Contractor to be present for all kind of

meetings with Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore as
and when asked. They are also liable for ensuring
follow ups/compliances etc, & reporting to the
Meetings Authority Engineer/IIM Indore in this regard with
proper maintenance of records. The Authority
Engineer/IIM Indore may ask to produce these
records at any point of time and the EPC
Contractor is bound to follow the same.
Fully responsible for getting the project work

executed as per drawings, design, intent,
specifications, etc., and should also ensure
completion of job, fulfilment of quality norms in
all dimensions of work to the satisfaction of the
Authority Engineer and In case of any deviation
Checking of construction work
happens in respect of design, drawing,
specification, procedure, methodology, timelines
Construction etc. from the approved one & without the
Stage respective approval of IIM Indore then in that case
onus lies with EPC Contractor and the respective
cost will be borne by the EPC Contractor.
Provide detailed justification for necessity of

changes, if any required in terms of design and
In case of necessity of change(s) specifications etc. and obtain approval thereof
from IIM INDORE. The execution in this respect
must also be factored in the quoted price.
EPC Contractor is responsible for submission of

bills along with all the requisite documents as per
the time frame/periodicity mentioned in this RFP.
Submission of Bills The submission shall be considered complete
only when the bill is supported with all the
statutory/ other requisite document to the
satisfaction of Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore.
Page 46 of 1358
To reply and settle the observations / objections /

paras (if any) of the CVC/Chief Technical
Examiner, CAG audit or any other checking /
investigating agency of the Government. EPC
Contractor will be fully responsible for
consequences of any audit / investigation para &
its respective observation. If at all any financial
To answer the queries raised by implication arisen during or after the execution
investigation agencies work in respect of the aforesaid observation/
settlement, then Contractor will have to bear the
full cost of the financial implications subjected the
reason is attributable to EPC Contractor
(However, whether the reason is attributable to
EPC Contractor or not, will be governed by the
decision of Construction Committee of IIM Indore
and same will be final & binding to the EPC
Contractor).
Final inspection, snagging, supervision of testing

and commissioning of various systems and
Checking of system completion
assisting IIM in taking over of various parts of
works and of various systems.
The EPC Contractor shall have the overall

responsibility of preparation of documents,
drawings and appointment of required
consultants for getting the approvals / NOC’s /
connections etc. for all services including power,
Preparation of documents, water, sewer, drainage, firefighting, lifts, DG set,
Construction drawings and appointing required etc., from government authorities. The EPC
Stage consultants for getting approvals Contractor scope shall also include the cost of
for all the services modifications if any as may be suggested by any
approving statutory/ Government authorities.
EPC Contractor shall ensure that all or other such
documents, drawings, etc., are
obtained/prepared well in time before handing
over the buildings and services to IIM INDORE.
EPC Contractor shall also apprise Authority

Engineer / IIM of the progress and /or activities of
Preparation of Daily /weekly /
the project on daily / weekly / fortnightly /
fortnightly
monthly basis as deemed fit by IIM INDORE, by
preparing and submitting monitoring reports.
Page 47 of 1358
The reports shall inter-alia include the following:
a. Name of Project / EPC Contractor

b. Scope of Works
c. Date of Commencement / Date of
Completion: Scheduled and Actual
d. Major Issues and Decisions Pending including
Drawings Constraints (if any), Site Constraints (if
any), Equipment Constraints (if any).
e. Status of Progress of Work: Cash Flow Chart,
L.O.B. Chart and Bar Chart
f. Areas of Concern
g. List of Registers Maintained
h. Labor Deployment Chart
i. List of Equipment Mobilized at Site
j. Materials/Personnel at Site
k. Status of Payment to EPC Contractor
l. Quality of Material / Tests
m. Cost Split Up of the Package
Monthly progress reports
n. Photographs of the Site
o. Site Order Book
p. Visitor’s Site Inspection
q. Consumable materials such as cement, steel,
paint, primer, putty and admixtures, brought to
site by the EPC contractor will be recorded at the
gate. Non-consumable type which would get
covered up later will also have to be accounted at
the gate.
r. The Progress/ Status of work shall be presented
through BIM, in line with the initial BIM
submission.
Note: 1. Apart from the above, some sample
formats for monitoring are also hereby enclosed
for compliance at Annexure-2
2. A recovery of Rs. 1000/- shall be made on per
day basis in case of delay in submission of the
aforesaid report as required by the institute.
Construction Arrangement of inspections Ensure all statutory inspections and checks.

Stage
Page 48 of 1358
EPC Contractor shall submit a consumption

statement of all consumable material or materials
getting covered up periodically along with
demand for funds. Any kind of consumables such
as cement, admixtures, paint or paint related
materials, steel reinforcement while being
brought inside the campus will have to be got
recorded at security gate by producing the invoice
Preparation & submission of or load tally. The nominated qualified person
statement of all the consumables. from the EPC Contractor will make the entry in a
register and issue a pass and update the same to
Authority Engineer. This pass shall be preserved
and submitted along with the consumption
statement. Any short fall on the quantity at gate
register with that of theoretical consumption will
be fined/ recovered from at double the price of
that material to extent of shortfall or deficiency.
Provide project completion report which shall

contain all technical and financial information of
the project. EPC Contractor to also obtain, submit
Completion Reports & drawings, getting
structural stability/sufficiency certificate from
Authority (as the case be) and fulfilling the
Preparation of completion report
requirements for obtaining
completion/occupancy certificate from Statutory
authorities/body wherever required, issue of as
built drawings & handing over all the assets to
IIMI.
Post- EPC Contractor to submit and arrange for user

Construction operation and maintenance manuals and training
Stage to Authority's representatives. EPC Contractor
shall ensure that technician of IIM get sufficient
training and for this they shall seek an
authentication from IIM Indore. In the absence of
authentication, it will be presumed that training
Preparation of manual for the
not conducted or imparted. In respect of highly
maintenance
specialized instruments if any, the supplier has to
deploy an operator for three months at site of
installation. All warranties and guarantees on
equipment/ fixtures etc. procured shall be in the
name of IIM and incorporation of appropriate
clauses in the RFP documents to be ensured by
EPC Contractor. All warranties and guarantees
shall be in the name of IIM INDORE.
Page 49 of 1358
Provide adequate engineering and supervisory

Arrangement of inspections &
staff for inspection / monitoring of works on
rectification of problems during
communication from IIMI, during Defect Liability
the DLP
Period.
Any other activity that is necessary for

accomplishment of the Job but not mentioned
Others herein is deemed to have been included in the
scope of EPC Contractor as per agreed scope of
work. And the decision of IIM Indore shall be final
in this regard and binding to the EPC Contactor.
6.1 General Scope of Works

The broad scope of work of EPC contractor to the satisfaction of competent authority of IIM
Indore includes, but not limited to:
Providing Architectural drawings as stipulated in the RFP document & as per the requirement
flagged by IIM Indore authorities in respect of Group VIII project & or as per the requirement
of the site not mentioned herein.
6.2 Scope of Works/Services
EPC contractor will have to prepare a scheme, designs, and footprint layout on an area
identified. Design will include but not limited to designing, detailing, and developing of building
services, broadly covering:
• Architectural drawings including R.C.C. structural design,
• Structural drawing provided is only for information. Bidder shall perform the structural
design based on the architectural layout mentioned list of drawing section of RFP
document. Bidder shall propose the structural system in line with performance and
loading parameter mentioned in the structural DBR.
• Formulating schemes/designs for internal and external services including Civil works,
Interior Design, Mechanical works, Electrical works etc. (Internal Electrification, Sub
Station, DG Set, LT & HT Cabling and Networks, Lifts and Traffic analysis, street lighting
etc.),
• Water Supply and Plumbing works,
• Drainage,
• Landscaping, hardscape, softscape, arboriculture, natural green lawns
• Furniture details,
• all systems for Information and communication enabled Technology in lecture
theatres/ classrooms/ offices,
• Integrated Building Management System (IBMS),
• Data and Tele-Communication Service & Design,
• Acoustic designs for buildings wherever required,
• Special Lighting for Stages/Auditorium/Exhibition and other required spaces,
Page 50 of 1358
• Renewable Energy System with Networks,

• Solar Powered Electrification network including arrangements for feeding surplus
power to grid,
• STP,
• Water Treatment Plant,
• Rainwater harvesting,
• Other development works, etc. as well as prepare Good for construction drawings.
Necessary schemes for making a barrier free campus and shall be approved by the IIM
competent Authority.
• Details of finishes for respective buildings and its area are provide in the schedule of
finishes and drawings attached with the RFP. However, for additional detailing, it would
be guided by the requirement of the Institute and as per the direction of Engineer-in
charge.
The EPC contractor shall provide services broadly described above. However, it should be
clearly understood that the description of services is only indicative, and the EPC contractor
shall be required to perform any other services which may be required whether or not
expressly mentioned hereinafter for “CONSTRUCTION OF GROUP VIII PROJECTS
COMPRISING OF MULTISTOREY HOSTEL BLOCKS, ACADEMIC BUILDING, FACULTY OFFICES
& APARTMENTS AND OTHER ASSOCIATED INFRASTRUCTURE AT IIM INDORE” to the
satisfaction of IIM Indore. Brief scope is as follows:
6.3 In addition to these, the scope of works includes preparation of required drawings for
approvals and the expenditure towards appointing required consultants for obtaining all
approvals/clearances for commencing the construction works from the concerned statutory
authorities. The EPC Contractor scope shall also include the cost of modifications if any as may
be suggested by any approving statutory/ Government authorities.
6.4 GREEN BUILDING DESIGN
The EPC contractor shall adhere to highest standards of environment and energy sustainability
as stipulated in respective Clause, An Environmental Brief and as approved by IIM Indore.
Holistic integration of the environmental sustainability brief in design, materials, construction,
services, processes, and maintenance concerns should be strictly addressed in planning and
design to achieve a Green Campus equivalent to GRIHA 5 Star. All stage wise approvals from
the concerned authorities be coordinated and obtained by the EPC Contractor. Nothing extra
shall be paid on this account. Since this is an optional requirement of the Institute, this should
not be read as Statutory/ Government requirement.
6.5 The EPC Contractor’s Roles and Responsibilities will include:
EPC contractor shall get the approval of the conceptual scheme from Authority Engineer/IIM
INDORE through as required by IIM Indore. Comments and suggestions or alternate proposal
of the Authority Engineer/IIM INDORE shall be evaluated and suitably incorporated till the
concept design is accepted and frozen.
Page 51 of 1358
• The EPC contractor shall develop the concept drawings for each of the building for
submission to all the statutory authorities/bodies, incorporate changes, if suggested
by the statutory authorities /bodies.
• The EPC Contractor shall prepare drawings / materials as per norms or any other body
or as per municipal norms and models for obtaining these approvals will be done by
the EPC Contractor at no additional cost. The EPC Contractor shall prepare all study
reports, drawings, physical models, simulations, and assessment reports etc. which are
required for clearance by all above bodies/authorities.
• All Environmental Impact and Social Impact Assessment as required by the concerned
statutory body to be done by the EPC Contractor.
• The EPC contractor shall have to perform in an efficient, orderly, and professional
manner and shall deploy necessary qualified and skilled persons according to the
requirement of the services.
• All basic/detailed drawings by EPC Contractor wherever special services or equipment
are required, and all the drawings for the structure will be checked and approved by
Authority engineer for approval to IIM INDORE. The decision of IIM INDORE for the
drawings to be submitted for special equipment or services or structure will be final to
this effect.
• The design/drawings shall comply with all applicable laws, byelaws, and statutory
provisions etc. in the performance of the assignment and in the execution of the
project.
• The EPC contractor shall comply with all the applicable
norms/codes/guidelines/regulations/byelaws/statutes of local as well as Central Govt.
Bodies.
• The EPC Contractor should cooperate and submit to the Institute all the required
drawings and data required for getting statutory/ Government approvals well withing
the time as informed by the Institute. Any delay in this regard is attributable to the EPC
Contractor.
EPC Contractor’s services shall be provided through a DESIGN MANAGER supported by
experienced professionals. The entity will deploy adequate number of professionals and other
staff to deliver the requisite services as per time schedule.
• The EPC contractor shall ensure that the nature, position, and appearance of all
controls of piped services and electrical installation satisfy user and aesthetic
requirements and ensure that adequate coordination drawings are included. They
shall also ensure that the various building/engineering services are suitable and
designed without any discrepancies between the structure and finishes, and the
requirements of service installation.
• The requirement of Design/drawings in the following highlighted areas: -

i. All Design/drawings including building plans, Landscaping and Signage plans etc.
ii. Soil investigation, S.B.C., Survey, Concept design development etc.
iii. All Electrical and Mechanical Engineering Services should be designed as “NET
ZERO ENERGY” Services.
iv. All Mechanical Engineering Services
v. All Public Health Engineering Services
Page 52 of 1358
vi. All Wastewater treatment and C&D (Construction and demolition) waste
management, treatment, and recycling System.
vii. Green Building Concept (Norms to be followed as per 5 Star- GRIHA)
viii. All furniture/equipment/ fixtures/ fittings for all buildings including rooms,
classrooms, kitchens, lecture rooms, amphitheatre, convocation hall etc.
ix. All interiors and all acoustical treatments.
x. All artwork and signage
xi. All water supply & drainage system.
xii. All I.T. Service/ICT Services for lecture halls/Classrooms/Offices
xiii. All environmental clearances/ permissions, environmental impact & social impact
assessment and their clearance from concerned statuaries bodies/ministries of
the Govt.
xiv. Any other services which are required but not specifically indicated.
• The EPC contractor will be carrying out topographical survey and the survey of all
existing services and other constraints existing in and around the site. Thereafter, the
report will be utilized for working out of the overall scheme. The EPC Contractor will
study and interpret the soil investigation reports and input data for structural and
foundation design for individual buildings/ structures/ equipment’s etc. as per relevant
IS codes. The Soil investigation & determination of safe bearing capacity would also be
forming the part of the scope of the EPC Contractor which they have to carry out on
their cost & shall be included in the quote.
Concept Drawings, submission & approval

i. Ascertain IIM Indore’s requirements and examination of site constraints and potential for
individual buildings, external and internal systems/ services, and preparation of a brief for IIM
INDORE’s review/ recommendations and IIM Indore’s approval including conceptual / control
designs/ drawings/ documents and incorporating required changes, if any.
ii. Submission of the concept design and make presentation of the entire scheme.
iii. Modifications in the concept plan considering the comments, suggestions of IIM INDORE and
submitting the same to IIM INDORE for approval.
iv. Obtaining approval of the Concept design from IIM Indore.
Approval Stage
i. Submission Plans of buildings and all external services including Fire Fighting arrangement &
details
ii. Submission/ Resubmission of the Architectural, drawing and related document to concerned
local authorities in compliance with the requirement of
iii. Carrying out Environment Impact Assessment, submission of the same and getting approval
from concerned authorities.
iv. Obtaining necessary approval of the project from Pollution Control Board and Ministry of
Environment/Department of forest and environment, as per the requirement.
Page 53 of 1358
DETAILED WORKING DRAWINGS

i. Prepare detailed working drawings. The detailed working drawings shall include detailed site
plan, detailed drawings for each buildings including floor plans, elevations, door & window
schedules, finishing schedules, fitting schedules, colour schemes, flooring patterns, reflected
ceiling plans, ironmongery, joinery, installation details, wall profiles, Staircases, ramp and lift
details, details of important building parts /areas, landscape & horticulture details etc. The
details are to be in line with the standards, specifications & schedule of finishes mentioned in
the RFP& as required by IIM Indore Needs to ensure use of minimum 2% processed/recycled
products such as GSB etc. from C&D waste to be used in non-sensitive structures in the project.
ii. Drawings shall be adequately detailed and shall contain enough information to enable
construction, The drawing shall include in accordance with the details provided in the RFP:
a. Layout Plan showing:

• All proposed buildings, play fields, green area, Sewage Treatment Plant, Sump, Rainwater
Harvesting, Electrical Sub-Station etc in accordance with
• Blow up of road junction / parking area and other such area as required.
• Coordinated External services.
b. Detailed Drawings of:

• Floor plans, fully coordinated with all services/disciplines.
• Elevations
• Sections
• Wall profiles
• Doors & Window details
• Stairs/Ramps/Lifts details
• Details of building parts, areas, critical special treatments.
• Toilet details.
• Flooring pattern and details
• Dado details
• Roof flow, draining including rainwater harvesting system underground tank.
• Detailed designed and drawing of all types of furniture, all lab equipment, all workshop
machineries, all kitchen equipment etc.
• Detailed drawing of artwork.
• Any other detailed require by the Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore.
c. Landscape & Horticulture

• Drawings of landscape including blow up of critical areas / landscapes / plantation schemes in
detailed coordination with all external services in accordance with the details and specifications
provided in the RFP.
• Horticulture details are attached with Landscape drawings. For additional detailing, it would be
guided by the requirement of the Institute and as per the direction of Engineer-in charge.
Page 54 of 1358
d. Any other details required for completion of the buildings/services. – The layout
drawings, detailed drawings for utility buildings and ancillary buildings like Electrical
Substations, Central UGT, Pump rooms, STP, ETP, 30 lacs litre water tank, etc., shall be forming
the scope of EPC Contractor.
e. ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING SERVICES

The electrical system shall be in accordance with “Net Zero energy “and GRIHA norms and it should
conform to GRIHA 5 Star Rating. They should be in accordance with the detail schematics,
specifications & load calculations given in the RFP.
f. Internal and External Electrification

• Drawing of internal electrification network of building with adequate sizing of cables, wires,
switchgears, distribution boards, panels, electrical fittings, fixtures etc based on the design
given in the RFP.
• Earthing protection system to be in accordance with latest IS standards.
• Lifts and escalators shall be barrier free campus including relevant norms and provisions for
Persons with Disabilities and should be Stretcher lift.
• Calculation and Simulation required conforming to GRIHA 5 Star Rating/ Platinum-LEED Rating
for complete electrical lightning system for the best illumination level (foot candles), uniformity,
layout, and aesthetic considerations such as colour rendition shall be taken into account.
• Measures for energy conservation –day light harvesting, occupancy sensor etc.
• All the staff quarters and faculty housing shall have the provision of communicable electrical
billing system.
g. External Electrification- other works

• Streetlights and landscape lightning to be provided in accordance with GRIHA as per drawings
& details provided in the RFP.
• Suitable Automatic Power Factor correction system to be provided.
h. Renewable Energy sources

• Solar power system at desired voltage level shall be in corporate with an import/export power
scheme. Automatic transfer scheme from raw power to renewable power shall be provided
with a suitable provision in electrical panels.
• Solar Potential Study for whole area along with Grid connectivity as per the details provided in
the RFP.
i. Energy/Building Management System (BMS)

• Building management system shall be the backbone of services it should be planned on open
protocol. It shall integrate all the necessary services of the building for close operation and
monitoring of the services from a single window.
Page 55 of 1358
• Schematic design of BMS system with the complete IO summary given in the RFP showing
proper integration of all the services.
j. Telephone, Intercom & Communication System
• Telephone layout and telephone equipment including conduit and accessories layout for the
telephone system and any protective devices battery back-up required.
• Before start of work in the EPABX/EPBX room. Prepare conduit layout of cables and terminals
inclusive of a fibre optic or other special data transmission cables for system required.
• Intercom layout and intercom equipment including conduit and accessories layout for the
intercom system and any protective devices required.
• Topology of networking, LAN (Structured Cabling), cables, conduits, raceways, sockets, layout
drawings floor wise.
• Get the approval from authority engineer/IIM Indore detailed drawings of the suppliers and
manufacturers.
• Latest IP based telephony system
k. Cable TV/Dish Antenna System.
• Prepare working drawings indicating the locations of TV points, Central panel/racks of dish
antenna as per the details provided in the RFP.
• Get approval of the Authority Engineer/IIM Indore the suppliers'/ manufacturers drawings/
documents.
l. Lightning Protection and Earthing System
• Lighting protection system shall be an advanced integrated lighting protection system as

specified in the RFP.
• Prepare plans showing internal/external earth grid, earth electrodes and lightning protection
with size of conductors and details of each electrical and lightning arrestors along with details
of earthing pits.
• Earth system shall be as per relevant Indian Standards and Indian Electricity rules. And its latest
guidelines.
m. External Lighting
• Assess the external lighting requirement for parking, pathway road, buildings as required for
human access etc.
• Prepare plans indicating the road lighting with circuit details, typical pole detail with type of
fixture, cabling, earthing etc.
• Prepare and get approved from the Authority Engineer/IIM Indore detailed drawings of the
suppliers and manufacturers.
Page 56 of 1358
n. UPS back-ups
• Prepare the plan indicating the locations of UPS rooms in the buildings, UPS room layout, Floor
wise UPS power distribution drawings, Single line diagram/Power flow diagram.
• Get Approved from the Authority Engineer/IIM Indore detailed drawings of the suppliers/
manufacturers.
o. Solar Heating and R.O. System
• Installation of Solar Heating System and R.O. System for building.

• Get approval on the detailed drawings of the suppliers/manufacturers from Authority
Engineer/ IIM Indore.
p. CCTV, Public Address system, Access Control system, Audio- Visual System and Vehicle
management System.
• Preparing detailed drawings of CCTV, Public Announcement, Access Control, Fire Alarm, token
display system etc. & Equipment with high level integration as per the details, schematics
provided in the RFP.
• Audio-Visual system, sound re-enforcement system, conference room projection system,
Amplifier speakers, mixers, acoustics, floor use layout control system, drawings and system
layout drawings per the details, schematics provided in the RFP.
q. IT and LAN Networking System

• Prepare detailed drawing of multi core optical fibre cable distribution network system for easy
and stable accessibility of intranet and internet services of the building per the details,
schematics provided in the RFP.
• The detailed drawing should incorporate details of all active and passive components with
colour code for high level and low-level networking as per the details given in RFP.
• Drawings of LAN network of the building for IT labs, Access points, WI-FI campus as per the
details given in the RFP.
r. MECHANICAL ENGINEERING SERVICES

A detailed assessment has to be made for planning the mechanical services of the building
conforming to Platinum- LEED/ GRIHA 5 Star Rating. Drawings, and getting to vet from the
Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore shop drawings. Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning
System
• Objective of air conditioning is to provide thermal comfort for the Air-conditioned spaces in a
cost-effective manner considering both capital and operation costs. Temperatures and Indoor
Air Quality shall be maintained in accordance with standards and practices.
• Verify heat load calculation in summers and monsoon shall be furnished along with the
detailed design and drawing of plant rooms, water piping, air ducts, HVAC equipment, piping
and instrumentation drawing.
Page 57 of 1358
s. Fire Detection and fire alarm system.

• Drawing of FDA Control Room layout
• Prepare working drawings (Floor wise) indicating the zones, location of the fire alarm sensors,
Response Indicator, Manual call points, Hooters, their conduits and wiring and location/details
of FDA control panels, evacuation plans.
t. Lifts and Escalators

• Prepare detail layout for the necessary machine areas as [per specified capacity and type of
lifts/escalators to be provided.
• lifts and escalators installation as per the Statutory/local regulations.
• Lift and escalators shall be in apt with person with disability and old age person to make the
campus barrier free.
u. Water Pumps
• Specify the type of pumps for water supply & d-watering purpose as per the details provided
in the RFP.
• Prepare and get approved from Authority Engineer/IIM Indore the suppliers'/ manufacturers
drawings/ documents.
v. Fire Fighting & Fire Suppression System

• Prepare working drawings for internal and external fire protection and suppression system
including hydrant, sprinkler system, CO2 flooding system, pressurization system, fire
extinguisher system, Underground Tanks, fire pump rooms etc. in line with the statutory
requirements and the details provided in the RFP.
• Get approved from the Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore the detailed drawings and data sheet of
suppliers/ manufacturer
w. Plumbing and Integrated Water Management System

• Prepare drawing of plumbing system for internal and external. It shall include comprehensive
design concepts and installation guidelines for energy conservation and water harvesting &
shall be in accordance with the specification schematics given RFP.
• Integrated and sustainable water management focusing on least anthropogenic water
discharge from human activities should be pursued.
• The use of water conservation fixtures, landscaping, rainwater harvesting, aquifer recharging,
and waste-water recycling need to be given due consideration.
• Involve use of efficient building and plumbing services components and fixtures tailor-made to
meet sustainability objectives and creating sufficient awareness among the users of building
facility and its services, during the occupancy stage.
• Ensure potable quality of water for drinking and washing as per the prescribed standards and
to ensure that treated wastewater is meeting the desired standards for reuse or disposal.
• Minimize the consumption of mains supply potable water and minimize the volumes of urban
storm water run-off.
x. PUBLIC HEALTH ENGINEERING
Page 58 of 1358
• All the design and drawings should be well coordinated with Architecture and other services
drawings.
• All designs shall be as per the latest Indian Standards, Local byelaws, and statutory
norms/regulation.
• Design of Public Health & Engineering services taking into account various topographical,
meteorological, Hydrological etc. reports, identify the source and quality of water, conduct
survey of existing water supply system, Sewerage system, Drainage system, Fire-fighting
system, other site development works etc. for planning of services. These existing systems are
to be augmented with proposed (Required) system.
• The services shall include following major components as discussed in detail:

i) Water Supply System
ii) Internal Sanitary Installations
iii) Sewerage System
iv) Drainage System
i) Water Supply System

• Prepare detail working drawings of internal and external water supply system including
Underground tank, Overhead tank, Water treatment plant, pumping stations, rising mains,
distribution system and internal plumbing, recycling of treated wastewater etc.
• Prepare and get approved from Authority Engineer/IIM Indore detailed shop drawings and
data sheets of suppliers/ manufacturers.
ii) Internal Sanitary Installations

• Prepare working drawings of internal sanitary installations.
• Prepare working drawings of handicapped friendly toilets and sanitary installations.
data sheets of supplies / manufacturers.
iii) Sewerage System and Sewage Treatment Plant

• Prepare working drawings for internal and external soil/waste disposal systems including
sewage treatment plant and treated water usages, etc as per the details in RFP.
data sheets of suppliers/ manufacturers.
iv) Drainage
• Work out and prepare working drawings for storm water drainage including roof drainage,
service area drainage and surface drainage.
• Prepare working drawings for rainwater harvesting system.
• Get approved from the authority Engineer/IIM Indore detailed shop drawings and data sheets
of suppliers/ manufacturers.
Page 59 of 1358
• Also prepare a scheme how best the rainwater from roof can be made use of (rainwater
harvesting)
• The EPC contractor shall propose a scheme for handling, disposal, reuse and recycling of
Construction and Demolition (C&D) Waste as generated at site as per advisories issued from
time to time.
• The EPC contractor shall also prepare scheme for purchase/disposal of all products such as
bricks, paver blocks, coarse and fine aggregate etc. generated during treatment and recycling
of C&D waste. The overall objectives of C&D waste management are to: -
1. Maximize recovery of recyclable C&D material(s).
2. Maximize reuse of recovered material in construction activity.
3. Eliminate waste quantity that requires landfill disposal.
4. Increase life of sanitary landfill site(s) and
5. Reduce in total costs of C&D waste management.
y. SITE DEVELOPMENT WORKS

• prepare working drawings (longitudinal & cross section) for roads/ footpaths/ parking areas
etc.
• Prepare working drawings of irrigation system for horticulture Landscape & Hardscape.
CONSTRUCTION STAGE:
i. The works shall include construction for Group VIII projects comprising of multistorey
Buildings, Faculty Offices and Apartments and other Infrastructure, with all necessary
Materials, labour, plant & equipment, scaffolding/platform for satisfactory construction,
completion of the works covered in the scope of the works to the intent and meaning of the
drawings, Master Development plan, Technical Specifications, DBR, and orders approved by
the Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore.
ii. The scope of works shall include, whether specifically mentioned or not in the various
clauses of approved Technical Specifications, DBR, lifting and shifting at all leads and lifts, all
apparatus, plant, equipment, tools, fuel, water, hoists, ladders, temporary structures required
during construction, timbering, transport, temporary stores, workshop, staff, labour, watch &
ward of the works, Quality Lab, adequate lighting etc. as required for the scope of Works at all
locations, all heights etc. complete to the satisfaction of Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore.
iii. It shall also include adherence to norms for safety of workers, first-aid equipment,
suitable accommodation for the staff and workmen with adequate sanitary arrangements, the
effecting and maintenance of all required insurances, the payment of all wages, salaries, fees,
royalties & duties if any applicable for the EPC Contractor’s Scope of works or other charges
arising out of the erection of works and the regular clearance of rubbish, reinstatement and
clearing-up of the site as may be required on completion of works (safety of the public and
protection of the works including adjoining property pertaining to the EPC Contractor’s scope
Page 60 of 1358
of work. This also includes all activities not specifically mentioned herein or noted on the
Drawings / Documents as being furnished or installed, but which are necessary and customary
to be performed under this contract.
iv. To provide documents, as-built drawings and arrange with the various local authorities
for the necessary testing, inspection, submission, third party testing and approval
requirements to be carried out up to and including the approval stage and to assist in obtaining
clearance until Occupation Certificate approval.
v. The specifications and drawings issued along with RFP document/Letter of Award and/
an essential and integral part of these Works. The scope of work in this contract shall also
include the provision of suitably qualified professionals, engineers, management team, skilled
and unskilled manpower, equipment (plant and machinery), materials, etc. to complete the
entire scope of Project within contractual period based on specifications, drawings & details.
vi. The work shall be carried out under the Supervision and as per directives of the
Authority Engineer/IIM Indore.
vii. Working time in a day at site shall be from 6:00 AM to 9:00 PM with a special condition
to allow the execution time beyond the working period in case of exigency as may be subject
to approval by the competent authority of IIM Indore. Since the earmarked site for Group VIII
Projects under this development lies withing the existing campus, the EPC Contractor, upon
permission of working beyond the specified hours, shall ensure that construction activities
causing high intensity and disturbing noise/ sounds shall be avoided.
viii. The scope of work including but not limited to following: -
• Plot development including site clearing, cutting of trees and re-planting the same as
per norms of Environmental clearance obtained by the Authority.
• Demolition of existing structures and necessary excavation.
• To interface and coordinate with other contractors (If Any) engaged by the IIM Indore
for any trade time to time.
• To provide all tools, scaffoldings (MS), transport equipment, hoist, lifts, tower cranes,
ladder, or any other type of equipment required for system delivery, installation,
testing, certification, and acceptance.
• To prepare the design on the design intent & DBR, approval from concerned local
municipal authorities, liaisoning for approvals, all related NOCs required to execute
the work.
• Testing of materials and finished works as called for in technical specifications and
elsewhere in contract for all civil, sanitary, and other specialist civil works and any other
works and third-party testing.
• To prepare shop drawings, Good for Construction Drawings, and detailed schedule to
monitor procurement, material delivery, installation, execution, start up and
certification.
• Quality assurance and control for the installation and certification
Page 61 of 1358
• Executing samples, mockups for Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore’s approvals. EPC
Contractor to execute the work as per approved drawings, samples, and mockups by
Authority Engineer/IIM Indore etc. complete.
• To provide documents, As-built drawings and arrange with the various local authorities
for the necessary testing, inspection, submission, and approval requirements to be
carried out up to and including the approval stage. EPC Contractor to provide the
submittal in the hard copies as mentioned in the Special Conditions Of Contract.
• Procurement of materials as per material specifications defined under Technical
Specification of Contract.
• The scope of work includes completion to the extent that the area/ building unit is
ready for use.
• The layout drawings include landscaping layout designs including both hard & soft
landscaping. The required arboriculture should be developed especially the green lawn
by the time of handing over/ closure of the project. The cost of developing these should
also be accounted for in the overall quote by the bidder, as these are forming the part
of scope.
• Handing over of the project shall be taken for the whole development as per agreed
scope of work, without any phasing.
6.6 Liaisoning & Approvals (Obtaining approvals, certifications, clearances, NOC’s,

permissions, etc.):
a) All necessary mandatory approvals, from local/state/central government authority for

obtaining necessary certifications, permissions, clearances, statutory approvals/NOC’s
during, pre and post construction will be obtained by the Institute. However, the making
of required drawings for approvals and the expenditure towards appointing required
consultants for certification shall be under the EPC Contractors purview. The EPC
Contractor scope shall also include the cost of modifications if any as may be suggested
by any approving statutory/ Government authorities.
b) Time required for such approvals is part of the Contract Period.
Page 62 of 1358
c) Below is the list of statuary approvals required but not limited to-
STATUTORY APPROVALS
Sr.
Description Authority
No
PRE-CONSTRUCTION STAGE
TNCP/ Local
Application to Develop, Erect, Re-erect, or to make alteration in
1 Authority/Concern
any place in a Building-
Authority
TNCP/ Local
2 FORM for Supervision- to be submitted by Authority Architect. Authority/Concern
Authority
Form of Licence issued under MP Bhumi Vikas Rules, to work as TNCP/ Local
3 Architect/ Structural Engineer/ Engineer/ Supervision/ Town Authority/Concern
Planner Authority
State Pollution Control

4 Environmental Clearance Board/Concern
Authority
Airport Authority of
5 Airport Authority of India Clearance India/Concern
Authority
Municipal
6 NOC for Drainage & Sewerage Corporation/Concern
Authority
Structural
7 Structural Stability Certificate -Provisional Consultant/Concern
Authority
Electrical Safety
Authority/ State
8 Load Sanctions - Electrical Scheme / SLD Approval
Electricity Board/
CEA/Concern Authority
Fire Department /
9 Fire Fighting Scheme / Provisional Fire NOC & Layout Approval
CFO/Concern Authority
Building permission for height above 30m as per MP Land

10 Applicable Authority
Development Act
Development
Authority/ Municipal
11 Intimation of Disapproval (IoD)/ Commencement Certificate
Corporation/Concern
Authority
CONSTRUCTION STAGE
Development
Plinth Level Notice / Plinth construction check survey - Building Authority/ Municipal
12
Wise Corporation/Concern
Authority
Page 63 of 1358
MP Electrical
13 Lift Escalator Installation Approval Safety/Concern
Authority
State Pollution
Control
14 Consent to Establish (DG Sets & STP) Dwg Approval for DG Set
Board/CEA/Concern
Authority
POST CONSTRUCTION STAGE
PWD / CPWD/Concern
15 Lift NOC
Authority
Fire Department /
16 Fire NOC – Final
CFO/Concern Authority
PESO/Concern
17 HSD License
Authority
State Electricity Board

Electrical Load Sanction - Permanent Power Connection / charging / Supply
18
permission for DG, Transformer, HT network, etc. board/CEA/Concern
Authority
Development
Authority/
19 Completion Certificate with Final plan approvals
TNCP/Concern
Authority
Development
Authority/
20 Occupancy Certificate
TNCP/Concern
Authority
EPC Contractor’s Scope of Policy & Registration and Permits/ Certifications
1 WC Policy (Workmen’s Compensation Policy)

2 CAR Policy (Contractor All Risk Policy) Concern Authority
CLRA Registration (Contract Labour Regulation & Abolition Act
3
1970)
4 BOCW (Building & Other Construction Workers Act 1996) Concern Authority
5 ESIC & PF registration Concern Authority
6 GRIHA Pre Certification GRIHA
Development
7 Excavation/ Mining Approval
Corporation/Concern
Authority
RTO Dept/Concern
8 NOC for Traffic & Coordination
Authority
Development
9 Site Office Approval (if required)
Corporation/Concern
Authority
Page 64 of 1358
Collector/ Municipal
10 Permission for Excavation/Royalty Payment Ward Off/Concern
Authority
11 Half yearly submission of Reports to MoEF & CPCB
12 GRIHA Final Certification GRIHA
13 ECBC compliance ECBC Code
Authorised Licensed
Structural
14 Final Structural Stability Certificate
Consultant/Concern
Authority
6.7 Other Miscellaneous
• EPC Contractor to take due care of structure considering the project location in close vicinity of
existing structure and specific atmospheric conditions. EPC Contractor to explore the option of
special paints having the anti-carbonation properties or suitable treatment to protect structure
for weather conditions at project location. Necessary anti corrosive treatment to be considered
for steel reinforcement and steel structure during construction.
• All buildings to be designed as per latest IS codes/ NBC Norms considering the design
compliance with earthquake resistant structure at project location.
• Master development includes necessary rainwater harvesting, lakes, ponds, and water bodies
as per requirement of Environmental clearance to store the water during rainy season.
• All necessary plot development (cut and fill) to be considered as per the contour and survey.
All necessary survey required for the plot development is part of the scope.
• The scope also includes design and construction of ancillary buildings like Substations near
existing Utility 1, 3 &4. All ancillary buildings like UGT, WTP, STP, ETP, Substations, Pumphouse,
etc. should be RCC framed structures. The transformers & DGs are to be placed inside the RCC
Framed structure.
6.8 Guarantee/Warranty and Performance Certificates (as required)

• The EPC Contractor’s shall submit guarantee/warranty and performance certificates following
packages –
➢ DG Sets.
➢ Transformers
➢ Lifts
➢ Power Substations
➢ HVAC – Air Conditioning Systems including AHU/ECU, FCU, Cassette/ Hi Wall Unit, VRF
Unit, Split ACs, Cabinet Fan
➢ Fire Fighting Systems including Pumps and Panels.
➢ STP& ETP
➢ WTP
➢ Plumbing Plumps.
➢ FAS/ PA.
➢ CCTV
➢ Access Control System.
➢ Building Management System
➢ UPS, Batteries, Invertors.
➢ Audio/ Video System.
➢ Electrical Panels.
Page 65 of 1358
➢ Lightning Control System.

➢ Water heating System including Solar Panels, Heat Pump and Geysers.
➢ LAN/IPBAX.
➢ Data/ Wi-Fi Networking System.
➢ Kitchen Exhaust and Fresh Air System.
➢ Conveyor Belt Dish Washer.
➢ Kitchen Refrigerators.
➢ TV
The EPC Contractor’s quote shall include a 25-year warranty for solar PV panels and 10 years
warranty for waterproofing & 10 years performance certificate for External painting works.
Page 66 of 1358
6.9 Block Wise Scope of work Matrix:
MDC
Academic MDC Boy's Girl's Type V
Sr No. Particulars Academic + Mess
Building Accommodation Hostels Hostel Residences
Incubation
1.00 Site Preparation Works
1.01 Demolition ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
1.02 Site Survey ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
1.03 Site Cleaning & Grading ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
2.00 Excavation and Filling       
2.01 Excavation in Soil ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
2.02 Excavation in Rock ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Backfilling - soil available
2.03 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
at site
Backfilling -soil brought
2.04 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
from outside
2.05 Anti-termite ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
2.06 Soiling ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Substructure - Shell and
3.00       
Core
3.01 PCC ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
3.02 Plum concrete ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
3.03 Footing/ Raft Concrete ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
3.04 Footing/ Raft Formwork ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Footing/ Raft
3.05 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Reinforcement steel
3.06 Substructure - Misc. ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Super structure - Shell
4.00       
and Core
4.01 Concrete ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
4.02 Formwork ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
4.03 Reinforcement steel ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
4.04 Structural steel ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Masonry – Fly Ash Cement
4.05 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Bricks
Internal plaster (Walls &
4.06 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Ceilings)
4.07 External plaster ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Fire Shaft Closure
4.08 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
(Vermiculate Concrete)
4.09 Super structure - Misc. ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Waterproofing - Sub &
5.00       
Super Structure
5.01 Foundation/Raft/Footings ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
5.02 Parking Waterproofing ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
5.03 Podium/Ground Top Level ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
5.04 UGT tanks and STP tanks ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
5.05 Lift pits ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
5.06 Retaining wall ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
All Toilets - including floor
5.07 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
& walls
5.08 Balcony and Utility area ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
5.09 Terrace area ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Waterbodies/ Swimming
5.10 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
pools
5.11 Kitchen area X X ✓ X X ✓ ✓
Page 67 of 1358
Academic MDC Academic MDC Boy's Girl's Type V

Sr No. Particulars Mess
Building + Incubation Accommodation Hostels Hostel Residences
6.00 Finishes - All Blocks

Flooring and
6.01 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
stonework
6.02 Interna Wall Painting ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Internal Ceiling
6.03 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Painting
External Wall
6.04 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Painting
External Ceiling
6.05 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Painting
External Shaft
6.06 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
painting
6.07 False ceiling ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Staircase / Balcony
6.08 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Railing
Classroom Step LW
6.09 ✓ X X X X X X
filling
6.10 All Wooden Doors ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
6.11 Utility Door ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
6.12 Toilet Door ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
6.13 Fire Rated Door ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
6.14 Shaft/Fire Rated Door ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
6.15 Misc. Doors ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
6.16 Sliding Window ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
6.17 Toilet Ventilators ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
6.18 Other Windows ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
6.19 Modular Kitchen X X ✓ X X ✓ ✓
6.20 Parking Area Finishes ✓ ✓ ✓ X ✓ ✓ ✓
Common Lobby Area
6.21 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
finishes
Elevation features-
6.22 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Louvers, jaali etc.
6.23 Residential Canopy ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
6.24 Shaft Covering ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
7.00 Internal MEP Works
7.01 Electrical Works ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
7.02 Plumbing Works ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
7.03 CP Sanitary ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
7.04 Geyser X X ✓ ✓ ✓ X ✓
7.05 Inverter ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
7.06 Exhaust Fans ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
7.07 Fire Fighting ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
7.08 Fire alarm & PA ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
HVAC/ Air
7.09 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
conditioning
7.10 Lifts ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
7.11 Solar Power ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ X ✓
7.12 Block Automation X X X X X X X
Security system -
7.13 CCTV in Common ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Area
Pressurisation (Lift &
7.14 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Staircase)
7.15 Video Door Phone X X ✓ X X X ✓
7.16 Gas Pipelines X X ✓ X X ✓ X
Entrance Lobby AC
7.17 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Works
Page 68 of 1358

8.00 External MEP Works

High Side Electrical
8.01 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
works
Substation work (CSS,
8.02 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Transformer, HT panel)
8.03 Electrical Networks ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
8.04 External lighting ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
8.05 Façade Lighting ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
8.06 Firefighting network ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
8.07 Plumbing network ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
8.08 FTTH ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
8.09 DG ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
8.10 STP ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
8.11 WTP ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Security system - CCTV
8.12 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
/ Boom barriers
8.13 Solar power - PV panel ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Solid Waste
8.14 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Management/OWC
9.00 Infra Structure Works       
Area
9.01 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Grading/Landfilling
9.02 SWD with Gratings ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Entrance Gates with
9.03 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Security Cabins
Roads with kerb stone
9.04 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
and Road Furniture
9.05 Paved Area ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
9.06 Hardscape ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
9.07 Softscape ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
9.08 Open parking area ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
9.09 Trees ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
9.10 Rainwater harvesting ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
9.11 sculptures ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Fountains and Water
9.12 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Bodies
9.13 Utility Trench ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
9.14 Signages ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Miscellaneous Infra
9.15 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Works
Page 69 of 1358

10.00 Furniture
Faculty Room -
10.01 ✓ X X X X X X
Table & Chairs
Faculty Room -
10.02 ✓ X X X X X X
Storages
Classroom -
10.03 Rectangular Table ✓ X X X X X X
(Various Length)
10.04 Classroom - Chairs ✓ X X X X X X
Classroom Video
10.05 Screens (Front & ✓ X X X X X X
Tilted)
Sliding writing
10.06 ✓ X X X X X X
boards
Acoustic Sliding
10.07 ✓ X X X X X X
Panels
10.07 Acoustic Ceiling ✓ ✓ X X X X X
Classroom - Arch
10.08 shape Table (Various ✓ X X X X X X
Length)
10.09 Round Tables X ✓ X X X X X

Entrance Desk &
10.10 X ✓ X X X X X
Chair set
10.11 Office Table X ✓ X X X X X
10.12 Office Chairs X ✓ X X X X X
Twin sharing Table &
10.13 Chairs Set for VLPE X ✓ X X X X X
Classroom
Cubicle type Table &
Chair seating
10.14 X ✓ X X X X X
arrangement for VPM
Classroom
Conference Table &
10.15 X ✓ X X X X X
Chairs
Entrance Lobby -
10.16 X X ✓ X X X X
Sofa Set
Dining Table &
10.17 X X ✓ X X ✓ X
Chairs Set
Study Table -Chair
10.18 X X ✓ X X X X
set
10.19 Single Bed X X ✓ X X X X
10.20 Wardrobe X X ✓ X X X ✓
10.21 Master Bed X X X X X X X
10.22 Dressing Table X X X X X X X
10.23 Kids Bed X X X X X X X
10.24 Kids Storage X X X X X X ✓
Living - Sofa Set
10.25 X X X X X X X
with centre Table
Study Table -Chair
10.26 X X X X X X X
set
Bookshelf in study
10.27 X X X X X X ✓
Room
10.28 Bedroom Storage X X X X X X ✓
Study Table -Chair
10.29 X X X ✓ ✓ X X
set
10.30 Single Bed X X X ✓ ✓ X X
10.31 Wardrobe X X X ✓ ✓ X ✓
Medical Room-Table
10.32 X X X ✓ ✓ X X
& Chair
Page 70 of 1358
CHAPTER 7
MILESTONE PAYMENT
Page 71 of 1358
Milestone Payment - for Group VIII Project

Subdivision of
S. No. Major Milestone Major % % Days
Milestone
Recoverable Mobilisation Advance @
A 10.00%
10%
At the time of LOI -
A.1 Mob Advance First Instalment to be paid 15 days 5.00% 15 Days
from LOI
After 60 days from
A.2 Mob Advance Second Instalment 5.00% 61 days
LOI
Schematic/ Detailed Design

B Development Drawings/GFC, and 3.00%
Liasoning Approvals @ 3%
Good for constructions Drawings.
B.1 (Architectural, Structural and Services) - 0.25% 31 days
Up to Plinth
Good for constructions Drawings.
B.2 (Architectural, Structural and Services) - 0.75% 61 days
Balance Drawings
Approvals from IIT and proof
B.3 consultants. (Architectural, Structural 0.25% 45 days
and Services) - Upton Plinth
Approvals from IIT and proof
B.4 consultants. (Architectural, Structural 0.75% 61 days
and Services) - Balance Drawings
Fulfilling the requirements for obtaining
B.5 liasoning Approval from State/Central 1.00% 31 days
Government Authority.
Completion of shell
and core package
(Excavation, Sub &
Super RCC Works
C Shell & Core works @30% 30.00% along with
Waterproofing,
Sleeves and
Concealed works in
RCC)
C.1 Bl. No. 3 - Boys Hostel

Complete excavation
C.1.1 Bl. No. 3 - Boys Hostel - Excavation with Anti Termite 0.27% 95 days
Treatment
C.1.2 Bl. No. 3 - Boys Hostel - Plinth/ G.F. Completion of plinth 0.61% 140 days
Page 72 of 1358
Bl. No. 3 - Boys Hostel - 1st to 4th

C.1.3 0.90% 280 days
Floor Complete with RCC,
Bl. No. 3 - Boys Hostel - 5th to 8th Blockwork, Mullions,
C.1.4 0.90% 363 days
Floor Pardi, Door Frames
Bl. No. 3 - Boys Hostel - 9th to 12th and Waterproofing
C.1.5 0.90% 447 days
Floor
Bl. No. 3 - Boys Hostel - 12th to Above Complete with above
C.1.6 0.90% 515 days
Terrace Floor works terrace, LMR, OHT.
C.2 Bl. No. 4 - Boys Hostel

Complete excavation
C.2.1 Bl. No. 4 - Boys Hostel - Excavation with Anti Termite 0.27% 95 days
Treatment
C.2.2 Bl. No. 4 - Boys Hostel - Plinth/ G.F. Completion of plinth 0.61% 140 days
Bl. No. 4 - Boys Hostel - 1st to 4th
C.2.3 0.90% 280 days
Bl. No. 4 - Boys Hostel - 5th to 8th Blockwork, Mullions,
C.2.4 0.90% 363 days
Bl. No. 4 - Boys Hostel - 9th to 12th and Waterproofing
C.2.5 0.90% 447 days
Floor
Bl. No. 4 - Boys Hostel - 12th to Above Complete with above
C.2.6 0.90% 515 days
C.3 Bl. No. 5 - Girls Hostel

Complete excavation
C.3.1 Bl. No. 5 - Girls Hostel - Excavation with Anti Termite 0.27% 95 days
Treatment
C.3.2 Bl. No. 5 - Girls Hostel - Plinth/ G.F. Completion of plinth 0.61% 140 days
Bl. No. 5 - Girls Hostel - 1st to 4th
C.3.3 0.90% 280 days
Bl. No. 5 - Girls Hostel - 5th to 8th Blockwork, Mullions,
C.3.4 0.90% 365 days
Bl. No. 5 - Girls Hostel - 9th to 12th and Waterproofing
C.3.5 0.90% 447 days
Floor
Bl. No. 5 - Girls Hostel - 12th to Above Complete with above
C.3.6 0.90% 515 days
C.4 Bl. No. 1 - Academic Block

Complete excavation
Bl. No. 1 - Academic Block -
C.4.1 with Anti Termite 0.42% 95 days
Excavation
Treatment
Bl. No. 1 - Academic Block - Plinth/
C.4.2 Completion of plinth 0.97% 183 days
G.F. - level 0.0 m
Bl. No. 1 - Academic Block - Shell & Complete with RCC,
C.4.3 1.74% 270 days
Core - level 6.0 m Blockwork, Mullions,
Page 73 of 1358
Bl. No. 1 - Academic Block - Shell & Pardi, Door Frames

C.4.4 1.04% 330 days
Core - level 9.9 m and Waterproofing
Bl. No. 1 - Academic Block - Shell &
C.4.5 2.43% 370 days
Core - level 13.8 m
Bl. No. 1 - Academic Block - Shell &
C.4.6 0.17% 415 days
Core - level 17.7 m
Bl. No. 1 - Academic Block - Shell & Complete with above
C.4.7 0.17% 455 days
Core - level 21.6 m terrace, LMR, OHT.
C.5 Bl. No. 8 - Type V Residence

Bl. No. 8 - Type V Residence - Complete excavation
C.5.1 0.38% 95 days
Excavation with ATT
Completion of plinth
Bl. No. 8 - Type V Residence - Plinth/
C.5.2 with Plinth Checking 0.76% 155 days
G.F.
Certificate
Bl. No. 8 - Type V Residence - 1st to Complete with RCC,
C.5.3 0.86% 300 days
3rd Floor Blockwork, Mullions,
Bl. No. 8 - Type V Residence - 4th to Pardi, Door Frames
C.5.4 0.86% 396 days
6th Floor and Waterproofing
Bl. No. 8 - Type V Residence - 7th to Complete with above
C.5.5 0.95% 475 days
Above Terrace Floor works terrace, LMR, OHT.
C.6 Bl. No. 6 - MDC Accommodation

Bl. No. 6 - MDC Accommodation - Complete excavation
C.6.1 0.33% 102 days
Excavation with ATT
Bl. No. 6 - MDC Accommodation -
Plinth/ G.F.
Certificate
Bl. No. 6 - MDC Accommodation - 1st Complete with RCC,
C.6.3 0.74% 360 days
to 4th Floor Blockwork, Mullions,
Bl. No. 6 - MDC Accommodation - 5th Pardi, Door Frames
C.6.4 0.74% 445 days
to 8th Floor and Waterproofing
Bl. No. 6 - MDC Accommodation - 9th Complete with above
C.6.5 0.83% 515 days
to Above Terrace Floor works terrace, LMR, OHT.
C.7 Bl. No. 2 MDC Academic + Incubation

Bl. No. 2 MDC Academic + Incubation Complete excavation
C.7.1 0.20% 95 days
- Excavation with ATT
Bl. No. 2 MDC Academic + Incubation
- Plinth/ G.F.
Certificate
Bl. No. 2 MDC Academic + Incubation Complete with RCC,
C.7.3 0.45% 230 days
- 1st floor Blockwork, Mullions,
Bl. No. 2 MDC Academic + Incubation Pardi, Door Frames
C.7.4 0.45% 270 days
- 2nd floor and Waterproofing
Page 74 of 1358
Bl. No. 2 MDC Academic + Incubation Complete with above

C.7.5 0.50% 305 days
- Terrace and above terrace terrace, LMR, OHT.
C.8 Bl. No. 7 - Mess

Complete excavation
C.8.1 Bl. No. 7 - Mess - Excavation 0.05% 200 days
with ATT
C.8.2 Bl. No. 7 - Mess- Plinth/ G.F. with Plinth Checking 0.10% 270 days
Certificate
Complete with RCC,
Blockwork, Mullions,
Bl. No. 7 - Mess - Terrace and above Pardi, Door Frames
C.8.3 0.34% 365 days
terrace and Waterproofing &
Complete with above
terrace, LMR, OHT.
All buildings
Including Parking
D Finishing works @20% 20.00% area finishes,
Entrance Canopies,
Shaft covering etc.
D.1 Bl. No. 3 - Boys Hostel - Finishing Works
D.1.1 Bl. No. 3 - Boys Hostel - Plastering

Bl. No. 3 - Boys Hostel - Plastering -
D.1.1.1 0.14% 425 days
GF to 5th floor
D.1.1.2 0.14% 487 days
6th to 10th floor
D.1.1.3 0.14% 547 days
11th to terrace floor
D.1.2 Bl. No. 3 - Boys Hostel - Tilling

Bl. No. 3 - Boys Hostel - Tilling - GF
D.1.2.1 0.16% 486 days
to 5th floor
Bl. No. 3 - Boys Hostel - Tilling -6th
D.1.2.2 0.16% 546 days
to 10th floor
Bl. No. 3 - Boys Hostel - Tilling -
D.1.2.3 0.16% 606 days
Bl. No. 3 - Boys Hostel - Doors &

D.1.3
Windows
D.1.3.1 0.29% 488 days
Windows- GF to 5th floor
Page 75 of 1358

D.1.3.2 0.29% 553 days
Windows-6th to 10th floor
D.1.3.3 0.29% 618 days
Windows-11th to terrace floor
D.1.4 Bl. No. 3 - Boys Hostel - Painting

Bl. No. 3 - Boys Hostel - Painting-GF
D.1.4.1 0.12% 503 days
to 5th floor
Bl. No. 3 - Boys Hostel - Painting-
D.1.4.2 0.12% 569 days
6th to 10th floor
D.1.4.3 0.12% 635 days
D.1.5 Bl. No. 3 - Boys Hostel - Fabrication

Bl. No. 3 - Boys Hostel -
D.1.5.1 0.05% 514 days
Fabrication-GF to 5th floor
D.1.5.2 0.05% 554 days
Fabrication-6th to 10th floor
D.1.5.3 0.05% 594 days
Fabrication-11th to terrace floor
D.1.6 Bl. No. 3 - Boys Hostel - External Façade 0.08% 670 days
D.1.7 Bl. No. 3 - Boys Hostel - False Ceiling

Bl. No. 3 - Boys Hostel - False
D.1.7.1 0.04% 655 days
Ceiling-GF to 5th floor
D.1.7.2 0.04% 695 days
Ceiling-6th to 10th floor
D.1.7.3 0.04% 735 days
Ceiling-11th to terrace floor
Bl. No. 3 - Boys Hostel - Furniture &

D.1.8
Fixtures
D.1.8.1 0.17% 657 days
Fixtures-GF to 5th floor
D.1.8.1 0.17% 682 days
Fixtures-6th to 10th floor
D.1.8.1 0.17% 707 days
Fixtures-11th to terrace floor
D.2 Bl. No. 4 - Boys Hostel- Finishing Works
D.2.1 Bl. No. 4 - Boys Hostel - Plastering
Page 76 of 1358

D.2.1.1 0.14% 425 days
GF to 5th floor
D.2.1.2 0.14% 487 days
6th to 10th floor
D.2.1.3 0.14% 547 days
D.2.2 Bl. No. 4 - Boys Hostel - Tilling

Bl. No. 4 - Boys Hostel - Tilling - GF
D.2.2.1 0.16% 486 days
to 5th floor
Bl. No. 4 - Boys Hostel - Tilling -6th
D.2.2.2 0.16% 546 days
to 10th floor
Bl. No. 4 - Boys Hostel - Tilling -
D.2.2.3 0.16% 606 days

D.2.3
Windows
D.2.3.1 0.29% 488 days
D.2.3.2 0.29% 553 days
D.2.3.3 0.29% 618 days
D.2.4 Bl. No. 4 - Boys Hostel - Internal Painting

Bl. No. 4 - Boys Hostel - Painting-GF
D.2.4.1 0.12% 503 days
to 5th floor
D.2.4.2 0.12% 569 days
6th to 10th floor
D.2.4.3 0.12% 635 days
D.2.5 Bl. No. 4 - Boys Hostel - Fabrication

D.2.5.1 0.05% 514 days
D.2.5.2 0.05% 554 days
Fabrication-6th to 10th floor
D.2.5.3 0.05% 594 days
Fabrication-11th to terrace floor
D.2.6 Bl. No. 4 - Boys Hostel - External Façade 0.08% 670 days
D.2.7 Bl. No. 4 - Boys Hostel - False Ceiling

D.2.7.1 0.04% 655 days
Page 77 of 1358

D.2.7.2 0.04% 695 days
D.2.7.3 0.04% 735 days

D.2.8
Fixtures
D.2.8.1 0.17% 657 days
D.2.8.2 0.17% 682 days
D.2.8.3 0.17% 707 days
D.3 Bl. No. 5 - Girls Hostel - Finishing Works
D.3.1 Bl. No. 5 - Girls Hostel - Plastering

D.3.1.1 0.14% 425 days
GF to 5th floor
D.3.1.2 0.14% 487 days
6th to 10th floor
D.3.1.3 0.14% 547 days
D.3.2 Bl. No. 5 - Girls Hostel - Tilling

Bl. No. 5 - Girls Hostel - Tilling - GF
D.3.2.1 0.16% 486 days
to 5th floor
Bl. No. 5 - Girls Hostel - Tilling -6th
D.3.2.2 0.16% 546 days
to 10th floor
Bl. No. 5 - Girls Hostel - Tilling -
D.3.2.3 0.16% 606 days
Bl. No. 5 - Girls Hostel - Doors &

D.3.3
Windows
D.3.3.1 0.29% 488 days
D.3.3.2 0.29% 553 days
D.3.3.3 0.29% 618 days
D.3.4 Bl. No. 5 - Girls Hostel - Painting

Bl. No. 5 - Girls Hostel - Painting-GF
D.3.4.1 0.12% 503 days
to 5th floor
Page 78 of 1358
Bl. No. 5 - Girls Hostel - Painting-

D.3.4.2 0.12% 569 days
6th to 10th floor
Bl. No. 5 - Girls Hostel - Painting-
D.3.4.3 0.12% 635 days
D.3.5 Bl. No. 5 - Girls Hostel - Fabrication

Bl. No. 5 - Girls Hostel - Fabrication-
D.3.5.1 0.05% 514 days
GF to 5th floor
D.3.5.2 0.05% 554 days
6th to 10th floor
D.3.5.3 0.05% 594 days
D.3.6 Bl. No. 5 - Girls Hostel - External Façade 0.08% 670 days
D.3.7 Bl. No. 5 - Girls Hostel - False Ceiling

D.3.7.1 0.04% 655 days
Bl. No. 5 - Girls Hostel - False
D.3.7.2 0.04% 695 days
Bl. No. 5 - Girls Hostel - False
D.3.7.3 0.04% 735 days
Bl. No. 5 - Girls Hostel - Furniture &

D.3.8
Fixtures
D.3.8.1 0.17% 657 days
D.3.8.2 0.17% 682 days
D.3.8.3 0.17% 707 days
D.4 Bl. No. 1 - Academic Block
D.4.1 Bl. No. 1 - Academic Block - Plastering

D.4.1.1 0.13% 407 days
Plastering - Ground Floor
D.4.1.2 0.19% 477 days
Plastering - 1st Floor to Terrace
D.4.2 Bl. No. 1 - Academic Block - Tilling

Bl. No. 1 - Academic Block - Tilling -
D.4.2.1 0.33% 447 days
Ground Floor
Page 79 of 1358
Bl. No. 1 - Academic Block - Tilling -

D.4.2.2 0.49% 507 days
1st Floor to Terrace
Bl. No. 1 - Academic Block - Doors &

D.4.3
Windows
Bl. No. 1 - Academic Block - Doors
D.4.3.1 0.19% 462 days
& Windows- Ground Floor
Bl. No. 1 - Academic Block - Doors
D.4.3.2 0.28% 507 days
& Windows - 1st Floor to Terrace
D.4.4 Bl. No. 1 - Academic Block - Painting

D.4.4.1 0.15% 478 days
Painting - Ground Floor
D.4.4.2 0.22% 538 days
Painting - 1st Floor to Terrace
D.4.5 Bl. No. 1 - Academic Block - Fabrication

D.4.5.1 0.07% 425 days
Fabrication - Ground Floor
D.4.5.2 0.11% 472 days
Fabrication - 1st Floor to Terrace
Bl. No. 1 - Academic Block - External

D.4.6
Façade
D.4.6.1 0.18% 437 days
External Façade - Ground Floor
D.4.6.2 0.27% 512 days
External Façade - 1st Floor to Terrace
D.4.7 Bl. No. 1 - Academic Block - False Ceiling

Bl. No. 1 - Academic Block - False
D.4.7.1 0.26% 487 days
Ceiling- Ground Floor
Bl. No. 1 - Academic Block - False
D.4.7.2 0.39% 537 days
Ceiling - 1st Floor to Terrace.
Bl. No. 1 - Academic Block - Furniture &

D.4.8
Fixtures
D.4.8.1 0.55% 540 days
Furniture & Fixtures-Ground Floor
D.4.8.2 Furniture & Fixtures-1st Floor to 0.82% 600 days
Terrace.
D.5 Bl. No. 8 - Type V Residence
Page 80 of 1358
D.5.1 Bl. No. 8 - Type V Residence - Plastering

Bl. No. 8 - Type V Residence -
D.5.1.1 0.21% 471 days
Plastering-Stilt to 5th Floor
D.5.1.2 0.21% 531 days
Plastering-6th floor to Terrace
D.5.2 Bl. No. 8 - Type V Residence - Tilling

D.5.2.1 0.23% 506 days
Tilling-Stilt to 5th Floor
D.5.2.2 0.23% 586 days
Tilling-6th floor to Terrace
Bl. No. 8 - Type V Residence - Doors &

D.5.3
Windows
Bl. No. 8 - Type V Residence - Doors
D.5.3.1 0.29% 525 days
& Windows-Stilt to 5th Floor
Bl. No. 8 - Type V Residence - Doors
D.5.3.2 0.29% 615 days
& Windows- 6th floor to Terrace
D.5.4 Bl. No. 8 - Type V Residence - Painting

D.5.4.1 0.15% 533 days
Painting-Stilt to 5th Floor
D.5.4.2 0.15% 603 days
Painting-6th floor to Terrace

D.5.5
Fabrication
D.5.5.1 0.04% 481 days
Fabrication-Stilt to 5th Floor
D.5.5.2 0.04% 531 days
Fabrication-6th floor to Terrace
Bl. No. 8 - Type V Residence - External

D.5.6 0.01% 598 days
Façade
Bl. No. 8 - Type V Residence - False

D.5.7 0.05% 609 days
Ceiling
Bl. No. 8 - Type V Residence - Furniture

D.5.8
& Fixtures
D.5.8.2 0.32% 543 days
Furniture & Fixtures-Stilt to 5th Floor
D.5.8.3 0.32% 603 days
Furniture & Fixtures-6th floor to Terrace
Page 81 of 1358
D.6 Bl. No. 6 - MDC Accommodation

D.6.1
Plastering
D.6.1.1 0.13% 425 days
Plastering-GF to 5th floor
D.6.1.2 0.13% 488 days
Plastering- 6th to Terrace.
D.6.2 Bl. No. 6 - MDC Accommodation - Tilling

D.6.2.1 0.22% 509 days
Tilling-GF to 5th floor
D.6.2.2 0.22% 549 days
Tilling- 6th to Terrace.
Bl. No. 6 - MDC Accommodation - Doors

D.6.3
& Windows
D.6.3.1 0.19% 510 days
Doors & Windows-GF to 5th floor
D.6.3.2 0.19% 565 days
Doors & Windows- 6th to Terrace.

D.6.4
Painting
D.6.4.1 0.13% 498 days
Painting-GF to 5th floor
D.6.4.2 0.13% 543 days
Painting- 6th to Terrace.
Bl. No. 6 - MDC Accommodation-

D.6.5
Fabrication
D.6.5.1 0.07% 486 days
D.6.5.2 0.07% 511 days
Fabrication- 6th to Terrace.

D.6.6 0.07% 596 days
External Façade
Bl. No. 6 - MDC Accommodation - False

D.6.7
Ceiling
D.6.7.1 0.12% 529 days
False Ceiling-GF to 5th floor
D.6.7.2 0.12% 559 days
False Ceiling- 6th to Terrace.
Page 82 of 1358

D.6.8
Furniture & Fixtures
D.6.8.1 0.21% 537 days
Furniture & Fixtures-GF to 5th floor
D.6.8.2 0.21% 577 days
Furniture & Fixtures- 6th to Terrace.
D.7 Bl. No. 2 MDC Academic + Incubation
Bl. No. 2 MDC Academic + Incubation -

D.7.1
Plastering
Bl. No. 2 MDC Academic +
D.7.1.1 0.09% 290 days
Incubation - Plastering- Ground Floor
D.7.1.2 Incubation - Plastering- 1st floor to 0.09% 320 days
Terrace

D.7.2
Tilling
D.7.2.1 0.12% 314 days
Incubation - Tilling- Ground Floor
D.7.2.2 0.12% 349 days
Incubation - Tilling- 1st floor to Terrace

D.7.3
Doors & Windows
D.7.3.1 Incubation - Doors & Windows-Ground 0.08% 337 days
Floor
D.7.3.2 Incubation - Doors & Windows- 1st floor 0.08% 372 days
to Terrace

D.7.4
Painting
D.7.4.1 0.06% 353 days
Incubation - Painting- Ground Floor
D.7.4.2 Incubation - Painting-- 1st floor to 0.06% 378 days
Terrace
Bl. No. 2 MDC Academic + Incubation-

D.7.5
Fabrication
D.7.5.1 0.03% 317 days
Incubation- Fabrication-Ground Floor
Page 83 of 1358

D.7.5.2 Incubation- Fabrication-1st floor to 0.03% 337 days
Terrace

D.7.6 0.03% 378 days
External Façade

D.7.7
False Ceiling
D.7.7.1 0.09% 384 days
Incubation - False Ceiling-Ground Floor
D.7.7.2 Incubation - False Ceiling-1st floor to 0.09% 409 days
Terrace

D.7.8
Furniture & Fixtures
D.7.8.1 Incubation - Furniture & Fixtures- 0.19% 400 days
Ground Floor
D.7.8.2 Incubation - Furniture & Fixtures-1st 0.19% 425 days
floor to Terrace
D.8 Bl. No. 7 - Mess

D.8.1 Bl. No. 7 - Mess - Plastering 0.03% 330 days
D.8.2 Bl. No. 7 - Mess - Tilling 0.09% 420 days
D.8.3 Bl. No. 7 - Mess - Doors & Windows 0.02% 440 days
D.8.4 Bl. No. 7 - Mess - Painting 0.02% 440 days
D.8.5 Bl. No. 7 - Mess- Fabrication 0.03% 460 days
D.8.6 Bl. No. 7 - Mess - External Façade 0.04% 460 days
D.8.7 Bl. No. 7 - Mess - False Ceiling 0.00% 400 days
D.8.8 Bl. No. 7 - Mess - Furniture & Fixtures 0.08% 496 days
Internal & External

E MEP works @20% 20.00% Services along with
High side Electricals.
E.1 Bl. No. 3 - Boys Hostel - MEP Works
E.1.1 Bl. No. 3 - Boys Hostel- Plumbing

Bl. No. 3 - Boys Hostel- Plumbing-
E.1.1.1
Concealed Plumbing
Page 84 of 1358
Bl. No. 3 - Boys Hostel-

E.1.1.1(a) Plumbing-Concealed Plumbing-GF to 5th 0.05% 398 days
floor
E.1.1.1(b) Plumbing-Concealed Plumbing-6th to 0.05% 458 days
10th floor
E.1.1.1(c) Plumbing-Concealed Plumbing-11th to 0.05% 518 days
terrace floor
Including Testing &

Bl. No. 3 - Boys Hostel- Plumbing- Commissioning,
E.1.1.2
Water Supply and Down takes Connection with
Main Lines
E.1.1.2(a) Water Supply and Down takes - 0.07% 514 days
Installation -GF to 5th floor
E.1.1.2(b) Water Supply and Down takes - 0.07% 544 days
Installation-6th to 10th floor
E.1.1.2(c) Water Supply and Down takes - 0.07% 604 days
Installation-11th to terrace floor
Water Supply and Down takes - Testing
E.1.1.2(d) 0.04% 664 days
& Commissioning, Connection with
Main Lines
Bl. No. 3 - Boys Hostel- Plumbing-C. P Installation, Testing

E.1.1.3
& Sanitary Fittings & Commissioning
Bl. No. 3 - Boys Hostel- Plumbing-C.
E.1.1.3(a) P & Sanitary Fittings - Installation -GF to 0.07% 610 days
5th floor
E.1.1.3(b) P & Sanitary Fittings - Installation-6th to 0.07% 640 days
10th floor
E.1.1.3(c) P & Sanitary Fittings - Installation-11th 0.07% 670 days
to terrace floor
E.1.1.3(d) P & Sanitary Fittings - Testing & 0.08% 700 days
Commissioning.
E.1.2 Bl. No. 3 - Boys Hostel- Fire Fighting

Bl. No. 3 - Boys Hostel- Fire Fighting -
E.1.2.1 0.16% 670 days
Installation
Page 85 of 1358

E.1.2.2 0.04% 700 days
Testing & Commissioning
E.1.3 Bl. No. 3 - Boys Hostel- Electrical

Bl. No. 3 - Boys Hostel- Electrical-
E.1.3.1
Conduiting & Wiring
E.1.3.1(a) 0.20% 504 days
Conduiting & Wiring-GF to 5th floor
E.1.3.1(b) 0.20% 534 days
Conduiting & Wiring-6th to 10th floor
E.1.3.1(c) Conduiting & Wiring-11th to terrace 0.20% 564 days
floor

E.1.3.2
Cabel Tray, Cabel, DB's
E.1.3.2(a) 0.10% 515 days
Cabel Tray, Cabel, DB's-GF to 5th floor
E.1.3.2(b) 0.10% 545 days
Cabel Tray, Cabel, DB's-6th to 10th floor
E.1.3.2(c) Cabel Tray, Cabel, DB's-11th to terrace 0.10% 575 days
floor

E.1.3.3
Panels
E.1.3.3(a) 0.19% 547 days
Panels - Installation
E.1.3.3(b) 0.05% 609 days
Panels - Testing & Commissioning
E.1.3.4 Bl. No. 3 - Boys Hostel- Electrical-Lifts

E.1.3.4(a) 0.13% 600 days
Lifts - Installation
E.1.3.4(b) 0.03% 690 days
Lifts - Testing & Commissioning
Bl. No. 3 - Boys Hostel- Electrical - Lights, Fans, Fittings,

E.1.3.5
Light Fixtures etc.
Bl. No. 3 - Boys Hostel- Electrical -
E.1.3.5(a) 0.07% 660 days
Light Fixtures-GF to 5th floor
E.1.3.5(b) 0.07% 680 days
Light Fixtures-6th to 10th floor
E.1.3.5(c) 0.07% 700 days
Light Fixtures-11th to terrace floor
Page 86 of 1358
ELV (FAPA, CCTV, IT,

Bl. No. 3 - Boys Hostel- Electrical-ELV
E.1.3.6 Data, Wi-Fi___33,
(FAPA, CCTV, IT, Data, Wi-Fi, etc.)
etc.)
E.1.3.6(a) 0.13% 590 days
ELV-GF to 5th floor
E.1.3.6(b) 0.13% 620 days
ELV-6th to 10th floor
E.1.3.6(c) 0.13% 650 days
ELV-11th to terrace floor

E.1.3.7
Audio Video
E.1.3.7(a) 0.08% 669 days
Audio Video- Installation
E.1.3.7(b) 0.02% 729 days
Audio Video - Testing & Commissioning
Bl. No. 3 - Boys Hostel- Fire HVAC &

E.1.4
Others
E.1.4.1 0.02% 640 days
Others - Installation
E.1.4.2 0.01% 670 days
Others - Testing & Commissioning
E.2 Bl. No. 4 - Boys Hostel - MEP Works

E.2.1 Bl. No. 4 - Boys Hostel- Plumbing

E.2.1.1
Concealed Plumbing
E.2.1.1(a) Plumbing-Concealed Plumbing-GF to 5th 0.05% 398 days
floor
E.2.1.1(b) Plumbing-Concealed Plumbing-6th to 0.05% 458 days
10th floor
E.2.1.1(c) Plumbing-Concealed Plumbing-11th to 0.05% 518 days
terrace floor
Including Testing &

Bl. No. 4 - Boys Hostel- Plumbing- Commissioning,
E.2.1.2
Main Lines
Page 87 of 1358

E.2.1.2(d) 0.04% 664 days
Main Lines
Bl. No. 4 - Boys Hostel- Plumbing-C. P Installation, Testing

E.2.1.3
E.2.1.3(a) P & Sanitary Fittings - Installation -GF to 0.07% 610 days
5th floor
E.2.1.3(b) P & Sanitary Fittings - Installation-6th to 0.07% 640 days
10th floor
E.2.1.3(c) P & Sanitary Fittings - Installation-11th 0.07% 670 days
to terrace floor
E.2.1.3(d) P & Sanitary Fittings - Testing & 0.08% 700 days
Commissioning.
E.2.2 Bl. No. 4 - Boys Hostel- Fire Fighting

E.2.2.1 0.16% 670 days
Installation
E.2.2.2 0.04% 700 days
E.2.3 Bl. No. 4 - Boys Hostel- Electrical

E.2.3.1
Conduiting & Wiring
E.2.3.1(a) 0.20% 504 days
E.2.3.1(b) 0.20% 534 days
floor
Page 88 of 1358

E.2.3.2
E.2.3.2(a) 0.10% 515 days
E.2.3.2(b) 0.10% 545 days
floor

E.2.3.3
Panels
E.2.3.3(a) 0.19% 547 days
E.2.3.3(b) 0.05% 609 days
E.2.3.4 Bl. No. 4 - Boys Hostel- Electrical-Lifts

E.2.3.4(a) 0.13% 600 days
E.2.3.4(b) 0.03% 690 days
Bl. No. 4 - Boys Hostel- Electrical - Lights, Fans, Fittings,

E.2.3.5
Light Fixtures etc.
E.2.3.5(a) 0.07% 660 days
E.2.3.5(b) 0.07% 680 days
E.2.3.5(c) 0.07% 700 days
Bl. No. 4 - Boys Hostel- Electrical-ELV ELV (FAPA, CCTV, IT,

E.2.3.6
(FAPA, CCTV, IT, Data, Wi-Fi, etc.) Data, Wi-Fi, etc.)
E.2.3.6(a) 0.13% 590 days
ELV-GF to 5th floor
E.2.3.6(b) 0.13% 620 days
E.2.3.6(c) 0.13% 650 days

E.2.3.7
Audio Video
Page 89 of 1358

E.2.3.7(a) 0.08% 669 days
E.2.3.7(b) 0.02% 729 days

E.2.4
Others
E.2.4.1 0.02% 640 days
E.2.4.2 0.01% 670 days
E.3 Bl. No. 5 - Girls Hostel
E.3.1 Bl. No. 5 - Girls Hostel- Plumbing

Bl. No. 5 - Girls Hostel- Plumbing-
E.3.1.1
Concealed Plumbing
E.3.1.1(a) 0.05% 398 days
Concealed Plumbing-GF to 5th floor
E.3.1.1(b) 0.05% 458 days
Concealed Plumbing-6th to 10th floor
E.3.1.1(c) Concealed Plumbing-11th to terrace 0.05% 518 days
floor
Including Testing &

Bl. No. 5 - Girls Hostel- Plumbing- Commissioning,
E.3.1.2
Main Lines
E.3.1.2(d) 0.04% 664 days
Main Lines
Bl. No. 5 - Girls Hostel- Plumbing-C.P Installation, Testing

E.3.1.3
Page 90 of 1358

E.3.1.3(a) C.P & Sanitary Fittings - Installation -GF 0.07% 610 days
to 5th floor
E.3.1.3(b) C.P & Sanitary Fittings - Installation-6th 0.07% 640 days
to 10th floor
E.3.1.3(c) C.P & Sanitary Fittings - Installation-11th 0.07% 670 days
to terrace floor
E.3.1.3(d) C.P & Sanitary Fittings - Testing & 0.08% 700 days
Commissioning.
E.3.2 Bl. No. 5 - Girls Hostel- Fire Fighting

Bl. No. 5 - Girls Hostel- Fire Fighting -
E.3.2.1 0.16% 670 days
Installation
Bl. No. 5 - Girls Hostel- Fire Fighting -
E.3.2.2 0.04% 700 days
E.3.3 Bl. No. 5 - Girls Hostel- Electrical
Bl. No. 5 - Girls Hostel- Electrical-

E.3.3.1
Conduiting & Wiring
E.3.3.1(a) 0.20% 504 days
E.3.3.1(b) 0.20% 534 days
floor

E.3.3.2
E.3.3.2(a) 0.10% 515 days
E.3.3.2(b) 0.10% 545 days
floor

E.3.3.3
Panels
E.3.3.3(a) 0.19% 547 days
Page 91 of 1358

E.3.3.3(b) 0.05% 609 days
E.3.3.4 Bl. No. 5 - Girls Hostel- Electrical-Lifts

E.3.3.4(a) 0.13% 600 days
E.3.3.4(b) 0.03% 690 days
Bl. No. 5 - Girls Hostel- Electrical - Lights, Fans, Fittings,

E.3.3.5
Light Fixtures etc.
Bl. No. 5 - Girls Hostel- Electrical -
E.3.3.5(a) 0.07% 660 days
E.3.3.5(b) 0.07% 680 days
E.3.3.5(c) 0.07% 700 days
Bl. No. 5 - Girls Hostel- Electrical-ELV ELV (FAPA, CCTV, IT,

E.3.3.6
(FAPA, CCTV, IT, Data, Wi-Fi, etc.) Data, Wi-Fi, etc.)
E.3.3.6(a) 0.13% 590 days
ELV-GF to 5th floor
E.3.3.6(b) 0.13% 620 days
E.3.3.6(c) 0.13% 650 days

E.3.3.7
Audio Video
E.3.3.7(a) 0.08% 669 days
E.3.3.7(b) 0.02% 729 days
Bl. No. 5 - Girls Hostel- Fire HVAC &

E.3.4
Others
E.3.4.1 0.02% 640 days
E.3.4.2 0.01% 670 days
E.4 Bl. No. 1 - Academic Block
E.4.1 Bl. No. 1 - Academic Block- Plumbing
Page 92 of 1358
Bl. No. 1 - Academic Block- Plumbing-

E.4.1.1 0.03% 469 days
Concealed Plumbing
E.4.1.2 Water Supply and Down takes - 0.04% 469 days
Installation
E.4.1.3 0.01% 499 days
Main Lines
E.4.1.4 0.06% 529 days
C. P & Sanitary Fittings - Installation
Bl. No. 1 - Academic Block-C. P &
E.4.1.5 Sanitary Fittings - Testing & 0.01% 559 days
Commissioning.
E.4.2 Bl. No. 1 - Academic Block- Fire Fighting

Bl. No. 1 - Academic Block- Fire
E.4.2.1 0.11% 514 days
Fighting - Installation
Bl. No. 1 - Academic Block- Fire
E.4.2.2 0.03% 559 days
Fighting - Testing & Commissioning
E.4.3 Bl. No. 1 - Academic Block- Electrical

Bl. No. 1 - Academic Block- Electrical-
E.4.3.1
Conduiting & Wiring
Bl. No. 1 - Academic Block-
E.4.3.1(a) Electrical-Conduiting & Wiring - Ground 0.18% 410 days
Floor
E.4.3.1(b) Electrical-Conduiting & Wiring - First 0.18% 440 days
Floor
E.4.3.1(c) Electrical-Conduiting & Wiring - 0.09% 470 days
Connecting Bridge (Faculty Block)

E.4.3.2
E.4.3.2(a) Electrical-Cabel Tray, Cabel, DB's- 0.15% 440 days
Ground Floor
E.4.3.2(b) Electrical-Cabel Tray, Cabel, DB's- First 0.15% 470 days
Floor
E.4.3.2(c) Electrical-Cabel Tray, Cabel, DB's- 0.06% 500 days
Connecting Bridge (Faculty Block)
Page 93 of 1358

E.4.3.3
Panels
E.4.3.3(a) 0.15% 500 days
Electrical-Panels - Installation
E.4.3.3(b) Electrical-Panels - Testing & 0.04% 530 days
Commissioning

E.4.3.4
Lifts
E.4.3.4(a) 0.24% 500 days
Electrical-Lifts - Installation
E.4.3.4(b) Electrical-Lifts - Testing & 0.06% 530 days
Commissioning
Bl. No. 1 - Academic Block- Electrical -

E.4.3.5
Light Fixtures
E.4.3.5(a) 0.08% 510 days
Electrical -Light Fixtures - Ground Floor
E.4.3.5(b) 0.08% 540 days
Electrical -Light Fixtures- First Floor
E.4.3.5(c) Electrical -Light Fixtures- Connecting 0.04% 570 days
Bridge (Faculty Block)

E.4.3.6
ELV (FAPA, CCTV, IT, Data, Wi-Fi, etc.)
E.4.3.6(a) Electrical-ELV (FAPA, CCTV, IT, Data, Wi- 0.30% 510 days
Fi, etc.) - Ground Floor
E.4.3.6(b) Electrical-ELV (FAPA, CCTV, IT, Data, Wi- 0.30% 540 days
Fi, etc.)- First Floor
Electrical-ELV (FAPA, CCTV, IT, Data, Wi-
E.4.3.6(c) 0.15% 570 days
Fi, etc.)- Connecting Bridge (Faculty
Block)

E.4.3.7
Audio Video
E.4.3.7(a) 1.20% 495 days
Electrical-Audio Video - Installation
E.4.3.7(b) Electrical-Audio Video - Testing & 0.30% 570 days
Commissioning
Page 94 of 1358
Bl. No. 1 - Academic Block- Fire HVAC &

E.4.4
Others
Bl. No. 1 - Academic Block- Fire HVAC
E.4.4.1 0.47% 479 days
& Others- - Installation
Bl. No. 1 - Academic Block- Fire HVAC
E.4.4.2 0.12% 559 days
& Others- Testing & Commissioning
E.5 Bl. No. 8 - Type V Residence
E.5.1 Bl. No. 8 - Type V Residence - Plumbing

Bl. No. 8 - Type V Residence-
E.5.1.1
Plumbing-Concealed Plumbing
E.5.1.1(a) Plumbing-Concealed Plumbing-Stilt to 0.11% 439 days
5th Floor
E.5.1.1(b) Plumbing-Concealed Plumbing-6th floor 0.11% 484 days
to Terrace

E.5.1.2 Plumbing-Water Supply and Down takes
- Installation
E.5.1.2(a) Plumbing-Water Supply and Down takes 0.14% 455 days
- Installation-Stilt to 5th Floor
E.5.1.2(b) Plumbing-Water Supply and Down takes 0.14% 500 days
- Installation-6th floor to Terrace

Plumbing-Water Supply and Down takes
E.5.1.3 0.06% 530 days
- Testing & Commissioning, Connection
with Main Lines

E.5.1.4 Plumbing-C. P & Sanitary Fittings -
Installation
E.5.1.4(a) Plumbing-C. P & Sanitary Fittings - 0.22% 515 days
Installation-Stilt to 5th Floor
E.5.1.4(b) Plumbing-C. P & Sanitary Fittings - 0.22% 560 days
Installation-6th floor to Terrace
Page 95 of 1358
Bl. No. 8 - Type V Residence-C. P &

E.5.1.5 Sanitary Fittings - Testing & 0.11% 590 days
Commissioning.
Bl. No. 8 - Type V Residence- Fire

E.5.2
Fighting
E.5.2.1 0.03% 551 days
Fighting - Installation
E.5.2.2 0.01% 601 days
Fighting - Testing & Commissioning
E.5.3 Bl. No. 8 - Type V Residence- Electrical

E.5.3.1
Electrical-Conduiting & Wiring
E.5.3.1 (a) Electrical-Conduiting & Wiring-Stilt to 0.20% 505 days
5th Floor
E.5.3.1 (a) Electrical-Conduiting & Wiring-6th floor 0.20% 550 days
to Terrace

E.5.3.2
Electrical-Cabel Tray, Cabel, DB's
E.5.3.2(a) Electrical-Cabel Tray, Cabel, DB's-Stilt to 0.10% 505 days
5th Floor
E.5.3.2(b) Electrical-Cabel Tray, Cabel, DB's-6th 0.10% 550 days
floor to Terrace

E.5.3.3
Electrical-Panels
E.5.3.3(a) 0.13% 555 days
Electrical-Panels- Installation
E.5.3.3(b) Electrical-Panels - Testing & 0.03% 600 days
Commissioning

E.5.3.4
Electrical-Lifts
E.5.3.4(a) 0.09% 555 days
Electrical-Lifts - Installation
E.5.3.4(b) Electrical-Lifts - Testing & 0.02% 600 days
Commissioning
Page 96 of 1358
Bl. No. 8 - Type V Residence- Electrical

E.5.3.5
-Light Fixtures
E.5.3.5(a) Electrical -Light Fixtures-Stilt to 5th 0.07% 575 days
Floor
E.5.3.5(b) Electrical -Light Fixtures-6th floor to 0.07% 620 days
Terrace

E.5.3.6 Electrical-ELV (FAPA, CCTV, IT, Data,
Wifi, etc.)
E.5.3.6(a) 0.17% 575 days
Electrical-ELV -Stilt to 5th Floor
E.5.3.6(b) 0.17% 620 days
Electrical-ELV --6th floor to Terrace
Bl. No. 8 - Type V Residence- Fire HVAC

E.5.4
& Others
E.5.4.1 0.03% 551 days
HVAC & Others - Installation
E.5.4.2 HVAC & Others - Testing & 0.01% 601 days
Commissioning
E.6 Bl. No. 6 - MDC Accommodation

E.6.1
Plumbing
E.6.1.1 0.07% 500 days
Plumbing - Concealed Plumbing
E.6.1.2 Plumbing - Water Supply lines & down 0.08% 530 days
takes & Connection - Installation
Plumbing - Water Supply lines & down
E.6.1.3 0.02% 560 days
takes & Connection -Testing &
Commissioning
E.6.1.4 0.30% 590 days
Plumbing - CP & Sanitary - Installation
E.6.1.5 Plumbing - CP & Sanitary - Testing & 0.07% 620 days
Commissioning
Bl. No. 6 - MDC Accommodation- Fire

E.6.2
Fighting
Page 97 of 1358

E.6.2.1 0.06% 555 days
Fire Fighting - Installation
E.6.2.2 0.01% 600 days
Fire Fighting - Testing & Commissioning

E.6.3
Electrical
E.6.3.1
Electrical-Conduiting & Wiring
E.6.3.1(a) Electrical-Conduiting & Wiring-GF to 5th 0.19% 480 days
floor
E.6.3.1(b) Electrical-Conduiting & Wiring - 6th to 0.19% 510 days
Terrace

E.6.3.2
Electrical - Cabel Tray, Cabel, DB's
E.6.3.2(a) Electrical - Cabel Tray, Cabel, DB's-GF to 0.09% 480 days
5th floor
E.6.3.2(b) Electrical - Cabel Tray, Cabel, DB's- 6th 0.09% 510 days
to Terrace

E.6.3.3
Electrical - Panels
E.6.3.3(a) 0.12% 475 days
Electrical - Panels - Installation
E.6.3.3(b) Electrical - Panels - Testing & 0.03% 550 days
Commissioning

E.6.3.4
Electrical -Lifts
E.6.3.4(a) 0.08% 475 days
Electrical -Lifts- Installation
E.6.3.4(b) Electrical -Lifts - Testing & 0.02% 550 days
Commissioning

E.6.3.5
Electrical - Light Fixtures
E.6.3.5(a) 0.06% 590 days
Electrical - Light Fixtures-GF to 5th floor
Page 98 of 1358

E.6.3.5(b) 0.06% 620 days
Electrical - Light Fixtures- 6th to Terrace

E.6.3.6 Electrical - ELV (FAPA, CCTV, IT, Data,
Wi-Fi, etc.)
E.6.3.6(a) 0.12% 590 days
Electrical - ELV -GF to 5th floor
E.6.3.6(b) 0.12% 620 days
Electrical - ELV - 6th to Terrace

E.6.3.7
Electrical - AV
E.6.3.7(a) 0.05% 605 days
Electrical - AV - Installation
E.6.3.7(b) Electrical - AV - Testing & 0.01% 635 days
Commissioning
Bl. No. 6 - MDC Accommodation- Fire

E.6.4
HVAC & Others
E.6.4.1 0.44% 555 days
Fire HVAC & Others- Installation
E.6.4.2 Fire HVAC & Others - Testing & 0.11% 605 days
Commissioning
E.7 Bl. No. 2 MDC Academic + Incubation

Bl. No. 2 MDC Academic + Incubation
E.7.1
- Plumbing
E.7.1.1 Incubation - Plumbing-Concealed 0.04% 350 days
Plumbing
Incubation - Plumbing -Water Supply
E.7.1.2 0.05% 365 days
lines & down takes & Connection -
Installation
Incubation - Plumbing -Water Supply
E.7.1.3 0.01% 395 days
lines & down takes & Connection -
E.7.1.4 Incubation - Plumbing - CP & Sanitary - 0.08% 425 days
Installation
Page 99 of 1358

E.7.1.5 Incubation - Plumbing - CP & Sanitary - 0.02% 460 days

E.7.2
Fire Fighting
E.7.2.1 0.04% 380 days
Incubation- Fire Fighting - Installation
E.7.2.2 Incubation- Fire Fighting - Testing & 0.01% 410 days
Commissioning

E.7.3
Electrical
E.7.3.1 Incubation- Electrical - Conduiting & 0.09% 370 days
Wiring
E.7.3.2 Incubation- Electrical - Cabel Tray, 0.08% 370 days
Cabel, DB's

E.7.3.3
Incubation- Electrical - Panels
E.7.3.3(a) Incubation- Electrical - Panels - 0.03% 370 days
Installation
E.7.3.3(b) Incubation- Electrical - Panels - Testing 0.01% 410 days
& Commissioning

E.7.3.4
Incubation- Electrical - Lifts
E.7.3.4(a) 0.05% 335 days
Incubation- Electrical - Lifts - Installation
E.7.3.4(b) Incubation- Electrical - Lifts - Testing & 0.01% 410 days
Commissioning

E.7.3.5 0.04% 440 days
Incubation- Electrical - Light Fixtures
E.7.3.6 Incubation- Electrical - ELV (FAPA, CCTV, 0.15% 440 days
IT, Data, Wi-Fi, etc.)

E.7.3.7
Incubation- Electrical - AV
Page 100 of 1358


E.7.3.7(a) 0.24% 440 days
Incubation- Electrical - AV - Installation
E.7.3.7(b) Incubation- Electrical - AV - Testing & 0.06% 500 days
Commissioning

E.7.4
Fire HVAC & Others
E.7.4.1 Incubation- Fire HVAC & Others - 0.26% 365 days
Installation
E.7.4.2 Incubation- Fire HVAC & Others - 0.07% 425 days
E.8 Bl. No. 7 - Mess

E.8.1 Bl. No. 7 - Mess - Plumbing 0.06% 495 days
E.8.2 Bl. No. 7 - Mess- Fire Fighting 0.01% 495 days
E.8.3 Bl. No. 7 - Mess- Electrical 0.16% 495 days
E.8.4 Bl. No. 7 - Mess- Fire HVAC & Others 0.08% 495 days
As mentioned in the
F Infra structure Works @ 22% 22.00% Scope of Work
Document
F.1 Ancillary Building - STP & ETP

Ancillary Building - STP & ETP-Civil
F.1.1 0.44% 452 days
Works
Ancillary Building - STP & ETP-
F.1.2 0.66% 572 days
Services Works
F.2 Ancillary Building - WTP

F.2.1 Ancillary Building - WTP - Civil Works 0.44% 452 days
Ancillary Building - WTP- Services
F.2.2 0.66% 572 days
Works
F.3 Ancillary Building - UGT

F.3.1 Ancillary Building - UGT - Civil Works 0.77% 452 days
Ancillary Building - UGT- Services
F.3.2 0.33% 572 days
Works
F.4 Ancillary Building - Electric Substation 1

Ancillary Building - Electric Substation
F.4.1 0.33% 452 days
1-Civil Works
Page 101 of 1358


F.4.2 0.77% 572 days
1- Services Works
F.5 Ancillary Building - Electric Substation 2

F.5.1 0.33% 452 days
2- Civil Works
F.5.2 0.77% 572 days
2- Services Works
F.6 Roads
Roads- Between and around Bl. No. 8,
F.6.1 Bl. No. 6, Bl. No. 2, Bl. No. 5, Utility 3, 1.76% 607 days
Electric Substation 10 &1, Central UGT.
F.6.2 Roads- Between and around Bl. No. 1 0.88% 637 days
Roads- Between and around Bl. No. 3,
F.6.3 Bl. No.4, Bl. No.7, Utility 4, Electric 1.76% 697 days
Substation 11, OAT.
F.7 Hardscape
Hardscape- Between and around Bl.
No. 8, Bl. No. 6, Bl. No. 2, Bl. No. 5,
F.7.1 1.32% 543 days
Utility 3, Electric Substation 10 &1,
Central UGT.
F.7.2 0.66% 573 days
No. 1
F.7.3 No. 3, Bl. No.4, Bl. No.7, Utility 4, 1.32% 633 days
Electric Substation 11, OAT.
F.8 Landscape
Landscape- Between and around Bl.
No. 8, Bl. No. 6, Bl. No. 2, Bl. No. 5,
F.8.1 0.88% 607 days
Utility 3, Electric Substation 10 &1,
Central UGT.
F.8.2 0.44% 637 days
No. 1
F.8.3 No. 3, Bl. No.4, Bl. No.7, Utility 4, 0.88% 697 days
Electric Substation 11, OAT.
F.9 External Services

External Services - Between and
around Bl. No. 8, Bl. No. 6, Bl. No. 2, Bl.
F.9.1 2.64% 543 days
No. 5, Utility 3, Electric Substation 10
&1, Central UGT.
Page 102 of 1358


F.9.2 1.32% 573 days
around Bl. No. 1
F.9.3 around Bl. No. 3, Bl. No.4, Bl. No.7, 2.64% 633 days
Utility 4, Electric Substation 11, OAT.
Clearance of
Occupancy Readiness - Snagging and de-
G 2.00% snagging and de-
snagging.
snagging list.
G.1 Bl. No. 3 - Boys Hostel 0.30% 754 days
G.2 Bl. No. 4 - Boys Hostel 0.30% 754 days
G.3 Bl. No. 5 - Girls Hostel 0.30% 754 days
G.4 Bl. No. 1 - Academic Block 0.47% 617 days
G.5 Bl. No. 8 - Type V Residence 0.25% 633 days
G.6 Bl. No. 6 - MDC Accommodation 0.22% 620 days
G.7 Bl. No. 2 MDC Academic + Incubation 0.13% 450 days
G.8 Bl. No. 7 - Mess 0.03% 514 days
Fulfilling the requirements for obtaining

H 1.00% 1.00% 790 days
Statutory/ Government approvals.
Handing over of all

Documents related
to Survey reports,
OEM Manuals/
Certificates for
equipment’s,
I Final Completion Certificate 2.00% Guarantee/ 2.00% 820 days
Warranty
Certificates, as built
drawings etc. as
desired by
Authority/Authority
Engineer.
Total (Excluding Mobilisation

100.00%
Advance)
NOTE –
• Date of commencement shall be considered as Zero Day.

• The completion period of the project is 1+26 months, totaling 27 months. The first month is for
design and the milestone period will start from the completion of the first month i.e. 31st day
mentioned above.
• The payment shall be made upon achieving the individual milestone only.
Page 103 of 1358

• 0.1 % of the awarded value shall be retained against the performance of solar PV panels for 25
years after final completion certificate. This retention amount may be released against the
Bank guarantee of equivalent value for the aforesaid period. The EPC Contractor shall have to
submit the guarantee bond also as per the requirement of the IIM Indore.
• 0.03 % of the awarded value shall be retained against the performance of waterproofing for 10
years after final completion certificate. This retention amount may be released against the
Bank guarantee of equivalent value for the aforesaid period. The EPC Contractor shall have to
submit the guarantee bond also as per the requirement of the IIM Indore.
Page 104 of 1358

CHAPTER 8
GENERAL CONDITIONS OF CONTRACTS
Page 105 of 1358

CHAPTER 8
GENERAL CONDITIONS OF CONTRACTS
After getting the award: EPC Contractor shall have to execute an agreement on non-judicial stamp
paper of requisite value immediately on furnishing the performance guarantee in the format
prescribed by IIM Indore and sign on all contract documents. (Cost of stamp paper to be borne
by the EPC Contractor)
1. Integrity Agreement: EPC Contractor shall have to execute an Integrity Agreement also
on non-judicial stamp paper of requisite value immediately on furnishing the
performance guarantee in the format prescribed by IIM Indore and signing on all contract
documents. (Cost of stamp paper to be borne by the EPC Contractor)
2. The Engineer-in-charge referred to in the document implies the Chief Engineer of the IIM
Indore.
3. Stamp Duty:
a. Stamp (wherever mentioned in the RFP/ not mentioned but required legally),
stamp duty will generally be following the Indian Stamp Act, 1899 (as applicable to
Madhya Pradesh).
b. For the services of the ‘EPC Contractor’, the stamp duty shall be as per the Indian
Stamp Act, 1899 (as applicable to Madhya Pradesh). Any revision, if made by the
govt. will be applicable at the time of execution ofthe agreements.
c. The cost w.r.t. stamp duty will solely be with the bidder i.e., cost to be borne by
successful bidder.
Page 106 of 1358

Part I
Preliminary
Page 107 of 1358

ENGINEERING, PROCUREMENT, AND CONSTRUCTION AGREEMENT
THIS AGREEMENT1 is entered into on this the ………... day of ………, 20….
BETWEEN
1 THE DIRECTOR OF IIM represented by [INDIAN INSTITUTE OF MANAGEMENT INDORE]

and having its principal offices at Rau-Pithampur Road, Indore-453556, M.P. (hereinafter referred
to as the “Authority” which expression shall, unless repugnant to the context or meaning
thereof, include itsadministrators, successors and assigns) of One Part;
AND
2 ……………………………………………., means the selected bidder having its registered

office at ………………….…, (hereinafter referred to as the “EPC Contractor” which expression shall,
unless repugnant to the context or meaning thereof, include its successors and permittedassigns)
of the Other Part.
WHEREAS:
(A) The Authority had resolved to APPOINTMENT OF EPC CONTRACTOR FOR

CONSTRUCTION OF GROUP VIII PROJECTS COMPRISING OF MULTISTOREY HOSTEL
BLOCKS, ACADEMIC BUILDING, FACULTY OFFICES & APARTMENTS AND OTHER
ASSOCIATED INFRASTRUCTURE AT IIM INDORE in accordance with the terms and
conditionsto be set forth in an agreement to be entered into.
(B) The Authority had accordingly invited proposals by its [Request for Proposal No.***
dated ***] (the “Request for Proposal” or “RFP”) for short listing of bidders for EPC of
the above-mentioned work and had shortlisted certain bidders including, inter alia, the
selected bidder.
(C) The Authority had prescribed the technical and commercial terms and conditions and
invited bids (the “Request for Proposals” or “RFP”/ Tenders) from the bidders
shortlisted pursuant to the RFQ for undertaking the Project.
(D) After evaluation of the bids received, the Authority had accepted the bid of the selected
bidder and issued its Letter of Acceptance No.
………………………………………………………………………. Date ………………………. (Hereinafter
called the “LOA”) to the selected bidder for CONSTRUCTION OF GROUP VIII PROJECTS
COMPRISING OF MULTISTOREY HOSTEL BLOCKS, ACADEMIC BUILDING, FACULTY
OFFICES & APARTMENTS AND OTHER ASSOCIATED INFRASTRUCTURE AT IIM
INDORE at the contract price specified hereinafter, requiring the selected bidder to
inter alia:
(i) Deliver to the Authority a legal opinion from the legal counsel of the selected bidder
with respect to the authority of the selected bidder to enter into this Agreement and
the enforceability of the provisions thereof, within 10 (ten) daysof the date of issue of
LOA; and
(ii) Execute this Agreement within 15 (fifteen) days of the date of issue of LOA.
Page 108 of 1358

(E) The EPC Contractor has fulfilled the requirements specified in Recital (D) above.
NOW, THEREFORE, in consideration of the foregoing and the respective covenants and
agreements set forth in this Agreement, the sufficiency and adequacy of which is hereby
acknowledged, the Authority hereby covenants to pay the EPC Contractor, in consideration of the
obligations specified herein, the Contract Price or such other sum as may become payable under
the provisions of the Agreement at the times and in the manner specified by the Agreement and
intending to be legally bound hereby, the Parties agree as follows:
Page 109 of 1358

ARTICLE 1
DEFINITIONS AND INTERPRETATION
1.1 Definitions
The words and expressions beginning with capital letters and defined in this Agreement
(including those in Article 26) shall, unless the context otherwise requires, have the
meaning ascribed thereto herein, and the words and expressions defined in the
Schedules and used therein shall have the meaning ascribed thereto in the Schedules.
1.2 Interpretation
1.2.1 In this Agreement, unless the context otherwise requires,
(a) references to any legislation or any provision thereof shall include amendment or re-
enactment or consolidation of such legislation or any provision thereof so far as such
amendment or re-enactment or consolidation applies or is capable of applying to any
transaction entered into hereunder;
(b) references to laws of India or Indian law or regulation having the force of law shall include
the laws, acts, ordinances, rules, regulations, bye laws or notifications which have the
force of law in the territory of India and as from time to time may be amended, modified,
supplemented, extended or re-enacted;
(c) references to a “person” and words denoting a natural person shall be construed as a
reference to any individual, firm, company, corporation, society, trust, government, state
or agency of a state or any association or partnership (whether or not having separate
legal personality) of two or more of the above and shall include successors and assigns;
(d) the table of contents, headings or sub-headings in this Agreement are for convenience
of reference only and shall not be used in, and shall not affect, the construction or
interpretation of this Agreement;
(e) the words “include” and “including” are to be construed without limitation and shall be
deemed to be followed by “without limitation” or “but not limited to” whether or not they
are followed by such phrases;
(f) references to “construction” or “building” include, unless the context otherwise requires,
survey and investigation, design, developing, engineering, procurement, supply of plant,
materials, equipment, labour, delivery, transportation, installation, processing,
fabrication, testing, and commissioning of the Project, including maintenance during the
Construction Period, removing of defects, if any, and other activities incidental to the
construction and “construct” or “build” shall be construed accordingly;
(g) references to “development” include, unless the context otherwise requires,

construction, renovation, refurbishing, augmentation, up-gradation and other activities
incidental thereto during the Construction Period, and “develop” shall be construed
accordingly;
Page 110 of 1358

(h) any reference to any period of time shall mean a reference to that according to Indian
standard time;
(i) any reference today shall mean a reference to a calendar day;
(j) reference to a “business day” shall be construed as reference to a day (other than a
Sunday) on which banks in the State are generally open for business;
(k) any reference to month shall mean a reference to a calendar month as per the Gregorian
calendar;
(l) references to any date, period or Project Milestone shall mean and include such date,
period or Project Milestone as may be extended pursuant to this Agreement;
(m) any reference to any period commencing “from” a specified day or date and “till” or “until”
a specified day or date shall include both such days or dates; provided that if the last day
of any period computed under this Agreement is not a business day, then the period
shall run until the end of the next business day;
(n) the words importing singular shall include plural and vice versa;
(o) references to any gender shall include the other and the neutral gender;
(p) “lakh” means a hundred thousand (100,000) and “crore” means ten million (10,000,000);
(q) “indebtedness” shall be construed so as to include any obligation (whether incurred as

principal or surety) for the payment or repayment of money, whether present or future,
actual or contingent;
(r) references to the “winding-up”, “dissolution”, “insolvency”, or “reorganization” of a

company or corporation shall be construed so as to include any equivalent or analogous
proceedings under the law of the jurisdiction in which such company or corporation is
incorporated or any jurisdiction in which such company or corporation carries on
business including the seeking of liquidation, winding-up, reorganization, dissolution,
arrangement, protection or relief of debtors;
(s) save and except as otherwise provide modified, his Agreement, any reference, at any
time, to any agreement, deed, instrument, license or document of any description shall
be construed as reference to that agreement, deed, instrument, license or other
document as amended, varied, supplemented, modified or suspended at the time of
such reference; provided that this Sub-clause (s) shall not operate so as to increase
liabilities or obligations of the IIM Indore hereunder or pursuant hereto in any manner
whatsoever;
(t) any agreement, consent, approval, authorization, notice, communication, information or

report required under or pursuant to this Agreement from or by any Party or the
Authority Engineer shall be valid and effective only if it is in writing under the hand of a
duly authorized representative of such Party or the Authority Engineer, as the case may
be, in this behalf and not otherwise;
(u) the Schedules and Recitals to this Agreement form an integral part of this Agreement and
Page 111 of 1358

will be in full force and effect as though they were expressly set out in the body of this
Agreement;
(v) references to Recitals, Articles, Clauses, Sub-clauses, Provisos or Schedules in this

Agreement shall, except where the context otherwise requires, mean references to
Recitals, Articles, Clauses, Sub-clauses, Provisos and Schedules of or to this Agreement;
reference to an Annex shall, subject to anything to the contrary specified therein, be
construed as a reference to an Annex to the Schedule in which such reference occurs;
and reference to a Paragraph shall, subject to anything to the contrary specified therein,
be construed as a reference to a Paragraph of the Schedule or Annex, as the case may
be, in which such reference appear;
(w) the damages payable by either Party to the other of them, as set forth in this Agreement,
whether on per diem basis or otherwise, are mutually agreed genuine pre-estimated loss
and damage likely to be suffered and incurred by the Party entitled to receive the same
and are not by way of penalty (the “Damages”); and
(x) time shall be of the essence in the performance of the Parties’ respective obligations. If
any time period specified herein is extended for the reasons specified in the Agreement,
such extended time shall also be of the essence.
1.2.2 Unless expressly provided otherwise in this Agreement, any Documentation required to
be provided or furnished by the EPC Contractor to the IIM Indore shall be provided free
of cost and in three copies, and if the IIM Indore is required to return any such
Documentation with its comments and/or approval, it shall be entitled to retain two
copies thereof.
1.2.3 The rule of construction, if any, that a contract should be interpreted against the parties
responsible for the drafting and preparation thereof, shall not apply.
1.2.4 Any word or expression used in this Agreement shall, unless otherwise defined or
construed in this Agreement, bear its ordinary English meaning and, for these purposes,
the General Clauses Act, 1897 shall not apply.
1.3 Measurements and arithmetic conventions
All measurements and calculations shall be in the metric system and calculations done
to 2 (two) decimal places, with the third digit of 5 (five) or above being rounded up and
below 5 (five) being rounded down.
1.4 Priority of agreements and errors/discrepancies
1.4.1 This Agreement, and all other agreements and documents forming part of or referred to
in this Agreement are to be taken as mutually explanatory and, unless otherwise
expressly provided elsewhere in this Agreement, the priority of this Agreement and other
documents and agreements forming part hereof or referred to herein shall, in the event
of any conflict between them, be in the following order:
(a) this Agreement; and
(b) all other agreements and documents forming part hereof or referred to herein;
Page 112 of 1358

(c) i.e., this Agreement at (a) above shall prevail over the agreements and documents at (b).
(d) Subject to the provisions of Clause 1.4.1, in case of ambiguities or discrepancies within
this Agreement, the following shall apply:
(e) Between two or more Clauses of this Agreement, the provisions of a specific Clause
relevant to the issue under consideration shall prevail over those in other Clauses.
(f) between the Clauses of this Agreement and the Schedules, the Clauses shall prevail and
between Schedules and Annexes, the Schedules shall prevail;
(g) between any two Schedules, the Schedule relevant to the issue shall prevail;
(h) between the written description on the Drawings and the Specifications and Standards,
the latter shall prevail;
(i) between the dimension scaled from the Drawing and its specific written dimension, the
latter shall prevail; and
(j) between any value written in numerals and that in words, the latter shall prevail.
1.5 Joint and several liability – Not Applicable
Page 113 of 1358

Part II
Scope of the Project
Page 114 of 1358

ARTICLE 2
SCOPE OF THE PROJECT
2.1 Scope of the Project
Under this Agreement, the scope of the Project (the “Scope of the Project”) shall mean
and include:
(a) Construction of the Project on the Site set forth in Chapter 6– Scope of Works
(b) performance and fulfillment of all other obligations of the EPC Contractor in accordance
with the provisions of this Agreement and matters incidental thereto or necessary for the
performance of any or all the obligations of the EPC Contractor under this Agreement.
Page 115 of 1358

ARTICLE 3
OBLIGATIONS OF THE EPC CONTRACTOR
3.1 Obligations of the EPC Contractor
3.1.1 Subject to and on the terms and conditions of this Agreement, the EPC Contractor shall
undertake the survey, investigation, design, engineering, procurement, and construction
of the Project and observe, fulfil, comply with, and perform all its obligations set out in
this Agreement or arising hereunder.
3.1.2 The EPC Contractor shall comply with all Applicable Laws and Applicable Permits
(including renewals as required) in the performance of its obligations under this
Agreement.
3.1.3 Save and except as otherwise provided in this Agreement or Applicable Laws, as the case
may be, the EPC Contractor shall, in discharge of all its obligations under this Agreement,
conform with and adhere to Good Industry Practice at all times.
3.1.4 The EPC Contractor shall remedy any and all loss or damage to the Project, occurring on
orafter the Appointed Date and until the date of Provisional Certificate, with respect to
the Works completed prior to the issuance of the Provisional Certificate and/or
Completion Certificate, with respect to the Works referred to in the Punch List, at its own
risk and cost, save and except to the extent that any such loss or damage shall have
arisen from any default of the IIM Indore or on account of a Force Majeure Event in which
casethe provisions of GCC Clause 19 shall apply.
3.1.5 The EPC Contractor shall remedy any and all loss or damage to the Project during the
Defects Liability Period at its own risk and cost, to the extent that such loss or damage
shall have arisen out of the reasons specified in GCC Clause 15.3.
3.1.6 The EPC Contractor shall, at its own cost and expense, in addition to and not in derogation
of its obligations elsewhere set out in this Agreement:
(a) make, or cause to be made, necessary applications to the relevant Government

Instrumentalities with such particulars and details as may be required for obtaining
Applicable Permits set forth in Schedule-E and obtain and keep in force and effect
such Applicable Permits in conformity with Applicable Laws;
(b) procure, as required, the appropriate proprietary rights, licenses, agreements and
permissions for Materials, methods, processes, know-how and systems used or
incorporated into the Project;
(c) make reasonable efforts to maintain harmony and good industrial relations among
the personnel employed by it in connection with the performance of its obligations
under this Agreement;
(d) ensure and procure that he/she comply with all Applicable Permits and Applicable
Laws in the performance by them of any of the EPC Contractor’s obligations under
this Agreement;
Page 116 of 1358

(e) always act in a manner consistent with the provisions of this Agreement and not
cause or fail to do any act, deed or thing, whether intentionally or otherwise, which
may in any manner be violative of any of the provisions of this Agreement;
(f) support, cooperate with and facilitate the IIM Indore in the implementation and
operation of the Project in accordance with the provisions of this Agreement;
(g) ensure that the EPC Contractor comply with the safety and welfare measures for
labour in accordance with Applicable Laws and Good Industry Practice;
(h) keep, on the Site, a copy of this Agreement, publications named in this Agreement,
the Drawings, Documents relating to the Project, and Change of Scope Orders and
other communications sent under this Agreement, and provide access to all these
documents at all reasonable times to the Authority Engineer and its authorized
personnel;
(i) cooperate with other agencies employed by the IIM Indore and personnel of any
other public authority; and
(j) not interfere unnecessarily or improperly with the convenience of the public, or the
access to and use and occupation of all the existing facilities within the Rightof Way,
irrespective of whether they are public or in the possession of the IIM Indore or of
others.
3.1.7 The EPC Contractor shall undertake all necessary superintendence to plan, arrange,
direct, manage, inspect, and test the Works.
3.2 Obligations relating to sub-contracts and any other agreements.
The EPC Contractor shall not sub-contract the total Contract Price directly under its own
supervision and through its own personnel.
3.3 Obligations relating to employment of foreign nationals.
The EPC Contractor acknowledges, agrees, and undertakes that employment of foreign
personnel by the EPC Contractor shall be subject to grant of requisite regulatory permits
and approvals including employment/residential visas and work permits, if any required,
and the obligation to apply for and obtain the same shall and will always be of the EPC
Contractor. Notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained in this Agreement,
refusal of or inability to obtain any such permits and approvals by the EPC Contractor
shall not constitute Force Majeure Event and shall not in any manner excuse the EPC
Contractor from the performance and discharge of its obligations and liabilities under
this Agreement.
3.4 Obligations relating to EPC Contractor’s personnel.
3.4.1 The EPC Contractor shall ensure and procure that the personnel engaged by it for
performance of its obligations under this Agreement are at all times appropriately
qualified, skilled and experienced in their respective functions in conformity with
Applicable Laws and Good Industry Practice.
Page 117 of 1358

3.4.2 The Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore may, for reasons to be specified in writing, direct the
EPC Contractor to remove any member of the Contractor’s personnel from the Project.
Provided that any such direction issued by the Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore shall specify
the reasons for the removal of such person.
3.4.3 The EPC Contractor shall, on receiving direction from the Authority’ Engineer/ IIM Indore
under the provisions of Clause 3.4.2, ensure and procure the removal of such person or
persons from the Project with immediate effect. The EPC Contractor shall further ensure
that such persons have no further connection with the Project.
3.5 Obligations relating to advertisement on Project.
The EPC Contractor shall not use the Project or any part thereof in any manner for
branding or advertising purposes including for advertising any commercial product or
services or companies.
3.6 Obligations relating to EPC Contractor's care of the Works.
The EPC Contractor shall bear full risk in and take full responsibility for the care of Works,
and of Materials, goods, and equipment for incorporation therein, on and from the
Appointed Date and until the date of Completion Certificate, with respect to the Works
referred to in the Scope of Work.
3.7 Obligations relating to electricity, water, and other services.
The EPC Contractor shall be responsible for procuring all power, water, and other
services that it may require for the Project. Necessary Liasoning with approval Authority
(State/Central) is part of the scope of the work.
3.8 Obligations relating to information.
3.8.1 Without prejudice to the provisions of Applicable Laws and this Agreement, upon
receiving a notice from the Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore for any information that it may
reasonably require or that it considers may be necessary to enable it to perform any of
its functions, the EPC Contractor shall provide such information to the IIM Indore
forthwith and in the manner and form required by the IIM Indore.
3.8.2 After receiving a notice from the IIM Indore for reasoned comments on the accuracy and
text of any information relating to the EPC Contractor’s activities under or pursuant to
this Agreement which the IIM Indore proposes to publish, the EPC Contractor shall
provide such comments to the IIM Indore in the manner and form required by the IIM
Indore.
3.9 Unforeseeable difficulties
Except as otherwise specified in the Agreement:
(a) the EPC Contractor accepts complete responsibility for having foreseen alldifficulties
Page 118 of 1358

and costs of successfully completing the Works;
(b) the EPC Contract Price shall not be adjusted to take account of any unforeseen
difficulties or costs; and
(c) the Scheduled Completion Date shall not be adjusted to take account of any
unforeseen difficulties or costs.
For the purposes of this Clause, unforeseeable difficulties include physical conditions like
man-made or natural physical conditions including sub-surface and hydrological
conditions which the EPC Contractor encounters at the Site during execution of the
Works.
Page 119 of 1358

ARTICLE 4
OBLIGATIONS OF THE IIM INDORE
4.1 Obligations of the IIM Indore
4.1.1 The IIM Indore shall, at its own cost and expense, undertake, comply with, and perform
all its obligations set out in this Agreement or arising hereunder.
4.1.2 Deleted.
4.1.3 The IIM Indore shall, upon receiving the Performance Security under Clause 7.1.1,
provide to the EPC Contractor:
(a) the Right of Way in accordance with the provisions of Clauses 8.2 and 8.3, within a period
of 15 (fifteen) days from the date of this Agreement, on no less than 90% (ninety per cent)
of the total land required for the Project;
(b) approval of the general arrangement drawings (the “GAD”) from Authority Engineer to
enable the EPC Contractor to construct and execute the Project in accordance with the
Specifications and Standards, and subject to the terms and conditions specified in such
approval, within a period of 45 (Forty-five) days from the Appointed Date; 2 and
(c) Deleted
4.1.4 Delay in providing the Right of Way [or approval of GAD by IIM Indore / Authority
Engineer, as the case may be,] in accordance with the provisions of GCC Clause 4.1.3 shall
entitle the EPC Contractor to Damages in a sum calculated in accordance with the
provisions of GCC Clause 8.3 of this Agreement and Time Extension in accordance with
the provisions of GCC Clause10.5 of this Agreement. [For the avoidance of doubt, the
Parties agree that the Damages for delay in approval of GAD by the IIM Indore/Authority
Engineer for a particular phase/section/Building/Infra shall be deemed to be equal to the
Damages payable under the provisions of GCC Clause 8.3 for delay in providing Right of
Way. Right of way is available without encroachment.
4.1.5 Notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained in this Agreement, the Parties
expressly agree that the aggregate Damages payable under Clauses 4.1.4, 8.3 and 9.2
shall not exceed 3% (three per cent) of the Contract Price. For the avoidance of doubt,
the Damages payable by the IIM Indore under the aforesaid Clauses shall not be additive
if they arise concurrently from more than one cause but relate to the same part of the
Project.
4.1.6 Deleted
4.2 Obligations relating to Operation & Maintenance

Deleted.
Page 120 of 1358

ARTICLE 5
REPRESENTATIONS AND WARRANTIES
5.1 Representations and warranties of the EPC Contractor
The EPC Contractor represents and warrants to the IIM Indore that:
(a) it is duly organised and validly existing under the laws of India, and has full power and
authority to execute and perform its obligations under this Agreement and to carry out
the transactions contemplated hereby;
(b) it has taken all necessary corporate and other actions under Applicable Laws to authorize
the execution and delivery of this Agreement and to validly exercise its rights and
perform its obligations under this Agreement;
(c) this Agreement constitutes its legal, valid and binding obligation, enforceable against it
in accordance with the terms hereof, and its obligations under this Agreement will be
legally valid, binding and enforceable obligations against itin accordance with the terms
hereof;
(d) it is subject to the laws of India, and hereby expressly and irrevocably waives any
immunity in any jurisdiction in respect of this Agreement or matters arisingthereunder
including any obligation, liability or responsibility hereunder;
(e) the information furnished in the Bid and as updated on or before the date of this
Agreement is true and accurate in all respects as on the date of this Agreement;
(f) the execution, delivery and performance of this Agreement will not conflict with, result
in the breach of, constitute a default under, or accelerate performance required by any
of the terms of its memorandum and articles of association or any Applicable Laws or
any covenant, contract, agreement, arrangement, understanding, decree or order to
which it is a party or by which it or any of its properties or assets is bound or affected;
(g) there are no actions, suits, proceedings, or investigations pending or, to its knowledge,
threatened against it at law or in equity before any court or before any other judicial,
quasi-judicial or other authority, the outcome of which may result in the breach of this
Agreement or which individually or in the aggregate may result in any material
impairment of its ability to perform any of its obligations under this Agreement;
(h) it has no knowledge of any violation or default with respect to any order, writ, injunction
or decree of any court or any legally binding order of any Government Instrumentality
which may result in any material adverse effect onits ability to perform its obligations
under this Agreement and no fact or circumstance exists which may give rise to such
proceedings that would adversely affect the performance of its obligations under this
Agreement;
(i) it has complied with Applicable Laws in all material respects and has not been subject to
any fines, penalties, injunctive relief or any other civil or criminal liabilities which in the
aggregate have or may have a material adverse effect on its ability to perform its
obligations under this Agreement;
Page 121 of 1358

(j) no representation or warranty by it contained herein or in any other document furnished

by it to the IIM Indore or to any Government Instrumentality in relation to Applicable
Permits contains or will contain any untrue or misleading statement of material fact or
omits or will omit to state a material fact necessary to make such representation or
warranty not misleading;
(k) no sums, in cash or kind, have been paid or will be paid, by it or on its behalf, to any
person by way of fees, commission or otherwise for securing the contractor entering into
this Agreement or for influencing or attempting to influence anyofficer or employee of the
IIM Indore in connection therewith;
(l) all information provided by the {selected bidder/ members of the Consortium} in
response to the Request for Qualification and Request for Proposals or otherwise, is to
the best of its knowledge and belief, true and accurate in all material respects;
(m) all undertakings and obligations of the EPC Contractor arising from the Request for
Qualification and Request for Proposals or otherwise shall be binding on the EPC
Contractor as if they form part of this Agreement; and
(n) nothing contained in this Agreement shall create any contractual relationship or
obligation between the Authority and any Sub-contractors, designers, consultants, or
agents of the EPC Contractor.
5.2 Representations and warranties of the IIM Indore
The IIM Indore represents and warrants to the EPC Contractor that:
(o) it has full power and authority to execute, deliver and perform its obligations under this
Agreement and to carry out the transactions contemplated herein and that it has taken
all actions necessary to execute this Agreement, exercise its rights and perform its
obligations, under this Agreement;
(p) deleted.
(q) it has the financial standing and capacity to perform its obligations under this Agreement;
(r) this Agreement constitutes a legal, valid and binding obligation enforceable against it in
accordance with the terms hereof;
(s) deleted.
(t) deleted.
(u) it has good and valid right to the Site and has the power and IIM Indore to grant the Right
of Way in respect thereof to the EPC Contractor;
(v) deleted.
Page 122 of 1358

5.3 Disclosure
In the event that any occurrence or circumstance comes to the attention of either Party
that renders any of its aforesaid representations or warranties untrue or incorrect, such
Party shall immediately notify the other Party of the same. Such notification shall not
have the effect of remedying any breach of the representation or warranty that has been
found to be untrue or incorrect nor shall it adversely affect or waive any obligation of
either Party under this Agreement.
Page 123 of 1358

ARTICLE 6
DISCLAIMER
6.1 Disclaimer
6.1.1 The EPC Contractor acknowledges that prior to the execution of this Agreement, the EPC
Contractor has, after a complete and careful examination, made an independent
evaluation of the Request for Qualification, Request for Proposals, Scope of the Project,
Specifications and Standards, Site, local conditions, physical qualities of ground, subsoil
and geology, traffic volumes, suitability and availability of access routes to the Site and
all information provided by the IIM Indore or obtained, procured or gathered otherwise,
and has determined to its satisfaction the accuracy or otherwise thereof and the nature
and extent of difficulties, risks and hazards as are likely to arise or may be faced by it in
the course of performance of its obligations hereunder. Save as provided in Clause 4.1.2
and Clause 5.2, the IIM Indore makes no representation whatsoever, express, implicit or
otherwise, regarding the accuracy, adequacy, correctness, reliability and/or
completeness of any assessment, assumptions, statement or information provided by it
and the EPC Contractor confirms that it shall have no claim whatsoever against the IIM
Indore in this regard.
6.1.2 The EPC Contractor acknowledges and hereby accepts to have satisfied themselves as to
the correctness and sufficiency of the Contract Price.
6.1.3 The EPC Contractor acknowledges and hereby accepts the risk of inadequacy, mistake or
error in or relating to any of the matters set forth in Clause 6.1.1 above and hereby
acknowledges and agrees that the IIM Indore shall not be liable for the same in any
manner whatsoever to the EPC Contractor, or any person claiming through or under any
of them and shall not lead to any adjustment of Contract Price or Scheduled Completion
Date.
6.1.4 The Parties agree that any mistake or error in or relating to any of the matters set forth
in Clause 6.1.1 above shall not vitiate this Agreement or render it voidable.
6.1.5 In the event that either Party becomes aware of any mistake or error relating to any of
the matters set forth in Clause 6.1.1 above, that Party shall immediately notify the other
Party, specifying the mistake or error.
6.1.6 Except as otherwise provided in this Agreement, all risks relating to the Project shall be
borne by the EPC Contractor; and the IIM Indore shall not be liable in any manner for
such risks or the consequences thereof.
Page 124 of 1358

Part III
Construction
Page 125 of 1358

ARTICLE 7
PERFORMANCE SECURITY
7.1 Performance Security
7.1.1 The EPC Contractor shall, for the performance of its obligations hereunder, provide to
the IIM Indore, within 15 (fifteen) days of the date of this Agreement, an irrevocable and
unconditional guarantee, for an amount equal to 5% (five per cent) of the Contract Price,
from a Scheduled commercial Bank in the form set forth in Annex-I of Schedule-F (the
“Performance Security”). The Performance Security shall be valid until 60 (sixty) days of
the expiry of the Defects Liability Period specified in GCC Clause 15.1.1. Until such time
the Performance Security is provided by the EPC Contractor pursuant hereto and the
same comes into effect, the Bid Security shall remain in force and effect, and upon such
provision of the Performance Security, the IIM Indore shall release the Bid Security to the
EPC Contractor. For the avoidance of doubt, the Parties expressly agree that the EPC
Contractor shall provide, no later than 30 (thirty) days prior to the expiry of the
Performance Security for the Defects Liability Period specified in GC Clause 15.1.1, a
Performance Security in respect of the extended Defects Liability Period, as specified in
Clause 15.1.2, for an amount equal to 5% (five per cent) of the estimated cost of Project
if any, as specified therein.
7.1.2 Notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained in this Agreement, the Parties agree
that in the event of failure of the EPC Contractor to provide the Performance Security in
accordance with the provisions of GCC Clause 7.1.1 and within the time specified therein
or such extended period as may be provided by the IIM Indore, in accordance with the
provisions of Clause 7.1.3, the IIM Indore may encash the Bid Security and appropriate
the proceeds thereof as Damages, and thereupon all rights, privileges, claims and
entitlements of the EPC Contractor under or arising out of this Agreement shall be
deemed to have been waived by, and to have ceased with the concurrence of the EPC
Contractor, and this Agreement shall be deemed to have been terminated by mutual
agreement of the Parties.
7.1.3 In the event the EPC Contractor fails to provide the Performance Security within 15
(fifteen) days of the date of this Agreement, it may seek extension of time for a period
not exceeding a further 15 (fifteen) days on payment of Damages for such extended
period in a sum calculated at the rate of 0.1% (zero point one per cent) of the Contract
Price for each day until the Performance Security is provided.
7.2 Extension of Performance Security
The EPC Contractor may initially provide the Performance Security for a period of
completion of work; provided that it shall procure the extension of the validity of the
Performance Security, as necessary, at least 2 (two) months prior to the date of expiry
thereof. Upon the EPC Contractor providing an extended Performance Security, the
previous PerformanceSecurity shall be deemed to be released and the Authority shall
return the same to the EPC Contractor within a period of 7 (seven) business days from
the date of submission of the extended Performance Security.
Page 126 of 1358

7.3 Appropriation of Performance Security
7.3.1 Upon occurrence of a EPC Contractor Default, the IIM Indore shall, without prejudice to
its other rights and remedies hereunder or in law, be entitled to encash and appropriate
from the Performance Security the amounts due to it as Damages for the EPC Contractor
Default.
7.3.2 Upon such encashment and appropriation from the Performance Security, the EPC
Contractor shall, within 30 (thirty) days thereof, replenish, in case of partial
appropriation, to its original level the Performance Security, and in case of appropriation
of the entire Performance Security provide a fresh Performance Security, as the case may
be, and the EPC Contractor shall, within the time so granted, replenish or furnish fresh
Performance Security as aforesaid failing which the IIM Indore shall be entitled to
terminate the Agreement in accordance with Article 21. Upon such replenishment or
furnishing of a fresh Performance Security, as the case may be, the EPC Contractor shall
be entitled to an additional Cure Period of 30 (thirty) days for remedying the EPC
Contractor Default, and in the event of the EPC Contractor not curing its default within
such Cure Period, the IIM Indore shall be entitled to encash and appropriate such
Performance Security as Damages, and to terminate this Agreement in accordance with
Article 21.
7.4 Release of Performance Security
The IIM Indore shall release the Performance Security within 60 (sixty) days of the expiry
of the Defects Liability Period or the extended Defects Liability Period, as the case may
be, under this Agreement. Notwithstanding the aforesaid, the Parties agree that the IIM
Indore shall not be obliged to release the Performance Security until all Defects identified
during the Defects Liability Period or the extended Defects Liability Period, as the case
may be, have been rectified.
7.5 Deleted
Page 127 of 1358

ARTICLE 8
RIGHT OF WAY
8.1 The Site
The site of the Project (the “Site”) shall comprise the site described in Schedule-A in
respect of which the Right of Way shall be provided by the IIM Indore to the EPC
Contractor.The IIM Indore shall be responsible for:
(a) acquiring and providing Right of Way on the Site in accordance with the layout finalized
by the IIM Indore, free from all encroachments and encumbrances, and free access
thereto for the execution of this Agreement; and
8.2 Site to be free from Encumbrances.
Subject to the provisions of Clause 8.2, the Site shall be made available by the IIM Indoreto
the EPC Contractor pursuant hereto free from all Encumbrances and occupations and
without the EPC Contractor being required to make any payment to the IIM Indore on
accountof any costs, compensation, expenses and charges for the acquisition and use of
such Site for the duration of the Project Completion Schedule. For the avoidance of doubt,
it is agreed that the existing rights of way, easements, privileges, liberties and
appurtenances to the Site shall not be deemed to be Encumbrances. It is further agreed
that, unless otherwise specified in this Agreement, the EPC Contractor accepts and
undertakes to bear any and all risks arising out of the inadequacy or physical conditionof
the Site.
8.3 Protection of Site from encroachments

On and after signing the memorandum and/or subsequent memorandum referred to in
Clause 8.2.1, and until the issue of the Provisional Certificate, the EPC Contractor shall
maintain a round-the-clock vigil over the Site and shall ensure and procure that no
encroachment thereon takes place. During the Construction Period, the EPC Contractor
shall protect the Site from any and all occupations, encroachments or Encumbrances,
and shall not place or create nor permit any Sub-contractor or other person claiming
through or under the Agreement to place or create any Encumbrance or security interest
over all or any part of the Site or the Project Assets, or on any rights of the EPC Contractor
therein or under this Agreement, save and except as otherwise expressly set forth in this
Agreement. In the event of any encroachment or occupation on any part of the Site, the
EPC Contractor shall report such encroachment or occupation forthwith to the IIM Indore
and undertake its removal at its own cost and expenses.
8.4 Temporary Right of Way
The EPC Contractor shall bear all costs and charges for any special or temporary right of
way required by it in connection with access to the Site. The EPC Contractor shall obtain
at its cost such facilities on or outside the Site as may be required by it for the purposes
of the Project and the performance of its obligations under this Agreement.
Page 128 of 1358

8.5 Access to the IIM Indore and the Authority Engineer
• The Right of Way given to the EPC Contractor hereunder shall always be subject to the right
of access of the IIM Indore and the Authority Engineer and their employees and agentsfor
inspection, viewing and exercise of their rights and performance of their obligationsunder
this Agreement.
• The EPC Contractor shall ensure, subject to all relevant safety procedures, that the IIM
Indorehas unrestricted access to the Site during any Emergency.
8.6 Geological and archaeological finds
It is expressly agreed that mining, geological or archaeological rights do not form part of
this Agreement with the EPC Contractor for the Works, and the EPC Contractor hereby
acknowledges that it shall not have any mining rights or interest in the underlying
minerals, fossils, antiquities, structures or other remnants or things either of particular
geological or archaeological interest and that such rights, interest and property on or
under the Site shall vest in and belong to the IIM Indore or the concerned Government
Instrumentality. The EPC Contractor shall take all reasonable precautions to prevent its
workmen or any other person from removing or damaging such interest or property and
shall inform the IIM Indore forthwith of the discovery thereof and comply with such
instructions as the Authority or the concerned Government Instrumentality may
reasonably give for the removal of such property.
Page 129 of 1358

ARTICLE 9
UTILITIES
9.1 Existing utilities and roads
Notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained herein, the EPC Contractor shall
ensurethat the respective entities owning the existing roads, right of way, level crossings,
structures, or utilities on, under or above the Site are enabled by it to keep them in
continuous satisfactory use, if necessary, by providing suitable temporary diversions with
the authority of the controlling body of that road, right of way or utility.
9.2 Shifting of obstructing utilities
The EPC Contractor shall, in accordance with Applicable Laws, cause shifting of any utility
(including electric lines, water pipes and telephone cables) to an appropriate location or
alignment, if such utility or obstruction adversely affects the execution of Works in
accordance with the direction of Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore. The actual cost of such
shifting shall be paid by the EPC Contractor. The successful bidder has to take necessary
step for finding out and shifting the same as required and as per the instructions of
Engineer-in-charge. Financial implication needs to be borne by the EPC contractor and
the prospective bidder has to factor in the same in their quote. The same has to be
verified during the Pre-bid meeting/ Site visit by the bidders.
9.3 New utilities
9.3.1 The EPC Contractor shall allow, subject to such conditions as the IIM Indore may specify,
access to, and use of the Site for laying telephone lines, water pipes, electric cables or
other public utilities. For the avoidance of doubt, it is agreed that use of the Site under
thisClause 9.3 shall not in any manner relieve the EPC Contractor of its obligation to
construct the Project in accordance with this Agreement and any damage caused by such
use shall be restored forthwith at the cost of the EPC contractor.
9.3.2 In the event the construction of any Works is affected by a new utility or works
undertaken in accordance with this Clause 9.3, the EPC Contractor shall be entitled to a
reasonable Time Extension as determined by the Authority Engineer in accordance with
the provisions of Clause 10.4.
9.3.3 Not Applicable

Page 130 of 1358

ARTICLE 10
DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION OF THE PROJECT
10.1 Obligations prior to commencement of Works
10.1.1 Within 20 (twenty) days of the Appointed Date, the EPC Contractor shall:
(a) appoint its representative, duly authorized to deal with the IIM Indore in respect of all
matters under or arising out of or relating to this Agreement;
(b) appoint a DESIGN MANAGER (the “DESIGN MANAGER”) who will head the EPC
Contractor’s design unit and shall be responsible for surveys, investigations, collection of
data, and preparation of preliminary and detailed designs;
(c) undertake and perform all such acts, deeds and things as may be necessary or required
before commencement of Works under and in accordance with this Agreement,
Applicable Laws and Applicable Permits; and
(d) make its own arrangements for sourcing of materials and procurement needed for the
Project under and in accordance with Applicable Laws and Applicable Permits.
10.1.3 Within 10 (ten) days of the Appointed Date, the EPC Contractor shall submit to the IIM
Indore and the Authority Engineer a programme (the “Programme”) for construction of
the Works, developed using networking techniques and giving the following details:
Part I EPC Contractor’s organization for the Project, the general methods and
arrangements for design and construction, environmental management plan, Quality
Assurance Plan including design quality plan, traffic management and safety plan
covering safety of users and workers during construction, EPC Contractor’s keypersonnel,
and equipment.
Part II Programme for completion of all stages of construction given in Schedule-G and
Project Milestones of the Works as specified in Project Completion Schedule set forth in
Schedule-I. The Programme shall include:
(a) the order in which the EPC Contractor intends to carry out the Works,including
the anticipated timing of design and stages of Works;
(b) the periods for reviews under Clause 10.2; and
(c) the sequence and timing of inspections and tests specified in thisAgreement.
The EPC Contractor shall submit a revised programme whenever its previous Programme
isinconsistent with the actual progress or with the EPC Contractor’s obligations without
changing the agreed completion date.
The EPC Contractor acknowledges and agrees that the IIM Indore may, within a period of
15(fifteen) days of receipt of the Programme, convey its comments to the EPC Contractor
stating the modifications, if any, required for compliance with the provisions of this
Page 131 of 1358

Agreement, and the EPC Contractor shall carry out such modifications, to the extent
required for conforming with the provisions of this Agreement.
Part III Monthly cash flow forecast for the Project.
10.1.4 The EPC Contractor shall compute, on the basis of the Drawings prepared in accordance
with Clause 10.2.7, and provide to the Authority Engineer, the detailed quantities, in
respect of the various items of work specified in Schedule-G and comprising the Scope
of the Project. The Parties expressly agree that these details shall form the basis for
estimating the interim payments for the Works in accordance with the provisions of
Clause 17.3. For the avoidance of doubt, the sum ofpayments to be computed in respect
of all the items of work shall not exceed the Contract Price, as may be adjusted in
accordance with the provisions of this Agreement.
10.1.5 Not Applicable.
10.1.6 Not Applicable.
10.2 Design and Drawings
10.2.1 Design and Drawings shall be developed in conformity with the Specifications and
Standards set forth in Schedule-D. In the event the EPC Contractor requires any
relaxation in design standards due any unavoidable circumstances, the alternative design
criteria for such case shall be provided for review of the Authority Engineer/IIM Indore.
10.2.2 In respect of the EPC Contractor’s obligations with respect to the design and Drawings of
the Project as set forth in Schedule-H, the following shall apply:
(a) The EPC Contractor shall prepare and submit, with reasonable promptness and in such
sequence as is consistent with the Project Completion Schedule, 10 copies each of the
design and Drawings, duly certified by the Proof Consultant,to the Authority Engineer for
review. Provided, however, that in respect of Project, the Authority Engineer may require
additional drawings for its review in accordance with Good Industry Practice;
(b) by submitting the Drawings for review to the Authority Engineer/IIM Indore, the EPC
Contractor shall be deemed to have represented that it has determined and verified that
the design and engineering, including field construction criteria related thereto, are in
conformity with the Scope of the Project, Specifications and Standards, Applicable Laws
and Good Industry Practice;
(c) within 15 (fifteen) days of the receipt of the Drawings, the Authority Engineershall review
the same and convey its observations to the EPC Contractor with particular reference to
their conformity or otherwise with the Scope of the Project and the Specifications and
Standards. The EPC Contractor shall not be obliged to await the observations of the
Authority Engineer on the Drawing submitted pursuant hereto beyond the said period
of 15 (fifteen) days and may begin or continue Works at its own discretion and risk;
(d) if the aforesaid observations of the Authority Engineer indicate that the Drawings are not
in conformity with the Scope of the Project or the Specifications and Standards, such
Page 132 of 1358

Drawings shall be revised by the EPC Contractorin conformity with the provisions of this
Agreement and resubmitted to the Authority Engineer/IIM Indore for review. The
Authority Engineer shall give its observations, if any, within 10 (ten) days of receipt of the
revised Drawings. In the event the EPC Contractor fails to revise and resubmit such
Drawings to the Authority Engineer for review as aforesaid, the Authority Engineer may
cause the payment for the affected works to be withheld under the provisions ofClause
17.5.4. If the EPC Contractor disputes any decision, direction or determination of the
Authority Engineer hereunder, the Dispute shall be resolved in accordance with the
Dispute Resolution Procedure;
(e) no review and/or observation of the Authority Engineer and/or its failure to review and/or
convey its observations on any Drawings shall relieve the EPC Contractor of its obligations
and liabilities under this Agreement in any mannernor shall the Authority Engineer or the
IIM Indore be liable for the same in anymanner; and if errors, omissions, ambiguities,
inconsistencies, inadequacies or other Defects are found in the Drawings, they shall be
corrected, along with theaffected Works, at the EPC Contractor's cost;
(f) the EPC Contractor shall be responsible for delays in submitting the Drawings, as setforth
in Schedule-H, caused by reason of delays in surveys and field investigations, and shall
not be entitled to seek any relief in respect thereof fromthe IIM Indore; and
(g) the EPC Contractor warrants that its designers, including any third parties engaged by it,
shall have the required experience and capability in accordance with Good Industry
Practice and it shall indemnify the IIM Indore against any damage, expense, liability, loss
or claim, which the IIM Indore might incur, sustain or be subject to arising from any
breach of the EPC Contractor’s design responsibility and/or warranty as set out in this
Clause.
10.2.3 Any cost or delay in construction arising from review by the Authority Engineer shall be
borne by the EPC Contractor.
10.2.4 Works shall be executed in accordance with the Approved Drawings (by IIM Indore)
provided by the EPC Contractor in accordance with the provisions of this Clause 10.2 and
the observations of the Authority Engineer thereon as communicated pursuant to the
provisions of Clause 10.2.4 (d). Such Drawings shall not be amended or altered without
prior written notice to the Authority Engineer. If a Party becomes aware of an error or
defect of a technicalnature in the design or Drawings, that Party shall promptly give notice
to the other Partyof such error or defect.
10.2.5 Within 90 (ninety) days of the Project Completion Date, the EPC Contractor shall furnish
to the IIM Indore and the Authority Engineer a complete set of as-built Drawings, in 8
(eight) hard copies and in its editable digital format or in such other medium or manner
as may be acceptable to the IIM Indore, including an as-built survey illustrating the layout
of the Project and setback lines, if any, of the buildings and structures forming part of
Project Facilities, and shall hand them over to the IIM Indore against receipt thereof.
10.3 Construction of the Project
10.3.1 The EPC Contractor shall construct the Project as specified in Schedule-B and Schedule-
C, and in conformity with the Specifications and Standards set forth in Schedule-D. The
EPC Contractor shall be responsible for the correct positioning of all parts of the Works,
Page 133 of 1358

and shall rectify any error in the positions, levels, dimensions, or alignment of the Works.
The [820th (Eight hundred and twentieth) day] from the Commencement Date shall be
the scheduled completion date (the “Scheduled Completion Date”) and the EPC
Contractor agrees and undertakes that the construction shall be completed on or before
the Scheduled Completion Date, including any extension thereof.
10.3.2 Compensation for Delay –
If the contractor fails to maintain the required progress in terms of clause 10.4 or to
complete the work and clear the site on or before the stipulated completion date or
justified extended date of completion determined as per clause 10.4 also considering
any extension granted under Article 13, he shall, without prejudice to any other right or
remedy available under the law to the Government on account of such breach, pay as
compensation, the amount calculated as below : (i) Compensation for delay of work @
0.75% of accepted tendered amount per month of delay (to be computed on per day
basis) Provided further that the total amount of compensation for delay to be paid under
this condition shall not exceed 5 % (five percent) of the accepted Tendered Value of work
or of the accepted Tendered Value of the Sectional part of work as mentioned in Schedule
'G' for which a separate period of completion is originally given.
The period of delay solely attributable to contractor shall be computed as the time taken
by contractor going beyond the 'justified date of completion' as determined by the
authority specified in schedule G under clause 10.4. Further, in case where the contractor
is entitled to additional time under Article 13, that shall also be accounted for while
deciding the net period of delay. In case, the authority specified in schedule G decides to
levy compensation during the progress of work, the period of delay attributable to
contractor shall be computed (by such authority) as the period by which the progress is
behind the schedule on date of such decision, after due consideration of justified
extension at that stage of work. In case no compensation has been decided by the
authority in Schedule 'G' during the progress of work, this shall be no waiver of right to
levy compensation by the said authority if the work remains incomplete on final justified
extended date of completion. If the Engineer in Charge decides to give further extension
of time allowing performance of work beyond the justified extended date the contractor
shall be liable to pay compensation for such extended period. The levy of compensation
under this clause shall be without prejudice to the right of action by the Engineer-in-
charge under Article 21 or any other clause in the contract. In case action under clause
10.3.2 has not been finalized and the work has been determined under Article 21, the
right of action under clause 10.3.2 shall remain post determination of contract and in
such case the levy of compensation shall be for days the progress is behind the schedule
on date of determination, as assessed by the authority in Schedule G, after due
consideration of justified extension. The compensation for delay, if not decided before
the determination of contract, shall be decided after of determination of contract.
Further, in such case where the contract has been determined, the total amount of
recovery against compensation under clause 10.3.2 plus that under Article 21 (i.e.
forfeiture of security deposit, performance guarantee) shall not exceed 8 % of the
accepted tendered value of work.
The amount of compensation may be adjusted or set-off against any sum payable to the
Contractor under this or any other contract with the Government. In case, the contractor
does not achieve a particular milestone mentioned in schedule G, or the re-scheduled
Page 134 of 1358

milestone(s) in terms of clause 10.4, the amount shown against that milestone shall be
withheld, to be adjusted against the compensation levied as above. With-holding of this
amount on failure to achieve a milestone, shall be automatic without any notice to the
contractor. However, if the contractor catches up with the progress of work on the
subsequent milestone(s), the withheld amount shall be released. In case the contractor
fails to make up for the delay in subsequent milestone(s), amount mentioned against
each milestone missed subsequently also shall be withheld. The amount so withheld can
be released against BG/ FDR from a commercial bank of equivalent amount. Further, no
interest whatsoever shall be payable on such withheld amount.
10.4 Extension of time for completion
10.4.1 Without prejudice to any other provision of this Agreement for and in respect of
extension of time, the EPC Contractor shall be entitled to extension of time in the Project
Completion Schedule (the “Time Extension”) to the extent that completion of any Project
Milestone is or will be delayed by any of the following, namely:
(a) delay in providing Right of Way by IIM Indore, specified in Clause 4.1.4;
(b) Change of Scope, unless an adjustment to the Scheduled Completion Date has been
agreed under Article 13;
(c) occurrence of a Force Majeure Event;
(d) any delay, impediment or prevention caused by or attributable to the IIM Indore,the
Authority Engineer on the Site; and
(e) any other cause or delay which entitles the EPC Contractor to Time Extension in
10.4.2 The EPC Contractor shall, no later than 15 (fifteen) business days from the occurrence of
an event or circumstance specified in Clause 10.4.1, inform the Authority Engineer by
notice in writing, with a copy to the IIM Indore, stating in reasonable detail with
supporting particulars, the event or circumstances giving rise to the claim for Time
Extension in accordance with the provisions of this Agreement:
Provided that the period of 15 (fifteen) business days shall be calculated from the date
on which the EPC Contractor became aware, or should have become aware, of the
occurrence of such an event or circumstance:
Provided further that notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained in this

Agreement, Time Extension shall be due and applicable only for the Works which are
affected by the aforesaid events or circumstances and shall not in any manner affect the
Project Completion Schedule for and in respect of the Works which are not affected
thereby.
10.4.3 In the event of the failure of the EPC Contractor to issue to the Authority Engineer a notice
in accordance with the provisions of Clause 10.4.2 within the time specified therein, the
EPC Contractor shall not be entitled to any Time Extension and shall forfeit its right to
any such claims in future. For the avoidance of doubt, in the event of failure of the EPC
Contractor to issue notice as specified in this Clause 10.4.3, the IIM Indore shall be
Page 135 of 1358

discharged from all liability in connection therewith.
10.4.4 The Authority Engineer shall, on receipt of a claim in accordance with the provisions of
Clause 10.4.2, examine the claim expeditiously within the time frame specified herein. In
the event the Authority Engineer requires any clarifications to examine the claim, the
Authority Engineer shall seek the same within 15 (fifteen) days from the date of receiving
the claim. The EPC Contractor shall, on receipt of the communication of the Authority
Engineer requesting for clarification, furnish the same to the Authority Engineer within
10 (ten) days thereof. The Authority Engineer shall, within a period of 30 (thirty) days from
the date of receipt of such clarifications, forward in writing to the EPC Contractor its
determination of Time Extension. For the avoidance of doubt, the Parties agree that the
Authority Engineer shall, in accordance with the provisions of this Agreement, notify the
EPC Contractor of the aforesaid Time Extension no later than 60 (sixty) days from the
date of receipt of the EPC Contractor’s claim for Time Extension.
Provided that when determining each extension of time under this Clause 10.4, the
Authority Engineer shall review previous determinations and may increase, but shall not
decrease, the total Time Extension.
10.4.5 If the event or circumstance giving rise to the notice has a continuing effect:
(a) the detailed claim shall be considered as interim;
(b) the EPC Contractor shall, no later than 10 (ten) days after the close of each month, send
further interim claims specifying the accumulated delay, the extension of time claimed,
and such further particulars as the Authority Engineer may reasonably require; and
(c) the EPC Contractor shall send a final claim within 30 (thirty) days after the effect of the
event or the circumstance ceases.
Upon receipt of the claim hereunder, the Authority Engineer shall examine and
determine the same in accordance with the provisions of Clause 10.4.4 within a periodof
60 (sixty) days of receipt thereof.
10.5 Incomplete Works

In the event the EPC Contractor fails to complete the Works in accordance with the
Project Completion Schedule, including any Time Extension granted under this
Agreement, the EPC Contractor shall endeavor to complete the balance work
expeditiously and shall pay Damages to the IIM Indore in accordance with the provisions
of Clause 10.3.2 for delay of each day until the Works are completed in accordance with
the provisions of this Agreement. Recovery of Damages under this Clause shall be
without prejudice to the rights of the IIM Indore under this Agreement including the right
to termination under Clause 21.1.
Page 136 of 1358

ARTICLE 11
QUALITY AND SAFETY ASSURANCE AND SUPERVISION
11.1 Quality of Materials and workmanship
11.1.1 The EPC Contractor shall ensure that the Construction, Materials and workmanship are
in accordance with the requirements specified in this Agreement, Specifications and
Standards and Good Industry Practice.
11.1.2 The EPC Contractor warrants that all Materials shall be new, unused, not reconditioned
andin conformity with Specification and Standards, Applicable Laws and Good Industry
Practice, and that the EPC Contractor shall not use any materials which are generally
recognized as being deleterious under Good Industry Practice.
11.2 Quality control system
11.1.3 The EPC Contractor shall establish a quality control mechanism to ensure compliance
with the provisions of this Agreement (the “Quality Assurance Plan” or “QAP”).
11.1.4 The EPC Contractor shall, within 30 (thirty) days of the Appointed Date, submit to the
Authority Engineer its Quality Assurance Plan which shall include the following:
(a) organization, duties and responsibilities, procedures, inspections and documentation;
(b) quality control mechanism including sampling and testing of Materials, test frequencies,
standards, acceptance criteria, testing facilities, reporting, recording and interpretation
of test results, approvals, check list for site activities, and proforma for testing and
calibration in accordance with the Specifications and Standards and Good Industry
Practice; and
(c) internal quality audit system.
11.1.5 The Authority Engineer shall convey its comments to the EPC Contractor within a period
of 21 (twenty-one) days of receipt of the QAP stating the modifications, if any, required,and
the EPC Contractor shall incorporate those in the QAP to the extent required for
conforming with the provisions of this Clause 11.2.
11.1.6 The EPC Contractor shall procure all documents, apparatus and instruments, fuel,
consumables, water, electricity, labour, Materials, samples, and qualified personnel as
are necessary for examining and testing the Works, Materials and workmanship in
accordance with the Quality Assurance Plan.
11.1.7 The cost of testing of Construction, Materials and workmanship under this Article 11 shall
be borne by the EPC Contractor at its own risk and cost without any additional claim to
IIM Indore.
11.3 Methodology
The EPC Contractor shall, at least 15 (fifteen) days prior to the commencement of
construction, submit to the Authority Engineer for review the methodology proposedto
Page 137 of 1358

be adopted for executing the Works, giving details of equipment to be deployed, traffic
management and measures for ensuring safety. The Authority Engineer shall complete
the review and convey its comments, if any, to the EPC Contractor within a periodof 10
(ten) days from the date of receipt of the proposed methodology from the EPC
Contractor.
11.4 Inspection and review by the Authority
The Authority or any representative authorized by the Authority in this behalf may
inspect and review the progress and quality of the construction of Works and issue
appropriate directions to the EPC Contractor for taking remedial action in the event the
Works are not in accordance with the provisions of this Agreement.
11.5 External technical audit
At any time during construction, the Authority may appoint an external technical auditor
to conduct an audit of the quality of the Works. The findings of the audit, to the extent
accepted by the Authority, shall be notified to the EPC Contractor and the Authority
Engineer for taking remedial action in accordance with this Agreement. The EPC
Contractor shall provide all assistance as may be required by the auditor in the conduct
of its audit hereunder and should comply to the observations raised during the Audit
within stipulated timeline at EPC Contractor’s own risk and cost.
11.6 Inspection of records
The Authority shall have the right to inspect the records of the EPC Contractor relating to
the Works.
11.7 Inspection of Works
11.7.1 The Authority Engineer and its authorized representative shall at all times:
(a) have full access to all parts of the Site and to all places from which natural Materials are
being obtained for use in the Works; and
(b) during production, manufacture, and construction at the Site and at the place of
production, be entitled to examine, inspect, measure and test the Materials and
workmanship, and to check the progress of manufacture of Materials.
11.7.2 The EPC Contractor shall give the Authority Engineer and its authorized agents access,
facilities, and safety equipment for carrying out their obligations under this Agreement.
11.7.3 The Authority Engineer shall submit a monthly inspection report (the “Inspection
Report”) to the Authority and the EPC Contractor bringing out the results of inspections
andthe remedial action taken by the EPC Contractor in respect of Defects or deficiencies.
For the avoidance of doubt, such inspection or submission of Inspection Report by the
Authority Engineer shall not relieve or absolve the EPC Contractor of its obligations and
liabilities under this Agreement in any manner whatsoever.
Page 138 of 1358

11.8 Monthly progress reports
During the Construction Period, the EPC Contractor shall, no later than 10 (ten) days after
the close of each month, furnish to the Authority and the Authority Engineer a
monthly report on the progress of Works, any other report, and any relevant information
within reasonable agreed time as per instructions of the Authority Engineer.
11.9 Samples
The EPC Contractor shall submit the following samples of Materials and relevant
information to the Authority Engineer for review:
(a) manufacturer's test reports and standard samples of manufactured Materials;and
(b) samples of such other Materials as the Authority Engineer may require.
11.10 Tests
11.10.1For determining that the Works conform to the Specifications and Standards, the
Authority Engineer shall require the EPC Contractor to carry out or cause to be carried out
tests, at such time and frequency and in such manner as specified in this Agreement, and
in accordance with Good Industry Practice for quality assurance. The EPC Contractor
shall, with due diligence, carry out all the tests in accordance with the Agreement and
furnish the results thereof to the Authority Engineer.
11.10.2 In the event that results of any tests conducted under this Clause 11.10 establish any
Defects or deficiencies in the Works, the EPC Contractor shall carry out remedial
measuresat its own risk and cost and furnish a report to the Authority Engineer in this
behalf. The Authority Engineer shall require the EPC Contractor to carry out or cause to
be carried outtests to determine that such remedial measures have brought the Works
into compliance with the Specifications and Standards, and the procedure shall be
repeated until such Works conform to the Specifications and Standards.
11.11 Examination of work before covering up
In respect of the work which the Authority Engineer is entitled to examine, inspect,
measure or test before it is covered up or put out of view or any part of the work is placed
thereon, the EPC Contractor shall give notice to the Authority Engineer whenever any
such work is ready and before it is covered up. The Authority Engineer shall then either
carry out the examination, inspection or testing without unreasonable delay, or promptly
give notice to the EPC Contractor that the Authority Engineer does not require to do so.
Provided, however, that if any work is of a continuous nature where it is not possible or
prudent to keep it uncovered or incomplete, the EPC Contractor shall notify the schedule
of carrying out such work to give sufficient opportunity, not being less than 3 (three)
business days’ notice, to the Authority Engineer to conduct its inspection, measurement
or test while the work is continuing. Provided further that in the event theEPC Contractor
receives no response from the Authority Engineer within a period of 3 (three) business
days from the date on which the EPC Contractor’s notice hereunder is delivered to
the Authority Engineer, the EPC Contractor shall be entitled to assume that the Authority
Engineer would not undertake the said inspection.
Page 139 of 1358

11.12 Rejection
11.12.1 If, as a result of an examination, inspection, measurement or testing, any Plant, Material,
design or workmanship is found to be defective or otherwise not in accordancewith the
provisions of this Agreement, the Authority Engineer may reject such Plant, Material,
design or workmanship by giving notice to the EPC Contractor, with reasons. The EPC
Contractor shall then promptly make good the Defect and ensure that the rejected item
complies with the requirements of this Agreement.
11.12.2 If the Authority Engineer requires a Plant, Material, design or workmanship to be

retested, the tests shall be repeated on the same terms and conditions, as applicable in
each case. If the rejection and retesting cause the Authority to incur any additional costs,
such costs shall be recoverable by the Authority from the EPC Contractor and may be
deducted by the Authority from any monies due to be paid to the EPC Contractor.
11.12.3 The EPC Contractor shall not be entitled to any extension of time on account of rectifying
any Defect or retesting as specified in this Clause 11.12.
11.12.4 No examination, inspection, measurement or testing of any Plant, Material, design or

workmanship by the Authority Engineer or its failure to convey its observations or to
examine, inspect, measure or test shall relieve the EPC Contractor of its obligations and
liabilities under this Agreement in any manner nor shall the Authority be liable for the
same in any manner.
11.13 Remedial work
11.13.1Notwithstanding any previous test or certification, the Authority Engineer may instruct
the EPC Contractor to:
(a) remove from the Site and replace any Plant or Materials which are not in accordance with
the provisions of this Agreement;
(b) remove and re-execute any work which is not in accordance with the provisionsof this
Agreement and the Specification and Standards; and
(c) execute any work which is urgently required for the safety of the Project, whether
because of an accident, unforeseeable event or otherwise; provided thatin case of any
work which is required on account of a Force Majeure Event, theprovisions of Clause 19.6
shall apply.
11.13.2If the EPC Contractor fails to comply with the instructions issued by the Authority
Engineer under Clause 11.13.1, within the time specified in the Authority Engineer’snotice
or as mutually agreed, the Authority Engineer may advise the Authority to havethe work
executed by another agency. The cost so incurred by the Authority for undertaking such
work shall, without prejudice to the rights of the Authority to recover Damages in
accordance with the provisions of this Agreement, be recoverable from the EPC
Contractor and may be deducted by the Authority from any monies due to be paid to the
EPC Contractor.
Page 140 of 1358

11.14 Delays during construction
Without prejudice to the provisions of Clause 10.3.2, in the event the EPC Contractor does
not achieve any of the Project Milestones within the time period stipulated in ScheduleI
or the Authority Engineer shall have reasonably determined that the rate of progressof
Works is such that Completion of the Project is not likely to be achieved by the endof the
Scheduled Completion Date, it may notify the same to the EPC Contractor, and the EPC
Contractor shall, within 15 (fifteen) days of such notice, by a communication inform the
Authority Engineer in reasonable detail about the steps it proposes to take to expedite
progress and the period within which it shall achieve the Project Completion Date.
11.15 Quality control records
The EPC Contractor shall hand over to the Authority Engineer a copy of all its quality
control records and documents before the Completion Certificate is issued pursuant to
Clause 12.2.
11.16 Video recording
During the Construction Period, the EPC Contractor shall provide to the Authority for
everycalendar quarter, a video recording, which will be compiled into a 3 (three) hour
digitalvideo disc or any substitute thereof, covering the status and progress of Works in
that quarter. The video recording shall be provided to the Authority no later than 15
(fifteen) days after the close of each quarter after the Appointed Date.
11.17 Suspension of unsafe Construction Works
11.17.1Upon recommendation of the Authority Engineer to this effect, or on its own volitionin
cases of emergency or urgency, the Authority may by notice require the EPC Contractor
to suspend forthwith the whole or any part of the Works if, in the reasonable opinion of
the Authority Engineer or the IIM Indore, as the case may be, such work threatens the
safety of the Users and or other persons on or about the Project. Provided, however, that
in case of an emergency, the Authority may suo moto issue the notice referred to
hereinabove.
11.17.2The EPC Contractor shall, pursuant to the notice under Clause 11.17.1, suspend the
Worksor any part thereof for such time and in such manner as may be specified by the
Authority and thereupon carry out remedial measures to secure the safety of suspended
works, the Users, other persons and vehicles on or about the Project. The EPC Contractor
may by notice require the Authority Engineer to inspect such remedial measures
forthwith and make a report to the Authority recommending whether or not the
suspension hereunder may be revoked. Upon receiving the recommendations of the
Authority Engineer, the Authority shall either revoke such suspension or instruct the EPC
Contractor to carry out such other and further remedial measures as may be necessary
and reasonable, and the procedure set forth in this Clause 11.17 shall be repeated until
the suspension hereunder is revoked.
11.17.3Subject to the provisions of Clause 19.6, all reasonable costs incurred for maintainingand
protecting the Works or part thereof during the period of suspension (the “Preservation
Costs”), shall be borne by the EPC Contractor; provided that if the suspension has
occurred as a result of any breach of this Agreement by the Authority,the Preservation
Costs shall be borne by the Authority.
Page 141 of 1358

11.17.4If suspension of Works is for reasons not attributable to the EPC Contractor, the Authority
Engineer shall determine any Time Extension to which the EPC Contractor is reasonably
entitled in accordance with the provisions of Clause 10.4.
Page 142 of 1358

ARTICLE 12
COMPLETION CERTIFICATE
12.1 Tests on completion
12.1.1 No later than 30 (thirty) days prior to the likely completion of the Project, or a Section
thereof, the EPC Contractor shall notify the Authority Engineer of its intent to subject the
Project or a Section thereof, to Tests. The date and time of each of the Tests shall be
determined by the Authority Engineer in consultation with the EPC Contractor and
notified to the Authority who may designate its representative to witness the Tests. The
EPC Contractor shall either conduct the Tests as directed by the Authority Engineer or
provide such assistance as the Authority Engineer may reasonably require for conducting
the Tests. For the avoidance of doubt, the Parties agree that in the event of the EPC
Contractor and the Authority Engineer failing to mutually agree on the dates for
conducting the Tests, the EPC Contractor shall fix the dates by giving not less than 10
(ten)days’ notice to the Authority Engineer, and in the event the Authority Engineer delays
the Tests hereunder, the Authority shall impose exemplary penalties on the Authority
Engineer and shall ensure that Tests are completed in time either by the Authority
Engineer or any substitute thereof.
12.1.2 All Tests shall be conducted in accordance with Schedule-J at the cost and expense of the
EPC Contractor. The Authority Engineer shall observe, monitor and review the resultsof
the Tests to determine compliance of the Project or a Section thereof, with Specifications
and Standards and if it is reasonably anticipated or determined by the Authority Engineer
during the course of any Test that the performance of the Project or Section or any part
thereof, does not meet the Specifications and Standards, it shall have the right to
suspend or delay such Test and require the EPC Contractor to remedy and rectify any
Defect or deficiency. Upon completion of each Test, the Authority Engineer shall
provide to the EPC Contractor and the Authority copies of all Test data including detailed
Test results. For the avoidance of doubt, the Parties expressly agree that the Authority
Engineer may require the EPC Contractor to carry out or cause to be carried out additional
Tests, in accordance with Good Industry Practice, for determiningthe compliance of the
Project or Section thereof with the Specifications and Standards.
12.2 Provisional Certificate
12.2.1 Subject to the provisions of Clause 12.2.5, upon completion of all Works forming part of
the Project, save and except the Works for which Time Extension has been granted under
Clause 10.5, the Authority Engineer shall, at the request of the EPC Contractor, issue a
provisional certificate of completion substantially in the form set forth in Schedule-K(the
“Provisional Certificate”) if the Tests in respect of the completed Works are successful.
The Provisional Certificate shall have appended thereto a list of outstandingitems of work
(the “Punch List”) that need to be completed in accordance with the provisions of this
Agreement. The EPC Contractor undertakes to complete such outstandingitems of works,
within a period of 30 (thirty) days of the date of Provisional Certificate,and those parts of
the Works in respect of which Time Extension has been granted, within the extended
period thereof. For the avoidance of doubt, the Parties agree that the Punch List shall
include all Works for which Time Extension has been granted andshall also include any
minor outstanding items of work forming part of the completed Sections if such works
do not materially affect the use of the completed Sections for their intended purpose.
Page 143 of 1358

The Parties further agree that Provisional Certificate shall not be issued if the completed
Works cannot be safely and reliably placed in service of theUsers thereof.
12.2.2 Upon issue of the Provisional Certificate, the provisions of Article 15 shall apply to the
completed parts of the Project and the property and ownership of all such completed
Works shall vest in the Authority.
12.2.3 If the Authority Engineer determines that the Project or any completed part thereof does
not conform to the provisions of this Agreement and cannot be safely and reliablyplaced
in operation, it shall forthwith make a report in this behalf and send copies thereof to the
Authority and the EPC Contractor and withhold issuance of the Provisional Certificate
until the Defects or deficiencies are rectified by the EPC Contractor and Tests are
successful in accordance with this Article 12.
12.2.4 Notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained in Clause 12.2.3, the Authority may,
at any time after receiving a report from the Authority Engineer under that Clause, direct
the Authority Engineer to issue a Provisional Certificate under Clause 12.2.1 and such
direction shall be complied forthwith.
12.2.5 No Provisional Certificate shall be issued under the provisions of this Clause 12.2 until the
EPC Contractor has submitted valid claims for payment of at least 80% (eighty per cent)of
the amount arrived at after reducing the lump sum price specified in Clause 17.1.1 by the
amount attributable to works which have been withdrawn under the provisions of Clause
8.3.3. For the avoidance of doubt and by way of illustration, the Parties agree that if the
Contract Price specified in Clause 17.1.1 is Rs. 105 cr. (Rs. one hundred andfive crore) and
the works withdrawn under Clause 8.3.3 have a value of Rs. 5 cr. (Rs. five crore), a
Provisional Certificate shall not be issued until valid claims for payment of an amount of
Rs. 80 cr. (Rs. eighty crore) have been submitted by the EPC Contractor inaccordance with
the provisions of this Agreement. It is further agreed that all price adjustments made in
pursuance of Clause 17.10 shall not be reckoned for computation of the claims for
payments referred to in this Clause 12.2.5. It is also agreed that any Change of Scope
effected within 30 (thirty) days of the Appointed Date shall be reckoned for the purposes
of determining the Contract Price hereunder.
12.3 Completion of remaining Works
All items in the Punch List shall be completed by the EPC Contractor in accordance with
the provisions of this Agreement. For any delay in their completion other than for the
reasons attributable to the Authority or due to Force Majeure, the Authority shall be
entitled to recover Damages from the EPC Contractor in accordance with the provisions
of Clause 10.3.2 of this Agreement.
12.4 Completion Certificate
12.4.1 Upon completion of all Works, including the items specified in the Punch List, and the
Authority Engineer determining the Tests to be successful, it shall forthwith issue to the
EPC Contractor and the Authority a certificate substantially in the form set forth in
Schedule-K (the “Completion Certificate”).
12.4.2 Upon receiving the Completion Certificate, the EPC Contractor shall remove its
equipment,materials, debris and temporary works from the Site within a period of 30
(thirty) daysthereof, failing which the Authority may remove or cause to be removed,
Page 144 of 1358

such equipment, materials, debris and temporary works and recover from the EPC
Contractor anamount equal to 120% (one hundred and twenty per cent) of the actual cost
of removalincurred by the Authority.
12.4.3 Without prejudice to the obligations of the EPC Contractor specified in Article 15, the
property and ownership of all the completed Works forming part of the Project shall vest
in the Authority.
12.5 Rescheduling of Tests
If the Authority Engineer certifies to the Authority and the EPC Contractor that it is unable
to issue the Completion Certificate or Provisional Certificate, as the case may be, because
of events or circumstances on account of which the Tests could not be held or had to be
suspended, the EPC Contractor shall be entitled to re-schedule the Tests and hold the
same as soon as reasonably practicable.
Page 145 of 1358

ARTICLE 13
CHANGE OF SCOPE
The change in the scope of work will be considered if the projected area of Construction is
increased by constructing additional floor(s) on any buildings as designed beyond budgeted
plinth area of construction as per drawings enclosed with RFP (Excluding Utility buildings and
GLR). The extension of any building will include all the structural & civil works, finishes, furniture
& fixtures, MEP services including Electrical, Plumbing, Firefighting, HVAC, ELV, IT, AV, etc., as
provided in the floor below. The increased area will be paid for on a per square meter basis. The
rate for square meters of additional construction will be derived by the following formulae.
X = Total contract value including GST in rupees.

Y = Net contract value = X – 0.2X
(The contract value minus outer developments costs)
A = Budgeted plinth area of construction as per drawings (Excluding area of Utility buildings and
GLR)
Z = Cost in Rupees per square meter for increased area of construction due to additional floors.
Formulae for Z = Y/A (The rate includes GST) Rupees.
* GLR – Ground Level Reservoir.
* The Time period for giving consent for further vertical extension of any building should be, by
the completion of structural concreting work of one floor below the Original planned top floor by
the EPC Contractor. The required time extension will be determined as per discussion with the
EPC Contractor and decided by the Institute.
Page 146 of 1358

ARTICLE 14
TRAFFIC REGULATION
14.1 Traffic regulation by the EPC Contractor
14.1.1 The EPC Contractor shall take all the required measures and make arrangements for the
safety of Users during the construction of the Project or a Section thereof in accordance
with Good Industry Practice. It shall provide, erect and maintain all such barricades, signs,
markings, flags, and lights as may be required for the safety man/machinery & vehicle
movement.
Page 147 of 1358

ARTICLE 15
DEFECTS LIABILITY
15.1 Defects Liability Period
15.1.1 The EPC Contractor shall be responsible for all the Defects and deficiencies, except usual
wear and tear in the Project or any Section thereof, till the expiry of a period of 2 (two)
years commencing from the date of Completion Certificate or expiry of a period of 24
(twenty-four) months from the date of final bill payment, whichever is later (the “Defects
Liability Period”).
15.2 Remedy and rectification of Defects and deficiencies
The EPC Contractor shall repair or rectify all Defects and deficiencies observed by the
Authority Engineer during the Defects Liability Period within a period of 15 (fifteen)days
from the date of notice issued by the Authority Engineer in this behalf, or within such
reasonable period as may be determined by the Authority Engineer at the requestof the
EPC Contractor, in accordance with Good Industry Practice.
15.3 Cost of remedying Defects
For the avoidance of doubt, any repair or rectification undertaken in accordance with the
provisions of Clause 15.2, including any additional tests, shall be carried out by theEPC
Contractor at its own risk and cost, to the extent that such rectification or repair is
attributable to:
(a) the design of the Project;
(b) Works, Plant, Materials or workmanship not being in accordance with this
Agreement and the Specifications and Standards;
(c) improper maintenance during construction of the Project by the EPC Contractor; or
(d) failure by the EPC Contractor to comply with any other obligation under thisAgreement.
15.4 EPC Contractor’s failure to rectify Defects.
In the event that the EPC Contractor fails to repair or rectify such Defect or deficiency
withinthe period specified in Clause 15.2, the Authority shall be entitled to get the same
repaired, rectified or remedied at the EPC Contractor’s cost so as to make the Project
conform to the Specifications and Standards and the provisions of this Agreement. All
costs consequent thereon shall, after due consultation with the Authority and the EPC
Contractor, be determined by the Authority Engineer. The cost so determined, and an
amount equal to 20% (twenty per cent) of such cost as Damages, shall be recoverable
by the Authority from the EPC Contractor and may be deducted by the Authority from
anymonies due to the EPC Contractor.
Page 148 of 1358

15.5 EPC Contractor to search cause.
15.5.1 The Authority Engineer may instruct the EPC Contractor to examine the cause of any
Defect in the Works or part thereof before the expiry of the Defects Liability Period.
15.5.2 In the event any Defect identified under Clause 15.5.1 is attributable to the EPC
Contractor,the EPC Contractor shall rectify such Defect within the period specified by the
Authority Engineer and shall bear the cost of the examination and rectification of such
Defect.
15.5.3 In the event such Defect is not attributable to the EPC Contractor, the Authority Engineer
shall, after due consultation with the Authority and the EPC Contractor, determine the
costsincurred by the EPC Contractor on such examination and notify the same to the EPC
Contractor, with a copy to the Authority, and the EPC Contractor shall be entitled to
payment of such costs by the Authority.
15.6 Extension of Defects Liability Period
15.6.1 The Defects Liability Period shall be deemed to be extended till the identified Defects
under Clause 15.2 have been remedied.
15.6.2 Any Materials or Works with Defects identified under Clause 15.2 and replaced or
repaired during the Defects Liability Period or the extended Defects Liability Period, as
the case may be, would be further warranted for a period of twelve (12) months fromthe
date of completion of such repair or replacement.
15.6.3 The EPC Contractor shall upon termination or expiry of this Agreement, or upon expiry
of the Defects Liability Period, assign any outstanding benefit in respect of any
subcontract or any warranty from any sub-EPC Contractor to the Authority or to such
other person as the Authority may direct.
Page 149 of 1358

ARTICLE 16
AUTHORITY ENGINEER
16.1 Appointment of the Authority Engineer
16.1.1 The IIM Indore has appointed an Authority Engineer for construction management of
Group VIII projects comprising of multistorey hostel blocks, academic building, faculty
offices & apartments and other associated Infrastructure at IIM Indore. The Director of
IIM Indore shall have the authority to nominate any person as the Authority Engineer
under this contract.
Page 150 of 1358

Part IV
Financial Covenants
Page 151 of 1358

ARTICLE 17
PAYMENTS
17.1 Contract Price
17.1.1 The Authority shall make payments to the EPC Contractor for the Works on the basis of
the Lump sum price accepted by the Authority in consideration of the obligations
specifiedin this Agreement for an amount of Rs. ***** (Rs. ****) (the “Contract Price”),
which shall be subject to adjustments in accordance with the provisions of this
Agreement. The Parties further agree that save and except as provided in this
Agreement, the Contract Price shall be valid and effective until issue of Completion
Certificate. All the payments shall be done based on agreed milestone payment schedule,
stated in this agreement.
17.1.2 The Contract Price includes all duties, taxes, royalty, and fees that may be levied in
accordance with the laws and regulations in force as on the Base Date on the EPC
Contractor's equipment, Plant, Materials and supplies acquired for the purpose of this
Agreement and on the Works undertaken under this Agreement. Nothing in this
Agreement shall relieve the EPC Contractor from its responsibility to pay any tax including
any tax that may be levied in India on profits made by it in respect of this Agreement.
17.1.3 The Contract Price shall not be adjusted for any change in duties, taxes etc. specified in
Clause 17.1.2 above, save and except as specified in Clauses 17.8 and 17.13.
17.1.4 The Contract Price shall not be adjusted to take account of any unforeseen difficulties or
costs, unless otherwise provided for in this Agreement.
17.1.5 Unless otherwise specified in this Agreement, the Contract Price covers all the EPC
Contractor’s obligations for the Works under this Agreement and all things necessary for
the Construction thereof and for the rectification of any Defects in the Project.
17.1.6 All payments under this Agreement shall be made in Indian Rupees.
17.2 Advance Payment (Mobilization Advance)
17.2.1 The Authority shall make an advance payment (the “Advance Payment”), equal to 10%
(ten per cent)7 of the Contract Price, for mobilization expenses and for acquisition of
equipment. The Advance Payment shall carry simple interest at the rate of 8% (eight per
cent) per annum and shall be made in two equal instalments. The mobilization advance
shall be paid as per the clause mentioned in SCC.
17.2.2 The EPC Contractor may apply to the Authority for the 1st (first) instalment of the Advance
Payment at any time after the Appointed Date, along with an irrevocable and
unconditional guarantee from a scheduled commercial Bank for an amount equivalent
to 110% (one hundred and ten per cent) of such instalment, substantially in the form
provided at Annex-III of Schedule-F, to remain effective till the complete and full
repayment of such instalmentand any interest thereon.
17.2.3 At any time, after 60 (sixty) days from the Appointed Date, the EPC Contractor may apply
Page 152 of 1358

to the Authority for the 2nd (second) instalment of the Advance Payment along with an
irrevocable and unconditional guarantee from a scheduled commercial Bank for an
amount equivalent to 110%.The Bank guarantee shall have to be issued as per the format
of Contract Document.(one hundred and ten per cent) of such instalment, substantially
in the form provided at Annex-III of Schedule-F, to remain effective till the complete and
full repayment of such instalment and any interest thereon. 2nd Installment of 50% shall
be payable only after successful mobilization of mutually agreed plan as stated in special
conditions of Contract.
17.2.4 The instalments of Advance Payment shall be paid by the Authority to the EPC Contractor
within 15 (fifteen) days of the receipt of its respective requests in accordance with the
provisions of this Clause 17.2.
17.2.5 The Advance Payment shall be recovered through proportionate deductions to be made
in the Interim Payments Certificates issued in accordance with the provisions of Clause
17.5.2. Deductions of Advance Payment shall commence from the Interim Payment
Certificate in which the cumulative interim payments certified shall have reached 50%
(fifty per cent) of the Contract Price. The total amount recovered in each Interim Payment
Certificate shall not exceed 30% (thirty per cent) of the amount due and payable under
such Interim Payment Certificate, which shall include interest on the amount being
recovered hereunder. For the avoidance of doubt, the Parties agree that in the event the
total payment specified in any Interim Payment Certificate exceeds the limit of 50% (fifty
per cent) of the Contract Price, the proportion of recovery hereunder shall be restricted
to the amount exceeding 50% (fifty per cent) of the Contract Price. By way of illustration,
the Parties agree that if the first recovery of say, Rupees ‘x’ is made after 20 (twenty)
months from the date of 1st (first) instalment of the Advance Payment, interest on
Rupees ‘x’ shall be due and payable for a period of 20 (twenty) months; and when the
next recovery is made in the following month for say, Rupees ‘y’, interest on Rupees ‘y’
shall be due and payable for a period of 21 (twenty one) months. The Parties further
agree that no payments more than 90% (ninety per cent) of the Contract Price shall be
released to the EPC Contractor until the Advance Payment, including interest thereon,
has been fully recovered.
17.2.6 If the Advance Payment has not been fully repaid prior to Termination under Clause
19.7 or Article 21, as the case may be, the whole of the balance then outstanding shall
immediately become due and payable by the EPC Contractor to the Authority. In the
event of Termination for EPC Contractor Default, the Advance Payment shall be deemed
to carry interest at an annual rate of 3% (three per cent) above the Bank Rate from the
date of Advance Payment to the date of recovery thereof. For the avoidance of doubt,
the aforesaid interest shall be payable on each instalment of the Advance Payment,
regardless of whether the instalment or any part thereof has been repaid to the Authority
prior to Termination.
17.3 Procedure for estimating the payment for the Works.
17.3.1 The Authority shall make interim payments to the EPC Contractor, as certified by the
Authority Engineer on completion of a stage, for a milestone specified, and valued in
accordance with the proportion of the Contract Price assigned to each item and its stage
and payment procedure in Schedule-G.
17.3.2 The EPC Contractor shall make its claim for interim payment for the stages completed till
Page 153 of 1358

the end of the month for which the payment is claimed, valued in accordance with Clause
17.3.1, and supported with necessary particulars and documents in accordance with this
Agreement.
17.3.3 Any reduction in the Contract Price arising out of Change of Scope or the Works
withdrawn under Clause 8.3, as the case may be, shall not affect the amounts payable
for the items or stage payments thereof which are not affected by such Change of Scope
or withdrawal. For the avoidance of doubt and by way of illustration, the Parties agree
that if the amount assigned to Project is reduced from Rs. 100 crores to Rs. 80 crores
owing to Change of Scope or withdrawal of Works, as the case may be, the reduction in
payment shall be restricted to the relevant payments for Project and the payment due in
respect of all other stage payments under the item Project shall not be affected in any
manner. The Parties further agree that the adjustments arising out of the aforesaid
modifications shall be carried out in a manner that the impact of such modifications is
restricted to the said Change of Scope or withdrawal, as the case may be, and does not
alter the payments due for and in respect of items or stage payments which do not form
part of such Change of Scope or withdrawal.
17.4 Stage Payment Statement for Works
The EPC Contractor shall submit a statement (the “Stage Payment Statement”), in 3
copies,by the 7th (seventh) day of a month to the Authority Engineer in the form set forth
in Schedule M, showing the amount calculated in accordance with Clause 17.3 to which
the EPC Contractor considers itself entitled for the completed stage(s) of Works. The
amount for the completed work shall not be less than Rs 10 Cr (Ten Crores) for first 3 RA
bills and for the rest RA Bills it is to be Rs. 20 Cr (twenty crore). The Stage Payment
Statement shall be accompanied with the progress reports and any other supporting
documents. The EPC Contractor shall not submit any claim for payment of incomplete
stages of work. In the event that there is no claim for a month in accordancewith the
provisions of this Clause 17.4, the EPC Contractor shall submit a ‘Nil’ claim to theAuthority
Engineer.
The EPC Contractor shall ensure submission along with every running bill (on account or
interim bill) item wise/ material-wise (wherever applicable) consumption statement
supported by complete calculations.
The EPC Contractor along with all RA Bills ensure preparation & submission of statement
of all the consumables. The EPC Contractor shall submit a consumption statement of all
consumable material or materials getting covered up periodically for any kind of
consumables such as cement, admixtures, paint or paint related materials, steel
reinforcement while being brought inside the campus will have to be got recorded at
security gate by producing the invoice or load tally. The nominated qualified person from
the Authority Engineer will make the entry in a register and issue a pass. This pass shall
be preserved and submitted along with the consumption statement. Any short fall on the
quantity at gate register with that of theoretical consumption will be fined/ recovered
from the EPC Contractor at double the price of that material to extent of shortfall or
deficiency.
Page 154 of 1358

17.5 Stage Payment for Works
17.5.1 Within 10 (ten) days of receipt of the Stage Payment Statement submitted by the EPC
Contractor pursuant to Clause 17.4, to the Authority Engineer. The Authority Engineer
shall determine the amount due to the EPC Contractor and recommend the release of
75% (Seventy-Five per cent) of the amount so determined as ad hoc payment against the
Stage Payment Statement. Within 15 (fifteen) working days of the receipt of
recommendation for ad hoc payment by the Authority Engineer, the Authority (Institute)
shall make a payment to the EPC Contractor.
17.5.2 Within 15 (fifteen) days of the receipt of the Stage Payment Statement referred to in
Clause 17.4, the Authority Engineer shall determine and shall deliver to the Authority
(Institute) and the EPC Contractor, an IPC certifying the amount due and payable to the
EPC Contractor as remaining, after adjusting the ad hoc payments already released to
the EPC Contractor against the said statement.
17.5.3 In cases where there is a difference of opinion as to the value of any stage, the opinion
of the Authority Engineer shall prevail, and interim payments shall be made to the EPC
Contractor on that basis; provided that the foregoing shall be without prejudice to the
EPC Contractor’s right to raise a Dispute.
17.5.4 The Authority Engineer may, for reasons to be recorded, withhold from payment:
(a) the estimated value of work or obligation that the EPC Contractor has failed to perform
in accordance with this Agreement and in respect of which the Authority Engineer had
notified the EPC Contractor; and
(b) the estimated cost of rectification of any Works which have not been constructed in
accordance with this Agreement.
17.5.5 Payment by the Authority hereunder shall be deemed to be provisional and shall not be
construed as the Authority's acceptance, approval, consent or satisfaction with the work
done.
17.5.6 In the event the amounts released by the Authority under Clause 17.5.1 exceed the
amount finally determined by the Authority Engineer pursuant to Clauses 17.5.2 to
17.5.4, the difference thereof shall be accounted for in the next IPC.
17.6 Payment of Damages
17.6.1 The EPC Contractor may claim Damages due and payable to it in accordance with the
provisions of this Agreement.
17.6.2 The Authority Engineer shall issue the IPC within 15 (fifteen) days of the receipt of the
claim under Clause 17.6.1, after making adjustments in accordance with the provisions
of this Agreement. The Authority shall pay to the EPC Contractor the amount dueunder
such IPC within a period of 30 (thirty) days from the date of the submission of the claim
under this Clause 17.6.
17.7 Time of payment
17.7.1 The Authority Engineer’s recommended balance payment of the Stage Payment
Page 155 of 1358

Statement is to be made by the Authority (Institute) within a total period of 45 working days of
submission of bill by the EPC Contractor.
17.8 Price adjustment for Works –

If the prices of materials and/or wages of labour required for execution of the work
increase, the contractor shall be compensated for such increase as per provisions
detailed below and the amount of the contract shall accordingly be varied, subject to the
condition that such compensation for escalation in prices and wages shall be available
only for the work done during the stipulated period of the contract including the justified
period extended under the provisions of clause 10.4 Article 10 of the contract without
any action under clause A1.5 Chapter 2 of this RFP. Such compensation for escalation in
the prices of materials and labour, when due, shall be worked out based on the following
provisions:
i. The base date for working out such escalation shall be the last stipulated date of
receipt of tenders including extension, if any.
ii. The cost of work on which escalation will be payable shall be reckoned as below :
a. Gross value of work done up to this quarter : (A)
b. Gross value of work done up to the last quarter : (B)
c. Gross value of work done since previous quarter (C)= (A-B)
d. Full assessed value of Secured Advance fresh paid in this quarter
: (D)
e. Full assessed value of Secured Advance recovered in this quarter
: (E)
f. Full assessed value of Secured Advance for which escalation
Payable in this quarter, (F)= (D-E)
g. Advance payment made during this quarter: (G)
h. Advance payment recovered during this quarter: (H)
i. Advance payment for which escalation is payable in this Quarter
(I)= (G-H)
j. Amount paid based on prevailing market rates due to
deviations/variations as per Article 13 during this quarter: (J)
Then, M = C+F+I-J
Cost of work for which escalation is applicable(W)=0.85M
Components for materials, labour, etc. shall be pre-determined for every
work and incorporated in the conditions of contract attached to the tender
documents included in Schedule 'G'. The decision of the Engineer-in-Charge
in working out such percentage shall be binding on the contractors.
iii. The following principles shall be followed while working out the payment/recovery
on account of variation of prices of materials and/ or wages of labour.
a. The compensation for escalation shall be worked out at quarterly
intervals and shall be with respect to the cost of work done as per
bills paid during the three calendar months of the said quarter.
The date of submission of bill by the contractor to the department
shall be the guiding factor to decide the bills relevant to the
Page 156 of 1358

quarterly interval. The first such payment shall be made at the end
of three months after the month (excluding the month in which
the letter of commencement of work is issued by the Engineer-in-
Charge) and thereafter at three months' interval. At the time of
completion of the work, the last period for payment might become
less than 3 months, depending on the actual date of completion.
b. The indices as defined below (excluding LI) relevant to any
quarter/period for which such compensation is to be paid shall be
the arithmetical average of the indices relevant to the three
calendar months. If the period up to the date of completion after
the quarter covered by the last such installment of payment, is less
than three months, the indices shall be the average of the indices
for the months falling within that period.
c. The minimum wage of an unskilled Mazdoor shall be the higher of
the wage notified by Government of India, Ministry of Labour and
that notified by the local administration both relevant to the place
of work and the period of reckoning.
d. The escalation for labour also shall be paid at the same quarterly
intervals when escalation due to increase in cost of materials is
paid under this clause. If such revision of minimum wages takes
place during any such quarterly intervals, the escalation
compensation shall be payable at revised rates only for work done
in subsequent quarters;
e. Irrespective of variations in minimum wages of any category of
labour, for the purpose of this clause, the variation in the rate for
an unskilled Mazdoor alone shall form the basis for working out
the escalation compensation payable on the labour component.
iv. In the event the price of materials and/or wages of labour required for execution
of the work decreases, there shall be a downward adjustment of the cost of work
so that such price of materials and/or wages of labour shall be deductible from the
cost of work under this contract and in this regard the formula herein stated below
under this Clause 10CC shall mutatis mutandis apply.
v. The contract price shall be adjusted for increase or decrease in rates and prices of
labour, cement, steel reinforcement bar, fuel and lubricants and other input
materials as per percentage of materials/labour specified in Schedule G and in
accordance with the principles, procedures and formulae specified below:
a. Price adjustment for change in cost shall be paid in accordance

with the following formulae:
Page 157 of 1358

Where, W=cost of work done as per para (ii) above.

VW (Variation of cost of Work) =Increase or decrease in the cost of works
during the period under consideration due to change in the rates for
relevant components.
Percentage components of materials &labour as specified in the
Schedule G are defined
as under:-
CP - Cement component,
LP - Labour component,
CMP - Civil component of other construction materials,
EMP - E & M component of construction materials
FP -POL (Diesel) component
SP - Reinforcement steel bars/TMT bars/structural steel (including
strands and cables) component
BP - Bitumen component
Indices for various components of materials & labour to be used for
the purpose of this Clause are defined as under
Cl = Wholesale Price Index for Pozzolana Cement published by office of the

Economic Adviser, Ministry of Industry & Commerce valid for the month of
last date of receipt of tender including extension, if any.
Cl = Wholesale Price Index for Pozzolana Cement published by office of the
Economic Adviser, Ministry of Industry & Commerce for the period under
consideration.
LO = Minimum daily wage in rupees of an unskilled adult mazdoor, fixed under any
law, statutory rule or order as on the last date of receipt of tender including
extension, if any.
LI = Minimum wage in rupees of an unskilled adult mazdoor, fixed under any law,
statutory rule or order as applicable on the last date of the quarter previous
to the one under consideration.
CMO = Price Index for civil components of other construction materials valid for the
month of the last date of receipt of tender including extension, if any, as issue
by the office of CE CSQ (Civil) or successor.
CMI = Price Index for civil components of other construction materials for the
period under consideration and as issued by the office of CE CSQ (Civil) or
successor.
EMO = Price Index for E & M components of construction materials valid for the
month of the last date of receipt of tender including extension, if any, as
issued by the office of CE CSQ (Electrical) or successor.
EMI = Price Index for E & M components of construction materials for the period
under consideration and as issued by the office of CE CSQ (Electrical) or
successor.
FO = Wholesale Price Index of HSD (High Speed Diesel)published by office of the
Page 158 of 1358

the last date of receipt of tender including extension, if any.

FI = Wholesale Price Index of HSD (High Speed Diesel) published by office of the
consideration.
SO = Wholesale Price Index of Mild Steel-long products published by office of the
the last date of receipt of tender including extension, if any
SI = Wholesale Price Index of Mild Steel-long products published by office of the
consideration.
BO = Wholesale Price Index of Bitumen published by office of the Economic Adviser,
Ministry of Industry & Commerce valid for the month of the last date of
receipt of tender including extension, if any
BI = Wholesale Price Index of Bitumen published by office of the Economic Adviser,
Ministry of Industry & Commerce for the period under consideration.
17.9 Restrictions on price adjustment
Price adjustment shall be due and payable only in respect of the stages of Works for
which the Stage Payment Statement has been submitted by the Contractor no later than
30 (thirty) days from the date of the applicable Project Milestone, including any Time
Extension granted therefor in accordance with the provisions of this Agreement. For the
avoidance of doubt, in the event of submission of any Stage Payment Statement after the
period specified herein, price adjustment shall be applicable only until the date of the
respective Project Milestone.
17.10 Final Payment Statement

17.10.1 Within 60 (sixty) days of receiving the Completion Certificate under Clause 12.4, the EPC
Contractor shall submit to the Authority Engineer six copies of a final payment statement
(the “Final Payment Statement”), with supporting documents, in the form prescribed
by the Authority Engineer in respect of:
(a) the summary of EPC Contractor’s Stage Payment Statements as submitted in accordance
with Clause 17.4;
(b) the amounts received from the Authority against each claim; and
(c) any further sums which the EPC Contractor considers due to it from the Authority.
17.10.2 If the Authority Engineer disagrees with or cannot verify any part of the Final Payment
Statement, the EPC Contractor shall submit such further information as the Authority
Engineer may reasonably require.
17.10.3 The Authority Engineer shall deliver to the Authority:
(i) an IPC for those parts of the Final Payment Statement which are not in dispute,along with
Page 159 of 1358

a list of disputed items which shall then be settled in accordance withthe provisions of
Article 24; or
(ii) a Final Payment Certificate in accordance with Clause 17.15, if there are no disputed
items.
17.10.4 In the event that the Authority Engineer does not prescribe the form referred to in Clause
17.10.1 within 7 (seven) days of the issue of a Completion Certificate, the EPC Contractor
shall submit the statement in such form as it may reasonably deem fit.
17.11 Discharge
Upon submission of the Final Payment Statement under Clause 17.10, the EPC Contractor
shall give to the Authority, with a copy to the Authority Engineer, a written discharge
confirming that the total of the Final Payment Statement represents full and final
settlement of all monies due to the EPC Contractor in respect of this Agreement for all
the Works arising out of this Agreement, except for any monies due to either Party on
account of any Defect. Provided that such discharge shall become effective only after the
payment due has been made in accordance with the Final Payment Certificate issued
pursuant to Clause 17.12.
17.12 Final Payment Certificate
17.12.1Within 30 (thirty) days after receipt of the Final Payment Statement under Clause 17.10,
and the written discharge under Clause 17.11, and there being no disputed itemsof claim,
the Authority Engineer shall deliver to the Authority, with a copy to the EPC Contractor, a
final payment certificate (the “Final Payment Certificate”) stating the amount which, in
the opinion of the Authority Engineer, is finally due under this Agreement or otherwise.
For the avoidance of doubt, before issuing the Final PaymentCertificate, the Authority
Engineer shall ascertain from the Authority all amounts previously paid by the Authority,
all sums due to the Authority, and the balance, if any,due from the Authority to the EPC
Contractor or from the EPC Contractor to the Authority, as thecase may be. The Authority
shall, in accordance with the provisions of Clause 17.7, pay to the EPC Contractor the
amount which is specified as being finally due in the Final Payment Certificate.
17.13 Change in law. – Deleted
17.14 Correction of Interim Payment Certificates
The Authority Engineer may, by an Interim Payment Certificate, make any correction or
modification in any previous Interim Payment Certificate issued by it.
17.15 Authority’s claims
If the Authority considers itself to be entitled to any payment from the EPC Contractor
under any Clause of this Agreement, it shall give notice and particulars to the EPC
Contractor 20 (twenty) days before making the recovery from any amount due to the EPC
Contractor, andshall take into consideration the representation, if any, made by the EPC
Contractor in this behalf, before making such recovery.
Page 160 of 1358

17.16 Bonus for early completion
In the event that the Project Completion Date occurs prior to the Scheduled Completion
Date, the Contractor shall be entitled to receive a payment of bonus equivalent to 0.03%
(zero point zero three per cent) of the Contract Price for each day by which the Project
Completion Date precedes the Scheduled Completion Date, but subject to a maximum
of 3% (three per cent) of the Contract Price. Provided, however, that the payment of
bonus, if any, shall be made only after the issue of the Completion Certificate. For the
avoidance of doubt, the Parties agree that for the purpose of determining the bonus
payable hereunder, the Contract Price shall always be deemed to be the amount
specified in Clause 17.1.1 and shall exclude any revision thereof for any reason.
Page 161 of 1358

ARTICLE 18
INSURANCE
18.1 Insurance for Works
18.1.1 The EPC Contractor shall affect and maintain at its own cost the insurances specified in
Schedule-N and as per the requirements under Applicable Laws.
18.1.2 Subject to the provisions of Clause 19.6, the EPC Contractor shall, in accordance with the
provisions of this Agreement, be liable to bear the cost of any loss or damage that does
not fall within the scope of this Article 18 or cannot be recovered from the insurers.
18.1.3 Save and except as provided in Clause 18.1.4, the EPC Contractor shall fully indemnify, hold
harmless and defend the Authority from and against any and all losses, damages, costs,
charges and/or claims with respect to:
(a) the death of or injury to any person; or
(b) the loss of or damage to any property that may arise out of or in consequence of any
breach by the EPC Contractor of this Agreement during the execution of the Works or
the remedying of any Defects therein.
18.1.4 Notwithstanding anything in Clause 18.1.3, the Authority shall fully indemnify the EPC
Contractor from and against any and all losses, damages, costs, charges, proceedings
and/or claims arising out of or with respect to:
(a) the use or occupation of land or any part thereof by the Authority;
(b) the damage to property which is the unavoidable result of the execution and completion
of the Works, or the remedying of any Defects therein, in accordance with this
Agreement; and
(c) the death of or injury to persons or loss of or damage to property resulting from any act
or neglect of the Authority, its agents, servants or other EPC Contractors, not being
employed by the EPC Contractor.
Provided, however, that in the event of any injury or damage as a result of the
contributory negligence of the EPC Contractor, the Authority shall be liable to indemnify
the EPC Contractor from and against any and all losses, damages, costs, charges,
proceedings and/or claims to the extent as proportionate to the liability of the Authority,
its servantsor agents or other EPC Contractors not associated with the EPC Contractor in
such injury or damage.
18.1.5 Without prejudice to the provisions of Clauses 18.1.3 and 18.1.4, the EPC Contractor shall
maintain or effect such third-party insurances as may be required under Applicable Laws.
18.1.6 The EPC Contractor shall provide to the Authority, within 30 days of the Appointed Date,
evidence of professional liability insurance maintained by its DESIGN MANAGER and/or
consultants to cover the risk of professional negligence in the design of Works. The
Page 162 of 1358

professional liability cover shall be for a sum of not less than [3% (three per cent)] of the
Contract Price and shall be maintained until the end of the Defects Liability Period.
18.2 Notice to the Authority
No later than 15 (fifteen) days after the date of this Agreement, the EPC Contractor shall
by notice furnish to the Authority, in reasonable detail, information in respect of the
insurances that it proposes to effect and maintain in accordance with this Article 18.
Within 15 (fifteen) days of receipt of such notice, the Authority may require the EPC
Contractor to effect and maintain such other insurances as may be necessary pursuant
hereto, and in the event of any difference or disagreement relating to any suchinsurance,
the Dispute Resolution Procedure shall apply.
18.3 Evidence of Insurance Cover
18.3.1 All insurance obtained by the EPC Contractor in accordance with this Article 18 shall be
maintained with insurers on terms consistent with Good Industry Practice. Within 10 (ten)
days from the Appointed Date, the EPC Contractor shall furnish to the Authority notarized
true copies of the certificate(s) of insurance, copies of insurance policies and premia
payment receipts in respect of such insurance, and no such insurance shall be cancelled,
modified, or allowed to expire or lapse until the expiration of at least 45 (forty-five) days
after notice of such proposed cancellation, modification or non- renewal has been
delivered by the EPC Contractor to the Authority.
18.3.2 The EPC Contractor shall procure and ensure the adequacy of the insurances at all times
in accordance with the provisions of this Agreement.
18.4 Remedy for failure to insure.
If the EPC Contractor shall fail to effect and keep in force all insurances for which it is
responsible pursuant hereto, the Authority shall have the option to either keep in force
any such insurances, and pay such premia and recover the costs thereof from the EPC
Contractor, or in the event of computation of a Termination Payment, treat an amount
equal to the Insurance Cover as deemed to have been received by the EPC Contractor.
18.5 Waiver of subrogation
All insurance policies in respect of the insurance obtained by the EPC Contractor
pursuant to this Article 18 shall include a waiver of any and all rights of subrogation or
recovery of the insurers thereunder against, inter alia, the Authority, and its assigns,
successors, undertakings and their subsidiaries, Affiliates, employees, insurers and
underwriters, and of any right of the insurers to any set-off or counterclaim or any other
deduction, whether by attachment or otherwise, in respect of any liability of any such
person insured under any such policy or in any way connected with any loss, liability or
obligation covered by such policies of insurance.
18.6 EPC Contractor’s waiver
The EPC Contractor hereby further releases, assigns and waives any and all rights of
subrogation or recovery against, inter alia, the Authority and its assigns, undertakings
Page 163 of 1358

and their subsidiaries, Affiliates, employees, successors, insurers and underwriters,

which the EPC Contractor may otherwise have or acquire in or from or in any way
connectedwith any loss, liability or obligation covered by policies of insurance maintained
or required to be maintained by the EPC Contractor pursuant to this Agreement (other
than third party liability insurance policies) or because of deductible clauses in or
inadequacy of limits of any such policies of insurance.
18.7 Cross liabilities
Any such insurance maintained or effected in pursuance of this Article 18 shall include a
cross liability clause such that the insurance shall apply to the EPC Contractor and to the
Authority as separately insured.
18.8 Accident or injury to workmen
Notwithstanding anything contained in this Agreement, it is hereby expressly agreed

between the Parties that the Authority shall not be liable for or in respect of any damages
or compensation payable to any workman or other person in the employment of the EPC
Contractor or Sub-EPC Contractor, save and except as for death or injury resulting from
anyact, omission or default of the Authority, its agents or servants. The EPC Contractor
shall indemnify and keep indemnified the Authority from and against all such claims,
proceedings, damages, costs, charges, and expenses whatsoever in respect of the above
save and except for those acts, omissions or defaults for which the Authority shall be
liable.
18.9 Insurance against accident to workmen
The EPC Contractor shall effect and maintain during the Agreement such insurances as
may be required to insure the EPC Contractor’s personnel and any other persons
employed by it on the Project from and against any liability incurred in pursuance of this
Article 18 Provided that for the purposes of this Clause 18.9, the EPC Contractor’s
personnel/any person employed by the EPC Contractor shall include the Sub- Contractor
and its personnel. Provided further that in respect of any persons employed by any Sub-
EPC Contractor, the EPC Contractor's obligations to insure as aforesaid under this Clause
18.9 shall be dischargedif the Sub- Contractor shall have insured against any liability in
respect of such personsin such manner that the Authority is indemnified under the policy.
The EPC Contractor shallrequire such Sub- Contractor to produce before the Authority,
when required, such policy of insurance and the receipt for payment of the current
premium within 10 (ten)days of such demand being made by the Authority.
18.10 Application of insurance proceeds
The proceeds from all insurance claims, except for life and injury, shall be applied for any
necessary repair, reconstruction, reinstatement, replacement, improvement, delivery or
installation of the Project and the provisions of this Agreement in respect ofconstruction
of Works shall apply mutatis mutandis to the Works undertaken out of theproceeds of
insurance.
Page 164 of 1358

18.11 Compliance with policy conditions
The EPC Contractor hereby expressly agrees to fully indemnify the Authority from and
against all losses and claims arising from the EPC Contractor’s failure to comply
with conditions imposed by the insurance policies effected in accordance with this
Agreement.
Page 165 of 1358

Part V
Force Majeure and Termination
Page 166 of 1358

ARTICLE 19
FORCE MAJEURE
19.1 Force Majeure
As used in this Agreement, the expression “Force Majeure” or “Force Majeure Event”
shall mean occurrence in India of any or all of Non-Political Event, Indirect Political Event
and Political Event, as defined in Clauses 19.2, 19.3 and 19.4 respectively, if it affects the
performance by the Party claiming the benefit of Force Majeure (the “Affected Party”) of
its obligations under this Agreement and which actor event (a) is beyond the reasonable
control of the Affected Party, and (b) the Affected Party could not have prevented or
overcome by exercise of due diligence and followingGood Industry Practice, and (c) has
Material Adverse Effect on the Affected Party.
19.2 Non-Political Event
A Non-Political Event shall mean one or more of the following acts or events:
(a) act of God, epidemic, pandemics, extremely adverse weather conditions, lightning,
earthquake, landslide, cyclone, flood, volcanic eruption, chemical or radioactive
contamination or ionizing radiation, fire or explosion (to the extent of contamination or
radiation or fire or explosion originating from a sourceexternal to the Site);
(b) strikes or boycotts (other than those involving the EPC Contractor, Sub- Contractors or
their respective employees/representatives, or attributable to any act oromission of any
of them) interrupting supplies and services to the Project for acontinuous period of 24
(twenty-four) hours and an aggregate period exceeding10 (ten) days in an Accounting
Year, and not being an Indirect Political Event set forth in Clause 19.3;
(c) any failure or delay of a Sub- Contractor but only to the extent caused by anotherNon-
Political Event;
(d) any judgement or order of any court of competent jurisdiction or statutory authority
made against the EPC Contractor in any proceedings for reasons other than
(i) failure of the EPC Contractor to comply with any Applicable Law or Applicable Permit, or
(ii) on account of breach of any Applicable Law or Applicable Permitor of any contract, or
(iii) enforcement of this Agreement, or (iv) exercise of any of its rights under this
Agreement by the Authority; or (v) breach of itsobligations by the EPC Contractor under
its sub-contracts;
(e) the discovery of geological conditions, toxic contamination or archaeological remains on

the Site that could not reasonably have been expected to be discovered through a site
inspection; or
(f) any event or circumstances of a nature analogous to any of the foregoing.
19.3 Indirect Political Event
An Indirect Political Event shall mean one or more of the following acts or events:
Page 167 of 1358

(a) an act of war (whether declared or undeclared), invasion, armed conflict or act of foreign
enemy, blockade, embargo, riot, insurrection, terrorist or military action, civil commotion
or politically motivated sabotage;
(b) industry-wide or State-wide strikes or industrial action for a continuous period of 24

(twenty-four) hours and exceeding an aggregate period of 10 (ten) days inan Accounting
Year;
(c) any civil commotion, boycott or political agitation which prevents construction of the
Project by the EPC Contractor for an aggregate period exceeding 10 (ten) days in an
Accounting Year;
(d) failure of the Authority to permit the EPC Contractor to continue with its Construction
Works, with or without modifications, in the event of stoppage of such work after
discovery of any geological or archaeological finds;
(e) any failure or delay of a Subcontractor to the extent caused by any Indirect Political Event;
(f) any Indirect Political Event that causes a Non-Political Event; or
(g) any event or circumstances of a nature analogous to any of the foregoing.
19.4 Political Event

A Political Event shall mean one or more of the following acts or events by or on
account of any Government Instrumentality:
(a) Deleted.
(b) compulsory acquisition in national interest or expropriation of any Project Assets or

rights of the EPC Contractor or of the Sub- Contractors;
(c) unlawful or unauthorized or without jurisdiction revocation of, or refusal to renew or

grant without valid cause, any clearance, license, permit, authorization, no objection
certificate, consent, approval or exemption required by the EPC Contractor or any of the
Sub- Contractors to perform their respective obligationsunder this Agreement; provided
that such delay, modification, denial, refusal or revocation did not result from the EPC
Contractor’s or any Sub- Contractor’s inability or failure to comply with any condition
relating to grant, maintenance or renewal of such clearance, license, authorization, no
objection certificate, exemption, consent, approval or permit;
(d) any failure or delay of a Sub- Contractor but only to the extent caused by anotherPolitical
Event; or
(e) any event or circumstances of a nature analogous to any of the foregoing.
Page 168 of 1358

19.5 Duty to report Force Majeure Event
19.5.1 Upon occurrence of a Force Majeure Event, the Affected Party shall by notice report such
occurrence to the other Party forthwith. Any notice pursuant hereto shall include full
particulars of:
(a) the nature and extent of each Force Majeure Event which is the subject of any claim for
relief under this Article 19 with evidence in support thereof;
(b) the estimated duration and the effect or probable effect which such Force Majeure Event
is having or will have on the Affected Party’s performance of its obligations under this
Agreement;
(c) the measures which the Affected Party is taking or proposes to take for alleviating the
impact of such Force Majeure Event; and
(d) any other information relevant to the Affected Party’s claim.
19.5.2 The Affected Party shall not be entitled to any relief for or in respect of a Force Majeure
Event unless it shall have notified the other Party of the occurrence of the Force Majeure
Event as soon as reasonably practicable, and in any event no later than 10 (ten) days after
the Affected Party knew, or ought reasonably to have known, of its occurrence, and shall
have given particulars of the probable material effect that the Force Majeure Event is
likely to have on the performance of its obligations under this Agreement.
19.5.3 For so long as the Affected Party continues to claim to be affected by such Force Majeure
Event, it shall provide the other Party with regular (and not less than weekly) reports
containing information as required by Clause 19.5.1, and such other informationas the
other Party may reasonably request the Affected Party to provide.
19.6 Effect of Force Majeure Event on the Agreement
19.6.1 Upon the occurrence of any Force Majeure
(a) prior to the Appointed Date, both Parties shall bear their respective Force Majeure costs.
(b) after the Appointed Date, the costs incurred and attributable to such event and directly
relating to this Agreement (the “Force Majeure costs”) shall beallocated and paid as
follows:
(i) Upon occurrence of a Non-Political Event, the Parties shall bear their respective
Force Majeure costs and neither Party shall be required to pay to theother Party any costs
thereof;
(ii) Upon occurrence of an Indirect Political Event, all Force Majeure costs
attributable to such Indirect Political Event, and not exceeding the Insurance Cover for
such Indirect Political Event, shall be borne by the EPC Contractor, and to the extent Force
Majeure costs exceed such Insurance Cover, one half of such excess amount shall be
reimbursed by the Authority to the EPC Contractor forthe Force Majeure events; and
(iii) Upon occurrence of a Political Event, all Force Majeure costs attributableto such
Page 169 of 1358

Political Event shall be reimbursed by the Authority to the EPC Contractor.
For the avoidance of doubt, Force Majeure costs may include costs directly attributableto
the Force Majeure Event, but shall not include debt repayment obligations, if any, ofthe
EPC Contractor.
19.6.2 Save and except as expressly provided in this Article 19, neither Party shall be liable inany
manner whatsoever to the other Party in respect of any loss, damage, cost, expense,
claims, demands and proceedings relating to or arising out of occurrence or existence of
any Force Majeure Event or exercise of any right pursuant hereto.
19.6.3 Upon the occurrence of any Force Majeure Event during the Construction Period, the
Project Completion Schedule for and in respect of the affected Works shall be extendedon
a day for day basis for such period as performance of the EPC Contractor’s obligations is
affected on account of the Force Majeure Event or its subsisting effects, as may be
determined by the Authority Engineer.
19.6.4 Force Majeure costs for any event which results in any off-setting compensation being
payable to the EPC Contractor by or on behalf of its Sub- Contractors shall be reduced by
such amounts that are payable to the EPC Contractor by its Sub- Contractors.
19.7 Termination Notice for Force Majeure Event
If a Force Majeure Event subsists for a period of 60 (sixty) days or more within a
continuous period of 120 (one hundred and twenty) days, either Party may in its
discretion terminate this Agreement by issuing a Termination Notice to the other Party
without being liable in any manner whatsoever, save as provided in this Article 19, and
upon issue of such Termination Notice, this Agreement shall, notwithstanding anythingto
the contrary contained herein, stand terminated forthwith; provided that before issuing
such Termination Notice, the Party intending to issue the Termination Notice shall inform
the other Party of such intention and grant 15 (fifteen) days’ time to make a
representation, and may after the expiry of such 15 (fifteen) days period, whether or not
it is in receipt of such representation, in its sole discretion issue the Termination Notice.
19.8 Termination Payment for Force Majeure Event
19.8.1 In the event of this Agreement being terminated on account of a Non-Political Event, the
Termination Payment shall be an amount equal to the sum payable under Clause 21.5.
19.8.2 If Termination is on account of an Indirect Political Event, the Termination Payment shall
include:
(a) any sums due and payable under Clause 21.5; and
(b) the reasonable cost, as determined by the Authority Engineer, of the Plant andMaterials
procured by the EPC Contractor and transferred to the Authority for use inConstruction,
only if such Plant and Materials are in conformity with the Specifications and Standards;
19.8.3 If Termination is on account of a Political Event, the Authority shall make a Termination
Payment to the EPC Contractor in an amount that would be payable under Clause 21.6.2
Page 170 of 1358

as if it were an Authority Default.
19.9 Dispute resolution
In the event that the Parties are unable to agree in good faith about the occurrence or
existence of a Force Majeure Event, such Dispute shall be finally settled in accordancewith
the Dispute Resolution Procedure; provided that the burden of proof as to the
occurrence or existence of such Force Majeure Event shall be upon the Party claiming
relief and/ or excuse on account of such Force Majeure Event.
19.10 Excuse from performance of obligations
If the Affected Party is rendered wholly or partially unable to perform its obligations
under this Agreement because of a Force Majeure Event, it shall be excused from
performance of such of its obligations to the extent it is unable to perform on account of
such Force Majeure Event; provided that:
(a) the suspension of performance shall be of no greater scope and of no longer duration
than is reasonably required by the Force Majeure Event;
(b) the Affected Party shall make all reasonable efforts to mitigate or limit damageto the
other Party arising out of or as a result of the existence or occurrence of such Force
Majeure Event and to cure the same with due diligence; and
(c) when the Affected Party is able to resume performance of its obligations under this
Agreement, it shall give to the other Party notice to that effect and shall promptly resume
performance of its obligations hereunder.
Page 171 of 1358

ARTICLE 20
SUSPENSION OF EPC CONTRACTOR’S RIGHTS
20.1 Suspension upon EPC Contractor Default
Upon occurrence of a EPC Contractor Default, the Authority shall be entitled, without
prejudice to its other rights and remedies under this Agreement including its rights of
Termination hereunder, to (a) suspend carrying out of the Works or any part thereof, and
(b) carry out such Works itself or authorise any other person to exercise or performthe
same on its behalf during such suspension (the “Suspension”). Suspension hereunder
shall be effective forthwith upon issue of notice by the Authority to the EPC Contractor
and may extend up to a period not exceeding 90 (ninety) days from the dateof issue of
such notice.
20.2 Authority to act on behalf of EPC Contractor
During the period of Suspension hereunder, all rights and liabilities vested in the EPC
Contractor in accordance with the provisions of this Agreement shall continue to vest in
the EPC Contractor and all things done or actions taken, including expenditure incurred
by the Authority for discharging the obligations of the EPC Contractor under and in
accordance with this Agreement shall be deemed to have been done or taken for and on
behalf of the EPC Contractor and the EPC Contractor undertakes to indemnify the
Authority for all costs incurred during such period. The EPC Contractor hereby licenses
and sub-licensesrespectively, the Authority or any other person authorized by it under
Clause 20.1 to use during Suspension, all Intellectual Property belonging to or licensed
to the EPC Contractor with respect to the Project and its design, engineering,
construction, and which is used or created by the EPC Contractor in performing its
obligations under the Agreement.
20.3 Revocation of Suspension
20.3.1 In the event that the Authority shall have rectified or removed the cause of Suspension
within a period not exceeding 60 (sixty) days from the date of Suspension, it shall revoke
the Suspension forthwith and restore all rights of the EPC Contractor under this
Agreement. For the avoidance of doubt, the Parties expressly agree that the Authority
may, in its discretion, revoke the Suspension at any time, whether or not the cause of
Suspension has been rectified or removed hereunder.
20.3.2 Upon the EPC Contractor having cured the EPC Contractor Default within a period not
exceeding 60 (sixty) days from the date of Suspension, the Authority shall revoke the
Suspensionforthwith and restore all rights of the EPC Contractor under this Agreement.
20.4 Termination
20.4.1 At any time during the period of Suspension under this Article 20, the EPC Contractor
mayby notice require the Authority to revoke the Suspension and issue a Termination
Notice. The Authority shall, within 15 (fifteen) days of receipt of such notice, terminatethis
Agreement under and in accordance with Article 21 as if it is an EPC Contractor Default
under Clause 21.1.
20.4.2 Notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained in this Agreement, in the event that
Page 172 of 1358

Suspension is not revoked within 90 (ninety) days from the date of Suspension
hereunder, the Agreement shall, upon expiry of the aforesaid period, be deemed to have
been terminated by mutual agreement of the Parties and all the provisions of this
Agreement shall apply, mutatis mutandis, to such Termination as if a Termination Notice
had been issued by the Authority upon occurrence of a EPC Contractor Default.
Page 173 of 1358

ARTICLE 21
TERMINATION
21.1 Termination for EPC Contractor Default
21.1.1 Save as otherwise provided in this Agreement, in the event that any of the defaults
specified below shall have occurred, and the EPC Contractor fails to cure the default
withinthe Cure Period set forth below, or where no Cure Period is specified, then within
a Cure Period of 60 (sixty) days, the EPC Contractor shall be deemed to be in default of
this Agreement (the “Contractor Default”), unless the default has occurred as a result of
any breach of this Agreement by the Authority or due to Force Majeure. Without
prejudice to the generality of the expression, ‘defaults’ referred to herein shall include
the following:
(a) The EPC Contractor fails to provide, extend or replenish, as the case may be, the
Performance Security in accordance with this Agreement;
(b) Subsequent to the replenishment or furnishing of fresh Performance Security in

accordance with Clause 7.3, the EPC Contractor fails to cure, within a Cure Period of 30
(thirty) days, the EPC Contractor Default for which the whole or part of the Performance
Security was appropriated;
(c) the EPC Contractor does not achieve the latest outstanding Project Milestone due in
accordance with the provisions of Schedule-I, subject to any Time Extension, and
continues to be in default for 45 (forty-five) days;
(d) the EPC Contractor abandons or manifests intention to abandon the construction of the
Project without the prior written consent of the Authority;
(e) the EPC Contractor fails to proceed with the Works in accordance with the provisionsof
Clause 10.1 or stops Works for 30 (thirty) days without reflecting the same in the current
programme and such stoppage has not been authorized by the Authority Engineer;
(f) the Project Completion Date does not occur within the period specified in Schedule-I for
the Scheduled Completion Date, or any extension thereof;
(g) failure to complete the Punch List items within the periods stipulated therefor in Clause
12.3;
(h) the EPC Contractor fails to rectify any Defect, the non-rectification of which shall have a
Material Adverse Effect on the Project, within the time specified in thisAgreement or as
directed by the Authority Engineer;
(i) the Contractor subcontracts the Works or any part thereof in violation of this Agreement
or assigns any part of the Works without the prior approval of the Authority;
(j) the EPC Contractor creates any Encumbrance in breach of this Agreement;
(k) an execution levied on any of the assets of the EPC Contractor has caused a Material
Adverse Effect;
Page 174 of 1358

(l) the EPC Contractor is adjudged bankrupt or insolvent, or if a trustee or receiver is

appointed for the EPC Contractor or for the whole or material part of its assets that has
a material bearing on the Project;
(m) the EPC Contractor has been, or is in the process of being liquidated, dissolved, wound-
up, amalgamated or reconstituted in a manner that would cause, in the reasonable
opinion of the Authority, a Material Adverse Effect;
(n) a resolution for winding up of the EPC Contractor is passed, or any petition for winding
up of the EPC Contractor is admitted by a court of competent jurisdiction and a
provisional liquidator or receiver is appointed and such order has not beenset aside within
90 (ninety) days of the date thereof or the EPC Contractor is orderedto be wound up by a
court except for the purpose of amalgamation or reconstruction; provided that, as part
of such amalgamation or reconstruction, the entire property, assets and undertaking of
the EPC Contractor are transferred to the amalgamated or reconstructed entity and that
the amalgamated or reconstructed entity has unconditionally assumed the obligations
of the EPC Contractor under this Agreement; and provided that:
(i) the amalgamated or reconstructed entity has the capability and experience necessary
for the performance of its obligations under this Agreement; and
(ii) the amalgamated or reconstructed entity has the financial standing to perform its
obligations under this Agreement and has a credit worthinessat least as good as that of
the EPC Contractor as at the Appointed Date;
(o) any representation or warranty of the EPC Contractor herein contained which is, as of
the date hereof, found to be materially false or the EPC Contractor is at any time
hereafter found to be in breach thereof;
(p) the EPC Contractor submits to the Authority any statement, notice or other document,in
written or electronic form, which has a material effect on the Authority’s rights,
obligations or interests and which is false in material particulars;
(q) the EPC Contractor has failed to fulfil any obligation, for which failure Terminationhas
been specified in this Agreement; or
(r) the EPC Contractor has failed to make any payment to the Authority within the period
specified in this Agreement;
(s) the EPC Contractor issues a Termination Notice in violation of this Agreement; or
(t) the EPC Contractor commits default in complying with any other provision of this
Agreement if such a default causes a Material Adverse Effect on the Project or on the
Authority.
21.1.2 Without prejudice to any other rights or remedies which the Authority may have under
this Agreement, upon occurrence of a EPC Contractor Default, the Authority shall be
entitled to terminate this Agreement by issuing a Termination Notice to the EPC
Contractor; provided that before issuing the Termination Notice, the Authority shall by a
notice inform the EPC Contractor of its intention to issue such Termination Notice and
Page 175 of 1358

grant 15 (fifteen) days to the EPC Contractor to make a representation, and may after the
expiry of such 15 (fifteen) days, whether or not it is in receipt of such representation,
issue the Termination Notice; provided further that any representation received within
the stipulated time shall be duly considered and the Termination Notice will be set out
in brief the reasons for the termination.
21.1.3 On termination of this Agreement, the Authority may complete the Works and/or procure
its completion through any other entity. The Authority and such entity may, for this
purpose, use any Materials, Plant and equipment, EPC Contractor’s documents and other
design documents made by or on behalfof the EPC Contractor.
21.2 Termination for Authority Default
21.2.1 In the event that any of the defaults specified below shall have occurred, and the
Authority fails to cure such default within a Cure Period of 90 (ninety) days or such longer
period as has been expressly provided in this Agreement, the Authority shall be deemed
to be in default of this Agreement (the “Authority Default”) unless the default has
occurred as a result of any breach of this Agreement by the EPC Contractor or due to
Force Majeure. The defaults referred to herein shall include the following:
(a) The Authority commits a material default in complying with any of the provisions of this
Agreement and such default has a Material Adverse Effect onthe EPC Contractor;
(b) the Authority has failed to make payment of any amount due and payable to the EPC
Contractor within the period specified in this Agreement;
(c) the Authority repudiates this Agreement or otherwise takes any action that amounts to
or manifests an irrevocable intention not to be bound by this Agreement; or
(d) the Authority Engineer fails to issue the relevant Interim Payment Certificatewithin 60
(sixty) days after receiving a statement and supporting documents.
21.2.2 Without prejudice to any other right or remedy which the EPC Contractor may have under
this Agreement, upon occurrence of an Authority Default, the EPC Contractor shall be
entitled to terminate this Agreement by issuing a Termination Notice to the Authority;
provided that before issuing the Termination Notice, the EPC Contractor shall by a notice
inform the Authority of its intention to issue the Termination Notice and grant 15 (fifteen)
days to the Authority to make a representation, and may after the expiry of such 15
(fifteen) days, whether or not it is in receipt of such representation, issue the Termination
Notice; provided further that any representation received within the stipulated time shall
be duly considered and the Termination Notice will be set out in brief the reasons for
the termination.
21.3 Termination for Authority’s convenience

Notwithstanding anything hereinabove, the Authority may terminate this Agreement for
its own convenience without assigning any reason. The termination shall take effect 30
(thirty) days from the date of notice hereunder.
Page 176 of 1358

21.4 Requirements after Termination
Upon Termination of this Agreement in accordance with the provisions of this Article 21,
the EPC Contractor shall comply with and conform to the following:
(a) deliver to the Authority all Plant and Materials which shall have become the property of
the Authority under this Article 21;
(b) deliver all relevant records, reports, Intellectual Property and other licenses pertaining to
the Works, other design documents and in case of Termination occurring after the
Provisional Certificate has been issued, the “as built”Drawings for the Works;
(c) transfer and/or deliver all Applicable Permits to the Authority to the extent permissible
under Applicable Laws; and
(d) vacate the Site within 15 (fifteen) days.
21.5 Valuation of Unpaid Works
21.5.1 Within a period of 45 (forty-five) days after Termination under Clause 21.1, 21.2 or 21.3,
as the case may be, has taken effect, the Authority Engineer shall proceed to determine
the valuation of unpaid Works (the “Valuation of Unpaid Works”):
(a) value of the completed stage of the Works, less payments already made; and
(b) reasonable value of the partially completed stages of works as on the date of
Termination, only if such works conform with the Specifications and Standards.
and shall adjust from the sum thereof (i) any other amounts payable or recoverable, as
the case may be, in accordance with the provisions of this Agreement; and (ii) all taxesdue
to be deducted at source.
21.5.2 The Valuation of Unpaid Works shall be communicated to the Authority, with a copy to
the EPC Contractor, within a period of 45 (forty-five) days from the date of Termination.
21.6 Termination Payment
21.6.1 Upon Termination on account of EPC Contractor Default under Clause 21.1, the Authority
shall:
(a) encash and appropriate the Performance Security or Retention Money, whichever is
more, and in the event the EPC Contractor has failed to replenish or extend the
Performance Security, claim the amount stipulated in Clause 7.1.1, as agreed pre-
determined Damages, if any;
(b) encash and appropriate the bank guarantee, if any, to the extent of the outstanding
Advance Payment and interest thereon; and
(c) pay to the EPC Contractor, by way of Termination Payment, an amount equivalent tothe
Valuation of Unpaid Works after adjusting any other sums payable or recoverable, as the
case may be, in accordance with the provisions of this Agreement,
Page 177 of 1358

the case may be, in accordance with the provisions of this Agreement, and (ii) all taxesdue
to be deducted at source.
21.6.2 Upon Termination on account of an Authority Default under Clause 21.2 or for
Authority’s convenience under Clause 21.3, the Authority shall:
(a) return the Performance Security and Retention Money after deducting all amounts due
from the EPC contractor up to the date of termination;
(b) encash and appropriate the bank guarantee, if any, to the extent of the outstanding
Advance Payment, including interest thereon; and
(c) pay to the EPC Contractor, by way of Termination Payment, an amount equal to:
(i) Valuation of Unpaid Works;
(ii) the reasonable cost, as determined by the Authority Engineer, of the Plant and Materials
procured by the EPC Contractor and transferred to the Authority for its use, only if such
Plant and Materials are in conformitywith the Specifications and Standards;
(iii) the reasonable cost of temporary works, as determined by the Authority Engineer; and
(iv) 10% (ten per cent) of the cost of the Works that are not commenced or not completed,
the case may be, in accordance with the provisions of this Agreement, and (ii) all taxes
due to be deducted at source.
21.6.3 Termination Payment shall become due and payable to the EPC Contractor within 30
(thirty) days of a demand being made by the EPC Contractor to the Authority with the
necessary particulars, after the Valuation of Unpaid Works has been communicated by
the Authority Engineer, and in the event of any delay, the Authority shall pay simple
interest at the rate of 6% per annum, on the amount of Termination Payment remaining
unpaid; provided that such delay shall not exceed 90 (ninety) working days. For the
avoidance of doubt, it is expressly agreed that Termination Payment shall constitute full
discharge by the Authority of its payment obligations in respect thereof hereunder.
21.6.4 The EPC Contractor expressly agrees that Termination Payment under this Article 21 shall
constitute a full and final settlement of all claims of the EPC Contractor on account
of Termination of this Agreement and that it shall not have any further right or claim under
any law, treaty, convention, contract or otherwise.
21.7 Other rights and obligations of the Parties
Upon Termination for any reason whatsoever
(a) the property and ownership in all Materials, Plant and Works and the Project shall, as
between the EPC Contractor and the Authority, vest in the Authority in whole, free from
Page 178 of 1358

any and all Encumbrances; provided that the foregoing shall be without prejudice to
Clause 21.6;
(b) the risk of loss or damage to any Materials, Plant or Works and the care and custody
thereof shall pass from the EPC Contractor to the Authority; and
(c) the Authority shall be entitled to restrain the EPC Contractor and any person claiming
through or under the Agreement from entering upon the Site or any part of the Project
except for taking possession of materials, stores, implements,construction plants and
equipment of the EPC Contractor, which have not been vested in the Authority in
21.8 Right of Authority to continue work after termination

On termination of this agreement for any reason whatsoever, the authority may
complete the works and/or procure its completion through any other entity, entirely at
its option. The Authority and such entity may, for this purpose, use any materials, plant
and equipment, EPC Contractor’s documents and other design document made by or
on behalf of the EPC Contractor.
21.9 Survival of rights
Notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained in this Agreement but subject to

clause 21.8 above, any Terminationpursuant to the provisions of this Agreement shall be
without prejudice to the accrued rights of either Party including its right to claim and
recover money damages, insurance proceeds, security deposits, and other rights and
remedies, which it may have in law orAgreement. All rights and obligations of either Party
under this Agreement, including Termination Payments, shall survive the Termination to
the extent such survival is necessary for giving effect to such rights and obligations.
Page 179 of 1358

Part VI
Other Provisions
Page 180 of 1358

ARTICLE 22
ASSIGNMENT AND CHARGES
22.1 Restrictions on assignment and charges
This Agreement shall not be assigned by the EPC Contractor to any person, save and
exceptwith the prior consent in writing of the Authority, which consent the Authority shall
beentitled to decline without assigning any reason.
22.2 Hypothecation of Materials or Plant
Notwithstanding the provisions of Clause 22.1, the EPC Contractor may pledge or
hypothecate to its lenders, any Materials or Plant prior to their incorporation in the
Works. Further, the EPC Contractor may, by written notice to the Authority, assign its right
to receive payments under this Agreement either absolutely or by way of charge, to any
person providing financing to the EPC Contractor in connection with the performance of
the EPC Contractor’s obligations under this Agreement. The EPC Contractor
acknowledges that anysuch assignment by the EPC Contractor shall not relieve the EPC
Contractor from any obligations, duty or responsibility under this Agreement. For the
avoidance of doubt, all Materials and Plants shall, upon their incorporation into Works,
be free from any and allEncumbrances without the Authority being required to make any
payment to any personon account of any costs, compensation, expenses and charges for
such Materials, Plantsand Works.
Page 181 of 1358

ARTICLE 23
LIABILITY AND INDEMNITY
23.1 General indemnity
The EPC Contractor shall indemnify, defend, save and hold harmless the Authority and
its officers, servants, agents, Government Instrumentalities and Government owned
and/orcontrolled entities/enterprises, (the “Authority Indemnified Persons”) against any
andall suits, proceedings, actions, demands and third party claims for any loss, damage,
cost and expense of whatever kind and nature, whether arising out of any breach by the
EPC Contractor of any of its obligations under this Agreement or from any negligence
underthe Agreement, including any errors or deficiencies in the design documents, or
tort or on any other ground whatsoever, except to the extent that any such suits,
proceedings, actions, demands and claims have arisen due to any negligent act or
omission, or breachor default of this Agreement on the part of the Authority Indemnified
Persons.
23.2 Indemnity by the EPC Contractor
23.2.1 Without limiting the generality of Clause 23.1, the EPC Contractor shall fully indemnify,
hold harmless and defend the Authority and the Authority Indemnified Persons from and
against any and all loss and/or damages arising out of or with respect to:
(a) failure of the EPC Contractor to comply with Applicable Laws and Applicable Permits;
(b) payment of taxes required to be made by the EPC Contractor in respect of the incomeor
other taxes of the Sub- Contractors, suppliers and representatives; or
(c) non-payment of amounts due as a result of Materials or services furnished to the EPC
Contractor or any of its Sub- Contractors which are payable by the EPC Contractor orany
of its Sub- Contractors.
23.2.2 Without limiting the generality of the provisions of this Article 23, the EPC Contractor shall
fully indemnify, hold harmless and defend the Authority Indemnified Persons from and
against any and all suits, proceedings, actions, claims, demands, liabilities and damages
which the Authority Indemnified Persons may hereafter suffer, or pay by reason of any
demands, claims, suits or proceedings arising out of claims of infringement of any
domestic or foreign patent rights, copyrights or other Intellectual Property, proprietary
or confidentiality rights with respect to any materials, information, design or process
used by the EPC Contractor or by the Sub- Contractors in performing the EPC
Contractor’sobligations or in any way incorporated in or related to the Project. If in any
such suit, action, claim or proceedings, a temporary restraint order or preliminary
injunction is granted, the EPC Contractor shall make every reasonable effort, by giving a
satisfactory bond or otherwise, to secure the revocation or suspension of the injunction
or restraintorder. If, in any such suit, action, claim or proceedings, the Project, or any part
thereof or comprised therein, is held to constitute an infringement and its use is
permanently enjoined, the EPC Contractor shall promptly make every reasonable effort
to secure for the Authority a license, at no cost to the Authority, authorizing continued
use of the infringing work. If the EPC Contractor is unable to secure such license within a
reasonable time, the EPC Contractor shall, at its own expense, and without impairing the
Specifications and Standards, either replace the affected work, or part, or process thereof
Page 182 of 1358

with non- infringing work or part or process or modify the same so that it becomes non-
infringing.
23.3 Notice and contest of claims.
In the event that either Party receives a claim or demand from a third party in respect of
which it is entitled to the benefit of an indemnity under this Agreement (the “Indemnified
Party”) it shall notify the other Party (the “Indemnifying Party”) within15 (fifteen) days of
receipt of the claim or demand and shall not settle or pay the claim without the prior
approval of the Indemnifying Party, which approval shall not be unreasonably withheld
or delayed. In the event that the Indemnifying Party wishes to contest or dispute the
claim or demand, it may conduct the proceedings in the name ofthe Indemnified Party,
subject to the Indemnified Party being secured against any costs involved, to its
reasonable satisfaction.
23.4 Defence of claims
23.4.1 The Indemnified Party shall have the right, but not the obligation, to contest, defend and
litigate any claim, action, suit or proceeding by any third party alleged or asserted against
such Party in respect of, resulting from, related to or arising out of any matter for which
it is entitled to be indemnified hereunder, and reasonable costs and expensesthereof
shall be indemnified by the Indemnifying Party. If the Indemnifying Party acknowledges
in writing its obligation to indemnify the Indemnified Party in respect ofloss to the full
extent provided by this Agreement, the Indemnifying Party shall be entitled, at its option,
to assume and control the defence of such claim, action, suit or proceeding, liabilities,
payments and obligations at its expense and through the counselof its choice; provided it
gives prompt notice of its intention to do so to the IndemnifiedParty and reimburses the
Indemnified Party for the reasonable cost and expenses incurred by the Indemnified
Party prior to the assumption by the Indemnifying Party of such defence. The
Indemnifying Party shall not be entitled to settle or compromise any claim, demand,
action, suit or proceeding without the prior written consent of the Indemnified Party,
unless the Indemnifying Party provides such security to the Indemnified Party as shall be
reasonably required by the Indemnified Party to secure the loss to be indemnified
hereunder to the extent so compromised or settled.
23.4.2 If the Indemnifying Party has exercised its rights under Clause 23.3, the Indemnified Party
shall not be entitled to settle or compromise any claim, action, suit or proceedingwithout
the prior written consent of the Indemnifying Party (which consent shall not be
unreasonably withheld or delayed).
23.4.3 If the Indemnifying Party exercises its rights under Clause 23.3, the Indemnified Party
shall nevertheless have the right to employ its own counsel, and such counsel may
participate in such action, but the fees and expenses of such counsel shall be at the
expense of the Indemnified Party, when and as incurred, unless:
(a) the employment of counsel by such party has been authorized in writing by the
Indemnifying Party;
(b) the Indemnified Party shall have reasonably concluded that there may be a conflict of
interest between the Indemnifying Party and the Indemnified Party in the conduct of the
defence of such action;
Page 183 of 1358

(c) the Indemnifying Party shall not, in fact, have employed independent counsel reasonably
satisfactory to the Indemnified Party, to assume the defence of suchaction and shall have
been so notified by the Indemnified Party; or
(d) the Indemnified Party shall have reasonably concluded and specifically notified the
Indemnifying Party either:
(i) that there may be specific defences available to it which are differentfrom or
additional to those available to the Indemnifying Party; or
(ii) that such claim, action, suit or proceeding involves or could have amaterial
adverse effect upon it beyond the scope of this Agreement:
Provided that if Sub-clauses (b), (c) or (d) of this Clause 23.4.3 shall be applicable, the
counsel for the Indemnified Party shall have the right to direct the defence of such claim,
demand, action, suit or proceeding on behalf of the Indemnified Party, and the
reasonable fees and disbursements of such counsel shall constitute legal or other
expenses hereunder.
23.5 No consequential claims
Notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained in this Article 23, the indemnities
herein provided shall not include any claim or recovery in respect of any cost, expense,
loss or damage of an indirect, incidental or consequential nature, including loss of profit,
except as expressly provided in this Agreement.
23.6 Survival on Termination
The provisions of this Article 23 shall survive Termination.
Page 184 of 1358

ARTICLE 24
DISPUTE RESOLUTION
RESOULTION OF DISPUTES AND DISAGREEMENTS: If any dispute or difference of any kind

whatsoever shall arise between the parties in connection with or arising out of this
Agreement or out of the breach termination or invalidity of this Agreement thereof, the
parties shall resolve them by resorting to the following:
A. The Party shall attempt within a period of 30 days after receipt of notice by the other
party of the existence of a dispute, settle such dispute in the first instance by mutual
discussions between the parties represented by the EPC Contractor or their
authorized representative and Chief Engineer of IIM Indore.
B. If the dispute cannot be settled by mutual discussion within 30 days as provided

herein, the dispute shall be referred to the Director IIM Indore, whose decision shall
be full, final & binding on the parties.
Page 185 of 1358

ARTICLE 25
MISCELLANEOUS
25.1 Governing law and jurisdiction
This Agreement shall be construed and interpreted in accordance with and governed by
the laws of India, and only the courts in Indore (M.P. India) shall have exclusive
jurisdiction over matters arising out of or relating to this Agreement.
25.2 Waiver of immunity
Each Party unconditionally and irrevocably:
(a) agrees that the execution, delivery and performance by it of this Agreement constitute
commercial acts done and performed for commercial purpose;
(b) agrees that, should any proceedings be brought against it or its assets, property or
revenues in any jurisdiction in relation to this Agreement or any transaction
contemplated by this Agreement, no immunity (whether by reason of sovereignty or
otherwise) from such proceedings shall be claimed by or on behalf of the Party with
respect to its assets;
(c) waives any right of immunity which it or its assets, property or revenues now has, may
acquire in the future or which may be attributed to it in any jurisdiction;and
(d) consents generally in respect of the enforcement of any judgement or award against it
in any such proceedings to the giving of any relief or the issue of any process in any
jurisdiction in connection with such proceedings (including the making, enforcement or
execution against it or in respect of any assets, property or revenues whatsoever
irrespective of their use or intended use of any order orjudgement that may be made or
given in connection therewith).
25.3 Delayed payments
Refer Clause 17.7 in this of Article 17

25.4 Waiver
25.4.1 Waiver, including partial or conditional waiver, by either Party of any default by the other
Party in the observance and performance of any provision of or obligations underthis
Agreement:
(a) shall not operate or be construed as a waiver of any other or subsequent defaulthereof
or of other provisions of or obligations under this Agreement;
(b) shall not be effective unless it is in writing and executed by a duly authorized
representative of the Party; and
(c) shall not affect the validity or enforceability of this Agreement in any manner.
Page 186 of 1358

25.4.2 Neither the failure by either Party to insist on any occasion upon the performance of the
terms, conditions and provisions of this Agreement or any obligation thereunder nor
time or other indulgence granted by a Party to the other Party shall be treated or deemed
as waiver of such breach or acceptance of any variation or the relinquishment of any
such right hereunder.
25.5 Liability for review of Documents and Drawings
Except to the extent expressly provided in this Agreement:
(a) no review, comment or approval by the Authority or the Authority Engineer of any
Document or Drawing submitted by the EPC Contractor nor any observation or
inspection of the construction of the Project nor the failure to review,approve,
comment, observe or inspect hereunder shall relieve or absolve the EPC Contractor from
its obligations, duties and liabilities under this Agreement, Applicable Laws and
Applicable Permits; and
(b) the Authority shall not be liable to the EPC Contractor by reason of any review, comment,
approval, observation or inspection referred to in Sub-clause (a) above.
25.6 Exclusion of implied warranties etc.
This Agreement expressly excludes any warranty, condition or other undertaking implied
at law or by custom or otherwise arising out of any other agreement between the Parties
or any representation by either Party not contained in a binding legal agreement
executed by both Parties.
25.7 Survival
25.7.1 Termination shall:
(a) not relieve the EPC Contractor or the Authority, as the case may be, of any obligations
hereunder which expressly or by implication survive Termination hereof; and
(b) except as otherwise provided in any provision of this Agreement expressly limiting the
liability of either Party, not relieve either Party of any obligations or liabilities for loss or
damage to the other Party arising out of, or caused by, acts or omissions of such Party
prior to the effectiveness of such Termination or arising out of such Termination.
25.7.2 All obligations surviving Termination shall only survive for a period of 3 (three) years
following the date of such Termination.
25.8 Entire Agreement
This Agreement and the Schedules together constitute a complete and exclusive
statement of the terms of the agreement between the Parties on the subject hereof, and
no amendment or modification hereto shall be valid and effective unless such
modification or amendment is agreed to in writing by the Parties and duly executed by
persons especially empowered in this behalf by the respective Parties. All prior writtenor
oral understandings, offers or other communications of every kind pertaining to this
Page 187 of 1358

Agreement are abrogated and withdrawn. For the avoidance of doubt, the Parties hereto
agree that any obligations of the EPC Contractor arising from the Request for
Qualificationor Request for Proposals and bid submissions, as the case may be, shall be
deemed to form part of this Agreement and treated as such.
25.9 Severability
If for any reason whatsoever, any provision of this Agreement is or becomes invalid,
illegal or unenforceable or is declared by any court of competent jurisdiction or any other
instrumentality to be invalid, illegal or unenforceable, the validity, legality or
enforceability of the remaining provisions shall not be affected in any manner, and the
Parties will negotiate in good faith with a view to agreeing to one or more provisions
which may be substituted for such invalid, unenforceable or illegal provisions, as nearlyas
is practicable to such invalid, illegal or unenforceable provision. Failure to agree upon
any such provisions shall not be subject to the Dispute Resolution Procedure set forth
under this Agreement or otherwise.
25.10 No partnership
This Agreement shall not be interpreted or construed to create an association, joint

venture or partnership between the Parties, or to impose any partnership obligation or
liability upon either Party, and neither Party shall have any right, power or authority to
enter into any agreement or undertaking for, or act on behalf of, or to act as or be an
agent or representative of, or to otherwise bind, the other Party.
25.11 Third parties
This Agreement is intended solely for the benefit of the Parties, and their respective
successors and permitted assigns, and nothing in this Agreement shall be construed to
create any duty to, standard of care with reference to, or any liability to, any person nota
Party to this Agreement.
25.12 Successors and assigns.
This Agreement shall be binding upon and inure to the benefit of the Parties and their
respective successors and permitted assigns.
25.13 Notices
Any notice or other communication to be given by any Party to the other Party under or
in connection with the matters contemplated by this Agreement shall be in writing and
shall:
(a) in the case of the EPC Contractor, be given by facsimile or e-mail and by letter delivered
by hand to the address given and marked for attention of the person set out below or to
such other person as the EPC Contractor may from time to time designate by notice to
the Authority; provided that notices or othercommunications to be given to an
address outside the city specified in Sub- clause (b) below may, if they are subsequently
confirmed by sending a copy thereof by registered acknowledgement due, air mail or by
courier, be sent by facsimile or e-mail to the person as the EPC Contractor may from time
to time designate by notice to the Authority;
Page 188 of 1358

Attention:
{Designation:
Address:
Fax No:
Email:}
(b) in the case of the Authority, be given by facsimile or e-mail and by letter delivered by
hand and be addressed to the person named below with a copy delivered to the
Authority Representative or such other person as the Authoritymay from time to time
designate by notice to the EPC Contractor; provided that if the EPC Contractor does not
have an office in the same city as the Authority, it maysend such notice by facsimile or e-
mail and by registered acknowledgement due,air mail or by courier;
{Designation:
Address:
Fax No:
Email:}; and
(c) any notice or communication by a Party to the other Party, given in accordanceherewith,
shall be deemed to have been delivered when in the normal course ofpost it ought to
have been delivered and in all other cases, it shall be deemed tohave been delivered on
the actual date and time of delivery; provided that in thecase of facsimile or e-mail, it shall
be deemed to have been delivered on the working day following the date of its delivery.
25.14 Language
All notices required to be given by one Party to the other Party and all other
communications, Documentation and proceedings which are in any way relevant to this
Agreement shall be in writing and in English language.
25.15 Counterparts
This Agreement may be executed in two counterparts, each of which, when executed and
delivered, shall constitute an original of this Agreement.
25.16 Confidentiality
The Parties shall treat the details of this Agreement as private and confidential, except to
the extent necessary to carry out obligations under it or to comply with Applicable Laws.
The EPC Contractor shall not publish, permit to be published, or disclose anyparticulars
of the Works in any trade or technical paper or elsewhere without the previous consent
of the Authority.
25.17 Copyright and Intellectual Property rights
25.17.1As between the Parties, the EPC Contractor shall retain the copyright and other
Intellectual Property rights in the EPC Contractor's Documents and other design
documents made by (oron behalf of) the EPC Contractor. The EPC Contractor shall be
deemed (by signing this Agreement) to give to the Authority a non-terminable
transferable non-exclusiveroyalty-free license to copy, use and communicate the EPC
Page 189 of 1358

Contractor's Documents, including making and using modifications of them. This license
shall:
(a) apply throughout the actual or intended working life (whichever is longer) of the relevant
parts of the Works,
(b) entitle any person in proper possession of the relevant part of the Works to copy,use and
communicate the EPC Contractor's Documents for the purposes of completing,
operating, maintaining, altering, adjusting, repairing and demolishing the Works, and
(c) in the case of EPC Contractor's Documents which are in the form of computer programs
and other software, permit their use on any computer on the Site and other places as
envisaged by this Agreement, including replacements of any computers supplied by the
EPC Contractor:
25.17.2The EPC Contractor's Documents and other design documents made by (or on behalf of)
the EPC Contractor shall not, without the EPC Contractor's consent, be used, copied or
communicatedto a third party by (or on behalf of) the Authority for purposes other than
those permittedunder this Clause 25.17.
25.17.3As between the Parties, the Authority shall retain the copyright and other Intellectual
Property rights in this Agreement and other documents made by (or on behalf of) the
Authority. The EPC Contractor may, at its cost, copy, use, and obtain communication of
these documents for the purposes of this Agreement. They shall not, without the
Authority's consent, be copied, used or communicated to a third party by the EPC
Contractor,except as necessary for the purposes of the contract.
25.18 Limitation of Liability

25.18.1Neither Party shall be liable to the other Party for loss of use of any Works, loss of profit,
loss of any contract or for any indirect or consequential loss or damage which may be
suffered by the other Party in connection with this Agreement.
25.18.2The total liability of one Party to the other Party under and in accordance with the
provisions of this Agreement, save and except as provided in Articles 21 and 23, shall not
exceed the Contract Price. For the avoidance of doubt, this Clause shall not limit the
liability in any case of fraud, deliberate default or reckless misconduct by the defaulting
Party.
Page 190 of 1358

ARTICLE 26
DEFINITIONS
26.1 Definitions
In this Agreement, the following words and expressions shall, unless repugnant to the
contextor meaning thereof, have the meaning hereinafter respectively assigned to
them:
“Accounting Year” means the financial year commencing from the first day of April of
anycalendar year and ending on the thirty-first day of March of the next calendar year;
“Advance Payment” shall have the meaning as set forth in Clause 17.2.1;
“Affected Party” shall have the meaning as set forth in Clause 19.1;
“Affiliate” means, in relation to either Party {and/or Members}, a person who controls,
is controlled by, or is under the common control with such Party {or Member} (as used
in this definition, the expression “control” means, with respect to a person which is a
company or corporation, the ownership, directly or indirectly, of more than 50% (fifty per
cent) of the voting shares of such person, and with respect to a person which is not a
company or corporation, the power to direct the management and policies of such
person, whether by operation of law or by contract or otherwise);
“Agreement” means this Agreement, its Recitals, the Schedules hereto and any
amendments thereto made in accordance with the provisions contained in this
Agreement;
“Applicable Laws” means all laws, brought into force and effect by GOI or the
StateGovernment(s) including rules, regulations and notifications made thereunder, and
judgements,decrees, injunctions, writs and orders of any court of record, applicable to
this Agreement andthe exercise, performance and discharge of the respective rights and
obligations of the Parties hereunder, as may be in force and effect during the subsistence
of this Agreement;
“Applicable Permits” means all clearances, licenses, permits, authorizations, no

objection certificates, consents, approvals and exemptions required to be obtained or
maintained under Applicable Laws in connection with the construction of the Project
during the subsistence ofthis Agreement;
“Appointed Date” means that date which is later of:
(a) the 15th day of the date of this Agreement;
(b) the date on which the EPC Contractor has delivered the Performance Security in
accordancewith the provisions of Article 7;
(c) the date on which the Authority has provided the Right of Way on at least 90% (ninety
percent) of the total land required for the Project in conformity with the provisions of
Page 191 of 1358

Clause 8.2; and
(d) the date on which the Authority has provided to the EPC Contractor the environmental
and forest clearances for at least 90% of the total land required for the Project;
“Arbitration Act” means the Arbitration and Conciliation Act, 1996 and shall include
modifications to or any re-enactment thereof, as in force from time to time;
“Authority” shall have the meaning THE DIRECTOR OF IIMI represented by [INDIAN
INSTITUTE OF MANAGEMENT INDORE] and having its principal offices at Rau-Pithampur
Road, Indore-453556, M.P. (hereinafter referred to as the “Authority” which expression
shall, unless repugnant to the context or meaning thereof, include its administrators,
successors and assigns).
“Chief Engineer” shall have the meaning as the head of projects from the Authority.
“Authority Default” shall have the meaning as set forth in Clause 21.2.1;
“Authority Engineer” shall have the meaning as set forth in Clause 16.1.1;
“Authority Representative” means such person or persons as may be authorized in

writing by the Authority to act on its behalf under this Agreement and shall include any
person or persons having authority to exercise any rights or perform and fulfil any
obligations of the Authority under this Agreement;
“Bank” means a bank incorporated in India and having a minimum net worth of Rs. 1,000
crore (Rupees one thousand crore) or any other bank acceptable to the Authority;
“Bank Rate” means the rate of interest specified by the Reserve Bank of India from time
to time in pursuance of section 49 of the Reserve Bank of India Act, 1934 or any
replacement ofsuch Bank Rate for the time being in effect;
“Base Date” means the last date of that calendar month, which date precedes the Bid Due
Dateby at least 28 (twenty-eight) days;
“Bid” means the documents in their entirety comprised in the bid submitted by the
[selected bidder] in response to the Request for Proposals in accordance with the
provisions thereof and “Bids” shall mean the bids submitted by any and all pre-qualified
bidders;
“Bid Security” means the bid security provided by the EPC Contractor to the Authority in
accordance with the Request for Proposals, and which is to remain in force until
substituted bythe Performance Security;
“CPI (IW)” means the Consumer Price Index for Industrial Workers as published by the
Labour Bureau, Government of India and shall include any index which substitutes the
CPI (IW), and any reference to CPI (IW) shall, unless the context otherwise requires, be
construed as a reference to the CPI (IW) published for the period ending with the
preceding month;
“Change of Scope” shall have the meaning as set forth in Article 13;
Page 192 of 1358

“Change of Scope Notice” shall have the meaning as set forth in Clause 13.2.1;
“Change of Scope Order” shall have the meaning as set forth in Clause 13.2.4;
“Completion Certificate” shall have the meaning as set forth in Clause 12.4.1;
{“Consortium” means the consortium of entities which have formed a joint venture for
implementation of this Project;}$
“Construction” shall have the meaning as set forth in Clause 1.2.1 (f);
“Construction Period” means the period commencing from the Appointed Date and
ending on the date of the Completion Certificate;
“Contract Price” means the amount as specified in Clause 17.1.1;
“EPC Contractor” shall have the meaning attributed thereto in the array of Parties
hereinabove as set forth in the Recitals;
“EPC Contractor Default” shall have the meaning as set forth in Clause 21.1.1;
“Cure Period” means the period specified in this Agreement for curing any breach or
default of any provision of this Agreement by the Party responsible for such breach or
default and shall:
(a) commence from the date on which a notice is delivered by one Party to the other Party
asking the latter to cure the breach or default specified in such notice;
(b) not relieve any Party from liability to pay Damages or compensation under the provisions
of this Agreement; and
(c) not in any way be extended by any period of Suspension under this Agreement; provided
that if the cure of any breach by the EPC Contractor requires any reasonable actionby the
EPC Contractor that must be approved by the Authority or the Authority Engineer
hereunder, the applicable Cure Period shall be extended by the period taken by the
Authority or the Authority Engineer to accord their approval;
“Damages” shall have the meaning as set forth in paragraph (w) of Clause 1.2.1;
“Defect” means any defect or deficiency in Construction of the Works or any part
thereof,which does not conform with the Specifications and Standards;
“Defects Liability Period” shall have the meaning as set forth in Clause 15.1.1;
“Dispute” Any dispute, difference or controversy of whatever nature howsoever arising

under or out of or in relation to this Agreement (including its interpretation) between
the Parties, and so notified in writing by either Party to the other Party (the “Dispute”)
“Dispute Resolution Procedure” means the procedure for resolution of Disputes as set
forth in Article 24;
“Drawings” means all of the drawings, calculations and documents pertaining to the
Page 193 of 1358

Project as set forth in Schedule-H, and shall include ‘as built’ drawings of the Project;
“Document” or “Documentation” means documentation in printed or written form, or

in tapes, discs, drawings, computer programmes, writings, reports, photographs, films,
cassettes,or expressed in any other written, electronic, audio or visual form;
“Emergency” means a condition or situation that is likely to endanger the safety or

security ofthe individuals on or about the Project, including Users thereof, or which poses
an immediate threat of material damage to the Works or any of the Project Assets;
“Encumbrances” means, in relation to the Project, any encumbrances such as mortgage,

charge, pledge, lien, hypothecation, security interest, assignment, privilege or priority of
any kind having the effect of security or other such obligations, and shall include any
designation of loss payees or beneficiaries or any similar arrangement under any
insurance policy pertaining to the Project, where applicable herein but excluding utilities
referred to in Clause 9.1;
“EPC” means engineering, procurement and construction;
“Final Payment Certificate” shall have the meaning as set forth in Clause 17.12.1;
“Final Payment Statement” shall have the meaning as set forth in Clause 17.10.1;
“Force Majeure” or “Force Majeure Event” shall have the meaning ascribed to it in
Clause19.1;
“GAD” or “General Arrangement Drawings” shall have the meaning as set forth in
Clause 4.1.3 (b);
“GOI” or “Government” means the Government of India;
“Good Industry Practice” means the practices, methods, techniques, designs,

standards, skills, diligence, efficiency, reliability and prudence which are generally and
reasonably expected from a reasonably skilled and experienced EPC Contractor engaged
in the same type of undertaking as envisaged under this Agreement and which would be
expected to result in the performance of its obligations by the EPC Contractor in
accordance with this Agreement, ApplicableLaws and Applicable Permits in reliable, safe,
economical and efficient manner;
“Government Instrumentality” means any department, division or sub-division of the

Government or the State Government and includes any commission, board, authority,
agency or municipal and other local authority or statutory body, including panchayat,
under the controlof the Government or the State Government, as the case may be, and
having jurisdiction over all or any part of the Project or the performance of all or any of
the services or obligations of the EPC Contractor under or pursuant to this Agreement;
“IRC” means the Indian Roads Congress;
“Indemnified Party” means the Party entitled to the benefit of an indemnity pursuant to
Article23;
“Indemnifying Party” means the Party obligated to indemnify the other Party pursuant
Page 194 of 1358

to Article 23;
“Indirect Political Event” shall have the meaning as set forth in Clause 19.3;
“Insurance Cover” means the aggregate of the maximum sums insured under the
insurances taken out by the EPC Contractor pursuant to Article 18, and includes all
insurances required to be taken out by the EPC Contractor under Clauses 18.1 and 18.9
but not actually taken, and when usedin the context of any act or event, it shall mean the
aggregate of the maximum sums insured and payable or deemed to be insured and
payable in relation to such act or event;
“Intellectual Property” means all patents, trademarks, service marks, logos, get-up,
trade names, internet domain names, rights in designs, blue prints, programmes and
manuals, drawings, copyright (including rights in computer software), database rights,
semi-conductor, topography rights, utility models, rights in know-how and other
intellectual property rights, ineach case whether registered or unregistered and including
applications for registration, and allrights or forms of protection having equivalent or
similar effect anywhere in the world;
“Interim Payment Certificate” or “IPC” means the interim payment certificate issued by
theAuthority Engineer for payment to the EPC Contractor in respect of EPC Contractor’s
claims for payment raised in accordance with the provisions of this Agreement;
“LOA” or “Letter of Acceptance” means the letter of acceptance referred to in Recital

(D);
{“Lead Member” shall, in the case of a consortium, mean the member of such consortium
who shall have the authority to bind the EPC Contractor and each member of the
Consortium; and shall be deemed to be the EPC Contractor for the purposes of this
Agreement;}$
“Major Bridge” means a bridge having a linear waterway of 18 metres or more or which
has a clear opening of 12 metres or more in spans;
“Manuals” shall mean the manuals as specified in Schedule D
“Material Adverse Effect” means a material adverse effect of any act or event on the
ability of either Party to perform any of its obligations under and in accordance with the
provisions ofthis Agreement and which act or event causes a material financial burden or
loss to either Party;
“Materials” are all the supplies used by the EPC Contractor for incorporation in the
Works of the Project;
“Non-Political Event” shall have the meaning as set forth in Clause 19.2;
“Parties” means the parties to this Agreement collectively and “Party” shall mean any of
theparties to this Agreement individually;
“Performance Security” shall have the meaning as set forth in Clause 7.1.1;
Page 195 of 1358

$
This definition may be omitted if the EPC Contractor is not a Consortium.
“Plant” means the apparatus and machinery intended to form or forming part of the
Works;“Political Event” shall have the meaning as set forth in Clause 19.4;
“Programme” shall have the meaning as set forth in Clause 10.1.3;
“Project” means the construction of the Project in accordance with the provisions of this
Agreement, and includes all works, services and equipment relating to or in respect of
the Scope of the Project;
“Project Assets” means all physical and other assets relating to (a) tangible assets such as
civil works and equipment including [foundations, embankments, pavements, road
surface, interchanges, bridges, culverts, road over-bridges, drainage works, traffic signals,
sign boards, kilometre-stones, electrical systems, communication systems, rest areas,
relief centres, maintenance depots and administrative offices]; and (b) Project Facilities
situated on the Site;
“Project Completion Date” means the date on which the Completion Certificate is issued.
“Project Completion Schedule” means the progressive Project Milestones set forth in
Schedule-I for completion of the Project on or before the Scheduled Completion Date;
“Project Facilities” means all the amenities and facilities to be constructed on the Site,
as described in Schedule-C;
“Project Milestone” means the project milestone as set forth in Schedule-I and includes
theScheduled Completion Date;
“Proof Consultant” shall have the meaning as set forth in Clause 10.2.2; “Provisional
Certificate” shall have the meaning as set forth in Clause 12.2.1; “Punch List” shall have
the meaning as set forth in Clause 12.2.1;
“Quality Assurance Plan” or “QAP” shall have the meaning as set forth in Clause 11.2.1;
“Re.”, “Rs.” or “Rupees” or “Indian Rupees” means the lawful currency of the Republic
ofIndia;
“Request for Proposals” or “RFP” shall have the meaning as set forth in Recital (C);
“Request for Qualification” or “RFQ” shall have the meaning as set forth in Recital (B);
“Retention Money” shall have the meaning as set forth in Clause 7.5.1;
“Right of Way” means the constructive possession of the Site free from encroachments
and encumbrances, together with all way leaves, easements, unrestricted access and
other rights ofway, howsoever described, necessary for construction of the Project in
Page 196 of 1358

accordance with this Agreement;

“Safety Consultant” shall have the meaning as set forth in Clause 10.1.5; “Scheduled
Completion Date” shall be the date as set forth in Clause 10.3.1;
“Scope of the Project” shall have the meaning as set forth in Clause 2.1;
“Section” means a part of the Project;
“Site” shall have the meaning as set forth in Clause 8.1;
“Specifications and Standards” means the specifications and standards relating to the
quality,quantity, capacity and other requirements for the Project, as set forth in Schedule-
D, and any modifications thereof, or additions thereto, as included in the design and
engineering for the Project submitted by the EPC Contractor to, and expressly approved
by, the Authority;
“Stage Payment Statement” shall have the meaning as set forth in Clause 17.4;
“State” means the State or the Union Territory, as the case may be, in which the
headquarters of the Authority are situate and “State Government” means the
government of that State or Union Territory;
“Structures” means an elevated [road or a flyover], as the case may be;
“Sub- Contractor” means any person or persons to whom a part of the Works has been
subcontracted by the EPC Contractor and the permitted legal successors in title to such
person, but not an assignee to such person;
“Suspension” shall have the meaning as set forth in Clause 20.1;
“Taxes” means any Indian taxes including excise duties, customs duties, value added tax,
sales tax, local taxes, cess and any impost or surcharge of like nature (whether Central,
State or local) on the goods, Materials, equipment and services incorporated in and
forming part of the Project charged, levied or imposed by any Government
Instrumentality, but excluding any interest, penalties and other sums in relation thereto
imposed on any account whatsoever. For the avoidance of doubt, Taxes shall not include
taxes on corporate income;
“Termination” means the expiry or termination of this Agreement;
“Termination Notice” means the communication issued in accordance with this

Agreement by one Party to the other Party terminating this Agreement;
“Termination Payment” means the amount payable by either Party to the other upon
Termination in accordance with Article 21;
“Tests” means the tests set forth in Schedule-J to determine the completion of Works in
accordance with the provisions of this Agreement;
“Time Extension” shall have the meaning as set forth in Clause 10.4.1;
Page 197 of 1358

“User” means a person who uses or intends to use the Project or any part thereof in
accordancewith the provision of this Agreement and Applicable Laws;
“Valuation of Unpaid works” shall have the meaning as set forth in Clause 21.5.1;
“WPI” means the wholesale price index for various commodities as published by the
Ministryof Commerce and Industry, GOI and shall include any index which substitutes
the WPI, and any reference to WPI shall, unless the context otherwise requires, be
construed as a reference to the WPI published for the period ending with the preceding
month; and
“Works” means all works including survey and investigation, design, engineering,
procurement, construction, Plant, Materials, temporary works and other things
necessary to complete the Project in accordance with this Agreement.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF THE PARTIES HAVE EXECUTED AND DELIVERED THIS

AGREEMENT AS OF THE DAY, MONTH AND YEAR FIRST ABOVE WRITTEN.
SIGNED, SEALED AND DELIVERED SIGNED, SEALED AND DELIVERED
For and on behalf of THE AUTHORITY by: For and on behalf of
THE EPC CONTRACTOR by:
(Signature) (Name) (Designation)
In the presence of:
1.
2.
(Signature) (Name) (Designation)
{COUNTERSIGNED and accepted by:
Name and particulars of other members of the Consortium}
Page 198 of 1358

Schedules
Page 199 of 1358

SCHEDULE - A
(See Clauses 2.1 and 8.1)
SITE OF THE PROJECT
1 The Site
1.1 The site of the Project shall include the land, buildings, structures and roadworks as
described in Annex-I of this Schedule-A.
1.2 The dates of providing the Right of Way to the EPC Contractor are specified in Annex-II of
this Schedule-A.
1.3 An inventory of the Site including the land, buildings, structures, road works, trees and
any other immovable property on, or attached to, the Site shall be prepared jointly by
the Authority Representative and the EPC Contractor, and such inventory shall form part
ofthe memorandum referred to in Clause 8.2.1 of this Agreement.
1.4 Deleted.
1.5 The status of the environmental clearances obtained or awaited is given in Annex IV.
1.6 The EPC Contractor with prior approval may use the land allocated for Group VIII Projects
appropriately without affecting the layout of the Project buildings & services, for the
establishment of their Batching plant, site offices, godowns, etc. on their cost and risk.
However, no labor camp or overnight stay for any of the contractor's labor, manpower,
staff, etc will be allowed inside the campus. Only security personal for guarding will be
allowed. The above said land is provided without any charges/ rent, during the project
execution. The connected clauses given in the RFP should be strictly followed.
Page 200 of 1358

Annex - I
(Schedule-A)
Site for Project9
[Note: Through suitable drawings and description in words, the land, buildings,
structures and road works comprising the Site shall be specified briefly but precisely in
this Annex-I.]
Refer Tender Drawings for details.
Page 201 of 1358

Annex - II
(Schedule-A)
Dates for providing Right of Way
The dates on which the Authority shall provide Right of Way to the EPC Contractor
ondifferent Sections of the Site are specified below:
The authorities has confirmed there is not Right of Way clause operated for this Project
since the proposed land is integral part of the campus and hold the land parcel for the
further expansion. Authority has obtained necessary clearance from the Approval
Authority and shall be handed over to the EPC Contractor from day 1 on issuing the LOA.
Page 202 of 1358

Annex - III
(Schedule-A)
Alignment Plans10
NOT APPLICABLE
Page 203 of 1358

Annex - IV
(Schedule-A)
Deleted
Page 204 of 1358

SCHEDULE - B
(See Clause 2.1)
DEVELOPMENT OF THE PROJECT
1 Development of the Project
Development of the Project shall include design and construction of the Project as
described in this Annexure I, Schedule-B and in Schedule-C.
2 Rehabilitation and augmentation11
NA
3 Specifications and Standards
The Project shall be designed and constructed in conformity with the Specifications and
Standards specified in Annex-I of Schedule-D.
Page 205 of 1358

Annex - I
(Schedule-B)
Description of the Project12
Refer Chapter-3, Brief Details and Objective of Work of this RFP Document.
Page 206 of 1358

SCHEDULE - C
(See Clause 2.1)
PROJECT FACILITIES13
Refer Clause 9.63.4.3 of Special Conditions of Contract of this RFP Document.
Page 207 of 1358

SCHEDULE - D
(See Clause 2.1)
SPECIFICATIONS AND STANDARDS
1 Construction
The EPC Contractor shall comply with the Specifications and Standards set forth in Annex-I of
this Schedule-D for construction of the Project.
Page 208 of 1358

Annex - I
(Schedule-D)
Specifications and Standards for Construction15
1 Specifications and Standards
All Materials, works and construction operations shall conform to the Manual of
Standards and Specifications for CPWD Works. Where the specification for a work is not
given, Good Industry Practice shall be adopted to the satisfaction of the Authority
Engineer. However, the DBR and technical specifications are attached herewith the RFP,
the most stringent specifications to be followed w.r.t CPWD and attached technical
specification.
2 Deviations from the Specifications and Standards
2.1 The terms “Concessionaire”, “Independent Engineer” and “Concession Agreement” used
in the Manual shall be deemed to be substituted by the terms “EPC Contractor”,
“Authority Engineer” and “Agreement” respectively.
2.2 [Notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained in Paragraph 1 above, the following
Specifications and Standards shall apply to the Project, and for purposes of this
Agreement, the aforesaid Specifications and Standards shall be deemed to be amended
to the extent set forth below:]
[Specify the deviations, if any]
[Note: Deviations from the aforesaid Specifications and Standards shall be listed out here. Such
deviations shall be specified only if they are considered essential in view ofproject-specific
requirements.]
Page 209 of 1358

SCHEDULE - E
(See Clause 3.1.7(a))
APPLICABLE PERMITS
1 Applicable Permits16
1.1 The EPC Contractor shall obtain, as required under Applicable Laws, the following
Applicable Permits:
(a) Permission of the State Government for extraction of boulders from quarry;
(b) Permission of Village Panchayats and Pollution Control Board for installationof
crushers;
(c) License for use of explosives;
(d) Permission of the State Government for drawing water from river/reservoir;
(e) License from inspector of factories or other competent Authority for setting up batching
plant;
(f) Clearance of Pollution Control Board for setting up batching plant;
(g) Clearance of Village Panchayats and Pollution Control Board for setting upasphalt
plant;
(h) Permission of Village Panchayats and State Government for borrow earth; and
(i) Any other permits or clearances required under Applicable Laws.
Page 210 of 1358

SCHEDULE - F
(See Clauses 7.1.1, 7.5.3 and 19.2)
FORM OF BANK GUARANTEE
Annex-I
(See Clause 7.1.1)
Form of Guarantee for Performance Security
Please refer Form for Bank Guarantee as mentioned in Chapter FORMS of this RFP.
Page 211 of 1358

Annex – II (Schedule - F) (See Clause 7.5.3)
Form of Guarantee for Withdrawal of Retention Money
Deleted.
Page 212 of 1358

Annex – III (Schedule - F) (See Clause 19.2)
Form of Guarantee for Advance Payment
…………………..,…………………..,
………………….,WHEREAS:
(A) …………………………………… (insert name and address of the EPC Contractor)

(hereinafter called the “EPC Contractor” has executed an agreement (hereinafter called
the “Agreement”) with the (insert name and address of the project authority),
(hereinafter called the “Authority”) for the construction of the ……………. Engineering,
Procurement and Construction (the “EPC”) basis,subject to and in accordance with the
provisions of the Agreement
(B) In accordance with Clause 19.2 of the Agreement, the Authority shall make to the EPC
Contractor an advance payment (herein after called “Advance Payment”)equal to 10%
(ten per cent) of the Contract Price; and that the Advance Payment shall be made in three
instalments subject to the EPC Contractor furnishing an irrevocable and unconditional
guarantee by a scheduled commercial bank for an amount equivalent to 110% (one
hundred and ten per cent) of such instalment to remain effective till the complete and
full repayment of the instalment of the Advance Payment as security for compliance with
its obligations in accordance with the Agreement. The amount of {first/second/third}
instalment of the Advance Payment is Rs ................................................. cr. (Rupees
…………………. crore) and the amount of this Guarantee is Rs ........ cr. (Rupees crore)
(the “Guarantee Amount”)$.
(C) We, …………………... through our branch at …………………. (the “Bank”) have agreed to furnish
this bank guarantee (hereinafter called the “Guarantee”) for the Guarantee Amount.
NOW, THEREFORE, the Bank hereby, unconditionally, and irrevocably, guarantees

andaffirms as follows:
1. The Bank hereby unconditionally and irrevocably guarantees the due and faithful
repayment on time of the aforesaid instalment of the Advance Payment under and in
accordance with the Agreement, and agrees and undertakes to pay to the Authority,
upon its mere first written demand, and without any demur, reservation, recourse,
contest or protest, and without any reference to the EPC Contractor, such sum or sums
up toan aggregate sum of the Guarantee Amount as the Authority shall claim, without
the Authority being required to prove or to show grounds or reasons for its demand
and/orfor the sum specified therein.
2. A letter from the Authority, under the hand of an officer not below the rank of a Chief
Engineer of the Authority, that the EPC Contractor has committed default in the due and
faithful performance of all or any of its obligations for the repayment of the instalment.
of the Advance Payment under and in accordance with the Agreement shall be
conclusive, final and binding on the Bank. The Bank further agrees that the Authority
shall be the sole judge as to whether the EPC Contractor is in default in due and faithful
performance of its obligations during and under the Agreement and its decision that the
EPC Contractor is in default shall be final and binding on the Bank, notwithstanding any
Page 213 of 1358

differences between the Authority and the EPC Contractor, or any dispute between them
pending before any court, tribunal, arbitrators or any other authority or body, or by the
discharge of the EPC Contractor for any reason whatsoever.
3. In order to give effect to this Guarantee, the Authority shall be entitled to act as if the
Bank were the principal debtor and any change in the constitution of the EPC Contractor
and/or the Bank, whether by their absorption with any other body or corporation or
otherwise, shall not in any way or manner affect the liability or obligation of the Bank
under this Guarantee.
4. It shall not be necessary, and the Bank hereby waives any necessity, for the Authority to
proceed against the EPC Contractor before presenting to the Bank its demand under this
Guarantee.
5. The Authority shall have the liberty, without affecting in any manner the liability of the
Bank under this Guarantee, to vary at any time, the terms and conditions of the Advance
Payment or to extend the time or period of its repayment or to postpone for any time,
and from time to time, any of the rights and powers exercisable by the Authority against
the EPC Contractor, and either to enforce or forbear from enforcing any of the terms and
conditions contained in the Agreement and/or the securities available to the Authority,
and the Bank shall not be released from its liability and obligation under these presents
by any exercise by the Authority of the liberty with reference to the matters aforesaid or
by reason of time being given to the EPC Contractor or any other forbearance, indulgence,
act or omission on the part of the Authority or of any other matter or thing whatsoever
which under any law relating to sureties and guarantors would but for this provision have
the effect of releasing the Bank from its liability and obligation under this Guarantee and
the Bank hereby waives all of its rights under any such law.
6. This Guarantee is in addition to and not in substitution of any other guarantee or security
now or which may hereafter be held by the Authority in respect of or relating to the
Advance Payment.
7. Notwithstanding anything contained hereinbefore, the liability of the Bank under this
Guarantee is restricted to the Guarantee Amount and this Guarantee will remain in force
for the period specified in paragraph 8 below and unless a demand or claim in writing is
made by the Authority on the Bank under this Guarantee all rights of the Authority
under this Guarantee shall be forfeited and the Bank shall be relieved from its liabilities
hereunder.
8. The Guarantee shall cease to be in force and effect on______________ Unless a demand or
claim under this Guarantee is made in writing on or before the aforesaid date, the Bank
shallbe discharged from its liabilities hereunder.
9. The Bank undertakes not to revoke this Guarantee during its currency, except with the
previous express consent of the Authority in writing and declares and warrants that it
has the power to issue this Guarantee and the undersigned has full powers to do so on
behalf of the Bank.
Page 214 of 1358

10. Any notice by way of request, demand or otherwise hereunder may be sent by post
addressed to the Bank at its above referred branch, which shall be deemed to have been
duly authorized to receive such notice and to effect payment thereof forthwith, and if
sent by post it shall be deemed to have been given at the time when it ought to have
been delivered in due course of post and in proving such notice, when given by post, it
shall be sufficient to prove that the envelope containing the notice was posted and a
certificate signed by an officer of the Authority that the envelope was so posted shall be
conclusive.
11. This Guarantee shall come into force with immediate effect and shall remain in force and
effect up to the date specified in paragraph 8 above or until it is released earlier by the
Authority pursuant to the provisions of the Agreement.
Signed and sealed this ………. day of ………., 20……… at ………...
SIGNED, SEALED AND DELIVERED
For and on behalf of the Bank by:(Signature)
(Name) (Designation) (Code Number)(Address) NOTES:
(i) The bank guarantee should contain the name, designation and code number of the
officer(s) signing the guarantee.
(ii) The address, telephone number and other details of the head office of the Bankas well
as of issuing branch should be mentioned on the covering letter of issuing branch.
Page 215 of 1358

SCHEDULE - G
(See Clauses10.1.4 and 19.3)
CONTRACT PRICE WEIGHTAGES
GENERAL RULES & DIRECTIONS:
Officer inviting tender : Director, IIM Indore

Agreement authority : Director, IIM Indore
Applicable mode Contracts : EPC Mode
Type of Building : As per this RFP
Construction Technology : As per this RFP
Definitions:
Engineer-in-Charge : Chief Officer Engineering, IIM Indore

Accepting Authority : Director, IIM Indore
The start date/ commencement date : As per the communication issued by the Institute.
1.1 Proportions of the Contract Price for different stages of Construction of the Project
shall be as specified in Chapter 7, of this RFP document.
Page 216 of 1358

Clause 17.8 Price Adjustment for Works:
For Construction Period
Percentage of
Relevant Component of Material / Labour etc. for price escalation total value of % Age
work
Component of Cement Cp 3%
Component of Labour Lp 25%
Civil Component of Other Construction Materials CMp 30%
E&M Component of Construction Materials EMp 29%
Component of POL Fp 5%
Component of Reinforcement Steel / TMT Bars / Structural Steel Sp 8%
Component of Bitumen Bp 0%
100%
Page 217 of 1358

SCHEDULE - H
(See Clause 10.2.4)
DRAWINGS
1 Drawings
In compliance of the obligations set forth in Clause 10.2 of this Agreement, the EPC
Contractor shall furnish to the Authority Engineer, free of cost, all Drawings listed in
Annex-I of this Schedule-H.
2 Additional Drawings
If the Authority Engineer determines that for discharging its duties and functions under
this Agreement, it requires any drawings other than those listed in Annex-I, it may by
notice require the EPC Contractor to prepare and furnish such drawings forthwith. Upon
receiving a requisition to this effect, the EPC Contractor shall promptly prepare and
furnish such drawings to the Authority Engineer, as if such drawings formed part of
Annex-I of this Schedule-H.
Annex - I
(Schedule - H)
List of Drawings
[Note: The drawings as listed but not limited to as listed in Chapter-6 “ Scope of works” of this
RFP.]
Page 218 of 1358

SCHEDULE - I
(See Clause 10.3.2)
PROJECT COMPLETION SCHEDULE
1 Project Completion Schedule
During Construction period, the EPC Contractor shall comply with the requirements set
forth in this Schedule-I for each of the Project Milestones and the Scheduled Completion
Date. Within 15 (fifteen) days of the date of each Project Milestone, the EPC Contractor
shall notify the Authority of such compliance along with necessary particulars thereof.
For project milestones Refer the attached schedule Chapter 7 Milestone payments
1.1 Deleted
2 Extension of time
Upon extension of any or all of the aforesaid Project Milestones or the Scheduled
Completion Date, as the case may be, under and in accordance with the provisions of
this Agreement, the Project Completion Schedule shall be deemed to have been
amended accordingly.
Page 219 of 1358

SCHEDULE - J
(See Clause 12.1.2)
TESTS ON COMPLETION18
1 Schedule for Tests
1.1 The EPC Contractor shall, no later than 30 (thirty) days prior to the likely completion of
construction, notify the Authority Engineer and the Authority of its intent to subject the
Project to Tests, and no later than 10 (ten) days prior to the actual date of Tests, furnish
to the Authority Engineer and the Authority detailed inventory and particularsof all works
and equipment forming part of Works.
1.2 The EPC Contractor shall notify the Authority Engineer of its readiness to subject the
Project to Tests at any time after 10 (ten) days from the date of such notice, and upon
receipt of such notice, the Authority Engineer shall, in consultation with the EPC
Contractor, determine the date and time for each Test and notify the same to the
Authority who may designate its representative to witness the Tests. The Authority
Engineer shall thereupon conduct the Tests itself or cause any of the Tests to be
conducted in accordance with Article 12 and this Schedule-J.
2 Tests
2.1 Visual and physical test: The Authority Engineer shall conduct a visual and physical check
of construction to determine that all works and equipment forming part thereof conform
to the provisions of this Agreement. The physical tests shall include [***].
2.2 Other tests: The Authority Engineer may require the EPC Contractor to carry out or cause
to be carried additional tests, in accordance with Good Industry Practice, for determining
the compliance of the Project with Specifications and Standards.
2.3 Environmental audit: The Authority Engineer shall carry out a check to determine
conformity of the Project with the environmental requirements set forth in Applicable
Laws and Applicable Permits.
2.4 Safety Audit: The Authority Engineer shall carry out, or cause to be carried out, a safety
audit to determine conformity of the Project with the safety requirements and Good
Industry Practice.
3 Agency for conducting Tests
4 Completion Certificate
Upon successful completion of Tests, the Authority Engineer shall issue the
Completion Certificate in accordance with the provisions of Article 12.
Page 220 of 1358

SCHEDULE - K
(See Clause 12.2 and 12.4)
PROVISIONAL CERTIFICATE
1 I/We, …………………………. (Name of the Authority Engineer), acting as theAuthority

Engineer, under and in accordance with the Agreement dated …………….
(the “Agreement”), for construction of the Building ……... (the “Project”) on Engineering,
Procurement and Construction (EPC) basis through (Name of EPC Contractor),
hereby certify that the Tests in accordance with Article 12 of the Agreement have been
undertaken todetermine compliance of the Project with the provisions of the Agreement.
2 Works that are incomplete on account of Time Extension have been specified in the
Punch List appended hereto, and the EPC Contractor has agreed and accepted that it
shall complete all such works in the time and manner set forth in the Agreement. In
addition,certain minor works are incomplete, and these are not likely to cause material
inconvenience to the Users of the Project or affect their safety. The EPC Contractorhas
agreed and accepted that as a condition of this Provisional Certificate, it shall complete
such minor works within 30 (thirty) days hereof. These minor works have also been
specified in the aforesaid Punch List.
3 In view of the foregoing, I/We am/are satisfied that the Project part (building)….…… can
be safely and reliably placed in service of the Users thereof, and in terms of the
Agreement, the Project is hereby provisionally declared fit for entry into operationon this
the ………… day of ………. 20…...
ACCEPTED, SIGNED, SEALED SIGNED, SEALED AND DELIVERED
For and on behalf of For and on behalf of
EPC CONTRACTOR by: Authority Engineer by:
(Signature) (Signature)
(Name and Designation) (Name and Designation)
(Address) (Address)
Page 221 of 1358

COMPLETION CERTIFICATE
1 I/We, ……………………. (Name of the Authority Engineer), acting as the Authority Engineer,
under and in accordance with the Agreement dated …………
(the “Agreement”), for construction of the …………. section (km …… to km ……)
of Group VIII project IIM Indore. …… (the “Project Building”) on Engineering, Procurement
and Construction (EPC) basis through …………………. (Name of EPC Contractor), hereby
certify that the Tests in accordance with Article 12 of the Agreement have been
successfully undertaken to determine compliance of the building with the provisions of
the Agreement, and I/We am/are satisfied that the Project building can be safely and
reliably placed in service of the Users thereof.
2 It is certified that, in terms of the aforesaid Agreement, all works forming part of Group
VIII Project have been completed, and the Project Building is hereby declared fit for entry
into operation on this the ……… day of ……… 20….
SIGNED, SEALED AND DELIVERED

For and on behalf of
the Authority Engineer by:
(Signature) (Name) (Designation)(Address)
Page 222 of 1358

SCHEDULE - L
(See Clause 18.1.1)
SELECTION OF AUTHORITY ENGINEER
Authority Engineer has been appointed by Authority.
Page 223 of 1358

Annex – I
(Schedule - L)
Terms of reference for Authority Engineer
Deleted
Page 224 of 1358

SCHEDULE - M
(See Clauses 19.4.1, 19.6.1, and 19.8.1)
FORMS OF PAYMENT STATEMENTS
1. Stage Payment Statement for Works
The Stage Payment Statement for Works shall state:
(a) the estimated amount for the Works executed in accordance with Clause 19.3.1
subsequent to the last claim;
(b) amounts reflecting adjustments in price for the aforesaid claim;
(c) the estimated amount of each Change of Scope Order executedsubsequent to the
last claim;
(d) amounts reflecting adjustment in price, if any, for (c) above inaccordance with the
provisions of Clause 13.2.3 (a);
(e) total of (a), (b), (c) and (d) above;
(f) Deductions:
(i) Amounts to be deducted in accordance with the provisions of theAgreement except

taxes;
(ii) any amount towards deduction of taxes; and
(iii) any amount towards deduction of taxes at source underApplicable Laws;
(g) Net claim: (e) – (f);
(h) the amounts received by the EPC Contractor up to the last claim:
(i) for the Works executed (excluding Change of Scope orders);
(ii) for Change of Scope Orders, and
(iii) taxes deducted.
2. EPC Contractor’s claim for Damages
Note: The EPC Contractor shall submit its claims in a form acceptable to the Authority.
Page 225 of 1358

SCHEDULE - N
(See Clause 20.1)
INSURANCE
1. Insurance during Construction Period
1.1 The EPC Contractor shall effect and maintain at its own cost, from the Appointed Date till
the date of issue of the Completion Certificate, the following insurances for any loss or
damage occurring on account of Non-Political Event of Force Majeure, malicious act,
accidental damage, explosion, fire and terrorism:
(a) insurance of Works, Plant and Materials and an additional sum of [15% (fifteenper cent)]
of such replacement cost to cover any additional costs of and incidental to the
rectification of loss or damage including professional fees andthe cost of demolishing
and removing any part of the Works and of removing debris of whatsoever nature; and
(b) insurance for the EPC Contractor's equipment brought onto the Site by the EPC
Contractor, for a sum sufficient to provide for their replacement at the Site.
1.2 The insurance under paragraph 1.1 (a) and (b) above shall cover the Authority and the
EPC Contractor against all loss or damage from any cause arising under paragraph 1.1
otherthan risks which are not insurable at commercial terms.
2. Insurance for EPC Contractor's Defects Liability
The EPC Contractor shall effect and maintain insurance cover for the Works from the date
of issue of the Completion Certificate until the end of the Defects Liability Period for any
loss or damage for which the EPC Contractor is liable and which arises from a cause
occurring prior to the issue of the Completion Certificate. The EPC Contractor shall also
maintain other insurances for maximum sums as may be required under Applicable Laws
and in accordance with Good Industry Practice.
3. Insurance against injury to persons and damage to property
3.1 The EPC Contractor shall insure against its liability for any loss, damage, death or bodily
injury, or damage to any property (except things insured under Paragraphs 1 and 2 of
this Schedule which may arise out of the EPC Contractor's performance of this Agreement.
The insurance cover shall be as per the statutory norms- BOCW, WCP, etc. with no limit
on the number of occurrences.
3.2 The insurance shall be extended to cover liability for all loss and damage to the
Authority's property arising out of the EPC Contractor’s performance of this Agreement
excluding:
(a) the Authority's right to have the construction works executed on, over, under, in or through
any land, and to occupy this land for the Works; and
Page 226 of 1358

(b) damage which is an unavoidable result of the EPC Contractor's obligations to execute the
Works.
4. Insurance to be in joint names.
The insurance under paragraphs 1 to 3 above shall be in the joint names of the
EPC Contractor and the Authority
Page 227 of 1358

CHAPTER 9
SPECIAL CONDITIONS OF
CONTRACTS
Page 228 of 1358

9.1 Preamble
This document for the Scope of Works set out to assist the Tenderer in
identifying the extent of the work to be priced in the RFP by amplifying the
details shown on the master design concept drawings, as detailed in the scope
of work document and directing to the attention of the Tenderer other items
that are not necessarily described or indicated yet are required for the full
performance and completion of the Works. All items essential for the
completeness of the Works even if not specifically shown on the drawings or
noted in the specifications provided that the same shall be reasonably inferred
from there shall be furnished and installed by the EPC Contractor and included
in this RFP. This is not intended to exclude any other items that may be
required by the Authority Engineer/IIM Indore, that may be required by the
Statutory Authorities or for good construction practice.
Type of Work - The Contract shall be Engineering, Procurement, and

Construction Contract. The EPC Contractor to Work out his own BOQ to build
up the total Contract Price. It is presumed the EPC Contractor has familiarized
himself about the conditions at Site prevailing in all seasons and further that
the Prices/Rates filled in by the EPC Contractor in the RFP are sufficient to carry
out the Work under all conditions at Site and in all seasons including all
overheads covered in the overall Contract Sum and no adjustment shall be
done in Overall Contract Sum shall include compensation for minor Items
incidental or required to execute an item of Work but missed out from the
description in the relevant scope of works document or are Site/location
specific.
9.2 General Scope of Works
This work shall include all labour, materials, equipment, tools and tackles,
transportation, unloading and stacking, taxes, insurance, guarantees,
warranties etc. that are necessary for the complete performance/ making
group VIII project’s infrastructure fully functional & ready to use.
9.3 Order of Precedence
The Special Conditions of Contract are to be read in conjunction with General

Condition of Contract. If there are any variations, discrepancies or conflicting
provisions, the provisions in Special Conditions shall take precedence over the
provisions in the General Conditions of Contract.
The Contract Documents shall be treated as being mutually explanatory of

each other. In case of any ambiguity or discrepancy in the Contract Documents,
following will be the order of precedence:
• Amendments
• Articles of Agreement
• Notice of Award
Page 229 of 1358

• Tender Drawings / Master Concept Design

• Design Basis Report
• Technical Specifications
• Conditions of Contract
- Special Conditions of Contract
- General Conditions of Contract
Subject to Order of precedence any conflict in Terms of various documents
shall be interpreted in the interest of Work (s) and to expedite the same.
However, for the purpose of execution of the Works, the priority of the
documents shall be as under
- Site instructions/ clarifications/Sketches issued by the Authority Engineer/ IIM

Indore or any pertinent authorized representative of the Authority.
- Approved GA/ Shop Drawings
- Technical Specifications as appended to the Agreement.
Any error or discrepancy in a document or between documents shall be

immediately bought to the notice of Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore, who shall
issue any necessary clarification or instruction.
IIM Indore reserves the right to change/ modify the above-mentioned order of
precedence in the interest of work & decision of competent Authority of IIM
Indore shall be final and binding to the EPC Contractor.
9.4 Access
The EPC Contractor is required to verify and satisfy themselves regarding the
Site details including but not be limited to the following:
• Access
• Availability of water for construction and its workers (to be arranged on their
own as IIM Indore will not be providing the same)
• Availability of electricity (to be arranged on their own as IIM Indore will not be
providing the same)
• Place for stores, materials, plants, and machineries.
• Place for erection of Site Office, Cement Godown, Fabrication yards, Material
testing laboratory etc.
The EPC Contractor is deemed to have catered for all contingencies connected
with the Site and access. The construction will be happening inside the campus
which is protected by the compound wall. Entries and exits are regulated by
security. All the construction workers including EPC Contractor’s employees
should produce police clearance, COVID Vaccination Certificate and an ID card
issued by them. Security/project department of IIM will randomly check the
police clearance, COVID Vaccination Certificate and if anyone employed
without a clearance will be debarred from entry.
Page 230 of 1358

9.4.1 Access to Site -
The access shall be provided from any one of the three gates available at the
site. The decision on which gate to be used shall be solely decided by the
Competent Authority of IIM Indore.
9.4.2 In view of Covid-19, there are some entry restrictions/ rules which the EPC
Contractor will have to follow while entering campus/ during work
i) All your representatives must carry the respective IDs.
ii) Any of your representatives should not contact any of the residents.
iii) The representative coming will have to undergo thermal screening at the gate.
iv) Any of the person with fever, cold, cough & throat pain shall not be allowed.
v) The representatives must wear masks & gloves all the time, as without mask &
gloves they will not be allowed.
vi) The representative must carry drinking water and food, as no facility will be
available here.
vii) All your representatives to maintain social distancing.
viii) Arogya Setu app should be installed in the representative’s mobile phones.
ix) Spitting/chewing pan/gutka in any place on the campus is strictly prohibited.
x) Your representative coming for entering the premises be advised to show
patience as the measures will slow down the entry/exit procedure.
xi) People coming for the referred job must be confined to their site only, as they
are not allowed to move other than the designated site in the campus.
xii) All the representatives/ workers are entering into campus should carry their
vaccination certificate.
xiii) No one from any containment zone will be permitted to campus.
9.5 Deviation Limits
Not Applicable
9.6 Maintenance Liability
9.6.1 The EPC Contractor shall be responsible for rectification of defects for a period
of 24 (Twenty-Four) Months from the date of Final Completion/ Handing Over
of complete Project, without any additional charges/ cost implication on IIM
Indore. Any cost implication if liable to be incurred has to be solely borne by
the EPC Contactor. This period shall be known as the Defects Liability Period as
per the provisions of the General Conditions of Contract. For any defects, the
EPC Contractor shall be intimated and the same has to be rectified within the
period mentioned in the communication of IIM Indore. If the same doesn’t gets
rectified in the given time period, the IIM Indore shall get it rectified at the risk
and cost of the EPC Contractor without any further intimation, which shall be
recovered from the deposits available with the IIM Indore.
9.6.2 The EPC Contractor shall execute and maintain the works in strict accordance
with the contract and to the satisfaction of the Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore.
Page 231 of 1358

9.7 Samples
9.7.1 Material
9.7.1.1 The EPC Contractor shall, at its own expense and without any delay, supply to
the Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore samples of materials along with data sheets/
specification, if required, proposed to be used in the Works as per laid down
specifications. The Authority Engineer/ competent authority of IIM Indore shall
intimate to the EPC Contractor in writing whether the samples are approved or
not. If the samples are not approved, the EPC Contractor shall forthwith
arrange to supply to the Authority Engineer/IIM Indore for approval new
samples complying with the Specifications laid down in the Contract. It is the
responsibility of the EPC Contractor to prepare and bring all sample materials,
erect mock-ups and obtain written approvals from the Authority Engineer/ IIM
Indore during the progress of the Project. No additional payments will be made
for this. The quality of samples shall strictly conform to the standards set by
IIM Indore and the EPC Contractor shall be squarely liable if any inferior
material is utilized.
9.7.1.2 A schedule giving dates for the submission of samples or data sheets shall be
included in the schedule described under Section 1 / 2.7. All samples or data
sheets must be submitted for approval well in advance, within reasonable time
to ensure the availability at site as per approved programme.
9.7.1.3 The Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore shall check and approve such samples or
data sheets, with reasonable promptness. The Work shall be in accordance
with the approved samples and / or data sheets.
9.7.1.4 Samples of materials and goods shall be submitted with descriptive labels and
/ or application or installation instructions intact and legible and properly
labeled / tagged to identify the material type, reference, manufacturer /
supplier and country of origin.
9.7.1.5 Where variations in texture, colour, grain or other characteristics are inherent
and anticipated in the samples submitted, a sufficient quantity shall be
provided to indicate the full range of characteristics which will be present.
9.7.1.6 The EPC Contractor shall accompany each transmittal of samples with a
transmittal listing the sample data for each sample and referencing each
sample to the appropriate drawing or specification section and Clause.
9.7.1.7 Acceptance of any sample shall be only for characteristics for uses named in
such acceptance and for no other. Acceptance of a sample shall not be taken
to change or modify any requirement of the Contract documents. Once the
material has been accepted, no further change in brand or make will be
permitted.
9.7.1.8 The EPC Contractor must obtain the Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore written
approval of the respective samples of workmanship and prototypes before
proceeding with the actual mass execution of the various sections of the works.
Page 232 of 1358

9.7.1.9 The finished work must correspond to the approved samples of materials,
workmanship and prototypes. The Authority Engineer/IIM Indore at his sole
discretion may return certain samples for use in the Works. These shall be
installed in good condition and suitably marked for identification. Such
samples and any packing are to be provided at the expense of the EPC
Contractor and are to be displayed in a sample room.
9.7.1.10 The Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore shall have full powers to acquire other
proper materials to be substituted for rejected materials and in the event of
the EPC Contractor refusing to comply, it may cause the same to be supplied
by other means, as decided by competent authority of IIM Indore. All costs
which may incur upon for such removal and/or substitution shall be borne by
the EPC Contractor.
9.7.1.11 All samples shall be delivered to the Authority Engineer’s/ IIM Indore’s Office at
The EPC Contractor cost. Each sample shall be in duplicate and properly
labelled as under:
• Name of Project
• Name of EPC Contractor
• Name of Product
• Name of Manufacturer and its full address
• Item reference of Bill of Quantities
• Date of submission
9.7.1.12 Samples shall be accompanied with technical specifications / catalogues /

leaflets / test results of manufacturer etc.
9.7.1.13 As part of the Work, the EPC Contractor shall procure and pay for, EPC
Contractors’ labour, materials, equipment, supplies, soil, gravel and similar
materials and manufacturing, fabrication and related services (whether on or
off the Site) for construction of and incorporation in the Works or which are
otherwise required for completion of the Work in accordance with the
Specification and the Contract and are not explicitly specified to be furnished
by the Authority Engineer/IIM Indore pursuant to the terms and provisions of
the Contract including Specification.
9.7.1.14 Within 15 (Fifteen) days after signing the Contract, the EPC Contractor shall
submit for approval of the Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore a complete list of all
material proposed to be used in the work with makes/ brands specified.
9.7.1.15 Where special makes or brands are called for, the EPC Contractor has to adhere
to such instructions and any deviations are not accepted unless specifically
approved by the Authority Engineer / IIM Indore.
9.7.1.16 IIM Indore reserves the right to approve/ call for any make/ brand for ensuring
best quality/ adherence to the pattern/ for harmonizing with existing etc. & this
shall be final and binding upon the EPC Contractor.
Page 233 of 1358

9.8 Mock-up
9.8.1 In order to establish standards of acceptability for material and finishes, the
EPC Contractor shall finish mock-ups in all respects at locations chosen by the
Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore. The materials used here shall be as approved
with special attention being paid to establish workmanship and finishing
standards for the Works as stipulated in the Contract Documents.
9.8.2 The EPC Contractor shall give notice in writing in this respect and shall obtain
a written approval through the Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore. Approval shall
be taken in advance of the actual execution of Works. If the EPC Contractor
decides to commence material procurement prior to such approvals being
given by the Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore, it is at its own risk and cost.
9.8.3 The EPC Contractor will install mock-ups as per the need for the approval by
IIM Indore on award of Contract. The mock-ups shall be reviewed and
approved by the Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore for issues on Quality of Laying
/ Workmanship, material, equipment, etc., which will enable EPC Contractors
to proceed. In case the Mockup(s) in terms quality, workmanship, material,
equipment, etc. ,gets rejected and the EPC Contractor fails to produce the
mockup(s) to the satisfaction of IIM Indore then in that case, the Authority
Engineer/ IIM Indore reserves the right to get the mock up(s) prepared at the
risk and cost of the EPC Contractor which has to followed by the EPC Contractor
for the work.
9.8.4 The EPC Contractor shall prepare mock-ups for the following but not limited to
–
• Façade – Glazing, Louvers and Other Elements.
• Elevational Fins/ Pardi for Academic Block.
• Panel Cladding in Lift Lobbies.
• Painting – Internal and External.
• Plumbing Shaft.
• Acoustic Paneling.
• External Wall and Column Aesthetic treatment.
• All Residential Blocks – Sample Flat/ Sample Room with Furniture.
• Typical 75-Seater Classroom.
• Typical 150-Seater Classroom.
• Staircase and Other Railings.
• Modular Kitchen for Type V Residence.
• Faculty Cabin.
9.9 Transportation
9.9.1 The EPC Contractor shall at its own risk and expense transport all the material,
goods, and the EPC Contractor’s Equipment to the Site by the mode of
transport that the EPC Contractor judges most suitable under all the
circumstances.
Page 234 of 1358

9.9.2 The EPC Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining, if necessary, approvals
from the Statutory Authorities for transportation of the material, goods, and
the EPC Contractor’s Equipment to the Site. The EPC Contractor shall indemnify
and hold harmless the IIM Indore from and against any claim for damage to
roads, bridges or any other traffic facilities that may be caused by the transport
of the material, goods, Plant and Equipment and the EPC Contractor’s
Equipment to the Site.
9.10 EPC Contractor’s Labour
The EPC Contractor shall, as far as possible, give preference to local labour,
especially project affected persons.
(a) The EPC Contractor shall provide and employ on the Site skilled, semi-skilled
and unskilled labour as is necessary for the proper, timely and qualitative
execution of the Contract.
(b) Unless otherwise provided in the Contract, the EPC Contractor shall be
responsible for the recruitment, transportation, accommodation and catering
of all labour, local or expatriate, required for the execution of the Contract and
for all payments in connection therewith.
(c) The EPC Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining all necessary permit(s)
and/or visa(s) from the appropriate authorities for the entry of all labour and
personnel to be employed on the Site.
(d) The EPC Contractor shall at all times during the progress of the Contract use its
best endeavors to prevent any unlawful, riotous or disorderly conduct or
behavior by or amongst its employees and the labour of its Subcontractors.
(e) The EPC Contractor shall, in all dealings with its labour currently employed on
or connected with the Contract, follow all laws and regulations pertaining to
the employment of labour on its own cost & expenses.
(f) The EPC Contractor shall also be liable for any pecuniary liabilities arising on
account of any violations by them of the provision of the Act/Statutory
requirements etc.
(g) The labour accommodation will not be allowed inside the site premises.
9.11 Engagement of Apprentices
9.11.1 The EPC Contractor shall comply with the relevant provisions of any Act related
to the subject, or any rule and orders issued there under from time to time by
the Statutory Authorities.
Page 235 of 1358

9.11.2 The Authority Engineer/IIM Indore shall not be liable for any infringement of
the restrictive provisions of any related Act or rule or Government Order in the
event the Act or rule or Government Order is violated by the EPC Contractor.
9.11.3 The EPC Contractor shall also be liable for any pecuniary liabilities arising on
account of any violations by it of the provision of the Act.
9.11.4 Further the EPC Contractor alone shall be responsible for the personal safety
of the Apprentice / personal engaged by it and the Authority Engineer/IIM
Indore shall not be liable for any accident or personal injury that may occur at
site during the Construction period.
9.12 As-Built Drawings
9.12.1 The EPC Contractor shall during the course of execution prepare and keep
updating a complete set of As-built drawings which shall be corrected in timely
manner, if necessary, to show each and every change from the Contract
drawings, as approved working/shop drawings, with the exact as-built
locations, sizes and types of Works etc. This set of drawings shall be used for
record purposes.
9.12.2 On completion of the Works and before issuance of the Certificate of Final
Completion, the EPC Contractor shall submit to the Authority Engineer/IIM
Indore layout drawings drawn at approved scale indicating the complete
system “As Built. These drawings shall include but not limited to the following:
9.12.3 After scrutiny and observations by the Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore, the
drawing given shall be required to be obtained for a final amended as built
drawing and the final version thereof submitted in hard copy format in 10 sets
to the Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore as well as electronic format in AutoCAD
(In CD) to the Authority Engineer. All costs and expenses in connection
therewith shall be borne by the EPC Contractor.
9.12.4 In case the EPC Contractor fails to submit complete sets of hard/ soft copies of
As-built drawings as aforesaid, it shall be liable to pay the cost required to do
the same at EPC Contractor’s risk and cost.
9.12.5 Record Drawings
The EPC Contractor shall make accurate records of those parts of the Works
which will become hidden by further progress, as may be directed by the
Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore. Such records shall be checked and verified by
the Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore while the work is open for inspection.
Records shall be entered by the EPC Contractor on prints of drawings which
Page 236 of 1358

are made available to him for this purpose, amplified by him with
supplementary dimensioned sketches along with its CAD drawings, and
handed to the Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore as soon as practicable. All costs
and expenses in connection therewith shall be borne by the EPC Contractor.
9.13 Method Statement
9.13.1 The EPC Contractor shall within 10 (Ten) days of receipt of the Notice of Award
to commence work, under respective Clause of General Conditions of Contract,
submit for the approval of the Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore a detailed
programme and Method Statement with drawings and sketches showing how
it proposes to carry out the Works based on the Contract Documents. The
statement shall describe methods to be employed in carrying out the Works.
The programme shall give estimated dates on which the various section of the
works will commence together with the estimated rate of progress of
Construction and estimated output so that the whole of the works may be
completed within the stipulated Contract Period including various Milestones
indicated therein.
9.13.2 The EPC Contractor shall progress the works thoroughly and take such action
as is necessary in order to ensure that the approved programme is strictly
adhered to in all its stages. The EPC Contractor shall submit detailed
programmes of the various sections of the works as and when required by the
Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore. The EPC Contractor shall take all precautions
and cover all contingencies to ensure that adequate spare equipment and
materials are available at all times to ensure completion of the works in
accordance with the agreed programme.
9.13.3 The EPC Contractor shall prepare and furnish to the Authority Engineer/ IIM
Indore the documents listed in the Technical Specification and in accordance
with the Project requirements. Any part of the Works covered by or related to
the documents to be approved by the Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore shall be
executed only after the Authority Engineer’s/IIM Indore’s approval thereof.
9.14 EPC Contractor responsible for sufficiency of resources
9.14.1 The EPC Contractor shall take upon itself the full and complete responsibility
for the sufficiency of plant and equipment, centering and shuttering,
scaffolding, timbering, machinery tools and tackles and generally for all other
resources for the fulfilment of the Contract Conditions. In the event of any of
afore mentioned resources proving insufficient or inadequate EPC Contractor
is still fully and entirely responsible for the sufficiency of these resources not
withstanding any previous approval or recommendations that may have been
given by the Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore. The sufficiency further implies that
resources be it Men, Material and Machinery are deployed adequately and
most important safely.
Page 237 of 1358

9.14.2 Site Management
9.14.2.1The EPC Contractor shall constantly keep on his work, during its progress,
qualified and competent Project personnel, who will be responsible for the
carrying out of the works to the true meaning of the Drawings, Specifications,
and good standard practices, under the Authority Engineer’s instructions and
directions to the satisfaction of the Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore. Attention is
called to the importance of requesting instructions from the Authority Engineer
before undertaking any work where the Authority Engineer’s directions or
instructions are required. Any such work done in advance of such instructions
will be liable to be removed.
9.14.2.2 The EPC Contractor shall constantly keep upon the Works on a full-time basis,
the required personnel which are including but not limited to Chapter 4 of this
RFP.
These required personnel once employed for the Works and approved by the
Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore shall not be removed from the Works without
prior consent from the Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore.
The provision of such organization chart and the Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore
approval thereof shall not limit the EPC Contractor’s responsibilities and
obligations in respect of adequate staffing at the Site. In the event additional staff
are considered necessary to supervise the execution of the Works properly and
effectively in the opinion of the Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore, the EPC
Contractor shall provide such additional staff within reasonable time (not more
than 15 days) at no extra cost to the Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore.
9.15 Temporary Works
9.15.1 The EPC Contractor is entirely responsible for the construction, maintenance
and removal of all temporary works employed by it and making good in
carrying out the Works to the satisfaction of the Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore.
At least twenty days before it intends to commence the construction of any
temporary works, the EPC Contractor shall submit full particulars including
drawings for the approval of the Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore.
9.15.2 Obtaining the necessary approvals from the Governmental agencies / local
bodies for erecting the same shall be the responsibility of the EPC Contractor
on their own risk and cost.
9.15.3 The Authority Engineer’s/ IIM Indore’s approval will in no way relieve the EPC
Contractor of its responsibility for the safety of the Works, operatives, adjoining
property, regulations, codes of practice etc.
9.15.4 The EPC Contractor shall ensure that it shall make safe and reinstate all areas
affected by such Temporary Works.
9.15.5 The EPC Contractor shall design purpose made steel staging platform for
Page 238 of 1358

carrying out the Works at various heights. All required staging for supporting
centering, shuttering of beams, slabs, masonry works etc. shall be carried out
strictly as per the Authority Engineer’s/ IIM Indore’s approved arrangements. It
is to be noted that designing of such works shall be carried out by the EPC
Contractor at its own cost and shall be submitted to the Authority Engineer/
IIM Indore for approval minimum 20 (twenty) days prior to commencement of
such works. No work will be permitted without compliance of these conditions.
9.15.6 Temporary Fencing, etc.
The EPC Contractor shall take over the existing fencing / install the new fencing
and gates for the protection of the public and for proper execution of the works
including all costs incurred for the security of the works and in accordance with
the requirements of the Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore and regulations of local
authorities (without any cost to the IIM Indore). These shall be altered,
relocated, and adapted from time to time as necessary and removed on
completion by the EPC Contractor on their own risk and cost.
9.16 Pumping Out Water
9.16.1 The EPC Contractor will be required to provide and work at his own cost all
pumps, engines and machinery requisite to keep the trenches for the sewer,
drains or foundations and all other excavations clear of water whether sub-soil
water, storm water or leakage from tanks, wells, drains, sewers, water mains,
tide water etc. so that there may be no accumulation of such water and no
setting out may be done, no masonry may be laid, no concrete deposited, no
joints made and no measurements taken in water. Pumping out water shall be
done in such approved manner as to preclude the possibility of any damage to
the foundation trench, concrete or masonry or any adjacent structure inside or
outside the wall front. When water is met in foundation trenches or in tank
excavation, pumping out water shall be from auxiliary pit of adequate size dug
slightly outside the building excavations. The depth of auxiliary pit shall be
more than the working foundation trenches / levels. The auxiliary pit shall be
refilled with approved excavated materials after the dewatering is over. Sumps
for the suction pipes to work in will have to be excavated by the EPC Contractor,
at such distances apart, and to such depths as the Authority Engineer/ IIM
Indore may determine, when the work progresses their sumps. must from time
to time be excavated by the EPC Contractor, unused sumps being filled up by
him with dry rubble carefully hand-packed to the satisfaction of the Authority
Engineer/ IIM Indore, the EPC Contractor will not be paid extra for any
temporary dams or sumps or their removal or refilling nor will such work if
taken into measurement in any way, unless otherwise provided.
9.16.2 The EPC Contractor shall make proper provision for leading the pumped
discharge to the nearest water entrance, storm water drain, manholes or water
course by means, of a wooden or G.L channels or hose pipe after taking
appropriate approval from the “Statutory Authority”. Under no circumstances
Page 239 of 1358

the discharge will be allowed to flow along a paved surface. If an accumulation

is unavoidable, it shall be treated with Insecticides to the satisfaction of the
Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore. In case of failure to do this on the part of EPC
Contractor such accumulation shall be treated by the competent authority/ IIM
Indore at the risk and cost of the EPC Contractor.
9.16.3 The EPC Contractor shall adopt an appropriate method of dewatering work and
shall submit its proposal along with the statutory approval, for carrying out the
dewatering work for the approval of the Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore. The
water shall be pumped continuously to keep the water level at a minimum of
two 2’ (feet) below the lowest point of excavation level. The operation shall be
continued until the entire excavation has been completed so as to ensure the
excavation is always dry.
9.16.4 An adequate number of pumps shall be deployed to ensure a continuous

dewatering process.
9.16.5 Power / Fuel required for the operation of pumps etc. shall be provided and
paid for by the EPC Contractor.
9.16.6 Softening of the bottom of excavation will not be allowed. If softening occurs
due to weather or any other source, the EPC Contractor shall remove the
affected area and replace as specified and directed by the Authority Engineer/
IIM Indore at no extra cost.
9.16.7 Necessary grading, trenching and temporary sumps shall be made around
excavations as required to prevent water runoff into excavation and to ensure
proper protection to slopes from erosion.
9.16.8 The excavated area shall be kept free from water:

a. During inspection and measurement
b. From start to completion of concreting till they come above existing ground.
c. Till the Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore considers that the concrete is
sufficiently set.
d. Till the underground reservoir is tested for water tightness.
9.17 Steel for Reinforcement / Cement
9.17.1 The EPC Contractor shall at his cost make his own arrangements for the safe
storage of cement, steel and tiles at the work site as required and instructed
by the Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore. The Handling and storage facility for
cement shall be so arranged that no cement shall be kept in storage for more
than 90 (ninety) days from the date of receipt of cement from the factory. If any
cement is kept for more than 90 (ninety) days in the EPC Contractor’s storage,
it shall be rejected and shall be disposed immediately as directed and replaced
at the EPC Contractor’s cost.
Page 240 of 1358

9.18 Fire Precautions
9.18.1 The EPC Contractor shall comply with Fire Regulations of the controlling
authority in force during the currency of the Contract relating to the
precautions to be taken against fire hazards on site.
9.18.2 Arrangements for firefighting shall comply with but not limiting to the HSE
document enclosed with the tender and relevant codes/ standards.
9.18.3 The EPC Contractor shall provide arrangements for firefighting at his own cost.
For this purpose, he shall provide the requisite number of fire extinguishers
and adequate number of buckets, some of which are to be always kept filled
with sand and some with water. This equipment shall be provided at suitable
prominent and easily accessible places and shall be properly maintained.
9.18.4 The EPC Contractor may be subject to periodic fire prevention inspections and
any deficiency or unsafe condition shall be corrected by the EPC Contractor at
his own cost and to approval of the Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore and the
relevant authorities.
9.18.5 These fire prevention inspections shall include but not limited to the following:
i. Proper handling, storage and disposal of combustible materials, liquids and
wastes.
ii. Work operations which can create fire hazards.
iii. Access for firefighting equipment.

iv. Type, size, number and location of fire extinguishers or other firefighting
equipment.
v. Inspection and maintenance records for extinguishers.
vi. Type, number and location of containers for the removal of surplus materials
and rubbish.
vii. General housekeeping.
9.18.6 The EPC Contractor shall also be liable for any pecuniary liabilities arising on
account of any violations by it of the provision of the Act.
9.19 Use of Site
9.19.1 The EPC Contractor shall not use any portion of the Site for any purpose not
connected with the Works. It shall maintain a permanent Site access free of
spillage and shall not interfere with the existing flow of traffic thereof. Also, the
same shall apply to terraces, basements, and other developed areas of the
Works.
Page 241 of 1358

9.19.2 Vehicle Wash Bay
- The EPC Contractor shall establish sufficient number of wash bays near each
entrance/exit to the project site. All trucks/vehicles moving outside the site
shall have the tyres washed prior to the site leaving the project site. This is to
ensure that the roads outside the site are not dirtied / defaced by construction
muck.
- The wash bays shall have submersible pump (1+1 backup) and a hose jet along
with recyclable water for washing tyres. Two (2) dedicated workers would be
manning the wash back at each time. Dump trucks to have lift covers on top to
prevent muck/dirt/smell from flowing across roads.
9.20 Protection / Safety of adjacent Structures, trees and shrubs
9.20.1 Adequate protection against any form of damage or deterioration shall be

provided for all sections of the Works by the EPC Contractor at its own cost.
This shall include but is not limiting to the protective tapes, casings, guard rails
and the like. Particular care shall be taken to self-finished surfaces during
construction.
9.20.2 In pursuance of this Clause, the EPC Contractor shall carry out all the works as
directed and instructed by the Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore to its satisfaction.
9.20.3 The EPC Contractor shall provide and erect to the approval of the Authority
Engineer/ IIM Indore such supports as may be required to protect efficiently all
structures and protective guards to trees which may be endangered by the
execution of the works or otherwise take such permanent measures as may be
required by the Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore to protect the structures and
trees.
9.20.4 Trees and Shrubs designated by the Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore shall be
protected from damage during the course of the work and the earth level shall
not be changed within three feet of such trees. Where necessary such trees
and shrubs shall be protected by means of temporary fencing.
9.21 Cleaning of Works
9.21.1 The Site shall be maintained clean at all times during the currency of the
Contract. Necessary manpower, tools and tackles shall be deployed by the EPC
Contractor to ensure a clean Site. In case the EPC Contractor fails to comply
with this condition to the satisfaction of the Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore and
the Authority/ IIM Indore shall get the same maintained at the cost and risk of
the EPC Contractor.
9.21.2 Prior to handing over the Works, the EPC Contractor shall deep clean all
buildings and external areas of the Works ready for occupation.
Page 242 of 1358

9.21.3 Proper stacking of scaffolding material, shuttering material, bricks / brick bats,
steel pieces, etc., needed for work on day-to-day basis shall be organised in
proper stacks. Heaps in unplanned manner and un-orderly fashion shall not be
permitted.
9.22 Site Drainage

All water which may accumulate on the site during the progress of the works
or in trenches and excavation, shall be removed from the site to the satisfaction
of the Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore by the EPC Contractor at their own risk
and cost. The EPC Contractor shall install mosquito proof and accessible water
storage tanks for construction and drinking water. The EPC Contractor shall
periodically give legionella treatment to water storage tanks, sites of water
stagnation, water collection.
9.23 Testing Facilities at the Site Laboratory:
9.23.1 EPC Contractor shall provide a testing lab equipped with the following at Site,
but not limited to:
General:
Sl. No Description Quantity

1 Oven - Electrically operated, thermostatically controlled, range 1 No
up to 200 Deg. C sensitivity 1 Deg. C
2 Platform balance 300 Kg. capacity 1 No
3 Balance 20 Kg. capacity-self indicating type 1 No
4 Electronic Balance 5 Kg. capacity accuracy 0.5 gm. 2 Nos
5 Water bath-electrically operated and thermostatically controlled 1 No

with adjustable shelves, sensitivity 1 Deg. C
6 Thermometers:
Mercury-in-glass thermometer range 0 Deg to 250 Deg. C 4 Nos
Mercury-in-steel thermometer with 30 cm stem, range up to 300
Deg. C
7 Kerosene or gas stove or electric hot plate 1 No
8 Glassware, spatulas, wire gauzes, steel scales, measuring tape, As

casseroles, karahis, enameled trays of assorted sizes, required
pestle- mortar, porcelain dishes, gunny bags, plastic bags,
chemicals, digging tools like pickaxes, shovels etc.
9 Set of IS sieves with lid and pan:
9a 450 mm diameter (for coarse aggregate) 1 Set
Page 243 of 1358

63 mm, 53 mm, 37.5 mm, 26.5 mm, 13.2 mm,

9.5 mm, 6.7 mm and 4.75 mm size
9b 200 mm diameter (for fine aggregate) 2 Sets

10mm, 6.3mm, 4.75mm, 2.36 mm, 2.0 mm, 1.18 mm, 600-
micron, 425-micron, 300 micron, 150 micron and 75 micron
10 Water Testing Kit 1 Set
11 First Aid Box 1 Set
For Soils & Aggregates
1 Riffle Box 1 No
2 Atterberg Limits (liquid and plastic limits) determination apparatus 1 Set
3 Compaction Test Equipment both 2.5 Kg and 4.5 Kg rammers (Light 1 Set
and Heavy compactive efforts)
4 Dry Bulk Density Test apparatus (sand pouring cylinder, tray can etc.) 1 Set
complete
5 Speedy Moisture Meter complete with chemicals 1 Set
6 Post-hole Auger with extensions 1 Set
7 Core cutter apparatus 10 cm dia. 10/15 cm height, complete with 1 Set

dolly, rammer etc
8 Aggregate Impact Value Test apparatus / Los Angles Abrasion Test 1 Set
apparatus
9 Flakiness and Elongation Test Gauges 1 Set
10 Standard measures of 30, 15 and 3 litres capacity along with standard 1 Set
tamping rod
11 California Bearing Ratio test apparatus 1 Set
12 Unconfirmed compression test apparatus 1 Set
Page 244 of 1358

For Concrete:

1 Cube testing machine 200 Ton capacity 1 No.
2 Pychnometer 100 ml. Capacity with brass cone 1 No.
3 Slump Test apparatus with tamping rod 3 Nos.
4 G.I.Sheet, M.S. Tray and Baby mixer machine 1 Set
5 Wheelbarrow, Spade, Mortar Pan, Trowel 1 Set
6 Measuring instruments such as stainless-steel rule, steel tape etc. 2 Sets
7 Scientific Calculator 1 No.
8 Flashlight 1 No.
9 Thermometer 0 – 100 C – 1 No. 1 No.
10 A set of standard sieves 300 mm dia. G.I. (for 40 mm, 25 mm, 20 1 Set
mm, 16 mm, 12.5mm, 10 mm and 4.75mm)
11 Set of standard Sieves – Brass 200 mm dia. (4.75 mm, 2.35 mm, 1 Set
1.18 mm 600 microns, 300 microns, 150 microns
12 Hot plate or stove 1 No.
13 Pocket cone penetrometer 0 to 50 kg. per sq.cm. 1 No.
14 Bulk density containers – 10 litres, 15 litres and 20 litres 1 No. Each
15 Standard sand grade 1,2 & 3 – Tamin, Madras – 2 Kgs. Each
16 Measuring cylinder – Polypro final 1000 ml. 250 ml. And 100 ml. 2 Sets
Capacity
17 Vicat needle apparatus with dashpot 1 No.
18 Mortar Cube Vibrator 1 No.
19 Mortar Cube Moulds 7.07cm x 7.07cm x 7.07cm 6 Nos.
(Minimum)
20 Concrete cube Moulds 15cm x 15 cm x 15 cm 12 Nos.
(Minimum)
21 10 Kg. Double pan balance 1 No.
However, the test shall be carried out accordingly in case of using batching
plant at Site.
Whenever felt necessary the Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore reserves the right
to order any test for which facilities may be available at the Site lab or otherwise
through an independent testing lab at the cost of the EPC Contractor.
In case felt necessary the Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore reserves the right to
order the EPC Contractor for installation of any required testing facility without
any additional/ extra cost to the IIM Indore i.e., on EPC Contractor’s own risk
and cost.
9.23.2 EPC Contractor shall undertake carrying out the following Non-destructive Test
(NDT) including semi destructive test like ‘Core Test’ by a reputed / approved
Third Party Testing Agency, in order to establish the integrity of structure at NO
EXTRA COST. EPC Contractor shall submit test reports after conducting the test
periodically for review. EPC Contractor shall undertake such measures as may
be necessary upon acceptance the Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore.
Page 245 of 1358

The details of tests to be conducted are below:
Item
Description Test Frequency
No
Carrying out Ultrasonic Pulse Velocity Tests
(UPVT) on columns for assessment of
1 quality/uniformity of in-situ concrete by forming One column in every floor
grids as per IS:13311 (part1) Between 500 to
1000mm column width
Carrying out Rebound Hammer Test on slab for
assessment of surface hardness and quality of
2 1 test in alternate floors
in-situ concrete as per IS: 13311 (part2) in about
5 locations of 1 Sqm each per panel.
Extraction of concrete cores from columns,
beams and slabs after carrying out profometer 6 cores in one Tower
3 scanning to locate rebars from identified regions (2 in columns, 2 in beams, 2
in order to assess the compressive strength of in- in slabs)
situ concrete
9.24 On-site and Off-site Testing
9.24.1 On site testing of one or more elements of curtain walling and glazing, selected
at random by the Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore shall be carried out to confirm
satisfactory erection and workmanship related to the works executed for this
Package Contract.
9.24.2 Air Permeability and Static Water Penetration test shall be carried out by
forming a plenum within shell of one of building areas and spraying water on
to the external face during testing.
9.24.3 Curtain walling, if executed, to be water tested in accordance with Local

Standards for water leakage.
9.24.4 EPC Contractor to provide all testing, samples, calculation etc of all fixings,
brackets, angles etc that may be required by the Authority Engineer/ IIM
Indore.
9.25 Quality Assurance
The EPC Contractor shall submit project specific QA/QC programme and
manual for the approval of the Authority Engineer’s/ IIM Indore’s
Representative. The EPC Contractor QA/QC program shall be in line with the
Page 246 of 1358

Authority Engineer’s/ IIM Indore’s Requirements. The QA/QC plan shall include
submission of all test reports as per Tender Specifications and IS Codes or
applicable codes. The Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore reserves the right to
recommend changes/ alternations/ addition and/or deletion to the same and
EPC Contractor shall be obligated to abide by the same. The EPC Contractor
should maintain records for inspection by the Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore
at any point of time during or after execution.
9.26 Pre - Installation Requirements:
9.26.1 The EPC Contractor will provide the equipment layout plan / drawings, shop
drawings in computer readable format for the work and the site readiness
requirements within 21 (twenty-one) days on receipt of Notice of Award. The
implementation schedule should specify the date of which the site would be
ready for installation.
9.27 Pre - Delivery Inspection:
9.27.1 The inspection of the equipment shall be carried out by the Authority Engineer/
IIM Indore for confirmation of the technical specifications. The EPC Contractor
shall prepare the detailed procedure to be adopted for carrying out the
inspection tests at their factory premises. This will be submitted to the
Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore for approval within 21 (twenty-one) days on
receipt of Notice of Award. The equipment shall not be dispatched till the
Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore gives dispatch instructions in writing. During the
pre-delivery inspection, all test certificates for the relevant equipment shall be
furnished by the EPC Contractor. The EPC Contractor shall give written
intimation to the Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore at least 10 (ten) days in
advance for the inspection. The EPC Contractor shall bear expenses, (including,
travelling, lodging and food) for such inspections to be made at factories for
the Authority Engineer’s and IIM Indore’s representative.
9.28 Acceptance Testing Procedure:
9.28.1 The EPC Contractor will provide the standard acceptance testing procedure for
all the equipment within 21 (twenty-one) days, on receipt of the Notice of
Award. The acceptance test procedures shall be mutually agreed upon
between the Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore and the EPC Contractor. The
acceptance test will be carried out continuously for a period of 10 (ten) days
consecutive days. The EPC Contractor will have to provide an uptime of 99.5%
on all individual equipment for the acceptance of the equipment by the
Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore as well as conformity to requirements.
Page 247 of 1358

9.29 Warranty
9.29.1 The EPC Contractor undertakes to be fully liable and responsible for the
manufacturer’s warranty in respect of proper design, quality and workmanship
of all equipment, accessories, etc., for a period of 24 (Twenty-Four) months
from the date of acceptance of the complete systems or as per OEM whichever
is higher.
9.29.2 The EPC Contractor shall attend to all the problems reported them within 4
(four) working hours of intimation and rectify within 8 (eight) hours, 7 days a
week ,for high priority areas like but not limiting to academic Classroom, MDC
incubation, kitchen, etc., For Substations, servers and area of higher
importance, the reporting time would be 2 hours and rectification time shall be
4 hours from the time of intimation, for other areas the reporting time will be
24 working hours after intimation. The EPC Contractor shall supply and replace
all the parts found defective during the warranty period at the earliest. The EPC
Contractor will assure a minimum UPTIME of 99.5% for every individual piece
of equipment. During the warranty period if any equipment remains down for
more than 8 (eight) hours continuously, the Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore has
the right to encash the Performance Bank Guarantee / Security Deposit
Guarantee. All warranty maintenance work has to be carried out by the
principal manufacturer. The replacement of parts should be of same
make/model/ OEM, other substitutes/ local arrangements will not be accepted.
9.29.3 Guarantee for Waterproofing Works & Anti Termite Treatment Works
9.29.3.1 On completion of the Waterproofing treatment and anti-termite works in all

respects, a guarantee that the building is safe for a period of 10 years is
required on Non-Judicial stamp paper of requisite value as per the Indian
Stamp Act, 1899 (as applicable to Madhya Pradesh) in a format which shall be
approved by the Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore who shall have the final
decision. The Cost of the stamp paper will solely be borne by the EPC
Contractor. Apart from the bond, EPC Contractor’s cash retention of 10% of the
value of work shall be done, which will be released after the guarantee period.
9.29.3.2 In the event of re-infestation of the said structure at any time during guarantee
period, an undertaking is required from the EPC Contractor that such
treatments as may be necessary to render the Structure free from water shall
be carried out with immediate effect.
9.29.3A Performance warranty for exterior paints

The EPC contractor shall provide a performance warranty for all the exterior
paints for the period of 10 years.
9.29.3B Performance warranty for Solar PV

The EPC contractor shall provide a performance warranty for all Solar PV
Works for the period of 25 years.
Page 248 of 1358

9.30 Preventive Maintenance
9.30.1 The EPC Contractor will provide the preventive maintenance schedule for all
the equipment at the time of Handing Over of the Facilities. The detailed
checkout and test procedure to be carried out during preventive maintenance
should be provided along with the schedule. This preventive maintenance shall
be carried out by the EPC Contractor on its own expenditure during the
complete DLP period and without any additional/ extra cost to IIM Indore.
9.30.2 EPC Contractor shall temporarily cover and protect all equipment and open
pipe ends, property/assets of the institute etc. It is the responsibility of the EPC
Contractor to protect all the installed equipment until the time of testing,
commissioning, and handling over to the Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore is
complete.
9.31 Training
9.31.1 The EPC Contractor shall provide training for handling all their equipment, free
of cost to the human resources as required by IIM Indore.
The EPC Contractor will also certify the competence of the trainees.
a) The EPC Contractor shall train the Personnel (Maintenance Team) to become
proficient in operating the equipment installed. Training shall be done as and
when required by IIM Indore till the expiry of the defect liability period.
b) The period of training shall be adequate and mutually agreed upon by the
Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore and EPC Contractor.
c) The Team shall also be trained for routine maintenance work and lubrication,
overhauling, adjustments, testing, minor repairs, and replacements.
d) Nothing extra shall be paid to the EPC Contractor for training.
9.32 Tender Programme
The Tenderer is required to submit with his Tender a detailed programme

which shall identify the main time spans and relationships between all
elements of the Scope of Works.
This programme shall address every element of the Scope of Works including
but not limited to award of Contract, submission and review of design, working
or fabrication drawings, calculations, schedules or details (including
information requirements), submission and review of overall specific method
statements, procurement of all materials and items of equipment (including
those supplied to or from others) required for the permanent and/or
temporary works, off-site fabrication construction, erection, commissioning,
snagging, cleaning, preparation and provision of as-built drawings, operation
manuals and the like and handover - as appropriate to the scope of the works
to be undertaken.
Page 249 of 1358

The Tender Programme shall clearly identify the resources and methods which
the Tenderer intends to adopt in order to achieve the interim and overall stages
of completion required to complete the scope of works.
9.33 Progress Reporting
The EPC Contractor shall provide the Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore with the
following written reports.
• Daily progress report,
• Weekly progress reports,
• Fortnightly progress report,
• Monthly progress reports
Such reports shall include, but not necessarily be limited to, progress in relation
to the programme and any anticipated problems that may cause delays or
disruption. A format for these reports shall be approved by the Authority
Engineer prior to issuance of the first report.
The reports shall inter-alia include the following:
a. Name of Project / Contractor

b. Scope of Works
c. Date of Commencement / Date of Completion: Scheduled and Actual
d. Major Issues and Decisions Pending including Drawings Constraints (if any),
Site Constraints (if any), Equipment Constraints (if any).
e. Status of Progress of Work: Cash Flow Chart, L.O.B. Chart and Bar Chart
f. Areas of Concern
g. List of Registers Maintained
h. Labor Deployment Chart
i. List of Equipment Mobilized at Site
j. Materials/Personnel at Site k. Status of Payment to Contractor
k. Quality of Material / Tests
l. Cost Split Up of the Package
m. Photographs and Videos of the Site
n. Site Order Book
o. Visitor’s Site Inspection
p. Consumable materials such as cement, steel, paint, primer, putty and
admixtures, brought to site by the contractor will be recorded at the gate.
Non-consumable type which would get covered up later will also have to be
accounted at the gate.
Note:
1. Apart from the above, some sample formats for monitoring is also hereby
enclosed for compliance at Annexure-2.
2. A recovery of Rs. 1000/- shall be made on a per day basis in case of delay in
submission of the aforesaid report as required by the institute.
Page 250 of 1358

9.34 Standard Codes / IS Codes

9.34.1 All Standard codes as mentioned in the documents shall be taken as the latest
versions in force as on the date of Bid Submission.
• IS: 456 – code of practice for plain and reinforced concrete.

• IS: 383 – specifications for fine and coarse aggregate from natural sources for
concrete.
• BIS: 1893 - 2016 - Criteria for Earthquake resistant design of Structures.
• IS: 2386 – methods of tests for aggregate for concrete. (nine parts)
• IS: 2430 – methods of sampling.
• IS: 4082 – specifications for storage of materials.
• IS: 2116 – permissible clay, silt and fine dust contents in sand.
• IS: 2250 – compressive strength test for cement mortar cubes.
• IS: 269-2015 – specifications for 33, 43 and 53 grade OPC.
• IS: 455 – specifications for PSC (Portland slag cement).
• IS: 1489 – specifications for PPC (Portland pozzolana cement).
• IS: 6909 – specifications for SSC (super-sulphated cement).
• IS: 8041 – specifications for RHPC (Rapid Hardening Portland cement)
• IS: 12330 – specifications for SRPC (sulphate resistant portland cement).
• IS: 6452 – specifications for HAC for structural use (high alumina cement).
• S: 3466 – specifications for masonry cement.
• IS: 4031 – chemical analysis and tests on cement.
• IS: 456; 10262; SP 23 – codes for designing concrete mixes.
• IS: 1199 – methods of sampling and analysis of concrete.
• IS: 516B– methods of test for strength of concrete.
• IS: 13311 – ultrasonic testing of concrete structures.
• IS: 4925 – specifications for concrete batching plant.
• IS: 3025 – tests on water samples
• IS: 4990 – specifications for plywood formwork for concrete.
• IS 2750 – Specification for Steel scaffolding.
• IS: 9103 – specifications for concrete admixtures.
• IS: 12200 – specifications for PVC (Polyvinyl Chloride) water bars.
• IS: 1077 – specifications for bricks for masonry work.
• IS: 5454 – methods of sampling of bricks for tests.
• IS: 3495 – methods of testing of bricks.
• IS: 1786 – cold-worked HYSD steel rebars (grades Fe415 and Fe500).
• IS: 432; 226; 2062 – mild steel of grade I.
• IS: 432; 1877 – mild steel of grade II.
• IS: 1566 – specifications for hard drawn steel wire fabric for reinforcing concrete.
• IS: 1785 – specifications for plain hard drawn steel wire fabric for prestressed
concrete.
• IS: 2090 – specifications for high tensile strength steel bar for prestressed
concrete.
• IS: 2062 – specifications for steel for general purposes.
• IS: 226 – specifications for rolled steel made from structural steel.
• IS: 2074 – specifications for prime coat for structural steel.
Page 251 of 1358

• IS: 2932 – specifications for synthetic enamel paint for structural steel.
• IS: 12118 – specifications for Polysulphide sealants
9.35 Site Conditions:

9.35.1 All equipment with all specified accessories and efficiency losses accounted for
shall be capable of producing the cooling output at the environmental
conditions stated below:
Summer: 46.00 C DB / 22.00C WB
Monsoon: 30.00 C DB / 22.00C WB
Winter: 26.00 C DB / 6.00 C WB
However Further information can be obtained on temperature, wind speed,

and rainfall from the local Meteorological Office.
9.35.2 Move utilities to avoid conflict with excavation supports etc as site conditions
dictate.
9.35.3 Any utilities disturbed or damaged in the opinion of the representative of the
public utilities comprises shall be restored to his satisfaction at no additional
cost to the Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore.
9.36 Hoisting, Transportation etc
EPC Contractor shall include for the safe transportation of the equipment and
material to the site, his own unloading, storage, assembly and hoisting of
materials and equipment, own scaffolding, rigging and access equipment,
installation and subsequent clean up and rubbish disposal. Remove the same
from the site when no longer required.
9.37 Multiple Visits
The EPC Contractor may be required to perform isolated work or undertake

multiple visits to complete the work to meet the Project Schedule. The EPC
Contractor may be required to leave out portions of the work to accommodate
the construction process. This work shall be performed at no additional cost
and shall be coordinated with the other EPC Contractors.
9.38 Protection / Preservation of Trees
EPC Contractor shall take all measures necessary to ensure the protection and
Page 252 of 1358

preservation of existing trees within the boundary of the Site.

The relocation of the existing trees shall be done as per the guidance of
Authority engineer/ IIM Indore. EPC Contractor shall follow relocation and
replantation norms of the Statutory authority.
9.39 Shop Drawings
9.39.1 The EPC Contractor shall prepare and furnish all Shop Drawings at no extra
cost for approval by the Authority Engineer / IIM Indore before commencing
fabrication / manufacture of the equipment. Such shop drawings shall be
based on the Good for Construction drawings and requirements laid down in
the specifications and as per site conditions. The procurement of material shall
be commenced only after the shop drawings are approved in writing by the
Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore. Such drawings shall be co - ordinated with all
disciplines of work.
9.39.2 The EPC Contractor shall submit following the shop drawings product data to
the Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore for approval adequate to determine
compliance with the specifications after award of the Contract, but prior to
starting work.
9.39.3 Prior to the submission of the same to the Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore, the
EPC Contractor shall review and certify the information is in compliance with
the Contract Documents. Furthermore, the EPC Contractor shall check all
material and equipment when it arrives on Site and verify its compliance with
the Contract Documents.
9.39.4 Shop drawings shall be approved by Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore.
9.39.5 Prior to the submission of the same to the Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore, the
EPC Contractor shall review and certify the information is in compliance with
the Contract Documents. Furthermore, the EPC Contractor shall check all
material and equipment when it arrives on site and verify its compliance with
the Contract Documents.
9.39.6 The EPC Contractor shall submit 10 no’s/sets of each shop drawings to
Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore.
9.40 Documents
The EPC Contractor shall submit to the Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore, the
following documents on completion of the work and before issuance of
Certificate of Final Completion.
i) Certificate for Waterproofing works, anti-termite treatment work etc.

ii) Structural Safety and Stability Certificates.
iii) Green Building Certificate.
iv) Licenses
Page 253 of 1358

v) Test certificates
vi) History sheets of the equipment
vii) Catalogues
viii) Operation and Maintenance manuals
ix) Logbook
x) List of tools and tackles
xi) List of recommended spares and consumables.
xii) Manufacturer’s certification for proper installation as per
manufacturer installation manual.
xiii) Reconciliation statement
xiv) All approvals and sanctions
xv) As Built Drawings
xvi) Provide tools as required by the Specifications.
xvii) Perform all tagging, labelling and signage as specified/required/
directed.
xviii) Warranty certificates for equipment and system performance.
9.41 Operation and Maintenance Manuals:
9.41.1 All manuals shall be written in English and Hindi language.
9.41.2 The EPC Contractor shall submit to the Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore draft
copies of comprehensive operating and maintenance manuals, maintenance
schedule and log sheets for all systems and equipment included in this contract
six weeks before handover. These shall be supported with the manufacturer’s
operating and maintenance manuals.
9.41.3 The manuals shall contain basis of design, detailed technical data and drawings
for each equipment as installed, the erection, testing, operation and
maintenance procedures, spare parts manual and recommended spares for 3-
year period of maintenance of each equipment.
9.41.4 The EPC Contractor shall also submit the preventive maintenance schedule for
the equipment supplied.
9.41.5 The EPC Contractor shall submit 10 sets of installed drawings, operation, and
maintenance manual for all equipment / operations etc. (incorporating
comments, if any, of the Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore) complete in all
respects.
Page 254 of 1358

9.42 Obtaining Clearances / Certificates from Authorities:
The EPC Contractor has to inspect the Site before quoting and ascertain that
the Site suitable for erection of Generators (for temporary/ permeant power),
Batching plants, STP etc. and meet the Statutory requirements of sanctioning
Authority. The Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore shall sign, and issue letters as
required. It is the EPC Contractor’s responsibility to get permission from
statutory Authority and other agencies, within the Project schedule.
9.43 Manufacturing:
The responsibility shall be solely that of the EPC Contractor for ensuring the
manufacture of the equipment as per the specifications. The EPC Contractor
shall be responsible for selection of materials as per agreed specifications and
ensuring that the manufacturer shall be regularly engaged in the production of
package unit and associated spares for the next 5 years and shall be able to
provide maintenance services on a 24-hour basis.
9.44 Manufacturer Instruction:
Any specific instruction furnished by manufacturer covering the points not

mentioned in technical specifications of the RFP shall be brought to the notice
of the Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore for further instructions in this regard.
9.45 Import License:
For importing any item if any import license / L C is required, it shall be the
responsibility of the EPC Contractor on his/her own risk and cost, any delay on
this account shall be to EPC Contractor’s account.
9.46 Interference / Co-ordination if any with Other Services:
9.46.1 Before installation it shall be the responsibility of the EPC Contractor to check
if there is any interference to its piping / cable routing etc with the following:
a) Structural Beams
b) Plumbing
c) Electrical & DG Sets
d) Site Development
e) Core finishes
f) Facades
g) Dry wall partitions,
h) Acoustic panels.
Page 255 of 1358

i) False ceiling
9.46.2 The EPC Contractor shall work when and where directed by the Authority
Engineer/ IIM Indore to install all plumbing required in co-ordination with the
civil works.
9.46.3 The EPC Contractor shall properly trace and anchor all piping within the
foundation slab. The EPC Contractor shall also provide their personnel to
inspect such plumbing installation are correct within the foundation slab
during the placing of the concrete.
9.46.4 The EPC Contractor shall properly brace all fixtures, flushometers, etc. and shall
include any materials necessary to perform this work.
9.47 Make of Materials
Approved make of material shall be used. Alternative make and or listed make
in this Contract shall be used with the specific written approval of the Authority
Engineer/ IIM Indore. Refer Form 16 (List of Approved Makes). IIM Indore
reserves the right to approve/ call for any make/ brand for ensuring best
quality/ adherence to the pattern/ for harmonizing with existing etc. & this shall
be final and binding upon the EPC Contractor.
9.47.1 Preference to make in India
EPC Contractor shall be compliant to the Public Procurement (Preference to

make in India), Order 2017-revised or latest order (as amended from time to
time) issued by the Department of Promotion of Industry and Internal Trade
(DPIIT), Ministry of commerce and Industry. Also, EPC contractors must submit
undertaking (attached in forms section of this RFP) along with bid. Scanned
copy of the filled undertaking duly signed & sealed on letter head of the EPC
Contractor to be uploaded at the time of submission of bid.
2. Only 'Class-I Local supplier' as defined in Public procurement (Preference to

make in India), Order 2017 are eligible to participate for subject tender.
9.48 Sample Submission and Approval
List of Items, material, and equipment to be supplied as a part of the contract

together with samples shall be submitted for approval to the Authority
Engineer/ IIM Indore as per agreed schedule.
Page 256 of 1358

9.49 Substitute Material
Due to Non-availability of any material mentioned in the specifications,

substitute material shall be used only after detail of material accompanied by
all technical data, sizes, particulars of material and manufacturers name, etc.,
shall be submitted to the Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore, for obtaining written
approval for such material.
9.50 Material Testing
The Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore shall have full power to get any material of
work to be tested by an independent agency at random at the EPC Contractor’s
risk and cost in order to confirm the soundness and adequacy.
9.51 Interchangeability
All similar parts or equipment shall be interchangeable, with one another.
9.52 Works Inspection

9.52.1 Prior to shipment of equipment the Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore reserves
the right to inspect the same at manufacturer’s works and the EPC Contractor
shall provide and secure for the Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore or his
Authorized Representative every reasonable access and facility at the
manufacturer works for inspection and testing. The EPC Contractor to bear the
expenses, for such works inspection at the manufacture’s location, for the
Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore or his Authorized Representative.
9.52.2 Site Inspection:
a) Prior to proceeding with the Works, the EPC Contractor shall carefully inspect
the installed works and verify that all such works is complete to the point where
this work can commence.
b) Verification of dimensions prior to fabrication and installation.
c) Equipment has been chosen which will fit into the physical spaces provided and
indicated, allowing sufficient space for access, servicing, removal and
replacement of parts etc. However, since spare requirements and equipment
arrangements vary according to each manufacturer, the responsibility of
access and proper fit lies with the EPC Contractor.
d) While carrying out the inspection the existing infrastructure, including IT,
Telephony systems, EPBX, CCTV, etc., must be looked into so that the
infrastructure coming up under Group VIII Project should sync with the
existing.
Page 257 of 1358

9.53 Inspection and Testing
a) All equipment shall be inspected and tested as per an agreed Inspection Test
Plan which shall be submitted by the EPC Contractor as per the agreed
schedule. Before the same is packed and dispatched from the EPC Contractor’s
Works. The EPC Contractor shall get it tested as specified / directed.
b) The EPC Contractor shall get performed all such tests as may be necessary to
meet requirements of Local Authorities, Municipal or other statutory laws /
byelaws in force. No extra shall be paid for these.
c) The Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore may, at his sole discretion, carry out
inspection at different stages during manufacturing and final testing after
manufacturing.
d) Approvals or passing of any inspection by the Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore of

his authorized representative shall not, however, prejudice that right of the
Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore to reject the plant and / or equipment if it does
not comply with the specification when erected or give complete satisfaction in
service.
9.54 Material & Equipment Supplied by The Authority:
Not Applicable
9.55 Safety of Material:
The EPC Contractor shall be responsible for protecting all the materials and
equipment against damage from any cause whatsoever.
9.56 Tendered Quoted price all Inclusive:
a) The Quoted Price tendered by the EPC Contractor for the Group VIII Project
shall be all inclusive and shall apply to all heights, lifts and leads and depths, in
all positions of the building.
b) The quoted price in this RFP shall be inclusive of cost of materials, labour,
equipment, furniture, furnishing, site office, establishment and operation, P&M
required for erection & commissioning of the project, designing, drawing,
engineering, procurement, Water, power, operating expenses, profit margin,
incidental expenses, all other taxes excluding GST and excluding PF,ESIC etc.
The Quote should also include but not limited to testing, samples, handling
charges, storages, plant & machinery etc., for successful completion to the
satisfaction of the competent authority of IIM Indore as per the scope of the
work. The quote should be inclusive of making all infrastructure ready to use
and fully functional to the level as intended, from the day of Handing over of
the Project. No extra claim will be entertained.
c) The quoted price must be for complete items inclusive of all such accessories,
Page 258 of 1358

fixtures and fixing arrangements, supports, nuts, bolts, hangers as are a

standard part of the particular item.
d) The quoted price are inclusive of cutting holes, cores and chases in walls and
RCC floors / beams / columns / walls and making good the same with cement
mortar / concrete / waterproofing of appropriate mix and strength as per
specification and / or as directed by the Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore. The
EPC Contractor shall provide holes, sleeves, recesses in the concrete and
masonry work as the Work proceeds.
e) The quoted price shall have the provision for incorporation of all the directions
of competent authority of IIM Indore passed in the interest of the Group VIII
Project.
f) The EPC Contractor’s quote shall also factor in the expenses towards
responsibility for compliance of all statutory provisions towards labour cess or
any other applicable laws, as the case may be, from time to time i.e. all
statutory levies and taxes shall be borne by the EPC Contractor. The applicable
GST, applicable TDS towards GST and Income tax or any other statutory
levies/taxes as per the Central Govt./State Govt./local body Regulations shall
be deducted from the running account bills/final bill, as applicable at the time
of payment. Only the GST, PF & ESIC at actuals during the pendency of the
contract shall be reimbursed . No other claim in this regard shall be
entertained.
g) The quoted price must be inclusive of expenses in transferring all kinds of
ownership rights to the institute.
h) The price shall remain firm during the currency of the contract subjected to
Clause 17.8 of GCC “Price adjustment for Works” read with other terms and
conditions of this RFP.
9.57 Partial Occupancy of Services:
During progress of the Work, completed portions of building may be occupied

and put to use by the IIM Indore. The EPC Contractor shall however remain fully
responsible for the maintenance of installation till the entire Work covered by
the Contract is satisfactorily completed and handover to the IIM Indore.
9.58 Equipment:
a) All equipment shall be brand new, of the time and capacity specified and as
shown on the drawings.
b) The equipment shall be supplied by the listed manufacturer and model
number and shall be in accordance with the space limitations of the Project.
c) The EPC Contractor shall furnish and install any necessary items as required by
the manufacturer of equipment supplied, whether or not shown on the
drawings, at no additional cost to the IIM Indore, for the installation of a
complete and operable system in every respect.
Page 259 of 1358

d) Roof top located equipment shall be installed with all bases, curbs, flashings
and counter flashings light provided by the EPC Contractor.
e) Painting of all concealed and exposed pipes, equipment as specified including
weatherproof treatment on exposed / buried pipe work shall be part of this
Contract, even if it is implicitly / explicitly not specified in the technical
specifications, scope of work.
f) The EPC Contractor will include scrubbers on all pump gauges.
g) The direction of the Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore shall be adhered to with
regards to placement, installation of the equipment at the risk and cost of EPC
Contractor. The quoted price should cover this aspect as well.
9.59 License and Permit:
9.59.1 The EPC Contractor must keep constant liaison with the Municipal/ Other
Statutory Authorities or other competent Authority and obtain approval of all
Works carried out by him/her.
9.59.2 The EPC Contractor shall assist the Institute to obtain from the Municipal/
Other Statutory Authorities the Final Completion Certificate with respect to
Group VIII Projects as defined in the Scope of works.
9.59.3 The EPC Contractor shall assist the Institute, as part of his/her scope of work,
to obtain necessary Licenses/ certifications/ NOCs etc., from the appropriate
authority for the scope of this contract.
9.60 Working Programmes
9.60.1 Management Meetings -The EPC Contractor or its Authorised representative

required to attend all the meetings/ workshops etc., as and when called for by
the Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore. The cost and all incidental expenses for
attending the said meeting shall be borne by the EPC Contractor with no
additional financial implication of whatsoever nature on Authority Engineer/
IIM Indore. The minutes of meetings shall be recorded, and the EPC Contractor
is bound to follow the same with no additional cost implication on Authority
9.60.2 Programme of Working Drawings, Method Statements and Other

Submissions (Design Programme) BIM Modelling
a) The EPC Contractor shall prepare a programme which will clearly define and
separately identify the intended preparation, submission and review of each
individual package of working drawings or submissions for every element of
the scope of works.
Page 260 of 1358

b) This programme shall be represented in the form of a bar chart or a series of

bar charts, supported by durations, start and finish dates and amount of float
resulting from the critical path analysis of the network for the contracted scope
of works. A precedence network shall also be supplied to support and explain
the bar chart(s).
c) The EPC Contractor shall, when preparing the design programme, take into
account the physical and technical interfaces between every element of the
scope of works for the EPC Contractor and the scope of works for other
contracts based on information provided by the Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore
from time to time. Design information should then be submitted in a form that
will enable a full coordinated and complete review of the drawing package or
submission. If design details are submitted in an uncoordinated and
incomplete manner, then they will be returned without review with a request
to be re-submitted when they are in a sufficiently complete form to enable a
complete and thorough review. This may include reference to previously
reviewed drawings or documents, provided that the documents being referred
to have attained a satisfactory status.
d) An essential part of this programme will be the phasing of submission in order
that the Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore is provided with an even flow of
reviews, with a gradual and controlled build up and run down of effort. The
Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore will always endeavor to return documents
within the stipulated review periods but cannot guarantee such action if
submissions are provided in an ad-hoc, substandard or incomplete manner. It
is therefore to the benefit of the EPC Contractor and the project to provide
submissions in a well-ordered fashion.
e) This programme shall also identify all items of information which the EPC
Contractor requires to be provided by the Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore, the
time that they are required and the elements and tasks within the programme
that the EPC Contractor considers will be affected and how they will be affected
by the provision of such information.
f) In addition to indicating the essential relationships between each element or

task of the programme, this programme will also clearly identify the
relationship between the completion of review of each submission and any
subsequent procurement, manufacturing construction or other key element of
the Contract.
g) It is essential that, in preparing the design programme, the EPC Contractor

should bear in mind that submissions may not necessarily achieve approved
status at first submission and the programme should be designed with a
suitable contingency for that eventuality.
h) This programme will form an intrinsic part of the Scope of Work.

i) The programme to be submitted in MSP/ Primavera format.
Page 261 of 1358

9.60.3. The Procurement Programme
a) The EPC Contractor shall prepare a programme clearly identifying and defining
the intended preparation of shop drawings, fabrication schedules and the like,
procurement of materials, the manufacture and / or fabrication of materials,
items of plant or equipment required to complete the scope of works, any tests
required, the preparation of goods for shipment, the method of shipment to
be adopted, the shipment of goods and delivery to site of each item or
shipment of material, item of plant or equipment required for the execution of
the scope of work.
b) When the information is available, the EPC Contractor shall develop this
programme into a comprehensive procurement schedule which will include,
but not necessarily be limited to, names and locations of all manufactured and
/ or fabricators of materials, plant and / or equipment, scheduled fabrication
or manufacturing runs, scheduled packaging, shipping, docking and clearance
dates, intended means of shipment (road, rail, air, sea) and the name and
shipping details of each vessel, vehicle, aircraft etc. to be utilised in shipping
items for the project.
c) This programme should be presented in the form of an MSP/ Primavera bar
chart or a series of a bar charts supported by duration, start and finish dates
and amount of float, resulting from the critical path analysis of the network for
the whole scope of works. A precedence network will also be supplied to
support and explain the bar chart(s).
d) In addition to indicating the essential relationships between each element or

task of the programme, this programme will also clearly identify the
relationship between the end of each procurement string (i.e., delivery of the
work site) and commencement of the related installation or construction
activities.
e) In consideration of the risks inherent in shipping, the procurement programme
shall also identify sufficient time periods for the unpacking and checking of
delivered materials in addition to sufficient contingency to mitigate the effects
of the type of event or series of events that an experienced EPC Contractor
should anticipate.
The EPC Contractor shall submit a procurement plan for the materials, for a
maximum of 2 months stock of proposed work in the contract period. Due to
any compelling reasons such as market price fluctuation or substantial
increase in prices of Cement, Steel & Tiles, the EPC Contractor can make a
representation to the Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore to consider a relaxation
in the stipulated maximum of 2 months stock. The Authority Engineer/ IIM
Indore may consider this on merits and the decision by the Authority Engineer/
IIM Indore in this matter shall be final.
Page 262 of 1358

9.60.4. The Construction / Installation Programme
a) The EPC Contractor shall prepare a programme in the form of PERT Chart (in MSP
/ Primavera) which will clearly identify the intended sequences, duration and
relationships for all activities required for the execution of the Works. This
programme shall be presented in the form of a bar chart or a series of bar
charts, supported by duration, start and finish dates and amount of float,
resulting from the critical path analysis of the network for the whole scope of
work. A precedence network diagram shall also be supplied to support and
explain the bar chart(s), showing all dependencies between activities.
b) The construction programme shall include all testing and commissioning
requirements, the provision of deliverable documents prior to completion and
will make do allowance for snagging. The key dates for handover of stages of
the work are to be shown.
c) It is essential when developing this programme, that the EPC Contractor takes
into account the requirement that all related design submissions, material
submission and method statements must have achieved a suitable status
before the associated element of the work may commence.
d) This programme shall also identify all items of information and working areas
which the EPC Contractor requires, the time that they are required and the
elements and tasks within the programme that the EPC Contractor considers
will be affected and how they will be affected by the provision of such
information and working locations.
e) This information should clearly identify the phases of work.
f) The EPC Contractor must use a licensed version of all software without any risk
/ cost to the Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore.
9.60.5. The Overall Programme
a) The EPC Contractor shall summarize the three programmes (engineering,

design, procurement, and construction) into a single programme at the level of
detail above that described in the individual programmes. This shall be
considered the summary level for monitoring and reporting purposes.
b) The overall programme shall be presented in the form of a bar chart.

c) The overall programme shall also be provided in the form of a precedence
network, which will clearly identify all relationships and dependencies at the
most detailed level of programme.
d) The overall programme shall indicate the means by which the EPC Contractor
intends to achieve any interim milestone or handover dates required by the
EPC Contractor.
Page 263 of 1358

9.60.6. Updating of Programmes
a) The overall programme shall be marked-up at the end of each month to show
progress to month end or as and when required by the Authority Engineer/ IIM
Indore.
b) In the event of slippage of any activities, report to be prepared giving detailed
proposals for full recovery during the coming month together with a recovery
programme if requested.
c) The marked-up programme and recovery proposals / programme (if

applicable) to be submitted by the first working day of the month to the
9.61 Record Keeping
The EPC Contractor shall furnish and deliver to the Authority Engineer/ IIM
Indore a series of progress photographs taken of the works as follows:
a) On first day of each month, until the work is complete, 6 (six) colour
photographs of works to be taken from points selected by the Authority
Engineer/ IIM Indore showing as much as possible of the work installed or
completed during the previous month.
b) When the work is completed, and when directed by the Authority Engineer/ IIM
Indore, 12 (twelve) full colour photographs of works to be taken from points of
view selected by the Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore.
c) All photographs to be min 6 x8 in size however in case enlarged photograph is
required EPC Contractor shall furnish the same. The soft copies shall bear the
date of exposure and shall be accompanied by a schedule giving the name of
the project, description of view and other pertinent data.
d) The EPC Contractor shall be responsible for all the costs related to production
of monthly progress photographs.
e) The EPC Contractor shall take photos and video from the locations approved
by the Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore to show the progress of work at monthly
intervals/ as called for, throughout the construction period and furnish
photographs/ videos and CDs/ DVDs/ Hard Disk of required duration
(minimum 15 minutes for each month) duly indicating therein the specified
number of negative / prints affixed in albums. Each photograph/video shall be
marked with the description of the photograph/video and location from which
it was taken.
f) The ownership and copyright of all photographs / CDs/ DVDs and negatives
shall be vested with the IIM Indore and are not to be used without IIMI’s
permission under any circumstances. Negatives and prints / CDs/DVDs shall be
handed over to the Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore monthly.
Page 264 of 1358

9.61.1. Documents on Site
The EPC Contractor shall maintain including but not limited to the following
documents at Site which are including but not limited to the following:
i. Muster Roll
ii. Labour Register
iii. Hindrance Register
iv. Material Register (Materials Account Statement)
v. Stock Register
vi. Material Testing Registers
vii. Daily Works Register
viii. Measurement Book
ix. Site Instruction Book (triplicate)
x. Project Risk Register
xi. The EPC Contractor shall keep and maintain latest editions of relevant B.I.S.
codes, IS Codes and NBC’s at the work site and make it available to the
Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore when required.
xii. Any other documents required by the Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore to check
quality / progress of Work, etc.
xiii. Records required under Labour law/ other statutory acts applicable for the
project.
The EPC Contractor shall maintain records and accounts in connection with the
performance of this Contract, which will accurately document incurred costs,
both direct and indirect, of whatever nature for a period as specified under
respective Central Government’s/ other statutory authorities rules/
regulations/acts etc., from the date of completion of the Work. The Authority
Engineer/ IIM Indore/ statutory authorities shall have the right to examine and
copy, at all reasonable times and with advance notification, such records and
accounts as required and called for.
9.62 Handover From or to Other Trade EPC Contractors
Not Applicable
9.63 Office Facility
9.63.1 The EPC Contractor shall erect, operate and maintain the fully furnished site
office for the Authority Engineer & IIM Indore and related facilities till the
completion/ handing over/closure, (whichever is later) of the project in all
respects. All costs towards installation and operation including consumables,
spares and any other expenses shall be deemed to have been included in the
quoted rates for the project.
Page 265 of 1358

9.63.2 At the end of the above period or as and when directed by the Authority
Engineer/ IIM Indore, the EPC Contractor shall dismantle the site office and
clear the site in all respects and hand over back to the Authority Engineer / IIM
Indore in the original condition or in a levelled manner.
9.63.3 The site office construction shall be completed within 30 days from the date of
issue of LOI and the site office shall be furnished and air conditioned and made
fully operational, including water supply, sanitation facilities, computers,
printers, etc. within 30 days from the date of issue of LOI.
9.63.4 The following facilities shall be provided by EPC Contractor in the respective
areas as indicated. The numbers and details are indicative and may vary
marginally depending on requirements.
9.63.4.1 Client’s Office

a. Two Executive Cabins – both the cabins with Executive, Table,
Chair, 6 nos. visitor chairs, air conditioned, equipped with
Personal Computer (with required software), internet facility,
printers, conferencing facility. Office cupboard, pin up display
board.
b. Conference Room – to accommodate minimum 20
participants, with required furniture i.e., conference table,
chairs, etc. The room should be air conditioned, with projector
and conferencing facility.
9.63.4.2 Authority Engineer’s Site Office

a. Two Executive Cabins – both the cabins with Executive, Table,
Chair, 6 nos. visitor chairs, air conditioned, internet facility,
printers, conferencing facility.
b. Room for Site Team Seating – to accommodate 10 persons,
equipped with furniture and chairs, internet facility and air
conditioned.
9.63.4.3 Common Facilities
• All Offices and Conference Hall to be Air Conditioned and

ceiling fans also to be provided.
• All computers in all offices shall be net worked with Wi-Fi
connection with min 30MBPS speed.
• Housekeeping arrangements shall be made to clean the
complete site office complex and premises, including toilets
every day and also to maintain all areas in spotlessly clean
condition throughout the day.
• Coffee, tea and drinking water with dispenser shall be
provided to all site office staff as and when required.
Page 266 of 1358

• All electricity, water, telephone, fax and internet bills shall be

paid by EPC Contractor, including installation charges, monthly
rentals and operating costs.
• Comprehensive maintenance arrangements shall be made for
all office equipment’s to ensure minimum down time.
• Safety helmets, safety shoes and monsoon shoes shall be
provided for all staff of the IIM Indore, the Authority Engineer
& visitors.
• Above facilities shall be made available for visitors also - 20 nos
• Blinds / curtains shall be provided for all windows.
• Exclusive security guards shall be provided for the site office
round the clock.
• All signage for site office as required shall be provided.
9.63.5 The EPC Contractor to maintain the above facility at their own risk and cost,
throughout project duration & shall be dismantled, relocated as and when
instructed by the competent authority of IIM Indore.
9.63.6 Display of notices
The EPC Contractor shall display all permissions, licenses, registration

certificates and other statements required to be displayed under various
labour laws and other legislations applicable to the works at the site office and
also maintain the requisite register / records factually and up to date and keep
them ready for inspection by the concerned authorities and also make
available the same to the Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore for inspection.
9.64 Final Bill - As per GCC
9.65 Mechanisation
EPC Contractor is instructed to resort to mechanization process during

construction in order to optimize deployment of skilled manpower and labour.
By virtue of mechanization, EPC Contractor will endeavor to ensure project
schedule requirement are adhered. Examples of mechanization however not
limited to, are mentioned below:
• Use as much as possible proprietary / branded and proven. Modular

Formwork System for shear walls, retaining walls columns etc. EPC
Page 267 of 1358

Contractor may deploy fabricated / proprietary / local manufacturer

product of proven quality or supply any similar formwork system.
• Boom Placers, etc.
• Any other possible means of mechanization.
EPC Contractor must submit a Method Statement, Formwork Design, MAR for
approval of the Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore.
9.66 Minimum Technical Parameters –

Engineer in Charge reserves the right to relax some parameters of detailed
specifications without compromising with the output criteria in view of the
availability in the time bound manner, harmonizing the development with
existing one and in the interest of the work and delivery.
9.67 Taxes including GST Compliances

No Tax or statutory levy other than GST shall be reimbursed by IIM Indore.
The EPC Contractor shall be responsible for compliance of all statutory
provisions towards ESI, PF or any other applicable laws, as the case may be,
from time to time i.e., all statutory levies and taxes shall be borne by the EPC
Contractor. The applicable GST, applicable TDS towards GST and Income tax or
any other statutory levies/taxes as per the Central Govt./State Govt./local body
Regulations shall be deducted from the running account bills/final bill, as
applicable at the time of payment. Only the GST as applicable during the
pendency of the contract shall be reimbursed extra. No other claim in this
regard shall be entertained.
9.68 GRIHA Compliance
SPECIAL CONDITIONS OF GRIHA FOR CIVIL.
EPC Contractor shall obtain GRIHA 5-star rating and shall consider the same suitably in his
financial offer. GRIHA Precertification to GRIHA 5-star final certification shall be forming the
part of the scope of EPC Contractor. 'It is Understood that the EPC Contractor shall be
performing the requirement for Documentation and Simulation works (Providing
photographs, technical datasheets etc) required to obtain the GRIHA 5-star certification at
its own risk and cost.
The criteria for complying with GRIHA requirements are indicated below.
1. General Inclusions for Green Building:
The EPC Contractor is bound to execute and work as per the Green Building Guidelines
specified under GRIHA rating and as instructed by Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore’s
representatives.
Page 268 of 1358

The EPC Contractor shall work in close coordination with the Authority Engineer/ IIM
Indore’s or any other specified agency to provide the required documents / drawings /
photographs/purchase orders/ filled logs/ contracts with scrap dealers etc. as required for
Green Building Certification under GRIHA. The EPC Contractor shall be penalized on non-
submission of aforementioned data.
Criteria 1: Green Infrastructure

• The transplant existing mature trees within the site and ensure that they survive.
Criteria 2: Low Impact Design

• The EPC Contractor should ensure preservation of existing vegetation/ existing water
bodies /other topographical features like boulders etc.
Criterion 3: Design to mitigate UHIE,

• The contract should ensure that the site surface visible to sky with high SRI coating or with
high SRI value material.
• SRI (Solar reflective index) value of the exposed site surface including the roof greater than
0.5.
• The EPC Contractor has to keep records for purchase orders of paints/ tiles with high SRI.
• Provide the photographs of the measures implemented. (Post construction landscape)
Criteria 4: Air and Soil pollution control (during construction)

• Provide 3m high barricade around the construction area.
• Provide Wheel washing facility at the vehicular entrance of the site.
• Cover fine aggregate and excavated earth on site with plastic/geotextile sheets.
• Water sprinkling on fine aggregate (sand) and excavated earth.
• The EPC Contractor shall undertake fertility test (specifying NPK and Organic carbon) for
soil to understand soil potential to reuse for plantation.
• The EPC Contractor shall make adequate arrangements to remove and store the topsoil
layer (200mm upper layer) of the site in a standard manner or as recommended and
approved by the Green Building Consultants.
• The EPC Contractor shall carry out temporary seeding, mulching, plantation on site as
recommended by Green Building Consultants to check soil erosion.
• All diesel gensets on site to have proper chimneys with their outlet facing away from the
site.
• Develop and implement a spill prevention plan (to control effects of spill from hazardous
materials like bitumen, diesel etc.) on site.
• PUC certified vehicles should be used.
• The EPC Contractor needs to document compliance of criteria through photograph.
• Limit the speed of vehicular movement on-site 10km/hr.
Criterion 5: Topsoil Preservation during Construction/compensatory depository forestation -
• All required certificates/specification sheet explaining the properties of the building

material/system needs to be obtained from the manufacturer/vendor as required by the
green building rating authority. The final certificates would be produced after the approval
of green building consultant with necessary due diligence. The purchase orders of all the
materials made with the manufacturers / authorized vendors should be maintained and
shall be provided for the process with due diligence upon request.
Page 269 of 1358

• The EPC Contractor shall limit overall site disturbances including earthwork and clearing of
vegetation as prescribed by GRIHA or as recommended and approved by the Green
Building Consultants.
• The EPC Contractor shall retain the protected areas as marked in the logistics plan thereby
keeping these undisturbed. It will be the responsibility of the EPC Contractor to oversee
that construction activity does not spill in these protected areas, leaving the ground cover
or vegetation in these areas untouched.
• The topsoil should be stored and preserved for post construction landscape, topsoil
requirement.
• Existing trees being preserved should be barricaded, with diameter equivalent to the
canopy of the tree.
• Document through photographs showing compliance of measures with the criterion.
Criterion 6: Construction Management Practices
• The EPC Contractor shall undertake soil erosion and sedimentation control measures as
required by GRIHA, based on the standard site management practices as prescribed by NBC
2005 and as approved by the Green Building Consultants. These measures may include
construction of sedimentation basins / trenches as approved by Green Building
consultants. The EPC Contractor shall take all precautions / measures to ensure that soil is
not carried away from the site due to runoffs or any other causes as may get identified.
• The EPC Contractor shall manage water flows and runoffs on site during the construction
period. The standard soil erosion control practices prescribed in NBC or as recommended
and approved by Green Building consultants shall be implemented on site prior to
monsoons.
• Trenches to be constructed along the construction boundary which can be terminated in
sedimentation basins. Sedimentation basins will have to be constructed to prevent soil
erosion, throughout the construction period.
• Efficient water uses during construction.
The EPC Contractor shall take measures to minimize the wastage of water during
construction and shall control on potable water usage for construction activities such as
curing, washing etc as guided by Green Building Consultant/Authority Engineer.
Reduction in waste during construction

• The EPC Contractor shall be responsible for the management, including storage, collection
and disposal/recycling of construction waste generated on site during construction.
• The EPC Contractor shall plan for minimization of waste generation on site during the
course of construction. This plan shall be required to be discussed with the Green Building
consultants and documented.
• The EPC Contractor shall reuse the construction waste generated on site for purposes
found suitable like for roadwork filling, site levelling, backfilling etc.
• The EPC Contractor shall ensure proper, segregated storage of all waste generated and a
plan for proper utilization/ disposal of the waste through proper channels like scrap
dealers/ recycler or as approved by the Green Building consultants. Documentation shall
be maintained by the EPC Contractor of this plan.
• The EPC Contractor shall store the construction waste in a segregated manner, separately
in sheds on site or in designated areas, such that it does not cause any air, land or water
pollution, particularly in the undisturbed areas in and around the project site.
Page 270 of 1358

Storage of construction work material

• All construction material shall be properly stored to avoid wastage of material on site. The
EPC Contractor should employ standard NBC practices for material storages or practices
approved by Green Building consultants to ensure that construction material storage does
not cause pollution to uncontaminated parts of the site or any areas outside the site
boundaries, due to material run offs during monsoons etc.
• The EPC Contractor must ensure that Construction materials having the potential to pollute
either land or water such as cement, fly ash etc. should be stored in covered, built sheds,
with impervious floors. It is recommended to construct a temporary trench bounding such
storage areas, so that potential pollutants do not get mixed with the storm water run-off.
• The EPC Contractor shall ensure that hazardous and spill-prone materials such as
pesticides, fuel, paints, solvents, any chemicals etc, are be handled with care and any
spillage on the ground should be prevented.
• Proper logistics plan to be followed which includes location of material storage, entry-exit
to the site, labour colony etc, as approved by Green Building consultant.
Construction and Demolition Waste Management' Protocol to be followed:

• The demolition waste shall be segregated and stored separately in predesigned areas. The
storage area must preferably not be on bare earth.
• Demolition plan and layout to record the sequence of demolition, segregation, recovery,
recycling, and reuse shall be prepared.
• An effort must be made to harvest each type of waste separately.
• The demolition waste materials shall not be dumped in landfills.
• More than 75 % of the demolition waste generated must be either sent for recycling
through authorized agency or must be reused on site itself.
• The EPC Contractor shall provide detailed information of the diversion strategy for each
type of demolition waste. Minimum 5 nos. of different demolition waste materials must be
diverted from landfills.
• Documentation of these to be recorded through photographs.
Criterion 7: Energy Optimization

• The EPC Contractor should document through photographs, implementation of Electrical,
Mechanical system technical data sheet, PO copies at the post construction.
• The EPC Contractor should document building material implementation photographs
(Insulation to wall and roof), material specifications, GRIHA product catalogue.
• The EPC Contractor should document BEE star rated labelled or equivalent appliance as
per the consultant specification.
Criterion 8: Renewable Energy Utilization

• The EPC Contractor should document through photographs, implementation of Renewable
Energy measures on site, post construction.
Criterion 9: Indoor Air Quality.
• All paints are low VOC and lead-free interior paints, and adhesives and sealants should
comply with the VOC limits prescribed GRIHA, / as green initiatives as follows:
• The Interior composite wood-product do not use urea-formaldehyde as a bonding resin.
• Use of wood-based materials containing Phenol formaldehyde, Melamine formaldehyde as
bonding agents.
Page 271 of 1358

Limits for low – VOC content in interior paints
Paint applications VOC limits (grams of VOC per litre)

Flat <50
Interior Coating
Non-Flat <150
Flat <200
Exterior Coating
Non-Flat <100
Anti-corrosive Gloss/Semi-Gloss/ Flat <250
Limits for low – VOC content in adhesives in interior applications
Architectural adhesive application VOC content limit (g of VOC/litre)

Wood Flooring 100
Industrial / Rubber flooring 60
Ceramic Tile 65
Structural Glazing 100
Multi-Purpose construction 70
Sub-floor 50
Wall board/panel 50
PVC welding 285
Adhesive primer for plastic 250
Structural wood member 140
Sub-specific use metal to metal 30
Wood 30
Fibre glass 80
Plastic foams/porous materials (Except wood) 50
Limits for low VOC content in interior sealants
VOC content limit (grams of VOC per

Sealant application
litre)
Architectural/roadways 250
Single-ply roof material installation/repair 450
Others 420
Sealant primer applications architectural non-porous 250
Sealant primer application architectural porous 775
Other sealant primer applications architectural 750
• Submit purchase orders for paints, sealants, resins (reflecting full quantities).
• Submit manufacturer data sheet indicating VOC (g/L) content in adhesive and sealant.
• Document through photographs compliance of the criterion.
Page 272 of 1358

Criterion 10: Water Demand Reduction

• The EPC Contractor to keep records and Submit purchase orders (reflecting full quantities)
for the low-flow fixtures used in the project.
• Document through photographs, of the measures implemented in compliance of the
criterion.
• The EPC Contractor should keep records and submit purchase orders (reflecting full
quantities) for the irrigation systems installed on site.
criterion.
Criterion11: Wastewater Treatment

• The EPC Contractor will need to submit potable water quality, treated wastewater, and
captured rainwater quality test reports from various sources before and after treatment (if
required) - from an NABL accredited laboratory on the quality of potable water. (Post
construction, before occupancy)
criterion, for wastewater treatment plant and rainwater harvesting systems.
• EPC Contractor should document technical specification sheets/brochures for wastewater
treatment system installed on-site highlighting its type, capacity, and efficiency to
demonstrate compliance.
Criterion12: Rainwater Management

• The EPC Contractor should document soil percolation test report depicting rate of soil of
the site.
Criterion 13: Water Quality and Self-Sufficiency

• Document through photographs that the various measures implemented onsite to reduce
the WPI of the project demonstrating compliance.
• EPC Contractors should submit third-party (from labs accredited by NABL) water quality test
reports for water used for various purposes in the project demonstrating compliance.
Criterion 14: Utilization of Alternative Materials in Building.
• Promote the use of recommended waste material (such as blast furnace slag (GGBS), fly
ash etc..,), having the properties similar to conventional construction material for building
construction. These being low embodied energy material as well as waste products, reduce
the need for virgin materials in the building structure and help divert the waste from
landfills.
• All the building materials and systems used on site must be as per the specifications and
approved makes by the Engineer-In-Charge. (Example: - Window Glazing, Wall, Roof,
Insulation, shadings, Etc…)
• Minimum 30% of the ordinary Portland cement replacement with GGBS (Ground
Granulated Blast-furnace Slag) in plaster/masonry mortar. The EPC Contractor needs to
submit the purchase orders reflecting full quantities and test report highlighting recycle
content percentage.
Page 273 of 1358

• Minimum 40% composition of building blocks/bricks by GGBS/Fly ash (Ground Granulated

Blast-furnace Slag/Fly ash) by volume, for 100% load bearing and non-load bearing masonry
wall. The EPC Contractor needs to submit the purchase orders reflecting full quantities and
test report highlighting recycle content percentage.
• Minimum 30% replacement of ordinary Portland cement with GGBS (Ground Granulated
Blast-furnace Slag) by weight of cement used in structural concrete. The EPC Contractor
needs to submit the purchase orders reflecting full quantities and test report highlighting
recycle content percentage.
criterion.
Criterion 15: Reduction in Global Warming Potential through Life Cycle Assessment.
Embodied energy of the building structure material should be low as specified in the
GRIHA and which promotes the reduction in embodies energy of building materials.
• Submit the Cycle Assessment report (using a third party LCA Calculator) for each individual
material.
• Submit purchase orders (reflecting full quantity) and relevant sections of the BOQ
highlighting the low-energy materials used.
• Provide photographs, with description, of the measures implemented.
Low environmental impact materials in the building interiors* should be specified same
as the GRIHA requirement.
Following materials will be accepted as low-environmental impact.
a) Stones from India
b) Composite wood-based product
c) FSC chain of Custody certified product
d) Manufactured products with at least 5% recycled content.
e) Product with EPD (cradle to gate) analysed and published as per ISO 14025/ISO
21930
f) Products with water footprint (cradle to gate) analysed and published as per ISO
14046
(* false ceiling/internal partition/panelling/in-built furniture/flooring/internal door &
window panels & frames).
• Natural finished materials are preferred to be use in the project.
• All required certificates/specification sheet explaining the properties of the building
material/system needs to be obtained from the manufacturer/vendor as required by the
green building rating authority. The final certificates would be produced after the approval
of green building consultant with necessary due diligence. The purchase orders of all the
materials made with the manufacturers / authorized vendors should be maintained and
shall be provided for the process with due diligence upon request.
• Submit purchase orders (reflecting full quantities) and relevant sections of the BOQ for the
low environmental impact materials used in building interiors.
Criterion 16: Alternate Material for External Site Development.
Page 274 of 1358

Ensure that at least 70% of all roads and vehicular pathways within site premises are
constructed with one, or any combination, of the following.
• Bituminous road with minimum 6% plastic waste content by weight of bitumen.

• Cast in-situ cement concrete road with minimum 30% fly ash content by weight of total
cementitious material.
• Concrete blocks with minimum 40% fly ash content by weight of block » Paver blocks
containing minimum 10% C&D waste content by weight of block.
• Stones from India
• Any other product with minimum 10% recycled content by weight
criterion.
Ensure that 100% of the pavement/footpath including kerb stone constructed on-site are
constructed with one, or any combination, of the following.
• Bituminous pavement with minimum 6% plastic waste by weight of bitumen

• Cast in-situ concrete with minimum 30% fly ash content by weight of total cementitious
material.
• Concrete blocks with minimum 40% fly ash content by weight of block
• Paver blocks containing minimum 10% C&D waste content by weight of material.
• Stones from India
• Any other product with minimum 10% recycled content by weigh
Criterion 17: Safety and Sanitation for Construction Workers
Sanitary Conveniences
• Adequate number of toilets and potable drinking water facility shall be provided, as guided
by Authority Engineer/Green building Consultant with proper design and layout to allow for
clean and regular use.
Labour shelters
• The labour colony shall be adequate and properly outlined to provide a safe and habitable
living for labourers. The cleanliness and solid waste management of the labour colony shall
be the responsibility of the EPC Contractor.
• Safety measures for workers/labours shall be provided from materials of construction,
transportation, storage, and other dangers and health hazards.
• EPC Contractor shall provide all required equipment’s and support to fulfil safety
procedures, norms and guidelines (as applicable) as specified in NBC 2005 -Part 7:
Construction practices and Safety.
• EPC Contractor shall provide health facilities for on- site workers like arrangement of first
aid facility, health check-up camp, safety and health awareness programmes/seminars etc.
to improve worker’s workability.
• The EPC Contractor shall conduct periodic test (to ensure the portability) for the drinking
water provided for labours on site, if the drinking water facility is not from corporation.
• EPC Contractor should provide crèche in labour colony, if there are children residing in the
colony Also EPC Contractor shall be responsible to maintain cleanliness and hygiene in the
labour colony.
Safety of Construction workers (Labours)
Page 275 of 1358

• EPC Contractor shall provide personalized safety equipment’s (gum boots, hand gloves,
helmets, welder's protective eye-shield etc.) to all construction workers and responsible to
ensure the implementation of safety norms (thought the construction) by the construction
workers, as guided by the green building consultant.
• Also, EPC Contractor shall provide safety nets, barricades, safety signage’s etc. to educate
construction workers and other staff on site.
• The project shall avoid working during night.
• Submit test reports demonstrating that the drinking water provided to workers meets the
relevant BIS drinking water norms.
• Submit narrative on provision of crèche facility for children of construction workers (only if
workers’ family is living on site).
Criterion18: Universal Accessibility

Criterion25: Dedicated facilities for service staff

Criterion 26: Positive Social Impact

Criterion 27: Project Commissioning

• Provide photographs, with commissioning documents, electromechanical equipment
technical data sheets, system protocol.
Criterion 28: Smart metering and monitoring

• Submit specification sheets and purchase orders of the various meters installed in the
project.
• Submit details and purchase orders of the Smart Metering system installed in the project.
9.69 Handing Over

• The EPC Contractor in presence of the Authority Engineer should
Witness testing and commissioning of all utilities and certify the same.
The EPC Contractor shall check all the provisions for durability of the
structures & installations including furniture’s, equipment’s etc. and
submit a detailed report on the same.
• Preparation of completion report - Provide project completion report

which shall contain all technical and financial information of the
project. The EPC Contractor to submit, Completion Reports &
drawings, structural stability/sufficiency certificate and issue of as built
drawings & handing over all the assets to the Authority Engineer/ IIM
Indore.
• Preparation of manual for the maintenance – The EPC Contractor to
Page 276 of 1358

arrange for user operation and maintenance manuals and training to

the Authority Engineer’s/ IIM Indore’s representatives. EPC Contractor
shall ensure that technician of IIM get sufficient training and for this
they shall seek an authentication from Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore.
In the absence of authentication, it will be presumed that training not
conducted or imparted. In respect of highly specialized instruments if
any, the supplier has to deploy an operator for three months at site of
installation.
• EPC Contractor to get all warranty papers and test certificates from all
vendors and equipment suppliers. All warranties and guarantees on
equipment/ fixtures etc. procured by the EPC Contractors shall be in
the name of IIM Indore.
• Provide adequate engineering and supervisory staff for during the DLP
inspection / monitoring of works on communication from IIMI, during
Defect Liability Period and issue of timely notice to vendors / agencies
for rectification of defects, if observed.
• EPC Contractor to support the Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore, to reply

and settle the observations / objections / paras (if any & at any stage
pre/during/post construction & at any point of time) of the CVC/Chief
Technical Examiner, CAG audit or any other checking / investigating
agency of the Government. EPC Contractor will be fully responsible for
consequences of any audit / investigation para & its respective
observation. If at all any financial implication arisen during or after the
execution work in respect of the aforesaid observation/ settlement,
then EPC Contractor will have to bear the full cost of the financial
implications subjected the reason is attributable to EPC Contractor.
(However, whether the reason is attributable to EPC Contractor or not
will be governed by the decision of competent Authority of IIM Indore
and same will be final & binding to the EPC Contractor).
• EPC Contractor to compile a list of all vendors and manufacturers and

their maintenance/ local office/ distributor/representative to be
contacted in case of need.
9.70 Disposal of Debris/ Waste Material-

EPC Contractor’s responsibility includes the disposal of the debris/waste
material of any nature/type to the Indore Municipal Corporation’s authorized
place of disposal (as on date it is Devguradia, Indore) on their own expenses.
Nothing extra shall be paid by IIM Indore on this account.
9.71 Contribution of EPF and ESI –

The ESI and EPF contributions on the part of employer in respect of this
contract shall be paid by the contractor. These contributions on the part of the
employer paid by the contractor shall be reimbursed by the Engineer-in-charge
to the contractor on actual basis. The verification of deployment of labour will
Page 277 of 1358

be done through biometric attendance system or any other suitable method

by the Engineer-in-charge. The applicable and eligible amount of EPF & ESI shall
be reimbursed preferably within 7 days but not later than 30 days of
submission of documentary proof of payment provided same are in order.
Page 278 of 1358

Summary of Consequential Clauses in case of non-performance
For the sake of clarity in respect of various penal / compensation relatedprovisions, the respective
clauses are summarized hereunder:
Ref Clause. Clause Details
@ 0.75% per month subject to a maximum of 5% of the accepted
Chapter 2 – A.1 Compensation for delay tendered amount, to be computed on a per day basis after the
contract period. Further details for levying the compensation are
as follows:
• If the Contractor fails to adhere the timelines to complete

the respective deliverables as mentioned in this RFP on or
before the period mentioned or justified extended date of
completion of the respective deliverables i.e. excluding
any extension given without compensation, he shall,
without prejudice to any other right or remedy available
under the law to the IIM Indore on account of such breach,
pay as compensation the amount calculated at the rates
stipulated above.
• The Director IIM Indore will be the sole authority who may
decide on the amount of accepted Tendered Value of the
services for every completed day/month (as determined)
that the progress remains below the specified or that the
services remain incomplete.
• Provided always that the total amount of compensation

for delay to be paid under this condition shall not exceed
5 % (five percent) of the accepted Tendered Value of
services. In case no compensation has been decided by
the Director IIM Indore during the progress of contract,
this shall be no waiver of right to levy compensation by
the Director IIM Indore if the services remain incomplete
on final justified extended date of completion. If the
Engineer in Charge decides to give further extension of
time allowing performance of services beyond the
justified extended date, the Authority Engineer shall be
liable to pay compensation for such extended period.
Page 279 of 1358

• Provided that compensation during the progress of work

before the justified extended date of completion for delay
under this clause shall be for non-achievement of
sectional completion or part handing over of services
on stipulated/justified extended date for such part
services or if delay affects any other works/services. This
is without prejudice to the right of action by the Engineer
in Charge for levying compensation in respect of delay in
performance and claim of compensation. In case action
has not been finalized and the services has been
determined/terminated under the respective clause of
this RFP, the right of action under this clause shall remain
post determination of contract but levy of compensation
shall be for days the progress is behind the schedule on
date of determination, as assessed by the competent
authority, after due consideration of justified extension.
The compensation for delay, if not decided before the
determination of contract, shall be decided after of
determination of contract. The amount of compensation
may be adjusted or set-off against any sum payable to the
Authority Engineer under this or any other contract with
the IIM Indore.
After signing of agreement with IIMI, Contractor shall prepare an
integrated programmed chart in MS Project/Primavera software
for the execution of work, clearly showing all activities from the
start of work to completion, with details of manpower,
equipment and machinery required for the fulfilment of the
Preparation of
Chapter - 6 programme within the stipulated period or earlier and submit
Programme Chart
the same for approval to the IIM Indore within ten days of award
of the contract. A recovery of Rs. 1000/- shall be made on per
day basis in case of delay in submission of the above
programme.
After signing of agreement with IIMI, EPC Contractor shall prepare

Building Information Model (BIM) for the Scope of work as per RFP.
BIM (LOD 500) for Architectural, Structural, Interior, MEP, ELV, BMS,
Networking services, External Development, External services, etc.,
Chapter - 6 BIM Modelling LOD 500
to be created in line with the Design drawings, specification, DBR's
and the other technical details. The said BIM (LOD 500) should
include but not limited to the following - Drawings, BOQ, Elements,
progressive coordinated drawings, clash detection work,
walkthrough, rendering, as built drawings, etc. EPC Contractor to
Page 280 of 1358

submit the same for approval to the IIM Indore within 45 days from
the date of commencement. A recovery of Rs. 1000/- shall be made
on per day basis in case of delay in submission of the above
programme.
EPC Contractor shall prepare and submit an execution plan and

Daily/Weekly/Fortnight methodology and submission of Daily/Weekly/Fortnightly/Monthly
Chapter - 6 Progress report as required by the Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore.
ly/Monthly Report
A recovery of Rs. 1000/- shall be made on per day basis in case of
delay in submission of the aforesaid.
Drawing up and putting in place a Quality Assurance Plan as well
as a Safety Assurance Plan along with an appropriate and
Quality and safety efficient mechanism to ensure their effective implementation at
Chapter-6
assurance plan site. Non -adherence to the aforesaid plan attributable to
Contractor will attract penalty as decided by the competent
Authority of the institute, which shall be final & binding.
The Engineer-in-Charge/Director of IIM Indore may, without
prejudice to his any other right or remedy against the Contractor
in respect of any delay, inferior workmanship, any claim for
damages and / or any other provisions of this contract or
GCC Article otherwise, and whether thedate for completion has or has not
Termination:
21 elapsed and irrespective of the actual completion of the
work/job/project/services, by notice in writing absolutely
determine/ terminate the contract by pointwise reasons,
including but not limited to, instances of delay or non-
commencement of work/ services.
For any absenteeism of the aforesaid respective
manpower during the execution ofthe contract period,
the EPC Contractor to make sure the necessary
alternative without any absenteeism. Any absenteeism
more than a week shall be liable to penalize. (to be
computed on per day basis of the respective
Chapter 4, absenteeism) –
Absenteeism • For Sr. No. 1 to 2 – Rs. 1 Lakh per person per
Note 4
month.
• For Sr. No. 3 to 10 – Rs. 70 thousand per
person per month.
• For Assistant Project Manager in the above
table – Rs. 50 thousand per person per month.
• For Balance – Rs. 20 thousand per person per
month
Page 281 of 1358

Reimbursement of
increased GST, PF, ESIC In case of delay attributable to the Contractor & there is an
increase in GST rate or PF, ESIC then the reimbursement towards
rate during the
GST, PF and ESIC shall be restricted to the rate as prevailing
delayed contract
during currency of the original contract.
period
Note: Any other clause with respect to compensation / penalty / liquidated damage etc. which are not
mentioned herein the above table will be guided by therespective clause of this RFP.
Page 282 of 1358

FORMS
Page 283 of 1358

Form -1
LETTER OF TRANSMITTAL
[ON THE LETTER HEAD OF APPLICANT]
To,
The Director,
Indian Institute of management, IndoreRau-Pithampur Road,
Indore- 453536
SUB: Submission of bids for the Appointment of EPC Contractor for Construction of Group VIII
Projects comprising of multistorey hostel blocks, academic building, faculty offices & Apartments
and other associated Infrastructure at IIM Indore.
Sir,
Having examined the details given in Notice and RFP document for the above work, I/we hereby
submit relevant document.
1. I/we hereby certify that all the statements made, and information supplied in respect of the
aforesaid bid and accompanying statements are true and correct.
2. I/we furnished all information and details necessary for eligibility and have no further
pertinent information to supply.
3. I/we submit the requisite bid security & bid processing fee and authorize the Institute i.e., IIM
Indore or its officials to approach the bank issuing the same to confirm the correctness
thereof. I/We also authorize IIM Indore and its officials to approach individuals, employees
firms and corporation to verify our competence and general reputation.
4. I/We submit the certificates/ documents in support of our suitability, technical knowledge
and capability for having successfully completed the said works (as mentioned / as attached
in support of eligibility requirement)
Enclosures:
1.
2.
3.
Seal of bidder
Date of submission: Signature(s) of Bidder(s)
Page 284 of 1358

Form -2
Litigation & Arbitration cases Completed & Pending/in progress with details during last 7
Years
[ON THE LETTER HEAD OF BIDDER]
Form-2
Litigation & Arbitration cases Completed & Pending/in progress with
details during last 7 Years
Name & Address

Name
with mobile no. of Litigati
Sl. of Name of Awarded Litigatio Remark
Location the officer/Engineer- on
No. work/pro the Client Cost n Brief s
In-Charge for the Status
ject
project
Page 285 of 1358

Sample/indicative format for Completion certificate(s) for similar projects’ job completed during
last five years.
Reference No. Date
Name & Address of the Client:
Name of the Firm:
1 Name of work with brief particulars

2 Work Order No. & Date
3 Agreement Amount
4 Date of commencement of work
5 Stipulated date of completion
6 Actual date of completion
7 Details of compensation levied for delay (
indicate amount) if any
8 Gross amount of the work completed andpaid
9 Name and address of the authority under

whom works executed
10 Whether the EPC Contractor employed qualified
Engineer during execution of work?
11 i) Quality of work (Indicate grading)
(Outstanding/ Very Good/ Good /
Satisfactory/ Poor)
12 i) Did the EPC Contractor go for arbitration

ii) If yes, total amount of claim
iii) Total amount awarded
13 Comments on the capabilities of the EPC Contractor
a) Technical Proficiency (Outstanding/ Very Good/

Good / Satisfactory/ Poor)
b) Financial soundness (Outstanding/ Very Good/
Good / Satisfactory/ Poor)
c) Mobilization of adequate T&P
(Outstanding/ Very Good/ Good /
Satisfactory/ Poor)
d) Mobilization of manpower (Outstanding/ Very
Good/ Good / Satisfactory/ Poor)
e) General behavior (Outstanding/ Very
Good/ Good / Satisfactory/ Poor)
Authorized Signatory
Page 286 of 1358

Format of Bank details for refund of bid security on letter head
1. Name of the Beneficiary:
2. Address:
3. Telephone Number (with STD code)/ Mobile No.
4. Bank Particulars
a. Bank Name:
b. Branch Address:
c. Branch Code:
d. MICR code (enclosed copy of a cancelled cheque):
e. 11 Digit IFS Code of the Bank
f. Bank Account Number
g. Bank Account Type:
5. Permanent Account Number (PAN):
6. Email Address for intimation regarding release of payments:
Seal of the Firm Name & Signature of Authorized Signatory
Page 287 of 1358

Format for Power of Attorney for signing of BID.

(Refer Chapter 2 clause C.4)
Know all men by these presents, We……………………………………………. (name of the firm and address of the
registered office) do hereby irrevocably constitute, nominate, appoint and authorize Mr./ Ms. (name),
…………………… son/daughter/wife of ……………………………… and presently residing at …………………., who is
presently employed with our Firm/Agency/ Enterprise and holding the position of ……………………………. ,
as our true and lawful attorney (hereinafter referred to as the “Attorney”) to do in our name and on our
behalf, all such acts, deeds and things as are necessary or required in connection with or incidental to
submission of our BID for the “Appointment of EPC Contractor for construction of Group VIII
Projects comprising of multistorey hostel blocks, academic building, faculty offices & apartments
and other associated infrastructure at IIM (the “Authority”) including but not limited to signing and
submission of all applications, BIDs and other documents and writings, participate in Pre-BID and other
conferences and providing information/ responses to the Authority, representing us in all matters
before the Authority, signing and execution of all contracts including the agreement and undertakings
consequent to acceptance of our BID, and generally dealing with the Authority in all matters in
connection with or relating to or arising out of our BID for the said Project and/ or upon award thereof
to us and/or until the entering into of the EPC Contract with the Authority. AND we hereby agree to ratify
and confirm and do hereby ratify and confirm all acts, deeds and things done or caused to be done by
our said Attorney pursuant to and in exercise of the powers conferred by this Power of Attorney and
that all acts, deeds and things done by our said Attorney in exercise of the powers hereby conferred
shall and shall always be deemed to have been done by us.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF WE, ………………., THE ABOVE-NAMED PRINCIPAL HAVE EXECUTED THIS POWER OF
ATTORNEY ON THIS ……… DAY OF …………. 2….
For …………………………...
(Signature, name, designation and address)
of person authorized by Board Resolution
(in case of Firm/ Company)/ partner in case of
Witnesses: Partnership firm
1.
2.
Accepted
……………………………
(Signature)
(Name, Title and Address of the Attorney) (Notarized)
Person identified by me/ personally appeared before me/
Attested/ Authenticated*
(*Notary to specify as applicable)
(Signature Name and Address of the Notary)
Seal of the Notary
Registration No. of the Notary
Date………………
Page 288 of 1358

Notes:
• The mode of execution of the Power of Attorney should be in accordance with the procedure,
if any, laid down by the applicable law and the charter documents of the executant(s) and when
it is so required, the same should be under common seal affixed in accordance with the
required procedure.
• Wherever required, the Bidder should submit for verification the extract of the charter
documents and documents such as a board or shareholders’ resolution/ power of attorney in
favor of the person executing this Power of Attorney for the delegation of power hereunder on
behalf of the Bidder.
Page 289 of 1358

(Format of Integrity Pact)
INTEGRITY PACT
Between
Indian Institute of Management Indore hereinafter referred to as “The Principal”
and
……………………………………………….. hereinafter referred to as “The Bidder/ EPC Contractor”
Preamble
The Principal intends to award, under laid down organizational procedures, contract/s for
…………………………………. The principal values full compliance with all relevant laws of the land, rules,
regulations economic use of resources and of fairness/ transparency in its relations with its Bidder(s)
and / or EPC Contractor(s).
In order to achieve these goals, the Principal will appoint Independent External Monitors (IEMs) who will
monitor the tender process and the execution of the contract for compliance with the principles
mentioned above
Section 1 - Commitments of the Principal
(1) The Principal commits itself to take all measures necessary to prevent corruption and to observe
the following principles :
a. No employee of the Principal, personally or through family members, will in connection

with the RFP for, or the execution of a contract, demand, take a promise for or accept,
for self or third person, any material or immaterial benefit which the person is not
legally entitled to.
b. The Principal will, during the tender process, treat all Bidder(s) with equity and reason. The
Principal will in particular, before and during the tender process, provide to all Bidder(s)
the same information and will not provide to any Bidder(s) confidential / additional
information through which the Bidder(s) could obtain an advantage in relation to
the tender process or the contract execution.
c. The Principal will exclude from the process all known prejudiced persons.
(2) If the Principal obtains information on the conduct of any of its employees which is a criminal
offence under the IPC/PC Act, or if there be a substantive suspicion in this regard, the Principal
will inform the Chief Vigilance Officer and in addition can initiate disciplinary actions.
Page 290 of 1358

Section 2 - Commitments of the Bidder(s)/ EPC Contractor(s)
(1) The Bidder(s)/ EPC Contractor(s) commit themselves to take all measures necessary to prevent
corruption. The Bidder(s)/ EPC Contractor(s) commit themselves to observe the following
principles during participation in the tender process and during the contract execution.
a. The Bidder(s)/ EPC Contractor(s) will not, directly or through anyother person or firm,
offer, promise or give to any of the Principal's employees involved in the tender process
or the execution of the contract or to any third person any material or other benefit
which he/she is not legally entitled to, in order to obtain in exchange any advantage of
any kind whatsoever during the tender process or during the execution of the contract.
b. The Bidder(s)/ EPC Contractor(s) will not enter with other Bidders info any undisclosed
agreement or understanding, whether formal or informal. This applies in particular to
prices, specifications, certifications, subsidiary contracts, submission or non-
submission of bids or any other actions to restrict competitiveness or to introduce
cartelisation in the bidding process.
c. The Bidder(s)/ EPC Contractor(s) will not commit any offence under the relevant IPC/PC
Act; further the Bidder(s)/ EPC Contractor(s) will not use improperly, for purposes of
competition or personal gain, or pass on to others, any information or document
provided by the Principal as part of the business relationship, regarding plans, technical
proposals and business details, including information contained or transmitted
electronically.
d. The Bidder(s)/EPC Contractor(s) of foreign origin shall disclose the name and address of
the Agents /representatives in India, if any Similarly the Bidder(s)/EPC Contractor(s) of
Indian Nationality shall furnish the name and address of the foreign principals, if any.
Further details as mentioned in the "Guidelines on Indian Agents of Foreign Suppliers"
shall be disclosed by the Bidder(s)/EPC Contractor (s).Further, as mentioned in the
Guidelines all thepayments made to the Indian agent/ representative have to be in
Indian Rupees only. Copy of the "Guidelines on Indian Agents of Foreign Suppliers" is
placed at (page nos. 6-7).
e. The Bidder(s)/ EPC Contractor(s) will, when presenting their bid, disclose any and all
payments made, is committed to or intends to make to agents, brokers or any other
intermediaries in connection with the award of the contract.
f. Bidder(s) /EPC Contractor(s) who have signed the Integrity Pact shall not approach the
Courts while representing the matter to IEMs and shall wait for their decision in the
matter.
(2) The Bidder(s)/ EPC Contractor(s) will not instigate third persons to commit offences outlined
above or be an accessory to such offences.
Section 3 - Disqualification from tender process and exclusion from future contracts
(1) If the Bidder(s)/EPC Contractor(s), before award or during execution has committed a transgression
Page 291 of 1358

through a violation of Section 2, above or in any other form such as to put their reliability or
credibility in question, the Principal is entitled to disqualify the Bidder(s)/EPC Contractor(s) from
the tender process or take action as per the procedure mentioned in the "Guidelines on Banning
of business dealings". Copy of the "Guidelines on Banning of business dealings" is placed at
(page nos. 8-17).
Section 4 - Compensation for Damages
(1) If the Principal has disqualified the Bidder(s) from the tender process prior to the award
according to Section 3, the Principal is entitled to demand and recover the damages equivalent
to Earnest Money Deposit/ Bid Security.
(2) If the Principal has terminated the contract according to Section 3, or if the Principal is entitled to
terminate the contract according to Section 3, the Principal shall be entitled to demand and
recover from the EPC Contractor liquidated damages of the Contract value or the amount
equivalentto Performance Bank Guarantee.
Section 5 - Previous transgression
(1) The Bidder declares that no previous transgressions occurred in the last three years with
any other Company in any country conforming to the anti- corruption approach or with any
Public Sector Enterprise in India that could justify his exclusion from the tender process.
(2) If the Bidder makes incorrect statement on this subject, he can be disqualified from the tender
process or action can be taken as per the procedure mentioned in "Guidelines on Banning of
business dealings".
Section 6 - Equal treatment of all Bidders / EPC Contractor / Subcontractors(not permitted

otherwise)
(1) In the case of Sub-contracting, the Principal Contractor shall take the responsibility of the
adoption of Integrity Pact by the Sub-contractors.
(2) The Principal will enter into agreements with identical conditions as this one with all Bidders and
Contractors.
(3) The Principal will disqualify from the tender process all bidders who do not sign this Pact or violate
its provisions.
Section 7 - Criminal charges against violating Bidder(s) / Contractor(s) /Subcontractor(s)
If the Principal obtains knowledge of conduct of a Bidder, Contractor or Subcontractor, or of an

employee or a representative or an associate of a Bidder, Contractor or Subcontractor which
constitutes corruption, or if the Principal has substantive suspicion in this regard, the Principal
will inform the same to the Chief Vigilance Officer.
Section 8 - Independent External Monitor
(1) The Principal appoints competent and credible Independent External Monitor for this Pact after
approval by Central Vigilance Commission. The task of the Monitor is to review independently
Page 292 of 1358

and objectively, whether and to what extent the parties comply with the obligations under this
agreement.
(2) The Monitor is not subject to instructions by the representatives of the parties and performs
his/her functions neutrally and independently. The Monitor would have access to all Contract
documents, whenever required. Itwill be obligatory for him / her to treat the information and
documents of the Bidders/Contractors as confidential. He/ she reports to the Director,IIM.
(3) The Bidder(s)/Contractor(s) accepts that the Monitor has the right to access without restriction to
all Project documentation of the Principal including that provided by the Contractor. The
Contractor will also grant the Monitor, upon his/her request and demonstration of a valid
interest, unrestricted and unconditional access to their project documentation. The same is
applicableto Sub-contractors.
(4) The Monitor is under contractual obligation to treat the information and documents of the
Bidder(s)/ Contractor(s)/ Sub-contractor(s) with confidentiality. The Monitor has also signed
declarations on Non-Disclosureof Confidential Information' and of 'Absence of Conflict of
Interest'. In caseof any conflict of interest arising at a later date, the IEM shall inform Director,
IIM INDORE and recuse himself / herself from that case.
(5) The Principal will provide to the Monitor sufficient information about all meetings among the
parties related to the Project provided such meetings could have an impact on the contractual
relations between the Principal andthe Contractor. The parties offer to the Monitor the option
to participate in such meetings.
(6) As soon as the Monitor notices, or believes to notice, a violation of this agreement, he/she will so
inform the Management of the Principal and request the Management to discontinue or take
corrective action, or to take other relevant action. The monitor can in this regard submit non-
binding recommendations. Beyond this, the Monitor has no right to demand from theparties
that they act in a specific manner, refrain from action or tolerate action.
(7) The Monitor will submit a written report to the Director, IIM INDORE within 8 to 10 weeks from
the date of reference or intimation to him by the Principaland, should the occasion arise, submit
proposals for correcting problematic situations.
(8) If the Monitor has reported to the Director IIM INDORE, a substantiated suspicion of an offence
under relevant IPC/ PC Act, and the Director IIM INDORE has not, within the reasonable time
taken visible action to proceed against such offence or reported it to the Chief Vigilance Officer,
theMonitor may also transmit this information directly to the Central Vigilance Commissioner.
(9) The word 'Monitor' would include both singular and plural.
Section 9 - Pact Duration
This Pact begins when both parties have legally signed it. It expires for the Contractor 12 months after
the last payment under the contract, and for all other Bidders 6 months after the contract has
been awarded. Any violation of the same would entail disqualification of the bidders and
exclusion from future business dealings.
If any claim is made / lodged during this time, the same shall be binding and continue to be valid despite
Page 293 of 1358

the lapse of this pact as specified above, unless it is discharged / determined by Director, IIM
INDORE.
Section 10 - Other provisions
(1) This agreement is subject to Indian Law. Place of performance and jurisdiction is the Registered
Office of the Principal, i.e. Indore.
(2) Changes and supplements as well as termination notices need to be made in writing. Side
agreements have not been made.
(3) If the Contractor is a partnership or a consortium, this agreement must be signed by all partners
or consortium members.
(4) Should one or several provisions of this agreement turn out to be invalid, theremainder of this
agreement remains valid. In this case, the parties will strive to come to an agreement to their
original intentions.
(5) Issues like Warranty / Guarantee etc. shall be outside the purview of IEMs.
(6) In the event of any contradiction between the Integrity Pact and its Annexure, the Clause in the
Integrity Pact will prevail.
(For &, On behalf of the Principal) (For &, On behalf of Bidder/ Contractor)
(Office Seal) (Office Seal)

Place …………………………….
Date …………………………….
Witness 1:
(Name & Address)
Witness 2:
(Name & Address)
Page 294 of 1358

Format of Bank Guarantee

Bank Guarantee for Performance Security
(On the appropriate stamp paper)
THIS DEED OF GUARANTEE made on day of _ 2022, between[Name of

Bank]., having Registered Office at [Address], (hereinafter called the “Bank” which expression shall
unless repugnant to the context and meaning thereof include its successors) in favor of [The Director
IIM Indore] having its office at [Address] and Registered Office at [Address]. (Hereinafter called
“Authority” which expression shall unless repugnant to the context and meaning thereof include its
successors and assigns).
WHEREAS has issued a Letter of Acceptance / Work Order dated

to having its Corporate office at
(hereinafter called the “EPC Contractor”) which constitute a binding Contract
(hereinafter called “Contract Agreement”) for carrying out the “(Name of Work )” based
upon the RFP submitted by the EPC Contractor and agreed between Authority and EPC Contractor
and subject to the terms therein contained. The work to be carried out by EPC Contractor shall be
supervised and implemented by
. (hereinafter called “AuthorityEngineer”)
AND WHEREAS in accordance with the terms and conditions of the contract agreement, the EPC
Contractor has agreed to furnish a Bank Guarantee to Authority in the form of acceptable to for a sum
of Rs.
(Rupees Only) to ensure timely and satisfactory.
performance by the EPC Contractor of its obligation under the Contract Agreement.
AND WHEREAS the Bank has at the request of the EPC Contractor agreed to furnish this irrevocable
and unconditional guarantee in favor of Authority to secure performance by the EPC Contractor of its
obligations under the Contract Agreement on the terms and conditions herein contained.
NOW THIS DEED WITHNESSTH AS FOLLOWS:
i) The Bank hereby unconditionally and irrevocably guarantees the due and punctual performance
and observance of and compliance by the EPC Contractor of the covenants, agreements,
conditions and provisions expressed or implied on the part of the EPC Contractor to be
performed observed orcomplied with under the Contract Agreement in accordance with the
terms thereof and in the event of any non-performance and non-compliance of the same for
any reason, the Bank shall absolutely irrevocably and unconditionally without any demur
right of set off or counter claim, forthwith upon written demand by Authority and without
demur or protest and without reference to the EPC Contractor pay to Au tho rity a sum not
exceeding Rs. (Rupees
only). A demand so made by shall be final and binding on theBank.
ii) The Bank’s liability under this Guarantee is restricted to Rs.

(Rupees only).
Page 295 of 1358

iii) The decision of Authority for the time being in force, or at any time thereafter as to the non-
performance, non-observance and non-compliance by the Contractor of the covenants,
agreements, conditions and provisions, expressed or implied, on the part of the Contractor, to
be observed performed or complied with under the Contract Agreement shall be final,
conclusive and binding upon the Bank and shall not in any circumstances be questioned by the
Bank, under what so ever circumstances.
iv) Any demand for payment under this Guarantee shall be made on the Bank by Owner in writing
at [Bank Address] and shall be deemed to have been sufficiently made by Authority if the writing
containing the demand is sent to the Bank by registered post to the address as aforesaid or sent
to the Bank by hand delivery at such address and written acknowledgement obtained to such
delivery.
v) The guarantee obligations of the Bank hereunder shall continue in force and effect and be
binding on the Bank in accordance with its terms up to
or until the due performance, observance and compliance by the EPC Contractor of all the
covenants, agreements, conditions and provisions, expressed or implied, on the part of the
EPC Contractor to be observed, performed or complied with under the Contract Agreement,
the completion of the Defects Liability Period and issue of the Certificate of Final Completion
by A u t h o r i t y in accordance with the Contract Agreement whichever is later.
vi) As between the Bank and Authority (but without affecting the EPC Contractor’s obligations) the
Bank shall be liable under this Guarantee as if it were the sole principal debtor. The Bank’s
liability here under shall not be discharged nor shall its liability be affected by:
a. any time, indulgence, waiver or consent at any time given by Authority to the EPC Contractor.
b. Any amendment to the Contract Agreement,
c. The making or the absence of any demand by Authority on the EPC Contractor or any other person
for payment.
d. The enforcement or absence of enforcement of the Contract Agreement or of any security or other
defect in any provision of the Contract Agreement or of any of the EPC Contractor obligations
there under.
e. The dissolution, amalgamation, reconstruction or reorganization or appointment of any

Administrative Receiver of the EPC Contractor.
vii) The Guarantee herein contained shall not be determined or in any way prejudiced or affected
by any change in the constitution of the Bank/ Authority or by any merger, or amalgamation or
reconstruction of the Bank / Authority but shall be enforceable against the merged,
amalgamated or reconstruction body.
viii) The Bank hereby expressly and irrevocably waives all claims of waiver, release, surrender or
compromise and all defenses, set offs, counter claims recoupments, reductions, limitations and
impairments, whatsoever.
Page 296 of 1358

ix) Authority shall be at liberty to vary and alter or modify any of the terms and conditions of the
Contract Agreement including without limitation to extend from time to time the time for the
performance of the Contract Agreement by the EPC Contractor or to postpone from time to
time any of the powers exercisable by against the EPC Contractor, to forbear or to enforce
any of the terms and conditions of the Contract Agreement, without in any manner affecting
this Guarantee and without notice to or assent of the Bank.
x) The Bank waives any right to require/proceeding first against the EPC Contractor or the
realization first of any other security or other guarantee, if any.
xi) The Bank agrees and confirms that its obligation to make payment to Authority on demand
hereunder and discharge of such obligation shall not be delayed,exercised or avoided by reason
of any act or omission on the part of Authority.
xii) The bank declares and confirms that the Bank has taken all necessary corporate action to
authorize the execution delivery and performance of this Guaranteein accordance with the
terms hereof and that the Bank has full power to enter into and perform and discharge its
obligations under taken hereunder and that this Guarantee constitutes legal, valid and binding
obligation of the Bank, enforceable in accordance with its terms and any defects therein or in
its execution shall not be a plea for non-payment or performance of its obligation.
xiii) This guarantee shall be Governed by and construed in all respects according to the laws of India
and shall be subject to the jurisdiction of the courts in Indore (Madhya Pradesh).
xiv) Any forbearance or indulgence on the part of Authority in the enforcement of the covenants,
agreements, conditions and provisions, expressed or implied, on the part of the EPC Contractor
to be observed, performed or complied with by the EPC Contractor under the contract
agreement shall in no way relieve the Bank of its liability under the Guarantee.
xv) Terms and expressions defined in the contract agreement and used herein shall have the
meanings assigned to them therein save and except where the context otherwise require.
xvi) Notwithstanding anything contained hereinabove.
a. Our liability under this bank guarantee shall not

exceedRs. (Rupee )
b. This bank guarantee shall be valid up to or and
c. It is a condition to our liability for payment of the guaranteed amount or part any thereof arising
under this Bank guarantee that we receive a valid written claim or demand for payment under
this bank guarantee on orbefore or as provided in clause 5 whichever is later failing which our
liability under this bank guarantee will automatically cease.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF THE BANK HAS SET ITS HAND AND SEAL THE DAY ANDYEAR FIRST
ABOVE WRITTEN.
SIGNED for and behalf )
Page 297 of 1358

Of the Bank by it’s duly authorized )Representative Mr. )

In the presence of
Undertaking Form
Following undertaking on bidder’s letter head as under shall be submitted along with Technical bid.
Local Content certification
We M/s __________________________________(bidder’s name) under that we meet the mandatory Local

Content (LC) requirement for qualifying as ‘Class I Local supplier’s as per the PP-LC Policy against
Tender No. ______________________________dated ____________. The percentage of Local Content in
the Bid is _________%*
Authorized dated signature of the bidder with stamp.
Page 298 of 1358

Annexure-1 (To be submitted after award of contract)
FORMAT OF CURRICULUM VITAE (CV) FOR PROPOSED PROFESSIONAL STAFF
Photograph
Proposed Position: ………………………………………………
Name of Firm:
Name of Staff:
Profession/ Specialization:
Date of Birth:
Years with Firm/Entity:
Nationality:
Membership of Professional Societies:
Detailed Task Assigned:
Sl. Name of Post Project Period Assignment Client of Remark

No Employer Held Name in the Project the
Project
From To
Education:
[Summarise college/university and other specialised education of staff member, giving their names, dates
attended (period of attendance), and degrees obtained. Use about one quarter of a page.]
Key Qualifications:
[Give an outline of staff member’s experience and training most pertinent to tasks on assignment.
Describe degree of responsibility held by staff member on relevantprevious assignments and give dates
and locations. Use about half a page.]
Employment Record:
[Starting with present position, list in reverse order every employment held. List all positions Held by
staff member since graduation, giving dates, name of employing organizations, titles of positions held,
and locations of assignments. For experience also give types of activities performed and client references,
where appropriate. Use about three-quarters of a page.]
Languages:
[For English language indicate proficiency: excellent, good, fair, or poor; in speaking, reading, and writing]
Page 299 of 1358

Summary of Qualification & Experience vis-à-vis the requirements as per RFP:
Requirements as Possessed by the Break-up of experience

per RFP Staff Member
Brief Description of Man-months
Project provided
Certification by the Candidate:
I, the undersigned, (Name and Address) undertake that this CV correctly describes myself, my
qualifications and my experience and Employer would be at liberty to debar me if any information given
in the CV, in particular the Summary of Qualification & Experience viz-a-viz the requirements as per RFP
is found incorrect. I further undertake that I have neither been debarred by IIMI or any other central/
state government/ Autonomous bodies/ organizations nor left any assignment with the EPC Contractor
firm/agency/enterprise engaged by Employer / contracting firm (firm to be supervised now) for any
continuing work of Employer without completing my assignment. I will be available for the entire duration
of the current project (named….). If I leave this assignment in the middle of the work, Employer would be
at liberty to debar me from taking any assignment in any of the Employer works for an appropriate period
of time to be decided by the Employer. I have no objection if my services are extended by the Employer
for this work in future.
I further undertake that my CV is being proposed for this project by --------------------------------------- (the
applicant firm) and I have not given consent to any other EPC Contractor firm/agency/enterprise to
propose my CV for any position for this project.
I further undertake that if due to my inability to work on this project due to unavoidable circumstances,
due to which EPC Contractor firm/agency/enterprise is forced to seek replacement. In such unavoidable
circumstances, I shall not undertake any employment in Employer projects during the period of
assignment of this project and Employer shall consider my CV invalid till such time.
I undertake that I have no objection in uploading/hosting of my credentials by Employer in public domain.
For Key Personnel having intermittent inputs, add the following:
I further certify that I am associated with the following assignments as on date (as on 7 days prior to due
date for submission of proposal) including those for which LOA has been received by the firm and the
inputs in these assignments shall not affect the work of the current assignment.
Name of Client Date of Likely start Likely end Total inputof

Assignment LOA (Month /Year) (Month the person
/Year) (man
months)
Page 300 of 1358

………………………………………………………….. Date………………
(Signature of Key Personnel) (Day/Month/Year)
Certification by the firm
The undersigned on behalf of ----------(name of EPC Contracting firm/agency/enterprise) certify that the
qualification and experience details of Shri ------ (name of the proposed personnel and address) as
described in the CV has been checked and found to be correct. It isalso certified that Shri-------- (name of
proposed personnel) to the best of our knowledge has neither been debarred by IIMI or any other
Central/State Government/ Autonomous organizations nor left his assignment with any other EPC
Contracting firm/agency/enterprise engaged by the Employer/ Contracting firm(firm to be supervised
now) for the ongoing projects. We understand that if the information about leaving the past assignment
is known to the Employer, Employer would be at liberty to remove the Personnel from the present
assignment and debar him for an appropriate period to be decided by the Employer.
………………………………………………………….. Date………………
[Signature of authorized representative of the Firm](Day/Month/Year)
Note:
a) Personnel is to affix his recent photograph on first page of CV.
b) Complete address and phone number of the Personnel is to be provided.
c) Document for proof of age is to be enclosed.
d) Document for proof of qualification is to be enclosed.
e) Age of the personnel shall not be more than ……………….
f) Experience Certificates from Employers to be attached.
Page 301 of 1358

AFFIDAVIT FOR CORRECTIVENESS OF CV KEY PERSONNEL AND EXPERIENCE CLAIMED BY THE

FIRMS/AGENCY/ENTERPRISE
(To be submitted on non-judicial stamp paper)
I, the undersigned, on behalf of (name of the EPC Contractor), in

the capacity of do hereby certify that the details furnished in
this proposal including CV of key personnel and experience claimed by the firms/agency/enterprise are
true and correct to the best of my knowledge.
Managing Director/ Head of theFirm/ Authorized representative of the firm

Address
Page 302 of 1358

Annexure-2
Formats for monitoring
Format-1
Format for Monitoring of Major Milestone Status

(Monthly Review)
Level of
Sl. Descriptions Scheduled Actual Status confidenc Hindrances
No. Completio Completio e on scale
10
n n
Format-2
Format for Monitoring of
Construction Activities
Activit
ies
Interio
Related to Related Scheduled Schedu Actual
Sl. Actual
Civ Electri A r External to Date of led Date of
No il cal C furnis Date of
. Services External Commenc Date of Comple
hing & Commence
wat Pow Sanitiza Develop ement Comple tion
IT ment
er er tion ment tion
relate
d
Page 303 of 1358

Format-3
Finishing
Schedule
Tap
Sl. No. Locatio Flooring/ Dad Paint False Flooring Connection Remark
n Skirting o Finish Ceiling U.D. point/ s
Insulation W.B./
Urinal/ W.C.
Format-4
Finishing Schedule
No. of No. of
Interior Split
Sl. Fixture Wiring fan Socket Fire Any Other
Power A.C./
No. Location and type and outlet- Fightin Equipmen
Lightin Windo
their their 5A/15A gAlarm t
g wA.C.
type sizes
(W/m2)
Format-4
Door/ Window Schedule
Sl. MarkNo.
No. Size Technical Specification
Page 304 of 1358

ANNEXURE
Page 305 of 1358

S. No. Particular Page No.
1. Design Basis Report

Structural DBR 308
Electrical DBR 426
HVAC DBR 477
Plumbing & Firefighting DBR 549
PHE Infrastructure & Master
581
Schematic DBR
Net Zero Building Services DBR 599
Green Building DBR 604
Solid Waste And C&D Waste
611
Management DBR
Signages DBR 618
Furniture DBR 631
Rigid Pavement DBR 665
ELV DBR 671
2. Technical Specifications
Technical Specification for Civil
833
Works
Technical Specification for HVAC
910
Works
Technical Specification for
997
Plumbing Works
1042
Electrical Works
1131
Firefighting Works
1144
Furniture Works
3 List of Drawings 1164
4 Approved Make List 1200
5 Technical Compliance 1223
6 Safety Manual and Practices 1304
Page 306 of 1358

Design Basis Report
Page 307 of 1358

STRUCTURAL DBR
Page 308 of 1358

STRUCTURAL DBR FOR ACADEMIC BUILDING INCLUDING FACULTY & STAFF/ACADEMIC

ASSOCIATES OFFICE
INDEX
⚫ Introduction
⚫ Structural System
⚫ Description of Structures
⚫ Code Requirements
⚫ Design Methodology
⚫ Properties of Materials
⚫ Concrete Covers
⚫ Loads
⚫ Geotechnical Data & Foundation system
⚫ Post Tensioning Design Basis Brief
Page 309 of 1358

1. Introduction
The objective of this report is to lay down the design basis for the structural design of Group VIII
Project at IIM Indore. The intent of this document is to identify and record all the pertinent input
requirements, analysis & design criteria for structural design of the proposed project. It is aimed at
formulating the basis of the structural analysis, design & detailing work that the Structural Engineer
shall be planning in delivering the structural scheme of the building. The scheme shall be
compatible with the architectural theme, satisfy the functional needs, at the same time confirming
to the Indian Standards and other applicable building norms to achieve safe, stable, strong, and yet
optimally economical structures. The parameters adopted in this report are going to be the basis
of the structural design calculations. Hence, it is expected that the planning and design team
members of other associated teams give their feedback and approval to the parameters,
suggestions, recommendations mentioned in the report.
The design will aim to achieve.
➢ Structural & functional integrity.

➢ Desirable Structural performance under characteristic service design loads.
➢ Resistance to loads due to natural phenomena i.e. wind, earthquakes and thermal.
➢ Structural durability.
2. Structural System
The proposed project consists of a variety of building types and hence shall consist of different
structural systems. The ACADEMIC BUILDING has been conceptualized as RCC Dual System where
the lateral load shall be share between RCC walls and Columns. The floor plate shall be formed
with conventional slabs system. Post tension beams have been proposed at selected locations and
a design brief for the same is enclosed in the document.
The Faculty offices have been conceptualized as RCC DUAL System with Shear walls and Special
moment resisting frame with conventional slabs system.
3. Description Of Structures
No of No of
Building Name Floor Provision
Buildings Floors
height
ACADEMIC BUILDING 6m +7.05
1 GF+1+T 2 floors
m
0m+6m+
FACULTY AND STAFF
3.9m+3.9m+ 1 GF+4+T 2 floors
OFFICES
3.9m+3.9m
4. Code Requirements
The structural analysis and design of the building structures shall be complied with the
requirements specified in the National Building Code, and the relevant Indian standard codes
(latest revisions) listed herein:
Page 310 of 1358

IS: 875 - 1987 Part 1 : Code of practice for Unit weights of materials- Dead Loads.
IS: 875 - 1987 Part 2 : Code of practice for Live Loads.
IS: 875 - 2015 Part 3 Code of practice for Wind Loads.
IS: 875 - 1987 Part 5 Code of practice Special Loads & Load combinations.
IS: 456 - 2000 Code of practice for Plain and Reinforced concrete.
IS: 800 - 2007 Code of practice for General construction in Steel design.
IS: 1161 – 1998 Steel tubes for structural purposes.
IS: 2062 – 2011 Hot rolled medium and high tensile structural steel -
Specification.
IS: 816 - 1969 Use of metal arc welding for general construction in mild steel.
IS: 9595 - 1996 Metal arc welding of carbon and carbon manganese steel.
IS: 1893 - 2016 Part 1 Criteria for Earthquake resistant design of Structures.
IS: 13920-2016 Ductile design and detailing of Reinforced Concrete structure
subject to seismic forces.
IS: 1904 - 1986 Code of practice for design & construction foundations in soil.
IS: 1080 - 1985 Code of practice Design & Const. of Shallow Foundations.
SP: 16 Design aid for reinforced concrete to IS: 456.
SP: 34 Handbook on Concrete reinforcement and Detailing.
IS: 1786 -2008 Specification for High Strength Deformed steel bars and Wires
for Concrete
IS: 3370 (Part1&2) -2009 Code or practice for Concrete Structures for the storage of
Liquids – General
IS: 2950 (Part- 1) -1981 Code of Practice for Design And Construction Of Raft
Foundations
IS: 4326-2013 Earthquake Resistant Design and Construction of Buildings
5. Design Methodology
The structural analysis and design of the building shall be performed as per the governing
guidelines of the relevant Indian Standard Codes. Applicable Dead, Live, Wind and Seismic Loads
along with appropriate load combinations shall be considered.
Gust wind load derivations shall be carried out using coefficients / factors in accordance with the
relevant codes.
The seismic analysis shall be carried out for both static and dynamic loading in accordance with
the relevant code of practice, and dynamic response shall be considered for design of the
structural elements.
The permissible values of the load factors and stresses shall be utilized within the purview of the
Indian Standards. The computer analysis shall be done to evaluate individual internal member
forces, reactions at foundation level and deflection pattern of the entire structure and in the
individual members.
The structural design of the foundations shall be on the basis of the safe bearing capacity and
Other Geotechnical parameters of soil at the foundation levels provided by Geotechnical Engineer.
The design of all structural RC elements are based on the Limit State method of design as specified
in IS 456-2000 and detailed as per IS 13920-2016 & SP 34.
Page 311 of 1358

Note:
1. Permissible stresses to be considered to 90% of the permissible stresses
as per the codal provisions.
2. The structural design of the buildings under the scope of work shall be as
per BIS 1893(Draft version in circulation for comments by BIS vide letter
no. CED 39/T10 dated 26th April 2023).
5.1 Modelling
The buildings are planned as a combination of flooring system, beams Shear walls/columns. After
preliminary sizing of various structural members, a computer model of the structural frame of the
buildings shall be generated for carrying out computer analysis for the effects of vertical and
lateral load that are likely to be imposed on the structure.
The structure shall be idealized as a 3-D space frame model using software packages like ETABS.
In these packages slab loads are applied as floor loads. Wall loads are applied as UDL on beams.
Self- weight shall be added in the software to have member loads.
Diaphragm behavior Rigid or flexible shall be computed appropriately as per 1893 and shall be
applied in the structural model.
Geometrical dimensions, member properties and member-node connectivity, including
Eccentricities shall be modelled in the analysis problem. Variations in material grades, if present,
will also be considered.
The following are main points to be considered for the modelling in 3D analysis of the structure.
➢ The walls shall be modeled as shell elements in elevation and defined as piers for facilitation
of design data. Appropriate meshing shall be done to these walls.
➢ As all walls and columns shall be supported on Raft and Isolated footings, Pin support shall
be assigned in the analysis model for walls modeled as shell element and fixed support for
columns
➢ All beams shall be modeled at the floor level. These are modeled as line elements with
appropriate facade/wall/glazing load as shown in architectural drawings.
The analysis of the proposed structure would be carried to

⚫ Analysis shall ensure elastic behavior and fulfilment of serviceability criteria for un-factored
load combination.
⚫ Analysis shall ensure adequate structural integrity for factored load combinations.
⚫ Obtain static displacements and rotations at various nodes.
⚫ Obtain resultant member forces like bending moments, shear forces and axial forces.
5.2 Storey Drift

The storey drift in any storey due to the minimum specified design lateral force, with partial load
safety factor of 1.0 shall be restricted to 0.004 times storey height as specified in IS 1893 – 2016.
5.3 Control of Deflection (Vertical):

The deflection of a structure or part there of shall not adversely affect the appearance or efficiency
of the structure or finishes or partitions. The deflection shall generally be limited to the following
Page 312 of 1358

(clause 23.2 of IS 456-2000):

➢ The final deflection due to all loads including the effects of temperature, creep and shrinkage
and measured from the as-cast level of the supports of floors, and all other horizontal
members, should not normally exceed span/250.
➢ The deflection including the effects of temperature, creep and shrinkage occurring after
erection of partitions and the application of finishes should not normally exceed span/350 or
20 mm whichever is less.
When deflections are required to be calculated, the method given in Appendix - B of IS: 456 – 2000
shall be used.
5.4 Lateral displacement limit

The lateral displacement limit to the minimum specified design lateral force, with partial load
safety factor of 1.0 shall be restricted to H/500 (approx.) in order to ensure minimum damage to
Nonstructural elements (NSE) and structural elements (SE).
5.5 Crack width

In view of geographic location of the project, it can be classified under moderate atmospheric
condition. Based on this assumption and as per IS 456: 2000, crack width in RCC elements shall be
restricted to 0.2 mm in water retaining structures.
5.6 Property Modifiers

As per Clause 6.4.3.1 as per IS 1893 2016 appropriate modifiers shall be applied to structural
properties used in structural model, Table 6 from 16700 is attached below.
5.7 Design Criteria

For the design of R.C.C. elements, the Limit State Method shall be used as per IS 456-2000
Materials of construction shall be predominantly concrete with consideration for strength and
durability. Minimum grade of concrete is suggested as M35, in view of the level of stresses to be
borne both in compression as well as flexural members.
High Yield Strength Deformed bars conforming to IS: 1786 with fy = 500 MPa is considered in the
design calculations, except for shear reinforcement, where fy shall be assumed as 415 Mpa.
Page 313 of 1358

Ductile detailing norms shall be adopted (in accordance with IS: 13920) in order to render more
ductility to the structure.
Covers to reinforcement shall be in accordance with IS: 456:2000 corresponding to moderate

exposure conditions and also to satisfy a fire rating of 2 hrs. mentioned in Part 7.
5.8 Detailing
The reinforcement layout shall take into account the strength requirements as well as the
economy of construction. Provisions of IS: 456-2000, IS 13920-2016 and IS: SP 34 shall be followed
for the purpose of detailing of reinforcement.
5.9 Separation / Expansion Joints

The Academic and hostel building have been divided by using expansion joints.
The (R1Δ1 +R2Δ2) where R1 and R1 are response reduction factor for Building 1 and 2 respectively
and Δ1 and Δ2 are story displacements as 7.11.1 in agreement with 7.11.1.1 and 7.11.1.2
Δ1 and Δ2 shall be calculated as per unscaled deflection for dynamic analysis.
5.10 Shrinkage Strip

Shrinkage control strips and pour strips are found to perform successfully which permit initial
shrinkage to occur without causing an increase in stresses. Shrinkage strip shall be provided at
pre planned location to release the initial shrinkage stress in concrete, without providing
separation joint in the structure.
6. Properties Of Materials
6.1 Concrete:
The following grades of concrete are used for the construction of the structure. All concrete mix
shall be as per IS 456-2000.
The grade of concrete for RCC shall be M35 for Academic Building, Faculty and Staff Offices
Building, except for Grade slab, Lintels, sills and nonstructural parapet walls for which the grade
of concrete shall be M25.
The Min grade of Plain cement concrete shall be M15 for moderate Exposure condition.
6.1.1 Cement
The minimum cement content, water cement ratio other cementitious materials shall be as per IS
8112 and IS 12269 and IS 1489 (part 1). Use of Fly ash and/or GGBS shall be encouraged within the
limits of mix design of concrete.
Page 314 of 1358

6.1.2 Aggregates
The sizes of coarse aggregates confirm to IS 383. Nominal maximum size of coarse aggregate
would be 20 mm, suitably graded as per the requirement of mix design. The fine aggregates
confirm to the specifications of IS 515.
6.1.3 Water
Mixing Water shall confirm to IS 456: 2000.
6.2 Reinforcement:
Reinforcing steel shall be Grade Fe-500D conforming to IS: 1786- 2008 and IS 13920-2016.
7. Concrete Covers
Concrete Covers are based on Moderate exposure conditions and fire resistance as per NBC 2016.
The clear cover to outermost reinforcement shall be as follows:
Raft/Footing = 50mm
Slab = 25 mm
Beam = 30mm
Columns = 40mm
Retaining wall = Outside face 40 inside face 30 mm
Fire: The structure shall be designed for 2Hr. fire rating, as the firefighting system and fire hydrants
are available within the building. The minimum clear over to reinforcement and minimum
dimensions of RC structural members as per clause 21.2 of IS: 456-2000 shall be as follows
considering 2Hr fire rating.
Sl. No Structural member Min. Min. clear over

dimension
1.0 Column fully exposure to fire 300mm 40mm
2.0 Beams (continuous) 200mm 30mm
3.0 Floors (continuous) 125mm 25mm
4.0 RCC walls 160mm -
8. Loads
8.1 Dead Loads:(Ref: IS 875 Part I)
RCC structural members : 25 kN/m3 (Up to 2 percent reinforcement)

: 25-26.5 kN/m3 (interpolation for Reinforcement
between 2-5 percent)
Density of structural steel : 78.5 kN/m3
Density of floor finishes / plasters : 20.4 kN/ m3
Saturated Soil density : 20 kN/m3
Density of Bricks : 20 kN/m3
Glass : 25 kN/m3
Page 315 of 1358

8.2 Imposed Loads:

The following are the imposed gravity loads which shall be adopted in addition to the self-weight
of the structure as per
IS 875 Part 2.
Occupancy Live Machine Finishes

UDL CONC
KN/m2 KN
1 Lobby, Corridors, = 3 4.5 1.5 kN/m2
2 Staircase, Refuge = 3 4.5 1.5 kN/m2
3 Storerooms, Service, = 5 4.5 2 kN/m2
4 Toilets = 2 - 3 kN/m2
5 Terrace = 2 4 kN/m2
6 Pantry, Cafe 3 2.7 1.5 kN/m2
7 Server room, ELV,AHUs 2 4 1.5 kN/m2
8 Classrooms = 4 3.6 1.5 kN/m2
9 Faculty room, Staff rooms 2.5 2.7 15 kN/m2
10 LMR = 8 1.5 kN/m2
Wall loads for different floor heights calculated with density of 20kn/m3 are mentioned in the table
below
Floor Beam Brick Wall UDL

Plaster
Block Height Depth Density Thickness Load
Metre Metre KN/m Metre Metre

KN/m
Faculty Offices EXTERNAL WALL 3.9 0.6 20 0.2 0.030 15.2
Faculty Offices INTERNAL WALL 3.9 0.6 20 0.2 0.024 14.8
Faculty Offices INTERNAL WALL
100mm 3.9 0.6 20 0.1 0.030 8.6
ACADEMIC EXTERNAL WALL 7.05 0.7 20 0.2 0.03 29.2
ACADEMIC INTERNAL WALL 7.05

0.7 20 0.2 0.024 28.4
ACADEMIC INTERNAL WALL

7.05
100mm
0.7 20 0.2 0.03 16.5
ACADEMIC EXTERNAL WALL 6 0.7 20 0.2 0.03 24.4
ACADEMIC INTERNAL WALL 6 0.7 20 0.2 0.024 23.7
ACADEMIC NTERNAL WALL
100mm 6 0.7 20 0.1 0.03 13.8
Plaster thickness considered for 200mm external walls:

18 mm for exterior face
12 mm for interior face
Page 316 of 1358

Plaster thickness considered for 200 mm internal walls:


Plaster thickness considered for ceiling = 6mm
8.3 Wind Loads:(Ref: IS 875 Part III – 2015)

Wind loads shall be calculated in accordance with IS 875: Part 3.
Design wind speed
Vz = Vb x k1 x k2 x k3 x k4
Vb Basic wind velocity = 39 m/s

k1 Probability Factor (Risk coefficient) = 1.00 for 50 Year mean design life
k2 Terrain category 2, class C = As per Table 2
k3 Topography factor = 1.00
k4 Importance factor for the cyclonic region = 1.00
Table 2 from IS 875 Part 2 is attached below for reference.
Page 317 of 1358

8.4 Earthquake Loads:(Ref: IS 1893 - 2016 Part I)
1 Earthquake Zone = 3
2 Zone Factor Z = 0.16
3. Importance Factor
Academic Building I = 1.5
Faculty Offices 1.2
4 Response Reduction Factor R = 5
5 Soil Type = Hard
The seismic load calculations shall be carried out in accordance with IS 1893: 2016 As per this code,
the site lies in Zone 3 with zone factor Z = 0.16
Vb = Z  ( I 2R)  (Sa |g ) W
S a/ g is the Normalized Design Acceleration Co-efficient for the structure which is the function of
the fundamental time period of vibration of the structure and the type of the founding soil as per
Clause 6.4.
Average response acceleration coefficient for hard soil shall be calculated for the building
Depending on its time period.
Page 318 of 1358

W is the Seismic Weight of the building, which shall be calculated in accordance with the relevant
clause in IS1893: 2002. Since the structure is an R.C.C. structure, a damping value of 5% shall be
considered.
Space frame analysis of the structure shall be carried out using the Response Spectrum method.
As per IS 1893, the base shear of response spectrum analysis shall be matched with the base shear
of static analysis by providing appropriate scale factor in the analysis.
Appropriate reduction in Live Load shall be considered for design of column, load bearing walls,
piers and foundation as per clause 3.2 of IS 875 (Part 2) and as per clause 8.1 of IS 875 (Part 5) and
clause 7.3 of IS-1893 (Part 1).
Calculation Of Time Period:

The fundamental translational natural Period of oscillation of the structure shall be calculated as
per Buildings 7.6.2c
8.5 Load Combinations: As per IS 1893: 2016 and IS: 875 – Part 5
Concrete Member Design (LSM):
Partial load are factors referred from SP: 24 –1983 Clause , 35.4.1
Load Combination
D.L. L.L. Wind Earthquake
a. DL + LL 1.5 1.5 - -
b. DL + LL + Spec(X)/EQX 1.2 1.2 - 1.2 (x)
c. DL + LL - SPEC(X) /EQX 1.2 1.2 - 1.2 (x)
d. DL + LL + SPEC(Z) /EQZ 1.2 1.2 - 1.2 (y)
e. DL + LL - SPEC(Z) /EQZ 1.2 1.2 - 1.2 (y)
f. DL + SPEC(X) /EQX 1.5 - - 1.5 (x)
g. DL- SPEC(X ) /EQX 1.5 - - 1.5 (x)
h. DL + SPEC(Z) /EQZ 1.5 - - 1.5 (y)
i. DL - SPEC(Z) /EQZ 1.5 - - 1.5 (y)
j. DL + LL + WL(X) 1.2 1.2 1.2 (x) -
k. DL + LL - WL(X) 1.2 1.2 1.2 (x) -
l. DL + LL + WL(y) 1.2 1.2 1.2 (y) -
Page 319 of 1358

m. DL + LL - WL(y) 1.2 1.2 1.2 (y) -

n. DL + WL(X) 1.5 - 1.5 (x) -
o. DL - WL(X) 1.5 - 1.5 (x) -
p. DL + WL(y) 1.5 - 1.5 (y) -
q. DL - WL(y) 1.5 - 1.5 (y) -
r. DL + W (X) 0.9 - 1.5 (X) -
S. DL – W(X) 0.9 - -1.5 (X) -
t. DL + W(Y) 0.9 - 1.5 (Y) -
u. DL + W (Y) 0.9 - -1.5 (Y) -
v. DL + SPEC (X) /EQX 0.9 - - 1.5 (X)
w. DL – SPEC(X) /EQX 0.9 - - -1.5 (X)
x. DL + SPEC(Z) /EQZ 0.9 - - 1.5 (Y)
y. DL + SPEC (Z) /EQZ 0.9 - - -1.5 (Y)
Additional combinations as follows shall be used where lateral load resisting element are not
oriented in mutually orthogonal directions.
Ex ± 0.3Ey
Ey ± 0.3Ex
9. Geotechnical Data & Foundation System

Geotech Report for Project No 220036N Dated 20/08/2020 From Cengers Geotechnica Pvt Ltd,
New Delhi is attached for reference only. However, the EPC Contractor shall conduct a Geo
technical report on its own.
The foundation system for building shall consist of isolated spread footings. Suitable reduction of
live loads shall be considered in design. The foundations shall be designed Based as per the soil
investigation which will be carried by the EPC Contractor. However, in no case Net safe allowable
bearing pressure shall be considered more than 30 T/m2 or lesser if as per Geo technical
investigation found less than 30T/m2 then the same shall be considered.
A few salient points from Geotechnical report are mentioned below:

➢ The ground water was met at 5.9 to 6.5 m depth at time of Investigation.
➢ Liquefaction is not likely to take place at the site in the event of an earthquake.
➢ Excavation in weathered rock can be done with jack hammers and rock breakers and JCB
Excavators. It is anticipated that blasting won’t be required.
The Safe bearing capacities have been given in table 5.6 of the report and have been summarized
here for reference.
Page 320 of 1358

Page 321 of 1358

Page 322 of 1358

Structural DBR for MDC Academic + Incubation
INDEX
⚫ Introduction
⚫ Concrete Covers
⚫ Loads
⚫ Post Tensioning Design Basis Brief
Page 323 of 1358

1. Introduction
The objective of this report is to lay down the design basis for the structural design of Proposed
Infrastructure at IIM Indore. The intent of this document is to identify and record all the pertinent
input requirements, analysis & design criteria for structural design of the proposed project. It is
aimed at formulating the basis of the structural analysis, design & detailing work that the Structural
Engineer shall be planning in delivering the structural scheme of the building. The scheme shall
be compatible with the architectural theme, satisfy the functional needs, at the same time
confirming to the Indian Standards and other applicable building norms to achieve safe, stable,
strong and yet optimally economical structures. The parameters adopted in this report are going
to be the basis of the structural design calculations. Hence, it is expected that the planning and
design team members of other associated teams give their feedback and approval to the
parameters, suggestions, recommendations mentioned in the report.

➢ Resistance to loads due to natural phenomena i.e., wind, earthquakes and thermal.
structural systems. The MDC ACADEMIC + INCUBATION Building has been conceptualized as RCC
Special moment resisting frame with conventional slabs system. The SMRF will be a primary lateral
load carrying system and the conventional slab and Ductile Moment frames shall carry the gravity
load at floor level. Post tension beams have been proposed at selected locations and a design brief
for the same is enclosed in the document.
Building Name Floor ht No of Buildings No of Floors Provision

MDC ACADEMIC + INCUBATION
4.5m 1 GF+2+T 2 floors
BUILDING
IS: 875 - 2015 Part 3 : Code of practice for Wind Loads.
IS: 875 - 1987 Part 5 : Code of practice Special Loads & Load combinations.
IS: 456 - 2000 : Code of practice for Plain and Reinforced concrete.
IS: 800 - 2007 : Code of practice for General construction in Steel design.
IS: 1161 – 1998 : Steel tubes for structural purpose.
Page 324 of 1358

IS: 2062 - 2011 : Hot rolled medium and high tensile structural steel –
Specification.
IS: 816 - 1969 : Use of metal arc welding for general construction in mild steel.
IS: 9595 - 1996 : Metal arc welding of carbon and carbon manganese steel.
IS: 1893 - 2016 Part 1 : Criteria for Earthquake resistant design of Structures.
IS: 13920-2016 : Ductile design and detailing of Reinforced Concrete structure
IS: 1904 - 1986 : Code of practice for design & construction foundations in soil.
IS: 1080 - 1985 : Code of practice Design & Const. of Shallow Foundations.
SP: 16 : Design aid for reinforced concrete to IS: 456.
SP: 34 : Handbook on Concrete reinforcement and Detailing.
IS: 1786 -2008 : Specification for High Strength Deformed steel bars and Wires for
Concrete
IS: 3370 (Part1&2) -2009 : Code or practice for Concrete Structures for the storage of
Liquids – General
IS: 2950 (Part- 1) -1981 : Code of Practice for Design And Construction Of Raft Foundations
IS: 4326-2013 : Earthquake Resistant Design and Construction of Buildings
relevant codes.
individual members.
Note:
5.1 Modelling
Page 325 of 1358

In this package slab loads are applied as floor loads. Wall loads are applied as UDL on beams. Self-
weight shall be added in the software to have member loads.
Following are main points to be considered for the modelling in 3D analysis of the structure.
columns

➢ Analysis shall ensure elastic behavior and fulfilment of serviceability criteria for un-factored
load combination.
➢ Analysis shall ensure adequate structural integrity for factored load combinations.
➢ Obtain static displacements and rotations at various nodes.
Obtain resultant member forces like bending moments, shear forces and axial forces.
5.2 Storey Drift


(clause 23.2 of IS 456-2000):
⚫ The final deflection due to all loads including the effects of temperature, creep and
shrinkage and measured from the as-cast level of the supports of floors, and all other
horizontal members, should not normally exceed span/250.
⚫ The deflection including the effects of temperature, creep and shrinkage occurring after
erection of partitions and the application of finishes should not normally exceed
span/350 or 20 mm whichever is less.
shall be used.
Page 326 of 1358


5.5 Crack width


properties used in structural model, Table 6 from 16700 is attached below:
5.7 Design Criteria


5.8 Detailing
Page 327 of 1358

5.9 Shrinkage Strip

6.0 Properties Of Materials

6.1 Concrete:
The grade of concrete for RCC shall be M35 for MDC ACADEMIC + INCUBATION Building, except
for Grade slab, Lintels, sills and nonstructural parapet walls for which the grade of concrete shall
be M25. The Min grade of Plain cement concrete shall be M15 for moderate Exposure condition.
6.1.1 Cement
6.1.2 Aggregates
6.1.3 Water
6.2 Reinforcement:
Page 328 of 1358

7 Concrete Covers
The clear cover to outermost reinforcement shall be as follows:
Raft/Footing = 50mm
Slab = 25 mm
Beam = 30mm
Columns = 40mm
Sl. No Structural member Min. dimension Min. clear over
8.0 Loads

: 25-26.5 kN/m3 (interpolation for Reinf between 2-5
percent)
Glass : 25 kN/m3
8.2 Imposed Loads:

of the structure as per
IS 875 Part 2.

UDL CONC
KN/m2 KN
Page 329 of 1358


6 Classrooms = 4 3.6 1.5 kN/m2
7 LMR = 8 1.5 kN/m2
below.
Floor Beam Wall

Block Brick Plaster UDL
Height Depth Thickness
Density Load
Metre Metre KN/m Metre Metre KN/m
EXTERNAL WALL 4.5 0.5 20 0.2 0.03 18.4
INTERNAL WALL 4.5 0.5 20 0.2 0.024 17.9
INTERNAL WALL 100mm 4.5 0.5 20 0.1 0.030 10.4




Design wind speed

Page 330 of 1358


Importance Factor i. Buildings with

3.
occupancy greater than 200 I =
1.2
5 Soil Type = Hard
Vb = Z  ( I 2R)  (Sa |g ) W
Page 331 of 1358

Clause 6.4.
considered.

Load Combination
D.L. L.L. Wind Earthquake
a. DL + LL 1.5 1.5 - -
b. DL + LL + Spec(X)/EQX 1.2 1.2 - 1.2 (x)
c. DL + LL - SPEC(X) /EQX 1.2 1.2 - 1.2 (x)
d. DL + LL + SPEC(Z) /EQZ 1.2 1.2 - 1.2 (y)
e. DL + LL - SPEC(Z) /EQZ 1.2 1.2 - 1.2 (y)
f. DL + SPEC(X) /EQX 1.5 - - 1.5 (x)
g. DL- SPEC(X ) /EQX 1.5 - - 1.5 (x)
h. DL + SPEC(Z) /EQZ 1.5 - - 1.5 (y)
i. DL - SPEC(Z) /EQZ 1.5 - - 1.5 (y)
j. DL + LL + WL(X) 1.2 1.2 1.2 (x) -
k. DL + LL - WL(X) 1.2 1.2 1.2 (x) -
Page 332 of 1358

l. DL + LL + WL(y) 1.2 1.2 1.2 (y) -

m. DL + LL - WL(y) 1.2 1.2 1.2 (y) -
n. DL + WL(X) 1.5 - 1.5 (x) -
o. DL - WL(X) 1.5 - 1.5 (x) -
p. DL + WL(y) 1.5 - 1.5 (y) -
q. DL - WL(y) 1.5 - 1.5 (y) -
r. DL + W (X) 0.9 - 1.5 (X) -
S. DL – W(X) 0.9 - -1.5 (X) -
t. DL + W(Y) 0.9 - 1.5 (Y) -
u. DL + W (Y) 0.9 - -1.5 (Y) -
v. DL + SPEC (X) /EQX 0.9 - - 1.5 (X)
w. DL – SPEC(X) /EQX 0.9 - - -1.5 (X)
x. DL + SPEC(Z) /EQZ 0.9 - - 1.5 (Y)
y. DL + SPEC (Z) /EQZ 0.9 - - -1.5 (Y)
Partial load factors are referred to from SP: 24 – 1983, Clause 35.4.1.
Ex ± 0.3Ey
Ey ± 0.3Ex
9.0 Geotechnical Data & Foundation System

bearing pressure shall be considered less than 30 T/m2 or lesser if as per Geo technical
A few salient points from the Geotechnical report are mentioned below.
➢ Liquefaction is not likely to take place at the site in event of an earthquake.
here for reference.
Page 333 of 1358

Page 334 of 1358

Page 335 of 1358

Structural DBR for Boys Hostel Building
INDEX
⚫ Introduction
⚫ Concrete Covers
⚫ Loads
⚫ Time period calculation
⚫ Wind load calculation
Page 336 of 1358

1. Introduction
⚫ Structural & functional integrity.

⚫ Desirable Structural performance under characteristic service design loads.
⚫ Resistance to loads due to natural phenomena i.e., wind, earthquakes and thermal.
⚫ Structural durability.
structural systems. The HOSTEL has been conceptualized as RCC Well distributed Shear wall with
Moment frame and conventional slabs system. The 200 mm thick RC shear walls along with Ductile
portal frames will be a primary lateral load carrying system and the conventional slab and Moment
frames shall carry the gravity load at floor level.

HOSTELS 3.3 m 3 (2B,1G) GF+14+T 2 floors
IS: 1161 – 1998 : Steel tubes for structural purposes.
Page 337 of 1358

Specification.
Concrete
Liquids – General
IS: 16700 – 2017 : Criteria for Structural Safety of Tall concrete Buildings
relevant codes.
individual members.
Note:
Page 338 of 1358

5.1 Modelling
In these packages slab loads are applied as a floor loads. Wall loads are applied as UDL on beams.
➢ The walls shall be modeled as shell elements in elevation and defined as piers for
facilitation of design data. Appropriate meshing shall be done to these walls.
➢ As all walls and columns shall be supported on Raft and Isolated footings, Pin support
shall be assigned in the analysis model for walls modeled as shell element and fixed
support for columns.

➢ Analysis shall ensure elastic behavior and fulfilment of serviceability criteria for un-
factored load combination.
➢ Obtain resultant member forces like bending moments, shear forces and axial forces
5.2 Storey Drift


(clause 23.2 of IS 456-2000):
Page 339 of 1358

shall be used.

5.5 Crack width

As per clause 7.2 & table 6 of IS 16700 and Clause 6.4.3.1 as per IS 1893 2016 appropriate modifiers
shall be applied to structural properties used in structural model, Table 6 from 16700 is attached
below. The minor direction moment in 200 mm walls can be ignored with appropriate modifier.
5.7 P delta Analysis

P delta analysis as per appropriate criteria of 16700 shall be carried out.
5.8 Design Criteria


exposure conditions and also to satisfy a fire rating of 2 hrs mentioned in Part 7.
5.9 Detailing
Page 340 of 1358


6.1 Concrete:
The Following Grades Of Concrete Are Used For The Construction Of The Structure.
All Concrete Mix Shall Be As Per Is 456-2000.
The Grade Of Concrete For Rcc Shall Be M35 For Hostel, Except For Grade Slab,
Lintels, Sills And Non-Structural Parapet Walls For Which The Grade Of Concrete Shall
Be M25.
The Min Grade Of Plain Cement Concrete Shall Be M15 For Moderate Exposure
Condition.
6.1.1 Cement
The minimum cement content, water cement ratio other cementitious materials shall
be as per IS 8112 and IS 12269 and IS 1489 (part 1). Use of Fly ash and/or GGBS shall
be encouraged within the limits of mix design of concrete.
6.1.2 Aggregates
The sizes of coarse aggregates confirm to IS 383. Nominal maximum size of coarse
aggregate would be 20 mm,
suitably graded as per the requirement of mix design. The fine aggregates confirm to the
specifications of IS 515.
6.1.3 Water
6.2 Reinforcement:
Reinforcing steel shall be Grade Fe-500D conforming to IS: 1786- 2008 and IS 13920-
2016.
7.0 Concrete Covers
Page 341 of 1358

Concrete Covers are based on Moderate exposure conditions and fire resistance as
per NBC 2016. The clear
cover to outermost reinforcement shall be as follows.
Raft/Footing = 50mm
Slab = 25 mm
Beam = 30mm
Columns = 40mm
Fire: The structure shall be designed for 2Hr. fire rating, as the firefighting system
and fire hydrants are available within the building. The minimum clear over to
reinforcement and minimum dimensions of RC structural members as per clause
21.2 of IS: 456-2000 shall be as follows considering 2Hr fire rating.

8.0
Loads

: 25-26.5 kN/m3 (interpolation for Reinf
between 2-5 percent)
Glass : 25 kN/m3
8.2 Imposed Loads:

The following are the imposed gravity loads which shall be adopted in addition to the
self-weight of the structure as per IS 875 Part 2.
UDL CONC
KN/m2 KN
Lobby, Corridors, Common

1 = 3 4.5 1.5 kN/m2
room
Page 342 of 1358

6 LMR = 8 1.5 kN/m2

7 Rooms = 2 1.8 1.5 kN/m2
8 Balconies = 4 1.5 Kn/m 3 kN/m2
below.
Beam Brick Wall UDL

Floor Plaster
Block Depth Density Thickness Load
Height
HOSTEL EXTERNAL
3.3 0.6 20 0.2 0.030 12.4
WALL
HOSTEL INTERNAL WALL 3.3 0.6 20 0.2 0.024 12.1
HOSTEL INTERNAL WALL
100mm 3.3 0.6 20 0.1 0.030 7.02



Impact allowances for rotating and vibrating Machines shall be taken into account as
per table mentioned under clause 6.1 of IS 875 part 2.
Loading effect due to impact shall be considered as per 6.2 of IS 875 Part 2
Page 343 of 1358

1 . Fire pump at Water tank level

Weight of Pump = 200 kg Impact Factor = 1.5
Load including impact factor in Kn = 2.942 Kn Machine size = 1.575*1.35 M
Intensity of imposed load due to Machine with impact factor = 2.942/1.575*1.35 =
1.384 Kn/m2
2. Pressurization pump 175 kg Weight of Pump = 175 kg
Impact Factor = 1.5

Intensity of imposed load due to Machine with impact factor = 2.5725/0.775*1.05 =
3.15 Kn/m2

Design wind speed

k4 Importance factor for the cyclonic = 1.00

region
Detailed calculation for Gust based wind forces building wise can be referred from Annexure B
Page 344 of 1358


Importance Factor
Buildings with
3 occupancy greater than I = 1.2
200
Response Reduction
4 R = 4
Factor
5 Soil Type = Hard
The seismic load calculations shall be carried out in accordance with IS 1893: 2016 As
per this code, the site lies in Zone 3 with zone factor Z = 0.16
Vb = Z  (I | 2R)  (Sa |g ) W
S a/ g is the Normalized Design Acceleration Co-efficient for the structure which is the
function of the fundamental time period of vibration of the structure and the type of
the founding soil as per Clause 6.4.
Average response acceleration coefficient for hard soil shall be calculated for the
building Depending on its time period.
W is the Seismic Weight of the building, which shall be calculated in accordance with
the relevant clause in the IS1893: 2002. Since the structure is a R.C.C. structure, a
damping value of 5% shall be considered.
Space frame analysis of the structure shall be carried out using Response Spectrum
Page 345 of 1358

method. As per IS 1893, the base shear of response spectrum analysis shall be
matched with the base shear of static analysis by providing appropriate scale factor
in the analysis.
Appropriate reduction in Live Load shall be considered for design of column, load
bearing walls, piers and foundation as per clause 3.2 of IS 875 (Part 2) and as per
clause 8.1 of IS 875 (Part 5) and clause 7.3 of IS-1893 (Part 1).

The fundamental translational natural Period of oscillation of the structure shall be
calculated as per Buildings with RC Structural walls (Calculation for blocks attached)
Load Combination D.L. L.L. Wind Earthquake

a. DL + LL 1.5 1.5 - -
b. DL + LL + Spec(X)/EQX 1.2 1.2 - 1.2 (x)
c. DL + LL - SPEC(X) /EQX 1.2 1.2 - 1.2 (x)
d. DL + LL + SPEC(Z) /EQZ 1.2 1.2 - 1.2 (y)
e. DL + LL - SPEC(Z) /EQZ 1.2 1.2 - 1.2 (y)
f. DL + SPEC(X) /EQX 1.5 - - 1.5 (x)
g. DL- SPEC(X ) /EQX 1.5 - - 1.5 (x)
h. DL + SPEC(Z) /EQZ 1.5 - - 1.5 (y)
i. DL - SPEC(Z) /EQZ 1.5 - - 1.5 (y)
j. DL + LL + WL(X) 1.2 1.2 1.2 (x) -
k. DL + LL - WL(X) 1.2 1.2 1.2 (x) -
l. DL + LL + WL(y) 1.2 1.2 1.2 (y) -
m. DL + LL - WL(y) 1.2 1.2 1.2 (y) -
n. DL + WL(X) 1.5 - 1.5 (x) -
o. DL - WL(X) 1.5 - 1.5 (x) -
p. DL + WL(y) 1.5 - 1.5 (y) -
q. DL - WL(y) 1.5 - 1.5 (y) -
r. DL + W (X) 0.9 - 1.5 (X) -
S. DL – W(X) 0.9 - -1.5 (X) -
Page 346 of 1358

t. DL + W(Y) 0.9 - 1.5 (Y) -

u. DL + W (Y) 0.9 - -1.5 (Y) -
v. DL + SPEC (X) /EQX 0.9 - - 1.5 (X)
w. DL – SPEC(X) /EQX 0.9 - - -1.5 (X)
x. DL + SPEC(Z) /EQZ 0.9 - - 1.5 (Y)
y. DL + SPEC (Z) /EQZ 0.9 - - -1.5 (Y)
Partial load factors are referred from SP: 24 – 1983, Clause 35.4.1.
Additional combinations as follows shall be used where lateral load resisting element
are not oriented in mutually orthogonal directions.
Ex ± 0.3Ey
Ey ± 0.3Ex

➢ Excavation in weathered rock can be done with jack hammers and rock breakers
and JCB Excavators. It is anticipated that blasting won’t be required.
The Safe bearing capacities have been given in table 5.6 of the report and have been
summarized here
Page 347 of 1358

Page 348 of 1358

Time period calculation

1. Hostel
CALCULATION OF TIME PERIOD IS 1893 - 2016

Project IIM Date 24.10.2020
Indore
Building Hostel R Prepared Nishant
By Rathi
Time Aw 0.09h (s)
period
Building h 59.1 m Tx 2.069 0.96 2.069
Configurations Dx 31 m Ty 2.042 1.60 2.042
Dy 11 m
Effective Thickness Eff Area
Pier Label Axis Length(m) (m) (m2) LwiX/h AwX LwiY/h AwY
P1 90 0.640 0.300 0.192 0.000 0.0077 0.011 0.009
P2 90 0.640 0.300 0.192 0.000 0.0077 0.011 0.009
P3 90 0.640 0.300 0.192 0.000 0.0077 0.011 0.009
P4 90 0.640 0.300 0.192 0.000 0.0077 0.011 0.009
P5 90 0.960 0.300 0.288 0.000 0.0115 0.016 0.013
P6 90 0.960 0.300 0.288 0.000 0.0115 0.016 0.013
P7 90 0.960 0.300 0.288 0.000 0.0115 0.016 0.013
P8 90 0.960 0.300 0.288 0.000 0.0115 0.016 0.013
P9 90 0.640 0.300 0.192 0.000 0.0077 0.011 0.009
P10 90 0.640 0.300 0.192 0.000 0.0077 0.011 0.009
P11 90 0.640 0.300 0.192 0.000 0.0077 0.011 0.009
P12 90 0.640 0.300 0.192 0.000 0.0077 0.011 0.009
P13 90 0.680 0.300 0.204 0.000 0.0082 0.012 0.009
P14 90 0.640 0.300 0.192 0.000 0.0077 0.011 0.009
P16 90 0.960 0.300 0.288 0.000 0.0115 0.016 0.013
P18 90 0.960 0.300 0.288 0.000 0.0115 0.016 0.013
P19 90 0.640 0.300 0.192 0.000 0.0077 0.011 0.009
P20 90 0.640 0.300 0.192 0.000 0.0077 0.011 0.009
P21 90 0.640 0.300 0.192 0.000 0.0077 0.011 0.009
P22 90 0.640 0.300 0.192 0.000 0.0077 0.011 0.009
P25 90 0.960 0.300 0.288 0.000 0.0115 0.016 0.013
P26 90 0.960 0.300 0.288 0.000 0.0115 0.016 0.013
P27 90 0.640 0.300 0.192 0.000 0.0077 0.011 0.009
P28 90 0.640 0.300 0.192 0.000 0.0077 0.011 0.009
P31 0 0.640 0.300 0.192 0.011 0.0085 0.000 0.008
P32 0 0.640 0.300 0.192 0.011 0.0085 0.000 0.008
P33 0 0.640 0.300 0.192 0.011 0.0085 0.000 0.008
P34 0 0.640 0.300 0.192 0.011 0.0085 0.000 0.008
Page 349 of 1358

P37 0 0.640 0.300 0.192 0.011 0.0085 0.000 0.008
Wind load calculation

1. Hostel
Page 350 of 1358

Page 351 of 1358

Structural DBR For Girls Hostel
INDEX
⚫ Introduction
⚫ Concrete Covers
⚫ Loads
1. Introduction
Page 352 of 1358


structural systems. The HOSTEL has been conceptualized as RCC Well distributed Shear wall with
Moment frame and conventional slabs system. The 200 mm thick RC shear walls along with Ductile
portal frames will be a primary lateral load carrying system and the conventional slab and Moment
frames shall carry the gravity load at floor level.

HOSTELS 3.3 m 3 (2B,1G) GF+14+T 2 floors
IS: 2062 - 2011 : Hot rolled medium and high tensile structural steel -
Specification.
Page 353 of 1358

IS: 1786 -2008 : Specification for High Strength Deformed steel bars and Wires
for Concrete
Liquids – General
IS: 2950 (Part- 1) -1981 : Code of Practice for Design And Construction Of Raft
Foundations
relevant codes.
individual members.
Note:
Page 354 of 1358

5.1 Modelling
columns.

load combination.
➢ Obtain resultant member forces like bending moments, shear forces and axial forces.
5.2 Storey Drift

(clause 23.2 of IS 456-2000):
Page 355 of 1358

shall be used.

5.5 Crack width

below. The minor direction moment in 200 mm walls can be ignored with appropriate modifiers.

5.8 Design Criteria

Page 356 of 1358


5.9 Detailing


6.1 Concrete:
The grade of concrete for RCC shall be M35 for HOSTEL, except for Grade slab, Lintels, sills and
nonstructural parapet walls for which the grade of concrete shall be M25. The Min grade of Plain
cement concrete shall be M15 for moderate Exposure condition.
6.1.1 Cement
6.1.2 Aggregates
6.1.3 Water
6.2 Reinforcement:
7.0 Concrete Covers

The clear cover to outermost reinforcement shall be as follows.
Page 357 of 1358

Raft/Footing = 50mm
Slab = 25 mm
Beam = 30mm
Columns = 40mm
8.0 Loads

percent)
Glass : 25 kN/m3
8.2 Imposed Loads:
of the structure as per IS 875 Part 2.
UDL CONC
KN/m2 KN
Lobby, Corridors, Common
1 = 3 4.5 1.5 kN/m2
room
Page 358 of 1358

6 LMR = 8 1.5 kN/m2
7 Rooms = 2 1.8 1.5 kN/m2
Wall loads for different floor heights calculated with density of 20kn/m3 are mentioned in the
table below.
Beam Brick Wall UDL

Plaster
Block Floor Height Depth Density Thickness Load
HOSTEL EXTERNAL
3.3 0.6 20 0.2 0.030 12.4
WALL
HOSTEL INTERNAL
3.3 0.6 20 0.2 0.024 12.1
WALL
HOSTEL INTERNAL
WALL
3.3 0.6 20 0.1 0.030 7.02
100mm



Impact allowances for rotating and vibrating Machines shall be taken into account as per table
mentioned under
clause 6.1 of IS 875 part 2.
1. Fire pump at Water tank level
Weight of Pump = 200 kg Impact Factor = 1.5
Page 359 of 1358


Intensity of imposed load due to Machine with impact factor = 2.942/1.575*1.35 = 1.384 Kn/m2
2. Pressurization pump 175 kg

Weight of Pump = 175 kg
Impact Factor = 1.5
Load including impact factor in Kn = 2.5725 Kn
Machine size = 0.775*1.050 M

Design wind speed

Page 360 of 1358

3.
Importance Factor
Buildings with occupancy greater than 1.2
I =
200

5 Soil Type = Hard
The seismic load calculations shall be carried out in accordance with IS 1893: 2016 As per this
code, the site lies in Zone 3 with zone factor Z = 0.16
Page 361 of 1358

Vb = Z  ( I 2R)  (Sa |g ) W
Clause 6.4.
considered.
clause.7.3 of IS-1893 (Part 1).

per Buildings with RC Structural walls (Calculation for blocks attached)

a. DL + LL 1.5 1.5 - -
b. DL + LL + Spec(X)/EQX 1.2 1.2 - 1.2 (x)
c. DL + LL - SPEC(X) /EQX 1.2 1.2 - 1.2 (x)
d. DL + LL + SPEC(Z) /EQZ 1.2 1.2 - 1.2 (y)
e. DL + LL - SPEC(Z) /EQZ 1.2 1.2 - 1.2 (y)
f. DL + SPEC(X) /EQX 1.5 - - 1.5 (x)
g. DL- SPEC(X ) /EQX 1.5 - - 1.5 (x)
h. DL + SPEC(Z) /EQZ 1.5 - - 1.5 (y)
i. DL - SPEC(Z) /EQZ 1.5 - - 1.5 (y)
j. DL + LL + WL(X) 1.2 1.2 1.2 (x) -
Page 362 of 1358

k. DL + LL - WL(X) 1.2 1.2 1.2 (x) -

l. DL + LL + WL(y) 1.2 1.2 1.2 (y) -
m. DL + LL - WL(y) 1.2 1.2 1.2 (y) -
n. DL + WL(X) 1.5 - 1.5 (x) -
o. DL - WL(X) 1.5 - 1.5 (x) -
p. DL + WL(y) 1.5 - 1.5 (y) -
q. DL - WL(y) 1.5 - 1.5 (y) -
r. DL + W (X) 0.9 - 1.5 (X) -
S. DL – W(X) 0.9 - -1.5 (X) -
t. DL + W(Y) 0.9 - 1.5 (Y) -
u. DL + W (Y) 0.9 - -1.5 (Y) -
v. DL + SPEC (X) /EQX 0.9 - - 1.5 (X)
w. DL – SPEC(X) /EQX 0.9 - - -1.5 (X)
x. DL + SPEC(Z) /EQZ 0.9 - - 1.5 (Y)
y. DL + SPEC (Z) /EQZ 0.9 - - -1.5 (Y)
Ex ± 0.3Ey
Ey ± 0.3Ex

Page 363 of 1358

here.
Page 364 of 1358

1. Hostel

Indore
Building Hostel R Prepared Nishant
By Rathi
Time Aw 0.09h (s)
period
Building h 59.1 m Tx 2.069 0.96 2.069
Configurations Dx 31 m Ty 2.042 1.60 2.042
Dy 11 m
Pier Label Axis Length(m) (m) (m2) LwiX/h AwX LwiY/h AwY
P1 90 0.640 0.300 0.192 0.000 0.0077 0.011 0.009
P2 90 0.640 0.300 0.192 0.000 0.0077 0.011 0.009
P3 90 0.640 0.300 0.192 0.000 0.0077 0.011 0.009
P4 90 0.640 0.300 0.192 0.000 0.0077 0.011 0.009
P5 90 0.960 0.300 0.288 0.000 0.0115 0.016 0.013
P6 90 0.960 0.300 0.288 0.000 0.0115 0.016 0.013
P7 90 0.960 0.300 0.288 0.000 0.0115 0.016 0.013
P8 90 0.960 0.300 0.288 0.000 0.0115 0.016 0.013
P9 90 0.640 0.300 0.192 0.000 0.0077 0.011 0.009
P10 90 0.640 0.300 0.192 0.000 0.0077 0.011 0.009
P11 90 0.640 0.300 0.192 0.000 0.0077 0.011 0.009
P12 90 0.640 0.300 0.192 0.000 0.0077 0.011 0.009
P13 90 0.680 0.300 0.204 0.000 0.0082 0.012 0.009
P14 90 0.640 0.300 0.192 0.000 0.0077 0.011 0.009
P16 90 0.960 0.300 0.288 0.000 0.0115 0.016 0.013
P18 90 0.960 0.300 0.288 0.000 0.0115 0.016 0.013
P19 90 0.640 0.300 0.192 0.000 0.0077 0.011 0.009
P20 90 0.640 0.300 0.192 0.000 0.0077 0.011 0.009
P21 90 0.640 0.300 0.192 0.000 0.0077 0.011 0.009
P22 90 0.640 0.300 0.192 0.000 0.0077 0.011 0.009
P25 90 0.960 0.300 0.288 0.000 0.0115 0.016 0.013
P26 90 0.960 0.300 0.288 0.000 0.0115 0.016 0.013
P27 90 0.640 0.300 0.192 0.000 0.0077 0.011 0.009
P28 90 0.640 0.300 0.192 0.000 0.0077 0.011 0.009
P31 0 0.640 0.300 0.192 0.011 0.0085 0.000 0.008
P32 0 0.640 0.300 0.192 0.011 0.0085 0.000 0.008
P33 0 0.640 0.300 0.192 0.011 0.0085 0.000 0.008
P34 0 0.640 0.300 0.192 0.011 0.0085 0.000 0.008
Page 365 of 1358

P37 0 0.640 0.300 0.192 0.011 0.0085 0.000 0.008

P38 0 0.640 0.300 0.192 0.011 0.0085 0.000 0.008
P39 0 0.640 0.300 0.192 0.011 0.0085 0.000 0.008
P40 0 0.640 0.300 0.192 0.011 0.0085 0.000 0.008
P41 0 0.640 0.300 0.192 0.011 0.0085 0.000 0.008
P42 0 0.640 0.300 0.192 0.011 0.0085 0.000 0.008
P45 0 0.550 0.300 0.165 0.009 0.0072 0.000 0.007
P46 0 0.560 0.300 0.168 0.009 0.0074 0.000 0.007
P47 0 0.560 0.300 0.168 0.009 0.0074 0.000 0.007
P48 0 0.630 0.300 0.189 0.011 0.0084 0.000 0.008
P52 0 0.640 0.300 0.192 0.011 0.0085 0.000 0.008
P53 0 0.640 0.300 0.192 0.011 0.0085 0.000 0.008
LW1 90 2.240 0.300 0.672 0.000 0.0269 0.038 0.038
LW2 0 1.760 0.300 0.528 0.030 0.0279 0.000 0.021
LW3 90 2.240 0.300 0.672 0.000 0.0269 0.038 0.038
P62 0 0.800 0.300 0.240 0.014 0.0109 0.000 0.010
P64 0 0.800 0.300 0.240 0.014 0.0109 0.000 0.010
P65 0 0.800 0.300 0.240 0.014 0.0109 0.000 0.010
P66 0 0.800 0.300 0.240 0.014 0.0109 0.000 0.010
P67 0 0.800 0.300 0.240 0.014 0.0109 0.000 0.010
P68 0 0.780 0.300 0.234 0.013 0.0106 0.000 0.009
P69 0 0.800 0.300 0.240 0.014 0.0109 0.000 0.010
P70 0 0.800 0.300 0.240 0.014 0.0109 0.000 0.010
P71 0 0.800 0.300 0.240 0.014 0.0109 0.000 0.010
P72 0 0.800 0.300 0.240 0.014 0.0109 0.000 0.010
P73 0 0.800 0.300 0.240 0.014 0.0109 0.000 0.010
P78 90 0.640 0.300 0.192 0.000 0.0077 0.011 0.009
P79 90 0.660 0.300 0.198 0.000 0.0079 0.011 0.009
P80 0 0.420 0.300 0.126 0.007 0.0054 0.000 0.005
P81 0 0.800 0.300 0.240 0.014 0.0109 0.000 0.010
P89 -45 0.244 0.300 0.073 0.003 0.0030 0.003 0.003
P90 0 0.268 0.300 0.080 0.005 0.0034 0.000 0.003
P91 0 0.640 0.300 0.192 0.011 0.0085 0.000 0.008
Page 366 of 1358


1. Hostel
Page 367 of 1358

Page 368 of 1358

Structural DBR for MDC Accommodation
INDEX
⚫ Introduction
⚫ Concrete Covers
⚫ Loads
Page 369 of 1358

1. Introduction

structural systems. The MDC Accommodation has been conceptualized as RCC Well distributed
Shear wall with Moment frame and conventional slabs system. The 200 mm thick RC shear walls
along with Ductile portal frames will be a primary lateral load carrying system and the conventional
slab and Moment frames shall carry the gravity load at floor level.
3. Description of Structures

MDC ACCOMDATION 3.3m(3.9 GF) 1 GF+10+T 2 floors
IS: 875 - 1987 Part 1 : Code of practice for Unit weights of materials- Dead Loads. IS:
875 - 1987 Part 2 : Code of practice for Live Loads.
IS: 1161 – 1998 : Steel tubes for structural purpose.
Specification.
Page 370 of 1358

Concrete
Liquids – General
relevant codes.
individual members.
Note:
5.1 Modelling
Page 371 of 1358

columns.
load combination.
5.2 Storey Drift


(clause 23.2 of IS 456-2000):
shall be used.
Page 372 of 1358


5.5 Crack width


below. The minor direction moment in 200 mm walls can be ignored with appropriate modifiers.

5.8 Design Criteria


Page 373 of 1358

5.9 Detailing

6.1 Concrete:
The grade of concrete for RCC shall be M35 for MDC ACCOMDATION, except for Grade slab, Lintels,
sills and nonstructural parapet walls for which the grade of concrete shall be M25.
6.1.1 Cement
6.1.2 Aggregates
6.1.3 Water
6.2 Reinforcement:
7.0 Concrete Covers

Page 374 of 1358

Raft/Footing = 50mm
Slab = 25 mm
Beam = 30mm
Columns = 40mm
8.0 Loads

percent)
Glass : 25 kN/m3
8.2 Imposed Loads:

UDL CONC
KN/m2 KN
1 Lobby, Corridors, Lounge = 3 4.5 1.5 kN/m2
Page 375 of 1358

6 LMR = 8 1.5 kN/m2
7 Room, DAP Room = 2 1.8 1.5 kN/m2
8 Kitchens = 3 4.5 1.5 kN/m2
9 Dinning = 4 2.7 1.5 kN/m2
10 Balconies, Open terrace = 4 1.5 Kn/m 3 kN/m2
Wall loads for different floor heights calculated with density of 20kn/m3 are mentioned in the
table below.
Floor Beam Brick Wall UDL

Plaster
MDC ACCOM EXTERNAL
WALL 3.3 0.6 20 0.2 0.03 12.4
MDC ACCOM INTERNAL
WALL 3.3 0.6 20 0.2 0.024 12.15
MDC ACCOM INTERNAL
WALL 3.9 0.6 20 0.2 0.024 15.15
MDC ACCOM INTERNAL
WALL 3.9 0.6 20 0.2 0.024 14.85
mentioned under clause 6.1 of IS 875 part 2.
Impact Factor = 1.5

3. Weight of Pump = 175 kg
4. Impact Factor = 1.5

Design wind speed
Page 376 of 1358


Page 377 of 1358


Importance Factor
3. Buildings with occupancy greater than
I = 1.2
200
5 Soil Type = Hard
Vb = Z  ( I 2R)  (Sa |g ) W
Clause 6.4.
clause in the IS1893: 2002. Since the structure is a R.C.C. structure, a damping value of 5% shall be
considered.
Space frame analysis of the structure shall be carried out using Response Spectrum method. As
per IS 1893, the base shear of response spectrum analysis shall be matched with the base shear

per Buildings with RC Structural walls (Calculation for blocks attached in annexure A)
Page 378 of 1358


a. DL + LL 1.5 1.5 - -
b. DL + LL + Spec(X)/EQX 1.2 1.2 - 1.2 (x)
c. DL + LL - SPEC(X) /EQX 1.2 1.2 - 1.2 (x)
d. DL + LL + SPEC(Z) /EQZ 1.2 1.2 - 1.2 (y)
e. DL + LL - SPEC(Z) /EQZ 1.2 1.2 - 1.2 (y)
f. DL + SPEC(X) /EQX 1.5 - - 1.5 (x)
g. DL- SPEC(X ) /EQX 1.5 - - 1.5 (x)
h. DL + SPEC(Z) /EQZ 1.5 - - 1.5 (y)
i. DL - SPEC(Z) /EQZ 1.5 - - 1.5 (y)
j. DL + LL + WL(X) 1.2 1.2 1.2 (x) -
k. DL + LL - WL(X) 1.2 1.2 1.2 (x) -
l. DL + LL + WL(y) 1.2 1.2 1.2 (y) -
m. DL + LL - WL(y) 1.2 1.2 1.2 (y) -
n. DL + WL(X) 1.5 - 1.5 (x) -
o. DL - WL(X) 1.5 - 1.5 (x) -
p. DL + WL(y) 1.5 - 1.5 (y) -
q. DL - WL(y) 1.5 - 1.5 (y) -
r. DL + W (X) 0.9 - 1.5 (X) -
S. DL – W(X) 0.9 - -1.5 (X) -
t. DL + W(Y) 0.9 - 1.5 (Y) -
u. DL + W (Y) 0.9 - -1.5 (Y) -
v. DL + SPEC (X) /EQX 0.9 - - 1.5 (X)
w. DL – SPEC(X) /EQX 0.9 - - -1.5 (X)
x. DL + SPEC(Z) /EQZ 0.9 - - 1.5 (Y)
y. DL + SPEC (Z) /EQZ 0.9 - - -1.5 (Y)
Ex ± 0.3Ey
Page 379 of 1358

Ey ± 0.3Ex

here for reference.
Page 380 of 1358

Page 381 of 1358

1. MDC Accommodation

Project IIM Indore Date 24.10.2020
Building MDC Prepared Nishant
Accommodation By Rathi
Aw 0.09h (s)
h 45.9 m Tx 1.529 0.72 1.529
Dx 32.6 m Ty 1.515 1.17 1.515
Dy 12.42 m
Pier Axis Length(m) (m) (m2) LwiX/h AwX LwiY/h AwY
Label
P1 90 1.216 0.600 0.730 0.000 0.0292 0.026 0.037
P2 90 1.216 0.300 0.365 0.000 0.0146 0.026 0.019
P5 90 1.216 0.300 0.365 0.000 0.0146 0.026 0.019
P6 90 1.216 0.300 0.365 0.000 0.0146 0.026 0.019
P9 90 1.200 0.300 0.360 0.000 0.0144 0.026 0.018
P10 90 1.216 0.300 0.365 0.000 0.0146 0.026 0.019
P11 90 1.216 0.300 0.365 0.000 0.0146 0.026 0.019
P14 90 1.200 0.300 0.360 0.000 0.0144 0.026 0.018
P16 90 0.800 0.300 0.240 0.000 0.0096 0.017 0.011
P17 0 2.000 0.300 0.600 0.044 0.0356 0.000 0.024
P18 90 0.800 0.300 0.240 0.000 0.0096 0.017 0.011
P19 90 0.800 0.300 0.240 0.000 0.0096 0.017 0.011
P20 0 0.960 0.300 0.288 0.021 0.0141 0.000 0.012
P21 90 0.800 0.300 0.240 0.000 0.0096 0.017 0.011
P22 90 0.800 0.300 0.240 0.000 0.0096 0.017 0.011
P23 0 0.964 0.300 0.289 0.021 0.0141 0.000 0.012
P24 90 0.800 0.300 0.240 0.000 0.0096 0.017 0.011
P25 0 1.040 0.300 0.312 0.023 0.0155 0.000 0.012
P26 90 0.800 0.300 0.240 0.000 0.0096 0.017 0.011
LW1 0 2.520 0.300 0.756 0.055 0.0491 0.000 0.030
LW2 90 2.000 0.300 0.600 0.000 0.0240 0.044 0.036
LW3 0 2.520 0.300 0.756 0.055 0.0491 0.000 0.030
LW4 90 1.896 0.300 0.569 0.000 0.0228 0.041 0.033
LW5 0 2.280 0.300 0.684 0.050 0.0426 0.000 0.027
LW6 90 1.896 0.300 0.569 0.000 0.0228 0.041 0.033
P28 0 0.964 0.300 0.289 0.021 0.0141 0.000 0.012
P29 90 0.800 0.300 0.240 0.000 0.0096 0.017 0.011
Page 382 of 1358

P30 0 0.976 0.300 0.293 0.021 0.0143 0.000 0.012

P31 90 0.800 0.300 0.240 0.000 0.0096 0.017 0.011
P32 90 0.800 0.300 0.240 0.000 0.0096 0.017 0.011
P33 0 0.964 0.300 0.289 0.021 0.0141 0.000 0.012
P34 90 0.800 0.300 0.240 0.000 0.0096 0.017 0.011
P35 0 1.200 0.300 0.360 0.026 0.0184 0.000 0.014
P36 90 0.800 0.300 0.240 0.000 0.0096 0.017 0.011
P40 90 1.216 0.300 0.365 0.000 0.0146 0.026 0.019
P41 90 1.216 0.300 0.365 0.000 0.0146 0.026 0.019
P42 90 1.216 0.300 0.365 0.000 0.0146 0.026 0.019
P43 90 1.216 0.300 0.365 0.000 0.0146 0.026 0.019
P46 90 1.216 0.300 0.365 0.000 0.0146 0.026 0.019
P47 0 1.200 0.300 0.360 0.026 0.0184 0.000 0.014
P48 90 0.720 0.300 0.216 0.000 0.0086 0.016 0.010
P53 0 1.600 0.300 0.480 0.035 0.0265 0.000 0.019
P55 0 1.200 0.300 0.360 0.026 0.0184 0.000 0.014
P56 90 0.560 0.300 0.168 0.000 0.0067 0.012 0.008

MDC ACCOMMODATION
Page 383 of 1358

Page 384 of 1358

Structural DBR for MESS
INDEX
⚫ Introduction
⚫ Concrete Covers
⚫ Loads
Page 385 of 1358

1. Introduction

structural systems. The MESS Building has been conceptualized as an RCC Special moment
resisting frame with conventional slabs system. The SMRF will be a primary lateral load carrying
system and the conventional slab and Ductile Moment frames shall carry the gravity load at floor
level.

2.7 Serv
MESS BUILDING 1 2 floors
3.45 Terrace GF+T
Page 386 of 1358

Specification.
Concrete
Liquids – General
relevant codes.
individual members.
Note:
Page 387 of 1358

5.1 Modelling
columns.

load combination.
➢ Obtain resultant member forces like bending moments, shear forces and axial forces
5.2 Storey Drift


(clause 23.2 of IS 456-2000):
Page 388 of 1358

shall be used.

5.5 Crack width


properties used in structural model, Table 6 from 16700 is attached below. The minor direction
moment in 200 mm walls can be ignored with appropriate modifiers.
5.7 Design Criteria


5.8 Detailing
Page 389 of 1358

5.9 Shrinkage Strip

6.1 Concrete:
The grade of concrete for RCC shall be M35 for MESS Building, except for Grade slab, Lintels, sills
and nonstructural parapet walls for which the grade of concrete shall be M25.
6.1.1 Cement
6.1.2 Aggregates
6.1.3 Water
6.2 Reinforcement:
7.0 Concrete Covers

Raft/Footing = 50mm
Page 390 of 1358

Slab = 25 mm
Beam = 30mm
Columns = 40mm
8.0 Loads

percent)
Glass : 25 kN/m3
8.2 Imposed Loads:

UDL CONC
KN/m2 KN
Page 391 of 1358

6 Kitchens = 3 4.5 1.5 kN/m2
7 Dinning = 4 2.7 1.5 kN/m2
8 LMR = 8 1.5 kN/m2
below.
Floor Beam Brick Wall Plaster UDL

MESS EXTERNAL WALL 2.7 0.5 20 0.2 0.030 10.1
MESS INTERNAL WALL 2.7 0.5 20 0.2 0.024 9.9
MESS INTERNAL WALL
100MM 2.7 0.5 20 0.1 0.030 5.7
MESS INTERNAL WALL 3.45 0.6 20 0.2 0.024 12.8
MESS INTERNAL WALL
100MM 3.45 0.6 20 0.1 0.030 7.4
MESS INTERNAL WALL 6.15 0.6 20 0.2 0.024 25

18mm for exterior face



Design wind speed
Page 392 of 1358


Table 2 from IS 875 Part 2 is attached below for reference
3. Importance Factor All other buildings

I = 1
5 Soil Type = Hard
Page 393 of 1358

Vb = Z  ( I | 2R)  (Sa |g ) W
Clause 6.4.
considered.


a. DL + LL 1.5 1.5 - -
b. DL + LL + Spec(X)/EQX 1.2 1.2 - 1.2 (x)
c. DL + LL - SPEC(X) /EQX 1.2 1.2 - 1.2 (x)
d. DL + LL + SPEC(Z) /EQZ 1.2 1.2 - 1.2 (y)
e. DL + LL - SPEC(Z) /EQZ 1.2 1.2 - 1.2 (y)
Page 394 of 1358

f. DL + SPEC(X) /EQX 1.5 - - 1.5 (x)

g. DL- SPEC(X ) /EQX 1.5 - - 1.5 (x)
h. DL + SPEC(Z) /EQZ 1.5 - - 1.5 (y)
i. DL - SPEC(Z) /EQZ 1.5 - - 1.5 (y)
j. DL + LL + WL(X) 1.2 1.2 1.2 (x) -
k. DL + LL - WL(X) 1.2 1.2 1.2 (x) -
l. DL + LL + WL(y) 1.2 1.2 1.2 (y) -
m. DL + LL - WL(y) 1.2 1.2 1.2 (y) -
n. DL + WL(X) 1.5 - 1.5 (x) -
o. DL - WL(X) 1.5 - 1.5 (x) -
p. DL + WL(y) 1.5 - 1.5 (y) -
q. DL - WL(y) 1.5 - 1.5 (y) -
r. DL + W (X) 0.9 - 1.5 (X) -
S. DL – W(X) 0.9 - -1.5 (X) -
t. DL + W(Y) 0.9 - 1.5 (Y) -
u. DL + W (Y) 0.9 - -1.5 (Y) -
v. DL + SPEC (X) /EQX 0.9 - - 1.5 (X)
w. DL – SPEC(X) /EQX 0.9 - - -1.5 (X)
x. DL + SPEC(Z) /EQZ 0.9 - - 1.5 (Y)
y. DL + SPEC (Z) /EQZ 0.9 - - -1.5 (Y)
Ex ± 0.3Ey
Ey ± 0.3Ex

Page 395 of 1358

here for reference.
Page 396 of 1358

Structural DBR for Type V Residences
INDEX
⚫ Introduction
⚫ Concrete Covers
⚫ Loads
Page 397 of 1358

1. Introduction

structural systems. The Type V residence has been conceptualized as RCC Well distributed Shear
wall with Moment frame and conventional slabs system. The shear walls will be primary lateral
load carrying system and the conventional slab and Ductile Moment frames shall carry the gravity
load at floor.

TYPE- V RESIDENCES 3.3m 1+1(future) GF+8+T 2 floors
Specification.
Page 398 of 1358

IS: 1786 -2008 : Specification for High Strength Deformed steel bars and Wires
for Concrete
Liquids – General
IS: 2950 (Part- 1) -1981 : Code of Practice for Design And Construction Of Raft
Foundations
5.0 Design Methodology

relevant codes.
individual members.
Note:
Page 399 of 1358

5.1 Modelling
In these package slab loads are applied as a floor loads. Wall loads are applied as UDL on beams.

columns.

load combination.
5.2 Storey Drift


(clause 23.2 of IS 456-2000):
Page 400 of 1358

shall be used.

5.5 Crack width

condition. Based on this assumption and as per IS 456: 2000, crack width in RCC elements shall
be restricted to 0.2 mm in water retaining structures.

As per clause 7.2 & table 6 of IS 16700 and Clause 6.4.3.1 as per IS 1893 2016 appropriate
modifiers shall be applied to structural properties used in structural model, Table 6 from 16700
is attached below. The minor direction moment in 200 mm walls can be ignored with
appropriate modifiers.

5.8 Design Criteria

Page 401 of 1358


5.9 Detailing

6.1 Concrete:
The grade of concrete for RCC shall be M35 for Type- V Residences, except for Grade slab, Lintels,
sills and nonstructural parapet walls for which the grade of concrete shall be M25.
6.1.1 Cement
6.1.2 Aggregates
6.1.3 Water
Page 402 of 1358

6.2 Reinforcement:
7.0 Concrete Covers

Raft/Footing = 50mm
Slab = 25 mm
Beam = 30mm
Columns = 40mm
8.0 Loads

percent)
Glass : 25 kN/m3
8.2 Imposed Loads:

Page 403 of 1358

UDL CONC
KN/m2 KN
6 LMR = 8 1.5 kN/m2
7 Bedroom, Living, Hall = 2 1.8 1.5 kN/m2
below.
Floor Beam Brick Wall Plaste UDL

Block Height Depth Density Thickness r Load
TYPE-V EXTERNAL WALL 3.3 0.6 20 0.2 0.030 12.4
TYPE-V INTERNAL WALL 3.3 0.6 20 0.2 0.024 12.1
TYPE-V INTERNAL WALL
100mm 3.3 0.6 20 0.1 0.030 7.0



mentioned under
clause 6.1 of IS 875 part 2.
Page 404 of 1358

Impact Factor = 1.5

Impact Factor = 1.5

Design wind speed

Page 405 of 1358


Importance Factor
3. Buildings with occupancy greater than
I = 1.2
200
5 Soil Type = Hard
Vb = Z  ( I | 2R)  (Sa |g ) W
Clause 6.4.
Page 406 of 1358

considered.

per Buildings with RC Structural walls (Calculation for blocks attached)

a. DL + LL 1.5 1.5 - -
b. DL + LL + Spec(X)/EQX 1.2 1.2 - 1.2 (x)
c. DL + LL - SPEC(X) /EQX 1.2 1.2 - 1.2 (x)
d. DL + LL + SPEC(Z) /EQZ 1.2 1.2 - 1.2 (y)
e. DL + LL - SPEC(Z) /EQZ 1.2 1.2 - 1.2 (y)
f. DL + SPEC(X) /EQX 1.5 - - 1.5 (x)
g. DL- SPEC(X ) /EQX 1.5 - - 1.5 (x)
h. DL + SPEC(Z) /EQZ 1.5 - - 1.5 (y)
i. DL - SPEC(Z) /EQZ 1.5 - - 1.5 (y)
j. DL + LL + WL(X) 1.2 1.2 1.2 (x) -
k. DL + LL - WL(X) 1.2 1.2 1.2 (x) -
l. DL + LL + WL(y) 1.2 1.2 1.2 (y) -
m. DL + LL - WL(y) 1.2 1.2 1.2 (y) -
n. DL + WL(X) 1.5 - 1.5 (x) -
o. DL - WL(X) 1.5 - 1.5 (x) -
p. DL + WL(y) 1.5 - 1.5 (y) -
q. DL - WL(y) 1.5 - 1.5 (y) -
r. DL + W (X) 0.9 - 1.5 (X) -
S. DL – W(X) 0.9 - -1.5 (X) -
t. DL + W(Y) 0.9 - 1.5 (Y) -
u. DL + W (Y) 0.9 - -1.5 (Y) -
Page 407 of 1358

v. DL + SPEC (X) /EQX 0.9 - - 1.5 (X)

w. DL – SPEC(X) /EQX 0.9 - - -1.5 (X)
x. DL + SPEC(Z) /EQZ 0.9 - - 1.5 (Y)
y. DL + SPEC (Z) /EQZ 0.9 - - -1.5 (Y)
Partial load factors are referred from SP: 24 – 1983, Clause 35.4.1
Ex ± 0.3Ey
Ey ± 0.3Ex

T Geotech Report for Project No 220036N Dated 20/08/2020 From Cengers Geotechnica Pvt Ltd,
here for reference.
Page 408 of 1358

Page 409 of 1358

1. TYPE- V RESIDENCES

Indore
Building Type V Prepared Nishant
By Rathi
Aw 0.09h (s)
h 39.3 m Tx 0.951 0.63 0.951
Dx 32 m Ty 0.993 0.60 0.993
Dy 35 m
Pier Axis Length(m) (m) (m2) LwiX/h AwX LwiY/h AwY
Label
1 90 0.960 0.300 0.288 0.000 0.0115 0.024 0.015
2 90 0.960 0.300 0.288 0.000 0.0115 0.024 0.015
3 90 0.960 0.300 0.288 0.000 0.0115 0.024 0.015
4 90 0.960 0.300 0.288 0.000 0.0115 0.024 0.015
5 0 0.960 0.300 0.288 0.024 0.0145 0.000 0.012
6 90 0.960 0.300 0.288 0.000 0.0115 0.024 0.015
7 90 0.960 0.300 0.288 0.000 0.0115 0.024 0.015
8 90 0.960 0.300 0.288 0.000 0.0115 0.024 0.015
9 90 0.960 0.300 0.288 0.000 0.0115 0.024 0.015
10 90 0.960 0.300 0.288 0.000 0.0115 0.024 0.015
11 90 0.960 0.300 0.288 0.000 0.0115 0.024 0.015
12 90 0.960 0.300 0.288 0.000 0.0115 0.024 0.015
13 90 0.960 0.300 0.288 0.000 0.0115 0.024 0.015
14 0 0.960 0.300 0.288 0.024 0.0145 0.000 0.012
15 0 0.978 0.300 0.293 0.025 0.0148 0.000 0.012
16 0 0.960 0.300 0.288 0.024 0.0145 0.000 0.012
17 0 0.960 0.300 0.288 0.024 0.0145 0.000 0.012
18 0 0.980 0.300 0.294 0.025 0.0149 0.000 0.012
20 0 0.980 0.300 0.294 0.025 0.0149 0.000 0.012
21 0 0.960 0.300 0.288 0.024 0.0145 0.000 0.012
22 0 0.960 0.300 0.288 0.024 0.0145 0.000 0.012
23 0 0.960 0.300 0.288 0.024 0.0145 0.000 0.012
25 0 0.960 0.300 0.288 0.024 0.0145 0.000 0.012
26 0 0.960 0.300 0.288 0.024 0.0145 0.000 0.012
27 0 0.980 0.300 0.294 0.025 0.0149 0.000 0.012
28 0 0.980 0.300 0.294 0.025 0.0149 0.000 0.012
30 0 0.960 0.300 0.288 0.024 0.0145 0.000 0.012
Page 410 of 1358

31 0 0.960 0.300 0.288 0.024 0.0145 0.000 0.012

32 0 1.360 0.300 0.408 0.035 0.0225 0.000 0.016
33 0 0.960 0.300 0.288 0.024 0.0145 0.000 0.012
34 0 0.960 0.300 0.288 0.024 0.0145 0.000 0.012
35 0 1.360 0.300 0.408 0.035 0.0225 0.000 0.016
36 0 1.160 0.300 0.348 0.030 0.0183 0.000 0.014
37 0 1.040 0.300 0.312 0.026 0.0160 0.000 0.012
38 90 0.960 0.300 0.288 0.000 0.0115 0.024 0.015
39 0 1.040 0.300 0.312 0.026 0.0160 0.000 0.012
40 0 1.160 0.300 0.348 0.030 0.0183 0.000 0.014
41 0 0.960 0.300 0.288 0.024 0.0145 0.000 0.012
42 90 0.880 0.300 0.264 0.000 0.0106 0.022 0.013
43 90 0.960 0.300 0.288 0.000 0.0115 0.024 0.015
44 90 0.880 0.300 0.264 0.000 0.0106 0.022 0.013
45 0 0.960 0.300 0.288 0.024 0.0145 0.000 0.012
46 0 0.960 0.300 0.288 0.024 0.0145 0.000 0.012
47 90 0.960 0.300 0.288 0.000 0.0115 0.024 0.015
48 90 0.960 0.300 0.288 0.000 0.0115 0.024 0.015
49 0 0.960 0.300 0.288 0.024 0.0145 0.000 0.012
50 0 0.960 0.300 0.288 0.024 0.0145 0.000 0.012
51 90 0.960 0.300 0.288 0.000 0.0115 0.024 0.015
52 90 0.960 0.300 0.288 0.000 0.0115 0.024 0.015
53 90 0.960 0.300 0.288 0.000 0.0115 0.024 0.015
54 90 0.960 0.300 0.288 0.000 0.0115 0.024 0.015
55 0 0.960 0.300 0.288 0.024 0.0145 0.000 0.012
56 0 1.160 0.300 0.348 0.030 0.0183 0.000 0.014
57 0 1.040 0.300 0.312 0.026 0.0160 0.000 0.012
58 90 0.960 0.300 0.288 0.000 0.0115 0.024 0.015
59 0 0.960 0.300 0.288 0.024 0.0145 0.000 0.012
60 0 0.960 0.300 0.288 0.024 0.0145 0.000 0.012
61 90 0.960 0.300 0.288 0.000 0.0115 0.024 0.015
62 0 1.040 0.300 0.312 0.026 0.0160 0.000 0.012
63 0 1.160 0.300 0.348 0.030 0.0183 0.000 0.014
64 0 1.360 0.300 0.408 0.035 0.0225 0.000 0.016
65 0 0.960 0.300 0.288 0.024 0.0145 0.000 0.012
66 0 0.960 0.300 0.288 0.024 0.0145 0.000 0.012
67 0 1.360 0.300 0.408 0.035 0.0225 0.000 0.016
68 0 0.960 0.300 0.288 0.024 0.0145 0.000 0.012
69 0 0.960 0.300 0.288 0.024 0.0145 0.000 0.012
70 0 0.980 0.300 0.294 0.025 0.0149 0.000 0.012
71 0 0.980 0.300 0.294 0.025 0.0149 0.000 0.012
72 0 0.960 0.300 0.288 0.024 0.0145 0.000 0.012
Page 411 of 1358

73 0 0.960 0.300 0.288 0.024 0.0145 0.000 0.012

76 0 0.978 0.300 0.293 0.025 0.0148 0.000 0.012
77 0 0.968 0.300 0.290 0.025 0.0147 0.000 0.012
78 0 0.960 0.300 0.288 0.024 0.0145 0.000 0.012
79 0 0.960 0.300 0.288 0.024 0.0145 0.000 0.012
80 0 0.960 0.300 0.288 0.024 0.0145 0.000 0.012
81 0 0.960 0.300 0.288 0.024 0.0145 0.000 0.012
82 0 0.960 0.300 0.288 0.024 0.0145 0.000 0.012
83 0 0.960 0.300 0.288 0.024 0.0145 0.000 0.012
84 90 0.960 0.300 0.288 0.000 0.0115 0.024 0.015
85 90 0.960 0.300 0.288 0.000 0.0115 0.024 0.015
86 90 0.960 0.300 0.288 0.000 0.0115 0.024 0.015
87 90 0.960 0.300 0.288 0.000 0.0115 0.024 0.015
88 90 0.960 0.300 0.288 0.000 0.0115 0.024 0.015
89 90 0.960 0.300 0.288 0.000 0.0115 0.024 0.015
90 90 0.960 0.300 0.288 0.000 0.0115 0.024 0.015
92 90 0.960 0.300 0.288 0.000 0.0115 0.024 0.015
93 0 0.960 0.300 0.288 0.024 0.0145 0.000 0.012
94 90 0.960 0.300 0.288 0.000 0.0115 0.024 0.015
95 90 0.960 0.300 0.288 0.000 0.0115 0.024 0.015
96 90 0.960 0.300 0.288 0.000 0.0115 0.024 0.015
97 90 0.960 0.300 0.288 0.000 0.0115 0.024 0.015
99 0 0.960 0.300 0.288 0.024 0.0145 0.000 0.012
LW1 90 1.800 0.300 0.540 0.000 0.0216 0.046 0.033
LW2 0 2.200 0.300 0.660 0.056 0.0432 0.000 0.026
LW3 0 1.200 0.300 0.360 0.031 0.0191 0.000 0.014
LW4 90 1.800 0.300 0.540 0.000 0.0216 0.046 0.033
LW5 0 2.800 0.300 0.840 0.071 0.0618 0.000 0.034
LW6 90 1.840 0.300 0.552 0.000 0.0221 0.047 0.034
LW7 0 2.800 0.300 0.840 0.071 0.0618 0.000 0.034
Page 412 of 1358


1. Type V Residence
Page 413 of 1358

Page 414 of 1358

Method Statement of Post Tensioning System
1. General
Utracon Post Tensioning Systems are developed and maintained by Utracon Structural Systems
Pte Ltd Singapore serviced and distributed to a worldwide network of subsidiaries owned by the
Utracon Corporation, Singapore.
Our systems comply with international specifications and recommendations e.g.: ASTM, AASHTO,
BS, EUROCODE, DIN, AUSTRIAN CODE, SIA, FIP, EOTA, IS CODE, etc. The quality of UPS
products and services is in full compliance with the above.
This method statement has been developed to provide guidance for all personnel involved in the
project in using UPS systems which covers the installation, stressing and grouting operations.
2. Post Tensioning systems.

The systems used are the Utracon Post-Tensioning Systems incorporating strand of 0.5” (12.7mm),
0.6 “(15.24mm) diameter in the design of post tensioning structures.
3. Materials
3.1 PT Strands
Strands 0.50” 0.60”

Nominal Diameter 12.7mm 15.24mm
Nominal Area 100mm2 140mm2
Nominal weight 0.785kg/m 1.102kg/m
Tensile strength 1860N/mm2 1860N/mm2
Modulus of elasticity 195kN/mm2 195kN/mm2
Min breaking load of strand 186kN 260.7kN
3.2 Sheathings
The sheathings for bonded tendons shall be spirally wound galvanized steel tubing made from
galvanized steel strips of 0.3 mm thickness.
The sheathings shall be mortar tight to prevent entrance of cement grout during concreting and
shall be corrugated for better bonding.
The sheathings shall be sufficiently strong to retain shapes and to resist damage during
construction.
Page 415 of 1358

The round sheathings with various outer diameters from 68mm to 135mm have been widely used
in UPS Multiplane anchorage systems.
The Flat sheathings used in this project shall be of 80 mm wide and 25 mm deep configured to
match UPS “Flat Anchorage “systems.
3.3 Anchorages
The types of anchorage used are Flat Anchorage (FA), Multiplane Anchorage (MA), Coupler, Plate
Anchorage and Bond Head (Dead End) Anchorage. Various types of anchorage are available to
serve the different requirements of the projects. The purpose of the anchorage is transferring the
tendon force to the concrete structure after the strands are stressed.
Anchorages used in this project shall be of flat anchorage (FA) Type as the structural member (PT
Flat Slab) intend to use is Flat in geometry.
4.0 Design data for friction / elongation calculation
Friction of coefficient, u : 0.2 Or as per the consultant’s recommendation.

Wobble factor k : 0.0017/m
Draw in of wedge : 6mm
Stressing anchorage : Type FA, MA and Coupler
Loss in jack : Varies from 0 ~ 2.0%.
5.0 Handling and storage of materials
⚫ The pre-stressing strands shall be free of grease and corrosion enhancing materials.
⚫ No flame cutting of strands is allowed.
⚫ Care should be taken in the handling of strands in order to avoid mechanical damage to the
strands.
⚫ Strands should be raised above ground to avoid contamination.
⚫ Webbing slings shall be used for loading and unloading in order to avoid mechanical damage
to the strand coils.
⚫ All Post Tensioning components must be handled and stored such that any contamination,
mechanical damage or corrosion can be avoided.
6.0 General Work Procedures
➢ Post Tensioning tendons shall be installed in accordance with the “Approved Drawings issued
for Construction”.
For Post Tensioning slabs construction
Page 416 of 1358

➢ Install bottom slab reinforcement when the slab formwork is ready.

➢ Provide sufficient cover for the bottom slab reinforcement.
➢ Install tendons in accordance with the shop drawings.
➢ Install top slab reinforcement.
➢ For Post Tensioning beams construction
➢ Install bottom and side reinforcements and links. No capping links shall be installed at this
stage.
➢ Install top reinforcements and capping links of the beam.
7.0 Guidelines for Tendon Installation
➢ Tendon alignment shall take precedent over reinforcement.

➢ All dimensions measured shall be based on the formwork level. Therefore, accurate formwork
is necessary.
➢ The tolerances of formwork shall be 5mm or in accordance with the specifications.
➢ The Multiplane Anchorages are fixed to the end formwork by support bars to avoid any
displacement during concreting.
➢ The Multiplane Anchorages must be orientated perpendicularly to the cable axis and with the
grout vent at the top.
➢ If the side formwork is to be erected earlier, the main contractor has to arrange for holes to
be provided at the formwork for each anchorage to accommodate protruding strands.
➢ Tolerances for vertical tendon profiles are 10mm for high and low points.
➢ Tolerances for horizontal tendon profiles are 150mm (to avoid small M&E openings / pipes
or other obstructions). Specialist designer shall be consulted for tolerances more than
150mm.
➢ Handle ducts with care and no stepping on ducts.
➢ Tendon support bars and bar-chairs are placed at 1m interval and secured with binding wire
to avoid movement during concreting.
➢ Duct joints are sealed with tape.
➢ Check visually on the ducts’ straightness and do necessary adjustment before concreting.
➢ Grout hoses must be protected from being embedded or removed during concreting.
➢ Any defect found in the bulb of strands such as breakage of ply should be replaced with new
bulb.
8.0 Stressing
Stressing shall not commence unless the main contractor has confirmed the concrete of the slab
/ beam has achieved the minimum cube strength at transfer.
Compressive Strength required for commencing stressing operation shall be 70% of the concrete
grade used or minimum of 25 N/mm2.
Preparation for stressing:

➢ Removal of the side formwork and anchorage blackouts (polyfoam).
➢ Main contractor / Client shall provide the working platform (Min 750mm wide from the face
perimeter beam) to commence the preparation & stressing operation.
Page 417 of 1358

➢ Placing wedge plates and wedges. This operation must be carried out after concreting so that
the anchorages are not fouled by grout.
➢ Ensure the protruding strands length is sufficient for stressing. Protruding length if strand
required for stressing shall be 350 – 400 mm.
➢ The theoretical elongation calculations must be approved by the consultant before stressing.
8.1 Stressing of Multiplane Tendons

➢ The multistrand jack shall be secured and hoisted to the anchorage’s level by chain blocks or
crane.
➢ All strands shall be inserted through the jack’s guide pipes.
➢ Connect jack to hydraulic pump.
➢ At the beginning of stressing the strands are locked in the jack pulling head.
➢ The pressure readings and the measured elongation are recorded in the stressing report.
➢ Stress initially to 10 Mpa to remove slack in the strands.
➢ Proceed stressing and record the strands’ elongation for every incremental of 10MPa
pressure.
➢ When the jack has reached the end of its stroke or the desired force has been obtained, the
pressure in the jack is released and the strands will lock uniformly by the wedges in the wedge
plate.
➢ The jack piston returns.
➢ Stressing is continued in as many stages as are necessary to obtain the required forces.
8.2 Stressing of Flat Tendons

➢ The jack shall be carried by hand to the stressing anchorage.
➢ Connect jack to hydraulic pump with hydraulic hoses.
➢ Strand shall be inserted to the jack.
➢ 25% of the stressing force shall be applied to the tendon to remove slack in the strands.
➢ Spray marks shall be made to the strands.
➢ Proceed with the stressing to the full force.
➢ Measure the distance of the spray mark to the wedge plate. This will reflect the strand’s
elongation from 25% to 100% force. (assume X mm )
➢ Add the wedge draw-in of 6mm to the X.
➢ Effective strand’s elongation from 25% to 100% stressing force, Y
Y = X + 6mm
➢ The total elongation (from 0% to 100% force) shall be calculated by extrapolation of the value
Y.
Total Strand’s Elongation = Y x 100

75
➢ Compare the full elongation (actual elongation) against the theoretical value.
De-Shuttering at pour strip area can be carried out after completion of concreting in that area and
after achievement of required compressive strength, as per the designer’s instruction.
Page 418 of 1358

9.0 Grouting
Grouting shall not commence unless the consultant has approved the stressing result.
Preparation for grouting

➢ Cut the protruding strands (stressing length) to a minimum of 10mm from the wedge plate.
➢ The anchorage blackouts shall be filled with the approved cementitious material.
➢ The grouting shall be continued after a minimum period of 24 hours of drying of the patch
up.
➢ Prior to grouting, the ducts shall be thoroughly cleaned by oil free compressed air.
Proposed grout mix

➢ Cement in standard 50kg package (Ordinary Portland cement)
➢ Water = 0.4 x 50kg = 20 kg
= 20 litres
➢ Admixture = 0.2% weight of cement (50 kg) = 100 ml
(Conplast P211M from Fosroc)
Mixing sequence = water – additive - cement
Min mixing time = 3-4 min
9.1 Tests for grouting

⚫ Viscosity
⚫ Compressive strength
9.2 Viscosity test

➢ A viscosity test will be executed by means of a flow cone.
➢ Flow time is measured with a stopwatch.
➢ It is the measurement of time that the grout takes to completely flow out of the cone.
➢ It is carried out after the 3-4 min minimum mixing time.
➢ The flow time should be between 10 to 25 seconds.
178 mm Ø
76
Filled mm
Level
191 mm
38mm
12.7 mm ø
Page 419 of 1358

9.3 Compressive strength test
➢ 6 test cubes of 100 x 100 x 100 mm shall be prepared per grouting session.
➢ After 24 hours, remove cubes from mould and store in the water storage tank.
➢ Compressive strength at 7 and 28 days for 3 cubes each shall be tested.
➢ According to specification, average compressive strength of 3 cubes shall be:
7 days : minimum of 17 N/mm2
28 days : minimum of 30 N/mm2
9.4 Grouting of tendon

➢ Mix the grout as per approved grout mix.
➢ Grout mix shall be prepared in a W/C ratio of 0.4 with workability additive of 0.2 % of
weight of cement.
➢ Inject grout from the tendon’s inlet hose.
➢ Lock the outlet hose when consistent grout flows out from it.
➢ When grout flows out at the intermediate vents, lock these vents in the direction of the
grout flow.
➢ Lock the outlet hose when the grout flows out has the same consistency as the grout
being pumped in.
➢ Continue pumping to build up pressure. Lock the inlet hose when a pressure of 3~5 bar
is achieved.
➢ Repeat the above steps to the next tendon.
➢ Electrically operated helical screw type Pump with water reservoir & mixing tank shall be
used for this grouting operation.
9.5 Precautions to be taken during grouting.
➢ Pressure should be duly controlled so as not to cause segregation of grout.

➢ Required pressure to be maintained shall be 3 – 5 bars.
➢ Excessive mixing (especially at high temperatures) can stiffen the grout already in the
mixing drum.
➢ In case of interruption (more than 45 minutes) the grout shall be flushed out of the
tendon using water and compressed.
Specifications For Post Tensioning System
1. General
The Post Tensioning bonded Flat slab system shall consist of High Tensile strands of 12.70 mm
(0.5“dia) /15.20 mm dia ( 0.6 “ dia) and contained in a flat slab GI duct of 80 mm x 20 mm .Each
strand in anchored by means of wedge and individually stressed by means of a mono strand Jack.
The prestressing force is transferred to the concrete by a flat anchorage. By use of flat duct, the
static depth of slab is more efficiently utilized compared to a round.
2. Prestressing systems
The pre-stressing system is incorporating strands with 12.70 mm dia strand /15.20 mm dia strand.
Page 420 of 1358

3. Materials
Strands 0.5” 0.6”

Nominal Area 98.7mm2 139mm2
Nominal weight 0.775 kg/m 1.101 kg/m
Tensile strength 1860 N/mm2 1860 N/mm2
Modulus of elasticity 195000 N/mm2 195000 N/mm2
Min breaking load of strand 184kN 260kN
Strand quality in accordance IS 14268 IS 14268

with
3.1 Ducts
The sheathing consists of corrugated spiral ducts made from galvanized steel strips of 0.3 mm
thick.
3.2 Anchorages
The type of anchorages commonly used is Flat Anchorage (FA), Multi plane Anchorages (MA), Bond
Head (Dead End) Anchorages. The purpose of the anchorages are when the strands are stressed,
the tendon force would be transferred to the concrete. Bursting reinforcement is provided behind
the anchorage to distribute the stressing force.
4. Design data for friction / elongation calculation
Friction of coefficient u : 0.2 } or as per the consultant’s recommendation

Wobble factor k : 0.0017/m } design parameters
Draw in of wedge : 6mm (approximately)
Stressing anchorage : Type FA, MA
Loss in jack : Varies from 0 to 2.0% for various type of jacks.
5. Handling and storage of materials
➢ The pre-stressing strands shall be free of grease and corrosion enhancing properties.
➢ No flame cutting of strands is allowed.
➢ Care should be taken during handling of construction work in order to avoid mechanical
damage to the strands.
➢ Strands should be raised above ground level to prevent ingress of soil.
Page 421 of 1358

➢ Suitable ropes or slings shall be used for loading and unloading in order to avoid mechanical
damage to the strand coil.
➢ The component must be handled and stored such that any contamination, mechanical
damage or corrosion can be avoided.
6. General Working Procedures

➢ Generally, the prestressing tendons are installed in accordance with the “Approved Drawings
issued for Construction”.
➢ Install bottom slab reinforcement when the slab formwork is ready.
➢ Provide sufficient cover to the bottom slab reinforcement in accordance with the shop
drawings.
➢ Install tendons after the completion of the bottom slab reinforcement.
➢ As for beam construction, install bottom / side reinforcement and links (without internal &
external capping links in the beam).
➢ Install top reinforcement and capping links of the beam.
7. Guidelines for Tendons Installation

⚫ Tendon alignment and height shall take precedent over reinforcement whenever there
is a clashing point.
⚫ All dimensions measured shall be based on the formwork level. Therefore, an accurate
formwork level is necessary.
⚫ The tolerances of formwork shall be 5mm or in accordance with the specifications.
⚫ The Multiplane Anchor is fixed to the end formwork by support bars to avoid any
displacement during concreting.
⚫ The Multiplane Anchor must be orientated perpendicularly to the cable axis and with the
grout connection at the top of the duct.
⚫ If the side formwork is to be erected early, the main contractor has to arrange for hole
protrusion to be made for each anchorage to accommodate protruding duct and
strands.
⚫ Tolerances for vertical tendon profiles are 10mm for all high and low points.
⚫ Tolerances for horizontal profiles are 150mm (to avoid small M&E openings or other
obstructions). Specialist designer shall be consulted for tolerances bigger than 150mm.
Page 422 of 1358

⚫ Handle ducts with care to avoid damage.
⚫ Support bars and bar-chairs are placed at intervals of each 1m (approx.) and secured
with binding wire to avoid any movement during concreting.
⚫ Duct joints are sealed with tape.
⚫ Care should be taken during concreting to avoid grout hoses from being embedded in
concrete or removed completely.
⚫ Avoid stepping on ducts placed.
⚫ Care should be taken to avoid damaging ducts with tie bars of the formwork.
8. Stressing
Stressing shall not commence unless the main contractor has confirmed that the concrete for the
pour to be stressed has achieved the minimum cube strength as required.
Preparation for stressing

⚫ Removal of formwork and polyfoam / plastic block out from the anchorage blackout.
⚫ Placing of wedge plate and wedges. It is important that this operation be carried out after
concrete so that the anchorage is not fouled by grout or dirt.
⚫ Ensure that the protruding strand length is sufficient for stressing.

8.1 For Multistrand Jacks (Multiplane Anchor)
⚫ At the beginning of stressing the strands are locked in the jack pulling head.
⚫ The pressure of the manometer and the measured elongation are recorded in the
stressing report.
⚫ When the jack has reached the end of its stroke or the desired force has been obtained,
the pressure in the jack is released and the strands become locked uniformly by the
wedges in the wedge plate.
⚫ The jack piston returns.
⚫ Stressing is continued in as many stages as are necessary to obtain the required force.
8.2 For Monostrand Jack (Flat Anchor)

⚫ Initial stressing of 25% of the total designed force can commence any time after the
concrete has minimum cube strength of 8N/mm2. The purpose of initial stressing is to
take the slack of the strands in the tendon.
⚫ A spray mark is made on the strands.
Page 423 of 1358

⚫ Proceed with the full 100% stressing of the total designed force after the concrete has
attained its minimum strength as per the specifications.
⚫ Measure the difference in length from the spray mark to the wedge plate. This will reflect
the elongation per strand from 25% to 100%. (Assume this to be X mm in length.)
⚫ Add the wedge draw in which is approximately 6mm to the elongation.
⚫ By extrapolation the full measurement can be calculated and compared against

theoretical elongation.
Therefore, the full elongation for one-end stressing will be
= (X + 6mm) x 100
------- % = = (X + 6mm) x 1.3333
75
Similarly for tendons with two ends stressing, the tendons may be stressed from one end followed
by another. Sum of elongations from both ends is then compared with total theoretical extension.
Assuming the far end elongation is Y. The total elongation will be:
{(X + 6mm) + (Y + 6mm)} x 100 %
75
⚫ After approval by consultants / main contractor the protruding strands are to be cut off
to a minimum of 10mm from the wedge plate.
⚫ All stressing results shall be tabulated on a stressing record and submitted for approval
by the engineer. The pressure gauge and jack nos shall also be indicated.
⚫ If the average stressing result of the whole pour is within 8% it shall be deemed as
satisfactory.
⚫ In accordance with the Federation Institute of Prestressing (FIP) code, the average shall
be within 8%.If any individual tendon of a pour falls outside this, then the average
extension over the whole respective pour should be checked and this falls within the
tolerance of 8%, then the stressing operation is considered satisfactory.
⚫ Stripping of formwork can be carried out after full stressing of beam / slab is completed.
⚫ However, the Resident Engineer on-site shall be consulted by the main contractor before
any stripping of formwork can commence.
9. Grouting
Proposed grout mix
⚫ Cement in standard 50kg package (Ordinary Portland cement)
⚫ Water = 0.45 x 50kg = 22.5 kg
= 22.5 liters
⚫ Admixture = 0.4% weight of cement (50 kg) = 200gm
⚫ Conplast Fosrac or Cebex 100 fosrac
Page 424 of 1358

Mixing sequence = water – cement - additive

Min mixing time = 3-4 min
Terms & Conditions:
A) Scope of the work:
The scope of your work under this Tender shall include:
I. Detail design and Engineering of the Flat Slabs /Beam slab by post tensioning system
in accordance with the design parameters specified by the Consultants, the codal
requirements of ISI (Indian Standard Institute) latest versions , National Building Code
and the relevant B.S. Standards.
II. To prepare detail shop drawings for the post tensioning work to be carried out by
showing clearly all the dimensions, spacing and other constructions details and obtaining
approvals of same from RCC Consultants well in advance to have sufficient time for
procurement and delivery of material and equipment is afforded to your construction
team to carry out the work in accordance with the requirement of our overall
construction schedule.
III. To assist and guide the civil contractor for any work directly or indirectly related to or
consequential to the post tensioning of the flat slabs.
IV. Prepare and submit three sets of As Built drawings for each post tensioned slab showing
clearly the profile and location of each tendon.
Eligibility criteria for PT Team

1. The PT Team should have a minimum of 10 (Ten) years experience in post – tensioning
works.
2. The PT Team may be either a registered partnership firm or a company limited by shares
having experience in similar construction and the design Engineer should have a
minimum of 10 years of design experience.
3. The PT Team Should Posses Design Experience & Execution Experience More than 10
Years in India.
4. The PT Systems (Anchorages) should be in use for more than 10 years and it should be
validated by a systems performance test conducted in a registered laboratory (IIT).
A) Anchorage efficiency
B) Load transfer test
5. PT Team should have the Proprietorship of their systems and their assembly.
6. Similar kinds of PT Projects Completed in the last 3 years shall form part of the
qualification.
Page 425 of 1358

ELECTRICAL DBR
Page 426 of 1358

ELECTRICAL DBR
FOR
ACADEMIC BUILDING INCLUDING FACULTY & STAFF/ ACADEMIC ASSOCIATES OFFICE
1. Nature Of Building - Academic Facility.

2. Area of Building – Approx.150518 Sq Feet
3. Nature Of Load –Critical
4. Total Connected Load in KW – 1821 KW
5. Light and Power Load – 602 KW
6. HVAC and Ventilation Load- 819 KW
7. UPS, Computer & LIFT Load – 360 KW
8. Max Operating Load – 1275 Kw
A) Main Panel 1No.

Main panel is provided with Lighting section 800A 4 pole ACB - 2Nos. (working and Stand BY) for
Lighting, Lift Load, UPS , Computers Load and Power section with 1000A 4 Pole ACB-2NOS.
(working and Stand BY) for power load of AC, Ventilation , AHU Power Load in LT Electrical Room
Ground Floor .
Necessary Power arrangements are made according to Utility.
B) Wiring Installation
The complete wiring installation concealed / exposed will be installed in heavy gauge rigid steel
conduit (black steel) and wiring installation will confirm to IS standard (IS:732-1989). The wiring for
light and small convenience power outlets shall be with PVC insulated FRLSH copper conductor
wires conforming to IS:694. The point wiring shall be done with 1.5 sq mm copper conductor while
lighting circuit wiring shall be carried out with 2.5 Sq mm copper conductor while power wiring
shall be carried out with 4 Sq.mm. copper conductor wires. Colour code shall be maintained for
the entire wiring installation i.e., Red, Yellow and Blue for the phases and black for the neutral and
green for earthing. Inverter wiring is planned.
Sufficient amount of general power outlets & specialized power outlets for ELV services & UPS
services shall be given in all areas to meet the power requirement of that particular area. Optimum
no. of power sockets shall be provided in lecture hall / faculty office / hostel / residential areas.
HMS class PVC conduits shall be considered for concealed and steel conduit shall be considered
for exposed area conduiting.
100% light fixture consider on Emergency for Classrooms.
Universal sockets with USB charging points are mandatory to provide at all Classrooms desk for
each student.
C) Earthing
Safety in using electrical energy is of paramount importance considering its dangers. The earthing
system will be in conformity with IS: 3043.
1. Two Nos. (02) GI Earthing is to be provided for LT Panel and Distribution Board Body Earthing.
2. Four Nos. (04) CU Earthing is to be provided for LIFTS.
Page 427 of 1358

3. Two No. (02) CU Earthing is to be provided for Server / LV Equipment.

All earth pits are maintenance free chemical type.
D) Lighting and Electrical fixture

LED Tubes, Surface/ Recess Type LED Down Lighters, Ceiling Fans and are provided within room,
Common area to suits plans.
All area light Fixture shall be provided as per final layout & ensure that required lux level which is
specified.
Occupancy sensors should be considered for Passage area on normal lighting & Toilet area
consider the way such as light will not switch OFF in case of some sit inside WC.
All sensors should be considered as per latest, updated models with override provision.
E) Inverter
4no. of 20 KVA Pure Sine wave Inverter with 30 Minutes Back Up Time is provided for all Classroom,
common area , Staircase , lobby , Office , Syndicate, entrance, utility area.
F) UPS
2no. of 5 KVA Online UPS with 30 Minutes Back Up Time is provided for CCTV and Security System.
G) UPS
80KVA x 4 Nos. (3 working +1 Stand BY in sync mode) Online UPS with 30 Minutes Back Up Time
is to be provided. 20KVAx4 Nos. (3 working +1 Stand BY in sync mode) 2 sets of Online UPS with
02 Hours (120 Minutes) Back Up Time is provided for DATA and IT Server Load. UPS system should
be provided for classroom with the consideration of all classrooms light fixtures operating on UPS.
LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS
1. Fire Detection And Alarm System & Public Address System

Fire detection intelligent addressable fire detection system with distributed voice evacuation
system will be planned for Block. Advance protection system should be considered for server room
against fire, water and rodent like as GSS, RRS, WLD and VESDA systems.
2. IP Based Closed Circuit TV System (CCTV)

IP CCTV has been proposed for monitoring adequate security to Building in Classroom Lobby,
Entrance, Passage, Terrace and Lifts, common area, Office Stairs, utility.
3. Data System, LAN & Wi-Fi System:

Computer Data Points with Cat 6A Cabling and modular switches is provided in Each Classroom,
Office, syndicate, Faculty Office area. WI/ FI system is proposed in corridors, Common area, Lobby,
Control Room, Data / Server Room, Terrace, Cafe, utility areas of Building.
4. Dish Antenna TV System

TV points (Dining area) is to be provided with RG Coaxial cables and Modular Socket and with Cat
6 Data cable for IPTV in Café / Common Room. The system shall consist of dish antenna, amplifier,
Splitter, Set-top box, cabling and the modular outlet points inside the buildings. Provision of both
MATV and IP TV system needs to be incorporated along with the Display.
Page 428 of 1358

5. Telephone System
IP Digital Telephone points in each Classroom, Office, Data / Server area, Faculty Office, Syndicate
room etc is provided with RJ-45 sockets and Cat 6 Data Cables.
6. Lifts -
5 nos. Machine room less Passenger / Bed Lifts to be provided for Academic Block. The installation
is carried out as per rules & regulation of local bodies NBC and IS Codes that govern the
requirement of installation of the lift.
7. Lighting Automation
Lighting Automation is provided for each classroom, Common area to provide ease of switching.
Keypad is provided at all entries of classroom and with necessary Power and communication
wiring up to Distribution Board.
8. Access Control
Access Controls is provided to achieve authorized entries of Students / staff. Biometric, Card
reader type system is provided which will be helpful to maintain attendance of Student and Staff.
9. Solar panels (200KWx1Nos.) is provided on Terrace top of Building.
Load Sheet - Academic Block: -
Total
Area Equipment Max.
Sr Light Power AC Load Diversity
Particulars (Sq. Load Demand
Nos. Load Load Load (In Factor
Ft.) (In Kw.) (In Kw.)
Kw.)
1 Academic Block 150518
2 G Floor 75 226 301 0.7 210.73
3 F Floor 75 226 301 0.7 210.73
4 HVAC Load 819.1 819 0.7 573.37
5 Lift Load 40 40 0.7 28.00
UPS and Computer
6 Load (20KVA* 6 Nos. 360 360 0.7 252.00
+ 80 KVA * 3 Nos.)
7 SUB TOTAL 150518 151 452 819 400 1821 1275
Add Future Load for 2 Floors 151 452 819 400 1821 0.7 1274.82
Total Load 3642 2550
Summary of Solar (On Grid)

Proposed Capacity of Solar Power in Kw 1800
Units Generated per Kw per day by Solar System 4.2
Total Units Generated in a day 7560.0
Page 429 of 1358

Total Units Generated in a Month (25 days considered per

189000.0
Month)
Equivalent to power consumption of new premises hence

Net Zero energy feature will be achieved.
Page 430 of 1358

ELECTRICAL DBR
FOR
MDC ACADEMIC & INCUBATION
1. Nature Of Building - Educational Building.

2. Area of Building – Approx. 40522 Sq Feet
5. Light Load – 41 KW
6. Power Load, IT, Computer, Equipment & LIFT Load – 140 KW
7. HVAC Load – 212 Kw
A) Main Panel 1No.

Main panel is provided with Lighting section 400A 4 pole MCCB - 2Nos. (working and Stand BY) for
Lighting, Lift Load and Power section with 800A 4 Pole ACB-2NOS. (working and Stand BY) for
power load of AC, Computers, IT Loads, Ventilation Load in LT Electrical Room Ground Floor.
Necessary Power arrangements are made according to Utility.
services shall be given in all areas to meet power requirement of that particular area. Optimum
100% light fixture consider on Emergency for Classrooms.
Universal socket with USB charging point mandatory to be provided at all Classrooms workstations.
C) Earthing
3. Two Nos. (02) CU Earthing is to be provided for Server / LV Equipment.
Page 431 of 1358

All earthing should be maintenance free chemical type.

LED Tubes, Surface/ Recess Type LED Down Lighters, Ceiling Fans and are provided within area,
specified.
Occupancy sensors should be considered for Passage area on normal lighting & Toilet area
consider the way such as light will not switch OFF in case of some sit inside WC.
All sensors should be considered latest updated model with override provision.
E) Inverter
3no. of 15 KVA Pure Sine wave Inverter with 30 Minutes Back Up Time is provided for emergency
Lighting for Classrooms, common area, Staircase, lobby, entrance, office, utility area.
F) UPS
UPS system should be provided for classroom with the consideration of all classrooms light
fixtures operating on UPS.
G) 4 no. of 40 KVA Online UPS (with 3+1 synchronization) with 30 Minutes Back Up Time is provided
for All Academic, Classroom, Studio activities.
LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS

system will be planned for Incubation Block.

IP CCTV has been proposed for monitoring adequate security to Building in Lobby, Entrance,
Passage, Terrace and Lifts, common area, Stairs, utility.
3. Data System, LAN & Wi-Fi System

Computer Data Points with Cat 6A Cabling and modular switches is provided in Each Classroom,
common Room, VLPE, FPM Class, Work Office, cabins as required. WI/ FI system is proposed in
corridors, Common area, Lobby, all Classrooms, Control Room, VLPE Studio, utility areas Block.
4. Telephone System
1 no. IP Digital Telephone points at each Classroom, work station, VLPE, FPM Classroom, Office,
Cabin, Pantry is provided with RJ-45 sockets and Cat 6 Data Cables.
5. Lifts
2 nos. Machine room less Passenger / Bed Lifts to be provided for MDC Academic + Incubation
Block. The installation is carried out as per rules & regulation of local bodies NBC and IS Codes
that govern the requirement of installation of the lift.
Page 432 of 1358

6. Audio and Video facility with projectors and all necessary Data, HDMI, Sound cabling is provided
in all Classrooms, VLPE, FPM Classrooms.
Load Sheet - MDC Incubation
Max.
Ligh Total
Sr Powe Equipme Diversi Deman
Area t AC Load Remar
No Particulars r nt Load ty d
(Sq. Ft.) Loa Load (In ks
s. Load (In Kw.) Factor (In
d Kw.)
Kw.)
MDC
1 Academic 41 20.26 212.4 120 393 0.7 275.23
& Incubation
2 Lift - 2Nos. 20 0.7 14.00
40.5
SUB TOTAL 40522 20.26 212.4 120 413 289.22
2
Add Future Load 27014.6 27.0 141.6

13.51 80.00 262 0.7 183.49
for 2 Floors 7 1 0
67.5 354.0 675.3

Total Load 33.77 200.00 472.71
4 0 1
Page 433 of 1358

ELECTRICAL DBR
FOR
BOY’S HOSTEL
1. Nature Of Building - Hostel Room Facility (289 Rooms)

5. Light Load – 79.19 KW
6. Power Load, AC, Equipment & LIFT Load – 1303.37 KW
A) Main Panel 1No.

power load of AC / Geyser, Ventilation Load in LT Electrical Room Ground Floor. Necessary Power
arrangements are made according to Utility. Fire Emergency Feeder Provided for Pressurization
and Lift Load.
shall be carried out with 4 Sq.mm. copper conductor wires. Color code shall be maintained for the
entire wiring installation i.e., Red, Yellow and Blue for the phases and black for the neutral and
Reading Light to be considered on Each room. HMS class PVC conduits shall be considered for
concealed and steel conduit shall be considered for exposed area conduiting.
Washing & dryer power point mandatory to be provided in all Floor of Hostel’s Block.
C) Earthing
3. One No. (01) CU Earthing is to be provided for Server / LV Equipment.
4. Twelve Nos. (12) CU Earthing is l provide for Building Lightening Arrester.
Page 434 of 1358

D) Lighting and Electrical fixture –

LED Tubes, Surface/ Recess Type LED Down Lighters, Ceiling Fans and are provided within room ,
specified.
Occupancy sensor should be considered for Passage area on normal lighting & Toilet area consider
the way such as light will not switch OFF in case of someone sit inside WC.
All sensors should be considered latest updated model with override provision.
E) Inverter
2no. of 5 KVA Pure Sine Wave Inverter with 30 Minutes Back Up Time is provided for common area,
Staircase, lobby, entrance, utility area.
F) UPS
LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS

system will be planned for Hostel Block.

IP CCTV has been proposed for monitoring adequate security to Building in Lobby, Entrance,
Passage ,Terrace and Lifts, common area , Stairs ,utility .

Computer Data Points with Cat 6A Cabling and modular switches is provided in Each room,
common Room, Warden Room. WI/ FI system is proposed in corridors, Common area, Lobby,
Control Room, utility areas of Hostel Block.

TV points (Dining area) is provided with RG Coaxial cables and Modular Socket and with Cat 6 Data
cable for IPTV in Multipurpose and Common Room. The system shall consist of dish antenna,
amplifier, Splitter, Set-top box, cabling and the modular outlet points inside the buildings.
Provision of both MATV and IP TV system needs to be incorporated along with the Display.
5. Telephone System
2 nos. IP Digital Telephone points at each Floor Level and Multipurpose and Common Room,
Warden Room is provided with RJ-45 sockets and Cat 6 Data Cables.
6. Lifts
2 nos. Machine room less Passenger / Bed Lifts to be provided for Hostel Block. The installation is
carried out as per rules & regulation of local bodies NBC and IS Codes that governs the
Page 435 of 1358


Load Sheet Hostel
S. Nos. Description Load in KW
1A Light Load
i Ceiling fan energy saver - 1 Nos 0.06
ii Exhaust Fan Fresh Air -1no. 0.08
iii 28 W LED Tube - 01 Nos. 0.028
iv Wall bracket 14 W LED - 02 Nos. 0.028
v LED Leaner Light 14 W per mtr.- 3 Mtr 0.042
vi Ceiling downlight 18 W LED - 02 Nos. 0.036
1 Typical Room load 0.274
2A Geyser load 2.00

2B AC Load 1.75
2C General Power load (Laptop charger etc.) 0.25
2 Total Power load for 1 Room 4
As per DBR - Load Sheet - Boy’s Hostel

Qty in
S. Nos. Description Load in KW Total Load
Nos.
1 Room Light Load 0.27 289 79.19
2 Room Power Load 4 289 1156.00
3 Floor power Load 4.7 15 70.50
4 Lift well Light 1 1 1.00
5 Heat Pump 1
6 Solar Geyser 2 4 8.00
7 Common Light Load 0.96 15 14.47
8 Sub Total 1329.15
9 Future Load
10 Room Light Load 0.274 40 10.96
11 Room Power Load 4.00 40 160.00
12 Common area Light & Power load 5.66 2 11.33
Page 436 of 1358

ELECTRICAL DBR
FOR
GIRL’S HOSTEL
1. Nature Of Building - Hostel Room Facility (289 Rooms).

6. Power Load, AC, Equipment & LIFT Load – 1303.37 KW
A) Main Panel 1No.

power load of AC / Geyser, Ventilation Load in LT Electrical Room Ground Floor. Necessary Power
arrangements are made according to Utility. Fire Emergency Feeder Provided for Pressurization
and Lift Load.
green for earthing. Inverter wiring is planned. HMS class PVC conduits shall be considered for
Reading Light to be considered on Each room.
Washing & dryer power point mandatory to provide in all Floor of Hostel’s Block.
C) Earthing
Page 437 of 1358


LED Tubes, Surface/ Recess Type LED Down Lighters, Ceiling Fans and are provided within room,
specified.
the way such as light will not switch OFF in case of some sit inside WC. All sensors should be
considered latest updated model with override provision.
E) Inverter
2no. of 5 KVA Pure Sine Wave Inverter with 30 Minutes Back Up Time is provided for common area,
Staircase , lobby , entrance ,utility area.
F) UPS
LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS

system will be planned for Hostel Block.

IP CCTV has been proposed for monitoring adequate security to Building in Lobby, Entrance ,
Passage ,Terrace and Lifts, common area , Stairs ,utility .

common Room, Warden Room. WI/ FI system is proposed in corridors, Common area, Lobby ,
Control Room, utility areas of Hostel Block .

TV points (Dining area ) is provided with RG Coaxial cables and Modular Socket and with Cat 6 Data
cable for IPTV in Multipurpose and Common Room.
The system shall consist of dish antenna, amplifier, Splitter, Set-top box, cabling and the modular
outlet points inside the buildings. Provision of both MATV and IP TV system needs to be
incorporated along with the Display.
5. Telephone System
2 nos. IP Digital Telephone points at each Floor Level and Multipurpose and Common Room,
Warden Room is provided with RJ-45 sockets and Cat 6 Data Cables.
6. Lifts
2 nos. Machine room less Passenger/ Bed Lifts will provided for Hostel. The installation is carried
out as per rules & regulation of local bodies NBC and IS Codes that governs the requirement of
installation of the lift.
Page 438 of 1358


Load Sheet for Hostel

1A Light Load
i Ceiling fan energy saver - 1 Nos 0.06
ii Exhaust Fan Fresh Air -1no. 0.08
iii 28 W LED Tube - 01 Nos. 0.028
iv Wall bracket 14 W LED - 02 Nos. 0.028
v LED Leaner Light 14 W per mtr.- 3 Mtr 0.042
vi Ceiling downlight 18 W LED - 02 Nos. 0.036
1 Typical Room load 0.274
2A Geyser load 2.00
2B AC Load 1.75
2C General Power load (Laptop charger etc.) 0.25
2 Total Power load for 1 Room 4
As per DBR - Load Sheet - GIRLS Hostel

Qty in
S. Nos. Description Load in KW Total Load
Nos.
1 Room Light Load 0.27 289 79.19
2 Room Power Load 4 289 1156.00
3 Floor power Load 4.7 15 70.50
4 Lift well Light 1 1 1.00
5 Heat Pump 1
6 Solar Geyser 2 4 8.00
7 Common Light Load 0.96 15 14.47
8 Sub Total 1329.15
9 Future Load
10 Room Light Load 0.274 40 10.96
11 Room Power Load 4.00 40 160.00
12 Common area Light & Power load 5.66 2 11.33
Page 439 of 1358

ELECTRICAL DBR
FOR
MDC ACCOMMODATION
1. Nature Of Building - Hostel Room Facility (100 Rooms)

4. Total Connected Load in KW – 784KW
5. Rooms Light & Power Load – 350.4 KW
6. Common Light, Emergency & LIFT Load-140 KW
7. Power Load, AC , Equipment – 240.9 KW
A) Main Panel 1No.

Main panel is provided with Lighting section 1000A 4 pole ACB - 2Nos. (working and Stand BY) for
Lighting, Lift Load, Emergency Load and Power section with 630A 4 Pole ACB-2NOS. (working and
Stand BY) for power load of AC / Geyser , Ventilation Load in LT Electrical Room Ground Floor.
Necessary Power arrangements are made according to Utility. Fire Emergency Feeder Provided for
Pressurization and Lift Load.
green for earthing. Inverter wiring is planned. HMS class PVC conduits shall be considered for
100% light fixture consider on Emergency for all rooms.
Reading & Foot lamp Light to be considered in Each room.
C) Earthing
4. Twelve Nos. (12) CU Earthing is to be provided for Building Lightening Arrester.
Page 440 of 1358


LED Tubes, Surface/ Recess Type LED Down Lighters, Ceiling Fans and are provided within room ,
specified.
the way such as light will not switch OFF in case of some sit inside WC.
All sensors should be considered the latest updated model with override provision.
E) Inverter
2no. of 5 KVA Inverter with 30 Minutes Back Up Time is provided for common area, Staircase,
lobby, entrance, utility area.
F) UPS
LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS

system will be planned for MDC Accommodation Block.

IP CCTV has been proposed for monitoring adequate security to Building in Dining Lobby,
Entrance, Passage, Terrace and Lifts, common area, Stairs, utility.

common Room. WI/ FI system is proposed in corridors, Common area, Lobby, Dining, Control
Room, utility areas of MDC Accommodation.

TV points (Dining area) is provided with RG Coaxial cables and Modular Socket and with Cat 6 Data
cable for IPTV in Rooms, Dining Area. The system shall consist of dish antenna, amplifier, Splitter,
Set-top box, cabling and the modular outlet points inside the buildings. Provision of both MATV
and IP TV system needs to be incorporated along with the Display.
5. Telephone System
1 no. IP Digital Telephone points in each Room, Dining area, Service Room is provided with RJ-45
sockets and Cat 6 Data Cables.
6. Lifts
2 nos. Machine room less Passenger / Bed Lifts will provide for Accommodation Block. The
installation is carried out as per rules & regulation of local bodies NBC and IS Codes that govern
the requirement of installation of the lift.
Page 441 of 1358


8. Kitchen equipment shall be designed for catering all MDC Accommodation block including cold
room, gas bank, etc.
Load Sheet for MDC Accommodation

1 Light Load 0.06
2 Ceiling Fan Energy saver -1 no. 0.08
3 28-watt LED Tube -1no. 0.028
4 wall Bracket 14-watt LED - 2no. 0.028
5 LED Linear Light 14 watt/ meter - 3 meter 0.042
6 Ceiling Down Lighter 18-watt LED - 2Nos. 0.036
7 General Power Load 0.530
8 Geyser Load 2
9 AC Load 0.4
10 General Power Load ( Laptop, charger etc.) 0.3
Sub Total 3.504
Page 442 of 1358

ELECTRICAL DBR
FOR
MESS
1. Nature Of Building - Dining with Kitchen.

2. Area of Building – approx. 14122 Sq Feet
4. Total Connected Load in KW – 206.49 KW
6. Power Load, AC , Equipment & LIFT Load – 192.37 KW
7. Max Operating Load – 144.54 Kw
A) Main Panel 1No.

Main panel is provided with Emergency section 100A 4 pole MCCB -2Nos. (working and Stand BY)
for Lighting, Lift Load and Power section with 315A 4 Pole MCCB-2NOS. (working and Stand BY) for
power load of AC/AHU, Kitchen Power and Ventilation Load in Electrical Room Ground Floor.
Necessary Power arrangements are made according to kitchen Utility.
green for earthing. Complete inverter wiring is planned. HMS class PVC conduits shall be
considered for concealed and steel conduit shall be considered for exposed area conduiting.
no. of power sockets shall be provided in all areas.
C) Earthing

LED Tubes, Surface/ Recess Type LED Down Lighters, Ceiling Fans and are provided within block
to suits Interior plans.
the way such as light will not switch OFF in case of some sit inside WC.
Page 443 of 1358

E) Inverter
3.7 KVA Pure Sine wave Inverter with 30 Minutes Back Up Time is provided for Dining, Kitchen ,
preparation , lobby , entrance ,utility area.
F) UPS
5 KVA Online UPS with 30 Minutes Back Up Time is provided for CCTV and Security System.
LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS

system will be planned for Mess Block.

IP CCTV has been proposed for monitoring adequate security to Building in Lobby, Entrance ,
Passage ,Terrace and Lifts, dining , Kitchen ,preparation , store ,utility .

Computer Data Points with Cat 6 Cabling and modular switches is provided for Chef, Store for
Receiving, Counter desk ,Billing counter . WI/ FI system is proposed for dining area, corridors,
Common area, Lobby , Control Room, utility areas of premises .

TV points (Dining area ) is provided with RG Coaxial cables and Modular Socket and with Cat 6 Data
cable for IPTV. The system shall consist of dish antenna, amplifier, Splitter, Set-top box, cabling
and the modular outlet points inside the buildings. Provision of both MATV and IP TV system needs
to be incorporated along with the Display.
5. Telephone System
8 nos. IP Digital Telephone points (Chef, preparation area,) is provided with RJ-11 sockets and Cat
6 Data Cables.
6. Lifts
2 nos. Machine room less Passenger Lifts to be provisioned for Mess Block. The installation is
carried out as per rules & regulation of local bodies NBC and IS Codes that govern the requirement
of installation of the lift.
7. LED Token Display system is provided for Order Display and confirmation.
8. Kitchen equipment shall be designed for catering 300 students including Cold rooms, gas bank,
etc.
Page 444 of 1358

ELECTRICAL DBR
FOR
TYPE V RESIDENCES
1. Nature Of Building Residential building with 3-bedroom and 1-studyroom in flats.

3. Nature Of Load – Residential (Non-Critical)
4. Total Connected Load in KW – 750.97 KW
5. No. Of Flats – 32
6. Load of Typical One Flat – 20.75KW
7. Common Area Light Load – 17.89 KW
8. Common Area Power Load & LIFT Load – 68.94 KW
9. Max Operating Load – 379 KW
A) Main Panel 1No.

Main panel is provided with 630A 4 pole ACB -2Nos. (One Working + One Stand BY Breaker)
provided with bus coupler and interlocking arrangement in Electrical Room Ground Floor . Floor
Meter Panels is provided To measure Power to each flat. 1 no. common meters is provided to
measure common area Power. 100% DG power back up is planned (to be decided by Management)
. Common area panel is planned with timers for Lighting.
The complete wiring installation concealed/ exposed will be installed concealed. Gauge rigid steel
shall be carried out with 4 Sq.mm. copper conductor wires. For Air Conditioning Unit of 2KW power
wiring shall be carried out with 6 Sq.mm. copper conductor wires. Colour code shall be maintained
for the entire wiring installation i.e., Red, Yellow and Blue for the phases and black for the neutral
and green for earthing. Complete inverter wiring is planned for in Residence and occupants may
install their inverters.
C) Earthing
1. Two Nos. (02) GI Earthing is to be provided for LT Panel / Meter panel Body Earthing.
2. Two Nos. (02) Earthing is to be provided for Electrical Shaft and Residential Consumers.
Page 445 of 1358


LED Tubes, Surface/ Recess Type LED Down Lighters, Ceiling Fans and Geysers is provided within
each residence and LED Tubes, Surface/ Recess Type LED Down Lighters, Ceiling Fans in Common
Area.
specified. Occupancy sensor should be considered for Passage area on normal lighting & Toilet
area consider the way such as light will not switch OFF in case of some sit inside WC.
E) UPS
5 KVA Online UPS with 30 Minutes Back Up Time is provided for CCTV and Security System.
F) Inverter
3.7 KVA Pure sine wave Inverter with 30 Minutes Back Up Time is provided for Emergency lighting
in Parking, passage, corridors & each flat one light point in living area.
LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS

system will be planned for each Residence, Stilt Floor and Common area (Passage/Lobby/
Entrance).

IP CCTV has been proposed for monitoring adequate security to Building in parking, Lobby,
Entrance, Passage, Staircase, Terrace and Lifts.

Wi-Fi system is proposed for each Residence Flats 02Nos. Routers, corridors, Common area, Lobby,
Control Room, utility areas of premises. 5nos. Data point with Cat6 Data Cable is provided with RJ-
45 sockets in each residence.

TV points (Living Room, Master B Room, Bedrooms-2nos.) is provided with RG Coaxial cables and
Modular Socket and with Cat 6 Data cable for IPTV. 2Nos. Points is provided in Front and Back
Lobby at Ground Level. The system shall consist of dish antenna, amplifier, Splitter, Set-top box,
cabling and the modular outlet points inside the buildings. Provision of both MATV and IP TV
system needs to be incorporated.
5. Telephone System:
IP Digital Telephone points (Living Room, Master B Room , Bedrooms -2 nos. Study Room-1Nos.)
is provided with RJ-11 sockets and Cat 6 Data Cables in each residence . One No. Basic model of IP
Telephone Instrument provided in each flat. One No. each point is provided in front and Back
Lobby, Main panel room, Terrace and each lift.
IP Telephone point & Analog Telephone point with instrument to be provided for Each flat.
Page 446 of 1358

6. Lifts
2 Nos. Machine room less Passenger / Bed Lifts to be provided for Residential area. The installation
is carried out as per rules & regulation of local bodies NBC and IS Codes that governs the
7. Video Door Phone

Video Door Phone for security reason, each flat provided by standalone 1no. Video Door Phone
& Video Door Camera, Video Door camera to be installed at Main Entry of Flat and Monitor to be
installed in Dining/ Living room near Kitchen with necessary Cabling work.
8. Solar panels (15 KW x 02Nos.) is provided on Terrace top of Building.
Load Summary for Type V Residences
S. Nos.. Description Load in KW Remarks
Typical Flat Load

Light Load @ 0.7 watt / Sq feet for
1 1.00
1425 sq feet area
Freeze 0.6 Kw, TV-0.3 K, RO-
0.1KW, Washing machine -
2 Power Load 4.25
1.0 ,Mixer-1.0 KW, Iron- 0.75KW,
Grinder - 0.5KW)
Geyser(4.5kW), Micro Oven-
3 Appliances Load 7.5
2Kw, Kettle- 1.0KW
Considering 4Ac / Flat 1.5KW
4 AC Load 8
each,1 AC -2.0KW
Total Load for Typical Flat 20.75
Tot
Max.
Ligh al
Sr Area Pow AC Equipme Diversi Deman
Particular t Loa Remar
No (Sq. er Loa nt Load ty d
s Loa d k
s. Ft.) Load d (In Kw.) Factor (In
d (In
Kw.)
Kw.)
Type V
Residence
1 (32Flats) - 8156
1 664 0.5 331.96
One Flat 5
Load20.75
KW
2 Lift - 2Nos. 20 0.7 14.00
Light Load
Parking @
0.7watt /
3 9250 6.48 6.48 0.5 3.24
Sq feet for
9250 sq
feet area
Page 447 of 1358

Light Load
Common
@ 0.7 watt
1631 11.4
4 / Sq feet 11 0.5 5.71
3 2
for (15369
sq
feet area)
Power
Load
Common
@3
5 48.94 49 0.5 24.47
watt / Sq
feet for
(15369 sq
feet area)
9081
SUB TOTAL 18 49 751 379
5
Page 448 of 1358

ELECTRICAL DBR
FOR
BUILDING SERVICES
General:
The scope of this proposal is the new buildings proposed for ‘Group VIII Architectural design at IIM
Indore’ site and associated enabling and infrastructure and landscape ground works within the
footprint of the building. The proposed buildings are as follows:
1. Academic Block
2. MDC Academic + Incubation
3. MDC Housing
4. Type V housing
5. Boys & Girls Hostel
6. Mess
The Building utilities have been planned in accordance with International practice followed in such
types of Building as per standard codes of practice.
In order to optimize the cost of services, the receiving 33/11 KV Sub Station near Utility - 1 area &
the location of HT Substation & DG set are placed in 2 locations namely New Utility 3 and 4 block.
This will reduce cost of LT cabling. Although, the overall complex will be integrated with respect to
power supply network at HT side and additional HT Cable Laid between New Utility 3 and 4 to
create ring main system.
Following report spell out the brief design concepts to be adopted in this project for various
services relating to Electrical, Firefighting, Plumbing and HVAC System.
ELECTRICAL
DESIGN BASIS REPORT (ELECTRICAL)
ELECTRICAL SERVICES
1. Reference Standards
The following standards and codes shall be followed during detailed design of the services:
⚫ National building code of India – 2016
⚫ Energy conservation building codes amended as on date.
⚫ GRIHA manuals
⚫ Relevant codes of national fire codes 2008 amended up to date.
⚫ Relevant codes of bureau of Indian standards
⚫ IS: 1180 / IS 11171(part III): transformers.
⚫ IEC 60831/ IS 13340 & IS 13341: capacitors.
⚫ IEC 60947 / IS 13947: specification for low voltage switch gear & control gear.
Page 449 of 1358

⚫ BS / IS / IEC 62305: lightning protection system.

⚫ BS 7430, IS 3043: Earthing & bonding.
⚫ BS 7671 requirements for electrical installation
⚫ NFPA 70
⚫ NFPA101, life safety code
⚫ NEC, national electric code of India
2. Summary of electrical Load: Summary for Transformer & DG Set
SUMMARY OF ELECTRICAL LOAD FOR IIM INDORE GROUP 8

PROJECT
33/ 11 KV Transformer capacity
Utility - 3 1801.22
Utility - 4 3097.23
Total 4898.45
Diversity @70% 3428.91
Loading @95% 3609.38

Say 3500 KVA
Require 02 Nos. 3500 KVA
This substation will be located near Utility -1 area.
Load Detail at New Utility-3

Max.
Sr Total Load Diversity
Particulars Demand Remarks
Nos. (In Kw.) Factor
(In Kw.)
1 MDC Academic & Incubation 675.31 472.71
2 MDC Accommodation 897.11 627.98
3 Type V Residence 1 931.82 469.91
4 Type V Residence 2 931.82 469.91 Future Provision
5 Girl's Hostel 1584.84 796.42
SERVICES
6 Water & Plumbing Load 20 0.5 10
7 External Light Load 10 0.5 5
TOTAL 5050.90 2851.93
Page 450 of 1358

Transformer Rating
Total Load In KW 5050.90
Total Load In KW with
2851.93
Diversity
Total Load In KVA at 0.95
3002.04
PF
Total Load In KVA with
1801.22
Overall Diversity 60%
Considering
TRANSFORMER For 95% Loading Of 2 Nos.x
1896.02 Transformer
CAPACITY Transformer 2000KVA
Redundancy N+1
DG Rating

2851.93
Diversity
Total Load In KVA at 0.8
3564.92
PF
2138.95
For 100% Loading of 415 Volts

DG CAPACITY 2138.95
DG Set 3 Nos. x 750KVA
MDC Academic & Incubation
Pow Equipm Total

Sr Ligh Max.
Area er AC ent Load Diversit
No Particulars t Demand
(Sq. Ft.) Loa Load Load (In y Factor
s. Load (In Kw.)
d (In Kw.) Kw.)
MDC
40.5 20.2
1 Academic& 40522 212.4 120 393 0.7 275.2
2 6
Incubation
2 Lift - 2Nos. 20 0.7 14.0

40.5 20.2
SUB TOTAL 40522 212.4 120 413 289.2
2 6
Add Future Load 27014.6 27.0 13.5 141.6

80.00 262 0.7 183.5
for 2 Floors 7 1 1 0
Page 451 of 1358

67.5 33.7 354.0

Total Load 200.00 675.31 472.7
4 7 0
MDC ACCOMODATION
Equipm Total
Sr Area Powe Divers Max.
Light AC ent Load
N Particulars (Sq. r ity Demand
Load Load Load (In
os. Ft.) Load Factor (In Kw.)
(In Kw.) Kw.)
MDC Housing
1 Total Load of 51346 350.4 240.9 591 0.7 413.91
Room
2 Lift - 2Nos. 20 0.7 14.00
Common Area
3 41 41 0.7 28.70
Lobby
Common
4 Light, Power , 40 40 0.7 28.00
Pump Load
Fire
5 Emergency 38.8 39 0.7 27.16
load
6 Kitchen Power 53.1 53 0.7 37.17
SUB TOTAL 51346 390 80 241 53 784 549
Add Future Load

9336 70 36 6.91 113 0.7 79.04
for 2 Floors
390.4 149.8 276.9 897.1
Total Load 60.01 627.98
0 0 0 1
Type V Residence 1
Equip Max.
Ligh Total Diver
Area Powe AC ment Dema
Sr t Load sity
Particulars (Sq. r Lo Load nd
Nos. Loa (In Facto
Ft.) Load ad (In (In
d Kw.) r
Kw.) Kw.)
Type V Residence
1 1 (32Flats) -One 81565 664 0.5 331.96
Flat Load 20.75KW
Page 452 of 1358

2 Lift - 2Nos. 20 0.7 14.00

Light Load Parking
@ 0.7watt / Sq feet
3 9250 6.48 6.48 0.5 3.24
for 9250 sq feet
area
Light Load
Common @ 0.7
16313. 11.4
4 watt / Sq feet for 11 0.5 5.71
00 2
(15369 sq
feet area)
Power Load
Common @ 3 watt
5 / Sq feet for 48.94 49 0.5 24.47
(15369 sq
feet area)
SUB TOTAL 90815 18 49 751 379
Add Future Load for 2

166 0.5 82.99
Floors
Add Future Floor
4078.2
Common area light & 2.85 12.23 15 0.5 7.54
5
Power
17.8
Total Load 90815 48.94 931.82 469.91
9
Girl's Hostel
Max.
Ligh Equipm Total Diver
Powe AC Dema
Sr Area t ent Load sity
Particulars r Loa nd
Nos. (Sq. Ft.) Loa Load (In Facto
Load d (In
d (In Kw.) Kw.) r
Kw.)
Total Load of 79.1 1156.

1 103347 1235 0.5 617.59
Room 9 00
2 Lift - 2Nos. 20 0.7 14.00
Fire Emergency
3 and 53.40 53 0.5 26.70
Ventilation Load
Common area
4 93.97 94 0.5 46.98
Light, Power
SUB TOTAL 103347 1403 705
Page 453 of 1358

Add Future Load for 2 10.9 171.3

13780 182 0.5 91.14
Floors 6 3
1584.8
Total Load 796.42
4
Load Detail at New Utility-4

Max.
Sr Total Load Diversity
Particulars Demand
Nos. (In Kw.) Factor
(In Kw.)
1 Academic Block 3642.34 2549.64
2 Boys Hostel-1 1584.84 796.42
3 Boys Hostel-2 1584.84 796.42
4 Mess 545.23 381.66
SERVICES
5 WTP Poad 97 0.9 87.3
6 Fire Fighting Pump (**Only "ON" on Emergency) 246 1 246
7 External Light Load 15 0.7 10.5
8 STP Load 40 0.9 36
TOTAL 7755.26 4903.94
Total Load In KVA at

0.95 5162.05
PF
3097.23
Considering
TRANSFORMER For 95% Loading Of 3 Nos.x
3260.24 Transformer
CAPACITY Transformer 1600KVA
Redundancy N+1
DG Rating
Page 454 of 1358

Total Load In KVA

6129.93
at 0.8 PF
3677.96
For 100% Loading Of 415 Volts

DG CAPACITY 3677.96
DG Set 5 Nos. x 750KVA
Academic Block
Lig Pow Equipm Total Max.

Sr Area AC Diversi
ht er ent Load Deman
No Particulars (Sq. Loa ty
Loa Loa Load (In d
s. Ft.) d Factor
d d (In Kw.) Kw.) (In Kw.)
15051
1 Academic Block
8
2 G Floor 75 226 301 0.7 210.73
3 F Floor 75 226 301 0.7 210.73
819.
4 HVAC Load 819 0.7 573.37
1
5 Lift Load 40 40 0.7 28.00
UPS and Computer
Load (20KVA* 6
6 360 360 0.7 252.00
Nos. + 80 KVA * 3
Nos.)
15051
SUB TOTAL 151 452 819 400 1821 1275
8
Add Future Load for 2 15051

151 452 819 400 1821 0.7 1274.82
Floors 8
Total Load 3642 2550
Boy’s Hostel - 1
Total
Area Equipment Max.
Particulars (Sq. Load (In Demand
Ft.) Kw.) (In Kw.)
Kw.)
Total Load of
1 103347 79.19 1156.00 1235 0.5 617.59
Room
2 Lift - 2Nos. 20 0.7 14.00
Page 455 of 1358

Fire Emergency
3 and 53.40 53 0.5 26.70
Ventilation Load
Common area
4 93.97 94 0.5 46.98
Light, Power
SUB TOTAL 103347 1403 705

13780 10.96 171.33 182 0.5 91.14
Floors
Total Load 1584.84 796.42
Boy’s Hostel - 2
Total
Area Equipment Max.
Particulars (Sq. Load (In Demand
Ft.) Kw.) (In Kw.)
Kw.)
Total Load of
1 103347 79.19 1156.00 1235 0.5 617.59
Room
2 Lift - 2Nos. 20 0.7 14.00
Fire Emergency
3 and 53.40 53 0.5 26.70
Ventilation Load
Common area
4 93.97 94 0.5 46.98
Light, Power
SUB TOTAL 103347 1403 705

13780 10.96 171.33 182 0.5 91.14
Floors
Total Load 1584.84 796.42
Page 456 of 1358

Mess
AC Load Max.
Equipm Total
Sr Powe (Air Diversi Dema
Area Light ent Load
No Particulars r washer & ty nd
(Sq. Ft.) Load Load (In (In
s. Load Scrubber Factor (In
Kw.) Kw.)
) Kw.)
1 Mess 14122 14.12 42.37 50 100 206.5 0.7 144.54
Add Future Load
2 Lift 20.0 0.7 14.00
Future
3 14122 14.12 42.37 50 100 206.5 0.7 144.54
Provision
4 Food Court 14122 9.89 42.37 60 112.3 0.7 78.58
545.2
Total Load 381.66
3
3. Sources of Power Supply
33 KV overhead line shall be tapped from existing 33 KV line after Metering unit. Further it shall be
connected to all required outdoor type equipment such as AB switch, Lighting Arrester, Isolator,
DO Fuse, VCB, CT, PT Unit etc. as required.
2 Nos. 3500 KVA 33/11 KV, Outdoor Type ONAN Transformer with OLTC.
11KV HT VCB Panel indoor type (with 2 Incomer + 1 Bus Coupler +5 Outgoing Feeders) proposed
in existing 33/11KV Grid Sub Station . 11KV HT 300 sq mm A2XFY cables proposed from New 11KV
HT VCB Panel in Existing 33/11KV Grid to proposed 11KV HT Panel Substations near utility 3 and 4
respectively with proposed Ring cable Loop between New Utility no. 3 and 4. The 11/0.433 KV
Substations shall be proposed near existing Utility No. 3 and Utility No. 4. 11 KV HT 300 sq mm
A2XFY cables shall be laid Underground in RCC Hume Pipes NP2 class with Pull chambers from 11
KV VCB Panel (at Utility - 1)
All civil & Mechanical infrastructure for all substation as per above system requirement should be
considered.
Page 457 of 1358

i - 11KV HT VCB Panel-
The power shall be further distributed in the proposed Building after stepping down from 11kV to
433 Volt through Distribution Transformer and fed to Main LT Panel. LT Power will be fed to
different buildings and outdoor area LT Panels through UG cables.
It is proposed that the proposed Electric Substation consisting of 11KV HT panel, Transformers DG
Sets, Main LT Panel and Capacitor Panels shall be housed as per requirement.
The following capacity transformers 11/0.433 KV ONAN type -
A. New Utility 3 – 2000KVA x 2 Nos.

B. New Utility 4 – 1600KVA x 3 Nos.
ii - Transformer -
Page 458 of 1358

iii - Main LT Panel: -
From the Type Tested Main LT Panel, LT supply will be fed into the different Type tested LT Panels
/ Meter Panel in each building through Under Ground Armored LT cables. Each Building will be
Given two feeder supply namely Lighting Load Feeder and Air Conditioning / Power feeder. One
Emergency feeder to be provided for each hostel, residential building & Fire Fighting Panel to in
case of Fire Emergency condition.
From respective Type tested LT Panels supply will be fed to Main lighting Panel, Main Power Panel,
Main Emergency Panels & Utility panels. All these panels shall be placed in electrical room in
ground floor. Floor Panels / DBs are proposed at each floor for light / power / emergency loads.
Distribution Boards are proposed on each floor / Halls / room etc. for final distribution.
Distribution Boards for normal lighting, normal power, emergency lighting / power shall be
provided as per requirement.
The designs of the electrical installations are in accordance with Bureau of Indian Standards,
relevant Indian Electricity Act amended time to time and also in accordance with local electricity
board, CPWD and CEIG rules and regulations.
Automatic power factor compensating multiple capacitor units shall be provided for maintaining
of average power factor between 0.98 to unity to have effective savings in energy cost. Contactor
control switching arrangement with detuned filters for reducing harmonics shall be provided to
sense the power factor in the system shall automatically switch ON/ OFF the capacitor units to
achieve the pre-set power factor. Harmonic filters shall be used with harmonic-filter-duty power
capacitors to mitigate harmonics, improve power factor and avoid electrical resonance in electrical
network.
Fire Suppression system for HT / LT Panels should be consider as per statutory requirement.
iv - DG Set Back Up
Page 459 of 1358

New Utility 3 – 750KVA x 3 Nos.
New Utility 4 – 750KVA x 5 Nos.
➢ DG Sets shall be placed in both Utility 3 and 4 with DG room / shed to ease maintenance for
the DG sets in rainy seasons.
➢ Automatic start of the DG sets as required in case of mains failure including synchronization.
➢ The number of DG sets started shall be based on the load requirement thus conserving fuel.
➢ Return of the system to normal and stopping of the DG sets after restoration of mains supply.
100% Power backup is planned for the situation when normal power supply is not available. DG
Sets of 415 Volt are proposed in the DG Plant Room. As per the load calculations, the DG Sets as
required.
The DG sets shall be operated through a PLC / Synchronizing Relay based auto load management,
auto mains failure system to achieve the following.
All DG Sets shall have Radiator water cooled for engine cooling system. One sets of main
synchronization panels is planned in each utility 3 & 4. DG Set shall be acoustically treated to
arrest the noise pollution as per CPCB Norm.
DG Sets are envisaged to be operated in synchronized mode. Provision of PLC shall be done with
Manual override facility, so that auto as well as manual synchronization can be done. PLC shall
have in-built feature of synchronization, auto load sharing, auto load shading for the DG Sets.
DG rooms Shall be provided with required Fans & ducting for controlling the ventilation required
as per DG OEM.
Page 460 of 1358

Exhaust piping for the DG Sets shall be taken up to the highest point as per CPCB guidelines.
All Electrical substation & distribution system shall be connected to required SCADA (Supervisory
Control And Data Acquisition) system.
990 Liter Day Oil tank inbuild with each D. G. set.
V - Solar Power system

Solar PV Power Generation system is considered on Terrace of Academic Block, MDC Academic &
Incubation, MDC Accommodation, Hostels, Mess and Type V residence and other available area
(on existing Buildings, Parking Sheds) suited to architecture and services. The PV Solar cells to be
Installed at Roof top / on ground available space with GI structures with necessary cabling up to
Inverters & Panels with Feeder provision in panels. Inverters and Interfacing panels to be proposed
and installed in the room at terrace. The cabling from Inverter to mains connected through
interfacing panels, metering Panels will be installed with system and connected to respective main
panel of each building and Energy Meters to be installed to measure Units produced by Solar
system measured individually. Solar Tree concept for Solar power need to consider on available
space on ground for solar power generation after taking approval from Engineer in charge.
Necessary connection & arrangement should be done in Mail L.T. Panel as per available space
interface & surrounding area for Utilization of solar power generation.
04 No. 15KW Solar tree to be considered in external open area with all requirements.
4. Net Zero Energy Service

Considering Net Zero energy solution min. 1800 Kwp Solar PV On Ground which can be
connected to Grid & individual Roof Top System proposed at Different locations. The 1800KW
capacity for Solar system is considered as per Load Summary. Please refer below detail for net
Zero calculation - Summary of Net Zero Energy Services
Averag
Total Total
Max e Hours Total
Connec Units Units
Dema Operat of Days of
S. Descripti ted Divers Divers consu Consu
nd ing Operat Month
Nos. on Load In ity ity med med
Load Dema ion in Consid
KW per in a
in Kw nd In a day ered
Day Month
Kw
Girls 18079.
1 372 0.3 111.6 0.45 50.22 12 602.64 30
Hostel 2
B. Hostel 18079.
2 372 0.3 111.6 0.45 50.22 12 602.64 30
-1 2
B. Hostel 18079.
3 372 0.3 111.6 0.45 50.22 12 602.64 30
-2 2
4 Type V 471 0.25 117.75 0.25 29.44 12 353.25 30 10597.
Page 461 of 1358

Residenc 5
e -1
MDC
23755.
5 Accommo 488.79 0.3 146.64 0.45 65.99 12 791.84 30
19
dation
Incubatio
6 n 533 0.4 213.2 0.45 95.94 10 959.4 25 23985
center
7 Mess 98 0.4 39.2 0.45 17.64 4 70.56 30 2116.8
Faculty 22.111 221.11
8 122.84 0.4 49.136 0.45 10 25 5527.8
Office 2 2
Academic
9 1507 0.4 602.8 0.45 271.26 10 2712.6 25 67815
Block
Grand 4336.6 6916.6 188034

Total 3 8 .89
Summary of Solar (On Grid)

Proposed Capacity of Solar Power in Kw 1800
Units Generated per Kw per day by Solar System 4.2
Total Units Generated in a day 7560.0
Total Units Generated in a Month (25 days considered per Month) 189000.0
Equivalent to power consumption of new premises hence Net

Zero energy feature will be achieved.
5. Charging Points for Electrical Vehicle:

EV charging Point need to be considered for as per Latest Guideline of Ministry of Power or 10%
of 4-Wheeler & 2-Wheeler vehicle & additional Future provision should be consider including all
charging equipment catering for Fast & Slow charging as require for EV charging.
Individual Metering provision / Energy consumption should be considered for each EV charging
point.
6. Wiring Installation
A) Generally, the electrical wiring installation will conform to IS standard (IS:732-1989). The
complete wiring installation concealed / exposed will be installed in heavy gauge rigid steel conduit
(black steel).
B) The wiring for light and small convenience power outlets shall be with PVC insulated FRLSH
copper conductor wires conforming to IS:694. The point wiring shall be done with 1.5 sq mm
copper conductor while lighting circuit wiring shall be carried out with 2.5 Sq mm copper
conductor while power wiring shall be carried out with 4 Sq.mm. copper conductor wires. Colour
code shall be maintained for the entire wiring installation i.e. Red, Yellow and Blue for the phases
and black for the neutral and green for earthing.
C) Sufficient amount of general power outlets & specialized power outlets for ELV services & UPS
Page 462 of 1358

services shall be given in all areas to meet power requirement of that particular area. Optimum
All PC / system requirements I.e. FAS, ACS, CCTV, BMS, AV, Light automation, etc It Should be
provided by vendor under their accountability till handing over.
7. Earthing
system will be in conformity with the IS: 3043. All non-current carrying metal parts forming part of
the electrical system shall be connected to the grounding system. The requirement of Indian
Electricity Rules and statutory requirement of local Electricity authority shall also be met fully.
i. Substation earthing a. Transformer neutral earthing solidly earthed

(Copper) b. DG sets neutral earthing solidly earthed.
ii. Protective earthing a. HT panel body earthing.

(GI) b. Trans & DG set body earthing
c. LT Panels
d. Power Panel
e. Equipment's
All Maintenance free chemical earthing considered.
8. Lightning Protection System

The Lightning Protection system shall be in accordance with the National Building Code – 2016,
Part -8, Section 2. National Building Code – 2016, Part -8, Section 2 & as per latest guideline also
clearly defines the need of the measures to be taken care for planning, erection, testing and
maintenance of lightning protection system. A proper lightning protection system (consisting of
air terminal, down conductor, earthing) design is very important to ensure increased protection of
a building against lightning and its effects. Since only a mere vertical air terminal will not solve the
purpose for protection of building unless the entire building is sufficiently protected either with:
• Angle of protection method

• Mesh conductor method or
• Calculated as per rolling sphere method.
9. Internal and External Lighting

Designing of number of light fittings are proposed in order to have effective lumens and nominal
Lux requirements as per IS 3648 (Part 1 – 1966) and NBC 2016 specifications. All lighting shall be
through LED fixtures unless stated otherwise. It is proposed to have uniform lighting density in all
areas as per IS, NBC & ECBC norms. The general lighting of various areas will be designed on the
basis of illumination level in conformity to BIS, NBC 2016 & ECBC and lighting fixtures shall be
integrated with the interior layout.
The general lighting of various areas shall be planned as per Standard. Emergency lighting shall
be planned with an inverter / UPS supply.
Lighting in all the areas shall be integrated with the interior layout as provided by the Interior
Page 463 of 1358

Designer. Lighting for outdoor area shall have a combination of LED streetlight, post top & high
mask light (04 Nos.) as per requirement of layout and are proposed to cover the entire areas.
Landscape lighting shall be provided as per requirement of layout in accordance with actual use
& aesthetically suitable to provide the natural view. Recommended lux levels in different areas are
as per following.
AREA RECOMMENDED LUX

SR.NO.
INTERNAL AREAS LEVEL
LECTURE HALL / MEETING ROOMS / 450 LUX
1
SYNDICATE ROOMS
200 LUX
2 CORRIDOR / PASSAGE / LOBBY
3 TOILET 150 LUX

4 FACULTY OFFICE 300 LUX
5 DINING HALL 250 LUX
6 MESS 250 LUX
7 HOSTEL ROOMS GENERAL 200 LUX
8 HOSTEL ROOMS READING TABLE 350 LUX
9 PORCH 100 LUX
AREA RECOMMENDED LUX

SR.NO.
EXTERNAL AREAS LEVEL
1 MAIN ROAD 12-15 LUX
SECONDARY ROAD
2 8-10 LUX
LANDSCAPE / GARDEN AREA

3 5-8 LUX
10. UPS System

Centralized Modular type Hot Swappable UPS System with latest IGBT technology & inbuilt
Isolation Transformer for uninterrupted power supply shall be provided to support critical services
such as emergency lighting in all areas such as lecture halls, meeting rooms , syndicate rooms ,
offices , corridors, lift lobbies, staircase, electrical room, toilets, etc. , security system, data
networks, all LV equipment, Fire Panel, BMS System, computer power points etc. The UPS System
shall provide 30 Min backup with Maintenance Free batteries and Bypass system. The system shall
have the incoming and outgoing switchgears panel. The system shall include the interconnection
of UPS Input/output power supply Panels & UPS units, UPS & Batteries through flexible copper
cables of suitable size & racks.
11. Lighting Automation And Controls

Lighting Automation Controls proposed for Classrooms, Conference, Corridor and Passages of
Page 464 of 1358

Academic Block, MDC Incubation Center. Keypads for Scene controls proposed as per aesthetic.
Lux Level dimming sensors proposed to optimize energy with respect to external Light level. All
sensors should be considered latest updated model with override provision.
LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS
TV system shall be provided as per requirement in meeting room / Syndicate room / Mess /
Common Area, Type V / residence. The system shall consist of dish antenna, amplifier, Splitter, Set-
top box, cabling and the modular outlet points inside the buildings. Provision of both MATV and
IP TV system needs to be incorporated along with the Display.
2. Lifts
Machine room less Passenger Lifts are provided for Academic, office, Residential area. The
installation is carried out as per rules & regulation of local bodies NBC and IS Codes that govern
the requirement of installation of the lift. The voltage and frequency of the supply shall subject to
variation permissible under Indian Electricity Act and Rules.
INTEGRATED BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

In the conventional installations, supervisor along with his staff carry out operation of all
equipment and components in the Air conditioning Plant Room, DG Set Room, Plumbing Plant
Room, Fire Fighting Pump Room and for other mechanical equipment installations: They are
responsible for monitoring the instrumentation and controls for machinery and also for starting it
up or shutting it down as per regular schedule or on demand. Human errors are accepted as an
integral part during operation and no control is possible to eliminate them.
As size and complexity of modern buildings have increased, the efficient and economic operation
of the mechanical services has become even more complex problem. Further as skilled labor is
becoming scarce and more expensive; it is becoming a difficult task to maintain large installations.
This is where building Management System plays an important role to manage various aspects
within a Building. The Building Management System shall be provided to monitor all parameters
of Air conditioning, Plumbing, Electrical and firefighting.
IBMS is a micro-processor-based system which centralizes and simplifies…
» controlling
» monitoring
» operation and…
» Management
…of heating, air-conditioning, ventilation & other building services to achieve…
Page 465 of 1358

» safe and comfortable working environment

» energy saving & efficient operation.
» at reduced time & cost
Building Management System shall not only help in conserving energy by making it possible to
plan and execute various energy conservation control scheme but also help in reducing scarce
trained main power requirement for operating and maintaining the Building services. It shall also
act as a management informed about the critical operation of various building services and
compile data required for analyzing the possibility of conserving energy.
1. BMS Components-
BMS shall have 3 levels of intelligence namely:
A) Central Server
» With powerful user-friendly software.
» Used for everyday building operation.
B) DDC Controllers
» Micro-processor based.
» Pre-configured / Freely programmable
» Controls the HVAC & other equipment of the building.
C) Field Devices
» Temperature, Humidity, Pressure sensors
» Valves, Actuators, Transducers etc.
All the field devices such as temperature sensor, level sensor, current sensor, etc. shall be
connected to the DDC’s. The operator workstations should be used for man machine interface. All
the utilities shall be displayed in graphical format as well as text format for easy understanding
and interaction.
Page 466 of 1358

2. BMS Architecture
3. BMS Software
The software shall be password protected and shall provide summaries, trends and history of
various monitored and controlled data points. The system shall also be provided with following
applications software for the purpose of
optimizing energy consumption:
A) Scheduled Start /
B) Optimum Start / Stop- duty Cycling.
C) Demand Limiting
D) Day/Night setback
E) Chilled water reset and capacity control.
4. BMS Benefits
A) Improved indoor environment quality.
- Comfortable living and working environment – domestic or commercial
- Better temperature and humidity control
- Good air quality
B) Faster response to
- occupant needs
- end-user complaints
- trouble conditions
C) Maintenance Savings
- efficient control gives less wear and strain of mechanical equipment.
- provides longer life
- runtime monitoring alerts timely maintenance of equipment
- avoids expensive failures
Page 467 of 1358

D) Energy Savings
- eliminates unnecessary system operation.
- accurate energy usage information
- helps you to take steps to reduce energy consumption like Optimum-Start, Night-Purging, Time
Scheduling
E) Consolidated facility control

- One-point centralized operation
- Simpler operation
- Reduces time and resources
F) Reduced operator training

- on-screen instructions
- user-friendly graphic displays
- simpler operation programmed for routine and repetitive operation
G) Improved management reporting

- Provides valuable real-time data
- Creates reports, charts
- Critical information immediately sent to printers, emailed
- or sent via SMS
H) Timely and effective control

- alerts your employees when your facility is not operating correctly
- reduce troubleshooting and down time.
- Remote access connectivity without site visits.
I) Performance Benchmarking
- Facilitates the overall system performance measurement
- Comparison with set benchmarks
IBMS MONITORING & CONTROLS: -

1. Air Conditioning system, AHU, TFA, Fresh air / Exhaust fans.
2. Plumbing system pumps status, controls.
3. STP pumps status, controls.
4. Hot water System status, controls.
5. Fire Fighting Pump Status, monitoring.
6. Transformers status, monitoring.
7. Lifts / Escalators status, Monitoring.
8. DG set status, monitoring.
9. LT Breakers status, Monitoring.
10. Electrical Parameters (current, voltage, PF, frequency etc) Monitoring.
11. Energy consumption.
Please refer I/O Summary provided with the RFP.
Page 468 of 1358

COMPUTER/ LAN NETWORKING/ WI-FI POINTS
Foiled shield CAT6 A CABLES & COMPONENTS, FIBER OPTICS CABLE &COMPONENTS
⚫ Complete installation shall be done in accordance with installation practices for a well-
structured cabling system, using components from a single vendor to ensure consistent and
assured performance. The structured cabling distribution network shall serve as a vehicle for
transport of data, video and voice telephony signals over a common network throughout the
network.
⚫ Installation, termination and identification of wiring between station outlets and networking
rack shall be considered part of the contractor’s work.
⚫ Wiring utilized for data and voice communications shall originate at networking racks and
terminate at IOs terminated at wall.
⚫ All cables and terminations shall be identified at all locations.
⚫ All balanced twisted pair cable terminations shall comply with and be tested to TIA/EIA568-
C.2 standards for CAT 6A installations.
⚫ Standards Compliance: - shielded twisted pair cabling system, conforming to ANSI/TIA/EIA

568- C.2 CAT 6A cabling system, ISO/IEC 11801 2nd edition, EN-50173-1.
⚫ The contractor carrying out the SITC shall make the system entirely operational for its
intended use, by addition of components specific to its make/model even if not specifically
mentioned in the BOQ.
⚫ It shall be the responsibility of the installer and OEM manufacturer to ensure that the Passive
Components of structured cabling distribution network will be free from manufacturing
defects in material and workmanship under normal and proper use.
⚫ The site will be duly certified by OEM for a period of 25 years from the date of issuance of the
registration certificate or installation, whichever is earlier.
⚫ 25-year product guarantee by the OEM / manufacturer along with system performance
guarantee by Penta scanning reports and actual test results conducted at site such as
attenuation, return loss, NEXT & ACR. Permanent link shall be tested for minimum guaranteed
performance as per standards at 500 MHZ operation minimum.
⚫ The Supplying, installation, testing and commissioning of FOILED SHIELD CAT6A data cables
shall include supply and laying of cables in existing conduit on ceiling / wall / slab etc.
⚫ Cat 6A RJ 45 data outlets points will be provided for Computers, Networking, Telephones, Wi-
Fi, Access Control, CCTV, Information Display system, BMS, SCADA etc. as per requirement in
rooms and other areas as drawings provided. In classrooms of academic building data points
to be provided to each student seating. For additional detailing, it would be guided by the
Page 469 of 1358

requirement of the Institute and as per the direction of Engineer-in charge. To protect Cat 6A
outlets from authorized/unauthorized insertion of cords or foreign objects and/or deter
unintended or unauthorized disconnection of cords, Outlet adapter lock and secure patch
cord solution to be used which utilizes universal keys to provide secure and tamper proof
connections.
The Data Outlet points shall be connected to Rack Panel/Computer hub with 4 pair CAT-6A wiring
in Raceways, recessed/ surface MS conduit as required. UPS Power supply shall be provided to
Network Rack, Servers & Computers wherever required.
The maximum length of the CAT-6A cable from end user point to the Hub or Edge switches shall
not be more than 90 M. Beyond 90 M length Fiber Optic Cable shall be used.
The Rack Panel/computer hub at various floors will be connected to Main rack of the block with
Fiber Optic Cable through MS conduit or raceways on surface/ recess.
Suitable Server shall be placed in a room with false flooring shall be established in Academic
Building, which comprises both LAN server & IPABX server. There shall be proper redundant (24 X
7) cooling facility in the server room to maintain the desired temperature, humidity & Indoor air
quality for smooth operation of the System.
The Server shall have Firewall protection, Bandwidth management & required client Access license.
The incoming Fiber cable from Service provider for the Campus Broadband connectivity shall be
terminated in the Server room. The laying and termination of Fiber optic cable within the campus
will be provided.
The Rack Panel comprising of jack/Patch panels, Network switches, patch cords, power supply
units, Cooling Fans, Wire managers, LIUs, Trans-receivers, Fiber patch cord etc. of individual floor
floors.
LAN Infrastructure at different Floors shall be used commonly for IPABX, BMS, Access Control
System, CCTV, LV system etc. along with LAN.
Color coding management: Different color I/O will be provided for the different services at I/o and
Rack end to identify all services by color.
Field terminated plugs made for CAT-6Awill be used for any device to be installed in ceiling (For
Ex-Camera, Wi-Fi, etc.) for improved performance and more efficient power deliveries by
eliminating extra connection points for patch cords and outlets. Cat6A cable and field terminated
plug should be of same make for system performance guarantee by the OEM.
Wireless access points for Wi-Fi connectivity are proposed in all the building. In Type 5 residential
building 2 nos of additional Wi-fi shall be provided in each flat.
Page 470 of 1358

PURE SERVER BASED IPABX SYSTEM

RJ-45 Telephone socket outlets with suitable IP Phones instruments shall be provided at
convenient locations& as per drawings provided. CAT-6A wiring shall be provided in
recessed/surface MS conduits/ raceways from each telephone point up to the Rack panel (Patch
Panel & Switch) at each floor or nearest Rack Panel of Floor. The Maximum length of the CAT-6A
cable shall be 90 M.
IPABX with minimum capacity of 1500 Telephones & expandable up to 2000 telephones shall be
located at Server Room in the academic block. The PRI lines for IPABX shall be terminated in the
separate Rack in server room of academic Block. This Rack will be connected to the IPABX system.
The Rack Panel (comprising of jack/Patch panels, Network switches, patch cords, power supply
units, Cooling Fans, Wire managers, LIUs, Trans receivers, Fiber patch cord etc.) of individual
buildings/Blocks shall be connected to the main IPABX Server Rack with optical Fiber cables to be
laid underground in DWC HDPE Pipe of suitable size.
Manholes with covers shall be provided in the underground DWC HDPE pipes at suitable lengths
for easy pulling & maintenance of cables.
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM WITH IP BASE DIGITAL PA SYSTEM AND TELEPHONE TALK BACK SYSTEM
A. An intelligent reporting, microprocessor-controlled fire detection system along the IP based

Digital PA system shall be installed for all the buildings in accordance with the technical
specifications.
Basic Performance:
1. Alarm, trouble and supervisory signals from all intelligent reporting devices shall be encoded on
NFPA Class A Signaling Line Circuits (SLC).
2. Device Circuits (IDC) shall be wired NFPA Class A as part of an addressable device connected by
the SLC Circuit.
3. Notification Appliance Circuits (NAC) shall be wired NFPA Class A as part of an addressable
device connected by the SLC Circuit.
4. On Class A configurations a single ground fault or open circuit on the system Signaling Line
Circuit shall not cause system malfunction, loss of operating power or the ability to report an alarm.
5. Alarm signals arriving at the FACP shall not be lost following a primary power failure (or outage)
until the alarm signal is processed and recorded.
6. Speaker circuits may be controlled by NAC outputs built into the amplifiers, which shall function
as
addressable points on the Digital Audio Loop.
7. NAC speaker circuits shall be arranged such that there is a minimum of one speaker circuit per
floor of the building or smoke zone whichever is greater.
8. Audio amplifiers and tone generating equipment shall be electrically supervised for normal and
abnormal conditions.
9. NAC speaker circuits and control equipment shall be arranged such that loss of anyone (1)
speaker circuit will not cause the loss of any other speaker circuit in the system. Two-way
emergency telephone communication circuits shall be supervised for open and short circuit
Page 471 of 1358

conditions.
Speaker circuits shall be arranged such that there is a minimum of one speaker circuit per smoke
zone.
Speaker circuits shall be electrically supervised for open and short circuit conditions. If a short
circuit exists on a speaker circuit, it shall not be possible to activate that circuit.
10. Audio amplifiers and tone generating equipment shall be electrically supervised for abnormal
conditions. Digital amplifiers shall provide built-in speaker circuits, field configurable as four Class
B, or two Class A circuits.
11. The proposed product shall not restrict the buyer to one single organization, nor shall it require
any proprietary dongle or other programming tools for after sales & maintenance activity.
Design Intent
a) Main fire alarm panel with digital voice command system, Fire fighters’ telephone, Voice alarm
controller, amplifier, zone selector keypad and announcement console – Ground floor fire alarm
panel room at each building.
b) IP Based Public address system integrated with FAS system shall be provided in each building.
c) Active repeater panels at independent buildings.
d) All fire alarm panels connected as pier to pier. In the event of CPU failure, all SLC loop modules
shall fallback to degrade mode. Systems not offering degrade mode shall offer Redundant CPU.
Such degrade mode shall treat the corresponding SLC loop control modules and associated
detection devices as conventional two-wire operation. Any activation of a detector in this mode
shall automatically activate associated Notification Appliance Circuits.
e) Fire survival cables (750 deg. 2 hours)
f) Class - A cabling to loop all detectors, devices & MCP‟s to control panel.
g) Coverage per detector as per NFPA -2015, considering > 60 ACH
h) System integration (Soft integration) with all standalone panels such as agent release panels for
deluge valves, Pre-action panels, lift switchboard, DG fresh air switchboard, etc
k) VESDA (Very Early Smoke Detection Apparatus) and Gas suppression flooding system by clean
agent (NOVAC 123) to cover the false flooring/ ceiling and room void areas of Data Hall, UPS,
Battery rooms and MMR.
m) Emergency communication system, integral with the Main FACP, including voice alarm system
components, microphones, amplifiers, zone selector keypads and tone generators
n) Audible Alarm Notifications
o) Fire fighters telephone system as part of main fire alarm system, which is two-way, supervised
voice communication proposed to link between the MFACP and remote fire fighters' telephone
stations throughout the building (at all staircases at all levels)
Addressable Intelligent fire detection and Alarm system of latest technology with Fire alarm panels,
multi-Sensor detectors, smoke detectors, heat detectors, beam detectors, response indicators,
manual call point and hooters, light strobe etc. shall be provided as per summary sheet of FAS
system defined in technical specifications. It shall meet the requirement of NBC 2016/State By laws.
License/Approval of Local Fire Authorities shall be provided for the Academic, Hostels, Mess, MDC
accommodation, Type-5 residential, Incubation buildings. There shall be the proper Zoning of the
complex/buildings considering the Non-Critical& Critical areas buildings. Repeater panels shall
be provided in various buildings as required.
Page 472 of 1358

There shall be Independent fire panels for all the buildings (Academic, Hostels, Mess, MDC
accommodation, Type-5 residential, Incubation buildings) and all fire control panels shall be
interconnected with each other. Fire Detectors and devices of other ancillary buildings/ blocks shall
be connected to Fire Control Panel of the nearest building through necessary cables in DWC HDPE
pipes. The monitoring of whole complex shall be in the Main Fire Control Room of Academic
Building. For Central Monitoring of all the Fire Panels, necessary devices like PC, Printer, modules
& Software etc. of latest technology with minimum 1 TB hard disk shall be provided in the Control
room. Fire Alarm control Panel shall not have more than 159 devices and 159 detectors in one
loop. The details of the system proposed shall be as follows:
b) Addressable intelligent main fire alarm control panel as per technical specifications and
conforming to UL 864, 10th Edition for Control Units for Fire Protective Signaling Systems
and will have Integrated 8 channel voice alarm controller for PA system. FAs panel should
have 2 ways Communication Fire Fighters System. Failure of Fire Panel CPU shall not
result in failure of DVC operation.
c) Smoke Detectors and multi criteria detectors should be conforming to UL 268, 7th
Edition Smoke Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems. Detectors should be Hard
addressable with rotary switch. Detectors should be installed as per coverage defined in
NFPA 72. It should include all rooms, halls, storage areas, above false ceiling as per norms,
lofts, and spaces above suspended ceilings including plenum areas utilized as part of the
HVAC system. In addition, coverage should include all closets, elevator shafts, enclosed
stairways, dumbwaiter shafts, chutes, and other subdivisions and accessible spaces.
d) Suitable numbers of input/ output (C/M) relay modules are suggested for connecting
other equipment like Electrical Panels, lifts, firefighting system, AHUs etc.
e) The spacing between two detectors shall not be more than 7.5Mtr. or it shall be as per
relevant code in IS:2189- 2008 in respective ceiling height.
f) Cabling shall be with Fire Survival Armored copper cable as per BS 7486.
g) Suitable sounders/strobe and sounder with strobe lights of 110 Cd intensity level are
suggested in all buildings as per relevant code.
h) Directional sounders will be provided near all staircase and exit points of the buildings
as per NFPA 72 2019 edition Clause 18.4.8.
i) Addressable manual call boxes shall be provided near all exits, staircases, lift lobbies etc.
as per relevant Norms.
j) The Response Indicators shall be used for above ceiling detectors.
k) Above ceiling detectors shall be provided as required as per relevant code in IS:2189.
l) UL Listed Addressable multi-criteria detector combining 4 Fire signatures (Smoke + Heat

+ CO + IR) with standard mounting base shall be provided in critical areas of the buildings.
Page 473 of 1358

m) Two Way communication Fire Fighters Telephone Jack & Handset with necessary
accessories are to be provided in all the buildings as per requirement.
n) FAS system shall be connected to BMS system.
o) Graphic user interface will be provided in the main fire control room. The Graphic
workstation shall act as an independent node communicating on the peer-to-peer
network and shall not be dependent on the Fire Panel CPU for operation. Failure of Fire
Panel CPU shall not result in failure of GUI.
p) Group Decision Making by Smoke Detectors. The group of minimum three detectors
shall work in tandem to take fast and genuine alarm decision mitigating the risk of false
alarm. There shall be no requirement of cross zoning or mandatory sequential address
setting in the detectors to achieve this function. This shall be a built-in intelligence in the
system to take fast & reliable decision on genuine alarm triggering. The alarm event shall
be a result of a group of detector chamber readings considered as a consolidated alarm
signal.
q) The intelligent addressable aspiration detector that communicates directly with the fire
alarm control panel via the SLC communication protocol hall be deployed To cover the
false flooring and room void areas of Data Hall, server rooms, UPS, Battery rooms and
MMR along with total room flooding gas suppression system.
r) IP Based networkable call station shall be capable of making paging announcements

across all the zones in the system.
s) The battery shall have sufficient capacity to power the fire alarm system for not less than
48 hours in standby plus 2 hours of alarm upon a normal AC power failure.
t) Testing and Final Inspection: The service of a competent, factory-trained engineer or

technician authorized by the manufacturer of the fire alarm equipment shall be provided
to technically supervise and participate during all of the adjustments and tests for the
system. All testing shall be in accordance with NFPA 72.
IP BASED CLOSED CIRCUIT TELEVISION SYSTEM (CCTV SYSTEM)

The CCTV and Surveillance System shall control and monitor different buildings in the Campus. All
the buildings shall have IP Based Dome Cameras, Bullet Cameras and PTZ Cameras for surveillance.
The types of cameras & locations of various Cameras indicated herein are minimum to be provided.
However, during detailed designing if required and found necessary the type/ rating of the
Cameras shall be upgraded.
Dome Cameras (Indoor type) + Bullet camera (Outdoor Type) + PTZ Cameras on pole or Roof top
(Outdoor) to be used for the surveillance of the building and campus.
Page 474 of 1358

The indoor Dome Cameras are proposed to be installed at all Entry & Exit Points, main corridor,
Lift lobbies & common areas like staircases, internal corridors, Waiting areas, reception, of all
buildings.
All the outdoor cameras shall be in IP-67 Housing with Junction box, media converter etc. is
proposed in weatherproof housing. The existing LAN network switches would be used for CCTV
connectivity and will be connected to central CCTV server & cameras shall have POE connectivity
ports.
Network connectivity for outdoor cameras having distance more than 80metres shall be on optical
fiber. Suitable provision shall be provided to connect with existing LAN infrastructure. The power
supply to LAN switches and Monitors will be on UPS. The video recording shall be Network Video
Management System with Storage Channel NVR with RAID supported.
Bullet/Dome camera:
Bullet cameras shall be minimum 5 MP Resolution and in accordance with technical specifications
with IR suitable for Day and night operations. Dome camera would be of 2 MP and in accordance
with technical specifications with IR suitable for Day and night operations All the cameras shall be
operative on automotive manual & scheduled mode. The cameras shall be UL Listed. RJ- 45 Cable
connectors will be used for Network/POE connectivity.
PTZ outdoor cameras:

The true IP day and night viewing PTZ cameras proposed are 30 x optical zoom, P-iris with
minimum 2 MP resolution & Auto focus lens with focal length 4.5 mm to 135 mm or better. The
PTZ camera shall automatically track the object to use its Pan/Tilt/Zoom feature and primary
stream at 60/50 frames per sec. The cameras shall be UL Listed. RJ- 45 Cable connectors will be
used for Network/ POE connectivity.
Network Video Management System:

The IP Video Management Storage Appliance shall be a RAID 5 protected allin-one recording,
viewing and management solution for network surveillance systems of up to 64 cameras in 1080p
HD resolution. The IP Video Management Storage Appliance shall utilize “enterprise-rated” hard
drives. shall offer/support up to 8 Sata 64 TB of net capacity storage for each 32/64 Channels. The
IP Video Management Storage Appliance shall offer Dual Hard disk protected with RAID 1 on 2x
240GB M.2SSD. Installation of an IP based Camera CCTV system with the objective to provide High
degree of Electronic surveillance system. It is also essential to have recorded images stored at least
for 30 days @ 2MP 30fps of all critical are as to facilitate investigations of a reported case. System
should be offered with 30 days of Storage @ 2MP 30fps in RAID-5 with 20% Buffer capacity.
LED Display Monitor:
The sufficient no. of Full HD LED Monitors with high resolutions screen size of 55” are to be
provided for viewing all live/ recorded camera proceedings. The resolutions of 1920(H) x 1080(v)
pixels with comfortable viewing angle is proposed for all monitors suitable for operation on 220-
240V AC 50 Hz power for the display panel should be equipped with all standard features such as
video in, Audio in, HDMI/DVI, RJ 45 Port etc.
The Control Room shall be located in the Security /Control Room of the academic block. The wiring
inside the building shall be with CAT 6A cable in conduit and for Outdoor connectivity Armored
Page 475 of 1358

fiber Optic Cable shall be used. Optical fiber cable shall be laid underground in HDPE pipes with
suitable Manholes for easy pulling and proper Maintenance. PTZ cameras will be placed on roof
top and on Street light Poles with necessary mounting arrangements in external areas.
ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM:

Access Control system for the academic building and MDC incubation will be magnetic door type
controlled through Card readers. Faculty rooms, Server/IT rooms, Classrooms and Labs shall be
provided access control through In/Out card reader system. IP based door controllers and other
devices as per technical specifications and BOQ shall be provided as required. Existing LAN
infrastructure shall be used for network connectivity of IP based door controllers. Each Controller
will control a maximum of four doors which can be for single or double leaf door. Both side of
doors for entry and exit readers has to provide along with the emergency break glass switch, to
be used In case of emergency. The centralized control will be managed through a server to be
installed in main Security Control/ Server Room. For Overriding purpose Push Button will be
provided inside the rooms.
The system will be capable to record the biometric attendance and access control data with Card
of the authorized personnel and the records will be stored in server. Access control software
should support unlimited client workstation without restriction on limit of number of users.
Biometric attendance machines with Card has to be provided in academic and incubation block at
the staff entry.
For Hostels and residential quarters digital type door lock shall be provided on the hostel rooms
and flat entrances.
Page 476 of 1358

HVAC SYSTEM DBR
Page 477 of 1358

HVAC SYSTEM DBR

FOR
ACADEMIC BUILDING INCLUDING FACULTY & STAFF/ACADEMIC ASSOCIATES OFFICE
1. Intent of HVAC System

The intent of system design is to provide comfortable of acceptable indoor air quality. The system
at the same time will be energy efficient and cost economical, easy to operate using CFC free
refrigerants.
The proposed building shall be GRIHA certified. The HVAC system shall be done as per the GRIHA
guidelines. All HVAC and electrical equipment’s shall be five-star rated. or Highest star rating as
available.
2. Introduction
➢ It is proposed to provide centralized Air Conditioning system with Air cooled Variable
Refrigerant Volume / flow system (VRF /VRV) for Academic Block.
➢ Fresh air will be maintained as required by ASHARE/ ISHARE standards.
3. Design Standard
The following design guides used in the Design of HVAC System: -
➢ National Building Code 2016

➢ ASHRAE Handbooks.
- Fundamentals 2017
- HVAC Systems and Equipment 2016
- HVAC Applications 2015
➢ Refrigeration 2010
➢ Indian society of heating refrigerating and air conditioning engineers
➢ Duct construction standards as per relevant IS-655 codes OR SMACNA-2007
➢ ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 62.1-2016-Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality
➢ Green Building provisions as per GRIHA V-2019 & ECBC 2017
4. Basic Consideration For Estimation

Site Location : Indore (M.P.) Geographic Location
Latitude : 22.43°N
Longitude : 75° 85 °E
Altitude : 567MTRs
❖ Outside Design data (Ambient Conditions)

Based on outdoor design data specified for Indore (M.P.) in ISHRAE Handbook & As per client
suggested, the outdoor Design conditions have been considered as follows:
Summer Monsoon To be considered for
Dry Bulb Temperature
41.1 °C (106°F) 32.2°C (90°F) Summer 46 °C (114.8°F)
Mean Coincident Wet Bulb

Temperature 25.0 °C (77°F) 27.77°C (82°F) 28.6 °C (83.6°F)
Relative Humidity (%) 28% 70% 28%
Page 478 of 1358

❖ Inside Design data (Conditions) to be considered.

Dry Bulb Temperature 22 °C (71.6°F) ± 1 °C
Mean Coincident Wet

Bulb Temperature 16.05 °C (60.9°F)
Relative Humidity (%) 55%±5%
Cooling load calculations have been done according to the client's suggested outside & Inside
conditions.
❖ Mechanical Ventilation
Toilet (Public): The exhaust rate shall be 70/50cfm per WC/Urinal and 1 cfm/sqft for
remaining area as per ASHRAE standard 60.1 with equivalent draw of air from adjacent
areas. Under cut of 25-40 mm shall be provided in the main entrance door to the Toilet
for achieving the desired result.
Toilet (Private) : 50 CFM exhaust as per ASHRAE standard 62.1 with equivalent draw
of air from adjacent areas. Under cut of 25-40 mm shall be provided in the main entrance
door to the Toilet for achieving the desired result
❖ Building Data as follows:

For Exposed Brick Wall : U Value = 0.36 BTU/Hr-SqFt-
Deg°F
Glass For Radiation For Exposed Window

(with venetian blind or sun film) : SHGC-0.25.
Glass For Conduction & Convection : U Value = 0.38 BTU/Hr-SqFt-

Deg°F
Insulated Roof : U Value = 0.12 BTU/Hr-SqFt-

Deg°F
A. Exposed Roof to Sun shall be insulated with 50 mm thick (fire retardant TF quality)
Expanded poly styrene or equivalent.
B. All glazing shall be single glass or tinted glass with blinds or heavy drapes from inside.
❖ Occupancy: - In mention attached annexure of Summary heat load sheet.
❖ Fresh Air/Outside Air & Supply Air Changes:-

Outdoor fresh air for Air-conditioned area in considering as per ANSI/ASHRAE Standard
62.1 Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality and 30% additional fresh air
provision to be made to regulate the indoor air quality with CO2 senser as per green
building norms.
Page 479 of 1358

❖ Lighting Load: - mentioned in attached Summary heat load sheet.
❖ Equipment Load: - mentioned in attached Summary heat load sheet.
❖ Estimated Air-containing (Cooling) Load as under: -

Academic Block
Fresh Lighting Heat
Equipment Dehumidified
Particulars Height Area Occupancy Air Load Load
Sr. No. Load (Kw) CFM
(Ft.) (Sq.Ft.) CFM (Kw) (Tr)
Ground Floor
Classroom
1. 19 2246 76 916 8.98 2.25 18.1 6931
1
Classroom
2 19 2246 76 916 8.98 2.25 18 6931
2
Classroom 19 76 7058
3 2246 916 8.98 2.69 18.3
3
Classroom
4 19 2246 76 916 8.98 2.69 18 7058
4
Classroom 19 2246 76 916 8.98 2.69 18 6931

5
5
Classroom
6 19 2246 76 916 8.98 2.69 18 6931
6
Classroom
19 31 4342
7 1 (30 seat) 727 359 4.00 0.73 9.5
Classroom-
19 727 31 4.00 0.73 4444
8 2 (30 Seat) 359 9.6
Classroom-
32 727 31 359 4.00 0.73 9.6 4444
9 3 (30 Seat)
10 Café-1 32 1700 68 1061 6.80 2.55 25.7 11329
11 Café-2 19 1700 68 1061 6.80 2.55 26 11329
Syndicate
12 19.0 153 3 31 0.31 0.18 1.7 891
Room-1
Syndicate
13 19.0 153 3 31 0.31 0.18 1.7 891
Room-2
Syndicate
14 19.0 153 3 31 0.31 0.18 1.7 891
Room-3
Syndicate
15 19.0 153 3 31 0.31 0.18 1.7 891
Room-4
Syndicate
16 19.0 153 3 31 0.31 0.18 1.7 891
Room-5
17 Syndicate 19.0 153 3 31 0.31 0.18 1.7 891
Page 480 of 1358

Room-6
18 Office - 1 19.0 301 6 62 0.60 0.30 2.1 959
19 Office - 2 19.0 301 6 62 0.6 0.30 2.1 959
20 Lobby 19 879 35 410 1.32 1.76 12.5 6080
Total Load
for Ground
21454 750.0 9418.9 67.1 26.0 210.7 87277.0
Floor
First Floor
Classroom 22.6 3895 152 16132

1 1786 16.36 3.90 39.2
1
Classroom 22.6 3895 152 16.36 3.90 16786

2 1786 40.1
2
Classroom
3 22.6 3895 152 1786 16.36 3.90 40.1 16132
3
Classroom 22.6 152 16.36 3.90

4 3895 1786 40 16786
4
Classroom
5 22.6 3895 152 1786 16.36 3.90 39.8 16554
5
Classroom 22.6 3895 152 16.36 3.90 39.8 16554

6 1786
6
Academic
22.6 727 24 1.82 0.73 4374
7 Associate 1 291 8.9
Academic
22.6 727 24 291 1.82 0.73 8.9 4374
8 Associate 2
Academic
9 22.6 727 24 291 1.82 0.73 8.9 4346
Associate 3
Syndicate
10 22.6 153 3 31 0.31 0.18 2.0 1078
Room 1
Syndicate
11 22.6 153 3 31 0.31 0.18 2.0 1078
Room 2
Syndicate
12 22.6 153 3 31 0.31 0.18 2.0 1078
Room 3
Syndicate
13 22.6 153 3 31 0.31 0.18 2.0 1078
Room 4
Syndicate
14 22.6 153 3 31 0.31 0.18 2.0 1078
Room 5
Syndicate
15 153 153 3 31 0.31 0.18 2.0 1078
Room 6
Faculty
16 12.1 138 3 31 0.31 0.18 1.5 774
Room-1
Faculty
17 12.1 138 3 31 0.31 0.18 1.5 774.0
Room-2
Page 481 of 1358

Faculty
18 12.1 138 3 31 0.31 0.18 1.5 774.0
Room-3
Faculty
19 12.1 138 3 31 0.31 0.18 1.5 774.0
Room-4
Faculty
12.1 138 3 30 0.28 0.17 1.5 753
21 Room-6
Faculty
12.1 138 3 30 0.28 0.17 1.5 753
22 Room-7
Faculty
12.1 138 3 30 0.28 0.17 1.5 753
23 Room-8
Faculty 753
24 Room-9 12.1 138 3 30 0.28 0.17 1.5 .0
Faculty
12.1 138 3 30 0.28 0.17 1.5 753
25 Room-10
Faculty
12.1 138 3 30 0.28 0.17 1.5 753
26 Room-11
Faculty
12.1 138 3 30 0.28 0.17 1.5 753
27 Room-12
Faculty
12.1 138 3 30 0.28 0.17 1.5 753
28 Room-13
Faculty 753
29 Room-14 12.1 138 3 30 0.28 0.17 1.5 .0
Faculty 753
30 Room-15 12.1 138 3 30 0.28 0.17 1.5 .0
Faculty 753
31 Room-16 12.1 138 3 30 0.28 0.17 1.5 .0
Faculty
12.1 138 3 30 0.28 0.17 1.5 753.0
32 Room-17
Faculty
12.1 138 3 30 0.28 0.17 1.5 753
32 Room-17
Faculty
33 12.1 138 3 30 0.28 0.17 1.5 753.0
Room -18
Total of
28949 1056 12320 94 30 299 128358
First floor
Second Floor
Faculty
1 12.1 138 3 30 0.28 0.17 1.5 753.0
Room-1
Faculty
2 12.1 138 3 30 0.28 0.17 1.5 753.0
Room-2
Faculty
3 12.1 138 3 30 0.28 0.17 1.5 753.0
Room-3
Faculty
4 12.1 138 3 30 0.28 0.17 1.5 753.0
Room-4
5 Faculty 12.1 138 3 30 0.28 0.17 1.5 753.0
Page 482 of 1358

Room-5
Faculty
6 12.1 138 3 30 0.28 0.17 1.5 753.0
Room-6
Faculty
7 12.1 138 3 30 0.28 0.17 1.5 753.0
Room-7
Faculty
8 12.1 138 3 30 0.28 0.17 1.5 753.0
Room-8
Faculty
9 12.1 138 3 30 0.28 0.17 1.5 753.0
Room-9
Faculty
21 12.1 138 3 30 0.28 0.17 1.5 753.0
Room - 21
Faculty
22 12.1 138 3 30 0.28 0.17 1.5 753.0
Room -22
Faculty
23 12.1 138 3 30 0.28 0.17 1.5 753.0
Room - 23
Faculty
24 12.1 138 3 30 0.28 0.17 1.5 753.0
Room -24
Faculty
25 12.1 138 3 30 0.28 0.17 1.5 753.0
Room - 25
Faculty
26 12.1 138 3 30 0.28 0.17 1.5 753.0
Room -26
Faculty
27 12.1 138 3 30 0.28 0.17 1.5 753.0
Room - 27
Faculty
28 12.1 138 3 30 0.28 0.17 1.5 753.0
Room -28
Total of
Second 3856 84 847 8 5 42 21084
floor
Fourth Floor
Faculty
1 12.1 314 6 63 0.31 0.31 3.04 1532
Lounge-1
Faculty
2 12.1 314 6 63 0.31 0.31 3.0 1532.0
Lounge-2
Faculty
3 12 138 3 30 0.28 0.17 1.5 753
Room-3
Faculty
4 12.1 138 3 30 0.28 0.17 1.5 753.0
Room-4
Faculty
5 12.1 138 3 30 0.28 0.17 1.5 753.0
Room-5
Faculty
6 12.1 138 3 30 0.28 0.17 1.5 753.0
Room-6
Faculty
7 12.1 138 3 30 0.28 0.17 1.5 753.0
Room-7
Faculty
8 12.1 138 3 30 0.28 0.17 1.5 753.0
Room-8
9 Faculty 12.1 138 3 30 0.28 0.17 1.5 753.0
Page 483 of 1358

Room-9
Faculty
10 12.1 138 3 30 0.28 0.17 1.5 753.0
Room-10
Faculty
11 12.1 138 3 30 0.28 0.17 1.5 753.0
Room-11
Faculty
12 12.1 138 3 30 0.28 0.17 1.5 753.0
Room-12
Faculty
13 12.1 138 3 30 0.28 0.17 1.5 753.0
Room-13
Faculty
14 12.1 138 3 30 0.28 0.17 1.5 753.0
Room-14
Faculty
15 12.1 138 3 30 0.28 0.17 1.5 753.0
Room-15
Faculty
16 12.1 138 3 30 0.28 0.17 1.5 753.0
Room-16
Faculty
17 12.1 138 3 30 0.28 0.17 1.5 753.0
Room-17
Faculty
18 12.1 138 3 30 0.28 0.17 1.5 753.0
Room-18
Faculty
19 12.1 138 3 30 0.28 0.17 1.5 753.0
Room-19
Faculty
20 12.1 138 3 30 0.28 0.17 1.5 753.0
Room-20
Faculty
21 12.1 138 3 30 0.28 0.17 1.5 753.0
Room-21
Faculty
22 12.1 138 3 30 0.28 0.17 1.5 753.0
Room-22
Faculty
23 12.1 138 3 30 0.28 0.17 1.5 753.0
Room-23
Faculty
24 12.1 138 3 30 0.28 0.17 1.5 753.0
Room-24
Faculty
25 12.1 138 3 30 0.28 0.17 1.5 753.0
Room-25
Faculty
26 12.1 138 3 30 0.28 0.17 1.5 753.0
Room-26
Total of
Fourth 3933 84 853 7 5 42 21136
Floor
Grand
58192 1974 23438 209 65 613 270822
Total
5. Proposed Air-Conditioning System

Based on the basis of design, available drawings Details, the load works out to be 613 TR . following
energy efficient option for the Air-conditioning System has been selected:
Based on the load, we have proposed the variable refrigerant volume / flow air-condition system
Page 484 of 1358

as follows:
Academic Block - 770HP / 616TR

(After selecting standard unit & technology)
6. System Description
6.1 VRV/VRF (Variable refrigerant volume/Flow) is an air-

condition system for commercial building applications
with sophisticated individual zone control.
These systems are the most versatile of the multi-split
systems as the indoor units may function individually.
These systems are widely used in commercial Purpose.

➢ VRV/VRF system has an Outdoor unit, Indoor unit,
REFnet.
Piping system & an inbuilt BMS
➢ Each room/Area will have fan coil /AHU/cassette type

indoor unit having fan, coil, UVGI system and filter
(MERV-8) housed in a cabinet.
All these indoor units shall be with occupancy senser and

will be connected to a group of outdoor units through
refrigerant and communication cables.
High quality refrigerant joints. Refrigerant piping and
cabling will be laid through shaft to the terrace level OR
deck area near to balcony.
➢ Outdoor units will be located at the terrace level

isolated to outside view taking advantage of roof
structure; sufficient maintenance and air circulation
space will be available surrounding the outdoor units.
➢ Co2 Sensor with motorized VCD in fresh air duct shall

be provided to maintain indoor air quality as per
ECBC guidelines.
As described above VRV/VRF system will consist of the following components:

➢ Heat pump type OR Cooling Only Condensing unit
➢ AHU/cassette type indoor unit
➢ Ref.net Joints & Headers
➢ Individual Remote controller in each room
➢ BACnet & LON WORKS interface to integrate VRV/VRF system with BMS
Advantages Of VRV/VRF System:

➢ Environment Friendly:
Page 485 of 1358

The modern VRV/VRF system used HCFC free R 410A refrigerant as a media. Hence it does not
contribute to ozone depletion. Also due to its high COP especially at the part load condition,
commonly prevailing in Office application. VRV/VRF system has lower global warming impact on
Environment.
➢ Noise Level:
Indoor units possess very low sound level in the range of 32 d
to 38 dB., in addition outdoor units are also reasonably quiet
and sound level of ODU are in the range of 68 dB. Moreover
VRV/VRF outdoor unit have very advance “NIGHT QUIET MODE
“, which brings down noise level of outdoor units up to 13 dB
when capacity requirement is lower during night operation. This can be achieved by both auto and
manual mode.
➢ Outdoor Unit Placement:

For all areas, it is very convenient to place outdoor units on the terrace or Same lvl of Floor OR
Utility platform. This will completely hide the outdoor units and also provide sufficient service
space. Also, shafts containing refrigerant piping will be very close to outdoor unit location. VRV/VRF
system can achieve long ref. pipe length up to 165mt. between indoor and outdoor units. This
makes it possible to have outdoor units at desired location.
➢ Enteral Monitoring & Control:

Simplified but advance central control air conditioning
management system that gives complete control of VRV/VRF air
conditioning equipment can be provided in accordance with
building management requirement. These controls can be used
without full time supervision. VRV/VRF offers multifunctional
centralized as well as localized control management system to
centrally control and monitored Temperature settings, Time
scheduling, Change over, Malfunction alarm and various energy
saving features. It can also be hooked up with Fire and Security
system.
➢ Individual Control:
VRV/VRF is a completely variable system and has negligible fixed energy components. This
characteristic makes it highly suitable for applications such as this, which has constantly changing
occupancy of a bldg. It provides each room with independent control, allows system shutdown in
areas where no Air-conditioning is required and accordingly power consumption of the system will
reduce proportionately. It has characteristic of better energy efficiency at part load condition.
➢ Easy Maintenance:
It is completely self-diagnostic system and generates error codes on remote control display
indicating the type of error occurred. Also, this modular system doesn’t need any standby
equipment because if one compressor is malfunctioning, other takes over emergency operation.
If an outdoor unit malfunctions, another provides emergency operation till repair is done.
7. Ventilation System: -
Page 486 of 1358

Building Ventilation
➢ All public Toilets shall be connected to the mechanical ventilation system consisting of in-line
fan with exhaust duct.
➢ The toilet block of the faculty room will be ventilated and cooled by the heat recovery unit.
(Battery room exhaust shall be done with hydrogen sensor)
➢ Smoke Extraction ventilation system shall be provided in public area as per NBC norms.
8. Low side work of HVAC in various areas

All area shall be air conditioned through Individual ceiling mounted/Floor mounted AC Unit, Ceiling
mounted cassette unit. Outdoor air requirement shall be met through louver installed on External
wall. The Temperature shall be 22 +/- 1 deg cel and Rh around 55% +/- 5.
9. Technical Specification of Selected Equipment of Air Condition system

Air Cooled Variable refrigerant volume/Flow: -
⚫ All the VRV/VRF shall be working on non-CFC environmentally free refrigerant R410A.
⚫ It is proposed to install Efficiency Fully Inverter type scroll/rotary Compressors with COP of
minimum.
⚫ 3.28 at AHRI conditions and IEER not less than 6.5 and part load COP 4.7 at 50 percent load.
⚫ Operation cost is less as compared to chillers.
The selected VRV/VRF shall be with microprocessor-based control panel with open communication
protocol to facilitate data logging and monitoring on IBMS. All VRV systems integrated in single
controller and further it will be integrated to building BMS system.
Air Handling unit (AHU) Connecting to VRV /VRF AC system.

⚫ The double skin with Double or Single tracer air handling units (with mixing box wherever
specified).
⚫ The AHU housing shall be constructed of 1 mm thick galvanized pre-plasticised/powder
coated sheet on outside and 0.8 mm thick plain GI sheet inside with PUF of 38 kg/m3 density
insulation in between sheets to make 25 or 50 mm thick finished panels as applied on
requirement.
⚫ The AHU shall have a fan section with PLUG forward/break ward curved centrifugal fan.
⚫ The AHU shall insulate joint less stainless-steel condensate drain pan.
⚫ The AHU shall have one Stage Filtration Banks as required.
⚫ Maximum face velocity across prefilters and filters : 2.54 m/sec (500 fpm)
⚫ Maximum face velocity across cooling coils : 2.54 m/sec (500 fpm)
⚫ Maximum fan outlet velocity : 9.14 m/sec (1800 fpm)
⚫ All AHUs shall be with electronic commutated (EC) Motor operated through DOL starter panel.
(The AHU drain shall be connected with nearest drain point and one AFU filter cleaning point
to be provided in each floor).
10. Duct, Pipe & Insulation

⚫ Air conditioning & Small toilet ducts shall be factory fabricated from galvanized steel sheets
(Class VII) of various thicknesses ranging from 24 Gauge (0.8mm) to 18 (1.2mm) gauge
according to duct sizes and in accordance with SMACNA/IS:655 standards.
⚫ Motorized smoke dampers shall be installed within supply air ducts and return air ducts at
Page 487 of 1358

AHU room wall crossings (if have AHU room), to prevent spread of smoke / fire to the
adjoining areas. Smoke & Fire dampers shall be motorized and shall be actuated by smoke
sensor as per fire regulations. Air handling units shall also be tripped when smoke is sensed
in the conditioned area served by the air handling unit.
⚫ Design parameter for Duct design shall be:

Maximum flow velocity in ducts for air conditioning : 7.5 m / sec (1500 fpm)
Maximum flow velocity in ducts for ventilation in : 7.5 m / sec – 12.5 m / Sec
toilet exhaust & Kitchen exhaust (1500 – 2500 FPM)
Maximum friction : 0.95 Pa / M run
(0.1-inch WG/100 ft run)
⚫ Grilles/ diffusers shall be powder coated extruded aluminum construction and shall be
provided as per the requirement of interior design.
⚫ Design parameter for Grill /Diffuser design shall be:

Maximum face velocity : 500 FPM
Sound level : NC35
Maximum pressure drop : 4 mm Wg
Throw : As per interior layout
⚫ The refrigerant piping of VRF AC system shall be taken from the indoor units to outdoor units
at ceiling & dedicated vertical shaft of VRF AC pipe.
⚫ For better continuous support the refrigerant piping of the VRF system will be run in the cable
tray.
⚫ Condensate drain piping shall be UPVC confirming to relevant BIS Codes.
10.1 Insulation
➢ Ducting Insulation material to be nitrile rubber insulation with fire performance Class “O”.
Insulation shall be Finished with Fiber glass cloth for mechanical protection.
➢ Ducting position Insulation Thickness

SA duct in RA path : 19mm Ducted return air system
SA duct : 19mm
RA duct : 19mm
Both SA& RA exposed : Both 25mm
Acoustic Insulation : 25mm
AHU Room Acoustic Insulation : 50mm (Resin bonded fiber glass)
➢ Refrigerant copper piping shall be Insulated by nitrile rubber insulation with fire performance
Class “O”.
➢ The exposed (directly to the sun) insulation shall be finished with 7 mil thick fiber glass cloth
with covered a minimum of two layers of UV protection paint / coat for mechanical and UV
protection.
➢ Condensate drain piping shall be Insulated by nitrile rubber insulation with fire performance
Page 488 of 1358

Class “O”.
11. Noise Criterion

➢ Mechanical services shall generally be designed and installed with provisions to contain noise
and the transmission of vibration, generated by moving plant and equipment at source to
achieve acceptable noise rating for NC levels for occupied spaces. Vibration isolators shall be
designed for minimum isolation efficiency of 90%.
➢ All items of rotating plant and equipment shall be isolated from the foundation / structure by
the use of anti-vibration materials, mountings or spring-loaded supports fixed to either
concrete bases, inertia blocks or support steels.
➢ acoustic lining shall be installed in ducts Acoustic performance of the attenuators shall meet
or exceed the 35 TO 45 dB(A).
12. The following IS CODES will be applicable for the project.
IS: 659 - 1964 : Safety Code for Air-conditioning.

IS: 660 - 1963 : Safety Code for Mechanical Ref.
IS: 325 - 1970 : Specifications for 3 Ph. Induction Motor. Also confirm to IS :1231
for Foot Mounted & IS: 2223 for flange mounted motors.
IS: 2147 - 1962 : Degree of protection provided by enclosures for low voltage
switch and control gears.
IS: 3012 - 1965 : Code of Practice for installation (PART-I) & maintenance of
switchgear.
IS: 3016 - 1982 : Code of Practice for Fire precautions in welding and cutting
operations.
IS: 3615 - 1967 : Glossary of terms used in Refrigeration and Air-
conditioning.
IS Std.For Insulation Work-

IS: 7240 - 1981 : Code of Practice for Application and finishing of Thermal
Insulation.
IS: 3069 : Glossary of Items symbols & units relating to thermal
materials.
IS: 655 – 2006 : Ducting work.
IS: 277 : For Sheet galvanizing spec.
13. Underdeck Insulation

50 mm Thickness of Underdeck insulation will consider at Top terrace floor ceiling with adequate
false ceiling as require.
14. Wall Acoustic Insulation

Acoustic lining on wall and ceiling of AHU rooms with 50mm thick, density 32 kg/cu.m resin bonded
glass fiber insulation friction fixed in 610mm x 610 mm framework made of 25X50X50X50X25 mm
made out of 0.6mm thick GI sheet U shaped channel and covered with reinforced fiber glass tissue
and finished with 0.80 mm perforated aluminum sheet etc. complete as required.
Page 489 of 1358

HVAC SYSTEM DBR

FOR

refrigerants. The proposed building shall be GRIHA certified. The HVAC system shall be done as
per the GRIHA guidelines. All HVAC and electrical equipment’s shall be five-star rated. or highest
star rating as available
2. Introduction.
Refrigerant Volume / flow system (VRF /VRV) for MDC Incubation.
3. Design Standards

-Fundamentals 2017
-HVAC Systems and Equipment 2016
-HVAC Applications 2015
4. Basic Consideration for Estimation

Latitude : 22.43°N
Altitude : 567MTRs

To be considered for
Summer Monsoon
Dry Bulb Temperature Summer
41.1 °C (106°F) 32.2°C (90°F)
46 °C (114.8°F)
Mean Coincident Wet
Bulb Temperature 25.0 °C (77°F) 27.77°C (82°F) 28.6 °C (83.6°F)
Page 490 of 1358

❖ Inside Design data (Conditions) as per client requirement

Mean Coincident Wet

conditions.
Toilet (Public) : The exhaust rate shall be 70/50cfm per WC/Urinal and 1 cfm/sqft for
remaining area as per ASHRAE standard 60.1 with equivalent draw of air from adjacent
areas. Under cut of 25- 40 mm shall be provided in the main entrance door to the Toilet
for achieving the desired result.
Toilet (Private) : 50 CFM exhaust as per ASHRAE standard 62.1 with equivalent draw of
air from adjacent areas. Under cut of 25-40 mm shall be provided in the main entrance
door to the Toilet for achieving the desired result.
➢ For Exposed Brick Wall : U Value = 0.36 BTU/Hr-SqFt-Deg°F
➢ Glass For Radiation For Exposed Window : SHGC-0.25.

(with venetian blind or sun film)
➢ Glass For Conduction & Convection : U Value = 0.38 BTU/Hr-SqFt-Deg°F
➢ Insulated Roof : U Value = 0.12 BTU/Hr-SqFt-Deg°F
A. Exposed Roof to Sun shall be insulated with 50 mm thick (fire retardant TF quality) Expanded
poly styrene or equivalent.
❖ Fresh Air/Outside Air & Supply Air Changes: -
➢ Outdoor fresh air for Air-conditioned area in considering as per ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 62.1-
2016- Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality and 30% additional fresh air provision to
be made to regulate the indoor air quality with CO2 senser as per green building norms.
Page 491 of 1358

❖ Lighting Load: - mentioned in attached Summary heat load sheet.
❖ Equipment Load: - mentioned in attached Summary heat load sheet.

MDC Incubation & Academic Building
Sr Equipm Lighti
Heig Fres Heat
. Area Occupa ent ng Dehumidi
Particulars ht h Air Load
N (Sq.Ft) ncy Load Load fied CFM
(Ft.) CFM (Tr)
o (Kw) (Kw)
Ground Floor
Classroom
1 16.1 2443 56 737 7.33 2.44 15.7 6443
1
Classroom
2 16.1 2690 60 795 8.07 2.69 16.8 6864
2
Collaborati
3 16 2712 68 874 2.71 2.71 17.4 6644
on Space
4 Lobby 30.8 341 11 134 0.34 0.34 3.9 1859

Work 32 7 1
5 14.1 7 0.66 0.33 717
Office-1 9 1 .7
Work 32 7 1
6 14.1 7 0.66 0.33 716
Office-2 9 1 .7
Total of 88 5
209 2682 20 9 23243
Ground floor 44 7
First Floor
FPM 658.
1 14.1 1689.3 54 7.1 1.69 13.6 5375
Classroom 3
Classroom 794.
2 14.1 2690 60 8.07 2.69 16.4 6551
3 8
First floor
3 14.1 2141.2 43 167 1.07 2.14 10.8 5975
Passage
VLPE
4 14.1 1549 44 550 6.2 1.55 10.3 3800
Classroom
VLPE
5 14.1 269 3 50 0.81 0.27 1.6 821
Studio
Total of
8339 204 2220 23 8 53 22522
First floor
Second Floor
Teleconfere
1 14.1 308 12 102 0.62 0.31 2.7 1162
ncing
Interaction
2 14.1 495 16 143 0.99 0.49 3.8 1510
Space
Page 492 of 1358

3 Work Office 14.1 2970 59 615 5.94 2.97 15.9 7126
Second
4 14.1 2120 21 465 1.06 2.12 11.4 4741
Floor Passage
Work Office
5 14.1 153 21 31 0.31 0.15 0.9 434
Cabin-1
Work Office
6 14.1 80 3 26 0.16 0.08 0.8 356
Cabin-2
Work Office
7 14.1 138 3 30.3 0.28 0.14 0.6 232
Cabin-3
Work Office
8 14.1 138 3 30 0.28 0.14 0.6 232
Cabin-4
Work Office
9 14.1 138 3 30 0.28 0.14 0.6 232
Cabin-5
1 Work Office
14.1 138 3 30 0.28 0.14 0.6 232
0 Cabin-6
1 Work Office
14.1 138 3 30 0.28 0.14 0.6 232
1 Cabin-7
1 Conference 105.
14.1 355 12 0.53 0.36 2.4 979
2 Room 7
1 Small Work
14.1 227 6 57 0.45 0.23 1.7 809
3 Office -1
1 Small Work
14.1 181 5 47 0.36 0.18 1.3 616
4 Office -2
1 Small Work
14.1 185 5 46.9 0.37 0.19 1.3 621
5 Office -3
1 Work Office
14.1 355 7 73 0.71 0.36 2.3 1106
6 Cabin-4
1 Small
14.1 170 6 52 0.17 0.17 1.2 506
7 Collab. Room
1 Server
14.1 348.6 1 0 17.43 0.35 7.1 4391
8 Room
Total of
8638 189 1915 30 9 56 25517
Second Floor
Grand Total
of MDC
Incubation 25821 602 6817 73 26 166 71282
Centre
Note 1 – The loads are revised as per latest architectural layouts and green building
Page 493 of 1358

parameters mentioned above.

Based on the basis of design, available drawings Details, the load works out to be 166 TR . following
energy efficient option for the Air-conditioning System has been selected:
Based on the load, we have proposed the variable refrigerant volume / flow air-condition system
as follows
Academic Block - 191HP / 152.8 TR (After selecting standard unit & technology)
6.1 VRV/VRF (Variable refrigerant volume/Flow) is an

air-condition system for commercial building application
with sophisticated individual zone control. These
systems are the most versatile of the multi-split systems
as the indoor units may function individually.

➢ VRV/VRF system has an Outdoor unit, Indoor unit,
REFnet Piping system & an inbuilt BMS
➢ Each room/Area will have fan coil /AHU/cassette

type indoor unit having fan, coil, UVGI system and
filter (MERV-8) housed in a cabinet. All these indoor
units shall be with occupancy senser and will be
connected to a group of outdoor units through
refrigerant and communication cables. High quality
refrigerant joints. Refrigerant piping and cabling will
be laid through shaft to the terrace level OR deck
area near to balcony.
➢ Outdoor units will be located at the terrace level

isolated to outside view taking advantage of roof
structure; sufficient maintenance and air circulation
space will be available surrounding the outdoor
units.
➢ Co2 Sensor with motorized VCD in fresh air duct shall be provided to maintain indoor air
quality as per ECBC guidelines.

➢ FCU/AHU/cassette type indoor unit.
➢ Individual Remote controller in each room
Page 494 of 1358

➢ BACnet & LON WORKS interface to integrate VRV/VRF system with BMS.
ADVANTAGES OF VRV/VRF SYSTEM:
Environment.
➢ Noise Level:
Indoor units possess very low sound level in the range of 32 d to
38 dB., in addition outdoor units are also reasonably quiet and
sound level of ODU are in the range of 68 dB. Moreover VRV/VRF
outdoor unit have very advance “NIGHT QUIET MODE “, which
brings down noise level of outdoor units up to 13 dB when
capacity requirement is lower during night operation. This can
be achieved by both auto and manual mode.

For all areas, it is very convenient to place outdoor units on the terrace or Same level of Floor OR
makes it possible to have outdoor units at the desired location.

Simplified but advance central control air conditioning management system that gives complete
control of VRV/VRF air conditioning equipment can be provided in accordance with building
management requirement. These controls can be used without full time supervision. VRV/VRF
offers multifunctional centralized as well as localized control management system to centrally
control and monitored Temperature settings, Time scheduling, Change over, Malfunction alarm
and various energy saving features. It can also be hooked up with Fire and Security system.
Page 495 of 1358

characteristic makes it highly suitable for application such as this, which has constantly changed
indicating the type of error occurred. Also, this being modular system doesn’t need any standby
If an outdoor unit’s malfunctions, another provides emergency operation till repair is done.
7. Ventilation System:
⚫ All public Toilets shall be connected to the mechanical ventilation system consisting of in-line
fan with exhaust duct. Battery room exhaust shall be done with hydrogen sensor.
⚫ Smoke Extraction ventilation system shall be provided in public area as per NBC norms.

➢ All the VRV/VRF shall be working on non-CFC environmentally free refrigerant R410A.
➢ It is proposed to install Efficiency Fully Inverter type scroll/rotary Compressors with COP of
minimum 3.28 at AHRI conditions and IEER not less than 6.5 and part load COP 4.7 at 50
percent load.
➢ Operation cost is less as compared to chillers.

➢ The double skin with Double or Single tracer air handling units (with mixing box wherever
specified).
➢ The AHU housing shall be constructed of 1 mm thick galvanized pre-plasticised/powder
requirement.
➢ The AHU shall have a fan section with PLUG forward/break ward curved centrifugal fan.
➢ The AHU shall insulate joint less stainless-steel condensate drain pan.
➢ The AHU shall have one Stage Filtration Banks as required.
➢ Maximum face velocity across prefilters and filters : 2.54 m/sec (500 fpm)
➢ Maximum face velocity across cooling coils : 2.54 m/sec (500 fpm)
➢ Maximum fan outlet velocity : 9.14 m/sec (1800 fpm)
Page 496 of 1358

➢ All AHUs shall be with electronical commutated (EC) Motor operated through DOL starter
panel. (The AHU drain shall be connected with nearest drain point and one AFU filter cleaning
point to be provided in each floor)

according to duct sizes and in accordance with SMACNA standards.
⚫ Motorized smoke dampers shall be installed within supply air ducts and return air ducts at
Maximum flow velocity in ducts for ventilation in : 7.5 m / sec – 12.5 m /Sec
Sound level : NC35
Maximum pressure drops : 4 mm Wg
⚫ The refrigerant piping of VRF AC system shall be taken from the indoor units to outdoor units
⚫ For better continuous support the refrigerant piping of the VRF system will be run in the cable
tray.
⚫ Condensate drain piping shall be UPVC confirming to relevant BIS Codes for all indoor units.
10.1 Insulation
SA duct in RA path : 19mm Ducted return air system
SA duct : 19mm
RA duct : 19mm
Both SA& RA exposed : Both 25mm
Class “O”.
protection.
Page 497 of 1358

Class “O”.
11. Noise Criterion


IS: 325 - 1970 : Specifications for 3 Ph. Induction Motor. Also confirm to IS :1231
switchgear.
operations.
conditioning.

Insulation.
IS: 3069 : Glossary of Items symbols & units relating to thermal
materials.

50 mm. thick Under deck insulation will consider on ceiling of Top floor with adequate false ceiling
as require.

Page 498 of 1358

HVAC SYSTEM DBR

FOR
BOY’S & GIRL’S HOSTEL
A. Pressurization Systems Of Stairwell/Lift Well/Lift Lobby (Of Fire Tower)
1. Introduction
In a high-rise building, the stairs typically represent the sole means of egress during a fire. It is
imperative for the exit stairs to be free of smoke and to incorporate design features that improve
the speed of occupant egress. Most building codes require the fire stairwells in a high-rise building
to be pressurized to keep smoke out.
2. Codes and Design Standards

➢ National Buildings Code 2016

➢ NFPA 101 – Life Safety Code
➢ NFPA 92A – Recommended Practice for Smoke Control Systems
➢ NFPA 92B – Guide for Smoke Management in Malls, Atria, and Large Areas
➢ NFPA 90 - Standard for Installation of Air-conditioning and Ventilating system.
➢ ASHRAE 1999 HVAC Applications, Chapter 52, Fire and Smoke Management
➢ ASHRAE Principals of Smoke Management Handbook
➢ British Standard BS5588 - Smoke Control in Protected Escape Route using Pressurization.
➢ British Standard BS 5720 - Code of Practice for Mechanical Ventilation and Air Conditioning in
Building
Page 499 of 1358

3. Pressurization system
Pressurization is a method adopted for protecting the exits from ingress of smoke, especially in
high rise buildings.in pressurization, air is injected into the staircase to raise their pressure slightly
above the pressure in adjacent parts of the building. As a result, ingress of smoke or toxic gases
into the exits will be prevented. The pressurization of staircases shall be adopted as given from
(NBC2016 VOLUME-1 part4 fire and life safety table-6). The pressure difference for staircase shall
be 50 pa in case of fire in staircase & lift well. the pressure difference for staircase shall be 25 pa
in case of fire in staircase & lift lobby of fire tower.
4. Air Flow calculation of Pressurization air flow

Staircase Pressurization Calculation sheet (15 floor for present and 2nos floor consider for future
provision)
Ref Clause: 1 As per NBC Part 4 (Fire & Life Safety) >> Annexure C >> Clause C.1.5.g (Page 65),
a positive pressure 50 Pa shall be maintained inside Stair well.
AREA = Hostel Building

Q1 0.839A√∆ P (AS PER ASHRAE Standard -chapter-
=
52)
Q2 = Air leakage in Cumt / Sec
A Area of leakage in Sq.mt

=
∆p = Pressure difference in Pa
Coefficient 0.839
=
Total Nos. of Staircase = 1 Nos.

FROM / UPTO = Ground To 14th floor+(2 nos floor for future
provision)
No of Levels 17 NOS
=
No. of Open doors 2 NOS
=
Door size (Mtr) = WXH
1.50 X 2.1
Type of Door : Double Leaf
Page 500 of 1358

Leakage Area (Based on ASHRAE-Principles of

Smoke Management: Chapter 6_Table 6.3) = 0.03 Sq.mt
Gap Thickness at Top &
Sides 2.03 mm
Gap Thickness at Bottom 5 mm
Flow Coefficient C 0.65
i.e. Area of Leakage in closed condition /Door = 0.03 Sq.mt
No. of Levels (-) Open

Total area of all doors = Area (Sqmt) x door
= 0.03 x 15
= 0.45 Sq.mt
Positive ∆p to be maintained in the Liftwell = 50Pa

50.00 Pa i.e. 5 mm
Q1 (Air Volume required to maintain 50 Pa
differential Pressure in all Door closed

condition) = A(Total leakage area
X
= 0.839 X : sqmt) √∆p(Pa)
X
= 0.839 X 0.45 7.071
2.67 Cumt / Sec
X
Q2 (Leakage of air through Open Doors) =
Area of Open doors Nos. of door X Velocity Across door
= X
open (mtr/sec)
Q2 = 1.50 X 2.1 X 2 0.75
Total Air Volume required (Cumt / Sec) = 4.73 Cumt / Sec
Page 501 of 1358

= Q1 + Q2
=
2.67 + 4.73
7.39 Cumt / Sec

Total Air Volume required (Cuft / Min i.e. CFM) = Cumt / Sec X 60 X 35.28
15653
Total (considering 10% air leakage through ducts
& structures) = 17218 CFM
FAN CAPACITY REQUIRED FOR EACH

LIFTWELL = 17218 CFM Selected FAN 17300
CFM / LANDING = 1013 CFM
Page 502 of 1358

Lift well Pressurization Calculation sheet (15 floor for present and 2nos floor consider for future provision)
Ref Clause: 1 As per NBC Part 4 (Fire & Life Safety) >> Annexure C >> Clause C.1.5.g (Page 65), a positive pressure 50 Pa shall be maintained inside Liftwell.
Page 503 of 1358

Q1 = 0.839A√∆ P (AS PER ASHRAE

Standard-chapter- 52)
A = Area of leakage in Sq.mt
Coefficient = 0.839
=
Total Nos. of Lift wells = 1 Nos.
FROM / UPTO = Ground To 14th floor+(2
nos floor for future provision)
No of Levels = 17 NOS
No. of Open doors = 1 NOS
Door size(Mtr) = W X H
1.50 X 2.1
Page 504 of 1358

Leakage Area (Based on ASHRAE-Principles of = 0.03 Sq.mt

Smoke Management: Chapter 6_Table 6.3)
Gap Thickness at Top & 2.0
Sides 3 mm
Total area of all doors = Area (Sqmt) x No. of Levels - Open door
= 0.03 x 16
= 0.48 Sq.mt
5
Positive ∆p to be maintained in the Lift well = 50.00 Pa i.e. 5 mm 0
Pa
differential Pressure in all Door closed A(Total leakage area :sqmt) √∆p(Pa
condition) = 0.839 X X )
= 0.839 X 0.48 7.071
X
2.85 Cumt / Sec
=
Nos. of door Velocity Across door (mtr/sec)
Area of Open doors X open
Q2 (Leakage of air through Open Doors) = X
1.50 X 2.1 X 1 0.75
= X
Q2 = 2.36 Cumt / Sec

Q1 + Q2
Total Air Volume required (Cumt / Sec) =
2.85 + 2.36
=
5.21 Cumt / Sec
=
Page 505 of 1358

11029
Total (considering 10% air leakage through

ducts & structures) = 12132 CFM

Page 506 of 1358

Lift Lobby Pressurization Calculation sheet (15 floor for present and 2nos floor consider for future provision)
Ref Clause: 1 As per NBC Part 4 (Fire & Life Safety) >> Annexure C >> Clause C.1.5.g (Page 65), a positive pressure 30 Pa shall be maintained inside Lift lobby.
Q1 =
0.839A√∆ P (AS PER ASHRAE Standard -chapter-52)
A =
Area of leakage in Sq.mt
Coefficient = 0.839
Total Nos. of Lift lobby of Each floor = 1 Nos.

FROM / UPTO = Ground To 14th floor+(2 nos floor for future
provision)
No of lift lobby = 17 NOS

No. of Open doors in one floor = 1 NOS in Each Lift lobby
No. of total Open doors = 2 NOS in total Lift lobby
1.50 X 2.1
Page 507 of 1358


Gap Thickness at Top & Sides 2.03 mm
= 0.03 x 15
= 0.45 Sq.mt
Positive ∆p to be maintained in the Liftwell 30.00 Pa i.e. 3 mm 30 Pa
=
Q1 (Air Volume required to maintain 30 Pa 0.839 X A(Total leakage area :sqmt) X √∆p(Pa)
differential Pressure in all Door closed condition) = 0.839 X 0.45 X 5.477
= 2.07 Cumt / Sec
= Area of Open doors Nos. of door X Velocity Across door (mtr/sec)

X open
Q2 (Leakage of air through Open Doors)
1.50 X 2.1 X 2 X 0.75
=
=
Q2
= 4.73 Cumt / Sec
Total Air Volume required (Cumt / Sec)

= Q1 + Q2
= 2.07 + 4.73
Page 508 of 1358

6.79 Cumt / Sec

Cumt / Sec X 60 X 35.28
= 14379
Total Air Volume required (Cuft / Min i.e. CFM)
=
Total (considering 10% air leakage through ducts 15817 CFM
& structures) =
FAN CAPACITY REQUIRED FOR EACH LIFTWELL = 15817 CFM Selected FAN 15900
Page 509 of 1358

5. Equipment and ductwork for Staircase/ lift well / Lift lobby pressurization
Fire staircases shall be provided with pressurization system, consisting of supply air centrifugal
fans installed on terrace of the building. These fans/AHU (fan section only) with double skin
construction as per specification of pressurization fan shall supply air through vertical risers for
achieving effective pressurization. Fans shall be sized to maintain minimum positive pressure (50
Pa in case of staircase) across the door. The operation of these fans shall be interlocked with
smoke detectors and operate automatically upon receiving signal. supply air ductwork used for
comfort the pressurization air systems. The pressurization air can be delivered either from a
dedicated galvanized duct work.
6. Multiple Injection Pressurization

The multiple injection technique supplies air from more than one location. The scheme may use
multiple fans, or a single fan connected to a ducted arrangement with multiple outlets. How far
apart these air injection points should be located is dependent on the height of the building.
Page 510 of 1358

7. Barometric Dampers
Barometric dampers use adjustable counterweights which are adjusted so that the damper opens
when a particular (excessive) pressure is reached. The location of dampers needs to be carefully
chosen since dampers located too close to the supply openings can operate too quickly.
Underdeck insulation 50 mm. thick will be consider at Top floor ceiling with adequate false ceiling
as require.

Page 511 of 1358

HVAC SYSTEM DBR

FOR
MDC ACCOMODATION

refrigerants. The proposed building shall be GRIHA certified. The HVAC system shall be done as
per the GRIHA guidelines. All HVAC and electrical equipment’s shall be five-star rated. or highest
star rating as available.
2. Introduction.
Refrigerant Volume / flow system (VRF /VRV) for Academic Block & MDC Housing Block.
➢ also proposed to provide pressurization system of fire lift well, fire lift lobby & fire staircase
in high rise building according to norms.
3. Design Standards

-Fundamentals 2017

Latitude : 22.43°N
Altitude : 567MTRs

Page 512 of 1358

To be Considered for
Summer Monsoon
Summer
Dry Bulb Temperature 41.1 °C (106°F) 32.2°C (90°F) 46 °C (114.8°F)
Mean Coincident Wet

Mean Coincident Wet

conditions.
remaining area as per ASHRAE standard 60.1 with equivalent draw of air
from adjacent areas. Under cut of 25-40 mm shall be provided in the main
entrance door to the Toilet for achieving the desired result.
Toilet (Private) : 50 CFM exhaust as per ASHRAE standard 62.1 with equivalent draw of
air from adjacent areas. Under cut of 25-40 mm shall be provided in the
main entrance door to the Toilet for achieving the desired result.
Kitchen of Canteen :30-50 Air Changes / hr. (approx.)

(Exhaust Hoods to be considered for the final design of exhaust
& ventilation system)
Smoke Evacuation in case of fire :12 ACPH smoke evacuation with equivalent draw of air
from adjacent areas for makeup.
➢ Glass For Radiation For Exposed Window : SHGC-0.25.

Page 513 of 1358

A. Exposed Roof to Sun shall be insulated with 50 mm thick (fire retardant TF quality) Expanded
poly styrene or equivalent.
❖ Fresh Air/Outside Air & Supply Air Changes: -

➢ Outdoor fresh air for Air-conditioned area in considering as per ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 62.1-
2016- Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality and 30% additional fresh air provision to
be made to regulate the indoor air quality with CO2 senser as per green building norms.
❖ Lighting Load: - Mention in attached Summary heat load sheet.
❖ Equipment Load: - Mention in attached Summary heat load sheet.
MDC housing Block

Heig Are Occupan Fres Equipme Lighti He
Sr Particular ht Dehumidified
a cy hAir nt ng at
. s CFM
(Ft. (Sq. Cfm Load Load Loa
N ) Ft (Kw) d
o (Kw)
) (Tr
)
Ground Floor
1 Faculty
Building 12. 250 85 1496 10.03 2.51 26.8 96
Dining 1 7 60
2 Reception 19. 401 16 135 0.20 0.40 4.7 23
Lounge 4 26
3 Reception 12. 594 15 193 0.30 0.59 4.4 18
Lobby 1 92
4 Fire Control 12. 132 1 17 1.99 0.13 1.10 666
Room 8
Total of Ground floor 3635 117 1841 13 4 37 14544
First Floor
1 Room-1 10. 132 2 23 0.20 0.13 1.1 64
3 0
2 Room-2 10. 132 2 23 0.20 0.13 0.9 44
3 5
3 Room-3 10. 132 2 23 0.20 0.13 0.9 44
3 5
4 Room-4 10. 132 2 23 0.20 0.13 0.9 44
3 5
5 Room-5 10. 132 2 23 0.20 0.13 0.9 44
3 5
6 Room-6 10. 132 2 23 0.20 0.13 1.1 64
3 0
Page 514 of 1358

7 Room-7 10. 132 2 23 0.20 0.13 1.1 63

3 2
8 Room-8 10. 132 2 23 0.20 0.13 1.1 64
3 8
9 Room-9 10. 132 2 23 0.20 0.13 1.1 64
3 8
10 Room-10 10. 132 2 23 0.20 0.13 1.1 64
3 8
Lounge+1500M
11 10. 707 8 94 0.32 0.50 7.1 215
m
3 0
Passage
Total of First floor 203 28 328 2.3 2 17 77
0 90
Second Floor
1 Room-1 10. 132 2 23 0.20 0.13 1.1 64
3 0
2 Room-2 10. 132 2 23 0.20 0.13 0.9 44
3 5
3 Room-3 10. 132 2 23 0.20 0.13 0.9 44
3 5
4 Room-4 10. 132 2 23 0.20 0.13 0.9 44
3 5
5 Room-5 10. 132 2 23 0.20 0.13 0.9 44
3 5
6 Room-6 10. 132 2 23 0.20 0.13 1.1 64
3 0
7 Room-7 10. 132 2 23 0.20 0.13 1.1 63
3 2
8 Room-8 10. 132 2 23 0.20 0.13 1.1 64
3 8
9 Room-9 10. 132 2 23 0.20 0.13 1.1 64
3 8
10 Room-10 10. 132 2 23 0.20 0.13 1.1 64
3 8
Lounge+1500M
11 10. 707 8 94 0.32 0.50 7.1 215
m
3 0
Passage
Total of Second floor 2030 28 328 2.3 2 17 77
90
Total for eight nos.
floor(2 to9th floor) 1624 224 2623 18 15 138.3 62320.0
1
Tenth Floor
1 Room-1 10. 132 2 23 0.20 0.13 1.21 69
3 4
2 Room-2 10. 132 2 23 0.20 0.13 0.93 49
3 9
3 Room-3 10. 132 2 23 0.20 0.13 0.93 49
3 9
4 Room-4 10. 132 2 23 0.20 0.13 0.93 49
3 9
5 Room-5 10. 132 2 23 0.20 0.13 0.93 49
3 9
6 Room-6 10. 132.3 2.0 23 0.20 0.13 1.21 640
3
7 Room-7 10. 132.3 2.0 23 0.20 0.13 1.20 686
Page 515 of 1358

3
8 Room-8 10. 132.3 2.0 23 0.20 0.13 1.22 702
3
9 Room-9 10. 132.3 2.0 23 0.20 0.13 1.22 702
3
10 Room-10 10. 132.3 2.0 23 0.20 0.13 1.22 702
3
Lounge+1500M
11 10. 707 8 94 0.32 0.50 7.5 2458
m
3
Passage
Total of Tenth floor 2030 28.0 328 2 1.8 18.5 8600.0
TFA Load 52.6 6350
Grand Total of MDC housing
Block 23935. 5119.
397.0 33.1 21.9 211.2 93254.0
5 2

Based on the basis of design, available drawings Details, the
load works out to be 211.2 TR. following energy efficient option
for the Air-conditioning System has been selected:
Based on the load, we have proposed the variable refrigerant
volume / flow air-condition system as follows
MDC Housing -244HP / 194TR (After selecting standard unit &

technology)
6.1 VRV/VRF (Variable refrigerant volume/Flow) is an air-
condition system for commercial building applications with
sophisticated individual zone control. These systems are the
most versatile of the multi-split systems as the indoor units may
function individually.
➢ VRV/VRF system has an Outdoor unit, Indoor unit, REFnet
Piping system & an inbuilt BMS.
➢ Each room/Area will have fan coil /AHU/cassette type

indoor unit having fan, coil, UVGI system and filter (MERV-
8) housed in a cabinet. All these indoor units shall be with
occupancy senser and will be connected to a group of outdoor units through refrigerant and
communication cables. High quality refrigerant joints. Refrigerant piping and cabling will be
laid through shaft to the terrace level OR deck area near to balcony.
➢ Outdoor units will be located at the terrace level isolated to outside view taking advantage of
roof structure; sufficient maintenance and air circulation space will be available surrounding
the outdoor units.
Page 516 of 1358

Co2 Sensor with motorized VCD in fresh air duct shall be provided to maintain indoor air quality
as per ECBC guidelines.

➢ FCU/AHU/cassette type indoor unit
➢ Individual Remote controller in Guest room
➢ BACnet & LON WORKS interface to integrate VRV/VRF system with BMS.
ADVANTAGES OF VRV/VRF SYSTEM

Environment.
➢ Noise Level:
Indoor units possess very low sound level in the range of 32 d to
38 dB., in addition outdoor units are also reasonably quiet and
the sound level of ODU are in the range of 68 dB. Moreover
VRV/VRF outdoor unit have very advanced “NIGHT QUIET MODE
“, which brings down noise level of outdoor units up to 13 dB
when capacity requirement is lower during night operation. This
can be achieved by both auto and manual mode.

For all areas, it is very convenient to place outdoor units on the terrace or Same lvl of Floor OR
makes it possible to have outdoor units at the desired location.

Simplified but advanced central control air conditioning
management system that gives complete control of
VRV/VRF air conditioning equipment can be provided in
accordance with building management requirement.
These controls can be used without full-time supervision.
VRV/VRF offers multifunctional centralized as well as
localized control management system to centrally
control and monitored Temperature settings, Time
scheduling, Change over, Malfunction alarm and various
energy saving features. It can also be hooked up with a
Fire and Security system.
Page 517 of 1358

characteristic makes it highly suitable for applications such as this, which has constantly changing
indicating the type of error occurred. Also, this modular system doesn’t need any standby
If an outdoor unit malfunctions, another provides emergency operation till repair is done.
➢ All public Toilets shall be connected to the mechanical ventilation system consisting of in-line
fan with exhaust duct.
➢ Treated fresh air shall be provided in guest rooms.
➢ Battery room exhaust shall be done with hydrogen sensor.
➢ Smoke Extraction ventilation system shall be provided in public area as per NBC norms.
➢ In guest room toilet shall be ventilated by individual wall mounted fans.
➢ Kitchen in providing fresh air by Air-Washer (Air-Cooling) and Exhaust by scrubber.
➢ Kitchen shall be provided with evaporative cooled supply air at compensating hoods. The
system shall consist of centrifugal type fan, air washer with Cellulose Pad, fresh air grille, air
distribution system with grilles, electrical panel, power cabling, control wiring and earthing.
Fresh air shall be drawn from outside through the air washer and supplied to through GSS
ducts and by means of grilles. Similar equipment shall be provided for kitchen exhausting
approximately 10% additional amount of supply air.


➢ All the VRV/VRF shall be working on non-CFC environmentally free refrigerant R410A.
➢ It is proposed to install Efficiency Fully Inverter type scroll/rotary Compressors with COP of
minimum 3.1 at AHRI conditions and IEER not less than 6.5 and part load COP 4.7 at 50
percent load.
➢ Operation cost is less as compared to chillers.

➢ The double skin with Double or Single tracer air handling units (with mixing box wherever
Page 518 of 1358

specified).
➢ The AHU housing shall be constructed of 1 mm thick galvanized pre-plasticized/powder
requirement.
➢ Maximum face velocity across cooling coils : 2.54 m/sec (500 fpm)
point to be provided in each floor).

➢ Air conditioning & Small toilet ducts shall be factory fabricated from galvanized steel sheets
according to duct sizes and in accordance with SMACNA/IS:655 standards.
➢ Motorized smoke dampers shall be installed within supply air ducts and return air ducts at
➢ Design parameter for Duct design shall be:
Maximum flow velocity in ducts for ventilation in : 7.5 m / sec – 12.5 m /Sec
➢ Grilles/ diffusers shall be powder coated extruded aluminum construction and shall be
➢ Design parameter for Grill /Diffuser design shall be:
Sound level : NC35
➢ The refrigerant piping of VRF AC system shall be taken from the indoor units to outdoor units
➢ For better continuous support the refrigerant piping of the VRF system will be run in the cable
tray.
➢ Condensate drain piping shall be UPVC confirming to relevant BIS Codes for all indoor units.
10.1 Insulation: -
Page 519 of 1358

SA duct in RA path :19m

Ducted return air m
system
SA duct : 19mm
RA duct : 19mm
Both SA& RA exposed : Both
25mm
Class “O”.
protection.
Class “O”.
11. Noise Criterion

⚫ Mechanical services shall generally be designed and installed with provisions to contain noise
⚫ All items of rotating plant and equipment shall be isolated from the foundation / structure by
⚫ acoustic lining shall be installed in ducts Acoustic performance of the attenuators shall meet

IS: 325 - 1970 : Specifications for 3 Ph. Induction Motor. Also confirm to IS: 1231
switchgear.
operations.
conditioning.

Page 520 of 1358

Insulation.
IS: 3069 : Glossary of Items symbols & units relating to thermal materials.
13. Mechanical Smoke Extraction (in case of fire):-

This extraction system is adopted for safe escape conditions to be maintained in the corridor and
allow adequate access for fire-fighters. This type of smoke extraction system comprises of a
mechanical extract shaft that serves the common corridor and/ or lobby. When smoke is detected
within a protected lobby, only the fire damper to the smoke shaft on the fire floor will open (all
other dampers will remain locked shut). In turn, the vent at the head of the staircase will open
allowing the smoke to be removed and make up air for the smoke extraction system. The fan at
the top of the mechanical smoke shaft extracts the smoke and prevents migration of smoke into
the adjacent compartments. All corridor and common lift/stair passage area comes under this
system at 12 Air changes per hour, according to the norms of NBC-2016 and NFPA
14. Pressurization Systems Of Stairwell/Lift Well/Lift Lobby (Of Fire Tower)
14.1 Introduction
In a high-rise building, the stairs typically represent the sole means of egress during a fire. These
fans/AHU (fan section only) with double skin construction as per specification of pressurization
fan. It is imperative for the exit stairs to be free of smoke and to incorporate design features that
improve the speed of occupant egress. Most building codes require the fire stairwells in a high-
rise building to be pressurized to keep smoke out.
14.2 Pressurization system

(NBC2016 VOLUME-1 part4 fire and life safety table-6). the pressure difference for staircase shall
be 50 pa in case of fire in staircase & lift well. the pressure difference for the staircase shall be 25-
30 pa in case of fire in staircase & lift lobby of fire tower.
14.3 Air Flow calculation of Pressurization air flow

Staircase Pressurization Calculation sheet (ground + 10 floor for present and 2nos floor
consider for future provision)
Page 521 of 1358

Ref Clause:
1 As per NBC Part 4 (Fire & Life Safety) >> Annexure C >> Clause C.1.5.g (Page 65), a positive
pressure 50 Pa shall be maintained inside Stair well.
AREA = MDC Accommodation
Q1 = 0.839A√∆ P (AS PER ASHRAE Standard -chapter-52)
Coefficient = 0.839
=
FROM / UPTO = Ground To 10th floor+(2 nos floor for future provision)
Door size (Mtr) =

W X H
1.50 X 2.1
Page 522 of 1358

Leakage Area (Based on ASHRAE-Principles of Smoke

Management: Chapter 6_Table 6.3) = 0.03 Sq.mt
Total area of all doors = Area (Sqmt) x No. of Levels (-) Open door
= 0.03 x 11
= 0.33 Sq.mt
Positive ∆p to be maintained in the Liftwell = 50.00 Pa i.e. 5 mm 50 Pa
Q1 (Air Volume required to maintain 50 Pa differential Pressure

in all Door closed condition) = 0.839 X A(Total leakage area :sqmt) X √∆p(Pa)
= 0.839 X 0.33 X 7.071
= 1.96 Cumt / Sec
Velocity Across
Q2 (Leakage of air through Open Doors) = Area of Open doors X Nos. of door open X door (mtr/sec)
= 1.50 X 2.1 X 2 X 0.75
Q2 =
4.73 Cumt / Sec
Q1 + Q2
=
1.96 + 4.73
=
6.68 Cumt / Sec
Total Air Volume required (Cuft / Min i.e. CFM) =
Cumt / Sec X 60 X 35.28
14146
Total ( considering 10% air leakage through ducts & structures) = 15561 CFM
Page 523 of 1358

Lift well Pressurization Calculation sheet(Ground + 10 floor for present and 2nos floor consider for future provision)
Ref Clause:
1 As per NBC Part 4 (Fire & Life Safety) >> Annexure C >> Clause C.1.5.g (Page 65), a positive pressure 50 Pa shall be maintained inside Liftwell.
0.839A√∆ P (AS PER ASHRAE Standard -chapter-

Q1 = 52)
Coefficient = 0.839

1.50 X 2.1
Page 524 of 1358

Leakage Area (Based on ASHRAE-Principles of = Sq.mt

Smoke Management: Chapter 6_Table 6.3) 0.03

=
i.e. Area of Leakage in closed condition /Door 0.03
Sq.mt
= 0.03 x 12
= 0.36 Sq.mt

differential Pressure in all Door closed condition) = 0.839 X A(Total leakage area :sqmt) X √∆p(Pa) 7.071
= 0.839 X 0.36 X
= 2.14 Cumt / Sec
Area of Open doors X Nos. of door open Velocity Across door
1.50 X 2.1 X 1 (mtr/sec)
= X
2.36 Cumt / Sec 0.75
Q2 = Q1 + Q2
Total Air Volume required (Cumt / Sec) = 2.14 + 2.36
= 4.50 Cumt / Sec
= Cumt / Sec X 60 X 35.28
Total Air Volume required (Cuft / Min i.e. CFM) = 9522
Total (considering 10% air leakage through ducts &
Page 525 of 1358

structures) = 10474 CFM
Lift Lobby Pressurization Calculation sheet( Ground + 10 floor for present and 2nos floor consider for future provision)
Ref Clause:
Coefficient = 0.839

1.50 X 2.1
Page 526 of 1358


= 0.03 x 11
= 0.33 Sq.mt
Positive ∆p to be maintained in the Lift Lobby = 30.00 Pa i.e. 3 mm 30 Pa
Q1 (Air Volume required to maintain 30 Pa = 0.839 X A(Total leakage area :sqmt) X √∆p(Pa)
differential Pressure in all Door closed condition) = 0.839 X 0.33 X 5.477
= 1.52 Cumt / Sec
Area of Open doors Nos. of door

= X open X Velocity Across door (mtr/sec)
Q2 (Leakage of air through Open Doors) = 1.50 X 2.1 X 2 X 0.75
Q2 = 4.73 Cumt / Sec
Total Air Volume required (Cumt / Sec) = Q1 + Q2

= 1.52 + 4.73
= 6.24 Cumt / Sec
13212
Total ( considering 10% air leakage through ducts &
structures) = 14533 CFM
Page 527 of 1358

FAN CAPACITY REQUIRED FOR EACH LIFT LOBBY = 14533 CFM Selected FAN 14600
Page 528 of 1358

14.4 Equipment and ductwork for Staircase/ lift well / Lift lobby pressurization
Fire staircases shall be provided with pressurization system, consisting of supply air centrifugal
fans installed on terrace of the building. These fans/AHU (fan section only) with double skin
construction as per specification of pressurization fan. These fans shall supply air through vertical
risers for achieving effective pressurization. Fans shall be sized to maintain minimum positive
pressure (50 Pa in case of staircase) across the door. The operation of these fans shall be
interlocked with smoke detectors and operate automatically upon receiving signal. supply air
ductwork used for comfort the pressurization air systems. The pressurization air can be delivered
either from a dedicated galvanized duct work.
Page 529 of 1358

14.5 Multiple Injection Pressurization

The multiple injection technique supplies air from more than one location. The scheme may use
multiple fans, or a single fan connected to a ducted arrangement with multiple outlets. How far
apart these air injection points should be located is dependent on the height of the building.
14.6 Barometric Dampers

Barometric dampers use adjustable counterweights which are adjusted so that the damper opens
when a particular (excessive) pressure is reached. The location of dampers needs to be carefully
chosen since dampers located too close to the supply openings can operate too quickly.
14.7 Underdeck Insulation:

50 mm. thick underdeck insulation will consider on ceiling of top floor with adequate false ceiling
as require.
Page 530 of 1358

HVAC SYSTEM
FOR MESS

The intent of system design is to provide comfortable of acceptable indoor air quality. The
system at the same time will be energy efficient and cost economical. The proposed building shall
be GRIHA certified. The HVAC system shall be done as per the GRIHA guidelines. All HVAC and
electrical equipment’s shall be five-star rated or higher rated available.
2. Introduction.
➢ In Mess building Block is proposed to provide Two Stage Indirect/Direct Evaporative Cooling
systems.
➢ Kitchen Ventilation will be designed as per the ISHARE Ventilation book.
3. Design Standards

-Fundamentals 2017
➢ Indian society of heating refrigerating and air
conditioning engineers

Latitude : 22.43°N
Altitude : 567MTRs

To be Considered for
Summer Monsoon
Summer
Dry Bulb Temperature 41.1 °C (106°F) 32.2°C (90°F) 46 °C (114.8°F)
Mean Coincident Wet
Page 531 of 1358


Cooling load calculations have been done according to the client's suggestion outside & Inside
conditions.
remaining area as per ASHRAE standard 60.1 with equivalent draw of air
from adjacent areas. Under cut of 25-40 mm shall be provided in the main
entrance door to the Toilet for achieving the desired result.
Kitchen of Canteen : 40-50 Air Changes / hr. (approx.)

(Exhaust Hoods to be considered for the final design of exhaust &
ventilation system)
Mess Building seating area: Air flow is calculated according to the sensible (dry) heat inside
the building.

➢ Glass For Radiation For Exposed Window : 0.56 BTU/Hr-SqFt-Deg°F

a. Exposed Roof to Sun shall be insulated with 50 mm thick (fire retardant TF quality)
Expanded polystyrene or equivalent.
b. All glazing shall be single glass or tinted glass with blinds or heavy drapes from inside.

Air cooling is the air flow design, which is based on generating sensible loads from outside
temperature, occupancy, power & electrical load.
Heat load Estimate : For Summer
Project / Client : IIM Indore DB (°F) DB (°C)
Space used for : Mess Summer 114.80 46
Building
seating
area.
Room 82.40 28.0
Diff (S) 32.40 18
Page 532 of 1358

Height Area Volume

16.24 5949 96617
Item Area ft² Sun gain (S) Factor Btu/Hour
Summer
(Solar heat gain through glasses)
East 789.04 12.0 0.56 5302.33
West 0.00 164.0 0.56 0.00
South 0.00 12.0 0.56 0.00
North 0.00 14.0 0.56 0.00
SE 920.10 12.0 0.56 6183.10
SW 959.93 100.0 0.56 53755.83
NE 921.42 12.0 0.56 6191.96
NW 959.93 123.0 0.56 66119.67
(Solar heat & Transmission gain

through walls)
East 806.44 35.4 0.36 221.81
West 0.00 29.4 0.36 0.00
South 0.00 33.4 0.36 0.00
North 0.00 21.4 0.36 0.00
SE 1088.36 35.4 0.36 2144.19
SW 1112.09 31.4 0.36 1720.06
NE 1089.67 27.4 0.36 1659.62
NW 1112.09 23.4 0.36 1281.83
(Transmission gain - roof & Except

walls)
Roof Insulated 0 49.4 0.12 0.00
Roof No insulated 0 49.4 0.48 0.00
Roof Shaded 0 25.4 0.48 0.00
Ceiling 0 27.4 0.48 0.00
Floor 0 27.4 0.48 0.00
GI Exposed 4550 32.4 1.10 162176.83
Wall Partition 1991 27.4 0.40 21820.19
Glass Partition 0 27.4 1.10 0.00
(Internal heat gain)
People 310 255.0 79050.00
Equipment 0 3400.00 0.00
Lights 2975 3.40 1.25 12641.63
Sub Total 420269.05
S.factor % 5.00 21013.45
Room sensible heat 441282.50
S.A Duct % 2.50 11032.06
S.A.Fan gain % 5.00 22064.12
Effective room sensible heat 474378.69
Page 533 of 1358

Air Quantity in CFM @ 5.0˚C 48804

Delta T
5. Proposed Air-Conditioning System: -

For the comfort conditions in the mess building, we therefore propose to provide a two-stage
indirect / direct evaporative cooling system with a 12000 CFM X 4 number unit based on the
calculated air flow CFM based on the above calculation.
Two Stage Indirect/Direct Evaporative Cooling
In mess building is proposed to provide a Two Stage Indirect/Direct Evaporative Cooling system.
Evaporative cooling is an environmentally friendly and energy efficient cooling method that only
uses water as the working fluid to cool air through the simple evaporation of water. It is a
technology that could substantially reduce the air-conditioning cooling energy requirement in
buildings and provide other important environmental benefits. However, traditional direct
evaporative coolers will increase the humidity of the air to a level that makes occupants
uncomfortable under humid climatic conditions. Two- stage evaporative cooling systems can
improve efficiency and reduce the amount of moisture added to the air.
Two principal methods of evaporative cooling are commonly used, the direct (DEC) and the indirect
one (IEC). DEC is the simplest and the most widespread form of evaporative air conditioning. This
system typically uses a fan to draw hot outdoor air into a porous wetted medium. The water
absorbs heat as it evaporates from the porous wetting medium, and the air thus leaves the DEC
at a lower temperature. In fact, dry bulb temperature of the air reduces as it is moistened in this
adiabatic saturation process. The principle underlying DEC is the conversion of sensible heat to
latent heat. The wetted medium could be a porous wetted pad consisting of fibers, cellulose
papers or a spray of water.
Two-stage indirect/direct evaporative coolers as shown in Figure can cool air to lower
temperatures than are attainable with direct (“one-stage”) evaporative coolers and add less
moisture to the indoor air. In these coolers, a first-stage indirect evaporative cooler lowers both
the dry bulb temperature (DBT) and wet bulb temperature (WBT) of the incoming air. After leaving
the indirect stage, the supply air passes through a second stage direct evaporative cooler. First-
stage cooling follows a line of constant humidity ratio as no moisture is added to the primary
airstream; the second stage follows the WBT line at the condition of the air leaving the first stage.
Page 534 of 1358

Advantage
➢ Compared to single stage evaporative cooling, this 2-stage system provides lower
temperatures and doesn’t add as much moisture in the air as Air-Washer does. For Pune
ambient conditions, temperature reduction will be 4 to 5 °C more than Air-Washer and
moisture addition will be more than 50% less than Air-Washer.
➢ While compared to conventional air-conditioning, this method of comfort conditioning results

in huge energy saving and still maintains the “100% fresh-cool-clean air”.
➢ Energy-efficient – Saves up to 60% of the energy compared to conventional air conditioning.
➢ Reducing chances of infection - Helps reduce viral density in the air thereby reducing the
chances of infection from contagious viruses in air e.g., swine flu.
➢ All Toilets shall be connected to the mechanical ventilation system consisting of wall mounted
propeller fan or in-line fan with exhaust duct as required.
➢ Kitchen in providing fresh air by Air-Washer (Air-Cooling) and Exhaust by scrubber.
➢ Kitchen shall be provided with evaporative cooled supply air at compensating hoods. The
system shall consist of centrifugal type fan, air washer with Cellulose Pad, fresh air grille, air
distribution system with grilles, electrical panel, power cabling, control wiring and earthing.
Fresh air shall be drawn from outside through the air washer and supplied to through GSS
ducts and by means of grilles. Similar equipment shall be provided for kitchen exhausting
approximately 10% additional amount of supply air.

In Mess Seating area shall be Two stage air cooling through 4 number Floor mounted Unit,
the air- cooling unit shall be installed at loft & outside air will be suck from louvers. The
Temperature shall be 28 deg cel.
Floor mounted units shall be as follows.

➢ The double skin with Double or Single tracer air handling units
Page 535 of 1358

➢ The AHU housing shall be constructed of 1 mm thick galvanized pre-plasticised/powder

requirement.
➢ Maximum face velocity across heat exchanger : 2.54 m/sec (500 fpm)
point to be provided in each floor)
9. Duct & Insulation:

according to duct sizes and in accordance with SMACNA standards.
⚫ Dual stage Air cooling ducts shall be factory fabricated with spiral type from galvanized steel
sheets (Class VII) of various thicknesses ranging from 24 Gauge (0.8mm) to 18 (1.2mm) gauge
according to duct sizes and in accordance with SMACNA standards. All Spiral duct insulation
shall be done from inside.

Maximum flow velocity in ducts for ventilation in : 7.5 m / sec – 12.5 m / Sec


Maximum face velocity : 500 FPM to 600 FPM
Sound level : NC35
9.1 Insulation
⚫ Ducting Insulation material to be nitrile rubber insulation with fire performance Class “O”.
Insulation shall be done from inside the duct.
⚫ Ducting position Insulation Thickness
SA duct of Air-cooling duct : 19mm (Inside)
Page 536 of 1358

10. Noise Criterion


Underdeck insulation 50 mm. thick will be consider at Top floor ceiling with adequate false ceiling
as require.
Following IS CODES will be applicable for the project.

IS: 325 - 1970 : Specifications for 3 Ph. Induction Motor. Also confirm to IS: 1231
switchgear.
operations.
conditioning.

Insulation.
IS: 3069 : Glossary of Items symbols & units relating to thermal materials.
HVAC SYSTEM
FOR
TYPE V RESIDENCES
A. Pressurization Systems Of Stairwell/Lift Well/Lift Lobby (Of Fire Tower)
1. Introduction
In a high-rise building, the stairs typically represent the sole means of egress during a fire. It is
imperative for the exit stairs to be free of smoke and to incorporate design features that improve
the speed of occupant egress. Most building codes require the fire stairwells in a high-rise building
to be pressurized to keep smoke out.
Page 537 of 1358

2. Codes and Design Standards

➢ National Buildings Code 2016

➢ NFPA 101 – Life Safety Code
➢ NFPA 92A – Recommended Practice for Smoke Control Systems
➢ NFPA 92B – Guide for Smoke Management in Malls, Atria, and Large Areas
➢ NFPA 90 - Standard for Installation of Air-conditioning and Ventilating system.
➢ ASHRAE 1999 HVAC Applications, Chapter 52, Fire and Smoke Management
➢ ASHRAE Principals of Smoke Management Handbook
➢ British Standard BS5588 - Smoke Control in Protected Escape Route using Pressurization.
➢ British Standard BS 5720 - Code of Practice for Mechanical Ventilation and Air Conditioning in
Building
3. Pressurization system
(NBC2016 VOLUME-1 part4 fire and life safety table-6). the pressure difference for staircase shall
be 50 pa in case of fire in staircase & lift well. the pressure difference for staircase shall be 25 pa
in case of fire in staircase & lift lobby of fire tower.
4. Air Flow calculation of Pressurization air flow
Staircase Pressurization Calculation sheet (10 floor for present and 2nos floor consider for
future provision)
Ref Clause:
1 As per NBC Part 4 (Fire & Life Safety) >> Annexure C >> Clause C.1.5.g (Page 65), a positive
pressure 50 Pa shall be maintained inside Stair well.
Page 538 of 1358

AREA = TYPE-V BUILDING
Coefficient = 0.839
FROM / UPTO = Stilt to Eighth Floor +terrace floor+(2 nos floor for future
provision)
1.50 X 2.1
Page 539 of 1358

Leakage Area (Based on ASHRAE-Principles of Smoke

Management: Chapter 6_Table 6.3) = 0.03 Sq.mt
Total area of all doors = Area (Sqmt) x No. of Levels (-) Open door
= 0.03 x 10
= 0.30 Sq.mt
Q1 (Air Volume required to maintain 50 Pa differential 0.839 X A(Total leakage area :sqmt)
Pressure in 0.839 X 0.30 √∆p(Pa)
all Door closed condition) = 1.78 Cumt / Sec X 7.071
= X
=
Area of Open doors Nos. of door open Velocity across door

X (mtr/sec)
1.50 X 2.1 X 2 0.75
= X
4.73 Cumt / Sec
Q2 =
Q1 + Q2
1.78 + 4.73
=
Page 540 of 1358

= 6.50 Cumt / Sec
13769
Lift well Pressurization Calculation sheet(10 floor for present and 2nos floor consider for future provision)
Ref Clause:

Coefficient = 0.839
FROM / UPTO = Stilt To Eight floor+terrace Floor+(2 nos floor for future provision
Door size(Mtr) =W X H
1.50 X 2.1
Page 541 of 1358


Gap Thickness at Top &
Sides 2.03 mm
= 0.03 x 11
= 0.33 Sq.mt
Positive ∆p to be maintained in the Lift well = 50.00 Pa i.e. 5 mm 50Pa

differential Pressure in all Door closed A(Total leakage area :sqmt) √∆p(Pa
condition) = 0.839 X X )
= 0.839 X 0.33 X 7.071
= 1.96 Cumt / Sec
Q2 (Leakage of air through Open Doors) = Nos. of door Velocity Across door
Area of Open doors X open X (mtr/sec)
= 1.50 X 2.1 X 1 X 0.75
Q2 = 2.36 Cumt/sec
Total Air Volume required (Cumt / Sec) = Q1 + Q2
= 1.96 + 2.36
= 4.32 Cumt / Sec
9145
Page 542 of 1358

Total ( considering 10% air leakage through

Lift Lobby Pressurization Calculation sheet(10 floor for present and 2nos floor consider for future provision)
Ref Clause:
1 As per NBC Part 4 (Fire & Life Safety) >> Annexure C >> Clause C.1.5.g (Page 65), a positive pressure 25- 30 Pa shall be maintained inside Liftwell.
Coefficient = 0.839

FROM / UPTO = Stilt to Eight Floor+Terrace Floor+(2 nos floor for future provision)
1.50 X 2.1
Page 543 of 1358

Type Of Door : Double Leaf
Page 544 of 1358


= 0.03 x 10
= 0.30 Sq.mt
Positive ∆p to be maintained in the Liftwell 30.00 Pa i.e. 3 mm Pa
= 30
differential Pressure in all Door closed A(Total leakage area :sqmt)
condition) = 0.839 X X √∆p(Pa)
= 0.839 X 0.30 X 5.477
1.38 Cumt / Sec
=
Area of Open doors Nos. of door Velocity Across door (mtr/sec)

Q2 (Leakage of air through Open Doors) = X open X
= 1.50 X 2.1 X 2 X 0.75
Q2
= 4.73 Cumt / Sec
Total Air Volume required (Cumt / Sec)

= Q1 + Q2
= 1.38 + 4.73
=
Page 545 of 1358

Total Air Volume required (Cuft / Min i.e. CFM) 6.10 Cumt / Sec
=
Cumt / Sec X 60 X 35.28
12920
Total ( considering 10% air leakage through

Page 546 of 1358

5. Equipment and ductwork for Staircase/ lift well / Lift lobby pressurization
Fire staircases shall be provided with pressurization system, consisting of supply air centrifugal fans
installed on terrace of the building. These fans shall supply air through vertical risers for achieving
effective pressurization. Fans shall be sized to maintain minimum positive pressure (50 Pa in case of
staircase) across the door. The operation of these fans shall be interlocked with smoke detectors and
operate automatically upon receiving signal. supply air ductwork used for comfort the pressurization
air systems. The pressurization air can be delivered either from a dedicated galvanized duct work.
6. Multiple Injection Pressurization

The multiple injection technique supplies air from more than one location. The scheme may use multiple
fans, or a single fan connected to a ducted arrangement with multiple outlets. How far apart these air
injection points should be located depends on the height of the building.
Page 547 of 1358

7. Barometric Dampers
Barometric dampers use adjustable counterweights which are adjusted so that the damper opens when
a particular (excessive) pressure is reached. The location of dampers needs to be carefully chosen since
dampers located too close to the supply openings can operate too quickly.
Underdeck insulation 50 mm. thick will be consider at Top floor ceiling with adequate false ceiling as
require.
B. Air-Conditioning system
➢ Drain piping need to be provided.
➢ Location for AC indoor and outdoor are allocated, the end user will install the AC as per space
allocated.
➢ Copper Piping routing needs to be provided & Aluminum boxing / trucking need to be provided to
hide copper-piping.
Page 548 of 1358

PLUMBING & FIRE FIGHTING

DBR
Page 549 of 1358

PLUMBING & FIRE FIGHTING DBR

FOR
ACADEMIC BUILDING INCLUDING FACULTY & STAFF/ACADEMIC ASSOCIATES OFFICES
PLUMBING SYSTEMS (WATER SUPPLY & DRAINAGE) FOR ACADEMIC BUILDING
1. Design Calculations:
Total Water requirement Calculation of IIM Faculty & Academic block @ 135 LPCD
Domestic Gross
Flushing Flow
Water Wate
S. Total Water to
Type Flat Populatio Requiremen r Req.
No Populatio requiremen Sewe
n t (A) A+B
. n t (B) r
LPCD LPD LPC LPD LPD LPD
D
Total
1
Classroom 3340 25 83500 20 66800 150300 141950
3340
s seats
2 Faculty
70 70 25 1750 20 1400 3150 2975
rooms
Café 200
3 sqm
1650 10 660 2310 2171
3sqm/1 66 66 25
person
Total 3476 86900 68860 155760 147096
2. Source of Water
Main source of domestic water is from Main centralized Underground water tank and Flushing water is from
the in house STP/ETP treated water.
Page 550 of 1358

3. Water Storage Sizing

The water storage capacities of the tanks are as follows:
Overhead Tanks (half day’s storage

considered)
Domestic Water
S. No. Fire Tank Flushing Water Storage
Storage
1 No.
1 No. 1 No.
Academic 25,000
1. 10,000 30,000 Liters
Building Liters. Liters.
1 No. 1 No.
10,000 1 No.
1. Faculty Building 10,000
Liters. 15,000 Liters
Liters.
4. Domestic Water
Water sourced from the central storage tank shall be used for domestic usage in toilets (wash basin),
Kitchen.
5. Drinking Water
Portable localized RO water units shall be provided for drinking purposes along with water dispensers
with hot and cold-water provision.
6. Recycled Water from STP / ETP

Water recovered from tertiary sewage treatment plant shall be used for Flushing water as per the
availability shortfall if any shall be makeup from UGT.
7. Water Distribution
Faculty & Academic Building – will have OHT for domestic, Flushing, water OHT and which will receive
water from main sump by means of pumping and further From domestic OHT water to each fixture
shall be supplied through gravity feed.
Based on the pressure requirement, a booster pump shall be provided for domestic use.
8. Flushing water will receive from STP /ETP to each block flushing water OHT and from OHT water to
each fixture shall be through gravity feed.
9. Sewage & wastewater drainage

The soil and waste shall be carried down in separate independently vented pipes. Two pipe drainage
systems shall be adopted as per ASPE standard. The sanitary, waste & vent system shall be watertight,
and gas tight designed to prevent escape of foul gas and odour from various fixtures.
It is proposed to use UPVC pipe for soil / waste drainage. The soil & waste piping shall be under-sunk,
and the horizontal header shall be subsequently connected to the vertical stack located inside the
associated pipe shaft. These pipes shall be connected to the drainage chambers at the ground level.
Page 551 of 1358

10. Water supply Piping
All piping both for Hot & cold water shall be of CPVC whether in the shafts, wherever exposed above the
false ceiling.
For wherever concealed in wall all piping shall be Polyethelene-Aluminium-Polyethelene PE-ALPE

Composite Pressure Pipes conforming to IS – 15450 for both Hot water and cold water.
The pipe sizing shall be based on the fixture unit calculation as per ASPE standard.
Isolation Valves Back flow preventing valves, pressure reducing valves etc. shall be incorporated in the
system as required.
11. Rainwater Disposal

A separate and independent rainwater drainage system shall be provided for collecting rainwater from
terraces, paved areas, lawns and roads. Rainwater down takes of appropriate size and number shall be
provided in shafts adjacent to the external wall; these shall be integrated with the external facade of the
building. The final disposal shall be in a rainwater harvesting pit with overflow connection to outside
external areas.
12.0 Sanitary & CP Fitting

Sanitary & CP Fitting for Academic building should be of premium categories with respect to hostels,
residence and mess block. Refer detailed finishing schedule for respective buildings attached with the
drawings.
Page 552 of 1358

FIRE FIGHTING & FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM FOR ACADEMIC BUILDING
The Academic Building is categorized under ‘Light Hazard’ as per TAC “Classification of Occupancies” in
TAC Fire Protection Manual. The main objective of firefighting system shall be to protect loss to Life and
Property duly complying or exceeding statutory provisions.
1. Basis/ Concept of Design

The firefighting arrangement shall be designed as per the requirement of local guidelines, NBC-2016 &
engineering design standard.
Following functional system shall be provided; strictly in compliance with the listed reference standards:
Following firefighting provisions are proposed accordingly as per NBC2016 Part 4 Table
Sl. No. Description Building Remarks
1 Fire Hydrant System All Floors
Inside the building in the

dedicated shaft Three number
2 Wet Raiser All Floors,
of FHC
Type A,B,C,K type extinguishers
shall be provided as per
3 Fire Extinguishers All Floors
NBC/TAC/IS:2190-2010 Norms.
Piping system confirming to IS: 1239
– GI “C” Class for wet raiser & Hydrant
4 Piping System
system & Sprinkler system
Fire water static Fire water static storage shall be Final storage shall be as
5 Storage 25,000 Ltrs per CFO & preliminary NOC.
All floors including rooms and

6 Sprinkler All Floors common area.
Complete periphery of the

7 Yard Hydrant External building
Fire and life safety signage
8 Signage shall be provided as per
External & Internal
IS:9457-2005
Firemen Axe shall be provided
9 Firemen axe External & Internal
as per IS:926-1985
Page 553 of 1358


FOR
PLUMBING SYSTEMS (WATER SUPPLY & DRAINAGE) FOR MDC ACADEMIC &
INCUBATION
1. Design Calculations
Total Water requirement Calculation of IIM MDC Incubation Centre @ 135 LPCD
Domestic Flushing Gross

Water Water Water
Flow to
Requirement requirement Req.
S. Population Total Total Sewer
(A) (B) A+B
No. Type Flat per room Units Population
LPCD LPD LPCD LPD LPD LPD
1 Total seats 292 292 25 7300 20 5840 13140 12410
2 Office 33 33 25 825 20 660 1485 1403
3 Conference 10 10 25 250 20 200 450 425
Collaboration
4 10 10 25 250 20 200 450 425
room
Reception&
5 10 10 25 250 20 200 450 425
waiting hall
Total 355 8875 7100 15975 15088
2. Source of Water
Main source of domestic water is from Main centralized Underground water tank and Flushing water is
from the in house STP / ETP treated water.
Page 554 of 1358


Overhead Tanks (half day’s storage

considered)
S. No. Fire Tank Flushing Water Storage Domestic Water Storage

1 No.
1 No. 1 No.
MDC Incubation 10,000
1. Liters. 7,000 Liters. 8,000 Liters
Building
4. Domestic Water
Kitchen & Pantry.
5. Drinking Water
Portable localized RO water unit shall be provided for drinking purposes along with water dispensers

MDC Incubation Building – will have OHT for domestic, Flushing, water OHT and which will receive
water from main sump by means of pumping and further From domestic OHT water to each fixture
shall be supplied through gravity feed. Top floor domestic water shall be means of pumping system.
Based on the pressure requirement booster pump shall be provided for domestic use for top
floors.
8. Flushing water will receive from STP to each block flushing water OHT and from OHT water to each
fixture shall be through gravity feed.

false ceiling.

Page 555 of 1358

system as required.

terraces, paved areas, lawns and roads. Rainwater down takes of appropriate size and number shall be
provided in shafts adjacent to the external wall; these shall be integrated with the external facade of
the building. The final disposal shall be in a rainwater harvesting pit with overflow connection to outside
external areas.
12. Sanitary & CP Fitting

Sanitary & CP Fitting for MDC Incubation building should be of premium categories with respect to
hostels, residence and mess block.
Page 556 of 1358

FIRE FIGHTING & FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM FOR MDC ACADEMIC & INCUBATION
The MDC Incubation building is categorized under ‘Light Hazard’ as per TAC “Classification of
Occupancies” in TAC Fire Protection Manual. The main objective of firefighting system shall be to protect
loss to Life and Property duly complying or exceeding statutory provisions.

Following firefighting provisions are proposed accordingly as per NBC2016 Part 4 Table 7
Fire Hydrant
1 All Floors
System
dedicated shaft Three
number of FHC
Type A,B,C,K type
extinguishers shall be
Fire provided as per
3 All Floors
Extinguishers NBC/TAC/IS:2190-2010
Norms.
Piping system confirming to IS:
1239
– GI “C” Class for wet raiser &
4 Piping System
Hydrant system & Sprinkler
system
Final storage shall be as
Fire water static Fire water static storage shall be
per CFO & preliminary
5 Storage 5,000 Ltrs
NOC.
All floors including
rooms and common
6 Sprinkler All Floors
area.
Complete periphery of
7 Yard Hydrant External the building
Fire and life safety
signage shall be
8 Signage
External & Internal provided as per IS:9457-
2005
Firemen Axe shall be
9 Firemen axe External & Internal provided as per IS:926-
1985
Page 557 of 1358


FOR
BOY’S HOSTEL
PLUMBING SYSTEMS (WATER SUPPLY & DRAINAGE) FOR HOSTEL
Total Water requirement Calculation of IIM Boys Hostel @ 135 LPCD
Gross
Domestic Water Flushing Water Water Flow to
S.No Populati Tot Total Requirement (A) requirement (B) Req. A+B Sewer
. Type Flat on per al Populati
room Uni on
LP LP LP LP LP LP
ts
CD D CD D D D
Ground
1 floor 10 1 12 12 90 108 45 540 162 151
rooms 1 0 0 2
person/ro
om
14 floor
typical
2 each floor 1 320 320 90 288 45 144 432 403
20 00 00 00 20
rooms 1
person/ro
om
Dormitory
78sqm 1
3 person/5s 18 18 90 162 45 810 243 226
qm and 0 0 8
warden’s
2
members
4 Visitors 25 5 125 10 250 375 363
Multipurp
5 ose hall 15 15 25 375 20 300 675 638
Total 332 390 32000 16300 48300 45101
Page 558 of 1358

2. Source of Water

It is proposed to provide One day’s water storage capacity based on ultimate requirement of both Boys
Hostel Building 1 & 2. The incoming to the Boys hostel block UGT will receive treated water from main
Central Under Ground Tank. Further water from the local sump shall be pump to each Hostel block OHT.
Under Ground & Overhead Tanks details (OHT Designed for 0.5 days storage)
S. Description Fire Flushing Water Domestic Water

No. Reserve Storage Storage
1 No.
Hostels 1 & 1 No.
2 will have 1 No. 16,000 Liters
8,200 Liters.
10,000 (On each
1. one UGT of Liters. (On each
60,000 block
block terrace)
Litres terrace)
4. Domestic Water
Kitchen & water body makeup.
5. Drinking Water

7. Hot Water
Hot water for the building shall be supplied from Solar water tank with storage water heaters in each
toilet. Pre-heat water from solar system will be sourced to Storage type heaters and further supplied to
each toilet fixture from the localized storage water heaters. Necessary vales are provided to avoid back
flow in the water supply system.
Boys Hostel Building 1 & 2 – will have one common local sump of 64.0 kld (one day storage) which will
receive water from main sump by means of pumping and further from local sump the water will lift to
each block domestic OHT. From domestic OHT water to each fixture shall be supplied through gravity
feed. Top three floors shall receive hot and cold water by means booster pump for both hot & cold
water.
Flushing water will receive from STP to each block flushing water OHT and from OHT water to each
fixture shall be through gravity feed by means of zoning system.
Page 559 of 1358

and gas tight designed to prevent escape of foul gas and odor from various fixtures.
false ceiling.
For wherever concealed in wall all piping shall be Polyethelene-Aluminium-Polyethelene

PE-ALPE Composite Pressure Pipes conforming to IS – 15450 for both Hot water and cold water.
system as required.
11.Rainwater Disposal
terraces, paved area, lawns and roads. Rainwater down takes of appropriate size and number shall be
external areas.
Page 560 of 1358

FIRE FIGHTING & FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM FOR BOYS HOSTEL
The Boys Hostel building is categorized under ‘Light Hazard’ as per TAC “Classification of Occupancies”
in TAC Fire Protection Manual. The main objective of firefighting system shall be to protect loss to Life
and Property duly complying or exceeding statutory provisions.

Fire Hydrant
1 All Floors
System
number of FHC
Type A, B,C,K type
3 All Floors
Norms.
1239
4 Piping System
system
NOC.
rooms and common
area.
signage shall be
8 Signage
2005
1985
Page 561 of 1358


FOR
GIRL’S HOSTEL
PLUMBING SYSTEMS (WATER SUPPLY & DRAINAGE) FOR GIRL’S HOSTEL
Total Water requirement Calculation of IIM Girls Hostel @ 135 LPCD
Gross
Domestic Water Flushing Water Water Flow
S. Populatio Tota Total Requirement (A) requirement (B) Req. to
No. Type Flat n per l Populatio A+B Sewer
room Unit n
LPC LP LPC LP LP LP
s
D D D D D D
Ground
1 floor 10
rooms 1
1 12 12 90 1080 45 540 1620 1512
person/roo
m
14 floor
typical each
2 floor 20
rooms 1
1 320 320 90 28800 45 14400 43200 40320
person/roo
m
Dormitory
78sqm 1
3 person/5sq
m and
18 18 90 1620 45 810 2430 2268
warden’s
2 members
4 36
Visitors 25 5 125 10 250 375
3
Multipurpo
5 63
se hall 15 15 25 375 20 300 675
8
Total 332 390 32000 16300 48300 45101
2. Source of Water
Page 562 of 1358


It is proposed to provide One day’s water storage capacity based on ultimate requirement of Girls Hostel
Building. The incoming to the Girls hostel block UGT will receive treated water from main Central Under
Ground Tank. Further water from the local sump shall be pumped to Girls Hostel block OHT. The water
storage capacities of the tanks are as follows:
S. Fire Flushing Water Domestic Water

No. Description Reserve Storage Storage
1 No.
Hostel will 1 No.
have One 1 No. 16,000 Liters
8,200 Liters.
10,000 (on each
1. UGT of Liters. (On each
30,000 block
block terrace)
Litres terrace)
4. Domestic Water
Kitchen & water body makeup.
5. Drinking Water

7. Hot Water
toilet. Pre-heat water from solar system will be sourced to Storage type heaters and further supplied to
Girls Hostel Building – will have one common local sump of 32.0 kld (one day storage) which will receive
water from main sump by means of pumping and further from local sump the water will lift to each
block domestic OHT.From domestic OHT water to each fixture shall be supplied through gravity feed.
Top three floors shall receive hot and cold water by means booster pump for both hot & cold water.
Flushing water will receive from STP to each block flushing water OHT and from OHT water to each
fixture shall be through gravity feed by means of zoning system.

Page 563 of 1358

false ceiling.

system as required.

terrace, paved area, lawns and roads. Rainwater down takes of appropriate size and number shall be
external areas.
Page 564 of 1358

FIRE FIGHTING & FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM FOR GIRL’S HOSTEL
The Girls Hostel building is categorized under ‘Light Hazard’ as per TAC “Classification of Occupancies”

Fire Hydrant
1 All Floors
System
number of FHC
Type A, B, C,K type
3 All Floors
Norms.
1239
4 Piping System
system
NOC.
rooms and common
area.
signage shall be
8 Signage
2005
1985
Page 565 of 1358


FOR
MDC ACCOMODATION
PLUMBING SYSTEMS (WATER SUPPLY & DRAINAGE) FOR MDC ACCOMMODATION
Total Water requirement Calculation of IIM MDC ACCOMODATION BUILDING @ 135 LPCD
Gross
Domestic Flushing
Water Flow
Water Water
S. Populat Total Requirement Req. to
Total requirement
No Type Flat ion per Populati A+B Sewer
Units (A) (B)
. Flat on
Faculty
Block, 10
rooms/Floor
(total 10+2
floors
1 1 120 120 90 10800 45 5400 16200 15120
buildings)
Total 120 120 10800 5400 16200 15120
2. Source of Water

The water storage capacities of the tank are as follows.
S. Description Fire Flushing Water Domestic Water

No. Tank Storage Storage
1 No. 1 No.
MDC 1 No.
5,000 10,000
1. Accommodation Liters. 5,000Liters.
Building Liters
Page 566 of 1358

4. Domestic Water
Kitchen & Pantry.
5. Drinking Water

7. Hot Water
toilet. Pre- heat water from solar system will be sourced to Storage type heaters and further supplied to
8. Water Distribution: MDC Accommodation Building

Will have OHT for domestic, Flushing, water OHT and which will receive water from main sump by
means of pumping and further From domestic OHT water to each fixture shall be supplied through
gravity feed. Top floor domestic water supplied shall be by means of pumping system.
Based on the pressure requirement booster pump shall be provided for domestic use for top
floors.

false ceiling.

system as required.

Page 567 of 1358

terraces, paved area, lawns and roads. Rainwater down takes of appropriate size and number shall be
external areas.
12. Sanitary & CP Fitting

Sanitary & CP Fitting for MDC Accommodation building should be of premium categories with respect
to hostels, residence and Mess block.
Page 568 of 1358

FIRE FIGHTING & FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM FOR MDC ACCOMMODATION
The MDC Accommodation building is categorized under ‘Light Hazard’ as per TAC “Classification of
Occupancies” in TAC Fire Protection Manual. The main objective of firefighting system shall be to protect
loss to Life and Property duly complying or exceeding statutory provisions.

Fire Hydrant
1 All Floors
System
number of FHC
Type A,B,C,K type
3 All Floors
Norms.
1239
4 Piping System
system
NOC.
rooms and common
area.
signage shall be
8 Signage
2005
1985
Page 569 of 1358


FOR MESS
PLUMBING SYSTEMS (WATER SUPPLY & DRAINAGE) FOR MESS
Total Water requirement Calculation of IIM for Mess @ 135 LPCD
Gross
Domestic Water Flushing Water
Water
Requirement requirement Flow to
Req.
Total (A) (B) Sewer
S. Populatio A+B
Type Flat Populatio
No. n LPC LPC
n LPD LPD LPD LPD
D D
Total 5 1892 1 516 2408 2029
1 344 344
seats 5 0 5 0 0 6
For
Coolers
2 0 4000 0 0 4000 3600
(drinkin
g
water)
Total 344 22920 5160 28080 23896
2. Source of Water

The water storage capacities of the tank are as follows.
Overhead Tanks (half day’s storage considered)
S. Flushing Water Domestic Water Storage

N Storage
o.
1 No. 1 No.
1
2,000 Liters. 10,000 Liters
.
4. Domestic Water
Kitchen & Pantry
Page 570 of 1358

5. Drinking Water
6. Recycled Water from STP /ETP

7. Hot Water
Hot water for the building shall be supplied from Heat Pump System.
Mess Building – will have OHT for domestic, Flushing, which will receive water from main sump by means
of pumping and further From domestic OHT water to each fixture shall be supplied through gravity feed.
Based on the pressure requirement booster pump shall be provided for domestic use and kitchen
use.
9. Flushing water will receive from STP / ETP to each block flushing water OHT and from OHT water to

false ceiling.
For wherever concealed in wall all piping shall be Polyethelene-Aluminium-Polyethelene

PE-ALPE Composite Pressure Pipes conforming to IS – 15450 for both Hot water and cold water.
system as required.

Separate and independent rainwater drainage system shall be provided for collecting rainwater from
provided in shafts adjacent to the external wall; these shall be integrated with the external facade of
the building. The final disposal shall be in rainwater harvesting pit with overflow connection to outside
external areas.
Page 571 of 1358

FIRE FIGHTING & FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM FOR MESS
The Mess building is categorized under ‘Light Hazard’ as per TAC “Classification of Occupancies” in TAC
Fire Protection Manual. The main objective of firefighting system shall be to protect loss to Life and
Property duly complying or exceeding statutory provisions.

Fire Hydrant
1 All Floors
System
number of FHC
Type A, B,C,K type
3 All Floors
Norms.
1239
4 Piping System
system
NOC.
rooms and common
area.
signage shall be
7 Signage
2005
1985
Page 572 of 1358


FOR TYPE V RESIDENCES
PLUMBING SYSTEMS (WATER SUPPLY & DRAINAGE) FOR TYPE V RESIDENCE
Total Water requirement Calculation of IIM Type - V Residence Building - 1 @ 135 LPCD
Flow to
Sewer @
Domestic Flushing Gross 90% of
Populatio Total Total Water Water Wate total
S.No Type Flat n per Flat Unit Populatio Requiremen requiremen r Req. domesti
. s n t (A) t (B) A+B c use &
100% of
flushing
use
Type - V
Residence
Building
Block
3BHk,
4Flats/Floo 1080
1 6 40 240 90 21600 45 32400 30240
r (total 8+2 0
floors
buildings)
At 10% of Total
2 Visitors 24 15 360 25 600 960 924
Unit Population
1140
Total 40 212 21960 33360 31164
0
SUMMARY & TREATED WASTEWATER RE-USE

S. No. Description Round-Off
1 Domestic Water Requirement 22 KLD
2 Total Flushing Water Requirement 12 KLD

Total Water Requirement (Domestic +Flushing) 34 KLD
2. Source of Water
Page 573 of 1358


It is proposed to provide One day’s water storage capacity based on ultimate requirement of both Type
- V Residence Building 1 & 2. The incoming to the faulty block UGT will receive treated water from the
main Central Under Ground Tank. Further water from the local sump shall be pumped to each Type - V
Residence Building block OHT. The water storage capacities of the tanks are as follows:
Each Type - V Residence Building Overhead Tanks (One day’s storage considered)
S. Fire Flushing Water Domestic Water

Description
No. Reserve Storage Storage
Type–V 1 No.
Residenc 25,000 1 No. 1 No.
1.
e Building Liters. 12,000 Liters. 22,000 Liters.
4. Domestic Water
Kitchen & water body makeup. A bypass line provided for Flushing water as per the availability shortfall.
5. Drinking Water
Portable localized RO water provision assumed for drinking purposes.

7. Hot Water
Hot water for the building shall be supplied from Solar water tank along with storage water heaters in
each toilet. Pre heat water from solar system will be sourced to geyser and further supplied to each
toilet fixture from the localized storage water heaters. Necessary vales are provided to avoid back flow
in the water supply system.
1) Type - V Residence Building 1 & 2 – will have one common local sump of 68.0 kld (one day storage)
which will receive water from main sump by means of pumping and further from local sump the water
will lift to each block domestic OHT. From domestic OHT water to each fixture shall be through gravity
feed.
2) Flushing water will receive from STP / ETP to each block flushing water OHT and from OHT water to
Page 574 of 1358

Type - V Residence Building Flushing Water Supply Schematic:

false ceiling.

system as required.

Separate and independent rainwater drainage system shall be provided for collecting rainwater from
external areas.
Page 575 of 1358

FIRE FIGHTING & FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM FOR TYPE V RESIDENCE
Type V Residence building is categorized under ‘Light Hazard’ as per TAC “Classification of Occupancies”

The building is considered a Residential building with height of less than 35M. Following firefighting
provisions are proposed accordingly as per NBC2016 Part 4 Table 7
Fire Hydrant
1 All Floors
System

number of FHC
Type A, B, C,K type
3 All Floors
Norms.
1239
4 Piping System
system
NOC.
rooms and common
area.
signage shall be
8 Signage
2005
1985
Page 576 of 1358

FIRE PROTECTION WORKS (EXTERNAL DEVELOPMENT) DBR
Scope
The scope of work includes complete design, engineering with necessary design calculations, for the fire
hydrant system and fire pumps, fire extinguishers and sumps for the infrastructure as per codes and
standards listed below.
Standards
Fire protection system shall be designed and install as per National Building code (NBC) of India 2016,
part IV Fire & Life safety,), NFPA 14 Standards, TAC Byelaws.
Codes Of Practice
Unless specifically mentioned otherwise, all the applicable Codes and Standards published by the
Bureau of Indian Standards and their subsequent revision / BS Standards shall govern in respect of
design, workmanship, quality and properties of materials and method of testing; standards listed below
shall be applicable, in particular:
National Building Code of India Part IV for Fire

NBC ;
Protection System
TAC : Fire Protection Manual for Hydrant system
NFPA 14 : Standpipe and hose installation
IS-1239 / IS 3589 : Specification for MS pipes
API 600 / BS 5163 : Specifications for Gun Metal gate, globe &
IS778/780/2906 : check Valves for water supply.
IS-800 : Specifications for Structural steel
Specifications for covered electrodes for metal

IS-814 :
are welding of structural steel.
BS-5155 : Specifications for C.I. butterfly valve.
IS-4927 : Specifications for Canvas Hose Pipes.
Specifications for Branch pipes Fire hose

IS-903 :
couplings and auxiliary equipment
IS-5290 : Specifications for hydrant landing valves.
Method of measuring of building & civil

Engineering Works
IS-1200 :
(water supply, plumbing drain & sanitary
fittings)
Page 577 of 1358

Recommended practice for radiographic

IS-4853 : inspection of fusion welded butt joints in steel
pipes.
IS-636 : Synthetic, jacketed hose pipes.
IS-2159 : Hot dip galvanizing of iron and steel
IS-5 : Specification for painting
Specification for horizontal end suction centrifugal

IS 9137 :
pump
BS-1965 Part I : Specification for butt-welded Pipe Fittings.
IS 8423 ; Controlled percolating hose for firefighting.
IS 2871 : Branch pipe, universal for firefighting purposes.
IS 884 : First aid hose reel for fire fighting
Code of practice for selection, installation

IS 2190 : and maintenance of portable first aid fire
extinguishers.
Specification for washers for water fittings for
IS 937 :
firefighting system.
IS-9968 (Pt-1) : Rubber Insulated Braided Wire
IS-1554 (Pt-1) : PVC Insulated Cables
Shade No.536 of IS-

: Paint Shade for main Equipment/accessories
5
Code of Practice for wrapping and coating of
IS-10221 :
Welded Underground pipes
Occupancy
As per NBC the proposed infrastructure has been classified as educational and residential buildings,
group A, B and group D and under category of Light hazard.
System Proposed
The Fire protection system shall be designed and installed as per National Building Code (NBC) of India
and as per recommendations made by local Fire and Rescue Services. Following are the systems
proposed,
Page 578 of 1358

1. Centralized firewater tank and Fire pump room equipment.

2. Hydrant main till the building with Isolation valve for the respective Buildings
3. Yard hydrant system.
4. Fire extinguishers
Design Basis
Hydrant System
a) Classification of Occupancy : As per NBC.
b) Water supply : As per TAC clause 13.2.2 and Hydraulic

calculation
c) Sizing of Pumps : As per Hydraulic calculation
d) Sizing of Water Mains : Refer Calculations
e) Fire Extinguishers
As per Code IS 2190 : Code of practice for selection, installation and
maintenance of portable first aid fire
extinguishers.
Fire Hydrant System
1. The Hydrant network is pressurized with 7 kg/cm2water is maintained in readiness for any
eventuality (we assumed the water
pressure required at the furthest point is 7 kg/cm2)
2. All buildings are provided with yard hydrants and provision shall be made for the internal hydrant
valves on all floors.
3. Tap off provision shall be made for the respective buildings with isolation valves.
Yard Hydrant
For fighting fires from outside, the building at strategic locations on perimeter of the building there are
yard (external) hydrants have been proposed. The yard hydrants are provided with hose cabinet in
which 2 x 15Mts. fire hoses (CP hose) special type do not have rubberized material which can affect due
to sun heat, branch pipe and nozzle are stored. Also, there is a 4-way inlet type fire brigade connection
with isolation valves to feed water directly to system as well as to firewater tanks is provided near the
firewater tank. Each yard Hydrant comprising of the following:
1. Single headed hydrant valve.

2. 2 x 15Mts. of fire hoses.
3. Gunmetal Branch Pipe with nozzle
Pumps Proposed
Since the demand for Hydrant system is 2850 LPM at 105mwc, same capacity pump shall be envisaged
for even for hydrant system and the pump capacities is as under,
Page 579 of 1358

SL.NO. TYPE OF PUMPSET CAPACITY REMARKS

2 No. Electrically Driven Main pump for hydrant 171 cum / Hr at
1
system 108 mwc
171 cum / Hr at
2 2 No. Diesel Engine driven Standby pump 108
2 No. Electrically Driven Main pump for 171 cum / Hr at

3 Sprinkler 108
system
15 cum / Hr at 105
4 2 No. Electrically driven hydrant Jockey pump
mwc
15 cum / Hr at 105
5 2 No. Electrically driven hydrant Jockey pump
mwc
Fire Water Tanks

The UG sump is proposed in the Centralized water tank.
SL.NO. SYSTEM CAPACITY REMARKS
1 Fire Hydrant System 400 cum
Conclusion
Based on above calculations capacity of Fire water tank is worked out to 171cum, but it is rounded off
to 400 cum in two compartments. Pumps will take suction from both compartments through common
suction header.
Fire Extinguishers
Fire extinguishers of suitable type / capacity shall be installed in the entire complex including parking
areas.
Extinguishers shall be fixed either on walls / columns OR shall be mount on the floor stands fabricated
for the purpose.
Extinguishers shall be located in such a way that occupants shall not travel more than 15 mts. to reach
an extinguisher / minimum 2 Nos. per 300 sq.mts of floor area.
Fire water / sand Buckets shall be provided at HSD / FO storage yards, Transformer yards, Bus / car /
two-wheeler parking etc, Buckets shall be hung on the suitable floor stands.
Page 580 of 1358

PHE INFRASTRUCTURE & MASTER SCHEME DBR
Contents:
1. Design objectives
2. Source of water
3. Water Demand
4. Water Storage and distribution
5. Sanitary fixtures and fittings.
6. Sewerage system
7. Storm water Management and rainwater harvesting
STATUTORY REQUIREMENTS:
The Design Will Comply With The Following Requirements:
• National Building Code.

• Bureau of Indian Standard codes.
• The Environmental Protection Act in liaison with the Environmental Agency.
• Any other applicable laws as per local authorities
Design Objectives:
System design as per NBC Local by-law requirement:

⚫ Minimize water consumption / maximize the water efficiency within buildings to reduce the burden
on municipal water supply and wastewater supply.
⚫ Energy efficient distribution networks for all utilities.
⚫ All possible recycle and reuse options to achieve zero discharge philosophy and also to achieve
self-sustainability strategy.
⚫ Quality of supply water to be as per the end user requirement.
⚫ Establish piping network designs to ensure that Uniform pressure is available at all the user points.
⚫ Low noise and hammering free water supply distribution system.
⚫ The plumbing system shall be designed to achieve all points pertaining to LEED requirement.
Design Objectives Design Standards
⚫ System design as per NBC, Local by-law requirement.
Page 581 of 1358

Key Design Features

⚫ Water efficient sanitary ware & CP fittings, photo sensors for all urinals flushing system, which can
result in savings in potable water
⚫ All mechanical equipment shall have standby to minimize the downtime.
⚫ Water storage tanks are designed to tackle the eventuality of intermittent water supply by the
municipal authorities.
⚫ Zero discharge from the premises by recycling the treated water to be used for landscape, HVAC
and Toilet flushing.
⚫ Water hammer arrestors to avoid the noise and damage of piping due to hammering action.
⚫ Select mechanical equipment based on energy savings, high efficiency, ecofriendly, low operation
and maintenance cost.
Source Of Water
Water Source to this project will either be from the Narmada supply (270000 liters per day) or from
other sources like tankers, from where the water will be stored in the underground sump. From here it
will pass through the water treatment plant and stored in the zonal underground tanks/overhead
reservoir, from where the water will be supplied to the overhead tanks of the respective individual units.
All sewage will be led to the central STP / ETP. Recycled water from STP / ETP will be utilized for (Toilet
flushing and Landscaping) Bought out water after treatment will meet any short fall.
The STP is designed for 150 KLD capacity and ETP 250 KLD as to meet water requirement in campus.
Storage Of Water
The water will be stored in central UG sump to the extent of two day’s requirement and after treatment
will be stored treated water tank. Further the water will be transferred to the local underground tanks
and decentralized OHT with the help of transfer pumps to the extent of half day’s storage. The individual
OHTs will have the capacity to store one and a half day’s requirement.
Water Distribution – Domestic And Flushing

• Water supply shall be from main OHT.
• Water pipes from the OHT shall be routed through adequate size Hume pipe across the road
crossings.
• Each unit is having dedicated OHT & water to these tanks is fed by gravity main supply line from
the central OHT.
• Each unit shall be provided with a water meter chamber with necessary controls for the
regulation of water.
• Separate main lines will be laid to feed multi storeyed units and single storey units.
• Distribution of water within the unit by gravity system.
Water Distribution – Zonal STP / ETP Treated
• The Treated Water from STP / ETP is collected in a sump and then will be pumped to Individual
overhead flushing tanks with set of Pumps. From there it is distributed by gravity. A separate piping
system will feed the landscaping requirements. .
• The sizing of the entire distribution network is based on the simultaneous use of fixture unit’s
demand. A shut off valve is provided within the battery limit of each unit, which serves for the purpose
of maintenance of any utility. Individual toilets will be provided with a main control valve for isolation
and maintenance of the same.
Page 582 of 1358

• Air release valve and water hammer arrester shall be provided as per requirement of the
design.
• Water supply pipes are routed along the Storm water drain by clamping the pipes to the side
walls of the Drain.
WATER BALANCE
SOURCE Usage
NARMADA POTABLE 270 CUM USAGE DOMESTIC WATER 270 CUM
FLUSHING WATER 159 CUM

STP TREATED WATER 359 CUM
IRRIGATION 200 CUM
Total 629 CUM 629 CUM
IIM INDORE - DAILY WATER DEMAND
BUILDINGS DOMESTIC FLUSHING

REQUIREME REQUIREME
NT IN LTRS. NT IN LTRS.
ACADEMIC BLOCK 86900 68860
ACADEMIC & INCUBATION 8875 7100
MDC ACCOMMODATION 10800 5400
MESS BLOCK 22920 5160
BOYS HOSTEL BLOCK 64000 32500
GIRLS HOSTEL BLOCK 32000 16300
TYPE -V RESIDENCE 21960 11400
TYPE -V RESIDENCE FUTURE 21960 11400
TOTAL DOMESTIC WATER

269415
DEMAND
TOTAL FLUSHING WATER

158120
DEMAND IN LTRS.
TOTAL WATER DEMANDIN LTRS. 427535
Page 583 of 1358

SEWERAGE SYSTEM
Design Objectives
⚫ Achieve zero water discharge from the premises.

⚫ Compliance LOCAL GOVT norms.
⚫ Robust and scalable in design.
⚫ Energy efficient system design.
⚫ Less down time operation due to failure of equipment.
Design Basis
⚫ Sewerage system design as per NBC & local by-law.

⚫ Sewage treatment plant design as CPCB & SPCB norms.
Key Design Features
⚫ The drainage system shall be of 2-pipe system as per NBC, in which the soil and waste pipes
shall be distinct and separate with independent vents.
⚫ All pumps and equipment’s are proposed with standby and also to meet present and future
demands without any disturbance.
⚫ Robust and scalable in design.
⚫ Treated water quality to meet toilet flushing system and landscape irrigation system
parameter.
⚫ Achieve zero discharge concept.
⚫ The storm water / rainwater would be in a totally independent circuit.
Page 584 of 1358

System Description
⚫ The minimum diameter of the vertical soil stack shall be 110mm. All fixtures and appliances
shall be fully trapped to prevent back flow of foul gases and odor into the toilets.
⚫ The sewage from the soil stack shall be connected to the sewer header running below ground
with adequate slope to achieve the smooth flow in the system and ground floor appliances
shall be separately connected to the main sewerage network.
⚫ Finally, the sewage from the sewer header shall be discharged to STP.
⚫ For the waste from Café shall be conveyed in separate line of network and connected to
Grease Trap to remove the oil/grease present in the wastewater and then conveyed to the
external sewage network.
⚫ For easy maintenance of Traps in the toilets trap doors shall be provided.
⚫ All external storm/ drainage/ sewage line should be RCC Hume pipe with proper concrete
encasing.
Material Proposed
⚫ Following are the various materials proposed to use for sewage network system.
⚫ CI pipes and fittings for cafe
⚫ uPVC SWR pipes (6 Kg/Cm2) and fittings for internal and RCC Hume pies for external network.
STORM WATER DRAINAGE SYSTEM
Design Objectives
⚫ Zero discharge concepts by adapting aquifers re-charging and reuse of Terrace rainwater.
Design Basis
⚫ Meteorological data on rain fall.

⚫ Maximum intensity of rain fall of 150mm/hr. is considered for design of roof rainwater down
pipes and storm water drainage network.
Key Design Features
⚫ Implementation of storm water management plan, that reduce impervious cover, promotes
infiltration.
⚫ Design of storm water drains maintaining natural flow by promoting infiltration.
⚫ Zero discharge planning by adapting storm water re-charge wells.
⚫ Precautions to avoid aquifer contamination by providing necessary filter media.
System Description
⚫ Based on the annual rainfall at Indore as per the climatologically data, we have considered
maximum intensity of rainfall as 100 mm / Hr. The Minimum Rainwater Down take Considered
Page 585 of 1358

is 150 mm.
⚫ Rainwater from balconies from various floors will be conveyed through separate stacks and
connected to the external storm water network.
⚫ Rainwater Pipes from the Terrace are Terminated in the external levels which is Connected to
the Rainwater collection sump, overflow of which shall be connected to the External drainage
Storm Water Disposal System
⚫ The storm water disposal system broadly divided into the following:
⚫ Roof Top Drainage
⚫ Site Drainage
Site Drainage Disposal System
⚫ Site sloping towards pond.

⚫ Storm water will be released to the pond through the storm water drainage network
⚫ The site formation level are proposed considering the HFL of Existing pond.
⚫ Rational formula for calculating runoff Q = (C I A) / 360
⚫ Q–Runoff in m3/sec, C– Co-efficient of run off, I – Intensity of rainfall in mm/hr.
⚫ A – Drainage area in hectares.
Storm Water Drainage During Construction:
Special care will be taken during construction to ensure that there is no soil erosion during periods of
heavy rains.
The main channel conveying storm water to pond would be lined with hard material Feeder channels
would meet the main channel through a sieve. Topsoil would be preserved at a location away from the
construction area and techniques like mulching would be used to prevent loss of soil from the mound.
This soil would subsequently be spread over the landscaped area so that the biodiversity is preserved.
⚫ Run-off co-efficient for various types of surfaces

⚫ Open grounds, unpaved street - 0.10 – 0.30
⚫ Parks, lawns, gardens - 0.10 – 0.25
⚫ Macadam roads, pavements - 0.25 – 0.70
⚫ Asphalt pavements - 0.85 – 0.90
⚫ Watertight roof surface - 0.90 – 0.95
⚫ Run Off for entire area estimated for intensity of rainfall at 150 mm/hr,
Page 586 of 1358

⚫ RCC open drain with perforated slabs are proposed for Storm water drainage network.
⚫ Storm water from drain will be routed to the nearby creek at suitable locations.
⚫ Storm water from drain will be disposed to the creek.
Rainwater Harvesting System
⚫ Rainwater from building terraces shall be brought down to the ground level through RWP’s &
connected to storm water network and finally discharged to collection pond and shall be
reused after necessary treatment.
Page 587 of 1358

SEWAGE TREATMENT PLANT (STP) DBR
FAB/Moving Bed Bio Reactor (MBBR)

FAB/Moving Bed Bio Reactor is designed as per the analysis mentioned hereunder. If there is any
change in analysis, there can be changes in the design.
Design Basis
Capacity: 150 KLD
ETP Capacity: 250 Kld
Operating Hours: 24
Sewage Characteristics Unit Inlet Outlet (Scheme-II)
PH 6.5 -8.0 6.5 – 8.0

BOD PPM 250-300 <5
COD PPM 400-500 <20
TSS PPM 150 <5
Oil and Grease PPM <50 NIL
Inlet Temperature in C 25 – 30 25-30
NH4-N Mg/ltr 20-30 <5
Fecal coliform(MPN/100ml) MPN 1000000 <100
PO4-P Mg/ltr 20-40 <2
⚫ The design has been made based on the normal sewage characteristics as mentioned above.
Since the sewage contains significant contribution of kitchen waste it is required to do the
effluent analysis in an authentic laboratory such that we can provide you the appropriate
changes to be made in the system.
⚫ The sewage Treatment plant designed as per latest CPCB guidelines and local regulations.
Use of treated water

For low end purposes such as toilet flushing, gardening car washing etc,
Introduction FMR – Moving Bed Bio Reactor

Conventional wastewater treatment technologies like submerged aerated fixed film (SAFF) reactor,
Rotary biological contactors (RBC), Trickling filters or other activated sludge processes have inherent
disadvantages of large area of operation, higher power inputs and constant operator attention.
FAB/MBBR is as compared to conventional technologies FAB/MBBR media reactors are compact, energy
efficient and user friendly.
Page 588 of 1358

The FAB/MBBR process refers to the operation of activated sludge tanks in various configurations in a
combination of
1. Suspended biomass.
2. MLSS (mixed liquid suspended solids) and
3. Attached biomass, which is attached to the FAB/MBBR media. Such kind of operation is
generally classified as FAB/MBBR
Basic principle
Flock forming organism’s form clusters or attach to available surfaces. The FAB/MBBR carrier material
allows high biomass concentrations per cubic meter of material, which:
⚫ Increases the specific volumetric capacity of activated sludge tanks.

⚫ Controls biomass activity
Treated Water
Bar Tank
Screen
⚫ Reduces operating cost.
The FAB/MBBR technology is a single tank design unit; incorporating.

⚫ A bar screen,
⚫ A specially designed tank with synthetic media,
⚫ A lamella settler,
⚫ The primary lamella settler (Since your COD, TSS Level high )
⚫ The secondary lamella settler
⚫ A chlorine contact tank
The bar screen removes larger floating matter and suspended particles. Screened sewage flows into the
FAB/MBBR tank, which contains the FAB/MBBR media. The FAB/MBBR media significantly increases the
surface area for bacterial growth. Air is supplied through fine diffusers. Bacteria oxidize the organic
matter present in the sewage. Oxidized sewage overflows in the lamella settler. Suspended particles in
the treated wastewater settle, with a part of the settled sludge sliding back to the aeration tank. The
lamella plates provide larger surface areas, thus reducing the settling tank size. Treated water overflows
Page 589 of 1358

into a chlorine contact tank, wherein dosing hypochlorite solution through an electronic dosing system
disinfects the treated water.
Advantages using FAB/MBBR

⚫ Significant reduction in space requirement due to high surface area & loading rate of
⚫ FAB/MBBR media.
⚫ Reduced power and operating costs
⚫ No Sludge recycles.
⚫ No moving parts, less maintenance
MBBR is best suitable when.

⚫ Designing a new wastewater treatment plant when operating cost & space are constraints.
⚫ Upgrading of existing wastewater treatment plants.
⚫ Operate plants in low temperature areas.
⚫ Reduce bulking problems in existing treatment plants.
Applications of FAB/MBBR
1. Decentralized compact sewage treatment plants for Residential complexes, Hotels /
Commercial Center’s / Office Premises / Industries and Rural Communities.
Process Details
Bar Screen
Raw sewage from the source is usually received into the bar screen chamber by gravity. Screen provided
will remove all floating and big size matter such as plastic bottles, polythene bags, glasses, stones, etc.,
which may otherwise choke the pipeline and pumps.
Oil and Grease Trap (Civil Construction)

If the sewage generated includes maximum quantity from kitchen and canteen, there is a possibility of
higher concentrations of oil and grease in the raw sewage. It needs to be removed before biological
treatment as it otherwise may cause problems for biological treatment. Usually, a small civil
construction tank with a baffle wall and slotted oil pipe skimmer is provided. The oil and grease removed
by gravity floats to the surface, which is removed by the oil skimmer if requires (by client).
Equalization Tank (Civil Construction)

Usually, sewage generation is more during morning hours and evening hours. Visually no sewage is
generated during night hours. Any biological system needs constant feed for bacteria to work efficiently.
Hence, it is important to put an equalization tank to collect the excess flow during peak hours and feed
sewage in lean hours. A typical equalization tank has a capacity of 8 – 12 hours of average flow rate. The
tank is generally of civil construction by client. Provision of air grid is to be made for thoroughly mixing
the sewage to make it of homogenous quality and to keep the suspended matter in suspension and to
avoid septic conditions.
Page 590 of 1358

Transfer of Sewage
Contractor’s scope starts from transfer of sewage from Equalization Tank to MBBR tank. The distance
of transfer should not exceed beyond 5 meters. The transfer pump can be either submersible or non-
submersible type for this application. However, IEI has considered centrifugal non-submersible type.
The layout shall be as per IEI standard.
⚫ The pump should not run dry and Client to ensure sufficient sewage is available in the Equalization
Tank.
Process Flow Block Diagram
Page 591 of 1358

FAB/MBBR Tank
FAB/MBBR as the name indicates consists of floating media of various shapes and sizes. The main
objective of adding this media is to make available more surface area for bacteria to grow on, thereby
maintaining and retaining maximum possible bacterial population in a limited volume. The FAB/MBBR
media material allows biomass concentration of 20 – 40 Kgs/m3 material. Thus, FAB/MBBR consists of
combination of biomass in attached as well as suspended form. High concentration of biomass enables
reduction of aeration tank and in turn reduction in overall cost. Volume of the media shall vary from 6
to 25 % based on the concentration of organic matter.
Another main feature of the FAB/MBBR is its compactness. The FAB/MBBR consists of biological system
for removal of organic matter (BOD, COD), lamella for clarification and chlorine contact tank for
disinfection. As all units are placed inside a single tank, it saves space and also increases operational
ease.
In FAB/MBBR, raw sewage enters at the top of the tank. Air is introduced at the bottom of the tank
through fine bubble diffusers. Media will be in suspension because of the turbulence created by the air.
The bacteria required for the oxidation of the organic matter is attached to the media and some part is
suspended in the tank. After oxidation, the bacteria grow in number and need to be separated from the
aeration tank liquor. The lamella section inside the MBBR helps in clarification and separation of the
bacteria (sludge) and clear overflow flows into chlorine contact tank. Lamella plates helps in increasing
the settling area and removing the particles effectively in a smaller plan area. In chlorine contact tank,
Sodium hypo Chlorite (NaOCl) is added for disinfecting the clarified sewage. Baffle plates are provided
to make better contact. The chlorinated treated sewage then flows out of FAB/MBBR either for further
treatment or for disposal.
Treated Water Collection Tank

The treated water collection tank can be of civil construction by client in case required. The treated water
can be collected either from the chlorination chamber in Scheme I or from Activated Carbon Filter in
Scheme II.
Multi Grade Filter

Product Description – Multi grade filter is a depth filter that makes use of coarse and fine media mixed
together in a fixed proportion. This arrangement produces a filter bed with adequate pore dimensions
for retaining both large and small suspended particles. This filter performs at a substantially higher
specific flow rate than conventional filters. Specific flow rates of 0.82 – 1.64 ft/min have been successfully
obtained for treating waters containing 25 – 50 ppm suspended solids respectively to produce filtrate
with less than 5 ppm.
Features
Higher specific velocity.
Raw water can be used for backwashing the filter.
Applications
The Multigrade filter is an ideal choice for all applications where a conventional sand filter is used. It is
extensively used in side stream filtration of cooling water and in potable water treatment. It is ideal for
filtration of clarified water. In addition, it finds application in sea water filtration and infiltration of
chemical solutions. For these types of filtration rubber lined or epoxy painted filters are used.
Page 592 of 1358

Activated Carbon Filter

The activated carbon filters use granular activated carbon as media. These filters are ideally suited for
de - chlorination of water with free chlorine content and for removal of organic matter. The free chlorine
is reduced to "not detectable" levels.
Applications:
De-chlorination of water for drinking water applications.
Removal of organic matter from water.
Sludge
The sludge from the Clarifier to be removed from the bottom of the Clarifier once in a day by client and
transferred to sludge drying bed either by gravity or through pump depending on site condition. Before
starting the De-sludging, shut off the aeration for 30 minutes and allow the sludge to concentrate at the
bottom.
After concentration, the bottom sludge valve can be open to drain the required quantity of sludge. An
air scour pipe is provided to dislodge any media choking the drain outlet. Open the air scour valve for
short time to remove the clog.
Page 593 of 1358

UNDERGROUND TANK (UGT) DBR
⚫ What is an underground tank?

An underground tank (or sub-surface tank) is a water storage structure constructed below the ground.
The term also includes structures that are partially below ground. In most cases, underground tanks
collect and store runoff from ground catchments such as open grasslands, hillsides, home compounds,
roads, footpaths, paved and unpaved areas However, in certain circumstances, roof catchments can
also be channeled into underground tanks.
1. UGT
2. Boys Hostel UGT
3. Girls Hostel UGT
4. Type -V Residence UGT
5. Centralized UGT of 30 lakh liter capacity with WTP
Page 594 of 1358

Central Underground Tank Layout
⚫ Domestic UGT Tank total capacity = 540 KLD

⚫ Fire UGT Tank total capacity = 400 KLD
⚫ Central UGT Total capacity = 940 KLD
S. DOMESTIC
BLOCKS
NO. REQUIREMENT
1. ACADEMIC BLOCK 86900 LD
2. ACADEMIC & INCUBATION 8875 LD
3. MDC ACCOMMODATION 10800 LD

4. MESS BLOCK 22920 LD
5. BOYS HOSTEL BLOCK 64000 LD
6. GIRLS HOSTEL BLOCK 32000 LD
7. TYPE -V RESIDENCE 21960 LD
TYPE -V RESIDENCE FUTURE 21960 LD
8.
TOTAL DOMESTIC CAPACITY 269415 LD
Page 595 of 1358

Total Domestic Capacity Of UGT Of All Blocks = 270 KLD Hence Considering The Capacity For 2 Days We
Have Provided Central UGT Of 540 KLD For Domestic Purposes. The proposed water treatment plant
(WTP) capacity is 21 LPS(16hr operation). The inlet water (worst condition) collection and parameters
tests to be done by the EPC contractor and design and deliver the outlet water parameters shall be as
per CPCB/WHO/IS10500:2012 or latest standards.
Page 596 of 1358

WATER TREATMENT SYSTEM DBR
⚫ Chlorination
Water chlorination is the process of adding chlorine or chlorine compounds such as sodium
hypochlorite to water. This method is used to kill bacteria, viruses and other microbes in water. In
particular, chlorination is used to prevent the spread of waterborne diseases such as cholera, dysentery,
and typhoid.
⚫ Why Do We Chlorinate Our Water?

A large amount of research and many studies have been conducted to ensure success in new treatment
plants using chlorine as a disinfectant. A leading advantage of chlorination is that it has proven effective
against bacteria and viruses; however, it cannot inactivate all microbes. Some protozoan cysts are
resistant to the effects of chlorine.
In cases where protozoan cysts are not a major concern, chlorination is a good disinfection method to
use because it is inexpensive yet effective in disinfecting many other possibly present contaminants.
The chlorination process is also fairly easy to implement, when compared to other water treatment
methods. It is an effective method in water emergency situations as it can eliminate an overload of
pathogens relatively quickly. An emergency water situation can be anything from a filter breakdown to
a mixing of treated and raw water.
⚫ How Does Chlorine Inactivate Microorganisms?

Chlorine inactivates a microorganism by damaging its cell membrane. Once the cell membrane is
weakened, the chlorine can enter the cell and disrupt cell respiration and DNA activity (two processes
that are necessary for cell survival).
Choliration process
⚫ Aeration may be employed for a variety of reasons, including removal of volatile taste- and odor-
Page 597 of 1358

producing compounds, precipitation of iron and manganese and removal of carbon dioxide.
⚫ Oxidation may be used for purposes other than disinfection; these include precipitation of iron
and manganese, taste and odor control, color removal and oxidation of trace organic compounds.
The principal oxidizing agents employed in water treatment are chlorine, chloramines, ozone and
chlorine dioxide (White, 1986).
⚫ pH Adjustment, usually to more alkaline levels, is used to achieve optimal values for other
processes, including coagulation and disinfection, as well as to reduce the corrosiveness of the
water supply. pH can be increased by adding chemicals such as lime, caustic soda or soda ash or
by placing the water in contact with a bed of sparingly soluble material, such as marble. The pH of
drinking-water is typically in the range 7.5
⚫ Softening. Hardness in water results from the presence of calcium and magnesium compounds.
When hardness is excessive, it can be reduced by precipitation softening or ion exchange. In
precipitation softening, lime (and sometimes soda ash) is added to precipitate calcium as calcium
carbonate, which is removed in a sedimentation tank. Ion-exchange softening is used only for
ground waters; the water is passed through a bed of cationic resin which exchanges sodium for
calcium and magnesium. When the resin is fully loaded with calcium and magnesium, it is
regenerated using a strong brine solution.
⚫ Activated carbon may be employed to remove natural and synthetic organic chemicals. It is
produced by the controlled combustion of wood, coal and other material to produce a porous
material with a large surface area and a high affinity for organic compounds. A slurry of powder
can be added to the water and then removed by subsequent treatment processes, such as
coagulation. Alternatively, granular- activated carbon can be employed in purpose-built absorbers,
or as a replacement for some of the sand in a rapid gravity filter.
Page 598 of 1358

NET ZERO BUILDINGS DBR
Page 599 of 1358

General Brief
Global warming and climate change are rising issues during the last couple of decades. With residential
and commercial buildings being the largest energy consumers, sources are being depleted at a much
faster pace in the recent decades. Recent statistics shows that 14% of humans are active participant to
protect the environment with an additional 48% sympathetic but not active. In this chapter, net-zero
energy buildings design tools and applications are presented that can help designers in the commercial
and residential sectors design their buildings to be net-zero energy buildings. Case studies with benefits
and challenges will be presented to illustrate the different designs to achieve a net-zero energy building
(NZEB).
Global warming and climate change are rising issues during the last couple of decades. Buildings
including commercial and residential ones are major contributors to energy consumption. Energy
consumption in buildings significantly increases on a yearly basis due to the increased human comfort
needs and services. Multiple factors affect the energy consumption used for cooling buildings such as
wall structure, window to wall ratio, and building orientation in addition to weather conditions. Energy
consumed by buildings was reported to compose a relatively large proportion of the global energy
consumption. The building construction and the way it is operated and maintained have a significant
impact on the total energy and water usage of the world resources.
Thermal characteristics of building envelopes have become of rising significance for designers and
owners due to its relation to energy consumption reduction. Improper thermal insulations in buildings
can lead to higher chances of surface condensation when air has relative humidity higher than 80% and
when the convective and radiative heat transfer coefficients of the exterior walls are small.
The purpose of this chapter is to discuss benefits and design guidelines for zero energy buildings. NZEBs
have tremendous potential to transform the way buildings use energy. In response to regulatory
mandates, federal government agencies and many other state and local governments are beginning to
move toward targets for NZEBs.
There are several metrics that define the performance of buildings such as the net-zero site energy
building, net-zero source energy buildings, net-zero energy cost building, and net-zero energy emission
building.
The net-zero site energy building is defined as the building that produces as much energy as it consumes
when measured at the site. The net-zero source energy building is the building that produces as much
energy on an annual basis as it uses as compared to the energy content at the source. On the other
hand, the net-zero energy cost building is the building that uses energy efficiency and renewable energy
strategies as part of the business model. Lastly, the net-zero energy emission buildings is the building
design that looks at the emissions that were produced by the energy needs of the building. Figure
1 shows various energy efficiency measures
Page 600 of 1358

Figure 1
Calculation and Summary for Net Zero Energy Service
S. Description Connected Div. Max Div. Average Hours Of Total Total Days Total Units
No. Load In KW Demand Operating Operation Units of Month Consumed
Load in Demand in a day consumed Considere in a Month
Kw In Kw per Day d
Girls
372 0.3 111.6 0.45 50.22 12 602.64 30 18,079.20
1 Hostel
B. Hostel - 0.4
372 0.3 111.6 50.22 12 602.64 30 18,079.20
2 1 5
B. Hostel - 0.4
372 0.3 111.6 50.22 12 602.64 30 18,079.20
3 2 5
Type V
0.2 0.2
Residence 471 117.75 29.44 12 353.25 30 10,597.50
5 5
4 -1
MDC 146.63 0.4
488.79 0.3 65.99 12 791.84 30 23,755.19
5 Hostel 7 5
Incubatio 0.4
533 0.4 213.2 95.94 10 959.4 25 23,985.00
6 n center 5
0.4
98 0.4 39.2 17.64 4 70.56 30 2,116.80
7 Mess 5
Faculty 0.4
122.84 0.4 49.136 22.11 10 221.112 25 5,527.80
8 Office 5
Academic 0.4
1507 0.4 602.8 271.3 10 2712.6 25 67,815.00
9 Block 5
Grand 188,034.8
4336.63 6916.68
10 Total 9
Page 601 of 1358

Summary for Solar System (On Grid)
S.
Description
No.
Proposed Capacity of
1 1,800.00
Solar Power in Kw
Units Generated per

2 Kw per day by Solar 4.20
System
Total Units Generated

3 7,560.00
in a day
Total Units
Generated in a
189,000.0
4 Month (25 days
0
considered per
Month)
Note: For Further Details related to Net Zero calculations/ Proposal can be referred from
Consolidated Building wise DBR Folders. Space provision needs to confirm for feeder
provision in Electrical Panel.
Area identified for Panels Solar PV Panels
Power To be Generated 1,800 KW

Power in Watts 18,00,000 Watts
Panel Out put 250 Watts
Number of Panels 7,200
Area of Panel 1.70 Sqm.
Total Area Required 12,240 Sqm.
Area for Overlay 13,464 Sqm.

Say Total Area Required 13,500 Sqm.
Available Terrace Area 11216 Sqm.

Loss due to Mummy and Shadow
70 %
Area
Terrace Area Available for Solar

7851 Sqm.
PV
More Area required 5649 Sqm.
Page 602 of 1358

Parking Area - considering 90% of

2,340
the Parking area
P2C 369 Sqm.
P2D 369 Sqm.
P3 194 Sqm.
P4 344 Sqm.
P5 564 Sqm.
P6 500 Sqm.
Ancillary Buildings - considering

1,956
70% terrace area
Centralized UGT 420 Sqm.
WTP 458 Sqm.
STP 228 Sqm.
Electric Substation 1 425 Sqm.
Electric Substation 2 425 Sqm.
Area Percentage Unit

Total Area Required for Solar
13,500 Sqm
PV
Installation area, breakup - 14,187 105% Sqm

Terrace Area Available for Solar
7,851 58% Sqm
PV
Parking Area 2,340 17% Sqm
Ancillary Buildings - Terrace 1,956 14% Sqm
South side Road - One side of
the road, Panels on steel 2,040 15% Sqm
structure.
Page 603 of 1358

GREEN BUILDING DBR
Page 604 of 1358

GRIHA- Rating System and Certification

The GRIHA V 2015 rating system consists of 31 criteria categorized under various sections such as Site
Planning, Construction Management, Occupant Comfort and Wellbeing, Sustainable Building Materials,
Performance Monitoring and Validation, and Innovation.
GRIHA is a performance-oriented system where points are earned for meeting the design and
performance intent of the criteria. Each criterion has certain points assigned to it. It means that a project
demonstrating compliance with a criterion would achieve the associated points. GRIHA is a 100-point
system consisting of some core points, which are mandatory, while the rest are optional. Different levels
of certification (one star to five stars) are awarded based on the number of points earned. The minimum
points required for certification are 25. The scores for achieving GRIHA rating have been revised. The
new thresholds for achieving GRIHA rating are mentioned below:
GRIHA V 2015 Rating

Thresholds GRIHA Rating
25-40
41-55
56-70
71-85
86 or more
Rating Process
i. Registration
A project must be registered with GRIHA Council through the GRIHA website by filling in the registration
form online. Registration should preferably be done at beginning of a project, as several issues need to
be addressed at the pre-design stage. The registration process includes access to the essential
information related to rating.
ii. Post-registration workshops

An orientation workshop is conducted by the GRIHA Council, for the entire project team comprising of
the owner, architect, MEP Consultants, landscape consultants, project manager, etc. The workshop
serves the dual purpose of awareness of GRIHA System for all involved and identification and evaluation
of the optional criteria to enhance the rating of the project.
iii. Online Submission of documents

The project proponent is required to provide documentary evidence to demonstrate compliance with
the criteria. The required list of documents is mentioned in the criteria in the GRIHA Manual. All
Page 605 of 1358

compliance documents shall be submitted through the online portal on the GRIHA website. Submitted
documents will be checked and vetted by GRIHA Council.
iv. Due Diligence

Three site visits will be conducted as part of the rating process to verify the compliances on site. The
first site visit will be done when the project is at plinth level, the second one will be done when the
structural work is complete and interior finishing is in progress. The third and final site visit will be done
after the preliminary document assessment by GRIHA.
v. Evaluation process
Complete and consolidated rating documents submitted by the project proponent shall be sent for a
third-party review. Third party reviewers are identified and trained by the GRIHA Council under the
supervision of the Technical Advisory Committee of GRIHA. On-site checks will be carried out by the
GRIHA Council 3 times during the project execution phase for auditing the green features as part of the
Due-Diligence visits.
1. The submission summary report generated by the online portal will be sent to the evaluators. The
evaluators will award provisional points and comment on specific criteria, if need be.
2. The evaluation report will be sent to the project proponent to review the same and, if desired, take
steps to increase the score. The report will have elaborate remarks of the evaluation committee along
with comments. The report will list the criteria for which the documentation is incomplete, detailing the
information, which is required.
3. The project proponent will be given one-month time to resubmit the documents with necessary
modifications /additions. The resubmitted documents will comprise only of the additional documents /
information desired in the evaluation report.
4. The resubmitted documents will again be put through the vetting process described above. The
evaluation committee will then award the final score.
5. Final award of rating will be subject to an independent energy audit of the project after a year of
commissioning the building.
6. Once rated, the rating will be valid for a period of five years from the date of commissioning of the
building. GRIHA reserves the right to undertake a random on-site audit of any criteria for which points
have been awarded.
Note: It may please be noted that rating is subject to fulfilment of minimum requirements as necessary
under GRIHA. Projects that do not fulfil mandatory criteria and minimum required optional criteria are
not eligible for rating.
Certification Fees
The registration cum rating fee (subject to review and modification) is as follows:
Built-up Area (sqm) Fees
2,500 – 5,000 Rs 3,14,000
For every sqm above 5,000 Rs 3.75 per sqm
Page 606 of 1358

The fee includes.

⚫ GRIHA costs for preliminary assessment, administration, and coordination of online
documentation submission, and support over the project duration.
⚫ Third party evaluator fees.
⚫ One-day training workshop for project team.
A third-party, post-occupancy (at the operational stage) audit is to be conducted for the confirmation of
provisional rating after 12 months. A BEE certified energy auditor shall be appointed by the project
proponent to conduct the audit. This is not included in the GRIHA cost.
If the preliminary assessment or workshop or site visits are out of station for New Delhi, all expenditure
incurred on travel by flight (to & fro) and accommodation shall be arranged by the project proponent.
Two members from GRIHA Council will conduct 3 site visits, in the beginning of the project, middle and
towards the end of the project execution stages. Their travel and accommodation arrangements will
have to be made by the client.
Government taxes as applicable during registration are added to registration and rating fees.
GRIHA Feasibility Report

This report is a working document as part of the feasibility report that needs to be prepared for IIM
Indore project. This feasibility document will elaborate all credits and its details requirements with
respect to the project and also give inputs and suggestions for material selection and products and
other documents required to achieve the desired level of GRIHA certification.
The document wherever requires will also try and highlight the cost and savings benefit to the client for
the GRIHA credit achievement. The document will progress as and when details of the project get
completed like architectural layouts, landscape design, MEP design etc. AKA will then further work in
sync with these consultants to achieve relevant credits and requirements for the GRIHA certification.
Below listed are all GRIHA credits and points that can be achieved as of date with the required
documents and available data. This checklist is to give various consultants a brief about their area of
work and what needs to be done to achieve credits w.r.t. GRIHA certification.
Note -
- EPC contractor needs to follow latest GRIHA self-evaluation checklist
- It is mandatory for EPC contractors to get GRIHA 5-star rating for Group VIII Projects, IIM Indore.
Project Name Group VIII Projects

Targeted Rating 5 Star Rating
Ma
Criter Points
Man Section Criterion x
ion Type Attem Compliances
ual Name Name Poi
No pted
nts
1. Optimum Design
Green Partly
2. Basic amenities within the Campus
1 Infrastruc Manda 5 5
3. Promotion of Non-Motorized Vehicle
Sustaina ture tory
and EV Charging Facility.
ble
I Opting three strategy -
Site Low
1. Minimizing heat gain trough tress,
Planning Impact Option
2 5 3 orientation, mutual shading and sun
Design al
breakers.
Strategies
2. Provision of SWD for 90% area.
Page 607 of 1358

3. Retaining the natural contours and

slope.
Achieving reduction in temperature by -
Design to 1. Having Sun Breakers for Academic
Option
3 Mitigate 2 1 Buildings,
al
UHIE 2. Heat reflective material and Insulating
material on roofs.
Adopting Mandatory Griha
requirements -
1. Provision of 3-meter-high barricading
around the construction area. 2. Wheel
washing facility at the vehicular entrance
Air and
Partly of the site.
Soil
4 Manda 1 1 3. All diesel generator sets on site to have
Pollution
tory proper chimneys with their outlet facing
Control
away from the site.
4. Water sprinkling on fine aggregate
(sand) and excavated earth
Constru
5. Limit the speed of vehicular
II ction
movement on-site to 10km/h.
Manage
Topsoil Included as a mandatory item in the
ment Option
5 Preservati 1 1 Tender for the EPC Contractor to
al
on execute.
1. Ensuring Proper stacking and storage
of material including safe disposal of
Constructi
waste.
on Partly
2. Minimizing water consumption by use
6 Managem Manda 2 2
of Gunny bags, curing compound, and
ent tory
admixtures.
Practices
3. Metering the water consumption
during construction.
1 Use of exterior lighting fixtures (lamp +
ballast) meet the luminous efficacy of
Energy Partly
80lm/W.
7 Optimizat Manda 12 10
2. Use of BEE 5-Star labelled equipment.
ion tory
3. Peak heat load through building
Energy
envelope will be done.
Optimiz
Renewabl Partly We are aiming for Net Zero Energy
ation
8 e Energy Manda 5 3 Building which shall be achieved through
Utilization tory Solar PV.
III Low ODP Partly
Achieving through use of CFC and HCFC
9 and GWP Manda 1 1
free refrigeration and HVAC System.
Materials tory
Provision of natural light is done, and use
Partly of Lightning Automation is done to
Visual
Occupan 10 Manda 4 4 ensure Artificial lighting is in sync with
Comfort
t tory the natural light. Solar path analysis will
Comfort be done.
Thermal Partly 1. Building orientation, sun breakers,
11 2 2
and Manda trees and green areas are placed such to
Page 608 of 1358

Acoustic tory achieve maximum Thermal Comfort.

Comfort 2. Simulation will be done.
1. Fresh Air Intake provision made to
Partly enhance the indoor air quality.
Indoor Air
12 Manda 6 6 2. CO2 sensors proposed as per
Quality
tory standards for monitoring CO2 levels.
3. Use of Low VOC and lead-free paints.
1. Use of Low Flow Water Fixture to
Water Partly
reduce usage.
13 Demand Manda 4 4
2. Reuse of treated STP water in Flushing
Reduction tory
and Landscape irrigation.
Wastewat
er Option 1. STP plant of 400KLD capacity installed
14 2 1
Treatmen al to treat wastewater generated.
Water t
Manage Storm Water Drain proposed in design
Rainwater
ment Option along the roads with Rainwater
15 Managem 5 4
al Harvesting pit for Rainwater
ent
management.
Water
IV Water treatment plant for treatment of
Quality Partly
municipality supply water. Also,
16 and Self- Manda 5 5
provision of RO system on each floor of
sufficienc tory
Hostels and Accommodation.
y
Waste Compliances post start of the facility -
Managem Partly 1. Provision of Color-Coded Waste Bins.
17 ent – Post Manda 4 4 2. Segregation of Waste.
Solid
Occupanc tory 3. Evidence for proper disposal of Waste
Waste
y to be shown.
Manage
Organic
ment
Waste Option Provision of Organic Waster composter
18 2 2
Treatmen al to convert organic waste into manure.
t
Utilization
of
Alternativ 1. Use of Fly Ash Bricks.
Option
19 e 5 5 2. Fly ash in RCC.
al
Materials 3. Use of GSB for roads.
in
Sustaina Building
ble Reduction
V Building in Global Using of fly ash bricks and other
Material Warming buildings materials which have recycled
s Potential Option content and sourced as locally as
20 5 2
through al possible will substantially reduce the
Life Cycle embodied energy from the base building
Assessme case
nt
Alternativ Option 1. Using fly ash in Roads.
21 2 2
e al 2. Using Indian Stones for External
Page 609 of 1358

Materials Development.
for 3. Use of recycles Paver Bocks.
External
Site
Developm
ent
Life Life Cycle
Option Simulation will be done after project
Cycle 22 Cost 5 3
al completion.
Costing Analysis
Safety
and
Sanitation Partly
Mandated in the Tender as per EHS
23 for Manda 1 1
Standards.
Constructi tory
on
Workers
Universal
Socio Option Entire campus including Classrooms is
24 Accessibili 2 2
Economi al designed Barrier free.
ty
c
Dedicated
Strategi
Facilities
es Option
25 for 2 2 Provisions made for Service staff toilets.
al
Service
Staff
1. Hygienic sanitation, will be provided at
Positive Partly site.
VI
26 Social Manda 3 2 2. Tobacco bans till construction on site.
Impact tory 3. Awareness programs for workers and
staff.
Ensuring that systems installed are as
Project
Manda per requirement like HVAC, Solar
27 Commissi 0 0
tory Heating, DGs, Transformers, Pumps,
oning
WTP, STP, etc.
Perform Smart
ance Metering Partly Implementation of Building
Meterin 28 and Manda 7 5 Management system shall be done for
g and Monitorin tory monitoring and metering the data.
Monitori g
ng Operation
and Committee to be formed and Operation
Manda
29 Maintena 0 0 and Maintenance manuals will be
tory
nce prepared to achieve the same.
Protocol
Total
100 83
Points
Innovati Innovatio Option
VII 30 5 3
on n al
Grand
100
Total 86
+5
Points
Page 610 of 1358

SOLID WASTE AND C&D WASTE

MANAGEMENT DBR
Page 611 of 1358

Overview
Solid-waste management is the collection, treatment, and disposal of solid material that is discarded
because it has served its purpose or is no longer useful. Improper disposal of municipal solid waste can
create unsanitary conditions, and these conditions in turn can lead to pollution of the environment and
to outbreaks of vector-borne diseases—that is, diseases spread by rodents and insects. The task of solid-
waste management presents complex technical challenges. They also pose a wide variety of
administrative, economic, and social problems that must be managed and solved.
Construction and Demolition (C&D) materials consist of the debris generated during the construction,
renovation and demolition of buildings, roads, and bridges. The waste generated can be recycled to
make tiles and pavers that can be used in hardscapes. Certain C&D materials can also be used in new
building projects, thus avoiding the need to mine and process virgin materials.
Introduction: IIM Indore

IIM Indore is one of the fastest growing institutions in India today. IIM Indore is regarded as one of the
most beautiful educational campuses in India among all B-Schools by students, parents and
professionals alike. Situated atop a scenic hillock, the Institute is blessed with scenic beauty and has
remarkable architecture, structural designs and facilities. The campus provides an ideal backdrop for
contemplative learning.
The pace of development in infrastructural facilities at IIM Indore has been phenomenal. The new
development (Group-VIII project) is on the south side of the campus, has contour difference of
approximately 2 m which includes-
⚫ Academic Building Including Faculty & Staff /AA Offices
⚫ MDC academic + incubation
⚫ MDC accommodation building
⚫ Type 5 residences
⚫ Boys’ and girls’ Hostels
⚫ Mess
Aim of the project

1. To manage the different types of solid waste generated on IIM Indore campus post-occupancy.
2. To manage the construction waste generated on site.
Solid Waste Management

Since higher education campuses are like mini autonomous cities, they can act as a model for solid
waste management (SWM) and enhance sustainable development. SWM is one of the basic parameters
of environmental sustainability. The average rate of waste generation in India is 1.5 kg/ capita/ day. A
dedicated SWM program on the campus will sensitize and build the consciousness of the campus
occupants toward waste management; increase the productivity and performance of students and
employees by providing clean and healthy workplace; influence the local community by creating a
difference in the level of cleanliness between the campus and the local environment. A SWM program
on campus will also benefit the campus through reduced resource consumption and waste diversion.
The campus community can be sensitized about the benefits of SWM through awareness programs,
motivational interactions, creating a web portal and sharing information on the issues along with the
community participation.
Sound practices in waste management refer to processes, policies and technologies. Administrative
interventions and community involvements contribute to a sustainable SWM system. Reduction of
waste at source by the individual generator through the use of products which are reusable is the first
Page 612 of 1358

option. Composting is a highly efficient and beneficial technique of SWM for organic waste. Some studies
conducted in the Indian context, show that 80 to 90% of waste going to landfill sites can be prevented
by treatment of organic waste. The process of recycling of inorganic waste is an economical method of
utilizing the separated waste to make new products. The participation mechanism in the waste
management process is extremely important as key points address community participation,
outsourcing, capacity building and skill development.
Steps for developing an SWM Plan for IIM Indore campus:
➢ Identifying the types of waste generated on campus such as Dry, Organic, Glass, Metal, Plastic,
Electronic, etc.
➢ Estimate the quantity of different types of waste generated (kg/day) based on campus occupancy
details.
➢ Identifying the waste generation points such as classrooms, offices, studios, hostel rooms, kitchen,
etc. and develop a strategy for segregation at source such as the use of differently colored dustbins
for different types of waste.
➢ Determining waste collection points in big bins based on various waste generation points.
➢ Identifying waste pick-up zones for covered transportation to recycling/treatment/disposal site
➢ Identifying options for treatment of wet waste on or off site
➢ Devising a plan for transportation of residual waste to processing/disposal sites
➢ Identifying options for collection and safe and suitable recycling/disposal of Electronic waste such
as batteries, pen drives, chargers, earphones, etc. as electronic products contain hazardous
materials which include poisonous chemicals
➢ Estimating the number of personnel required for SWM process as well as an inventory of
containers, tools and equipment which will be needed on campus
➢ Cost estimation for the entire process of SWM from generation to disposal
➢ Developing strategies for awareness amongst individuals to reduce waste at prime source to
develop a sustainable waste management system on campus
Group VIII development can be divided in 3 areas for efficient management-
The waste is generated in Indore in segregated form. The waste generators have been classified as
Page 613 of 1358

domestic, semi bulk and bulk generators. Domestic generators are the generators that generate less
than 25 kg of waste per day. Generators that generate 25-100 kg of waste per day have been classified
assemi bulk generators. The generators generating more than 50 kg of waste have been classified as
bulk generators.
The waste is generated in segregated form as wet waste, dry waste and domestic hazardous waste by
the domestic generators. The bulk generators segregate the waste as wet waste and dry waste.
The dry waste from both the transfer stations and the bulk collection vehicles is offloaded at the MRF
centers, where they are further segregated and processed. The wet waste from the transfer stations
and the bulk collection system is offloaded for processing at the central composting plant at the site.
The wet waste of the bulk generators is processed on site by the respective generators.
C & D Waste Management

‘Guidelines on Environmental Management of C&D wastes by CPCB will be followed for IIM Indore. As
this is a new development demolition waste is very less compared to the new construction waste. There
are 2 types of components in new construction i.e. Major components [Cement concrete, Bricks, Cement
plaster, Steel (from RCC, door/window frames, roofing support, railings of staircase etc.), Rubble, Stone
(marble, granite, sand stone) and Timber/wood (especially demolition of old buildings)] and Minor
components Conduits (iron, plastic), Pipes (GI, iron, plastic), Electrical fixtures (copper/ aluminum wiring,
wooden baton, switches, wire insulation), Panels (wooden, laminated), Others (glazed tiles, glass panes).
Below are the steps for developing a C & D management Plan for IIM Indore campus:
➢ Calculation of C & D on the basis of data developed by Technology Information, Forecasting and
Assessment Council's (TIFAC) which states that for new construction range of 40-60 kg per sq.m is
to be considered and for demolition range of 300-500 kg per sq.m and site data as every project is
different.
➢ Identifying the waste that can be recycled at site for e.g. broken tiles, pavers, etc.
➢ Determining the Segregation system, instruments and tools needed, and the number of personnel
required for the process.
➢ Calculation of remaining waste.
➢ Determining C&D waste collection points on the site, so that it should not disturb the present
campus and ongoing construction.
Page 614 of 1358

➢ Determining schedule of transfers and the best suitable way to transfer the waste to the collection
and segregation center.
➢ Identifying waste pick up zones for transportation to the collection and segregation center. The
collection center at IT Park square is nearest to IIM Indore campus.
➢ Cost estimation for the entire process of C & D from segregation to disposal
➢ Suggestions for reuse and minimization of C & D waste.
In India, CPCB’s guidelines on C&D waste is followed and according to the guidelines following are the
components of construction and demolition waste-
➢ The composition of C & D waste can vary depending on age of building being demolished /
renovated or the type of buildings being constructed. As mentioned earlier, C & D waste generation
figures for any region varies as it depends largely on the type and nature of construction /
demolition project activities which may be regional / site / project specific. Under Rule 4 sub-rule
(3) of the C & D waste rules (2016) [1] the segregation by bulk C & D waste generators shall be done
into four streams such as: Concrete, Soil ,Steel, wood and plastics, Bricks & mortar.
➢ Demolition waste characteristics: In India, when old buildings are demolished the major demolition
waste is soil, sand and gravel accounting for bricks (26%) & masonry (32%), Concretes (28%), metal
(6%), wood (3%) others (5%). Bricks, tiles, woods and iron metal are sold for reuse / recycling
(Building Material and Technology Promotion Council).
➢ Excavations, concrete, masonry and wood together constitute over 90% of all C & D waste.
➢ The typical composition of Indian C & D waste: The major constituents are concrete, soil, bricks,
wood, asphalt and metal. Brick & masonry, soil, sand & gravel account for over 60% of total waste.
(Source- Municipal Corporation of Delhi, Burari facility).
Some of the key benefits of efficient recycling and reusing of C & D waste are listed below-
➢ Reduces quantum of transportation and disposal of C & D wastes to be handled when on-site
utilization is encouraged.
➢ Proper segregation of C & D waste avoids mixing with biodegradable waste destined for MSW
treatment facilities / landfills.
➢ Promotes options for reuse / recycle of products from C & D waste.
➢ Roads sides and vacant plots could be freed from debris dumps thereby giving cities a better
facelift.
➢ Creates employment generation and market: C & D waste management activities (segregation,
reuse & recycling being labor intensive activities, generate employment opportunities. The
manufacturing & sale of recycled products creates a market that opens further job opportunities.
The Construction and Demolition waste generated from the Indore city is sent to Construction and
Page 615 of 1358

Demolition waste processing plant at Devguradia. The plant is designed with a capacity of 100 Tons per
day (TPD), and it covers an area of 4 acre.
Indore city generates 100 TPD (Tons per day) of construction and demolition waste which are sent to
four collection and segregation centers by various collection methods. For collection of waste there are
three procedures:
➢ Any C&D waste generator can bring their waste on their own expense and dump it at the collection
center.
➢ C&D waste generators can call on a toll-free number: 18002331311, for collection of their C&D
waste on payment basis.
➢ C&D waste generator can also use the Mayor Helpline app i.e., Indore 311 app, for collection of
their C&D waste on payment basis.
The plant is designed with a capacity of 100 Tons per day (TPD), and it covers an area of 4 acre. The
waste is subjected to a number of operations and processes through a number of units. This entire
activity results in the conversion of Construction and Demolition waste into 40 mm aggregate , 20 mm
Maximum size aggregate , Sand and sludge.
The various processes that are followed with the help of different instruments that are installed at the
C&D waste processing plant are shown with the help of flow chart below:
Page 616 of 1358

Which are then in turn converted into useful end products such as Paver Blocks with finished surface,
rough paver blocks, Rectangular paver bricks and masonry bricks. Thus, the entire Construction and
Demolition waste is converted into valuable end products and the mission of resource recovery is
accomplished.
Page 617 of 1358

SIGNAGES DBR
Page 618 of 1358

About Signages
“Signage is any kind of visual graphics created to display information to a particular audience.” Signs are
any kind of visual graphics created to display information to a particular audience. This is typically
manifested in the form of way finding information in places such as streets or on the inside and outside
of buildings. Signs vary in form and size based on location and intent, from more expansive banners,
billboards, and murals to smaller street signs, street name signs, sandwich boards and lawn signs.
Newer signs may also use digital or electronic displays.
History Of Signages
• The French Enseigne indicates its essential connection with what is known in English as a flag, and in
France , banners not infrequently took the place of signs or sign boards in the Middle Ages.
• Signs, however, are best known in the form of painted or carved advertisements for shops, inns, etc.
• They are one of various emblematic methods used from time immemorial for publicly calling attention
to the place to which they refer.
• The ancient Egyptians and Romans were known to use signs. In ancient Rome, signboards were usually
made from stone or terracotta
Signages Purpose
The main purpose of signs is to communicate, to convey information such that the receiver may make
cognitive decisions based on the information provided. In general, signs may be classified according to
the following functions:
➢ Information:
Signs conveying information about services and facilities, such as maps, Directories, or instructional
signs.
Page 619 of 1358

➢ Direction:
Signs showing the location of services, facilities, functional spaces and key Areas, such as sign posts
or directional arrows.
➢ Identification:
Signs indicating services and facilities, such as room names and numbers, Restroom signs, or floor
designations.
➢ Safety And Regulatory:

Signs giving warning or safety instructions, such as warning signs, Traffic signs , exit signs , or signs
conveying rules and
regulations.
Page 620 of 1358

Signages Shapes
• The particular shapes may vary among different parts of the world.
• Rectangular signs are used to portray information to an audience. This is found in safe condition signs,
public information signs,
and fire equipment signs .
Signages Materials
• Acrylic
• Aluminum Composite Panels
• High-density polyethylene (HDPE)
• High-density polyurethane
• Polyvinyl chloride (PVC)
• Polycarbonate
• Polypropylene, Styrene, and other
• thermoplastics
• Medium density overlay panels
• Oilcloth
• Modular Curved Frame Technology
• Corflute (Corrugated Plastic)
• Vinyl
Page 621 of 1358

Vinyl Signage Boards
Signages Types
• LED & neon-based signage
• Custom made signage
• Lettering on glass
• Banners
• Billboards
• Painted-blimp signage, etc
• Glow signboards
• Acrylic signboards
• Digital
• Neon
• 3d
• Creative signage's.
Glow Signages
• It can be used both indoors and outdoors, we can focus the most important features and emphasize
your messages with backlighting .
• Commonly found in trade show exhibits, restaurants, retail outlets and few traffic signs.
Signages Acrylic Signages:

• These have a glossy surface and are lightweight and easy to mount.
• They are safe and cheaper alternative to glasses and plastics.
• Used for company logos or highly glossed posters to display your company’s product or messages.
• We can use them as hanging signs, promotional sale signs or directional signs.
Page 622 of 1358

Digital Signages
• Low-cost, low maintenance options that consume considerably less power than other types.
• They can be used in retail outlets, mall, showrooms and traffic signs .
Signages Neon Signages

• Neon signs are eye-catching, cost-effective.
• Recognizable at night and even during day and are used for commercial signages in restaurants, pubs,
casinos, hostels etc.
3D Signages
• Usually used in banks, colleges, schools and important buildings .
Disability Access Symbols:-
Access To Low Vision :

This symbol may be used to indicate access for people who are blind or have low vision, including: a
guided tour, a path to a nature trail or a scent garden in a park; and a tactile tour or a museum exhibition
that may be touched.
The Symbol Of Accessibility:
Page 623 of 1358

The wheelchair symbol should only be used to indicate access for individuals with limited mobility,
including wheelchair users. For example, the symbol is used to indicate an accessible entrance,
bathroom or that a phone is lowered for wheelchair users. Remember that a ramped entrance is not
completely accessible if there are no curb cuts, and an elevator is not accessible if it can only be reached
via steps.
Access For Hearing Loss:
This is the International Symbol of Access for Hearing Loss. Such systems typically transmit sound via
hearing aids or headsets. They include infrared, loop and FM systems. Portable devices may be available
from the same audiovisual equipment suppliers that service conferences and meetings.
Residential Type-V Block:-
S.
INDEX ITEM SIZE IN MM
NO.
1500 X 2200 MM AS PER THE
1. IA BUILDING DIRECTORY
REQUIREMENT OF CONTENT
2. IB FLOOR DIRECTORY 900 X 1500 MM
3. IM FIRE SAFETY IN FORNT OF LIFTS 200 X 275 MM
4. IO LEVEL SIGN 350 X 350 MM
5. IZ-2 ROOM NO. PLATE 125 X 75 MM
Page 624 of 1358

6. ID RECEPTION BACKDROP AS PER SITE

MANDATORY SIGN-
7. IC 550 X 550 MM
NO SMOKING ,ETC.
8. IZ FIRE EXIT 380 X 150 MM
Hostel Block :-
S.
NO.
HANDICAP WASHROOM
6. IN1 200 X 200 MM
SIGNAGE
7. IJ DOOR NAME PLATE 250 X 135 MM
8. IN WASHROOM SIGNAGE 200 X 200 MM
9. IZ FIRE EXIT 380 X 150 MM
MANDATORY SIGN-
10. IC 550 X 550 MM
NO SMOKING ,ETC.
MDC Academic & Incubation Block :-
S.
NO.
5. IZ-2 CLASSROOM SIGNAGE 250 X 135 MM
HANDICAP WASHROOM
6. IN1 200 X 200 MM
SIGNAGE
9. II FIRE EXIT 900 X 160 MM
DEPARTMENT NAMECLATURE /
10. IV 750 X 160 MM
WAYFINDING
MANDATORY SIGN-
11. IC NO SMOKING, NO MOBILE USE 550 X 550 MM
,ETC.
Page 625 of 1358

MDC Accommodation:-
S.
NO.
HANDICAP WASHROOM
6. IN1 200 X 200 MM
SIGNAGE
10. IV 750 X 160 MM
WAYFINDING
MANDATORY SIGN-
11. IC 550 X 550 MM
NO SMOKING ,ETC.
Academic Block :-
S.
NO.
5. IZ-2 CLASSROOM SIGNAGE 250 X 135 MM
HANDICAP WASHROOM
6. IN1 200 X 200 MM
SIGNAGE
10. IV 750 X 160 MM
WAYFINDING
MANDATORY SIGN-
,ETC.
Page 626 of 1358

Mess Block:-
S.
NO.
5. - DINING HALL -
HANDICAP WASHROOM
6. IN1 200 X 200 MM
SIGNAGE
10. IV 750 X 160 MM
WAYFINDING
MANDATORY SIGN-
,ETC.
EXTERNAL SIGNAGE FOR CAMPUS

Creative Sign Designs is experienced in guiding students, faculty and visitors in and around education
campuses. Virtually all campus signage projects completed by Creative’s team of experts includes
interior and exterior way finding consultation and matching new products with existing university
signage structures.
As an expert in design and fabrication of campus signage, Creative Sign Designs is equipped to handle
any college’s signage project – large or small.
Uses Of Outdoor Wayfinding Signage At Universities
Page 627 of 1358

Outdoor directional signage performs multiple functions at a college or university. Here are some ways
to use wayfinding signs outside.
➢ Welcome visitors: An outdoor sign placed at the entrance to your school’s campus lets people
know that they have found the right place. It can also greet them and make them feel welcome on
campus. Outdoor signage placed at the front of buildings welcomes visitors to those specific
locations.
➢ Guide people to the right buildings: Outdoor wayfinding signage can direct people to specific
locations. The signs can use arrows to help people know which way to turn as they navigate their
way through a parking lot or along the paths or roads on campus. University campus signage can
also provide more details, such as how far away a particular building is in feet, meters or minutes.
➢ Help people find their way: Wayfinding signage can also include maps that help people get their
bearings and find multiple places once they are on campus. The maps can show people where they
are and how far they can walk in 5 or 10 minutes. Maps can also give people advice on shortening
their trip or inform them of their transportation options, such as taking the campus shuttle or using
a bike share system.
➢ Share updates and information: Outdoor signage can also help keep visitors up to date on the
goings-on at the school. For example, a digital sign at the campus entrance can display information
about school closures. It can also provide updates about the school’s sports teams or faculty. If the
school puts a new policy into place, such as requiring parking passes, displaying the information
on an entrance sign lets people know what’s expected of them when they arrive on campus.
About Campus Way finding for Colleges

Wayfinding signage guides traffic where to go and how to get there. Wayfinding signs are not only very
important for campuses with multiple buildings, but for parking lots and pathways as well. We will help
design a wayfinding program that makes it easy for people to find where they need to go quickly and
simply.
Page 628 of 1358

About Campus Identification Signage

Campus identification signage is important for all schools. When working with multiple buildings it
becomes crucial to have proper signage to guide students, parents, and faculty to the correct area. We’ve
worked with schools and helped manage large scale campus projects to keep their signage concise and
organized.
About Campus Traffic Signage

The Reflective yellow, Red and yellow-green signs regulate traffic around colleges and playgrounds.
Reinforce these regulations by posting signs for college speed limits, colleges crossing signs, and college
bus stops.
General Note
All the signages including internal & external signages (for Group VIII project, IIM Indore) needs to be
designed, installed, tested, commissioned by the EPC contractor in line with the existing signages given
in IIM campus (Indore) or as per requirement of competent authority (IIM Indore) and get it approved
from IIM Indore before executing on the site. The signages work involves installing accessories etc.
Page 629 of 1358

complete job & fully functional.
Sample Images (including but not limited to) :-
Note: - These are for reference only.
Page 630 of 1358

FURNITURE DBR
Page 631 of 1358

General Note*: -
1) All the furniture is to be custom made.
2) In all furniture/kitchen cabinets/wardrobes/storage/any other millworks, 19 mm thick fire-retardant ply

confirming to IS: 5509 with both side fire retardant 1.0 mm thick laminates with PVC edge bending tape
2.00 mm thick to be used.
3) The base frame of the furniture should be of square tube stainless steel 25mm x 25mm x 2mm thick.
This stainless-steel base to be provided for exposed frames i.e., Executive Tables, Workstations, etc.
4) First impression table / Reception table to be made of Corian material as per the design which shall be
in conformity to the attached reference image.
5) Stainless Steel strips to be provided on top of luggage rack to be provided in MDC Accommodation.
Reference image attached.
6) Frame of Beds (to be made in ply as specified above) should be of MS square tube framing 32mm x
32mm, 3mm thick. Painted with primer and two coats of synthetic enamel paint. Partial Storage space to
be provided inside the bed with sliding drawer/ trolleys.
7) Each Hostel room bed to be provided with Mattress swing 12.5 cm thick (ortho product Spinetech air
luxury Mattress model) (Make Sleepwell or equivalent) with a Single Pillow as per the approved make list.
8) Each MDC Accommodation room bed to be provided with a Mattress swing 17.5 cm thick (ortho product
Spinetech air luxury Mattress model) (Make Sleepwell or equivalent) with two Single Pillow as per the
approved make list.
9) Type V Residence Wardrobe and Modular Kitchen (With Chimney) to be provided as per the drawings.
10) All hardware should be of approved metala soft closing hinges, telescopic slide, multipurpose lock,
hanger rod of 25 mm dia 16-gauge S.S. pipe, tower bolt of barrel type having size 150x10 mm, magnetic
catcher triple strip vertical type of approved type, 128 mm handle, kd/ minifix, mirror, edges to be sealed
with PVC edged bending tape 2 mm thick of approved brand fixture and finishing etc. The necessary
hardware and other accessories would be of Hafele or equivalent make, to be provided without any extra
cost and making the furniture fully functional, durable and safe to use.
11) The furniture work mentioned in DBR, Tender or any other IIM Indore Group VIII project document
should include all supplying of material, making, installing at site, labour, finishing, edge bending,
lamination, buffer, etc. all complete job.
12) The sample/mockup of each furniture to be prepared by EPC contractor as per the requirement & to
the satisfaction of competent authority IIM Indore & get approved it from IIM Indore before executing on
the project.
13) Furniture drawings to be prepared by EPC contractor and get approved by competent authority IIM
Indore, before executing on the project.
14) Participants have to witness the physical items that will be shown during the Pre-bid meeting for
understanding the Institutes requirement . For miscellaneous items it would be guided by the
requirement of the Institute and as per the direction of Engineer-in charge.
*Applicable for all furniture of Group VIII projects, IIM Indore.
Page 632 of 1358

FURNITURE DBR
FOR
ACADEMIC BUILDING INCLUDING FACULTY & STAFF/ACADEMIC ASSOCIATES OFFICES
Office chair (high back) knee-tilt multilock mechanism of featherlite make (model - YS-6050C) or equivalent
to be provided) for
Classroom Furniture- Student Desk – Linear And Curve Pattern
Page 633 of 1358

Optima Mid back Chair – Featherlite or equivalent- for students.
Talk Series, Boat Convex 8 Person Conference Table
Note- Office chair (high back) knee-tilt multilock mechanism of featherlite make (model - YS-6050C) or
equivalent to be provided )
Page 634 of 1358

Workstations, (Design As Per Furniture Layout)
Table Set (Design As Per Furniture Layout )
Sofa 1 and 2 Seaters
Page 635 of 1358

Store well Steel Almirah Coffee Table Corner Table
Bookcase 4 - Door Café Chair
Page 636 of 1358

First Impression Reception Desk
4-Seater Pu Coated Dining Table
Page 637 of 1358

FURNITURE DBR
FOR
Page 638 of 1358

Office chair (high back) knee-tilt multilock mechanism of

featherlite make (model - YS-6050C) or equivalent to be
provided) in the following: -
1) All faculty chairs

2) Teleconference - all chair
3) All Working offices - faculty chair
4) Interactive spaces - all chair
5) Workspace - all chair
6) collaborative space - all chair
7) Conference Room - all chair
8) Work cabin - Faculty chair
Office chair (mid back) knee-tilt multilock mechanism of featherlite make (model - YS-6050C) or
equivalent to be provided) in the following: -
1) All Classroom - All student chair
Page 639 of 1358

Classroom Furniture – Linear Pattern
Page 640 of 1358

4-Seater Circular Table with additional toughened glass of 12mm thick on top of the table
Side Table Coffee Table
Page 641 of 1358

Talk Series, Boat Convex 10 Person Conference Table
Optima Mid back Chair.
Page 642 of 1358

FURNITURE DBR
FOR
HOSTEL
Executive Worktable Optima Mid back Chair
EQ SINGLE BED with 2 side by side trolley storage with headboard Almirah With Two Doors
And One Locker
Page 643 of 1358

Coffee Table
Page 644 of 1358

FURNITURE DBR
FOR
MDC ACCOMODATION
Page 645 of 1358

Executive Worktable Optima Mid back Chair
Shoe Rack Dressing Stool
Page 646 of 1358

TV Unit Luggage Rack with SS strip on top
EQ SINGLE BED with 2 side by side trolley storage with headboard Almirah With Two Doors And
One Locker
Page 647 of 1358

Side Table
Page 648 of 1358

FURNITURE DBR
FOR
MESS
Café Chair Executive Worktable Optima Mid back chair
Page 649 of 1358

BOY'S HOSTEL-1 - FURNITURE DETAIL

Qty
S.nos Floor Room Item in
Nos.
1 BOYS HOSTEL GROUND FLOOR Wardens Room 1
Featherlight Optima high

2 BOYS HOSTEL GROUND FLOOR Medical Room 1
back chair or Equivalent
3 BOYS HOSTEL GROUND FLOOR Reception 1
3
BOYS HOSTEL 2ND TO 6TH, 8TH, 9TH, Rooms (20 No.
4 200
11, 12, 14TH FLOOR per floor)
Rooms (20 No.
5 BOYS HOSTEL 7TH, 10TH,13TH FLOOR 60
per floor) Featherlight Optima midback
6 BOYS HOSTEL FIRST FLOOR Rooms chair or Equivalent 20
7 BOYS HOSTEL GROUND FLOOR Rooms 10
294
10 BOYS HOSTEL GROUND FLOOR Wardens Room Worktable (4x2) 1
11 BOYS HOSTEL GROUND FLOOR Visitors Room Worktable (4x2) 1
2
12 BOYS HOSTEL GROUND FLOOR Medical Room Worktable (5x2) 1
13 BOYS HOSTEL GROUND FLOOR Reception Worktable (5x2) 1
2
Common
14 BOYS HOSTEL GROUND FLOOR Coffee Table 4
Room
15 BOYS HOSTEL GROUND FLOOR Wardens Room Bed Side Table 1
16 BOYS HOSTEL GROUND FLOOR Visitors Room Bed Side Table 1
17 BOYS HOSTEL GROUND FLOOR Medical Room Bed Side Table 1
3
18 Study Table 200
Rooms (20 No.
19 BOYS HOSTEL 7TH, 10TH,13TH FLOOR Study Table 60
per floor)
20 BOYS HOSTEL FIRST FLOOR Rooms Study Table 20
21 BOYS HOSTEL GROUND FLOOR Rooms Study Table 10
290
Common
22 BOYS HOSTEL GROUND FLOOR Sofa 1 Seater 1
Room
23 BOYS HOSTEL GROUND FLOOR Waiting Area Sofa 1 Seater 2
Common
Room
7
Common
25 BOYS HOSTEL GROUND FLOOR Sofa 2-Seater 2
Room
Page 650 of 1358

Common
Room
5
Common
Room
28 BOYS HOSTEL GROUND FLOOR Waiting Area Sofa 2-Seater 2
Common
Room
9
Reception Counter/Reception
30 BOYS HOSTEL GROUND FLOOR Reception Cabinet Below Counter / Wall 3
Panelling
3
31 Storage Cabinet 200
Rooms (20 No.
32 BOYS HOSTEL 7TH, 10TH,13TH FLOOR Storage Cabinet 60
per floor)
33 BOYS HOSTEL FIRST FLOOR Rooms Storage Cabinet 20
34 BOYS HOSTEL GROUND FLOOR Rooms Storage Cabinet 10
35 BOYS HOSTEL GROUND FLOOR Wardens Room Storage Cabinet 1
36 BOYS HOSTEL GROUND FLOOR Visitors Room Storage Cabinet 1
38 BOYS HOSTEL GROUND FLOOR Medical Room Storage Cabinet 1
294
39 Single Bed 200
BOYS HOSTEL 7TH, 10TH,13TH FLOOR Rooms (20 No.
40 Single Bed 60
PLAN per floor)
41 BOYS HOSTEL FIRST FLOOR PLAN Rooms Single Bed 20
42 BOYS HOSTEL GROUND FLOOR PLAN Rooms Single Bed 10
290
spine tech air luxury model of
BOYS HOSTEL 2ND TO 6TH, 8TH, 9TH, Rooms (20 No. sleepwell or Equivalent size
43 200
11, 12, 14TH FLOOR PLAN per floor) 1980x915x128,. One luxury
pillow
BOYS HOSTEL 7TH, 10TH,13TH FLOOR Rooms (20 No. sleepwell or Equivalent size
44 60
PLAN per floor) 1980x915x128, One luxury
pillow
45 BOYS HOSTEL FIRST FLOOR PLAN Rooms sleepwell size 1980x915x128, 20
One luxury pillow
sleepwell or Equivalent size
46 BOYS HOSTEL GROUND FLOOR PLAN Rooms 10
1980x915x128, One luxury
pillow
Page 651 of 1358


47 BOYS HOSTEL GROUND FLOOR PLAN Wardens Room 1
1980x915x178. Two luxury
pillows
48 BOYS HOSTEL GROUND FLOOR PLAN Visitors Room 1
pillows
49 BOYS HOSTEL GROUND FLOOR PLAN Medical Room 1
pillows
293
50 BOYS HOSTEL GROUND FLOOR PLAN Wardens Room Single Bed 1
51 BOYS HOSTEL GROUND FLOOR PLAN Visitors Room Single Bed 1
52 BOYS HOSTEL GROUND FLOOR PLAN Medical Room Single Bed 1
3
Note - Refer Technical Specification for Furniture for details.
BOY'S HOSTEL-2 - FURNITURE DETAIL

Qty
Nos.
1 BOYS HOSTEL GROUND FLOOR Wardens Room 1

3
4 200
Rooms (20 No.
5 BOYS HOSTEL 7TH, 10TH,13TH FLOOR 60
6 BOYS HOSTEL FIRST FLOOR Rooms chair or Equivalent 20
7 BOYS HOSTEL GROUND FLOOR Rooms 10
294
10 BOYS HOSTEL GROUND FLOOR Wardens Room Worktable (4x2) 1
11 BOYS HOSTEL GROUND FLOOR Visitors Room Worktable (4x2) 1
2
Page 652 of 1358

12 BOYS HOSTEL GROUND FLOOR Medical Room Worktable (5x2) 1

13 BOYS HOSTEL GROUND FLOOR Reception Worktable (5x2) 1
2
Common
14 BOYS HOSTEL GROUND FLOOR Coffee Table 4
Room
15 BOYS HOSTEL GROUND FLOOR Wardens Room Bed Side Table 1
16 BOYS HOSTEL GROUND FLOOR Visitors Room Bed Side Table 1
17 BOYS HOSTEL GROUND FLOOR Medical Room Bed Side Table 1
3
18 Study Table 200
Rooms (20 No.
19 BOYS HOSTEL 7TH, 10TH,13TH FLOOR Study Table 60
per floor)
20 BOYS HOSTEL FIRST FLOOR Rooms Study Table 20
21 BOYS HOSTEL GROUND FLOOR Rooms Study Table 10
290
Common
Room
23 BOYS HOSTEL GROUND FLOOR Waiting Area Sofa 1 Seater 2
Common
Room
7
Common
Room
Common
Room
5
Common
Room
28 BOYS HOSTEL GROUND FLOOR Waiting Area Sofa 2-Seater 2
Common
Room
9
30 BOYS HOSTEL GROUND FLOOR Reception Cabinet Below Counter / Wall 3
Panelling
3
Rooms (20 No.
32 BOYS HOSTEL 7TH, 10TH,13TH FLOOR Storage Cabinet 60
per floor)
33 BOYS HOSTEL FIRST FLOOR Rooms Storage Cabinet 20
34 BOYS HOSTEL GROUND FLOOR Rooms Storage Cabinet 10
35 BOYS HOSTEL GROUND FLOOR Wardens Room Storage Cabinet 1
38 BOYS HOSTEL GROUND FLOOR Medical Room Storage Cabinet 1
Page 653 of 1358

294
39 Single Bed 200
BOYS HOSTEL 7TH, 10TH,13TH FLOOR Rooms (20 No.
40 Single Bed 60
PLAN per floor)
41 BOYS HOSTEL FIRST FLOOR PLAN Rooms Single Bed 20
42 BOYS HOSTEL GROUND FLOOR PLAN Rooms Single Bed 10
290
BOYS HOSTEL 2ND TO 6TH, 8TH, 9TH, Rooms (20 No. sleepwell or Equivalent size
43 200
pillow
BOYS HOSTEL 7TH, 10TH,13TH FLOOR Rooms (20 No. sleepwell or Equivalent size
44 60
pillow
45 BOYS HOSTEL FIRST FLOOR PLAN Rooms sleepwell size 1980x915x128, 20
One luxury pillow
46 BOYS HOSTEL GROUND FLOOR PLAN Rooms 10
pillow
47 BOYS HOSTEL GROUND FLOOR PLAN Wardens Room 1
1980x915x178, Two luxury
pillow
48 BOYS HOSTEL GROUND FLOOR PLAN Visitors Room 1
pillow
49 BOYS HOSTEL GROUND FLOOR PLAN Medical Room 1
pillow
293
50 BOYS HOSTEL GROUND FLOOR PLAN Wardens Room Single Bed 1
51 BOYS HOSTEL GROUND FLOOR PLAN Visitors Room Single Bed 1
52 BOYS HOSTEL GROUND FLOOR PLAN Medical Room Single Bed 1
3
Page 654 of 1358

GIRL'S HOSTEL - FURNITURE DETAIL

Qty
Nos.
1 GIRLS HOSTEL GROUND FLOOR Wardens Room 1

2 GIRLS HOSTEL GROUND FLOOR Medical Room 1
3 GIRLS HOSTEL GROUND FLOOR Reception 1
3
GIRLS HOSTEL 2ND TO 6TH, 8TH, 9TH, Rooms (20 No.
4 200
Rooms (20 No.
5 GIRLS HOSTEL 7TH, 10TH,13TH FLOOR 60
6 GIRLS HOSTEL FIRST FLOOR Rooms chair or Equivalent 20
7 GIRLS HOSTEL GROUND FLOOR Rooms 10
8 GIRLS HOSTEL GROUND FLOOR Medical Room 2
9 GIRLS HOSTEL GROUND FLOOR Reception 2
294
10 GIRLS HOSTEL GROUND FLOOR Wardens Room Worktable (4x2) 1
11 GIRLS HOSTEL GROUND FLOOR Visitors Room Worktable (4x2) 1
2
12 GIRLS HOSTEL GROUND FLOOR Medical Room Worktable (5x2) 1
13 GIRLS HOSTEL GROUND FLOOR Reception Worktable (5x2) 1
2
Common
14 GIRLS HOSTEL GROUND FLOOR Coffee Table 4
Room
15 GIRLS HOSTEL GROUND FLOOR Wardens Room Bed Side Table 1
16 GIRLS HOSTEL GROUND FLOOR Visitors Room Bed Side Table 1
17 GIRLS HOSTEL GROUND FLOOR Medical Room Bed Side Table 1
3
18 Study Table 200
Rooms (20 No.
19 GIRLS HOSTEL 7TH, 10TH,13TH FLOOR Study Table 60
per floor)
20 GIRLS HOSTEL FIRST FLOOR Rooms Study Table 20
21 GIRLS HOSTEL GROUND FLOOR Rooms Study Table 10
290
Common
22 GIRLS HOSTEL GROUND FLOOR Sofa 1 Seater 1
Room
23 GIRLS HOSTEL GROUND FLOOR Waiting Area Sofa 1 Seater 2
Common
24 GIRLS HOSTEL GROUND FLOOR Sofa 1 Seater 4
Room
7
Common
25 GIRLS HOSTEL GROUND FLOOR Sofa 2-Seater 2
Room
Page 655 of 1358

Common
Room
5
Common
Room
28 GIRLS HOSTEL GROUND FLOOR Waiting Area Sofa 2-Seater 2
Common
Room
9
30 GIRLS HOSTEL GROUND FLOOR Reception Cabinet Below Counter / Wall 3
Panelling
3
Rooms (20 No.
32 GIRLS HOSTEL 7TH, 10TH,13TH FLOOR Storage Cabinet 60
per floor)
33 GIRLS HOSTEL FIRST FLOOR Rooms Storage Cabinet 20
34 GIRLS HOSTEL GROUND FLOOR Rooms Storage Cabinet 10
35 GIRLS HOSTEL GROUND FLOOR Wardens Room Storage Cabinet 1
36 GIRLS HOSTEL GROUND FLOOR Visitors Room Storage Cabinet 1
37 GIRLS HOSTEL GROUND FLOOR Visitors Room Storage Cabinet 1
38 GIRLS HOSTEL GROUND FLOOR Medical Room Storage Cabinet 1
294
39 Single Bed 200
GIRLS HOSTEL 7TH, 10TH,13TH FLOOR Rooms (20 No.
40 Single Bed 60
PLAN per floor)
41 GIRLS HOSTEL FIRST FLOOR PLAN Rooms Single Bed 20
42 GIRLS HOSTEL GROUND FLOOR PLAN Rooms Single Bed 10
290
GIRLS HOSTEL 2ND TO 6TH, 8TH, 9TH, Rooms (20 No. sleepwell or Equivalent size
43 200
pillow
GIRLS HOSTEL 7TH, 10TH,13TH FLOOR Rooms (20 No. sleepwell or Equivalent size
44 60
pillow
45 GIRLS HOSTEL FIRST FLOOR PLAN Rooms sleepwell size 1980x915x128, 20
One luxury pillow
46 GIRLS HOSTEL GROUND FLOOR PLAN Rooms 10
pillow
Page 656 of 1358


47 GIRLS HOSTEL GROUND FLOOR PLAN Wardens Room 1
pillow
48 GIRLS HOSTEL GROUND FLOOR PLAN Visitors Room 1
pillow
49 GIRLS HOSTEL GROUND FLOOR PLAN Medical Room 1
pillow
293
50 GIRLS HOSTEL GROUND FLOOR PLAN Wardens Room Single Bed 1
51 GIRLS HOSTEL GROUND FLOOR PLAN Visitors Room Single Bed 1
52 GIRLS HOSTEL GROUND FLOOR PLAN Medical Room Single Bed 1
3
MDC ACCOMMODATION - FURNITURE DETAILS

S.nos Floor Room Item Qty
1 MDC HOUSING Ground FLOOR Lobby Corner Table 4
2 MDC HOUSING FIRST FLOOR Lounge Corner Table 1
MDC HOUSING 2ND TO 6TH & 8TH,9
3 Lounge Corner Table 7
TH FLOOR PLAN
MDC HOUSING 7TH & 10TH FLOOR
4 Lounge Corner Table 2
PLAN
5 14
6 MDC HOUSING GROUND FLOOR Dinning Big Hall Café Chair 104
Featherlight Mid back
7 MDC HOUSING Ground FLOOR Chef Cabin (model - YS-6050C) or 1
Equivalent
8 MDC HOUSING FIRST FLOOR Rooms (model - YS-6050C) or 10
Equivalent
MDC HOUSING 2ND TO 6TH & 8TH,9 Rooms (10 No. per
9 (model - YS-6050C) or 70
TH FLOOR PLAN floor)
Equivalent
MDC HOUSING 7TH & 10TH FLOOR Rooms (10 No. per
10 (model - YS-6050C) or 20
PLAN floor)
Equivalent
Timeout 4 Seater PU
11 MDC HOUSING GROUND FLOOR Dinning Big Hall Coated Dinning Table 26
(1022x1022) or Equivalent
12 MDC HOUSING FIRST FLOOR Rooms Worktable (4x2) 10
Page 657 of 1358

13 Worktable (4x2) 70
PLAN floor)
15 MDC HOUSING Ground FLOOR Lobby Sofa 2 2
16 MDC HOUSING FIRST FLOOR Lounge Sofa 2 1
17 Lounge Sofa 2 7
TH FLOOR PLAN
18 Lounge Sofa 2 2
PLAN
20 Lounge Sofa 1 7
TH FLOOR PLAN
21 Lounge Sofa 1 2
PLAN
24 Lounge Sofa 2 14
TH FLOOR PLAN
25 Lounge Sofa 2 2
PLAN
Slotted Angle Rack, 6' x 3'
27 MDC HOUSING GROUND FLOOR Dry Store 10
x 18"
Reception
Counter/Reception
28 MDC HOUSING GROUND FLOOR Reception Lounge 2
Cabinet Below Counter /
Wall Panelling
Storage Cabinet with
29 MDC HOUSING FIRST FLOOR Rooms 10
Locker
MDC HOUSING 2ND TO 6TH & 8TH,9 Rooms (10 No. per Storage Cabinet with
30 70
TH FLOOR PLAN floor) Locker
MDC HOUSING 7TH & 10TH FLOOR Rooms (10 No. per Storage Cabinet with
31 20
PLAN floor) Locker
spine tech air luxury
model of sleepwell (or
32 MDC HOUSING FIRST FLOOR Rooms Equivalent) size 10
1980x915x178,. Two
luxury pillow
33 Equivalent) size 70
1980x915x178,. Two
luxury pillow
34 Equivalent) size 20
PLAN floor)
1980x915x178,. Two
luxury pillow
Page 658 of 1358

35 MDC HOUSING FIRST FLOOR Rooms Single Bed 10

36 Single Bed 70
37 Single Bed 20
PLAN floor)
100
MDC ACADEMIC & INCUBATION - FURNITURE DETAILS

SR.
FLOOR LOCATION DESCRIPTION OF ITEMS Qty.
NO
MDC INCUBATION GROUND
1 Working Office 1 Corner Table 1
FLOOR
2 Working Office 2 Corner Table 1
FLOOR
2
3 Lobby Cabinet Below Counter / Wall 1
FLOOR
Panelling
MDC INCUBATION GROUND Featherlight Mid back (model - YS-

4 6
FLOOR 6050C) (or Equivalent)
MDC INCUBATION SECOND Featherlight Mid back (model - YS-
5 38
44
6 Worktable (4x2) 4
FLOOR
MDC INCUBATION FIRST
7 Worktable (4x2) 3
FLOOR
MDC INCUBATION SECOND
FLOOR
20
9 Lobby Coffee Table 4
FLOOR
10 Working Office 1 Coffee Table 1
FLOOR
11 Working Office 2 Coffee Table 1
FLOOR
6
12 Working Office 1 Sofa 2-Seater 1
FLOOR
Page 659 of 1358


FLOOR
14 Lobby Sofa 2-Seater 4
FLOOR
FLOOR
FLOOR
8
17 Desk 42
FLOOR
18 Wish Recta Module (or Equivalent) 22
FLOOR

19 Classroom 1 Talk Pod – 4-Seater Circular 14
FLOOR
FLOOR
FLOOR
22 Working Office 4 Talk Pod – 4-Seater Circular 1
FLOOR
23 Collaboration Room Talk Pod – 4-Seater Circular 1
FLOOR
24 Interactive Space Talk Pod – 4-Seater Circular 3
FLOOR
47
25 Classroom 1 57
26 Classroom 2 57
27 Working Office 1 1
MDC INCUBATION FIRST Featherlight Mid back (model - YS-
29 Classroom 3 57
30 VLPE Classroom 1
31 VLPE Studio 1
32 FPM Classroom 52
MDC INCUBATION SECOND Teleconferencing Featherlight Mid back (model - YS-
33 2
FLOOR room 6050C) (or Equivalent)
34 Interactive Space 12
Page 660 of 1358


35 Collaborative Space 42
40 Collaboration Room 4
41 Conference Room 2
42 Server Room 2
Featherlight Mid back (model - YS-
226
6050C) (or Equivalent)
Featherlight Mid back (model - YS-
73
6050C) (or Equivalent)
MDC INCUBATION FIRST Wish Hexagonal Module (or
43 30
FLOOR Equivalent)
MDC INCUBATION SECOND Wish Hexagonal Module (or
44 36
FLOOR Equivalent)
66
MDC INCUBATION SECOND Boat Convex 10-Seater conference
45 2
FLOOR table (or Equivalent)
2
ACADEMIC - FURNITURE DETAILS

SR.
FLOOR LOCATION DESCRIPTION OF ITEMS Qty.
NO
ACADEMIC BLOCK GROUND
1 Recp. /Lobby Corner Table 3
FLOOR
ACADEMIC BLOCK, Plan at +
Faculty lounge 1,2 Corner Table 4
17.7 M
7
2 Faculty lounge 1,2 Sofa 2-Seater 4
17.7 M
4
3 Recp. /Lobby Sofa 2-Seater 6
FLOOR
Faculty lounge 1,2 Sofa 2-Seater 6
17.7 M
Page 661 of 1358

12
4 Recp. /Lobby Cabinet Below Counter / Wall 1
FLOOR
Panelling

5 `Café 1, 2 Café Chair 64
FLOOR
ACADEMIC BLOCK GROUND Timeout 4-Seater PU Coated Dinning

6 `Café 1, 2 16
FLOOR Table (1022x1022)
ACADEMIC BLOCK GROUND Syndicate Room Featherlight High back (model - YS-
7 48
FLOOR 1,2,3,4,5,6 6050C) (or Equivalent)
ACADEMIC BLOCK FIRST Syndicate Room Featherlight High back (model - YS-
48
FLOOR 1,2,3,4,5,6 6050C) (or Equivalent)
ACADEMIC BLOCK GROUND Syndicate Room Boat Convex 8-Seater conference

8 6
FLOOR 1,2,3,4,5,6 table
ACADEMIC BLOCK FIRST Syndicate Room Boat Convex 8-Seater conference
6
FLOOR 1,2,3,4,5,6 table
12
ACADEMIC BLOCK GROUND Featherlight Optima midback chair
9 Staff Office (2 Nos.) 6
FLOOR (or Equivalent)
Academic
ACADEMIC BLOCK FIRST Featherlight Optima high back chair
10 Associates room, 66
FLOOR (or Equivalent)
1,2,3
66
ACADEMIC BLOCK FIRST Faculty Room (18 Featherlight High back (model - YS-
11 18
FLOOR Nos.) 6050C) (or Equivalent)
ACADEMIC BLOCK, Plan at + Faculty Room (28 Featherlight High back (model - YS-
28
9.9 M Nos.) 6050C) (or Equivalent)
ACADEMIC BLOCK, Plan at + Faculty Room (24 Featherlight High back (model - YS-
24
17.7 M Nos.) 6050C) (or Equivalent)
70
ACADEMIC BLOCK FIRST Faculty Room (18 Featherlight Optima midback chair
12 36
FLOOR Nos.) (or Equivalent)
ACADEMIC BLOCK, Plan at + Faculty Room (28 Featherlight Optima midback chair
56
9.9 M Nos.) (or Equivalent)
ACADEMIC BLOCK, Plan at + Faculty Room (24 Featherlight Optima midback chair
48
17.7 M Nos.) (or Equivalent)
140
ACADEMIC BLOCK GROUND Classroom 1,2,3 (30 Featherlight Optima midback chair
13 3
FLOOR Seat) (or Equivalent)
ACADEMIC BLOCK GROUND Classroom Featherlight Optima midback chair
6
FLOOR 1,2,3,4,5,6 (or Equivalent)
Page 662 of 1358

ACADEMIC BLOCK FIRST Classroom Featherlight Optima midback chair

6
FLOOR 1,2,3,4,5,6 (or Equivalent)
15
14 Staff Office (2 Nos.) Worktable (4x2) 6
FLOOR
ACADEMIC BLOCK GROUND Classroom 1,2,3 (30
Worktable (4x2) 3
FLOOR Seat)
ACADEMIC BLOCK GROUND Classroom
Worktable (4x2) 6
FLOOR 1,2,3,4,5,6
ACADEMIC BLOCK FIRST Classroom
Worktable (4x2) 6
FLOOR 1,2,3,4,5,6
21
15 Recp. /Lobby Coffee Table 3
FLOOR
Faculty lounge 1,2 Coffee Table 4
17.7 M
7
ACADEMIC BLOCK GROUND Classroom 1,2,3 (30 Desk+ Optima Midback chair for each
16 90
FLOOR Seat) seat (or Equivalent)
ACADEMIC BLOCK GROUND Classroom Desk+ Optima Midback chair for each
450
FLOOR 1,2,3,4,5,6 seat (or Equivalent)
ACADEMIC BLOCK FIRST Classroom Desk+ Optima Midback chair for each
900
FLOOR 1,2,3,4,5,6 seat (or Equivalent)
1440
Academic Wish Recta Module 900 MM Height
ACADEMIC BLOCK FIRST
17 Associates room, 1200X600 with pedestal (or 66
FLOOR
1,2,3 Equivalent)
66
ACADEMIC BLOCK FIRST Faculty Room (18
18 18
FLOOR Nos.)
ACADEMIC BLOCK, Plan at + Faculty Room (28
28
9.9 M Nos.)
24
17.7 M Nos.)
70
ACADEMIC BLOCK GROUND Storerooms (14
19 Almirah 56
FLOOR rooms)
Staff Office (2 Nos.) Almirah 6
FLOOR
ACADEMIC BLOCK FIRST Storerooms (14
Almirah 56
FLOOR rooms)
Almirah 18
FLOOR Nos.)
Almirah 28
9.9 M Nos.)
Almirah 24
17.7 M Nos.)
Page 663 of 1358

188
20 VSDU 5 18
FLOOR Nos.)
VSDU 5 28
9.9 M Nos.)
VSDU 5 24
17.7 M Nos.)
70
21 4 Door Bookcase 18
FLOOR Nos.)
4 Door Bookcase 28
9.9 M Nos.)
4 Door Bookcase 24
17.7 M Nos.)
70
TYPE RESIDENCE - FURNITURE DETAILS

S.
Description Qty. FLATS Total Qty
No.
WARDROBE
1 1.00 32.00
Size (1.65x3.15m) 32
WARDROBE
2 2.00 32.00
Wardrobe size (2.00x2.1m). 64
3 MODULAR KITCHEN 1.00 32.00 32
Note- Refer drawings for details.
MESS- FURNITURE DETAILS

Sr No Description Qty.
Mess Area
1 Café Chair 304
2 Timeout 4-Seater PU Coated Dinning Table 4
3 Timeout 8-Seater PU Coated Dinning Table (2822x1022) 36
Food Court Area

1 Café Chair 128
2 Timeout 4-Seater PU Coated Dinning Table 16
3 Timeout 8-Seater PU Coated Dinning Table (2822x1022) 8
Page 664 of 1358

RIGID PAVEMENT DBR

Design of Rigid Pavement for IIM Indore Campus.
1.1 DESIGN DATA
• Details of the Road
Design of Cement Concrete Pavements at 11M Indore
Width of Road — 7m and 9m
• Wheel Load
Design Wheel Load - 50 KN
• Design Period
Design Life of Pavement — 20 Years
• Subgrade
The Soaked California Bearing Ratio (CBR) of existing soil — 7 %
• Present Traffic
49 Commercial Vehicles per Day (CVPD) — Approximate after discussion with client
• The Modulus of Subgrade Reaction (K)
Effective modulus of Subgrade Reaction (K) = 58 MPa/m
• Pavement Quality Concrete (PQC)
Equivalent, Grade of Concrete = M 30
Flexural Strength of Concrete = 0.7(fck)0.5= 0.7(30)0.5=3.843 Mpa
28-day flexural strength = 3.834 MPa
90-day flexural strength = 1.1 x 3.834 MPa= 4.22MPa
Page 665 of 1358

• Modulus of Elasticity of Concrete= 30,000 MPa
• Poisson Ratio = 0.15
• Coefficient of Thermal Expansion- 10 5/ 0c
• Density — 2400 kg/m3
• Transverse Slope = 2%
• Tyre Pressure = 0.8MPa
2.2 DESIGNS FOR STRESS
Refer the attached Excel Sheet
2.3 PROPOSED THICKNESS AND COMPOSITION OF CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT
Subgrade: It is recommended to compact the existing soil of top 300 mm with minimum soaked CBR of 7%.
This material should have the maximum dry density of not less than 1.75 gm/cc.
Granular Sub-Base (GSB): Provide Crusher-Run Macadam (37.5 mm max) Sub-Base Material confirming to,
Table 400-14, Section 400, MoRT&H (Fifth Revision) specifications for 100 mm thickness in full pavement
width. This material should satisfy the requirements of Liquid Limit and Plasticity Index values of not more
than 25% and 6% respectively when tested according to IS:2720 (Part 5). The grading requirement of the
material is as follows:
Table 5: Grading Requirements for Crusher run Macadam base

Sr. No. Sieve Size (mm) Percent by Weight Passing IS Sieve
1 63.00 100
2 45.00 100
3 22.40 90-100
4 5.60 35-55
5 0.710 10-30
6 0.090 2-5
Wet Mix Macadam (WMM): Provide Wet Mix Macadam layer confirming to Grading from, Table 400-6,
Section 400, MoRT&H (Fifth Revision) specifications for 75 mm thickness.
Table 6: Aggregate Grading Requirements for WMM
Page 666 of 1358

Sr. No. Sieve Size (mm) Percent by Weight Passing IS Sieve
1 53.00 100
2 45.00 95-100
3 26.50 -
4 22.40 60-80
5 11.20 40-60
6 4.75 25-40
7 2.36 15-30
8 0.600 8-22
9 0.075 0-5
Pavement Quality Concrete (PQC): Provide 200 mm thickness of Pavement Quality Concrete (M30), vacuum
dewatering to be done after laying of concrete.
Transverse Contraction Joints: The contraction joints should be provided at a spacing of 3000 mm for both
the pavement widths 7 m and 9m.
Longitudinal Joints: For 7 m and 9 m wide slab, provide longitudinal joint at half of the slab width i.e. 3.5m
and 4.5m respectively. Tie bars shall be positioned to remain within the middle third of the slab depth
preferably at one half depth of the slab. Use 10 mm diameter deformed steel bars of 500 mm length at
600mm center to center.
Page 667 of 1358

Contraction Joint
3 to 5 mm wide
Depth =%to %of depth
of slab
Page 668 of 1358

Contraction Joint
3 to 5 mm wide
Depth =%to %of depth
of slab
Figure: Planof 9 m Wide Road
Transverse Construction Joints: If the construction joint is located at the site of the expansion joint than
regular expansion joint shall be provided with the load transferring devices. If the construction joint is located
at the site of the contraction joint or otherwise than provide deformed bars of 25 mm diameter, 450 mm
long and spaced at 250 mm center to center.
Page 669 of 1358

Figure shows reinforcement in longitudinal joint and construction joint
Reinforcement Nominal to Arrest Cracks : Reinforcement provided in concrete pavements is intended for
holding the cracks faces tightly together, so as to prevent opening of the cracks and to maintain aggregated
interlock required for lock transfer. It does not increase the flexural strength of unbroken slab when used in
quantities which are considered economical. Since cracks starting from the top are surface are more critical
because of ingress of water when they open up, the reinforcement can be placed 50 mm from the top surface
of the slab, and it should be kept at least 50 mm away from the face of the transverse joints and edge.
Section of 4.5m / 6m / 9m etc. wide road
Page 670 of 1358

2.4 GENERAL REMARKS
1. The Subgrade material and Granular Sub-Base Material has to be rolled and compacted till the density
achieved iöat least 98 % of the Maximum Dry Density for the material determined as per IS: 2720 (Part
8).
2. A Camber of 1 in 50 (2%), as recommended by Indian Road Congress for Cement Concrete Pavement
may be provided.
3. Utility pipes should be provided as per the requirement, but the utility pipes should not be placed on
the joints of the cement concrete slab.
4. The sawing of joints shall be carried out with diamond studded blades soon after the concrete has
hardened (as early as 4 to 6 hours and not later than 12 hours) to take the load of the sawing machine
and personnel without damaging the texture of the pavement.
5. All the joints should be sealed with polysulphide or silicone, or polymer modified bitumen or other
similar formulation. The joint sealing compound shall be hot poured elastomeric type or cold
polysulphide type.
6. Design of Cement Concrete mix must be carried out before the start of work from a recognized
laboratory. The designed and controlled cement concrete mix with minimum 90 days Flexural strength
of 4.22MPa.
7. The curing of Concrete shall be done by covering the surface by gunny bags/ hessian, which shall be
kept continuously moist for 28 days by sprinkling water. Use of curing compounds should be made
just after the laying of cement concrete slab.
8. No vehicular traffic shall be allowed to run on the finished surface of a concrete pavement within a
period of 28 days of its construction and until the joints are permanently sealed.
9. Surface Texture — The surface of the concrete slabs shall be brush-textured in a direction at right
angles to the longitudinal axis of the carriageway. Brooming shall be perpendicular to the center line
of the pavement and so executed that the corrugations thus produced will be uniform in character
and width and about 1.5mm deep. The brushed surface texture shall be applied evenly across the slab
in one direction by the use of a wire brush not less than 450 mm wide, wider brushes of 3.0 m are
preferred. The brush shall be made of 32 guage tap wires grouped together in tufts spaced at 10mm
centres. The tufts shall contain an average of 14 wires and initially be 100mm long. The brush shall
have two rows of tufts. The rows shall be 20mm apart and the tufts in one row shall be opposite the
center of the gap between tufts in other row.
10. Solar Powered road studs of make 3M or equivalent need to be provided at the spacing of 2m/4m/6m.
The stud shall be visible from distance more than 800m.
11. Thermoplastic paint markings conforming to IS 164 (1981 or latest) for divider, lane separation, parking
etc. need to be provided.
Important Note-
Apart from the above, the construction of road should follow the latest guidelines / specifications of MORT&H,
IRC and BIS.
Page 671 of 1358

Page 672 of 1358

ELV DBR
Page 673 of 1358

About Report
This Design Basis Report (DBR) outlines technical and design criteria, requirements, and assumptions
for the IIM INDORE Group VIII project used to communicate the project's design parameters For Design
and refer for Contractor.
The DBR includes a detailed description of the project's scope, objectives, and goals, as well as the
Minimum technical and design criteria, and performance requirements that will be used to guide the
design and construction of the project. It may also include information about the environmental and
safety regulations that the project must comply with, as well as any potential risks or hazards associated
with the project.
The DBR is an important document in the design and construction process, as it serves as a reference
point for Contractors involved in the project. It helps to ensure that the project is designed and built to
meet the required standards, and that all related Agencies are aligned in their understanding of the
project's technical and design requirements.
ELV scope including with Light management system (DALI Dimmable system), Integrated Building
management system or other standalone system as require for completion of work & future ready
system.
Page 674 of 1358

Design Basis of IP Based Public address and Voice Alarm system.
Design Intent
The intent of this report is to define the basis and list the salient features of IP based Public address and
Voice Evacuation system design. This report will be guidelines to take forward the detailed engineering
design.
Scope of work
Supply, Installation, Testing and Commissioning of Public address and Voice Evacuation System.
Public Address and Voice Alarm System Brief
The system designed is fully IP-network based public address and Voice Evacuation system with all
components of the system are IP-networked for highest flexibility and scalability. The devices Controller,
amplifiers and Call stations are certified for EN 54 and ISO 7240, marked for CE and be compliant with
the RoHS directive.
Devices are managed via the latest media networking technology, enabling better audio quality with
greater flexibility and scalability than any other public address and voice alarm system.
All system devices such as system controller, amplifiers and call stations will communicate via IP, using
an Audio over IP (AoIP) protocol that supports AES67 for audio and using AES70 for control, with optional
encryption and authentication to prevent unauthorized access, misuse, and modification of data. The
audio part designed supports Layer 3 connections via routers between subnets with lowest latency and
synchronized outputs.
The system comprises innovative multi-channel amplifier architecture, with intelligent power allocation
across the amplifier outputs and an integrated spare channel. This significantly improves the effective
utilization of available power, regardless of the loudspeaker load in each zone. As a result, fewer
amplifiers are needed, saving up to 50 percent on space, energy and backup battery power,
Each amplifier includes a spare amplifier channel, which automatically takes over the operations of the
failing channel, using the same redundant power supply and heatsink, making it an extremely cost-
effective and space-saving redundancy measure.
The system is designed to support >100 simultaneous channels for music routing and making calls, with
optional encryption and authentication to protect against eavesdropping and hacking, using an
uncompressed, high-definition digital audio format with 24-bit sample size and 48 kHz sample rate.
A system based on a single system controller is fully flexible and scalable supporting at least 120 system
devices and 500 zones. The intuitive interface of the call station provides an optimized user experience,
through an effective combination of touch screen and selection buttons. Clear progress guidance and
status feedback ensure comfort and ease of use for operators.
System functionality is defined in software, allowing for regular updates for functional and/or security
improvements. The system software runs on the system controller with additional firmware on other
system devices for device-related functions. Upload and installation of new firmware into the system
devices is secure.
System configuration is possible using a standard web browser, connected to the embedded webserver
in the system controller, using HTTPS (HTTP Secure) communication. The system supports multiple
access levels with associated access rights. The system doesn’t require PC connected for network system
Page 675 of 1358

operation.
System shall have the following features required for EVAC system:
Priority, start and end tones with volume setting, an audio input for live speech insertion with volume
setting, a message or sequence of messages with a number of repetitions and volume setting, maximum
call duration and optional automatic scheduling with duration and interval.
The system software permits uploading of individual wav-files for messages and tones to the system
controller, with integrity supervision of stored wav-files. It supports zone definition and zone grouping
with amplifier channel to zone assignment. The system software shall configure and control all device
inputs and outputs in the system, including audio processing functions, operation modes, assigned
functions and connections and the supervision thereof.
The system includes diagnosis and logging software, supporting different modes of enquiry, including
call events and fault events. It shall be possible to view fault events, collected by the system controller,
on a call station screen, including the fault status of connected third party equipment. It shall be possible
to acknowledge and reset faults and alarm states, and to log these actions.
Basic Component of the systems and Schematic of the system
Proposed Consolidated System Architecture For Fire and IP based PA For Group VIII Project
Key
Application and features list and solution Example
OMNEO Latest Technology in Audio industry Dante & AES67 compatibility AES70 Control compatibility
Dynamic audio routing Open interface for third party integration Audio quality & processing per channel
for room equalization Built in IP switches. Separation of commercial and evacuation IP-network
Complete IP-based architecture is the DNA of the system.
Page 676 of 1358

Key standards & certifications
Ip: Ongoing Trend Towards With En54 Certification All The Component (Controller / Amplifier/ Call
Station /power Supply) Ip-based Solutions In The Industry
Decentralization: Save On Cabling Cost User Experience: Higher Expectation Toward Usability Green:
Clean Environment Demands For Systems Using Less Power Efficiency: Compact Meaning Less (Rack)
Space Is Needed & Less Costs All Components Of The System Are Ip-networked For Highest Flexibility
And Scalability Innovative Amplifier Architecture Allocates Power Intelligently No Single Point Of Failure
With Built-in Redundancy Is Core To The System Concept
User-centric Design Delivers An Intuitive Interface With Feedback On Progress And Status
Comprehensive System Adapts To Changing Needs.
The requirement states that the system shall be fully IP-network based. This means that the entire
system will rely on IP networking technology for communication and control.
The system controller shall have the ability to dynamically assign network audio channels for audio
routing between system devices across multiple subnets. This means that the controller will
automatically assign network channels to ensure seamless communication between different system
devices regardless of their location on the network.
The system should be capable of supporting more than 100 simultaneous high-definition audio
channels with a resolution of 24-bit, 48 kHz. The system should also support encryption and
authentication to prevent eavesdropping and hacking.
The system controller should have the ability to control up to 250 devices serving more than 500 zones.
This means that the controller will be responsible for managing a large number of devices and zones
within the system.
The system should be capable of receiving Dante and AES67 audio streams, with support for Dante
audio input and output streams. This ensures that the system can work with a wide range of audio
devices and protocols.
The system controller should provide an interface for control data and multi-channel digital audio over
IP, with an integrated 5-port Ethernet switch for redundant network connections. The controller
should support RSTP and loop-through cabling to ensure seamless communication and reliability.
The system controller should have dual power supply inputs and power supplies to ensure high
availability and redundancy.
The system controller should manage all devices in the system to provide the configured system
functions. This means that the controller will be responsible for managing all devices within the system,
ensuring that they are working together seamlessly.
The system should incorporate supervised storage for message and tone files with networked playback
of up to eight streams simultaneously. This means that the system will be capable of storing and playing
back multiple audio streams simultaneously.
Page 677 of 1358

The system should keep an internal log of fault events and call events, providing valuable information
for system maintenance and troubleshooting.
The system controller should provide a secure TCP/IP open interface for remote control and diagnostics,
allowing for remote control and monitoring of the system.
The system controller should provide front-panel LED indications for the status of power supplies and
the presence of faults in the system. Additional software monitoring and fault reporting features should
also be available.
The system controller should have the ability to be connected in a hot redundant architecture, meaning
that in the event of a failure of the working controller, the standby controller will take over
automatically.
The system controller should have a built-in web server for configuration and file management using a
browser.
The system controller should have 90 minutes of message/tone storage and should have the ability to
record calls using an SD card up to 32 GB.
The system controller should be rack-mountable (1U) and should be certified for EN 54-16 and ISO 7240-
16, marked for CE, and be compliant with the RoHS directive.
Audio Amplifiers Type 1
amplifier is designed to be fully and natively IP-networked, which means that it can connect to the
system without requiring external converters. It supports Dante and AES67 audio inputs for multi-
channel digital audio over IP.
Each amplifier channel can adapt the maximum output power to its connected loudspeaker load, with
free assignable output power per channel for a total maximum of 600 watts per amplifier. The amplifier
supports 70V or 100V operation with direct drive capability and outputs that are galvanically insulated
from ground.
The amplifier has a built-in independent spare amplifier channel for automatic failover, ensuring that
the system continues to function even in the event of an amplifier failure. It provides an interface for
controlling data and multi-channel digital audio over IP using dual Ethernet ports for redundant network
connection, supporting RSTP and loop-through cabling, with automatic failover to an analog lifeline
input.
The amplifier has dual power supply inputs and power supplies, ensuring that it continues to function
even in the event of a power supply failure. All amplifier channels have independent A/B zone outputs
with support for class-A loudspeaker loops. The amplifier channels supervise the integrity of
connected loudspeaker lines without interruption of audio distribution.
The front-panel LED status indications provide information on the network link, ground fault, power
supplies, and audio channels. The amplifier is rack mountable (1U) and features software-configurable
signal processing, including level control, parametric equalization, limiting, and delay for each channel.
Page 678 of 1358

The amplifier is certified for EN 54-16 and ISO 7240-16, marked for CE, and is compliant with the RoHS
directive. It comes with a warranty of at least three years.
In terms of technical specifications, the amplifier has an ingress protection of IP30 and supports
Ethernet 100BASE TX and 1000BASE T with a TCP/IP protocol. It uses the OMNEO audio/control protocol
and has a network audio latency of 10ms. Audio data encryption is supported with AES128, while control
data security uses TLS. The amplifier has 5 ports.
Audio Amplifiers Type 2
amplifier is designed to be fully and natively IP-networked based, without the need for external
converters to connect to the system. Each amplifier channel can adapt its maximum output power to its
connected loudspeaker load, with free assignable output power per channel for a total maximum of 600
watts per amplifier. The amplifier can support 70V or 100V operation with direct drive capability and
outputs that are galvanically insulated from ground.
The amplifier also has a built-in independent spare amplifier channel for automatic failover, ensuring
that the system remains operational even if one channel fails. It provides an interface for control data
and multi-channel digital audio over IP using dual Ethernet ports for redundant network connection,
supporting RSTP and loop-through cabling, with automatic failover to an analog lifeline input. The
amplifier has dual power supply inputs and power supplies, ensuring power redundancy.
All amplifier channels have independent A/B zone outputs with support for class-A loudspeaker loops.
Additionally, all amplifier channels supervise the integrity of connected loudspeaker lines without
interruption of audio distribution. The amplifier provides front-panel LED status indications for the
network link, ground fault, power supplies, and audio channels, and additional software monitoring and
fault reporting features.
The amplifier is rack mountable (1U) and features software-configurable signal processing, including
level control, parametric equalization, limiting, and delay for each channel. It is certified for EN 54-16
and ISO 7240-16, marked for CE, and compliant with the RoHS directive. The warranty for this amplifier
is a minimum of three years.
The amplifier's signal processing per channel includes 7-section parametric audio equalization, level
control from 0 to -60dB with mute, and audio delay from 0 to 60 seconds with a resolution of 1
millisecond. The network interface for the amplifier is Ethernet 100BASE TX, 1000BASE T with a TCP/IP
protocol. It supports redundancy using RSTP and uses OMNEO for the audio/control protocol. The
network audio latency for this amplifier is 10ms, and it has AES128 encryption for audio data encryption
and TLS for control data security. The amplifier has two ports.
IP Based Call Station
The desktop call station is a device that provides an interface for controlling data and multi-channel
digital audio over IP. It has dual Ethernet ports for redundant network connection, supporting RSTP and
loop-through cabling. The device can receive Power over Ethernet (PoE) via either one or both network
connections. It features a 4.3" full color capacitive touch screen with brightness adjustment that
provides feedback on system status.
Page 679 of 1358

The call station housing is designed to fit both surface and flush mounting options. When the device is
not in use, it switches to sleep mode to save power and wakes up when the screen is touched, or a
button is pressed.
The desktop call station provides a backlit full-color capacitive touch panel LCD as a user interface for
business and evacuation purposes. It accepts optional call station extensions, each offering 12
configurable buttons for zone selection and other purposes. The device provides control and routing of
live speech calls, stored messages, and music with volume control per zone.
The desktop call station has a gooseneck cardioid microphone for live calls and a 3.5 mm jack line level
input for background music. The microphone's nominal acoustic input level is configurable from 80 to
100 dB SPL, and it has a maximum acoustic input level of 120 dB SPL. The signal-to-noise ratio (SNR) of
the microphone is greater than 70 dBA, and the frequency response (+3 / -6 dB) is from 100 Hz to 14
kHz. The microphone is unidirectional.
The line input's SNR is greater than 96 dBA, and the total harmonic distortion plus noise (THD+N) is less
than 0.1%. The desktop call station is certified for EN 54-16 and ISO 7240-16, marked for CE and
compliant with the RoHS directive.
The device provides software-configurable signal processing, including sensitivity control, parametric
equalization, and limiting. The network interface is Ethernet with 100BASE TX and 1000BASE T protocol.
It uses RSTP redundancy and OMNEO audio/control protocol. The network audio latency is 10 ms, and
the audio data encryption is AES128. The control data security is TLS. The device has two ports.
Call station extension keypad.
The call station extension keypad is a device designed to be used in conjunction with a desktop or wall-
mount call station. It provides 12 configurable buttons that can be used for zone selection and other
purposes. Each button has tactile feedback and is complemented by a light ring activation indicator,
along with a set of multi-colour LEDs for function-related status indications.
The call station extension keypad also features a removable front cover, allowing users to place
language-independent button labels behind it. This feature makes it easy for users to customize the
labels for their specific needs.
To ensure safety and quality, the call station extension keypad is certified for EN 54-16 and ISO 7240-16,
marked for CE, and compliant with the RoHS directive. These certifications indicate that the device meets
strict standards for fire detection and alarm systems, as well as environmental regulations.
Overall, the call station extension keypad is a useful accessory for call stations, providing an intuitive
and customizable interface for users to control audio and communication systems in a building or
facility.
Page 680 of 1358

IP-based wall mount housing for PA system
The IP-based wall mount housing is designed for PA system operation and comes with a fixed hand-
held microphone and helix cable. It can receive Power over Ethernet (PoE) via one or both network
connections. The call station is certified as EN 54-16 and ISO 7240-16, marked for CE, and is compliant
with the RoHS directive.
The wall mount housing features a 4.3" full-colour capacitive touch display with a graphical user
interface for optimum user guidance and feedback. The display provides status and fault indicators for
voice alarm purposes.
The call station has dual audio over IP-network ports for redundant network connections, and the audio
data encryption over IP complies with AES 128. This ensures secure transmission of audio data over the
network.
Overall, the IP-based wall mount housing with fixed hand-held microphone and helix cable is a reliable
and secure solution for PA system operation in a variety of settings, such as schools, offices, and public
buildings.
End-of-line supervision
The compact device for loudspeaker end-of-line supervision is a device designed to supervise the
integrity of the loudspeaker line. It is a simple device that requires only a connection to the end of the
loudspeaker line for supervision. The device is designed to ensure the reliability of the supervision,
regardless of the number of connected loudspeakers.
The device uses low-level high-frequency pilot tone monitoring to supervise the loudspeaker line
without interrupting the audio content. The supervision is inaudible, meaning that it does not produce
any sound that could interfere with the audio content.
The device is certified for EN 54-16 and ISO 7240-16, marked for CE, and is compliant with the RoHS
directive. It is a reliable and efficient solution for end-of-line supervision, ensuring the integrity of the
loudspeaker line and meeting the standards and regulations for fire alarm and voice evacuation
systems.
48 V DC power supply module
The 48 V DC power supply module is designed to provide reliable power to various equipment that
requires a 48 V output. It features a mains input with power factor correction, which ensures that the
power supply operates efficiently and does not draw more current than necessary from the mains. The
48 V output has a continuous output current capability of 5 A, which means it can provide up to 5 A of
current continuously without overheating or tripping. Additionally, it has a peak current capability of 7.5
A, which means it can provide up to 7.5 A of current for short periods of time without causing any
damage.
The power supply module is DIN-rail mountable, which makes it easy to install and integrate into existing
systems. Convection cooling ensures that the power supply operates quietly without the need for fans
or other cooling mechanisms. The power supply is marked for UL and CE, which means it has undergone
rigorous testing and certification to ensure its compliance with international safety and quality
Page 681 of 1358

standards. It is also compliant with the RoHS directive, which means it does not contain any hazardous
substances that could harm the environment.
24 V DC power supply module
The 24 V DC power supply module is a device that provides a regulated DC voltage output of 24 volts
from an AC mains input. It is designed with power factor correction to ensure efficient use of power and
reduce harmonic distortion. The power supply can deliver a continuous output current of 10 amps and
a peak output current of 15 amps.
The power supply is DIN-rail mountable, making it easy to install in an equipment rack or enclosure. It
is designed with passive cooling, which means that it does not require a fan or other cooling mechanism
to operate. This helps to reduce noise and increase reliability.
The power supply is marked for UL and CE, indicating that it has been certified to meet safety and
environmental standards. It is also compliant with the RoHS directive, which restricts the use of certain
hazardous substances in electronic products.
Public address server
The advanced public address server is an industrial PC designed to add advanced functions to a public
address system. The pre-installed and licensed software allows connected operator devices to control
announcements and background music in selected zones, using streaming from its internal memory or
from external music portals and internet radio stations. The server provides announcement creation
and control facilities to the operator, including message scheduling, live call recording with pre-
monitoring and playback, and multi-lingual text-to-speech calls using online conversion services.
For security reasons, the server has two Ethernet ports to connect the device to two different local area
networks. One network is for the public address system, which is secure, while the other network is a
corporate network with access to the operator devices and the internet. The server has an integrated
web server that allows operator devices to be platform independent and use a browser to access the
server.
The server can stream up to 10 high-quality audio channels into the public address system, using the
AES67 protocol. It is marked for UL and CE and is compliant with the RoHS directive.
Public address license code
An advanced public address license is a code that allows a single operator device to connect to and
access an advanced public address server. It is designed to be used with either a PC or a wireless tablet
as an operator device, and multiple operator devices can be used in parallel, each requiring its own
license. Once connected, the operator device will have access to a browser-based graphical user
interface, which can be controlled using a mouse or touch screen.
The user interface is optimized for use with a 10" touch screen and offers easy zone selection for voice
announcements, control of background music sources and volume in selected zones, the ability to make
live call recordings of announcements with pre-monitoring and playback to selected zones, the ability
Page 682 of 1358

to do live and scheduled playback of stored messages, and playback of text-based announcements with
automatic (multi-lingual) online text-to-speech conversion.
The license code allows the operator device to have several unique operator profiles on that device,
with tailored functionalities for each user. This means that each user can have their own settings and
preferences, allowing them to work more efficiently and effectively.
Ceiling mount speaker
The 6W ceiling mount speaker is designed to deliver excellent speech and music reproduction. It
features a spring-mounted design for easy installation and has a maximum power rating of 9W, with a
rated power output of 6 watts. The speaker is equipped with multiple power tapping options, including
6/3/1.5/0.75W.
The effective frequency range of the speaker is 90 Hz to 20KHz, which means it can reproduce both low
and high-frequency sounds accurately. The SPL (sound pressure level) at the rated power of 1Khz at 1m
is 98 dB, ensuring that the speaker can deliver clear and loud sound even in large Areas.
The opening angle at 1 kHz and 4 kHz (-6 dB) is 180° / 50°, indicating that the speaker can provide a wide
sound dispersion pattern in the lower frequency range, and a narrower dispersion pattern in the higher
frequency range. This feature helps to ensure even sound distribution throughout the room and
prevents sound distortion or uneven sound levels.
Speaker Shall have steel dome is a protective cover designed to isolate and protect a speaker from
building fires. It is typically made of steel to provide high durability and resistance to heat and has a
ceramic terminal connector that can withstand high temperatures. The steel dome also features a cable
loop that allows it to be connected to a secondary support in case the speaker's main support gives way
during a fire. This helps to ensure that the speaker remains in place and continues to function as
intended, even in the event of a fire. The steel dome is an important safety feature that helps to protect
both people and property in the event of a fire.
Outdoor Horn Speakers
high-efficiency horn loudspeaker has a rated power for 100 hours in accordance with IEC 60268-1 and
IEC 60268-5 Power Handling Capacity (PHC) standards. It includes a 100 V transformer with taps on the
primary winding to allow different power tapings. The horn loudspeaker can easily select nominal full-
power, half-power, or quarter-power radiation (in 3 dB steps) by connecting the amplifier output to the
appropriate tapping.
The horn loudspeaker also has a two-meter four-core cable for connectivity, and is housed in an elliptical,
ABS enclosure that is water and dust protected with an IP66 rating. The colour of the enclosure is light
Gray RAL 7035.
Main Fire Alarm Control Panel Shall have Minimum. Microprocessor based Intelligent Addressable
Main Fire Alarm Control Panel with 4 /6 /10 Loops, as per Design which is expandable up to 32 loops.
Each loop can support not less than 250 devices (detectors and modules in any combination) and has a
loop length of up to 1.6 / 3 km. The control panel includes an 8" colour LCD touch screen display with
bright colours to indicate alarms and events, 4 integrated Ethernet ports, and 2 RS 485 ports for
networking.
Page 683 of 1358

The control panel Should also include 200 soft programmable keys with status indicators for individual
triggering of NAC outputs, evacuation speaker zones, AHU modules, damper switch, smoke extraction
fans, lifts, and more. The panel supports 10,000 history logs in non-volatile memory (EPROM) and has a
power supply unit of 230 ± 5% V, 50 Hz, with 24 hours back up from 24-volt sealed maintenance-free
batteries with an automatic charger.
The panel seamlessly integrates with an EVAC certified Public Address System and is complete with all
accessories. It is also compatible with OPC/BacNet/Modbus protocol for BMS. The circuit is protected
against usual electrical transients, electromagnetic and electrostatic interference (EMI & RFI) present in
the building. Additionally, the panel features EMC/EMI Monitoring to inform the possibility of a false
alarm caused by interference from sources such as motors, power cables, Wi-Fi routers, fluorescent
lamps, network switches, mobile signals, etc. The panel is certified with Vds/EN54/UL & FM Certification
Active Repeater panel Shall have Minimum. - Active Repeater panel is a device used in fire alarm
systems that is connected peer to peer with the Main Fire Alarm panel. It enables the display of fire
alarm events and system status information in another location, away from the main panel. The
repeater panel should have the same HMI (Human Machine Interface) and keypad as the main panel,
allowing for easy acceptance and reset of alarms. The panel should be Vds, EN54, UL, and FM certified,
indicating that it has met strict safety and quality standards.
Other than the ability to accept and reset alarms, all other specifications of the repeater panel should
remain unchanged from the main panel. This includes the loop capacity, supporting not less than 250
devices, loop length, power supply unit, 24 hours back-up with sealed maintenance-free batteries,
seamless integration with an EVAC certified Public Address System, and compatibility with
OPC/BacNet/Modbus protocol for BMS. The repeater panel should be designed for ease of use and
reliability, ensuring effective fire detection and alarm response.
Active Repeater panel Shall have Minimum -Below ceiling addressable multisensory detector is Key
device to detect both smoke and heat in the event of a fire. It features a combination of optical and
thermal sensors, which work together to provide accurate and reliable detection. The detector comes
with a mounting base and an auto addressing feature that ensures easy installation and setup. It also
has inbuilt dual fault isolators as per NFPA 72 style 7 wiring requirements and offers both soft and hard
addressing options.
The detector should have a drift compensation feature that helps to maintain its sensitivity and accuracy
over time. It also has an integrated EMI/EMC circuit that monitors electromagnetic interference and
reports current and average values to the panel. The EMC safety for the detector is 50 V/m.
The detector should have Vds/EN54/UL & FM certified, ensuring that it meets the highest industry
standards for safety and performance and reliable fire detection is essential.
Active Repeater panel Shall have Minimum -A remote indicator is a device that is used to indicate the
status of an automatic detector installed in a location that is not easily visible, such as a false ceiling or
a closed room. It is designed to provide a visual indication of an alarm or fault signal to aid in locating
the detector.
The remote indicator should have a 360-degree viewing angle for both wall and ceiling mounting to
ensure visibility from any direction. It should also have an IP40 rating, indicating that it is protected from
solid objects greater than 1 mm in size and is not fully protected from moisture.
Page 684 of 1358

The remote indicator is an important component of a fire alarm system, as it helps to ensure that the
status of the detector is easily visible and can be promptly acted upon in the event of a fire.
Addressable Heat Detector Shall have Minimum. -The addressable Heat detector with Fixed and Rate
of rise temp is designed to detect the presence of fire in areas where smoke detectors are not suitable
such as in dusty or smoky environments. It comes with a mounting base and auto-addressing feature
for easy installation. The detector has inbuilt dual fault isolators in compliance with NFPA 72 style 7
wiring requirements, and it supports both soft and hard addressing.
The detector also has a drift compensation feature to ensure accurate detection and an integrated
EMI/EMC circuit to monitor electromagnetic interference and report current and average values to the
panel. If the detector does not have inbuilt isolators, an additional isolator module is required per
detector. This detector should have Vds, EN54, UL, and FM certifications to ensure compliance with
industry standards.
Addressable Manual Call Point Shall have Minimum - Manual call points are an important
component of fire alarm systems, used to manually trigger alarms in the event of a fire. The double
action break glass type with a push button is a popular option, allowing for easy activation with the push
button while requiring the glass to be broken for safety reasons. The MCP can be mounted on the
surface or flush mounted, depending on the preference of the user. Each addressable MCP has an
electronic circuit built into it, which provides addressing capability. The MCP is also equipped with an
inbuilt fault isolator or external isolator if not inbuilt, to ensure proper functioning. Additionally, the MCP
should have an LED to indicate alarms and should be EN54/VdS approved for safety and compliance.
Addressable Control Really Module Shall have Minimum -An Addressable Control Relay Module is a
device used in a fire alarm system to provide switching capability for various applications like smoke
dampers, air-handling units, or other auxiliary systems. The module is designed to be connected to an
addressable loop of the fire alarm control panel and can be programmed with specific addressing
information for identification by the control panel.
The Control Relay Module should have inbuilt dual fault isolators to ensure uninterrupted
communication with the fire alarm control panel even in the event of a short circuit or open circuit fault
on the loop. It should also be designed to comply with NFPA 72 style 7 wiring requirements. The
maximum switching current of the module should be 1A @ 30V DC.
The module should have flexible network structures, which will allow it to be used in various network
topologies. The Vds/EN54/UL & FM Certification of the module ensures that it meets the industry
standards for fire safety products.
Stand Alone Loop Detector Shall have Minimum-A stand-alone loop powered detector base sounder
with strobe is a type of fire alarm device that can be mounted on the detector base. It operates on the
same loop as other addressable devices in the fire alarm system and gets its power from the loop.
This device comes with an inbuilt dual fault isolator as per NFPA 72 style 7 wiring requirements to ensure
that a fault in one device does not affect the performance of other devices on the same loop. The device
has 32 different tone variants selection options and adjustable sound pressure by 5 levels, with the
sound pressure being 92.1 dB(A).
The device also has a flasher with a synchronized flash rate of 1 Hz and light intensity greater than 2 cd.
The device can be programmed from the panel. The device has Vds/ EN54/ UL & FM Certification.
Page 685 of 1358

Addressable Input output Module Shall have Minimum- The Addressable Module with one input &
one output contacts is a device designed for use with an addressable fire alarm control panel. The
module has inbuilt dual fault isolators as per NFPA 72 style 7 wiring requirements and is capable of
monitoring two types of signals: monitoring of a line with EOL resistor, and potential free contact
monitoring.
The module has one input contact that can be used to monitor a variety of signals, including smoke
detectors, heat detectors, manual call points, and other devices. The module's output contact can be
used to control a range of devices, such as dampers, fans, doors, and other equipment.
The module is designed to be compatible with a range of network structures and can be easily integrated
into an existing fire alarm system. It has Vds, EN54, UL & FM certifications, ensuring that it meets the
highest standards of safety and reliability.
Beam Detector with Conventional Interface Module Shall have Minimum. The transmitter and
receiver type motorized reflective, auto-aligning infrared optical beam smoke detector is designed for
the detection of smoke in large open spaces. The system consists of a transmitter and a receiver, which
are installed at opposite ends of the space being monitored. The transmitter sends a beam of infrared
light to the receiver, and when smoke particles enter the space between the two, the light is scattered,
causing the receiver to trigger an alarm.
The system can accommodate up to two detector heads per system controller, and each system
controller houses two pairs of fire and fault relays, one per detector. The system can be configured for
a range of up to 100m, and it includes integral LASER alignment and Auto-Align Fast Automatic Beam
Alignment for easy installation and maintenance.
In addition, the system includes ground-level control, which allows for easy testing and maintenance
without requiring ladders or other equipment. The system is suitable for use in a range of environments,
including warehouses, atriums, and other large open spaces. The system meets Vds, EN54, UL, and FM
certification standards for fire detection and alarm systems.
Video Fire Detection (VFD)camera Shall have Minimum. The Video Fire Detection (VFD) camera is a
highly advanced system that utilizes intelligent video analytics to detect flames and smoke within a very
short time period by analyzing video sequences. It is equipped with an inbuilt low-light IR illuminator
that allows it to operate even in low-light conditions (down to 0 lux). The VFD camera is capable of
detecting test fires like TF1, TF2 up to TF8, and can detect a flame width of 1m at a distance of 120m and
smoke of width 1m at a distance of 84m when set to an angle of 45 degrees.
The camera is designed to provide a relay output that can transmit alarm signals to the fire alarm panel
when it detects a fire. The VFD camera is certified by Vds, ensuring its compliance with the highest
industry standards for fire detection and safety.
Graphical User Interface Shall have Minimum. -The GUI (Graphical User Interface) based main
network software is a user-friendly software For monitor and control the fire alarm systems in a building.
The software is capable of graphically representing each node being monitored with floor plans and
icons depicting the actual locations of the various systems and/or sensors’ locations. The software is
typically located in the control room and can monitor all the blocks and panels connected with each
other.
Page 686 of 1358

One of the key features of the GUI software is its ability to monitor over the Fire Network along with the
Fire detection signal. This ensures that any potential fire alarms or related issues can be quickly and
easily identified and addressed.
The Graphic Workstation, which is a component of the GUI software, shall act as an independent node
communicating on the peer-to-peer network. It shall not be dependent on the Fire Panel CPU for
operation, which means that the failure of any CPU shall not result in failure of the Graphic Workstation.
This ensures the continued operation of the GUI software in the event of any failures or malfunctions.
Fighter Telephone System-A Fire Fighter Telephone System is an important communication tool used
by firefighters during emergency situations. The system comprises of a Master Control Panel that is
capable of controlling and monitoring up to 64 Telephone Stations across 8 zones. Each nod covers 8
stations, providing a maximum of 64 Telephone Stations. The system is designed to operate on an input
voltage of 230V AC and a DC output of 24V @ 100mA maximum.
The Master Control Panel is equipped with Audio and Visual Indication features to alert the operators
during emergency situations. The system provides a Group or All Call facility, which enables operators
to communicate with all the telephone stations or a group of stations within a particular zone. The Fire
Fighter Telephone System also provides full duplex audio conversations, allowing for two-way
communication between the Master and remote stations.
The system Shall flush mounting or wall mounting with a suitable back box. The operating temperature
range of the system is 0-49◦ C, and it can withstand humidity levels of up to 93+2% RH. The Fire Fighter
Telephone System complies with the British Standard BS 5839 Part 9:2002 for Fire Detection and Alarm
Systems for Buildings.
Fire Fighter Telephone Jack-A Fire Fighter Telephone Jack is a device used for communication with the
central Fire Fighter Console using a portable Handset. It is typically made of stainless steel and is
designed to be flush mounted on a wall. The device features a 4.5mm or 6.5mm RJ11 jack, which allows
for the connection of a compatible Fire Fighter Telephone Handset.
The Fire Fighter Telephone Jack is often used in systems that require multiple communication points
throughout a building. These communication points can be daisy-chained together in a topology to
create an unlimited number of connection points.
Overall, the Fire Fighter Telephone Jack is an important component of a Fire Fighter Telephone System
as it provides a reliable means of communication between firefighters and the central control room
during emergencies.
General Instructions for Location and Spacing
FO R FL A T C E IL I N G
On a flat ceiling with no obstructions, the radius of protection of fire detectors is 7.5m for a smoke
detector and 5.3m for a heat detector, and detectors should be mounted a minimum of 0.5m from a
wall. Some analogue multi-criteria detectors have a heat sensor only function, switched by the control
panel, typically used to reduce the possibility of false alarms during daytime when a building is occupied,
reverting to multi-sensor operation at night-time. If this type of operation is employed, the radius of
protection for a heat sensor should be used. Figure 20 gives a simple spacing plan based on these
Page 687 of 1358

figures; however, it should be noted that this might not be the most efficient layout for a given site;
which may reduce the number of detectors required. In practice, the layout of the room must be
considered to obtain the most efficient detector layout.
FO R HE IG H T C O NS ID E RA T I O N
Smoke or heat detectors can only detect fires once a certain amount of smoke or heat has reached the
sensor. As the height of a ceiling increases, the time taken for smoke or heat to reach a sensor will
increase, and it will become diluted with clean, cool air. Spacing of 7.5 m for smoke detectors is valid up
to a height of 7 m only and that of 5.3 m for heat detectors is valid only up to a height of 5 m. Beyond
these heights, spacing between the detectors shall be adjusted as follows:
• Smoke detectors for heights between 7 m and 10 m - 5 m spacing Beyond 10m height - Only
beam detectors or aspirating type detection systems.
• Heat detectors for heights between 5 m and 7 m - 3.5 m spacing Beyond 7 m height - Not allowed
to install heat detectors.
CEILING OBSTRACTION
Ceiling obstructions such as beams greater than 10% of the ceiling height should be treated as a wall
and will thus divide a room. Detectors should not be mounted within 500mm of such an obstruction If
the depth of an obstruction such as a beam is less than 10% of the height of the ceiling, but greater than
250mm deep, then detectors should not be mounted any closer than 500mm to the obstruction. Where
an obstruction such as a beam or a light fitting is less than 250mm in depth, detectors should not be
mounted any closer to the obstruction than twice its depth.
SLOPING CEILING
Where the ceiling is pitched or sloping, the slope of the roof tends to speed the rise of smoke or heat
to the apex, hence reducing the delay before the detectors are triggered. For sloped roofs with a pitch
height greater than 600mm for smoke detectors, or 150mm for heat detectors, a row of detectors
should be placed within a maximum vertical distance of 600mm or 150mm for smoke or heat detectors
respectively from the roof apex. Sloped roofs rising less than 600mm for smoke detectors or 150mm
for heat detectors may be treated as a flat ceiling.
Since the smoke or heat tends to rise faster up the slope, it is permissible to use a greater spacing for
the row of detectors mounted in the apex of the roof: For each degree of slope of the roof, the spacing
may be increased by 1% up to a maximum of 25%. Where, as in figure 24, the roof slopes are unequal
the spacing down the slopes can be unequal, however along the roof apex spacing the lesser of the two
figures should be used, in this example 10.5m +18%. Where the slope finishes within the adjusted
detection radius, the standard distance to the next row of detectors, 10.5m, should be used. Care must
be taken when placing the next row so that no gaps are left in detection coverage.
STAIRWELLS & LIFT SHAFT
Internal stairwells and lift shafts and other vertical service ducts through a building provide a clear path
for smoke to pass between floors of a building as if they were chimneys. It is therefore important to
protect these, preferably using smoke detectors. To maintain a world-class facility, microprocessor
Page 688 of 1358

based integrated building management system is proposed to enhance safety, comfort, and reduced
manpower and energy optimization.
All vertical shafts through a building must be protected by a smoke or heat detector at the top of the
shaft, and by a detector within 1.5m of each opening onto the shaft.
VOID & FALSE CEILING
Detectors need not normally be installed in voids less than 800mm deep, unless on the basis of a fire
risk assessment it is thought that fire or smoke could spread extensively through the voids before
detection, or unless the fire risk in the void is such as to warrant protection. Use of heat and smoke
detectors in voids greater than 800mm high is dependent on the protection category, and fire risk
assessment.
Where they are installed into voids, a detector's sensing element should be mounted either in the top
10% or the top 125mm of the void space whichever is greater. Although it can be difficult to install
detectors the correct way up in void spaces, care should be taken as incorrect orientation of a detector
can lead to increased ingress of dirt and dust, leading to reduced maintenance intervals, and possible
nuisance alarms.
DETECTORS (SMOKE) IN VENTILATION DUCTS
a) Smoke detectors or probes shall be installed in straight stretches of ductwork, at a distance from the
nearest bend, corner, or junction of at least three times the width of the duct; and
b) The suitability of the smoke detector for duct type application shall be evaluated within the
parameters defined by the manufacturers. The sampling inlet probe and the holes in the probe shall
be arranged, according to the manufacturer’s specifications, to cover as much of the duct as possible.
This provision normally calls for the probe to cover the wider dimension of the duct and the length of
the probe shall be at least two-thirds of that dimension Detectors should be with inbuilt short circuit
isolator & automatic addressing. Detectors should be installed as per coverage defined in NFPA 72. It
should include all rooms, halls, storage areas, basements, attics, lifts, and spaces above suspended
ceilings including plenum areas utilized as part of the HVAC system. In addition, coverage should include
all closets, elevator shafts, enclosed stairways (Directional Sounder), dumbwaiter shafts, chutes, and
other subdivisions and accessible spaces.
Each detector & device shall have an integrated short circuit isolator. Suitable numbers of input/ output
(C/M) relay modules are suggested for connecting other equipment like Electrical Panels, lifts,
firefighting system, AHUs etc. The spacing between two detectors shall not be more than 8 Mtr. or it
shall be as per relevant code & manufacture standards.
Suitable addressable loop powered sounders/ hooters for 100db sound level are suggested.
Addressable manual call boxes shall be provided near all exits, staircases, lift lobbies etc. as per relevant
Norms. The Response Indicators shall be used in the waiting areas, Corridors, Common Area etc.
Microprocessor IP based fire alarm control panel (fully redundant) for number of required loops with
24 hrs. Battery backup with LCD display, printer etc. shall be in the fire control room. And Fire Alarm
Panels shall be integrated with PA system and with BMS also. Two Way communication Fire Fighters
Telephone Jack & Handset with necessary accessories are to be provided in all the buildings as required.
Page 689 of 1358

the fire alarm system shall comply with requirements of nfpa standard 72 for protected premises
signaling systems except as modified and supplemented by this specification. the system shall be
electrically supervised and monitor the integrity of all conductors.
the facility shall have an emergency voice alarm communication system. digitally stored message
sequences shall notify the building occupants that a fire or life safety condition has been
reported. message generator shall be capable of automatically distributing up to eight simultaneous,
unique messages to appropriate audio zones within the facility based on the type and location of the
initiating event. the fire command center (FCC) shall also support emergency manual voice
announcement capability for both system wide or selected audio zones and shall include provisions for
the system operator to override automatic messages system wide or in selected zones.
the system shall support additional, alternate fire command centres, which shall be capable of
simultaneous monitoring of all system events. alternate fire command centres shall also support an
approved method of transferring the control functions to an alternate fire command center when
necessary. all fire command centres shall be individually capable of assuming audio command
functions such as emergency paging, audio zone control functions, and firefighter's telephone
communication functions.
each designated zone shall transmit separate and different alarm, supervisory and trouble signals to
the fire command center (FCC) and designated personnel in other buildings at the site via a multiplex
communication network.
Protect from moisture by using appropriate coverings. Store at dry interior locations. Sequence work
to avoid interferences with building finishes and installation of other products. Supply as maintenance
stock, consumable devices, components as recommended by Supplier, but shall not be less than two
units of each type/ rating of installed consumable material/ component/ device. For ease of service all
panel I/O wiring terminal blocks shall be removable, plug-in types and have sufficient capacity for #18
to #12 AWG wire. Terminal blocks that are permanently fixed are not acceptable.
The specifications and standards listed below form a part of this specification. The system shall fully
comply with the latest issue of these standards, Whereas Applicable.
NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)
NFPA 12 EXTINGUISHING SYSTEMS (LOW AND HIGH)
NFPA 12A HALON 1301 EXTINGUISHING SYSTEMS
NFPA 13 SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
NFPA 15 WATER SPRAY SYSTEMS
NFPA 16 FOAM / WATER DELUGE AND SPRAY SYSTEMS
NFPA 17 DRY CHEMICAL EXTINGUISHING SYSTEMS
NFPA 17A WET CHEMICAL EXTINGUISHING SYSTEMS
NFPA 2001 CLEAN AGENT EXTINGUISHING SYSTEMS
NFPA 70 NATIONAL ELECTRIC CODE
NFPA 90A AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEMS
NFPA 92A SMOKE CONTROL SYSTEMS
NFPA 92B SMOKE MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS IN MALLS, ATRIA, LARGE AREAS
NFPA 72 NATIONAL FIRE ALARM CODE
NFPA 101 LIFE SAFETY CODE
UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES INC. (UL)
Page 690 of 1358

UL 268, 7TH EDITION SMOKE DETECTORS FOR FIRE PROTECTIVE SIGNALLING SYSTEMS
UL 864, CONTROL UNITS FOR FIRE PROTECTIVE SIGNALLING SYSTEMS
10TH EDITION
UL 2572 MASS NOTIFICATION SYSTEMS
UL 217 SMOKE DETECTORS, SINGLE AND MULTIPLE STATION
UL 228 DOOR CLOSERS - HOLDERS FOR FIRE PROTECTIVE SIGNALLING SYSTEMS
UL 268A SMOKE DETECTORS FOR DUCT APPLICATIONS
UL 521 HEAT DETECTORS FOR FIRE PROTECTIVE SIGNALLING SYSTEMS
UL 464 AUDIBLE SIGNALLING APPLIANCES
UL 38 MANUALLY ACTUATED SIGNALLING BOXES
UL 1481 POWER SUPPLIES FOR FIRE PROTECTIVE SIGNALLING SYSTEMS
UL 346 WATERFLOW INDICATORS FOR FIRE PROTECTIVE SIGNALLING SYSTEMS
UL 1076 CONTROL UNITS FOR BURGLAR ALARM PROPRIETARY PROTECTIVE SIGNALLING SYSTEMS
UL 1971 VISUAL NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES
UL 2017 STANDARD FOR GENERAL-PURPOSE SIGNALLING DEVICES AND SYSTEMS
UL60950 SAFETY OF INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY EQUIPMENT
Design Basis of VMS and Analytics Based Surveillance System
CCTV and surveillance system for the campus is a comprehensive and advanced system designed to
control and monitor different buildings according to the NBC 2016, relevant IS codes, and local by-laws.
The system is designed to provide maximum security and surveillance coverage for the campus, with a
range of IP-based dome cameras, bullet cameras, and PTZ cameras strategically placed throughout the
buildings & Outdoor area. The types of cameras specified in the Document are the minimum required
to provide adequate surveillance coverage for the campus. However, during the detailed design process,
the type and rating of the cameras may be upgraded if necessary to ensure optimal performance and
coverage.
With the increasing security concerns in public areas, it Shall have become essential to have a robust
and comprehensive CCTV network. The CCTV setup must be an IP based solution to provide the best
image quality and high manageability. This setup should cover all public areas, indoor and outdoor, to
ensure maximum surveillance. The purpose of this paper is to describe the requirements for an effective
CCTV network that can provide comprehensive surveillance and meet the needs of modern security.
Design Topology
A server-based IP-based CCTV system with VMS (Video Management System) is a modern solution for
video surveillance that offers advanced features and capabilities compared to traditional analog
systems. This type of system is designed to run on a centralized server, which manages and controls all
cameras in the network.
The system consists of IP cameras that are connected to the network via Ethernet cables, allowing for
remote access and management of the cameras. The cameras are usually powered over Ethernet (PoE),
which eliminates the need for a separate power source. The IP cameras capture high-quality video
footage, which is then transmitted over the network to the centralized server.
Page 691 of 1358

The server is equipped with VMS software that is used to manage, view, and record the video footage
from the cameras. The VMS software provides advanced features such as motion detection, facial
recognition, and object tracking, which enable operators to identify and respond to potential security
threats more efficiently.
The server-based system is highly scalable, allowing for the addition of new cameras as required. The
system can be configured to support multiple sites, providing a centralized management platform for
all locations. The system can also be accessed remotely, allowing for real-time monitoring and
management from any location with an internet connection.
One of the key advantages of a server-based IP-based CCTV system with VMS is the ability to store and
manage large amounts of video data. The system can be configured to store video footage for an
extended period, typically up to 30 days or more, depending on the storage capacity of the server.
The system can be set up to trigger alarms and alerts based on predefined criteria, such as motion
detection or object tracking. These alerts can be sent to designated personnel via email, SMS, or push
notification, enabling a rapid response to potential security threats.
In summary, a server-based IP-based CCTV system with VMS is a modern and advanced solution for
video surveillance that offers a range of features and capabilities for enhanced security and surveillance.
The system is highly scalable, providing the ability to add new cameras as required, and can be accessed
remotely, enabling real-time monitoring and management from any location with an internet
connection.
SYSTEM COMPONENT AND MINIMUM REQUIRMENT
Bullet cameras provide high-quality surveillance coverage over longer distances. These cameras are
ideal for use in outdoor areas, such as parking lots, walkways, and open areas, where a higher level of
security is required. They are also weatherproof, making them ideal for use in harsh weather conditions.
Following is the Minimum Requirement as per Design
The 4MP fixed verifocal Bullet camera is designed to provide high-quality surveillance both indoors and
outdoors. With a 1/2.9-inch CMOS sensor and 2560 (H) x 1440 (V) total sensor pixels, this camera delivers
clear and crisp images with a frame rate of up to 25fps. It Shall have a minimum illumination of colour
0.4 lx, mono 0.04 lx, and IR 0.0 lx or better, making it ideal for low-light environments. The camera
features a wide dynamic range (WDR) of 120dB and supports video compression in H.265, H.264, and
M-JPEG formats.
Other intelligent features of the camera include automatic electronic shutter (AES), dynamic noise
reduction, and defog. It also shall have privacy masking and pixel counter capabilities and comes with a
memory card slot for local storage. The camera shall have an IR range of 50m and an automatic varifocal
lens that can adjust from 4.9 to 8mm. Additionally, it shall have an alarm input/output, audio
input/output, and network connectivity through RJ45 with G.711 and full/half duplex audio streaming.
This camera is ONVIF Profile S, G, T, and M compliant and shall have a weatherproof rating of IP66 and
an IK10 impact rating. It can be powered through Power over Ethernet (PoE) and comes with security
features like AES/FIPS encryption, signed firmware, Trusted Platform Module, and Public Key
Infrastructure. It also Shall have local storage capacity with SD card support up to 2TB and is UL certified
Page 692 of 1358

with an MTBF of over 90000 hours. The camera is also compatible with cloud storage options like FTP,
Dropbox, and email applications.
Dome Camera - provides high-quality surveillance coverage over 20 Mtr of More distances. These
cameras are ideal for use in Indoor areas, such as Office Lobby Staircase Etc, where a higher level of
security is required. Dome Cameras also weatherproofs, in in case need to install in Outdoor areas as
per Design Following is the Minimum Requirement as per Design
The 4MP Fixed Verifocal Dome camera with Internal/External IR is a high-quality CCTV camera suitable
for use in various settings. Its 1/2.9-inch CMOS sensor with 2560 (H) x 1440 (V) total sensor pixels
captures clear images up to 25fps. It shall have a low minimum illumination of colour 0.4 lx and mono
0.05 lx, making it suitable for use in low light conditions. The camera also features 120dB WDR, H.265;
H.264; M-JPEG video compression, Automatic Electronic Shutter (AES), and Intelligent Dynamic Noise
Reduction, Intelligent Defog, Privacy Masking, and Pixel Counter features for enhanced image quality
and control.
Additionally, it shall have an IR range of 30m, an automatic varifocal lens of 3.3 to 8 mm, and audio
input/output and alarm input 1/1. It supports network connectivity through RJ45, G.711, and audio
streaming full duplex/half duplex, and ONVIF Profile S, G, T, M. The camera is rated IP66 and IK10 for
weatherproof and impact resistance and is Power over Ethernet (PoE) capable. It Shall have AES/FIPS
encryption, signed firmware, Trusted Platform Module, and Public Key Infrastructure for enhanced
security. The camera also shall have a memory card slot for local storage of up to 1TB and is compatible
with FTP, Dropbox, and e-mail applications. UL certified and with a MTBF>90000 hours.
PTZ cameras are a highly advanced type of surveillance camera that offers exceptional flexibility and
coverage. These cameras are equipped with a pan, tilt, and zoom function, allowing them to cover a
wide range of angles and areas. They are ideal for use in large Open areas, Following is the Minimum
Requirement as per Design
The sensor of the camera is a 1/2.8" progressive scan CMOS with effective pixels of 1920X1080p (2 MP).
It shall have a frame rate of 60fps and an optical zoom of 30x with a digital zoom of 16x. The minimum
illumination is Colour: 0.1 lux, B/W: 0.3 lux, IR: 0 lux and Shall have an IR distance of 250m. It also shall
have a wide dynamic range of 120 dB HDR and video compression options of H.265, H.264, and MJPEG
streams.
The camera Shall have various intelligent features such as Dynamic Noise Reduction, BLC, and White
Balance. It Shall have a pan range of 360° continuous and a tilt range of -90° to 5° (Auto-flip 190°). The
pan/tilt modes are Pan: 240°/s; Tilt: 100°/s. It Shall have 256 presets and supports tours. It also Shall
have 1/1 Channel In/Out audio and supports Micro SD card storage up to 1TB. The camera Shall have
32 individually configurable privacy masks and 1/1 alarm inputs/outputs.
The camera shall have dual power options and is weather-resistant with an IP66 & NEMA 4x rating. It
also shall have an impact resistance rating of IK10. The camera supports ONVIF Profiles: S & G, T, M, M
and Shall have an MTBF of over 90000 hours. It is certified by UL, FCC, CE+, and shall have security
features such as AES/FIPS encryption and signed firmware. The camera also Shall have an in-built rain-
sensing wiper and supports SD card storage up to 2TB.
VMS (Video Management System) and Video Analytics
Page 693 of 1358

Video management software (VMS) is an essential tool for managing and monitoring digital video, audio,
and data across IP networks. It enables seamless integration of different cameras from multiple
locations, centralized control, and real-time monitoring of events. The software offers several
functionalities such as alarm management, users management, recording quality management,
schedule recording, drag & drop, bookmarks, snapshot, pop-up alarm, site maps support, and virtual
matrix functionality. Entire software (Licensed) to meet the requirement of tender document shall be
provided by the bidder. These include the software like Video Management Software (VMS), video
analytic software and other management software for workstations, software for cameras, software for
dedicated CCTV control keyboard, software for networking, Software for accessing the cameras via
mobile application, OS, other drivers and management software.
VMS SOFTWARE FEATURES
Software (VMS/ Video analytic software etc.) shall be natively integrated. software (VMS) and should be
ONVIF. And provide Highest level of Accuracy in all Applications. Following is Some of Essentials
Secured user authentication system: The user authentication and management system shall be
highly secured and robust, ensuring protection from cyber threats. The user permission level should be
defined very clearly. Only Admin access holders shall have the complete system access rights. Dual
authentication shall also be allowed.
Monitoring - access for all cameras on certain properties decided by admin, operator cannot access,
change any parameter in the IP VMS, only users with admin rights can perform changes in system The
IP VMS System should allow building security operators to view dedicated building or dedicated cameras
only, central control room operators shall have viewed permission for all cameras integrated to the
system.
Users should be able to view live and recording despite VMS server failure. Necessary arrangement for
hardware to be made. The Surveillance System Design for triplex i.e., it shall provide facility of viewing,
recording & replay simultaneously. VMS Shall be multi video signals from cameras (located at different
locations), process them for viewing on workstations/monitors and shall simultaneously record all the
cameras after suitable compression.
The IP based VMS System Capable to provide facilities like live view, control of PTZ cameras, recording,
playback of recorded/ archived video, problem/ event analysis, system configuration etc. from the IP
based VMS. The Software should have functionality to roll back the configuration in case new
configuration is not working as desired. For each camera bit rate, frame rate, resolution etc. shall be
programmable. Facility for searching and registration of new devices connected to online devices
(Camera, Joystick etc.)
Page 694 of 1358

Recording software of VMS System able to configure each stream as per user requirement. The
recording manager software shall be able to show live dashboard of status of camera recording showing
total storage, used storage, cameras connected, disconnected same time Recording and Playback shall
be performed simultaneously such that it shall not affect the recording from Video cameras.
VMS SOFTWARE LICENSE APPLICATION
• Tripwire/Intrusion: When a person or object crosses a defined virtual line or perimeter.

• Wrong direction: When a person or object moves in the wrong direction.
• Person entering/leaving field: When a person enters or exits a defined area.
• Follow route: When a person or object follows a pre-defined route.
• Loitering: When a person stays in a defined area for a specified duration.
• Object placed/removed: When an object is placed or removed from a defined area.
• Vehicle stopped: When a vehicle stops for a specified duration.
• Speed range detection: When a vehicle or person moves above or below a specified speed
range.
• People counting: When the number of people in a defined area crosses a certain threshold.
• Crowd density detection: When the density of people in a defined area crosses a certain
threshold.
• Attribute-based triggers: detect and trigger alerts based on various attributes of the objects.
• Duration: When an object or person stays in a defined area for a specified duration.
• Size: When an object or person crosses a defined size threshold.
• Direction: When an object or person moves in a certain direction.
• Colour: When an object or person of a certain colour is detected.
• Object classes: detect and classify various types of objects captured by the cameras, such as:
Upright persons: When a person is standing upright. Bikes: When a bike is detected.
Page 695 of 1358

Cars: When a car is detected.

Trucks: When a truck is detected.
Simultaneous triggering: trigger any six user-defined rules from the above list on all the cameras
simultaneously.
PoE and PoE + Network Switches - PoE (Power over Ethernet) and PoE+ switches Critical and Essential
Component for Stable CCTV systems to provide power and data connectivity to IP cameras. They
eliminate the need for separate power cables and outlets, reducing installation costs and simplifying
the setup process. Combination of Different power rated PoE switches can deliver up to 15.4W of power
per port, while PoE+ switches can deliver up to 30W of power per port, as per design and Camera
Requirement making them suitable for high-powered devices such as PTZ (Pan-Tilt-Zoom) cameras and
wireless access points. They also offer features such as QoS (Quality of Service), VLAN (Virtual Local Area
Network) support, and management capabilities to ensure efficient and reliable network performance
for CCTV systems.
Distribution switches are important components for managing multiple networks such as Data, CCTV,
Access Control, AV, Wi-Fi, and IP flows. These switches provide various features such as VLAN support,
IGMP snooping, port mirroring, MAC address filtering, URL filtering, Multicast Storm Control, DHCP
snooping, Access Control List (ACL) support, Quality of Service (QoS), MLD snooping, STP Root Guard,
and more. They also support technologies like slow, Spanning Tree Protocol (STP), Rapid Spanning Tree
Protocol (RSTP), Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP), and DHCP relay. Other features include IP-MAC
binding, SNMP trap, Energy Efficient Ethernet, Management Information Base (MIB), Class of Service
(CoS), tagged VLAN, and Differ Code Point (DSCP) support. These switches typically come with a 1.5MB
packet buffer, Err Disable Recovery, and ICMP support. They are crucial for maintaining network security
and efficient data flow.
Page 696 of 1358

TYPICAL LAY OUT OF POE AND POE + SWITCHES IN DESIGN
Video
Storage System
NAS system is a Mainly use to storing and managing surveillance footage while also providing advanced
video analysis capabilities to improve the security and provide verity of options e.g.
High storage capacity: The system should offer high-capacity storage to accommodate large amounts
of video data from multiple cameras. The system should offer high-capacity storage to accommodate
large amounts of video data from multiple cameras.
RAID protection: Storage system Shall have redundant storage and RAID protection to prevent data
loss in case of hardware failure.
Easy scalability: Storage system is scalable to meet the growing storage needs of the User as the
number of cameras increases.
Centralized management: Storage system able allow centralized management of all the cameras and
video footage, making it easy to search and retrieve footage.
Remote access: Storage system Able provide remote access to the surveillance footage from any
location, allowing authorized personnel to view the footage and analyses it.
Integration with other systems: Storage system able to integrate with other security systems like
access control, fire alarms, and more.
Page 697 of 1358

BRIF OF COMPONENT TECHNOLOGY
POE Cameras: Cameras should be POE (Power over Ethernet) to ensure high availability and better
administration. POE cameras simplify the installation process and reduce the need for power outlets.
These cameras can be easily connected to the network and powered through the Ethernet cable.
Compression: Cameras should have H.264 compression for lower storage requirements and better
transmission throughput. H.264 compression reduces the size of video files without compromising
image quality. This means that more footage can be stored on the hard drive, and the transmission of
video footage is faster and smoother.
Recording: A minimum of 30 days’ recording should be kept online to ensure that footage is available
for review when required. It is essential to ensure that the CCTV network has sufficient storage capacity
to store video footage for a minimum of 30 days.
Remote Storage: Remote storage for simultaneous backup of footage up to 30 days to cater to
emergency requirements is to be implemented. Remote storage ensures that footage is safe from theft
or damage to the hard drive. In case of an emergency, remote storage provides an additional backup,
which can be accessed from any location.
Remote Viewing: Remote viewing should be available to enable authorized personnel to view the CCTV
footage from any location. Remote viewing can be done through a web browser or dedicated software
that is compatible with the CCTV system. This feature allows security personnel to monitor the premises
from anywhere, which enhances the overall security of the facility.
Entrance Gates: Entrance gates should have a dedicated very focal camera for 24x7 monitoring of
visitor entry and frisking. These cameras should be capable of providing high-quality footage even in
low light conditions. The footage can be used to identify visitors and track their movements within the
premises.
Outdoor Cameras: All outdoor cameras should be of IP66 rating to ensure that they can withstand
harsh weather conditions. These cameras should have inbuilt IR illuminators for visibility up to 30
meters at least. The IR illuminators provide better visibility in low light conditions and help identify
suspicious activity.
Lift Lobby/Landing: Lift lobby/landing at each of the floors should have dedicated coverage to monitor
the movement of people in the building. These cameras should provide clear footage even in low light
conditions to ensure effective surveillance. Entry Points on Ground Floor: All entry points on the
ground floor should have CCTV cameras to monitor the entry and exit of people. These cameras should
be strategically placed to provide a clear view of the entry points.
Page 698 of 1358

Staircase Doors on All Floor: All staircase doors on the ground floor should have CCTV cameras to
monitor the movement of people in the building. These cameras should be placed strategically to
provide a clear view.
stipulated as per relevant IS Codes and NBC-2016
CCTV surveillance for building internal is proposed for common areas (except toilets), Pantry, electrical
rooms, hub rooms, server rooms, open workstations and other service areas in main office building,
facility building, infrastructure complex, single men accommodation, service & ESS areas.
100% CCTV surveillance is proposed for outside areas as well as along the periphery/perimeter.
CCTV cameras shall be integrated with BMS & will be centrally monitored through the control room.
The system shall be IP based, comprising IP cameras, Server and Monitor. This system shall ensure
recording through Servers. Remote monitoring of each camera shall be possible.
Authorities shall be able to monitor different sites from one location. IP CCTV system shall be capable
such that any number of cameras can be connected via CAT 6A cables to switches and into the Network.
Each of the cameras shall have individual IP addresses and shall be accessed as per the network
parameters.
The storage shall be done on a network node, which may be remote to the site of installation. There
shall be a separate video streaming server and a separate storage server or a combination as per
requirement. The cameras, which can be connected in one system, shall be controlled using licenses.
Also with the Server Based systems, better graphic technologies shall be used to enhance the viewing
and archiving as required by the respective authority.
CCTV video footage storage capacity (at FHD resolution and min 15 FPS) shall be 30 days.
Complete VMS shall be provided for all cameras and shall have expandability for future cameras to be
added same time Node Matrix to be referred for min no of points to be provided.
Page 699 of 1358

Design Basis of CT – (Information and Communication Technology)
Networking is the art of connecting devices together using various technologies and protocols. By doing
so, these devices can communicate with each other, share resources, and work together seamlessly as
part of a larger network.
W HA T NET W O RK S D O .
A Computer Network allows devices to communicate with each other, enabling collaboration, data
exchange, and accessing shared resources.
W HA T IS C IA A ND W H Y T HIS IS R EQ U IR ED .
CIA stands for Confidentiality, Integrity, and Availability. It is a triad of principles that guides the
development and implementation of secure information systems. These principles are critical for
ensuring the protection of sensitive and valuable data, as well as maintaining the trust of stakeholders
who rely on these systems.
Confidentiality: Confidentiality refers to the protection of sensitive information from unauthorized

access or disclosure. This principle ensures that data is only accessible to authorized individuals who
have a legitimate need to access it.
Integrity: Integrity refers to the accuracy and consistency of information over time. This principle
ensures that data is not modified, corrupted, or deleted in an unauthorized manner.
Availability: Availability refers to the ability to access and use information when needed. This
principle ensures that systems and data are available to authorized individuals and can withstand
disruptions or attacks.
U S E O F ‘ C IA ’ M O D EL I N N ET WO RK I N G
The CIA triad (Confidentiality, Integrity, and Availability) is a fundamental concept in computer
networking that is used to ensure the security and reliability of networked systems.
Confidentiality: Ensuring that data is only accessible to authorized users and protected from
unauthorized access or interception. This can be achieved through encryption, access controls, and
secure communication protocols.
Integrity: Ensuring that data is accurate, complete, and unaltered during transmission or storage. This
can be achieved through checksums, digital signatures, and other data integrity measures.
Availability: Ensuring that network resources are accessible and operational when needed. This can be
achieved through redundancy, fault-tolerant systems, and disaster recovery planning.
Authentication: Verifying the identity of users, devices, and systems before granting access to network
resources. This can be achieved through passwords, biometrics, and two-factor authentication.
Page 700 of 1358

Authorization: Controlling what resources users and devices can access once they have been
authenticated. This can be achieved through access controls, role-based access control (RBAC), and
permissions.
Auditing and accountability: Monitoring and tracking network activity to identify security incidents
and enforce compliance with security policies. This can be achieved through logging, intrusion detection
systems (IDS), and security information and event management (SIEM) tools.
Non-repudiation: Ensuring that a user or system cannot deny their actions on the network. This can be
achieved through digital signatures, transaction logs, and audit trails.
W HA T IS I CT
ICT stands for Information and Communication Technology, which is a term used to describe the
technologies used to manage, process, and communicate information. ICT encompasses a wide range
of technologies, including hardware, software, networks, and telecommunications, that are used to
collect, store, process, and transmit data and information.
The ICT model is used to develop, implement, and manage information systems that support the
operations of organizations.
Equipment’s and Services that are covered by ICT model are:
Hardware: This includes all physical components of a computer system, such as the Cables and
Connectors, Computer and Servers, Wired and Wireless Networking Devices, Storage devices, Security
Devices.
Software: This includes all computer programs, applications, and operating systems that run on the
hardware.
Data: This refers to the information that is stored, processed, and transmitted by Computer Systems,
Telephony Systems, Audio Video Devices and IoT Devices.
Networks: This includes all the technologies, devices, and protocols that allow computers and other
devices to communicate with each other and share resources.
Services: This refers to the various IT services that are offered, such as email, messaging, collaboration,
cloud computing, and security.
People: This includes all the individuals who are involved in the design, development, deployment,
maintenance, and use of IT systems, including end-users, system administrators, and IT managers.
Processes: This refers to the various procedures, policies, and standards that are used to manage and
operate IT systems effectively and efficiently.
IC T D ES IG N R EQ U I RE M EN T S
Functionality: The solution must fulfil the functional requirements of the organization, such as meeting
business needs and facilitating workflow processes.
Page 701 of 1358

Scalability: The solution must be scalable to accommodate future growth and changes in the
organization.
Reliability: The solution must be reliable, with high availability and minimal downtime, to ensure that
the business processes are not disrupted.
Security: The solution must be designed with robust security measures to protect sensitive data and
systems from unauthorized access or attacks.
Performance: The solution must meet the performance requirements of the organization, such as
processing speed, data transfer rate, and response time.
Integration: The solution must be designed to integrate existing systems and infrastructure, and to
enable easy data exchange between different systems.
Usability: The solution must be user-friendly and easy to use, with clear and intuitive interfaces and
instructions.
Maintainability: The solution must be designed for easy maintenance, with clear documentation and
support resources, and easy-to-use tools for system management.
Cost-effectiveness: The solution must be cost-effective and provide a good return on investment for
the organization.
Compliance: The solution must comply with all relevant laws, regulations, and industry standards, such
as data protection and privacy laws, and information security standards.
BU IL D IN G NE T WO RK
Indian Guideline for ICT Infrastructure
The NBC 2016 (National Building Code of India – 2016 Vol. 2 - Part 8 / Section 6) Mentioned about ICT
Network and Installation Practices. As per the guideline there are key requirements what we must cover
before start.
Structured Cabling System - The NBC requires the use of structured cabling systems for all new
buildings, which should be designed to meet the requirements of the relevant standards, such as
TIA/EIA-568, ISO/IEC 11801, ANSI/TIA-862 etc.…
Horizontal and Backbone Cabling - The NBC specifies that horizontal and backbone cabling should be
installed in accordance with the location of workstations, telephones, printers, and other devices, and
should be terminated at patch panels or wall outlets.
Telecommunications and Equipment Rooms - The NBC mandates the installation of dedicated
telecommunications rooms in all buildings to house the equipment and cabling required for the ICT
network.
Redundancy and Security - The NBC recommends the use of redundancy in the ICT network to ensure
high availability and reliability and specifies that the network should be designed to provide adequate
security measures, such as firewalls, intrusion detection systems, and access controls.
Page 702 of 1358

Scalability and Energy Efficient – The NBC recommends that Network should be designed to
accommodate future growth and expansion and should be scalable to meet changing requirements.
The NBC also encourages the use of energy-efficient technologies in the ICT network to minimize power
consumption and reduce carbon footprint.
A RC H IT EC T U R E
NE T W O RK T O P O L O G Y – S T A R
Star topology is the most widely used topology in computer networks. It has several advantages over
other topologies, including:
In star topology, each device is connected to a central hub or switch, which makes it easy to add or
remove devices from the network without disrupting the rest of the network. Since each device is
connected to the hub or switch with its own cable, if one cable or device fails, it doesn't affect the rest
of the network.
If there is a problem with the network, it is easy to isolate and troubleshoot the issue because each
device is connected to the hub or switch. A star topology can easily be scaled up to accommodate more
devices by adding more switches or hubs to the network.
Pictorial Diagram of Star Topology
NE T W O RK L A Y ERS
Core Layer - The core layer is the backbone of a network,

responsible for providing high-speed connectivity and
reliable transport of data packets between various
segments of the network. It is typically designed to be
highly available, with redundant links and devices, and
optimized for fast, efficient routing and switching of
traffic.
Aggregation Layer - The aggregation layer is the middle layer in a hierarchical network design, which
aggregates network traffic from multiple access switches and provides connectivity to the core layer.
The primary function of the aggregation layer is to provide routing, filtering, and policy-based
connectivity to the core layer. It also provides access control and bandwidth management.
Page 703 of 1358

Access Layer - The access layer is the edge of the network where end devices such as Computers,
Printers, CCTV, Access Control, Wi-Fi and Phones connect to the network. It is responsible for providing
connectivity to these devices and enforcing security policies.
Pictorial Diagram of Network Layers
Requirement and plan The Core Network of Building will provide network connectivity across the Floors.
Hence the complete Network solution construed as heart of the ICT solution and would comprise of
WAN and LAN network including both Passive and Active Networking Components such as Optical Fiber
Cable, Unshielded / Shielded Twisted Pair Cabling, ITAM (Information Technology Asset Management),
NMS (Network
Management
System), Core Switch,
Aggregation Switches, Access
Switches (PoE/Non PoE) etc.
Our approach should be

followed for the Network Architecture with a 3 Tier model of Core, Aggregation, and Access Layer. The
network backbone shall be in the form of a Star with Mash topology connected to the CORE in 1+1
protection. Further sub rings should fan out from the distribution switches in the backbone ring covering
the major zones of the campus. The zone breakdown of complete campus shall be done based on the
total estimation of port requirements across various services of LAN, Voice, CCTV, Wi-Fi, Access etc. and
the distances. The Core switch shall be in 1+1 configuration and will be hosted in the main server at a
suitable site with distribution switch placed at required locations (as per port requirements and
distance-based planning) within the racks in the building. The complete network from Core to
Distribution to Access layer shall be on single mode fiber. Core to Distribution to Access shall be on 6
core fiber. Bundled fiber should be used across the campus in the backbone rings, sub-rings and from
distribution to access layer as well. This will ensure additional resiliency and protection in the network.
The core network shall comprise of two Layer-3/4 Gigabit Ethernet switches that are configured and
deployed via 40G interconnect. These switches are high density 10G SFP switches with a non-blocking
architecture.
The Distribution layer will comprise of a set of modular Layer-3 Ethernet switches configured to operate
in a redundant cluster to which all the uplinks from Access/Edge switches, Security Gateway and Server
zone switches Storage connect.
The Layer-2 Gigabit PoE switches (24-port) shall be deployed at this Edge/Access layer. These switches
shall be up linked to the redundant distribution switches using dual 10GbE / 1GbE optical links as
required as per design.
Page 704 of 1358

The below diagram provides the Network Architecture view. The number of distribution layers will be
limited to the requirement.
Fiber Sliding Lockable Drawer Shall have.
The 24 Port Configurable Fiber Sliding Lockable Drawer Should be mounted on a standard 19-inch rack
to provide connectivity for up to 24 fiber optic cables. It has a sliding drawer design that can be locked
in security purposes. The device can accommodate 6-Pak adapter plates and supports fiber cables with
diameters ranging from 5mm to 16mm.
The device Shall Have strain relief post that helps in securing the fiber cables with central members
going patch cords. It also has a rear access for incoming and outgoing backbone cables. The device
contains management rings that can be used to maintain the bend radius of the fiber cords and to
accommodate any excess cordage.
The device Should rugged steel construction that ensures its durability and longevity. Additionally, it has
a built-in label facility that can be used to identify each port and its respective connection.
In-Ceiling Fiber Enclosure Shall have
In-Ceiling Enclosure is a versatile product that can accommodate up to 48 copper ports or up to 96 fiber
splices or MTP/MPO fibers, as well as 1U of active equipment. It is specifically designed to support a
Zone Cabling infrastructure in a drop or suspended ceiling environment. The product features 19"
equipment mounting rails with a 5U capacity, along with an integral cable management plate that can
support incoming and outgoing cable bundles. The enclosure has eight cable entry knockouts, which
allows for flexible cable routing. Additionally, cable tie securing points are provided on the roof and side
walls of the enclosure to ensure efficient cable routing and slack management.
Outdoor loose tube armored optical cable.
outdoor loose tube armored optical cable Would be use in harsh environments. It contains Minimum
24 optical fiber in water-blocked loose tubes and solid polyethylene fillers, with a total of 6 elements
laid-up around a fiber-reinforced plastic (FRP) central strength member. The interstices are water-locked,
and the cable is taped, corrugated steel tape armored, and polyethylene overall sheathed for protection.
The core diameter at 1310nm is 9 ± 0.6 μm, the cladding diameter is 125 ± 0.7 μm, and the cladding
non-circularity is ≤ 1.0 μm. The core non-circularity is ≤6.0% and the core-cladding concentricity error is
≤0.6 μm. The coating diameter is 242 ± 5 μm and the maximum individual fiber PMD is ≤ 0.1ps/sqrtkm.
This cable is suitable for long distance transmission with minimal signal distortion.
6A U/FTP Cable Network cable Shall have Minimum.
The 6A U/FTP Cable is a high-performance networking cable designed to support high-speed data
applications such as 10-Gigabit Ethernet (10GBASE-T). It consists of four screened pairs and a drain wire,
which minimize alien crosstalk and provide superior electromagnetic interference (EMI) protection. The
cable's primary insulation is made of polyolefin, and it has a laminated aluminum screen and a PVC or
LSOH sheath type. The cable's nominal outer diameter is 7.2mm, and its NVP is 75-77%.
The electrical characteristics of the 6A U/FTP Cable include a capacitance of 40 pF/m nom. @1 KHz, a DC
resistance of 72 /Km max., a propagation delay of 514 + 36f1/2 nS/100m max @1-500 MHz, a
propagation delay skew of 45 nS/100 max @ 1-500 MHz, a mean impedance of 100 ± 6 @ 1-500 MHz, a
Page 705 of 1358

resistance unbalance of 2% max, and a coupling attenuation of 45dB min @30-100 MHz and 40-20 Log
(f/100) @ 100-500 MHz.
The Category 6A U/FTP Cable is intended for high-speed data applications up to 500MHz, including IEEE
802.3 10GBASE-T 10Gb/s, IEEE 802.3 1000GBASE-T 1Gb/s, TIA/EIA-854 1000BASE-TX 1Gb/s, and ATM
155Mb/s 155Mb/s. The cable can operate in a wide temperature range, with a storage temperature of -
20˚C to +75˚C and an operation temperature of -20˚C to +60˚C. It complies with commercial standards
such as ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-C.2 and ISO/IEC 11801 A1.1 and has been independently tested by ETL.
Shielded Jack Shall have Minimum.
6A Data Gate Shielded Jack Should be support high-speed data transmission up to 10GBASE-T. It
features a die-cast zinc alloy housing that provides excellent EMI protection and minimizes crosstalk,
ensuring reliable signal transmission. The jack also has a spring-loaded shutter that protects it from dust
and contaminants, and the shutter design ejects improperly seated patch cords. This feature ensures
that the jack is always ready for use and eliminates the need for manual intervention. The jack is dual
cooler coded for either 568A or 568B wiring schedules, making it easy to install and configure.
OM3 Multimode Patch Cord LC duplex Shall have Minimum.
OM3 Multimode Patch Cord LC duplex is a type of fiber optic cable used to transmit data over short
distances at high speeds. Should have outside diameter of 2.9mm x 6.0mm and a buffer diameter of
900μm. The cable is made up of zip cord, which consists of two parallel cords held together by a thin
plastic strip. The strength member is made of aramid yarn, which provides durability and strength to
the cable. The cable sheath material is LS0H, and the cable is graded FDDI Riser Rated OFNR.
The connector ferrule of the patch cord is made of zirconia, which is a type of ceramic material known
for its durability and resistance to wear. It has a retention strength of 100N, which ensures a secure
connection between the connector and the patch panel. The patch cord has a minimum bend radius of
30mm, which ensures that the cable is not damaged when bent around corners or obstacles.
The OM3 Multimode Patch Cord LC duplex has an operating temperature range of 10°C to 60°C, which
makes it suitable for use in a variety of environments. It has an insertion loss of 0.30dB and a bandwidth
of 2000MHz/km at 850nm. The attenuation at 850nm is less than 3.5dB/km, which means that the signal
loss is minimal over short distances. .
6A Shielded Patch Cord is a high-performance patch cable that supports 10GBASE-T transmission over
various size meters. It is also backward compatible with 10/100/1000BASE-T networks. The patch cord
is made of high-quality four pair 26 AWG stranded copper wire that is shielded to minimize alien
crosstalk and provide superior electromagnetic interference (EMI) protection.
The cable is terminated with RJ45 plugs that are gold plated to provide a reliable connection with low
insertion loss. The plugs are also shielded to provide additional protection against EMI. The patch cord
features anti-snag slim strain relief slip-on boots that provide easy and secure installation while reducing
cable stress and minimizing the risk of damage to the connectors.
The patch cord is available in a range of colours and lengths, making it easy to identify and manage
cables in a network installation. The cable meets the industry standards for transmission performance
and is rated for operating temperatures between -20°C to +60°C.
Page 706 of 1358

6A field termination plug Shall have Minimum.
6A field termination plug is designed to support 10GB networks and can easily be terminated using
parallel jaw pliers. It is compliant with TIA-568-C.2 Cat 6A MPTL standards and is also backward
compatible with C6/C5e MPTL. The plug is rated IP20 and is UL approved. It is ideal for wireless access
points and IP-enabled devices, premise network applications. This plug is suitable for the most
demanding Power over Ethernet (PoE) applications including IEEE 802.3bt from Type 1 to Type 4, and
CISCO UPoE+ HD Base-T PoH up to 100W. It is RP3 compliant as defined by EN 50174-2:2018, ISO/IEC
14763-2:2019, and AS/NZS 14763.2:2020.
outdoor Wi-Fi Module Shall have Minimum.
outdoor Wi-Fi device Shall have high-performance wireless connectivity in outdoor environments. This
device shall have a dual-radio aggregate frame rate of up to 2.98 Gbps, which is achieved by the
presence of two radios: a 5 GHz 4x4:4 radio and a 2.4 GHz 4x4:4 radio. These radios work together to
provide a combined dual-radio aggregate frame rate of 2.98 Gbps, with up to 2,402 Mbps in the 5 GHz
band and 574 Mbps in the 2.4 GHz band.
To ensure reliable and robust wireless connectivity, this device incorporates advanced technologies like
transmit beamforming and enhanced receive sensitivity. Transmit beamforming is a technique that
focuses the Wi-Fi signal on the direction of the client device, thereby improving the signal quality and
reducing interference. Enhanced receive sensitivity, on the other hand, improves the device's ability to
detect and receive weak signals, thereby improving the overall performance of the Wi-Fi network.
This outdoor Wi-Fi device is Must he withstand harsh outdoor environments Should be installed with
ruggedized enclosures that are weatherproof and resistant to dust, moisture, and extreme
temperatures.
Indoor wi-fi device Shall have Minimum.
The indoor wi-fi device supports both 802.11n and 802.11ac standards. It has a 2.4GHz radio with 2x2
MIMO and two spatial streams, as well as a 5GHz radio with 3x3 MIMO and three spatial streams, which
can operate in either SU-MIMO or MU-MIMO modes. The device features transmit beamforming
technology to improve the quality of the wireless signal, as well as maximal ratio combining and low-
end sensitivity improvements to improve reception quality. Time Domain Channel Smoothing helps to
reduce interference and increase throughput.
The device supports 20-, 40-, and 80-MHz channels, and has PHY data rates of up to 300 Mbps for
802.11n and 1300 Mbps for 802.11ac. Packet aggregation is supported with A-MPDU and A-MSDU, while
Cyclic Delay Diversity (CSD), Maximum Likelihood Demodulation (MLD), and Low-Density Parity Check
(LDPC)
Storage Management
Rack Mount NAS Should high-performance and reliable network-attached storage solution be having
enterprise-level applications. The device Should equipped with two 10GbE SFP+ Smart NIC ports with
RDMA boost, which allows for fast and reliable data transfer.
Page 707 of 1358

The device Shall support up to 128 GB DDR4 ECC memory, providing high-speed processing power and
ensuring data integrity. Additionally, the device features dual redundant power supplies, which ensures
that the device can continue to operate even in the event of a power failure.
Storage should be capable of supporting storage for virtualization and can natively host independent
virtual machines and containerized apps. This makes the device a versatile and flexible solution that can
meet a range of different storage and computing requirements.
The device is equipped with twelve 3.5-inch SATA 6Gb/s drive bays, providing ample storage capacity for
large data sets. It also comes with six 2.5-inch SATA 6Gb/s SSD slots, which can be used for high-speed
storage or caching.
The device supports 10GbE and four 2.5GbE connectivity, allowing for fast data transfer and seamless
integration with other network devices. Additionally, the device features an Intel Xeon D-1622 quad-core
processor, which provides high-speed processing power and ensures smooth operation even under
heavy workloads.
Core Shall have minimum.
The Core Should high-performance network switches and support a range of different applications
including Data, CCTV, Access Control, AV, Wi-Fi___33, and IP Telephony.
The switches come equipped with a range of advanced features such as flow control, port mirroring,
MAC address filtering, IPv6 support, IP address filtering, and Stacking Technology, which allows for
seamless management and control of multiple switches.
The switches also support slow, Spanning Tree Protocol (STP), Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP),
Virtual Route Redundancy Protocol (VRRP), and Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP). These features
ensure high network availability, redundancy, and resilience.
The switches shall equip with DHCP snooping, Access Control List (ACL) support, Quality of Service (QoS),
Equal-Cost Multipath (ECMP), and IPv4 support. These features provide enhanced security, traffic
management, and efficient routing capabilities.
The switches support DHCP relay, Class of Service (CoS), 4MB packet buffer, GARP VLAN Registration
Protocol (GVRP), Err Disable Recovery, These features allow for efficient network management and
administration.
Additionally, the switches should be equipped with CPU protection, IP source guard, ARP inspection,
Network Timing Protocol (NTP), Loop Guard, Smart Connect, and Guest VLAN. These features provide
enhanced security, reliability, and network performance.
Distribution POE Shall have Minimum.
Distribution switches Shall have flow control, VLAN support, IGMP snooping, Syslog support, port
mirroring, Weighted Round Robin (WRR) queuing, MAC address filtering, Broadcast Storm Control, IPv6
Page 708 of 1358

support, URL filtering, IP address filtering, Multicast Storm Control, firmware upgradable, Weighted Fair
Queuing (WFQ), Stacking Technology, sFlow, Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) support, Rapid Spanning Tree
Protocol (RSTP) support, Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP) support, DHCP snooping, Access
Control List (ACL) support, Quality of Service (QoS), MLD snooping, STP Root Guard, IPv4 support, DHCP
relay, Port Security, IP-MAC binding,
SNMP trap, DHCP client, Energy Efficient Ethernet, Management Information Base (MIB), Multicast VLAN
Registration (MVR), dual firmware images, Strict Priority Queuing (SPQ), Neighbour Discovery Protocol
(NDP), loop prevention, NTP time synchronization, port isolation, Class of Service (CoS), tagged VLAN,
Generic VLAN Registration Protocol (GVRP), IGMP proxy, Differs Code Point (DSCP) support, 1.5MB
packet buffer, Err Disable Recovery, IGMP filtering, IGMP throttling, Protocol-based VLANs support, CPU
protection, IP source guard, ARP inspection, Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP), VLAN filtering,
and more.
switches Should provide efficient network management, advanced security features, and support for
various networking protocols and applications. The switches are also designed to be highly scalable and
flexible, allowing for easy integration into Star network topologies.
Data Distribution Shall have minimum.
Data Distribution Switches should be Capable of handling the distribution of data within a network.
capabilities that enable them to efficiently manage network traffic and ensure that data is transmitted
reliably and securely. Switches Must be supported following.
Flow control: This feature enables the switch to regulate the flow of data between devices on the
network, helping to prevent congestion and ensure that data is transmitted efficiently. LAN support:
This allows the switch to segment the network into virtual LANs, which can help to improve security and
simplify network management.
IGMP snooping: This feature enables the switch to monitor and manage multicast traffic, which can help
to reduce unnecessary network traffic and improve performance. Syslog support: This allows the switch
to send system logs to a syslog server, which can help to improve troubleshooting and network
management.
Port mirroring: This enables the switch to copy traffic from one port to another, which can be useful for
monitoring network traffic or troubleshooting network issues. Weighted Round Robin (WRR) queuing:
This feature enables the switch to prioritize traffic based on its importance, helping to ensure that critical
traffic is given priority over less important traffic.
MAC address filtering: This allows the switch to restrict access to the network based on MAC addresses,
helping to improve security. Broadcast Storm Control: This feature helps to prevent the switch from
being overwhelmed by excessive broadcast traffic, which can impact network performance.
IPv6 support: This enables the switch to support the latest version of the Internet Protocol, which is
increasingly being used in modern networks.URL filtering: This allows the switch to restrict access to
certain URLs or websites, helping to improve security.
IP address filtering: This enables the switch to restrict access to the network based on IP addresses,
helping to improve security. Multicast Storm Control: This feature helps to prevent excessive multicast
traffic from impacting network performance.
Page 709 of 1358

Firmware upgradable: This allows the switch to be upgraded with new firmware as needed, helping to
ensure that it remains up to date and secure. Weighted Fair Queuing (WFQ): This feature enables the
switch to allocate bandwidth fairly among different traffic flows, helping to ensure that all traffic is given
fair access to network resources.
Stacking Technology: This allows multiple switches to be connected to create a single, logical switch,
which can help to simplify network management. Flow: This enables the switch to collect and analyse
traffic data, which can be useful for troubleshooting and performance monitoring.
Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) support: This allows the switch to prevent loops in the network, which can
cause network disruptions. Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) support: This provides faster
convergence times than STP, which can help to minimize network downtime.
Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP) support: This enables the switch to support multiple spanning
tree instances, which can help to improve network performance and reliability. DHCP snooping: This
allows the switch to monitor DHCP traffic and prevent unauthorized DHCP servers from being
introduced on the network.
Access Control List (ACL) support: This enables the switch to restrict access to the network based on a
variety of criteria, including IP addresses, MAC addresses, and protocols. Quality of Service (QoS): This
allows the switch to prioritize certain types of traffic over others, helping to ensure that critical traffic is
given priority. LD snooping: This enables the switch to manage multicast traffic for IPv6 networks. STP
Root Guard: This helps to prevent switches from becoming the root bridge in the network, which can
cause network disruptions. DHCP relay: This allows the switch to forward DHCP requests to a DHCP
server, which can be.
Equipment Rack Shall have Minimum.
A high-density closed rack used for housing servers, networking devices, and other IT equipment. This
specific rack has a height of 42U and conforms to the DIN 41494 or equivalent EIA/ISO/EN/CEA standard.
It features adjustable mounting depth with 4 no adjustable 19" verticals with punched 10mm square
holes and a universal 12.7mm-15.875mm-15.875mm alternating hole pattern that offers greater
mounting flexibility and maximizes usable mounting space. The rack also has numbered U positions
and universal 25mm pitch holes for ETSI standard racks.
The rack should be 100% compatible with all equipment conforming to DIN 41494 (general industrial
standard for equipment) and has a powder-coated finish with a seven-tank pre-treatment process that
meets the ASTM standard.
The rack also includes grounding and bonding options, as well as a fan module mount provision on top.
It is a high-density closed rack, which means that it is designed to provide a high level of security and
protection for the IT equipment housed inside.
NMS
Network Management System (NMS) network administrators and monitor, manage, and troubleshoot
their network infrastructure. A key functionality of an NMS is network performance monitoring, which
provides real-time and historical data on network bandwidth usage, packet loss rate, interface error rate,
high CPU or memory utilization, number of TCP connections, and aggregate throughput of core routers.
Page 710 of 1358

In addition to performance monitoring, an NMS should also monitor key performance indicators (KPIs)
to measure service level agreements (SLAs). includes metrics such as availability, response time, and
network latency. Administrators can set thresholds for these KPIs and receive alerts when they are
exceeded, allowing them to proactively identify and remediate issues before they cause downtime or
service degradation.
Other key functionalities of an NMS include fault management, configuration management, and security
management. Fault management involves detecting and resolving network faults such as device failures,
link failures, and service disruptions. Configuration management involves tracking and managing
network devices and their configurations, ensuring that they are up-to-date and compliant with
organizational policies. Security management involves monitoring the network for security threats and
vulnerabilities and implementing security policies to protect against them.
Server
Server Shall have two CPUs (Central Processing Units) with a thermal heatsink designed to manage a
maximum power of 180 watts. The server also has 16GB RDIMM (Registered Dual In-Line Memory
Module) running at a speed of 3200MT/s with dual rank support. The server has a Boot Optimized
Storage Solution (BOSS) controller card with one M.2 stick of 480GB capacity for storage. The server also
has a PERC H745 front load FH (Full Height) for hard drive connectivity.
For hard drive storage, the server includes two 1.2TB SAS (Serial Attached SCSI) hard drives with 12Gbps
(Gigabits per second) transfer speed and a 10k (10,000 rotations per minute) spin rate. The server also
includes advanced system configuration settings and performance BIOS settings with a UEFI BIOS Boot
Mode with GPT Partition.
The server has six standard fans and a dual, hot-plug, fully redundant power supply with 800W mixed
mode power output. The server includes two power cords (Jumper Cord - C13/C14, 2M, 250V, 10A India
BIS) and a PCIe (Peripheral Component Interconnect Express) Riser with a Riser Config 2 that has four
x8 slots of half-length.
The server also includes an iDRAC9 (Integrated Dell Remote Access Controller) Enterprise 15G for
embedded systems management with multi-platform support. For network connectivity, the server has
a Broadcom 57414 dual-port 10/25GbE (Gigabit Ethernet) SFP28 (Small Form-factor Pluggable 28)
network adapter with OCP (Open Compute Project) NIC (Network Interface Card) 3.0. The server also
includes an additional network adapter with a Broadcom 5719 quad-port 1GbE BASE-T (Bridged
Accessible Server Extension-Transmission) adapter with PCIe full height support.
The server is also compatible with VSAN (Virtual Storage Area Network) licenses, which can be brought
separately by the user.
Data Servers
data server Should have 4 * 32GB RDIMM RAM modules operating at 3200MT/s with dual rank. It also
has two 1.2TB SAS hard drives with a speed of 12Gbps and a size of 2.5 inches with a 3.5-inch HYB carrier.
The power supply is dual, hot-plug, and non-redundant with a power capacity of 1400W. The server
comes with two jumper cords with C13/C14 connectors and a length of 4 meters and a voltage rating of
250V and a current rating of 10A according to India BIS standards.
Page 711 of 1358

It also has a riser configuration of 0, half-length, low profile with 5x16 + 1x4 slots. The server is equipped
with Open Manage Enterprise Advanced and iDRAC9 Enterprise 15G. For network connectivity, the
server has Ethernet Mezzanine Adapters with Broadcom 57412 Dual Port 10GbE SFP+ and OCP NIC 3.0.
The server also has a BOSS-S2 controller card with two M.2 240GB drives with RAID 1 configuration. The
server comes with ready rails sliding rails with cable management arm, an internal optical drive that can
read and write DVD+/-RW discs,
Firewall
The firewall, virtual wire (transparent mode). It shall also support several routing protocols, including
OSPFv2/v3 with graceful restart, BGP with graceful restart, RIP, static routing, Policy-based forwarding,
and Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet (PPPoE). For multicast, it supports PIM-SM, PIM-SSM, IGMP v1,
v2, and v3.
The firewall also includes IPsec VPN capabilities, supporting key exchange with manual key, IKEv1 and
IKEv2 (pre-shared key, certificate-based authentication). Encryption options include 3DES, AES (128-bit,
192-bit, 256-bit), while authentication options include MD5, SHA-1, SHA-256, SHA-384, SHA-512.
In terms of storage capacity, the firewall has 128 GB eMMC. The input voltage and frequency are 100-
240 VAC (50–60 Hz), and it has safety certifications such as cTUVus, CB. For EMI, it meets FCC Class B, CE
Class B, VCCI Class B standards. The operating temperature range is from 32°F to 104°F (0°C to 40°C),
and the non-operating temperature range is from -4°F to 158°F (-20°C to 70°C). Finally, the firewall uses
passive cooling.
Desktop
The internal M.2 SSD is used as the boot drive for the computer and has a capacity of 512 GB. The
computer also has Dual SATA Flex bay for connecting multiple HDDs/SSDs and supports RAID
configurations. There is no SATA RAID available in this system.
In addition, there Should be a front PCIe NVMe SSD slot for high-speed storage. The system Supplied
with ProSupport, which is a customer support service provided by the manufacturer. The system is also
equipped with a system power cord suitable for use in India with a voltage rating of 250V and a current
rating of 16A.
IP-PBX
A Hybrid IP PBX Provide communication system that combines traditional analog telephone lines with
digital VoIP (Voice over Internet Protocol) technology. This allows users to make and receive calls using
either analog or digital connections.
A Hybrid IP PBX Shall have functions, such as call routing, call queuing, call forwarding, voicemail,
conferencing, and more. It can support many extensions and can be integrated with other
communication systems, such as video conferencing, instant messaging, and email.
In addition to its communication features, a Hybrid IP PBX also offers advanced management tools for
administrators to manage users, extensions, and call routing. This includes the ability to set up auto-
attendants, create call groups, and manage call center queues.
Page 712 of 1358

A Hybrid IP PBX system is a communication system that combines traditional analog telephony with
IP-based technology. The main control panel of the system is the central hub that connects and
manages all the components of the system. The system should be equipped with a full package of
hospitality software, along with a gateway bridge for third-party property management software. The
system should be scalable up to 1296 analog ports and 2000 IP users. The system should have
preloaded 8 expansion slots that can be scaled up to 27 slots as per the requirement.
Main Control Panel
The system should have redundancy features in place to ensure that the system remains operational in
case of hardware or software failure. Additional hardware and software should be available to provide
redundancy. The analog extension cards should be included to enable SIP functionality and voice mail.
The system should support VOIP (SIP) trunks with up to 99 GSM/3G trunks, up to 64 CO ports, up to 128
VOIP (VOCODER) channels, up to 248 ISDN T1/E1 PRI channels, up to 1200 Ch. (24 Ports) ISDN BRI
channels, up to 64 Ch. (32 Ports) IP subscribers, up to 2000 digital subscribers, up to 128 analog
subscribers, and up to 1296 voice mail channels.
The power supply of the system should be 48VDC +20% to -15%, and the system should have
redundancy in place to ensure uninterrupted power supply. The system should also have a hot-swap
feature for expansion cards, enabling the user to add or remove cards while the system is running.
The control panel should have a hot redundancy feature for up to 1296 analog ports and 2000 pure IP
ports. All the required port opening licenses should be available from day one to ensure smooth
operation of the system.
Overall, the Hybrid IP PBX system should be reliable, scalable, and equipped with redundancy features
to ensure uninterrupted communication. It should also have all the necessary features and software to
cater to the needs of the hospitality.
Page 713 of 1358

System Should Support Following
Class 1 Instrument Shall have Minimum.
Hybrid IP-PBX pure IP instruments Shall have various features such as abbreviated dialing, call pick up,
and internal call restriction, call hold, mute, and DND, one-touch transfer, and hotline, redial, auto call
back, and auto answer. The system also includes call forward, call waiting, and call transfer, 3-way
conferencing, and conference multi-party, emergency call, and conferencing. The codec used in the
system includes G.722, G.711(A/µ), G.729, G.726, and G.723 with DTMF support for in-band, out-of-band
(RFC 2833), and SIP INFO. The full-duplex hands-free speakerphone with AEC, VAD, CNG, AEC, AJB, and
AGC Should also include in the system for better communication experience.
Class 2 Instrument Shall have Minimum.
A business-class pure IP instrument in a hybrid IP PBX system should be able to provide an efficient and
high-quality communication experience. Automatic Echo Cancellation (AEC) and Automatic Gain Control
(AGC) are essential features to provide crystal clear voice. The instrument should have an LCD graphical
display, context-sensitive keys, direct station selection (DSS) keys, a 32-key expansion module, headset
connectivity, and high-quality full-duplex speakerphone with high-definition audio quality.
It should also have multiple call line appearance, context-sensitive soft keys, busy lamp field, voice mail,
speed dial, and corporate directory. Full-duplex hands-free speakerphone with AEC, VAD, CNG, AEC, AJB,
AGC codecs, such as G.711(A/μ), G.722, G.723, G.729, iLBC, should be supported.
Overall, a business-class pure IP instrument in a hybrid IP PBX system should provide an efficient and
high-quality communication experience with essential features like AEC and AGC, LCD graphical display,
direct station selection keys, high-definition audio quality, multiple call line appearance, busy lamp field,
voice mail, speed dial, and corporate directory.
An access control system is a security solution that restricts and manages entry to a physical space or
digital system. It typically involves multiple components, including credentials, readers, control panels,
Page 714 of 1358

software, and locking mechanisms. The system can use a variety of methods to authenticate users, such
as face recognition, biometric scanners, and magnetic door locks.
With a master software access management software, the system can be centrally managed and
monitored. The software can also include hospitality features for hotels and other guest-oriented
environments, such as granting temporary access to guests, managing access levels for employees, and
generating audit trails.
Web interface access management software supports a large number of users and doors, making it
suitable for larger organizations. The software can offer features like online monitoring, lockdown,
Antipas back, event stream, roll call, and limited occupancy, which enhance the security and
management capabilities of the system.
Application Brief
System Should have Easier system operation with minimal training access control system should be
easy to operate, with a user-friendly interface that requires minimal training for users to understand
how to use it. This ensures that authorized personnel can access the secured areas without any
hindrances or delays.
Stringent access control policy For highly secured areas The access control system should have a strict
policy in place that governs access to highly secured areas. This policy should ensure that only
authorized personnel are allowed access to these areas.
Integration with video surveillance and alarm system control system should be integrated with video
surveillance and alarm systems to provide a comprehensive security solution. This integration allows
for real-time monitoring and detection of any unauthorized access attempts.
Easy operation with a complete visitor management system means that the access control system
should have a user-friendly interface that requires minimal training. Here are some features that can
ensure easy operation with a complete visitor management system:
Intuitive GUI to require minimal training: The access control system should have an intuitive graphical
user interface (GUI) that requires minimal training for users to understand how to operate it. This
ensures that authorized personnel can easily manage visitors and their access without any delays or
difficulties.
Manages up to 128 access groups and 1,000 access readers: The access control system should have the
ability to manage up to 128 access groups and 1,000 access readers, making it easy to assign access
levels and permissions for visitors. This feature ensures that visitors are granted access to the
appropriate areas within the premises.
Full integration support with existing visitor management software and badging applications The access
control system should offer full integration support with existing visitor management software if
Needed and badging applications. This ensures that visitor information is accurately captured and
stored, and badges can be easily printed for visitors to wear.
Extensive audit trail reporting: The access control system should have an extensive audit trail reporting
feature that captures all access attempts and visitor activities. This ensures that any unauthorized access
Page 715 of 1358

attempts or security breaches are immediately detected and reported, allowing for prompt action to be
taken.
Alarm and alert function during out-of-office hours and for secured areas: The access control system
should have an alarm and alert function that triggers during out-of-office hours and for secured areas.
This ensures that any unauthorized access attempts are immediately detected, and appropriate action
can be taken.
Choice of credentials including biometrics and smartphones: The access control system should have
variety of credentials for users to choose from, including biometrics and smartphones. This allows users
to choose the credential that best suits their needs and preferences.
Lower total cost of ownership over time: The access control system should have a lower total cost of
ownership over time, with minimal maintenance and upgrade costs. This ensures that the system
remains cost-effective in the long run.
Typical Layout of Access Control System
Elevator access control is a security that allows for the restriction of access to certain floors within a
building using an access control system. Here are some features that can describe elevator access
control:
Page 716 of 1358

Fully configurable elevator access control The access control system should have a module that provides
fully configurable elevator access control. This ensures that access to the elevator is restricted to
authorized personnel only.
Controls up to 60 floors per elevator unit. The elevator access control system should have the ability to
control up to 60 floors per elevator unit. This ensures that access to the entire building can be effectively
restricted.
Choice of credentials including fingerprint, RF cards (125kHz, 13.56MHz) and mobile: The access control
system should offer a choice of credentials including fingerprint, RF cards (125kHz, 13.56MHz), and
mobile. This ensures that authorized.
Biometric access control shall have Program with a person's unique physical characteristics, such as
their fingerprints or facial features, to verify their identity and grant access to secured areas. Here are
some features that can describe biometric access control for highly secured areas:
System Should have Multi-factor authentication with any combination of fingerprint, face, RF card
and/or PIN: Biometric access control systems for highly secured areas should offer multi-factor
authentication with any combination of fingerprint, face, RF card and/or PIN. This ensures that only
authorized personnel with the right combination of credentials can access the secured area.
System Should have Best in Class fingerprint and facial recognition technologies to ensures that the
system can accurately identify and verify authorized personnel, even in high-stress situations or adverse
conditions.
Flexibility in system design differentiating authentication methods from the strict high-security access
points to public areas: The biometric access control system should offer flexibility in system design,
allowing for differentiation in authentication methods between strict high-security access points and
public areas. This ensures that the system can be customized to meet the unique security needs of
different areas within the building.
System Shall have Integrated with Mobile identification and biometric access control to provide
enhanced security and convenience for access control systems. Following Should be Minimum
User should have any of Following During or Post Installation
Mobile credential support (NFC, BLE): Mobile identification technology provides support for mobile
credentials using Near Field Communication (NFC) and Bluetooth Low Energy (BLE) technologies. This
allows authorized personnel to access secured areas using their smartphones or other mobile devices.
Biometrics: fingerprint, face: Biometric identification provides an additional layer of security by using
unique physical characteristics, such as fingerprints or facial features, to verify the identity of authorized
personnel.
125kHz cards: EM, HID Prox: The access control system should support 125kHz cards, such as EM and
HID Prox cards. These are commonly used proximity cards that allow authorized personnel to access
secured areas.
Page 717 of 1358

13.56MHz: MIFARE, DESFire, Felica: The access control system should support 13.56MHz cards, such as
MIFARE, DESFire, and Felica. These are high-frequency contactless smart cards that provide enhanced
security features, including encryption and mutual authentication.
PIN: The access control system should provide support for PINs, which can be used in combination with
other credentials, such as mobile credentials, biometrics, and proximity cards, to verify the identity of
authorized personnel.
System Shall have Option for Video surveillance integration of access control systems that
enhances the security and safety of the building and its occupants. some Required and Integrated
features that can describe video surveillance integration:
Video surveillance integration should provide two-way integration between the access control system
and the video surveillance system. This ensures that the video footage can be accessed and controlled
from the access control system, and that access events can be delivered to the video management
system (VMS).
Video footage stored on Access Control server: The access control system should store the video footage
on the Access Control server, allowing authorized personnel to access the footage and monitor access
events.
The access control system should deliver real-time video footage to administrators when pre-defined
events occur, such as unauthorized access attempts or alarm events. This allows administrators to
quickly respond to security threats and take appropriate action.
Full SDK and API support to enhance seamless integration to your existing video security systems: The
access control system should provide full software development kit (SDK) and application programming
interface (API) support, allowing for seamless integration with existing video security systems. This
ensures that the access control system can be customized to meet the unique needs of the building and
its occupants.
In a shared office environment, where multiple tenants share the same building or office space,
System Should distributed topology for access control can provide enhanced scalability, flexibility, and
efficiency. Here are some features that can describe a distributed topology for a shared office
environment. A distributed topology eliminates the need for complex cabling installations over
partitions, walls, or ceilings.
Less cabling and intelligent readers to maximize scalability over facility expansion and unoccupied
sections: A distributed topology uses intelligent readers that are connected through a network, reducing
the amount of cabling required for installation. This allows for more scalability and flexibility over facility
expansion and unoccupied sections.
Fully configurable access zones, user privileges, access groups: A distributed topology allows for fully
configurable access zones, user privileges, and access groups, providing enhanced control and flexibility
over access permissions. This allows User to customized access control the System Post installation by
them self.
System Must be Integrated With Fire alarm and APB configuration of elevator access control systems
For enhanced safety and security in emergency situations. With fire alarm and APB configuration,
elevator access can be quickly and efficiently controlled to prevent unauthorized access, evacuate
Page 718 of 1358

occupants safely, and ensure the safety of the building and its occupants. Flexible configuration options
allow for customized responses to emergency situations, providing tailored solutions that meet the
unique needs of each building and its occupants.
System Should Integrate For Day First with Fire alarm and APB (All-Points Bulletin) configuration is an
important feature of elevator access control systems Shall enhanced safety and security in emergency
situations.
Fire alarm configurable: The elevator access control system should be able to receive and respond to
fire alarm signals from the building's fire detection system. In case of a fire, the elevator can be
controlled to prevent unauthorized access, evacuate occupants safely, and ensure the safety of the
building and its occupants.
APB configurable In emergency situations, such as a lockdown or an active shooter situation, the
elevator access control system should be able to receive and respond to APB signals from the building's
security system. This allows for quick and efficient control of elevator access and movement, preventing
unauthorized access and ensuring the safety of the building and its occupants.
Flexible configuration options The elevator access control system should Have flexible configuration
options, allowing for customized responses to fire alarm and APB signals. This ensures that the access
control system can be tailored to meet the unique needs of each building and its occupants.
Access control terminal
Access control terminal Should have a range of authentication methods, including face recognition,
QR/barcode, Multiclass SE, and dual RFID (125kHz EM, HID Prox & 13.56Mhz MIFARE, MIFARE Plus,
DESFire/EV1, FeliCa, iCLASS SE/SR/Seos, NFC). The device is built to withstand tough environments, with
an IP65 rating for water and dust resistance and an IK06 rating for impact resistance. It features a 5.5"
IPS LCD display with a capacitive touchscreen for ease of use. The terminal uses a Fusion matching
principle of visual and infrared camera to achieve high accuracy in face recognition. It supports OSDP
Ver 2, and features mask detection and compatibility with a variety of masks, including N95, 3-ply mask,
Page 719 of 1358

and fabric mask. The device can store up to 50,000 users' faces in 1:N mode, and supports 50,000 image
logs and 50,00,000 text logs,
Mullion type RF card reader
mullion type RF card reader should highly durable and versatile for outdoor use. It features an IP67
rating for water and dust resistance, and an IK08 rating for impact resistance. The device supports dual
RFID (125kHz EM & 13.56Mhz MIFARE, MIFARE Plus, DESFire/EV1, FeliCa), NFC, and BLE to read mobile
credentials, making it a highly flexible solution for various access control scenarios. It supports up to
2,00,000 users and 10,00,000 event logs, and features a 1 GHz CPU, 4 GB Flash + 64 MB RAM memory,
and support for Ethernet, PoE, RS 485 with OSDP, and Wiegand IN/OUT. It also features a robust relay
with a minimum of 5,00,000 operations, exit reader, exit switch, door sense, tamper detection, and a
vandal-proof IK08 rating. The device Should be slim mullion with a maximum width of 50mm and is
certified with CE, FCC, RoHS, SIG, and BIS,
Secure I/O Expansion Module
Secure I/O Expansion Module compatible with readers and Core Station secure I/O modules. Shall have
a cortex M3 72MHz CPU, 128KB flash and 20KB RAM. device Should have two inputs and one output,
as well as support for a multi-colour LED. It also supports Ethernet connectivity and one channel RS485
with OSDP, as well as one channel Wiegand IN/OUT. The device is UL certified and has received
approvals for CE, FCC, KC and RoHS. With this expansion module, users can expand the capabilities of
access control systems, and manage control additional inputs and outputs Post installation.
Page 720 of 1358

Software with License
System Should Supplied and Integrate with OEM,s Latest Version of Software Edition with S/W License
For web-based security platform and Provide robust management of access control and time
attendance systems. System Should be Capable to manage up to 1000 doors across multiple locations.
software Should equipped with advanced access control features, such as user management, device
management, door management, elevator management, and zone management. The zone
management feature includes anti-pass back, fire alarm, schedule lock, schedule unlock, intrusion alarm,
interlock, and muster zone. The software shall have streamline operations and increase security For
real-time information Of user activity and door access. The web-based interface Shall provide easy
access to the system from any computer or mobile device. Additionally, the software offers extensive
reporting capabilities, allowing users to generate custom reports on user activity, door access, and time
attendance. The software is designed to integrate with a wide range of access control devices, including
biometric readers, RF card readers, and mobile credentials, making it a flexible and scalable For Group
8 Building Blocks
System and Software Should Support Wire free Handheld Battery-Operated Reader For secure
standalone reader that operates on battery power, for use in areas where cabling is difficult. During
Installation It Should embedded with RF (Mifare / Mifare Desfire EV2 / Mifare Ultralight) + BLE + NFC
credentials, ensuring compatibility 3rd party if Needed.
reader Should Support clutch mechanism to supports door thicknesses ranging from 32mm to 120mm,
along with a mechanical key cylinder for emergency access and a manual thumb-turn for privacy control.
It also supports the svn platform for data privacy.
The battery life of this reader Should be up to 60,000 door openings and Can be operate in temperatures
ranging from +5 to +50 degrees Celsius without condensation. With its advanced security features and
ease of use.
portable programmable device
portable programmable device for enables the configuration of wire-free readers and provides
emergency access. and allows for convenient on-site programming of access control systems and
backups of essential data. The devices should be portability and allows user to easy transport and usage
in remote locations, ensuring that technicians can easily configure the system and provide emergency
access in case of a problem. programmable device enables the creation and modification of user profiles,
access rights, schedules, and other system settings. Additionally, it can store configurations and data
backups, which can be easily transferred between devices for system restoration.
Encoder For credentials assignment
Encoder for credentials assignment Should allow user to program and personalize credentials for an
access control system. These credentials can be anything from traditional RFID cards to biometric
information like fingerprints or facial recognition data. The encoder typically connects to a computer or
a network and is used to encode the credentials with specific access permissions for each user. Once
encoded, the credentials can be distributed to the users who need them, such as employees or tenants,
and used to gain access to the areas they are authorized to enter. The encoder may also be used for
data backup, so that in case of any system failure, the encoded credentials Should be easily retrieved
and restored. The encoder is an essential tool for managing access control systems and ensuring the
security of a facility of All Group 8 Building.
Page 721 of 1358

Access management software
Access management software is a web-based platform that provides advanced security features to
manage access control systems. Some key points about access management software shall provide.
supports many users and doors, typically ranging from a few hundred to several million. And provide
such as user management, device management, and door management. With advanced access control
functions such as anti-pass back, schedule lock, schedule unlock, intrusion alarm, interlock, and muster
zone management.
Software Should have possibility to creation of access groups, which enable administrators to assign
different access levels to different users based on their roles and provides real-time monitoring of
access control systems, allowing administrators to track events, alarms, and other system activities.
It offers reporting features, which enable administrators to generate various reports such as attendance
reports, access control reports, and event reports.
Following is the Required and Integrated / Program
• Web Interface: The software should have a web-based interface for easy accessibility from any
device with internet access.
• Access Management: It should be capable of managing up to 4000000 users and 64000 doors
with unlimited access levels, including customized access schedules and access groups.
• Hospitality Management: The software should have hospitality features such as room status
monitoring, check-in and check-out, room access control, and guest profile management.
• Online Monitoring: It should have real-time online monitoring of access events, alarms, and
system status, allowing for quick response to any security incidents.
• Lockdown: The software should have a lockdown feature that can be activated in case of an
emergency to restrict access to certain areas or the entire building.
• Anti-pass back: It should be capable of implementing anti-pass back measures to prevent
unauthorized entry and exit.
• Event Stream: The software should have an event stream feature that provides a detailed log of
all access events.
• Roll Call: The roll call feature enables the system to identify the location of people quickly and
accurately in case of an emergency.
• Limited Occupancy: The software should be able to limit the number of people in a particular
area to comply with safety regulations.
Page 722 of 1358

Design Basis of Audio-Visual System
The purpose of documenting is to develop a state-of-the-art high-end hybrid classroom and ensure that
the design is thoroughly planned, implemented, and evaluated to provide an advanced and seamless
learning experience for both in-person and remote students. Documentation is essential for the
successful implementation of this hybrid classroom design, and it can help ensure that the design meets
the intended objectives and goals. Here are some of the purposes of documenting the hybrid classroom
design:
Planning and Coordination: Documenting the hybrid classroom design can help plan and coordinate the
design and implementation process. A detailed design document can provide a clear overview of the
proposed design, including the equipment and technologies to be used, the integration of the systems,
and the expected outcomes.
Resource Allocation: Documenting of the hybrid classroom design can help allocate resources effectively
and efficiently. A detailed design document can help identify the necessary equipment, technologies,
and User requirement for the implementation process. This information can help ensure that the
necessary resources are available and allocated appropriately.
Implementation and Evaluation: hybrid classroom design can help ensure that the implementation
process is consistent with the design objectives and goals. A detailed design document can help guide
the installation and configuration of the equipment and technologies. It can also provide a framework
for evaluating the design's effectiveness in achieving its intended outcomes.
Communication and Collaboration: hybrid classroom design can help facilitate communication and
collaboration among the design team members. A detailed design document can provide a common
understanding of the design objectives, goals, and implementation process. It can also help ensure that
all team members are on the same page and working towards the same objectives.
Maintenance and Upgrades: hybrid classroom design can help facilitate the maintenance and upgrades
of the system. A detailed design document can provide information on the equipment, technologies,
and configuration of the system. This information can help ensure that any upgrades or maintenance
activities are consistent with the original design and do not compromise the system's effectiveness.
In conclusion, documenting the hybrid classroom design is essential for ensuring the successful
implementation of a state-of-the-art high-end hybrid classroom. It can help plan and coordinate the
design, allocate resources, guide the implementation process, facilitate communication and
collaboration, and support the maintenance and upgrades of the system. Ultimately, documenting the
design can help ensure that the hybrid classroom provides an advanced and seamless learning
experience for both in-person and remote students.
Page 723 of 1358

Basic Video layout
Basic Video layout
Page 724 of 1358

System Design Overview
A hybrid classroom design incorporating the following equipment can help to facilitate seamless
learning experiences for both in-person and remote students:
Classroom should have a Programmable touch panel control system that allows users to manage
various classroom technologies, including audio, video, and other multimedia devices. The touch panel
can be used to switch between in-person and remote learning modes, control audio and video sources,
and manage other classroom technology. Along with a three-input switcher that can be used to connect
and manage multiple audio and video sources. This switcher can be used to switch between different
audio and video inputs and route signals to other classroom equipment.
To Connect Classroom External Equipment e.g., Teacher / Gust Laptop Classroom Should have Facility
of Minimum two-input wall plate switcher that can be used to connect audio and video sources to the
classroom system. This switcher can be mounted on the wall and is ideal for use with laptops, tablets,
and other portable devices same time classroom should have facility to connect devices for wireless
presentation system that allows students and teachers to share content from laptops, tablets, and
smartphones. This system can be used to display content on the classroom projector or monitor, making
it easy for students to collaborate and share ideas.
For Back-end equipment Connectivity system should have 4K HDBaseT HDMI extenders that can be
used to extend HDMI signals up to 330 feet. These extenders can be used to transmit audio and video
signals from one classroom device to another, making it possible to share content from one source with
multiple display System should have facility to connect minimum six-input video scaler that can be used
to scale and switch video signals. Scale can be used to convert and scale different video resolutions and
formats, making it possible to display content from different devices on the same screen.
The system should have easy and hassle-free operation with the help of a control processor that can be
used to manage audio, video, and other classroom equipment. This processor can be used to automate
certain classroom functions, such as turning on and off equipment, adjusting audio and video settings,
and managing other classroom technology.
Multi-channel amplifier should be connected with Speakers that can be used to power classroom
speakers. This amplifier provides high-quality audio performance and is designed to work seamlessly
with other classroom technologies For Crystal Clear Audibility of PA system should have state of the are
digital signal processor that provides audio routing, mixing, and processing capabilities can be used to
manage audio inputs and outputs for the classroom sound system.
To Share Classroom content one class to other class including audio video Data Av over Ip technology
should be used and having multiple ( as per design) Networked AV decoders and encoders that allow
for seamless distribution of audio and video content over an Ethernet network same time for seam less
connectivity and control this system have management software license that provides additional control
options for the classroom AV system with A 10-inch touch panel control system that provides advanced
control options for the classroom AV system. This touch panel can be used to manage audio, video, and
other classroom equipment, and can be customized to meet the specific needs of the classroom.
Microphones are most critical part of any state-of-the-art PA system includes reliable digital wireless
system for flexible spaces and upgrading existing areas without access to cable paths. The system
should be able to provide up to 32 channels per RF band, allowing channels to be added in the field to
respond to future growth and shall have high-quality audio transmission, with a frequency response
Page 725 of 1358

range from 20 Hz to 20 kHz. The system should have very low-latency digital audio, which can be
enhanced through the Dante interface.
The wireless microphone system should have balanced line or headphone outputs, which can be used
to connect to other audio equipment. The GUI can also be used to send control signals to the main and
mixed outputs. Along with various types of wireless microphones, such as wireless handheld, lapel,
gooseneck, and pocket microphones. These microphones should offer reliable and high-quality audio
transmission, with a range of up to 300 feet.
Wireless Receiver: The wireless receiver should be compact and easy to install, with a simple interface
that allows for easy setup and configuration. The receiver should be capable of receiving multiple
channels simultaneously and should include features such as automatic frequency scanning and
selection, to ensure optimal performance. For long time uses of wireless microphone system should
include efficient power management features, which can help to prolong the battery life of the wireless
microphones. The system should also be able to provide real-time battery status updates, to ensure
that the microphones are always ready for use.
The system should be scalable, allowing additional wireless microphones and receivers to be added as
needed. The system should be able to support multiple users simultaneously, without compromising
the audio quality or reliability of the wireless communication.
The Audience engagement System Should be an online platform that allows remote participants to
join an event via the internet without needing to be connected through a local network. With the System
Application, participants of an online meeting can speak live, ask questions, and participate in polls. The
platform streamlines audience interactions by allowing the moderator to choose who speaks next by
enabling the microphone of a person's name on the list. Attendee microphones can also be deactivated
at any time to keep the conversation on track.
The System also allows moderators to create polls in real-time, and the results can be published on the
display. The audience engagement can be measured by reviewing poll results and other participation
information after the event has ended. There are three ways to participate in the platform, including
acting as a wireless microphone, texting a comment or question, and taking part in polls.
The platform also has a custom-made template as per requirement and notifies the moderator when
an attendee wants to speak. The moderator can choose the next person to speak, turn off an attendee's
mic anytime, and create polls before the event or live in real-time. The System Should supports up to
1000 attendees for larger events. Overall, the System makes online / offline events more engaging,
interactive, and inclusive, creating a seamless experience for both remote and in-person participants.
As 6 Classroom having capacity of 150 or more student and viewing distance would be approx. 80 ft for
clear view of white seamless ceramic writing board which used for writing, drawing, and presenting.
Whatever the written on the bord by teacher during classes that need to capture with the help of two
or more high-resolution cameras, the board's writing can be captured in real-time and processed by a
video wall controller. The captured video is then projected onto a high-resolution active LED video wall,
creating a seamless and clear image.
The use of high-resolution cameras ensures that every detail and movement on the board is captured
and transmitted in high quality. The video wall controller combines the captured video feed from the
cameras and seamlessly creates a single image, which is then projected onto the LED video wall. The
result is a clear and vivid image that can be viewed by each student in the classroom.
Page 726 of 1358

The seamless nature of the video projection is used in presentations, meetings, and educational settings.
With the ability to display content in real-time, it allows for a more interactive and engaging experience
for the audience In summary, classroom white seamless ceramic writing board with high-resolution
cameras, a video wall controller, and an active LED video wall creates a seamless and clear video
projection, for use in presentations, meetings, and educational settings.
System Should consist of a height-adjustable classroom podium for use in classrooms, for presentation
settings. Should be made of durable, waterproof commercial plywood with laminated surfaces and edge
binding tape for protection The podium is adjustable in height, typically ranging from 36 inches to 48
inches, which allows presenters of different heights to comfortably use it. The footrest at the base of
the podium is sloped at a 30-degree angle to provide additional support and comfort for the presenter's
feet.
The podium Shall have partition section to hold a variety of presentation tools, such as an LCD screen,
a keyboard with sliding arrangement, and a material rack. There is also a wire manager hole to keep
cables organized and out of sight. A touch or pen interactive panel can be mounted on the customized
housing on top of the podium, which allows for more engaging and interactive presentations. There is
also adequate space for a PC, visualizer, and microphone to be integrated into the podium.
The system component shall have minimum following.
1. Cable Cubby with integrated 7-inch Touch panel Shall have capacitive touchscreen For intuitive
interface for controlling AV systems. Touch panel Active-Matrix Colour LCD screen has a resolution of
Minimum 800x480 (WVGA), with contrast ratio of 700:1. Shall have viewing angle of ±70° horizontally
and vertically. The touch screen is responsive and supports gestures for easy control. The Touch panel
of cable cubby shall have minimum 2 GB of RAM and 8 GB of storage, It also features a motion sensor,
light sensor, and lid switch, which provide convenience and energy-saving benefits. Cable cubby shall
have speaker output option and compatible with a wide range of protocols, including DHCP, DNS,
HTTP, HTTPS, ICMP, IEEE 802.1x, SFTP, SSH, TCP/IP, UDP/IP, and more.
Page 727 of 1358

Typical Layout of Item No 1 – Connected Equipment may Change as per design*
2. a three input multi-format twisted pair transmitter is a device used to transmit audio, video, and
control signals over a long distance, up to 100 meters, using shielded twisted pair cables. It features
auto switching between inputs, and supports inputs such as VGA+Audio, HDMI, and Display Port, with
a maximum resolution of 4K (4096x2160) @ 30 Hz or more. The device outputs to a twisted pair/HD
Base output on an RJ45 port, and supports audio embedding, HDCP compliance, and built-in EDID
management. The transmitter can also remotely power the connected receiver or be remotely
powered by a connected switcher or receiver.
Page 728 of 1358

Typical Layout of Item No 2 – Connected Equipment may Change as per design
3. wall plate type multi-format twisted pair transmitter having auto switching between inputs based on
highest numbered input with active video signal, Automatically reformat HDMI source signal for DVI
sink device, Active buffering of DDC channels, provide power and signal presence indicator on front
panel, provide link and signal indicators on RJ-45 port, provide power and signal indicators, Automatic
colour bit depth management to prevent colour incompatibility. Inputs: 1 HDMI, 1 VGA+A, Resolution:
Up to 4K (4096x2160) @ 30 Hz or more, Signal transmission distance: Minimum 100m using shielded
twisted pair cable for audio, video, controls & power. Output: Twisted Pair/ HD BaseT output on RJ
45 port, Should support audio embedding, HDCP compliant. Support built-in EDID Management.
Should be able to remote power the connected receiver as well as be remotely powered by connected
switcher or receiver.
4. A wireless presentation system, Resolution 1080p or better. HDCP 2.3 complaint. Shall have min 1x
HDMI input for wired connection. Auto-arrange up to four or more different device windows over the
single HDMI output screen, shall provide 1x de-embedded line level analog audio, should have built-
in EDID management. Should enable attendees to view content on personal devices via a wireless
connection and a Web browser. Shall have built-in or provided with external wireless access point.
meet regulatory compliance: CE, c-UL, UL
Page 729 of 1358

Typical Layout of Item No 4 – Connected Equipment may Change as per design.
5. HDMI transmitter transmitting HDMI plus control and analog audio up to 330 feet (100 meters) over
twisted pair; supports computer and video resolutions up to 4K ; supports data rates up to 10.2 Gbps,
Deep Colour up to 12-bit, 3D, HD lossless audio formats, and CEC pass-through ; HDCP 2.3 compliant;
supports up to 4:4:4 chroma sampling; should support Maximum pixel clock 300 MHz; should
support Audio Gain Unbalanced output: 0 dB; balanced output +6 dB, Frequency response 20 Hz to
20 kHz, ±0.5 dB , THD + Noise 0.03% @ 20 Hz to 20 kHz at maximum output , S/N >90 dB, at maximum
output (15 dBu), balanced (unweighted) , Stereo channel separation >80 dB @ 1 kHz to 20 kHz;
6. HDMI receiver which receives HDMI plus control and analog audio up to 330 feet (100 meters) over
twisted pair; Support computer and video resolutions up to 4K, data rates up to 10.2 Gbps or better
and CEC pass-through; HDCP 2.3 compliant; EDID Management; Support up to 4:4:4 chroma sampling;
should support Maximum pixel clock of at least 300 MHz; should support Audio Gain of Unbalanced
output: 0 dB; balanced output +6 dB, Frequency response of 20 Hz to 20 kHz, ±0.5 dB, THD + Noise
of 0.03% @ 20 Hz to 20 kHz at maximum output, S/N of >90 dB, at maximum output (15 dBu), balanced,
Stereo channel separation : >80 dB @ 1 kHz to 20 kHz;
Page 730 of 1358

Typical Layout of Item No 5 & 6 – Connected Equipment may Change as per design
7. Video Streamer and Recorder for dual recording of all kinds of meetings including video conference.
03 or more HDMI Input, 02 or more RTP/RTSP push/pull streams, one or more analog video input,
one or more balanced/unbalanced analog audio Input, High quality inbuilt scaling to support
minimum two window layout with flexibility in size and position for each window (PIP, PBP, etc.) with
user selectable presets. Push and Pull streaming protocols, simultaneous multicast and unicast
streaming through H.264 compression. Bit rate of 200 kbps to 10 Mbps with Selectable bit rate control
(variable, constrained, or constant), 1 HDMI for local preview output. Resolution minimum
1080P@30fps or better. Simultaneous Streaming and three separate recordings with resolution
support:1080p, H.264 or better compression supporting protocol RTP/RTSP/RTMP. Recording
Capacity of minimum 70 GB SSD, support external USB storage of minimum 1TB, and defined network
storage. RS232/LAN control
Page 731 of 1358

8. HDMI and audio to USB C interface for integrating an AV source or system with a computer in a soft
codec videoconferencing application. The device has HDMI and audio to USB C scaling bridge with
integrated audio control, video processing, a variety of analog audio I/O ports, and signal
management for analog audio, HDMI embedded audio, and USB bidirectional audio. It supports HDMI
computer and video resolutions up to 4K/60 and 4K/30, HDMI audio de-embedding for two-channel
PCM audio, and USB audio from the host computer. The device provides digital audio processing tools
including gain, mixing, and ducking, and soft limit settings to define upper and lower limits on
adjusting near-end and far-end audio levels. The device supports automatic EDID management,
HDCP-compliant capabilities on HDMI input and loop-through, and Ethernet monitoring and control.
Page 732 of 1358

9. 4K six input scaling switcher. Data Rate: 18 Gbps, HDCP 2.3 compliance. Inbuilt Scaling up to 4K, 60
Hz, 4:4:4. Built-in EDID management, Automatic switching between inputs based on user defined
priority. should support Seamless Transition: Seamless freeze/cut, freeze/fade, cut through black, and
fade through black transition effects. Should Support logo placement as a foreground image, wherein
we can place company logo on live videos. Input: Min 5x HDMI or more, 1x Display Port/UBS C/HDMI.
Output: min 1x HDMI, 1x Duplicated twisted pair. Control: RS232/Ethernet. Should be operational in
up to 45 °C temperature. Control: RS232/Ethernet. Should be CE, c-UL, UL compliant.
Page 733 of 1358

10. The
Five
Input
HDCP-
Compliant Scaler with Seamless Switching is a device that integrates HDMI and analog video sources
into presentation systems. It features three HDMI inputs and two universal auto-detecting analog
video inputs with simultaneous outputs for HDMI and analog RGB or component video. The device
supports PIP (picture-in-picture) and Auto-switching between inputs, as well as Clean switch
transitions. It has selectable output rates from 640x480 to 1920x1200, including 1080p/60 and 2K. It
also has an advanced scaling engine with 30-bit precision processing and motion-adaptive
deinterlacing for signals up to 1080i. Other features include HDCP Visual Confirmation, Accu-RATE
Frame Lock, Image freeze control, and HDMI audio embedding and de-embedding. The device also
supports Ethernet Monitoring and Control and has an RS 232 Control Port.
Page 734 of 1358

11. The AV Control Processor is a powerful device that can control up to 30 devices, featuring at least 2x
RS232/RS422/RS485, 6x bidirectional RS232, 8 or more IR/Serial, 8 or more Relay, and 4 or more x
Digital IO. It supports Ethernet connectivity with 10/100/1000Base-T, IEEE 802.1X, IPv4, TCP, UDP,
DHCP, DNS, HTTPS, NTP, SFTP, SMTP, SNMP, SSH protocols. With a minimum of 1GB SDRAM and 8GB
Flash Memory, it is capable of handling complex commands and tasks efficiently. It also comes with
necessary licenses to integrate with iOS/Android devices and a built-in IR receiver for recording IR
commands. It is CE, c-UL, and UL certified, and operational in temperatures up to 45°C.
Page 735 of 1358

12. 7-inch Room scheduler with 7" capacitive touchscreen with 1024x600 resolution. Scratch, and
smudge-resistant Gorilla Glass screen. Aspect Ratio: 17:10, Brightness:420 cd/m2, SDRAM: 2G, Flash:
8 GB. Supports Ethernet Data Rate: 10/100/1000Base-T, half/full duplex with autodetect and Ethernet
Protocols: DHCP, DNS, HTTP, HTTPS, IEEE 802.1x, SFTP, SSH, TCP/IP, UDP/IP. Shall be compatible to
book the room using Microsoft® Exchange, Office 365™, Google Calendar™, 25Live®, EMS, NFS, and
Ad Astra® etc. Shall be PoE compatible. The room scheduler shall have LED lights built in to show
room availability. Shall have minimum 1x Digital Input to integrate with occupancy sensor if required.
Device shall be free from license for yearly subscriptions or to add a greater number of units. provided
with mounting accessories.
13. 2x8 ProDSP Digital Matrix Processor is a high-performance audio processor with 12 mic/line inputs
and 8 outputs, featuring twelve channels of AEC. It includes a configurable USB Audio interface with
Page 736 of 1358

flexible input/output configurations. Equipped with 64-bit floating point audio DSP processing,
selectable 48V phantom power for the first eight inputs, and studio-grade 24-bit/48 kHz converters,
the processor delivers superior sound quality. The processor also features 8 or more DSP
configurator presets and offers excellent audio system gain with balanced output at 0 dB and
unbalanced output at -6 dB or better. The device supports a frequency response of 20 Hz to 20 kHz,
±0.2 dB or better, with THD + Noise less than 0.01%, and S/N ratio of Analog Into Analog Out >107 dB,
20 Hz to 20 kHz, at maximum balanced output (unweighted). The device also includes adjustable input
gain with -18 dB to +80 dB in 0.1 dB steps and output impedance of 100 ohms balanced and 50 ohms
unbalanced or better, with a gain error of ±0.1 dB channel to channel or better.
14. 4K Video & Audio over 1Gbps Ethernet Encoder with 1x HDMI input, analog stereo audio input, and
Twister Pair output on RJ-45, Should support input with 18 Gbps of data rate supporting resolutions
up to 4K, 60 Hz, 4:4:4. Should be HDCP 2.3 compliant. Should support built in EDID and HDCP
management, provide green/ blue screen for HDCP notification. Should be configurable through USB,
RS-232/ Ethernet. Support 802.1X port-based authentication. 1 or More RS232, 1 or More IR Control
Ports and CEC for control of external AV devices, 1x HDMI 2.0 loop through, Support 100m
transmission of encoded stream. Support HTTPS, support multicast filtering with IGMPv2/v3, IPv4,
PTPv2, QoS, SSH, TCP, UDP and Multicast UDP, SRTP, PURE3 codec. Support PURE3 Intelligent
Selective Streaming, Adjustable bit rate, Error concealment, Embedded web interface, Microsoft
Active Directory support, support video bitrate of 150 Mbps to 900 Mbps. Should be powered through
local power supply or PoE+. Support AES67 audio over IP standard, audio breakaway. Should be
interoperable with 10G decoders. Support customizable screen saver to be displayed when no signal
is present, custom on-screen display. Should have front panel LED indicators for signal presence.
Should be operational in up to 40°C temperature. Shall meet regulatory compliance: CE, c-UL, UL,
Page 737 of 1358

RoHS, WEEE
15. 4K Video & Audio over 1Gbps Ethernet Scaling Decoder with Twister Pair input on RJ-45, 1x HDMI
output, should support scaled output with up to 18 Gbps of data rate supporting resolutions up to
4K, 60 Hz, 4:4:4. Should be HDCP 2.3 compliant. Should support built in EDID and HDCP management,
provide green/ blue screen for HDCP notification. Should be configurable through USB, RS-232/
Ethernet. Support 802.1X port-based authentication. 1 or More RS232, 1 or More IR Control Ports and
CEC for control of external AV devices, Support 100m transmission of decoded stream. Support HTTPS,
support multicast filtering with IGMPv2/v3, IPv4, PTPv2, QoS, SSH, TCP, UDP and Multicast UDP, SRTP,
PURE3 codec. Support PURE3 Intelligent Selective Streaming, Adjustable bit rate, Error concealment,
Embedded web interface, Microsoft Active Directory support, support videowall mode with scaled
output with saved and recalled presets, should be powered through local power supply or PoE+.
Support AES67 audio over IP standard, audio breakaway. Should be interoperable with 10G encoders.
Should have front panel LED indicators for signal presence. Support customizable screen saver to be
displayed when no signal is present, custom on-screen display, custom borders, workstation on
screen display. Should be operational in up to 40°C temperature. Shall meet regulatory compliance:
CE, c-UL, UL, RoHS, WEEE
15 – Connected Equipment may Change as per design
16. AV over IP System Manager is a powerful tool to manage IP-based video and audio matrixing
between 1G and 10G encoders and decoders. It supports a wide range of protocols including DHCP,
HTTPS, IGMPv2/v3, IPv4, PTPv2, SSH, TCP, and UDP. The system manager offers an embedded web
interface and Microsoft Active Directory support for easy management. It also features signal and PoE
transmission distance of up to 100m, 802.1X port-based authentication, and parallel firmware update
for multiple endpoints. The system manager supports videowall mode to save and recall presets and
CEC for AV devices connected over HDMI. It includes separate LAN interfaces for AV traffic and
corporate network, and can operate in temperatures of up to 50°C. The system manager is compliant
with regulatory requirements such as CE, c-UL, UL, RoHS, and WEEE.
Page 738 of 1358

17. A V Control Processor is a high-performance device that supports a range of communication

interfaces, including 1x RS232/RS422/RS485, 2x bidirectional RS232 or more, 2 or more IR/Serial, 4 or
more Relay, and 4 or more x Digital IO. The device is designed to control at least 30 devices over
multiple Ethernet ports, supporting 10/100/1000Base-T and IEEE 802.1X, IPv4, TCP, UDP, DHCP, DNS,
HTTPS, NTP, SFTP, SMTP, SNMP, SSH protocols. With a minimum of 1GB SDRAM and 8 GB flash
memory, the processor is capable of storing large amounts of data. The device comes with the
necessary license to integrate with iOS/Android devices and features a built-in IR receiver for
recording IR commands. It is operational in up to 45°C temperature and meets regulatory compliance
standards such as CE, c-UL, UL.
18. 10" capacitive touchscreen has a resolution of 1280x800 and 24-bit colour depth. The Gorilla Glass
screen is tough, scratch-resistant and smudge-resistant. It has 2GB of RAM and 4GB of storage. The
pixel density of the screen is 149 PPI, and it has an aspect ratio of 16:10. The brightness of the screen
is 420 nits (cd/m2), and the contrast ratio is 800:1. The touchscreen is compatible with the built-in
control processor of the presentation switcher. It supports DHCP, DNS, HTTP, HTTPS, ICMP, IEEE
802.1x, SFTP, SSH, TCP/IP, and UDP/IP protocols.
19. 4-channel amplifier is designed to operate with both low and high impedance speakers. It has a
rated power output of 600 watts per channel at 4 ohms and a sensitivity of 0.7V RMS. The on-board
digital signal processor allows for custom configuration of inputs and outputs, including input delay,
input and output parametric EQ, and output delay. The amplifier can be controlled, configured, and
monitored through a standard TCP/IQ network, and there is a combined GPIO/AUX port for recalling
presets, muting channels, monitoring faults, and powering on/off the amplifier. The amplifier has a
frequency response of +/-0.25dB and a voltage gain of 34dB.
20. Surface-mount column speaker with a slim and elegant design, consisting of 24 x 2” aluminum cone
full-range drivers. It has an overall impedance of 4Ω, an RMS power handling of 480 Watt, and a
maximum power handling of 960 Watt. The frequency response ranges from 150 Hz to 20 kHz (±3
dB). The sensitivity is 92 dB when measured with an input signal of 1 Watt at a distance of 1 meter,
while the maximum continuous sound pressure level is 113 dB. The speaker comes with a multi-
functional wall bracket allowing for optimal directional placement, and the enclosure is made of high-
quality aluminum with a perforated steel grill finishing in white or black colours.
21. Surface-mount column type with 12 x 2” aluminum cone full-range drivers. It is designed for use in
both 70/100V public address systems and low impedance (12Ω) audio systems. It has an RMS power
handling of 240 Watt with a maximum power handling of 480 Watt, and a frequency response of 150
Hz to 20 kHz (±3 dB). The sensitivity is 92 dB at 1 Watt/1 meter and the maximum continuous sound
pressure level is 113 dB. The nominal dispersion is 260° horizontal and 90° vertical coverage pattern
at -6dB (100 Hz - 10 kHz). The line transformer power taps are selectable and adjustable in steps of
40W, 20W, and 10W for 70/100V systems.
22. Handheld cordless microphone has a user-selectable polar pattern of cardioid, super-cardioid, or
hyper-cardioid and a frequency response range of 60 - 15kHz. The RF output power can be set to 1,
10, 25 or 50mW. The microphone has an internal antenna and an OLED display, with power options
of USB or included AA rechargeable batteries or disposable AA batteries. The microphone also
features indicators for battery status and mute status, and a programmable switch for talk, mute,
logic mute, on/off functions. The battery life can last up to 8 hours of continuous usage per charge,
typically at 1mW power output. The signal-to-noise ratio is 74dB typ. at 1kHz (1Pa) 'A' weighted.
23. Beltpack Transmitter Cordless Microphone has user-selectable RF output options of 1, 10, 25, or
Page 739 of 1358

50mW, and an external, field-replaceable antenna. The OLED display indicates battery and mute
status. It has a TA4 mic connector, 3V mic bias, and a mic input impedance of 47 K Ohms. The mic has
an omnidirectional polar pattern and a frequency response of 20-20kHz, with a signal-to-noise ratio
above 56dB at 1kHz ('A' weighted). The transmitter can be powered by USB, AA rechargeable
(included), or AA disposable batteries, and has a battery talk time of up to 8 hours of continuous usage
per charge at 1mW.
24. Wireless gooseneck microphone features a cardioid or super-cardioid polar pattern, an 18-inch
double-bend gooseneck, and a selectable RF output power of 1, 10, 25, or 50mW. The frequency
response ranges from 60-15kHz, and the signal-to-noise ratio is 74dB typical at 1kHz. It can be
powered via USB or with included AA rechargeable or disposable batteries and has LED indicators for
battery and mute status. The microphone includes a press-to-talk or press-to-mute button and a
programmable switch for talk, mute, logic mute, or on/off functions. It comes with four rechargeable
NiMH batteries, which take 4 hours to charge.
25. Pocket / Clip on Microphone with a 2.4GHz Digital Frequency Agile System. It has an omnidirectional
polar pattern and a pre-polarised pressure transducer acoustic principle. The frequency range is 50Hz
to 20kHz, with an external mic input range of 20Hz to 20kHz. It has an equivalent input noise of 21.8dB
(A-Weighted), a maximum output level of +3dBu, and a maximum SPL of 100dB SPL (1kHz @ 1m). The
microphone has an inbuilt Li-po battery that is rechargeable via USB, with a battery life of up to 7
hours. It has analog inputs and outputs of 3.5mm TRS, and computer connectivity via USB for
firmware updates. The analog outputs have a 6ms delay.
26. Charging station (docking station) is designed to charge 8 microphones simultaneously and can mix
and match any type of the supplied microphones. It has a capacity of 5.6V DC / 4 A and is housed in
ABS material. It can be wall-mounted, ceiling-mounted, or mic-stand mounted. The connectors are
straight connectors, and the reception pattern is 130-degree with a gain of 15dB of RF gain (915MHz).
It is phantom powered from the receiver and comes with a wireless extension antenna kit that
includes a pair of ceiling mount antennas and 75 ft RG58 plenum cables tuned for the RF band M715
(710-740 MHz).
27. Receiver (base station) shall be a 4-channel receiver with an OLED display and external antenna
support for up to six pairs per system. It shall allow for antenna distribution and be able to attach up
to 32 channels to one pair of antennas. The analog audio outputs shall include Phoenix terminal
blocks or with XLR adapters, with an output impedance of 100 Ohm. It shall also have a balanced 1/4-
inch TRS mixed line out for recorders or powered speakers, as well as a headphone out. The interface
shall include USB, RS232 & Ethernet (dual port 10/100 Mbps) and eight (8) digital outputs @ 48 KHz
Dante™ Audio channels. It shall have primary and secondary Dante ports with RJ45 ports and
100/1000 Mbps and 328 ft, as well as 22 programmable GPIO interface pins, and a gain adjustment
range of 20dB to +31 db.
28. The audience engagement solution shall be comprised of a host device and two mobile applications.
The first mobile application shall support event attendee functionality, including but not limited to:
requesting the opportunity to talk, participating in polls conducted by the event moderator, sending
text messages to the moderator, and using the built-in microphone to talk once given the opportunity
by the moderator. The second mobile application shall support event moderator functionality,
including but not limited to: reviewing attendees who have requested to talk, selecting an attendee
to talk, creating and distributing polls, deactivating attendee microphones, and sharing poll and/or
event data to an external video output. Both the attendee and moderator applications shall be
supported on Apple® devices running iOS® v9.0 or newer. The attendee application shall also be
supported on Android devices running v10.0 or newer. The moderator interface shall also be
Page 740 of 1358

supported and accessible via modern web browsers. The attendee and moderator applications and
the moderator web interface shall be localized in over 20 languages. The host device shall utilize an
Ethernet network via RJ-45 connector for interfacing with attendee and moderator applications, as
well as for control monitoring. The host device shall be equipped with two High-Definition Multimedia
Interface (HDMI®) ports, balanced analog audio outputs, and two USB 3.0 type A ports. The host
device shall be CE marked, UL listed and shall be compliant with the RoHS directive.
• Choose who speaks next (1) Press on a person's name in the list to enable their microphone.
• Deactivate attendee mics - If the conversation goes off-topic the moderator can deactivate an
attendee's microphone any time.
• Measure audience engagement - Review poll results and other participation info after the event
has ended.
• If a person can't speak or isn't comfortable speaking, they can text questions to the moderator.
• Remote Poling Participation
• Custom made Templates as per Requirement
• Be notified when an attendee wants to speak.
• Choose the next person to speak to.
• turn off an attendee mic at any time.
• Create polls before an event or live, in real time.
• Support Up to up to 1000 attendees.
29. Device supports a Gigabit Ethernet connection through an RJ-45 port using Cat 5 or higher cables. It
can output video in resolutions up to 4K UHD via two HDMI 2.0 ports. There are no analog audio
outputs, only a Euro block physical interface with a frequency response of 20Hz~20kHz, +4dBu, and
a THD+N of <0.006%. The dynamic range is >96dB with a balanced output impedance of 200Ω and a
maximum output of +12dBu. The sampling rate is 48 kHz with 24-bit D/A converters. The device has
two USB 3.0 ports and complies with FCC, CE, UL and C-UL, RoHS. It also supports over 20 localized
languages.
30. Digital audio server provides 128x128 channels of AVB and features 12 mic/line level inputs with AEC,
8 mic/line level outputs, and a Gigabit Ethernet port. It can handle up to 8 channels of configurable
USB audio and has an RS-232 serial port and 4-pin GPIO for added connectivity. The device also
supports port authentication via IEEE 802.1X and features SIP VoIP and standard FXO telephone
interfaces via RJ-45 and RJ-11 connectors respectively. The device allows for intuitive signal processing
via software configuration, enabling control over signal routing, mixing, equalization, filtering, delay,
and more. The frequency response ranges from 20Hz to 20kHz, with a dynamic range of >108dB and
input impedance of 8kΩ. The device has balanced output impedance of 207Ω, with a maximum input
of +24dBu and a maximum output selectable between +24dBu, +18dBu, +12dBu, +6dBu, 0dBu, and -
31dBu. The input gain range is 0-66dB, with phantom power of +48VDC (7mA/input). The device is
compliant with CE, UL, and RoHS regulations.
31. 2.5 Sq. MM speaker cable has a flame-retardant PVC jacket with a diameter of 8.0mm, coloured black.
It features insulation made of PVC with a diameter of 3.2mm and colours black and red. The cable
uses stranded bare copper wires with 140 x 0.15mm (2.50mm²) 140x34AWG conductors, and a
conductor resistance of <7.3 ohm/km. The cable has a test voltage of cond/cond: 2000 veff and is
capable of handling maximum watts load of current 15.0 Ampere/Line <1650 Watt. The cable can
flexibly be installed in a temperature range of -5° to +50° C, or fixedly installed within a temperature
range of -30° to +70° C. The conductors have a 360° twist rotation with a pitch per meter of 9.52, and
a 105mm pitch per rotation.
32. 2 core shielded signal cable has insulation made of PVC with a diameter of 3.2mm and colours black
Page 741 of 1358

and red. It uses stranded bare copper wires with 140 x 0.15mm (2.50mm²) 140x34AWG conductors,
and a conductor resistance of <7.3 ohm/km. The cable has a test voltage of cond/cond: 2000 veff and
can handle maximum watts load of current 15.0 Ampere/Line <1650 Watt. The cable can flexibly be
installed in a temperature range of -5° to +50° C or fixedly installed within a temperature range of -
30° to +70° C. The conductors have a 360° twist rotation with a pitch per meter of 9.52, and a 105mm
pitch per rotation. This high-performance signal cable is designed for use in audio and video systems
where reliable signal transmission is required.
33. Various sizes Fiber HDMI cable supports a high transfer rate of 18Gbps and can transmit a maximum
video resolution of 3840 x 2160 @ 60Hz. It also supports 48-bit Deep Colour for high-quality image
display and HDR for improved contrast and colour accuracy. The cable is compatible with 3D video
and has Chroma Sub Sampling for a more accurate colour representation. Additionally, it supports
EDID, ensuring that the video source and display device are correctly identified for optimal
performance. The Fiber HDMI cable supports bidirectional signal transmission and is capable of
transmitting stereo audio.
34. Active USB cable that supports USB 3.1 (gen 1), 3.0, 2.0, and 1.1 protocols. It features a USB B male
connector on one end and a USB-A male connector on the other end, and it is designed for extending
the range of USB devices. The cable is fully shielded and supports bidirectional signal transmission. It
is powered directly from the USB port, so no external power source is required. This cable can be
used to connect a variety of USB devices such as printers, scanners, cameras, and external hard drives.
35. Digital writing notebook is a device that allows users to convert handwritten notes into digital text
and edit, colour, and highlight them. The notebook should be capable of recording audio in sync with
the page the user is writing on and playing it back whenever required. The notebook should be able
to send emails or share the writing content from paper in handwriting. The system should provide an
instant backup from paper to digital and allow users to browse and search all smart notebooks from
any device. Users should be able to search by keywords or tags and sort notes by topic from any
device.
36. White seamless ceramic writing board measures 40X4 and has a minimum of 5 coatings. The wall
thickness of the anodized aluminum frame is 1.2mm, while the board material is ceramic steel. The
frame is made of anodized extruded aluminum alloy hollow section of designation 63400 conforming
to IS: 1285, while the back cover is made of galvanized steel sheets conforming to IS:277. The board
surface is suitable for writing with dry marker ink for whiteboard only, and the back surface coating
thickness of sheet is a minimum of 0.035mm. The top steel sheet has a thickness of 0.4mm and is
coated with vitreous enameled coating on both sides.
37. Height adjustable wooden podium is 1200 mm high, 600 mm wide, and 600 mm deep, made of 19
mm commercial waterproof and ISI-marked ply with both sides 1 mm laminated and 1 mm thick edge
binding tape. It has wire manager holes in an approved shade and make. The top is a 12 mm thick
plan glass with proper holding arrangement. The partition section is for holding an LCD screen, a
material rack in the center portion, a keyboard with sliding arrangement, and 18 mm thick waterproof
commercial ply along with both side 1 mm lamination standard make as approved by IIT-A to be fitted
as per dimensioned. It has a footrest of size 600mmx150mmx18 mm thick waterproof & ISI marked
ply board with 1 mm thick lamination & edge binding tape in a slope of 30 degrees towards the front
side complete with mounting arrangement at the side wall of the podium. It has provision for plat
mounted base with adjustable floor level in stud type insulated legs. The podium also has a touch/pen
interactive panel mounted on customized housing, adequate space for PC, visualizer, and
microphone, and an integrated computer system.
Page 742 of 1358

38. Document camera features a 1-CMOS 1/3" image pick-up device with a frame rate of 30/60 frames
per second at all resolutions. It has effective pixels of 1920 x 1080 and sRGB colour precision. The
converted output signals include UXGA (1600x1200), SXGA (1280x1024), XGA (1024x768), and SVGA
(800x600) with a resolution of 980 lines. The camera also has a wide-angle lens with a 28mm focal
length and f4.7 aperture, along with a 28x zoom (14x optical and 2x digital) controlled by a two-speed
zoom wheel. The shooting area is 300mm x 400mm (height: 120mm), and the focus range is 7mm to
200mm. It has various connectors including HDMI in/out, LAN port, mini-USB 2.0 device port, and USB
2.0 host port. The camera supports HDMI and DVI output with an optional adapter cable.
39. Certified IEC/EN 61643-1 branch circuit surge protection and power conditioning panel is designed
for audio/video/stage lighting systems. Enclosed in a professional-grade NEMA magnetic shielding
steel enclosure, it eliminates surge energy up to 6,000 volts without producing harmful side effects
such as earth contamination or common-mode disturbances. It can operate at a nominal line to
neutral voltage U0 of 240V and a maximum continuous operating voltage Uc of 240V 260VAC. It offers
a voltage protective level Up of 1KV, maximum shorted current Isc of 3KA, and open circuit voltage
Uoc of 6KV. The panel features TOV characteristics that withstand tT = 5s, UT=335V and has two ports,
with voltage regulation of ≤1%. It can operate at a temperature range of -40 - +35°C and a humidity
range of 30-90%.
40. 27U equipment rack that conforms to DIN 41494 or equivalent EIA/ISO/EN/CEA standard. It has
adjustable mounting depth with 4 no adjustable 19" verticals with punched 10mm square holes and
a universal 12.7 mm-15.875 mm alternating hole pattern that maximizes usable mounting space. The
basic frame is made of steel folded construction that is welded, with a top and bottom cover bolted
to the frame with cable entry and exit cut-outs. The front door is lockable toughened glass or lockable
perforated steel, and the rear door is lockable steel that can be plain, vented, or perforated. The rack
comes standard with caster wheels or levellers or a plinth rack and can handle a static load of 750 kg
with casters and 1250 kg with levellers/plinth.
41. LED Display is a modular LED screen with a minimum size of 136 inches diagonal in 16:9 aspect ratio
or higher. It has a minimum total resolution of 1920 x 1080 Full HD or more with a pixel pitch of
1.57mm or less and pixel configuration of SMD 3 in 1 LED package or better. The screen offers a
brightness of 500 nits or better with auto-brightness feature, brightness uniformity of 98% or more,
contrast ratio of 3000:1 or more, and colour processing depth of minimum 16 bit or more. It has a
viewing angle of 160° both horizontally and vertically and a depth of 70mm or less. The screen has
inbuilt connectivity ports including 3 x HDMI, 1 x DP, 1 x USB, control port, and audio out. The LED life
span of the screen is up to 1,00,000 hours, and it requires an input voltage of 230V, 50Hz, with a single
power cable connectivity and standby mode for power saving. The screen's case material is aluminum,
and it has built-in speakers. It also has additional features such as no interconnectivity cables and
fans behind the panels and operates under an operating temperature of up to 40 degrees with a
humidity range of 10-80% RH.
42. Active LED wall screen should have a size of at least 5760H x 1080V and a total resolution pixel pitch
of 2.50mm or finer, with a brightness of 600 nits or higher. The design should feature the latest
technology with a finless design and no power or signal cables at the backside to minimize civil work
at the site. The cabinet material should be made of die-cast aluminum, and the contrast ratio should
be 9,000:1 or better, with a processing depth of 20 bits. It should also be HDR compatible with HDR
10 pro and offer a full viewing angle of horizontal 160° / vertical 160°. The lifetime of the product
should be 1,00,000 hours, and the maximum power consumption should be 370 W/m2 or less.
Additionally, the screen should have a standby mode for power-saving, with a power consumption of
10W or less per cabinet under standby mode.
Page 743 of 1358

43. LFD (Large Format Display) has a screen size of 98 inches and a native resolution of 3,840 x 2,160
(UHD). The display has a typical brightness of 500 cd/m² and a viewing angle of 178 x 178 degrees.
The surface treatment of the display has a Haze of 1%, and it uses IPS panel technology with a refresh
rate of 120 Hz. The contrast ratio of the display is 1,300:1, and its response time is 8ms (G to G). The
input options include HDMI (3), DP, DVI-D, Audio, and USB 2.0 (2), while the external control options
include RS232C In/out (4 Pin Phone-Jack), RJ45 (LAN) In, and IR In. The display is CB / NRTL certified
and also FCC Class "A" / CE / KC certified.
44. 32" TV is a smart LED display with a quad-core processor and a 60 Hz refresh rate. It features Active
HDR and HDR Dynamic Tone Mapping with support for HDR10. The TV comes with a full web browser,
built-in Wi-Fi (802.11ac), and Simulink (HDMI CEC) technology. It has a 2.0Ch speaker system with 10W
audio output (rms) and two HDMI inputs with HDMI Audio Return Channel (ARC) support on HDMI 1.
It is certified for CB/NRTL, FCC Class "A", CE, and KC compliance.
Special Conditions for ELV Work
Special Submittal regarding IT & Network Integration
A. Mentioning Make and Model Number of offered products in each category.

B. Network/Schematic Diagram of proposed Network Solution.
C. Schematic and Line Diagrams of proposed Back Bone Connectivity Solution of each proposed
Solution.
D. Detailed Support Escalation Matrix, Maintenance and SLA details.
E. Certification/Undertaking document from the OEM for providing ongoing product.
Compliance of Facility Management Services
A. Service Level required should be based on 99.9% uptime. Draft SLA and Escalation Matrix Should be
submitted along with the Bid document.
B. The cost of Facility Management Services (FMS) for the Defect Liability Period Should be included in
the bid.
C. For facility management services, Client requires Onsite Support Engineers at site for complete IT and
Network Installation.
D. The facility management should mainly cover but not limited to the following activities on 8*7*365
Page 744 of 1358

basis:
E. User Administration
⚫ System Administration
⚫ Server Administration
⚫ Network Monitoring
⚫ Performance management
⚫ Disaster Recovery Management
Following Shall be Considered for Passive Components:
⚫ All copper & Fiber components should be from a single OEM as per the makes given in the
tender documents.
⚫ All passive components should be RoHS (Restriction of Certain Hazardous Substances)
complied with. Declaration-RoHS should be clearly mentioned on the datasheet of each
Passive Component.
⚫ There should be a minimum of 20 years ‘warranty assurance for all supplied components.
⚫ All work related to fiber including digging, laying of HDPE Pipe/Hume Pipe/Conducting will be
in the bidder ‘s scope. The Bidder Should take in consideration all the cost involved for the
same, nothing shall be paid extra on account for this.
⚫ Bidder should have adequate facilities, manpower and staff for installation testing and
commissioning and can provide after sales services. OEM has to authorize their System
Integrator in this regard stating that they will Support the solution through their SI.
Following Shall be Considered for Active Components
⚫ All components should be RoHS (Restriction of Certain Hazardous Substances) complied with.
Declaration-RoHS should be clearly mentioned on the datasheet of each Active Component.
⚫ Bidder has to provide training to end user personnel after successful completion of installation.
All configuration files, user id ‘s, password, installation manual, CD ‘s etc., have to be provided
to the end user during site handover.
⚫ Bidder should have adequate facilities, manpower and staff for installation testing and
commissioning and can provide after sales services. OEM must authorize their System
Integrator in this regard stating that they will Support the solution through their SI.
⚫ The response time to complaints from end users is up to 4 hrs. Resolution is 48-72 hrs. SLA.
Inspection and testing of materials
The contractor shall be required, if requested, to produce manufacturers test certificates for the batch
of materials supplied to him. The tests carried out shall be as per the relevant Indian Standards.
For examination and testing of materials and works at the site, Contractor shall provide all testing and
gauging equipment necessary and required for the work.
All such equipment shall be tested for calibration at any approved laboratory, if required, by the
Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore/
Page 745 of 1358

APPROVED MAKE LIST OF ELV OEM
Sr. No Item Description Approved Make

1 All type of Fire Alarm Panel BOSCH / Esser / Ziton
2 Active Repeater panel BOSCH / Esser / Ziton
3 All Type of Fire Sensers BOSCH / Esser / Ziton
4 Relay Module and Loop Powered Sounder BOSCH / Esser / Ziton
5 Beam Detector BOSCH / Esser / Ziton
6 Video Fire Detection camera BOSCH / Esser / Ziton
7 Graphical User Interface BOSCH / Esser / Ziton
8 Fire Fighter Telephone System Jacks Etc Revel / Agni /
Bosch, TOA, Dynacord, Majorcom,
9 IP based Digital Public Address Controller Baldwin Boxall
10 Class-D multi-channel Amplifier Baldwin Boxall
11 IP-networked multifunction power supply Baldwin Boxall
12 IP based desktop call station Baldwin Boxall
13 call station extension keypad Baldwin Boxall
14 IP based fixed hand-held microphone Baldwin Boxall
15 48 V DC power supply module Baldwin Boxall
16 24 V DC power supply module Baldwin Boxall
17 public address server Baldwin Boxall
18 public address license code Baldwin Boxall
19 ceiling mount speaker Bosch / Audac / Fidelity
20 Fire Dome For Speakers Bosch / Audac / Fidelity
21 horn loudspeaker Bosch / Audac / Fidelity
22 cabinet loudspeaker Bosch / Audac / Fidelity
23 all type of CCTV -Camera Bosch/Mobotix/Avigilon
24 VMS (Video Management software) Camera Make/Gentec/Milestone
25 VMS Server Camera Make/Dell/HP
26 Access Control Suprema / Invixium / Bosch
27 IP PBX and IP Phones NEC/ Cisco /Matrix
28 All type of Passive Network Molex / Element Cables / CommScope
29 Active Network Switches Juniper / Aruba /zyxel/Cisco
Pallo Alto / Juniper / Check Point
30 Fire wall /SonicWall
31 Wi Fi Access Point Juniper / Aruba /zyxel/Cisco
32 All Type of Servers and Mini PC Dell / HP / Lenovo
33 NAS Asuster / Qnap / Synology
Page 746 of 1358

34 Equipment Racks Netrack / Rittal / Tata

35 All type of AV switching Extron / Light ware / Crestron / Fidelity
36 AVoP Encoders Decoders and Controller Extron / Light ware / Crestron / Fidelity
37 All type of Microphones Clearone / Clock audio / Sennheiser
38 Audio Amplifiers Extron / Audac / Labgruppan
39 Speakers Audac / Fohan / Apart Audio
40 PTZ Cameras Data Video / Sony / People Link
41 Video Controllers Datapath/ Christie/Dexon
42 Audience engagement System Bi- Amp / Sennheiser /
43 digital audio server Bi Amp / Xilica / Sysmatrix
44 All type of Audio Cables Gothem / Belden / HOC / Klotz
45 Digital Writing Book moleskine / leuchtturm / rhodia
46 Height adjustable wooden podium Molar / Staagecraft / Fidelity / Panara
47 Document camera Fox Vision / People link / Epson
48 All Type of Display LG/Christie/Barco
49 Active LED Display LG/Christie/Barco
OEM and Custom made as on Required
50 All System Mounting hardware on Site
51 Face recognition access control Suprema / Invixium / Bosch
Touchless Exit Switch /EM Lock /Magnetic
52 Contact Megalock / SRk inovation / D&D
53 RFID and Biomatrix Salto / kaba / Tessa
Note – Engineer in Charge reserves the right to select above approved brands or equivalent make
without compromising with the output criteria in view of the availability in the time bound
manner, harmonizing the development with existing one and in the interest of the work and
delivery.
Remark – this document Created for Design basis and Overview of ELV system along with Minimum
Technical requirements or Quantity Bidder shall refer to Technical Compliance Sheet For Final technical
Specification.
Page 747 of 1358

TECHNICAL COMPLIANCE OF EQUIPMENT
Sl. No. Description of Item

1 Cat 6A U/FTP Shielded Cable
1.1 Specifications
Category 6A 4 pair U/FTP shielded LSZH cable should be compliant with
1.1.1
TIA/EIA‐568‐C.2
1.1.2 Should be of 4 twisted pairs of 23 AWG solid conductors
1.1.3 Should support network line speed up to 10 Gigabits per second.
Shall be 4-pair Unshielded twisted pair with a cross filler/ isolator (+),
1.1.4 meeting Category 6A tested to 500 MHz or more (4 connector test
report from ETL(Intertek)/UL to be submitted with offer).
Should be ETL verified to TIA/EIA‐568‐C.2 Category 6A standard for
1.1.5
500MHz (ETL certificate to be enclosed along with the bid)
Third party report of Full Cat6A Channel/Performance Test should be
1.1.6
enclosed along with the technical bid.
1.2 Mechanical Characteristics
Construction: 4 pair shielded cable should be constructed of 4 individual
1.2.1
screened pairs.
1.2.2 Conductor should be solid Copper
1.2.3 Conductor Size should be 23 AWG
1.2.4 Insulator should be Polyethylene/Polyolefin
1.2.5 Jacket/ Sheath type should be LS0H (Low Smoke Zero Halogen)
1.2.6 NVP should be 75‐77% or better
Screen should be each individual pair enclosed in laminated aluminum
1.2.7
foil with drain wire.
1.2.8 Propagation Delay Skew should be 45 nS/100 max @ 1‐500 MHz
1.2.9 Mean Impedance should be 100Ω ± 6 @ 1‐500 MHz
Coupling Attenuation should be 45dB min @30‐100 MHz 40‐20 Log
1.2.10
(f/100) @ 100‐500 MHz
Operating Temperature should be Installation: 0˚C to +50˚C and
1.2.11
Operation: ‐20˚C to +60˚C
1.2.12 Should be RoHS Compliant
1.2.13 Should be certified by ETL/UL

1 CAT6A 24 Port Shielded Jack Panel
Should be supplied with individually replaceable 24 numbers
1.1
Category-6A I/O shielded Jacks complying as per the ANSI/TIA-568C.2
Should be 19” rack mountable and of 1U height & complete with all
1.2
mounting accessories
1.3 Should have label holder/cover for identification of ports
IDC Connector plastic housing should be polycarbonate and UL94V-0
1.4
rated.
Operating Life should be Minimum 20 reterminations and contact
1.5
material should be copper alloy.
Page 748 of 1358

1.6 Material should be CRS (cold rolled steel)

Should be supplied with metallic integrated rear cable management
1.7
shelf for cable strain relief.
1.8 Should have provision for better cable dressing at the rear
I/O operating Life should be minimum 750 insertion cycles and contact
1.9
1.10 I/O contact plating should be 50μ Gold/ 50μ Nickel minimum
I/O should be Spring-loaded shutter or cap to protects from dust and
1.11
contaminants.
1.12 Should be RoHS Compliant
1.13 Should be certified by ETL/UL

1 CAT6A 1/2/3/5 Meter Shielded Patch Cord
1.1 Category 6A Equipment cords (Length – 1/2/3/5 Mtr)
Conductors Should be of 4 twisted pairs of 26 AWG stranded copper
1.2
for better flexibility
1.3 Patch cords should conform to ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 for Cat 6A
1.4 Should have RJ-45 jacks with boots at both the ends.
1.5 All patch cords should be factory crimped and packed.
1.6 Should have LSZH jacket for safety
1.7 Operating Temperature should be -25°C to +55°C
Screen material should be aluminum/polyester shield with tinned
1.8
copper drain wire.
1.9 Plug Insertion Life should be Minimum 750 times
1.10 Contact Plating should be 1.27um gold or better
1.11 Shall be RoHS Compliant
1.12 Should be certified by ETL/UL.

1 CAT6A Information Outlet (IO) Jack
1.1 Should be conform to Category-6A as per ANSI/TIA-568-C.2
1.2 Should be support network line speeds up to 10 Gbps
I/O operating Life should be minimum 750 insertion cycles and contact
1.3
1.4 I/O contact plating should be 50μ Gold/ 50μ Nickel minimum
I/O should be Spring-loaded shutter or cap to protects from dust and
1.5
contaminants.
All information outlets for 22‐24 AWG copper cable should be use
1.6
insulation displacement connectors (IDC)
1.7 Operating Life should be minimum 750 insertion cycles
1.8 Operating Life should Minimum 20 re‐terminations.
1.9 Wire Acco S Mediation: 22‐24 AWG solid
1.10 Plastic Housing must be Polycarbonate, UL94V‐0 rated
1.11 I/O should be terminated using industry standard punch‐down tools.
1.12 Should be RoHS Compliant
1.13 Should be certified by ETL/UL
Page 749 of 1358


1 CAT6A Shielded Connectors/ RJ45 Plug (Toll Less)
1.1 Should be conform to Category 6A
1.2 RJ-45 meets TIA-568.2-D Category 6A component performance.
1.3 IP 20 rated
1.4 Plug Insertion Life should be Minimum 750 times
1.5 Should support for 23-26 AWG wire size
1.6 Should Supports 10GB networks
1.7 Contact plating material should have 50u” gold plating
1.8 Shall be RoHS Compliant
1.9 Should be certified by ETL/UL.

1 Single Mode Fiber Cable 6/12 Core
Optical fibers in water blocked loose tube, taped, corrugated steel
tape armored (STA) polyethylene (HDPE) outer sheathed embedded
with two steel wires on the periphery. The cables are with UV
1.1
Stabilized PE Jacket and protected from Rodent attacks. Complying to
ISO/IEC 11801, EN50173, ANSI/TIA 568-C.3, Telcordia GR-20; suitable
for use in indoor / outdoor ducts, direct burial and backbone cabling.
Single Mode, 9/125-micron primary coated buffers, OS2 (IEC 60793-2-
1.2
50, B1.3 and ITU T G652.d).
1.3 Uni-tube construction,
1.4 Polybutylene, Terephthalate (PBT)
1.5 White
1.6 3.0/2.0 mm nominal OD/ID
1.7 4/6/8/12
Blue, Orange, Green, Brown, Slate (Grey), White, Red, Black, Yellow,
1.8
Violet, Pink, Aqua
1.9 Thixotropic Gel (Tube) Petroleum Jelly (Interstices)
1.10 Polyethylene Terephthalate
1.11 Corrugated Steel Tape Armor (ECCS Tape) Thickness > 0.125mm
1.12 Two Steel wires (0.9 mm dia)
1.13 Polyester based yarns below armored tape for easy ripping
1.14 UV Stabilized Polyethylene (HDPE)
1.15 2.0 mm nominal
1.16 Black
ISO/IEC 11801 2nd Edition, type OS1/OS2; AS/ACIF S008; AS/NZS
3080; TIA/EIA 568.C.3; IEC-60793-1, 60793-2 EN50173, ANSI/TIA 568-
1.17
C.3, Telcordia GR-20; suitable for use in indoor / outdoor ducts, direct
burial and backbone cabling, RoHS Complaint
1.18 9.0 MM
1.19 80 kg/km +‐ 1o %
1.20 2 km ± 10%
1.21 20 X Overall diameters
1.22 10 X Overall diameters
Page 750 of 1358

1.23 1500N
1.24 2000N/10 cm
1.25 . ‐20°C ±70°C
Characteristics‐Optical Performance Max. Attenuation (Cable with
fibers) At 1310 nm: 0.35 dB/km at 1550 nm: 0.22 dB/km Max.
1.16
Average Attenuation; At 1310 nm: 0.33 dB/km at 1550 nm: 0.21
dB/km

1 LC-LC Type 9/125µm Single mode OS2 Optical Fiber Patch Cords
1.1 9/125 µm, OS2, Duplex Zip cord.
The optical fiber patch leads shall comprise of Single-mode
1.2 9/125μm OS2 fiber with 2XLC type fiber connectors terminated at one
end and 2X LC type fiber connectors at another end of the patch cord.
1.3 (Duplex): 2.0mm ± 0.1mm x 4.1± 0.2mm
1.4 900µ tight buffer
1.5 Aramid Yarn
1.6 LS0H IEC 61034-1 & 2, IEC-60332-1, IEC-60754-1 & 2
1.7 0.30dB(max)
1.8 -40°C to +85°C
1.9 ETL Tested
ISO/IEC 1108:2008, ANSI/TIA/ EIA 568.C.3, ANSI/TIA/EIA-492,
1.10
TELECORDIA GR-409, ICEA-596

6 /12/24 Port Fiber Optic Rack Mount LIU with Adaptors Plates, Splice
1
Tray and Pigtails
1.1 LC-Style
1.2 -20 Degree C to +70 Degree C or better
1.3 500 cycles, Beige
1.4 200 cycles, Blue
1.5 Pre-radiused Ceramic Ferrules
1.6 Not more than 0.75 dB per mated pair
1.7 6/12/24 Ports Loaded
1.8 1U 19” / ETSI versions available
The FMS fiber management shelf series is ideal for high density front
1.9
patching applications.
Its compact design and high-density capacity allow it to deliver carrier
1.20 class fiber management to central offices, Pops, FTTx, mobile systems
and LANs.
1.21 1U: 12/24 Fiber terminations Upgradable Up to 96 LC port in 1 U
Page 751 of 1358

Should be supplied loaded with secondary coated LC pigtails, Splice

1.22
Tray & Splice Protector
1.23 Mounting brackets can be placed in different positions
1.24 Easy access to splicing tray
1.25 Easy access to back side of connector
1.26 Labeling strip for adhesive labels and better cable management
1.27 Fiber guides, radius controls & secure tie downs provided

The bidder must be a legal entity registered in India under the
Companies Act, 1956, having registered office and operations in India.
The entity should have been operational in India. (Certificate of
1 Incorporation and Memorandum / Articles of Association) The OEM of
Passive Network Components should be present in the India for last
25 Years. (Document proof Required- Proof of Incorporation should
be attached)
2 The company should have a Valid PAN and a valid (GSTN)
25‐year Performance warranty; Warranty to cover Bandwidth of the
3
specified and installed cabling system
4 Should have Technical / Telephonic support center in India
5 OEM must have ISO 9001:2008, ISO 9001:14001, ISO 45001
6 Factory Test report must be provided for the product during supply.
7 All the components/raw material used must be RoHS verified
OEM should have manufacturing Unit, Product design & development
8
center in India.
OEM should have at least 2-3 dedicated Presales/Technical manpower
9
in India for Tech support.
10 Only Premium Brand and No Class B Products should be quoted
The entire passive components Copper & Fiber should be from single
11
OEM of one make.
Quoted product part numbers must be available on OEM’s official
12
website
The OEM and Bidder should not be blacklisted by the Central / State
Government, the subordinate organizations, public sector
13 undertakings of government or a statutory authority from
participating in any project as on the date of proposal.

1 15U Wall Mount Double Section
The 19" wall mount cabinet are intended for digital infrastructure The
wall mount cabinets made up of steel frame structure The 19" Wall
mount cabinet comes in colors The 19" Wall Mount cabinet can be
1.1
equipped with rear cover for better sealing of the cabinets. Equipment
and accessories for the thermal and cable management such as cable
manage, cantilever tray, cooling fan, power distribution unit
Page 752 of 1358

Top cover made up of CRCA sheet + powder coated

Bottom cover made up of CRCA sheet + powder coated
Side Panels made up of CRCA sheet + powder coated
1.2
Frame made up of CRCA sheet + powder coated
Recess angel made up of CRCA sheet + powder coated
Door trims made up of CRCA sheet + powder coated
Salt spray test according to ISO 9227 (NSS test) and IEC EN 60068-2-11
1.3 (Ka test) for 168 hours: degree of rusting Ri1 according to ISO 4628-3,
propagation ≤ mm according to ISO 4628-8
19" Rack: Steel frame structure design, metal top cover with 2 fan
provision and cable entry provision covered with edge protected
1.4 rubber grommet, bottom cover with cable entry provision covered
with edge protected rubber grommet provide, powder coated finish
texture matt - 60 to 80 uM
1.5 Front glass single door with cam lock & key
1.6 Front panel mounting hardware
1.7 Cantilever Tray 250 mm D
1.8 230C A/C 90 CFM fan mounted on top cover -Optional
1.9 Horizontal cable Manager 1U with PVC loops
1.10 Weight carrying capacity (Certified - 60 Kg)
Racks to be preferably made out high quality Tata Steelium CRCA
1.11
sheets - 0.8/1.5 mm CRCA Sheets.
1.12 5 Ply Carton packaging with edge protectors
1.13 600W x 500D

1 42U Floor Mount
Standard Rack configuration would be welded frame with 4 nos. of
1.1 pillars of 1.5 mm thick CRCA sheet of 5 folded profile and welded from
top to bottom for reinforcement.
This is joined to the top cover and bottom cover having air cooled
ventilation for exhaust of hot air. The front door has provision of glass
1.2
as well as perforation with adequate ventilation in the rear door. Both
the Side panels are fitted with slam latches for easy removal.
1.5 mm CRCA Multi Fold Fabricated Frame to achieve high structural
1.3 Strength. Designed to carry loads of 1250 Kgs. Easy to Assemble with
the SKD design.
1.4 Front Perforated Dual Door & Rear Dual Perforated door
Support Channel gets screw fixed directly to front & Rear frame. Gives
1.5
High strength Load gets divide on robust Welded Frame.
Made of 1.2 mm CRCA and concealed from exterior view. Allows

1.6 provision for 4 nos. Fan mounting. Helps in easy installation like cable
tray support
Page 753 of 1358

4 nos. U marked Rails made of 2mm CRCA sheet.

1.7
These are adjustable with the depth space provided in the rack.
1.8 Degrees of Ingress Protection, IP 20 according to IEC 60529
1.9 Degree of Impact Protection, IK 08 according to IEC 62262
Corrosion Resistance through Salt Spray test according to ISO 9227 for
1.10
168 hours protection
Process validations thru’ NABL labs Ensures a Compliant & Robust
1.11
Product
1.12 Weight carrying capacity up to 1250 Kg
1.13 RAL 9005 Fine Texture – 60 to 80uM.
1.14 Fine texture finish achieved through Epoxy polyester Hybrid Powder
1.15 60 – 80 Micron powder deposit
1.16 Fine Texture Finish for Aesthetic appearance
1.17 High Scratch resistance against any sharp object
sheet steel, Removable Side panels, single point locking with quick
1.18
release latches
1.19 Fan's -230V AC - 90 CFM, dB 42
Power Distribution Unit - 06/13- or 6/16-Amp Multi-Standard - 12
1.20
Socket
Set of 4 castors (2"/3" height), 2 of brakes on front side and 2 without
1.21
brakes
Mounting Hardware Packets with set of M 6 screw, Cage Nuts and
1.22
Washer set of 10 or 20
1.23 1000WX1000D, 1000Wx1200D

1 Layer 3 Switch
1 Architecture & Performance
The Switch should Support flexible multi-Gigabit for
1.1
100M/1G/2.5G/5G/10G connections
Switch should provide high bandwidth with true physical stacking of
1.2
up to 4 units
1.3 High resiliency with redundant power supply (Dual AC)
1.4 Total port density of switch should be 28 or high
Switch should be equipped with 4 nos. ports which are compatible
1.5
with 100M/1G/2.5G/5G/10G bps
1.6 Must have 16 nos. of SFP+ (10Giga Fiber) ports
1.7 Also, should support 8 nos. 10GigaEthernet Ports
1.8 Console port DB9
1.9 Switch should have minimum 3 FAN
The Switch should have non-blocking wire speed switch fabric,
1.10 should have Minimum 560 Gbps switching capacity and 416 Mpps
forwarding rate.
The Switch should support Min. 32K Mac address or more, should
1.11
support Min. 4K VLANs
Page 754 of 1358

Should have 4M (on chip) Packet buffer (Egress/Ingress), Dual Flash

1.12
(64 MB), and 8GB RAM
1.13 should support 12K Bytes Jumbo frame
Should support EEE (802.3az) standard for minimize the power
1.14
consumption
1.15 Should support Dual Software (firmware) image
Switch should support external redundant power supply and
1.16
removable FAN
1.17 Acoustic noise should be 58 dBA or better
2 Should support the following Standard
IEEE 802.3 10BASE-T Ethernet, IEEE 802.3u 100BASE-TX Ethernet, IEEE
2.1 802.ab 1000BASE-T Ethernet, IEEE 802.3z 1000BASE-X Ethernet, IEEE
802.3x flow control
IEEE 802.1p class of service, priority protocols, IEEE 802.1X port
2.2
authentication, IEEE 802.3ad LACP aggregation
3 Traffic Management and QoS
Rate limiting: Rule-based/port-based bandwidth control, 64 kbps
3.1
granularity
3.2 Port-based egress traffic shaping and Broadcast storm control
3.3 IEEE 802.1p with 8 priority queues per port for different traffic types
3.4 Weighted Round Robin (WRR)/SPQ/WFQ scheduling algorithm
3.5 Supports DSCP, Supports DSCP to 802.1p priority mapping
Supports IGMP/IGMP snooping v1, v2, v3 and support congestion
3.6
control on all ports
3.7 Port-based VLAN, protocol based VLAN, Private VLAN.
3.8 802.1ad and VLAN stacking (Q-in-Q)
4 Link Aggregation
IEEE 802.3ad LACP link aggregation compliant, support static manually
4.1 port trunking up to 8 aggregation groups, 8 ports/per group randomly
selected
5 Resilient Network
IEEE 802.1D spanning tree protocol, IEEE 802.1w Rapid Spanning Tree
5.1
Protocol (RSTP), IEEE 802.1s Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP)
5.2 Dual configuration files and Dual flash images
Switch supports Equal Cost Multipath Routing (ECMP) and Virtual
5.3 Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) for increased network availability
and reliability.
5.4 BPDU Guard, Loop Guard, and Root Guard Support
5.5 Switch should support optional redundant power supply
5.6 Multicast Group support 1K or better
6 User Security and Authentication
6.1 should support MAC filtering per port secures access to each port
6.2 should support IEEE 802.1Q tag-based and port-based VLAN
6.3 should support Guest VLAN (port based/MAC based)
Page 755 of 1358

should support at least 9 MAC per port (Exclusive with protocol-based

6.4
& IP subnet-based VLAN, for 8/24 port devices)
6.5 Support GVRP, automatic VLAN member registration
should have at least 1K static VLAN, up to 4K dynamic VLAN and Full
6.6
range 4K PVID support and support Port-base VLAN & VLAN isolation
should support Intrusion lock for security and static and dynamic MAC
6.7
binding
should support specific MAC forwarding per port: only specified MAC
6.8
addresses can access the network (Port security)
should support limited MAC number per port and should be capable
6.9
to set mac ageing time
6.10 should support IP source guard and Loop guard
6.11 should support RADIUS MAC login, IP filtering
6.12 should support TCP/UDP socket filtering, BPDU transparency
should support 802.1X port-based authentication, compensated
6.13
assignment over VLAN and bandwidth for valid access
6.14 should support TACACS+ and Password encryption
7 Network Administration Security
Username/password required for Web/Telnet/local console
7.1
administrators
7.2 Two-level security by specific SNMP read/write community
7.3 Multiple login session, Multiple access permission management
7.4 should support SSH v1/v2, SSL
8 IPv6 Support
IPv6 over Ethernet, IPv6 Addressing architecture, IPv6 Path MTU,
8.1 ICMPv6, Dual Stack, Neighbor discovery, DHCPv6 client and Relay,
Dual stock. Patch MTU
8.2 Minimum path MTU size of 1280 or better
9 Layer-3 Features
9.1 Should support VRRP for redundancy
9.2 Should support ECMP for multipath
9.3 Policy Based Routing
9.4 Static Routing (minimum 1K for IPv4 & IPv6))
9.5 L3 forwarding table (4K IPv4 entries; 2K IPv6 entries)
10 Network Management
Switch should be supplied with management software to manage and
10.1
maintain multiple switches from central location
10.2 should support MED
Should support clustering at-least for 20 switches for managing by one
10.3
IP address
Web-based management, Telnet CLI, SNMP v1, v2c, v3, should have
10.4
RS-232c local console
10.5 IP management: Static IP or DHCP client
Page 756 of 1358

RMON four RMON groups 1, 2, 3, 9 (history, statistics, alarms and

10.6
events) for enhanced traffic management, monitoring and analysis
10.7 Switch should support 64 static routes
10.8 Port mirroring: supports source/destination/both port mirroring
10.9 L3 forwarding should support (2K IPv6 Entries or more)
10.10 Minimum 128 IP interface for IPv4 and 64 for IPv6
10.11 Intelligent ACL (L2/L3/L4 Access List Control)
Based on MAC address, Based on VLAN, based on IP address, based
10.12
on protocol type, based on TCP/UDP type, Based on DSCP
11 Routing
11.1 Static route, Policy-based route, Multiple default route
12 MIB Information
RFC 1066 TCP/IP-based MIB, RFC 1213, 1157 SNMP v2c/v3 MIB, RFC
2011, 2012, 2013 SNMP v2 MIB, RFC 1493 bridge MIB, RFC 2674 bridge
12.1 MIB extension, RFC 1643 Ethernet MIB, RFC 2358 Ethernet-like MIB,
RFC 1757 RMON group 1, 2, 3, 9 and RFC 1757 RMON group 1, 2, 3, 9
and RFC 2819, 2925 Remote Management MIB
13 Certification
LVD, SNMI, FCC Part 15 (Class A), CE EMC (Class A), BSMI ENC, and RoHS
13.1
(Level A)
The OEM Brand should be having valid ISO 9000, ISO 14000 and ISO
13.2 50001 corticates, all these certificates must be submitted in technical
bid.
14 Environmental specifications
Operating temp. 0 Deg C to 50 Deg C, Storage Temp. -40 Deg C to
14.1
70deg C
14.2 Operating Humidity 10% to 95 % (Noncondensing)
14.3 Power
14.4 Internal Dual AC power supply
15 MTBF: 65,62.70 hr or better
Auto detect and identify the connected devices, and list device
information such as model, firmware version, MAC address, IP
16 address, system name in the web-based management page. Supports
the web redirection to the connected device, and reset to factory
default
Provides a centralized management utility to discover and configure
the network devices, letting user easily to maintain the network. User
17
doesn't need to install various application or purchase expensive NMS
to do the cross-device management
The OEM Brand should be having valid ISO 9000, ISO 14000
18
certificates, all these certificates must be submitted in technical bid.
19 Compliance should be attached with tender on OEM Letterhead
20 Latest Datasheet should be attached with the Tender.
All active components (Switches/AP/SFP) offered shall be of the same
21 Make/manufacturer and shall be covered under same back-up
guarantee from the same OEM, to Ensure full compatibility,
Page 757 of 1358


1 Layer 2+ PoE Network Switch
Switch should have total 30 Nos. Gigabit port including 24 Nos. of
1.1 10/100/1000 Mbps RJ-45 Ethernet Ports and (1G/2.5G/5G/10G) 4 x 1G
SFP/10G SFP+ slots with be equipped with SFP
The Switch should have non-blocking wire speed switch fabric, should
1.2 have Min. 168 Gbps Back plane or more and should have Min. 125
Mpps or more
The switch should be flexible enough to be managed through cloud
1.3 and standalone mode. The Basic cloud management should be from
day one.
1.4 The Switch should have non-blocking wire speed switch fabric
1.5
The switch should have PoE power budget of at least 400 Watt or
1.6
more.
1.7 Switch should have USB-C out-of-band console port
Should have 2 MB Packet buffer (Egress/Ingress) and 64 MB Flash, and
1.8
1 GB RAM or more
Acoustic Noise value and Heat Dissipation (BTU/hr) support (dB): 27
1.9 dB and 128.27 respectively. And 520170 hrs. MTBF at 25 °C. EEE
(Energy efficient Ethernet)
1.10 Switch should support 1K IPv4 static route and 512 K IPv6 static Routes
1.11
consumption
1.13 The switch should be able to do virtual Stacking up to 20 units per IP
802.3x flow control IEEE 802.3af PoE and IEEE802.3at PoE plus
2.2
3.1
granularity
3.6
4 Link Aggregation
4.1
port trunking up to 8 aggregation groups, 8 ports/per group randomly
Page 758 of 1358

selected
5 Resilient Network
5.1
6.4
should have at least 4K static VLAN, up to 4K dynamic VLAN and Full
6.7
range 4K PVID support and support Port-base VLAN & VLAN isolation
Should support Protocol and IP Based VLANs Guest VLAN, Private
6.8 VLAN, MAC-based VLAN, Voice VLAN, Dynamic VLAN, GARP with
GVRP/GMRP, Double Tag (QinQ)
6.9
binding
6.10
should support limited MAC number per port and should be capable
6.11
to set mac ageing time
6.15
7.1
administrators
8 IPv6 Support
IPv6 over Ethernet, IPv6 Addressing, IPv6 Path MTU, ICMPv6, Dual Stack,
8.1
Neighbor discovery, DHCPv6 client and Relay
Switch should be supplied with management software to manage and
9.1
9.3
IP address
9.4
USB-C out-of-band console port
Page 759 of 1358

9.6 Should support DHCP server and Mirror CPU

9.7
10 Intelligent ACL (L2/L3/L4 Access List Control)
Based on MAC address, Based on VLAN, based on IP address, based on
10.1
protocol type, based on TCP/UDP type, Based on DSCP
11 MIB Information
11.1 MIB extension, RFC 1643 Ethernet MIB, RFC 2358 Ethernet-like MIB, RFC
1757 RMON group 1, 2, 3, 9 and RFC 1757 RMON group 1, 2, 3, 9 and
RFC 2819, 2925 Remote Management MIB
12 Certification
12.1 CE-LVD, FCC, CE, BSMI, RoHS compliant
The OEM Brand should be having valid ISO 9000, ISO 14000, all these
12.3
certificates must be submitted in technical bid.
Operating temp. 0 Deg C to 50 Deg C, Storage Temp. -40 Deg C to 70deg
13.1
C
14 Power
15 Input should be 100-240V AC, 50/60 Hz
information such as model, firmware version, MAC address, IP address,
16
system name in the web-based management page. Supports the web
redirection to the connected device and reset to factory default.
17
17.1 Compliance should be attached with tender on OEM Letterhead
17.2 Latest Datasheet should be attached with the Tender.
17.3 Make/manufacturer and shall be covered under same back-up

1 Layer 2 PoE Network Switch
1.1 10/100/1000 Mbps Ethernet PoE Ports and 4 Nos of 10G SFP+ with SFP
equipped
The switch should be flexible enough to be managed through cloud and
1.2 standalone mode. The Basic cloud management should be from day
one.
Page 760 of 1358

The Switch should have non-blocking wire speed switch fabric, should
1.4 have Min. 128 Gbps Back plane or more and should have Min. 95.2
Mpps or more
1.5 The Switch should support Min. 16K Mac address or more
1.6 The switch should have PoE power budget of at least 375 W.
Should support EEE IEEE802.3az standard for minimize the power
1.7 consumption on per port basis by supplying power on the basis of cable
length and active ports only
802.3x flow control, IEEE 802.3 10BASE-T Ethernet
IEEE 802.1D spanning tree protocolize 802.1w rapid spanning tree
2.2
protocol, IEEE 802.1s multiple spanning tree protocol
2.3
3.1
granularity
3.2 Port-based egress traffic shaping
3.3 Switch should support Jumbo frames of 9KB
should support broadcast storm control to avoid unwanted traffic
3.4
attack on CPU
should support IEEE 802.1p with priority queues for different traffic
3.5
types
3.6 Supports IGMP/IGMP snooping v1, v2, v3
3.7 Configurable IGMP snooping timer and priority
3.8 IGMP snooping statistics, and static multicast
3.9 Should support congestion control on all ports
4 Link Aggregation
4.1 IEEE 802.3ad LACP link aggregation compliant
4.2 Up to 8 aggregation groups,
5 Resilient Network
5.1 Should support IEEE 802.1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP)
5.2 Should support IEEE 802.1s Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP)
5.3 Should support Multiple Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol
Switch should support Protocol Based VLAN, IP subnet based, Guest
6.3
VLAN and MVR
6.4 Should support IEEE 802.1x based on guest VLAN and MAC-based
6.5 should support Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling(L2PT)
Page 761 of 1358

6.6 should support GVRP, automatic VLAN member registration

6.7 should support at least 1K static VLAN, up to 4K dynamic VLAN
6.8 should support Port-base VLAN & VLAN isolation
6.9 should support limited MAC number per port
7 Should be capable to set mac ageing time
should support Loop guard to avoid loops in network generated on
7.1
unmanaged switches
7.2 should support RADIUS MAC login
7.3
7.4 Should support 802.1ab LLDP and MED
7.5 Should support NTP, Syslog and DNS client
7.1 should support SSL
Should support static and dynamic IP-MAC and Port binding for port
7.2
security
Should support DHCP snooping to set the authorized ports to
7.3
communicate with DHCP servers
7.4 Should support ARP inspection
7.5 Should support AAA through Radius and Tacacs+ servers
8 IPv6 Support
IPv6 over Ethernet, IPv6 Addressing, ICMPv6, Dual Stack, Neighbor
8.1
discovery
9.1 Web-based management, SNMP v1, v2c, v3
9.2
Switch should be supplied with management software to manage
and maintain multiple layer2 switches for Centralized and batch
9.4
configurations like IP configurations, IP renew, Web Gui access,
Firmware update, device locating etc.
9.5 Switch should support Schedule PoE.
9.6 Should support flow for traffic analyzing
9.7 Should support OAM and Connectivity fault management
Should have Cluster Stacking to manage up to 24 switches by single
9.8
IP address
Switch should be able to automatically detect the power
9.9 consumption status of each Powered Device and supply only the
amount of power required to minimize the waste and unused power.
Based on MAC address, VLAN, IP address, Protocol, TCP/UDP type
10.1
and DSCP
11 Routing
11.1 Static route
Page 762 of 1358

11.2 Assigned DHCP relay with specific source IP interface

12 Certification
12.1 CE-LVD, FCC, CE, BSMI, RoHS Compliant
IEC 62368-1:2014(second edition), EN62368-1:2014, EN 62368-
12.2
1:2014/AC:2015
13.1 Operating temperature 0 Deg C to 50 Deg C
The OEM Brand should be having valid ISO 9000, ISO 14000 and ISO
14 50001 certificates, all these certificates must be submitted in
technical bid.
15 Compliance should be attached with tender on OEM Letterhead
17 Make/manufacturer and shall be covered under same back-up
1 Layer 2 Access Network Switch
1.1 10/100/1000 Mbps RJ-45 Ethernet Ports and (1G/2.5G/5G/10G) 4 x 1G
SFP/10G SFP+ slots Modulated with SFP
The Switch should have non-blocking wire speed switch fabric,
1.2 should have Min. 168 Gbps Back plane or more and should have Min.
125 Mpps or more
The switch should be flexible enough to be managed through
1.3 cloud and standalone mode. The Basic cloud management
should be from day one.
1.5
1.6 Switch should have USB-C out-of-band console port
Should have 2 MB Packet buffer (Egress/Ingress) and 64 MB Flash, and
1.7
1 GB RAM or more
Acoustic Noise value and Heat Dissipation (BTU/hr) support (dB): 27 dB
1.8 and 128.27 respectively. And 520170 hrs. MTBF at 25 °C. EEE (Energy
efficient Ethernet)
1.9 Switch should support 1K IPv4 static route and 512 K IPv6 static Routes
1.10
consumption
1.12 The switch should be able to do virtual Stacking up to 20 units per IP
802.3x flow control.
2.2
Page 763 of 1358


3.1
granularity
3.6
4 Link Aggregation
4.1 port trunking up to 8 aggregation groups, 8 ports/per group randomly
selected
5 Resilient Network
5.1
6.4
should have at least 4K static VLAN, up to 4K dynamic VLAN and Full range
6.6
4K PVID support and support Port-base VLAN & VLAN isolation
Should support Protocol and IP Based VLANs Guest VLAN, Private VLAN,
6.7 MAC-based VLAN, Voice VLAN, Dynamic VLAN, GARP with GVRP/GMRP,
Double Tag (QinQ)
6.8
binding
6.9
should support limited MAC number per port and should be capable to
6.10
set mac ageing time
6.14
7.1
administrators
Page 764 of 1358

8 IPv6 Support
IPv6 over Ethernet, IPv6 Addressing, IPv6 Path MTU, ICMPv6, Dual Stack,
8.1
Neighbor discovery, DHCPv6 client and Relay
switch should be supplied with management software to manage and
9.1
9.3
IP address
9.4
USB-C out-of-band console port
9.6 Should support DHCP server and Mirror CPU
9.7
Based on MAC address, Based on VLAN, based on IP address, based on
10.1
protocol type, based on TCP/UDP type, Based on DSCP
11 MIB Information
11.1 MIB extension, RFC 1643 Ethernet MIB, RFC 2358 Ethernet-like MIB, RFC
1757 RMON group 1, 2, 3, 9 and RFC 1757 RMON group 1, 2, 3, 9 and
RFC 2819, 2925 Remote Management MIB
12 Certification
12.1 CE-LVD, FCC, CE, BSMI, RoHS compliant
The OEM Brand should be having valid ISO 9000, ISO 14000, all these
12.2
certificates must be submitted in technical bid.
Operating temp. 0 Deg C to 50 Deg C, Storage Temp. -40 Deg C to
13.1
70deg C
14 Power
15 Input should be 100-240V AC, 50/60 Hz
information such as model, firmware version, MAC address, IP
16 address, system name in the web-based management page. Supports
the web redirection to the connected device and reset to factory
default.
17
All actives (AP/ Switch/SFP) should be of same make and compatible
17.2
for better compatibility)
Page 765 of 1358


1 WiFi-6 Indoor Access Point
1.1 Main Design
Supply and installation of 802.11ax (Wi-Fi 6) wireless access point with
1.1.1 4x4 MIMO which along with unique dual optimized antenna
technology
1.1.2 Should work on 2.4 and 5 GHz wireless frequency simultaneously
Should have 4x4_2x2 MU-MIMO with 4+2 spatial stream. Should
support maximal ratio Combining Should be operable at 20, 40- and
80-MHz channels, should support data rates up to 575 Mbps over 802.
1.1.2 11n and 2400 Mbps over 802.11ax technology, should support A-
MPDU (Tx/Rx), A-MSDU (Tx/Rx) packet aggregation. Should have cyclic
delay diversity support, should have maximum like hood
demodulation support, should have low density parity check support
1.2 RF Specifications
Should be operable on the following frequency bands: 2.4 GHz
(IEEE802.11 b/g/n) USA (FCC): 2.412 to 2.462 GHz, Europe (ETSI): 2.412
1.2.1 to 2.472 GHz, 5 GHz (IEEE 802.11 a/n/ac) - USA (FCC): 5.15 to 5.35 GHz;
5.725 to 5.850 GHz European (ETSI): 5.15 to 5.35 GHz; 5.470 to 5.725
GHz
AP should have the Transmission power of 28 dBm and should have 6
1.2.2
nos. of embedded Dual optimized antennas for celling and wall mount.
1.2.2 Should have antenna gain of at least 5dBi on 2.4Ghz and 6dBi on 5Ghz
Should support of connectivity for at least 512 devices per AP (256 per
1.2.3
Radio) maximum association
1.2.4 Should have Min. Rx sensitivity up to -102 dBm
802.11ax Data Rate support up to 2400 Mbps in MCS11 (160Mhz, 4
spatial stream; GI=800 ns) 802.11ac: Data Rate support up to 866 Mbps
1.2.5 in MCS9 (80 MHz; 2 spatial streams; GI = 400 ns) 802.11ax: Data Rate
2.4GHz up to 575 Mbps in MCS11 (40 MHz; 2 spatial streams; GI = 800
ns)
1.3 LAN
1.3.1 2x Minimum support of ethernet ports
Number of Multi-gig LAN port should support (atleast-1) with 2.5GbE
1.3.2
data rate
1.3.3 Should support PoE and power consumption of more than 19 watts.
Should support the following standards - IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.3u, IEEE
1.3.4
802.11ab, IEEE 802.3au, IEEE 802.3az, IEEE 802.3at
1.4 WLAN Features
1.4.1 Should support Mesh connectivity as and when required with controller
1.4.2 Should support fast roaming
1.4.3 Should support Mesh AP for multiple SSID and VLAN
1.5 Wireless Security
Page 766 of 1358

Should support WEP, WPA/WPA2-PSK WPA/WPA2-Enterprise, WMM (Wi-

1.5.1
Fi Certified), WLAN Access control list, also support WPA3
Should support EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS, EAP-PEAP, EAP-FAST, EAP-AKA and
1.5.2
EAP-SIM
Should support IEEE 802.1X, RADIUS Authentication, Microsoft AD
1.5.3 Authentication, Web Authentication, LDAP Authentication, MAC
Filtering, Layer-2 Isolation, MAC Authentication.
1.5.4 Should support at least 16 of SSID
Should authenticate to embedded RADIUS Server of controller with
1.5.5
multiple profile
1.5.6 Should support rogue AP detection and containment
1.5.7 Should have WLAN access control list feature.
1.6 Network
1.6.1 Should have IPv6 support from day 1
1.6.2 Should support VLAN and DHCP client
7.1 QoS (PG)
7.1.1 Should support WMM and WMM Power save features
7.1.2 Should support Diffuser Marking
1.8 Management
Should be supplied with same make software’s which can detect all Aps
1.8.1
in the network and managed from single console in standalone mode
The software supplied with AP should be able to perform the following
tasks - IP configuration/renew, Device Location, password
.2 configuration, device reboot, firmware upgrade, Batch AP configuration
and firmware upgrade, Batch profile backup, Wi-Fi AP Planning, wireless
health management and coverage detection
1.8.3 AP should support Managed and standalone modes
1.8.4 Should also be manageable through CLI, WEB console and SNMP
1.8.5 Should have multiple level for management admin
Access Point should support Standalone, Hardware controller-based
management, and for ease of management also should support cloud-
1.8.6
based management for single central worldwide management from the
any corner of the world over the Internet connection.
For the local management should support vendor specific utilities for
1.8.7
local management.
Access Point should support application security and Content security
1.8.8
with Cloud based management
Access Point should support NAT feature on cloud mode to provide the
1.8.9
IP address to the connected clients.
Access Point should be equipped with 1-year professional pack Cloud
1.8.10
license and should fall to basic license when license expired.
9.1 Others
9.1.1 Should be manufactured by plenum rated material
9.1.2 MTBF value should be at least 635,000 hrs. or better
Page 767 of 1358

Access Point should have PoE support, also should have option to
9.1.3
power up with Power Adopter for power redundancy
1.10 Certifications
1.10.1 FCC Part 15C, FCC Part 15E, ETSI EN 300 328, EN 301 893, LP0002.
FCC Part 15B, EN 301 489-1, EN 301 489-17, EN55022, EN55024,
1.10.2
EN61000-3-2/-3, BSMI CNS13438
1.10.3 EN 60950-1, IEC 60950-1, BSMI CNS14336-1
1.11 Environmental Specifications
1.11.1 Should support operating temperature up to 50°C
1.11.2 Should be operable under humidity of 10% to 90% (non-condensing)
1.11.3 Latest Datasheet should be attached with the Tender.
All active (Controller/AP/Switch/SFP) should be of same make for better
1.11.4
compatibility)

1 WiFi-6 Indoor Access Point
1.1 Main Design
Supply and installation of 802.11ax (WiFi 6) wireless access point with
1.1.1 4x4 MIMO which along with unique dual optimized antenna
technology
1.1.2 Should work on 2.4 and 5 GHz wireless frequency simultaneously
Should have 4x4_2x2 MU-MIMO with 4+2 spatial stream. Should
support maximal ratio Combining Should be operable at 20, 40- and
80-MHz channels, should support data rates up to 575 Mbps over 802.
1.1.3 11n and 4800 Mbps over 802.11ax technology, should support A-
MPDU (Tx/Rx), A-MSDU (Tx/Rx) packet aggregation. Should have cyclic
delay diversity support, should have maximum like hood
demodulation support, should have low density parity check support
1.2 RF Specifications
Should be operable on the following frequency bands: 2.4 GHz
(IEEE802.11 b/g/n) USA (FCC): 2.412 to 2.462 GHz, Europe (ETSI): 2.412
1.2.1 to 2.472 GHz, 5 GHz (IEEE 802.11 a/n/ac) - USA (FCC): 5.15 to 5.35 GHz;
5.725 to 5.850 GHz European (ETSI): 5.15 to 5.35 GHz; 5.470 to 5.725
GHz
AP should have the transition power of 28 dBm and should have 6 nos.
1.2.2
of embedded Dual optimized antennas for celling and wall mount.
1.2.3 Should have antenna gain of at least 5dBi on 2.4Ghz and 6dBi on 5Ghz
Should support of connectivity for at least 512 devices per AP (256 per
1.2.4
Radio) maximum association
1.2.5 Should have Min. Rx sensitivity up to -101 dBm
802.11ax Data Rate support up to 4800 Mbps in MCS11 (160Mhz, 4
spatial stream; GI=800 ns) 802.11ac: Data Rate support up to 866
1.2.6
Mbps in MCS9 (80 MHz; 2 spatial streams; GI = 400 ns) 802.11ax: Data
Rate 2.4GHz up to 575 Mbps in MCS11 (40 MHz; 2 spatial streams; GI
Page 768 of 1358

= 800 ns)
1.3 LAN
1.3.1 1x Minimum support of ethernet ports
1.3.2 Number of Multi-gig LAN port should support with 2.5GbE data rate
1.3.3 Should support PoE and power consumption of more than 25 watts.
Should support the following standards - IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.3u, IEEE
1.3.4
802.11ab, IEEE 802.3au, IEEE 802.3az, IEEE 802.3at
1.4 WLAN Features
Should support Mesh connectivity as and when required with
1.4.1
controller
1.4.2 Should support fast roaming
1.4.3 Should support Mesh AP for multiple SSID and VLAN
1.5 Wireless Security
Should support WEP, WPA/WPA2-PSK WPA/WPA2-Enterprise, WMM
1.5.1
(Wi-Fi Certified), WLAN Access control list, also support WPA3
Should support EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS, EAP-PEAP, EAP-FAST, EAP-AKA and
1.5.2
EAP-SIM
Should support IEEE 802.1X, RADIUS Authentication, Microsoft AD
1.5.3 Authentication, Web Authentication, LDAP Authentication, MAC
Filtering, Layer-2 Isolation, MAC Authentication.
1.5.4 Should support at least 16 of SSID
Should authenticate to embedded RADIUS Server of controller with
1.5.5
multiple profile
1.5.6 Should support rogue AP detection and containment
1.5.7 Should have WLAN access control list feature.
1.6 Network
1.6.1 Should have IPv6 support from day 1
1.6.2 Should support VLAN and DHCP client
1.7 QoS (PG)
1.7.1 Should support WMM and WMM Power save features
1.7.2 Should support Diffuser Marking
1.8 Management
Should be supplied with same make software’s which can detect all Aps
1.8.1
in the network and managed from single console in standalone mode
The software supplied with AP should be able to perform the following
tasks - IP configuration/renew, Device Location, password
1.8.2 configuration, device reboot, firmware upgrade, Batch AP configuration
and firmware upgrade, Batch profile backup, Wi-Fi AP Planning, wireless
health management and coverage detection
1.8.3 AP should support Managed and standalone modes
1.8.4 Should also be manageable through CLI, WEB console and SNMP
1.8.5 Should have multiple level for management admin
Page 769 of 1358

Access Point should support Standalone, Hardware controller-based

management, and for ease of management also should support cloud-
1.8.6
based management for single central worldwide management from the
any corner of the world over the Internet connection.
For the local management should support vendor specific utilities for
1.8.7
local management.
Access Point should support application security and Content security
1.8.8
with Cloud based management
Access Point should support NAT feature on cloud mode to provide the
1.8.9
IP address to the connected clients.
Access Point should be equipped with 1-year professional pack Cloud
1.8.10
license and should fall to basic license when license expired.
1.9 Others
1.9.1 Should be manufactured by plenum rated material
Should support Outdoor averments with up to IP67 industrial-grade
1.9.2
weather proofing
1.9.3 MTBF value should be at least 992,500 hrs. or better
Access Point should have PoE support, also should have option to
1.9.4
power up with Power Adopter for power redundancy
1.10 Certifications
1.10.1 FCC Part 15C, FCC Part 15E, ETSI EN 300 328, EN 301 893, LP0002
FCC Part 15B, EN 301 489-1, EN 301 489-17, EN55022, EN55024,
1.10.2
EN61000-3-2/-3, EN60601-1-2, BSMI CNS13438
1.10.3 EN 60950-1, IEC 60950-1, BSMI CNS14336-1
1.11 Environmental Specifications
1.11.1 Should support operating temperature up to 65°C
1.11.2 Should be operable under humidity of 10% to 90% (non-condensing)
1.12 Compliance should be attached with tender on OEM Letterhead
1.14
compatibility)

Wi-Fi Access Point Controller
Installation and supply of Controller with Security Gateway which is
empowered by AI to level up network protection and tackles unknown
t, empowered by cloud intelligence to level up network protection and
1 tackles unknown threats, and also should have capability of all security
services such as Web security, Application Security, Malware Blocker,
Reputation Filter, etc., but also sandboxing and Secure porter with
infographic dashboard.
Devise should support Intelligence Machine learning ecosystem that
2
can strengthen its defense and stay immune to new unknown attacks.
Page 770 of 1358

Device should support Hybrid Scanning (stream-based engine and a

3 cloud query running simultaneously) for Leveling up Malware blocking
to maximize malware detection rate.
Device should support Reporting applications to sees, analyses, and
4 reports network threats so admin can be advised what security actions
to take.
Device should have minimum 12x 1Gigabit and 2x SFP ports which
5
should be configurable as WAN or LAN.
Device should have USB3.0 ports for log storage and future support for
6
Mobile internet backup
Derive should be 19" Rack-mountable, Finless, and Console port for
7
recovery and configurations.
SPI firewall throughput 8000 Mbps, VPN throughput 1500 Mbps, IDP
throughput 2700 Mbps, Antivirus throughput 2000 Mbps and UTM
8 throughput 1900 Mbps or better. Maximum throughput based on RFC
2544 (1,518-byte UDP packets) and VPN throughput measured based
on RFC 2544 (1,424-byte UDP packets
Max. TCP concurrent sessions 2,000,000, and Maximum sessions
9
measured using the industry standard IXIA IxLoad testing tool
1000 nos. concurrent IPsec VPN tunnels and minimum 10 nos.
10
concurrent SSL VPN
11 Device should support 128x VLAN interfaces
12 SPI firewall throughput should be 8000 Mbps or better.
Controller should support should have capability to manage maximum
13
520 Access Points and 8 nos AP from day one without license
Device should have security features such as Sandboxing, Web Security,
Application Security, Malware Blocker, IDP (Intrusion Detection and
14
Prevention), Reputation Filter, Geo Enforcer, Secure porter from day
one.
15 Device should support 2-Factor Authentication
Device should have capability to create VPN tunnel with Microsoft Azure
16
and Amazon VPC
17 Device should support 100-240 V AC Power input
18 Max. power consumption should be 46 Watt or better.
19 Heat dissipation should be 42.65 BTU/hr or better
Accessories such as Power cord and Rack mounting kit should be
20
supplied with the device
21 MTBF (hr) 947,736or better
EMC certificate support: FCC Part 15 (Class B), CE EMC (Class B), RCM
22
(Class B) BSMI Safety certificate support: LVD and BSMI
24
compatibility)
Page 771 of 1358

Network Firewall
1 Firewall throughput (HTTP): 8.9/6.8 Gbps
2 Threat Prevention throughput (HTTP): 3.3/3.2 Gbps
3 IPsec VPN throughput: 4.6 Gbps
4 New sessions per second: 100,000
5 Virtual systems (base/max): 1/6
6 Interface - L2, L3, tap, virtual wire (transparent mode)
OSPFv2/v3 with graceful restart, BGP with graceful restart, RIP, static
7
routing
8 Policy-based forwarding
9 Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet (PPPoE)
10 Multicast: PIM-SM, PIM-SSM, IGMP v1, v2, and v3
11 Path quality measurement (jitter, packet loss, latency)
12 Initial path selection (PBF)
13 Dynamic path change
14 Features: App-ID, User-ID, Content-ID, Wildfire, and SSL Decryption
Key exchange: manual key, IKEv1, and IKEv2 (pre-shared key, certificate-
15
based authentication)
16 Encryption: 3DES, AES (128-bit, 192-bit, 256-bit)
17 Authentication: MD5, SHA-1, SHA-256, SHA-384, SHA-512
18 802.1Q VLAN tags per device/per interface: 4,094/4,094
19 Aggregate interfaces (802.3ad), LACP
NAT modes (IPv4): static IP, dynamic IP, dynamic IP and port (port
20
address translation)
Additional NAT features: dynamic IP reservation, tunable dynamic IP and
21
port oversubscription
22 HA: active/active, active/passive
23 Failure detection: path monitoring, interface monitoring
Port: 10/100/1000 (8), 1G/2.5G/5G (4) / PoE, 1G SFP (6), 1G/10G SFP/SFP+
24
(4)
25 HSCI 10 gigabit high availability (1)
26 RJ-45 console port (1)
27 USB port (1)
28 Micro USB console port (1)
29 Mean Time Before Failure (MTBF): 24 Year
30 Input Voltage (Input Frequency): 100–240 VAC (50–60 Hz)
31 Safety: cTUVus, CB
32 EMI: FCC Class A, CE Class A, VCCI Class A
Environment: Operating temperature: 0°C to 40°C at 10,000 feet / non-
33
operating temperature: -4°F to 158°F; -20°C to 70°C
34 Airflow: Front to back
Page 772 of 1358

1 Form Factor/Height: 2U rack server

2 Processors: Minimum Intel Xeon Silver 4216 16C 100W / 2.1Ghz / 22 MB
3 Additional Processor: Minimum 1 Processor Should Be Provisioned
4 Chipset: Minimum Intel C624
Memory: Server should be compatible with 12 DIMMs per processor; six
5
memory channels per processor with two DIMMs per channel
Memory: Minimum 2 x 2.5" PM893 960GB Read Intensive SATA 6Gb HS
6
SSD
Memory protection: Processor's integrated memory controllers: Error
correction code (ECC), SDDC (for x4 -based memory DIMMs), ADDDC
7 (for x4-based memory DIMMs, requires Intel Xeon Gold or Platinum
processors), memory mirroring, memory rank sparing, patrol
scrubbing, and demand scrubbing.
8 Memory capacity: Expandable up to 1.5TB Per Processor
9 Drive Bays: Open Bay / 2.5" SATA/SAS 8-Bay Backplane
Hard Drive: Minimum 2 x 2.5" PM893 960GB Read Intensive SATA 6Gb
10
HS SSD
Ports: Minimum Front: 1x USB 2.0 port with Controller access and 1x
11 USB 3.0 port; optional 1x VGA port. Rear: 2x USB 3.0 ports and 1x VGA
port; optional 1x DB-9 serial port
Expansion Slots: Minimum 2 x RAID 730-8i 1GB Cache PCIe 12Gb
12
Adapter (PCI or Motherboard)
13 HBA/RAID Support: 16Gb Gen6 FC Dual-port HBA
Cooling: Five (one processor) or six (two processors) hot-swap single-
14
rotor system fans with N+1 redundancy
Security and Availability Features: TPM 1.2/2.0; PFA; hot-
swap/redundant drives, fans, and PSUs; 45°C continuous operation;
15
light path diagnostic LEDs; front-access diagnostics via dedicated USB
port
16 Network Interface: Minimum 10Gb 2-port Base-T LOM
17 Power (Energy Star 2.0 compliant): 2x hot swap/redundant: 750W
Systems Management: Controller embedded management,
18 Administrator centralized infrastructure delivery, Energy Manager
centralized server power management
19 OS: Microsoft Windows Server
20 Warranty: 8 x 7 x 60
1 Form Factor/Height: 2U rack server

2 Processors: Minimum Intel Xeon Silver 4214 12C 85W / 2.2GHz / 16.5 M
3 Additional Processor: Minimum 1 Processor Should Be Provisioned
4 Chipset: Minimum Intel C624
Memory: Server should be compatible with 12 DIMMs per processor; six
5
memory channels per processor with two DIMMs per channel
Memory: Minimum 2 x 2.5" PM893 960GB Read Intensive SATA 6Gb HS
6
SSD
Page 773 of 1358

Memory protection: Processor's integrated memory controllers: Error

correction code (ECC), SDDC (for x4 -
7 based memory DIMMs), ADDDC (for x4-based memory DIMMs, requires
Intel Xeon Gold or Platinum processors), memory mirroring, memory
rank sparing, patrol scrubbing, and demand scrubbing.
8 Memory capacity: Expandable up to 1.5TB Per Processor
9 Drive Bays: Open Bay / 2.5" SATA/SAS 8-Bay Backplane
Hard Drive: Minimum 2 x 2.5" PM893 960GB Read Intensive SATA 6Gb
10
HS SSD
Ports: Minimum Front: 1x USB 2.0 port with Controller access and 1x
11 USB 3.0 port; optional 1x VGA port. Rear: 2x USB 3.0 ports and 1x VGA
port; optional 1x DB-9 serial port
Expansion Slots: Minimum 2 x RAID 730-8i 1GB Cache PCIe 12Gb
12
Adapter (PCI or Motherboard)
13 HBA/RAID Support: 16Gb Gen6 FC Dual-port HBA
Cooling: Five (one processor) or six (two processors) hot-swap single-
14
rotor system fans with N+1redundancy
Security and Availability Features: TPM 1.2/2.0; PFA; hot-
swap/redundant drives, fans, and PSUs; 45°C continuous operation;
15
light path diagnostic LEDs; front-access diagnostics via dedicated USB
port
16 Network Interface: Minimum 10Gb 2-port Base-T LOM
17 Power (Energy Star 2.0 compliant): 2x hot swap/redundant: 750W
Systems Management: Controller embedded management,
18 Administrator centralized infrastructure delivery, Energy Manager
centralized server power management
19 OS: Microsoft Windows Server
20 Warranty: 8 x 7 x 60
7″ Cable Cubby With Touch panel

Providing and Fixing of
Screen type TFT Active matrix colour LCD
Size 5" (127 mm), measured diagonally
Resolution 800x480 (WVGA)
Pixel density 186.6 PPI
Aspect ratio .5:3
Colour depth 24 bit, 16.7 million colours
Transparency 8 bits
Brightness 850 nits (cd/m2)
Contrast .700:1
Backlight LED
Viewing angle ±70° horizontal, ±70° vertical
Touch screen Capacitive
RAM 2 GB
Storage 8 GB
Connectors 1 female RJ-45 connector
Data rate 10/100/1000Base-T, half/full
Page 774 of 1358

duplex with autodetect

DHCP, DNS, HTTP, HTTPS, ICMP,
Protocols IEEE 802.1x, SFTP, SSH, TCP/IP,
UDP/IP
Motion sensor On/off
Light sensor Auto/manual
Lid switch Open/closed
Speaker output 1 mono, 89 dB Max. SPL @ 0.1 m
Frequency response 750 Hz to 20 kHz, ±5 dB
Container format WAV (Microsoft RIFF)
Encoding LPCM (uncompressed)
BIS, CE, C-Tick, c-UL,FCC Class B,
Regulatory compliance
ICES, RoHS, UL, VCCI, WEEE
Extron / Light ware / Crestron /
Approved Make
Fidelity
MAF and Test Certificate Products Test Certificate
Three Input Multi-Format Switcher

Frame rate1 24, 25, 30, 502, or 602 fps
Chroma sampling1 4:4:4, 4:2:2, or 4:2:02
Colour bit depth1 8 bits per colour
HDMI 1.4 , DisplayPort 1.1a, HDCP
Signal type1
1.4
HDMI 10.2 Gbps (3.4 Gbps per colour)
DisplayPort 10.8 Gbps (2.7 Gbps per lane)
Maximum data rate 10.2 Gbps (3.4 Gbps per colour)
Maximum pixel clock 300 MHz
Up to 2560x1600* @ 60 Hz or 4K
Resolution range
(4096x2160) @ 30 Hz,
Formats RGB and YCbCr digital video
DVI 1.0, HDMI 1.4, HDCP 1.4, CEA-
Standards
861E
VGA input 1 VGA-WUXGA RGBHV
HDMI input 1 single link HDMI (or DVI-D*)
DisplayPort input 1 DisplayPort
Connectors 1 RJ-45 jack
Termination standards TIA/EIA T568B
Frequency response 20 Hz to 20 kHz, ±0.5 dB
THD + Noise 0.03% @ 1 kHz at nominal level
>90 dB at maximum input
S/N
(unweighted)
Stereo channel separation >80 dB @ 1 kHz
Number/signal type 1 stereo, unbalanced
(2) 3.5 mm stereo jack, 2 channel;
Connectors
tip (L); ring (R); sleeve (Gnd)
Page 775 of 1358

RS-232 via 1 rear panel 3.5 mm, 3-

Serial control port
pole captive screw connector
Pin configuration 1 = Tx, 2 = Rx, 3 = Gnd
9600 baud rate, 8 data bits, 1 stop
Baud rate and protocol
bit, no parity
Approved Make
Fidelity
Products Test Certificate
MAF and Test Certificate
wall plate type multi-format twisted pair transmitter

Frame rate1 24, 25, or 30 fps
Chroma sampling1 4:4:4, 4:2:2
Signal type DVI 1.0, HDMI 1.4, HDCP 1.4
video data rate 10.2 Gbps (3.4 Gbps per colour)
HDMI 10.2 Gbps (3.4 Gbps per colour)
VGA 6.75 Gbps (2.25 Gbps per colour)
Up to 1920x1200 or 1080p @ 60
Hz; 8-bit colour depth 2048x1080
Resolution range (2K) @ 60 Hz, 4K (4096x2160) @ 30
Hz or 4K UHD (3840 x 2160) @ 30
Hz; 8-bit colour
Formats RGB digital video
DVI 1.0, HDMI, HDCP 1.2, EDID 1.3,
Standards
CEA-861E
Interconnection between transmitter and receiver
Signal type 1 DTP 330 output
Connectors 1 female RJ-45
Termination standards TIA/EIA T568B
Up to 330' (100 m) using shielded
Signal transmission distance 1080p @ 60
twisted pair (STP) cable or XTP
Hz
DTP 24 cable
Signal transmission distance 2048x1080 Up to 330' (100 m) using STP cable
(2K) @ 60 Hz or XTP DTP 24 cable
Signal transmission distance 4K/UHD @ Up to 330' (100 m) using STP cable
30 Hz or XTP DTP 24 cable
Cable requirements Solid conductor, 24 AWG or better
Cable recommendations 400 MHz bandwidth STP cable
Unbalanced output: 0 dB;
Audio Gain
balanced output +6 dB
Audio Frequency response 20 Hz to 20 kHz, ±0.5 dB
0.03% @ 20 Hz to 20 kHz at
Audio THD + Noise
maximum output
>90 dB, at maximum output (15
Audio S/N
dBu), balanced (unweighted)
Page 776 of 1358

Audio Stereo channel separation >80 dB @ 1 kHz to 20 kHz

Number/signal type
Analog audio (over DTP) 2 stereos, unbalanced
Digital audio 1 embedded digital audio on DTP
2-ch PCM, PCM, Dolby Digital 2/0,
Dolby Digital 2/0 Surround, Dolby
Embedded digital audio source formats Digital 5.1, Dolby Digital EX, DTS
Digital Surround 5.1, DTS-ES
Matrix 6.1, DTS-ES Discrete 6.1
Connectors
tip (L); ring (R); sleeve (ground)
Impedance >10k ohms, DC coupled
Nominal level -10 dBV (316 mVrms)
Maximum level +7 dBu, unbalanced
Analog audio 1 stereo, unbalanced
Digital audio 1 embedded digital audio on DTP
2-ch PCM, PCM, Dolby Digital 2/0,
Dolby Digital 2/0 Surround, Dolby
Embedded digital audio source formats Digital 5.1, Dolby Digital EX, DTS
Digital Surround 5.1, DTS-ES
Matrix 6.1, DTS-ES Discrete 6.1
Connectors 1 female RJ-45 jack
Approved Make
Fidelity
wireless presentation SharePoint system

Frame rate1 24, 25, 30, 50, or 60 fps
Colour bit depth1 8, 10, or 12 bits per colour
Signal Type HDMI 2.0b, HDCP 2.3
Max. video data rate 18 Gbps (6 Gbps per colour)
Windows 10, 11 macOS 10.15, 11,
Operating systems
12
264, AVI, M2T, M2TS, M4V, MKV,
Video file formats
MOV, MP4, MPG, SDP, TS
Image file formats BMP, JPG, PNG, TIFF
Video codecs VP8
Audio codecs OPUS
MPEG-2, MPEG4/XviD (Simple
Profile), H.264 (Baseline, Main,
Video codecs High, Stereo SEI Profile), VC1
(Simple, Main, Advanced Profile),
WEBM VP8, MJPEG
AAC-LC (MPEG-2 part 7, MPEG-4
Audio codecs
part 3, sub part 4 and part 14,
Page 777 of 1358

MP4 mono or stereo audio, max

384 kbps)
PCM mono or stereo 16 kHz to 96
kHz, 16-bit to 32-bit
BMP, JPG, PNG, TIFF Apple® iOS
Image codecs
13 and later
Operating systems
Android and iOS: MPEG-2,
MPEG4/XviD (Simple Profile),
H.264 (Baseline, Main, High,
Video codecs
Stereo SEI Profile), VC1 (Simple,
Main, Advanced Profile), WEBM
VP8, MJPEG
AAC-LC (MPEG-2 part 7, MPEG-4

part 3, sub part 4 and part 14,
Audio codecs MP4 mono or stereo audio, max
384 kbps) PCM mono or stereo 16
kHz to 96 kHz, 16-bit to 32-bit
Number/signal type 1 HDMI digital video
Connectors 1 female HDMI type A
Horizontal frequency 15 kHz to 100 kHz
Vertical frequency 24 Hz to 75 Hz
Frame rates 24, 25, 30, 50, or 60 fps
Chroma sampling 4:4:4, 4:2:2, or 4:2:0
Colour bit depth 8, 10, 12 or 16 bits per colour
Number/signal type 1 HDMI output
Peripheral device power 250mA
1 embedded digital audio from
HDMI Input
HDMI (stereo)
1 embedded digital audio from
Decoder input
decoder (stereo)
Approved Make
Fidelity
Long Distance DTP Transmitter for HDMI

Frame rate1 24, 25, 30, 50, or 60 fps
Signal type HDMI 1.4, HDCP 2.3
Max. video data rate 10.2 Gbps (3.4 Gbps per colour)
Page 778 of 1358


Up to 2560x1600* @ 60 Hz or 4K
(4096x2160) @ 30 Hz, UHD
Resolution range (3840x2160) @ 30 Hz, 4K/UHD @
60 Hz with 4:2:0 chroma
subsampling
8, 10, or 12 bits — subject to the
Colour bit depth
maximum data rate limit
Number/signal type 1 single link HDMI (or DVI-D*)
Connectors 1 female RJ-45 per unit
Termination standard TIA/EIA T568B
Gain
0.03% @ 20 Hz to 20 kHz at
THD + Noise
maximum output
S/N
Stereo channel separation >80 dB @ 1 kHz to 20 kHz
Connectors
tip (L), ring (R), sleeve (ground)
Maximum level +6 dBV (unbalanced)
1 stereo (2 channel),
Number/signal type
balanced/unbalanced
(1) 3.5 mm captive screw
Connectors
connector, 5 pole
50 ohms unbalanced; 100 ohms
Impedance
balanced
Gain error ±0.1 dB channel to channel
Maximum level (600 ohm) >+11 dBu, balanced
Approved Make
Fidelity
Long Distance DTP Receiver for HDMI

frame rate1 24, 25, 30, 50, or 60 fps
Signal type HDMI 1.4, HDCP 2.3
Max. video data rate 10.2 Gbps (3.4 Gbps per colour)
Page 779 of 1358


Up to 2560x1600* @ 60 Hz or 4K
(4096x2160) @ 30 Hz, UHD
Resolution range (3840x2160) @ 30 Hz, 4K/UHD @
60 Hz with 4:2:0 chroma
subsampling
8, 10, or 12 bits — subject to the
Colour bit depth
maximum data rate limit
umber/signal type 1 single link HDMI (or DVI-D*)
Connectors 1 female RJ-45 per unit
Termination standard TIA/EIA T568B
Gain
0.03% @ 20 Hz to 20 kHz at
THD + Noise
maximum output
S/N
Stereo channel separation >80 dB @ 1 kHz to 20 kHz
Connectors
tip (L), ring (R), sleeve (ground)
Maximum level +6 dBV (unbalanced)
1 stereo (2 channel),
Number/signal type
balanced/unbalanced
Connectors
connector, 5 pole
Impedance
balanced
Maximum level (600 ohm) >+11 dBu, balanced
Approved Make
Fidelity
H.264 Streaming Media Processor

Providing and Fixing of high-performance recording and streaming processor for
capturing and distributing AV sources and presentations as recorded media or live
streaming. Should have a flexible platform for automating system operation.
Accepting HDMI, component, composite, and optional 3G-SDI signals, it applies
two-window processing to the selected sources. System Should record and stream
simultaneously and can stream at two different resolutions and bit rates
concurrently using a range of transport protocols and session management
options. System Should be licensing fees,
Page 780 of 1358

3 HDMI digital video (HDCP

compliant), 1 component video (Y,
R-Y, B-Y; interlaced, progressive,
Number/signal type
HD), or composite video Optional:
1 SDI, HD-SDI, or 3G-SDI digital
component video
4 female HDMI type A, 3 inputs and
1 loop-through 3 female BNC;
Connectors component video, composite
video Optional: 1 female BNC: 3G-
SDI, HD-SDI, SDI
Analog: 0.0 V to 1.0 Vp-p with no

Minimum/maximum level
offset
Impedance 75 ohms
640x480 to 1920x1200 (reduced
blanking), 480p, 480i, 576p, 720p,
Resolution range
1080i, 1080p, NTSC, and PAL,
sampled pixel for pixel
Return loss (input 3) <-30 dB @ 5 MHz (input 3)
12 bits per colour, 13.5 MHz

standard (low resolution video),
Analog sampling
165 MHz standard (RGB, YUVp,
DVI)
Digital sampling 8-, 10-, or 12-bits per channel
Digital processing 4:2:2, 8-bits per colour
H.264/AVC (ITU H.264, ISO/IEC
14496-10) 4:2:0, 8-bit colour
Compression Encoding profiles: High, Main,
Baseline; Encoding levels: 4.1, 4.0,
3.2, 3.1, 3.0; configurable GOP
2 H.264/AVC digital video over

Video output Ethernet 1 HDMI digital video
(HDCP compliant)
1 female RJ-45 (streaming) 1

Connectors
female HDMI type A
Frame rate Up to 30 fps for all output rates

H.264/AVC (Profile type: High,
Formats Main, Baseline. Profile level: 4.1,
4.0, 3.2, 3.1, 3.0)
Tri-level or bi-level component

Sync Input type
video
Page 781 of 1358

Recording and Storage File system for USB FAT32, NTFS, VFAT long file name
storage extensions, EXT2, EXT3, EXT4
H.264 and AAC in an MP4
Recording and Storage File types
container, JPEG, JSON, XML
Recording and Storage File transfer
FTP, SFTP, CIFS
protocols
128 GB (110 GB for recording files)
Internal storage capacity or 480 GB (440 GB for recording
files)
1 (front panel), 1 (rear panel), USB
External USB ports 2.0 (Each port is current limited to
1.5 A.)
2 stereos, balanced or unbalanced,
Audio input
1 with loop-through
3 stereo, digital de-embedded
from HDMI 1 loop-through from
Number/signal type
HDMI 1 stereo, digital de-
embedded from SDI (optional)
>10k ohms unbalanced, >20k
Impedance
ohms balanced
+4 dBu (1.23 Vrms), -10 dBV (316
Nominal level
mVrms), adjustable via input gain
Maximum level +18 dBu, (balanced or unbalanced)
CMRR >70 dB @ 20 Hz to 20 kHz
1 stereo, HDMI (re-embedded local
Number/signal type preview) 1 AAC-LC digital audio
over Ethernet
Approved Make
Fidelity
4K HDMI and Audio to USB Scaling Bridge

Frame rate1 24, 25, 30, 50, or 60 fps
Colour bit depth1 8 or 10 bits per colour
DVI 1.0, HDMI 1.4 and 2.0, HDCP
Signal Type
1.4 and 2.3
Number/signal type 1 HDMI/DVI*
8 or 10 bits per channel; 3 channels
Digital pixel data bit depth
for HDMI
Colours 1 billion (10-bit processing)
1 USB (scaled, non-HDCP
Number/signal type
compliant)
Page 782 of 1358

Vertical frequency 5 Hz to 60 Hz, in 5-Hz increments

Unbalanced output, -6
Gain
dB; balanced output, 0 dB
<0.03%, 20 Hz to 20 kHz at
THD + Noise
maximum level
1 stereo, de-embedded from HDMI
(PCM only) 1 mono mic/line level,
balanced or unbalanced (available
Number/signal type phantom power online input 1
only) 1 mono line level, balanced or
unbalanced 1 stereo USB,
(communication/program audio)
1 HDMI type A (1) 3.5 mm, 6 pole
Connectors captive screw (2 mono) 1 USB type
C female
1 HDMI, embedded (loop out) 2
mono or 1 stereo line level,
Number/signal type
balanced or unbalanced 1 stereo
USB
Impedance
balanced
>+21 dBu, balanced; >+15 dBu,
Maximum level (Hi-Z)
unbalanced
-100 dB to 0 dB, in 0.1 dB
Output volume range
increments
Approved Make
Fidelity
Six Input 4K/60 Seamless Presentation Switcher

24, 25, 30, 50, 60, 120, 144, or 240
Frame rate1
fps
Chroma sampling1 4:4:4 and 4:2:2, 4:2:0 at input only
Colour bit depth1 8 or 10 bits per colour
DVI 1.0, HDMI 1.4 and 2.0,
Signal type
DisplayPort 1.2, HDCP 1.4 and 2.3
1 DisplayPort 5 HDMI/DVI 1
Number/signal type
HDMI/DVI loop-out, configurable
1 female DisplayPort 5 female
connectors HDMI type A 1 female HDMI type A
loop-out
15 kHz to 270 kHz for resolutions
Horizontal frequency
up to 18 Gbps
8 or 10 bits per colour; 600 MHz
Digital sampling
pixel clock maximum
Colours 1.07 billion (10 bit 4:4:4 processing)
Page 783 of 1358

1 HDMI/DVI 1 DTP2/XTP/HDBT,
Number/signal type
configurable
1 female HDMI type A 1 female RJ-
Connectors
45
Unbalanced output: -6 dB;
Gain
balanced output: 0 dB
<0.1%, 20 Hz to 20 kHz at nominal
THD + Noise
level
>90 dB at maximum balanced
S/N
output (unweighted)
Crosstalk ≤-80 dB @ 1 kHz, fully loaded
Analog de-embedding LPCM up to 2.0/24-bit/96 kHz
LPCM up to 7.1/24-bit/192 kHz,
Dolby Atmos, Dolby TrueHD, and
HDMI pass-through Dolby legacy formats DTS:X, DTS-
HD Master Audio, DTS 96/24, and
DTS legacy formats
2 stereo or 4 monos,
balanced/unbalanced 1 HDMI,
Number/signal type embedded 1 DTP2/XTP/HDBT
(embedded digital, and remote
balanced/unbalanced analog*)
(2) 3.5 mm, 5 pole captive screw 1
Connectors
female HDMI type A 1 female RJ-45
Impedance
balanced
unbalanced
0 to -100 dB in 0.1 dB steps
Output volume range (Volume control not available on
loop output)
Approved Make
Fidelity
Six IFive Input HDCP-Compliant Scaler with Seamless Switching

2 RGBHV, RGBS, RGsB, RGBcvS,
component video (YUVi or
Number/signal type
YUVp/HDTV), S-video, composite
video 3 HDMI
2 female 15-pin HD 3 female HDMI

Connectors
type A
Analog: 0.0 V to 1.0 Vp-p with no
Minimum/maximum levels
offset
Page 784 of 1358

Impedance 75 ohms
12 bit digital (3D-adaptive comb
Decoder
filter)
12 bits per colour; 13.5 MHz
Analog sampling standard (video) 170 MHz standard
(RGB)
8, 10, or 12 bits per channel; 165
Digital pixel data bit depth
MHz pixel clock (HDMI)
Colours 1 billion (10-bit processing)
RGBHV, RGBS, RGsB, RGBcvS, bi-
Input type
level or tri-level component video
RGBHV, RGBS, RGsB, and bi-level
Output type
or tri-level component video
Unbalanced output: -6 dB;
Gain
balanced output: 0 dB
Frequency response Line out: 20 Hz to 20 kHz, ±0.5 dB
5 stereos, balanced/unbalanced 3
Number/signal type stereo, de-embedded from HDMI
(LPCM-2Ch only)
>10k ohms unbalanced, DC
Impedance
coupled
+4 dBu (1.23 Vrms), -10 dBV (316
Nominal level
mVrms)
Maximum level +21 dBu, (unbalanced)
Stereo/mono,
Number/signal type
balanced/unbalanced
1 analog 1 S/PDIF digital audio
( LPCM-2Ch, Dolby Digital, or DTS
Fixed output
only) 1 HDMI embedded 1 optional
3G-SDI or HD-SDI embedded
unbalanced
0 dB to -100 dB in 1.0 dB
Analog output volume range
increments
Approved Make
Fidelity
IP Link Pro Control Processor

SDRAM 512 MB
Flash 4.5 GB
Global Configurator® Plus and
Configuration software
Professional
Page 785 of 1358

Programming software Global Scripter®

Network switch 1 unmanaged 3 port switch
Connectors 3 female RJ-45 connectors
10/100/1000Base-T, half/full duplex
Data rate
with autodetect
DHCP, DNS, HTTP (redirect), HTTPS,
Protocols ICMP, IEEE 802.1X, NTP, SFTP, SMTP,
SNMP, SSH, TCP/IP, UDP/IP
1 bidirectional RS-232, RS-422, RS-
Quantity/type 485 (port 1) 2 bidirectional RS-232
(ports 2 and 3)
1) 3.5 mm captive screw connector,
5 pole
Connectors
(2) 3.5 mm captive screw connectors,
3 pole
Quantity/type 4 digital input/output (configurable)
(1) 3.5 mm captive screw connector,
Connectors
5 pole
Input voltage range 0 to 24 VDC, clamped at +30 VDC
Input impedance >10k ohms
Programmable pullup 1k ohms to +5 VDC
Threshold low to high 2.8 VDC
Threshold high to low 2.0 VDC
Digital outputs 250 mA sink from 24 VDC max.
1, 2, 3, 4 = digital I/Os 1, 2, 3, 4; 5 =
Pin configurations
Gnd
Approved Make
Fidelity
7" Wall Mount Touch Link Scheduling Panel

Screen type TFT Active-matrix colour LCD
Size 7" (17.8 cm), measured diagonally
Resolution 1024x600 (WSVGA)
Pixel density 170 PPI
Aspect ratio 17:10
Transparency 8 bits
Contrast 700:01:00
Backlight LED
Viewing angle ±75° horizontal, +70°/-75° vertical
SDRAM 2 GB
Flash 8 GB
Connectors 1 female RJ-45 connector
Page 786 of 1358


Data rate
with autodetect
DHCP, DNS, HTTP, HTTPS, ICMP,
Protocols IEEE 802.1x, SFTP, SSH, TCP/IP,
UDP/IP
Quantity/type 1 high-speed USB 2.0
Connectors 1 Micro-B receptacle
USB 2.0, USB 1.1, USB 1.0
Standards
compatible
Low speed (1.5 Mbps), full speed (12
Max. data rates
Mbps), high speed (480 Mbps)
Approved Make
Fidelity
12x8 ProDSP Digital Matrix Processors

Audio Parameter
Balanced output: 0 dB, unbalanced
Gain
output: -6 dB
<0.02%, 20 Hz to 20 kHz, at
THD + Noise S/N
maximum level
>107 dB, 20 Hz to 20 kHz, at
Analog Into Analog Out maximum balanced output
(unweighted)
110 dB, 20 Hz to 20 kHz, at full-scale
Analog Into Digital Out
output (unweighted)
115 dB, 20 Hz to 20 kHz, at
Digital Into Analog Out maximum balanced output
(unweighted)
<-90 dB @ 20 Hz to 20 kHz, fully
Crosstalk
loaded
-100 dB to 0 dB (control 0 to 100 in
Volume control
0.1 dB steps)
8 mono (or 4 stereo), line,
Number/signal type
balanced/unbalanced
(4) 3.5 mm captive screw, 6 pole,
Connectors
mono, balanced/unbalanced
100 ohms balanced; 50 ohms
Impedance
unbalanced
>+21 dBu balanced, >+15 dBu
unbalanced
A/D, D/A conversion 24-bit, 48 kHz
AEC tail length >200 msec
AEC convergence Up to 60 dB/sec
Noise cancellation Up to 20 dB, software selectable
Number/signal type 1 USB 2.0
Page 787 of 1358

Connector 1 female USB 2.0 mini-B, rear panel

USB standards USB 2.0, high speed
Transmission Dante/AES-67, software selectable
4 RJ-45, 4-port 1 Gbps switch to
Connectors
Dante interface
Inputs 48 channels Rx
Outputs 24 channels Tx
Audio format Uncompressed, 24-bit, 48 kHz
Deterministic, based on user
Latency selections: 0.25 ms, 0.5 ms, 1.0 ms
(default), 2.0 ms, 5.0 ms
VoIP Port
Connector 1 RJ-45
Data rate 10/100/1000 Base-T
Session Initiation Protocol (SIP), RFC
Signaling protocol
3261 and related RFCs
Discovery protocol LLDP-MED (optional)
Up to 8 concurrent, independent
Lines
extensions
Codec support Various ITU, including wideband
Approved Make
Fidelity
1G Pro AV over IP Encoder - HDMI

Frame rate2 24, 25, 30, 50, or 60 fps
Colour bit depth2 8, or 10 bits per colour
DVI v 1.0, HDMI v1.4 and v2.0, HDCP
Signal Type
v1.4 and v2.3
1 digital HDMI video (input)* 1 digital
Number/signal type
HDMI video (loop through)
2 female HDMI type A: 1 for input, 1
Connectors
for loop through
Up to 4K (4096x2160 at 60 Hz) and
Resolution range
UHD (3840x2160 at 60 Hz)
DVI v1.0, HDMI v1.4 and v2.0, HDCP
Standards
v1.4/v2.3
8 or 10 bits per colour; 600 MHz pixel
Digital sampling
clock maximum
Number/signal type 1 PURE3 digital video over IP
Connector 1 RJ-45 connector
Page 788 of 1358

1 analog stereo, unbalanced or

Number/signal type balanced 1 digital stereo, de-
embedded from HDMI
Connector type 1 RJ-45 female
1GbE (802.3ab), 10/100/1000 Base-T,
Ethernet standards
half/full duplex with autodetect
Termination Auto-MDIX, TIA/EIA T568B
Complies with IEEE 802.3at Type 2
Power over Ethernet (PoE)
(PoE+), class 4
SRTP (AES-128) on video, audio, and
Streaming
USB
Transport Multicast UDP
DHCP, HTTPS, IGMPv2/v3, IPv4,
All supported
PTPv2, QoS, SSH, TCP, UDP
AES-256, 802.1X, Active Directory
Security
authentication
330' (100 m) using CAT 5e/6/6a/7
Signal transmission distance
cables
Approved Make
Fidelity
1G Pro AV over IP Scaling Decoder - HDMI

Frame rate2 24, 25, 30, 50, or 60 fps
Colour bit depth2 8, or 10 bits per colour
DVI v 1.0, HDMI v1.4 and v2.0, HDCP
Signal type
v1.4 and v2.3
Number/signal type 1 PURE3 digital video over IP
8 or 10 bits per colour; 600 MHz pixel
Digital sampling
clock maximum
Compression PURE3
Number/signal type 1 digital HDMI video
Up to 4K (4096x2160 at 60 Hz) and
Resolution range
UHD (3840x2160 at 60 Hz)
DVI v1.0, HDMI v1.4 and v2.0, HDCP
Standards
v1.4/v2.3
Formats RGB and YCbCr digital video
Number/signal type 1 audio over IP LPCM or AES67
Connector type 1 RJ-45 female
1GbE (802.3ab), 10/100/1000 Base-
Ethernet standards
T. half/full duplex with autodetect.
Page 789 of 1358


Complies with IEEE 802.3at Type 2
Power over Ethernet (PoE)
(PoE+), class 4
Quantity/type 1 bidirectional RS-232
(1) 3.5 mm captive screw connector,
Connector
5 pole (shared with IR port)
Analog to analog: -6.5 dBU balanced,
-12.5 dBu unbalanced HDMI to
Gain
analog: -5.3 dBu balanced, -11.3
unbalanced
Frequency response 20 Hz to 20 kHz, +0.5 dB
Crosstalk <-80 dB @ 1 kHz, fully loaded
Sampling rates 48 kHz
Bit depths 24 bits
Approved Make
Fidelity
Pro AV over IP System Manager With License

Network interface controllers (NICs) 1 OOB
Network Gigabit Ethernet
Connector type 2 RJ-45 females
10/100/1000 base-T, half/full duplex
Ethernet data rate
(auto detect)
Ethernet standards 1 GbE (802.3ab)
Power over Ethernet (PoE) Complies with IEEE 802.3af (PoE)
Protocols
IPv4, TCP, UDP, DHCP, HTTPS, PTPv2,
All supported
IGMPv2/v3, SSH
AES-256, 802.1X, Active Directory
Security
authentication
Termination standard TIA/EIA T 568B
330' (100 m) using CAT 5e/6/6a/7
Signal transmission distance
cables
330' (100 m) using CAT 5e/6/6a/7
PoE transmission distance
cables
Quantity/type 1 front panel USB mini-B
Standard Ethernet over USB
CE, c-UL UL,C-tick, FCC Class A, ICES,
KC, VCCI, Complies with the
Regulatory compliance
appropriate requirements of RoHS,
WEEE
Approved Make
Fidelity
Page 790 of 1358

IPCP Pro xi Control Processor

SDRAM 1 GB
Flash 8 GB
Network interface controllers (NICs) 1: 1 LAN
Network switch 1 unmanaged 3 port switch
Connectors 3 female RJ-45 connectors
10/100/1000Base-T, half/full
Data rate
duplex with autodetect
DHCP, DNS, HTTP, HTTPS
(redirect), ICMP, IEEE 802.1X,
Protocols
NTP, SFTP, SMTP, SNMP, SSH,
TCP/IP, UDP/IP
1 bidirectional RS-232, RS-422,
Quantity/type RS-485 (port 1) 2 bidirectional
RS-232 (ports 2 and 3)
connector, 5 pole (2) 3.5 mm
Connectors
captive screw connectors, 3
pole
4 digital input/output
Quantity/type
(configurable)
Connectors
connector, 5 pole
2 programmable:
unidirectional RS-232 (±5 V), or
Quantity/type TTL level (0 to 5 V) infrared
(carrier and non-carrier) up to
300 kHz
Connector
connector, 5 pole
Quantity/type 4 normally open relays
Relay control connectors
connector, 6 pole
eBUS control ports connector, 5 pole (uses 4
poles)
+V = +12 VDC; +S = + signal; -S
eBUS pin configuration
= - signal; G = ground
IR output carrier frequency 30 kHz to 300 kHz
IR learning carrier frequency 30 kHz to 300 kHz
2" (5.1 cm) to 12" (30.5 cm)
IR learning capture distance
from the front panel
Approved Make
Fidelity
Page 791 of 1358

IPCP Pro xi Control Processor

Screen type TFT Active-matrix Colour LCD display
Size 10.1" (25.7 cm), measured diagonally
Resolution 1280x800, WXGA
Dot/pixel pitch 149 PPI
Aspect ratio 16:10
Transparency 8 bits
Contrast 800:01:00
Backlight LED
Viewing angle ±85° horizontal, ±85° vertical
RAM 2 GB
Storage 8 GB
Control/communications port 1 female RJ-45 connector
Data rate
with autodetect
DHCP, DNS, HTTP, HTTPS, ICMP, IEEE
Protocol
802.1x, SFTP, SSH, TCP/IP, UDP/IP
Motion sensor On/off
Light sensor Auto/manual
Number/signal type 1 high-speed USB 2.0 device
Connectors 1 USB type A receptacle
USB 2.0, USB 1.1, USB 1.0
Standards
compatible
Speaker output 1 mono, 89 dB Max. SPL @ 0.1 m
Frequency response 750 Hz to 20 kHz, ±5 dB
Approved Make
Fidelity
4 Channel Low and High Impedance Amplifiers

Channels 4
Watt 600 X 4
Sensitivity (for full rated power at 8
0.7V RMS
ohms)
Rated Power Output (per channel @ 4
600W
ohms)
Analog Input Signal to Noise Ratio (ref.
rated power, 100V, 20Hz - 20kHz) at 8 > 104dB
ohms)
Page 792 of 1358

THD (full rated power, 20 Hz - 20 kHz) 0.35%

Damping Factor (20 Hz to 100 Hz) > 1000
Frequency Response (8Ω, 20 Hz - 20
+/-0.25dB
kHz)
Crosstalk (below rated power) 20 Hz to
> 80dB
1 kHz
On-board Digital Signal
Processor in each amplifier
allows for custom
configuration and includes
these integrated
DSP
Input Router• Input Delay – Up
to 1000ms• Input Parametric
EQ – 8 band• Crossover Output
Parametric EQ – 8 band•
Output Delay – Up to 100ms
controlled, configured, and
Network Control and Monitoring – monitored through standard
TCP/IQ network.
Recall presets, mute channels,
monitor faults, power
GPIO/AUX Port on/off the amplifier, and more
through a combined GPIO/AUX
Port.
Digital Signal Processing 96kHz, 32-bit floating point
Voltage Gain 34dB
Frequency Response ±0.25dB
Approved Make Extron /Crown / Fidelity

Multi-functional Column Loudspeaker

The loudspeaker must be a surface-mount column type, consisting of 24 x 2”
aluminum cone full-range drivers, which are fitted inside a slim and elegant
designed enclosure. The overall impedance of the speaker must be 4Ω. It must
have an RMS power handling of 480 Watt with a maximum power handling of
960 Watt and the frequency response (±3 dB) should range from 150 Hz to 20
kHz. The sensitivity must reach 92 dB when measured with an input signal of 1
Watt at a distance of 1 meter, while a maximum continuous sound pressure
level of 113 dB should be reached. The nominal dispersion shall be a 174°
horizontal and 7° vertical coverage pattern at -6dB (average 1 kHz - 4 kHz). The
speakers' enclosure shall be constructed of high-quality aluminum materials
with a fine perforated steel grill front finishing which comes available in both
white (RAL9003) and black (RAL9005) colours. Optimal directional placement
shall be possible through the included multi-functional wall bracket allowing
side swiveling over a range of 0° to 42° in both directions and down tilting with
an angle up to 13° Loudspeakers hall have Following
Speaker type Broadband column
Impedance 4Ω
Sensitivity (1W/1m) 92 dB
Page 793 of 1358

Frequency Range (-10 dB) 120 Hz - 20 kHz

Frequency Response (± 3 dB) 150 Hz - 20 kHz
Drivers 24 x 2”
Dispersion Horizontal X Vertical 174° X 7°
Incline angle Bottom X Left X Right 13° X 42° X 42°
Approved Make Audac / K- Array / Yamaha
Multi-functional Column Loudspeaker

The loudspeaker must be a surface-mount column type, consisting of 12 x 2”
aluminum cone full-range drivers, which are fitted inside a slim and elegant
designed enclosure. It shall be fitted with a multi-tapping line transformer
allowing the speaker for being used in 70/100V public address systems or
standard low impedance (12Ω) audio systems. It must have an RMS power
handling of 240 Watt with a maximum power handling of 480 W Watt and the
frequency response (±3 dB) should range from 150 Hz to 20 kHz. The sensitivity
must reach 92 dB when measured with an input signal of 1 Watt at a distance
of 1 meter, while a maximum continuous sound pressure level of 113 dB should
be reached. The nominal dispersion shall be a 260° horizontal and 90° vertical
coverage pattern at -6dB (average 100 Hz - 10 kHz) The line transformer power
taps shall be selectable through a rotary selector switch on the rear side of the
speaker and adjustable in steps of 40W, 20W and 10W for 70/100V (a 5W
tapping is available for 70V use). Fast and reliable connections shall be possible
through a 3-pin terminal block connector.
Speaker type Broadband column
Impedance 4Ω
Sensitivity (1W/1m) 92 dB
Frequency Range (-10 dB) 120 Hz - 20 kHz
Frequency Response (± 3 dB) 150 Hz - 20 kHz
Drivers 12 x 2”
Dispersion Horizontal X Vertical 174° X 9°
Incline angle Bottom X Left X Right 42° X 42° X 13°
Approved Make Audac / K- Array / Yamaha
4K PTZ Camera
HDMI: 2160p
60/59.94/50/30/29.97/25 1080p
Video format/Resolution
60/59.94/50/30/29.97/25
1080i 60/59.94/50 720p 60/59.94/50
Audio Compression Format
Page 794 of 1358

Audio Bitrate 96Kbps, 128Kbps, 256Kbps

TCP/IP, HTTP, RTSP, RTMP(S), SRT,
Streaming Protocols
ONVIF, DHCP, Multicast
First Stream Supported Resolution 3840x2160 1920x1080 1280x720
Video Bitrate 32Kbps ~ 50Mbps (Single Stream)
Video Bitrate Mode VBR, CBR
Encoding Frame rate 50Hz: 1-50fps 60Hz: 1-60fps
Pelco-D, Pelco-P, VISCA, VISCA over
IP DHCP, RTSP, RTMP (IP Cam),
Control Protocol
RTMPS,
DVIP
Image Sensor 1/1.8" CMOS
Effective Pixels 8.42Mega Pixels
S/N Ratio ≥55dB
Min. Illumination 0.5 Lux @ (F1.8, AGC ON)
Electronic Shutter 1/30s ~ 1/10000s
Zoom Ratio 20x Optical, 16x Digital Zoom
Iris Control Off / Normal
Digital Noise Reductions 2D/3D
Auto, Indoor, Outdoor, One Push,
White Balance
Manual, VAR
AGC / Gain Control Yes
Mirror / Flip Image Yes
Panning / Tilting Range Pan: 300° Tilt: +130° to -15°
Pan: 0.876°/s~43°/s Tilt: 0.693°/s
Panning / Tilting Speed
~21.32°/s
Focal Length 60°
HDMI 2.0 x1 3G-SDI x1
Video Output
10/100/1000M RJ45 x1
TCP/IP, HTTP, RTSP, RTMP(S), SRT,
Streaming Protocols
ONVIF, DHCP, Multicast
Video Bitrate 32Kbps ~ 50Mbps (Single Stream)
Video Bitrate Mode VBR, CBR
Encoding Frame rate 50Hz: 1-50fps 60Hz: 1-60fps
POE IEEE 802.3at
F/W Update Via Web UI or USB 2.0
Ceiling Mount as On Required On
Hardware
site
Approved Make Data Video / Sony / People Link
Handhold Cordless Microphone

Cardioid, Super-Cardioid, or Hyper-
Mic Polar Pattern
Cardioid
RF Output 1, 10, 25 or 50mW, user-selectable
Frequency Response 60 - 15kHz
Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 74dB Typ. at 1kHz (1Pa) ‘A’ weighted
Page 795 of 1358

Antenna Internal
• Display OLED
USB or AA rechargeable (included)
Power
or AA disposal
Indicators Battery status, mute status
• Programmable Switch Talk, mute, logic mute, on / off
Up to 8 hrs continuous usage per
Battery Talk Time
charge, typical @ 1mW
Approved Make Clearone / Clock audio / Sennheiser
Lepel with Belt pack Transmitter Cordless Microphone

• RF Output : 1, 10, 25 or 50mW, user-selectable
Antenna External, field-replaceable
Display OLED
USB, AA rechargeable (included), or
Power:
AA disposable
Indicators Battery status, mute status
Programmable Switch Talk, mute, logic mute, on / off
Mic Input Impedance 47 K Ohms
• Mic Bias 3V
Mic Connector TA4
Battery Charge Time 4 hrs
Up to 8 hrs continuous usage per
Battery Talk Time
charge, typical @ 1 mW
Mic Polar Pattern Omni
Frequency Response 20 - 20kHz
Above 56dB at 1kHz (1Pa) ‘A’
Signal-to-Noise Ratio
weighted
Charging Station (Docking Station) & Extension Antennas

Housing ABS
Charges 8 microphones
Capacity simultaneously (mix and match any
type of the supplied microphones)
Power 5.6V DC / 4 A
Wall mount, ceiling or mic-stand
Mount
mount
Connectors Straight connectors
Reception Pattern 130-degree reception pattern
Gain 15dB of RF gain (915MHz)
Power Phantom-powered from the receiver
Approved Make Clear one / Clock audio / Sennheiser
Page 796 of 1358

MAF and Test Certificates Products Test Certificate
Receiver (Base Station)

Channels per receiver 4-channels
Display OLED
External Antennas Support up to six pairs per system
Attach up to 32 channels to one pair
Antenna Distribution
of antennas
: Phoenix terminal blocks or with XLR
Analog Audio Outputs
adapters
Output Impedance 100 Ohm
Balanced 1/4-inch TRS mixed line
Headphone out (mixed) out for recorders or powered
speakers; or headphone out
USB, RS232 & Ethernet (dual port
Interface
10/100 Mbps)
Dante™ Audio channels Eight (8) digital outputs @ 48 KHz
Primary & secondary, RJ45 ports,
• Dante Ports:
100/1000 Mbps, 328 ft.
GPIO Interface 22 programmable pins
Gain Adjustment Range 20dB to +31 dB
Student Discussion Microphone System (Video Conferencing Compatible)

ARCHITECTS & ENGINEERS SPECIFICATION OF SYSTEM
The audience engagement solution shall be comprised of a host device and two
mobile applications. The first mobile application shall support event attendee
functionality, including but not limited to: requesting the opportunity to talk,
participating in polls conducted by the event moderator, sending text messages to
the moderator, and using the built-in microphone to talk once given the
opportunity by the moderator. The second mobile application shall support event
moderator functionality, including but not limited to: reviewing attendees who have
requested to talk, selecting an attendee to talk, creating and distributing polls,
deactivating attendee microphones, and sharing poll and/or event data to an
external video output. Both the attendee and moderator applications shall be
supported on Apple® devices running iOS® v9.0 or newer. The attendee
application shall also be supported on Android devices running v10.0 or newer. The
moderator interface shall also be supported and accessible via modern web
browsers. The attendee and moderator applications and the moderator web
interface shall be localized in over 20 languages. The host device shall utilize an
Ethernet network via RJ-45 connector for interfacing with attendee and moderator
applications, as well as for control monitoring. The host device shall be equipped
with two High-Definition Multimedia Interface (HDMI®) ports, balanced analog
audio outputs, and two USB 3.0 type A ports. The host device shall be CE marked,
UL listed and shall be compliant with the RoHS directive.
Supply System Should be able to full fill Following
Page 797 of 1358

System Should Online enables remote participants to directly join an event via
internet, without being connected through a local area network. A potential scenario
could be participants of an online meeting (on any unified Team Meet zoom etc.
communication platform) speaking live using the System Application, besides
participating in polls or asking questions via text message.
Streamlines audience interactions
Choose who speaks next (1) Press on a person's name in the list to enable their
microphone.
Deactivate attendee mics - If the conversation goes off-topic the moderator can
deactivate an attendee's microphone any time.
Create polls and publish results - Create audience polls in real time and publish
results on the room's display.
Measure audience engagement - Review poll results and other participation info after
the event has ended.
Three ways to participate (1) Acts as a wireless microphone.(2) Text a comment or
question (3) Take part in polls
If a person can't speak or isn't comfortable speaking, they can text questions to the
moderator.
Remote Poling Participation
Custom made Templates as per Requirement
Be notified when an attendee wants to speak
Choose the next person to speak
urn off an attendee mic at anytime
Create polls before an event or live, in real time
Support Up to up to 1000 attendees.
Bridging Unit - 1 Pcs
Gigabit Ethernet, RJ-45 (Cat 5 and
Network Connection
above)
Video Output Supported Resolutions Up to 4K UHD
Physical Interface: HDMI 2.0
Number of Outputs: 2 No
Analog Audio Output: Physical Interface Euro block
Frequency Response (20Hz~20kHz, +4dBu) .+0/-0.25dB
THD+N (20Hz~20kHz): < 0.006%
Dynamic Range (20Hz~20kHz, 0dB): > 96dB
Output Impedance (balanced): 200Ω
Maximum Output: .+12dBu
Sampling Rate: 48 kHz
D/A Converters 24-bit
USB: Version: .3.0
Number of Ports: 2
Compliance FCC , CE , UL and C-UL ,RoHS
languages Support localized in over 20 languages
Approved Make Biamp or Equivalent
Student Interactive Device 160 Pcs
Page 798 of 1358

Internal Storage 64 GB
Processor Octa-Core Processor
Storage Type microSD Card
Operating System Android 12 / IOS
Operating System Type Android /IOS
USB Type-C USB 2.0
Battery Capacity 5000 mAh
Audio Jack 3.5 mm
Memory (RAM) 3GB
Display Type PLS LCD / IPS / OLED
Wi-Fi: 802.11 b/g/n 2.4 GHz
Must be Submitted at the time of
Test Certificate
Install
Approved Make Samsung / Sony / Apple
Student Hands free Microphone 160 Pcs

Impedance 28 Ω
Sound pressure level (SPL) 119 dB SPL @ 1 kHz, 1V RMS
Ear coupling Ear-canal
Frequency response 1.2 m, symmetric length
THD, total harmonic distortion 17–20,000 Hz (-10 dB)
Transducer principle <0,5 % (1 kHz, 100 dB SPL)
Frequency response (Microphone) 100 - 10,000 Hz
Pick-up pattern Omni-directional microphone
Jack plug 3.5 mm, angled
Ear pad material Silicone
Microphone sensitivity .-42 dBv (1 kHz)
Approved Make Sennheiser / beer dynamics / Shure
digital audio server Acoustic Echo Cancellation and VOIP
providing and Fixing 128x 128 channels of AVB 12 mic/line level inputs with AEC, 8
mic/line level outputs Gigabit Ethernet port Up to 8 channels of configurable USB
audio RS-232 serial port 4-pin GPIO Supports port authentication via IEEE 802.1X SIP
VoIP interface via a RJ-45 connector Standard FXO telephone interface via RJ-11
connector Signal processing via intuitive software allows configuration and control
for signal routing, mixing, equalization, filtering, delay and much more
20Hz to 20kHz, +4dBu output: +0.25

Frequency Response:
dB/-0.5 dB
Dynamic Range (in presence of signal) 22Hz to 22kHz, 0dB gain: > 108dB
Input Impedance (balanced): 8kΩ
Output Impedance (balanced): 207Ω
Maximum Input: .+24dBu
Page 799 of 1358

.+24dBu, +18dBu, +12dBu +6dBu,

Maximum Output (selectable):
0dBu, -31dBu
Input Gain Range (6dB steps): 0-66dB
Phantom Power: .+48VDC (7mA/input)
Crosstalk, channel to channel, 1 kHz: 0dB gain, +4dBu input: < -85dB
A/D - D/A Converters: 24-bit
USB: Bit Depth: 16- or 24-bit
Number of Channels up to 8
Sample Rate: 48kHz
CE marked, UL listed, and RoHS
compliant
compliant
Approved Make Bi Amp / Sysmatrix / Clear one
high performance SPK 14 Speaker Cable

Flame retardant PVC, Ø 8.0 mm,
Jacket:
black
Insulation: PVC, Ø 3.2 mm, black and red
(OFC) Stranded bare copper wires
Conductor: 140 x 0.15mm (2.50mm²)
140x34AWG =
Conductor resistance: < 7.3 ohm/km
Test voltage: cond/cond: 2000 veff
flexi-installed: -5° to +50° C fix-
Temperature range:
installed: -30° to +70° C
current 15.0 Ampere/Line < 1650-
Watt Twist 360° rotation of
Maximum Watts load:
conductors: 105mm (pitch per meter
9.52)
Approved Make Gothem / Link Cables / Fidelity
high performance Signal Cable

Jacket: PVC, Ø 3.1 mm, black (YM2)
Bare copper wires (0.10 mm) 100%
Shield No. 1:
coverage
Cellular PP (09YI 1), Ø 1.15mm, white
3 = Insulation:
/ red
2 Conductors, stranded bare copper
4 = Conductor: wires 14 x 0.10mm (0.11mm²)
14x38AWG = 27 AWG
Conductor resistance: < 178 ohm/km
Shielding resistance: < 35 Ohm/km
cond/cond: < 40 nF/km cond/shield:
Capacitance (at 800Hz):
< 130 nF/km
Characteristic impedance: at 20 kHz: 110 Ohm
Page 800 of 1358

cond/cond: 500 veff and/shield:

Test voltage:
2000 veff
Approved Make Gothem / Link Cables / Fidelity
Seamless Ceramic Writing Bord 40X4

Providing and Fixing of White Seamless Ceramic Writing Bord 40X4 With minimum 5
Coating Approx Shall have Wall thickness of Anodized Aluminium Frame (Min) in mm:
1.2 millimetre Material of Board: Ceramic Steel Material of Frame: Anodized
extruded Aluminium alloy hollow section of designation 63400 conforming to IS:
1285Material of Back Cover: Galvanized steel sheets conforming to IS:277 Thickness
and Material of back support (conforming to IS:12406): 9.05 millimetre Surface
suitable for writing with: Dry marker ink for white board only Back surface coating
thickness of sheet (min): 0.035 millimetre Thickness and material of top steel sheet
Having Vitreous Enameled coating on both side: 0.4 millimetre
Approved Make OEM Custom made
4K Fiber HDMI Cable 30 Mtr
Technology 4K Fiber HDMI Cable Active
Max Supported Video Resolution 3840 x 2160 @ 60Hz
Supported Colour Depth 48-bit Deep Colour
HDR Support 3D Video Supported Yes
Chroma Sub Sampling
EDID Support yes
Signal Transmission Bidirectional
Audio Specification Stereo Audio
Side A - Connector 1 HDMI (MALE)
Side B - Connector 1 HDMI (MALE)
HDCP Specification 2.2; 1.4
Ethernet Support Yes
Approved Make Extron / People link / AOC

Chroma Sub Sampling
EDID Support yes
Page 801 of 1358


Chroma Sub Sampling
EDID Support yes

Chroma Sub Sampling
EDID Support yes

Chroma Sub Sampling
EDID Support yes
Page 802 of 1358



USB 3.0 Type A to Type B Active Cable - 20m

Cable Length 20 m (98.4 ft)
Cable Type USB Cable
Connector Type USB B Male USB-A Male
Extension Type Active USB USB 2.0 USB 3.0
USB 1.1 USB 2.0 USB 3.0USB 3.1 Gen
Signal Type
1
Fully Shielded Active Cable
USB Port Powered No external
power source
Supports USB 3.1 (gen 1), 3.0, 2.0 &
1.1
Digital Writing Notebook

Providing and Fixing of Digital Writing Notebook Shall have Send emails or share the
Writing Content from paper in handwriting. And Convert handwritten notes into
digital text and edit, colour and highlight them. System Should be capable of Record
audio in sync with the page are writing on. Play it back whenever is required same
time Get an instant backup from paper to digital and Capable to . Browse and search
all Smart Notebooks from any device and Search by keywords or tag notes and sort
them by topic from any device System Should Supplied with Following Specifications
Wireless Connection Bluetooth 4.2 (9LE)
Receiving/Transmitting Frequency 2.402-2.480 MHz
RF Output Power Class3
Type of emission F1D
Storage Media 16MB of internal memory
Rechargeable Lithium Polymer
Battery
Battery 3.7V/ 180mA
Charging Time About 90 min
Rated Input DC 5V / 1A
Max 125 days in standby mode
Standard mode: 8 hours (for
Usage Time continuous writing)
Eco mode: 11 hours (for continuous
writing)
Page 803 of 1358

Ink refills D1 multi pen ink refills

Smart Notebook Hard Cover
Accessories Magnetic Charger and Smart Pen
Refills
Approved Make moleskine / leuchtturm / rhodia

136" Large Format Display
Min. 136’’diagonal in 16:9 Aspect or
Size of LED Screen
higher
Minimum Total Resolution of Screen 1920 x 1080 , Full HD or more
Modular Design with 16:9 Aspect
Design
ratio
Pixel pitch 1.57 mm or less
Pixel configuration SMD 3 in 1 LED Package or Better
500 nit or better with Auto Brightness
Brightness (Type)
Feature
Brightness Uniformity 98% or More
Contrast ratio (Type) 3000 : 1 or More
Colour processing depth Min. 16 bit or More
160° & 160° more (Horizontal &
Viewing angle
Vertical)
Depth of LED Screen 70mm or less
Original OEM LED Controller of Same
LED Controller
OEM embedded inside LED
3 x HDMI, 1X DP, 1 x USB, Control
Inbuilt Connectivity Ports in Screen
Port, Audio out
LED life span 1,00,000 hrs
230V, 50Hz, Single power Cable
Input Voltage & Power Requirement Connectivity, Standby Mode for
Power Saving
Remote Control and Buttons on
Easy Operation
Screen for Easy Control & operation
Maintenance access Front
Unit case material Aluminium
No Interconnectivity cables & fans
Additional feature
behind the Panels
Operating Temperature up to 40
Operating Condition
degree and Humility 10-80%RH
Speakers Built in Speakers
Wall mount kit Original OEM Wall Mount Kit
Dust Protection from Front IP30
Should be certified with UL/ETL, CB,
EMC, FCC, India ETA/ BIS (minimum
Global Certifications
any Four Certifications to be
submitted)
Page 804 of 1358

HDMI CEC, Picture in Picture, Picture

by Picture, Inbuilt Operating System,
Smart Features
Inbuilt Digital Signage Features, HDR
10
Power consumption 800 watts or less
Direct Warranty from OEM for
Service minimum 2 Years, OEM Should have
Direct Service Centre in the State
Hardware Included as on Required on Site
Approved Make LG / Barco / NEC
Active LED Video wall Size -

Bidder has to specify Make
Make Model No. or Part Code
and Model
Minimum size of 14.4m
Width x 2.7m Height in 16:9
LED Wall Screen Size
Aspect with diagonal size of
577 inch or more
Total Resolution Minimum 5760H x 1080V
Pixel Pitch 2.50mm or finer
Brightness 600 nits or Higher
Latest Technology Fan less
Design with no power or
Signal Cables at Backside (Site
Design
is already at Finished stage,
This Feature is Must for
Minimum Civil work at Site)
Cabinet Material Die Cast Aluminium
Contrast ratio 9,000:1 or better
Processing Depth 20 Bit
HDR Compatibility HDR 10 pro
Full viewing angle Horizontal 160° / Vertical 160°
Lifetime 1,00,000h
Power Consumption Max 370 W/m2 or less
Power Consumption 10W or
Power Saving Standby Mode less per Cabinet under
Standby Mode
Environment conditions
Operating Humidity 10-80%RH
Operating Temperature 0∘to +40∘
Operating Hours 24x7x365
Single Cabinet resolution 480 x 270
Cabinet Depth 55 mm or less
16:9 Aspect for uniformity of
Cabinet Aspect
16:9 Screen
Page 805 of 1358

600x400mm VESA mounting

Wall mount kit Provision for easy installation
and minimum Rework at Site
Refresh Rate 3840Hz or More
UL/ ETL
Safety Certifications:
FCC
Colour Temperature 3200K - 9300K
LED Screen Controller should be of Same Make as LED Screen with Following
minimum Specs
HDMIx3, DPx1, IR, RS232C
INPUTS
In/Out, Ethernet, USB
Loading Capacity/ Input Resolution 3840 X 2160@60HZ
SIGNAL OUTPUT Minimum 8 x Ethernet/ Fiber
Output Resolution per controller Minimum 8.29 Million Pixels
Features HDR10 Pro / HDR10 +
OEM Should have registered office in India from last 10 years
OEM Must have Direct Service Centre in the state with Toll-free Number,
Website Tracking Support
OEM should have On roll skilled manpower ;he should have BE/Diploma in
Electronics/Electrical/Computers or Similar with Valid PF number
Quoted Brand Should have ISO27001,ISO9001,ISO14001,ISO45001
OEM Must have own LED Chip Repair Service Centre in India
OEM Should have Valid GST Number & PF Number in India
Approved Make LG/Christie/Barco
98" Large Format Display

Screen Size 98"
Native Resolution 3,840 x 2,160 (UHD)
Brightness(Type.,cd/m²) 500
Viewing Angle (H x V) 178 x 178
Surface Treatment (Haze) Haze 1%
Panel Technology IPS
Refresh Rate 120 Hz
Contrast Ratio 1,300:1
Response Time 8ms (G to G)
HDMI (3), DP, DVI-D, Audio,
Input
USB 2.0 (2)
RS232C In/out (4 Pin Phone-
External Control
Jack), RJ45 (LAN) In, IR In
Output DP, Audio (Off/Fixed/Variable)
CB / NRTL FCC Class "A" / CE /
Certification
KC
Included as on Required on
Hardware
Site
Page 806 of 1358

Test Certificate From OEM

OEM Authorization Must be Submitted Before
installation
Approved Make LG/Christie/NEC
32" Commercial Display

Screen Size 32"
Display Type Smart LED
Picture Processor Quad Core Processor
Refresh Rate 60 Hz
HDR Active HDR
HDR Dynamic Tone Mapping Yes
HDR 10 Yes
Full Web Browser Yes
Speaker System 2.0Ch Speaker
Audio Output (rms) 10 W
Wi-Fi (Built-in) Yes (802.11ac)
Simulink (HDMI CEC) Yes
HDMI Input 2 (Side)
HDMI Audio Return Channel ARC (HDMI 1)
LAN 1 (Rear)
HDMI Version HDMI 1.4
USB Ports 1 (Side)
Digital Audio Out (Optical) 1 (Rear)
Approved Make LG/Panasonic / Samsung
Document Camera Visualizer

Image Pick-up Device 1-CMOS 1/3"
30/60 frames (in all
Frame Rate
resolutions)
Effective Pixels 1920 x 1080
Colour Precision sRGB colour precision
UXGA (1600x1200), SXGA
Converted Output Signals (1280x1024), XGA (1024x768),
SVGA (800x600)
Resolution 980 lines
Lens Wide angle, 28mm, f4.7
28x zoom (14x optical + 2x
Zoom digital), with 2-speed zoom
wheel
300mm * 400mm
Shooting Area
(Hight:120mm)
Focus Range 7mm - 200mm
Focus Control Auto/Manual
Page 807 of 1358

White Balance Auto/Manual

Brightness Auto/Manual
yes (for recordings to the front
Automatic Image Flip
of the unit)
Lighting high-brightness LED light
Bottom Light With optional lightbox
1x HDMI in, 1x HDMI out, IP
addressable LAN port, mini-
Connectors
USB 2.0 device port, USB 2.0
host port,
HDMI (DVI output via optional
HDMI Output
HDMI-DVI adapter cable)
(if required external LAN to
Rs232 Port
RS232 adapters can be used)
Ethernet / Lan Port Yes, with PoE+
Vox Vision / People link /
Approved Make
Epson
bespoke video wall controller

Video wall matrix is 08 HDMI Inputs and 2 4K@60Hz HDMI Outputs to run LED
Wall with following specification
(i) To make the display system

behaves as a single logical
screen and provide
functionalities of display of
Basic Function windows through LAN, Video
Inputs as per specification
below.
(ii) To manage the display wall
as mentioned in para.
Video Inputs 08 HDMI Inputs
2 X 4k@60Hz HDMI Outputs to
Video Outputs drive complete video wall at its
native resolution.
Six PCIe Slots Five PCIe Gen2
Features slots x8 Single PCIe Gen3 slot
x8transfer
Standard: Intel Core i5 - 6M
Cache, up to 3.6 GHz
Processor
Optional upgrade: Intel Core i7
- 8M Cache, up to 4 GHz
Memory 16GB as standard
Dual 10 Base-T / 100 Base-TX /
Ethernet
1000 BaseT ethernet ports
HDMI & DisplayPort for control
Onboard Graphics
screen
Page 808 of 1358

RS232 For control

240GB (Upgrade Option:
Hard Disk SSD
480GB SSD)
OPERATING SYSTEM Windows 10 LTSB2
Compliance FCC / CE / RoHS
Power supply 250W ATX
48.6dB (A) up to 67.9 dB
Noise (A);Dependent on system
config & ambient temp
Operating Temp 0 to 35 DegC (32 to 95 DegF)
Storage Temp -20 to 70 DegC (-4 to 158 DegF)
Card format PCIe x8 plug-in card
Channels 2 & 4: 2x1920x1080p
Max Input resolution @60 fps Channels 1 & 3:
2x3840x2160p @60 fps
Frame buffer memory 768 MB
RGB: 5-5-5, 5-6-5 or 8-8-8 (24
bit/32 bit)
Pixel transfer formats
YUV: 4:2:2
MONO: 8 bits
Video Modes HDMI 1.4, HDMI 1.3, DVI
Max current at +3.3 - 0.45A.
Power Requirements Max current at +12V - 0.85A
Max power ≈ 18W
Operating Temperature 0 to 35 °C/ 32 to 96 °F
Storage temperature 20 to 70 °C/ -4 to 158 °F
Relative humidity 5% to 90% non-condensing
Wall management Software STD
Page 809 of 1358

•Create templates and produce

zones on your video wall for easy
placement of content. •Deploy
templates over a single screen,
multiple screens or an entire
video wall. •Template a window
to group multiple pieces of
content together. Select and
crop particular areas of interest
from a snapshot of your source
and deploy them to the video
wall.
Decode up to 8 IP streams.
General •Manipulate sources with full
keyboard and mouse
functionality (KVM).
•Place text over windows to
name and identify video wall
sources quickly.
•Use borders and frames to
surround content with a chosen
colour to group source types or
prioritize content.
•Add On-Screen Display (OSD)
text with borders and frames to
identify, group and priorities
sources.
Images (jpg, gif, tig, png), •Video
(avi, mov, mpg, wmv) •Remote
Desktop over IP (VNC) •PDF
Content
•Web page •Hardware input
•Switched hardware input
•Local applications control
Produce templates and produce zones
on videowall for easy placement of
contents
Deploy templates over a single screen, multiple screens or an entire videowall
Template a window to group multiple pieces of contents together
Select and crop a particular area of interest from a snapshot of your source and
deploy to them to the videowall
Manipulate sources with full keyboard and mouse functionality(KVM)
Place text over a window to name and identity videowall source quickly
Use borders and frames to surround contend with a chosen colour to group
source type or priorities contents
Add-on screen display OSD test with borders and frames to identify, group and
priorities sources
Approved Make Datapath/ Christie/Dexon
Page 810 of 1358

IP based PA
1. General Public Address & Voice Alarm System Specification

The system shall be fully IP-network based.
The system controller shall dynamically assign network audio channels for
audio routing between system devices across multiple subnets.
It shall support >100 simultaneous High-Definition audio channels (24-bit,
48 kHz) for music routing and making calls, with optional encryption and
authentication to protect against eavesdropping and hacking.
The system Controller shall have capability to control up to 250 devices
serving more than 500 zones.
It shall be capable of receiving Dante and AES67 audio streams. Controller
shall have support for Dante audio input and output streams
The system controller shall provide an interface for control data and multi-
channel digital audio over IP using an integrated 5-port Ethernet switch for
redundant network connections, supporting RSTP and loop-through
cabling.
The system controller shall have dual power supply inputs and power
supplies.
The system controller shall manage all devices in the system to provide the
configured system functions.
It shall incorporate a supervised storage for message and tone files with
networked playback of up to eight streams simultaneously.
It shall keep an internal log of fault events and call events.
The system controller shall provide a secure TCP/IP open interface for
remote control and diagnostics.
The system controller shall provide front-panel LED indications for the
status of power supplies and the presence of faults in the system and
provide additional software monitoring and fault reporting features.
Controller should have possibility to be connected in Hot Redundant
architecture, i.e., in case of failure of working controller standby controller
should take over the functionality of failed duty controller automatically.
The redundant controller can be in same rack or can be distributed
anywhere in network.
Controller should have built-in webserver for configuration and file
management using browser.
Controller should have 90 mins of message/tone storage and should have
possibility to record calls using the SD card up to 32 GB.
The system controller shall be rack mountable (1U).
The system controller shall be certified for EN 54-16 and ISO 7240-16,
marked for CE and be compliant with the RoHS directive.
Warranty shall be three years minimum.
2. System Controller
The system shall be fully IP-network based.
Page 811 of 1358

The system controller shall dynamically assign network audio channels

for audio routing between system devices across multiple subnets.
It shall support >100 simultaneous High-Definition audio channels (24-bit,
48 kHz) for music routing and making calls, with optional encryption and
authentication to protect against eavesdropping and hacking.
The system Controller shall have capability to control up to 250 devices
serving more than 500 zones.
It shall be capable of receiving Dante and AES67 audio streams. Controller
shall have support for Dante audio input and output streams
The system controller shall provide an interface for control data and
multi-channel digital audio over IP using an integrated 5-port Ethernet
switch for redundant network connections, supporting RSTP and loop-
through cabling.
The system controller shall have dual power supply inputs and power
supplies.
The system controller shall manage all devices in the system to provide
the configured system functions.
It shall incorporate a supervised storage for message and tone files with
networked playback of up to eight streams simultaneously.
It shall keep an internal log of fault events and call events.
The system controller shall provide a secure TCP/IP open interface for
remote control and diagnostics.
The system controller shall provide front-panel LED indications for the
status of power supplies and the presence of faults in the system and
Controller should have possibility to be connected in Hot Redundant
architecture, i.e., in case of failure of working controller standby
controller should take over the functionality of failed duty controller
automatically. The redundant controller can be in same rack or can be
distributed anywhere in network.
Controller should have built-in webserver for configuration and file
management using browser.
Controller should have 90 mins of message/tone storage and should have
possibility to record calls using the SD card up to 32 GB.
The system controller shall be rack mountable (1U).
The system controller shall be certified for EN 54-16 and ISO 7240-16,
Technical Specifications:
Input voltage range :: 24 to 48 VDC
Input voltage tolerance :: 20 to 50 VDC
Ingress protection IP30
Ethernet : 100BASE-TX, 1000BASE-T
Protocol : TCP/IP
Redundancy: RSTP
Audio/control protocol: OMNEO
Page 812 of 1358

Network audio latency : 10 ms

Audio data encryption: AES128
Control data security: TLS
Ports : 5
Temperature Operating : -5 to +50 °C / (23 to 122 °F)
Storage and transport : -30 to +70 °C/ (-22 to 158 °F)
Altitude (operating) -500 to +5000 m (-1640 to 16404 ft)
Air pressure (operating) 560 to 1070 hPa
3. 4-channel Amplifier
The 4-channel amplifier shall be fully and natively IP-networked based,
not requiring external converters to connect to the system.
The amplifier shall adapt the maximum output power of each amplifier
channel to its connected loudspeaker load, with free assignable output
power per channel for a total maximum of 600 watt per amplifier,
supporting 70V or 100V operation with direct drive capability and outputs
that are galvanically insulated from ground.
The amplifier shall have a built-in independent spare amplifier channel
for automatic failover.
The amplifier shall provide an interface for control data and multi-
channel digital audio over IP using dual Ethernet ports for redundant
network connection, supporting RSTP and loop-through cabling, with
automatic failover to an analog lifeline input.
The amplifier shall have dual power supply inputs and power supplies.
All amplifier channels shall have independent A/B zone outputs with
support for class-A loudspeaker loops.
All amplifier channels shall supervise the integrity of connected
loudspeaker lines without interruption of audio distribution.
The amplifier shall provide front-panel LED status indications for the
network link, ground fault, power supplies and audio channels, and
The amplifier shall be rack mountable (1U) and feature software-
configurable signal processing including level control, parametric
equalization, limiting and delay for each channel.
The amplifier shall be certified for EN 54-16 and ISO 7240-16, marked for
CE and be compliant with the RoHS directive.
Audio inputs (static)
Dante or AES67 channels -120
Power supply input A/B : Input voltage : 48 VDC
Input voltage tolerance: 44 to 50 VDC
Power supply input A/B : Input voltage : 48 VDC
Input voltage tolerance: 44 to 50 VDC
Enclosure: Ingress protection IP30
Network Interface : Ethernet : 100BASE-TX, 1000BASE-T
Protocol : TCP/IP
Page 813 of 1358

Redundancy : RSTP
Audio/control protocol : OMNEO
Audio data encryption : AES128
Ports : 5
Climatic conditions Temperature Operating : -5 to +50 °C / (23 to 122 °F)
5. End-of-Line Device
The end-of-line device shall only require a connection with the end of the
loudspeaker line to supervise its integrity.
Supervision reliability shall not depend on the number of connected
loudspeakers.
Supervision shall be inaudible and not interrupt audio content.
The end-of-line device shall be certified for EN 54-16 and ISO 7240-16,
6. Multifunction Power Supply
The multifunction power supply shall contain four independent mains
power supplies with power factor correction and dual output connection
facilities to power up to three 600 W amplifiers and to power a system
controller and two call stations.
The multifunction power supply shall have an integrated battery charger
for a connected battery, and independent converters to use the battery as
a backup power source for all connected loads in case of mains failures.
Failover to the backup battery shall be without interruption of output
power.
It shall use a single 12 V VRLA backup battery to eliminate the need for
battery balancing, while maximizing battery lifetime and power density.
The multifunction power supply shall have eight general purpose control
inputs with connection supervision and eight voltage free control outputs.
The multifunction power supply shall provide an interface for control data
and to receive a backup audio channel over IP using an integrated 6-port
Ethernet switch for redundant network connections, supporting RSTP and
loop-through cabling.
Two ports shall have PoE to provide redundant power to a call station.
The backup audio channel shall be available as analog lifeline to connected
amplifiers.
The multifunction power supply shall provide front-panel LED indications
for status of the power supply sections, mains and battery, network link
and fault presence, and provide additional software monitoring and fault
reporting features.
The multifunction power supply shall be rack mountable (2U). The
multifunction power supply shall be certified for EN 54-4 and ISO 7240-4,
Page 814 of 1358


Mains power supply input : Input voltage range : 115 to 240 VRMS
Input voltage tolerance : 102 to 264 VRMS
Frequency range : 50 to 60 Hz
Inrush current : < 20 A
Power factor (PF) : 0.9 to 1.0
Leakage current to safety ground : < 0.75 mA (120 V), < 1.5 mA (240 V)
Battery power supply input : Nominal DC input voltage : 12.6 V
DC input voltage tolerance : 9 to 15 V
Maximum current : 90 A
Under-voltage protection : < 9 V
Protocol : TCP/IP
Redundancy : RSTP
Ports : RJ45 : 5 (2 with PoE) and SFP : 1
Climatic conditions : Temperature Operating : -5 to +50 °C / (23 to 122 °F)
Fan airflow Front to sides/rear
Enclosure Ingress protection IP 30
7. desktop call station
The desktop call station shall provide an interface for control data and
multi-channel digital audio over IP using dual Ethernet ports for
redundant network connection, supporting RSTP and loop-through
cabling.
It shall receive Power over Ethernet (PoE) via either one or both network
connections.
It shall have 4.3" full-colour capacitive touch screen with brightness
adjustment and should give feedback on system status.
Call station housing should be able to fit surface /flush mounting.
Call station if not used shall switch to sleep mode to save power and
wake up when screen is touched/ button is pressed.
The desktop call station shall provide a backlit full-colour capacitive touch
panel LCD as user interface for business and evacuation purposes.
The desktop call station shall accept optional call station extensions, each
offering 12 configurable buttons for zone selection and other purposes.
It shall provide control and routing of live speech calls, stored messages
and music with volume control per zone.
Page 815 of 1358

The desktop call station shall have a gooseneck cardioid microphone for
live calls and a 3.5 mm jack line level input for background music.
It shall provide software-configurable signal processing including
sensitivity control, parametric equalization and limiting.
The desktop call station shall be certified for EN 54-16 and ISO 7240-16,
Microphone : Nominal acoustic input level (configurable) :80 to 100 dB
SPL
Maximum acoustic input level : 120 dB SPL
Signal to Noise Ratio (SNR) : > 70 dBA
Frequency response(+3 / -6 dB) : 100 Hz to 14 kHz
Unidirectional
Line input : Signal to Noise Ratio (SNR): > 96 dBA
Total Harmonic Distortion + Noise (THD+N) < 0.1 %
Supervision : Microphone : Current
Audio path : Pilot tone
Controller continuity: Watchdog
PoE (1-2): Voltage
Network Interface: Ethernet: 100BASE-TX, 1000BASE-T
Protocol: TCP/IP
Redundancy : RSTP
Ports : 2
Ingress protection : IP 30
8. Wall mount Call Station
The wall mount call station shall provide an interface for control data and
multi-channel digital audio over IP using dual Ethernet ports for
redundant network connection, supporting RSTP and loop-through
cabling.
It shall receive Power over Ethernet (PoE) via either one or both network
connections.
It shall have 4.3" full-colour capacitive touch screen with brightness
adjustment and should give feedback on system status.
Call station if not used shall switch to sleep mode to save power and wake
up when screen is touched/ button is pressed.
Call station housing should be able to fit surface /flush mounting.
Page 816 of 1358

The wall mount call station shall provide a backlit full-colour capacitive
touch panel LCD as user interface for business and evacuation purposes.
The wall mount call station shall accept optional call station extensions,
each offering 12 configurable buttons for zone selection and other
purposes.
It shall provide control and routing of live speech calls, stored messages
and music with volume control per zone.
The wall mount call station shall have a hand-held omnidirectional
microphone with helix cable for live calls and a 3.5 mm jack line level input
for background music
It shall provide software-configurable signal processing including
sensitivity control, parametric equalization and limiting.
The wall mount call station shall be certified for EN 54-16 and ISO 7240-
16, marked for CE and be compliant with the RoHS directive.
Technical specification
Microphone : Nominal acoustic input level (configurable) :80 to 100 dB
SPL
Maximum acoustic input level : 120 dB SPL
Signal to Noise Ratio (SNR) : > 70 dBA
Frequency response(+3 / -6 dB) : 100 Hz to 14 kHz
Unidirectional
Line input : Signal to Noise Ratio (SNR): > 96 dBA
Total Harmonic Distortion + Noise (THD+N) < 0.1 %
Supervision : Microphone : Current
Audio path : Pilot tone
Controller continuity : Watchdog
PoE (1-2) : Voltage
Protocol : TCP/IP
Redundancy : RSTP
Ports : 2
9. Call station extension

The call station extension shall offer electrical and mechanical connection
facilities for use with a desktop or wall mount call station.
It shall provide 12 configurable buttons for zone selection and other
purposes.
Page 817 of 1358

Each button has tactile feedback and a light ring activation indicator,
complemented with a set of multi-colour LEDs for function related status
indications.
The call station extension shall have a removable front cover to put
language independent button labels behind the front cover.
The call station extension shall be certified for EN 54-16 and ISO 7240-16,
Power supply input : Input voltage : 5 VDC
Input voltage tolerance : 4.5 to 5.5 VDC
Power consumption (indicators off / on) : 0.1 W / 1.0 W
Ingress protection : IP 30
10. Power supply Module 24V
The Power supply module shall contain a mains input with power factor
correction and a 24 V output. Output current capability shall be 10 A
continuous and 15 A peak. The power supply shall be DIN-rail mountable
with passive cooling. The power supply shall be marked for UL and CE and
be compliant with the RoHS directive.
Technical specification
Mains power supply input : Input voltage range : 100 to 240 VAC
Input voltage tolerance: 85 to 264 VAC
Frequency range: 50 to 60 Hz
Inrush current: < 35 A (115 V, 230 V)
Power factor (PF): 0.9 to 1.0
Leakage current to safety ground: < 1 mA (240 V)
24 VDC output : Nominal DC output voltage : 24 V
Output voltage range : 24 to 28 V
Maximum continuous current : 10 A
Derating: -0.25 A/°C above 50°C
Maximum peak current :15 A
MTBF : > 500.000 h
Network Interface :Ethernet : 100BASE-TX, 1000BASE-T
Protocol : TCP/IP
Redundancy : RSTP
Ports : 2
Page 818 of 1358

Climatic conditions : Temperature Operating : -25 to +80 °C

Storage and transport : -40 to +85 °C
Enclosure Ingress protection : IP 20
6W Ceiling Speaker
SITC of - 6W ceiling mount speaker with excellent speech & music
reproduction
- Max Power: 9W,Rated Power: 6Watts, Power Tapping: 6/3/1.5/0.75W
- Effective frequency range(-10 dB) :85 Hz to 20KHz
- SPL at rated power (1Khz at 1 m) 90 dB
- Opening Angle 1 KHz / 4 KHz (-6 dB): 180deg/180deg
- Speaker Diameter 88 mm(3.46in)
-ABS RAL 9003
According to EN 54-24
- Self-extinguishing acc. to UL94 V0
- Safety acc. to EN60065
15W ABS Horn Speaker
15 W high-efficiency ABS horn loudspeaker with weather protection IP65
- Max. Power: 22.5 W, Rated Power: 15 Watts, Power tapping:
15/7.5/3.75W
- Effective frequency range(-10 dB) :(500 Hz to 5KHz)
- SPL at rated power (1Khz) 115 dB
- Self-extinguishing acc. to UL94 V0
- IP65 acc. to IEC 60529, Safety acc. to EN60065
Access Control
Multiple Credential, Face Recognition Device

Biometric Face, RFID
RF Option 125kHz EM, HID Prox & 13.56MHz
MIFARE, MIFARE Plus, DESFire EV1/EV21),
FeliCa, iCLASS SE/SR/Seos
RF Read Range2) EM/HID iCLASS/MIFARE: 30 mm,
HID Prox/DESFire: 25 mm, FeliCa: 15 mm
Mobile NFC, BLE
Barcode and QR code Supported
CPU 1.5GHz Quad Core
Memory 32GB Flash + 4GB RAM
Crypto Chip Supported
LCD Type 5.5" IPS colour LCD
LCD Resolution 720 x 1280 pixels
Sound 16bit
Operating Temperature -20°C ~ 50°C (-4°F ~ 122°F)
Operating Humidity 0%~80%, non-condensing
Camera 2MP x 2EA (Visual, IR)
Dimension (W x H x D) 82.5mm x 171mm x 23.4mm
Ingress Protection (IP) IP65
Page 819 of 1358

Vandal Proof (IK) IK06

Certificates KC, CE, UKCA, FCC, RCM (Compliance:
RoHS, REACH, WEEE)
Recognition Distance 0.6 ~ 1.0 m (23.6"~39")
Recognition Height 1.4 ~ 1.9 m (55.1"~74.8")
Matching Speed Less than 0.3 sec
Live Face Detection (Anti- Supported
Spoofing)
Max. User 100000
Max. Credential (1:N) Face: 50,000
Max. Credential (1:1) Face: 100,000 / Card: 100,000 / PIN:
100,000
Max. Text Log 5000000
Max. Image Log 50000
Ethernet Supported (10/100/1000 Mbps,
automatic MDI/MDI-X)
Wi-Fi Supported (802.11 b/g/n 2.4GHz)
RS-485 1ch Host or Slave (Selectable)
Wiegand 1ch Input and 1ch Output
TTL Input 3ch Inputs
Relay 1 Relay
PoE+ Supported (IEEE 802.3 at compliant)
Intercom Supported
USB USB 2.0 (Host)
Extended USB Supported
Tamper Supported
Power DC 12 V 2.5A, DC 24 V 1.2A
Mullion type RF Card reader, Dual RFID
RF Option 125kHz EM & 13.56MHz MIFARE, MIFARE
Plus, DESFire EV1/EV21), FeliCa
Mobile Card NFC, BLE
Ingress Protection IP65, IP67
Vandal Proof IK08
Users (1:1) 200000
Users (1:N) 200000
Text Log 1000000
PIN Not supported
CPU 1 GHz
Memory 4 GB Flash + 64 MB RAM
Crypto Chip Supported
LCD Type Not supported
LED Multiple colours
Sound Multi-tone Buzzer
Operating Temperature -35°C ~ 65°C (-31°F ~ 149°F)
Storage Temperature -40°C ~ 70°C (-40°F ~ 158°F)
Operating Humidity 0% ~ 95%, non-condensing
Storage Humidity 0% ~ 95%, non-condensing
Dimension (WxHxD, mm) 48 x 145 x 27
Tamper Supported
Page 820 of 1358

Certificates CE, FCC, KC, RoHS, REACH, WEEE, SIG

Wi-Fi Not supported
Ethernet 10/100 Mbps, auto MDI/MDI-X
RS-485 1ch Master or Slave (Selectable)
Wiegand 1ch Input or Output (Selectable)
TTL Input 2ch Input
Relay 1 Relay
USB Not supported
SD Card Not supported
PoE Supported (IEEE 802.3af compliant)
Intercom Not supported
Power DC 12 V / DC 24 V
Secure I/O Expansion Module
CPU Cortex M3 72 MHz
Memory 128 KB Flash + 20 KB RAM
LED Multi-colour
PWR, RS-485 TX/RX IN1/IN2, RELAY
Operating temperature (-)20°C ~ 50°C
Storage temperature (-)40°C ~ 70°C
Operating humidity 0% ~ 80%, non-condensing
Storage humidity 0% ~ 90%, non-condensing
Dimension (W x H x D) 36 mm x 65 mm x 18 mm
Certificates CE, FCC, KC, RoHS
Interface RS-485 1 ch
TTL Input 2 ch
Relay 1 relay
Power • Recommended: 9 VDC (130 mA), 12 VDC
(100 mA), 18 VDC (70 mA)
• Maximum: 18 VDC (200 mA)
• Current: Maximum 200 mA
Relay 2 A@ 30 VDC Resistive load
1 A@ 30 VDC Inductive load
Advanced Edition
Maximum No. of Doors 100
Maximum No. of Connected 1000
Devices
Maximum No. of Access Levels 2048
Maximum No. of Access Groups 2048
Maximum No. of Access Groups 16
per User
Maximum No of Access Levels 128
per Access Group
Access Group Auto Sync Supported
Maximum No. of Cards per User 8
Maximum No. of Fingerprints 10
per User
User Auto Sync Supported
Access-on-Card Supported
Security Credential Cards Supported
Page 821 of 1358

iCLASS Seos Card Supported

Long-term Idle Users Supported
Management
Custom Field Supported
Elevator Supported
Maximum No. of Floors per 192
Elevator
Maximum No. of Floor Levels 2048
Anti-Pass back Supported
Fire Alarm Supported
Schedule Lock/Unlock Supported
Intrusion Alarm Zone Supported
Interlock Zone Supported
Muster Zone Supported
Occupancy Limit Zone Supported
Dashboard Supported
Cloud Supported
New Local API Supported
Server Matching Supported
Audit Trail Supported
Daylight Saving Time Supported
Dual Authentication Supported
Active Directory Supported
Graphic Map Supported
Rule Creation Daily / Weekly / Monthly / Weekend /
Holiday / Overtime / Day Start time /
Overtime
Shift Management Minimum 8 Shift
Integration Able to integrate with VMS / Payroll /
HRMS / Etc
Touchless & Feather Touch Exit Button -

Standard Structure Stainless steel Panel, Steel Button
Current Rating 3A,36VDC Max
Output Contact +12V GND NO NC COM
Mechanical Life 1000000 tested
Suitable for Door Hollow Door
Operating temp -10℃ ~ 55°C (14°F-131°F)
Operating Humidity 0-95% (non- condensing)
Detection range 0.1-10cm
White LED indicator Power OFF
Blue LED indicator Power ON(standby)
Red LED indicator Power ON(sensation)
Electro Magnetic Door Lock -
Housing Aluminium
Door Type Swing, Single
Holding Force 1,200 lbs
Dimensions 121/2” x 21/8” x 111/16” Housing
101/8” x 2” x 7/8” Armature
Page 822 of 1358

Input 12/24 VDC ± 10% Field Selectable

Current Draw 309 mA @ 24 VDC 560 mA @ 12 VDC
Door Position Status (DPS) SPDT 250 mA @ 30 VDC Resistive
Bond Alert Status (BAS) SPDT 1 Amp @ 30 VDC Resistive
Wired Screwable Magnetic Door Contacts
Providing and Fixing of Magnetic Contact Should be electrically controlled for
switching a power circuit, similar to a relay. Magnetic contacts Should Provide
exact position of the door (open/close). N/C type. electrical circuit is ON when
magnet is away from sensor(door in open position). Used in kitchen cabinet
etc. to make led light ON when cabinet door opens.
The sensor alone can be connected only in low power ( less than 12 W) dc
circuits. it cannot directly connect to 230 v ac circuit. relay fitted version also
for 230 v ac.
Material Plastic
Colour White
Contact Capacity (Max. Switch 0.5A
Current)
Voltage 100V
Rated Power (W) 10W
Actuation Distance 15-25cm
Length (mm) 28
Width (mm) 15
Height (mm) 13
Weight (gm) 8
standard battery-operated wire-free standalone reader
Wire free reader should be Stainless steel construction and battery operated.
Reader must operate on maximum of 3 AAA batteries (LR03 1,5V) and that
should last long till 40000 - 60.000 door opening
Wire free reader must have Multiple Opening mode like Standard Office mode
Timed office Automatic opening Automatic opening + office
Installation of Wire free reader should be Simple & it should be ready to install
on any type of door, including those with narrow frames
Reader must support MIFARE® (DESFire EV2, Plus, Ultralight C, Classic - ISO/IEC
14443) Bluetooth SMART (BLE) NFC. technologies .
Wire free reader must be able to operate on Data on card technology and
should have the capacity to store at least of 2250 logs in standalone mode.
Wire free reader should be compatible with European electromechanical
mortise locks and cylinders.
Reader should have the provision for mechanical key as well along with the
Privacy control mechanism.
Wire free reader should always be opened from the inside (single action panic
feature works in conjunction with the relevant mortise lock).
Wire free reader should not be more than of 285mm x 42mm x 19,5mm and
it should not be more than 1.5 KG Dimensions
Wire free reader should Covers door thicknesses: From 32mm up to 120mm.
Wire free reader should be of Clutch mechanism and when it's in unwire free
reader ed position then handle moves freely.
Page 823 of 1358

Handle of Wire free reader must be Reversible handle left or right .

Wire free reader must be available in multiple colour finishes. IM Satin
stainless steel IP Bright stainless-steel PP PVD bright brass type PM PVD satin
brass type NE Black chromium BC BioCote anti-microbial DB Dark Bronze
Reader must be available in Black and white colour.
Reader must perform well in +5 ºC / +50 ºC Environmental conditions
Outdoor, and it should be IP53.
Reader Must be CE, FCC/IC, RCM, EAC, BIS, IMDA , EN1906, EN 179,EN 1634-1
(Ei60, E260, E90) certified.
configure wire free readers & emergency access.
A multilingual Portable device must be there to configure the Wire free
readers.
Programmable device should work on Battery which should not be more than:
3 alkaline batteries - LR03 - AAA 1,5V
Portable device must be ready to work over NFC or USB or on RS232.
Portable Device must have the functionality to perform several activities like.
Initialize wire free readers Collecting the audit trail. Update locks (door profile
& internal clock). Door diagnostic. Emergency opening. Firmware update
Portable Device must have the functionality to open the Wire free readers in
case of emergency.
Portable device must have the provision to provide the power to the wire free
readers in case of Battery down.
Portable device must be EN 55022 (1994), Class B, EN 50082 (1997) certified.
Device Must perform seamlessly even in operating temperatures: .0ºC /80ºC’
encoder for credentials assignment
Card Ncoding device compatible with a wide range of RFID cards and
compatible with BLE mobile keys.
Ncoding device must not be more than 95,5 x 141 x 30,5mm Dimensions and
should not be more than 174 grams
Power consumption of Ncoding device should be: 5V and must have the
provision of USB or Ethernet connectivity to connect with the PC
USB Interface of the device should be USB 2.0 Type-B and Ethernet Interface:
10BASE-T/100BASE-TX
Ncoding device supports card types MIFARE® (DESFire EV2, Plus, Ultralight C,
Classic-ISO/IEC 14443), HID ICLASS®, Bluetooth SMART (BLE), NFC.
It should be CE, FCC/IC, RCM certified.
LED indication must be there as Red+Green+Blue
Encoding device must perform seamlessly in Temperature: Min 0ºC to Max 50
ºC
Noncondensing Humidity: lever must be at least of Min 0 to 95%
access management software with hospitality features

Web Based multilingual access control software that enables users to
programme access-time zones for each user, manage different company
calendars and obtain audit trails from each door to see who has passed
through it.
Page 824 of 1358

Software must be user friendly to use both PC and Tablet device.

Access control software must run on MSSQL database.
Software should be Multiworsktation compatible: so that there is No risk of
database corruption
Access control Software must include special functions such as automatic door
status changes, anti-pass back and relay management (for example, in
elevator control)
Software must have at least of user capacity of Up to 4 million users
Access software should support at least of Up to 64,000 doors & lockers
Software should have 256 Calendars., 1024 Time periods & 1024 Time zones.
Access software should support unlimited number of Access Levels.
Software must have the functionality to monitor the live events coming from
the Wire free readers.
Software must have the functionality to open or close the doors (Including the
Wire free readers) directly form the software.
Event Stream nd Automatic key assignment option must be available in
software.
Database synchronization must be available.
Access control Must be ready to integrate with other application over SHIP
communication.
Elevator configuration, Hotel Module and Mobile Gust Key option must be the
default part of the access control application.
Access control software must have the functionality for Graphics mapping.
Software should be ready to integrate with other applications over API or
database level.
Software should have the functionality such as Anti Pass back, occupancy
control, Visitor management,
IP PBX Telephony system
Sr. No Hybrid IP-PBX System

The IP-PBX/PABX/Communication System shall employ IP at its core with IP
switching technology and 100% non-blocking. System Should having 800
Sip Port Li seance from Day First along with HOT Redundancy Control Panel
1 up to 1296 analog ports & 2000 Pure IP Port
The system Should have Full Package of Hospitality Software Along with
Gate way bridge For 3rd party Property management Software System
Should Include All required Port opening License From Day First
2 The system should be IPV6 ready.

The system should have VoIP and VMS at its core i.e., VoIP and VMS
5 modules should sit on the CPU.
The system shall provide IP functionality at its core to support SIP/IP
extensions and trunks over SIP protocol. It should be possible to support
SIP Trunks and SIP/IP Extension with the single VoIP module. It should
support license-free 99 SIP trunks and 2000 SIP/IP users (SIP/IP Phone,
6 Mobile softphones, UC Client).
Page 825 of 1358

It should be possible to reach the capacity of system to 1000 analog and

7 2000 IP users without any add-on CPU or chassis/hardware platform.
The architecture of the system shall be capable of seamless migration to
its maximum capacity by simply adding peripherals cards/modules in the
same chassis without compromising function/features of the system. The
architecture should be non-stackable eliminating individual power supply
8 for each chassis.
The system should be built on a universal slot architecture and modular in
design to enable seamless growth, by adding the desired necessary
modules and cards as and when required. Any interface peripheral card
can be inserted in any slot of the platform, whereby it is possible to increase
or decrease the trunk lines or subscriber lines of the system as per the
9 requirement.
VoIP and VMS should be Daughter-board modules mounted on CPU. No
slots should be utilized for it. VoIP module(s) should support up to 250 VoIP
channels, 99 SIP trunks and 2000 SIP/IP users (SIP/IP Phone, Mobile
softphones, UC Client) on single VoIP module. The system should have
10 high-density VoIP module of 64 channels to save on real-estate.
System power supply should be inbuilt and SMPS type with input range of
11 48VDC +/- 15%
12 It shall have distributed processing architecture, SLIC and SMT Design.
It should support maximum 248 IP-TDM calls and 500 IP-IP calls (without
13 transcoding in Relay RTP Mode) and 50 IP-IP video calls.
14 The system should support UC Clients with following UC features:
15 Presence and IM
16 Video Calling
17 IM to SMS and vice versa
18 SMS to email and vice versa
19 Bulk Messaging
20 Busy Lamp Field and SMS on No Reply
21 Drag and Drop conference on Windows UC Client
The system should support SNMP, which helps to manage and monitor
network elements, audit network usage and detect network faults. SNMP
22 manager should support SNMPv1/v2c/v3 versions.
It should support SIP over TLS and SRTP to ensure VoIP call security over IP
23 network.
System should have two Gigabit Ethernet ports for LAN and WAN to
24 separate out local and VoIP traffic on external network.
It should be suitable for DTMF as well as the FSK type of telephone
25 instruments.
The EPABX capacity shall be suitable to scale up to 99 VoIP (SIP) Trunks and
26 2000 SIP/IP Users.
It should have built-in multi-party conferencing without any software
licensing. It should be possible to carry out 15 conferences of 3-participants
at a time. The maximum number of participants supported in single
27 conference would be 21.
Page 826 of 1358

The system shall have the inbuilt Auto-attendant facility and shall be able
to answer minimum 9 calls simultaneously and should support dial-by-
28 name.
29 The system shall be compatible with ISDN PRI line of Local Service Provider.
30 The PRI card should be software programmable for TE/NT mode.
The system shall have multiple port interfaces such as analog extension
lines, digital key phone, GSM/3G/4G for voice, T1E1 PRI, RADIO, CO and
E&M. All interfaces except VoIP and VMS shall be in the form of expansion
cards and can be plugged into the universal slots of the system as and
when required in the future. VoIP and VMS Board module should sit on the
31 CPU.
The EPABX should support Radio Connectivity in the form of card which
32 should be pluggable to the system.
Existing radios available with us which are as follows, shall be
interoperable: 1. MOTOROLA GM338 2. TADIRAN RT 6001/PRC 6020 (HF) 3.
TADIRAN RT - 7330M VHF 4. STARS V MKII 25 With should have minimum 4
radio interface port per card. It should support HF/VHF/UHF with the same
33 radio card.
The system should have in-skin GSM card so that the multiple SIMs can be
inserted on the GSM card plugged on to the PBX platform. Hence, the calls
on GSM mobile can be routed through this SIMs and contribute to
34 reduction of overall telecom bill.
The system should have combo cards (PSTN+ANALOG) to have flexible

configuration and save on the resources of universal slots.
35
The system should support SMPP protocol to send/receive SMS using in-
skin GSM SIMs within IP-PBX. Any software required to send/receive SMS
36 shall also to quote separately.
37 The system shall have USB/Ethernet port for SMDR/PMS/CAS Interface.
The system shall have built-in web-based software programming tool for
38 system administration.
The system shall have a built-in remote maintenance facility. The system
can be programmed remotely over the internet without any modem
39 required on the system side.
The call ringing sequence would be programmable and have options such
as simultaneous, hunting off, round robin and delayed simultaneous.
40
Detail reports of all system parameters should be generated through the
41 SMDR port of system.
The system should have built-in Power Failure Transfer for minimum 4
ports of PSTN Trunks. No external devices for Power failure should be
42 required.
The offered system should be QSIG ready (for PRI) for Networking and
Feature Transparency between two or more exchanges. System should be
networked over PRI QSIG with an option of direct fiber optic connectivity
43 on E1PRI Card.
Each port of the system shall be programmable. It shall have
44 programmable features port-wise/extension-wise.
Page 827 of 1358

The system shall support flexible numbering for extensions such as it may
have extensions with 1 digit, 2 digits and up to 6 digits numbers as well as
45 in combination of all.
Access codes, system timers and access to features shall be
46 programmable.
Storage of outgoing, incoming and internal call reports shall be generated
on SMDR port of the system. It shall also be available online through
47 Ethernet Port.
The system should have built-in outgoing Call Log buffer of 6000 calls,
48 incoming call log buffer of 5000 and call log buffer of 1000 internal calls.
System should support dial from the corporate directory. There shall be
minimum 2999 numbers possible to store in corporate directory and shall
49 also be possible to dial it as an abbreviated number.
Features given to an extension shall be accessed from any other extension
50 by dialing the secret codes.
51 The system must have following features:
52 Call Budget on Trunk
53 CLI based DISA (Mobile Extension)
54 GSM Trunk Connectivity
55 Multi-stage Dialing
56 Returned Call to Original Caller (RCOC)
57 Automatic Call to Missed (Predefined) Calls on Trunks
58 Dual Ring
59 Routing of calls to only permissible legal networks (Logical Partitioning)
60 SMDR/CDR through Ethernet Port
Extension features shall have an extension-to-extension call, extension to
central office, extension to operator, automatic call back, call transfer, call
forward, follow me, executive/secretary, do not disturb, barge-in, raid, Boss
61 ring, Priority shall be supported.
Operator features shall have the assistance to extension, attended call
transfer, call intercept, indication of call waiting, night service control etc.
62 should be available by default.
The system shall have features as CLI based routing, call duration control,
63 least cost routing i.e., time, number or combination of both.
The system shall have a conversational recording in the mailbox.
Conversation recording should be possible on Analog/Digital/IP as well as
Mobile SIP Smartphones (Android/iPhone) without any additional software
64 licenses.
Varied type of open SIP Terminals such as IP Phone, SIP softphone, Mobile
SIP Client and UC Client shall be supported.
65
System's UC Client should support 1000 DSS, 500 BLF and drag & drop
66 conference.
The system should have OEM manufactured UC Client application for
Android and iPhone and on Windows PC so that the mobility can be
67 extended for the Smartphone users as well as for Laptop/PCs users.
Page 828 of 1358

The system must support following features of IP telephony: Dynamic DNS,

Registrar Server, Proxy Server, Presence Server, NAT and STUN.
68
69 The system should support Voice Mail System with following features:
Attend as much as 64 calls simultaneously with flexibility of routing callers

to desired extension or delivering information depend upon the selection
70
Dial-by-Name to reach the intended user directly without
71 knowing/remembering extension number
Selectively allocate voicemails to users with the flexibility of customizable

mailbox size and greetings for All/Selective users
72
73 Group mailbox to share messages between departmental groups
74 Anywhere access to voice mail with just a phone call
75 Password protected secured voice mail access
Record important conversations for future reference and record
76 maintenance
77 Redirection of voice mails to another extension in case of non-availability
78 Tag voicemails while Forwarding Messages to Another Mailbox
79 Broadcast voice message to a group of personnel, at a go
Distribution lists for delivery of voice mails to different set of users or
80 groups
Message wait indication via ring, change in dial-tone, voice message or
81 message wait lamp
82 Notification of a new voicemail via email alert or a phone call
83 Mailboxes for all users (Analog / Digital / IP / UC users)
All the peripheral cards (extension cards, trunk cards should be hot-
swappable. i.e., it should be possible to replace a peripheral card while
84 system power is on.
The systems should be redundant which and offer 100% duplication of
power supply and CPU card. In the event of failure of the main power
supply or CPU card, the standby will take over without disruption of on-
85 going calls.
Hospitality Package should have Following features:
Check-in and Check-out
Check-in Profile
Room Types
Property Name
Guest Name and Title
Guest Number
Guest VIP status
Guest Search
Guest Shift
Alarms & Reminders
Wake-up Calls
Call Privilege
Call Budget
Page 829 of 1358

Call Forward
Call Block
Do Not Disturb (DND)
Occupancy status
Guest In/Out status
Maid In/Out status
Room clean status
Message Wait Indication
Voicemail
Mini Bar
Floor Service
Hotel-Motel Activity Log
Room status reports
Hybrid IP-PBX Instrument

Codec: G.722, G.711(A/µ), G.729,
G.726, G.723 DTMF: In-band, Out-
of-band (RFC 2833) and SIP INFO
1 Audio Features
Full-duplex hands-free
speakerphone with
AEC VAD, CNG, AEC, AJB, AGC
Abbreviated Dialing, Call Pick Up,
and Internal Call Restriction Call
Hold, Mute, and DND One-touch
Transfer and Hotline Redial, Auto
2 Phone Features Call Back (ACB), and Auto Answer
Call Forward, Call Waiting and Call
Transfer 3-way Conferencing and
Conference Multi-party Emergency
Call and Conferencing
128 x 64 Graphical LCD LED for Call,

3 Display Message Wait Indication Intuitive
user interface with Icon
Extended (Proprietary) SIP Protocol
4 Networking and Security IP assignment: Static, DHCP SRTP
TLS QoS: 802.1p/Q tagging (VLAN)
Desk mount External AC Adaptor:
AC 100~240V Input & DC
5 Physical Features 5V/600mA output Operating
humidity: 10 ~ 95%
Operating temperature: 0 ~ 45 °C
Compliance
Hybrid IP-PBX Instrument Type 2 Yes/No
Full-duplex Hands-free
Speakerphone with AEC Codecs:
1 Audio Features
G.711(A/μ), G.722, G.723, G.729,
iLBC AEC, AJB, AGC
Page 830 of 1358

Call Hold, Mute, Do Not Disturb

Speed Dial , Hotline, Redial, Call
Back Auto Answer, Call Forward,
2 Phone Features Call Waiting Call Transfer , Room
Monitoring Conference ,
Directory, Call Logs
Paging, Dial-by-Name
Message Wait Lamp, Ringer Lamp
3 Call Management Voice Mail, Call Pickup - Group
and Selective, Paging
240*64 Pixels Graphical LCD with
Backlit, LED for
Incoming/Ongoing Call, Mute and
4 Display
Hold, Intuitive User Interface with
Icons, Multiple Languages Caller
ID with Name and Number
SIP v2 (RFC3261), IP Assignment:
Static/DHCP/PPPoE , QoS:
802.1p/Q Tagging (VLAN), Layer 3
Toss, DSCP SRTP for Voice,
5 Networking and Security
Transport Layer Security (TLS),
AES Encryption for Configuration
File ,Digest Authentication using
MD5 IEEE802.1X
49 keys including 4 Context
6 Physical Features Sensitive Keys ,1 x RJ9 Handset
Port,1 x RJ9 Headset Port
Power Adapter: 5VDC/600mA,
Power over Ethernet (IEEE
7 Power Supply 802.3af), Power Consumption: 5W
(Typical),Connector: DC Power
Jack
Operating Temperature Range = 0
to 45°C, Storage Temperature = 0
to 55°C, Operating and Storage
8 Environmental
Humidity = 5 to 95%, RH, Non-
Condensing SNMP
v1/v2g
9 Certifications CE, FCC-15, RoHS
Page 831 of 1358

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Page 832 of 1358

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - CIVIL WORKS
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (GENERAL)
CHAPTER A - BRIEF OF REQUIREMENT OF THE WORK:
Introduction:
The scope of work relates to planning, designing, construction of Group VIII projects comprising of
multistory hostel blocks, academic building, faculty blocks & apartments and other associated
infrastructure at IIM Indore. The work is to be executed Design, Engineering, Procurement &
Construction (EPC) basis as laid down in the Master Plan, Concept plans, Design Brief Report and
tender drawings including Operation & Maintenance of buildings/services after completion and
handing over in phases and up to the expiry of the defect liability period of complete project.
The scope of work shall also include Electrical works, Mechanical works, electronic works, Plumbing,
Sanitary, Sewerage, Storm water drainage, & Firefighting works etc. including maintenance during
defect liability period including & preparation of all detailed shop drawings, obtaining approval
from all local authorities, electrical inspector, water, sewer, drainage, electricity connection from local
bodies, permission / approval for tree replantation etc. to be executed as integral part of the project. As
CLIENT/ IIM Indore aims at getting GRIHA 5-Star rating for the building, prospective bidders are
required to provide adequate documentation & all other requirements relevant to enable CLIENT/IIM
Indore in achieving these objectives as referred above.
General
The work shall in general conform to the Latest CPWD Specifications (corrected up to the last date of
submission/uploading of bid). Work under this Contract shall consist of furnishing all labour, materials,
equipment, tools & plants, and appliances necessary and required. Regarding testing of civil & electrical
& other materials, the testing of materials shall be conducted in Govt. Laboratory/ Govt. Engineering
Colleges/ IITs/ NITs or from the laboratory approved by IIM Indore/Authority Engineer. The charges of
testing of materials in approved laboratory shall be borne by the Contractor. No payment shall be made
for any damage caused by rain, snowfall, flood, or any other natural calamity, whatsoever during the
execution of the work. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for any damage to the govt. property
and work for which the payment has been advanced to him under the contract and he shall make good
the same at his risk and cost. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for safety and security of his
material, T&P, Machinery brought to the site by him.
The Contractor shall comply with the safety procedures, norms, and guidelines (as applicable) as
outlined in the document Part 7 Constructional practices and safety- 2016, National Building code of
India, Bureau of Indian Standards. A copy of all pertinent regulations and notices concerning accidents,
injury and first aid shall be prominently exhibited at the work site. Depending upon the scope & nature
of work, a person qualified in first aid shall be available at work site to render and direct first aid to
causalities. A telephone may be provided to first aid assistant with telephone numbers of the hospitals
displayed. Complete reports of all accidents and action taken thereon shall be forwarded to the
competent authorities.
The Contractor shall ensure the following activities for construction workers safety, among other
measures:
• Guarding all parts of dangerous machinery.
Precautionary signs for working on machinery.
• Maintaining hoists and lifts, lifting machines, chains, ropes, and other lifting tackles in good
condition.
• Durable and reusable formwork systems to replace timber formwork and ensure that formwork
Page 833 of 1358

where used is properly maintained.

• Ensuring that walking surfaces or boards at height are of sound construction and are provided
with safety rails or belts.
• Provide protective equipment, helmets etc.
• Provide measures to prevent fires. Fire extinguishers and buckets of sand to be provided in
the fire-prone area and elsewhere.
• Provide sufficient and suitable light for working during night-time.
The Contractor shall provide for an adequate number of garbage bins around the construction site and
the workers facilities and will be responsible for the proper utilization of these bins for any solid waste
generated during the construction. The Contractor shall ensure that the site and the workers facilities
are kept litter free. Separate bins should be provided for plastic, glass, metal, biological and paper waste
and labeled in both Hindi and English with suitable symbols.
Contractor should spray curing water on concrete structure and shall not allow free flow of water.
Concrete structures should be kept covered with thick cloth/gunny bags and water should be sprayed
on them. Contractor shall do water ponding on all sunken slabs using cement and sand mortar.
The Contractor shall remove from site all rubbish and debris generated by the Works and keep Works
clean and tidy throughout the Contract Period. All the serviceable and non-serviceable (malba) material
shall be segregated and stored separately. Malba, rubbish & other waste materials shall be disposed off
as directed/ approved by Engineer in Charge and necessary documentations shall be submitted to IIM
Indore/Authority Engineer. In this regard directives of National Green Tribunal or any other authority
shall be a binding on Contractor.
Approved Makes:
Specification/brands names of materials to be used as per the scope of work are listed in the bid
documents. The efforts should be made by the Contractor to use indigenous products.
Method Statement:
The Contractor shall submit a ‘Method statement’ for each important activity for the approval of the IIM
Indore/Authority Engineer soon after the award of work to him. The ‘Methods statement’ is a statement
by which the construction procedures for any activity of construction are formulated and stated in
chronological order. The ‘Methods statement’, should have a description of the item with elaborate
procedures in steps to implement the same, the specifications of the materials involved, their testing
and acceptance criteria, equipment to be used, Precautions to be taken, etc.
Setting Out
The Contractor shall carry out survey of the whole work area, setting out the layout of building in
consultation with the Engineer -in-Charge & proceed further. Any discrepancy between the IIM
Indore/Authority Engineer, architectural drawings and actual layout at site shall be brought to the notice
of the Engineer -in-charge. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to ensure correct setting out
of alignment. Total station survey/ Theodolite, instruments only shall be used for layout, fixing
boundaries, and Centre lines, etc.
The Contractor shall establish, maintain and assume responsibility for grades, lines, levels and
benchmarks. He shall report any errors or inconsistencies regarding grades, lines, levels, dimensions
etc. to the Engineer -in-Charge before commencing work. Commencement of work shall be regarded as
the Contractor ‘s acceptance of such grades, lines, levels, and dimensions and no claim shall be
Page 834 of 1358

entertained at a later date for any errors found.

If at any time, any error appears due to grades, lines, levels and benchmarks during the progress of the
work, the Contractor shall rectify such error, if so required, to the satisfaction of the Engineer -in-Charge.
Though the site levels are indicated in the drawings the Contractor shall ascertain and confirm the site
levels with respect to benchmark from the concerned authorities. The Contractor shall protect and
maintain temporary/ permanent benchmarks at the site of work throughout the execution of work.
These benchmarks shall be got checked by the IIM Indore/Authority Engineer or his authorized
representatives. The work at different stages shall be checked with reference to benchmarks maintained
for the said purpose.
The approval by the IIM Indore/Authority Engineer, of the setting out by the Contractor, shall not relieve
the Contractor of any of his responsibilities and obligation to rectify the errors/ defects, if any, which
may be found at any stage during the progress of the work or after the completion of the work.
The Contractor shall be entirely and exclusively responsible for the horizontal, vertical and other
alignments, the level and correctness of every part of the work and shall rectify effectively any errors or
imperfections therein. Such rectifications shall be carried out by the Contractor to the entire satisfaction
of the Engineer - in-Charge.
The contractor(s) shall carry out soil/geotechnical investigation and should satisfy himself about
complete characteristics of soil and other parameters at site. The details w.r.t soil strata, bearing
capacity etc. given in the DBR are indicative and no claim on the alleged inadequacy or incorrectness of
the soil data supplied by the department shall be entertained. The intending Contractor shall conduct
soil investigations on their own and shall be responsible for the adequacy of the design.
Coordinated Drawings
Before taking up the work, the contractor shall prepare shop drawings for the works listed below for
various civil and electrical & other services showing details of lay out in plan including sections elevations
& large-scale details and contractor shall plan and mobilize his resources as per these drawings and as
per actual site conditions to facilitate convenient execution, installation as well as maintenance of these
items.
Shop Drawings:
The scope of work, technical specifications and drawings together shall be considered as a tender
requirement and the work shall be carried out as per Good for Construction (GFC) drawings, prepared
& submitted by the Contractor and duly approved by IIM Indore/Authority Engineer/Architect. The
contractor shall study the GFC drawings and taking into account actual site conditions and selected
material and requirements, shall prepare shop drawings as fully coordinated drawings. Such drawings
shall be prepared for the works, not limited to the following works:
• Aluminium work &Structural glazing.
• Expansion joint work Stone cladding work
• Suspended ceiling work coordinated with all ceiling related services.
• Marble, granite, vitreous, ceramic, tile, flooring, work
All Electrical work
• All Sanitary work
• All HVAC works.
• All Fire Fighting work
Lifts Horticulture Electric Sub-station
DG sets STP & ETP
• CCTV & Access Control
Audio Visual Boilers &
Page 835 of 1358

Pumps Solar panels.

• Hard and Soft landscaping work
Signages
The shop drawings shall be prepared and submitted for approval, to the Architect, well in
advance to achieve the milestones provided.
Within the time frame agreed with the IIM Indore/Authority Engineer, the contractor shall prepare shop
drawings using latest version of Auto CAD. Shop drawings shall show all layouts, details in plans &
sections showing all connections, junctions, bends, supports, clearances. Fixing arrangements with
dimensions room, etc. shall be prepared by the contractor on Auto-CAD based on the architectural
drawings and site measurements. All measurable items quantities shall be mentioned on each shop
drawing being submitted for approval by the contractor. 4 sets of shop drawings (soft copy also) shall
be submitted for approval and Seven sets of final shop drawings after approval by IIM Indore/Authority
Engineer shall be submitted by the contractor along with the soft copy. The shop drawings shall be
prepared as per agreed schedule. All coordinated drawing of individual as well combined services shall
be prepared and submitted by the contractor, for approval.
Technical submittals of manufacturer ‘s catalogues and technical data shall be submitted for approval.
The contractor shall designate an Engineer responsible for issue and preparation of
shop drawings and control of GFC drawings.
Scale of Amenities: -
The doors and windows/flooring shall be provided as per the requirements indicated in the finishing
schedules/tender drawings/ MOUD Norms for residential buildings and technical specifications. In
case of variance, the decision of Engineer in charge shall prevail.
Page 836 of 1358

CHAPTER B- TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS- CIVIL WORKS
1. GENERAL
• The work shall be carried out in accordance with the Design Basis Report, Architectural
drawings, and structural drawings (proof checked/vetted by the approved Institute) and
approved by the IIM Indore/Authority Engineer. The Technical Specifications are to be read with
and in general conforming to the Latest CPWD Specifications.
• Contractor(s) shall provide permanent benchmarks, flag tops and other reference points for the
proper execution of work and these shall be preserved till the end of the work. All such
reference points shall be in relation to the levels and locations, given in the Architectural and
plumbing drawings. On completion of work, the Contractor(s) shall submit required number of
prints of ―as built drawings to the IIM Indore/Authority Engineer.
• Before commencement of any item of work the Contractor shall correlate all the relevant
architectural and structural drawings, and specifications etc. and satisfy himself that the
information available is complete and unambiguous. The Contractor alone shall be responsible
for any loss or damage occurring by the commencement of work based on any erroneous and
or incomplete information and no claim whatsoever shall be entertained on this account.
• The Contractor (s) should engage approved, licensed plumbers for the work and get the
materials (fixtures/fittings) tested, by the municipal Body /Corporation authorities wherever
required, at his own cost. The Contractor(s) shall submit for the approval of the IIM
Indore/Authority Engineer, the name of the plumbing Contractor proposed to be engaged by
him.
• The Contractor shall give performance test of the entire installation(s) as per the specifications
in the presence of the IIM Indore/Authority Engineer or his authorized representative before
the work is finally accepted and nothing extra what-so-ever shall be payable to the Contractor
for the test.
• The work of services will be executed simultaneously. The Contractor shall not be allowed
making recesses, holes, opening etc. as the same shall be planned in advance and necessary
grooves/niches shall be provided in shuttering of RCC.
• Sample of building materials, fittings and other articles required for execution of work shall be
got approved from the IIM Indore/Authority Engineer/ Architect, before use in the work. The
quality of samples brought by the Contractor shall be judged by standards laid down in the
relevant CPWD/ BIS specifications. All materials and articles brought by the Contractor to the
site for use shall conform to the samples approved by the Engineer-in- Charge which shall be
preserved till the completion of the work.
• BIS marked materials except otherwise specified shall be subjected to quality test at the
discretion of the IIM Indore/Authority Engineer besides testing of other materials as per the
specifications described for the item/material. Wherever BIS marked materials are brought to
the site of work, the Contractor shall, if required, by the IIM Indore/Authority Engineer, furnish
manufacturer ‘s test certificate or test certificate from approved testing laboratory to establish
that the material / procured by the Contractor for incorporation in the work satisfies the
provisions of specifications / BIS codes relevant to the material and / or the work done.
• The Contractor shall procure the required materials in advance so that there is sufficient
time to testing of the materials and clearance of the same before use in the work. The
Contractor shall provide at his own cost suitable weighing and measuring arrangements at site
for checking the weight / dimensions as may be necessary for execution of work.
• Contractor shall submit minimum ―Quality Assurance plan which shall consist of:
Lot size, number of required tests and frequency of testing. While deciding these criteria
Page 837 of 1358

CPWD Specifications & provisions of BIS Code and standard practices may be referred.
The mandatory test shall be in conformity with the requirements details in the latest CPWD
specifications. For testing of other materials/work, the requirements as per the provisions of
BIS Code and standard practices shall be applicable.
It should clearly indicate the Machinery and other Tool & Plants required to be deployed at
site by the Contractor. Entire Machinery and T&P may not be required at the start of work,
therefore, a proper time schedule by which each Machinery & T&P is to be brought at site
should also be indicated.
The Contractor shall maintain record of Receipt of Materials, testing of the same & Maintenance
of Register of Tests.
All the registers of tests carried out at Construction Site or in outside laboratories shall be
maintained by the Contractor, which may be inspected by IIM Indore/Authority Engineer or
his/her designee at any point of time.
The Contractor shall allow access to Third Party Quality Assurance Agency (TPQAA)
engaged by IIM INDORE to have a control on quality and methodology of execution.
Requisite number of Samples of materials including Cement Concrete Cubes shall be taken
jointly by Contractor, TPQAA and IIM Indore/Authority Engineer or their authorized
representative. All arrangements for transporting and getting them tested shall be made by
the Contractor.
All the test in field lab setup at Construction Site shall be carried out by the Quality control
team to be engaged by the Contractor which can be witnessed by Engineer-in- charge or
his/her designee. A daily report of Tests to be conducted on a day shall be submitted to IIM
Indore/Authority Engineer.
All the entries in the registers will be made by the designated Engineering Staff of the
Contractor.
The Contractor shall be responsible for safe custody of all the test registers.
Submission of copy of all test registers, Material at Site Register and hindrance register along
with each alternate Running Account Bill and Final Bill shall be mandatory.
All material received at site shall be entered in MAS Register and copy of Supply order, MTC &
Bill-invoice shall be maintained in order. The MAS Registers including Cement and Steel
Registers shall be maintained by a qualified staff of Contractor which shall be inspected
by IIM Indore/Authority Engineer or his authorized representative at any time. The daily
report of receipt of material shall be sent to IIM Indore/Authority Engineer.
• The Contractor shall ensure that no construction leakage (e.g., cement slurry etc.), is allowed to
percolate into the ground. Adequate precautions are to be taken to safeguard against this
including, reduction of wasteful curing processes, collection, basic filtering and reuse. The
Contractor shall follow requisite measures for collecting drainage water run-off from
construction areas and material storage sites and diverting water flow away from such polluted
areas. Temporary drainage channels, perimeter dike/swale, etc. shall be constructed to carry
the pollutant-laden water directly to the treatment device or facility.
2. POUR CARD, CHECK-LIST FOR EXECUTION OF WORK
As and when any important item is taken up for execution, the Contractor shall submit the
specifications and develop a checklist and Pour card. This sample checklist should be got approved
from the Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore and should be used at site. This check list should be shown to
the Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore or his authorized representative during inspection. This procedure
Page 838 of 1358

is to be followed for all hidden items, CC/RCC work, Steel-reinforcement, shuttering, cast-in-situ mosaic
flooring, doors & windows, plumbing, including water supply pipelines, roof treatment, earth filling etc.
The Contractor shall render all help and assistance in documenting the total sequence of this project by
way of photography, slides, audio-video recording etc. nothing extra shall be payable to the Contractor
on this account.
3. EARTH WORK:
The Contractor may note that the works are to be executed in a plot of land recently filled up. The
Contractor, at his own cost, shall ensure that proper compaction is achieved, as per requirements and
specifications, before construction work is taken up in the respective areas.
For all excavation operations executed manually or by mechanical means, irrespective of the
stipulations in the relevant CPWD Specifications or elsewhere in the Contract. the excavated earth shall
be put to use in the areas related to the work and thereafter the extra earth shall be used in filling up
the low-lying areas of the total plot, at its own cost. If there is any surplus excavated earth thereafter,
the same shall be disposed off by the contractor at his own cost to the place as directed by Engineer –
in-charge and/or permitted by the local authority after obtaining written permission of the Engineer –
in- charge and no payment will be made by the IIM Indore for disposal of this excavated earth.
The Contractor shall, at his own expense and without extra charges, make provision for all shoring,
pumping, dredging or bailing out water, encountered from any sources such as rains, floods, springs,
subsoil water table being high or due to any other cause whatsoever. The foundation trenches shall be
kept free from water while all the works below ground level are in progress without any extra payment.
Filling in plinth shall be in layers and consolidated with water and compacted with pneumatic rammers,
to achieve 90% relative density on testing. One test is to be carried out for 1000 sqm. of compacted area.
Handling of C&D Waste: -The debris / building rubbish waste and the like (Construction & Demolition
waste commonly known as C & D waste) generated from the work, should be taken out to be disposed
it off the campus in a legal and environmentally friendly way to the ―declared dumping/Land fill sites
where the facility of re-cycling of C&D waste are available. The documentary proof with respect to
disposal of all C&D waste generated out of work shall be submitted to Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore
on weekly basis.
3.1. Site Clearance:
Before the earth work is started, the area coming under cutting and filling shall be cleared of
shrubs, rank vegetation, grass, brushwood, trees and saplings of girth up to 30 cm measured at
a height of one metre above ground level and rubbish removed /disposed off by the contractor
at his own cost to the place as directed by Engineer – in- charge and/or permitted by the local
authority after obtaining written permission of the Engineer – in-charge and no payment will be
made by the IIM Indore for disposal of this rubbish. The roots of trees and saplings shall be
removed to a depth of 60cm below ground level or 30 cm below formation level or 15 cm below
sub grade level, whichever is lower, and the holes or hollows filled up with the earth, rammed
and levelled.
3.2. Anti-termite treatment:
Anti-termite treatment shall be done through approved specialized agencies only with prior
approval of the IIM Indore/Authority Engineer or his representative. During the execution of
work, if any damage shall occur to the treatment already done, either due to rain or any other
circumstances, the same shall be rectified and made good to the entire satisfaction of the
CLIENT/ IIM Indore or his representative by the contractor at his costs and risks. The work shall
be carried out as per Volume 1 Sub-head-2 of CPWD specification and IS 6313 PART 2. The
Page 839 of 1358

contractor shall be required to submit a methodology of execution of ATT work and get the
same approved by Engineer in charge before the starting such work.
The contractor shall submit 10 years guarantee bond for the anti-termite work executed.
4. PLAIN CEMENT CONCRETE AND REINFORCED CEMENT CONCRETE WORK:
4.1. Stone Aggregate:
Stone aggregate used in the work shall be of hard broken stone to be obtained from approved
source (Quarries to be approved by the Engineer in charge) and shall conform to relevant
provision in the Latest CPWD Specifications for works).
4.2. Sand
Sand to be used for the work shall be of as specified in Latest CPWD Specifications. Sand shall
be obtained from the source to be got approved by the Engineer in charge and washed if
required, with appropriate equipment to bring down the chemical, inorganic and organic
impurities within the permissible limits as per the direction of the Engineer in charge. The same
shall consist of hard siliceous materials.
Note: Where only one variety of sand is available the sand will be sieved for use in finishing work
as directed by the IIM Indore/ Authority Engineer in order to obtain smooth surface and nothing
extra will be paid on this account.
4.3. Cement
The contractor shall procure 43 grade Ordinary Portland cement conforming to IS 8112 /
Portland Pozzolana Cement conforming to IS 1489 (Part I) as required in the work, from
manufacturers as per list of approved makes or from any other reputed cement manufacturer
having a production capacity not less than one million tons per annum, in case the cement is
not available from manufacturers as per list of approved makes. The bidders may also submit
a list of names of cement manufacturers which they propose to use in the work. The bid
accepting authority reserves right to accept or reject name(s) of cement manufacturer(s) which
the bidder proposes to use in the work.
The supply of cement shall be taken in 50 kg. Bags/silos bearing manufacturer's name and ISI
marking. Samples of cement arranged by the Contractor shall be taken by the IIM
Indore/Authority Engineer and tested in accordance with the provisions of relevant BIS codes.
In case the test results indicate that the cement arranged by the Contractor does not conform
to the relevant BIS codes, the same shall stand rejected, and it shall be removed from the site
by the Contractor at his own cost within a week's time of written order from the Engineer- in-
charge to do so. Supply of cement shall be taken in 50-kg bags bearing manufacturer ‘s name,
or his registered trademarks if any and grade and type of cement as well as ISI marking. The
packing of the cement bags shall be as per Latest CPWD specifications.
The cement shall be brought at site in bulk supply of approximately 50 tons or more as decided
by the IIM Indore/Authority Engineer. The cement go-down of adequate capacity to store the
cement shall be constructed by the Contractor at site of work.
The cement go-down shall always be accessible for the IIM Indore/Authority Engineer or his
representative.
The cement shall be tested by the IIM Indore/Authority Engineer and shall be used on the work
only after satisfactory test results have been received. The Contractor shall supply free of charge
the cement required for testing including its transportation cost to testing laboratories. The cost
of tests shall be borne by the Contractor/Department in the manner indicated below:
By the Contractor, if the results show that the cement does not conform to relevant BIS codes.
By the Department, if the results show that the cement conforms to relevant BIS codes.
The actual issue and consumption of cement on work shall be regulated and proper accounts
Page 840 of 1358

maintained as provided in clause 10 of the contract. The theoretical consumption of cement

shall be worked out as per the procedure prescribed in Clause 42 of the GCC and shall be
governed by conditions laid therein. In case the cement consumption is less than theoretical
consumption including permissible variation, recovery at the rate so prescribed shall be made.
In case of excess consumption, no adjustment shall be made.
The cement brought to the site and the cement remaining unused after completion of the work
shall not be removed from site without the written permission of the Engineer-in- charge.
The damaged cement shall be removed from the site immediately by the Contractor on receipt
of a notice in writing from the IIM Indore/Authority Engineer. If he does not do so within 3 days
of receipt of such notice, the IIM Indore/Authority Engineer shall get it removed at the cost of
the Contractor.
4.4. Fly-ash
Fly-ash conforming to grade 1 of IS 3812 (Part 1) may be used as part replacement of OPC
provided uniform blending with cement is ensured in accordance with clauses 5.2 and 5.2.1 of
I.S.456-2000 in the items of BMC and RMC. However, this shall not override the provisions of
the respective items.
4.5. Centering Shuttering and Scaffolding:
All Scaffolding centering for RCC shall be properly designed system and brought to site in
sufficient quantity well in advance so that the progress of the work is not hampered for non-
availability of the same. In case of Ply shuttering, no more than 7 repetitions shall be allowed.
FORMWORK
1. Scope-
This section covers the requirements for providing, fabricating and erecting formwork
including propping, bracing, shoring, strutting, tying, bolting, wedging and all other
supports to the concrete during its setting and subsequent removal of forms.
2. Related work
• Cast-in-place Concrete
• Precast Reinforced concrete
3. Applicable codes and Specifications.

3.1 Materials
• IS: 4990-1993 Specifications for Plywood for concrete shuttering work
• IS: 3513PART 3 Plywood having more density.
3.2 Equipment
• IS: 2750-1964 Specifications for Steel Scaffolding.
Codes of Practices
• IS: 4014-1967 Code of Practice for steel tubular, scaffolding (Part I & II)
• IS: 14687-1999 False Work for Concrete Structure – Guidelines
• IS: 800-1984 Code of Practice for General Construction in Steel
3.3 Construction Safety
• IS: 3696-1966 (Part I & II) Safety Code for scaffolds and ladders.
4. Design Criteria
Formwork shall be designed for load and lateral earth pressure due to dead weight of
concrete, superimposed live loads of workmen, materials and plants and for other loads
as indicated on the drawings.
Formwork shall be designed to have sufficient strength to carry the hydrostatic head of
Page 841 of 1358

concrete as a liquid without deflection tolerances exceeding the acceptable limits. The
formwork design shall take into account height of pour, thickness of member, rate of pour,
concrete slump, placing temperature, concrete density, construction joints, wind load,
method of Discharge etc. Form work design shall be such so as to allow de-molding without
shock, distance or damage to concrete.
5. Material
5.1 General
Sheeting used in formwork shall be of plywood (as per IS: 4990-1993) or steel capable of
resisting damage to the contact faces under normal conditions of erecting forms, fixing
reinforcement steel and placing concrete. The selection of materials suitable for formwork
shall be made based on the quantity consistent with the specified finishes and safety.
All formwork supports (centering, props, scaffolds etc.) shall only be in structural steel and
preferably pipes confirming to IS:1161,IS:2750,IRC:87. Wooden bailers or bamboo shall not
be permitted as props or bracings. All props shall be properly braced with 40 NB ledger
pipes and swivel clamps as appropriate.
5.2 Plywood
Plywood used for formwork should be minimum 12mm thick shuttering quality plywood
and as specified in IS: 4990-1993 of make approved by Engineer. Suitable spanning/backing
members shall be provided depending on the shuttering design. For curved surfaces /
structures min. 6 mm thick plywood will be used.
5.3 Steel
Steel formwork shall be made as per shuttering design with sheathing sheets stiffened with
suitable framing supported at suitable spacing.
5.4 Miscellaneous.
Fiber glass, masonry and concrete may also be used as materials for forms or moulds with
the approval of the Engineer. For grid slabs, the decision as to the material to be used for
forms shall depend upon whether the work is to be exposed or not as indicated in
drawings.
6. Erection of Formwork
Forms shall be used wherever necessary to confine the concrete during vibration and to
shape it to the required lines. The formwork shall confirm to shapes, lines levels and
dimensions of the concrete shown on the drawings.
6.1 Forms shall have sufficient strength to withstand the pressure resulting from placement
and vibration of concrete and shall be maintained rigidly in position. Adequate number and
size of struts, braces, ties and props to ensure rigidity of forms during concreting shall
adequately support formwork. Where props rest on natural or filled up ground, to avoid
any settlement, the soil be thoroughly compacted, and bases of props shall be sufficient
size as to restrict the bearing pressure on the ground to 5 t/sqm.
6.2 Forms shall be tight enough to prevent loss of mortar from concrete and to produce a
dense, homogeneous and uniformly coloured concrete completely free from
honeycombing or surface Roughness. Joints In the formwork shall be designed to prevent
leakage, not only between individual elements forming the panels but also from the
horizontal and vertical junction between the panels themselves.
Page 842 of 1358

6.3 If formwork is held together by bolts or wires, those shall be so fixed that no iron shall be
exposed on surface against which concrete is to be laid. The tie bolts running may be used
through the concrete. Holes left in the concrete by these tie bolts shall be filled with suitable
material.
6.4 Formwork shall be constructed so as to facilitate loosening and permit removal without
jarring the concrete. Wedges, clamps and bolts shall be used wherever practicable instead
of nails.
7. Cleaning and Oiling of Formwork

7.1 The contractor shall ensure that at the time concrete is placed in the forms, the surface of
the forms in contact With the concrete shall be free from encrustation of mortar, grout or
other foreign material. Temporary Compressed air shall be used to clean the complete
formwork and remove all traces of duct and debris.
7.2 The surface of the forms to be in contact with the concrete shall be coated with an
approved form releasing agent that will effectively prevent sticking and will not satin the
concrete surface. After each use the surface of forms in contact with concrete shall be
cleaned, well wetted and treated with form oil. Lubricating machine oils shall not be placed.
The contractor shall be commercial form release agent that will not bond with, stain or
adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatment of concrete
surfaces.
7.3 Immediately before concreting is commenced the formwork shall be carefully examined to
check that all dirt shavings, sawdust and other refuse have been removed.
8. Removal of Formwork
8.1. Formwork shall be removed carefully so as to prevent damage to the concrete.
8.2. All non-supporting forms shall be loosened and removed during regular working hours and
as soon as the concrete has hardened sufficiently to prevent damage from the removal of
all forms. All false work and forms supporting concrete beams and slabs, or other members
subject to direct bending stress, shall not be removed or released until the concrete has
attained sufficient strength to ensure structural stability.
8.3. Unless otherwise permitted in writing, the forms shall not be stripped in less than the
minimum periods specified in IS: 456. However, the period may be decreased if the
concrete has attained necessary structural stability. If concreting is done inclement
weather i.e. temperature below 10˚C or above 40˚C, the above periods shall be suitably
modified as per instructions of the Engineer.
8.4. No construction loads exceeding the combination of superimposing dead loads plus
specified live load shall be supported on any un-shored portion of the structure under
construction, unless analysis indicates adequate strength to support such additional loads.
8.5. Formwork shall be removed in such a manner so as not to impair safety and serviceability
of the structure. It shall be removed gradually to prevent sudden application of loads to
the concrete. All concrete to be exposed by form removal shall have sufficient strength so
as not to be damaged thereby.
9. Re use of Forms
9.1. Immediately after the forms are removed, they shall be cleaned.
Page 843 of 1358

9.2. The contractor shall not be permitted to reuse any forms if the formwork has worm out
and have become unfit for formwork.
9.3. Formwork for Sloped Surfaces
9.3.1. Forms for sloped surfaces shall be built so that the formwork can be placed board by board
immediately ahead of concrete placement so as to enable ready access for placement,
vibration, inspection and repair of concrete.
9.3.2. The formwork shall also be built so that the boards can be removed one by one from the
bottom up as soon as the concrete has attained sufficient stiffness to prevent sagging.
Surfaces of construction joints and finished surfaces with slopes steeper than 2 horizontals:
1 vertical shall be formed as required herein.
9.4. Formwork for Curved surfaces
9.4.1. The contractor shall interpolate intermediate sections as necessary and shall construct the
forms so that the curvature will be continuous between sections. Where necessary to meet
requirements for curvature, the form lumber shall be built up of laminated slices cut to
make tight, smooth form surfaces.
9.4.2. After the forms have been constructed, all surface imperfections shall be corrected and all
surface irregularities at matching faces of form material shall be dresses to the specific
curvature.
9.4.3. Where required the formwork has to be checked with templates to ensure it meets the
requirement of the shapes and curves.
9.5. Formwork for exposed concrete surfaces
9.5.1. Where it is specifically shown on the drawings to have original fair face finish of concrete
surface without any rendering of plastering, formwork shall be carried out by using
plywood or steel plates of approved quality.
9.5.2. The forms shall be constructed so as to produce a uniform and consistent texture and
pattern on the face of the concrete.
9.5.3. To achieve a finish which shall be free of board marks, the formwork shall be faced with
plywood or equivalent material in large sheets. The sheets shall be arranged in an
approved pattern. Whenever possible, joints between sheets shall be arranged to coincide
with architectural feature, sills, window heads or change in direction of surface. All joints
between panels shall be vertical or horizontal unless otherwise directed. Suitable joints
shall be approved between sheets. The joints shall be arranged and fitted so that no
blemish or mark is imparted to the finished surfaces.
9.5.4. Forms for exposed concrete surfaces shall be constructed with grade strips (the underside
of which indicate top of pour ) at horizontal constructions joints , unless the use of groove
strips is specified on the drawings .The reset forms shall be tightened against the concrete
so that the forms will not be spread and permit abrupt irregularities or loss of mortar.
Supplementary form ties shall be used as necessary to hold the reset forms tight against
the concrete.
9.5.5. For fair faced concrete, the position of through bolts will be restricted and generally as
indicated on the drawings.
9.5.6. Plywood and steel plates used in the formwork for obtaining exposed surfaces shall be
reused. However, no forms will be allowed for reuse if it is doubtful to produce desired
texture of exposed concrete.
10. Tolerance in Finished Concrete
The formwork shall be so made as to produce a finished concrete true to shape, lines, level,
Page 844 of 1358

plumb and dimensions as shown in the drawings subject to the following tolerance unless
otherwise specified in this specification or as specified in IS: 14687-1999 and as per IS: 456
: 2000.
4.6. Reinforcement:
The Contractor shall procure TMT bars conforming to IS: 1786 pertaining of Fe500D Grade from
primary steel producers from the list of ―Approved make for Civil Works provided in the
agreement. The manufacturer has to give a certificate that the material supplied is not a re-
rolled product. Relevant vouchers & test certificates will be produced by the contractor. The
Contractor shall have to obtain and furnish manufacturer Test Report /test certificates for each
dia and each lot Tests to the IIM Indore/Authority Engineer in respect of all supplies of steel
brought by him to the site of work. Re-rolled sections will not be allowed. Reinforcement steel,
structural steel shall be stored and stacked in such manner so as to facilitate easy identification,
removal etc. The contractor shall take proper care to prevent direct contact between the steel
and the ground/ water for which he shall provide necessary arrangement at his own cost
including ensuring proper drainage of area to prevent waterlogging as per direction of the
Engineer-in- charge. Steel shall also be protected, by applying a coat of neat cement slurry over
the bars for which no extra payment shall be made. Test certificates for each consignment of
steel shall be furnished and further tests shall be got carried out from the authorized laboratory
as per the directions of IIM Indore/Authority Engineer, before incorporating the materials in the
work. Nothing extra will be paid for ―straightening of bars received from market in coils or with
bends. All incidental charges of any kind whatsoever including cartage, storage, safe custody of
materials, cutting and wastage etc. shall be borne by the contractor.
The actual average sectional weight for dia up to 10 mm shall be arrived at from one-meter-long
samples (minimum 3 from each dia) taken from each lot of steel. The discretion of the Engineer
– in – charge shall be final for the procedure to be followed for determining the average sectional
weight of each lot. Quantity of each diameter of steel received at site of work each day will
constitute the single lot for this purpose.
The weight of each lot of a particular diameter of 10mm and below shall be reckoned as the
weight as per actual issue multiplied by a factor equal to the standard sectional weight of the
particular diameter divided by the average sectional weight of the particular dia in a particular
lot worked out as per above para. Adjustment for the steel shall be effected on the basis of the
weight as modified above.
Measurement of all diameters of steel be on linear basis and will be converted into weight
on the basis of standard sectional weight coefficients given in relevant CPWD specifications
mentioned in schedule F of General Conditions of Contract.
Samples shall also be taken and got tested by the IIM Indore/Authority Engineer as per the
provisions in this regard in relevant BIS codes. In case the test results indicate that the steel
arranged by the Contractor does not conform to the specifications as defined the same shall
stand rejected, and it shall be removed from the site of work by the Contractor at his cost within
a week time or written orders from the IIM Indore/Authority Engineer to do so.
For checking nominal mass, tensile strength, bend test & re-bend test etc. specimen of sufficient
length shall be cut from each size of the bar at random at frequency not less than the specified
below:
Size of bar For consignment below 100 tones For consignment

above
100 tonnes
Page 845 of 1358

Under 10 mm dia One sample for each 25 tonnes or One sample for each
40bars p a r t thereof tonnes part thereof
10 mm to 16mm One sample for each 35 tonnes or One sample for each
45
dia bars part thereof tonnes part thereof.
Over 16mm dia One sample for each 45 tonnes or One sample for each 50
bars part thereof tonnes part thereof.
The Contractor shall supply free of cost the required steel bars for testing. The cost of tests shall
be borne by the Contractor.
The actual issue and consumption of steel on work shall be regulated and proper accounts shall
be maintained. The theoretical consumption of steel shall be worked out as per procedure
prescribed in clause 42 of the GCC and shall be governed by conditions laid therein.
Steel brought to site and remaining unused shall not be removed from site without the written
permission of IIM Indore/Authority Engineer.
Bar Bending Schedule: - Contractor shall prepare bar bending schedules and shall get them
approved from the IIM Indore/Authority Engineer or his authorized representative.
Records of Consumption of Cement & Steel: –
For the purpose of keeping a record of cement and steel received at site and consumed in works,
the contractor shall maintain a properly bound register in the form approved by the IIM
Indore/Authority Engineer, showing columns like quantity received and used in work and balance
in hand etc. The contractor‘s representative shall sign this register daily.
The register of cement & steel shall be kept at site in the safe custody of Engineer-in- charge
during progress of the work. This provision will not, however, absolve the contractor from the
quality of the final product.
4.7. Concrete Work

All concrete work will be strictly done by automatic computerized batching plant of suitable
capacity installed at site or RMC as per approval of IIM Indore/ Engineer-in- Charge. No concrete
work will be permitted without automatic batching plant unless specifically approved in writing
by IIM Indore/ IIM Indore/Authority Engineer. All operation required for continuing concreting
work at the construction joints for better bond are deemed to be included in the cost and nothing
extra shall be payable on this account.
4.8. Transportation, Placing and Compaction of Concrete

Transportation of the mix concrete shall be done through transit mixers and concrete pumped
through suitable concrete pumps and pipes arrangement and vibrated by vibration machines,
materials lifts shall also be provided at site as and where required.
Mixed concrete from the batching plant shall be transported to the point of placement by transit
mixers or through concrete pumps or steel closed bottom buckets capable of carrying 6 cum
concrete. In case the concrete is proposed to be transported by transit mixer, the mixer speed
shall not be less than 4 rev/ min. of the drum nor greater than a speed resulting in a peripheral
velocity of the drum as 70 m / minute at its largest diameter. The agitating speed of the agitator
shall be not less than 2 rev / min. nor more than 6 rev / min. of the drum. The number of
revolutions of the mixing drum or blades at mixing speed shall be between 70 to 100 revolutions
Page 846 of 1358

for a uniform mix, after all ingredients, have been charged into the drum. Unless tempering water
is added, all rotation after 100 revolutions shall be at agitating speed of 2 to 6 rev / min. and the
number of such rotations shall not exceed 250. The general construction of transit mixer and
other requirements shall conform to IS: 5892.
In case concrete is to be transported by pumping, the conduit shall be primed by pumping a batch
of mortar / thick cement slurry through the line to lubricate it. Once the pumping is started, it
shall not be interrupted (if at all possible) as concrete standing idle in the line is liable to cause a
plug. The operator shall ensure that some concrete is always there in the pump-receiving hopper
during operation. The lines shall always be maintained clean and shall be free of dents.
Materials for pumped concrete shall be batched consistently and uniformly. Maximum size of
aggregate shall not exceed one-third of the internal diameter of the pipe. Grading of aggregate
shall be continuous and shall have sufficient ultra-fine materials (materials finer than 0.25mm).
Proportion of fine aggregates passing through 0.25mm shall be between15 & 30% and that
passing through 0.125 mm sieve shall not be less than 5% of the total volume of aggregate. When
pumping long distances and through hot weather, set- retarding admixtures may be used.
Admixtures to improve workability can be added. Suitability of concrete shall be through pumping
shall be verified by trial mixes and by performing pumping tests.
4.9. RCC Work (Concrete Mix Design)
The RCC work shall be done with RMC of Design Mix Concrete, unless otherwise specified. The
Ready-Mix Concrete shall be as per IS: 4926 and as per Latest CPWD Specification and guidelines.
For the nominal mix in RCC, CPWD specification shall be followed. The Design Mix Concrete will
be designed based on the principles given in IS: 456, 10262 and SP 23. The contractor shall carry
out design mixes for each class of concrete indicating that the concrete ingredients and
proportions will result in concrete mix meeting requirements specified. The cement shall be
actually weighed as presumption of each bag having 50 kg shall not be allowed. In case of use of
admixture, the mix shall be designed with these ingredients as well.
The IIM Indore/Authority Engineer will reserve the right to inspect at any stage and reject the
concrete if he is not satisfied about quality of product at the user ‘s end.
The IIM Indore/Authority Engineer reserves the right to exercise control over the: -
• Ingredients, water and admixtures purchased, stored and to be used in the concrete including
conducting of tests for checking quality of materials, recording of test results and declaring the
materials fit or unfit for use in production of mix.
• Calibration check of the plant.
• Weight and quantity check on the ingredients, water and admixtures added for batch mixing.
• Time of mixing of concrete.
• Testing of fresh concrete, recordings of results and declaring the mix fit or unfit for use. This will
include continuous control on the workability during production and taking corrective action, if
required.
For exercising such control, the IIM Indore/Authority Engineer shall periodically depute his
authorized representative at the RMC plant. It shall be responsibility of the Contractor to ensure
that all necessary equipment, manpower & facilities are made available to Engineer-in- Charge
and/or his authorized representative at RMC plant.
All required relevant records of produced and used concrete shall be made available to the IIM
Indore/Authority Engineer or his authorized representative. IIM Indore/Authority Engineer shall,
as required, specify guidelines & additional procedures for quality control & other parameters in
respect of materials, production & transportation of concrete mix which shall be binding on the
Contractor. Only concrete as approved in design mix by Engineer- in-Charge shall be produced
and transported to the site.
Page 847 of 1358

4.10. Concrete Batching Plant (Design Mix)

The Concrete Batching Plant of suitable capacity to be installed, as per requirement at site, within
a period of 30 days from award of work. The contractor shall install batching plants (preferably
within the site or 50 meters distance from the site of work) supplying Concrete at site. The
batching plant proposed to be engaged by the contractor shall fulfill the following requirements.
• It shall be fully computerized.
• Facility to pump concrete up to the highest point of the building.
• It should have the facility for providing printed advice showing ingredients of concrete
carried by each mixer.
• It should have sufficient capacity to meet the requirement as per schedule.
• In case of failure of Batching Plant, RMC may be allowed with a written permission of the
Engineer in Charge.
• Approved admixtures conforming to IS.9103 shall be permitted to be used. The chloride
content in the admixture shall satisfy the requirement of BS 5075. The total amount of
chloride content in the admixture mixed Concrete shall satisfy the requirement of IS 456-
2000.
• The concrete mix design with and without admixture will be carried out by the contractor
through the Laboratories / Test house as approved by IIM Indore/Authority Engineer.
• The various ingredients for mix design/laboratory tests shall be sent to the lab test house
through the Engineer and the sample of such ingredients sent shall be preserved at site
by the department till completion of work or change in Design Mix whichever is earlier.
The sample shall be taken from the approved materials which are proposed to be used
in the work.
• The batching and mixing plant shall be fully automatic.
• The contractor has to arrange to erect a batching plant for the design mix concrete on
his own.
• The concrete shall be transported to the site in specially made Transit Mixers & shall have
suitable retarders so that it should not set before placing in position. It should have
sufficient flow so that at height the concrete shall be placed by pumping only.
• Each Transit Mixer reaching site shall invariably have manufacturer ‘s certificate
containing details like truck number Grade of mix, time of leaving the plant, time of
reaching a site etc. A copy of the same shall be handed over to E-in-C or his authorized
representative.
• However, samples for testing etc. shall be taken as per the mandatory tests prescribed in
the latest CPWD specifications.
• All cubes shall be tested for 7 days and 28 days tests in conformity with the relevant
CPWD specifications.
• In the items of RCC walls, railings and roofs etc. nothing extra shall be paid for making
designs as per patterns given by IIM Indore/Authority Engineers or for thickness of
sections.
• The water will be tested with regard to its suitability for use in CC/RCC work and nothing
extra will be paid for on this account.
Proportioning Concrete
In proportioning cement concrete, the quantity of both cement and aggregates shall be
Page 848 of 1358

determined by weight. The cement shall be weighed separately from the aggregates. Water shall
either be measured by volume in calibrated tanks or weighed. All measuring equipment shall be
maintained in a clean and serviceable condition. The amount of mixing water shall be adjusted to
compensate for moisture content in both coarse and fine aggregates. The moisture content of
aggregates shall be determined in accordance with IS: 2386 (Part III). Suitable adjustments shall
also be made in the weights of aggregates to allow for the variation in weight of aggregates due
to variation in moisture content.
Production of Concrete
The concrete shall be RMC produced in a central batching and mixing plant with computerized
printing for contents and admixture dosage. The batching plant shall be fully automatic.
Automatic batcher shall be charged by devices which, when actuated by a Single starter switch
will automatically start the weighing operation of each material and stop automatically, when
the designated weight of each material has been reached. The batching plant shall have an
automatic arrangement for dispensing the admixture and shall also be capable of discharging
water in more than one stage. A printout from the batching plant for every lot shall be
submitted. A batching plant essentially shall consist of the following.
Components:
Separate storage bins for different sizes of aggregates, silo for cement; and
water storage tank.
Batching equipment
Mixers
Control panels
Mechanical material feeding and elevating arrangements.
The Contractor shall arrange for inspection of automatic batching plant within seven
days of issue of letter of award to facilitate inspection and approval of same by
Engineer-In- Charge. Nothing extra will be paid for this.
The compartments of storage bins for aggregates shall be approximately of equal size.
The cement compartment shall be centrally located in the batching plant. It shall be
watertight and provided with necessary air vent, aeration fittings for proper flow of
cement & emergency cement cut off gate. The aggregate and sand shall be charged by
power operated centrally revolving chute. The entire plant from mixer floor upward
shall be enclosed and insulated. The batch bins shall be constructed so as to by self-
cleansing during drawdown. The batch bins shall in general conform to the
requirements of IS: 4925.
The batching equipment shall be capable of determining and controlling the prescribed
amounts of various constituent materials for concrete accurately i.e. water, cement,
sand, individual size of coarse aggregates etc. The accuracy of the measuring devices
shall fall within the following limits.
Measurement of Cement ±2% of the quantity of cement in each batch Measurement of
Water ±3% of the quantity of water in each batch Measurement of Aggregate ±3% of
the quantity of aggregate in each batch Measurement of Admixture ±3% of the quantity
of admixture in each batch
Mixing Concrete
The mixer in the batching plant shall be so arranged that mixing action in the mixers can be
observed from the operator's station. The mixer shall be equipped with a mechanically or
electrically operated timing, signaling and metering device which will indicate and assure
completion of the required mixing period. The mixer shall have all other components as
specified in IS: 4925.
Page 849 of 1358

Ingredients, water, and admixtures purchased, stored and to be used in the concrete including
conducting of tests for checking quality of materials recordings of test results and declaring the
material fit or unfit for use in production of mix.
Calibration check of the RMC.
Weight and quality check on the ingredient, water and admixture added for batch mixing.
Time of mixing of concrete.
Testing of fresh concrete, recordings of results and declaring the mix fit or unfit for use. This will
include continuous control on the workability during production and taking corrective action.
For exercising such control, the Engineer shall periodically depute his authorized representative
at the RMC plant. It shall be the responsibility of the contractor to ensure that the necessary
equipment manpower & facilities are made available to Engineer and/or his authorized
representative at RMC plant.
Ingredients, admixtures & water declared unfit for use in production of mix shall not be used. A
batch mix found unfit for use shall not be loaded into the truck for transportation.
All required relevant records of RMC shall be made available to the Engineer or his authorized
representative. Engineer shall, as required, specify guidelines & additional procedures for
quality control & other parameters in respect of materials, production and transportation of
concrete mix which shall be binding on the contractor & the RMC plant.
It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to ensure that the RMC producer provides all
necessary testing equipment and takes all necessary measures to ensure Quality control of
ready -mixed concrete. In general, the required measures shall be: -
Control of Purchased Material Quality

It shall be ensured that the materials purchased and used in the production of concrete conform
to the stipulation of the relevant agreed standards with the material Supplier and the
requirement of the product mix design and quality control producer ‘s. This shall be
accomplished by visual checks, sampling and testing, certification from materials suppliers and
information /data from material supplier. Necessary equipment for the testing of all material
shall be provided and maintained in calibration condition at the plant by the RMC producer.
Control of Material Storage

Adequate and effective storage arrangement shall be provided at RMC plant for prevention of
contamination, reliable transfer and feed system, drainage of aggregates, prevention of freeing
or excessive solar heating of Aggregate etc.
Record of Mix Design and Mix Design Modification
It shall be ensured that a record of mix design and mix design modification is available in his
computer at RMC plant for inspection of Engineer or his representative at any time.
Computer Print outs of Each Truck Load

Each truckload / transit mixer dispatched to site shall carry computer printout of the ingredients
of the concrete it is carrying. The printout shall be produced by an Engineer or his representative
at site before RMC is issued in work.
Transfer and Weighing Equipment
It shall be ensured that a documented calibration is in place. Proper calibration records shall be
Page 850 of 1358

made available indicating the date of next calibration due, corrective action taken etc. It shall be
ensured that additional calibration checks whenever required by the Engineer in writing to
contractor. Need to maintain a daily production record including details of mixes supplied.
Record shall be maintained of what materials were used for that day ‘s production including
water and admixtures.
Maintenance of Plant, Truck Mixers and Pumps

Plant, Truck Mixers and Pumps should be well maintained so that it does not hamper any
operation of production, transportation and placement.
Production of Concrete
The following precautions shall be taken during the production of RMC at the plant-
a. Weighing (Correct reading of batch data and accurate weighing):- For each
load, written, printed or graphical records shall be made of the weights of the
materials batched, the estimated slump, the total amount of water added to
load the delivery tickets number for that load and the time of loading the
concrete into the truck.
b. Visual observation of concrete during production and delivery or during
sampling and testing of fresh concrete assessment of uniformity, cohesion,
workability adjustment to water content. The workability of the concrete shall
be controlled on a continuous basis during production. The batch mix found
unfit shall not be loaded into the truck for transportation. Necessary
corrective action shall be taken in the production of mix as required for
further batches.
c. Use of adequate equipment at the plant to measure surface moisture content
of aggregates, particularly fine aggregates or the workability of the concrete,
cube tests etc. shall also be ensured.
Making corresponding adjustment at the plant automatically or manually to batched quantities
to allow for observed, measured or reported changes in materials or concrete qualities.
Sampling of concrete, testing monitoring of results.
Diagnosis and correction of faults identified from observations / complaints.
The RMC plant produced concrete shall be accepted by Engineer-in –Charge at site after receipt
of the same after fulfilling all the requirements of mix mentioned in the tender documents.
The Item of design mix cement concrete is inclusive of all the ingredients including admixtures,
if required, labour, machinery T&P etc. required for a design mix concrete of required strength
and workability, and shall take into account change, if any, in quantities of concrete, ingredients
like cement and aggregates and admixtures etc. as per the approved mix design.
Ready mix concrete shall be arranged in quantity as required at site of work. The ready- mix
concrete shall be supplied as per the pre-agreed schedule approved by the Engineer.
Frequency of sampling and standards of acceptance shall be as per CPWD specifications.
No addition of water or other ingredients shall be permitted in the RMC at site or during transit.
The RMC shall be placed by pump of suitable capacity and the arrangements shall be made to
arrange sufficient length of pipe at site to place the RMC in the minimum required time.
The contractor shall assess the quantity of RMC requirements at site well in advance and order
accordingly. It shall be the responsibility of the EPC contractor to arrange the requisite quantity
Page 851 of 1358

of RMC available at site, so that there is no hindrance to the work on this account.
4.11. Standard for Acceptance
The standard of acceptance shall be the same as specified in clause 16 of IS 456-2000.
In order to keep the floor finish as per direction of IIM Indore/Authority Engineer and as per
Architectural drawings and to provide required thickness of the flooring as per specification, the
level of top surface of RCC shall be accordingly adjusted at the time of its centering, shuttering
and casting.
4.12. 4.13 Ultrasonic Pulse Velocity Method of Test for RCC

The underlying principle of assessing the quality of concrete is that comparatively higher
velocities are obtained when the quality of concrete in terms of density, homogeneity and
uniformly is good. The consistency of the concrete as regards its general quality gets
established. In case of poorer quality lower velocities are obtained. If there are cracks, voids or
flaws inside the concrete which come in the way of transmission of pulse, lower velocities are
obtained.
The quality of concrete in terms of uniformity, incidence or absence of internal flaws, cracks and
segregation etc. indicative of the level of workmanship employed, can thus be assessed using
the guidance given in table below, which have been evolved for characterizing the quality
concrete in structure in term of the ultrasonic pulse velocity.
Velocity criterion for Concrete Quality Grading.
Sl. No. Pulse velocity by Cross Probing (km/sec) Concrete Quality

Grading
1 Above 4.5 Excellent
2 4.5 to 3.5 Good
3 3.5 to 3.0 Medium
4 Below 3.0 Doubtful
Note: In Case of “doubtful” quality it may be necessary to carry further tests.

Pulse velocity method of test of concrete is to be conducted for CPWD works as a routine test.
The acceptance criteria as per the above table will be applicable as per IS 13311 (part-1): 1992.
From the above ―Good and ―Excellent grading are acceptable and below these grading the
concrete will not be acceptable.
5% of the total number of RCC members in each category i.e. beam, column, slab and footing
may be tested by UPV test method for establishing quality of concrete. It is suggested that test
be conducted on RCC beam near joint with column, on RCC column near joint with beam, on
RCC footings and rafts. On RCC rafts a suitable grid can be worked out for determining the
number of tests. In addition, doubtful areas such as honeycombed locations, locations, where
continuous seepage is observed, construction joints and visible loose pockets will also be tested.
The test results are to be examined in view of the above acceptance criteria ―Good and
―Excellent and wherever concrete is found with less than required quality as per acceptance
criteria, repairs to concrete will be made. Honeycombed areas and loose pockets will be
repaired by grouting using Portland Cement Mortar/Polymer Modifies Cement Mortar /Epoxy
Mortar, etc. after chipping loose concrete in appropriate manner. In areas where concrete is
found below acceptance criteria and defects are not apparently visible on surface, injecting
approved grout in appropriate proportion using epoxy grout /acrylic Polymer modified cements
slurry made with shrinkage compensating cement / plain cement slurry etc will be resorted to
for repairs.(refer relevant chapters from CPWD Hand Book on Repairs and Rehabilitation of RCC
Page 852 of 1358

Buildings).Repair to concrete will be done till satisfactory results are obtained as per the
acceptance criteria by retesting of the repaired area. If satisfactory results are not obtained
dismantling and relaying of concrete will be done.
4.13. Cover/Spacer Block

The contractor shall provide an approved type of support for maintaining the bars in position
and ensuring required spacing and correct cover of concrete to reinforcement as called for in
the drawings, spacer blocks of required shape and size. Chairs and spacer bars shall be used to
ensure accurate positioning of reinforcement. To ensure proper cover, preferably factory-made
cover blocks/PVC cover blocks will be used to avoid displacement of bars in any direction.
4.14. Safety Net

SCAFFOLDING NET (As per CPWD Specification)
4.14.1 -Scaffolding net of required width made of high-density Polyethylene UV stabilized
knitted on warp knitting machines having density 100gm/sqm and shading coefficient minimum
75% around the construction site/ for vertical extension as per requirement including
fastening/tying with building/ scaffolding pipes or with any other fixtures etc. should be used.
4.14.2 Net shall be made with a square or diamond mesh. The maximum size of opening shall
not exceed 10X10 mm. A continuous length of net having no joints, shall be used to cover the
span between the supports. When in use, the net shall have a sag at the center of not less than
one-fifth and preferably not more than one-fourth of the length of the shorter side. The ends of
all cords used in the nets shall be secured to prevent unraveling. The maximum vertical distance
between the working level and the level at which the safety net is to be used shall be such that
it should not hamper the progress of the work or should not make inconvenience to the work
force. The work shall be carried out as per IS-11057 (IS code for Specification for Industrial Safety
Net).
5. MASONRY WORK
Masonry work shall be carried out in conformity of Latest CPWD Specifications for works.
5.1. BRICK WORK:
Class of Fly Ash Bricks to be used in construction, Grade of Cement Mortar shall be in conformity
of Latest CPWD Specifications for works.
The fly ash bricks shall be confirming to IS -12894-2002, class designation 10 average compressive
strength.
Shape and size of bricks shall be as mentioned in the sketch below.
Page 853 of 1358

Tolerances in shape & Size: The dimensions of bricks when tested in accordance with the above-
shown sketch be within the following limits per 20 bricks:
a) For modular size Length 3 720 to 3880 mm (3800 ± 80 mm)
b) Width 1760 to 1 840 mm (1800 ± 40 mm)
c) Height 1760to 1840 mm (1800 ± 40 mm)
(For 90 mm high bricks) 760 to 840 mm
(800 ± 40 mm) (For 40 mm high bricks)
The following tests need to be conducted for the fly ash bricks as per, IS 3495 & IS 10077
1. Compressive Strength - The minimum average wet compressive strength of pulverized fuel
ash-lime bricks shall not be less than 10N/mm2, when tested as described in IS 3495 (Part 1). The
wet compressive strength of any individual brick shall not fall below the minimum average wet
compressive strength specified for the corresponding class of bricks by more than 20 percent.
2. Drying Shrinkage- The average drying shrinkage of the bricks when tested by the method
described in IS 4139, being the average of three units, shall not exceed 0.15 percent.
3. Efflorescence Test- The bricks when tested in accordance with the procedure laid down in IS
3495 (Part 3), shall have a rating of efflorescence not more than ‘slight’.
4. Water Absorption- The bricks, when tested in accordance with the procedure laid down in IS
3495 (Part 2), after immersion in cold water for 24 hours, shall have average water absorption not
more than 15 percent by mass
Sampling for the tests shall be done as per IS 5454, 1978.Every lot has to be tested or tests shall
be conducted for every 20000 bricks, whichever is less.
Manufacturing:
• Fly Ash Bricks are made bricks manufactured by hydraulic or vibratory press.
• Raw material required are fly ash shall conform to Grade 1 or Grade 2 of IS 3812 (60-
65%), Bottom ash used as replacement of shall not have more than 12 percent loss on
ignition when tested according IS 1727, lime shall conform to class C hydrated lime of IS
712(8-12%), gypsum (5%), locally available sand/stone dust (18-27%) and water.
• Ordinary Portland Cement can also be used in place of hydrated lime and gypsum.
• Raw materials in the required proportion are mixed in the pan mixer to have a semi dry
uniform mix.
• Semi dry mix is placed in the moulds of hydraulic/ vibro press.
• Moulded bricks are air dried for one/two days in a shed depending upon the weather
conditions and then water cured for 14-21 days.
• The bricks thus produced are sound, compact, and uniform in shape
FINISHING:
Plastering, Painting, Polishing/ Varnishing to be carried out as per latest CPWD Specifications
and as specified in DBR and finishing schedule/tender drawings.
Page 854 of 1358

6. PAINTING WORKS
PAINTING ON EXTERNAL WALLS

The paint shall be (Textured exterior paint/Acrylic smooth exterior paint/premium acrylic smooth exterior
paint/100% premium acrylic emulsion paint) of an approved brand and manufacturer.
This paint shall be brought to the site of work by the contractor in its original containers in sealed
condition. The material shall be brought in at a time in adequate quantities to suffice for the whole work
or at least a fortnight’s work. The materials shall be kept in the joint custody of the contractor and the
Engineer-in- Charge. The empty containers shall not be removed from the site of work till the relevant
item of work has been completed and permission obtained from the IIM Indore/Authority Engineer.
• Textured Paint
Requirements: Texture Paint to be done on External Facade areas/ Drop off areas as per
finishing schedule.
Material- The paint shall be composed of high quality exterior durable acrylic- modified
resin-based binders and quartz; capable of being applied in two coats to create a textured
uniform surface without any scratch pattern. This paint shall be brought to the site of work
by the contractor in its original containers in sealed condition. The material shall be brought
in at a time in adequate quantities to suffice for the whole work or at least a fortnight’s work.
The materials shall be kept in the joint custody of the contractor and the IIM Indore /
Authority Engineer. The empty containers shall not be removed from the site of work till the
relevant item of work has been completed and permission obtained from the IIM Indore/
Authority Engineer.
Application-To clean the plastered surface thoroughly of all dirt, dust, grime, and laitance;
apply one base coat composed of high quality exterior durable acrylic-modified resin-based
binders and quartz; capable of being applied in two coats to create a smooth uniform
textured surface without any scratch pattern and a second coat after allowing sufficient
drying time, to create the approved pattern ensuring a uniform film thickness of 1.0-1.5mm
for both coats cumulatively; apply two - three coats in the desired shade to ensure
consistent appearance of the coating
• Low Water vapor permeability
• High erosion resistance
• Strong water repellence
• Anti-mold performance
• Finish: As approved by IIM Indore/Authority Engineer
• Low Volatile Organic Compound (VOC’s)
• This paint shall be used for exterior walls and outside exposed areas.
• Technical Data
• Do not apply when temperature is less than 5 deg C and/or it is raining.
• Comply with manufacturer’s specifications.
• Acrylic Emulsion Paint

Requirements: Shall be done on all surfaces where no other finish is done, over 1mm
putty over plaster.
• Initial coat: Thinned coat of emulsion
• Finishing Coats: 3 coats of emulsion
• Efflorescence salts: Remove. Apply waterproofing to remove recurring efflorescence
• Deviation of Surface Flatness: ±0.5mm (min)
Page 855 of 1358

• Sheen: matt
• Washable
• Anti-fungal
• Stain resistant
• Emulsion from more than one batch shall not be used in a room/ area.
• Finished sample shall be prepared by the Contractor for approval by the IIM Indore/Authority
Engineer before mass application.
• All components for painting shall be provided by a single manufacturer to ensure the
integrity of the finish and should be applied following vendor specifications and application
guide.
Technical Data
Do not apply when temperature is less than 10 deg C and/or moisture level is greater than
90%Technical Data Low Volatile Organic Compound (VOC’s) Sheen level < 5 at dGH Comply
with CPWD Vol 2/ 13.31
• Epoxy Paint
Requirements: Epoxy spray paint over MS structure & RCC surfaces as per requirement. Low
VOC Epoxy paint to be spray painted on clean MS surface or RCC surface with approved
primer as per manufacturers specs to achieve uniform coating all around. and satisfaction
of IIM Indore/Authority Engineer.
Technical Data
• VOC content less than 150 grams per liter.
• Two pack cold cure epoxy polyamide
Priming Coat on Wood Surface:

Primer for woodwork shall be of approved make. Surface to be primed shall be dry and
thoroughly cleaned. All unevenness shall be rubbed down smooth with sandpaper and shall
be well dusted, knots, if any, shall be covered with preparation of red lead made by grinding
red lead in water and mixing with strong glue sized and used hot. Appropriate wood filler
material with same shade as paint shall be used where so specified.
The surface treated for knotting shall be dry before primer is applied. After the primer is
applied the holes and indentation on the surface shall be stopped with glazier’s putty or
wood putty, stopping shall not be done before the priming coat.
Priming Coat on Iron & Steel Surfaces:

All rust and scales shall be removed by scrapping or by brushing with steel wire brushes.
Hard skin of oxide formed on the surface of wrought iron during raking which becomes
loose shall be removed. All dust and dirt shall be thoroughly wiped away from the surface
before zinc chromate primer on Iron & Steel works.
Priming Coat on Plastered Surface:

The surface shall ordinarily not be painted shall be applied to get correct finish until it has
dried completely. Before primer is applied, holes and undulations shall be filled up with
gypsum and rubbed smooth. The surface shall be applied epoxy primer. The primer shall
be applied with brushes, worked well into the surface, and spread even and smooth.
Painting shall be done by crossing and laying off. The crossing and laying off consists of
covering the area over with paint, brushing the surface hard for the first time over and then
brushing alternately in opposite direction, two or three times and then finally brushing
lightly in a direction at right angles to the same. In this process, no brush marks shall be left
the laying off is finished. The full process of crossing and laying off will constitute one coat.
Page 856 of 1358

Under Coat:
One coat of specified paint of shade suited to the shade of the topcoat shall be applied and
allowed to dry overnight. It shall be rubbed next day with the finest grade of wet abrasive
paper to ensure a smooth and even surface, free from brush marks and all loose particles
dusted off.
Topcoat:
Topcoats of specified paint of desired shade shall be applied. Each coat shall be allowed to
dry for not less than 24 hours and lightly rubbed down smooth with finest wet abrasion
paper to get an even glossy surface. If, however, the surface is not satisfactory additional
coats as required.
• Synthetic Emulsion Paint
Synthetic Enamel Paint (conforming to IS: 1932 – 1964) of approved brand and of the
required color shall be used for the topcoat and an undercoat of shade to match the topcoat
as recommended by the manufacturer shall be used.
Preparation of surface
a) Woodwork: - The surface shall be cleaned, and all unevenness removed. Knots if available
shall be covered with a preparation of red, red lead. Holes and indentations on the surface
shall be filled in with glazire’s putty or wood putty and rubbed smoothly before painting is
done. The surface should be thoroughly dry before painting.
b) Iron and steel work: - The priming coat shall have dried up completely before painting is
started. Rust and scaling shall be carefully removed by scraping or by brushing with steel
wire brushes. All dust and dirt shall be carefully and thoroughly wiped away.
c) Plastered surface: - The priming coat shall have dried up completely before painting is
started. All dust and dirt that has settled on the priming coat shall be thoroughly wiped away
before painting is started.
ii) Application
Under Coat: - One coat of the specified paint of shade suited to the shade of the topcoat
shall, be applied and allowed to dry overnight. It shall be rubbed next day with the finest
grade of wet abrasive paper to ensure a smooth and even surface, free form brush marks
and all loose particles dusted off.
Topcoat: - Top coats of specified paint of the desired shade shall be applied after the
undercoat is thoroughly dry. Additional finishing coats shall be applied if found necessary
to ensure a properly uniform glossy surface.
PROTECTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY

The Contractor shall continuously protect this and other Contractor’s work, and the Owner’s
property from damage, injury or loss arising in connection with operations under the
Contract Documents. He shall make good free of charge, any such damage, injury or loss,
except such as may be caused solely by agents or employees of the Owner.
The Contractor shall protect all finished surfaces, including the jambs and soffits of all
openings used as passageways or through which furniture and furnishings are handled,
against any possible damage resulting from the conduct of work by his trades.
FINAL CLEANING
Page 857 of 1358

General-
Provide final cleaning of the installed work, at a time indicated by the IIM Indore/ Authority
Engineer consisting of cleaning each installed surface or unit or work to normal “clean”
condition expected for a first-class building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply
with manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning operations. The following are examples, but
not by way of limitation, of cleaning levels are required.
• Remove label which are not required as permanent labels.
• Clean exposed hard-surfaced finished, including metals, painted surfaces, plastics, tile,
wood, special coatings, and similar surfaces, to a free condition, free of dust, stains, films
and similar noticeable distracting substances. Restore reflective surfaces to original
reflective conditions. Clean all furniture surfaces when so recommended by the
manufacturers as a final clean-up for finish installation.
• Vacuum clean carpeted surfaces and similar soft and upholstered surfaces.
Removal of Protection
Except as otherwise indicated or requested by IIM Indore/ Authority Engineer, remove
temporary protection devices and facilities, which were installed during course of the work
to protect previously, completed work during remainder or construction period.
7. DOOR & WINDOWS

The doors and windows shall be provided as per the requirements indicated in the Design Brief Report
and the respective schedules appended to the Design Basis Report, Finishing Schedule appended with
DBR & relevant Tender Drawings. However, the typical specifications for the various types of Doors and
Windows shall be as under:
7.1. Wooden:
7.1.1. Wood:
Timber shall be Forest Stewardship council (FSC) certified wood and it shall be seasoned,
and preservative treated.
The moisture contents of the wood used in the work shall not be more than that
stipulated in the relevant clause of Latest CPWD Specifications for works. Kiln
seasoning and preservative treatment of wood, if required, shall be done by the
contractor. In all other respects the wood used in the work shall conform to the
provision in latest CPWD specification for works.
The sample species to be used shall be deposited by the contractor with the Engineer-in
– charge before commencement of the work. The contractor shall produce cash
voucher and certificate from standard kiln seasoning plant operator about the timber
section to be used on the work having been kiln seasoned by them failing which it
would not be so accepted as kiln seasoned.
7.1.2. Glazing: -
The glazing shall be as per CPWD specifications keeping into consideration the size of
opening or panels of the glass or as specified.
7.1.3. Shutters-Wooden-Flush: -
Factory made shutters 35 mm thick, conforming to IS 2202 (Part –I) 1977, shall be
obtained from factories to be approved by the IIM Indore/ Authority Engineer and. The
contractor shall inform well in advance to the IIM Indore/ Authority Engineer the name
address of the factory from where the contractor intends to get the shutters
Page 858 of 1358

manufactured.
The contractor will place order for manufacture of shutters only after written approval
of
IIM Indore/Authority Engineer in this regard is obtained. The contractor is bound to
abide by the decision of the IIM Indore/ Authority Engineer. In case the factory
already proposed by the contractor is not found competent to manufacture quality
shutters, the contractor shall propose another name of another factory from the
approved list for the approval of IIM Indore/Authority Engineer.
The contractor will also arrange stage wise inspection of the shutters at factory with
the IIM Indore/ Authority Engineer. The contractor will have no claim, if the shutters
brought at site are rejected by IIM Indore/ Authority Engineer in part or in full lot due
to bad workmanship / quality or damages caused during their shifting from factory to
site. Such shutters will not be measured and paid, and the contractor shall remove
the same from the site of work within 7 days after the written instruction in this
regard are issued by the Engineer in charge or his authorized representatives.
The shutters shall be both side laminated with 1mm thick decorative f i r e r a t e d
laminated sheet of required make & shade (Factory pressed) or without lamination i.e.,
commercial veneered or decorative veneered as per the finishing schedule & tender
drawings appended to the tender document.
7.1.4. Hardware
All hardware for doors and windows shall be of bright finished brass or as specified. All
hardware shall be installed using routers and counter sunk screws. Panic hardware will
be provided in all staircases and escape doors.
The contractor shall procure all the hardware and the fixing shall be done in the best
workmanship manner and in accordance with that employed for fixing hardware.
7.2. Aluminum Works

General
The scope of the work is the fabrication, supply and erection at site of all types of
Aluminum glazed doors, windows, and ventilators in accordance with the drawings and
specifications.30 mm three track 16 gauge.
The supply and erection will include all parts such as but not restricted to frames, tracks,
guides, mullions, styles, rails, couplers, transoms, rails, plates glazing bars, glass, hinges,
arrangement, spring catches, cord and pulley arrangements, spring catches, cord and
pulley arrangements door closers floor springs etc., required for the whole work
whether the parts/ items are individually and specifically referred to in the schedules/
specifications/drawings or not provided that the supply and installation of such parts
can be inferred there from and are necessary to make the work complete, unless
separate provision is made in the bills of quantities for supply to such parts/items.
The doors, windows, ventilators, will be fabricated to suit the finished clear openings in
the building/structure which the tenderer will himself measure.
Materials: -
The members will be made out of aluminum alloy corresponding to IS:733 and will
consist of extruded sections and of other shapes, and to sized gauges as shown in the
drawings/ described in accordance with the relevant IS codes. The members shall be
chosen to provide strength/ stability and maximum resistance to wear and tear.
Page 859 of 1358

The Sections will be as per approved makes, extruded sections. As indicated in the
drawings the tenderer should specifically mention which sections he is using.
The IS specifications are to be strictly adhered to. Extruders using recycled materials
may be preferred.
The alloy of extruded aluminum should be BS or IS old HE9, Alcon 50 SWP. to this effect
a test certificate has to be provided for the extruder.
Finishing:
The extruded aluminum section has to be mechanically finished to remove all

scratches; extrusion marks etc and subsequently thoroughly cleared in all alkali baths
prior to anodizing.
The polyester powder coating/powder coating, as required, as per item of work, shall
be of desired shade with minimum average thickness to 50 microns or other shades as
required and to this effect the tenderer must have to produce test certificate from
authorized institutions Bureau of Indian Standard.
The polyester powder coated/powder coated material should be properly wrapped in

gummed tape before fabrication to avoid scratches during fabricated and erection shall
be kept protected till handing over.
Fabrication:
Before commencing the fabrication, the contractor shall submit to the Engineer – in –
charge for their approval detailed shop drawings, based on the approved Architectural
drawings and corresponding specification showing junctions, fittings, accessories such
as hinges flush bolts, locks, latches, latching arrangements, peg stays, rotor arms,
anodize pivots gaskets rubber packing door felts, mastic, sealant etc., including fixing
and sealing arrangements . Type and method of scaffolding he intends to use;
Fabrication is to be taken up only after approval by the Engineer – in - charge and in
accordance with the approved drawings. Sections for fabrication of door/
window/ventilators etc. shall be as per architectural drawings or as approved by the
Engineer – in - charge.
A sample of finished door / windows/ ventilator railing etc. shall be fabricated as per
the shop drawings approved by the Engineer – in - charge for final approval before
undertaking mass production/ fabrication,
The doors, window, ventilators and partitions shall be as per thickness given in the
approved shop drawings; Polyester Powder coating / Powder coating shall be as
specified in the item specifications.
All materials shall conform to relevant IS. Codes and in the absence of IS code, they
should correspond to the best engineering practice; the decision of the Engineer – in –
charge shall be final and binding on the contractor.
Fabrication shall be done true to the drawing/ sample approved and in correspondence
to the finished openings at the site. All joints shall be mitered at the corners, true right
angles, and joints to be finished neatly to hairlines, with concealed fasteners, wherever
possible joints shall be made in concealed locations.
All fabricated/finished items shall be packed and carted properly to site to prevent any
damage in transit. On receipt at site, they shall be carefully stacked in protected storage
to avoid distortion/damage.
Site installation shall be with concealed screws, self-tapping or other approved
fasteners or maybe by welding, due precautions shall be taken to avoid any distortion/
Page 860 of 1358

discoloration /damage to the finished items.

Woodwork faces /parts coming in contact with masonry shall before shifting to the site
be given a heavy coat of alkali resistance bitumen paint. Steel items coming in contact
with other incompatible materials shall be given a thick coat of zinc chromate primer.
Glazing:
The glazing shall be as specified in DBR & tender drawings or as per CPWD
specifications, keeping into consideration the size of opening or panels of the glass.
Hardware:
All hardware for doors and windows shall be as specified in DBR / tender drawings.
Fly proof SS wire mesh: Fly proof stainless steel grade 304 wire gauge mesh to be
provided in windows and doors as specified in Finishing schedule/ tender drawings
shall with average width of aperture 1.4 mm in both directions with wire of dia. 0.50
mm all complete
Aluminum Grills: Powder Coated Aluminium grill (minimum 50 micron) of approved
design/pattern, with approved standard section shall be fixed to the window frame /
Door Frame with stainless steel screws @ 200 mm center to center, including cutting
the grill to proper opening size for fixing and operation of handles and fixing approved
aluminum standard section around the opening, all complete as per requirement and
direction of IIM Indore/Authority Engineer.
Details of Aluminum Door/Windows
Extruded Section details: 30mm Series, 16 Gauge thickness (Confirming to IS 733 and IS
1285) Powder coated, shade of powder coating as per the directions of IIM Indore/
Authority Engineer.
SS screws of grade AISI 304
Glass: 5mm thick Reflective type Glass with
EPDM gasket,
Approved sealants.
Confirming to the CPWD specifications Volume 2 Section 21.
7.3. Fire Check Doors: -
General: -
a. GENERAL: - FOR ALL STAIRCASE, A.H.Us. ELECTRICAL ROOM, HT SHAFTS AND
OTHER SERVICE ROOM.
• The door shall be procured from approved manufacturer of CPWD / CBRI. The fire
and smoke / hot gases check door shall be conforming to IS-3614 (Part-II)). The
manufacturer shall have a prototype door tested and certified by CBRI Roorkee, of
120 minutes fire rating confirming to BS: 476 part 22 & IS: 3614 Part II for all 3 criteria’s
and insulation criteria shall be 20minutes as per NBC 2016.
• The fire and smoke / hot gases check door shall not collapse during the rated period of
the fire under the specified fire conditions.
• The fire and smoke / hot gases check door shall not allow the passage of hot gases or
the flames through the rebate of the gap between the door frame and shutter or
through the holes, developed in the shutter during fire.
• Material: -Door frames and shutter shall be as per drawings.
Page 861 of 1358

• Shop drawing: - The contractor shall submit including required designing shop drawing
for doorframes, shutters complete with
a. Plan, elevation with relative position of adjacent works
b. Glazing details with type size and fixing.
c. Fitting and fixtures with type size, brand and fixing details.
d. Finishing details.
• Sample Approval: - A sample of fire all types of check door including fittings and fixtures,
shall be fabricated as per the shop drawings approved by the Engineer – in - charge for
final approval before undertaking mass production/ fabrication at the same on approval
shall be sent to CBRI Roorkee prior to manufacturing.
• Opening Width: - Opening width of door mentioned in the drawings shall be width
measured with both door shutters fully open in straight position.
• Testing: - IIM Indore holds the right to get the door tested for fire rating at the cost of
the contractor. In case the IIM Indore/Authority Engineer desires to get the doors tested,
then one door shall be selected at random out of the entire lot and shall be tested for
two-hour fire rating. The testing shall be got done from only CBRI, Roorkee by the IIM
Indore/Authority Engineer. The cost of material for testing and transportation / packing
& other incidental testing charges shall be borne by the contractor. In case the door fails
to meet the requirement, the entire lot shall be rejected.
Page 862 of 1358

b. FIRE RESISTANT GLAZED DOORS, WINDOWS & PARTITIONS: - FOR ALL LIFT LOBBIES,
REFUGE AREAS AND CORRIDORS.
Metal Fire door from ISO 9001:2015 certified Manufacturer. The door must have been
manufactured with galvanized - GI sheet of GPSP Grade as per IS 277. All Fire doors must
satisfy the requirement of 120 minutes Fire Rating along with its Stability & Integrity for
120 minutes. The Prototype sample of the door must carry a prior test evidence as per IS
3614 part-2 / BS 476 Part 20 & 22 . The manufacturer must submit the copy of test
evidence prior to start of production .The offered test certificate should either carries it's
Validity or certificate must not be older than 5 years from CBRI / NABL Accredited Lab .
All doors should be finished with Powder coating in desired regular RAL Shades. Door
frame shall be Single rebate profile of section 100 x 57 mm made out of 1.20mm thick
galvanized steel sheet with a factory pre-punched groove so as to accommodate Fire &
smoke seal size minimum 10x4mm . Frames should be butt jointed and field assembled
with bolting system for proper strength .Frames should be provided with back plate for
anchor fasteners for installation on a finished plastered wall opening. Door leaf should
be minimum 46mm thick fully flush double skin door. Door leaf must be manufactured
from 0.8mm (22 guage) thick galvanized steel sheet. The door should be provided with
reinforcement pads to receiving appropriate Hardware’s of Becker Fire Solutions or
Equivalent make. The Shutter shall be filled with proprietary infill material . For Double
leaf doors; astragal has to be provided on meeting stile for both active and inactive leaf.
Vision panels wherever required should be of 120 minutes fire rating and should be of
non-wired type.
c. FRAME FOR FIRE RESISTANT GLAZED DOOR / WINDOWS AS PER DSR- 2018
FRAME:
Fire-resistant door frame of section 50x60 mm on horizontal side & 35x60 mm on vertical
sides having built in rebate made out of 1.6 mm thick GI sheet (Zinc coating not less than
120gm/m2) suitable for mounting 120 min Fire Rated Glazed Door Shutters. The frame
shall be filled with Mineral wool insulation having density minimum 96Kg/m3. The frame
will have a provision of G.I. Anchor fasteners 14 no’s (5 each on vertical style & 4 on
horizontal style of size M10 x 80) suitable for fixing in the opening along with Factory
made Template for SS Ball Bearing Hinges of Size 100x89x3mm for fixing of fire rated
glazed shutter. The frame shall be finished with an approved fire-resistant primer or
Powder coating of not less than 30 micron in desired shades as per the directions of
Engineer - in - charge.
SHUTTER:
60 mm thick glazed fire resistant door shutters of 120 min Fire Rating confirming to IS:3614 (Part
II) or EN1634 - 1:1999, tested and certified as per laboratory approved by IIM Indore/Authority
Engineer, with suitable mounting on door frame, consisting of vertical styles, top rail & side rail
60 mm x 60 mm wide and bottom rail of 110 mm x 60 mm made out of 1.6 mm thick G.I. sheet
(zinc coating not less than 120gm/m2) duly filled mineral wool insulation having density min
96 kg/m3 and fixing with necessary stainless steel ball bearing hinges of size 100x89x3mm of
approved make, including applying a coat of approved fire resistant primer or powder coating
not less than 30 micron etc. all complete as per direction of IIM Indore/Authority Engineer.
Page 863 of 1358

FIXED PARTITIONS:
Non-load bearing fixed frame for fire resistant glazed partition for 120 min fire rating, made out
to a profile of dimension 60mmx70mm of 1.6mm thick galvanized steel sheet as per test
evidence suitable for fixing fire rated glass for 120 min of both integrity and radiation control
(EW120) and min 15 min of insulation (EI15). The profile has to be fixed to the supporting
construction by means of Anchor fasteners of size M10x80, every 150 mm from the edges
and every 500mm (approx.) c/c. Linear measurement of frame shall be measured for payment.
The frame shall be filled with mineral wool insulation of density min 96kg/m3 and finished
with an approved fire resistant primer or powder coating of not less than 30 micron in desired
shade as per NBC 2016, IS 16231(part 3): and direction of IIM Indore/Authority Engineer.
GLASS :
Glazing in fire resistant door shutters, fixed panels and partitions etc., with GI beading made out
of 1.6mm thick GI sheet (Zinc coating not less than 120 gm/m2) of size 20x33mm screwed with
M4x38mm SS screws at distance of 75 mm from the edges and 150mm c/c, including applying a
coat of approved fire resistant primer/powder coating of not less than 30 micron on GI beading
& special ceramic tape of 5x20mm size etc. complete in all respect as per IIM Indore/Authority
Engineer. with glass required thickness having 120 min of fire resistance both integrity and
radiation control (EW120) and minimum. 20 min. of The Manufacturer have to give test report/
certification of fire glass and the glass should have the stamp showing the value of E, EW & EI.
The glass shall be tested in approved NABL accredited lab or by any other accreditation body
which operates in accordance with ISO/ IEC 17011 and accredits labs and accredits labs as per
ISO / IEC 17025 for testing and calibration scopes shall be eligible.
FIRE DOORS FITTINGS
All work is to be carried out in accordance with relevant IS Code and specification for Fire Door &
fitting as per IS: 3614 (Part I) – 1966 and direction of Engineer in charge.
1. HINGES: ’s BB4353 /BB1953 Becker F.S/ Geze/ Marshall’s fire rated 304 grade stainless steel ball
bearing hinges of size 100 x 75 x 3 mm of approved make with 8 Nos. stainless steel screws for wooden
fire doors.
2. PUSH TYPE PANIC BAR: 2 hrs. stainless steel 304 grade Push type Panic bar for single leaf doors for
2-hour fire rated door shutter confirming as per IS 3614 Part II and BS 476 Part 20 & 22 with S S Outside
Access Trim device having locking arrangement of approved make with necessary accessories and
screws etc. all completed. Make and Catalogue No/Item Code: (Ingersoll Rand’s Von Duprin 98 Series
+ 98.99 Trim, (Assa Abbloy s Yale - YPE RM501P SSS + YPE ACC004 Trim, Becker F.S & Domra cheva’s
PHB3000 1+ PHX03 Trim with cylinder.
3. 2 hrs. fire rated stainless steel 304 grade Push type Panic bars for double leaf 2-hour fire rated door
shutter confirming as per IS 3614 Part II and BS 476 Part 20 & 22 with SS Outside Access Trim device
having locking arrangement of approved make with necessary accessories and screws etc. all
complete. Make and Catalogue No/Item Code: (Ingersoll Rand's Von Duprin 98, 99 Series, and 98.99
Trim, (Assa Abbloy s Yale - YPE RM501P + YPEVR506P SSS & YPEACC004 Trim, Marshall's D/L SSS MH-
P- RM11002 + MH-PB-ACC11003 Trim and Kaba's PHB3000 1+PHB3000 2 & PHX03 Trim with cylinder.
4. Stainless steel 304 grade Offset D-type Pull Handles (for Glazed Fire doors) of 300 mm x 22mm dia
(minimum) of approved make with necessary accessories and screws etc. all complete. Make and
Catalogue No/Item Code: (Becker F.S Make / Assa Abbloy: AEH-06A/ Marshall - MHOD1001 & Kaba's
Page 864 of 1358

- 9125422)
5. D- TYPE HANDLE: 304 grade stainless steel D-type back-to-back pull handle of size 250mm long and
25 mm dia with complete roses for wooden fire doors Make and Catalogue No/Item Code: (Becker F.S
Make , Marshall - MHBTB-1000 & Kaba's -TGDIH-9125492)
6. DEAD LOCK: 2 hours fire rated Dead Lock System of approved makes in Wooden / Metal fire door
shutters with necessary accessories and screws etc. Make and Catalogue No./Item Code: (DL7260
Becker F.S / kaba- 288a Dead Lock package, Marshall: MH-L-13002 XX) .
7. DOOR CLOSER: 's TS 83, BLC-0604 Becker F.S and Marshall's MH DC S14016 SIL extruded aluminum
body heavy duty 2 hours fire rated door closer with stainless steel full body cover. The door closers
should be of size 1-6, Non handed having back check, and delayed action and shall be tested along with
the Glazed/ Metal / Wooden fire doors from CBRI Roorkee as per IS 3614 Part II & BS476 Part - 20 & 22
The door closer shall have 10 years mechanical warranty from the manufacturer and complies with EN
1154 - for 100000 cycles and is ANSI/BHIMA certified.
8. FLUSH BOLT: ’s 9114306, Briton’s DAL FBH 6, Marshall’s MS 300 304 grade Stainless Steel exposed
Tower Bolt of size 16mm dia rod and 250 mm long with complete screws. (Marshall Make).
Deliverables by the Contractor

Following documentation/ drawings shall be furnished along with the Doors/ window/ partition.
Prototype Test Certificate by national/international test house
Shop drawings
Specification/ Manufacturer ‘s literature, Test certificates and other documentation for materials and
items intended to be used.
Certificate indicating that design and installation of Doors and hardware conforms to norm laid down by
approved national/international test house.
Test report to be attested by Fire rated glass manufacturer.
The Fire rated glass applicator has to be approved by Fire rated Glass Manufacturer has to submit the
approved applicator certificate.
PANELLING Wooden Paneling
Fixing of Prowood grooved panel having system NRC up to 0.88 with lineal perforation. The high grade
MDF panels shall be melamine laminate of size 600X600mm with 2mm groove at 14mm pitch, Tongue
and Groove edges for seamless mounting having density of 800kg/m3(base panel confirming to IS
12406 and laminated panel confirming to IS 14587). The back of the panels are perforated with a
nonwoven fabric covering of 0.2mm for providing Sound absorption via the acoustic impedance
method. Panel is fixed by using GI Framework 2400mmx50mmx0.50mm spaced at 600mmx600
c/c & 16mm WPC framework spaced at 400mm centers with suitable brackets and the system is
backline with 50 mm Rockwool insulation@48kg density and along with all accessories example: chicken
mesh and all.
ACOUSTICAL WALL PANELLING
Fixing of Protrack Spandex System on G.I studs 2400mm X 50mm web flanges 15 & 50mm fully knurled
giving it high strength, hot dipped galvanized steel With 120GSM zinc coating specially designed for
Acoustic vibration management and long life with a backing 50mm thick Rock wool @48kg density
insulation intact with chicken mess wires. 600x1200x15mm Magnetite pine wool tile with NRC 0.9-1 to be
mechanically fastened on the G.I Studs. Then 12mm clip rail system are crew fixed on to the 12 mm MDF
Page 865 of 1358

waterproof and Acoustics panel’s .Then the Spandex is stretched over the clip rail system. The installed
system should provide NRC OF 1.00. Spandex colour as per Architect choice. The system to be installed
on G.I studs 600x600mm center to center 2400mm X 50mm web thickness 0.5mm, flanges 15 & 50mm
fully knurled giving it high strength, hot dipped galvanized steel with 120GSM zinc coating specially
designed for Acoustic vibration.
Glass Partition System
Fixing of Slim Glass partition of 12 mm Toughened Glass using Alexa System-45 Frames to a height of
maximum 3m or as per drawing. The Fixed glass to be fixed using Alexa BP45 Profiles at Top & Bottom &
Alexa SP45 at sides. The profile size to be 45 x 25 x 2mm to be fixed on to the floor/wall/ ceiling as per the
architect design Alexa H Junction profile to be used at all Glass-to-Glass vertical joints, 90 Deg L Junction
Profiles and T Junction profiles necessary as per design. In case of Glass overall panel Alexa MP45 & BP45
Over panel Profile to be used. In case of Open glass edges EP45 End Profile to be used. The Alexa profiles
shall be suitable for Glass thickness of 10/12.The Profile shall be matt natural anodized, the Profile
Manufacturer to supply all the necessary clips, seals and fixing accessories for the system. All Profiles to
be with 2 mm Gauge thickness Excluding 20 Micron of Anodizing.
Glass Partition Door
Fixing of Aluminium Glazed Door (Single Leaf) with Glass infill of 12 thick toughened glass with Alexa
System-100 frames Stiles all around the door. Aluminium Stile to be formed out of 100x45mm of Alexa
STP100 Door Profile frame with clips & seals with Flush Hinges (4Nos) & TGDI-J 450x25 Offset Pull Handle,
917 Narrow stile Dead Lock package 35MM , and TS 90 EN4 Cam Action Door closer (as per EN 1154) with
Hold Open unit necessary seals to be provided all around the door frames. For doors part of single/double
glazed partition DP100- SG/DG Door rebate profile to be used. In case of Glass overall panel Alexa
OHPDP100-SD/DG Over Panel Door profile to be used. The Alexa profiles shall be suitable for Glass
thickness of 10/12/13.52mm.The Profile shall be matt natural anodized, the Profile Manufacturer to
supply all the necessary clips, seals and fixing accessories for the system. All Profiles to be with 2 mm
Gauge thickness Excluding 20 Micron of Anodizing.
7.4. Glazing with Patch Fittings

General
The contractor shall be responsible for design, fabrication, supply, installation, test and guarantee of all
items including taking all measures that may be required to complete the work as per Architectural
concept drawings and specifications details.
The specialist agency engaged to carry out the external glazing installation and supply shall have at least
5 years of relevant experience and have completed external glazing systems of similar nature and
equivalent scale of works as shown in the tender documents.
The specialist contractor shall submit an outline of recent comparable works (illustrated by appropriate
drawings, sketches, photographs, brochures) by the firm / its technical partner to illustrate the
competence, experience and suitability of the firm.
The scope of work shall include:
Design, preparation of shop drawings, calculations, engineering data and test reports.
Fabrication and installation of Glass Entrances and Glazing with Patch Fittings system.
All anchors, fixings, attachments, reinforcements, steel reinforcing for mullions and transoms required
for a complete installation, except those specifically indicated as being provided by other trades.
Page 866 of 1358

Exposed Architectural mullions and other support members.

Finishes, protection coatings and treatments.
Sealing with approved sealants within and around the perimeter.
All thermal insulation, fire-safety etc. including supports and/or backing.
All caulking, sealing, electrometric and metal flashing, and gaskets including sealing at junctions with
roof, ground-floor waterproofing and building expansion joints between structures.
Electrical bonding and ear thing of all metal cladding elements.
Provisions to receive electrical outlets and cutouts for conduits and other electrical work.
Glass and glazing.
Transportation, storage, handling, protection and cleaning.
Submittals
Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components,
profiles and finishes.
Shop Drawings
Fabrication and installation details, including the following.
Plans, elevations and sections.
Details of fittings and glazing.
Hardware quantities, locations and installation requirements.
Sample for verification, for each type of exposed finish required for Metal finish: 150mm long section of
patch fittings, rails and other items.
Glass: 150mm square, showing exposed edge finish.
Materials
Glass
Glass shall be as specified in drawing or as per design requirement. It shall be Indian / imported
hard coated reflective bronze and heat strengthened glass. It shall be of approved make.
In toughening of Glass, rolling direction shall be parallel to the width of the glass panel such
that
waviness if any is parallel to the horizontal and no waviness parallel to the vertical and to ensure
that such waviness is of negligible order.
Components
Patch fittings: Stainless steel-clad aluminum
Floating Transom Bar: Steel cladded in metal matching fittings and in sizes recommended
by manufacturer for application indicated. Include stainless steel support rods, lateral
adjustment and ceiling channel. Support fins to be metal, finished to match transom bar.
Rails: Stainless steel-clad aluminum.
Accessory Fittings: Matching with patch fittings and rails metal and finish for overhead door
stop, Centre hosing lock, glass support fin brackets and other as shown in drawing.
Anchors and fastenings: Concealed
Page 867 of 1358

Weather stripping: Sweep type

Hardware.
Hardware should be heavy duty in matching

finish.
Concealed Floor Closer and Top Pivots
Centre hung; BHMA A156.4, Grade 1; including

cases, bottom arm, top walking beam pivots,
plates, and accessories required for complete
installation.
Swing: Double acting; Positive dead stop,

concealed with hold open angle Delayed action
closing
Concealed Overhead Holder: Grade 1, with dead stop setting coordinated with concealed floor
closer.
Push-pull set: Stainless steel finish
Lock set of approved make.
Fabrication Provide holes and cutouts in glass to receive hardware, fittings, rails and accessories before
tampering glass. Fully temper glass using horizontal (roller-hearth) process and fabricate so, when
installed, roll wave distortion is parallel with bottom edge of door or tile. Factory assembled components
and factory installed hardware to the greatest extent possible.
Execution
Examine areas and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other
conditions affecting performance of work. Install all glass system and associated components according
to manufacturer ‘s written instructions.
Set units in level and plumb.
Maintain uniform clearances between adjacent components.
Lubricate hardware and other moving parts according to manufacturer ‘s written instructions.
Page 868 of 1358

Set, seal and grout floor closer cases as required suiting hardware and substrate indicated.
Cleaning
The Contractor shall ensure that all actions are taken during installation to eliminate the effects of
corrosive substances on the finishes.
The Contractor shall clean both internal and external surfaces to remove corrosive substances, dust or
cement / mortar dropping during the installation as may be directed and instructed by the Engineer – in
- charge.
The internal surfaces of glass and aluminum frame are to be cleaned with compatible cleaning agents
prior to the installation of the internal protective sheeting.
The Contractor shall provide written verification that cleaning agents are compatible with aluminum,
stainless steel, glass coatings, granite, glazing materials and sealants. In no case shall alkaline or abrasive
agent be used to clean the surface. Care shall be taken during cleaning to avoid scratching of the surface
by grit particles.
Prior to snagging inspections, the Contractor shall, remove the internal protection sheets and carry out a
thorough cleaning of all glass and aluminum.
The Contractor shall also make good any physical damage to the structure including scratches, dents,
abrasions, pitting, etc. to the satisfaction of the Engineer – in - charge.
Manufacturer's delivery or job markings on glass and adhesive for manufacturer's labels shall be either a
neutral or slightly acidic material. In no case shall such material be alkaline; any staining of glass by
alkaline material will be cause for rejection of the glass.
After the installation of each pane of glass all markings and labels shall be carefully and completely
removed from the panes. Thereafter no markings or labels of any sort shall be placed on the glass.
Glazed openings shall be identified by suitable warning tapes or flags attached with a non- staining
adhesive or other suitable means to the framing of the opening. Tapes or flags shall not be in contact with
glass.
As soon as it is practically possible after the issuance of the occupation Permit for the Building, the
Contractor is to carry out a complete cleaning of the external face.
Performance Guarantee:
The contractor shall offer a minimum of 10-year Performance Warranty for the entire installation carried
out.
8. EXTERNAL FAÇADE WORKS:

8.1. GFRC Jali/Paneling
Providing and fixing 'UniStone' or Equivalent make exterior grade fiber reinforced polymer resin plastic
composite smooth finished back side closed screens as per approved pattern, design with wall thickness
between 2-2.5 mm and shade. The Fiber reinforced composite screens shall have fiber reinforcements
with resin matrix that bonds the fiber. The Material shall be casted in fiber moulds with ISO/UV resistant
Page 869 of 1358

PNG polyester resin with UV Stabilized clear gel coats for making it UV resistant nonfading product in
exterior conditions. The product shall be made in accordance with ASTM E84 for fire performance
characteristics and shall be classified as class B Material. The periphery or borders of screens shall have
marine ply reinforced for adequate fixing with Hilti Self-tapping screws and in accordance to shop
drawings approved by engineer in charge. The product's density shall be 1760 Kg/m3 having approximate
weight between 11-15 Kg/m2. The product shall have a tolerance of temperature variation between -20
degrees Celsius to 65 degrees Celsius. The product will have permissible dimensional tolerance of
dimensional (all directions) +/- 1/8".0-10 ft. (3mm in 3m) thickness +/- 1/8"(3mm).
8.2. Stonework: -
8.2.1. Wet cladding: -
The wet cladding shall be laid as per design and in accordance with CPWD Specifications as per
design and requirements. The cladding shall be fixed with 12mm thick (minimum), Cement
Mortar 1:3 (1cement: 3 coarse sand). Horizontal & vertical joints shall be filled with white cement
mixed with pigment of matching shade.
8.3. Structural Glazing System
Scope of Work
The contractor shall design, engineer, test, fabricate, deliver, install, and guarantee all
construction necessary to provide a complete structural glazing system to the proposed
building, all in conformity with the Design Basis Report & Drawings as given. Specification
and all relevant construction regulations including providing any measures that may be
required to that end, notwithstanding any omissions or inadequacies of the Drawings
and/or without limiting the generalities of the foregoing, the structural glazing Systems shall
include, without being limited to, the followings:
Metal frames, glass glazing, spandrels, ventilators, finish hardware, copings metal closure,
windows etc.
All anchors, attachments, reinforcement and steel reinforcing for the systems required for the
complete installations.
All thermal insulation associated with the system. All fire protection associated with the
system.
All copings, end closure and metal cladding to complete the system.
All sealing and flushing including sealing at junctions with other trades to achieve complete
water
tightness in the system.
Isolation of dissimilar metals and moving parts.
Anticorrosive treatment on all metals used in the system. Polyester powder coating aluminum
sections.
The contractor shall also be responsible for providing the followings:
Engineering Proposals, Shop Drawings, Engineering data and Structural Calculations in

connection with the design of the structural glazing System.
Scheduling and Monitoring of the Work.
Mock-ups, samples and test units.
Performance testing of the structural glazing framing and glazing assembly.
Co-ordination with work of other trades.
Page 870 of 1358

Protection.
• All final exterior and interior cleaning and finishing of the structural glazing System.
• As-built record drawings and photographs.
• Guarantees and Warranties.
• All hoisting, staging and temporary services.
• Conceptualizing and design of a suitable maintenance system for structural glazing.
The water tightness and structural stability of the whole structural glazing System are the
prime responsibility of the Contractor. Any defect or leakage found within the Guarantee
Period shall be sealed and made good all at the expense of the Contractor.
The structural glazing system shall be designed to provide for expansion and contraction
of components which will be caused by an ambient temperature range without causing
buckling, stress on glass, failure of joint sealants, undue stress on structural elements or other
detrimental effects. Specific details should be designed to accommodate thermal and building
movements.
Building Regulations
Structural glazing shall comply with all Government Codes and Regulations including IS codes, if
any. All structural glazing, individual aluminum and glass components and all completed work
shall be designed and erected to comply with the following:
Design load and deflection.
Structural glazing construction in its entirety shall be fabricated and erected to withstand
without damage or permanent deformation inward (positive) and outwards (negative) pressure,
all acting normal to the construction plane with a maximum deflection of not exceeding 1/175
of the clear span between structural support or 20mm maximum whichever is less. Structural
performance of all parts of structural glazing system shall conform to relevant IS codes, wind
load as per IS-875 and seismic loads as per IS-1893. Deflection shall cause no permanent set-
in excess of 1/1000 of span nor evidence of structure failure.
No cladding element shall sustain permanent deformation of failure under loading equivalent.
1.5 times the design wind pressure specified.
Tender Drawings and Specifications

The tender drawings indicate profile and configuration required together with relationship to
structural frame and interior building elements.
The Specification and tender drawings of the performance type includes only the minimum
requirements of the /structural glazing Wall System without limiting the Contractor to the
method of achieving desired performance.
Everywhere for all buildings toughened glass need to be considered for Structural Glazing.
Pre-Execution Requirements
I. Design Proposals
Page 871 of 1358

The contractor shall propose the final design in such a way that all basic functional
and architectural requirements in line with the Master Plan, Concept Plans & Design Basis
Report are fulfilled and get the same approved by IIM INDORE. However, basic design
requirements as described in the specification and other Architectural requirements such as
the size of window, net glass area, ventilator, configuration of windows and spandrels shall be
retained. Contractor to consider the U value of 0.38 for the glass as per the heat load calculations
done for the design of HVAC system.
The design proposals shall be in the form of drawings, drawn to full scale as far as practical and
specification shown in or describing all items of work including:
Request details as indicated on the tender drawings.
Metal quality finishes and thickness.
Glass quality, coating and thickness and proposed manufacturer ‘s brand names.
Sections of the mullion and transom together with structural calculations.
Arrangement and jointing of components.
Field connections especially mullion to mullion and transom to mullion.
Fixing and anchorage system of typical wall unit together with structural calculations.
Drainage system and provision in respect of water leakage in the curtain wall/structural glazing
system.
Provisions for thermal movements.
Sealant and sealing method.
Glazing method.
Wind load and seismic load and any other specific load considered in the design.
Lightning protection link-up system of the curtain wall/structural glazing for connection
and incorporation into the lightning conductor system of the building. Design concept must be
stated in the proposal.
The maximum permissible structural tolerances of the building that the system has been
designed to accommodate in case this tolerance exceeds hose specified in the Specification.
Any parts of the curtain wall/structural glazing, when completed, shall be within the following
tolerances:
Deviation from plumb, level or dimensioned angle must not exceed 3mm per 3.5m of length
of any member, or 6mm in any total run in any line.
Deviation from theoretical position on plan or elevation, including deviation from plumb, level
or dimensioned angle, must not exceed 9mm total at any location.
Change in deviation must not exceed 3mm for any 3.5m run in any direction.
Samples
Page 872 of 1358

The contractor shall also submit samples of mullion and transom sections in lengths of 300mm
with the same finish and workmanship along with the proposals and 300mmx300mm samples
of glass (samples to include exposed screws and other exposed securing devices, if any).
The Contractor/Sub-contractor shall submit a maintenance manual for the curtain wall/structural
glazing system inclusive of all metal parts, glass and finish etc.
During detailed design and execution any details may increase as per actual requirement at site,
these variations shall be executed without any extra cost implications to the IIM INDORE.
Execution- Performance Testing
The performance tests are to be conducted on the structural glazing system, if the area of
the structural glazing system exceeds 2500 Sqm from the certified laboratories accredited by
NABL (National Accreditation Board for Testing and Calibration Laboratories), Department of
Science and Technology, India. The decision of the IIM Indore/Authority Engineer about the
necessity of testing shall be final and binding.
General Requirements
Mock-up units shall be constructed by the contractor and tested to determine the structural
stability as well as air and water infiltration or leakage at glazing beads and all other joints
designed into the façade.
After approval of structural calculations and shop drawings for the structural glazing, one (1) Test
Unit for performance testing of the structural glazing shall be constructed by the contractor at
a laboratory approved by the Department.
Erect mock-up under manufacturer ‘s/installer ‘s direct supervision and employ workmen as
they would be employed during the actual erection at the job site.
Test procedures test schedules and test locations shall be submitted to IIM Indore/Authority
Engineer for approval before testing.
Prior to fabrication of Test Units, the contractor shall submit shop drawings and calculations of
the Test Unit for the IIM Indore/Authority Engineer ‘s approval.
Production for final job site erection shall not start until approval has been obtained as a result
of the mock-up test.
Test of Wind Pressure

The equivalent load of wind pressure or wind suction shall be given to the Test Unit as
increasing or decreasing the inside pressure in the ‗Pressure Chamber at which the Test Unit is
fixed.
The static wind pressure shall be applied up to 1.5 Kpa at maximum wind pressure. The
variation of dynamic pressure shall be of any approximate sine-cure-line.
Deflection on each observational point of the Test Unit shall be observed and recorded under
the Static pressure as described above.
Any damage and harmful permanent deformation on any parts except sealing materials shall
not be found at maximum wind pressure.
The deflection on the main structural parts in these conditions shall not exceed.
1/175 of the span between supports or 20mm, whichever is the lesser for vertical elements.
1/250 of the span between supports for horizontal elements.
The extent of recovery of deformation 15 minutes after the removal of the test load is to be
least 95%.
Page 873 of 1358

Test of Lateral Deflection per Floor Height

Lateral deflection per floor height shall be occurred on the test unit, when the structural frame
which fixes the test unit is deflected horizontally.
The deflection of every + 2.5mm shall be increased up to + 13mmm on the Test.
Unit (Static Deflection Test).
Dynamic deflection shall be applied up to + 13mm. The variation of dynamic deflection shall be
of an approximate sine-curve-line, one period of 3 seconds. The dimension of the deflection on
each observational points of the Test Unit shall be measured under the condition as described
above; the damage shall be observed. Any damage and harmful permanent deformation shall
not be found in any parts of the curtain wall/structural glazing except sealant at maximum
deflection.
Test of Water-tightness
Water shall be sprinkled to the Test Unit under the wind pressure. Pressure shall not be applied
to the Test Unit. The volume of the sprinkling water in one minute shall be 5 litres/m2 min. (0.1
gal/sq.ft.). All water leakage and drainage system at the joint and openable sash of the
curtain wall/structural glazing system shall be observed from the outside of the chamber. Hold
the test 2 times, in sequence as described below, conforming to the above-mentioned conditions.
Install the test unit. Hold 1st water-tightness test. Hold test of wind pressure as described
above. Hold 2nd water- tightness test.
Lateral deflection test. Water leakage at all parts of the Test Unit shall not be observed inside
during the 1st water- tightness test.
Test Report
The Contractor is required to submit five (5) copies of test reports to the IIM Indore/Authority
Engineer.
Cost of Performance Test

The Contractor shall allow in his tender for the cost of the performance testing and of fabrication,
erection, corrections to and demolition of the Test Units including any special provision required
in the testing laboratory for the tests mentioned above. The Contractor shall allow for
amendments and adjustments to the mock-up as required by the IIM Indore.
If the Test Unit fails to pass the initial testing, the Contractor shall make the necessary
corrections to the Test Unit and shall have to get the Test Unit retested by the Testing Laboratory
till it passes the tests.
Cost of corrections to the Test Unit and cost of re-testing shall be borne by the Contractor at
no additional cost to the IIM Indore.
Shop Drawings and Calculations for the Performance Testing Prior to fabrication of Test Unit, the
Contractor shall submit shop drawings and calculations of the Test Unit for IIM Indore/Authority
Engineer`s approval.
Record Drawings
The testing laboratory shall keep copy of approved Test Unit shop drawings and calculations
at testing laboratory during testing of Test Unit.
Page 874 of 1358

The testing laboratory shall accurately and neatly record on the above-mentioned shop drawings
all changes, revisions, modification etc. made to Test Unit, which shall become the record
drawings. At completion of testing and after approval of test reports the testing laboratory shall
submit the marked-up record drawings to the IIM Indore/Authority Engineer.
Contractor ‘s Representatives
Full time attendance by Approved Representatives of the Contractor & subcontractor
associated with the erection of curtain wall/structural glazing shall be provided for the erection
of the Test Unit and for all testing of the Test Unit.
9. RAILING, GRILL WORK AND FENCING:

9.1. Grill Work:
MS Grills shall be provided in the windows as specified made out of mild steel sections or
in the tender drawings. and
All steel grills shall be according to the detailed drawings and shall conform to Latest CPWD
Specifications.
On MS grills an approved quality priming coat of zinc chromate shall be applied over and above
a shop coat of primer and finished with two or more coats of low VOC synthetic enamel pain of
approved make and shade/ powder coating as specified.
9.2. Railing:
MS Railing:
As per architectural and structural member including painting & primer coat complete as per
CPWD specifications.
Stainless Steel Railing
The scope of the work includes preparation of the shop drawings (based on the tender /
architectural drawings), fabrication, supply, installation and protection of the stainless-steel
railing till completion and handing over of the work.
The stainless-steel work shall be got executed through specialized fabricator having experience
of similar works. The Contractor shall submit the credentials of the fabricator for the approval of
the IIM Indore/Authority Engineer.
The Contractor shall submit shop drawings, for approval of the IIM Indore/Authority Engineer, for
fabricating stainless steel railing with detailing of M.S. stiffener framework backing along with the
fixing details of the M.S. framework to the R.C.C columns. The details of the joints in the stainless-
steel railing including location, etc. shall also be shown in the shop drawings.
The Contractor shall procure and submit to the IIM Indore/Authority Engineer, samples of various
materials for the railing work, for approval. After approval of samples, the Contractor shall
prepare a mockup for approval of IIM Indore/Authority Engineer / IIM Indore. The material shall
be procured, and the mass work taken up only after the approval of the mockup by the IIM
Indore/Authority Engineer / IIM Indore. The mock-up shall be dismantled and removed by the
contractor as per the directions of the IIM Indore/Authority Engineer. Nothing extra shall be
payable on this account.
The stainless steel shall be of grade SS304 L / 2mm thick, with brushed steel satin finish and
procured from the approved manufacturer. It shall be without any dents, waviness, scratches,
stains etc.
Page 875 of 1358

The required joints in the railing provided as per the architectural drawings, shall be welded in a
workmanlike manner including grinding, polishing, buffing etc. all complete and compacted. The
temporary clamps provided and fixed to hold the stainless-steel railing, in position shall be
removed after the concrete has set properly. The junction of the flooring and the cladding shall
be neatly filled with weather silicone sealant of approved colour and shade. Nothing extra shall
be payable on this account.
One test (three specimens) for each lot shall be conducted for the stainless-steel pipe in the
approved laboratory. Therefore, the material shall preferably be procured in one lot from one
manufacturer.
The finished surface shall be free of any defects like dents, waviness, scratches, stains etc. and
shall have uniform brushed steel satin finish. Any defective work shall be rejected and redone by
the Contractor at his own cost. The finished surface shall therefore be protected using protective
tape which shall be removed at the time of completion of the work. The surface shall then be
suitably cleaned using nonabrasive approved cleaner for the material. Nothing extra shall be
payable on this account.
The item includes the cost of all inputs of labour, materials (including stainless steel pipes,
welding, brazing, concrete, protective film, weather silicone sealant etc including cost of providing
and fixing M.S. frames), T & P other incidental charges, wastages etc. The items also included
providing and fixing stainless steel anchor fasteners for fixing railing. The railing shall be fixed in
position using stainless steel pipes, stainless steel posts of required diameters and thickness as
shown on drawing and polished to satin finish including cutting, welding, grinding, bending to
required profile and shape, hoisting, butting, polishing etc. The item includes the cost of all inputs
of labour, materials, T&P, other incidental charges, wastage etc. The entire work shall be carried
out to the satisfaction of IIM Indore/Authority Engineer.
.
10. STRUCTURAL STEEL
General
This specification covers the fabrication and transportation to site and erection on prepared foundations
and structural steel work consisting of beams, columns, purlins, vertical trusses, bracings, shear
connections etc.
Fabrication, erection and approval of steel structures shall be in compliance with General Specifications
mentioned in CPWD specifications with up-to-date correction slips and IS: 800 – 1984. For the guidance on
general fabrication and erection of structural steel work, Chapter 11of IS: 800 (1984) must be followed. As
far as safety is concerned guidance could be obtained from Indian safety code for structural steelwork IS:
7205(1974). Before the commencement of the erection, all the erection equipment tools, shackles, ropes
etc. should be tested for their load carrying capacity. Such tests if needed may be repeated at intermediate
stages also.
Providing shop primer coat for steel structures. Grouting of holding-down bolt pockets and below base
plates where required.
Scope
The fabrication and erection of the steel work consists of accomplishing of all jobs here-in enumerated
including providing all labour, tools and plant all materials and consumables such as welding electrodes,
bolts and nuts, oxygen and acetylene gases, oils for cleaning etc. of approved quality as per relevant IS.
The work shall be executed according to the drawings, specifications, relevant codes etc. in an expeditious
and workman like manner, as detailed in the specifications and the relevant Indian Standard Codes and
Standard Practice and to the complete satisfaction of the IIM Indore/Authority Engineer.
Page 876 of 1358

Fabrication Drawings
The contractor shall prepare all fabrication and erection drawings on the basis of approved design
drawings and shall submit the same in triplicate to the IIM Indore/Authority Engineer for review, IIM
Indore/Authority Engineer shall review and comment, if any, on the same. Such review, if any, by the IIM
Indore/Authority Engineer, does not relieve the contractor of any of his required guarantees and
responsibilities. The contractor shall however be responsible for fabricating the structural strictly
conforming to specifications and reviewed drawings.
Fabrication drawings shall include but not limited to the following:
Member sizes and details

Types and dimensions of welds and bolts
Shapes and sizes of edge preparation for welding
Details of shop and field joints included in assemblies.

Quality of structural steels, welding electrodes, bolts, nuts and washers etc. to be used.
Erection assemblies, identifying all transportable parts and sub-assemblies, associated with special
erection instructions, if required.
Calculations where asked for approval.
Connections, splices etc. other details not specifically detailed in design drawings shall be suitably given on
fabrication drawings considering normal detailing practices and developing full member strengths. Where
asked for calculations for the merit shall also be submitted for approval.
IIM Indore/Authority Engineer review shall not absolve the contractor of his responsibility for the
correctness without comments to the contractor for necessary action. In the former case a further three
copies of amended drawings shall be submitted by the contractor for final review.
The contractor shall supply three prints each of the final reviewed drawings to the Engineer-in- charge
within a week since final review.
If any modification is necessary in the approved drawing during the course of execution of the and the
revised fabrication drawings shall be duly reviewed as per the above Clauses. of dimensions, adequacy of
details and connections. One copy will be returned reviewed with or job, revised fabrication drawings will
be prepared by the contractor, incorporating the changes.
Materials
Rolled Sections
Structural steel will generally be of standard quality conforming to IS: 226/IS: 2062. Whenever welded
construction is specified plates of more than 20 mm thickness will generally conform to IS: 2062.
Welding Materials
Welding electrodes shall conform to IS: 814 and approval of welding procedures shall be as per IS: 823.
iii. Bolts, Nuts & Washers- Bolts and nuts shall be as per IS: 1367 and tested as per IS: 1608. It shall have a
minimum tensile strength of 44 Kg/mm2 and minimum elongation of 23% on a gauge length of 5.65 (A-
Original cross-sectional area of the gauge length). Washers shall be as per IS: 2016.
Page 877 of 1358

All materials shall conform to their respective specifications. The use of equivalent or higher
grade
or alternate materials will be considered only in very special cases subject to the approval of the
IIM Indore/Authority Engineer in writing.
Receipt & Storing of Materials
Steel materials supplied by the contractor must be marked for identification and each lot
should
be accompanied by manufacturer's quality certificate, conforming chemical analysis
and mechanical characteristics.
All steel parts furnished by supplier shall be checked, sorted out, straightened, and arranged
by grades and qualities in stores.
Structural with surface defects such as pitting, cracks, laminations etc. shall be rejected
if the defects exceed the allowable tolerances specified in relevant standards or as
directed by the chief IIM Indore/Authority Engineer.
Welding wire and electrodes shall be stored separately by qualities and lots inside a dry
and enclosed room, in compliance with IS: 816 - 1969 and as per instructions given by the
Engineer-in- charge. Electrodes shall be perfectly dry and drawn from an electrode even, if
required.
Checking of quality bolts of any kind as well as storage of same shall be made conforming to
relevant standards.
Each lot of electrodes, bolts, nuts, etc. shall be accompanied by manufacturer's test
certificate.
The contractor may use alternative materials as compared to design specification only with
the
written approval of the IIM Indore/Authority Engineer.
Material Tests
The contractor shall be required to produce manufacturer's quality certificates for the
materials supplied by the contractor. Notwithstanding the manufacturer's certificates, the IIM
Indore/Authority Engineer may ask for testing of materials in approved test houses. The
test results shall satisfy the requirements of the relevant Indian Standards.
Whenever quality certificates are missing or incomplete or when material quality differs
from standard specifications the contractor shall conduct all appropriate tests as directed
by the IIM Indore/Authority Engineer at no extra cost.
Materials for which test certificates are not available or for which test results do not tally with
relevant standard specifications, shall not be used.
Fabrication
The Contractor will submit the credential with full particulars about work completed by
fabricator to be deployed for this work for approval of IIM Indore/Authority Engineer. After
written approval is communicated in respect of fabricator, then only the jobs should be
assigned to him. Fabrication shall be in accordance with IS: 800 Section V in addition to the
following:
Page 878 of 1358

Fabrication shall be done as per approved fabrication drawings adhering strictly to work points
and work lines on the same. The connections shall be welded or bolted as per design drawings.
Work shall also include fabricating built up sections.
Any defective material used shall be replaced by the contractor at his own expense, care being
taken to prevent any damage to the structure during removal.
All the fabricated and delivered items shall be suitably packed to be protected from any
good by the Contractor at his own cost.
Any faulty fabrication pointed out at any stage of work shall be made good by the contractor at
his own cost.
Preparation of Materials
Prior to release for fabrication, all rolled sections warped beyond allowable limit shall be pressed or rolled
straight and freed from twists, taking care that a uniform pressure is applied. Minor warping, corrugations
etc. in rolled sections shall be rectified by cold working. The sections shall be straightened by hot working
where the IIM Indore/Authority Engineer so direct and shall cooled slowly after straightening. Warped
members like plates and flats may be used as such only if wave like deformation does not exceed L/1000
but limited to 10 mm (L-Length). Surface of members that are to be joined by lap or fillet welding or bolting
shall be even so that there is no gap between overlapping surfaces.
Marking
Marking of members shall be made on horizontal pads, of an appropriate rack or supports in order to
ensure horizontal and straight placement of such members. Marking accuracy shall be at least + 1 mm.
Cutting
Members shall be cut mechanically (by saw or shear or by oxyacetylene flame). All sharp, rough, or broken
edges, and all edges of joints which are subjected to tensile or oscillating stresses shall be ground. No
electric metal arc cutting shall be allowed. All edges cut by oxyacetylene process shall be cleaned of
impurities prior to assembly. Cutting tolerances shall be as follows:
For members connected at both ends + 1 mm.
Elsewhere + 3 mm.
The edge preparation for welding of members more than 12 mm thick shall be done by flame cutting and
grinding. Cut faces shall not have cracks or be rough. Edge preparation shall be as per IS: 823 - 1964.
Drilling
Bolts holes shall be drilled. Drilling shall be made to the diameter specified in drawings. No enlarging of
holes filling, by man rolling or oxyacetylene flame shall be allowed. Allowed variations for holes (out-of-
roundness, eccentricity, plumb-line deviation) shall be as per IS: 800.
Maximum deviation for spacing of two holes on the same axis shall be + 1 mm.
Two perpendicular diameters of any oval hole shall not differ by more than 1 mm.
Drilling faults in holes may be rectified by reaming the holes to the next upper diameter, provided that
spacing of new hole centres and distance of hole centres to the edges of members are not less than allowed
and that the increase of hole diameter does not impair the structural strength. Hole reaming shall be
allowed if the number of faulty holes does not exceed 15% of the total number of holes for one joint.
Welding:
Preparation of Members for Welding
All welding in mild steel work shall be done with electrodes and / or by methods recommended by the
suppliers of the metals being welded in accordance with corresponding Indian Standards. Type, size and
Page 879 of 1358

spacing of welds, shall be as specified. All welding consumables shall be in accordance with the I.S.
standards. Welds behind finished mild steel surfaces shall be so done as to eliminate distortion and / or
discoloration on the finished side. Weld spatter and welding oxides on finished surfaces shall be removed
by descaling and / or grinding. Plug, puddle or spot welding shall not be permitted. If weld beads are visible
on exposed finished surfaces, the surfaces shall be ground and polished to match and blend with finish on
adjacent parent metal.
Structural welds shall be made by certified welders and shall conform to I.S. code. The welds shall be tested
by the Contractor to ensure quality and integrity of the structural welds. However, welding tests shall be
carried out as below: and the contractor shall maintain records for Visual testing – 100 % of the welds for
size and quality. Fillet weld testing- 30 % of the welds for MPI or Dye penetration test.
Dirt grease, lubricant, or other organic material shall be removed by vapor degreasing or suitable solvent.
Joints rejected because of welding defects may be repaired only by re welding. Defective welds shall be
removed by chipping or machining. Flame cutting shall not be allowed.
Assembly of structural members
Assembly of structural members shall be made with proper jigs and fixtures to ensure correct positioning
of members (angles, axes nodes etc.) Sharp edges, rust of cut edges, notches, irregularities and fissures
due to faulty cutting shall be chipped or ground or filled over the length of the affected area, deep enough
to remove faults completely. Edge preparation for welding shall be carefully and accurately made so as to
facilitate a good joint. Generally, no special edge preparation shall be required for members under 8 mm
thick. Edge preparation (beveling) denotes cutting of the same so as to result in V, X K or U seam shapes as
per IS: 823. The members to be assembled shall be clean and dry on the welding edges. Under no
circumstances shall wet, greasy, rust or dirt covered parts be assembled. Joints shall be kept free from any
foreign matter likely to get into the gaps between members to be welded. Before assembly the edges to
be welded as well as adjacent areas extending for at least 20 mm shall be cleaned(until metallic polish is
achieved). When assembling members, proper care shall be taken of welding shrinkage and distortions, as
the drawing dimensions cover finished dimensions of the structure. The elements shall be got checked and
approved by the IIM Indore/Authority Engineer or their authorized representative before assembly. The
permissible tolerances for assembly of members preparatory to welding shall be as per IS: 823. After the
assembly has been checked, temporary tack welding in position shall be done by electric welding; keeping
in view finished dimensions of the structure.
Welding procedures
Welding shall be carried out only by fully trained and experienced welders as tested and approved by the
IIM Indore/Authority Engineer. Any test carried out either by the IIM Indore/Authority Engineer or their
representative or the inspectors shall constitute a right by them for such tests and the cost involved
thereon shall be borne by the contractor himself. Qualification tests for welders as well as tests for approval
of electrodes will be carried out as per IS: 823. The nature of test for performance qualification of welders
shall be commensurate with the quality of welding required on this job as judged by the IIM
Indore/Authority Engineer. The steel structures shall be automatically, semi-automatically or manually
welded as per direction of IIM Indore/Authority Engineer. Welding shall begin only after the checks
mentioned in Clause herein have been carried out. The welder shall mark with his identification
mark on each element welded by him. When welding is carried out in open air, steps shall be taken to
protect the face of welding against wind or rain. The electrodes, wire and parts being welded shall be
dry. Before beginning the welding operation, each joint shall be checked to ensure that the parts to be
welded are clean and root gaps provided as per IS: 823. For continuing the welding of seems
discontinued due to some reason, the end of the discontinued seem shall be melted in order to obtain
a good continuity. Before resuming the welding operation, the groove as well as the adjacent parts shall
be well cleaned for a length of approx. 50 For single butt welds (in V, 1/2 V or U) and double butt welds
(in K, double U etc.) the re-welding of the root is mandatory but only the metal deposit on the root
Page 880 of 1358

has been cleaned by back gouging or chipping. The welding seams shall be left to cool slowly. The
contractor shall not be allowed to cool the welds quickly by any other method. For multi-layer welding,
before welding the following layer, the formerly welded layer shall be cleaned metal bright by light
chipping and wire brushing. Backing strips shall not be allowed. The order and method of welding shall
be so that –
No unacceptable deformation appears in the welded parts.
Due margin is provided to compensate for contraction due to welding in order to avoid any high
permanent stresses.
The defects in welds must be rectified according to IS: 823 and as per instruction of Engineer-in- charge.
Weld Inspection
The weld seams shall satisfy the following:

shall correspond to design shapes and dimensions.
shall not have any defects such as cracks, incomplete penetration and fusion, under-cuts, rough
surfaces, burns, blow holes and porosity etc. beyond permissible limits.
During the welding operation and approval of finished elements, inspections and tests shall be made
as shown in annexure-B. The mechanical characteristics of the welded joints shall be as in IS: 823.
Preparation of Members for Bolting
The members shall be assembled for bolting with proper jigs and fixtures to sustain the assemblies
without deformation and bending. Before assembly, all sharp edges, shavings, rust dirt, etc. shall be
removed. Before assembly, the contacting surfaces of the members shall be cleaned and given a coat
of primer as per IS: 2074.The members which are bolt assembled shall be set according to drawings
and temporarily fastened with erection bolts (minimum 4 pieces) to check the co-axiality of the holes.
The members shall be finally bolted after the deviations have been corrected, after which there shall
not be gaps. Before assembly, the members shall be checked and got approved by the IIM
Indore/Authority Engineer. The difference in thickness of the sections that are butt assembled shall not
be more than 3% or maximum 0.8 mm whichever is less. If the difference is larger, it shall be corrected
by grinding or filling. Reaming of holes to final diameter or cleaning of these shall be done only after
the parts have been check assembled. As each hole is finished to final dimensions (reamed if necessary)
it shall be set and bolted up. Erection bolts shall not be removed before other bolts are set.
Bolting up
Final bolting of the members shall be done after the defects have been rectified and approval of joints
obtained. The bolts shall be tightened starting from the center of joint towards the edge.
Planning of Ends
Planning of ends of members like column ends shall be done by grinding when so specified in the
design. Planning of butt-welded members shall be done after these have been assembled, the spare
edges shall be removed with grinding machines or files. The following tolerances shall be permitted on
member that has been planned.
On the length of the member having both ends planed, maximum + 2 mm with respect to design.
Level differences of planed surfaces, maximum 0.3 mm.
Deviation between planed surface and member's axis maximum 1/1500.
Page 881 of 1358

Holes for Field Joints

Holes for field joints shall be drilled in the shop to final diameters and tested in the shop, with trial
assemblies. When three-dimensional assembly is not possible in the shop, the holes for field joints may
be drilled in shop and reamed on site after erection, on approval by the IIM Indore/Authority Engineer.
For bolted steel structures, trial assembly in shop is mandatory. The tolerance for spacing of holes shall
be + 1 mm.
Marking for Identification
All elements and members prior to dispatch from the fabrication yard for erection shall be shop marked.
The members shall be visibly marked with weatherproof light coloured paint. The size and thickness of
the numbers shall be chosen to facilitate the identification of members. For the small members that are
delivered in bundles or crates, the required marking shall be done on small metal tags securely tied to
the bundle, while the crates shall be marked directly. Each bundle or crate shall be packed with members
for one and the same assembly; in the same bundle or crate, general utility members such as bolts,
quests etc. may be packed. List of materials showing weight, quality and dimension of contents shall be
placed in the crates.
The members shall be marked with a durable paint, in a visible location, preferably at one end of the
member so that these may be easily checked during storage and erection. All members shall be marked
in the shop before inspection and acceptance. When the member is being painted, the marking area
shall not be painted but bordered with white paint. The marking and job symbol shall be registered in
all shop delivery documents (transportation, for erection etc.)
Shop Test Pre-assembly
For steel structures that have the same type of welding the shop test pre-assembly shall be performed
on one out of every 10 members minimum. For bolted steel structures, shop test pre- assembly is
mandatory for all elements as well as for the entire structure in conformity with previous Clause.
Shop Inspection and Approval
General
The IIM Indore/Authority Engineer or their representative shall have free access at all responsible times
to the contractor ‘s fabrication shop and shall be afforded all reasonable facilities for satisfying himself
that the fabrication is being undertaken in accordance with drawings and specifications. Technical
approval of the steel structure in the shop by the IIM Indore/Authority Engineer is mandatory. The
contractor shall not limit the number and kinds of tests, final as well as intermediate once, or extra tests
required by the IIM Indore/Authority Engineer. The contractor shall furnish necessary tools, gauges,
instruments etc. and technical non-technical personnel for shop tests by the IIM Indore/Authority
Engineer, free of cost.
Shop Acceptance
The IIM Indore/Authority Engineer shall inspect and approve at the following stages:
The following approvals may be given in shop:
Intermediate approvals of work that cannot be inspected later.
Partial approvals Final approvals
Intermediate approval of work shall be given when a part of the work is preformed later:
Cannot be inspected later
Inspection would be difficult to perform, and results would not be satisfactory.
Partial approval in the shop is given on members and assemblies of steel structures before the
primer coat is applied and includes:
Approval of materials Approval of field joint
Page 882 of 1358

Approval of parts with planed surfaces Test erection Approval of members Approval of markings
Inspections and approvals of special features, like Rollers, loading platform mechanism etc.
During the partial approval, intermediate approvals as well as all former approvals, shall be taken into
consideration.
Final approval in the Shop
The final approval refers to all elements and assemblies of the steel structures, with shop primer coat,
ready for delivery from shop to be loaded for transportation or stored.
The final approval comprises of:
Partial approvals
Approval of shop primer coat
Approval of mode of loading and transport
Approval of storage (for materials stored)
Painting and Delivery

Preparation of parts for shop painting: Painting shall consist of providing at least one coat of red oxide
zinc chromate primer to steel members before dispatch from shop. Primer coat shall not be applied
unless:
Surface have been wire brushed, cleaned of dust, oil, rust or sand blasted as per the requirement and
direction of IIM Indore/Authority Engineer etc.
Erection gaps between members, spots that cannot be painted or where moisture or other aggressive
agents may penetrate, have been filled with an approved type of oil and putty.
The surface to be painted is completely dry.
The parts where water of aggressive agents may collect (during transportation, storage, erection and
operation) are filled with putty and provided with holes for drainage of water. Members and parts have
been inspected and accepted. Welds have been accepted.
The following are not to be painted or protected by any other product:
Surface which are in the vicinity of joints to be welded at site.
Surfaces bearing markings.
Other surfaces indicated in the design.
The following shall be given a coat of hot oil or any approved resistant lubricant only.
Planed surfaces.
Holes for links

The surfaces that are to be embedded in or in contact with the concrete shall be given a coat of cement
wash. The surfaces which are in contact with the ground, gravel or brick work and subject to moisture
shall be given bituminous coat. The other surfaces shall be given a primer coating.
Special attention shall be given to locations not easily accessible, where water can collect and which after
assembly and erection cannot be inspected, painted and maintained. Holes shall be provided for water
drainage and in accessible box type sections shall be hermetically sealed by welds.
Page 883 of 1358

The contractor shall paint further coats of red-oxide after erection and placing in position the steel
structures as directed by the IIM Indore/Authority Engineer.
Packing, transportation, delivery

After final shop acceptance and marking, the item shall be packed and loaded for transportation. Packing
must be adequate to protect item against warping during loading and unloading. Proper lifting devices
shall be used for loading, in order to protect items against warping. Slender projecting parts shall be
braced with additional steel bars, before loading, for protection against warping during transportation.
Loading and transportation shall be done in compliance with transportation rules. If certain parts cannot
be transported in the lengths stipulated in the design, the position and type of additional splice joints
shall be approved by the IIM Indore/Authority Engineer. Items must be carefully loaded on platforms of
transportation means to prevent warping, bending or falling during transportation. The small parts such
as fish-plates, quests etc. shall be securely tied with wire to their respective parts. Bolts, nuts and
washers shall be packed and transported in crates. The parts shall be delivered in the order stipulated
by the IIM Indore/Authority Engineer and shall be accompanied by document showing:
Quality and quantity of structure or members
Position of member in the structure
Particulars of structure
Identification number job symbol.
Field Erection
The erection work shall be permitted only after the foundation or other structure over which the steel
work will be erected is approved and is ready for erection.
The contractor shall satisfy himself about the levels, alignment etc. for the foundations well in advance,
before starting the erection. Minor chipping etc. shall be carried out by the contractor on his expense.
Any faulty erection done by the contractor shall be made good at his own cost.
Approval by the IIM Indore/Authority Engineer or their representatives at any stage of work does not
relieve the contractor of any of his required guarantees of the contract.
Storage and preparation of parts prior to erection
The storage place for steel parts shall be prepared in advance and got approved by the IIM
Indore/Authority Engineer before the steel structures start arriving from the hop. A platform shall be
provided by the Contractor near the erection site for preliminary erection work. The contractor shall
make the following verifications upon receipt of material at site.
For quality certificates regarding materials and workmanship according to these general specifications and
drawings.
Whether parts received are complete without defects due to transportation, loading and unloading and
defects, if any, are well within the admissible limit.
For the above work sufficient space must be allotted in the storage area which will be arranged by the
contractor without any extra cost to the department. Steps shall be taken to prevent warping of items
Page 884 of 1358

during unloading. The parts shall be unloaded, stored and stored so as to be these may be taken out in
order or erection. The parts shall be at least 150 mm clear from ground drainage of water. If rectification
of members like straightening etc. are required, these shall be done in a special place allotted which
shall be adequately equipped. The parts shall be clean when delivered for erection.
Erection & Tolerances
Erection in general shall be carried out as required and approved by the IIM Indore/Authority Engineer.
Positioning and levelling of the structure, alignment and plumbing of the stanchion and fixing every
member of the structure shall be in accordance with the relevant drawings and to the complete satisfaction
of the IIM Indore/Authority Engineer.
The following checks and inspection shall be carried out before during and after erection. damage during
transportation accuracy of alignment of structures direction according to drawings and specifications
progress and workmanship.
There may be any deviations regarding positions of foundations or anchor bolts, which would lead to
erection deviations, the IIM Indore/Authority Engineer shall be informed immediately. Minor rectifications
in foundations, orientation of bolts holes etc. shall be carried out as part of the work, at no extra cost. The
various parts of the steel structure shall be so erected so to ensure stability against inherent weight, wind
and erection stresses. The structure shall be anchored, and final erection joints completed after plan and
elevation positions of the structural members have been verified with corresponding drawings and
approved by the IIM Indore/Authority Engineer. The bolted joints shall be tightened so that the entire
surface of the bolt heads and nuts shall rest on the member. For parts with sloping surfaces tapered
washers shall be used.
Final acceptance and handing over the structure
At acceptance, the contractor shall submit the following documents:

Shop and erection drawings – four sets soft copy and hard copies 4 copies of each of the following:
Shop acceptance documents quality certificate for structural, plates, etc. (electrodes, welding wire,
bolts, nuts, washers etc.)
List of certified welders who worked on erection of structures. Acceptance and intermediate control
procedure of erection operations. Approval by the IIM Indore/Authority Engineer at any stage of work does
not relieve the contractor of any of his required guarantees of the contract.
Grouting of Pockets
Grouting of pockets and under base plates will be done only after the steel work has been levelled and
plumbed and the bases of stanchions are supported by steel shims. The space below the base plate and
pockets shall be thoroughly cleaned. The mortar used for grouting shall not be leaner than 1:2 (1 cement:
2 sand) (grade 300 in case of concrete) or as is specified and shall be mixed to the minimum consistency
required. It shall be poured under suitable head and tamped until the space has been completely filled.
Tolerances allowed in the erection of building without cranes.
The maximum tolerances for line and level of the steel work shall be + 3.00 mm on any part of the structure.
The structure shall not be out of plumb more than 3.5 mm on each 10 M. section of height and not more
than 7.0 mm per 30 M. section. These tolerances shall apply to all parts of the structure unless the drawings
issued for erection purposes state otherwise.
Page 885 of 1358

Contractor to submit shop drawing for all structural steel work for approval. The work at site should
commence only after getting the shop approved. Contractor to get erection scheme approved before
commencement of erection of trusses.
11. FLOORING:
The flooring in the building shall be as per the approved finishing schedule appended in Tender drawings
and laid in such a way that limits in floor levels would not exceed the limits provided in the latest CPWD
specifications or manufactures specifications.
In order to keep the floor finish as per direction of IIM Indore/Authority Engineer and as per Finishing
Schedule/ Architectural drawings and to provide required thickness of the flooring as per specification, the
level of top surface of RCC shall be accordingly adjusted at the time of its centering, shuttering and casting.
Alternatively, for maintaining the floor finish, grading with cement concrete with nominal mix 1:2:4 (1
cement: 2 coarse sand: 4 graded stone aggregate 10mm nominal size) shall be provided.
Wherever Vitrified Tile flooring is done, it shall be with 1st Quality multi-grade/multi-range tiles. Double
Charge 8.5-9 MM Thick Stain free with water absorption < 0.05%, MOR > 38N/mm2, Breaking Strength >
1500 N and Confirming to ISO: 10545 of Approved make in all available color, 1st quality/ Premium in
flooring.
Slope in floors shall be provided as per architectural drawings, else the levels at any place when checked
over a distance of one meters in any direction should not show variation in floor level more than 3 mm.
Protective layer to be provided of all types of flooring.
The grouting of the joints shall be with white cement and matching pigment.
The edges of steps in the staircases, counters, kitchen platform, windowsills, facias and similar location
shall be edge moulded as required.
First class Kota stone having 25mm thickness. The detailed specification shall be in conformation with
CPWD specifications/ IS Code.
Minimum Bed Mortar for various types of Flooring:-
• Stone flooring/kota stone flooring/granite flooring/ Ceramic glazed floor tile flooring/vitrified
flooring - 20mm thick bed of cement mortar 1:4 (1 cement: 4 coarse sand).
• For dado, skirting and risers of steps in stone /kota stone/granite / Ceramic glazed wall tile /vitrified
tiles- 12mm thick bed of cement mortar 1:3 (1 cement: 3 coarse sand).
• The vertical facia and drops shall be finished with epoxy resin-based adhesive.
Granite Work
The granite stonework shall, in general, be carried out as per the CPWD Specifications and relevant
specification for marble flooring, skirting, dado and tread/risers of steps under Flooring Sub Head of the
CPWD Specifications shall prevail.
Granite stone slabs shall be pre polished (mirror polished), eggshell polished, flame finished or given any
other surface treatment as specified, as per the IIM Indore/Authority Engineer architectural drawings and
as directed by the IIM Indore/Authority Engineer. Machine polishing and cutting to required size shall be
done with water (as lubricant) only. Sawing shall also be done preferably with water as lubricant but as a
Page 886 of 1358

special case, the IIM Indore/Authority Engineer may permit, at his discretion, oil or kerosene as lubricant
subject to all kerosene or oil in the body and surface of tiles / slabs being thoroughly dried in ovens. Tiles /
slabs with stains or patches due to the use of oil or otherwise, either before or after installation, shall be
rejected and shall be replaced by the Contractor at his own cost. Nothing extra shall be payable on this
account. Before execution of the granite stonework, the contractor shall submit for the approval of
the IIM Indore/Authority Engineer, the samples with following details:
Three representative samples for each type of granite stone specified.

Details of physical characteristics such as dimensional tolerances (within the specified limits), water
absorption, compressive strength, Mohs Hardness, Specific gravity with reference to IS: 1124& IS1122 or
International standards.
Source of supply and confirmation of availability in full quantity and uniformity of color, tone and
textures.
Company profile of Suppliers.

The decision of the IIM Indore/Authority Engineer as regards the approval of the samples for the various
types of the granite stones shall be final and binding on the Contractor.
The entire supply for each type of granite stone slab shall be procured from one location (in one quarry),
and supplied preferably, in one lot to keep variations to the minimum. The Contractor shall also segregate
and sort the slabs according to colour, shade, texture and size of grains etc. to keep variation(s) in stones
used at any one floor to the minimum. Any slab with variation in the colour, shade, texture and size of
grains etc., not acceptable to the IIM Indore/Authority Engineer, shall not be used in the work and shall be
removed and replaced by the Contractor.
The stonework may be required to be carried out in patterns, design and / or in combination with granite
stones of different colour and shade with or without borders and in combination of different stone slabs /
ceramic tiles for which nothing extra shall be payable. The stones shall be provided in sizes and shapes as
per the approved IIM Indore/Authority Engineer architectural drawings and wastages and incidental costs,
if any, shall be deemed to be covered in the cost of the relevant items. Nothing extra shall be payable on
this account.
The following tolerances shall be allowed in the dimension of granite stone slab:
Slabs: Tolerance
a). Length ± 1mm
b). Width ± 1mm
c). Thickness - 1mm
d). Angularity at corners ± 0.25%
The stones slabs not meeting the above tolerance limits shall be rejected and not permitted to be used in
the work. Nothing extra shall be payable on this account.
Stones slabs shall have uniform thicknesses with-in the tolerance limits and linear items like treads, sills
and jambs, coping, risers, urinal partitions, kitchen / wash basin platforms, vanity counters, facias and other
similar locations etc. shall have edge polished calibrated thickness i.e. exposed edges shall have edge
polished uniform thickness throughout the length of the work.
For the steps (risers and treads) in the linear profile, the granite stone shall be provided in single pieces up
to 2.0m, unless otherwise specifically permitted by the IIM Indore/Authority Engineer. Wherever grooves
are required to be provided the same is to be done, the joints shall be provided.
Page 887 of 1358

The granite slabs used for providing and fixing in the sills, soffits and jambs of doors, windows, ventilators
and similar locations shall be in single piece unless otherwise directed by the Authority Engineer/ IIM
Indore.
The granite stone slab shall be fixed over low-level storage cabinets using necessary adhesive as per the
manufacturer ‘s specification. The stone shall have uniform thickness and shall be provided in sizes as per
architectural drawings. The stone slab shall have uniformly levelled surface after fixing. All the joints shall
be finished smoothly in a workmanlike manner.
The granite work shall be adequately protected by a layer of Plaster of Paris, which shall be maintained
throughout and removed just before handing over of the works.
12. FALSE CEILING

General
The false ceiling in the buildings shall be as per the approved finishing schedule tender drawings as
per latest CPWD specifications or manufactures specifications. False ceiling items in general are carried
out as per the manufacturer ‘s specifications / as directed by the Engineer – in – Charge. Location of
particular type of false ceiling shall be as per relevant drawing, in its absence written approval of the
Engineer – in - charge shall be obtained.
Trap doors, as required, of approved size and design shall be provided.
G.I. METAL TILES CEILING

Frame :- The framework shall consist of G.I spring tee of specified size fixed to main C carrier with the help
of suspension Brackets. The framework shall be executed in a manner so as to form a grid of 600 mm x
600 mm as specified in the item. The pre-painted steel ‘C’ wall angle of size 20x30x20 mm and 0.5mm thick
shall be fixed along the periphery of the room with nylon sleeves and wooden screws at 300 mm center to
center. The main ‘C’ carrier of size 10x38x10 mm made of G.I steel 0.7 mm thick shall be fixed with cleats
of size 37x27x25x1.6 mm and rawl plugs of size 38x12 mm.
Ceiling tiles ;- GI Metal Ceiling Lay in perforated Tegular edge global white color tiles of size 595x595 mm
and 0.5 mm thick with 8 mm drop; made of GI sheet having galvanizing of 100 gms/sqm (both sides
inclusive) and 20% perforation area with 1.8 mm dia holes and having NRC (Noise Reduction Coefficient )
of 0.5, electro statically polyester powder coated of thickness 60 microns (minimum), including factory
painted after bending and perforation, and backed with a black Glass fiber acoustical fleece.
FALSE CEILING (FULLY PERFORATED MICRO TEGULAR EDGED GYPSUM BOARD)
Materials
Fully perforated gypsum false ceiling tiles shall be made of Gypsum plaster of 75 microns particle size
mixed with short length glass fiber filament of 20 microns ± 5 microns diameter to give it high strength
and shall be free from harmful or any toxic ingredients. Tiles shall be appropriate class and of finished
thickness as specified in the description of the item. Only selected tiles of uniform width shall be used.
Unless otherwise specified in the description of the item or shown in the drawings, the width of tiles
selected for use shall not be less than 595 x 595mm in size and of approved texture, design and patterns
and patterns and shall be fully perforated 12mm thick micro tegular-edged type GRG tiles. Where width
of room/ corridor is in multiple of standard width of tiles, same pattern shall be maintained throughout
the length. Where the width of rooms/ corridor is not in multiple of standard width of tiles, borders with
appropriate width and material of boards shall be provided in design approved by the IIM
Indore/Authority Engineer and maintained uniformly throughout the length/ width of room/ corridor.
GRG tiles shall have the following properties:
(a) Surface: The Fully perforated gypsum false ceiling tiles shall be painted with white dispersion
type solvent free paint. fully perforated false ceiling tiles shall have a non-woven fabric of density
Page 888 of 1358

minimum 30 grams per square meter pasted at the back.

(b) Dimensions: 595mm x 595mm Fully perforated 12mm thick micro tegular-edged type tiles.
Size referred to are always module sizes. The nominal panel size may differ depending on the
suspension system used.
(c) Density of material: 700 to 850 kg per Cum. (d) Relative humidity: 99% RH resistant.
(e) Fire resistance: Non-combustible as per BS: 476, Part-4: 1970 (f) Moisture Content: < 2%
(g) Acoustic control: Noise reduction coefficient (NRC) = 0.50 to 0.75 as per IS: 8225-1981.
(h) Light reflectance :>85%
(i) Suspension system: Suspension system shall be made of interlocking metal T-grids of
hot-dipped galvanized iron section.
13. POST TENSIONING
General
The Post Tensioning bonded Flat slab system shall consist of High Tensile strands of 12.70 mm (0.5“dia)
/15.20 mm dia ( 0.6 “ dia) and contained in a flat slab GI duct of 80 mm x 20 mm .Each strand in anchored
by means of wedge and individually stressed by means of a mono strand Jack. The prestressing force is
transferred to the concrete by a flat anchorage. By use of flat duct, the static depth of slab is more
efficiently utilized compared to a round
Prestressing systems
The pre-stressing system is incorporating strands with 12.70 mm dia strand /15.20 mm dia strand.
Materials
Strands 0.5” 0.6”
Nominal Area 98.7mm2 139mm2
Nominal weight 0.775 kg/m 1.101 kg/m
Tensile strength 1860 N/mm2 1860 N/mm2
Modulus of elasticity 195000 N/mm2 195000 N/mm2
Min breaking load of strand 184kN 260kN
Strand quality in accordance with IS 14268 IS 14268
Ducts
The sheathing consists of corrugated spiral ducts made from galvanized steel strips of 0.3 mm thick.
Anchorages
The type of anchorages commonly used is Flat Anchorage (FA), Multi plane Anchorages (MA), Bond Head
(Dead End) Anchorages. The purpose of the anchorages are when the strands are stressed, the tendon
force would be transferred to the concrete. Bursting reinforcement is provided behind the anchorage to
distribute the stressing force.
Design data for friction / elongation calculation

Friction of coefficient u : 0.2 } or as per the consultant’s recommendation Wobble factor k : 0.0017/m }
design parameters
Draw in of wedge : 6mm (approximately) Stressing anchorage : Type FA, MA
Loss in jack : Varies from 0 to 2.0% for various type of jacks.
Handling and storage of materials

The pre-stressing strands shall be free of grease and corrosion enhancing properties.
No flame cutting of strands is allowed.
Care should be taken during handling of construction work in order to avoid mechanical damage to the
Page 889 of 1358

strands.
Strands should be raised above ground level to prevent ingress of soil.
Suitable ropes or slings shall be used for loading and unloading in order to avoid mechanical damage to
the strand coil.
The component must be handled and stored such that any contamination, mechanically damage or
corrosion can be avoided. 6. General Working Procedures
Generally, the prestressing tendons are installed in accordance with the “Approved Drawings issued for
Construction”.
Install bottom slab reinforcement when the slab formwork is ready.
Provide sufficient cover to the bottom slab reinforcement in accordance to the shop drawings.
Install tendons after the completion of the bottom slab reinforcement.
As for beam construction, install bottom / side reinforcement and links (without internal & external
capping links in the beam).
Install tendons in accordance with the shop drawings.
Install top reinforcement and capping links of the beam.
Guidelines for Tendons Installation

Tendon alignment and height shall take precedent over reinforcement whenever there is a clashing point.
All dimensions measured shall be based on the formwork level. Therefore, an accurate formwork level is
necessary.
The tolerances of formwork shall be 5mm or in accordance with the specifications.
The Multiplane Anchor is fixed to the end formwork by support bars to avoid any displacement during
concreting.
The Multiplane Anchor must be orientated perpendicularly to the cable axis and with the grout connection
at the top of the duct.
If the side formwork is to be erected early, the main contractor has to arrange for hole protrusion to be
made for each anchorage to accommodate protruding duct and strands.
Tolerances for vertical tendon profiles are 10mm for all high and low points.
Tolerances for horizontal profiles are 150mm (to avoid small M&E openings or other obstructions).
Specialist designer shall be consulted for tolerances bigger than 150mm.
Handle ducts with care to avoid damage.

Support bars and bar-chairs are placed at intervals of each 1m (approx.) and secured with binding wire to
avoid any movement during concreting.
Duct joints are sealed with tape.
Care should be taken during concreting to avoid grout hoses from being embedded in concrete or
removed completely.
Avoid stepping on ducts placed.
Care should be taken to avoid damaging ducts with tie bars of the formwork.
Stressing
Stressing shall not commence unless the main contractor has confirmed that the concrete for the pour
Page 890 of 1358

to be stressed has achieved the minimum cube strength as required.
Preparation for stressing

Removal of formwork and polyfoam / plastic blackout from the anchorage blackout.
Placing of wedge plate and wedges. It is important that this operation be carried out after concreting so
that the anchorage is not fouled by grout or dirt.
Ensure that the protruding strand length is sufficient for stressing.
For Multistrand Jacks (Multiplane Anchor)

At the beginning of stressing the strands are locked in the jack pulling head.
The pressure of the manometer and the measured elongation are recorded in the stressing report. When
the jack has reached the end of its stroke or the desired force has been obtained, the pressure in the jack
is released and the strands become locked uniformly by the wedges in the wedge plate.
The jack piston returns. Stressing is continued in as many stages as are necessary to obtain the required
force.
For Monostrand Jack (Flat Anchor)
Initial stressing of 25% of the total designed force can commence any time after the concrete has
minimum cube strength of 8N/mm2. The purpose of initial stressing is to take the slack of the strands in
the tendon.
A spray mark is made on the strands.
Proceed with the full 100% stressing of the total designed force after the concrete has attained its
minimum strength as per the specifications.
Measure the difference in length from the spray mark to the wedge plate. This will reflect the elongation
per strand from 25% to 100%. (Assume this to be X mm in length.)
Add the wedge draw in which is approximately 6mm to the elongation. By extrapolation the full
measurement can be calculated and compared against theoretical elongation.
Therefore, the full elongation for one-end stressing will be = (X + 6mm) x 100
------- % = = (X + 6mm) x 1.3333
75
Similarly for tendons with two ends stressing, the tendons may be stressed from one end followed by
another. Sum of elongations from both ends is then compared with total theoretical extension.
Assuming the far end elongation is Y.
The total elongation will be:
{(X + 6mm) + (Y + 6mm)} x 100
------- %
75
Sample of Stressing Reports are as shown in Appendix A.4
After approval by consultants / main contractor the protruding strands are to be cut off to a minimum of
Page 891 of 1358

10mm from the wedge plate.

All stressing results shall be tabulated on a stressing record and submitted for approval by the engineer.
The pressure gauge and jack no’s shall also be indicated.
If the average stressing result of the whole pour is within 8% it shall be deemed as satisfactory.
In accordance with the Federation Institute of Prestressing (FIP) code, the average shall be within 8%.If
any individual tendon of a pour falls outside this, then the average extension over the whole respective
pour should be checked and this falls within the tolerance of 8%, then the stressing operation is
considered satisfactory. Stripping of formwork can be carried out after full stressing of beam / slab is
completed.
However, the Resident Engineer on-site shall be consulted by the main contractor before any stripping of
formwork can commence. 9. Grouting Proposed grout mix Cement in standard 50kg package (Ordinary
Portland cement)
Water = 0.45 x 50kg = 22.5 kg
= 22.5 liters
Admixture = 0.4% weight of cement (50 kg) = 200gm
Conplast Fosrac or Cebex 100 fosrac
Mixing sequence = water – cement - additive Min mixing time = 3-4 min
Terms & Conditions: A) Scope of the work :
The scope of your work under this Tender shall include:
i) Detail design and Engineering of the Flat Slabs /Beam slab by post tensioning system in accordance with
the design parameters specified by the Consultants, the codal requirements of ISI ( Indian Standard
Institute ) latest versions , National Building Code and the relevant B.S. Standards.
ii) To prepare detail shop drawings for the post tensioning work to be carried out by showing clearly all
the dimensions , spacing and other constructions details and obtaining approvals of same from RCC
Consultants well in advance to have sufficient time for procurement and delivery of material and
equipment is afforded to your construction team to carry out the work in accordance with the
requirement of our overall construction schedule.
iii) To assist and guide the civil contractor for any works directly or indirectly related to or consequential
to the post tensioning of the flat slabs.
iv) Prepare and submit three sets of As Built drawings for each post tensioned slab showing clearly the
profile and location of each tendon.
Eligibility criteria for PT Vendor

1. The PT Agency should have minimum 10 (Ten) years experience in post – tensioning works.
2. The PT Agency may be either a registered partnership firm or a company limited by shares having
experience in similar construction and the design Engineer should have minimum 10 years of design
experience.
3. The PT Vendor Should Posses Design Experience & Execution Experience More than 10 Years in India.
4. The PT Systems (Anchorages) should be in use for more than 10 years and it should be validated by
systems performance test conducted in a registered laboratory (IIT).
a) Anchorage efficiency
b) Load transfer test
Page 892 of 1358

5. PT agency should have the Proprietorship of their systems and their assembly. Similar kind of PT
Projects Completed in the last 3 years shall form part of the qualification.
14. Water Proofing Treatment

General:
All the items for water proofing treatment with cement-based water proofing treatment for roof slab
and sunken portion shall be guaranteed for TEN YEARS, to be reckoned from the date of expiring of
the Defect Liability period prescribed in the contract. The Guarantee shall be furnished by the contractor
as per Performa prescribed.
The treatment for waterproofing of basement, roofs, water retaining areas shall be of type and
specifications as given in the tender drawings and remain fully effective for a period of not less than 10
(Ten) years to be reckoned from the date of expiring of the Defect Liability period, prescribed in the
contract. At any time during the said guarantee period if the IIM INDORE or his representative finds any
defects in the said treatment or any evidence of re-infestation, dampness, leakage in any part of
buildings or structure and notifies the contractor of the same, the contractor shall be liable to rectify the
defect or give re-treatment and shall commence the work or such rectification or re-treatment within
seven days from the date of issue of such letter to him. If the contractor fails to commence such work
within the stipulated period, the IIM INDORE or his representative may get the same done by another
agency at the Contractor‘s cost and risk and the decision of the IIM INDORE for the cost payable by the
contractor shall be final and binding upon him. Re-treatment if required shall be attended to and carried
out by the Contractor within seven days of the notice from the IIM INDORE or his representative.
The work shall be got executed from the specialized agency as approved by the Engineer-in- Charge.
Total quantity of the water proofing compound required shall be arranged only after obtaining the prior
approval of the make by IIM Indore/Authority Engineer in writing. Materials shall be kept under double
lock and key and proper account of the water proofing compound used in the work shall be maintained.
It shall be ensured that the consumption of the compound is as per specified requirements.
The finished surface after water proofing treatment shall have adequate smooth slope as per the
direction of the IIM Indore/Authority Engineer.
Before commencement of treatment on any surface, it shall be ensured that the outlet drainpipes / spouts
have been fixed and the spout openings have been eased and rounded off properly for easy flow of water.
The approved specialized agency for the work of water proofing will have to execute a guarantee bond in
prescribed Proforma for removing any defects for at least 10 years. Guarantee bond shall be signed by
both the specialized agency as approved by the IIM Indore/Authority Engineer and the Contractor to meet
their liability under the guarantee bond. However, the sole responsibility about the efficiency of water
proofing treatment shall rest with the Contractor.
If the performance of the work done is found unsatisfactory and any defects noticed during the guarantee
period, they shall be rectified by the Contractor within seven days of receipt of intimation of defects in
the work. If the defects pointed out are not attended to within the specified period, the same will be got
done from another agency at the risk and cost of the Contractor.
Water Proofing Treatment (Pre-Construction) by Chemical Injection System
Horizontal Surface (Raft Slab)
Before the raft reinforcement is placed in position: Laying PCC as per drawings and specifications.
Page 893 of 1358

Cement slurry (cement and approved water proofing compound) is spread on the PCC for proper bonding
with subsequent water proofing treatment.
Water Proofing Course of 20mm thick cement mortar 1:4 (1 cement: 4 coarse sand) mixed with
approved water proofing compound is laid over the slurry. Stone aggregates 12mm down is
embedded at random.
After 24 hours, spreading cement slurry (cement and approved water proofing compound) on the 1st
layer of mortar.
Providing and laying 2nd layer of 20mm thick cement mortar 1:4 (1 cement: 4 coarse sand) mixed
with approved water proofing compound. Stone aggregate 12mm downsize is embedded at random.
After reinforcement of raft is placed in position:
Providing and fixing 25mm dia GI threaded grouting nozzles of adequate length at the specified locations
@ 1.50 metres c/c or as shown in the drawing all over the slab. The grouting nozzles are tied with
reinforcement in such a manner as not to choke its end during concrete operations. The top of these
nozzles protrudes above the raft concrete.
After minimum 7 days of concreting, cement grout of cement and approved water proofing
compound (non-shrinkage grouting compound) in proportion as specified is injected, through these
nozzles at the pressure of 2.5 to 3.0 Kg/Sq.cm.
After grouting, top of the nozzles is cut, and the space is filled with cement mortar 1:2 (1 cement: 2 coarse
sand) mixed with approved water proofing compound.
Retaining Wall
The external surface is prepared, and approved cement slurry is applied. Providing and laying 25mm
thick cement mortar in 1:4 (1 cement: 4 coarse sand) mixed with approved water proofing compound
in two layers with chicken wire mesh 26 or 24-gauge 25mm size in between the two layers. The G.I. pipes
are placed at 1.5m c/c in both directions, and 0.75 m C/C along construction joints and securely fastened
to the reinforcement prior to shuttering and concreting or alternately by drilling holes (25mm to 32mm
dia) in the concrete up to a depth as shown in the drawing all over the wall surface @ 1.50mt. C/C and
as shown in the drawing. Treatment along all construction joints by providing nozzles, as above, shall
also be executed.
Fixing 25mm dia G.I. threaded nozzles in these holes with cement mortar 1:4 (1 cement: 4 coarse
sand) mixed with water proofing compound.
Injecting cement grout of cement and polymer-based water proofing compound (non-shrinkage grouting
compound) in proportion as specified in these nozzles at a pressure of 2.5 to 3.0 Kg/Sq.cm.
After the grout the nozzles are cut and filled with cement mortar 1:2 mixed with polymer-based water
proofing compound in proportion as specified and finished smooth.
Note: The proportion of approved water proofing compound to be used in respect of ordinary cement
shall be as per manufacturer ‘s specifications.
Integral Cement Based Water Proofing Treatment for Roof /Sunken Floors of W.C`S etc.
The proprietary water proofing compound shall conform to I.S.2645 – 1975 in cement-based water
proofing treatment, stone aggregate shall be used instead of brick aggregate without any extra cost
wherever required by the Engineer in – charge.
The finished surface after water proofing treatment shall have required slope.
Page 894 of 1358

While treatment of sunken floors is done it shall be ensured that the ‗S‘or ‗P‘ traps as the case may
have been fixed / eased and rounded off properly the work shall be carried out as per relevant CPWD
specifications.
GURANTEE: The above water proofing, treatment shall be covered by 10 years guarantee by the main
contractor against leakage, seepage and dampness etc. for which necessary performance shall
be furnished by the contractor.
Water Proofing Treatment Integral Crystalline Waterproofing Materials
Integral Crystalline Waterproofing Admixture
Materials
Integral Crystalline Admix is one-part cementitious powder consisting of hydrophilic chemicals such as
Portland cement, very fine treated silica sand and various active, proprietary chemicals. These active
chemicals react with the moisture in fresh concrete with the by-products of cement hydration to cause a
catalytic reaction, which generates a non-soluble crystalline formation throughout the pores and capillary
tracts of the concrete. Thus, the concrete becomes permanently sealed against the penetration of water
or liquids from any direction. The concrete is also protected from deterioration due to harsh environmental
conditions.
Technical Specification/Parameters
The integral crystalline waterproofing admixture shall confirm to the following requirements:
At the manufacturers recommended dosage,
Material must fulfil the requirements of American concrete institute guidelines ACI-212-3R-10, the
coefficient of permeability should be measured for penetration of water. Under hydrostatic pressure of
72.5 psi (5 bars) to 150 psi (10 bars) for 72 to 96 hours as per DIN 1048 Part V. Reduction of water
penetration should be 50 to 90%.
The performance of the crystalline admixture must not be restricted by water/cement ratio of the concrete
mix. In other words, the crystalline admixture must perform at any water / cement ratio of the concrete
mix.
The product has no corrosion effect on reinforcement steel according to test norm DIN V 18998.
The maximum chloride content lies less than 0.1% and maximum alkali content less than 9.3%.
The integral crystalline admixture must be compatible with any other concrete admixture confirming to
ASTM D494 and IS 9103.
It will not be affected by wear abrasion of the treated concrete surface and crystalline treated concrete
shall not require protection layer.
The recommended crystalline admixture shall be non-toxic and shall confirm to NSF 61 USA.
Note - The manufacturer shall produce relevant test certificates as per relevant code as stated above.
Recommended Uses: - In locations such as Foundations / Rafts, Sewage and Water Treatment Plants,
Parking Structures Basement Retaining Walls etc.
Direction for use Dosage - 0.80% by weight of cement content per cubic meter of reinforced concrete.
Page 895 of 1358

Preparation of mixing
Mix integral crystalline admixture with water to form a very thin slurry (e.g. 40 lbs (18 kg) of powder mixed
with 6 gallons (22.7 ltr) of water). Pour the required amount of material into the drum of the ready-mix
truck and mix for at least 5 minutes to ensure even distribution of integral crystalline admixture throughout
the concrete.
Application
Concrete treated with integral crystalline admixture should be placed and finished in accordance with good
concrete practices. ACI guidelines and recommendations should be observed.
Precaution / Special Consideration
It is important to obtain a homogeneous mixture of crystalline admixture with the concrete. Therefore, do
not add dry crystalline admixture powder directly to wet concrete as this may cause clumping and through
dispersion will not occur.
When incorporating integral crystalline admixture, the temperature of the concrete mix should be above
40ºF (4ºC).
Storage / Shelf life
Integral crystalline admixture must be stored dry at a minimum temperature of 45ºF (7ºC), and its shelf life
is one year when stored under proper conditions.
Integral Crystalline Slurry
Materials
Integral crystalline slurry is a surface-applied, integral crystalline waterproofing material, which

waterproofs and protects concrete in-depth. It consists of Portland cement, specially treated quartz sand
and a compound of active chemicals. Integral crystalline slurry needs only to be mixed with water prior to
application. When Integral crystalline slurry is applied to a concrete surface, the active chemicals react with
moisture and the by-products of cement hydration to cause a catalytic reaction which generates an
insoluble, crystalline structure. These crystals fill the pores and minor shrinkage cracks in the concrete to
prevent any further water ingress (even under pressure). However, Integral crystalline slurry will still allow
the passage of vapor through the structure (i.e. the concrete will be able to ―breathe‖). Even after the
concrete has cured, Integral crystalline slurry remains nit in the concrete and will reactivate in the presence
of moisture to seal capillary tracts and hairline cracks. In addition to waterproofing the structure, Integral
crystalline slurry protects concrete against seawater, wastewater, aggressive ground water and
many other aggressive chemical solutions. Integral crystalline slurry is approved for use in contact with
potable water, and is therefore suitable for use in water storage tanks, reservoirs, water treatment plants,
etc. Integral crystalline slurry is not a decorative material.
coefficient of permeability should be measured for penetration of water. Under hydrostatic pressure of
Page 896 of 1358

72.5 psi (5 bars) to 150 psi (10 bars) for 72 to 96 hours as per DIN 1048 Part V. Reduction of water
penetration should be 50 to 90%.
Potable Water Compatibility: Nontoxic and suitable for use in potable water facilities – NSF Listed as per
ANSI 61 listing. Confirm to EN 1504-3 (For structural repairs – R3, Compressive strength > 25 Mpa), supplied
from an approved manufacturing unit having CE approval conforming to EN 1504-3-R3. The product has
no corrosion effect on reinforcement steel according to test norm DIN V 18998. The maximum chloride
content lies less than 0.1% and maximum alkali content less than 9.3%.
Note - The manufacturer shall produce relevant test certificates as per relevant code as stated above.
Recommended Uses: - In locations such as Foundations / Rafts, Sewage and Water Treatment Plants,
Parking Structures Basement Retaining Walls etc.
Surface Preparation
All concrete to be treated with Integral crystalline slurry must be clean and have an ―open capillary
surface. Remove laitance, dirt, grease, etc. by means of high-pressure water jetting, wet sandblasting
or wire brushing. Faulty concrete in the form of cracks, honeycombing, etc. must be chased out, treated
with Integral crystalline slurry and filled flush with crystalline mortar. Surfaces must be carefully pre
watered prior to the Integral crystalline slurry application. The concrete surface must be damp but
with no wet sheen on the surface.
Preparation of Material
Integral crystalline slurry is mechanically mixed with clean water to a creamy consistency or that
resembling thick oil. Mix only as much material as can be used within 20 minutes and stir mixture
frequently. If the mixture starts to set do not add more water, simply re-stir to restore workability.
Mixing ratios
Application Vertical Surfaces Horizontal Surfaces

Brush Application 5 parts integral crystalline slurry to 3 parts integral crystalline
2 parts water slurry to 1-part water
Spray Application 5 parts integral crystalline slurry to
2.75-3.25 parts water
Application
Crystalline slurry is prepared by mixing 1.00 kg of crystalline slurry with 400 ml of water and applying
the same from internal side with the help of synthetic fiber brush @0.70kg per sqm per coat in two coats
after cleaning the entire concrete surface thoroughly with high pressure water jet / wire brush or by
mechanical means to make it free from loose particles, dust and dirt etc. and making the surface
saturated with water before application of crystalline slurry. Second coat shall be applied within 4-6 hours
of first coat.
Apply integral crystalline slurry in two coats by masonry brush or appropriate power spray
equipment.
The second coat is applied while the first coat is still ―green‖.
Page 897 of 1358

Application Rates
For vertical surface - Two slurry coats of Integral crystalline slurry at 0.70 kg per sqm per coat for
horizontal surface – One slurry coat of Integral crystalline slurry at 1.10 kg per sqm.
Post Treatment
The treated areas shall be kept damp for a period of five days and be protected against direct sun, wind
and frost, by covering with polyethylene sheeting, damp burlap or similar.

Do not apply Integral crystalline slurry at temperatures at or below freezing or to froze or freezing
surfaces. Integral crystalline slurry cannot be used as an additive to concrete or plasters. (Integral
crystalline admixture should be considered for these applications).
Storage / Shelf Life
When properly stored in a dry place in unopened and undamaged original packaging its shelf life is 12
months.
Integral Crystalline Dry-Shake
Materials
Integral crystalline dry shake of hydrophilic in nature is a unique chemical treatment material for the
waterproofing and protection of concrete. Integral crystalline dry shake has been special formulated
for dry-shake applications on horizontal concrete surfaces where greater impact and abrasion
resistance is required. Packaged in the form of a dry powder compound, Integral crystalline dry
shake consists of Portland cement, various active proprietary chemicals, and a synthetic aggregate
hardener that has been crushed and graded to particle sizes suitable for concrete floors. Integral
crystalline dry shake becomes an integral part of the concrete surface, thereby eliminating problems
normally associated with coatings (e.g. scaling, dusting, flaking and delamination). The active chemicals
react with the moisture in the fresh concrete causing a catalytic reaction, which generates a non-soluble
crystalline formation within the pores and capillary tracts of the concrete.
coefficient of permeability should be measured for penetration of water. Under hydrostatic
pressure of 72.5 psi (5 bars) to 150 psi (10 bars) for 72 to 96 hours as per DIN 1048 Part V.
Reduction of water penetration should be 50 to 90%.
Potable Water Compatibility: Nontoxic and suitable for use in potable water facilities – NSF Listed
as per ANSI 61 listing.
Confirm to EN 1504-3 (For structural repairs – R3, Compressive strength > 25 Mpa), supplied from an
approved manufacturing unit having CE approval conforming to EN 1504-3-R3.
The product has no corrosion effect on reinforcement steel according to test norm DIN V 18998.
The maximum chloride content lies less than 0.1% and maximum alkali content less than 9.3%.
Recommended Uses: -
Page 898 of 1358

Raft / Foundation Slabs, Below-grade Structures Sewage and Water Treatment Plants Traffic Bearing
Surfaces Warehouse Floors Parking Structures etc.
Directions for Application
Application Rates
Under normal conditions, the coverage rate for Integral crystalline dry shake is 0.60 kg per sqm
depending on the degree of abrasion resistance required.
Application Procedure
Integral crystalline dry shake is to be sprinkled @ 0.60 kg per sqm over the PCC blinding, after fixing the
reinforcement bars on the cured PCC so as to achieve positive side waterproofing below the raft
concrete, as per the manufacture’s specification.
Curing
Curing is important and shall begin as soon as final set has occurred but before surface starts to dry.
Conventional moist curing procedures such as water spray, wet burlap or plastic covers may be used.
Curing shall continue for at least 48 hours.
For the best results when applying dry shake materials, the air content of the concrete shall not
exceed 3% (a high air content can make it difficult to achieve a proper application).
In hot, dry, or windy conditions, it is advisable to use an evaporation retardant on the fresh concrete
surface to prevent premature drying of the slab.
Chronic moving cracks or joints will require a suitable flexible sealant.
Integral crystalline dry shake must be stored dry at a minimum temperature of 45ºF (7ºC), and its shelf
life is one year when stored under proper conditions.
Crystalline Mortar
Materials
Crystalline mortar consists of Portland cement, specially treated quartz sand and a compound of active
chemicals. The active chemicals react with moisture and the by-products of cement hydration
to cause a catalytic reaction, which generates an insoluble integral crystalline complex.
These crystalline complexes grow in the presence of water, block the capillaries of the concrete and
minor shrinkage cracks, thus waterproofing it. Chemical activation begins when the powder is mixed
with water and may take several days to completely block the capillaries depending on ambient
temperature and environmental conditions.
coefficient of permeability should be measured for penetration of water. Under hydrostatic pressure
of 72.5 psi (5 bars) to 150 psi (10 bars) for 72 to 96 hours as per DIN 1048 Part V.
Reduction of water penetration should be 50 to 90%.
Page 899 of 1358

Bond strength: ≥ 1.5 Mpa (Class – R3).
Potable Water Compatibility: Nontoxic and suitable for use in potable water facilities – NSF
Listed as per ANSI 61 listing.
Confirm to EN 1504-3 (For structural repairs – R4, Compressive strength > 45 Mpa), supplied from an
approved manufacturing unit having CE approval conforming to EN 1504-3-R4.
The product has no corrosion effect on reinforcement steel according to test norm DIN V 18998. The
maximum chloride content lies less than 0.1% and maximum alkali content less than 9.3%.
Recommended Uses
Applied in conjunction with integral crystalline slurry coat for:
Installation of seal strips, reglets and coves at joints to assure water tightness.
Patching of tie holes and faulty construction joints
Patching and filling of routed out cracks.
Repairing of spalled and honeycombed areas
Surface Preparation
All surfaces to be patched, repaired or sealed with crystalline mortar must be clean and sound. Cracks
shall be routed out to a U-shaped configuration, approximately (20-25 mm) wide and a minimum of
(20-25 mm) deep. Tie holes should be roughened prior to filling. Spalled and honeycombed areas
must be thoroughly cleaned and chiseled back to sound concrete prior to rep air. Remove all dirt,
cement laitance, form release agents, curing compounds, paints, coatings, etc. by means of wet or dry
sandblasting, high pressure water jet or other suitable mechanical means. Surfaces must be well
moistened to a dull dampness at the time of application. The concrete should be damp with no wet
seen on the surface.
Preparation of Material
For routed cracks, coves and non-moving joints, add water to crystalline mortar until a medium stiff,
trowel able consistency is reached. The texture of the mix should be pliable enough to be trowelled
into the cracks with some pressure, but not so pliable that it would run out or sag out of the crack. The
approximate mixing ratio (by volume) is 4.5 parts powder to 1-part water. Alternatively,100 ml
of water to 450 gm of crystalline mortar powder. For tie holes and pointing applications, add only a
small amount of water. Mixed consistency should be that of ―dry
earth‖, holding a shape when squeezed in your hand but easily crumbled when pressed between fingers.
Mix only as much material as can be used within 20 minutes.
Application
For sealing cracks and faulty construction joints, routed out/making U-shape groove size
25x25mm and then priming the surface with integral crystalline slurry @0.05 kg per running meter
and while the surface is tacky filled the cavity up to surface crystalline mortar @1.50 kg per running
meter. Once crystalline mortar is touch dry then finally applying two coats of integral crystalline slurry
@0.05 kg per running meter per coat.
For repairing spalled & honeycombed areas, prepared the surface and chiesel back up to sound
Page 900 of 1358

concrete and then primed the area with integral crystalline slurry @0.70 kg per sqm. and while the
surface is tacky repair and level the honeycomb area with crystalline mortar @ 22.70 kg per sqm. for an
average thickness of 10mm. Once crystalline mortar is touch dry then finally two coats of integral
crystalline slurry @ 0.70kg per sqm. per coat.
For patching of tie rod holes, prepared tie rod hole surface and primed the area with integral crystalline
slurry @ 0.07 kg per sqm and while the surface is tacky repair and filled the tie rod holes with crystalline
mortar @ 0.040 kg per hole. The crystalline mortar shall be tightly rodded into tie holes or packed tightly.
For 25x25x25 mm hole, use 0.040 kg per hole to fill the tie hole.
Curing
Provide protection against extreme weather conditions such as heavy rain or freezing conditions during
the setting period. Curing is not normally required except during hot, low humidity weather. In
these conditions a light mist of water approximately 24 hours after the repair is completed will
help to ensure a controlled cure. In extreme dry heat, water misting may be required more
frequently.
Crystalline mortar shall not be applied at temperatures below 40ºF (4ºC), to a frozen substrate or if
temperatures drop below freezing during the curing period (approximately 24 hours). This product is
not recommended for use in expansion or construction joints. Crystalline mortar can be applied in (13
mm) layers not exceeding 2.5 inch (approximately 6.5 cm) to prevent shrinkage cracks in the mortar.
Crystalline mortar shall be stored in a dry enclosed area off the ground at a minimum
temperature of 45ºF (7ºC). Shelf life when stored in proper conditions in unopened, undamaged
packaging is 12 months.
Note- In the washrooms & wet areas the waterproofing application should be made till minimum 7 feet
height or false ceiling level as per the direction of Engineer in charge.
15. ROOFING
Polycarbonate Sheet Roofing
The polycarbonate sheet roofing shall be of approved make and shall conform to manufacture ‘s
specifications. The material procured shall be free of any defects and damage to the edges, surface
etc. The contractor shall ensure that the material is procured and delivered to the installation site without
any damage. Adequate care shall be taken for protection of the material before installation as
well as afterwards till handing over the building for occupation. The contractor shall ensure careful
handling and storage and prevent any rough handling, to prevent any edge or surface damage. Any
panel with edge damaged or damage to the finish etc. shall not be allowed to be used in the work and
shall be replaced by the contractor at his own cost. The contractor shall procure the material including
providing for wastages, damages etc. in one lot so as not have any color and shade variation. At least
one sample of the polycarbonate sheets brought by the contractor to the site of work shall be tested.
The test shall be got done at reputed independent laboratory as approved by the IIM Indore/Authority
Engineer. However, the contractor shall obtain and submit to the Department the manufacturer ‘s
certificate for compliance of the polycarbonate sheets as per the manufacturer ‘s specifications and also
copy of the manufacturer ‘s test report for the record.
Providing and Fixing of multicell polycarbonate panels 16mm thick with 5 cells - 6 walls structure over
MS supporting structures. Panel Width shall be 600mm to 1050mm to ensure best performance for wind
Page 901 of 1358

uplift. The panels shall be uniform in color with an integral microcell core having a soft light finish to
provide diffused light. In a cross section, the core shall be constructed of microcells not exceeding 4mm
x 4mm and shall be square/rectangular in appearance. Panels shall be coextruded with UV Protection
layers with thickness and concentration to filter and block more than 99% of the UV rays (UVA and UVB)
through a clear panel backed by third party certificate. The weight of the only panel shall not be less than
3250 gram per square meter. Panel shall have U value not more than 1.9 W/m2k. The panels shall have
cold bending radius of minimum 3.1 meter. Panel should achieve minimum sound absorption level 19
DB with third party Test certificate. Panel system shall have Vertical Standing Seam at both sides and
Snap-On connector to interlock the panels with a grip-lock 2 tooth locking mechanism to ensure
maximum uplift capability, water tightness and air tightness. Panels shall be fixed on Purlins (paid
separately) with special SS Expansion fastener and polycarbonate U/2 connectors. Panel system shall be
sealed with additional Tape / End caps / Aluminium U-Profile (mill finish) at the ends. Panel should pass
through Sandbag impact test ASTM E 695-03 after 25,000 hours of environmental exposure and Hailstone
impact test ASTM E 822-81. The panel system shall pass water penetration test ASTM E -331. The panel to
have classification under B S1 D0 for reaction to fire as per test standard EN 13501 – 1:2002 tested by an
independent, recognized testing laboratory. Panels shall have Yellowness Index as per ASTM D-1925; the
change shall not be more that 10 points after 5 years of exposure in comparison to original. The Colour
of the panel shall change no more than 3 units of delta E as per ASTM D2244-89, E308-85 (AIR) after 5
years of exposure in comparison to original. The Light Transmission of panels shall not change more than
10% after exposure of 5 years in comparison to original. The Panels shall be manufactured with approved
quality assurance as per ISO 9001 & ISO 14001 and manufacturer should have successful project
reference in Indian sub-continent at least 10 years old. Translucent polycarbonate system shall be
manufactured by a company continuously and regularly employed in the manufacture of translucent
systems using polycarbonate panel systems for a period of at least ten (10) years and the panels shall be
warranted for ten (10) years. Third party test certificates to be submitted before supplying the material
to Engineer in Charge.
The polycarbonate sheets shall be of colour, and shade as approved by the IIM Indore/Authority Engineer.
The physical and the chemical characteristics of the polycarbonate sheets shall be as per the
manufacturer ‘s specifications and shall conform to the ASTM standards. The sheets shall conform to
BS 476 part 7 for the fire rating. The contractor shall submit written guarantee to the Engineer- in-Charge
for the polycarbonate sheets procured and provided by him against any defects like peeling, breakage,
fading of color/ discoloration, cracking, leakage through the roofing loss of strength etc. for a period
of ten years after the date of completion of the work. The contractor shall obtain similar back-to-back
guarantees from the manufacturer.
The polycarbonate sheets shall be used in one piece along the span of the temporary sheds. The width
of the sheet across the span of the shed shall not be more than 700 mm. The polycarbonate sheets shall
be bent to required profile (linear or curvilinear) as per the architectural drawings and fixed in position,
to the structural steel framework, using self-driving self-tapping screws with EPDM washers etc. The
sheets shall be secured to the structural steel framework so as to withstand all the design dead, live,
wind, other accidental loads etc. and shall be fixed in a workmanlike manner. It shall not have any
sag. Therefore, the fabrication work shall be got done through experienced & reputed fabricator,
to be got approved from the IIM Indore/Authority Engineer.
The contractor shall submit to the IIM Indore/Authority Engineer the shop drawings giving fixing details
for the polycarbonate sheets in roofing and also quality assurance and methodology statement for
the item. The polycarbonate sheets shall be jointed along the length of the shed using aluminum top &
bottom pressure plates having required profiles for fixing the EPDM gaskets, screws, washers etc.
The aluminum pressure plates shall be color anodized or powder coated to the require shade. The joints
in the sheet shall be provided only on the RHS steel sections of the framework and shall not be permitted
Page 902 of 1358

elsewhere. The joint width of about 3-4 mm may be provided between the sheets at the junction for
thermal expansion. The EPDM gaskets of the required profiles shall than be fixed in the grooves in the
aluminum pressure plates on either side of the joint in the polycarbonate sheet. The bottom aluminum
plate shall be fixed to the structural steel framework using self-driving self-tapping screws; washers etc.
(one screw fixed to each sheet) and the screws fixed @300 mm center to center along the span of the
shed.
The EPDM gaskets of the required profile shall be fixed in the grooves in the aluminum pressure plate
on either side of the joint in the polycarbonate sheet. The top aluminum pressure plate shall than be
fixed securely to the bottom aluminum plate using countersunk self-driving self-tapping screws, EPDM
washers etc. All the screws shall be concealed using structural silicone sealant DC 995 of Dow Corning
or equivalent approved brand. Also, wherever required (especially at the joint in the EPDM gasket etc.)
the junction of the polycarbonate sheet and the sides of the pressure plates on both sides shall be
sealed using structural silicone sealant DC 995 of Dow Corning or equivalent brand as approved. The
item includes cost of all the operations and all inputs of the materials including Polycarbonate sheet,
EPDM gaskets, anodized aluminum capping, anodized aluminum edge capping to the sheet with U-
shaped EPDM gasket, all structure silicone sealant, self-driving self-tapping screws with EPDM washers,
nuts, bolts, washers etc. and the like, labor, T & P, all the incidental charges, wastages etc. involved in
the work. The contractor shall maintain the roofing scratch and damage free till the handling over the
building for occupation, at his own cost. Tolerance shall be as per manufacturers specifications.
The polycarbonate sheets shall be obtained with protective films on both sides. Care shall be taken
while fixing, to fix the sheets with UV protected side exposed to outside. The sheet shall be stored in a
manner not to expose to direct sunlight. The sheet shall be cut to the required size or drilled using the
toothed blade/machine. After fixing the protective film shall be removed and the sheets cleaned using
non-alkaline based detergent and abrasive equipment or solvents be avoided. The silicones, gaskets,
tapes etc. shall be compatible with the polycarbonate sheet.
For joining the sheets, at least one complete channel width of each sheet shall be secured per sheet
within the joining profile. Since thermal coefficient of expansion of the sheets is different from the
RHS steel frames, suitable provision shall be made for accommodating differential expansions. Also,
any rigid jointing agent that may prevent thermal movements shall not be used. The required section
aluminum profiles (upper central profile, lower central profile and top profile) for fixing the
polycarbonate sheet to the structural framework as well as for joining the sheet shall be as per the
manufacturer‘s specifications .The top capping profile shall be snap fit to the upper central profile, The
EPDM gaskets and the screws shall be provided as per the manufacturer‘s specifications.
The Gaskets shall be extruded microwave/ steam cured EPDM/ silicone of approved quality
compatible with substrates, finishes and other components they are in contact with. All gaskets
exposed directly on the exterior face shall be silicon gaskets, which are UV resistant. They shall not
degenerate/discolor or/each on exposure to weather/ rain/pollutants etc.
16. GLASS:
All glass and glazing material shall be verified and coordinate with the applicable Performance
requirement.
All glass shall be cut to required size and ready for glazing. All glass shall be accurate sizes with clear
undamaged edges and surfaces which are not disfigured. Any panel which does not fit any section of
the curtain wall and shop front will be rejected and a replacement made at the Contractor ‘s
expense.
Glass shall conform to the quality, thickness and dimensional requirement specified in US Federal
specifications DD – G0415C.
Heat strengthened glass shall not deviate in surface flatness by more than 0.23 mm with in 260mm
Page 903 of 1358

of leading or trailing edge, or 0.076 mm in center. Direction of ripple shall be consistent and is acceptable
to IIM Indore/Authority Engineer. Distortion of glass shall be controlled as much as possible during heat
strengthening. Sag distortion shall be unidirectional and surface compression shall be in the range of
320-450 Kg/cm². All glass shall be delivered to site with the manufacturer ‘s label of identification attached.
The glass glazed panel / structural glazing frames for the structural glazing system shall be designed to
withstand lateral imposed loads and comply with requirement of local building codes.
Glass shall be free from defect or impurities detrimental to its performance. Defects such as
bubbles, waves, spots scratches, spalls, discoloration, visibly imperfect coating, chipping, and bubbles
delaminating of opacifier film shall be limited in accordance with the Manufacturer ‘s / trade guidelines.
The glass is to be produced in such a way that the rollers will be parallel to what will be the horizontal
position of the glass. Glass should be consistent in colour.
Double glazed units shall be procured only from approved manufacturer. Quality control tests shall
be performed for mixing, curing, adhesion and dew point. The unit shall be guaranteed against
condensation and dirt between the panes, failure of seal and damage to internal coating. All glass
breakage caused by the Contractor or his sub-contractor because of negligence or caused by the
installation of faulty work by him shall be replaced by the Contractor at his own expense without delay
to the project completion.
SEISMIC / MECHANICAL EXPANSION JOINTS

Providing and fixing of expansion joint system related with floor location as per drawings and direction
of IIM Indore/Authority Engineer. The joints system will be of extruded aluminum base members, self-
aligning/self-centering arrangement and support plates etc. as per ASTM B221-02. The system shall
be such that it provides floor to floor/floor to wall expansion control system for various vertical
locations in load application areas that accommodates multi directional seismic movement without
stress to it’s components. System shall consist of metal profiles with a universal aluminum base
member designed to accommodate various project conditions and finish floor treatments. The cover
plate shall be designed of width and thickness required to satisfy projects movement and loading
requirements and secured to base members by utilizing manufacturer’s pre-engineered self-centering
arrangement that freely rotates/moves in all directions. The Self- centering arrangement shall exhibit
circular sphere ends that lock and slide inside the corresponding aluminum extrusion cavity
to allow freedom of movement and flexure in all directions including vertical displacement.
Provision of Moisture Barrier Membrane in the Joint System to have watertight joint is mandatory
requirement all as per the manufactures design and as approved by IIM Indore/Authority Engineer.
(Material shall conform to ASTM 6063). (Floor Joint of 100mm gap)/ Floor Joint of 150mm gap/ Floor
Joint 200mm gap) Providing and fixing of expansion joint system related with wall joint (
internal/external) location as per drawings and directions of IIM Indore/Authority Engineer. The joints
shall be of extruded aluminum base members, self-aligning/centering arrangement and support plates
as per ASTM B22 – 02.
The material shall be such that it provides and Expansion Joints System suitable for vertical wall to
wall/wall to corner application, both new and existing construction in office Building & complexes with
no slipping down tendency amongst the components of the Joint System. The Joint System shall
utilize lightw eight aluminum profiles exhibiting minimal exposed aluminum surface mechanically
snap locking the multicellular to facilitate movement. (Material shall conform to ASTM 6063.) (Wall Joint
of 100mm gap/ Wall Joint 150mm gap/ Wall Joint 200mm gap).
Providing and fixing of expansion joint system of approved make and manufacture of various roof
location as per approved drawings and direction of IIM Indore/Authority Engineer. The joints shall be
extruded aluminum base members with self- aligning and self- centering arrangement support plates
as per ASTM B221- 02. The system shall be such that it provides watertight roof to roof / roof to corner
joint cover expansion control system that is capable of accommodating multidirectional seismic
movement without stress to its components. System shall consist of metal profile that incorporates
a universal aluminum base member designed to accommodate various project conditions and roof
Page 904 of 1358

treatments. The cover plate shall be designed of width and thickness required to satisfy movement and
loading requirements and secured to base members by utilizing manufacturer’s pre-engineered self-
centering arrangement that freely rotates / moves in all directions. The Self centering arrangement
shall exhibit circular sphere ends that lock and slide inside the corresponding aluminum extrusion
cavity to allow freedom of movement and flexure in all directions including vertical displacement. The
Joint System shall resist damage or deterioration from the impact of falling ice, exposure to UV, airborne
contaminations and occasional foot traffic from maintenance personnel. Provision of Moisture Barrier
Membrane in the Joint System to have watertight joint is mandatory requirement. (Material shall
confirm to ASTM 6063.) (Roof Joint of 100mm gap/ Roof Joint of 150mm gap/ Roof Joint of 200mm gap).
The treatment of Seismic / mechanical expansion joints shall be carried out strictly as per the
specifications mentioned herein. In the absence of specifications of any material, relevant
I.S. specifications shall be followed and in case any material is not covered up with
the
specifications; IIM Indore/Authority Engineer‘s instructions shall be followed. No deviation
shall be permissible unless specifically approved by the IIM Indore/Authority Engineer.
The work shall be carried out as per CPWD specifications and directions of IIM Indore/Authority
Engineer.
The work shall be carried out as per site requirement. The contractor shall submit detailed
drawing/shop drawing for each type of joint within three days from the date of award and shall
be got approved from IIM Indore/Authority Engineer before execution of the work.
The contractor shall make minor modification in the samples as per site requirement with
the approval of IIM Indore/Authority Engineer if required and nothing extra shall be paid for this
modification.
The contractor shall submit the test reports of the product of the manufacturers.
Manufactures:- All seismic/mechanical expansion joints shall be designed and manufactured

by the approved manufacturers.
Guarantee:- All the joints shall be guaranteed at least for the period of 5years when installed by
the certified applicator in the prescribed Performa.
Installation:- Installation shall be in strict accordance with manufacture‘s technical

specifications, details and installation instructions. The work shall be carried out through the
specialized agencies as approved by the IIM Indore/Authority Engineer.
Protection:- The system and its component should be protected during construction and after
work is complete, the exposed surface and adjacent areas should be cleaned by suitable cleaner
to the satisfaction of IIM Indore/Authority Engineer.
Sample for joints:-The agency shall supply sample of minimum one meter length of all types
of expansion joints and the same shall be fixed at site at appropriate location and the same shall
be approved by the competent authority which shall be duly intimated by Engineer–in–Charge.
The agency shall place the order for procurement of mechanical expansion joint from the
parent company for supply only after obtaining approval from IIM Indore/Authority Engineer.
Materials:-
EPDM (Ethylene Propylene Dinine membrane) water resistant membrane shall be as
Page 905 of 1358

per manufacturers specifications and shall be of best quality. The EPDM membrane shall be
pasted with approved adhesive to the surface.
S.S. screw shall be of canon or equivalent make approved by IIM Indore/Authority Engineer.
Aluminum sheet shall be of approved make and shall generally confirm to IS: 737-1986. The
powder coating on aluminum sheet shall be 50-60 microns. The slots on the aluminum sheet
shall be made by lath machine with smooth and uniform finish.
For any discrepancy in item and corresponding drawing, the decision of Engineer- in-Charge
shall be final and nothing extra shall be paid on that account.
17. SIGNAGE
Signage System
A complete signage system must be developed by the contractor to cover the needs of the overall
project including Mandatory, Directional, Informational, Warning and Motivational etc.
Sign plates indicating room/area names or pictograph signs shall be provided for all rooms/areas
on doors or walls beside the doors or hanging from the false ceiling as per direction of Engineer
in charge.
Building name plate shall also be provided at the main entrance of each building block. Building
information boards shall be provided for Main Buildings at drop offs, Parking and Concourse.
The Contactor shall install sign plates for all rooms/areas of concourse. Prior to commencement
of the signage, the Contractor shall have the IIM Indore/Authority Engineer’s approval of the
equipment and materials to be used and the method of work execution.
The language of the signs shall be English and Hindi. Following Type of Signage shall be provided
as per relevant drawing/approved shop drawing.
Solid Letters/Hollow Letters Signage

Letters (Solid Letters/Hollow Letters) shall be made up of Stainless steel, grade 316 of approved
make, made from laser cut shape in required design, language & font, including buffing,
polishing, and fixing by sufficient numbers of fastener high quality chemical tape/ adhesive/fast
of approved make as per approved shop drawing.
Solid letters shall be made of SS sheet of 5 mm thickness. Hollow letters shall be made of SS sheet
of 1.5 mm thickness letters with side rising of 25/50mm Ornamental Finish or as approved.
Hollow Brand Logo/Emblem shall be made of SS sheet of 1.5 mm thickness Brand Logo/Emblem
with side raising of 50mm Ornamental Finish. Solid Brand Logo/Emblem shall be made of SS
sheet of 5 mm thickness.
Signage for Gate Number, Entry & Exit for all Gates shall be provided. Campus
Identification and Building Identification (Façade) shall be provided.
Pictograms signage
Following Pictograms signage in 304 grade 2 mm thick brush finished Stainless steel prepared
using etching technology shall be Design, Manufactured and installed by contractor. Filling with
industrial paint in required colours and baking to the required condition at required temperature
for obtain desired shine and gloss, in required font, design, pattern and size including buffing,
polishing etc. and fixing by high quality chemical tape/ adhesive of approved make or by S.S screw
(304 grade) on prepared surface, all complete as per architectural drawings/approved shop
drawing and direction of Engineer in charge.
For External
Page 906 of 1358

• Campus Map (Size: 1250x1828mm Facing Area) both sides visible.

• Directional Directory (Size:1880x610mm) Both side visible
• Vehicle Advisory (Size:185x450mm) Both side visible
• Building Identification (Size:1880x610mm) Both side visible
• Area Identification (Size:185x450mm) Both side visible
• Public Instructions (Size:1880x610mm) Both side visible
For Internal
• Room Number (Size:200x75)
• Department Name Plate (Size:900x300mm)
• Room Identification (Size:450x100mm)
• Floor No. (Size:600x300mm)
• Lift No. (Size:450x150mm)
• Washroom Identification (Size:200x200mm)
• Push & Pull (Size:150x75mm)
• Drinking Water (Size:450x150mm)
• Reception Logo (Size:760x760mm)
Informatory/ Directional/Warning Signage

Following informatory/ directional/warning signage shall be provided by contractor, in required
font, design, pattern and size made of 4 mm thick odorless Acrylic sheets of approved make,
conforming to specific gravity of 1.19, tensile strength of 69 MPA, percentage elongation of 4.2
%, modulus of elasticity 2800 MPA (ASTM –D638), refractive index of 149, (ASTM-D542) Rockwell
hardness of M94 (ASTM – D785), water absorption of 0.2 % (ASTM- D570) total light transmission
of 92 % (ASTM – D 1003) chemical, UV & weather resistant, having excellent insulation properties,
abrasions resistant of approved color, of approved quality and make, with beveled edges having
self-adhesive self-luminescent vinyl sheet ( film thickness >150 micron, luminescent duration 4-6
hours) of make 3M/ Avery or approved equivalent over which the signage/ letter cutout made of
vinyl sheet ( film thickness > 80 micron) of make 3M/ Avery or approved equivalent is pasted in
required color, font, design, pattern, including fixing over walls/ partition/glass etc, fixing by high
quality chemical tape of make 3M/ Avery or approved equivalent on prepared surface
• Floor Directory (Size:762x600mm)

• Floor Level (Size:600x300mm)
• Fire Exit Mounted (Size:300x300mm)
• Fire Exit Direction (Size:450x150mm)
• Evacuation Map (Size:762x600mm)
• Fire Extinguisher (Size:762x300mm)
• Fire Hose Reel (Size:250x250mm)
• Fire Alarm/Manual Call Point (Size:200x200mm)
• Lift Disclaimer (Size:450x300mm)
• Stair Safety Strips (Size:600x100mm)
• No Smoking (Size:600x300mm)
• You are under CCTV Surveillance (Size:600x300mm)
• Swacch Bharat Mission Signage (Size:600x300mm)
• Caution Signage (Size:200x200mm)
• Prohibited Signage (Size:200x200mm)
• Danger Signage (Size:450x450mm)
• Warning Signage (Size:762x600mm)
Following informatory/ directional/warning signage shall be provided and fixed by contractor, in
Page 907 of 1358

required font, design, pattern and size made of 4 mm thick odorless Acrylic sheets of approved
make, conforming to specific gravity of 1.19, tensile strength of 69 MPA, percentage elongation
of 4.2 %, modulus of elasticity 2800 MPA (ASTM –D638), refractive index of 149, (ASTM-D542)
Rockwell hardness of M94 (ASTM – D785), water absorption of 0.2 % (ASTM- D570) total light
transmission of 92 % (ASTM – D 1003) chemical, UV & weather resistant, having excellent
insulation properties, abrasions resistant of approved colour, with beveled edges having self-
adhesive self-luminescent vinyl sheet (film thickness >150 micron, luminescent duration 4-6
hours) of make 3M/ Avery or approved equivalent on both the faces of the acrylic sheet, pasted
with signage/ letter cutout made of vinyl sheet ( film thickness >80 micron)of make 3M/ Avery or
approved equivalent in required color, font, design, pattern, including fixing over walls/
partition/glass etc, hung with standard SS chains/ fixtures, studs etc as approved.
• Fire Exit Suspended
Back Lit Hollow Letters/ Brand Logo/Emblem

Back lit hollow Letters/ Brand Logo/Emblem shall be made up of Stainless steel, grade 316 (1mm
thick returns/ side face and 1.5 mm thick front face) of approved make made out of laser cut
shape in required design, language & font, with handcrafted returns(sides) including PU coating
(MRF or approved equivalent) of desired color as per brand guidelines, having the coat of
matt/glossy MRF HS Clear or approved equivalent on outer surface, fixed with matching color PU
Painted SS screws and heavy duty double sided tape of make 3M/AVERY or approved equivalent,
to a backing letter of same design, language, font and size and made up of 3mm thick acrylic
sheet of make ACAST/ACRYLITE or approved equivalent for uniform color distribution in the back/
side, having 66 IP LED light modules of GE/ CREE/ NICHIA/ OSRAM or approved equivalent of
approved color fixed with heavy duty tape of make 3M/AVERY or approved equivalent inside the
hollow letters in required numbers for desired level of illumination with appropriate control gears
in required numbers and of same make as that of LED,FRLS rated wiring of FINOLEX/POLYCAB or
approved equivalent , IP 66 control gear box of RITTAL or approved equivalent of suitable size for
installation of gears controls, including installation on wall using chemical anchor fasteners of
HILTI/FISHER or approved equivalent all complete as per architectural drawings, specifications
and direction of Engineer in charge. The depth of letters/ logo/ emblem shall be 75-100mm (as
approved depending on up to the height) including the SS returns of depth 50mm.
External Illuminated Signage Pylon

Illuminated external signage Pylon shall be provided. It shall be visible from both side made out
of MS Structure work with 4mm thick acrylic sheet of approved make, pasting of vinyl sheet of
approved make translucent type computerized cut over pressure pasting scratch proof type over
acrylic sheet with arrangements of electrical LED modules with control gears proper wiring work
both sides sheet fixing on the frame complete as per direction of IIM Indore/Authority Engineer
External Reflective Signage Pylon

External Reflective Signage Pylon shall be provided. It shall be visible from both side made out
of MS Structure work cladding of 4mm thick ACP sheet of approved make, pasting of HIP sheet
(3M/AVERY or approved make) over ACP sheet including all types of text, arrow, symbol, logo etc.
18. ACOUSTIC TREATMENT

Objectives
In an educational instituted it is to give the basic design principals and methodology being undertaken to
achieve the optimum technical parameters for audibility with intelligibility.
It is essential that architectural design provide good acoustical characteristics for classrooms and other
learning spaces including Auditorium, sports Building etc.in which speech communication is an important
Page 908 of 1358

part of the learning process.

Following standards need to be achieved: -
1: Background Noise Levels: 40- 45 dBA
2. Reverberation Time: 0.7 – 0.9 Secs
Specifications to be followed for the acoustic treatment.

AMBIENT NOISE LEVEL – NC 40
The doors shall be provided with peripheral seals and shall conform to STC 35 ratings.
Note- Further the requirement of acoustical treatment should be guided by specific requirement of area
and the institute.
19. Paver Blocks

Paver blocks should be of 80mm thick (with interlocking mechanism) having grade of concrete M-40,
designated for medium traffic category conforming to IS 15658 : 2006 (or latest). The shade, finish
etc. shall be guided by the requirement of the institute and as approved by Authority Engineer / IIM
Indore.
Tactile pavers etc. should be used for indication of direction and as navigation guide for visually
impaired people.
Page 909 of 1358

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS -HVAC
1. GENERAL
Scope of work shall include design, engineering, supply, installation, testing & commissioning
of HVAC system. All material shall be conforming to relevant IS specifications wherever exists
and subject to approval of Engineer in charge. The HVAC system shall be carried out strictly
as per NBC -2016/ASHRAE/ISHRAE/CPWD/ECBC latest versions. Any discrepancy with item
specifications with this document with CPWD documents, stringent specification to be
followed by contactor.
1.1. TENDER DRAWINGS
For guidance of the bidder, drawings (Schematic HVAC Layout/External Buried Pipe layout,
Plant Room Layout etc.) are enclosed with these tender documents. These drawings are
broadly indicative of the work to be carried out. The contractor on award of work will
furnish detailed stage-wise GFC drawings as required in advance for approval of Authority
Engineer.
1.2. GOOD FOR CONDTRUCTION DRAWINGS/ TECHNICAL DATA
The contractor shall prepare and furnish all shop drawings including floor plans & Terrace,
Schematic HVAC Layout/External HVAC pipe routing etc. The manufacturing of equipment
shall be commenced only after the shop drawings/GA Drawings/ technical data sheet
along with pump curves are approved in writing by the Engineer. Such drawings shall
be coordinated with other services’ work. These shop drawings will be approved by
AUTHORITY ENGINEER which will be considered as base for execution of firefighting work.
1.3. COMPLETION / AS BUILT DRAWINGS
On completion of the work and before issuance of certificate of virtual completion,

the contractor shall submit to the Authority Engineer. General layout drawings, drawn
at approved scale indicating layout of pump house piping and its accessories ―As
installed‖. AS built drawings shall be prepared taking approved shop drawings as base &
incorporating all changes/ modifications as per site conditions. These drawings shall include
the following: -
a. General Layout of Plant Room including all details mentioned in clause 1.2
b. Panels and other equipment/accessories location and their dimensions etc.
c. HVAC floor layout including terrace Plan etc.
d. Complete schematic as installed.
e. Route of all cables and pipes run along with detail sizes and mode of installation.
1.4. DRAWINGS & DOCUMENTS
The contractor shall submit to the Engineer, the following documents on completion of the
work and before issuance of virtual completion.
a. Warranty for required equipment installed like VRV/VRF AC System, Panels, AHU, FCU
etc.
b. As Built Drawings
c. Material Test Certificates
d. Catalogues/Brochure
e. Operation and Maintenance Manuals
f. List of recommended spares and consumables
1.5. MANUFACTURING
The responsibility for ensuring the manufacture of the equipment as per the specifications
Page 910 of 1358

shall be solely that of the contractor. The contractor shall be responsible for the selection of
materials asper agreed specifications.
1.6. MAKE OF MATRIALS/MANUFACTURER‟S INSTRUCTION
Only approved makes as mentioned in our approved make list of tender documents of
material shall be used. The Contractors shall furnish technical data sheets / GA drawings
of all items before placing P.O. The contractor shall get the samples of required items
approved from the AUTHORITY ENGINEER as conveyed by Authority Engineer. before
commencing the supply. In case of any discrepancy/anomalies wrt specifications,
prior intimation from Contractor to Authority Engineer to be given. Final decision lies with
AUTHORITY ENGINEER for according to approvals. Any specific instruction furnished by
manufacturer covering the points not mentioned in technical specifications of the tender
shall be brought to the notice of E-I-C in writing for further instructions in this regard
at appropriate time.
1.7. MATERIAL TESTING
The E-I-C shall have full power to get any material of work to be tested by an independent
agency at contractor’s expense in order to prove the soundness and adequacy.
1.8. INSPECTION AND TESTING

a. All equipment shall be inspected and tested as per an agreed Quality Assurance Plan
before the same is packed and dispatched from the contractor’s works. The contractor shall
carry out tests as specified/ directed by Authority Engineer.
b. The Authority Engineer. may, at his sole discretion, carry out inspection at different stages
during manufacturing and final testing after manufacturing.
c. Approvals or passing of any inspection by the engineer or his authorized representative shall
not, however, prejudice the right of the engineer to reject the plan if it does not comply with the
specification when erected or give complete satisfaction in service.
d.
1.9. TRAINING OF DEPARTMENT PERSONNEL

a. The contractor shall train the CLIENT/ AUTHORITY ENGINEER„s personnel to become
proficient incorporating the equipment installed. Training shall be done before the expiry of the
defects liability period (one year after completion & handing over).
b. The period of training shall be adequate and mutually agreed upon by the Engineer and
contractor.
c. The CLIENT/ AUTHORITY ENGINEER„s personnel shall also be trained for routine
maintenance work and lubrication, overhauling, adjustments, testing, minor repairs and
replacement.
d. Nothing extra shall be paid to the contractor for training CLIENT/ AUTHORITY ENGINEER„s
personnel.
1.10. PERFORMANCE GUARANTEE
At the close of the work and before issue of final certificate of virtual completion by the engineer,
the contractor shall furnish written guarantee indemnifying the CLIENT/ AUTHORITY ENGINEER
against defective materials and workmanship for a period of one year after completion and
handing over. The contractor shall hold himself fully responsible for reinstallation or replace free
of cost to the CLIENT/ AUTHORITY ENGINEER.
a. Any defective material or equipment supplied by the contractor.
b. Any material or equipment supplied by the CLIENT/ AUTHORITY ENGINEER which
is proved to be damaged or destroyed as a result of defective workmanship by the
contractor.
Page 911 of 1358

2. BASIS OF DESIGN FOR IIM INDORE
2.1 BASIS OF DESIGN

2.1.1 Site Location : Indore (M.P.)
2.1.2 Geographic location
Latitude : 22.43°N
2.1.3 Altitude : 567MTRs above mean sea level.
2.1.4 Outdoor Design Conditions :
Based on ISHRAE Weather Data or As per Client Requirements, the outdoor design
conditions shall
be considered as follows:
Summer
Dry Bulb Temperature : 46 °C (114.8°F)
Wet Bulb Temperature : 28.6 °C (83.6°F)
Monsoon
Dry Bulb Temperature : 32.2°C (90°F)
Wet Bulb Temperature : 27.77°C (82°F)
Design parameter for duct design shall be:
Maximum flow velocity in Ducts for
Air Conditioning : 7.5 m / sec (1500 fpm)
Maximum flow velocity in Ducts for : 7.5 m / sec
Ventilation in pump – 12,7 m / Sec
room, boiler room, generator room, toilet (1500 – 2500
exhaust & Kitchen FPM)
exhaust.
Maximum friction : 0.95 Pa / meter run
(0.10-inch WG/100 FT Run)
Noise Level : 60 dbA.
Ventilation Fan:
Maximum fan outlet velocity for fans up to 450 mm dia : 9 m / sec
Maximum fan outlet velocity for fans above 450 mm dia: 12 m / sec
Maximum fan speed for fans up to 450 mm dia : 1450 RPM
Maximum fan speed for fans above 450 mm dia : 1000 RPM
Filtration:
Recirculated Air (Mixed Fresh & Return air) at air handling : Washable synthetic type
units, fan coil units and ventilation units. Air filter
Note: - HVAC work shall be executed by single HVAC contractor, who has been done very good
quality work of some equivalent work.
Page 912 of 1358

3.0 VARIABLE REFRIGERANT VOLUME TYPE SYSTEM
SCOPE OF WORK
The scope of this section comprises the supply, erection testing and commissioning of
Variable Refrigerant Flow System conforming to these specifications and in accordance with the
requirements of Drawing and Schedule of Quantities.
TYPE
Units shall be air cooled, variable refrigerant volume air conditioner consisting of one outdoor
unit and multiple indoor units. Each indoor unit has capability to cool or heat independently
for the requirement of the rooms.
INDOOR UNIT
The indoor units on any circuit can be of different type and also controlled individually. Following
type of indoor units shall be connected to the system:
Ceiling mounted cassette type (Double flow) Ceiling mounted cassette type (Multi flow)
Ceiling mounted Low static Duct type
Ceiling mounted Duct type
Ceiling suspended concealed type
Wall mounted type
Floor standing type
The compressor installed in each modular outdoor unit shall be equipped with minimum one inverter
compressors for higher reliability, improved life, better backup and duty cycling purpose. The system
shall be capable of changing the rotating speed of inverter compressor by inverter controller to follow
variations in cooling and heating load. Outdoor unit shall be suitable for mix match connection of all type
of indoor units. The refrigerant piping between indoor units and outdoor unit shall be possible to extend
up to 175m with maximum 50m level difference. Both indoor units and outdoor units shall be factory
assembled, tested and filled with first charge of refrigerant before delivering at site.
3.1 OUTDOOR UNIT
The outdoor unit shall be factory assembled, weatherproof casing, constructed from heavy gauge mild
steel panels and coated with baked enamel finish. The unit should be completely factory wired tested
with all necessary controls:
Each modular inverter outdoor shall be Fully Inverter twin rotary compressor or Fully Inverter Multi
Scroll working on AC Supply(410V ± 10 %, 50Hz ± 3%).
In case of modular outdoor units, the outdoor unit shall have compulsorily at least one inverter
compressors so that the operation is not disrupted with failure of any inverter compressor and if one
inverter compressor malfunctions, other continues to provide emergency operation smoothly till repair
is effected.
It should also be provided with duty cycling for multiple inverter compressor switching starting
sequence for better stability and prolonging equipment life. The outdoor unit shall be modular in design
and should be allowed for side- b y - s i d e installation. The unit shall be provided with its
own microprocessor control panel. The outdoor units should have anti-corrosion paint free gal barium
base plate for easy mounting of unit. The machine must have a sub cool feature to use coil surface
more effectively thru proper circuit/bridge so that it prevents the flashing of refrigerant from long piping
due to this effect thereby achieving energy savings.
The outdoor unit should be fitted with low noise, aero spiral design fan with aero fitting grill for spiral
discharge airflow to reduce pressure loss and should be fitted with DC fan motor inverter type for
Page 913 of 1358

better efficiency.
The condensing unit shall be designed to operate safely when connected to multiple fan coil units.
● COMPRESSOR
The compressor shall be highly efficient Rotary/ Scroll type and capable of inverter control. The
inverter compressor shall change the speed in accordance with the variation in cooling or heating load
requirement:
All outdoor units shall have multiple steps of capacity control to meet load fluctuation and indoor unit
individual control. All parts of compressor shall be sufficiently lubricated stock. Forced lubrication may
also be employed.
Oil heater shall be provided in the compressor casing for compressor over 10TR rating.
The Inverter compressor shall preferably be Reluctance Fully Inverter compressor for higher
efficiency and improved reliability.
● HEAT EXCHANGER
The heat exchanger shall be constructed with copper tubes mechanically bonded to aluminum fins to
form a cross fin coil. The aluminum fins shall be covered by anti-corrosion resin film. The unit should
be with e-pass heat exchanger to optimize the path of heat exchanger and for better efficiency of
condenser. The unit shall be provided with necessary number of direct driven low noise level propeller
type fans arranged for vertical discharge. Each fan shall have a safety guard.
● REFRIGERANT CIRCUIT
The refrigerant circuit shall include liquid & gas shut-off valves and solenoid valves at condenser end.
The equipment must have in built refrigerant stabilization control for proper refrigerant distribution.
All necessary safety devices shall be provided to ensure the safely operation of the system. Refrigerant
should be R410a only.
● SAFETY DEVICES
All necessary safety devices shall be provided to ensure safe operation of the system.
Following safety devices shall be part of outdoor unit; high pressure switch, fuse (MCB/MCCB), fan drive
overload protector, fusible plug, overload relay, overload protection for inverter.
● OIL RECOVERY SYSTEM
Unit shall be equipped with an oil recovery system to ensure stable operation with long refrigeration piping
lengths.
The system must be provided with oil balancing circuit to avoid poor lubrication.
3.2 INDOOR UNIT
This section deals with supply, installation, testing, commissioning of various type of indoor units
confirming to general specification and suitable for the duty selected. The type, capacity and size of
indoor units shall be as specified in detailed Bill of Quantities
GENERAL
Indoor units shall be either ceiling mounted cassette type, or ceiling mounted duct able type or floor
standing type or wall mounted type or other as specified in RFP. Each unit shall have an electronic
control valve to control refrigerant flow rate respond to load variations of the room.
a) The address of the indoor unit shall be set automatically in case of individual and
group control.
b) In case of centralized control, it shall be set by liquid crystal remote controller.
Page 914 of 1358

The fan shall be dual suction, aerodynamically designed turbo, multi blade type, statically &
dynamically balanced to ensure low noise and vibration free operation of the system. The fan shall be a
direct driven type, mounted directly on motor shaft having supported from housing.
The cooling coil shall be made out of seamless copper tubes and have continuous aluminum fins. The fins
shall be spaced by collars forming an integral part. The tubes shall be staggered in the direction of airflow.
The tubes shall be hydraulically/ mechanically expanded for minimum thermal contact resistance
with fins. Each coils shall be factory tested at 21kg/sqm air pressure under water.
The unit shall have cleanable type filter fixed to an integrally molded plastic/aluminum frame. The
filter shall be easily serviceable.
Each indoor unit shall have computerized PID control for maintaining design room temperature. Each
unit shall be provided with microprocessor thermostat for cooling or cooling and heating.
Each unit shall be with wired LCD type remote controller. The remote controller shall memorize the
latest malfunction code for easy maintenance. The controller shall have self-diagnostic features for
easy and quick maintenance and service. The controller shall be able to change fan speed and angle of
swing flap individually as per requirement.
Each indoor unit shall be with UV-C disinfection kit installed inside the unit.
3.2.1 CEILING MOIUNTED CASSETTE TYPE UNIT (MULTI/FOUR WAY FLOW TYPE)
The unit shall be ceiling mounted type. The unit shall include pre-filter, fan section and DX-coil section
with refrigerant expansion device (Thermostatic capillary) also refrigerant distribution shall be
provided. The housing of the unit shall be powder coated galvanized steel. The body shall be light in
weight and shall be able to suspend from four corners. The fan shall be aerodynamically designed
diffuser turbo fan type.
Unit shall have an external attractive panel for supply and return air. Unit shall have four-way supply air
grilles on sides and return air grille in center.
Each unit shall have high lift drain pump, fresh air intake provision (if specified) Low gas detection
system and very low operating sound.
All the indoor units regardless of their difference in capacity should have same decorative panel size for
harmonious aesthetic point of view. It should have provision of connecting branch ducts.
3.2.2 CEILING MOUNTED DUCTABLE TYPE UNIT
Unit shall be suitable for ceiling mounted type. The unit shall include pre filter, fan section & DX coil
section with refrigerant expansion device (Thermostatic capillary) also refrigerant distribution shall be
provided. The housing of unit shall be light weight powder coated galvanized steel. The unit shall have
high static fan for Duct able arrangement.
3.2.3 CEILING SUSPENDED TYPE
Unit shall be suitable for ceiling suspended arrangement below false ceiling. The unit include pre filter,
fan section & DX coil section with refrigerant expansion device (Thermostatic capillary) also refrigerant
distribution shall be provided. The housing of unit shall be light weight powder coated galvanized steel.
Unit shall have an attractive external casing for supply and return air.
Page 915 of 1358

3.2.4 FLOOR STANDING TYPE
Unit shall be suitable for floor standing arrangement. The unit includes pre filter, fan section & DX coil section
with refrigerant expansion device (Thermostatic capillary) also refrigerant distribution shall be provided. The
housing of unit shall be light weight powder coated galvanized steel.
3.2.5 AIR HANDLING UNITS: DOUBLE SKIN AIR HANDLING UNITS (Also Fan Sections)
3.2.5.1 SCOPE:
The scope of this section comprises the supply, erection, testing and commissioning of double skin air
handling units, conforming to these specifications and in accordance with requirement of drawings and
of the Schedule of Quantities.
The Supplier shall supply and assemble double-skinned central station air handling units. Each unit
shall be a factory built, modular type with field assembled casing sections, complete with High Efficiency
SISW Plug Fan with EC motors, wire guard (N/A for CSU), cooling/ heating coils, valves chamber, drain
section, structural mountings, vibration isolators and all other related accessories as required under
/ Schedule. The unit shall be horizontal Draw- thru to suit AHU room size/ available space subject to the
acceptance by the consultant.
AHU Drain/ Floor Drain to be provided in all AHU rooms and filter clearing point will be provided at single
location in the floor.
3.2.5.2 TYPE:
The air handling units shall be double skin construction of approved make having filter section with
filters coil section with chilled/ hot water coil with insulated condensate drain pan, and centrifugal
fan. Units shall be of the arrangement as mentioned in the Drawings and mentioned in Schedule of
Quantities.
3.2.5.3 CAPACITY:
The air moving capacities and maximum motor horsepo wer shall be as mentioned Drawings and in
Schedule of Quantities.
3.2.5.4 HOUSING/CASING:
The housing/casing of the air handling unit shall be of double skin construction. The housing shall be
so made that it can be delivered at site in total/semi knock down conditions depending upon the
locations. The Framework shall be of Extruded Aluminum hollow sections with thermal barrier. The
entire frame shall be assembled using mechanical joints to make a sturdy & strong framew o r k for
various sections.
Double skin panels shall be made of 1.0 mm thick plain galvanized preplasticised on outside and 0.8
mm thick plain Galvanized sheet inside with P.U. foam of 40 Kg/m3 density (min) insulation injected in
between two turned finished panels of 50±2 mm thickness. These panels shall be bolted from inside
/ outside on to the framework with soft rubber gasket in between to make the joints air tight.
Thermo-acoustic Double Skin panels shall be 50+2 mm thick:
(a) 50+2 mm thick Thermal insulation- CFC free injected PUF of density not less than 40+2 kg/cu. m.
sandwiched between Outer sheet of the panel made out of 0.60 mm pre-coated galvanized sheet with
PVC guard on outside.
(b) Acoustic insulation- 50+2mm thick Glass wool with FRP tissue of density not less than 32+2
Page 916 of 1358

kg/cu.m. and 0.80mm Perforated G.I. sheet inside These panels shall be screwed from outside to the
framework with gasket system to make the joints airtight.
Framework for each section shall be bolted/screwed together with soft rubber gasket in between to
make the joints air tight. Suitable doors with aluminum die cast hinges and latches shall be provided for
access to various panels for maintenance. The entire housing shall be mounted on extruded
Aluminium channel framework.
Drain Pan shall be constructed of 18 G stainless steel SS 316 with slope on all sides, leading to a
common drain point so as to facilitate fast removal of condensate. The drain pan shall be of single
piece construction with minimum joints. All joints will be properly welded & be leak proof. Necessary
supports will be provided to slide the coil in the drain pan. Drain outlet shall be provided on one side of
drain pan as required by site conditions.
Damper shall be opposed blade double skinned airfoil aluminum to be provided to discharge side
section with integral gasket and assembled within a rigid extruded aluminum alloy frame. All linkages
and supporting spindles shall be made of aluminum or nylon, supported in Teflon bushes. Spindle
shall be provided with a bake lite knob for locking the damper blades in position. Linkages shall be
extended wherever specified for motorized operation. Damper frames shall be sectionalized to
minimize blade wrapping. Air leakage through dampers when in the closed position shall not exceed
1.5% of the maximum design air volume flow rate at the maximum design air total pressure.
Inspection window shall be provided for inspection during running conditions. Inspection door with
proper handles shall be provided on the motor side for its easy removal. It should be interlocked to a
limit switches which will start the lighting which the cover is open when the cover is open it should be
interlocked with motor so as to trip it of cover is opened.
3.2.5.5 CODES & STANDARDS:

The design, materials, manufacture, inspection, of the units shall comply with all currently applicable
statutes, regulations, codes and standards in the locality where the equipment is to be installed. In
particular, the units shall confirm of the following standards:
BS EN 1886 Mechanical & thermal performance of casing
IEC 60204-1 :2005 / EN 60204-1:2006 Safety of machinery – electrical equipment of

Machines part 1 general requirements.
3.2.5.6 FAN & MOTOR:

The fan section shall be equipped with a Single Inlet Single Width Centrifugal Impeller with High
Efficiency Backward curved blades and external rotor EC(Electronically Commutated) motor, energy
optimized for operation for high efficiency and favorable acoustic behavior. The motor shall be
compatible Variable Frequency drives controllers.
Impeller: The high efficiency Backward curved impeller made of welded aluminum sheet or high
performing composite material with external rotor motor balanced together statically and dynamically
according to relevant standards.
The EC fan should be capable of being fitted in horizontal position in the AHU.
Motor: The minimum efficiency class of the motor shall be equivalent to IE4. The motor shall be
permanent magnet external rotor motor with integrated electronics and suitable for continuous
operation. The speed of the motor shall be varied with an external 0-10V/ PWM control signal. The fan
in totality shall be of most efficient type so that the power consumption and noise level is minimal.
The motor shall be minimum IP54 protection class.
Integrated Electronics: The device electronics shall be protected from overload by the “Active
Temperature Management” so that if the ambient operating temperature exceeds the design limit, then
Page 917 of 1358

the fan is not switched off immediately. In such a condition the fan should be operational at lower
speeds till the operating ambient temperature drops down.
Units to be Equipped with EC Fans & Automation Controller (DDC Controller):
Units shall be equipped with Controller module having RS-485 port BMS compatibility & on-board
protocol with Display for the following:
a) EC fan operation status (ON/OFF)
b) Chilled water valve operation status.
c) AHU Airflow (CFM).
d) AHU power consumption.
e) Chilled water in/out Temp.
f) Filter Chock Common Alarm
**Controller shall also have a fire-trip alarm to shut-off the units in case of fire signal from fire panel.
Following are the required characteristics of the DDC controller:

1. It shall be a Microprocessor-based Programmable Electronic Controller with
Real-time Multi-tasking operating system, 32 Bit Datatype, Built-In 90Mbyte
memory.
Features like Built-In Web Server, FTP Server, Data-logging, Supports HTML
Standard & JavaScript. Front IP65 Protection, Built-in 132x64 pixels with 6-
button backlit keypad Display etc. shall be inbuilt.
2. Communication Ports: MODBUS TCP/IP Port (RJ45 Ethernet Port), MODBUS RS485 Port,
CAN-bus Port, Micro USB Port (HOST & DEVICE) for Uploads/Downloads, NFC Communication
enabled &Mac Address Label with QR code. 50 ppm internal clock precision & lithium
button battery with minimum 5years of Life.
3. Inputs/Outputs: Total 20 IO's (10 nos. Universal IO's, 6 Digital Outputs,
2 Digital Input & 2 Analogue Output)
4. Power Supply: 24V ac (+10/-15%), 28 to 36Vdc (-20/+10%)
5. Standards/Certifications: IEC 60695 (UL94), IEC 61131, (EN 61000-4-5), CEI EN 61010-1, EN
60730-1/UL60730, IEC EN 50022
6. EC FAN Integration: controller must be suitable for Integration with EBM
PAPST/ ZIEHL-ABEGGmake EC Fans with Software solution to integrate over
RS-485 for Monitoring all parameters related to
EC fan & in parallel Speed modulation over single line Communication.
Provision of EC FAN Speed modulation over 0-10V shall also be there.
3.2.5.7 COOLING/HEATING COILS FOR VRF/VRF REFRIGERANT:

Cooling coils shall have 12.5/15 mm dia tubes min. 27 gauge thick with aluminum fins firmly bonded to
copper tubes by mechanical expansion of copper tubes assembled in stainless steel frame cooling coil
shall be integrally finned type. Face and surface areas shall be such as to ensure rated capacity from
each unit and such that the air velocity across each coil shall not exceed 550 feet per minute. The coil
shall be pitched in the unit casing for proper drainage. Each coil shall be factory tested at 21 Kg./Sqcm.
air pressure while submerged in water. Tube shall be mechanically expanded for minimum thermal
contact resistance with fins. Fin spacing shall be 11 to 13 fins per inch (4-5 FINS/CM). Coil
shall have copper header with M.S. adopter.
The depth of the coil shall be such as to suit the requirements. Viz. re-circulated air applications, or
100% fresh air applications. The coil Row shall be selected as per the coil selection. Computerized
cooling coil selection output shall be submitted. Coils shall be AHRI 410 certified.
Page 918 of 1358

Minimum spacing between two sets of coils in series shall be 450 mm. The number of shall be as per
BOQ.
Coils in Two banks (one above another) shall have an additional stainless steel flat drain pan between
two banks, which will drain to main drain pan below through rigid pipes.
3.2.5.8 FILTER:
Each unit shall be provided with a factory / assembled filter section containing washable expanded
viscous metal or dry synthetic media type air filters having extruded aluminum frame. The media shall be
supported with aluminum mesh on sides. Filter Media is 100% non-woven electronically enhanced
synthetic media. The media is supported by an expanded metal continuously laminated on the air
leaving side to provide pleat stability while eliminating flutter. Pleat design is a V-Pleat configuration that
aids in reducing pressure drop and energy costs and allows total media usage, providing maximum
airflow. Frame shall be two-piece construction, made of a heavy duty 24- p o i n t moisture resistant
material. Diagonal and horizontal support members shall be bonded to the media on both sides.
Pre Filter (MERV-8/ G-4):
Pre-Filters shall be washable HDPE type in AL •frame construction and shall be 50 mm thick. Filter shall
be rated either as class 1 or class 2 in accordance with /.J S UL900. The filters shall be with 90% efficiency
down to 10 microns, and the design velocity across the filter shall not exceed 2.5 meters per second. The
pressure drop through the filter shall not exceed 5.0 mm while clean. Filter shall be supported by a
wire mesh and frame. All filters should be complying EN779:201 1, EN 1822 as applicable.
3.2.5.9 ISOLATOR:
6 to 8 number spring type Vibration isolators shall be provided in all floors mounted air handling units
along and AHU mounted within the ceiling space shall be hung through spring type vibration isolation
suspensions.
3.2.5.10 SAFETY FEATURES:

The fan access door shall be equipped with micro-switch interl o c k e d with fan motor to enable
switching off the fan motor automatically in the event of door opening. The access door shall be
further having wire mesh screen as an added safety feature bolted on to the unit frame.
Fan and motor base shall be properly earthed from the factory.
All screws used for panel fixing, projecting inside the unit shall be covered with PVC caps to avoid
human injury.
Units needs to be CE certified.
3.2.5.11 ACCESSORIES:
Each air handling unit shall be provided with Auto air vent at high point in the cooling coil and drain
plug in the bottom of the coil. In addition, the following accessories may be required at air handling
unit, their detailed specifications are given in individual sections, and quantities separately in
Schedule of Quantities.
a) Weatherproof light in Fan Section.
b) Limit Switch.
c) Wire Guard.
3.2.5.12 PAINTING:
Shop coats of paint that have become marred during shipment or erection shall be cleaned off with
mineral spirits, wire brushed, and spot primed over the affected areas, then coated with enamel paint
to match the finish over the adjoining shop painted surfaces.
Page 919 of 1358

3.2.5.13 PERFORMANCE DATA:

Air handling units shall be selected for the lowest noise level of the equipment. Fan performance
rating and power consumption data with operating points clearly indicated shall be submitted with the
tender or during execution stage and verified at the time of testing and commissioning of the
installation.
3.2.5.14 TESTING:
Capacity of various air handling unit models shall be computed from the measurements of air flow and
dry and wet bulb temperatures of air entering and leaving the coil. Flow measurements will be taken
by accurate flow measuring device and temperature measurements drive and temperature
measurements will be taken by accurately calibrated mercury-in glass thermometers. Computed
results shall conform to the specified capacities and quoted ratings. Power consumption shall be
computed from measurements of incoming voltage and input current.
NOTES:
1. Wherever there is space constraint for installing the AHUs, the AHUs may be provided with two
fans (instead of one) connected to single shaft, with a single drive motor.
2. Vertical AHUs shall be provided with motor access doors on the sides, as well as in the front,
as a standard.
3. AHUs having mixing box, TFA AHUs and any other AHU not surrounded by return air, will be
provided with thermal break profiles.
4. Roof mounted AHUs and those AHUs which are exposed to atmosphere, shall be provided
with reinforced, weatherproof canopy of thick GSS sheets, having same finish as AHU outer skin.
3.3 CENTRALIZED TYPE REMOTE CONTROLLER FOR INDIVIDUAL USER

A multifunctional compact centralized controller shall be provided with the system.
It shall be able to control multiple groups of indoor units with the following functions: -
a) Starting/stopping of Air-conditioners as a zone or group or individual unit.
b) Temperature setting for each indoor unit or zone.
c) Switching between temperature control modes, switching of fan speed and direction of airflow,
enabling/disabling of individual remote controller operation.
d) Monitoring of operation status such as operation mode & temperature setting of individual
indoor units, maintenance information, troubleshooting information.
e) Display of air conditioner operation history.
f) Daily management automation through yearly schedule function with possibility of various
schedules. Also, it should ensure run time equalization & rotation of master compressor
too both type of compressor.
g) System should be capable of providing power consumption by each indoor unit in KWH along
use time & use ratio.
h) The output available should be in Microsoft Excel format.
i) Data storage capacity of Power distribution shall be for at least 75 days.
j) The system shall be compatible to IBMS system working on BACnet or Modbus. Vender shall
share protocol as required by IBMS agency.
3.4 MODE OF VRV SYSTEM MEASUREMENT
3.4.1 VRV SYSTEM (INDOOR UNITS & OUTDOOR UNITS)
The entire VRV system with indoor (wall mounted spit units, cassette units, FCU & duct able units etc.)
& out-door unit having DC fan motor, heat exchanger coil, panel, control valves, control box, drain
pump, drain point, integrated PCB, Fully Inverter twin rotary / Scroll compressor, weatherp r o o f
Page 920 of 1358

casing, DX coil and all accessories, Starters, Controls, Control Panel, Control Wiring, Refrigerant charge,
Oil etc., Erection, Commissioning and Testing shall be regarded as one unit for purpose of measurement.
3.4.2 DUCTABLE UNITS
AHU with filters, Fan and coil section, without motor, with base frame motor, drive and guard suitable for
motor, mounting frame, vibration mounts as specified in BOQ shall from one unit of measurement.
Each Motor of AHUs shall be considered one unit of measurement. Installation, testing and commissioning
is a part of above points.
4.0 AIR COOLED HI-WALL/CASSETTE/DUCTABLE AIR CONDITIONING UNIT:
4.1 SCOPE:
The scope of this section comprises supply, erection, testing and commissioning of air cooled Hi-
Wall/Cassette/Duct able air-conditioning units and auxiliaries conforming to these specifications and in
accordance with the drawings.
4.2 HI-WALL/CASSETTE/DUCTABLE UNITS:
Air cooled Hi-Wall/Cassette/Duct able unit shall be provided with energy efficient hermetically sealed
scroll or reciprocating compressor/s, complete with vibration isolators & factory installed controls like
single phase preventer HP, LP & overload cutouts, interlocking of fan & compressor, thermostat with
selector switch, wiring etc. Efficient cooling coil shall be selected for low velocity OD copper tubing
having extended aluminum fins with rigid bonding between tubes & fins for high heat transfer. Tubes
shall be arranged in a staggered design for best air contact thus giving low bypass. The cooling coil
circuits shall be fed with liquid refrigerant through the expansion valve and a distributor. Blower of an
evaporating unit shall be statically and dynamically balanced and shall be selected to give required
airflow as identified in the drawings. Filters shall be synthetic type of Nylon mesh with metal frame.
Drain pan shall be of 18- g a u g e SS/powder coated MS duly insulated. Casing shall be heavy gauge
factory painted to provide better protection against rusting.
Remote air-cooled condensing unit shall be provided with efficient condenser coils made out of copper
tubing with extended aluminum fins. Tubes shall be arranged in a staggered design for better
efficiency. Condenser fans shall be selected to operate quietly for required CFM to keep condensing
temperature low. The compressor shall be in the outdoor unit capable of operating continuously even at
high ambience of 46 deg C (115 deg F). The condensing unit shall be installed with M.S. base frame, along
with cushy foot mounting vibration isolation pads, bolted and clamped to terrace or wall. The
compressor for 1.5 & 2 TR units shall be hermetically sealed Rotary/Reciprocating type.
Interconnected refrigerant piping between outdoor unit & indoor unit shall be of heavy gauge copper
complete with expansion valve, liquid line strainer, drier, shut off valves, including insulated suction
line. Expansion valve or termination of capillary tube shall be provided within indoor unit. 25mm thick
neoprene rubber pads shall be supplied for each indoor/outdoor unit. The units shall be tested in
accordance with IS: 1391. The power supply shall be provided at outdoor/indoor unit as per
manufacturer’s requirement. Cabling / Wiring between outdoor & indoor units shall be carried out by the
EPC contractor.
4.3 INSTALLATION:
The indoor units shall be mounted on ribbed rubber pads / grommets for vibration isolation. The
outdoor unit shall be installed with a M.S. base frame along with cushy foot mounting vibration
isolation pads. The refrigerant pipes & interconnecting cables & wires shall be neatly & firmly installed on
25 mm wide brackets fixed to masonry. Care shall be taken to avoid the possibility of damage to
cable/wires insulation due to hot refrigerant pipes. The contractor shall supply the required charge of
Page 921 of 1358

refrigerant, lubricant and other consumables, for commissioning and testing of the equipment.
4.4 ISOLATOR:
Vibration isolators shall be provided if floor mounted units are provided. Ceiling mounted units within
the ceiling space shall be hung through vibration isolation suspensions.
4.5 FRESH AIR INTAKES:

Extruded Aluminium (duly powder coated to desired colour shade) fresh air louvers with bird screen,
filter and dampers shall be provided in the clear openings in masonry walls of the indoor unit rooms
having at least one external wall. Louvers, dampers, fresh air ducts shall be as shown in drawings and in
schedule of quantities. Fresh air dampers shall be of interlocking, opposed blade, louver type. Blades
shall be made of not less than 18- g a u g e galvanized sheet steel, edges covered with felt to provide
airt i g h t closure and shall be rattle-free. Dampers shall be similar to those specified for air distribution.
Fresh air intake shall be as shown on the drawings.
5.0 DX TYPE AIR COOLED PRECISION UNITS
i. GENERAL: -
The room air-conditioning system shall be a floor discharge unit designed specifically for high sensible
heat ratio applications such as Server, Computer rooms and UPS room etc.
Each unit shall be capable of providing sensible cooling capacities at rated ambient temperatures with
adequate airflow. Each unit shall be capable of providing actual cooling capacity as per requirement.
Inside Conditions: - 22+ 1 0C and relative humidity is 50 + 5% RH.
The system shall contain Scroll compressor, Evaporator, Humidifier, Condenser and an Externally
Equalized Thermostatic expansion valve (TXV) all of which shall be contained within the cabinet of
the unit.
ii. CABINET CONSTRUCTION: -
The frame shall be constructed of Galvanized steel & shall be double skin type. The external panel shall
be constructed of 1.2mm zinc coated sheet steel. Front, rear and end panels shall be fitted with 25mm
glass fiber insulation, fire rated. T h e cabinet shall be powder coated and have a textured finish.
The hinged front panel shall be removable and include captive ¼ turn fasteners. The cabinet shall be
assembled with pop rivets providing ease of disassembly.
iii. FILTRATION: -
The filter chamber shall be an integral part of the system and withdraw able from the front of the unit.
Filtration shall be provided by deep V form G4 performance dry disposable media to AS1324.
iv. FANS: -
The fan section shall be designed for an external static pressure of 25 Pa. The fans shall be located
downstream of the evaporator coil and be of the forward curved centrifugal type, double width, double
inlet and statically and dynamically balanced to G6.3DIN ISO 1940-part I. Each fan shall be separately
driven by a high efficiency electric motor with an IP55 enclosure rating. The drive arrangement shall be
self-tensioning and provide for belt replacement without the use of tools. The motor base plate shall
include locators to ensure optimum axial alignment of the motor.
Page 922 of 1358

v. HUMIDIFIER: -
Humidification shall be provided by boiling water in a high temperature polypropylene steam

generator. The steam shall be distributed evenly into the bypass airstreams of the environment control
system to ensure full integration of the water vapor into the supply air without condensation.
The humidifier shall be capable of providing 7.5 kg of steam per hour. The humidifier shall have an
efficiency of not less the 1.3 kg/kw and be fitted with an auto flush cycle activated on demand from the
microprocessor control system. The humidifier shall be fully serviceable with replacement electrodes.
Wastewater shall be flushed from the humidifier by the initiation of the water supply solenoid water
valve via a U-pipe overflow system. Drain solenoid valves will not be used.
vi. ELECTRICAL HEATING: -
The electric heating elements shall operate at a heat density level not exceeding 60 kW/ m2. The low watt
density elements shall be of finned tubular steel construction finished in high temperature paint. The
heating circuit shall include dual safety protection through loss of air and manual reset high temperature
controls.
vii. COMPRESSORISED SYSTEMS: -
Scroll Compressor: -
The compressor shall be of a high efficiency complaint scroll design with an E.E.R. (energy efficiency
ratio) of not less than 3.25) at ARI rating conditions. The compressor shall be charged with mineral oil
and designed for operation on HCFC R407c or any other CFC free refrigerant. Each compressor shall
have internal motor protection and be mounted on vibration isolators.
Refrigeration Circuit: -
The refrigeration system shall be of the twin circuit direct expansion type and incorporate hermetic
scroll compressors, complete with crankcase heaters. Cooling steps shall be a maximum of 50% of
total unit cooling capacity for one and two compressor models. The system shall include a manual
reset high pressure control; auto reset low temperature switch, externally equalized thermal expansion
valve, high sensitivity refrigerant sight glass, large capacity filter drier and charging/access ports in each
circuit. Each refrigeration circuit shall include rigidly mounted isolation valves in the discharge and
liquid lines to aid servicing and installation (air cooled units only).
viii. EVAPORATOR COIL: -
The evaporator coil shall be A-shape coil (for down flow) incorporating draw-through air design for
uniform air distribution. The coil shall be constructed of rifled bore copper tubes and louvered
aluminum fins, with the frame and drip tray fabricated from heavy gauge aluminum. All metal parts in
contact with condensate shall be the same material to prevent electrolytic corrosion. The drip trays shall
ensure the collection of condensates and be accessible for cleaning.
ix. DEHUMIDIFICATION: -
A specific dehumidification cycle (split-liquid) shall operate by reducing the operating surface
temperature in a section of one of the refrigeration coils by means of a solenoid valve in the liquid line.
Full airflow of the unit will be maintained at all times to ensure consistent air distribution to the
conditioned space.
x. REMOTE AIR-COOLED CONDENSER: -
The air- c o o l e d condenser shall be the low profile, weatherproof type incorporating high
efficiency, direct drive, external rotor motors with axial blade fans. The condenser shall be
constructed from heavy-duty aluminum and corrosion resistant components. Heavy duty mounting legs
and all assembly hardware shall be included. Condensers shall be suitable for 24-hour operation
Page 923 of 1358

and be capable of providing vertical or horizontal discharge. The condenser shall be fully factory wired
and require a 230-volt I phase 50 hz electrical service.
xi. FAN SPEED CONTROL CONDENSER: -
The condenser fans shall be directly driven by 4 pole, 230 volt, 50 htz electric motors with an IP55
enclosure rating and class F insulation. The motor shall be equipped with permanently sealed ball bearing
and high temperature grease. The motors shall be speed controlled to ensure stable operating
conditions from –5oC to 45 oC ambient by a factory fitted, direct acting pressure actuated fan speed
controller. The control system shall be complete with input isolation switch, transducers and pressure
switches.
The high-perfo rm anc e heat exchanger shall include mechanically expanded crosshatched copper
tubes and louvered aluminum form maximum heat transfer. The coil shall be finished in a high
temperature modified epoxy coating to offer increased protection in aggressive environments. The coil
shall have a maximum of 3 rows and adequate fins per meter and the face velocity shall not be more
than 500 FPM.
xii. UNIT SIZE: -
The maximum footprint area of the unit shall not exceed 1.5 m 2. The unit shall require front access
(600 mm) only for routine service and installation work.
xiii. UNIT CONTROLLER: -
The unit controller shall be microprocessor based and include a large. LCD backlit graphic display for
clear visibility of text and graphics. The display and control buttons shall be accessible from the unit front
without removing any external panels. The controller shall feature ISP (In-system Programming)
technology to support program upload via a PC.
Control strategies shall be P-I-D with dew point compensation for accurate temperature and
humidity control. A selection of return or supply air control shall be provided to suit the
application. The controller shall have a user- f r i e n d l y menu driven interface with supporting help
screens and shall use multi- protocol data communications. Access to the controller settings to prevent
unauthorized access. In normal operating mode the screen shall display unit number, temperature and
relative humidity set points and actuals, graphs, time, date and operating status. Dynamic icons identify
the system operating mode. A 48-hour real time log of temperature and humidity data shall be retained
by the control system. All parameters and data shall be protected in memory by an onboard battery. An
EIA- 232 communications interface shall provide the capability of remote monitoring with the option of
EIA-485 interface on 2 or 4 wire connection.
xiv. CONTROL: -
The control system shall allow programming of the following conditions:
• Temperature set point.

• Humidity Set point.
• High Temperature Alarm
Low temperature Alarm
• High Humidity Alarm
• Low Humidity Alarm
• The control system shall include the following settable features:
• Unit identification number.
• Startup Delay, Cold start Delay and Fan Run on timers.
• Sensor Calibration.
• Remote shutdown & general Alarm management
• Compressor Sequencing.
• Return temperature control.
Page 924 of 1358

• Choice of Modulating output types.
xv. ALARMS: -
The microprocessor shall activate an audible, visual and general alarm in the event of any of the
following conditions:
▪ High Temperature
Low Temperature
▪ High Humidity
Low Humidity
Loss of Air
▪ High Pressure
▪ Low Pressure
▪ Humidifier Low Water
▪ Water Under Floor
▪ Spare Alarm 1 and 2 (Customized text)
The unit shall also incorporate the following protections:
▪ Single phasing preventors.

▪ Reverse phasing
▪ Phase imbalancing
▪ Phase failure
▪ Overload tripping (MPCB) of all components
6.0 AIR COOLED SPLIT AIR CONDITIONING UNITS (ENERGY SAVING INVERTER TYPE
COMPRESSORS
I. SCOPE
The scope of this section comprises the supply, erection, testing and commissioning of Air-Cooled
Split Units with inverter driven compressors conforming to these specifications and in accordance with
the requirements of Drawings and Design Basic Report. The proposed unit shall meet the highest
possible star rating as per BEE standards.
ii. TYPE The Split Units shall consist of hermetically sealed compressor, motor, air cooled condenser,
strip heaters, integral refrigerant piping and wiring, all mounted on a steel frame.
The indoor unit to be installed for the Split Unit within building, shall be housed in insulated cabinet
consisting of cooling coil, blower with motor, filter & insulated drain pan. Split unit must deliver specified
capacity after taking into account losses due to piping length & site conditions.
iii. CAPACITY
The refrigeration capacity of Packaged Unit and Room Air Conditioners, split unit shall be as shown on
Drawings and as per requirements.
iv. COMPRESSOR AND MOTOR
The compressor shall be hermetically sealed, swing type, serviceable type and shall have dual pressure
stat, and an operating oil charge. The motor shall be suction gas cooled and shall be sealed against dirt
and moisture. The motor shall be suitable for 415±10% / volts or 230±6 % volts, 50 Hz, A.C. supply.
v. REFRIGERANT PIPING AND CONTROLS
Refrigerant piping and fittings interconnecting compressor condenser shall be all copper and valves
Page 925 of 1358

shall be brass / gunmetal construction. The refrigerant used shall be ozone friendly HFC or any other
CFC free refrigerant.
vi. CASING
The indoor & outdoor units shall be sectionalized / cabinet construction. Indoor units shall consist of
fan section, coil section, filter section, and drain pan. The outdoor unit shall consist of condenser coil, fan
& compressor. In case of package units, the compressor shall be mounted within the indoor units and
in case of split unit, the compressor shall be mounted with the outdoor units. Each section shall be
constructed of thick sheet steel all welded / bolted construction, adequately reinforced with
structural members and provided with sufficient access panels for proper lubrication and
maintenance. The base panel shall be constructed of fabricated steel structure provided with an under
frame suitably braced. Each unit shall include one piece drain pan constructed of 20- g a u g e galvanized
sheet steel plate or stainless steel. Drain pan shall extend under coil and fan sections with drain
connections. Removable panels in fan and coil sections shall provide access to all internal parts. Panels
shall be internally lined with 2.5 cm thick fiberglass as per section ―Insulation‖ for the thermal insulation
and acoustic lining.
vii. FAN MOTOR AND DRIVE
The fan motor shall be suitable for 415 ± 10% volts or 230±10% volts, 50 Hz, A.C. Supply, Single phase,
motors shall be provided with permanent capacitors. Motors shall be especially designed for
quite operation and motor speed shall not exceed 1440 rpm.
viii. FAN
Fan wheels and housing shall be fabricated from heavy gauge steel. Fan wheels shall be of double-
width, double inlet forward-curve, multi-blade type enclosed in a housing and mounted on a
common shaft. Fan housing shall be made of die-formed steel sheets with stream-lined inlets to
ensure smooth air flow into the fans, fan shaft bearing shall be oil/grease lubricated. All rotating
parts shall be dynamically balanced individually, and the complete assembly shall be statically and
hydraulically balanced. Fan speed shall not exceed 1000 rpm and maximum fan outlet velocity shall be
550 meters per minute.
ix. COOLING COIL
Cooling coils shall be of fin and tube type having aluminum fins firmly bonded to copper tubes assembled
in zinc coated steel frame. Face and surface areas shall be such as to ensure rated capacity from each
unit and air velocity across each coil shall not exceed 100 meters per minute. The coil shall be
pitched in the unit casing for proper drainage. Each coil shall be factory-tested at 21 Kg. per sq.cm air
pressure under water. Tube shall be mechanically / hydraulically expanded for minimum thermal contract
resistance with fins. The no. of fins per cm. shall be 4 to 5.
x. VIBRATION ISOLATORS
The indoor and outdoor units shall be provided with ribbed rubber pad vibration isolators.
xi. PAINTING
Split units shall be factory finished with durable alkyd spray enamel. Shop coats of paint that have
become marred during shipment or erection shall be cleaned off with mineral spirits, then coated with
enamel paint to match the finish over the adjoining shop-painted surface.
xii. PERFORMANCE RATING
The unit shall be selected for the lowest operating noise level. Capacity rating and power consumption
with operating points clearly indicated shall be submitted with the tenders and verified at the time of
testing and commissioning of the installation.
Refrigerant should be R-4R10A or any other CFC free refrigerant, Noise level should be less than 40Db,
with wireless remote controller LCD type with LED panel display, with sleep mode, auto restart, auto air
Page 926 of 1358

swing(up-down), high EER Rotary, dual protection & 3M micro protection filters.
7.0 AIR COOLED PACKAGED UNIT (INVERTER TYPE DRIVEN COMPRESSOR)
i. SCOPE OF WORK
The specification for Air-cooled Package Units With Scroll Compressor covers the design requirement,
constructional feature, supply, installation, testing & commissioning.
ii. TYPE
The Air-cooled Packaged units shall be factory fabricated and supplied with factory test certificates.
iii. CABINET CONSTRUCTION
The cabinet of packaged units shall be fabricated out of heavy gauge corrosion resistant sheet with
powder coating / enamel. The cabinet shall have removable panels to allow easy servicing of the unit,
giving easy access into the unit. The fan section of the packaged unit shall be acoustically insulated
at work.
iv. COMPRESSOR
The air-cooled packaged units shall comprise of one / two number Scroll compressor inverter driven
type. The compressor section shall have all four walls acoustically insulated with 50mm thick fiberglass
insulation; tissue paper & perforated Aluminium sheet to keep the sound level within 50db. The
compressor should be suitable to withstand voltages varying from 340 to 460 volts.
v. AIR-COOLED CONDENSER
The condenser frame shall be constructed from heavy duty aluminum and incorporate a copper
tube and aluminum fins coil. The coil shall be a minimum of 3 rows deep, with a minimum fin spacing of
2.0 mm. The copper tubes of the condenser should be integrally firmed of minimum OD of 19 mm.
vi. REFRIGERATION CIRCUIT
The refrigeration system shall be of direct expansion type and shall incorporate one/ two no. hermetic
scroll compressors complete with crankcase heaters.
vii. COOLING COIL

The cooling coil shall be constructed of rifled bore copper tubes and louvered aluminum fins, with the
frame and drip trays fabricated from heavy gauge aluminum. The drip tray must be double angled for
condensate flow and easily removable for cleaning. The cooling coil shall be a minimum of 4 rows deep.
The distance between the fins should not be less than 1.8mm and the face velocity should not be more
than 2.5m/s.
viii. FANS
The fans shall be of the forward curved centrifugal type, double width, double inlet and statically
and dynamically balanced. Each fan shall be driven by a high efficiency motor, through a self-
tensioning belt drive arrangement. Each fan shall be mounted on a vibration isolated deck.
The unit shall be factory aligned, tested and complete with starter mounted inside the cabinet,
refrigerant piping, complete with charging valves, thermostatic expansion valve, distributor, liquid
strainer, dehydrator, liquid line shut off valve and HP/LP cut out etc. The selector switch should be
concealed behind the hinged door and be suitable for operating the fan only or along with the
cooling unit. The selector switch should be able to turn the unit on cooling and air temperature
should be regulated with the thermostat which automatically starts and stops the compressor as
required. In the case of multiple compressors installed in one cabinet each should have an independent
refrigerant circuit. The blower of the packaged unit should be statically and dynamically
balanced and driven by three phase motor of repute make. The air quantity of packaged unit should have
at least 400 CFM / Ton capacity.
Page 927 of 1358

The fan & fan motor should be able to take static pressure drops in coil, ducts, grills / diffusers. The unit
should be factory wired and tested. The air filter should have large surface and duct holding capacity
which must be easily removable type for cleaning purposes.
ix. FOR HIGH CFM PACKAGED UNIT
a) Evaporator, Condenser, Fan etc of the unit shall be designed to meet the high sensible load of the air-
conditioned area.
b) Cooling coil shall have minimum four rows and fan shall be capable of delivering 500 CFM/TR.
c) Evaporator shall have large surface area as compared with normal unit.
d) Tonnage rating of unit shall be based on 35.0 deg. C ambient.
x. REFRIGERENT PIPING AND CONTROLS
Refrigerant piping and fittings interconnecting compressor condenser shall be all copper and valves
shall be brass/ gunmetal construction. The refrigerant used shall be ozone friendly HFC -R410a or any other
CFC free refrigerant.
8.0 HEAT RECOVERY VENTILLATIONSECTION: (ENTHALPY WHEEL)
a. Wheel: The wheel shall be made of alternate layer of corrugated and intervening flat composite
material of aluminum foil of uniform width to ensure smooth surface. The cross contamination
between the two streams shall be nil and leakage less than 0.04%. The wheel medium should be bonded
together to form rigid transfer medium forming a multitude of narrow channels ensuring laminar flow.
The wheels shall be of proven design.
The wheel can be fully wound or on larger units, sectorized, i.e., assembled in segments. In the latter
case the segments are assembled between rigid spokes thus ensuring structural longevity and allowing
replacement of one or specific segments only.
The wheel shall be cleanable by spraying its face surface with compressed air, low temperature steam
or hot water or by vacuum cleaning without affecting its latent properties.
The face velocity across the wheel should not exceed 700 fpm (3.5 m/s). The wheels shall be tested in
accordance with AHRI (Std. 1060) or ASHRAE S4-78 method of testing air to air heat exchangers.
Development and manufacturers shall meet all quality assurance criteria specified in BSEN ISO 9001.
The minimum sensible and latent efficiencies should be 75%. A computerized selection should be enclosed
along with the offer.
b. Casing: The casing shall be constructed as a single skin, self-supporting, galvanized sheet steel
structure and include rotary wheel support beams and purging sector. The casing shall be supplied with
access panels to facilitate inspection and service. Size 2150 mm and larger shall be in two sections to
facilitate shipping and handling.
c. Seals: The casing shall be equipped with adjustable brush seals, which minimize the carryover to
max 0.05 – 0.2%.
d. Hub and Spokes: Hub and Spokes on one piece rotor shall be Aluminium and on sectorized rotor
Hub shall be made of steel, painted with ani corrosion paint and galvanized sheet steel spokes.
e. Drive: The wheel shall be belt driven along its perimeter. A constant speed fractional horsepower
motor shall be used. The motor shall be mounted on a self-adjusting base to provide correct belt
tension.
TESTING
Page 928 of 1358

The Thermal Wheel shall be tested in accordance with the parameters fixed below.
∙ Supply Air Capacity - FDB/FWB.

∙ Exhaust Air Capacity - FDB / FWB.
∙ Fresh Air Capacity - FDB / FWB
Heat exchanger units (HRV) in double skin construction, constructed out of extruded Aluminium section
frame with puff insulated panels, blowers, IE-3 Motor plate to plate type Aluminium heat exchanger and
filters. The unit will have two separate passages, one for supply of fresh air and the other for exhaust of
cool air from the rooms after the recovery of energy. Efficiency of these heat exchangers shall be 60-65%.
The plate- t o - p l a t e heat exchanger shall be rigid thermally bonded seamless Aluminium channels
separated by extruded aluminum spacers of the following capacity.
9.0 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES FOR HVAC SYSTEMS
1. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
a. This specification covers complete variable frequency drives (VFDs) designated on the drawing
schedules to be variable speed. All standard and optional features shall be included within the VFD.
b. The frequency converter shall not be a general-purpose product, but a dedicated HVAC
engineered product.
c. The VFD and its options shall be factory mounted and tested as a single unit under full load
before dispatch.
d. The VFD shall be tested to UL 508C. The appropriate UL label shall be applied.
e. The VFD shall be CE marked and conform to the European Union Electro Magnetic Compatibility
directive.
f. The VFD shall be UL listed for a short circuit current rating of 100 kA and labeled with this rating.
2. TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
2.1 The VFD shall convert incoming fixed frequency three-phase AC power into an adjustable
frequency and voltage for controlling the speed of three-phase AC motors. The motor current shall
closely approximate a sine wave. Motor voltage shall be varied with frequency to maintain desired
motor magnetization current suitable for the driven load and to eliminate the need for motor derating.
When properly sized, the VFD shall allow the motor to produce full rated power at rated motor voltage,
current, and speed without using the motor's service factor. VFDs utilizing sine weighted/coded
modulation (with or without 3rd harmonic injection) must provide data verifying that the motors will
not draw more than full load current during full load and full speed operation.
2.2 The VFD shall include an input full-wave bridge rectifier and maintain a fundamental
(displacement) power factor near unity regardless of speed or load.
2.3 The VFD shall have a dual 5% impedance DC link reactor (harmonic filters) on the positive and
negative rails of the DC bus to minimize power line harmonics and protect the VFD from power line
transients. The chokes shall be non-saturating. Swinging chokes that do not provide full harmonic
filtering throughout the entire load range are not acceptable.
2.4 VFDs with saturating (non-linear) DC link reactors shall require an additional 3% AC line reactor to
provide acceptable harmonic performance at full load, where harmonic performance is most critical.
IEEE519, 1992 recommendations shall be used for the basis of calculation of total harmonic distortion
(THD) at the point of common coupling (PCC). On request VFD manufacturer shall provide THD figures
Page 929 of 1358

for the total connected load. The contractor should provide details of supply transformer rating,
impedance, short circuit current, short circuit impedance etc to allow this calculation to be made.
2.5 All VFDs shall contain integral EMC Filters to attenuate Radio Frequency Interference
conducted to the AC power line. The VFDs shall comply with the emission and immunity
requirements of IEC 61800-3: 2004, Category C1 with 50m motor cable (unrestricted distribution).
The suppliers of VFDs shall include additional EMC filters if required to meet compliance to this
requirement.
2.6 The VFD„s full load output current rating shall meet or exceed the normal rated currents of
standard IEC induction motors. The VFD shall be able to provide full rated output current
continuously, 110% of rated current for 60 seconds and 120% of rated torque for up to 0.5 second while
starting.
2.7 The VFD shall provide full motor torque at any selected frequency from 20 Hz to base speed while
providing a variable torque V/Hz output at reduced speed. This is to allow driving direct drive fans without
high-speed derating or low speed excessive magnetization, as would occur if a constant torque V/Hz curve was
used at reduced speeds. A Breakaway current of 160% shall be available.
2.8 A programmable automatic energy optimization selection feature shall be provided as standard in the
VFD. This feature shall automatically and continuously monitor the motor’s speed and load to adjust the
applied voltage to maximize energy savings.
2.9 The VFD must be able to produce full torque at low speed to operate direct driven fans.
2.10 Output power circuit switching shall be able to be accomplished without interlocking or damage to
the VFD.
2.11 An Automatic Motor Adaptation algorithm shall measure motor stator resistance and reactance to
optimize performance and efficiency. It shall not be necessary to run the motor or de-couple the motor from
the load to perform the test.
2.12 Galvanic isolation shall be provided between the VFD„s power circuitry and control circuitry to ensure
operator safety and to protect connected electronic control equipment from damage caused by voltage spikes,
current surges, and ground loop currents. VFDs not including either galvanic or optical isolation on both analog
I/O and discrete digital I/O shall include additional isolation modules.
2.13 VFD shall minimize the audible motor noise through the use of an adjustable carrier frequency.
The carrier frequency shall be automatically adjusted to optimize motor and VFD operation while reducing
motor noise. VFDs with fixed carrier frequency are not acceptable.
2.14 The VFD shall allow up to at least 100 meters of SWA (Single Wire Armor) cable to be used between
the FC and the motor and allow the use of MICS (Mineral Insulated Copper Sheath) cable in the motor circuit
for fire locations.
3. PROTECTIVE FEATURES
3.1 Overload protection in VFD shall automatically compensate for changes in motor speed.
3.2 Protection against input transients, loss of AC line phase, output short circuit, output ground fault,
over voltage, under voltage, VFD over temperature and motor over temperature. The VFD shall display
all faults in plain language. Codes are not acceptable.
3.3 Protect VFD from input phase loss. The VFD should be able to protect itself from damage and
indicate the phase loss condition. During an input phase loss condition, the VFD shall be able to be
programmed to either trip off while displaying an alarm, issue a warning while running at reduced
output capacity, or issue a warning while running at full commanded speed. This function is independent
of which input power phase is lost.
Page 930 of 1358

3.4 Protect from under voltage. The VFD shall provide full rated output with an input voltage as low
as 90% of the nominal. The VFD will continue to operate with reduced output, without faulting, with an
input voltage as low as 70% of the nominal voltage.
3.5 VFD shall include current sensors on all three output phases to accurately measure motor current,
protect the VFD from output short circuits, output ground faults, and act as a motor overload. If an output
phase loss is detected, the VFD will trip off and identify which of the output phases is low or lost.
3.6 If the temperature of the VFD„s heat sink rises to 80C, the VFD shall automatically reduce its
carrier frequency to reduce the heat sink temperature. It shall also be possible to program the VFD
so that it reduces its output current limit value if the VFD„s temperature becomes too high.
3.7 In order to ensure operation during periods of overload, it must be possible to program the VFD
to automatically reduce its output current to a programmed value during periods of excessive load.
This allows the VFD to continue to run the load without tripping.
3.8 The VFD shall have temperature-c on t ro lled cooling fan(s) for quiet operation, minimized
losses, and increased fan life. At low loads or low ambient temperatures, the fan(s) may be off even when
the VFD is running.
3.9 Protect from output switching: The VFD shall be fully protected from switching a contactor /
isolator at the output without causing tripping e.g.: for switching on/off the isolators of the AHU /
ventilation fans / pumps near the motor with VFD in ON mode.
3.10 The VFD shall store in memory the last 10 alarms. A description of the alarm, and the date and
time of the alarm shall be recorded.
3.11 When used with a pumping system, the VFD shall be able to detect no-flow situations, dry pump
conditions, and operation off the end of the pump curve. It shall be programmable to take
appropriate protective action when one of the above situations is detected.
4. INTERFACE FEATURES
4.1 Auto keys shall be provided on the control panel to start and stop the VFD and determine
the source of the speed reference. It shall be possible to either disable these keys or password
protect them from undesired operation.
4.2 There shall be an ―Info‖ key on the keypad. The Info key shall include ―on-line‖ c ontext
sensitive assistance for programming and troubleshooting.
4.3 The VFD shall be programmable to provide a digital output signal to indicate whether the VFD
is in Manual or Auto mode. This is to alert the Building Automation System whether the VFD is
being controlled locally or by the Building Automation System.
4.4 Password protected keypad with alphanumeric, graphical, backlit display can be remotely
mounted. Two levels of password protection shall be provided to guard against unauthorized
parameter changes.
4.5 All VFDs shall have the same customer interface. The keypad and display shall be identical and
interchangeable for all sizes of VFDs.
4.6 To set up multiple VFDs, it shall be possible to upload all setup parameters to the VFD„s keypad, place
that keypad on all other VFDs in turn and download the setup parameters to each VFD. To facilitate setting
up VFDs of various sizes, it shall be possible to download from the keypad only size independent parameters.
Keypad shall provide visual indication of copy status.
4.7 Display shall be programmable to communicate in multiple languages including English, Chinese,
Korean, Japanese, Thai and Indonesian.
4.8 A Red FAULT light, a yellow WARNING light and a green POWER-ON light shall be provided. These
indications shall be visible both on the keypad and on the VFD when the keypad is removed.
Page 931 of 1358

4.9 A quick setup menu with factory preset typical HVAC parameters shall be provided on the VFD. The
VFD shall also have individual Fan, Pump, and Compressor menus specifically designed to facilitate start-up
of these applications.
4.10 A three-feedback PID controller to control the speed of the VFD shall be standard.
4.11 This controller shall accept up to three feedback signals. It shall be programmable to compare the
feedback signals to a common set point or to individual set points and to automatically select either the
maximum or minimum deviating signal as the controlling signal. It shall also be possible to calculate the
controlling feedback signal as the average of all feedback signals or the difference between a pair of
feedback signals.
4.12 The VFD shall be able to apply individual scaling to each feedback signal.
4.13 For fan flow tracking applications, the VFD shall be able to calculate the square root of any or all
individual feedback signals so that a pressure sensor can be used to measure air flow.
4.14 The VFD„s PID controller shall be able to actively adjust its setpoint based on flow. This allows the VFD
to compensate for a pressure feedback sensor which is located near the output of the pump rather than
out in the controlled system.
4.15 The VFD shall have three additional PID controllers which can be used to control damper and valve
positioners in the system and to provide setpoint reset.
4.16 Floating point control interface shall be provided to increase/decrease speed in response to contact
closures.
4.17 Five simultaneous meter displays shall be available. They shall be selectable from (at a minimum),
frequency, motor current, motor voltage, VFD output power, VFD output energy, VFD temperature in
degrees, feedback signals in their own units, among others.
4.18 Programmable Sleep Mode shall be able to stop the VFD. When its output frequency drops below set
―sleep‖ level for a specified time, when an external contact commands that the VFD go into Sleep Mode, or
when the VFD detects a no-flow situation, the VFD may be programmed to stop. When the VFD„s speed is
being controlled by its PID controller, it shall be possible to program a ―wake-up‖ feedback value that will
cause the VFD to start. To avoid excessive starting and stopping of the driven equipment, it shall be possible
to program a minimum run time before sleep mode can be initiated and a minimum sleep time for the VFD.
4.19 A run permissive circuit shall be provided to accept a ―system ready‖ signal to ensure that the VFD
does not start until dampers or other auxiliary equipment are in the proper state for VFD operation. The
run permissive circuit shall also be capable of initiating an output ―run request‖ signal to indicate to the
external equipment that the VFD has received a request to run.
4.20 VFD shall be programmable to display feedback signals in appropriate units, such as inches of water
column (in-wg), pressure per square inch (psi) or temperature (°F). Examples can be room temperature in
0C , return air temperature in 0C , supply air temperature in 0C, CO2 concentration in ppm, pressure in bar,
differential pressure in PSI etc.
4.21 VFD shall be programmable to sense the loss of load. The VFD shall be programmable to signal this
condition via a keypad warning, relay output and/or over the serial communications bus. To ensure against
nuisance indications, this feature must be based on motor torque, not current, and must include a proof
timer to keep brief periods of no load from falsely triggering this indication.
4.22 Standard Control and Monitoring Inputs and Outputs
a. Four dedicated, programmable digital inputs shall be provided for interfacing with the systems control
and safety interlock circuitry.
b. Two terminals shall be programmable to act as either as digital outputs or additional digital inputs.
Page 932 of 1358

c. Two programmable relay outputs, Form C 240 V AC, 2 A, shall be provided for remote indication of
VFD status.
d. Each relay shall have an adjustable on delay / off delay time.
e. Two programmable analog inputs shall be provided that can be either direct-or-reverse acting.
f. Each shall be independently selectable to be used with either an analog voltage or current signal.
g. The maximum and minimum range of each shall be able to be independently scalable from 0 to 10 V
dc and 0 to 20 mA.
h. A programmable low-pass filter for either or both of the analog inputs must be included to
compensate for noise.
i. The VFD shall provide front panel meter displays programmable to show the value of each analog
input signal for system set-up and troubleshooting,
j. One programmable analog current output (0/4 to 20 mA) shall be provided for indication of VFD
status. This output shall be programmable to show the reference or feedback signal supplied to the VFD and
for VFD output frequency, current and power. It shall be possible to scale the minimum and maximum
values of this output.
k. It shall be possible to read the status of all analog and digital inputs of the VFD through serial bus
communications.
l. It shall be possible to command all digital and analog output through the serial communication bus.
4.23 Optional Control and Monitoring Inputs and Outputs
a. It shall be possible to add optional modules to the VFD in the field to expand its analog and digital
inputs and outputs.
b. These modules shall use rigid connectors to plug into the VFD„s control card.
c. The VFD shall automatically recognize the option module after it is powered up. There shall be no
need to manually configure the module.
d. Modules may include such items as:
e. Additional digital outputs, including relay outputs f. Additional digital inputs
g. Additional analog outputs
h. Additional analog inputs, including Ni or Pt temperature sensor inputs
i. It shall be possible through serial bus communications to control the status of all optional analog and
digital outputs of the VFD.
4.24 Standard programmable firefighter’s override mode allows a digital input to control the VFD and
override all other local or remote commands. It shall be possible to program the VFD so that it will ignore
most normal VFD safety circuits including motor overload. The VFD shall display FIREMODE whenever in
firefighter’s override mode. Fire mode shall allow selection of forward or reverse operation and the selection
of a speed source or preset speed, as required to accommodate local fire codes, standards and conditions.
4.25 A real-time clock shall be an integral part of the VFD.
a. It shall be possible to use this to display the current date and time on the VFD„s display.
Page 933 of 1358

b. Ten programmable time periods, with individually selectable ON and OFF functions shall be available.
The clock shall also be programmable to control start/stop functions, constant speeds, PID parameter
setpoints and output relays. Is shall be possible to program unique events that occur only during normal
workdays, others that occur only on non-workdays, and others that occur on specific days or dates. The
manufacturer shall provide free PC-based software to set up the calendar for this schedule.
c. All VFD faults shall be time stamped to aid troubleshooting.
d. It shall be possible to program maintenance reminders based on date and time, VFD running hours,
or VFD operating hours.
e. The real-time clock shall be able to time and date stamp all faults recorded in the VFD fault log.
f. The VFD shall be able to store load profile data to assist in analyzing the system demand and
energy consumption over time.
i. The VFD shall include a sequential logic controller to provide advanced control interface capabilities.
This shall include:
ii. Comparators for comparing VFD analog values to programmed trigger values.
iii. Logic operators to combine up to three logic expressions using Boolean algebra.
iv. Delay timers
v. A 20-step programmable structure
4.26 The VFD shall include a Cascade Controller which allows the VFD to operate in closed loop set point
(PID) control mode for one motor at a controlled speed and control the operation of 3 additional constant
speed motor starters.
5. SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS
5.1 The VFD shall include a standard EIA-485 communications port and capabilities to be connected to
the following serial communication protocols at no additional cost and without a need to install any
additional hardware or software in the VFD:
a. Metasys N2
b. Modbus RTU
5.2 VFD shall have standard USB port for direct connection of Personal Computer (PC) to the VFD. The
manufacturer shall provide at no-charge- PC software to allow complete setup and access of the VFD and
logs of VFD operation through the USB port. It shall be possible to communicate to the VFD through this USB
port without interrupting VFD communications to the building management system.
5.3 The VFD shall have provisions for an optional 24 V DC back-up power interface to power the VFD„s
control card. This is to allow the VFD to continue to communicate to the building automation system even if
power to the VFD is lost.
6. ADJUSTMENTS
6.1 The VFD shall have a manually adjustable carrier frequency that can be adjusted in 0.5 kHz increments
to allow the user to select the desired operating characteristics. The VFD shall also be programmable to
automatically reduce its carrier frequency to avoid tripping due to thermal loading.
6.2 Four independent setups shall be provided.
Page 934 of 1358

6.3 Four preset speeds per setup shall be provided for a total of 16.
6.4 Each setup shall have two programmable ramps up and ramp down times. Acceleration and
deceleration ramp times shall be adjustable over the range from 1 to 3,600 seconds.
Each setup shall be programmable for a unique current limit value. If the output current from the VFD
reaches this value, any further attempt to increase the current produced by the VFD will cause the VFD
to reduce its output frequency to reduce the load on the VFD. If desired, it shall be possible to program a
timer which will cause the VFD to trip off after a programmed time period.
If the VFD trips on one of the following conditions, the VFD shall be programmable for automatic or
manual reset: external interlock, under-voltage, over-voltage, current limit, over temperature, and VFD
overload. The number of restart attempts shall be selectable from 0 through 20 or infinitely and the
time between attempts shall be adjustable from 0 through 600 seconds.
An automatic ―start delay‖ may be selected from 0 to 120 seconds. During this delay time, the VFD
shall be programmable to either apply no voltage to the motor or apply a DC braking current if desired.
Four programmable critical frequency lockout ranges to prevent the VFD from operating the load at a
speed that causes vibration in the driven equipment shall be provided. Semi- automatic setting of
lockout ranges shall simplify the set-up.
7. OPTIONAL FEATURES
7.1 All optional features shall be built and mounted by VFD manufacturer as an inbuilt factory solution.
All optional features shall be UL listed by the VFD manufacturer as a complete assembly and carry a UL label.
8. SERVICE CONDITIONS
8.1 Ambient temperature at full speed, full load operation with continuous drive rated output current:
a. -10 to 45°C for ratings up to 90 kW without derating
b. -10 to 40°C for ratings 110 kW and higher without derating
c. Relative Humidity: 0 to 95%, non-condensing.

d. Elevation: Up to 3,300 feet without derating.
e. AC line voltage variation: + 10% of nominal with full output.
f. VFD Enclosure protection: IP 55, integral, with no additional cabinets.

g. Side Clearances: No side clearance shall be required for cooling.
h. All power and control wiring shall be done from the bottom.
I. All VFDs shall be plenum rated.
9. QUALITY ASSURANCE
9.1. To ensure quality, the complete VFD shall be tested by the manufacturer. The VFD shall drive a motor
connected to a dynamometer at full load and speed and shall be cycled during the automated test
procedure.
9.2. All optional features shall be functionally tested at the factory for proper operation.
ECBC Mandatory Requirements for HVAC Works- It needs to be complied by Contractor.
Page 935 of 1358

10.0 IDEC (Indirect Direct) Two stage evaporative cooling unit
1 SCOPE
The scope of this section comprises the supply, erection, testing and commissioning of two stage
evaporative cooling units conforming to these specifications and in accordance with the requirement of
drawings and schedule of quantities.
2 TYPES
The two- s t a g e evaporative cooling unit shall comprise of two sets of heat exchanger to effect
sensible cooling (without adding water) followed by adiabatic cooling (with addition of water) to be
achieved with spray of water over cellulose pad as indicated on drawings and identified in schedule of
quantities. The unit can be of blow through type (push through type).
4.0 CAPACITY
The capacity of two stage evaporative cooling unit shall be as shown on drawings and schedule of
quantities.
5.0 TWO STAGE EVAPORATIVE COOLING UNIT
The two- s t a g e evaporative cooling unit shall be blow through type with minimum 110% saturation
efficiency with sensible heat exchanger and cellulose paper pads both put together. The two heat
exchangers should be mounted on SS frame over the tank.
5.1 Housing:
Double skinned panels shall be 44/23±1 mm thick made of 0.6 mm GI pre coated sheet of min 180
GSM pressure injected with CFC Free PU foam insulation (Density 38-42 Kg/m3) with K factor not
exceeding 0.02 watt/M2 shall be fixed to 1.5 mm thick aluminum alloy twin box section hollow profile
structural framework. The outer sheet of panels shall be made of GI pre coated plasticized sheet of 0.6
mm thick. The wet section of the unit should be with inner sheet of GI plane plasticized sheet of 0.6 mm
thick.
The entire framewo rk shall be mounted on GI channel base (depending on unit size and weight) as per
manufacturer’s recommendation. The panels shall be sealed to the framework by heavy neoprene gaskets
held captive in the framed extrusion. All panels shall be detachable or hinged. Hinges shall be made of
die cast aluminum with stainless steel pivots, handles shall be made of hard nylon and be operational
from both inside and outside of the unit. The doors should have locks with keys for safety purposes. Unit
supplied with various sections shall be suitable for onsite assembly provided with assembly drawing.
All fixing and gaskets shall be concealed. Units shall have hinged, quick opening access door in the fan
section and also in filter section where filters are not accessible from outside. Access doors shall be
double skin type.
Water tank shall be fabricated from 1.2 mm thick SS-304 sheet with all corners duly SS welded. The tank
shall be complete with makeup connection with float, drain and overflow connections. The water tank
shall house both the sensible and adiabatic heat exchangers, submersible pumps (EBARA make Optima
model) for both heat exchangers with filtration mesh around both pumps. The tank should be designed
as chassis to hold the heat exchangers support systems and the secondary fans located above (in case
of unit is draw through type). The water tank, structural shall also be made of SS-304.
Mist eliminator shall be made of one pass GI pre coated in GI frame.
5.2 Sensible Heat Exchanger
The fresh air taken shall be cooled sensibly before mixing water to the air stream. This is the first heat
exchanger in an IDEC unit. The construction of it should be such that the air being sensibly cooled
(i.e., without adding water/air to it) should not get in contact with scavenging air.
Page 936 of 1358

The heat exchanger shall have peak wet bulb efficiency of 80%. This heat exchanger module shall be made
of engineering polymer with a cellulosic media thermally fused. The velocity within the heat exchanger
should not exceed 450 FPM (2.3 m/s) at any given cross section on the heat exchanger face area. These
need to be stacked up modularly to required air capacity. These Heat exchanger modules shall facilitate a
secondary air passage without mixing with the primary air flow. The heat exchanger shall be UL type
tested.
5.3 Adiabatic Heat Exchanger
This shall be of imported cellulose paper pads and of cross fluted configuration assembled in self-
supporting pads in a lightw e i g h t construction. The pads shall be able to redistribute the water and
shall be impregnated with insoluble antirot salts, rigidifying saturates and wetting agents with built in
eliminators. The velocity across the fill shall not exceed 450 fpm (2.3 m/s) and shall not allow
carryover of water. The minimum thickness of fill shall be 200 mm and minimum efficiency of pads 90%.
5.4 Blower Section
The blower section of the unit will consist of a single/multiple fan and motor assembly mounted on a
common base frame. The blowers shall be DIDW centrifugal backward curved blowers / SISW plug type
plenum fan. Blower assembly shall be dynamically balance to G2.5 as per AMCA standard. This assembly
should be isolated from the main casing through rubber block type vibration isolators.
While selecting the primary blowers; one should keep in mind the exhaust (scavenging) air through the
primary heat exchanger. The quantity of scavenging air should not exceed 35% to that of air being
cooled. A sufficient size manhole will be provided on both the end panels of the blower section.
Impeller shall be statically and dynamically balanced.
If it is plenum fans, they should be properly aligned to the drive shaft and fixed to the rigid structural
frame. The motor frame shall have arrangements for lateral and side- w i s e movement. The blower
and drive assembly should be provided with a belt guard. The door on the blower section should have
perforated MS frame fixed to the door frame for the safety of operator / maintenance person. This
will be used when blowers are required to be put in / lift out for maintenance purposes.
5.5 Motor:
The motor provided for the drive of fans shall be IE2/IE3 type, TEFC induction motor. The motor to be
selected for 10% of higher capacity than indicated BkW by blower/fan manufacturer of suitable shaft
speed 1450/1000 RPM.
5.6 Water Distributor
The Water distribution system shall be designed properly to get proper efficiency across the heat
exchangers. The piping used shall be of rigid U-PVC of 6.0 Kg/Cm2 rating. The piping shall be placed on
the SS distribution plate of the primary heat exchanger above the tank. The nozzles should be selected
for proper water distribution. The water provided should be clean potable water. The water quality
recommended is as mentioned below.
– Hardness: Not more than (NMT) 100 PPM.

– TDS not more than 350 PPM. TDS beyond this limit affects the efficiency of the Ambiator.
Wherever the water hardness is high the customer needs to go for a softener plant.
– PH not more than 8.5
5.7 UV Treatment Device
The water shall be duly treated through an UV device of adequate capacity to treat the water that is used
for cooling the system. This device helps in eradicating the germs/bacteria from the water.
5.8 Filters
The filter section shall comprise of min single stage of filtration level. The material of filters should be
HDPE type fitted on GI frame panel type construction with 90% efficiency down to 10 microns. The
Page 937 of 1358

filters should be washable type. The velocity across filters shall not exceed 500 fpm (2.5 m/sec)
6.0 PUMPS
Pumps shall be submersible type of SS body construction. Two separate pumps; one for each
sensible (primary heat exchanger) and Adiabatic Heat (Secondary) exchanger shall be provided by
supplier.
7.0 TESTING
Efficiency of air washer shall be computed from the measurements of air flow and dry and wet bulb
temperature of air entering and leaving the air washer and ambient temperatures.
Power and Control panel:
The panel should be Non compartmentalized, free standing, door in door, electrical panel made from
CRCA MS sheet – 1.6 mm thick with inbuilt PLC with BMS connectivity, Bottom entry, IP-55 protection.
The main door should have viewed glass. Cabling till ASP (customer to terminate power at incomer of
panel), lighting etc., shall consist of isolator (MPCB/MCB) suitable to kW rating of starter, ON/OFF, trip
indication lamps, Digital VAF meter.
The control panel should have sufficient space for VFDs (If necessary) and the electrical bypass for it.
PLC controller for fan, pumps ON/OFF for DAMA and/or cellulosic media. The PLC will take this decision
of pump switching ON/OFF accordingly set parameters of temp and Rh inside the room. The control
panel will be complete with electrical internal wiring, controls & field devices. The panel shall be located
next to the DAMA unit, all electrical interconnection between blower drive motor, recirculation pump &
UV unit shall be considered.
11.0 WET SCRUBBER (IN ANY OTHER AREA OTHER THAN KITCHEN AS REQUIRED)
1. SCOPE OF WORK
The specification for package type double skin scrubber for mechanical ventilation covers the design
requirement, constructional feature, supply, installation, testing & commissioning.
2. TYPE
The scrubber shall be a double skin spray type system & shall be draw through type.
3. HOUSING
Double skinned panels shall be 25 mm thick made of galvanized steel; pressure injected with foam
insulation (density 40 Kg / m3) shall be fixed to 1.5 mm thick aluminum alloy twin box section structural
framework with stainless steel screws. The outer sheet of panels shall be made of galvanized pre-
plasticized sheet of 24 gauge thick and inner sheet of 22-gauge plain GI sheet. The entire framework
shall be mounted on an aluminum alloy or galvanized steel (depending on size) channel base as
per manufacturer’s recommendation. The panels shall be sealed to the framew o r k by heavy duty
‗O„ rings gaskets held captive in the framed extrusion. All panels shall be detachable or hinged.
Hinges shall be made of die cast aluminum with stainless steel pivots, handles shall be made of hard
nylon and be operational from both inside and outside of the unit. Units supplied with various sections
shall be suitable for onsite assembly with continuous foam gasket. All fixing and gaskets shall be
concealed. Units shall have hinged, quick opening access door in the fan section and also in filter section
where filters are not accessible from outside. Access doors shall be double skin type. The recirculation
tank shall be fabricated from 18- g a u g e stainless steel sheet duly reinforced with all corners welded.
The tank shall be complete with double brass strainers, make-up connection with float, drain and overflow
connections.
4. FAN
Page 938 of 1358

The blower shall be Centrifugal Forward / Backward Curved DIDW fan wheel of totally GI Construction with
Inlet Cones and shall be complete with individual motor and drive and shall be mounted on C Channel
frame and Cushy Foot or Spring Mounts. Each Scrubber shall comprise of one / two no. fans to
handle air quantities. Each fan shall be driven by a suitable HP TEFC motor. The fan wheel will be of the
multiblade type and mounted on two self- aligning pillow block bearings of the requisite size. The fan
shall be run with the help of ―V‖ Groove drives as per the recommendation of the drive supplier.
5. MOTOR
The TEFC motor shall be suitable for 415 ± 10% volts, 3 phase, 50 Hz ± 5%, A.C supply. The motor shall
be with class B/E insulation confirming to IS 325. The motor speed shall be 1440 RPM maximum
designed and guaranteed for continuous operation at the nameplate rating. It should confirm to IP 55.
6. FILTER SECTION
The filters section shall incorporate metallic viscous filter (for removal of oil and grease) of thickness 50 mm
in suitable aluminum frame. Velocity of air across the filters shall not exceed 2.5 m/s.
7. SPRAY ARRANGEMENT
The wet section will have 18 G SS Tank and body with folded construction with the bolted openable
sides also in 18 G GI sheet. Spray arrangement shall be 2 bank air washers with 1/8‖ (3 mm) bore bronze
nozzles with brass plug complete with GI pipes and spray headers. The minimum number of nozzles
shall be 1 / sqft of face area. Face velocity not to exceed 500 FPM (2.5 m/s). PVC drain/overflow and
bleed off outlet are to be provided on all wet sections.
8. PUMP
The unit will have a single phase 220 volts + 10% 50 c/s power supply Monoblock self- priming pump
assembly to provide recirculated tank water and a pressurized flow via a piping system for proper water
distribution. The pump capacity will be such that it can take care of the bank of Nozzles provided and
the rigid media.
9. INSTALLATION
The fans, pumps, scrubber etc. shall be provided with necessary vibration isolation cushy foot
mounts. All necessary accessories such as nut bolts etc. shall be arranged by the contractor. The
contractor shall arrange his own labour with material for completion of assembly.
The contractor, if specifically specified in DBR, shall cast the RCC foundations for equipment.
Anti-vibration pads of adequate efficiency shall be provided.
10. TRANSIT DAMAGE
The contractor at his own cost shall restore the unit to its original condition in case of any damage.
TESTING
The AC contractor shall compute the unit air quantity with the help of velocity meter. The computed
results shall be allied with specified capacities and power consumption shall be tallied with the indicated
figures in the technical data furnished by the contractor.
All necessary instruments of proper accuracy and services needed for the tests required for the
computation of capacities and power consumption as required by the Consultant shall be provided
by the contractor at his own cost.
It shall also be the responsibility of the Contractor to supply the motors and starters to satisfy the local
regulations pertaining to the limitation of starting current and indemnify the Department from all
liabilities arising out of any objections raised by the local authorities in this regard.
Page 939 of 1358

12.0 INLINE & PROPELLER FANS
1. SCOPE
The scope of this section comprises the supply, installation, testing and commissioning of
centrifugal and inline fans conforming to these specifications and in accordance with the requirement
of drawings and DBR.
2. TYPE
Centrifugal and inline fans shall be of type as indicated in drawings and in DBR.
3. INLINE FANS
Inline fan shall incorporate SISW direct driven centrifugal fan with TEFC (IP-44) motor. The fan assembly
shall be enclosed in a sheet metal housing of 22- g a u g e GSS and with necessary inspection cover
with proper gasket assembly. The fan material shall be galvanized sheet steel. Flanges shall be provided
on both sides of the inline fan to facilitate easy connection. Flexible anti- vibration joints shall be
provided to arrest vibration being transferred to other equipment connected to inline fan. Motor shall
be single phase/three phase as per duty conditions.
All single-phase fans shall be provided with speed regulators while all three phase fans shall be provided
with opposed blade dampers in GSS construction at fan outlet for air balancing.
4. PROPELLER FANS
Propeller fans shall be directly driven, three or four blade type mounted on a steel mounting plate with
orifice ring.
Mounting plate shall be of steel construction, square with streamlined venturi inlet coated with baked
enamel paint. The mounting plate shall be of standard size, constructed of 12- t o - 1 6 - g a u g e steel
sheet depending upon the fan size. Orifice rings shall be correctly formed by spinning or stamping to
provide easy passage of air without turbulence and to direct the air stream.
Fan blades shall be constructed of aluminum or glass reinforced polypropylene. Fan hubs shall be of
heavy welded steel construction with blades bolted to the hub fan blades and assembly shall be statically
and dynamically balanced.
Shaft shall be of steel accurately ground and shall not pass through first critical speed through entire
range of specified fan speed.
Motor shall be standard permanent split capacitor of shaded pole for small sizes, totally enclosed
with pre-lubricated sleeve or ball bearings, designed for a quiet operation with a maximum speed
of 1000 RPM for fans 60 cm dia. or larger and 1440 RPM for fans 45 cm dia. and smaller. Motors for
larger fans shall be suitable for 415 ± 6% volts. 50 cycle 3-phase power supply and for smaller fans shall
be suitable for 220 ± 6% volts, 50 cycles single-phase power supply. Motors shall be suitable for horizontal
or vertical service as indicated in drawings and as
per requirements.
Propeller fans shall be provided with following accessories: -

a. Wire guard and bird-screen
b. Gravity louvers at outlet
c. Regulator for controlling fan speed for single-phase fan motor.

d. Single-phase preventors for 3 phase fans.
e. Wiring between regulator and fan motor including termination at both ends.
5. PERFORMANCE DATA
Page 940 of 1358

All fans shall be selected for the lowest operating noise level. Capacity rating, power consumption
with operating points clearly indicated shall be submitted and verified at the time of testing and
commissioning of installation.
6. TESTING
The capacity of all fans shall be measured by an anemometer. Measured airflow capacities shall
conform to the specified capacities and quoted ratings, power consumption shall be computed from
measurements of incoming voltage and incoming current.
The Fans shall be preferably AMCA certified. Also, it should be UL & FM/EN approved.
13.0 FAN SECTIONS
1. SCOPE
The scope of this section comprises the supply, installation, testing and commissioning of ventilation
fan sections conforming to these specifications and in accordance with the requirement of drawings
and DBR. Fan Outlet velocity shall not exceed 610 meters per minute.
2. TYPE
Ventilation fan sections shall be complete with Centrifugal Fans, belt driven fans complete with motor
drive and housing with weatherproof cowl.
3. UNIT CONSTRUCTION
i. Housing
The housing shall be fabricated out of 16- g a u g e steel sheet and shall have flange to be
connected to duct. The discharge cowl shall be hinged along one edge for easy access to motor and drive,
for inspection and maintenance. The entire assembly shall be weatherproof and provided with 18-
gauge galvanized steel mesh bird screen of 6 mm size on all discharge cowls around the outlet areas.
Shaft shall be constructed of steel, turned, ground & polished.
ii. Fan
Fan shall be forward / backward inclined wheel type designed for maximum efficiency,
minimum turbulence and quiet operation. Fan shall be statically and dynamically balanced. Fan shall
conform to specifications as given in specification No.SPC/CF – PF/01
iii. Motor
Motors shall be suitable for 415 +- 10% volts, 50 CPS, 3 Phase AC supply totally enclosed fan cooled
motor provided with class ‗F„ insulation& IE-3 class efficiency. Motor shall be designed for quiet
operation and motor speed shall not exceed 1440 RPM. Drive to fan shall be through belts.
iv. Back draft Damper
Where called for in DBR the ventilation fan section shall be provided with a rattle free back draft damper
to prevent air from re-entering the fan when fan is not in operation, thus sealing completely in
closed position. Damper shall be shatterproof under all conditions.
4. VIBRATION ISOLATION
The motor and fan assembly shall be isolated from base through Dunlop/Resistoflex vibration isolators.
Page 941 of 1358

5. PERFORMANCE DATA
All fans shall be selected for the lowest operating noise level. Capacity rating, power consumption
with operating points clearly indicated shall be submitted and verified at the time of testing and
commissioning of installation.
6. TESTING
The capacity of all fans shall be measured by an anemometer. Measured airflow capacities shall
conform to the specified capacities and quoted ratings, power consumption shall be computed from
measurements of incoming voltage and incoming current.
The Fans shall be AMCA certified. Also, it should be UL & FM/EN approved. Sound attenuators with/without
baffles to reduce noise generated at source itself wherever feasible.
14.0 AXIAL FLOW FANS
1. SCOPE
This section covers the technical requirements for manufacture, testing at works, delivery at site, testing
after installation, commissioning of axial flow fan equipment for ventilation and exhaust system. Their
location shall be as given in DBR and drawings. The fans shall be complete with all the accessories required
for proper installation and performance consisting mainly of the following: -
a. Suction and discharge side flanges and counter flanges suitably drilled, complete with bolts
& nuts, direct driving electric motor, suspension hangers (for ceiling hung fans only) for vibration
isolation (rubber in shear type). Any structural steel and hardware required for assembly,
installation, supporting of fan or accessories. 2 mm thick flexible connectors, fire resistant type at
suction and discharge end, Foundation bolts and vibration isolators (in case of floor mounting only).
b. Gravity louvers
2. APPLICABLE SPECIFICATIONS STANDARDS AND CODES.
Documents listed below should be read along with the technical data given in the DBR and shall be
applicable to the material, manufacture, testing and installation of axial flow fans and accessories.
a. I.S.S.: 3588 – 1986; specifications for electric axial flow fans.
b. ANSI/ASHRAE: standard 51
c. ANSI/AMCA: standard 210 & 300 for preparing performance curves, charts and testing
of fans for air and sound performance.
d. IS-2312 – Propeller type A.C ventilation fans.
e. BS – 848/ ACMA Tested – Methods of performance test for fans.
3. DESIGN & MANUFACTURING
i. Fan and Components
a. The fan shall be designed to handle the quantity of air against the static pressure
and at conditions indicated in the technical data. The fan shall be 70% efficiency at operating
conditions and shall have performance characteristics to match the approved performance
curves.
b. The unit shall be factory built to the highest standards to ensure rigidity, maximum
mechanical and electrical reliability, quiet, stable and vibration-free operation at the prescribed
conditions of flow, static and speed.
Page 942 of 1358

c. The casing shall be fabricated from heavy gauge sheet steel with suction and discharge
ends flanged and complete with counter flanges, G.I. nuts and bolts. The flanges and counter
flanges shall be matched and drilled suitably to receive flexible PVC connections. An inspection
door with handle and neoprene gaskets shall be provided. Support brackets for ceiling suspension
shall be bolted to the casing for connection to hanger bolts.
ii. Impeller & Blades
The impeller shall be cast aluminum; aero foil type with well-balanced blades made from cast aluminum
alloy or cast steel construction.
4. DRIVE
The fan hub and blades shall be directly mounted on the shaft of a totally enclosed motor, rotor of fan
motor shall be well balanced. The motor shall be TEFC, squirrel cage, IP 55 0– class H/F as per use, IE-3 class
efficiency preferably and suitable for 415 +- 10% V, 50 HZ 3 phase AC power supply. The motor shall be
dual speed wherever called for in DBR. The maximum motor speed shall be limited to 1450 RPM. Motor
conduit box shall be mounted on exterior of fan casing and lead wires from motor to conduit box shall be
protected from air stream by enclosing in a flexible metal conduit.
5. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
The firm shall submit the technical data and performance characteristics with operating points duly
marked for approval prior to fabrication. The supplier shall supply the test certificates of all the fans.
6. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
a. Static, dynamic balancing and vibration: the individual fan impeller, blades, motor
shall be statically and dynamically balanced independently. After assembly the entire fan motor
unit shall not give rise to any vibrations. The balancing shall be as per ISO: 1940 GR 6.3.
b. NOISE LEVEL: The tendered shall indicate the noise level generated by the fan/motor
unit in terms of decibel units to be measured at 3M from the unit. This shall fall in line with
the best engineering standard and shall not be more than 80 db.
7. PAINTING
All fans and their accessories shall be painted with two coats of suitable enamel paint after one coat of
Red Oxide primer.
8. PACKING
The fans shall be dispatched in packed condition to avoid damage during transportation to site. Transit
insurance for the fans shall be included in this offer.
9. INSPECTION & TESTING
All fans shall be subjected to inspection and testing requirements as given below. The contractor
shall be responsible for providing all inspection facilities and for conducting all tests at works and at site
after erection. Test certificates for all fans shall be submitted, some fans at the discretion of CLIENT/
AUTHORITY ENGINEER may be tested at the factory in his presence.
The performance of the fan motor unit shall be tested by operating at design conditions. The following
parameters will be tested vis-à-vis the approved performance curves.
a. Airflow capacity, Static head developed, BHP requirement, Vibration and noise level. The Fans
shall be AMCA certified. Also, it should be UL & FM/EN approved. Sound attenuators with/without baffles
to reduce noise generated at source itself wherever feasible.
Page 943 of 1358

15.0 SHEET METAL WORKS AND ACCESSORIES - (MANUAL FABRICATION)
1. SCOPE
The scope of this section includes supply, fabrication, installation & testing of all sheet metal ducts,
supply, installation, testing & balancing of all grills & diffusers as per specifications & drawings.
Except as otherwise specified all ductwork and related items shall be in accordance with these
specifications.
Duct work shall mean all ducts, casings, dampers, access doors, joints, stiffeners, hangers & all
accessories.
2. DUCT MATERIALS
The ducts shall be fabricated from galvanized steel sheets class VIII - Light coating of Zinc conforming
to ISS: 277-1962 (REVISED) and with a galvanizing thickness of nominal 120 gm. Per SQM surface area.
i. Only new, fresh, clean (unsoiled) and bright GI/Aluminum sheets shall be used. The IIM
Indore/ Authority Engineer reserves the right to summarily reject the sheets not meeting
these requirements. Fabrication of ducts shall be through Lock forming machines.
ii. All duct work, sheet metal fabrication unless otherwise directed, shall strictly meet requirements,
as described in IS:655-1963 with Amendment-I (1971 Edition)
Longer size Sheet Type of Joints Bracing

of Duct Thickness
GI (MM)
Up to 750 0.63 GI Flange -
751-1000 0.80 25x25x3 mm angle iron frame with 8 25X25X3 MM @ 1M

mm Dia nuts & bolts
1001-1500 0.80 40x40x5 mm angle iron frame with 8 40x40x5 MM @1M

mm Dia nuts & bolts
1501-2250 1.00 50x50x5 mm angle iron frame with 10 40x40x3 mm @ 1.2m to
mm Dia nuts & bolts at 125 mm center be braced diagonally.
2251 & 1.25 50x50x6 mm angle iron frame with 10 40x40x3 mm @ 1.6m
above mm Dia nuts & bolts at 125 mm center diagonally braced
iii. Ducts larger than 450 mm shall be cross broken, duct sections up to 1200 mm length may
be used with bracing angles omitted.
iv. Changes in section of ductwork shall be affected by tapering the ducts with as long a taper
as possible. All branches shall be taken off at not more than 45 Deg. Angle from the axis of the
main duct unless otherwise approved by the Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore.
v. All ducts shall be supported from the ceiling/slab by means of M.S. rods of 10 MM Día with M.S.
angle at the bottom of size 40 mm x 40 mm x 6 mm for sizes up to 1500 mm at 3 m intervals.
Above size 1500 mm up to 2250, support shall be provided with 10 mm dia. MS rod and MS angle
size 50 mm x 50 mm at bottom at 2.5 m intervals. Above size 2250 mm support shall be provided
with 12 mm Dia MS rod and MS angle size 50 mm x 50 mm at bottom.
3. INSTALLATION
i. All ducts shall be fabricated and installed in workman like manner, generally conforming to relevant
Page 944 of 1358

BIS codes. Round exposed ducts shall die formed for achieving perfect circle configuration.
a. Ducts so identified on the drawing shall be acoustically lined and thermally insulated as described in
the section ‗Insulation„ and as indicated in DBR. Duct dimensions shown in drawings are overall sheet metal
dimensions inclusive of the acoustic lining where required and indicated in DBR.
b. Ducts shall be straight and smooth on the inside with neatly finished joints. All joints shall be made
airtight.
c. All exposed ducts up to 60 cm width within conditioned spaces shall have slip joints. The internal ends
of the slip joints shall be in the direction of airflow. Ducts and accessories within ceiling spaces visible from
air-conditioned areas shall be provided with two coats of matt black finish paint.
d. Change in dimensions and shape of ducts shall be gradual. Air turns shall be installed in all vanes
arranged to permit the air to make the turn without appreciable turbulence.
e. Ducts shall be fabricated as per details shown on drawings. All ducts shall be rigid and shall be
adequately supported and braced where required with standing seams, tees of ample size to keep the ducts
true to shape and to prevent buckling, vibration or breaking.
f. All sheets metal connections, partitions and plenums required to confine the flow of air to and
through the filters and fans shall be constructed of 18 Gauge GSS thoroughly stiffened with 25mm x 25mm
x 3mm angle iron braces and fitted with all necessary inspection doors as required to give access to all parts
of the apparatus. Doors shall be not less than 45cm X 45cm in size.
g. Plenums shall be panel type and assembled at site. Fixing of MS angle iron flanges of duct
pieces shall be with rivet heads inside i.e., Towards G.S. sheet and riveting shall be done from
outside.
h. Rubber gasket 3 mm thick shall be used between duct flanges and between duct and duct
supports instead of felt in all ducting installation for complete sealing.
ii. During the construction, the Contractor shall temporarily close duct openings with sheet metal
covers to prevent debris-entering ducts and to maintain opening straight and square, as per direction of
a. Great care should be taken to ensure that the ductwork does not extend outside and beyond height
limits as noted in the drawings.
b. All duct work shall be of high quality approved galvanized sheet steel guaranteed not to crack or peel
on bending or fabrication of ducts. All joints shall be tight and shall be made in the direction of airflow.
c. The ducts shall be reinforced where necessary and must be secured in place so as to avoid vibration
of the duct on its support.
d. All air turns of 45 degrees or more should include curved metal blades or vanes arranged so as to
permit the air to make abrupt turns without appreciable turbulence. Turning vanes shall be securely
fastened to prevent noise or vibration. All ducts shall be fabricated and installed in accordance with modern
design practice. The sheet metal gauges, and fabrication procedures as given in I.S. specifications shall be
adhered to and shall be considered as an integral part of these specifications.
e. The ductwork shall be varied in shape and position to fit actual conditions at building. All changes shall
be in accordance with the accepted duct design and subject to the approval of the Authority Engineer.
f. Sponge rubber or approved equal gaskets shall be installed between all connections of sheet metal
ducts to walls. Sheet metal connections shall be made to walls and floors by means of galvanized steel angles
anchored to the building structure with anchor bolts and with the sheet bolted to the angles. Sheet metal
connections shall be as shown in the drawings or as directed by Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore.
g. All ductworks shall be independently supported from building construction. All horizontal ducts
Page 945 of 1358

shall be rigidly and securely supported, in an approved manner, with trapeze hangers formed of galvanized
steel rods and galvanized steel angel/channel under ducts. All vertical ductworks shall be supported by
structural members on each floor slab. Duct supports may be through galvanized steel insert plates left in
slab at the time of slab casting. Galvanized steel cleat with aloe for passing the hanger rods shall be welded
to the plates. Trapeze hangers formed of galvanized steel rods and angles / channels shall be hung through
these cleats. Wherever use of metal insert plates is not feasible, duct support shall be through dash / anchor
fastener driven into the concrete slab by electrically operated gun. Hanger rods shall then hang through the
cleats.
h. Where ducts pass through brick or masonry openings, it shall be provided with 25 mm thick TF quality
thermo Cole around the duct prior to sealing of the opening.
i. All ducts shall be totally free from vibration under all conditions of operation. Whenever ductwork is
connected to fans, air handling units or blower coil units that may cause vibration in the ducts, ducts shall be
provided with a flexible connection, located at the unit discharge. Flexible connections shall be constructed
of fire retarding flexible heavy canvas sleeves at least 100 mm long but not more than 200 mm, securely
bonded and bolted on both sides. Sleeves shall be made smooth, and the connecting ductwork rigidly held
by independent supports on both sides of the flexible connection. The flexible connection shall be suitable
for pressure at the point of installation.
j. Flanges and supports are to be black, mild steel and are to be primer coated on all surfaces before
erection and painted with aluminum thereafter. Accessories such as damper blades and access panels are
to be of materials of appropriate thickness and the finish similar to the adjacent ducting, as specified.
k. The ductwork should be carried out in a manner and at such a time as not to hinder or delay the work
of the other agencies, especially the boxing or false ceiling Contractors.
4. DAMPERS
At the junction of each branch duct with the main duct and split of main duct, volume control dampers must
be provided. Dampers shall be rigid in construction to the passage of air.
The volume dampers shall be of an approved type, lever operated and complete with suitable level links &
quadrants, locking devices, which will permit the dampers to be adjusted and locked in any position.
The dampers shall be of opposed blade or louver type. The damper blade shall not be less than 1.25 mm
(18) gauge and shall not be over 225 mm wide. Automatic and manual volume opposed blade dampers shall
be complete with frames and bronze bearings as per drawings. Damper frames shall be constructed of 16-
gauge steel.
After completion of the ductwork, dampers are to be adjusted and set to deliver the required amount of air
as specified in the drawings.
5. ACCESS PANEL
A hinged and gasket access panel shall be provided on ductwork before each control device that may be
located inside the ductwork. Doors shall be provided with neoprene rubber gaskets. Angle joints shall be
provided with neoprene rubber gaskets for leak tightness of the joints. Access door/panels shall be
provided: - Near each smoke sensor Any other place specifically mentioned in the drawing or if asked by IIM
Indore/ Authority Engineer during execution stage.
6. MISCELLANEOUS
a. Sponge rubber gaskets are also to be provided behind the flange of all grills.
b. Each shoot from the duct, leading to a grille, shall be provided with an air deflector to divert the air
into the grille through the shoot.
Page 946 of 1358

c. Inspection doors measuring at least 450 mm x 450 mm are to be provided in each system at an
appropriate location, as directed by the Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore.
d. Diverting vanes must be provided at the bends exceeding 600 mm and at branches connected into
the main duct without a neck.
e. Proper hangers and supports should be provided to hold the duct rigidly, to keep them straight and
to avoid vibrations. Additional support is to be provided where required for rigidity or as directed by the
f. All duct supports, flanges, hangers and damper boxes etc. Shall be given 2 coats of red oxide paint
before installation and one coat of aluminum paint after the erection, at no extra cost.
g. All angle iron flanges are to be welded electrically and holes to be drilled.
h. All the angle iron flanges are to be connected to the GSS ducts by rivets at 100 mm centers.
16.0 GRILLS / DIFFUSERS
1. SUPPLY AND RETURN AIR DIFFUSERS
Supply and return air diffusers shall be made of extruded aluminum section. The diffusers shall be powder
coated in finish. Supply air diffusers shall be provided with screw operated opposed blade volume control
devices of extruded aluminum in black anodized finish. The diffusers shall be suitable for concealed fixing
arrangement and as approved by Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore/AUTHORITY ENGINEER. It should be anti-
smudge type. Colour code of diffuser needs to be approved by Authority Engineer.
The diffusers shall be provided with a removable central core. All diffusers shall be selected as per selection
curves and in consultation with Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore /Authority Engineer. All diffusers shall have
soft continuous rubber/foam gasket between the periphery of the diffusers and the surface on which it has
to be mounted.
a. LINEAR GRILLS:
Linear continuous supply or return air grills shall be extruded aluminum construction with fixed horizontal
bars at 15 0 inclination with flanges on both sides. The thickness of fixed bar louvers shall be 5mm in front
and the flange shall be 20mm wide with round edges. The grille shall be suitable for concealed fixing and
horizontal bars of the grille shall be mechanically crimped from the back to hold them.
Volume control device of extruded aluminum construction in black anodized finish shall be provided in S.A.
duct collars.
b. DOUBLE ADJUSTABLE LOUVERED SUPPLY/ RETURN AIR GRILLS WITH HORIZONTAL /VERTICAL OR
VERTICAL/ HORIZONTAL LOUVER ARRANGEMENT:
The grille shall be adjustable as each louver shall be pivoted to provide pattern with 00 to plus or minus 150
ARC up to 300 deflections down towards. The louvers shall hold deflection settings under all conditions of
velocity and pressure. The rear louver of the register shall be in black shade.
Volume control device of extruded aluminum construction with black anodized finish shall be provided in
S.A. grills.
c. EXHAUST AIR REGISTER:
The exhaust air register shall be made of extruded aluminum with fixed horizontal louvers at a 40-degree
angle setting on a 20 mm louvers pitch. The register shall have a 20 mm wide flange with round edges all
Page 947 of 1358

around. The register shall be suitable for front screw fixing.
Volume control device of extruded aluminum construction with black anodized finish shall be provided.
d. MULTI SLOT CEILING DIFFUSERS:
The multi slot ceiling diffuser shall be made of extruded aluminum with various slot widths and air pattern
deflectors. Deflectors in each slot provide an adjustable air pattern of 180 degree full. A special plenum shall
be provided for each supply air diffuser. The linear diffuser shall have alignment strips to give straight look
while installation.
Hit & miss type volume control damper of extruded aluminum construction with mill finish shall be with
multi-slot supply air diffuser.
e. LINEAR CEILING MOUNTED DIFFUSERS:
Linear ceiling mounted air terminals shall be made of extruded aluminum surface mounted one way or two-
way pattern. The linear terminal shall have alignment strips to give straight look while installation. Volume
control device of extruded aluminum construction in mill finish shall be provided in S.A. diffuser. It should
be anti-smudge type. Colour code needs to be approved by E-I-C.
f. FRESH AIR INTAKE LOUVERS:
Fresh air intake louvers 50 mm deep (minimum) wherever required as per shop drawing will be made of
extruded aluminum construction duly anodized or powder coated. Bird/insect screen will be provided with
the intake louvers. The blades are inclined at 450 on a 40 mm blade pitch to minimize water ingress. The
lowest blade of the assembly shall extend out slightly to facilitate disposal of rainwater without falling in
door/wall on which it is mounted.
Wherever specified, the intake louvers shall be provided with factory fitted all aluminum construction
volume control dampers in black anodized finish.
g. LAMINAR FLOW DIFFUSERS
i. INTRODUCTION
Diffusers are available for flush mounting in the ceiling. Suitable angle frames are also provided
for the modular panel construction. The units are available in three standard sizes for top entry
complete with opposed blade dampers.
ii. DESCRIPTION
LFD laminar flow diffusers are constructed from 18 swg Aluminium sheet, perforated face with
approx. 50% perforation. The perforated front face is an openable hinge type complete with
key operated dampers from front.
iii. SIZES
Available in standard sizes of 600 x 600 mm, 900 x 600 mm & 1200 x 600 mm or as per
requirements.
iv. FEATURES
• Suitable for modular panel assemblies.
• Top entry with opposed blade dampers.
• Pivoting type face plate for damper operation from front.
• Easy maintenance and cleaning
Page 948 of 1358

v. FINISHESD STANDARD
a) Epoxy Polyester Powder Coated off white/pure white
b) Natural anodized.
c) Diffuser shall be smudge proof type.
2. MOTORIZED COMBINED SMOKE & FIRE DAMPERS – SPRING RETURN
All supply and return air ducts at AHU room crossings (or ducts as applicable) and at all floor crossings shall
be provided with approved make fire and smoke dampers of at least 90 minutes fire rating certified by CBRI
ROORKEE as per UL 555:1973
Fire damper blades & outer frame shall be formed of 1.6 mm galvanized sheet steel. The damper blade shall
be provided on both ends using chrome-plated spindles in self-lubricated bronze bushes. Stop seals will be
provided on top and bottom of the damper housing made of 16 g galvanized sheet steel. For preventing
smoke leakage side seals will be provided.
In normal position damper blade shall be held in open position with the help of a 24 V operated electric
actuator thereby providing maximum air passage without creating any noise or chatter.
The damper shall be actuated through an electric actuator. The actuator shall be energized with the help of
a signal from the smoke detector installed in AHU room/R.A. duct/damper. The A/C Contractor shall also
provide a smoke detector. The fire damper shall also close due to Temp. rise in S.A. ducts thru the electric
temp. sensor factory set at 165 Deg. F micro switches with bake lite base will be provided to stop fan motor
and give open & close signal at remote panel in case of motorized actuator.
Each damper in case of motorized smoke-cum-fire damper shall have its own panel which will incorporate
necessary circuit required to step down voltage available from power supply to shown status of the damper
(open or close), to allow remote testing of damper & indication in event of damper closure due to signal
from smoke sensor/temp. sensor& reset button. An additional terminal will be provided to have a signal
(sound beep or visual) in central control room.
The damper actuator shall be spring return so as to close the damper in the event of power failure
automatically and open the same in case of power being restored.
Spring return action of the actuator shall be an in-built mechanism and shall not be mounted externally.
The damper shall be installed in accordance with the installation method recommended by the
manufacturer.
3. PAINTING
All grilles, and diffusers shall be powder coated in color as approved by Engineer-in charge/AUTHORITY
ENGINEER before installation.
All ducts immediately behind the grilles/diffusers etc. Are to be given two coats of black paint in Matt finish.
4. TESTING
After completion, all duct systems shall be tested for air leakage.
The entire air distribution system shall be balanced to supply the air quantity as required in various areas
and the final balance of air quantity through each outlet shall be submitted to the engineer- in-charge for
approval. Measured air quantities at fan discharge and at various outlets shall be identical to or less than
5% in excess of those specified and quoted. Branch duct adjustments shall be permanently marked after
air balancing is completed so that these can be restored to their correct position if disturbed at any time.
Page 949 of 1358

17.0 SHEET METAL WORKS –(FACTORY FABRICATED)
1. GENERAL
i. The work under this part shall consist of furnishing labour materials, equipment and
appliances as specified necessary and required to install all sheet metal and other allied
work to make the air conditioning supply, ventilating, and exhaust system ready for
operation as per drawings.
ii. Except as otherwise specified all duct work and related items shall be in accordance with
these specifications.
iii. Ductwork shall mean all ducts, casings, dampers, access doors, joints, stiffeners and hangers.
2. DUCT MATERIALS
i. The ducts shall be fabricated from galvanized steel sheets (with light coating of zinc which
shall be lead free) class VIII conforming to ISS:277-1962 (revised) or aluminum sheets
conforming to ISS:737-1955 (wherever aluminum ducts are specified).
ii. All duct work, sheet metal thickness and fabrication unless otherwise directed, shall strictly
meet requirements, as described in IS:655-1963 with amendment-I (1971 edition)
iii. GOVERNING STANDARDS: - Unless otherwise specified here, the construction, erection,
testing and performance of the ducting system shall conform to the SMACNA-1995 standards
(―HVAC Duct Construction Standards-Metal and Flexible-Second Edition-1995‖ SMACNA)
3. RAW MATERIAL
i. Ducting
a. All ducting shall be fabricated of LFQ (Lock Forming Quality) grade prime G.I. row material
furnished with accompanying Mill test Certificates.
b. Galvanizing shall be 120gms/sq.m. (total coating on both sides).
c. In addition, if deemed necessary, samples of raw material, selected at random by IIM

INDORE/ AUTHORITY ENGINEER„s site representative shall be subject to approval and tested for
thickness and zinc coating at contractor’s expense.
d. The G.I. raw material should be used in coil-form (instead of sheets) so as to limit the
longitudinal joints at the edges only irrespective of cross-section dimensions.
ii. Duct Connectors and Accessories
All transverse duct connectors (flanges/cleats) and accessories/related hardware are such at support system
shall be zinc-coated (galvanized)/
4. FABRICATION STANDARDS
i. All ductworks including straight sections, tapers, elbows, branches, show pieces, collars,
terminal boxes and other transformation pieces to provide the requisite quality of ducts and
speed of supply.
ii. Coil lines to ensure location of longitudinal seams at comes/folded edges only to obtain the
required duct rigidity and low leakage characteristics. No longitudinal seams permitted along
any face side of the duct.
iii. All ducts, transformation pieces and fittings to be made on CNC profile cutlers for required
accuracy of dimensions, location and dimensions of notches at the folding lines.
iv. All edges to be machine treated using lock formers, flanges and roller for fuming up edges.
v. Sealant dispensing equipment for applying built-in sealant in Pittsburgh lock where sealing of
longitudinal joints is specified.
Page 950 of 1358

5. SELECTION OF G.I. GAUGE AND TRANSVERSE CONNECTORS
Duct Construction shall be in compliance with 1‖ (250 Pa)w.g. static norms as per SMACNA.
All transverse connectors shall be the Rolamate 4-bolt slip-on flange system or Techno Fabri duct
imported makes of similar 4-bolt systems with built-in sealant if any to avoid any leakage additional sealant
to be used.
The specific class of transverse connector and duct gauge for a given duct dimensions will be 1‖(250 Pa)
pressure class.
Non-toxic, AC-applications grade P.E. or PVC Casketing is required between all mating.
6. DUCT CONSTRUCTION
The fabricated duct dimensions should be as per approved drawings and all connecting sections are
dimensionally matched to avoid any gaps.
7. DIMENSIONAL TOLERANCES:
i. All fabricated dimensions will be within +/- 1.0 mm of specified dimension. To obtain
required perpendicularity, permissible diagonal tolerances shall be +/- 1.0 mm per meter.
ii. Each and every duct piece should be identified by color coded sticker which shows specific part
numbers, job name, drawing number, duct sizes and gauge.
iii. Ducts shall be straight and smooth on the inside Longitudinal seams shall be airtight and at
comers only, which shall be either Pittsburgh or Snap Button Punch as per SMACNA practice,
to ensure air tightness.
iv. Changes in dimensions and shape of ducts shall be gradual (between 1:4 and 1:7). Turning
vanes or air splitters shall be installed in all bends and duct collars designed to permit the air to
make the tum without appreciable turbulence.
v. Plenums shall be shop/factory fabricated panel type and assembled at site.
vi. Factory Fabricated ducts shall have the thickness of the sheet shall be as follows.
Bracing
Size with GI tie
S. Sheet Fastener Type of Joints Support
of rods of
No. Thickness Size Bracing Angle
Duct following
sizes
Up to Fabricated out of G.I. The flanges

0.63 25x25x3
1 750 3/8‖ sheet of 24 gauge at shall be Cross tie rods
mm mm
mm every 1.2 m internal. made out to be fitted
751 of the of suitable
E-24 type flange, same duct Dia GI rod for
mm
0.63 shall be fabricated 25x25x3
2 to 3/8‖ sheet and each piece of
mm out of 24 G sheet at all the four duct mm
1000
every 1.2 m internal. corners
mm
Page 951 of 1358

1001 shall be
E-22 type flange shall
mm fitted for
0.80 be fabricated 40x40x5
3 to 5/8‖ fitting the
mm out of 22 G sheet at mm
1500 bolt
every 1.2 m internal.
mm
1501
J-16 type flange, shall
mm 40x40x6
1.00 be fabricated out of
4 to 5/8‖ mm
mm 16G sheet at every
2250 angle
1.2 m internal.
mm
50x50x6
mm
2251 J-16 type flange, shall with
mm 1.25 be fabricated out of MS
5 5/8‖
and mm 16G sheet at every rods
above 1.2 m internal. of 12
mm
dia.
vii. The gauges, joints and bracings for sheet metal duct work shall further conform to the e provisions
as shown on the drawings.
viii. Ducts larger than 600 MM shall be cross broken, duct sections up to 1200 MM length may be used
with bracing angles omitted.
ix. Changes in section of ductwork shall be affected by tapering the ducts with as long a taper as
possible. All branches shall be taken off at not more than 45 DEG. Angle from the axis of the main
duct unless otherwise approved by the Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore.
x. All ducts shall be supported from the ceiling/slab by means of M.S. Rods of 10 MM (3/8") DIA with
M.S. Angle at the bottom. The rods shall be anchored to R.C. Slab using metallic expansion
fasteners.
8. INSTALLATIONS
i. During the construction, the contractor shall temporarily close duct openings with sheet metal
covers to prevent debris entering ducts and to maintain opening straight and square, as per
direction of Authority Engineer.
ii. Great care shall be taken to ensure that the duct work does not extend outside and beyond
height limits as noted on the drawings.
iii. All duct work shall be of high quality approved galvanized sheet steel guaranteed not to crack or
peel on bending or fabrication of ducts. All joints shall be airtight and shall be made in the
direction of air flow.
iv. The ducts shall be reinforced with structured members where necessary and must be secured
in place so as to avoid vibration of the duct on its support.
v. All air turns of 45 degrees or more shall include curved metal blades or vanes arranged so as
to permit the air to make abrupt turns without appreciable turbulence. Turning vanes shall be
securely fastened to prevent noise or vibration. The duct work shall be varied in shape and position
to fit actual conditions at the building site. All changes shall be subject to the approval of the
Page 952 of 1358

Authority Engineer.
vi. Sponge rubber or approved equal gaskets of 6 MM maximum thickness shall be installed
between duct flanges as well as between all connections of sheet metal ducts to walls, floor
columns, heater casings and filter casings. Sheet metal connections shall be made to walls and
floors by means of wooden member anchored to the building structure with anchor bolts and
with the sheet screwed to them.
vii. Flanges bracings and supports are to be Rolamate or Techno Fabriduct. Accessories such as
damper blades and access panels are to be of materials of appropriate thickness and the finish
similar to the adjacent ducting, as specified.
viii. Joints, seams, sleeves, splitters, branches, takeoffs and supports are to be as per duct details as
specified, or as decided by Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore.
ix. Joints requiring bolting or riveting may be fixed by Hexagon nuts and bolts, stove bolts or buck
bolts, rivets or closed center top rivets or spot welding. Self-tapping screws must not be used.
All jointing material must have a finish such as cadmium plating or Galvanized as appropriate.
x. Fire retarding flexible joints are to be fitted to the suction and delivery of all fans. The material is
to be normally double heavy canvass or as directed by Authority Engineer. On all circular spigots
the flexible materials are to be screwed or clip band with adjustable screws or toggle fitting. For
rectangular ducts the material is to be flanged and bolted with a backing flat or bolted to mating
flange with backing flat.
xi. The flexible joints are to be not less than 75 MM and not more than 250 MM between faces.
xii. The duct work should be carried out in a manner and at such a time as not to hinder or delay
the work of the other agencies, especially the boxing or false ceiling contractors.
xiii. Duct passing through brick or masonry, wooden framework shall be provided within the opening.
Crossing duct shall have heavy flanges, collars on each side of wooden frame to make the duct leak
proof.
9. DOCUMENTATION FOR CHECKS
For each drawing, all supply of ductwork must be accompanied by computer-generated detailed Quantity
indicating all relevant duct sizes, dimensions and quantities. In addition, summary sheets are also to be
provided showing duct areas by gauge and duct size range as applicable.
Check sheet covering each fabricated duct piece showing dimensions and external surface area along with
summary of external surface area of duct gauge-wise.
All duct pieces have a part number, which should correspond to the serial number assigned to it in the Check
sheet. The above system will ensure speedy and proper site verification and approvals.
10. TESTING
After duct installation, a part of duct section (approximately 5% of total ductwork) may be selected at
random and tested for leakage. The procedure for leak testing should be followed as per SMACNA- ―HVAC
Air Duct Leakage Test Manual: (First Edition).
11. INSULATION:
A: DUCT
SCOPE
The scope of this section comprises the supply and application of insulation conforming to these
Page 953 of 1358

Specifications.
Insulation material shall be nontoxic, chemically inert, noncombustible, non-ignitable, shall have zero ozone
depletion potential, zero calorific value no heat evolution and shall be inherently proof against rotting,
mould and fungal growth and attack by vermin.
The materials shall comply with following standards.BS 476: Part 4 – Non-Combustible BS 476: Part 5 – Not
easily Ignitable (Class P) BS 476: Part 6 – Fire propagation Index (I<12) BS 476: Part 7 - Surface spread of
flame (Class 1)
The material should comply to Class„O„fire rating as per BS 476 part 6&7.
The product shall be able to work effectively at an ambient temperature range of -100ºC to 150ºC.
B: AHU / DUCT ACOUSTIC LINING (Insulation Thickness & Density as per requirements)
ACOUSTIC INSULATION
MATERIAL: ACOUSTIC LINING OF AHU ROOM AND LINING OF DUCTS:
For acoustic lining of AHU room/plant room the material shall be resin bonded glass wool of density 32
Kg/m3. All ducts up to a distance of 3m from AHU outlet or as shown in the drawing shall be acoustically
lined from inside.
Application:
AHU/DG Plant Room acoustic insulation:
Clean the inner surface of duct which is to be lined with wire brush to remove the dirt.
Fix insulation material of specified thickness covered overlapped with R P Tissue paper over it and
then covering the material with 0.8 mm thick perforated aluminum sheet fixed with the help of self- tapping
screws and shall be neatly finished to give true surface finish. The overlap at the corner shall not be less
than 10mm.
LINING OF DUCTS:
First 3 meter length of supply air duct shall be & Plenum acoustically insulated with 25 mm thick fiberglass
of density 48 Kg./Cu.M. and covered with 0.5 mm thick perforated Aluminium sheets from the inside of the
duct.
a) Apply a thin layer of tar paints.
b) Fix-up fiberglass slabs
c) Cover-up with perforated Aluminium sheets with the help of G. I. Screw Washers.
C. PIPING / DUCT /EQUIPMENT INSULATION:
All pipe/duct insulation shall be as specified in DBR meeting functional requirements. Insulation will be
Nitrile Rubber/Glass Wool as per requirements & as specified in DBR.
D. MATERIAL
• Insulation material shall be Closed Cell Elastomeric Nitrile Rubber.
• Density of Material shall be between 50+/-10% Kg/m3.
• Thermal conductivity of elastomeric nitrile rubber shall not exceed 0.035 W/mP0PK at an average
Page 954 of 1358

temperature of 0P0PC.
• The insulation shall have fire performance such that it passes Class “O” as per BS476 Part 7 for
surface spread of flame as per BS 476 and also pass Fire Propagation requirement as per BS476 Part
6 to meet the Class ‗O„ Fire category as per 1991 Building Regulations (England & Wales) and the
Building Standards (Scotland) Regulations 1990.
• Water vapour permeability shall not exceed 0.017 Perm inch (2.48 x 10-14 Kg/m.s.Pa), i.e. Moisture
Diffusion Resistance Factor or ‗µ„value should be minimum 7000.Complete pipe insulation shall
have 200 g/m² factory laminated, treated woven Glass Cloth coating for mechanical and UV
protection. The thickness of the insulation shall be as specified for the individual application.
• An air gap of 25 mm shall be present between adjacent insulation surfaces carrying chilled water
or refrigerant. Before applying insulation, all pipes shall be brushed and cleaned. All Pipe
surfaces shall be free from dirt, dust, mortar, grease, oil, etc. Nitrile Rubber insulation shall be
applied as follows:
• Insulating material in tube form shall be sleeved on the pipes.
• On existing piping, pre slit, self- adhesive tube with factory laminated woven glass cloth coating
shall be placed. Remove the release paper and make a seam joint. Cover the joint with an integral
glass cloth flap. Butt joints shall be sealed with adhesive and shall be covered with same glass
cloth (slit opened tube of the insulating material (slit with a very sharp knife in a straight line) shall
be placed over the pipe and) adhesive shall be applied as suggested by the manufacturer.
• Adhesive must be allowed to tack dry and then press surface firmly together starting from butt
ends and working towards center.
• Wherever flat sheets shall be used, Factory cut sheets shall be used (it shall be cut out in correct
dimension.) All longitudinal and transverse joints shall be sealed as per manufacturer
recommendations.
• The insulation shall be continuous over the entire run of piping, fittings and valves.
• All valves, fittings, joints, strainers, etc. in chilled water piping shall be insulated to the same
thickness as specified for the main run of piping and application shall be same as above. Valves
bonnet, yokes and spindles shall be insulated in such a manner as not to cause damage to
insulation when the valve is used or serviced.
• The detailed application specifications are as mentioned separately. The manufacturer’s

trained installer should only be used for installation.
E. RECOMMENDED ADHESIVE
In all cases, the manufacturer’s recommended Adhesive (SR-998) should be used for the specified purpose.
F. PARAMETERS FOR SELECTION OF THICKNESS
a) Design Basis: Condensation Control
b) Region: Costal Area

c) Application: Outdoor & Indoor
d) Design Conditions: 30 Deg. C & 82 % RH
Page 955 of 1358

i) Thickness of Insulation
e) Pipeline Temperature 7.0 Deg. C
ii) Drain Water Pipeline Temperature 15.0 Deg. C
Up To 50 mm Pipe Size - 19 mm Thick Insulation
iii) Refrigerant Pipeline Temperature 3.0 Deg. C
Up To 50 mm Pipe Size - 19 mm Thick Insulation
Above 50 mm & Up To 100 mm Pipe Size - 25 mm Thick Insulation
Page 956 of 1358

1. Checks for Insulation
Unless otherwise specified checks for duct and pipe insulation for the project shall be on the
basis of center line measurements described herewith.
a. Pipe Insulation shall be measured in units of length along the center line of the installed pipe, strictly
on the same basis as the piping measurements described earlier. The linear measurements shall
be taken before the application of the insulation. It may be noted that for piping measurement, all
valves, orifice plates and strainers are not separately measurable by their number and size. It is to
be clearly understood that for the insulation measurements, all these accessories including cladding,
valves, orifice plates and strainers shall be considered strictly by linear measurements along the
center line of pipes and no special rate shall be applicable for insulation of any accessories,
fixtures or fittings whatsoever.
b. Duct Insulation and Acoustic Lining shall be measured on the basis of surface area along the center
line of insulation thickness. Thus, the surface area of externally thermally insulated or acoustically
lined be based on the perimeter comprising center line (of thickness of insulation) width and depth
of the cross section of insulated or lined duct, multiplied by the center-line length including tapered
pieces, bends, tees, branches, etc. as measured for bare ducting.
2. Duct Insulation Material
Thermal insulation material for Duct insulation shall be with factory laminated black fiber glass cloth
closed cell Elastomeric UV resistant or Plain polyethylene material. Thermal conductivity as per BS 874
part 2 – 86 (DIN 52613 52612) / DIN EN 12667 / EN ISO8497 of the insulation material shall not
exceed 0.038 W/moK or 0.212 BTU / (Hr- ft2-oF/inch) at an average temperature of 30oC. The density of
the nitrile rubber shall be 40-60 Kg/m3 & for polyethylene material it shall be 25-30 Kg/m3 and shall
be plain material. The product shall have a temperature range of –40 oC to 105oC.
The insulation material shall be fire rated for Class 0 as per BS 476 Part 6 : 1989 for fire propagation test
and for Class 1 as per BS 476 Part 7, 1987 for surface spread of flame test. Water vapour permeability
shall be not less than 0.024 per inch (2.48 x 10- 13 Kg/m.s.Pa i.e. µ>7000: Water vapour diffusion
resistance) as per DIN 53122 part 2, DIN 52615 / EN 12086 & EN13469.
In addition to the above properties the insulation material for ducts shall be anti-microbial.
Microbiological growth on insulation surface shall be in accordance with ASTM G-21 and bacterial
resistance to ASTM2180.
The Material shall comply to ISO 5659 / BS 6853 / ABD 0031 for smoke density and toxicity values.
The thermal conductivity of insulation material shall not be effected by aging as per DIN 52616 standard.
The thickness of the insulation shall be as specified for the individual application. Each lot of insulation
material delivered at site shall be accompanied with manufacturers test certificate for density
and thickness. Samples of insulation material from each lot delivered at site may be selected by
Owner’s site representative and gotten tested for thermal conductivity and density at Contractor’s
cost. Adhesive used for sealing the insulation shall be non-flammable and with low VOC content
(maximum 850 gm/l as per IGBC guidelines) strictly as per manufacturer’s recommendations.
DUCTING INSULATION THICKNESS SHALL BE AS PER TABLE BELOW.

Ducting Position Thk. for non-coastal places
SA duct in RA path 19 mm
SA duct: 19 mm
Ducted return air system
RA duct: 19 mm
Both SA & RA exposed Both 25 mm
Page 957 of 1358

3. DUCT INSULATION External thermal insulation shall be provided as follows:
The thickness of insulation material shall be as per DBR/ drawings. Following procedure shall
be adhered to:
• Duct surfaces shall be cleaned to remove all grease, oil, dirt, etc. prior to carrying out
insulation work.
• Material shall be fitted under compression and no stretching of material shall be
permitted. All longitudinal and transverse joints shall be sealed by providing 50 mm
wide Fiber glass cloth laminated tape as per manufacturer recommendations. The
insulation installers shall be certified by the manufacturer.
• Where ducts/pipes penetrate walls / floor it shall be insulated with intumescent
properties insulation material for fire protection. The treatment shall be minimum 500
mm extended on both sides.
UNDERDECK INSUALTION-
Under deck Insulation for exposed slab with 25 MM Thk Pre-Insulated PIR Panel with Washers, G.I. Crossed
50 mm wide patty, Joints sealed with Hot / Cold Bitumen etc. As Specified. The density of insulation shall be
48 ± 2 KG/m3. both sides shall be with aluminum foil. Thermal Conductivity of insulation shall be 0.021
(W/m⁰ K). Insulation shall be Fire Classification with BS 476 Class O, Part 6&7.
QUALITY CHECKS ON DUCTING
Sl. DESCRIPTION YES - OK NO - REMARKS

No. X
1 Whether material adheres to Fabrication Standards as specified
(Look form Quality Sheets)
2 Valid for construction Drawings. at site.
3 Cross breaking, bracings / reinforcements are as per standard.
4 Air tightness of transverse / Longitudinal Joints ensured.
5 Grease and heat resistant sealant for kitchen exhaust duct.
6 Neoprene gaskets for pharmaceutical and clean room projects

used
7 Check following aspects of duct supporting system
Page 958 of 1358

Sl. No. DESCRIPTION YES - OK REMARKS

NO - X
7.1 Hanger spacing
7.2 Anchor bolts size and quality
7.3 Primer painting of supports
7.4 Check allowable load on trapeze angle for bigger ducts
8 Check whether contractor has provided
8.1 Vanes in elbows
8.2 Clinched collar at take Offs
8.3 Splitters
9 Check transitions & offsets slopes & fabrication.
10 Whether the installed ducting is as per layout

approved, check locations, headroom etc.
11 Whether grilles / diffusers are as per approved shade.
12 Check the method of installation for Grilles / Diffusers
13 Repair / paint damaged surfaces.
14 Check the coordination of following activities as per the

given sequence:-14.1 Main Ducts Cut for taking collars
14.2 Match / Fabricate collar taking false ceiling framework

for diffuser into account
14.3 Fix grilles / diffuser framework in false ceiling
14.4 Install the collar
14.5 Install diffuser
15 All elbows / turning points and branches to be properly

supported
16 Access door is provided at serviceable position for fan

and fire damper
17 Air balancing for room is studied
18 Air replacement is considered for air exhausted from

room
19 PVC or stainless-steel material is used for corrosive

fume exhaust system.
20 Anti vermin netting installed for louvers removable and

serviceable.
21 Water or gas vent outlet is not installed near air intake

louver.
22 Kitchen exhaust is not short circuited to outdoor air
intake louver.
Page 959 of 1358

Sl. No. DESCRIPTION YES - OK REMARKS

NO - X
23 Kitchen room pressure is slightly below the surrounding.

area.
24 Sound level of fan is studied.
25 Face velocity for louvers / grills / diffusers is studied.
26 Air distribution of the room is studied.
27 Cross break all flat surfaces to prevent vibrations or

buckling due to air flow.
28 Sides of ducts having collar for grills should not be.

cross broken to facilitate alignment of grills.
29 All bends and collars should have vanes.
30 If duct passes through fire chamber increase sheet

thickness.
31 Kitchen exhaust ducts to be tapered at bottom for oil /

grease collection.
32 Avoid flanged joints in kitchen exhaust duct above false

ceiling.
33 When aluminum ducts are used with steel angles, steel

to be painted with Zinc chromate paint
34 Provide check nuts with duct hangers
35 Ducts below 250 mm should not be more than 1 m long

to facilitate proper joining.
36 Plenums should have flanged and bolted ends for

rigidity and easy maintenance.
37 Avoid 'U' bends in ducts
38 Provide long radius bends and offsets.
39 No collars to be taken from top.
40 Install duct spool pieces near equipment for easy

removal.
18.0 PIPING AND FITTINGS
a) SCOPE:
The scope of this section comprises the supply and laying of Copper pipes on GI Cable tray, pipe fittings and
testing of refrigerant piping required for the complete installation as shown in the drawings. All piping
inclusive of fittings and valves shall follow the applicable Indian Standards.
b) REFRIGERANT PIPING:
Page 960 of 1358

i. All refrigerant pipes and fittings shall be type `L' hard drawn copper tubes for large unit’s soft
copper tubes for low- c a p a c i t y units with wrought copper fitting suitable for connection with
silver brazing or as per Manufacturers recommendations.
ii. All joints in copper piping shall be sweat joints using low temperature brazing. Before joining any copper
pipe or fittings, its interior shall be thoroughly cleaned be passing a clean cloth via wire or cable through
its entire length. The piping shall be continuously kept clean of dirt etc. while construction of the joints.
Subsequently, it shall be thoroughly blown out using carbon dioxide/nitrogen.
iii. Refrigerant lines shall be sized to limit pressure drop between evaporator and condensing unit as per as
per Manufacturers recommendations/approved by Consultants.
iv. Removable type combination drier and filter shall be installed in liquid line of the refrigeration system
incorporating a three-way valve bypass. After ninety days of commissioning, liquid line drier and filter
cartridges must be replaced by contractor at actual cost to be borne by owner.
v. After the refrigerant piping installation has been completed the refrigerant piping system shall be
pressure tested using Freon mixed with nitrogen at a pressure of 600 PSI. (High side) and 250 PSI (Low
side) in DX system & Freon mixed with nitrogen at a pressure of 600 PSI in VRV system. Pressure shall be
maintained in the system, for a minimum of 48 hours. The system shall then be evacuated to a minimum
vacuum of 74cm. of mercury and held for 48hours, during which time, change in vacuum shall not exceed
12 cm of mercury. Vacuum shall be checked with vacuum gage.
vi. All refrigerant piping shall be installed strictly as per the instructions and recommendations of air
conditioning equipment manufacturer. Properly sized oil traps shall be provided where required.
vii. All the refrigerant tube shall be thoroughly tested and checked for leaks, washed with industrial carbon
tetra chloride once, followed by two flushing with nitrogen and one flushing with refrigerant. All safety
controls shall be suitably set, and a record of all settings shall be furnished to the Authority Engineer.
viii. Refrigerant pipe joints, bends should be connected with preformed ready to use joints, couplers and
bends and not by flaring.
c) COLD WATER AND DRAIN PIPING:
i. All pipes to be used for cold water (makeup), drain, and condensate drain shall be approved make and
fittings of 4-6 KG / CM2 pressure rating Rigid PVC Pipes.
ii. Condensate from the evaporator unit shall be drained through properly installed drain piping designed
to prevent any accumulation of condensate in the drain pan. Drain piping shall be made of 20mm dia
/25mm dia / 32mm dia / 40mm dia / 50mm dia rigid PVC pipe of 6 Kg/Sq cm. pressure rating with
watertight threaded connections, leading from the room unit to a suitable drain point. Complete drain
piping shall be made leak proof and watertight by means of precise installation and the use of leak proof
sealant/adhesives. Insulation of drain piping by 6 mm thick Nitrile Rubber„O‟ class pipe section. Cold
water piping within the building may also be insulated.
e) PIPING INSTALLATION:
i. Tender drawings indicate schematically the size and location of pipes. The contractor, on the award of
the work, shall prepare detailed working drawings, showing the cross-section, longitudinal sections,
details of fittings, locations of isolating and control valves, drain and air auto vent valves, and all pipe
supports. He must keep in view the specific openings in buildings and other structures through which
pipes are designed to pass.
ii. Piping shall be properly supported on, or suspended from, stands, clamps, hangers as specified and as
required. The contractor shall adequately design all the brackets, saddles, anchors, clamps and hangers,
and be responsible for their structural sufficiency.
iii. Pipe supports shall be of GI Cable tray with steel, adjustable for height and primer coated with rust
preventive paint and finish coated black. Where pipe and clamps are of dissimilar materials, a gasket shall
be provided in between spacing of pipe supports shall not exceed the following:
Page 961 of 1358

Pipe Size Spacing between supports.
Up to 50mm 1.5 meter

iv. Vertical risers shall be parallel to walls and column lines and shall be straight and plumb. Risers passing
from floor to floor shall be supported at each floor by clamps or collars attached to pipe and with a 15mm
thick rubber pad or any resilient material. Where pipes pass through the terrace floor, suitable flashing
shall be provided to prevent water leakage. Risers shall have a suitable clean out at the lowest point and
air vent at the highest point.
v. Insulated piping shall be supported in such a manner as not to put undue pressure on the insulation. A
14-gauge metal sheet shall be provided between the insulation and the clamp, saddle or roller, extending
at least 15cm on both sides of the clamp, saddles or roller.
vi. All pipe work shall be carried out in a workmen like manner, causing minimum disturbance to the existing
services, buildings, rods and structure. The entire piping work shall be organized, in consultation with
other agencies work, so that laying of pipe supports, pipe and pressure testing for each area shall be
carried out in one stretch.
vii. Cut-outs in the floor slab for installing the various pipes are indicated in the drawings. The contractor
shall carefully examine the cut-outs provided and clearly point out wherever the cutouts shown in the
drawings do not meet with the requirements. Workable alternatives may be suggested in such cases.
viii. The contractor shall make sure that the clamps, brackets, clamps saddles and hangers provided for pipe
supports are adequate.
f) TESTING & BALANCING:

ix. After the refrigerant piping installation has been completed the refrigerant piping system shall be
pressure tested using, Freon mixed with nitrogen at a pressure of 600 PSI. (High side) and 250 PSI (Low
side) in DX system & Freon mixed with nitrogen at a pressure of 600 PSI in VRV system. Pressure shall be
maintained in the system, for a minimum of 48 hours. The system shall then be evacuated to a minimum
vacuum of 74cm. of mercury and held for 48hours, during which time, change in vacuum shall not exceed
12 cm of mercury. Vacuum shall be checked with vacuum gage.
x. Piping repaired subsequent to the above pressure test shall be re-tested in the same manner.
xi. System may be tested in sections and such sections shall be securely capped, then retested for entire
system.
xii. The contractor shall give sufficient notice to all other agencies at site, of his intention to test a section or
sections of piping and all testing shall be witnessed and recorded by Owner's site representative.
xiii. Painting of MS support with black color.
19. UVGI (Ultraviolet Germicidal Irradiation)
Supply, Installation, testing, commissioning and handing over of the duct mounted/ AHU mounted
Ultrav iolet Germicidal Irradiations ( UVGI) System for maintaining indoor Air Quality in AHU unit. The
lamp shall have 9000 hrs life, ballasts shall be electronic type, life rated greater than 15000 stars. An hour
meter shall be provided in the remotely mounted electrical box to indicate Lamp change and should be
designed to achieve kill rate of not less than 90% per pass. The prices include all interconnected wiring
between the UVGI Lamps.
The system shall be applied downstream of duct length and on the side of the AHU coil to ensure no
mold growth.
Installation of UVGI frame in the duct shall be with factory provided Guide Rails and Installation Rails.
Cover Plates and all necessary hardware required for installation shall be factory provided by
Manufacture " All wetted parts shall be Stainless Steel to render it suitable for use in Hospitals, Health Care
Facilities, and in Food Processing Plants. All non-wetted parts shall be powder coated.
Page 962 of 1358

The Lamps shall be 9000 hrs. life with not less than 25% derating provide Rated Average Life of 9000 hrs.
Lamps shall be environmentally friendly.
Ballasts shall be electronic type, life rated for greater than 15,000 stars.
An Hour Meter shall be provided in the remotely mounted Electrical Box to indicate Lamp change. The Hour
Meter shall have at least Two normally Open (NO) Dry Contacts, one to activate unit mounted indicating
lamp to warn Lamp change, and the other for remote indication or interface to BMS.
It Should be designed to achieve Kill Rate not less than 90% per pass.
Appropriate Safety and Caution Notice shall be screen printed on the cover plate of UVGI frame and on the
electrical box. Placing adhesive labels shall not be accepted, so as not to compromise on safety.
A proper supporting system for UVGI to be provided & will be in contractor's scope.
Air Ionizers: - (STP cum ETP Plant & STP Plant –Indoor Air quality):-
Air Ionizers of suitable CFM & adequate No. shall be provided as per relevant standards & norms by the EPC
Contractor as per ACPH requirement of Plant Room of STP cum ETP and STP (2 No. of Plant) to control the
odor to acceptable level & maintain desirable indoor air quality inside the plant room. Ionizers will be
placed after the fresh air fan & air will be supplied uniformly through perforated duct. It shall target the
obnoxious /toxic/pungent smell gases & convert it into non-harmful gases. It should also target
microorganisms & particle counts, VOC, static charges, mold growth, outside air contaminants etc.
The Air Purification System shall be a product of an established manufacturer. It shall be designed using
ASHRAE Standard 62.1. The EPC contractor needs to provide Indoor Air Quality calculations using the
formulas within ASHRAE Standard 62.1 to validate acceptable indoor air quality. The Air Purification
Technology shall have been tested by UL or Intertek/ETL preferably to prove conformance to UL 867 for
electronic devices. EPC Contractor shall submit their certifications along with their submittal.
Ionization system shall be capable of:
1. Effectively killing microorganisms downstream of the ionization equipment (mold,

bacteria, virus, etc.).
2. Controlling gas phase contaminants generated from human occupants, building

structure, furnishings and outside air contaminants.
3. Reducing space particle counts.
4. Reducing space static charges.
5. When mounted to the air entering side of a cooling coil, keep the cooling coil free from
pathogen and mold growth.
6. EPC contractor shall provide documentation that proves the product has minimum kill
rates for the following pathogens given the allotted time and in a space condition:
a) MRSA: 99.5% in 60 minutes or less preferably
b) E. Coli: 93.5% in 30 minutes or less preferably
c) H1N1: 86.6% in 60 minutes or less preferably
d) Aspergillus: 74.8% in 60 minutes or less preferably
Page 963 of 1358

TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
The AC Contractor shall have a dedicated experienced, specialized, approved, testing and commissioning (T&C)
team /agency responsible for coordination with other trades, preparation of T&C plan method statement &
T&C procedures, organizing & scheduling the T&C activities along with the progress of works, supervision any
re-testing, coordination with third parties for commissioning & certification, organizing & performing testing
for satisfaction of all Statutory Bodies, T&C record documentation & handover.
(a) GENERAL
a. Testing, adjusting and balancing of heating, ventilating and air-conditioning systems at site.
b. Testing, adjusting and balancing of HVAC Hydronic system at site.

c. Testing, adjusting and balancing of exhaust system at site. Comply with current editions of all
applicable practices, codes, methods of standards prepared by technical societies and Associations
including:
ASHRAE: 2007 HVAC Application or latest version.
SMACNA: Manual for the Balancing and Adjustment of air distribution system.
d. AC Contractor shall submit a Test, adjust, balance procedure/method statements/charts

for approval to Client.
(b) PERFORMANCE
a. Verify design conformity.
b. Establish fluid flow rates, volumes, and operating pressures.
c.
T
ake electrical power readings for each motor.
d. Establish operating sound and vibration levels.
e. Adjust and balance to design parameters.
f. Record and report results as per the formats specified.
(c) DEFINITIONS
a. Test: To determine quantitative performance of equipment.
b. Adjust: To regulate for specified fluid flow rates and air patterns at
terminal equipment (e.g. reduce fan speed, throttling etc.)
c. Balance: To proportion within distribution system (submains, Branches and

terminals) in accordance with design quantities.
(d) TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING (TAB) PROCEDURES
The following procedures shall be directly followed in TAB of the total system. Before
Page 964 of 1358

commencement of each one of the TAB procedure explained hereunder, the AC

Contractor shall intimate the Client about his readiness to conduct the TAB procedures in
the format given in these specifications.
(e) DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM AND REQUIREMENTS
Adjust and balance the following system to provide most energy efficient operation compatible with selected
operating conditions.
a. All supply, return and outside air systems.
b. All exhaust air systems.
c. All chilled water systems.
d. All cooling tower (condenser) water systems.
e. Emergency purge systems.
(f) AIR SYSTEMS
I. Air Handlers Performance
The TAB procedure shall establish the right selection and performance of the AHUs with the following results
:
a. Air-IN DB and WB temperature.
b. Air-OUT DB and WB temperature.
c. Dew point air leaving.
d. Sensible heat flow.
e. Latent heat flow.
f. Sensible heat factor.
g. Fan air volume.
h. Fan air outlet velocity.
i. Fan static pressure.
j. Fan power consumption.
k. Fan speed.
II. Air distribution
Both supply and return air distribution for each AHU and for areas served by the AHU shall be determined
and adjusted as necessary to provide design air quantities. It shall cover balancing of air through main and
branch ducts.
III. The Preparatory Work
To conduct the above test, following preparatory works are required to be carried out including the
availability of approved for construction shop drawings and submittals:
a. All outside air intake, return air and exhaust air dampers are in proper position.
Page 965 of 1358

b. All system volume dampers and fire dampers are in fully open position.
c. All access doors are installed & are airtight.
d. Grilles are installed & dampers are fully open.
e. Provision and accessibility of usage of TAB instruments for traverse measurements are available.
f. All windows and doors are in position.
g. Duct system is of proper construction and is equipped with turning vanes and joints are sealed.
h. Test holes and plugs for ducting.
(g) HYDRONIC SYSTEM BALANCING
I. The Hydronic system shall involve the checking and balancing of all water pumps, piping network
(main & branches), the heat exchange equipment like cooling and heating coils, condensers and chillers
and cooling towers in order to provide design water flows.
II. The essential preparation work, must be done by the HVAC Contractor prior to actual testing,
adjusting and balancing of HVAC system and ensure following :
∙ Availability of coordinated drawings and approved submittals and system sketch with design
water flows specified thereon.
∙ Hydronic system is free of leaks, is hydrostatically tested and is thoroughly cleaned, flushed
and refilled.
∙ Hydronic system is vented.
III. The AC Contractor shall confirm completion of the basic procedures and prepare check lists for
readiness of system balance.
a. Check pumps operation for proper rotation and motor current drawn etc.
b. Confirm that provisions for TAB measurements (Temperature, pressure and flow
measurements) have been made.
c. Open all shut-off valves and automatic control valves to provide full flow through coils. Set all
balancing valves in the preset position, if these values are known. If not, shut all riser balancing valves
except the one intended to be balanced first. Balancing work for both Chilled Water System and Condenser
Water System shall be carried out in a professional manner and test reports in the specified format shall
be prepared and presented to the Client / Consultant for endorsement.
(h) READINESS FOR COMMENCEMENT OF TAB
Before starting of any of the tests, the readiness to do so should be recorded as per the prescribed check
list.
(i) TAB INSTRUMENTS
I. Air Measuring Instruments
a. For measuring DB and WB temperature, RH and dew point, microprocessor based TSI USA make
VelociCalc Plus Meter, Model 8386, or equivalent shall be used. This instrument shall be capable of
calculating the sensible, latent total heat flows, sensible heat factor and give printouts at site and have data
Page 966 of 1358

logging/downloading facility.
b. For measuring Air velocity, DB temperature and Air volume, TSI USA make VelociCalc
meter model 8386/ 8345 or equivalent shall be used. It shall be able to provide instant print out of
recorded Air volume readings.
c. Pitot tube.
d. Electronic Rotary Vane Anemometer TSI make or equivalent. e. Accubalance Flow Measuring
Hood TSI make or equivalent.
[All above instruments shall have a valid certification from a reputed testing institution.]
II. Hydronic Measuring Instruments

a. For measurement of water flow across balancing valves, instruments as provided by the
manufacturer of the valves specific to the type of valves shall be need. This shall include but not be limited
to differential pressure manometers. Temperature shall be measured using electric thermometers from
thermowells provided at strategic location by the HVAC Contractor. The water balancing shall be carried
out being computer simulation program provided / certified by the balancing valve manufacturer.
III. Rotation Measuring Instrument
a. Electronic Digital Tachometer.
IV. Temperature & RH Measuring Instrument
a. TSI VelociCalc model 8386 / VelociCalc model 8345 or equivalent.
V. Electrical Measuring Devices
a. Clamp on Volt ammeter.

b. Continuity Meter.
VI. Vibration and Noise Levels
Vibration and alignment field measurements shall be taken for each circulating water pump, water chilling
unit, air handling unit and fan driven by a motor over 10 HP. Readings shall include shaft alignment,
equipment vibration, bearing housing vibration, and other test as directed by the Authority Engineer.
Sound level readings shall be taken at ten (10) locations in the building as selected by the Contractor
/ Client. The readings shall be taken on an Octave Band analyzer in a manner acceptable to him.
The AC Contractor shall submit test equipment data and reporting forms for review. In order to reduce
the ambient noise level, the readings shall be taken at night. All tests shall be performed in the presence
of Client / Consultant or his authorized representative.
Page 967 of 1358

SYSTEM READY TO BALANCE CHECK LIST (NOT LIMITED TO FOLLOWING)
Description Ready Date Corrected
Yes No
1. HVAC Units (AHU)

a. General
Louvers installed.
Manual dampers open & locked
Automatic dampers set properly.
Housing Construction leakage
Access doors-leakage Condensate
drain piping and pan Free from dirt
and debris.
Nameplate data
b. Filters
Type and size Number
Clean
Frame-Leakage
c. Coils (Hydronic)
Size and rows
Fin spacing and condition.
Obstructions and / or debris
Airflow and direction
Piping leakage
Correct piping Connections and flow
Valves open or set
Air vents or steam traps
Provision made of TAB Measurements
d. Fans Rotation
Wheel clearance and balance
Bearing and motor lubrication
Drive alignment Belt tension
Drive set screws tight
Belt guard in place
Flexible duct connector
alignment Starters and
disconnect switches Electrical
service & connections.
Nameplate data
e. Vibration Isolation
Springs &
Compression Base
Level & Free
2. Duct System
a. General
Manual dampers open & locked
Access doors closed and tight
Fire dampers open and accessible
Terminal units open and set
Registers and diffusers open and set
Turning vanes in square elbows
Provisions made for TAB measurements. Systems
installed as
per plans.
Page 968 of 1358

Ductwork sealed as required.

b. Architectural
Windows installed and closed.
Doors closed as required.
Ceiling plenums installed and
sealed. Access doors closed and
tight
Air shafts and openings as required.
3. Pumps
a. Motors.
Rotating Lubrication Alignment
Set screws tight
Guards in place
Tank level and controls.
Starters and disconnect
switches Electrical service &
connections. Nameplate data.
b. Piping
Correct flow
Correct connections
Leakage Valves open or set
Strainer clean
Air vented Flexible connectors
Provisions made for TAB measurements
c. Bases
Vibration isolation. Grouting Leveling
4. Hydronic Equipment
a. Heat Exchangers/ HW coil
Correct flow and
connections Valves open or
set
Air vents or steam traps Leakage
Provisions made for TAB measurements
Nameplate data.
5. Refrigeration Equipment Crankcase
heaters energized Operating
controls and devices. Safety
controls and devices. Valves open
Piping connections and flow Flexible connectors
Oil level and lubrication
Alignment and drives. Guards in place. Vibration
isolation.
Starters, contactors and disconnect switches.
Electrical
connectors. Nameplate data.
6. Hydronic Piping systems.
Leak tested.
Fluid levels and make-up Relief
or safety valves. Compression
tanks and air vents. Steam traps
and connections. Strainers clean
valves open or set
Provisions made for TAB
measurements. Systems installed as
per plans.
7. Controls System
Page 969 of 1358

Data centers.
Outdoor return air reset
Economizer
Static pressure
Room controls.
8. Other Checks.
a. Other trades or personnel notified of
TAB work requirements.
b. Preliminary data complete
c. Test report forms prepared.
INSTRUMENT CALIBRATION REPORT
PROJECT
S/No INSTRUMENT/ APPLICATION DATES OF CALIBRATION TEST DATE

USE
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
REMARKS
TEST DATE READINGS BY
Page 970 of 1358

INSTRUMENT CALIBRATION REPORT
PROJECT
S/No INSTRUMENT/ APPLICATION DATES OF CALIBRATION TEST DATE

USE
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
REMARKS
Page 971 of 1358

AIR HANDLING EQUIPMENT TEST REPORT
PROJECT
SYSTEM/UNIT LOCATION
Description Data
a) UNIT
Make/Model No.
Type/Size
Serial Number
Arr./Class
Discharge
Pully dia/Bore
No. Belts/make/size.
No.Filters/type.size (Pre.)
No.Filters/type/size (secondary)
b) MOTOR
Make / Frame
H.P / RPM
Volts/Phase/cycles
F.L amps.
Pully Dia/Bore
Pully /Distance.
Total Cfm
Total S.P
Fan RPM
Motor Volts. T
Outside air Cfm
Return air Cfm
Discharge S.P
Cooling Coil S.P
Filters S.P
REMARKS
Page 972 of 1358

COOLING / HEATING TEST REPORT (AHU)
PROJECT
COIL DATA COIL NO. COIL NO. COIL NO.
System Number
Location
Coil Type
No. Rows Fins/In
Manufacturer
Model Number
Face Area, Sq.Ft.
TEST DATA DESIGN/ACTUAL DESIGN/ACTUAL DESIGN/ACTUAL
Air Qty. CFM
Air Vel.FPM
Press.Drop In.
Out.Air DB/WB
Ret. Air DB/WB
Ent.Air DB/WB
Lvg.Air DB/WB
Air AT
Waer flow. GPM
Press.Drop.PSI
Ent.Water Temp
Lvg .Water Temp
Water AT
Exp.Valve/Refrig
Refrig.Suction Pr.
Refrig.Suct.Temp
Inlet Steam press.
REMARKS
Page 973 of 1358

Ductable COIL TEST REPORT
PROJECT
DATE LOCATION
MANUFACTURER
AREA SERVED FCU MAKE CAPACITY TR TEMPERATURE DEG. F
GRILLE ROOM
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
REMARKS
Page 974 of 1358

DUACTBLE FAN TEST REPORT
PROJECT
FAN DATA FAN No. FAN No. FAN No.
Location
Service
Manufacturer
Model No.
Serial No.
Type / Class
Motor Make / Style
Motor H.P/RPM/ Frame
Volts/Phase/Cycles
F.L Amps.
Motor pully Dia./Bore
Fan pully Dia./Bore
No. Belts/ Make/Size
Pully Distance.
CFM
FAN RPM
S.P IN/OUT
TOTAL S.P
Voltage
Amperage
REMARKS
Page 975 of 1358

RECTANGULAR DUCT TRAVERSE REPORT
PROJECT SYSTEM
LOCATION / ZONE_ _ACTUAL AIR TEMP. DUCT S.P_
DUCT REQUIRED ACTUAL

SIZE_ SQ.FT. FPM _CFM FPM _CFM
POSITION 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
10
11
12
13
VELOCITY
SUBTOTALS
REMARKS
Page 976 of 1358

GRILLES AND DIFFUSERS TEST REPORT
PROJECT SYSTEM
OUTLET MANUFACTURER
TEST APPARATUS
S/No AREA OUTLET NO./ DESIGN PRLIMINARY FINAL

SERVED TYPE/ SIZE CFM/VEL CFM/VEL CFM/VEL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
REMARKS
Page 977 of 1358

33. PAINTING WORK
This section deals with painting various equipment / material supplied under this contract. It gives basic
guidance for painting as specified below: -
Application: The original colour of all equipment like water chilling machines, air-handling units etc.
which if get damaged during transportation or during installation shall be painted in original shade with
the two coat of paint to give a final finish.
All chilled water pipes shall be painted as per standard code of practice and arrows shall be marked to
indicate direction of flow of water
Colour Scheme For The equipment / Materials
Description Standard Colour & Reference Lettering

Colouring
Exposed Duct Work (other than plant As per E-I-C Directions As per E-I-C
room) Directions
Air Conditioning Duct Work (Plant BSS 111 Pale Blue Black
Rooms)
Ventilation Duct Work (Plant BSS 111 Pale Blue Black
Rooms)
Conditioner Casings Air Handling BSS 111 Pale Blue Black
Units, Filter Plenums
Electrical (Conduit Ducts and Motors ) BSS 557 Light Orange Black
Chilled Water Pipe Jade Green Black
Drains Black White
Vents White Black
Fans BSS 111 Pale Blue Black
Valves and Pipeline Fittings White with black handles Black
Beltquards Black and yellow diagonal stripes
(45 25 mm wide)
Switchboards- exterior – interior BS 366 Light Beige White
Machine Bases, Inertia Bases and Charcoal Grey
Plinths
Chilling M/C As Per Manufacturer’s Standard
Pump-sets Battleship grey
Condenser water pipes Light green Black

Electrical panels/sub-panel/ Light grey powder coated
remote control console RAL 7032 as per DIN
Supports for ducts Silver
Page 978 of 1358

34. IDENTIFICATION OF SERVICES GENERAL
This section comprises of identification of services for each piece of equipment.
VALVE LABELS AND CHARTS
Each valve shall be provided with a label indicating the service being controlled, together with a
reference number corresponding with that shown on the Valve Charts and ― as fitted‖ drawings. The
labels shall be made from 3 ply (black / white/ black) Traffolyte material showing white letters and
figures on a black background. Labels to be tied to each valve with chromium plated linked chain.
The labels shall be suitable for a minimum of 40 characters with font size of 24 minimum. Labelling
scheme of each equipment to be submitted for approval from Client / Consultant.
A wall mounted, glass covered plan to the endorsement of the Client / Consultant shall be provided
and displayed in each plant room showing the plant layout with pipe work, valve diagram and valve
schedule indicating size, service, duty, etc.
All AC equipment shall be provided with permanent mounted identification labels and unique tagging
numbers. The shop drawings shall also include these tagging numbers for easy identification on site.
It should be coordinated with BMS also to ensure consistent equipment tagging among drawings,
BMS display and site installation.
IDENTIFICATION OF SERVICES
Pipe work and duct work shall be identified by colour bands 150 mm. wide or colour triangles of at least
150 mm. / side. The bands of triangles shall be applied at termination points, junctions, entries and exits
of plant rooms, walls, in ceiling spaces, ducts and control points to readily identify the service, but
spacing shall not exceed 4.0 meters.
PIPE WORK SERVICES
For pipe work services and its insulation, the colours of the bands shall comply with BS.1710:
1971.Basic colours for pipe line identification:
Pipeline Contents BS. 4800 Colour Reference Colour

Water 12 D 45 Green
Steam 10 A 03 Grey
Oils 06 C 39 Brown
Gas 08 C 35 Yellow / Brown
Pipeline Contents BS. 4800 Colour Reference Colour
Air 20 E 51 Blue
Drainage 00 E 53 Black
Electrical 06 E 51 Orange
Page 979 of 1358

Colour code indicator bands shall be applied as colour bands over the basic identification colour in the
various combinations as listed below :-
Pipeline Contents Colour Bands to BS. 4800
Water Services :
Cooling 00 E 55
Fresh / drinking 18 E 53
Boiler feed 04 D 45/00 E 55 / 04 D 45
Condensate 04 D 45/14 E 53 / 04 D 45
Chilled 00 D 55/14 E 53 / 00 D 45
Central Heating Services :
Below 100 Deg. C 18 E 55/04 D 45/18 E 53
Above 100 Deg. C 04 D 45/18 E 53 /04 D 45
Cold Water Storage
Tanks: 00 E 55/18 E 53/00 E 55
Hot Water Supply 00 E 55/04 D 45/00 E 55

Pipeline Contents Colour Bands to BS. 4800
Hydraulic Power 04 C 33
Sea / River Untreated Basic Colour only
Fire Extinguishing 04 E 53
Steam Services : Basic Colour only
Air : Compressed Basic Colour only
Vacuum White
Town Gas : Manufactured 14 E 53
Natural 10 E 53
Oils :
Diesel 00 E 55
Lubricating 14 E 53
Hydraulic Power 04 C 53
Transformer 04 D 45
Drainage and other fluids : Basic Colour only
Page 980 of 1358

Electrical Services : Basic Colour only
In addition to the colour bands specified above all pipe work shall be legibly marked with black or white
letters to indicate the type of service and the direction of flow, identified as follows:-
High Temperature Hot Water HTHW

Medium Temperature Hot Water MTHW
Low Temperature Hot Water LTHW
Chilled Water CHW
Condenser Water CONDW
Steam ST
Condensate CN
Pipe shall have the letters F and R added to indicate flow and return respectively as well as directional
arrows.
DUCT WORK SERVICES:
For Duct work services and its insulation, the colours of the triangles shall comply with BS.1710: 1971.
The size of the symbol will depend on the size of the duct and the viewing distance, but the minimum
size should not be less than 150 mm. length per side. One apex of the triangle shall point in the direction
of airflow.
Services Colour BS.4800 Colour

Reference
Conditioned Air Red and Blue 04 E 53 / 18 E 53
Ward Air Yellow 10 E 53
Outdoor air Green 14 E 53
Exhaust / Extract / Recirculated Air Grey AA 0 09
Foul Air Brown 06 C 39
Dual Duct System Hot Supply Air Red 04 E 53
Cold Supply Air Blue 18 E 53
In addition to the colour triangles specified above all duct work shall be legibly marked with black or
white letters to indicate the type of service, identified as follows: -
Supply Air
S Return Air
R Outdoor Air
O Exhaust Air
E Smoke Extract Duct
M Spill Air
A
The colour banding and triangles shall be manufactured from self-adhesive cellulose tape, laminated with
a layer of transparent ethyl cellulose tape.
LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS
Followings List of Abbreviations shall have been used in preparing the Tender Specifications, DBR &
Drawings.
AABC AMERICAN AIR BALANCING

COUNCIL ACH AIR CHANGE PER HOUR
AC AIR CONDITIONING
ACMV AIR CONDUCTING AND MECHANICAL
Page 981 of 1358

VENTILATION AHU AIR HANDLING UNIT

ANSI AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARD
INSTITUTE ARI AMERICAN REFRIGERATION INSTITUTE
ASHRAE AMERICAN SOCIETY OF HEATING, REFRIGERATION
AND AIRCONDITIONING ENGINEER
ASME AMERICAN SOCIETY OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERS
ASTA ASSOC.CIATION OF SHORT - CIRCUIT TESTING

AUTHORITIES ASTM AMERICAN SOCIETY OF TESTING AND MATERIALS
ATG AIR TRANSFER GRILLE
AWS AMERICAN WELDING SOCIETY

BAS BUILDING AUTOMATION
SYSTEM BIS BUREAU OF INDIAN STANDARD
BMS BUILDING MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM BTU BRITISH THERMAL UNIT
CDW CONDENSER WATER
CFM CUBIC FEET PER
MINUTE CHW CHILLED WATER
CMS CENTRAL MONITORING SYSTEM
CRCA COLD ROLLED COLD ANNEALED
CSA CANADIAN STANDARD ASSOC.CIATION
CT COOLING TOWER
CTI COOLING TOWER INSTITUTE
DB DISTRIBUTION BOARD
DDC DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROLLER
DOL DIRECT ONLINE
DFA DELHI FIRE AUTHORITY
DIA DIAMETER
DIDW DOUBLE INLET DOUBLE WIDTH
DX DIRECT EXPANSION
EA EXHAUST AIR
EEPROM ELECTRICAL ERASABLE
PROGRAM ELCB EARTH LEKAGE CIRCUIT
BREAKER ETL ELETRICAL TESTING LABORATORIES
EPA ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION ACT
FCU FAN COIL UNIT
F/A FLOOR ABOVE
F/B FLOOR BLOW
FCC FIRE COMMAND CENTRE
FD FIRE DAMPER
FFL FINISHED FLOOR LEVEL
FPM FEET PER MINUTE
FPS FOOT PER SECOND
FRP FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC
GI GALVANISED IRON
GPM GALLON PER MINUTE
GSS GALVANIZED STEEL
SHEET H/L HIGH LEVEL
HDG HOT DIP GALVANIZED
HDPE HIGH DENSITY POLY ETHANE
HFC HYDRO FLURO CARBON
HP HORSEPOWER
HVAC HEATING, VENTILATION & AIR CONDITIONING
IAQ INDOOR AIR QUALITY
IEC INTERNATIONAL ELECTROCHEMICAL COMMISSION
IKW INDICATED KILO WATT
IPD INITIAL PRESSURE DROP
ISO INTERNATIONAL STANDARD ORGANIZATION
Page 982 of 1358

KW KILO WATT
L LITRE
LCD LIQUID CRYSTAL
DISPLAY L/L LOW LEVEL
L/S LITRE PER SECOND
LSZH LOW SMOKE ZERO HALOGEN
LT LOW TENSION
M METER
MAX. MAXIMUM
MCB MINIATURE CIRCUIT
BREAKER MCC MOTOR CONTROL
CENTRE MFD MOTORIZED FIRE DAMPER
MIN MINIMUM
MM MILLIMETER
NBC NATIONAL BUILDING CODE
NC NOISE CRITERIA
NEC NATIONAL ELECTRIC CODE
NFPA NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOC.CIATION
NPLV NET PART LOAD VALUE
NIST NATIONAL INSTITUTE OF STANDARDS & TECHNOLOGY
NEMA NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOC.CIATION
NPSH NET POSITIVE SUCTION HEAD
NTS NOT TO SCALE
OA OUTDOOR AIR
PHE PUBLIC HEALTH ENGINEERING
PLC PROGRAMMABLE LOGI CONTROLLER
P.C. PERSONAL COMPUTER
PSIG POUNDS PER SQUARE INCH GAUGE
PUF POLYURETHANE FOAM
RA RETURN AIR
RAD RETURN AIR DUCT
RCC REINFORCED CEMENT CONCRETE
RH RELATIVE HUMIDITY
RPM REVOLUTIONS PER
MINUTE SA SUPPLY AIR
SAD SUPPLY AIR DUCT
SMACNA SHEET METAL & AIR CONDITIONING CONTRACTORS
NATIONAL ASSOC.CIATION INC
STD STANDARD
T/A TO ABOVE
TAB TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
T/B TO BELOW
TCC TERMINAL CONTROL CENTRE
TFA TREATED FRESH AIR
TOA TREATED OUTDOOR AIR
TP THREE PHASE
TR TONS OF REFRIGERATION
TVOC TOTAL VOLATILE ORGANIC
COMPOUNDS VAV VARIABLE AIR VOLUME
VFD VARIABLE FREQUENCY
DRIVES VIP VIBRATION ISOLATING PAD
VSPS VARIABLE SPEED PUMPING SYSTEM
XLPE CROSS -LINKED POLYETHYLENE
SISW SINGLE INLET SINGLE WIDTH
UL UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES INC.
WG WATER GAUGE
Page 983 of 1358

35. NOISE & VIBRATION CONTROL
1. SCOPE OF WORK
This section deals with design, supply, installation, testing and commissioning of noise and vibration
control equipment and accessories.
2. STANDARDS
The testing of all noise control equipment and the methods used in measuring the noise rating of
air conditioning plant and equipment shall be in accordance with the relevant sections of the following
British Standards, unless otherwise stated:
BS 4718: 1971 Methods of Test of Silencers for Air Distribution Systems
BS 2750: Laboratory and Field Measurement of Airborne Sound

Parts 1-9:1980 Insulation of Various Building Elements
Recommendations for Field Laboratory Measurement of Airborne
and Impact Sound Transmission in Buildings
BS 3638: 1987 Methods of Measurement of Sound Adsorption in a Reverberation Room
BS 4773: Acoustic Testing.
Part 2: 1976
BS 4856: Acoustic performance without additional ducting of forced
Part 2: 1976 fan convection equipment.
Part 5: 1976 Acoustic performance with additional ducting of forced fan
convection equipment
BS 4857: Acoustic Testing and Rating of High-Pressure Terminal
Par 2:1978 (1983) Reheat Units.
BS 4954: Acoustic Testing and Rating of Induction Units.
Par 2:1978 (1987)
BS 5643: 1984 Glossary of Refrigeration, Heating, Ventilating and Air
Conditioning Terms
3. GENERAL
The air conditioning contractor must take all necessary precautions to have minimum noise generation
and its transmission generated by moving plant and equipment to achieve acceptable limits for occupied
areas. In addition to the noise level criteria particular attention must be given to the following details
at time of ordering plant and equipment and their installation :-
All moving plants / equipment shall be statically and dynamically balanced at manufacturers works
and certificates issued.
The isolation of moving plant, machinery and apparatus including lines equipment from the building
structure.
Where duct work and pipe work services pass through walls, floors and ceilings, or wherever supported
shall be surrounded with a resilient acoustic absorbing material to prevent contact with the structure
and minimize the outbreak of noise from plant rooms.
The reduction of noise breakout from plant rooms and the selection of externally mounted equipment
and plant to meet ambient noise level requirements of the Specifications.
Electrical conduits and connections to all moving plant and equipment shall be carried out in flexible
conduit and cables to prevent the transmission of vibration to the structure and nullify the provisions
of anti-vibration mountings.
Page 984 of 1358

All duct connections to fans shall incorporate flexible connections, except in cases where these are fitted
integral within air handling units.
All resilient acoustic absorbing materials shall be nonflammable, vermin and rot proof and shall not tend
to break up or compress sufficiently to transmit vibration or noise from the equipment to the structure.
Where practicable, attenuators shall be built into walls and floors to prevent the flanking of noise the
duct work systems and their penetrations sealed in the manner previously described. Where this
is not feasible, the exposed surface of the duct work between the attenuators and the wall subjected
to noise infiltration shall be acoustically clad as specified.
Ambient noise from cooling tower also shall be assessed to determine the suitable attenuators that can
reduce the noise so as not affecting the adjoining public area.
4. SOUND ATTENUATORS
Attenuators shall be provided in ducts in accordance with acceptable noise level criteria. Attenuators shall
be constructed from high quality pre-galvanized steel sheet casings with lock formed joints along the
casing length. Angle iron cross jointing flanges shall be fitted to silencer casings, drilled as required and
finished with red oxide primer paint. Acoustic splitters shall be formed by chancel section pre-galvanized
sheet steel framework retaining acoustic fill of a density to attain the required performance. Splitters shall
have round Nos., ends to give smooth entry and exit conditions to minimize air pressure drops. The
acoustic fill shall be protected from the air flow by 22 swg minimum perforated galvanized sheet steel.
All attenuators shall be selected against a maximum allowable air pressure drop of 100 Pa. It will be
the responsibility of the AC Contractor at the time of placing orders for fan equipment to obtain from
the manufacturers, certified sound power levels to enable the selected duct silencers to be checked
against the original design information, prior to orders being placed.
5. ANTI-VIBRATION MOUNTINGS.
All items of rotating and reciprocating plant and equipment shall be isolated from the structure by the
use of anti-vibration materials, mountings or spring- l o a d e d supports fixed to either concrete bases,
inertia blocks or support steels. Centrifugal fans and motors within air handling units shall be isolated
from the frame of the air handling unit by suitable anti-vibration mountings. Fan discharge air connections
shall be fitted with approved flexible connections. Axial flow fans shall be mounted on steel legs as
diaphragm plates supported on neoprene in shear anti-vibration mountings or suspended using
spring loaded hangers to suite the application. Centrifugal pumps shall be mounted on inertia bases
consisting of reinforced concrete sub-base, anti-vibration mountings and concrete filled steel upper
plinth. The AC Contractor shall be responsible for providing the steel upper plinth and mountings. Pipe
work connections to circulating pumps, chillers, cooler coils and other heat exchanger equipment shall be
made with flexible connections as per piping Specifications. The construction of the anti-vibration
mountings shall generally comply with the following: -Enclosed Spring Mounting (Caged or Restrained
Springs) Each mounting shall consist of cast or fabricated telescopic top and bottom housing enclosing
one or more helical steel springs as the principle isolation elements and shall incorporate a built- in
leveling device. The springs shall have an outside diameter of not less than 75% of the operating height
and be selected to have at least 50% overload capacity before becoming coil bound. The bottom plate of
each mounting shall have bonded to it a neoprene pad designed to attenuate any high frequency energy
transmitted by the springs. Mountings incorporating snobbery of restraining devices shall be designed
so that the snubbing damping or restraining mechanism, is capable of being adjusted to have no
significant effect during the normal running of the isolated machine. The manufacturers shall provide
restrained isolator on chillers subject to approval.
6. OPEN SPRING MOUNTINGS
Each mounting shall consist of one or more helical steel springs as the principal isolation elements
and shall incorporate a built-in leveling device. The spring shall be fixed or otherwise securely located
to cast or fabricated top and bottom plates and shall have an outside diameter of not less than
Page 985 of 1358

75% of the operating height, and shall be selected to have at least 50% overload capacity before
becoming coil- bound. The bottom plate shall have bonded to it a neoprene pad designed to
attenuate any high frequency energy transmitted by the springs.
7. NEOPRENE-IN-SHEAR MOUNTINGS
Each mounting shall consist of a steel top plate and base plate completely embedded in oil resistant
neoprene. Each mounting shall be capable of being fitted with a leveling device, and bolt holes in the base
plate and tapped holes in the top plate so that they may be bolted to the floor and equipment where
required.
8. INERTIA BASES FOR PUMPS
The inertia base shall be an all-welded mild steel channel frame the minimum depth of which shall be 1/12
of the longest span between isolator but not less than 150 mm. filled with concrete the density of which
shall be 2300 kg/m3.
The inertia base shall be sufficiently large to provide support for all parts of the equipment, including any
component which overhands the equipment base, such as suction, and discharge elbows on centrifugal
pumps.
The frame shall include pre-located equipment anchor bolts fixed into position and housed in a steel sleeve
allowing minor bolt location adjustment. Isolator support brackets shall be welded into the corners of the
base and suitably re-enforced for the load of the equipment and base.
Additional reinforcing roads shall be provided at 200 mm. centers to ensure the concrete and frame is
adequately stiffened against distortion.
9. REFERENCE DESIGN STANDARD
Following standard & guidelines shall be adopted while designing the HVAC System.
i) National Building Code of India (NBC 20016) with latest revision.
ii) Energy Conservation Building Code (ECBC 2007) or latest
iii) ASHRAE latest Handbooks.
a) Fundamentals
b) HVAC Systems and Equipment
c) HVAC Applications
d) Refrigeration
e) HVAC Design Guidelines for Health Care Facilities ASHRAE Standard 170.
iv) Duct construction standards as per relevant latest BIS codes & SMACNA standards.
v) Air filters as per ASHRAE 52.1-1992 or latest and 52.2-2007 or latest.

vi) Indoor Air quality as per ASHRAE 62.1-2010 or latest
vii) Motors, Cabling, Wiring and accessories as per latest BIS codes.
viii) National Electric Codes (NEC) latest version
ix) ANSI / ASHRAE / IESNA standard 90.1-2009 or latest: Energy standard for building except low rise
residential buildings.
x) ASHRAE standard 55: Thermal Comfort.
10. BIS CODE & GUIDELINES
Followings are the few list of Bureau of Indian Standards Codes for guidelines.
Page 986 of 1358

IS : 277 - 1992 Galvanized steel sheet (Plain & Corrugated) wire for
fencing.
IS : 554 - 1985 (Reaffirmed 1996) Dimensions for pipe threads where pressure tight joints
are required on the threads.
IS : 655 - 1963 (Reaffirmed 1991) Metal air ducts.
IS : 659 – 1964 (Reaffirmed 1991) Air conditioning (Safety Code)
IS : 660 – 1963 (Reaffirmed 1991) Mechanical Refrigeration (Safety Code)
IS : 694 - 1990 PVC insulated (HD) electric Cables for working voltage
(Reaffirmed 1994) unto and including 1100 volts.
IS : 732 - 1989 Code of practice for electrical wiring.
IS : 780 - 1984 Sluice valves for water works purposes.
IS : 822-1970 (Reaffirmed 1991) Code of procedure for inspection of welds.
IS : 1239 (Part - I) - 1990 Mild steel tube
IS : 1239 (Part - II) - 1992 Mild steel Tubulars and other wrought steel pipe fittings.
IS : 1255 - 1983 Code of Practice for installation and maintenance of
Power Cables unto and including 33 KV rating (Second
Revision)
IS : 1554 - 1988 (Part – I) PVC insulated (Heavy Duty) electric cables for working
voltages unto and including 1100 volts.
IS : 1897 – 1983 (Reaffirmed 1991) Copper bus bar / strip for electrical purposes
IS : 2379 - 1990 Colour code for the identification of Pipelines.
IS : 2551 - 1982 Danger notice plate
IS : 3043 - 1987 Code of practice for earthing.
IS : 3103 – 1975 (Reaffirmed 1999) Code of practice for Industrial Ventilation.
IS : 3837 – 1976 (Reaffirmed 1990) Accessories for rigid steel conduit for electrical wiring.
IS : 4736 – 1986 (Reaffirmed 1998) Hot-dip zinc coatings on steel tubes.
IS : 4894 - 1987 Centrifugal Fan.
IS : 5133 - 1969 (Part-I) Boxes for the enclosure of electrical (Reaffirmed 1990)
accessories.
IS : 5216 - 1982 Guide for safety procedure and practices (Part-I)
(Reaffirmed 1990) in electrical work.
IS : 5312 (Part-I) - 1984 Swing - check type reflux non (Reaffirmed 1990) return
valves for water works
IS : 5424 – 1989 (Reaffirmed 1994) Rubber mats for electrical purposes.
IS : 5578 & 11353-1985 Marking and identification of conductors
IS : 6392 – 1971 (Reaffirmed 1988) Steel pipe flanges.
IS : 8623 - 1993 Low voltage switchgear and control gear assemblies
(Requirement for type / partly type tested assemblies)
IS : 8623 - 1993 Bus Bar trunking system (Part - II)
IS : 8828 - 1996 Circuit Breakers for over current protection for household
and similar installation.
IS : 9537 – 1981 (Part II) Rigid Steel Conduits for electrical wiring
IS : 10810 - 1988 Methods of test for cables.
IS : 13947-1993 (Part-I) General rules for low voltage switch gears and control
gears.
IS : 13947-1993 (Part-II) Circuit Breakers IEC 947 - 2
IS : 13947 - 1993 (Part-III) Switches, disconnectors and fuse for low voltage switch
gear and control gear.
Page 987 of 1358

IS : 13947 - 1993 (Part-IV) Low voltage switch gear and control gear for contactors
and motor starters
IS : 13947 – 1993 (Part-V) Control Circuit Devices.
BS : EN:779 – 1993 Filters
IEC Relevant Sections.
36. SAFETY CODES
1. SCOPE
The scope of this sub-section is the minimum safety requirements to be observed during
manufacture and erection of the HVAC system as specified herein in addition to the safety norms generally
followed: -
2. I.S. STANDARDS
The safety code for mechanical refrigeration IS: 660 and safety code for air conditioning IS: 659 shall be
observed.
3. SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
Some of the important safety requirements are as under but not limited to the same: -
a. There shall be maintained in a readily accessible place, first aid appliances including adequate supply
of sterilized dressings and cotton wool.
b. The injured person shall be taken to a public hospital without loss of time.
c. Suitable and strong scaffolds shall be provided for workmen for all works that cannot be safely
done from ground.
d. No portable single ladder shall be over 8 meters in length. The width between side rails shall not
be less than 30 cm (clear) and the distance between two adjacent rings shall not be more than 30 cms,
when a ladder is used, an extra mazdoor shall be engaged for holding the ladder.
e. The excavated material shall not be placed within 1.5 meters of the edge of the trench or half of
the depth of trenches whichever is more. All trenches and excavations shall be provided with
necessary fencing and lighting.
f. Every opening in the floor of a building or in a working platform to be provided with suitable means
to prevent the fall of persons or materials by providing suitable fencing or railing whose minimum
height shall be one meter.
g. No. Floor, roof or other part of the structure shall be so overloaded with debris or material as to
render it unsafe.
h. Workers employed on mixing and handling materials such as asphalt, cement mortar or concrete
& lime mortar shall be provided with protective footwear and rubber hand gloves.
i. Those engaged in welding works shall be provided with protective eye shields and glove.
j. No paint containing lead or lead products to be used except in the form of paste or
readymade paint.
k. Suitable facemasks shall be supplied for use of workers when the paint is applied in the form of spray
or surface having lead paint dry rubbed and scraped.
l. Overalls shall be supplied by the Contractor to the painter and adequate facilities shall be provided
to enable the working painter to wash during cessation of the work.
Page 988 of 1358

m. The ropes used in hoisting or lowering material or as a means of suspension, shall be of adequate
quality and adequate strength and free from defects.
n. All site personnel shall wear safety helmets whenever they are in the construction/ erection areas.
AIR HANDLING EQUIPMENTS TEST REPORT
PROJECT _SYSTEM / UNIT
LOCATION
UNIT DATA MOTOR DATA
Make/Motor No. Make / Frame
Type/Size H.P / RPM
Serial Number Volts/Phase/Cycles
Arr./Class F.Lamps.
Discharge Pulley Dia/Bore
Pulley dia/ Bore Pulley/ Distance
No. Belts/make/Size
No.Filters/type.Size (Pre.)
No.Filters/type.Size (secondary)
TEST DATA DESIGN ACTUAL TEST DATA DESIGN ACTUAL
Total Cfm Discharge S.P
Total S.P
Fan RPM Cooling Coil S.P
Motor Volts Filters S.P
Out air Cfm
Return air Cfm
REMARKS.
TEST DATE
READINGS BY
Page 989 of 1358

Note : Please Furnish above report for all AHU.
RECTANGULAR DUCT TRAVERSE REPORT
PROJECT SYSTEM
LOCATION / ZONE_ ACTUAL AIR TEMP. _DUCT S.P
POSITION 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
VELOCITY
SUBTOTAL
S
Page 990 of 1358

GRILLES AND DIFFUSERS TEST REPORT
PROJECT
SYSTEM
OUTLET MANUFACTURER
TEST APPARATUS
REA OUTLET DESIGN INITIAL FINAL
SERVED NO TYP SIZE VEL CFM VEL CFM VEL CFM VE
REMARKS.
Note : Please Furnish above report for all grills/diffusers with S.No. marked on respective drawings
38. SYSTEM TESTING ADJUSTMENT AND BALANCING
1. SCOPE
a) Testing, adjusting and balancing of heating, ventilating and air-conditioning

systems at site.
b) Testing, adjusting and balancing of HVAC Hydronic system at site.
c) Testing, adjusting and balancing of exhaust system at site.

Comply with current editions of all applicable practices, codes, methods of
standards prepared by technical societies and associations including:
ASHRAE: 1999 HVAC Application
SMACNA: Manual for the Balancing and Adjustment for air distribution System
2. PERFORMANCE
a) Verify design conformity.
b) Establish fluid flow rates, volumes and operating pressures.
c) Take electrical power readings for each motor.
d) Establish operating sound and vibration levels.
e) Adjust and balance to design parameters
Page 991 of 1358

f) Record and report results as per formats specified.
3. DEFINITIONS
Test: To determine quantitative performance of equipment.

Adjust: To regulate for specified fluid flow rates and air patterns at terminal Equipment
(e.g. reduce fan speed, throttling etc.)
Balance: To proportion within distribution system (sub mains, branches and Terminals) in accordance
with design quantities.
4. TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING (TAB) PROCEDURES
The following procedures shall be directly followed in TAB of the total system.
Before commencement of each one of the TAB procedures explained hereunder, the contractor shall
intimate the Engineer-In-Charge about his ready to conduct the TAB procedures in the format given
in these specifications.
5. DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM AND REQUIREMENT
Adjust and balance the following system to provide most energy efficient operation compatible with
selected operating conditions.
- All supply, return and outside air systems.
- All exhaust air systems
- All chilled water systems.
- All cooling tower (condenser) water systems.
- Emergency purge systems
6. AIR SYSTEMS
a) Air Handlers Performance
The TAB procedure shall establish the right selection and performance of the AHUs with the following
results.
- Inlet air Dry and Wet bulb temperatures.
- Outlet air Dry and Wet bulb temperatures.
- Air leaving dew point temperature
- Sensible heat Pickup
- Latent heat Pickup
- Sensible hat factor
b) Air distribution
Both supply and return air distribution for each AHU and for areas served by the AHU shall be determined
and adjusted as necessary to provide design air quantities. It shall cover balancing of air through main and
branch ducts utilizing telescoping probes of Electronic Rotating Vane Anemometers and Accubalance for
grilles and diffusers.
Page 992 of 1358

c) The Preparatory work
To conduct the above test, the following preparatory works are required to be carried out including the
availability of approved for construction shop drawings and submittals.
All outside air intake return air and exhaust air dampers are in proper position. All system volume dampers
and fire dampers are in fully open position. All access doors are installed & are airtight. Grilles are installed &
dampers are fully open. Provision and accessibility of usage of TAB instruments for transverse measurements
are available. All windows and doors are in position. The duct system is of proper construction and is
equipped with turning vanes and joints are sealed.
7. HYDRONIC SYSTEM BALANCING
The Hydronic system shall involve the checking and balancing of all water pumps. Piping network (main &
branches), the heat exchange equipment like cooling and heating coils, condensers and chillers and cooling
towers in order to provide design water flows. The essential preparation work, must be done by the HVAC
contractor prior to actual testing, adjusting and balancing of HVAC system and ensure following:
a. Availability of co-ordinate drawings and approved submittals and system sketch with design water flows
specified thereon.
b. Hydronic system is free of leaks, is hydrostatically tested and is thoroughly cleaned, flushed and refilled.
c. Hydronic system is vented.
d. The contractor shall confirm completion of the basic procedures and prepare checklists for readiness of
system balance.
e. Check pumps operation for proper rotation and motor current drawn etc.
f. Confirm that provisions for TAB measurements (Temperature, pressure and flow measurements) have
been made.
g. Open all shut-off valves and automatic control valves to provide full flow through coils. Set all balancing
valves in the preset position, if these values are known. If not, shut all riser balancing valves except the one
intended to be balanced first.
h. Balancing work for both Chilled Water System and Condenser Water System shall be carried out in a
professional manner and test reports in the specified format shall be prepared and presented to the
Authority Engineer. For approval.
8. READINESS FOR COMMENCEMENT OF TAB
Prior to commencement of any test, the readiness to do so should be recorded as per the
prescribed checklist.
9. TAB INSTRUMENTS
i. Air measuring Instruments
For measuring DB and WB temperature, RH and dew point, microprocessor, suitable instrument shall
be used. This instrument shall be capable of calculating the sensible, latent total heat flows,
sensible heat factor and give printouts at site and have data logging/downloading facility. For measuring
Air velocity, DB temperature and Air volume, suitable instrument shall be used. It shall be able to
provide instant printout of recorded Air Volume readings.
Pitot tube.
Electronic Rotary Vane Anemometer.
Accubalance Flow Measuring Hood.
Page 993 of 1358

ii. Hydronic Measuring Instruments
For measurement of water flow differential pressure and temperature, The instrument shall have a
built-in-microcomputer capable of giving readings for pressure differential flow rate and
temperature.
iii. Rotation Measuring Instrument
∙ Electronic Digital Tachometer
iv. Temperature & RH Measuring Instrument

v. Electrical Measuring Devices
∙ Clamp on Volt ammeter
∙ Continuity Meter
10. VIBRATION AND NOISE LEVELS
Vibration and alignment field measurements shall be taken for each circulating water pump, water chilling
unit, air handling unit and fan driven by a motor over 10 HP. Readings shall include shaft alignment,
equipment vibration, bearing housing vibration, and other test as directed by the
Engineer-In-Charge.
Sound level readings shall be taken at ten (10) locations in the building as selected by the Engineer-
In-Charge. The readings shall be taken on an Octave Band Analyzer in a manner acceptable to
him. The contractor shall submit test equipment data and reporting forms for review. In order to
reduce the ambient noise level, the readings shall be taken at night. All tests shall be performed in the
presence of Engineer-In-Charge.
LIST OF BUREAU OF INDIAN STANDARD CODES
IS 1239 (Part– I) 1979 Mild Steel Tube
IS 1239 (Part – I) 1982

Mild Steel Tubular and Other Wrought Steel Pipe Fittings
IS 4736 – 1986 (Reaffirmed) Hot Dip Zinc Coatings of Steel Tubes
Code of Procedure For Manual Metal Arc Welding
IS 823-1964 of
Mild Steel
IS 780-1984 Service Valves For Water Works Purpose
Copper Alloy Gate, Globe and Check Valves For Water
IS 778-1980 Works Purpose
IS 1536-1976 Flanges Configuration
Swing Check Type Reflux Non-Return Valves For Water
IS 5312 (Part –I) 1984 Works
IS 2379-1963 Color Code For Identification of Pipelines
Dimension For Pipe Thread Where Pressure Tight
IS 554-1975 Joints
Are Required On Threads
IS 655-1963 (Reaffirmed
1991) Metal Air Ducts
IS 277-1992 Galvanized Steel Sheet For Fencing
Specific Requirements For Direct Switches of
IS 4064 Part II-1978 Individual
Motors
Page 994 of 1358

IS 3854-1969 Switches For Domestic & Similar Purpose

IS 732 (Part III-1902) Inspection and Testing of Installation
IS 659 – 1964 (Reaffirmed
1991) Air Conditioning Safety Code
IS 660 – 1963 (Reaffirmed
1991) Mechanical Refrigeration ( Safety Code)
IS 4894 – 1991 Test Code For Centrifugal Fan
IS 3103 – 1975
Reaffirmed 1994 Code of Practice For Industrial Ventilation
IS 7240 – 1981 Application & Finishing of Thermal Insulation Material
IS 325 Specifications For Three Phase Induction Motor
IS 3142 – 1993 V Grooved Pulley
BS-EN-779 – 1993 Particulate Air Filters For General Ventilation
IS 702 – 1988 Industrial Bitumen
IS 8183 – 1993 Bonded Mineral Wool
IS 2494 – 1993 V Belts For Industrial Purposes
IS 2062 – 1992 General Purpose Steel
ASHRAE Handbooks American society of heating, refrigeration and air
conditioning books
- Applications 1999
- Fundamentals 1997
- System and equipment 1996
- Indoor air quality 62 – 1999
39. SPECIFICATIONS FOR ELECTRICAL WORKS
1. GENERAL:
All Electrical works including but not limited to motors, switchgears, power & control/signal cables,
earthing, terminations etc. required for various items shall generally be as per specifications given in
electrical specifications. All electric motors shall be suitable for 3 phase, 50 cycles 415 volts a.c. supply.
2. CONTROL PANEL:
These panels should be floor/wall mounted, sheet steel clad, modular construction, cubicle design,
compartmentalized. Th ese panels shall comprise of incoming & outgoing feeders (circuit breakers,
fuse switch units/switch fuse units, contactor starters with overload relays, single phasing preventor
etc.
The panels shall be provided wherever necessary with necessary interlocks designed to prevent
incorrect operation and to ensure the safety of operating personnel and equipment.
All feeders are to be operated from the front and they shall be interlocked suitably.
Padlocking arrangement and interlock defeating device shall also be provided. Each module shall have
separate door and partition plate. The feeder incomer switches shall be interlocking with the door so that
the door can only by opened when switch is in òff' position. The doors and covers shall be provided
with thick gaskets to make it dust tight. All the door covers shall be provided with synthetic rubber
gaskets to make it dust tight. Feeder name tags shall be provided.
3. CONTACTOR STARTERS:
Star Delta Starter

The star delta starter shall be air break automatic contactor starter provided with main contractor,
Page 995 of 1358

star contactor, delta contactor, timer and automatic change over from start to delta, bimetallic overload
relay, operating coil, start/stop push button, single phasing preventor, auxiliary make and break contacts,
indicating lamps etc. The contactor shall quick make, quick break, double break consisting of robust silver
contacts. The coil voltage shall be 415 volts ac at 50 hz. The starter shall be provided with trip indication
light and overload reset push button for overload relay.
DOL Contactor Starter
The contactor shall be air break type coil operated, DOL contactor starter, provided with cables entries,
ambient temperature compensated bimetallic overl o a d relay, single phasing preventor, solenoid
coil, start and stop push buttons, 8 auxiliary make and break contacts, indicating lamps etc. The
contactors shall be quick make and quick break, double break type consisting of robust silver
contacts. The coil voltage shall be 440/240 volts at 50 c/s. The starter shall be provided with trip
indication light and overloa d reset bush button for overload relay.
Page 996 of 1358

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS PLUMBING INSTALLATION
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS
1.0 Scope of work
1.1 The Contractor’s scope of work covers supply, installation, commissioning and testing of the
complete Plumbing Installation Works as specified. Any discrepancy with item specifications with this
document with CPWD documents, stringent specification to be followed by contactor.
2.0 Location
2.1.1 The works are to be carried out at the IIM Indore, Madhya Pradesh, India
All electrical equipment and gear shall be designed for temperatures of

i) Peak 46 C
ii) Daily average 32 C
iii) Yearly weighted average 35 C
3.0 Drawings, Specifications & Deviations
3.1 The drawings and specifications lay down minimum standards of equipment and workmanship.
3.2 In case of discrepancy between the drawings and specifications, the tenderer shall assume the
more stringent of the two and furnish his rates accordingly.
3.3 The contractor shall prepare shop drawings and all work shall be according to approved working
drawings. Shop drawings shall give all dimensions and shall incorporate the requirements for
consultants, architects and interior designers. Approval of drawings does not relieve the Contractor of
his responsibility to meet with the intents of the specifications. All such drawings for approval shall
be quadruplicated. In addition, the contractor shall submit manufacturers’ details and get them approved
before ordering. This has to be done whether the materials / equipment is one of the approved makes or
not. The liability of the material supplied at basic rate of the owner shall be binding on the
contractor and shall be covered under defects liability period.
4.0 Tools and Spare Parts
4.1 All tools, tackle, scaffolding and staging required for erection and assembly of the equipment and
installation covered by the contract shall be obtained by the contractor himself. All other materials such as
foundation bolts, nuts etc. required for the installation of the plant shall also be supplied and included in the
contract.
5.0 Testing & Handing Over
5.1 The contractor shall carry out tests on different equipment as specified in various sections in the
presence of Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore in order to enable them to determine whether the plant,
equipment and installation in general comply with the specifications.
Page 997 of 1358

5.2 All equipment shall be tested after carrying out the necessary adjustments and balancing to establish
equipment ratings and all other design conditions. The test data shall be submitted in the Acceptance Test
Forms supplied by the Consultants. At least four sets of readings shall be taken for each item tested and
submitted. Instruments required for testing shall be furnished by the contractor for testing with initial
requirements of all consumables.
5.3 The plant shall be handed over after satisfactory testing along with four sets of documentation each
consisting of:
i) Detailed equipment data in the proforma approved by the Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore.
ii) Manufacturer’s maintenance and operating instructions.
iii) Set of as-built drawings, showing plant layouts, piping, ducting etc.
iv) Approved Test readings for all equipment & installation.
v) List of recommended spares.
vi) Certificate from the contractors that they cleared the site of all debris and litter caused by them during
the construction.
vii) All tests to be certified by Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore.
5.4 Submission of the above documentation shall form a precondition for the final acceptance of the plant
and installation and final payment.
5.5 The contractor has to furnish an undertaking that all materials supplied by him at site shall be fully tax
paid and shall produce all documents for satisfaction of the IIM Indore or taxation authorities. All liabilities
of the same shall be of the contractor.
6.0 Performance guarantee
6.1 All equipment and the entire installation shall be guaranteed to yield the specified ratings and design
conditions plus/minus 3% tolerance. Any equipment found short of the specified ratings by more than the
allowable tolerance as determined by the test readings shall be rejected.
7.0 Defects Liability
7.1 All equipment and the entire installation shall be guaranteed against defective materials and
workmanship for a period of as per the RFP after the plant is commissioned and handed over to the clients
along with the 4 sets of completion documents. During the defect liability period, the contractor shall rectify,
repair or replace defective parts and components free of cost except in the case of those, which are due to
normal wear & tear.
8.0 Statutory Inspections

8.1 The Contractor shall be fully responsible for meeting all the statutory obligations & local inspectorates
wherever applicable to the works carried out by them. The contractor should prepare all working drawings
and have the equipment and installation inspected and approved.
Page 998 of 1358

9.0 Liability due to malfunctioning of the installation of contractor, which may damage any plant machinery
of the owner during testing or during defects liability period.
10.0 Any increase in quantity over and above tender quantity has to be brought to the notice of the
Consultant and upon written confirmation only the contractor shall proceed further. In the absence of
obtaining written permission as given above, the owner shall not assume liability for any of the works carried
out.
13.0 General Conditions

13.1 The tender shall be governed by General conditions of Contract forming part of this tender. Wherever
conflicting, the general conditions shall prevail.
13.2 Tenderer may indicate their comments, only as deviations from the conditions stipulated herein.
Wholesale submission of their own conditions and / or printed conditions in disregard of the conditions
stipulated herein shall not be binding on this contract.
13.3 The clients are entitled to import equipment under EPCG at concessional duty. The bidders are hereby
informed that they can substitute Indian equipment by equivalent imported equipment excluding customs
duties, which will be paid by clients on the basis of a customs demand note.
14.0 Safety Precautions

14.1 A competent, qualified and authorized Engineer shall be on the site whenever the contractor’s men are
at work. The Supervisor should ensure that all plant and machinery used on the site are rendered safe for
working and meets with the Indian or International safety standards applicable for the use and operation
of such machinery. The supervisor should also ensure that the workmen are supplied with and made to use
safety appliances such as safety belts, lifelines, helmets etc. The Supervisor shall not leave the work site
without permission from Authority Engineer or their nominee. The contractor shall provide an organization
chart of the personnel to be deployed at site for the execution of the contract.
SANITARY SYSTEMS
1. Scope
1.1. Scope of work covers Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of:
• Sanitaryware
• Chromium plated (CP) fittings.
2. Standards
All sanitaryware shall generally conform to IS: 2556 Part I to VIII unless stated otherwise.
3. Materials
3.1. General
3.1.1. All sanitary ware and CP fittings shall be new and have approved make, type and colour.
All samples of materials with catalogues, performance data, shall be submitted and
approved before use on the work. Approved samples along with other approved materials
Page 999 of 1358

shall be neatly displayed on a board and such a display board of samples shall always
be in exhibition in the construction office of the Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore. Such a
display shall be used for the day-to-day checking of the materials on site.
3.1.2. All materials shall be inspected and received in good condition and thereafter, it will be totally
under the safe custody of the tenderer/contractor till they are handed over satisfactorily after
installation, testing and commissioning.
3.1.3. Wherever multiple choices of fixtures are offered, the IIM INDORE shall have the final choice.
3.1.4. All fixtures shall be complete with all accessories as required for the working of the said fixture
as specified.
3.2. Orissa W.C
3.2.1. Orissa W.C shall be in white glazed vitreous chinaware of size specified. The W.C shall be
provided with a 100 mm white vitreous chinaware P or S trap with or without vents as
required. The size of Orissa water closet shall be 58cms x 44cms.
3.2.2. Each W.C shall be provided with a low height flushing tanks.
3.3. European W.C
3.3.1. European W.C shall be wash down or siphonic, floor or wall mounted in white glazed vitreous
chinaware with integral P or S trap as required. Wall hung W.C shall be supported by C.I or G.I
floor mounted chair. The W.C shall be provided with an exposed or concealed type brass flush
valve or flushing cistern as specified in the schedule of work.
3.3.2. Each W.C shall be provided with a solid plastic seat. The seat shall be fixed to the W.C with CP
brass or S. S. pillar bar hinges. Rubber buffers shall be provided for the cover.
3.4. Urinals
3.4.1. Urinals shall be lipped type large flat back in white glazed vitreous chinaware of size 59.00cm
x 37.5cm x 39cm unless specified otherwise.
3.4.2. Urinals shall be provided with:
• 15 dia spreader
• 32 dia CP dome waste
• 32 dia CP P-trap with unions.
• CP wall flange and pipe.
All exposed pipes and fittings shall be of C.P brass. The urinals shall be fixed with CP
brass screws.
3.4.3. Urinal flushing shall be through one of the following methods as specified in the schedule of
work:
• Small urinal flush valve with push button.
Page 1000 of 1358

• Auto flush valve with DC long life battery or AC supply.

Auto flush shall be concealed in wall and flush pipe shall be of copper or G.I except
the exposed parts which shall be C.P brass.
3.4.4. Waste pipe for urinals shall be any one of the following: -
• Cast Iron pipes.
3.4.5. Urinal partitions shall be white glazed vitreous chinaware complete with CP brass screws;
anchor fasteners etc. as required.
3.5. Lavatory Basin
3.5.1. Lavatory basins shall be white glazed vitreous chinaware synthetic or polymarble or any other
material and have size, shape and type specified in the schedule of work.
3.5.2. Each basin shall be complete with:

• C.I or galvanized steel supporting brackets & clips as required.
• 32 dia CP waste and overflow.
• Pop-up waste or rubber plug with CP chain as specified.
• 32 dia CP P-trap with cleanout, unions, CP pipe to wall and wall flange
• 15 dia CP control angle valve/s with CP connections.
• Mixing or CP fittings as specified.
3.6. Stainless Steel Sinks
3.6.1. Each sink shall be complete with:
• 40 dia waste fitting with brass/rubber plug & chain.

• 40 dia P-trap with clean out, unions, CP pipe to wall & wall flange.
• 20 dia CP control valve/s with CP connections.
• Mixing or CP fittings with spout as specified.
3.7. Mirrors
3.7.1. Mirrors shall be plate glass electro coated copper 6 mm thick of guaran-teed to be clear,
distortion-less (at all angles) non-wavy of approved make and sample. The size shall be as
specified in the schedule of work.
3.7.2. Mirrors shall be provided with backing of 12 mm thick marine plywood fixed with CP brass
semi round headed screws and cup washers or CP brass clamps as specific or instructed by
Authority Engineer.
4. Installation
4.1. All sanitary ware and CP fittings shall be installed in accordance with the interior requirements.
Neat workmanship and maintaining the exact position and level of each fixture shall be the sole
objective of the installation. Care shall be taken to fix the inlet and outlet pipes to the correct
positions. Faulty positioning shall be made good without any damage to the finished floor or wall
tiling and any damage to the finished surfaces shall be made good at the tenderer/contractor’s
Page 1001 of 1358

cost.
4.2. In order to ensure quality of workmanship and compliance with interior requirements, one or two
mock-up installations shall be done and got approved. Fixtures used in the mock-up may be reused
with the approval of the Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore.
4.3. All fixing accessories like bolts, nuts, brackets etc. may be supplied along with the ware as defined
in the mode of measurement and schedule of work.
4.4. All such accessories shall be CP brass or galvanized or stainless steel as approved by the Authority
Engineer/ IIM Indore. All exposed pipes and bends shall be of CP brass.
4.5. The Indian W.C shall be fixed in level in a neat workmanlike manner. The W.C and trap shall be set
in brickbat 1:2:4 concrete mix. Joints between W.C and flush pipe shall be made with a putty or
white lead and linseed oil and caulked well or with approved rubber joints. The joint between W.C
and trap shall be made with 1:1 cement mortar and shall be rendered leak proof.
4.6. The Orissa W.C shall be fixed in level in a neat workmanlike manner. The W.C & trap shall be set in
brickbat concrete 1:2:4. Joint between W.C & flush pipe shall be made with putty of white lead in
linseed oil and caulked well or with approved rubber joint. Joint between W.C & trap shall be made
with 1:1 cement sand mortar and shall be rendered leak proof.
4.7. Wall-hung European W.C shall be mounted on C.I chairs, which are fixed to the wall and floor using
Anchor fasteners. The bolts and nuts used for fixing the chairs shall be stainless steel and the fixing
bolts for the W.C and chairs could be CP brass or stainless steel. Floor-mounted W.C shall be fixed
with Anchor fasteners using stainless steel bolts and nuts. The gap between the WC and floor or
wall shall be neatly sealed with waterproof non-hardening sealant of approved colour. The sealant
should not extrude beyond the footprint or WC outline.
4.8. All W. C’s shall be aligned and levelled with the floor and wall tiles so as to present an integrated
look. The utmost care and skill shall be exercised to achieve a good installation in keeping with the
interior designs.
4.9. Urinals shall be fixed to the wall using Anchor fasteners and stainless-steel bolts and nuts. The
urinals shall be held in line and level according to the interior designs and tile modules. Partitions,
wherever required to be Provided, shall also maintain line and level as shown on drawings and as
required. Supply spreader and drain piping and P-trap shall be of CP brass and installed in a neat
and workman like manner. No unseemly bends or wooden support pieces shall be permitted.
4.10. Wall-mounted lavatory basins and sinks shall maintain line and level as specified by the interior
drawings and also with the tile modules. The supply connections shall be of CP brass from the angle
stop valves to the pillar taps or single level fixture and shall display good workmanship. Drain
connections shall have a CP P-trap with unions and exposed CP drainpipe and a wall flange or
escueheon. In the case of counter mounted basins and sinks extreme care shall be taken to
independently and adequately support the basin and aligning with the opening in the counter slab.
Supply and drain connections shall be same as for wall mounted basins. The crevices between
basin and wall or counter shall be neatly sealed with a non-hardening sealant of approved colour.
4.11. All accessories like the mirror, soap tray, Towel Rod/ Ring etc shall be neatly fixed as
Page 1002 of 1358

per interior designs. Good workmanship is the essence of all sanitary installation for
achieving interior design objectives.
4.12. During the construction period, the contractor shall protect all the sanitary fixtures from damage
due to accidental or even intentional mechanical impact with hard objects and also misuse and
vandalism.
5. Testing and Acceptance
The Sanitary appliances shall be generally tested for the following:
5.1. Water Tests - The water tests shall be applied before the appliances are connected & May be
carried out in sections so as to limit the static head to 4.5m. It is necessary to Seal all the openings
affected by the test & provide support to the plugs used as Stoppers.
• The testing plug at the upper end of the ventilating pipe should be fitted with a tee piece with a
cock on each branch, one branch being connected by a flexible tube to a manometer. Air
pressure is then introduced into the system through the other branch of the tee- piece until the
desired pressure is shown on the manometer scale. The pressure applied should be equal to
65 mm water gauge and should remain constant for a period of three minutes to provide the
soundness of the installation.
• Alternatively, the air pressure may be applied by passing a flexible tube from a tee - piece
attached to a manometer through the water seal of the sanitary appliance, the test then being
carried out as described in A.
5.2. Smoke Test - Fault indicated by the air tests may be located by pumping smoke into the system
with a smoke machine. Care should be taken to ensure that the system is filled with smoke before
sealing with the plugs.
5.3. Hydraulic Performances - Discharge tests should be made from all the appliances, singly &
collectively. Obstruction in any of the pipelines should be traced & the whole system examined for
proper hydraulic performance, including the retention of any adequate water in each trap. The
sanitary fixtures form the final terminal units of the water supply and drainage system and
should meet the performance needs as a terminal unit. Each fixture shall be inspected for
scratches or chippings and alignment before acceptance.
The following design flows shall be verified and validated for acceptance.
W.C Flush valve 15 ltrs. to Provide test 32 dia valved

20 ltrs. connection at the lowest
per flush floor & highest floor.
Flushing 6 – 9 lit Fill time between two

cistern consecutive flushes.
Lavatory CW/HW Pillar taps ) 15 lpm max. 10 lpm min

Basin or )
Single lever)
Page 1003 of 1358

fixture)
Full basin 3 min. To be measured

drain time & validated.
Sink CW/HW Pillar taps )15 lpm max. 10 lpm min.

or)
Single lever)
fixture)
Full sink 3 min. To be measured

drain time & validated.
All tests shall be conducted at each and every fixture except for flush valves, which shall be at the
lowest and highest test connections to be made on each riser/down take. The contractor shall make
the temporary valve connections which shall be plugged with a brass plug after validation.
6. Tolerance Limits
The following tolerances shall be permitted:
6.1. EWC –
a) On dimension 75 mm & over - (+/-) 4%
b) On dimensions less than 75mm - (+/-) 2mm
c) On all angles - (+/-) 3 deg
6.2. Low Flush tanks – The flush tanks shall be capable of being rapidly brought into action by the
operating lever but shall not self-siphon or leak. When tested according to IS 774 the discharge rate
shall be 5(+/-)0.50 litres in 3 seconds for a 5 liters tank. The tank shall be so designed that there
shall be no appreciable variation in the force of flush during the flushing of the required quantity
of water.
6.3. Wash Basins –
a) on dimension 75 mm & over - (+/-) 4%
6.4. Kitchen / Pantry Sinks -
a) Thickness Criteria - The Thickness of the stainless steel shall not be less than 1.00mm
before forming & after forming shall not be less than 75mm.
b) Depth - The depth of the sink bowl shall be 150mm minimum, when measured from the top
edge of the bowl to the base of the sink.
Page 1004 of 1358

c) Internal Dimensions of Bowls - The minimum internal dimensions, when measured on

the bowl center lines across the top of the bowl, shall be 380mmx340mm for rectangular bowls
& 360mm for round bowls.
d) Bowl Locating Limits - The distance between the edge of the sink bowls & the end of the
sink shall be 15mm minimum for sitting on type sinks & 30mm minimum for inset type sinks.
Depth of the collar provided for inset sinks shall be 10 (+/-)2 mm. For sinks designed for
use with a 600mm wide worktop, the distance between the edge of the sink bowl & the
front of the sink shall be 50mm, minimum & in the case of sinks designed for use with
500mm wide worktop, the distance shall be 45mm minimum.
Test –
A) When Examined by an unaided eye of an experienced observer, from a distance of 600+/-

100mm from exposed surfaces, the sink shall be free from visible defects.
B) The visual examination shall be carried out with uniform illumination at the surface of the sink of
300 lux & with the sink positioned so that it is between the light source & the observer.
6.5. Urinals-
a) On dimension 75 mm & over - (+/-) 4%
6.6. Pillar Taps/Bib Taps –

Every pillar tap, complete with its component parts shall Withstand an internally applied hydraulic pressure
of 20 kg/sq.cm. Maintained for a Period of 2 minutes during which period it shall neither leak nor sweat.
WATER SUPPLY SYSTEM
1. Scope
1.1. The scope of work shall cover supply, installation, testing and commissioning of: (Concealed
and Open type) .
• Cold and Hot Water (if required) distribution piping and valves.
• Connections to sanitary ware, kitchen/ pantry equipment etc.
• Secondary storage tanks, if any.
• All valves, masonry valve chambers etc.
• Insulation of pipes.
• Painting of pipes & supports generally as specified and shown on drawings.
2. Standard
2.1. The following standards shall be applicable as revised up to date:
Page 1005 of 1358

1. IS 2065-1983 Code of practice for water supply in buildings.
2. IS 1239 Part 1 & 2 Steel tubes & tubulars and fittings.
3. IS 778 Gun metal gate, globe and check valves for water steam and oil.
4. IS 1703 High pressure ball valves.
5. IS 781 Screw down Bib taps and stop cocks.
6. IS 1879 (Part I to X) Malleable iron G.I. fittings.
7. IS 1536 Centrifugally cast LA Class pressure pipes.
8. IS 1538 Cast Iron fittings for pressure pipes for water, gas and sewage.
9. IS 4984 High density Polyethylene pipes for potable water supplies.
Water Supply Systems 2 of 12

10. IS 4985 Unplasticized PVC pipes for potable water supplies.
11. IS 7634 Code of practice for plastic pipe work for potable water supplies.
12. BS EN 1057 – 1996 Copper Pipes & fittings.
3. Materials
3.1. General
3.1.1. All materials shall be new of the best quality conforming to the specifications. Where
different makes are specified, the choice of make shall rest with the Authority
3.1.2. All samples of materials with necessary catalogues, performance data shall be submitted and
approved before use on the work. Approved samples of all materials shall be neatly displayed
on a board and such a display board of samples shall always be in exhibition in the sample
room of the construction office of the Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore. Such a display shall be
used for the day-to-day checking of the materials on site.
3.2. Steel Pipes & Fittings
All steel pipes shall be heavy quality galvanized steel tubes conforming to IS-1239.
3.2.1. Fittings shall be malleable iron galvanized fittings of approved make conforming to IS 1879 (I
to X). All fittings shall have the manufacturer’s trademark stamped on it. Fittings shall include
Page 1006 of 1358

couplings, bends, tees, reducers, nipples, union, bushes etc. All fittings shall be suitable for
the class of pressure of the piping system.
3.2.2. Flanges shall be galvanized steel screwed type conforming to IS 6392 and the pressure class
of the piping system. Flanges should mate with equipment or valve flanges as the case may
be and shall be complete with bolts and nuts and gaskets suitable for the temperature and
pressure of water in the system concerned. Gasket
3.2.3. Selections shall be got approved before use and samples of approved gaskets shall be put
on display.
3.3. Cast Iron Pipes & Fittings
3.3.1. Cast iron pipes shall be of ‘LA’ class conforming to IS 1536 suitable for Drip seal jointing with
spigot and socket joints and if flanged they shall be ‘A’ class conforming to IS 1537. Pipes shall
be in maximum lengths available.
3.3.2. Fittings shall be of the class required conforming to IS 1538. If Spigot-socket, they shall be
suitable for drip seal jointing.
3.3.3. A CPVC, Pipes & Fittings - Pipes with one boat of desired shade of enamel paint. All
terminations points for installation of faucets shall have brass termination fittings.
Installation shall be to satisfaction of manufacturer & project Manager. Pipes from 65 mm to
150 mm dia shall be schedule 40 for CWC & Schedule 80 for HWS / HWR.
3.3.4. 1Joining pipes & fittings
a. Cutting:
Pipes shall be cut either with a wheel type plastic pipe cutting or hacksaw blade and care shall be
taken to make square cut which provides optimal bonding area within a joint.
b. Deburring / Beveling :
Burrs and fittings should be removed from the outside and inside of pipe with a pocketknife of file otherwise
burrs and fittings may prevent proper contact between pipe and fittings during assembly.
c. Fitting preparation:
A clean dry rag/cloth should be used to wipe dirt and moisture from the fitting sockets and tubing end. The
tubing should make contact with the socket wall 1/3 or 2/3 of the way into the fitting socket.
d. Solvent Cement Application:
Only CPVC solvent cement confirming to ASTM-F493 should be used for joining pipe with fittings. An even
coat of solvent cement should be applied on the pipe end and a thin coat inside the fitting socket, otherwise
too much of cement solvent can cause clogged water ways.
Page 1007 of 1358

e. Assembly:
After applying the solvent cement on both pipe and fitting socket, pipe should be inserted into the fitting
socket within 30 seconds and rotating the pipe ¼ to ½ turn while inserting so as to ensure even distribution
of solvent cement with the joint. The assembled system should be held for 10 seconds (approximately) in
order to allow the joint to set up.
An even bead of cement should be evident around the joint and if this bead is not continuous remake the
joint to avoid potential leaks. Set & Cure times :
Solvent cement set and cure times shall be strictly adhered to as per the below mentioned table.
Ambient Temperature during Pipe Size

Core Period ½ “ - 1” 1.1/4 “ - 2”
Above 15 deg. C 1 Hr 2 Hrs
4 – 15 deg. C 2 Hrs 4 Hrs
Below 4 deg. C 4 Hrs 8 Hrs
Special care shall be exercised when assembling flow guard systems in extremely low temperature (below
40 C) or extremely high temperature (above 450 C) In extremely hot temperatures, make sure that both
surfaces to the joined are still wet with cement solvent when putting them together.
3.4. Valves
3.4.1. Valves 65 mm dia and below shall be heavy duty 20Kg/cm2 gun metal full way valves
or Globe valves conforming to IS 778 and ISI stamped along with the name stamp of the
manufacturer.
3.4.2. Where specified, valves of 80 mm size and above may be cast iron flanged sluice valves with
non-rising spindle. Each sluice valve shall be provided with wheel for valves in exposed
position and cap top for underground valves. Suitable operating keys shall be provided for
sluice valves with tops. Sluice valves shall be of best quality conforming to IS 780-1969 of class
specified and ISI stamped.
3.4.3. Air valves shall be gunmetal or C.I of size as specified in the Schedule of Work. Each air valve
shall be provided with an isolation gun metal full way valve for size 65 mm dia and below and
C.I flanged valve 80 mm dia and above.
3.4.4. Scour valves shall be gun metal full way valves for sizes up to 65 mm dia.
4. Pipe Installation
4.1. General
4.1.1. Shop drawings for the routing of pipes shall be prepared generally on the basis of layout
drawings issued. The shop drawings shall reflect the site conditions, structural beams and
columns, obstructions by way of any construction elements or any other service pipes,
ducts etc. The drawings should clearly indicate openings required in brick or concrete
walls, drain valves at low points, air valves at high points, isolating valves, if any, and invert
Page 1008 of 1358

levels at every 15m intervals. The drawings should also indicate typical details of hangers,
supports, brackets etc. After approval of the drawings, pipe routes shall be marked with
a distinct colour of paint on the site and got it approved by the Authority Engineer/ IIM
Indore.
4.1.2. All openings and chases in brick walls core cuttings shall be made neatly and refilled to a
reasonable finish. However, final finishing will be done by the civil contractor. Openings in
concrete walls shall, however, be made only with the approval of the Authority Engineer/ IIM
Indore. Pipe penetrations, through wall or floor, shall be sealed with an approved fire-resistant
sealant with Birla 3m .
4.1.3. Good workmanship and neat pipe layout are the prerequisites of these specifications.
Horizontal pipes shall be truly horizontal with necessary slopes and hangers or supports as
specified and shown on drawings. Vertical pipes shall be truly vertical and shall be laid away
from the walls at least by 10mm or as required by the Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore. All pipe
runs shall be parallel to the ceiling or walls to present a neat appearance. Pipes buried in wall
shall be laid in machine-made chases with galvanized steel anchors.
4.1.4. All pipes before and after testing shall be protected with wooden or brass plugs to
prevent ingress of dust, sand or any extraneous matter.
4.2. Pipe supports; hangers & clamps
4.2.1. Pipe supports, clamps, suspenders shall be pre-fabricated and galvanized (after
fabrication). The support systems shall generally follow the types specified under “PIPE
SUPPORTING SYSTEMS”. Application of support systems shall follow the guidelines in the
above specifications. Any other types of support, suspension or clamping to meet the site
conditions shall be got approved before use.
4.3. Copper / Galvanized steel piping
4.3.1 Supports for Copper /galvanized steel piping shall be as follows:
Size Horizontal Vertical

(mm) (m) (m)
Up to 15 1.25 1.80
20 - 25 2.00 2.50
32 - 125 2.50 3.00
Over 125 3.00 400
Additional support shall be provided at the bends, heavy fittings like valves and near equipment and
as directed by the Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore.
4.3.2 All fittings shall be screwed type unless specified otherwise. However, flanged joints shall be provided
at the following positions:
• Pairs of flanges for isolation and removal of equipment.
• Mating flanges for equipment flange connections.
Page 1009 of 1358

• Mating flanges for valves, strainers, as the case may be.
• Pair of flanges or unions at every 15m continuous run of piping.
4.3.3 Entire piping shall be self-draining using eccentric reducers at all change of sections and shall be
pitched 0.3% towards low points where a drain outlet and shut off valve shall be provided. All high points in
the piping shall have air vents with shut off valves.
4.4. Insulation
4.4.1. Wherever pipes are thermally insulated, the material shall be a flexible light weight
elastomeric material of standard manufacture with the following physical properties:
Composition : Closed cellular with scaled internal and external faces.

Density : 60 –100 Kg/m3
Thermal Conductivity : 0.039 w/mc @ 32C
Fire rating : Self-extinguishing, Low smoke confirming
To ASTM D635 & UL-94V
Ozone resistance : No craching ASTM D 1171
Water Vapour permeability : 0.15 perm ASTM C 355
Water absorption : 3% by weight ASTM D 1056
4.4.2. Insulation thickness shall be as shown in the schedule of work. In embedded situations, the
pipes shall be wrapped with PVC tape as specified in the schedule.
4.4.3. Separable well is only for a future temperature sensor. Others will provide sensors.
Thermometers, wherever required, should be dial type or industrial type with a suitable range
(40 - 80C) complete with a separable well.
4.5. Painting- All exposed piping shall be painted as specified under the Section “PAINTING”.
4.6. Copper Piping:
The Copper tubes shall confirm to EN 1057 in 10’ length and thickness as per table X.
SIZE OF COPPER TUBES TO BS 2871 : PART 1

Table ‘X’ Table ‘Y’ Table ‘Z’
Nominal Maximum Nominal Maximum Nominal Maximum
Size of Thickness Working Thickness Working Thickness Working
Tube (mm) Pressure (mm) Pressure (mm) Pressure
12 0.6 55 0.8 75 0.5 53
15 0.7 52 1.0 75 0.5 42
22 0.9 45 1.2 61 0.6 34
28 0.9 35 1.2 47 0.6 27
35 1.2 38 1.5 47 0.7 25
42 1.2 31 1.5 39 0.8 24
Page 1010 of 1358

54 1.2 24 2.0 41 0.9 21
The Dimension must be strictly as per EN 1057, and chemical composition of the copper pipes shall
be copper of 99.9% min and 0.015& to 0.040% Phosphorous. The tubes shall be totally cylindrical and
of uniform thickness free from flaw, pin holes, cracks and other skin defects. The max working and
burst pressure of tubes shall be as per EN 1057. All tubes shall be eddying current tested to ensure
that the tubes are free from any internal blow holes/flaw or eccentricity. The vendor to produce the
test certificates as required by the IIM Indore/ Authority Engineer upon requirement for any
verification.
As regards the fittings, it shall be made of Dezincification Resistant materials conforming to BS 864/EN
1254. Ordinary or Duplex brass fittings are not allowed to be used. The dimensions of the fittings
must confirm to EN 1254 Part II and EN 1057 to ensure proper jointing. The fittings must have BS 864
or EN 1254 imprinted on the fitting itself.
For Solder Ring Fittings, all plain ends of fittings must be provided with enough amount of lead-free
solder in the neck of fitting itself to ensure proper capillary action. The solder must be soft solder &
lead free with melting temperature of appx. 230 deg.C. & must be capable of melting with an ordinary
blow lamp and on melting must be sufficient to form a complete leak proof joint to cover the annular
space in between the tube and fitting from the socket of the fitting to the outside of the fitting.
Solder must confirm to BS 219 /BS EN 29453 specifications.
For End Feed Fittings, the fittings must be capable of End Feeding. Solder wire to be used with these
fittings must be soft solder capable of melting at appx. 230 deg.C and must confirm to BS 219/EN BS
29453. Solder wire must be absolutely lead free. Copper Tin or Silver Tin Solder is acceptable.
The following codes governing the SITC of Copper Piping Plumbing shall be followed.
COPPER TUBES
BS 2871 PART-1 Copper Tubes for Water, Gas & Sanitation
BS EN 1057 Seamless, round copper tubes for water and gas in sanitary and heating
applications
ASTM B88 Seamless Copper Water tube
ASTM E243/EN Electro-magnetic (Eddy Current)
1971 examination of copper and copper alloy tubes.
Copper/Gun metal
Fittings.
BS 864 PART-2 Capillary and compression tube fittings of copper and copper alloys.
EN 1254 Copper and Copper Alloy Plumbing fittings
Part 1 Fittings with end for capillary soldering or capillary brazing to copper
tubes
Part 2 Fittings with compression ends for use with copper tubes.
Solder
Wire/Brazing
Alloys
BS EN 29453 Soft Solder Alloys-Chemical Compositions and forms
Page 1011 of 1358

BS 1723 Brazing
FLUX
ANSI/NSF6 or equi.
5. Acceptance, Testing & Commissioning
5.1. Before testing and commissioning, water shall be filled and circulated through the piping system
and flushed out to ensure clean piping. Entire piping installation with all valves fully open,
except the terminal fixture valves shall be subjected to a hydraulic test pressure whichever
is higher of the following:
• times the dynamic head of the pump plus the gravity head of an overhead storage or
pressure tank.
• 2.5 times the no-delivery head (head developed when the discharge valve is closed) of the
pump.
5.2. The test shall be for the entire water supply system and shall hold for a minimum of 3 hours without
loss of pressure. During the testing period, the contractor should walk along the entire piping
system along with the Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore and validate that there are no leaks anywhere
in the system. Such validation shall be carried out segment by segment and recorded. Should there
be any leaks in any segment, the system shall be drained, leaks attended and tested once again as
above till the entire piping system is rendered leak-tight and acceptable.
The Leak Shall be determined by the formulae.
ql = ( (ND* P)^0.50/3.3)
ql = the allowable leakage in cubic cm/hr
N = number of joints in the length of the pipel i n e
D = diameter in mm. &
P = the average test pressure during the leakage testing kg/sq cm.
Should any test of pipe laid in position discloses leakage greater than that specified above
the defective joints shall be repaired until the leakage is within the specified allowance.
Flow tests at each and every outlet shall be conducted as specified in Section “SANITARY SYSTEM”
and all test readings and statements of verification shall form the acceptance test documentation. If
the piping was tested in sections during construction phase, all such test records shall form an
appendix to the above documentation.
Tolerances
For medium & heavy grade of single tube of GI pipes the tolerances for the thickness & weight shall be (+/-
)10%. For the quantities per load of 10 t, for medium & heavy grade Gi pipes the tolerances shall be (+/ )7.50%.
Page 1012 of 1358

Testing
i. Once an installation is completed and cored as per above mentioned

recommendations, the system should be hydrostatically pressure tested at 150 psi ( 10 Bar) for
one hour. During pressure testing, the system should be fitted with water and if a leak is found,
the joint should be cut out and replacing the same with new one by using couplers.
ii. Transition of Flow guard CPVC to Metals
When making a transition connection to metal threads, special Brass / plastic transition
fitting (Male and female adapters) should be used. Plastic threaded connections should
not be over torqued Hard right plus one- h a l f turn should be adequate.
iii. Threaded Sealants- Teflon tape shall be used to make threaded connections leak proof.
iv. Solvent Cement
Only CPVC solvent cement conforming to ASTMF 493 should be used for joining pipe with fittings and
valves. Flow guard CPVC cement solvent have a minimumshelf life of 1 year. Aged cement solvent
will often change colour or being to thicken and become gelatinous or jelly like and when this
happens, the cement should not be used. The cement solvent should be used within 30 days after
opening thecompany’s seal and tightly close the seal after using in order to avoid its freezing. The freeze
cement solvent should be discarded immediately and fresh one should be used. The CPVC solvent cement
usage should be adhered to as given in table below.
Diameter of pipe in inch

½“ ¾“ 1” ¼“ 1½“ 2”
(flow guard)
Approx. nos. of joints which can
be mode per litre of solvent 200 Nos. 180 Nos. 150 Nos. 130 Nos. 100 Nos. 70 Nos.
cement.
v. Hangers and supports

For Horizontal runs, support should be given at 3- f o o t (9 0 cm) intervals for diameters of one
inch and below and at 4-foot (1.2 m) intervals for larger sizes. Hangers should not have rough or sharp
edges which come in contact with the tubing. Supports should be as per the below mentioned table:
Size of 21 49 71 82
Pipe degree C degree C degree C degree C
Inch Ft. Ft. Ft. Ft.
½“
5.5 4.5 3.0 2.5
¾“
5.5 5.0 3.0 2.5
1”
6.0 5.5 3.5 3.0
¼“
6.5 6.0 3.5 3.5
Page 1013 of 1358

1½“
7.0 6.0 3.5 3.5
2”
7.0 6.5 4.0 3.5
SCHEDULE – 40
Recommended Support spacing ( I feet)

Nom. Pipe size Temperature “ C
(In) (mm) 23 38 49 60 71 82
2½ 65 7½ 7 7 6½ 6 3½
3 80 8 7 7 7 6 3½
4 100 8½ 7½ 7½ 7 6½ 4
6 150 9½ 8 8 7½ 7 4½
8 200 9½ 8 8 7½ 7 5
INTERNAL DRAINAGE SYSTEMS
1. Scope of Work
1.1. The scope of work shall cover:
1.1.1. Soil and waste drainage piping including:
• soil, waste and vent stacks.
• connections to sanitary ware
• waste connections to kitchen, other appliances, floor traps etc.
• connections to external sewerage system
1.1.2. Storm water drainage piping including
• roof drainage
• storm water down takes
• connections to external storm water drainage system.
2. Standards
All materials and the installation shall meet latest of the following standards:
Page 1014 of 1358

1) IS : 3989 Centrifugally cast-iron pipes

2) IS : 6163 Centrifugally cast low-pressure iron pipes
3) IS : 1536 Centrifugally cast-iron pressure pipes
4) IS : 782 Pig lead.
5) IS : 1726 CI manhole frames & covers.
6) IS : 5329 Code of Practice for Sanitary pipe work.

7) IS : 3114 Code of practice for laying of cast iron pipes
8) IS : 1239 Steel tubes & tubulars
9) IS : 1879 Malleable iron GI fittings
3. Materials
3.1. General
3.1.1. All materials shall be new and have the best quality conforming to the specifications. Where
different makes are specified, the choice of make shall rest with the Authority
3.1.2. All samples of materials with necessary catalogues and performance data shall be submitted
and got approved before use on the work. Approved samples of all materials shall be neatly
displayed on a board and such a display board of samples shall always be in exhibition in the
sample room of the construction office of the Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore. Such a display
shall be used for the day-to-day checking of the materials on site.
3.2. Cast Iron Pipes & Fittings
3.2.1. Cast iron pipes shall be centrifugally cast low-pressure cast-iron spigot and socket pipes
conforming to Indian Standards specified and generally meeting the following:
Nominal Thickness Weight of Internal Depth

Diameter (mm) 1.83m Diameter of lead
Inch (mm) length of socket (mm)
(Kg) (mm)
50 3.5 8.5 73 25
75 3.5 12.7 99 25
100 4.0 19.2 126 25
Page 1015 of 1358

150 5.0 35.5 178 38
Acceptable tolerance for pipes to IS 3939 -84 and IS 1729 shall be as follows
a) Wall thickness -15 %
b) Length +/-20 mm
c) Weight -10 %
All joints shall be with lead caulking.
3.2.2. Centrifugally cast low pressure iron pipes without sockets (socket-less) shall conform to IS
6163. Fittings shall be socket-less, and all joints shall be with a synthetic rubber sealing collar
with a stainless-steel clamp with two S.S bolts for application of uniform pressure. All materials
shall be from approved manufacturers. Neoprene shall be used as gasket material.
3.2.3. Wherever specified centrifugally cast pressure pipes of ‘LA’ class shall be used. The pipes and
fittings shall conform to IS 1536. Fittings shall be spigot and socket type suitable for molten
lead caulking. Where necessary flanged pipes and fittings may be used with a Teflon gasket.
3.2.4. Fittings shall be cast iron compatible with the pipes used. Tees, bends, crosses and other
specials shall have easy sweep as specified. Cleaning eyes shall be provided wherever
required and shall be complete with a sealing gasket and suitable bolts. Cleaning eyes should
not be along the flow (such as bends) but behind (such as Y or T).
3.3. Steel Pipes and Fittings - Steel pipes shall be galvanized medium quality tubes to IS:1239. Fittings
shall be galvanized malleable iron conforming to IS:1879 ( i to x). Fittings shall include long
radius bends, tees, reducers, unions etc.
3.4. Lead Piping
3.4.1. Lead pipes shall be seamless hydraulically drawn and of uniform thickness throughout,
conforming to IS 404. Weights and wall thickness of pipes shall be as follows:
Nominal dia Wall thickness Weight in

(mm) (mm) Kg /m
32 2.6 3.28
40 2.6 3.95
50 2.7 5.07
75 2.7 7.48
Page 1016 of 1358

100 2.7 9.88
3.5. Traps & Seals –
3.5.1. All traps shall be self-cleaning, and the material and the seal depth shall be as specified below
wherever the traps are not integral with the appliances or ware.
Appliance or ware Trap

Material Type Seal depth
(mm)
Lavatory/Wash basin (1)

CP brass P 50
Sinks (1)
CP brass P 50
Floor drain Cast Iron P or S 50

built-in
Kitchen Floor drain Fabricated P 50

or fabricated drain boxes Stainless
Steel
(built-in)
Urinals (1)
C P brass P 50
Fan Coil Units Galvanized P 25

steel
Air Handling Units Galvanized P 50

steel
(All P-traps shall have cleaning eye or other cleaning facility)
Roof Drain outlet Cast iron - -
Plant room floor drains Cast iron/ - -

fabricated
steel
(1)
Bottle type traps shall not be used.
Any other appliance shall have an appropriate trap as specified by the Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore or
as required.
3.5.2. All floor drains shall be covered with perforated stainless-steel grating of size specified or
Page 1017 of 1358

required. Roof drain outlets shall have dome grates unless specified otherwise. Plant room
floor drains shall have cast iron or fabricated steel grating.
3.6. Cleanouts - Cleanouts other than those integral with the fitting, shall be of brass and screw down
type. Wherever cleanouts are required in cast iron piping, galvanized steel adaptors shall be
provided as part of the cleaning system.
4. Drainage/ Sewage System Installation
4.1. General
4.1.1. Shop drawings for the routing of pipes shall be prepared generally by the contractor on
the basis of layout drawings issued by the consultants.
4.1.2. However, the drawings shall reflect the site conditions, structural beams and columns
obstructions by way of any construction elements or any other service pipes, ducts etc.
The drawings should clearly indicate openings.
4.1.3. Required in brick or concrete walls and invert levels at every 15m intervals. The drawings
should also indicate typical details of hangers, supports, brackets etc. After approval of the
drawings, pipe routes shall be marked with a distinct colour of paint on the site and done
the Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore approve it.
4.1.4. All openings and chases in brick walls shall be made neatly and finished but the final,
finish will be by others. Openings in concrete walls shall, however, be made only with the
approval of the Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore. Pipe penetrations, through wall or floor, shall
be sealed with an approved fire-resistant sealant.
4.1.5. Good workmanship and neat pipe layout are the prerequisites of these specifications.
Horizontal pipes shall be truly horizontal with necessary slopes and hangers or supports
as specified and shown on drawings. Vertical pipes shall be truly vertical and shall be laid
away from the walls at least by 50mm or as required by the Authority Engineer/ IIM
Indore. All pipe runs shall be parallel to the ceiling or walls to present a neat
appearance. Pipes buried in the wall shall be laid in machine-made chases with galvanized
steel anchors.
4.1.6. All pipes before and after testing shall be protected with wooden or brass plugs to prevent
ingress of dust, sand or any extraneous matter.
4.2. Pipe supports; hangers & clamps
All pipe supports, hangers & clamps shall be standard pre-fabricated galvanized (after
fabrication) units. Pipe supports shall generally follow the types specified under “PIPE SUPPORT
SYSTEMS” and the associated drawings.
4.3. Soil & Waste Piping
4.3.1. Horizontal pipes shall be suspended from the structural ceiling slab or wall brackets at the
Page 1018 of 1358

following centres:
Pipe dia Support centres

(mm) (m)
32 1.8
50 - 100 2.0
Over 100 2.5
Pipes shall be laid to an optimum slope of 1 in 60 as far as possible. A liberal provision of

easily accessible cleanouts shall be made on all horizontal pipes. Cleaning facility shall
preferably be from the floor above the ceiling slab for all under floor installations. Where
horizontal pipes are laid in a sunken floor slab, adequate slopes shall be achieved through
galvanized saddles or cement mortar bedding. All such pipes, after testing, shall be covered
with and set in cement concrete (1:2:4) so that the pipes are not disturbed during the filling
up of the sunken floor.
4.3.2. Vertical stacks shall be truly vertical and parallel to the wall and supported on saddles so that
the pipes are at least 50mm away from the finished surface. Branch pipe connections shall
be aligned with the bend or tee on the stack. Where the vertical stack meets the horizontal
run or a manhole, a 45o tee connection with a cleanout shall be employed to facilitate
smooth flow and easy cleanability.
4.3.3. The spigot shall be centered in the adjoining socket by tightly caulking in sufficient turns of
tarred gasket or hemp yarn to leave unfilled half the depth of socket for lead. When gasket
or hemp yarn has been caulked tightly home, a jointing ring shall be placed round the barrel
& against the faces of the socket. Molten Pig lead shall then be poured in to fill the remainder
of the socket. The lead shall then be solidly caulked with suitable tools & hammers of not less
than 3 Kg weight, right round the joint to make up for the shrinkage of the molten metal on
cooling & shall be preferably finished 3mm behind the socket face. Lead for caulking shall
conform to IS: 782-1978.
4.3.4. Cast iron socket-less pipes shall be joined by using rubber/neoprene sealing tube and a
stainless-steel clamp with two bolts. All materials and method of jointing shall strictly
conform to manufacturers standards and recommendations.
4.3.5. Galvanized steel drain piping shall be used for appliances, wash basins, sinks, bathtubs etc.
using screwed malleable galvanized fittings with approved sealants. Elbows may be avoided
as far as possible and long- sweep bends are preferred for smooth flow. Joints between the
galvanized steel pipe and cast iron shall be done through appropriate fitting and lead
caulking as shown on drawings or as instructed by the Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore.
Page 1019 of 1358

4.3.6. Where specified, lead pipes may be used for waste, vent and WC connections. Pipe size shall
be as shown on drawings or as required for the appliance. Lead pipes shall be straightened
by wooden mandrels and bent to shape by dry sand filling. Joints of lead pipes shall be wiped
solder joints. The pipe ends to be joined shall be cleaned with a wire brush and freed from
oxide if any. Chalk shall then be rubbed to kill the greasy nature of lead. After this plumber’s
black shall be applied. A fine shaving of lead shall be removed from this with shave hook.
Mutton tallow shall then be smeared over the prepared surface. The molten solder, and alloy
composed of 3 parts Of tin and 7 parts of lead shall be poured in a thin stream from a ladle
moved in an elliptical direction over the joint position including a portion of the pipe at each
end beyond the mark. When sufficient solder has been poured the joint shall be wiped with
pad of wiping cloth with long continuous movements in one direction only so as to leave a
neatly formed elliptical shaped joint. Surplus solder remaining on the joint shall be removed.
The joint shall be watertight, air tight and shall be free from burrs, strings or droppings and
shall be 60 to 90mm in length depending on the pipe diameter.
4.3.7. Joint between lead pipe and cast-iron pipe or stoneware pipe shall be made as follows:
One end of a brass thimble shall be slipped into or over the lead pipe and jointed to it by
means of a wiped solder joint. The other end of thimble shall then be inserted into the socket
of the cast iron or stone ware pipe. In case of cast iron, the joint shall be made with molten
lead and in case of the stone ware the joint shall be made with cement mortar 1:1.
4.3.8. Where specified, PVC pipes may be used for waste, vent and WC connections. Pipe size shall
be as shown on drawings or as required for the appliance. Pipe connection to the cast iron
piping shall be through appropriate adapter.
4.3.9. All pipes shall be fixed in a gradient towards the outfalls of drains. Pipes inside a toilet room
shall be in chase unless otherwise shown on drawings. Where required, pipes may be run at
ceiling level in suitable gradient and supports shall be as follows:
Pipe Material Vertical Horizontal

(Mm) (Mm)
GI 3000 2400
PVC 1800 1200
Lead 1200 1200
Cast iron pipes shall be supported at every joint and 1800 center to center.
4.3.10. Cast iron floor drains shall be set in 1:2:4 cement concrete. Kitchen floor drain boxes shall
be as shown in drawings and kept flush with the finished floor. The drain boxes shall have a
minimum of 50mm water seal and a suitable perforated grating. Drain boxes shall be
connected to the cast iron drain piping through a flanged galvanized steel drain connection.
Page 1020 of 1358

4.3.11. All waste connections shall have the following minimum sizes:
Appliance Diameter
(Mm)
Wash basins 30
Sinks 50
Urinals 50
Bidets 30
Shower trays 40
Bathtubs 50
Floor drains 65/75
4.4. Vent Piping
4.4.1. Building vent stacks shall be not less than 75mm dia. Where the vent stack becomes one
with the main soil or waste stack the main stack size shall not be reduced. Vent connections
on any branch waste drain line shall be at least two thirds the diameter of the branch drain
subject to a minimum of 25mm. Vent connection to a soil drain line shall be a minimum of
32mm dia. Vent connections shall be as near to the crown of the trap but not farther than
450mm.
4.4.2. No water shall enter a vent lines. Vent lines shall be laid vertically terminated at least
150mm above the open-to-air roof. Vents may be connected back to the waste or
soil stack above the highest appliance connection and the said stack extends beyond
the roof by at least 150mm into the air.
4.5. Cleaning plugs
Cleaning plugs shall be easily accessible and convenient for rodding. Such plugs shall be
liberally provided so that the entire drainage system could be easily cleared of all possible chokes.
All clean outs shall be behind the flow and as far as possible, plug bends may be avoided.
5. Acceptance, Testing & Commissioning - Comprehensive tests of all appliances shall be made by
simulating conditions of use. Overflows shall also be examined for obstructions.
5.1. Pre commissioning checks
5.1.1. A walk-through inspection shall be carried out and the following checks made:
• Layouts are according to the drawings and identify variations.
• Material used are as specified, new and as per approved samples.
• All fixtures viz. Suspenders, brackets, clamps etc. are adequate and firmly fixed and spaced
as specified.
• Cleaning eyes are duly plugged and are easily accessible.
Page 1021 of 1358

• No visible damage or cases of bad workmanship.
• Check water seals in traps by discharging adequate number of appliances.
5.1.2. During construction, the piping shall be tested in sections so that the maximum static head
of water is not more than 4.5m. All such sectional tests shall be witnessed and signed by the
Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore. Records of these tests shall form the Acceptance Test
documentation.
5.1.3. An air test shall be conducted as specified in IS:5329 with a test pressure of 50mm water
gauge. If the pressure is not holding, then a smoke test shall be conducted through a smoke
generator to track down the leaking points. After attending to the leaks, the piping shall be
air tested again.
5.1.4. Hydraulic Performance Tests shall be conducted on each stack by simultaneous release of
water through various appliances like WC’s and bathtubs to ensure water sealing of traps.
5.1.5. Smoke Tests Shall be carried out as - All soil pipes, waste pipes, & vent pipes & all other pipes
when above ground shall be approved gas tight by a smoke test conducted under a pressure
of 25mm of water & maintained for 15 minutes after all traps seals have been filled with
water. A clear pungent smoke is produced by burning oily waste or tar paper or similar
material in the combustion chamber of a smoke machine which consists of a bellow & a
burner. If there is any leak at any point of the drain it is easily detectable by the sight as well
as by the smell of the smoke. Chemical smokes are not satisfactory.
5.1.6. Tests For Straightness & Obstructions Shall be carried out as under:
• By inserting at the high end of the sewer or drain a smooth ball of a diameter
13mm less than the pipe bore. In the absence of any obstruction, such as yarn
or mortar projecting through the joints, the ball should roll down the invert of the
pipe & emerge at the lower end.
• By means of a mirror at one end of the line & lamp at the other. If the pipeline is
straight , the full circle of light may be observed. If the pipel i n e is not straight.
This will be apparent. The mirror will also indicate obstruction in the barrel.
5.1.7. Test Records : Complete test records of all the test shall be properly maintained.
5.1.8. Tolerances On CI spun Pipes- Tolerances on the external diameter of the barrel, the
internal diameter of the socket & the depth of socket shall be as follows :
External diameter of barrel: (+/-) 4.0
Internal diameter of socket: (+/-) 3.0
Depth of socket: (+/-) 10.0
The tolerances on length of the pipes shall be (+/-) 20mm.
The tolerances on wall thickness shall be (-) 15%. No limits for plus tolerance is
allowed.
Page 1022 of 1358

Tolerances on the mass shall be limited to ( -10%). No limit for plus

tolerance.
EXTERNAL DRAINAGE SYSTEMS
1. Scope
1.1. The scope of work shall cover supply, installation and commissioning of: Storm water & sanitary
sewer drainage including-
a. Excavation and back filling of pipe trenches.
b. Construction of opens drains & catch basins.
c. Laying of pipe drains
d. Final connection to the Rainwater harvesting Tank & overflow thereof To the public storm
water drainage system.
e. Connection of all waste & soil lines to the sewage treatment Plant.
2. Standards
2.1. All materials and the installation shall meet latest of the following standards revised up to date:
1) IS: 3989 centrifugally cast (spun) cast iron pipes
2) IS: 6163 centrifugally cast low-pressure cast iron pipes

i) Spigot and socket type
ii) Socket-less type
3) IS: 1536 Centrifugally cast LA class cast iron pipes,

Spigot & socket or flanged type
4) IS: 1538 Cast iron fittings and specials

(Part 1 to 24)
5) IS: 1879 malleable cast iron pipe Fittings

(Part 1)
6) IS: 1239 Mild steel tubes and tubulars (6 to 150mm)
7) IS: 3589 Seamless and ERW steel pipes for water, gas and sewage (168 to 2032mm)
8) IS : 1239 Mild steel tubulars and other wrought steel

(Part 2) pipe fittings.
9) IS: 651 Salt glazed stoneware pipes
10) IS : 458 Concrete pipes

11) IS : 4989 HDPE pipes for potable water supplies,
Page 1023 of 1358

sewage & industrial effluents
12) IS : 985 UPVC pipes for potable water supplies
13) IS : 110221 Code of practice for coating and wrapping of

underground mild steel pipelines.
14) IS : 3114 Code of practice for laying of cast iron pipes
3. Materials
3.1. General-
3.1.1 all materials shall be new and have the best quality conforming to the specifications. Where
different makes are specified, the choice of make shall rest with the consultants.
3.1.2 all samples of materials with necessary catalogues performance data shall be submitted
and got approved before use on the work. Approved samples of all materials shall be neatly
displayed on a board and such a display board of samples shall always be in exhibition in
the sample room of the construction office of the Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore. Such a
display shall be used for the day-to-day checking of the materials on site.
3.1.3 All materials shall be inspected and received in good condition and thereafter, it will be
totally under the safe custody of the tenderer/contractor till they are handed over
satisfactorily after installation, testing and commissioning.
3.2. Pipes & Fittings
3.2.1 Cast iron pipes shall be centrifugally cast low-pressure type to IS: 3989 or IS: 6163. Fittings
shall be spigot and socket type suitable for the make of pipe used. All joints shall be lead
caulked.
3.2.2 Stoneware pipes shall conform to IS: 651. Pipes shall be salt glazed and of uniform
thickness. Pipes shall be free from cracks, air-blows and fire blisters. All joints shall be
made of cement mortar 1:1.
3.2.3 Cement concrete spun pipes shall conform to IS: 458 and shall be of NP2 class. All pipes
shall be dowelled for making a leak tight joint with a collar. Collar joints shall be made of
cement mortar 1:1.
3.2.4 Where specified or when higher pressures are encountered, pipes shall be
centrifugally cast pressure pipes of `LA’ class to IS : 1536. Fittings shall be spigot and
socket type suitable for lead-caulked joints. Where required, flanged fittings with Teflon
sealing gasket may be used.
4. Excavation and Back filling
4.1. Excavation for pipe trenches shall not be excessive but adequate for pipe laying and jointing.
Generally, trench width shall be pipe diameter plus 200mm on either side subject to a minimum
of 600mm up to a depth of 2000mm and 750mm beyond and up to 5000mm. The bottom of
Page 1024 of 1358

trench shall be 100mm below the pipe invert level. Actual excavation will be measured and
paid for on actuals subject to the maximum as defined above.
4.2. Wherever directed by the Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore, the depth of excavation may be
increased owing to poor soil conditions. In all such cases, the trench will be filled up
with gravel or cement concrete up to the required level. All such extra excavation and
gravel or cement concrete filling shall be paid for as extra.
4.3. Excavation for manholes, inspection chambers, and catch basins shall be done 300mm all-
round the base foundation. This is to allow ease of construction. Excess excavations shall not be
admissible for payment.
4.4. Excavation for pipe trenches shall be in open cutting with reasonably vertical sides. For
excavation deeper than 1500mm, the trench sides shall be shored up with timber or steel sheets
with adequate strut support to prevent slippage and side collapse.
4.5. The drainage lines shall be set out in straight lines between manholes. The alignment shall be
done by suitable ranging rods and levels established by proper levelling instruments.
4.6. All excavated soil and debris shall be neatly stacked alongside the trench as directed and used
for refilling and the surface finished to its original condition. Surplus soil and debris shall be
promptly disposed off making the site clean and clear of unwanted debris. Wherever
subsoil water enters the trench, proper arrangements shall be made for dewatering. Wherever
the excavated surface is a turf or paving, care shall be taken in properly preserving the turf
and paving material so that the same can be reused when the surface is refinished. Rates
for excavation shall therefore cover all the costs of the contingent works.
4.7. Trench excavation, pipe laying, testing and refilling shall be programmed along with the Authority
Engineer/ IIM Indore so that needlessly long lengths of trenches may not remain open causing
undue obstructions to site movements. Where blasting is unavoidable, it shall be permitted after
securing the approval of the authorities concerned. Hours of blasting and safety precautions
shall meet with the requirements of the local authority and the directions of the Authority
4.8. After the laying of the pipeline or any other work has been finished and proved to be watertight,
the trench or other excavation shall be refilled. Utmost care shall be taken in doing this, so that
no damages shall be caused to the pipe drains and other permanent work. The filling in
the haunches and up to 750 mm above the crown of the pipe, shall consist of the finest selected
material placed carefully in 250 mm layers and watered and consolidated. After this has been laid,
the trench and other excavation shall be refilled carefully in 250 mm layers being watered to assist
in the consolidation, unless the Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore shall otherwise direct.
5. Cement Concrete Laying
5.1. Wherever required, cement concrete shall be laid for foundations or bedding or saddles. The
cement concrete shall consist of clean hard broken stone with irregular surfaces, clean washed sand
and Portland cement mixed in the proportions indicated in the drawings or as described in the
detailed specifications for the particular classes of work or in the relevant items of the schedule.
5.2. The materials shall be kept clean and dry before being mixed. The mixing shall be done on a specially
Page 1025 of 1358

constructed platform. The mixture shall be thoroughly turned over several times till a thorough and
uniform mix has been achieved. The concrete mix then shall be filled in iron pans and immediately
carried to the works spot. Generally, machine mixing shall be preferred to hand mixing for large
volumes of
concrete.
5.3. All form work or shuttering and their supports shall be of ample strength to withstand the weight
of the concrete and the shocks due to ramming without distortion or sagging. They shall be finished
smooth, accurately fitted and watertight. The surface against which the concrete is to rest shall be
plain. Paper, lime mortar and other expedients to make good the defects in joinery, will not be
permitted. Formwork shall be cleaned and repaired where necessary if it is to be reused.
5.4. The concrete shall be conveyed to the place in such a manner that there shall be no tendency for
the separation of the different ingredients, and it shall not be dropped into position from a height
greater than 1.5 m. The concrete shall be placed, rammed and tamped as shall be required by the
Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore. It shall not be interfered with once it has commenced to set. When
new concrete is to be placed on the existing concrete, the surface of the old concrete shall be
thoroughly washed and roughened before the new concrete is laid thereon. The joint between the
old and the new work shall be made with cement sand slurry (1:1) being laid over the surface of the
old concrete which is roughed, washed and wetted.
5.5. The concrete shall be kept wet at least for 15 days after laying. After it has been laid, it shall be
covered with gunny bags, which shall be kept constantly wet by the applications of water.
5.6. General
A shop drawing of the proposed layout of the sewerage and storm water drainage shall
be prepared after a detailed route survey. The drawing shall indicate among others:
• Surveyed route of the sewer lines and storm water drain lines indicating existing
obstructions by way of pathways, buildings, lawns, any other known service lines.
• Locations of inspection chambers (IC), gulleys, manholes and catch basins in relation
to the paving patterns, if any.
• Invert levels vis-à-vis outfall public sewer or storm drain or any sewage treatment
plant.
• Proposed diversion of existing service lines.
Upon approval of the drawings and details the work shall be commenced.
6. Pipe Laying
6.1. Stoneware pipe laying
a. Stacking and laying of stoneware pipes along the trenches shall be done in a manner as to
cause the minimum inconvenience to public and traffic. Cracked pipes whether at the socket
Page 1026 of 1358

or body shall be rejected. All stoneware pipes should be carefully fitted together on the
surface of the ground to ensure proper fit before they are lowered. The barrels, spigots
and sockets are properly cleaned, scrapped and brushed and lowered by hand to the
bottom of the trench and on to the bedding. The bedding shall be minimum of 100mm
of shifted earth and after laying the bedding is to be worked and compared up to the center
of the pipe so as to ensure proper bedding of the pipe. After testing and rectification of
leaks the back filling shall be compacted up to 750mm above the crown of the pipe in 250mm
layers and then only should the back filling to the top be completed.
b. Pipes shall be laid carefully to the alignment, levels and gradients as directed and care
shall be taken to prevent any sand, earth or other matter from entering the pipes during
laying. The pipes between manholes shall be laid truly, in straight lines, without vertical
or horizontal deviations. All inverts shall be laid from sight rails fixed at the true levels,
with proper boning rods. The pipes shall have sockets facing up the gradient beginning at the
lower end, and with the socket resting in the socket holes cut in the concrete bed if specified.
Each pipe shall be laid singly, and no pipe shall be laid until the trench has been excavated
to the required depth for a distance of 20 mts. in front of the pipe to be laid.
c. In each joint a gasket of tarred yarn shall be placed round the joint, and inserted in it by means
of suitable jointing tools. More strains of yarn shall be added and well rammed home.
The yarn will be moistened to avoid absorption of water from the mixed cement mortar.
Portland cement mortar (1:1) shall be fixed in the joint as described here under:
The cement mortar paste shall be carefully inserted into the joint by hand and shall be
caulked into the joint with wooden caulking tools. More cement shall be added until the
space of the joint is filled completely with tightly caulked cement mortar paste and
smoothly finished. Depths of yarn and cement mortar paste for different sizes of pipe
joints are given below.
Internal Depth of Depth of Depth of cement

dia of pipe Socket yarn mortar paste
(mm) (mm) (mm) (mm)
100 50 22 28
150 60 28 28
250 65 32 32
6.2. Concrete pipe laying
a. Concrete pipe laying shall follow generally the specifications for stoneware pipes. Pipes
shall be laid on cement concrete saddles as shown on drawings and as directed by the
b. A fter the concrete saddles have been laid properly as specified in the schedule;
concrete pipes shall be lowered gradually into the trenches over the concrete saddles or bed.
Holes for collars shall be made at every joint. These holes will be made depending upon
the particular length of the pipe being laid. The pipes shall be leveled properly
Page 1027 of 1358

to requirement. The pipe shall rest on the bed at every point throughout its
length. To ensure this, the space between the underside of the pipes and the invert of the
cradle shall be carefully grouted solid with thin cement slurry consisting of 1 part of cement
to 3 parts of clean washed sand in such a manner that no voids shall be left. This is to
ensure that the load of the pipes and the super imposed load of the earth filling shall be
evenly distributed on the bedding. All precautions shall be taken before the pipes are
gradually lowered on the cradle or on firm ground. After the alignment of pipes is checked
and the joints are made and tested, the grouting shall be done. The saddle concrete shall be
allowed to set at least for three days, before any pipes are placed in it and the contractor shall
take due care in setting the pipe in the saddle so that no damage to the saddles shall occur.
If any damage to the saddle occurs, it shall be rectified or removed and replaced as decided
by the Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore.
c. The back filling shall be compacted up to 600mm above the crown of the pipe in 250mm
layers.
d. The joints for the pipes shall be made by loose collars. The collars shall be specially
roughened inside to provide a better grip. Two adjacent pipe ends will be so designed
and manufactured that when butted together concentrically a dowel will be left between the
two ends. In this dowel, cement mortar of 1:1 proportion shall be filled and the collar shall
then be adjusted over the pipe so that its ends are equidistant from the pipe ends and
is concentric with the pipe. The space between the collar and the outer barrel of the pipe
can then be caulked with bitumen-soaked hemp yarn in layers at least up to 50 mm (and
not exceeding 80 mm) from the joint on either side. The remaining space on either side of
the joint up to the collar shall then be caulked with a stiff mix of cement sand mortar
1:1 with waterp r o o f compound. Every joint shall be finished smoothly at an angle
of 45o with the longitudinal axis of the pipe on either side of the collars. The interior of
the pipe drains shall be cleared off all dirt, cement mortar and superfluous materials.
6.3. CI pipes
a. CI pipes, low pressure or LA class, shall be laid same as the concrete pipes on saddles
and grouted and back filled after the joints are made and tested generally as specified for
the concrete pipes.
b. All spigot and socket joints shall be lead caulked either with molten lead or lead wool. A
bitumen- s o a k e d spun yarn gasket shall be first caulked into place before pouring in
molten lead in one continuous pour or caulking in lead wool. Caulking should be done with
a pneumatic tool or with a 2 kg (minimum) hand hammer. Lead run joints shall be preferably
finished 3mm behind the socket face. Spongy or imperfectly filled joints shall be burnt or
chiseled out and remade.
c. The lead joints shall meet the following requirements:

Pipe NB Molten joint Wool joint
(mm)
Lead Length Lead Yarn
(Kg) (mm) (Kg) (Kg)
80 1.8 45 1.30 0.17

100 2.2 45 1.70 0.23
Page 1028 of 1358

150 3.4 50 2.41 0.34

200 5.0 50 3.37 0.57
250 6.1 50 4.11 0.74
6.4. Making connections
a. Contractor shall connect the new sewer line to the existing manholes by cutting the walls,
benching and restoring them to the original conditions. A new channel be cut in the benching
of the existing manhole for the new connections. Contractor shall remove all sewage and
water if encountered in making the connection without additional cost. Permission from
municipal authorities to connect the sewer to the municipal manhole and permission from
police for cutting the road for making connection if required shall be obtained by the
contractor.
7. Inspection Chambers, Manholes & Traps
7.1. Manholes shall be constructed in accordance with the drawings. The floors shall be of cement
concrete and the side walls brickwork or rubble masonry as laid down in the drawings. Proper
channels shall be formed to lead the storm water/sewage from the pipe drain without
interruption to the flow and all pipes required for branch pipe drain connections shall be built in
the walls. Relieving arches shall be provided to prevent any load on the pipes. In case the
diameter of the main drain is increased in the manhole, the crown on the incoming and
outgoing pipes shall be kept at the same level and necessary slope will be given in the invert of
the channel. In exceptional cases where this is not possible, connection may be made up to half
the difference in diameter and built into the brickwork or rubble masonry. The rungs shall
be of cast iron of suitable size each weighing about 3 Kg. These shall be provided in two
vertical staggered runs, which may be about 38 cms apart horizontally. These rungs shall be 450
mm below the manhole covering and the lowest not more than 30 mm above the benching.
7.2. The inside and outside of all manholes shall be rendered with cement mortar as laid down in the
schedule or as shown on the drawing to the required thickness and worked to a polished face
with a coat of neat cement mixed with waterproof compound. Rendering shall be done only
after approval of the external plaster by the Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore.
7.3. The channels shall be formed of 1:2:4 cement concrete as shown on the drawing. They shall be
semicircular in the bottom half and half the diameter of the sewer. Above the horizontal
diameter the side shall be extended vertically preferably to the full vertical diameter and top
edge shall be suitably rounded off. The branch channels also be suitably constructed in
respect to the benching.
7.4. At the junction with the main channel an appropriate fall suitably rounded off in the direction of
flow in the main channel shall be given. There shall be fall of not less than 38 mm in each
manhole, but in flat area where it is not feasible to enforce this provision, the Engineer-in-
charge shall amend or reduce the fall to be allowed in each manhole.
7.5. The brickwork for manholes shall meet the following specifications:
a. All bricks to be used in the work shall be table moulded and of good quality, approved by
the Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore before incorporation in the construction.
Page 1029 of 1358

b. The bricks shall be of uniform size, deep red in color and homogenous in texture, free from
flaws, cracks, stone floats or nodules of lime or other blemishes, sharp edges.
c. No brick after 24 hours immersion in water shall absorb more than 20% of its own
weight. Test report for the brick shall be submitted to the Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore.
d. All bricks shall be thoroughly soaked in water before usage, till the bubbles cease to come
up. No half or quarter brick shall be used except as closers. The closers shall be horizontal,
and the wall shall be raised to plumb or as shown in the drawings.
e. Brick work shall be built in English bond with brick in cement and sand mortar as specified
in the schedule or as in the drawings. The joints shall be raked to a depth of 12 mm to receive
cement plaster.
f. Joints in brickwork shall not be more than 10 mm thick.
g. Brickwork shall not be raised more than 10 courses in a day. The brick work shall be
watered thrice a day for 10 days.
h. Brickwork shall be uniformly raised all-round, and no part shall be raised more than 900
mm above another at any time.
i. All joints shall be thoroughly flushed with mortar at every course. The mortar shall conform
to the specifications as laid in the schedule or as per drawings. Care shall be taken to
see that the bricks are properly bedded, and all joints completely filled to the full depth.
7.6. Cement plastering of manholes shall meet the following specifications:
a. Materials for plastering, viz. cement and sand shall be of the best quality. All materials shall
have to be approved by the Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore before incorporation in the work.
b. Portland cement shall be mixed with clean sharp siliceous sand to the proportions as shown
on the drawings or as described in the schedule for the particular class of work. Cement
and sand shall be first mixed dry along with waterproof compound upon a clean dry
platform, after which sufficient clean water shall be added to bring the whole mass into a
plastic condition. No mortar which has started to set shall be used nor such mortar remixed
with the new one. It shall be removed from the work site at once.
c. The surface to be plastered shall first be thoroughly cleaned and all joints raked out to not
less than 12 mm depth to receive key for plaster. The surface shall be thoroughly
wetted for at least 24 hours prior to common cement of work. The mortar shall be of
uniform mixture as specified elsewhere. The thickness of cement and sand plaster shall be
as specified in the schedule of work. The first coat shall be just sufficient to fill up all the
unevenness in the surface under treatment in case of rubble masonry. It shall not be
smoothened, and the second coat shall be applied while the first coat is still raw. Cement
mortar which falls to the ground, during application shall on no account, be reused. The
floating coat over the plaster shall be done with neat cement 1.5 mm thick as approved by the
7.7. The channels inside the manholes and chambers shall be formed of 1:2:4 cement concrete as
Page 1030 of 1358

shown on the drawings or as specified in the relevant item of the schedule. It shall be to the full
width of the pipe drain. The depth of the channel shall be as per drawing. Similar curved
channels shall be built in the chambers, where branch drains, form junctions. All channels
shall be given a suitable fall as shown on the drawing or as directed.
7.8. Where not specified manholes shall be constructed as follows:
Size of manhole (mm) 900 x 450 900 x 600 900 dia
Type Rectangular Rectangular Conical
Maximum depth (mm) 1500 1500 to 4400

(For storm drain) (For sewers)
Size of cover & frame(mm) 900 x 450 900 x 600 500 dia
Weight of cover & 96 125 250

frame (Kg)
The depth of manhole shall be measured from the top of cover to the invert level of
the manhole.
7.9. Drop connections shall be as follows:
a. Drop connections shall be provided between branch sewer and main sewer or in the main
sewer itself in steep ground when the difference in invert level of the two exceeds 450 mm of
the required sizes.
b. Drop connections from gully traps to main sewer on rectangle manholes shall be made
inside the manholes and shall have C.I special type door bend on top and heel rest bend at
bottom connected by a C.I pipe. Holder bat clamps shall support this pipe at 1800 mm
intervals with at least one clamp for each drop connection. All joints shall be lead caulked
joints 25 mm deep.
c. Drop connections from branch sewer to main sewer shall be made outside the manhole wall
with glazed stoneware pipe tee connection, vertical pipe and bend at the bottoms. The top of
the tee shall be finished up to the surface level and provided with a CI hinged type frame
and cover 300 x 300mm. The connection shall be embedded in cement concrete 1:2:4
150 mm all- round the pipe and tee up to the surface chamber of the tee.
d. Drop connection made from vertical stacks directly into manholes shall not be considered
as drop connections. They shall be paid for under the relevant soil and waste pipes.
7.10. The manhole covers and frame shall be CI double sealed pattern to IS_____ and of specified weight
and clear size and as approved by the Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore. They shall be of the best
Page 1031 of 1358

foundry gray metal, tough and close grained and the samples of the manhole frame and cover
submitted to the Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore and his approval in writing obtained thereto,
before the covers and frames are ordered. The covers and frames are to be painted with two coats
of anticorrosive black bitumastic paint. The covers and frames shall be clean moulded, accurately
made and fitted in a workmanlike manner, the surface being smooth and even. All manhole frames
shall be set to correct alignment and levels, embedded in layers of 1:3 cement sand mortar or 1:2:4
cement concrete.
8. Rainwater Drains
8.1. Masonry drains
8.1.1 Brick masonry drains shall be of a minimum width of 300 mm for a maximum depth of
450 mm. The minimum width of drains shall be 45 cms for depths beyond 450 mm.
8.1.2 Brick masonry drain shall be constructed in brick masonry, cement mortar, cement
concrete foundations as specified in the schedule of quantities. Masonry and
concrete work shall be as specified. Wherever specified, masonry drains shall be
plastered with cement mortar inside. The outer surface shall be flush pointed without
additional charge.
8.1.3 Wherever specified, all brick masonry covered drains shall be provided with cast iron or
precast R.C.C. slabs.
8.1.4 all drains shall be plastered with cement mortar 1:3 with a coat of neat cement with
waterproof compound. All finished works shall afford specified gradients and ensure free
and efficient discharge.
8.2. Formed drains
Drains shall be formed by open excavation, dressing, forming and compacting as shown on
drgs. And as directed by the Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore. Rubble pitching shall be done
wherever shown or as directed by the Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore.
9. Acceptance, Testing & Commissioning
9.1. Since the external drainage piping gets covered underground, it is programmed in segments
so that each part is inspected, tested and covered. Hence, it is necessary that all the materials
are inspected during the programmed segmental execution for their quality, compliance with
The specifications and their newness. Pipes which do not appear new and/or chipped or
damaged in any way shall not be permitted to be used. A proper and comprehensive
record of inspection and testing of each segment validated by the Authority Engineer shall
be maintained. This form part of the acceptance test documentation
9.2. After the cement mortar had time to set, the pipes shall be tested in lengths between manholes.
In the lowest manhole a plug shall be inserted. At the upper manhole a circular disc to fit
exactly the inside diameter of the pipe with a filling pipe with a right-a n gl e bend and an air
cock shall be fixed. The length of the pipe shall be filled with water by means of pipe connection
on the upper disc. The air cock in the upper disc shall be kept open while the pipeline is being
filled, to permit the Escape of air. When the pipe length has been filled with water and air
Page 1032 of 1358

excluded the air cock shall be shut and water shall be poured into a Conical funnel attached
to the filling tube of the disc in the upper manhole until the water remains in the funnel. The
filling level in the funnel is about 1.5 m above the invert of the highest pipe in that stretch.
Permissible leakage in 30 minutes shall be:
0.05 lit/m for 100mm pipe
If it is more, the water shall be drained off and joints recaulked and the piping retested.
9.3. After the joints and pipes have been proved to be watertight, they shall be bedded or enveloped in
cement concrete, if specified, to the extent necessary. Refilling shall be done with finest selected
material and shall be done in layers not exceeding 250 mm thick, watered consolidated and
rammed properly as specified.
PIPE SUPPORTS
1. Pipe Supports
1.1. All water supply and drainp i p e s whether horizontal or vertical shall be suitably supported
using galvanized M.S clamps or Hitech brackets, angles etc. manufactured by M/s Hitech Supports
(India) Pvt Ltd or equivalent.
1.2. Vertical Pipes
1.2.1. The pipes running vertical inside the shaft shall be supported by galvanized M.S angles
fixed to wall with anchor bolts and studs. The clamps shall be provided at every 3000
mm c/c or as specified in the table.
1.2.2. when the horizontal distance between the center lines of two adjacent pipes is less than
300 mm a powder coated HITECH rail shall be fixed to wall the pipes independently
clamped to the rail with ‘U’ bolt clamps.
1.3. Horizontal Pipes
1.3.1. Pipes running horizontal shall be supported from structural beam/slab by using
appropriate galvanized M.S. pipe hangers, double angles etc. of HITECH or equivalent
make.
Page 1033 of 1358

1.3.2. the spacing of supports shall be as follows:
GI PIPES / M.S PIPES CI SPUN PIES
Internal Spacing Internal Spacing

Dia (mm) (Mm) dia (mm) (mm)
15 1800 75-150 2700

20 , 25 2400 200-250 3000
32 2700 300 3600
40-50 3000
65-80 3600
100 4000
150 4500
1.3.3. Support for horizontal piping longer than 15 m in a stretch shall be provided with swivel
clamps. Otherwise, the clamps shall be universal clamps or rigid clamps as required by the
Project Engineer.
1.3.4. When the center line distance of two adjacent pipes is less than 300 mm a horizontal rail
common for the pipes shall be provided on slab/beam and the pipes clamped to this rail
with clamps as in 1.3.3 above.
1.4. Fixing of clamps/rails etc.
1.4.1. All clamps, rails and accessories shall be fixed to the structure (beam, slab, walls etc.) by
using approved good quality anchor fasteners of appropriate size.
PAINTING
1. Scope
1.1. The scope of work covers painting of:
1.1.1. All equipment
1.1.2. Piping & pipe support
1.1.3. Duct supports
Page 1034 of 1358

1.1.4. Electric Panels & cable trays
1.2. All equipment and piping shall be painted in accordance with the following colour code (or other
colours if specifically requested for by the Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore.)
Equipment/ Service Colour BAND

Width Spacing Colour
(mm) (mm)
COLD WATER
Municipal Sea green - - -
Domestic - do - 25 1500 White
Flush - do - 25 1500 Brown
Hot water supply - do - 25 1500 Red
Hot water Ret - do - 25 1500 Red
(chain dotted)
DRAINAGE Black
Soil - do - - - -
Waste - do - 25 1500 White
Vent. - do - 25 1500 White
(Chain dotted)
Rainwater - do - - -
Colour
BAND OILS
HSD Light Brown - - -

LDO - do - 25 1500 White
Light Brown 25 1500 White & Blue
Painting 1 of 2
Page 1035 of 1358

NATURAL GAS
Equipment/ Service Colour BAND

Width Spacing Colour
(mm) (mm)
PUMPS & MOTORS Canary Yellow - - -
SUPPORTS Black, or as - - -
directed
1.3. All surfaces to be painted shall be thoroughly cleaned with wire brush to remove completely rust
and other extraneous substances. Over the cleaned surfaces one coat or red oxide primer shall be
applied completely covering the exposed surfaces. Out finish coat of painting shall be applied one
day after the prime coat, after ensuring that the paint is dry. The second coat shall be done before
the installation is handed over and after approval to do so from the Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore.
MOTOR AND ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
1. Scope of work
1.1. The scope of work covers, selection, supply, installation, testing and commissioning all electrical
items of work comprising:
i) Drive motors & starters

ii) Motor control centers & power panels
iii) Cable laying
& iv) Protective Earthing (PE)
2. Ratings
2.1. All motor, switchgear, cable and PE ratings shall comply with the data sheets and the specification.
Where higher ratings are required to match equipment offered, the tenderer may provide
accordingly and bring out the fact specifically.
2.2. Ratings shall be at the ambient conditions specified. Motors shall comply with IS:325 or equivalent
BSS revised up to date. All motors shall be statically and dynamically balanced and shall be
selected for low noise levels. Ratings shall be suitable for the complete operating range of
the equipment concerned and should not cause overloading
2.3. Switchgear and starters shall be rated for the equipment and system fault levels. Protective
Earthing shall be consistent with the over current tripping devices.
Page 1036 of 1358

3. Squirrel Cage Induction Motors
3.1. Stator cores shall be made up of low loss high permeability sheet steel lamina-tions. Stator windings
shall be made of electrolytic copper with class B/E insulation and inserted as formed coils baked in
position. Rotors shall be of die cast aluminum or copper cage construction.
3.2. Roller bearings at the drive and ball bearings at the free end shall be provided.
3.3. Motor windings shall be air cooled by means of shaft-mounted fan, designed for quiet operation.
Enclosures shall be as shown on the data sheets or as required.
3.4. Motors, especially for air handling unit and fan drives shall be selected for low sound power level.
4. Starters
4.1. The starter selections shown in the relevant data sheets shall be used as a general guide. Where
the load torque demands higher starting torque, motor and starter shall be accordingly selected.
4.2. Direct to line or Wye Delta or auto transformer starters shall be air insulated totally enclosed metal
clad. Wye Delta starters shall be automatic change over type.
4.3. All starters shall have:
i) Adjustable thermal overload trips on all phases.

ii) Single phase preventing device
iii) Under voltage protection (80%)
iv) Latch-on contracts with trip mechanism to indicate fault tripping
4.4. Solid state soft starters, wherever specified, shall be of tested and approved makes.
5. Product Support
5.1. The supplier must be able to provide technical documentation, covering both catalogues and
statements of dimensions and weight.
5.2. The local dealer must be able to provide full technical and maintenance assistance with full
complements of spares.
6. Motor Installation
6.1. Motors and driven equipment shall be mounts on a common base and coupled through flexible
couplings or multiple V-belt drive. Coupling and belt drives shall be provided with suitable safety
guard.
6.2. Final wiring connections to motors shall be flexible.
6.3. Where motors are installed away from the starter.
7. Motor Control Centres & Power Panels
Page 1037 of 1358

7.1. All motor control centres, and power panels shall be cubicle type fabricated from a combination
of 14 & 16 SWG sheet steel, free standing, extensible, totally enclosed, dust tight, vermin-proof
cubicle, flush dead front and modular construction suitable for 3 phase 415V 4 wire 50 Hz system.
All boards shall be accessible from the front for the maintenance of switch fuses, bus bars, cable
terminations, meters etc. Cables shall be capable of entering the board both from top as well as
bottom. All panels shall be machine pressed with punched openings for meters etc. All sheets
shall be rust inhibited through a process of degreasin, acid pickling, phosphating etc. The panels
shall be finished with two coats of synthetic enamel of approved colour applied over one coat of
red oxide primer. Engraved plastic labels shall be provided indicating the feeder details, and
capacity and danger signs.
7.2. The boards shall accommodate air insulated bus bars, air circuit breakers, switch fuse units with
HRS fuses, starters, necessary meters, relays contactors etc. As required and arranged in suitable
tiers. All breakers and switch fuses shall be suitably derated taking into account specified ambient
temperature and ruling temperature inside the cubicle.
7.3. The switchboard shall be fully compartmentalized in vertical tiers housing the feeder switches in
totally enclosed independent compartments. Each compartment shall be self-sufficient with
switch unit, fuses, contactors, relays, indicating lamps and an interlocked door with facility for
padlocking. Each feeder must terminate in an independent labelled terminal block. Strip type
terminal block accommodating several feeders together is not acceptable. Pressure clamp type
terminals suitable for aluminum wires may be used up to switches of 25A and cable lugs for
higher ratings. All terminations shall be shrouded in an approved manner. The entire enclosure
shall meet with IS: 2147/1962. Feeder connections shall be made out of solid insulated
copper/aluminum wires or strips with bimetallic clamps wherever required. Internal wiring, bus
bar markings etc. Shall conform to IS: 375/1963. Internal wiring shall have terminal ferrules. Main
switch should be at an easily accessible height and the highest switch operating handle should
not be over 1.75m from floor level. Cable glands need not form part of the switch board as the
cost of glands will form part of the cable termination.
7.4. Bus bars shall be three phase and neutral and of copper or aluminum or aluminum alloy as
specified and shown on drawings and rated for a temperature rise of 30 oC over the ambient
temperature specified, based on insulated conductor rating (IS:8084-1976). Neutral bars may be
of one half the size of the phase bars. The main horizontal bus bars shall be of uniform cross
section and rated in accord with the incoming switch. The vertical bus bars for the feeder
columns may be rated at 75% of aggregate feeder capacity and shall be uniform in size.
Bus bars and interconnections shall be taped with PVC colour coded tape to prevent bar-
to-bar accidental shorts. Each bus bar shall be directly and easily accessible on removal
of the front cover. Bus bars shall be totally enclosed, shrouded and supported on non-
hygroscopic insulated blocks to withstand thermal and dynamic overloads during system short
circuits. An earth bus of size 50% of the phase bar subject to a minimum of 15 x 3 Cu or
25 x 3 Al. shall be provided. Individual switch components shall be connected with the
earth bus through copper or aluminum, or galvanized steel strip size as shown. All wire
connections to bars shall be through lugs, bolts and nuts and spring washers.
7.5. Isolators shall be fixed on the wall on self-supported angle iron framework as required and
mounted as near to the motor as possible. Where several motors are installed, isolators if
required shall be provided at a central location on a common framework.
Page 1038 of 1358

7.6. Panels shall be installed on a base channel frame and on a concrete pad to be provided by others.
All panels shall be meggar-tested and shall not be commissioned till the valves are more than 2.5
megohms phase to phase and 1.5 megohm phase to neutral. All meters on the panel shall be
calibrated before commissioning.
7.7. The general arrangement and fabrications drawings shall be got approved before taking up for
fabrication.
8. Cabling
8.1. All cables shall be 1100 Volt grade PVC insulated, sheathed with or without steel armoring as
specified and with an outer PVC protective sheath. Cables shall have high conductivity stranded
aluminum or copper conductors and cores colour coded to the Indian Standards. All cables shall
be new without any kinks or visible damage. The manufacturers name, insulating material,
conductor size and voltage class shall be marked on the surface of the cable at every 600mm
centres
8.2. Cables shall be laid in the routes marked in the drawings. Where the route is not marked, the
contractor shall mark it out on the drawings and also on the site and obtain the approval of the
Architect/Consultant before laying. Procurement of cables shall be on the basis of actual site
measurements and the quantities shown in the schedule of work shall be regarded as a guide
only.
8.3. Cables, running indoors shall be laid on walls, ceiling, inside shafts or trenches. Single cables laid
shall be fixed directly to walls or ceiling and supported at not more than 500 mm. Where
number of cables are run, necessary perforated cable trays shall be provided wherever
shown. Perforated cable trays shall be mild steel or Aluminium as specified in the schedule
of work. Perforated trays shall not be directly suspended but supported on mild steel
framew o r k as shown on drgs. or as approved. Cables laid in built-up trenches shall be on
steel supports. Plastic identification tags shall be provided at every 20m. Cables shall be bent
to a radius not less than 12 (twelve) times the overall diameter of the cable or in accordance
with the manufacturer’s recommendations whichever is higher.
8.4. In the case of cables buried directly in ground, the cable route shall be parallel or perpendicular
to roadways, walls etc. Cables shall be laid in an excavated, graded trench, over a sand or soft
earth cushion to provide protection against abrasion. Cables shall be protected with brick or
cement titles. Width of excavated trenches shall be as required. Backfill over buried cables shall
be with a minimum earth cover of 600mm. The cables shall be provided with cables markers at
every 30 meters and at all loop points.
8.5. The general arrangement of cable laying is shown on drawings. All cables shall be full runs from
panel to panel without any joints or splices. Cables shall be identified at end terminations
indicating the feeder number and the Panel/Distribution board from where it is being laid. All
cable terminations for conductors up to 4 sqmm may be insertion type and all higher sizes shall
have tinned copper compression lugs. Cable terminations shall have necessary brass glands. The
end terminations shall be insulated with a minimum of six half-lapped layers of PVC tape. Cable
armoring shall be earthed at both ends.
8.6. MV cables shall be tested upon installation with a 500V Meggar and the following readings
established:
Page 1039 of 1358

1) Continuity on all phases
2) Insulation Resistance
(a) between conductors
(b) all conductors and ground
All test readings shall be recorded and shall form part of the completion
documentation.
9. Equipment earthing
9.1. All apparatus and equipment transmitting or utilizing power shall be earthed in the following
manner:
Size of phase conductor Copper Aluminium Galvanized
steel
Up to 16 < Same > 1.55
Over 16 to 35 < 16 > 32
Over 35 < As shown on drgs. >
Minimum (base) 2.5 4.0 6

Minimum (enclosed) 2.5 2.5 -
The earth continuity conductor may be drawn inside the conduit in which case, it should be
insulated.
Copper earth wires shall be used where copper wires are specified. Aluminium wires may be
used where aluminum phase wires are specified unless otherwise indicated in the schedule of
work and drawings.
9.2. Metallic conduit shall not be accepted as an earth continuity conductor. A separate
insulated/bare earth continuity conductor of size related to phase conductor shall be provided.
Non-metallic conduit shall have an insulated earth continuity conductor of the same size as
above. All metal junction and switch boxes shall have an inside earth stud to which the earth
conductor shall be connected. The earth conductor shall be distinctly coloured (green) for easy
identification.
9.3. Armored cables shall be earthed by 2 distinct earth connections to the armoring at both the ends
and the size of connection being as above. In multiple cables entering a panel/DB, the cable joints
shall be bonded together using a bonding wire selected on the basis of the largest size of cable
in the group. In the case of enamored cable, an earth continuity conductor shall either be run
outside along the cable or should form a separate insulated core of the cable. 3 Ph. power panels
and distribution boards shall have 2 distinct earth connections of the size correlated to the
incoming cable size. In case of 1 Ph. DB’s a single earth connection is adequate. Similarly for 3 Ph
and 1 Ph. isolating switches there shall be 2 and 1 earth connections respectively, sizes being
correlated to the incoming cable.
Page 1040 of 1358

9.4. 3 Ph. motors and other 3 Ph. apparatus shall have 2 distinct earth connections of size equal to
incoming feeder size. For 1 Ph motor and 1 Ph apparatus, the single earth connections shall be
provided of the above size.
10. Electrical Installation
10.1. All work shall be carried out in accordance with the local Electrical Inspectorate and IS Code of
Practice 732. Reference to the above codes, specifications and regulations shall mean the latest.
10.2. All materials used on the installation shall be new and of approved make. The tender should
indicate makes of materials proposed to be used on the job.
Page 1041 of 1358

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR ELECTRICAL
A- WIRING SYSTEM:
1.1 SCOPE:
The scope of work under this section covers design, supply, installation, testing and commissioning of
wiring for lights, fans, exhaust fans, call bells, fan coil units, geysers and power sockets etc., The wiring
shall generally be done using PVC insulated copper conductor multi strand wires FRLSH in 16 Gauge
MS black enameled conduits/ Steel conduits as called for including providing switches, sockets, plug
tops, electronic fan regulators, outlet boxes etc. as per CPWD Specifications.
1.2 STANDARDS:
The following latest standards and rules shall be applicable:
IS : 732 Code of practice for electrical wiring installation (System voltage not Exceeding
1100 V).
IS : 1646 Code of practice for fire safety of buildings (General) Electrical installation.
IS : 9537 Conduits for Electrical installations (Part 1-4)
IS : 2667 Fittings for rigid steel conduits for electrical wiring.
IS : 3480 Flexible steel conduits for electrical wiring.
IS : 3837 Accessories for rigid steel conduit for electrical wiring.
IS : 694 PVC insulated cables.
IS : 6946 Flexible (Pliable) non-metallic conduits for electrical installation.
IS : 1293 Plugs and sockets outlets of rated voltage up to and including 250 V.
IS : 8130 Specifications for conduits for electrical installation.
IS : 3854 Switches for domestic and similar purposes.
IS : 3419 Fittings for rigid non-metallic conduits.
IS : 4648 Guide for electrical layout in residential building.
IS : 4649 Adopters for flexible steel conduits.
IS : 5133 Boxes for enclosures of the Electrical.
IS : 4615 Switch socket outlets.
IS : 8884 Code of practice for installation of Electric bells and call system.
IS : 2551 Electric Danger notice plates.
IS : 3646 Code of practice for interior illumination.
IS : 371 Ceiling Roses.
IS : 302 General and safety requirements for household and similar electrical
appliances.
IS : 3043 Code of practice for earthing.
IS : 5216 Guide for safety procedures and practices in electrical work.
Indian Electricity Act and Rules.

Regulations for the electrical equipment in buildings issued by the concerned Electrical Authorities.
All standards and codes mean the latest.
1.3 POINT WIRING FOR LIGHTS, FANS, EXHAUST & 6 AMPS CONVENIENCE SOCKETS:
1.3.1 A point wiring shall consist of the wiring from switch/electronic fan regulator as required,
including providing conduit & accessories, pendant holder or a swan holder, or ceiling fan
Page 1042 of 1358

hook box or socket etc., with suitable termination. A point wiring shall include, in addition, the
earth continuity conductor/wire from the switch board to the earth pin/stud of the
outlet/switch box/ light fitting & fans & all other such non-current carrying metals shall be
earthed and to the outlet points. No tee jointing or looping of wires shall be done anywhere
except at a switch box or a light fitting, or a plug socket outlet as shown in drawing.
The point wiring shall be carried out in the undermentioned manner.
1.3.2 Supply, installation, fixing of conduits and Steel wire/ G.I. pull wire with necessary accessories,
junction/pull/ inspection/switch boxes and outlet boxes/Fan hook box etc. However, Switches,
Switch plates & switch boxes are not required for the lights which are controlled directly from
the MCB DB's.
1.3.3 Supplying and drawing of wires of required size including earth continuity PVC insulated FRLSH
wire.
1.3.4 Supply, installation and connection of flush type switches, sockets, cover plates, switch plates
& fixing fan regulator, lamp holder, ceiling rose etc.,
1.3.5 The point shall be complete with the branch wiring from switch board, conduit with accessories,
junction, pull/inspection boxes, control switch, socket, outlets boxes, ceiling roses, lamp
holder, connector, extension cord wire, flexible conduits etc.
1.4 POINT RATE:
For the purposes of installation, the rate for point wiring shall include the following:
i) Point Wiring.
And for the purpose of measurements and payments the points shall be designated as follows:
ii) One light controlled by one switch.

These points are light/fan points of given length from switch to the first point.
iii) Two nos. of lights controlled by one switch and so on.

These points include wiring for first point as mentioned above and subsequent points looped
from the first point to next light points and are controlled from the same switch as the first point.
a) The Circuit Main:
The circuit main for lights/fan/6A sockets (where 6 A sockets connected to light circuit) shall include the
wiring from the switch board / MCB DB as specified in schedule of quantity up to the first switch/light
point/fan point. The scope of work shall include the following:
i) Supply and wiring in concealed/surface conduit from switch board/DB's as specified in

schedule of quantity to first switch/light/fan point.
ii) Providing PVC insulated FRLSH copper conductor earth wire.
iii) Providing Steel/G.I. fish wire (pull wire) in the conduit.
iv) Termination of wires in switch board / DB's & switches using proper tinned copper lugs of
soldering/crimping type.
v) Providing necessary pull/junction boxes where necessary.
Page 1043 of 1358

vi) Identification of circuits shall be done with ferrule nos.
b) Point Wiring:
The point wiring shall include supply, installation, connection, testing and commissioning of point wiring
in conduit.
The exact scope of work included in the point wiring is enumerated as stated below:
i) Wiring from the first switch/light/fan point, where the circuit main is terminated to the various
lights/fans/sockets (where 6A sockets connected to light circuit loop), and then looping
between the switches/lights/fans/6A sockets etc.
ii) Providing all necessary switches, switch plates, sockets, outlet boxes/pull/junction/fan hook
boxes etc.
iii) Providing insulated earth continuity wire with each circuit in the conduit along with the wiring
system.
iv) Providing G.I. fish wire (pull wire) in the conduits.
v) Providing & installing lamp holders wherever necessary.
vi) Providing PVC insulated, PVC sheathed flexible three core 2.5 sq. mm extension cords
including flexible conduits from outlet points mounted at false ceiling point to the light
outlet.
NOTE: The point shall be measured in nos /sets/group of lights controlled from switch board / DB as
mentioned in the BOQ.
c) Wiring for 6/16 Amps Power Sockets for Equipment Wiring
The work for wiring of 6A/16A sockets and wiring for power outlets shall include following:
i) Supply & installation of conduits from DB (concealed/ surface) with its accessories up to the
6/16 A power point in required size of conduit.
ii) Wiring from DB to the 6/16 A power point including earth wire of specified size.
iii) Supply and installation of the socket outlet with outlet boxes of approved make and Control
switch of approved make. All 6/16 A, power socket outlets shall be measured in numbers.
1.5 SYSTEM OF WIRING:
Unless otherwise mentioned on the drawings, the system of internal wiring shall be as follows:
The system of wiring shall consist of single core, PVC insulated, 1100 Volt grade, stranded copper
conductor wires/cables FRLSH laid through concealed or exposed MS conduits as mentioned elsewhere
or as directed by Construction manager /Consultant.
1.6 GENERAL:
Prior to laying and fixing of conduits and light outlet boxes, contractor shall carefully examine the layout
drawings and prepare detailed shop drawings, indicating the exact location of light outlets, with
distances marked, conduit routing, with sizes, No. of wires run in each conduit, control switch location
etc. The contractor shall obtain the approval of all shop drawings by the Construction
manager/Consultant prior to the installation of conduits. Any discrepancy noticed in the design
Page 1044 of 1358

drawings shall be brought to the notice of the Construction manager/ Consultant. Any suggestions or
modifications suggested by the contractor shall have the approval of the Construction
manager/Consultant before execution.
1.7 CONDUITS:
1.7.1 Type of Conduit – Unless otherwise specified all conduits for concealed/ surface/exposed
installation including conduits running above false ceiling shall be of 16 Gauge MS black
enameled conduits/ Steel conduit.
1.7.2 16 Gauge MS black enameled conduits/ Steel Conduits:
Conduits and Accessories shall confirm to IS:9537 (Part-2). All conduits shall be 16Gauge MS
conduits/ Steel conduit ISI marked. No conduit less than 20mm in diameter shall be used.
The conduits shall be delivered to the site of construction in original bundles and each length
of conduit shall bear the label of the manufacturer & ISI Mark (Engraved Markings) or painted
markings. Conduit accessories such as bends, coupling etc., shall be conforming to relevant
Indian Standard Specifications. The number of 1100 volt grade PVC FRLSH insulated copper
conductor wires that may be drawn in the conduits of various size shall be in conformity with
code of practice for electrical wiring installation IS 732.
1.8 CONDUIT ACCESSORIES:
1.8.1 16 Gauge MS black enameled conduits/ Steel conduit & Collars:
The MS/ steel conduit bends and collars shall be of MS black enameled / steel. The bends and
collars shall conform to IS 2667 & have ISI mark. The conduit bends & collars shall preferably
be of the same make as of conduit. The minimum radius of conduit bend shall be 2 1/2 times
the outer diameter of the conduit pipe. Where necessary conduit bends with inspection door
shall be used, only factory made/ readymade bends shall be used.
1.8.2 Junction/Pull/Inspection Boxes:
The boxes for junction/pull/inspection boxes to be used with MS/ Steel conduit installation
shall be heavy gauge CRCA sheet steel painted boxes. These boxes shall be manufactured in
conformity with ISI specification and to match the type of conduit used. The boxes shall be of
round/square or rectangular shape and shall have minimum 50mm depth. The box shall have
threaded stub projection to terminate M.S. conduits. The boxes shall have concealed screwed
sockets for fixing the ceiling rose or cover plate.
2.0 SWITCH OUTLET & SOCKET OUTLET BOXES:
2.1 Concealed Type outlet Boxes
The concealed outlet boxes for switches, sockets, power outlets, telephone outlet, fan regulator etc.,
shall be of same make as of switches/sockets etc. to match the exact requirement of combination of
outlets. The boxes shall be fabricated out of heavy gauge CRCA (cold rolled carbon alloy) sheet steel with
Page 1045 of 1358

zinc plating (G.I). The size of boxes should match the type of outlet/switch plate to be mounted on the
box. The adequate No. & size of knockout holes shall be provided to terminate the conduits in the box.
These boxes shall be standard factory-made product of same make as of switch plates & sockets.
Separate screwed earth terminal shall be provided in the box for earthing.
The outlet box shall be of minimum depth of 50mm. Boxes shall be suitable for grid mounting type of
accessories. Long screw shall be provided to take care of the extra plaster thickness to mount the switch
plates. Provision shall be made in the box & switch plate to have the minor adjustment of alignment of
switch plate to plumb level.
2.2 Surface Type Boxes:
The boxes for mounting switches, sockets and other wiring devices shall be either moulded plastic or
heavy gauge CRCA sheet steel painted to match the colour of wall. The box shall be suitable to terminate
the M.S. surface conduit into the box. The size and shape of box shall match the exact type and
combination of switch plates, receptacles & wiring devices. Deep boxes shall be used to facilitate easy
termination of conduit & wires/cables. Separate screwed earth terminal shall be provided in the box for
earthing.
2.3 Light Outlet Boxes:
For concealed MS/ steel conduit installation the light outlet box shall be of PVC (round/square) with
knock out holes, conduit projection suitable to terminate the conduit to the box. The box shall be made
of heavy gauge PVC & the sample to have the approval of Construction manager/Consultant before use.
The boxes shall have concealed screwed socket to fix the ceiling rose. The boxes shall be a minimum of
50 mm deep. For surface conduit installation the light outlet box shall be made of CRCA sheet steel
painted boxes. The boxes shall have threaded stub projection having internal threading to terminate
the conduit of different sizes. The boxes shall be a minimum of 50mm deep.
2.4 Ceiling Fan Hook Boxes:
The ceiling fan hook box shall be fabricated of 2mm thick M.S. with adequately sized M.S. rod/hook
(minimum 10mm dia) to fix the ceiling fan. The hook shall be concealed within the fan hook box. The
side extensions of rod shall be sufficiently long enough to provide adequate anchorage in the concrete.
The size of the box shall be such that it should be totally covered by the plastic canopy of the ceiling fan.
The box shall have anticorrosive primer coating and enameled paint.
2.5 COVER PLATES FOR SWITCHES & OUTLETS
Switches/socket/wiring devices plates shall be the same product as of switches/sockets/wiring devices.

This shall be of best quality moulded plastic grid mounting type device plates/frames and shall match
with the type of switches/sockets & boxes.
2.6 COVER PLATES FOR INSPECTION/JUNCTION/PULL BOXES
The cover plate for PVC boxes shall be minimum 3mm thick of perspex/formica/Acrylic sheet cover. For
M.S. boxes cover plate shall be black enameled M.S. plates. The shape of the plate shall match that of
the box.
Page 1046 of 1358

2.7 RECEPTACLES
The sockets shall conform to IS 1293. Each socket shall be provided with a control switch of appropriate
rating. The sockets shall be moulded type rated for 250 volts and of full 6 Amp or 16 Amp capacity as
mentioned on the drawings.
The 6/16 Amps sockets shall be multi pin (6 pin) automatic shutter type suitable for plugging 6 Amps/16
Amps tops. The shutter shall open when the earth pin of the plug top inserts in the socket. Where called
for the 16 Amps socket shall have indicating lamp. The socket outlets & switches shall be of grid
mounting type. Where called for sockets shall be provided with three pin plugs top suitable to the socket
& of the same make as of socket. The socket outlets installed outside the building/open to sky or in
damp/wet areas shall of weatherproof watertight type.
2.8 INDUSTRIAL TYPE SOCKETS
The socket outlets single phase or three phase installed in basement area, kitchen etc., shall be three
pin or 5 pin industrial type with MCB (Single phase or three phase) control. The socket & MCBs shall be
mounted in a sheet steel enclosure and shall be the standard factory-made product.
3.0 CONDUCTORS:
All PVC insulated Copper conductor wires shall conform in all respects to standards as listed under sub-
head 'Regulations and Standards' and shall be of 1100V Grade.
3.1 PVC insulated FRLSH wires (for light & small power wiring)
a) The PVC cables shall conform to IS : 694/1977. For all internal wiring PVC insulated cables of 1100V
grade, single core shall be used. The conductors shall be plain annealed copper conductors
complying with relevant ISS. The conductors shall be circular stranded copper conductor.
b) The minimum number and diameter of wires for circular stranded conductor shall meet the
requirements set out in the relevant Indian Standards.
c) The insulation shall be PVC compound complying with the requirements of relevant ISS. It shall be
applied by an extrusion process and shall form a compact homogeneous body. The thickness of
PVC insulation shall be as set out in the relevant standards.
d) The cores of all cables shall be identified by colors in accordance with the following sequence.
Single phase - Red
Three phase - Red, Yellow, Blue
Neutral - Black
Earth - Green or Green/Yellow.
A means of identifying the manufacturer shall be provided throughout the length of cable.
3.2 Wire Sizes:
Unless otherwise specified in the drawings the size of the cable/wires used for internal wiring shall be
as follows:
In case of circuit wiring for lights, exhaust fans, ceiling fans, bell, convenience socket outlet points: -
1.5/ 2.5 Sq. mm - From DB's to the junction boxes, FCU, first switch board etc. with no joints. In between
joints may be at switches, socket outlet, light points only.
1.5 / 2.5 Sq. mm - From junction boxes to lights/fan/ 6 A sockets outlets etc.
Page 1047 of 1358

In the case of power socket outlet circuit.

6.0 Sq. mm - From D.B. 20/30 Amps Industrial type sockets.
4.0 Sq. mm - From DBs to 16/20 Amps sockets.
The earth continuity conductor size as indicated in the drawing/BOQ shall be drawn through conduit
along with other circuit cables/wires. For general guidance the size of the earth continuity conductor
shall be as follows: -
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED MINIMUM SIZE OF EARTH CONTINUITY CONDUCTOR WIRES NOT
FORMING PART OF THE SAME CABLE AS THE ASSOCIATED CIRCUIT CONDUCTOR.
NOMINAL NOMINAL
Cross-sectional area of largest associated copper Cross-sectional area of earth continuity
circuit conductor in Sq.mm Conductor in sq.mm (PVC insulated green
wire colour)
1.5 1.5
2.5 1.5
4.0 2.5
6.0 2.5
10.0 4.0
16.0 6.0
25.0 10.0
35.0 10.0
50.0 10.0
Separate circuit shall run for each water heater, pantry/kitchen equipment, window air conditioner, and
similar outlets at location as shown on drawings.
4.0 INSTALLATION OF CONDUIT:
Open/Surface Conduit System with 16Gauge MS black enameled conduits/ Steel conduits:
a) Wherever specifically called for, surface conduit system shall be adopted. All conduits shall be of 16-
gauge MS black enameled grade. Conduits shall run in square and Symmetrical lines. Before the
conduits are installed, the exact route shall be marked at the site and approval of the Construction
manager/ Consultant shall be obtained. Conduits shall be fixed by heavy gauge saddles, secured
by suitable rawel plugs, at an interval of not more than 1.0 meter. Wherever couplers, bends, or
similar fittings are used saddles shall be provided at either side at a distance of 300 mm from the
center of such fittings. Conduits shall be joined by means of screwed couplers and screwed
accessories only. In long distance straight runs of conduit, inspection type couplers /junction boxes
shall be provided. Threading shall be long enough to accommodate pipe to the full threaded
portion of the couplers and accessories. Cut ends of conduits shall have no sharp edges nor any
burrs left to avoid damage to insulation of wires.
b) Bends in conduit runs shall be done by using pipe bending machine. Sharp bends shall be
accomplished by introducing solid bends, inspection bends or PVC inspection boxes. Radius of solid
bends shall not be less than 75mm. Not less than 90-degree bend shall be used in a conduit run
from outlet to outlet.
c) Wherever conduits terminate into control boxes, outlet boxes, distribution boards etc., they shall be
rigidly connected to the box with check nuts on either side of the entry.
Page 1048 of 1358

d) Steel wire /fish wire shall be drawn in each conduit.

e) Separate PVC insulated copper conductor earth wire shall be drawn in each conduit.
f) Draw boxes shall be located at convenient location for easy drawing of wires.
g) Every mains and sub mains shall run in an independent conduit with an independent earth wire of
specified capacity along the entire length of conduit.
h) The conduit to be installed shall be of ample cross section area to facilitate the drawing of wires.
The diameter of the conduit shall be selected as per table specified in this specifications. But in no
case it shall be less than 20 mm diameter.
i) Entire conduit layout shall be done such as to avoid additional junctions boxes other than for outlet
points. Conduits shall be free from sharp edge and burrs. Conduits shall be laid in a neat and
organized manner as directed and approved by the Construction manager/Consultant. Conduit
runs shall be planned so as not to conflict with any other services pipe, lines/duct.
j) The conduit shall be painted with two coats of enamel paint, color as approved by the Construction
manager/ Consultant after installation if required.
k) If required, connection between PVC and steel conduits shall be through a junction box. Direct
connection between PVC and steel conduits are not allowed.
l) Where exposed conduits are suspended from the structure, they shall be clamped firmly and rigidly
to hangers of design to be approved by the Construction manager/Consultant Where hanger
supports are to be anchored to reinforced concrete, appropriate inserts and necessary devices for
their fixing shall be left in position at the time of concreting, making holes and opening in the
concrete will generally not be allowed. Where inserts are not provided, contractor shall use only
anchor fasteners. In case, it is unavoidable, prior permission of the Construction manager
/Consultant shall be obtained to make any openings in the concrete surface.
m) Conduit Joints: Conduit pipes shall be joined by means of couplers and screwed accessories, as per
IS : 2667. In long distanced straight runs of conduit, inspection type couplers at reasonable intervals
shall be provided or running threads with couplers and lock nuts shall be provided. The bare
threaded portion shall be treated with anti-corrosive paints. Threads on conduit pipes in all cases
shall be between 11mm or 27mm long, sufficient to accommodate pipes to full threaded portion
of couplers or accessories. Cut ends of conduit pipes shall have no sharp edges nor any burrs left,
to avoid damage to the insulation of conductors while pulling them through such pipes. Brass
female bushes shall be used in each conduit termination in a switch box, outlet box, electrical panel
or any other box.
Conduit shall be secure in each outlet box, switch box, electrical panel or any other box by means
of one G.I. hexagonal lock nut and bush, outside and inside the box. At each building expansion
joints, approved oil tight double wire wound flexible steel conduit, or any other approved method
shall be used. This shall be united on both sides with the rigid conduits by suitable union. Conduits
installed in the plant room for mechanical equipment shall be properly clamped with the
mechanical supports, but in no case, it shall be fixed with the body of the equipment.
The connection of conduit to the mechanical equipment shall be through oil tight double wire
wound flexible steel conduit. In any case the length of the flexible conduit shall not exceed one
meter. The flexible conduit shall be properly clamped with the body of the equipment. They shall
not in any case be clamped to any cover or any removable parts of the equipment.
n) Bends of Conduits: All necessary bends in the system including diversion shall be done by bending
pipes or by inserting suitable solid or circular inspection type normal box or similar fittings. Conduit
fittings shall be avoided as far as possible on conduit system exposed to weather, where necessary,
solid type fittings shall be used. Radius of such bends in conduit pipes shall be not less than 75mm.
Page 1049 of 1358

No length of conduit shall have more than the equivalent of four quarter bends from outlet, the
bends at the outlets not being counted.
o) Protection against Dampness: In order to minimize condensation or sweating inside the conduit, all
outlets of conduit system shall be properly drained and ventilated, but in such a manner as to
prevent the entry of insects, as far as possible.
p) Bunching of Cables: Unless otherwise specified, insulated conductors of different phases shall be
bunched in separate conduit. Wires carrying current shall be so bunched in the conduit that the
outgoing and return wires are drawn into the same conduit. Wires originating from two different
phases shall not be run in the same conduit.
5.0 WIRING:
All final branch circuits for lighting and appliances shall be single conductor cables run inside conduits.
Branch circuit conductor sizes shall be as shown in the load analysis of drawing and conforming to the
requirements of the I.E. Regulations & I.S. Code.
Home runs indicated on the drawings for the final branch circuits shall be kept in a separate conduit up
to the panel board via switches wherever called for. No other wiring shall be bunched in the same
conduit unless the other circuit main of same phase run in the conduit.
For each lot of wire supply, Contractor shall supply a certificate issued by the Manufacturer stating its
origin, date of manufacture, constitution and standards to which it complies and the test certificates. A
looping system of wiring shall be used. Wires shall not be jointed inside the conduit or pull boxes. Where
joints are unavoidable, they shall be made through approved mechanical connectors with prior
permission of Construction manager / Consultant.
Control switches shall be connected in the phase conductors only and shall be 'ON' when the knob is
down. Switches shall be fixed in galvanized steel boxes. Chromium plated screws shall be used.
Power wiring shall be distinctly separate from lighting wiring.
Each circuit phase wire from the distribution boards should be followed with a separate neutral wire of
the same size as the circuit wire.
Drawing of Conductors:
a) The drawing and jointing of PVC insulated copper wire and cables shall be executed with due regard
to the following precautions. While drawing wires through conduits, care shall be taken to avoid
scratches and kinks which causes breakage of conductors. There shall be no sharp bends.
b) Insulation shall be shaved off like sharpening of a pencil and it shall not be removed by cutting it
square.
c) Strands of wires shall not be cut for connecting terminals. The terminals shall have sufficient cross-
sectional area to take all strands and shall be soldered. Connecting brass screws shall have flat
ends. All looped joints shall be soldered and connected through block/connectors. The pressure
applied to tighten terminal screws shall be just adequate, neither too much nor too less.
Conductors having nominal cross-sectional areas exceeding 10 sq. mm. shall always be provided
with cable sockets. At all bolted terminals, brass flat washer of large area and approved steel spring
shall be used. Brass nuts and bolts shall be used for all connections.
Page 1050 of 1358

d) Only certified wiremen and cable jointers shall be employed to do jointing work. All wires and cables
shall bear the manufacturer's label and shall be brought to site in original packing. For all internal
wiring, PVC insulated wires of 1100 volts grade shall be used. The sub-circuit wiring for point shall
be carried out in loop system and no joints shall be allowed in the length of the conductors. If the
use of joints connections are unavoidable due to any specific reason, prior permission, in writing,
shall be obtained from the Architect. No wire shall be drawn into any conduit, until all work of any
nature, that may cause injury to wire, is completed. Care shall be taken in pulling the wires so that
no damage occurs to the insulation of wire. Before the wires are drawn into the conduits, the
conduits shall be thoroughly cleaned of moisture, dust, dirt or any other obstruction by forcing
compressed air through the conduits. The minimum size of PVC insulated conductor wires for all
sub-circuit wiring for light points shall be 1.5 / 2.5 sq. mm as indicated in the drawing.
5.1 Joints:
All joints shall be made at main switches, distribution boards, socket outlets, lighting outlets and switch
boxes only. No joints shall be made in conduits and in junction boxes. Conductors shall be continuous
from outlet to inlet.
5.2 MAINS AND SUB-MAINS:
Mains and sub-mains cable or wires where called for shall be of the rated capacity and approved make.
Every main and sub-main wire shall be drawn into an independent adequate size conduit. An
independent earth wire of the proper rating shall be provided for every single-phase sub main. For every
3- phase sub main, 2 nos. earth wires of proper rating shall be provided along with the sub main. The
earth wires shall be fixed to conduits by means of clips at not more than 1000 mm distance. Where
mains and submain cables are connected to switchgear, sufficient extra lengths of cable shall be
provided to facilitate easy connections and maintenance.
5.3 LOAD BALANCING:
Load balancing of circuits in three phase installation shall be planned before the commencement of
wiring and shall be strictly adhered to.
5.4 COLOUR CODE OF CONDUCTORS:
Colour code shall be maintained for the entire wiring installation: red, yellow, blue for three phases,
black for neutral, green/yellow green for earthing.
The control wire from light control switches to the light/ fan points shall be the same colour as that of
the phase/ circuit wires feeding that particular loop.
5.5 EARTHING:
All earthing system shall be in accordance with IS 3043 code of practice for earthing.
The type and size of earthing wire shall be as specified under the heading of cables. Each conduit
originating from the DB to various outlets shall have one earth wire (PVC insulated copper conductor
green colour wire).
5.6 COMPLETION CERTIFICATES:
Page 1051 of 1358

All the above tests shall be carried out in presence of Construction manager/Consultant and the results
shall be recorded in a prescribed form. Any default during the testing shall be immediately rectified and
that section of the installation shall be re-tested. The completed test results forms shall be submitted
to the Construction manager/Consultant for approval.
On completion of an electric installation a certificate shall be furnished by the contractor, countersigned
by the certified supervisor under whose direct supervision the installation was carried out. This
certificate shall be in a prescribed form as required by the local electric supply authority.
B- LIGHT FIXTURES & FANS:
1.1 SCOPE:
Scope of work under this section shall include Supply, installation inspection/testing and commissioning,
receiving at site, safe storage, transportation from point of storage to point of erection, erection and
commissioning of light fittings, fixtures and accessories for back of the house area including all
necessary supports, brackets, down rods and painting etc as required.
1.2 INSTALLATION:
1.2.1 The light fixtures and fittings shall be assembled and installed in position complete and ready
for service, in accordance with details, drawings, manufacturer's instructions and to the
satisfaction of the Construction manager /Consultants. Pendent fixtures specified with overall
stem lengths are subject to change and shall be checked with conditions on the job and
installed as directed. All suspended fixtures shall be mounted rigid and fixed in position in
accordance with drawings, instructions and to the approval of the Construction
manager/Consultants. Fixtures shall be suspended true to alignment, plumb level and capable
of resisting all lateral and vertical forces and shall be fixed as required.
1.2.2 All suspended light fixtures, fans etc, shall be provided with concealed suspension arrangement
in the concrete slab/roof members. It is the duty of the Contractor to make these provisions
at the appropriate stage of construction. Exhaust fans shall be fixed at location shown on
drawings. They shall be wired to a plug socket outlet at a convenient location near the fan. All
switch and outlet boxes, for fans and light fittings shall be bonded to earth. The recessed type
fixtures shall not be supported into the false ceiling framework. This shall have independent
support from the socket of ceiling using conduit down rods/steel chain with provision for
adjusting the level of fitting. Wires shall be connected to all fixtures through connector blocks.
Wires brought out from junction boxes shall be encased in flexible pipes for connecting to
fixtures concealed in suspended ceiling. The flexible pipes shall be check-nuted to the junction
box with a brass bush. Double checknut at the fixture and flexible pipes, wherever used shall
be of make and quality approved by the Construction manager/Consultants.
C. - EARTHING:
1.1 SCOPE:
All the non-current carrying metal parts of electrical installation shall be earthed as per IS: 3043. All
equipment, metal conduits, rising main cable Armour, switch gear, distribution boards, meters, all other
metal parts forming part of the work shall be bonded together and connected by two separate and
distinct conductors to earth electrodes. Earthing shall be in conformity with the provisions of Rules 32,
Page 1052 of 1358

61, 62, 67 and 68 of IER 1956.
1.2 G.I.PIPE EARTH STATION :
G. I. pipe shall be of medium class, 40 mm dia and 4.5 m length. Galvanizing shall conform to relevant
Indian Standards. G.I. pipe electrode shall be cut tapered at the bottom and provided with holes of 12
mm dia drilled not less than 7.5 cm from each other up to 2 M of length from bottom. The pipe electrode
shall be as far as practicable embedded below permanent moisture level. Except where rock is
encountered, pipes shall be driven to a depth of at least 4.5 mtr. Where rock is encountered at a depth
of less than 2.5mtr the electrode may be buried inclined to the vertical and the inclinations shall not be
more than 30 deg from the vertical. The pipe electrode shall be made of one piece. Earth leads to the
electrode shall be laid in a heavy-duty GI pipe and connected to the pipe electrode with brass bolts, nuts
and washers. GI pipe shall be terminated in a wire meshed funnel. The funnel shall be enclosed in a
masonry chamber of 450 mm x 450 mm dimensions. The chamber shall be provided with C.I. frame and
CI inspection cover. The earth station shall also be provided with a suitable permanent identification
label tag. The earth electrode shall conform to IS:3043 latest edition. The soil around the earthing
electrode shall be treated to reduce the resistivity of the soil by filling the complete depth of electrode
with alternative layers of charcoal and salt.
1.3 PLATE EARTH STATION:
Plate electrodes shall be made of G.I./copper (CU) plate of 6mm/3mm thick and 600 x 600mm size. The
plate shall be buried vertically in ground at a depth of not less than 4.5 meters to the top of the plate,
the plate being encased in charcoal to a thickness of 300 mm all round. It is preferable to bury the
electrode to a depth where subsoil water is present. Earth leads to the electrode shall be laid in a heavy-
duty GI pipe and connected to the plate electrode with brass bolts, nuts and washers. A GI pipe of not
less than 20 mm dia shall be clamped with bolts vertically to the plate and terminated in a wire meshed
funnel. The funnel shall be enclosed in a masonry chamber of 450 mm x 450 mm dimensions. The
chamber shall be provided with GI frame and CI inspection cover. The earth station shall also be
provided with a suitable permanent identifications label tag. The earth electrode shall conform to IS:
3043 latest editions.
1.4 MAINTENANCE FREE EARTHING
In the case of Rod Earthing, the Earthing Electrode shall consist of Copper Rod of suitable dia for
achieving desired surface area. In the case of use of Copper Bonded Steel Rod, the thickness of
molecularly bonded copper coating shall not be less than 250 micron. The earthing electrode & bonding
material shall comply with UL 467 for Grounding and Bonding Equipment. The earthing electrode
arrangement shall be provided with ground enhancing material complying with IEEE 80 : 2000 clause
14.5 'd' The Ground enhancing material in its set form shall have a resistivity of not more than 20 Ohm-
cm. the Proposed Material shall not dissolve or decompose or otherwise pollute the soil or the local
water table. The earthing stations shall be guaranteed for minimum 25 years for restricting earthing
resistance as mentioned in BOQ. The necessary Calculation for achieving the guaranteed Earthing
resistance value shall be submitted by vendor for approval. The electrodes shall have a clean surface,
not covered by paint, enamel, grease or other material of poor conductivity.
1.5 ELECTRODE EARTHING:
Page 1053 of 1358

The earthing electrode ( AS per IS 3043 : 1987) has to be installed by doing bore of size 300mm up to a
depth of 3000mm., then throw handful of compound (2 bag of betonite powder compound) soil mix
into pit. After removing plastic sleeve carefully from electrode place electrode at center after this start
refilling space around electrode with backfill compound in small quantity. Then pour some water and
poke the pit with a long wooden rod to allow trapped air to escape .In this manner gradually continue
refilling process till the electrode is buried in bore up to the green patch painted on top portion of
electrode. Ensure that pit is not watery. Pack electrode nicely and tightly so that it stands firmly in pit.
Pour a few bucket of water in and around pit . In hard soil condition , do not mix compound with
dug out soil. Test earth electrode resistivity .If result is not satisfactory give some time to electrode
system to set in soil. After this connect it with equipment through suitable size down conductor (GI/CU
strip) as specified .After this the PCC in 1:2:4 is to be applied in an area of 300mmx300mm and brick
masonry chamber( thickness of chamber wall 200 mm) has the chamber cover and frame of
300mmx300mm of CI shall be supplied and grouted in brick masonry. The chamber cover shall have
lifting hook and shall have space in frame for proper placement. The watering fennel is to be installed
over watering pipe. The test link between earthing electrode and running earthing strip is to be provided
for testing . After completion of work, resistance of earth pit has to be measured by 4 pin method and
results shall be recorded /handed over to Employer /consultant in 1 sets.
1.6 EARTHING CONDUCTORS:
The scope of work includes supply of hot dipped galvanized iron strips/wire as per details and drawings.
The GI Strip supplied for purpose shall be continuous (minimum single length acceptable in 10 mtr.) The
strip has to be straightened without damaging galvanizing. The strip has to be welded by overlapping
and three side continuous welding joint. These joints shall then be cleaned and jute covering has to be
provided (wherever strip is buried in ground). After this black bituminous anti corrosive paint has to be
applied on all joints. Same process has to be adapted for all tapings also In case if earth wire is required
to be connected on strip with the help of bolt, GI bolts, nuts are to be used along with covering and
painting. The earthing strip, wherever indicated in drawing, has to be supplied in ground at a depth
specified in dwg. The earthing strip shall be covered with black soil and in no case, sand has to be used
around strip.
All earthing conductors shall be of high conductivity copper/or GI as specified and shall be protected
against mechanical damage and corrosion. The connection of earth electrodes shall be strong secure
and sound and shall be easily accessible. The earth conductors shall be rigidly fixed to the walls, cable
trenches, cable tunnel, conduits and cables by using suitable clamps.
Main earth bus shall be taken from the main medium voltage panel to the earth electrodes. The number
of electrodes required shall be arrived at taking into consideration the anticipated fault on the medium
voltage network. Earthing conductors for equipment shall be run from the exposed metal surface of the
equipment & connected to a suitable point on the sub main or main earthing bus. All switchboards,
distribution boards and isolators disconnect switches shall be connected to the earth bus. Earthing
conductors shall be terminated at the equipment using suitable lugs, bolts, washers and nuts.
All conduits cable armoring, cable gland etc., shall be connected to the earth all along their run by
earthing conductors of suitable cross-sectional area. The electrical resistance of earthing conductors
shall be low enough to permit the passage of fault current necessary to operate a fuse/ protective device
or a circuit breaker and shall not exceed 2 Ohms.
1.7 LOCATION FOR EARTH ELECTRODE:
Page 1054 of 1358

Normally an earth electrode shall not be situated less than 2 M from any building. Care shall be taken
that excavation for earth electrode may not affect the column footings or foundation of the building.
Further the location shall be such where the soil has a reasonable chance of retaining moisture as far
as possible. Entrances, pavements and roadways are definitely to be avoided for locating the earth
electrode.
1.8 EARTHING SYSTEM:
Main earthing grid shall be of 50 x 6 GI strip laid in a grid formation. All other equipment shall be earthed
to this strip. All panels, equipment and non-current carrying conductor shall be earthed through the
strip/wire of suitable size.
Main panels - 50 x 5
Main panels to sub panels - 32 x 5
Sub panel to DB - 25 x 3
DBs to sub DBs - 8 SWG G.I.
The earthing system shall be mechanically robust, and the joints shall be capable of retaining low
resistance even after subjection to fault currents. Joints shall be tinned, soldered and/or double rivetted
or nut bolt system. All the joints shall be mechanically and electrically continuous and effective. Joints
shall be protected against corrosion.
D- LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM:
1.1 SCOPE:
The scope of work under this section covers the specifications for supply, installation, connection,
testing and commissioning of lightening protection system consisting of the following:
Air termination network.

Roof conductors.
Down conductors.
Testing joint
Earth termination network.
1.2 STANDARDS:
The lightning protection system shall comply with IS: 2309/ 1989 and Indian Electricity Act and Rules,
NBC (2016), IS/IEC 62305.
1.3 SYSTEM:
a) The lightning protection system shall be installed as indicated on the drawings or in case such
is not available the contractor shall prepare one as per IS/IEC 62305 and get the same approved
by Construction manager/Consultant.
b) As air terminals shall be installed on the highest roof of the building, the air terminals shall be
joined to horizontal roof conductor by means of rivets/clamps.
c) Roof conductor shall be laid horizontally on the roof as indicated on the drawing.
d) Down conductor shall be installed on the vertical surface of the building. The down conductor
shall be joined with roof conductors in the method as prescribed by the code. A test joint shall
Page 1055 of 1358

be provided in the down conductor 1000 mm above the ground level at a place which is easily
accessible for testing.
e) The down conductor shall be joined with earth termination network or to the earthing station
as indicated on the drawing.
f) The earthing station and the earthing conductor shall be as per section under heading
"EARTHING".
1.4 COMPONENT PART:
1.4.1 Air Terminals and Roof Conductors

a) An air termination shall consist of vertical conductor or a system of horizontal conductors and
shall be installed along the outer perimeter of the roof.
b) No part of the roof shall be more than 9 m from the nearest horizontal protective conductor.
c) All metallic projections, chimneys, ducts, vent pipe, railings, gutters etc., on or above the main
surface of the roof of the structure shall be bonded to and form part of the air termination
network. The method and nature of the fixing shall be simple, solid and permanent.
d) The minimum dimension of the air termination network shall be as follows : Above Ground
Below Ground Galvanized iron strip 20 x 3 mm 32 mm x 6 mm
e) The Air terminal shall be installed vertical on the highest point of the roof and shall be clamped
firmly with the structure.
The roof conductor shall be laid horizontally above the finishing of the roof surface.
1.4.2 Down Conductor:
a) The number of down conductors shall be as follows :

1) A structure having a base area not exceeding 100 sq.m shall have only one down conductor.
2) For a structure having a base area exceeding 100 sq.m, the number of down conductors shall
equal to smaller of the following : One, for first 100 Sqmtr plus one more for every 300 sq.m
or part thereof in excess of the first 100 sq.m or one for every 30 m of perimeter.
b) The down conductor shall be distributed around the outside wall of the structure.
c) Any external metal running vertically through the structure shall be bonded to the down
conductor at the top and bottom.
d) A down conductor shall follow the most direct path possible between the air terminals and
the earth termination.
e) The size of the down conductor shall be similar to roof conductor/air termination network.
f) Each down conductor shall be provided with a testing joint in such a position that, it is
convenient for testing. (about 1000 mm above Ground level)
1.4.3 Joints and Bonds
a) The lightning protection system shall have as few joints as possible. Joints and bonds shall be
mechanically and electrically effective e.g. clamped, screwed, bolted, riveted or welded. With
overlapping joint, the length of overlapping shall not be less than 25mm for all types of
conductors. Contact surfaces shall be first cleaned, then inhibited from oxidation with a
suitable non-corrosive compound. Joints of dissimilar metals shall be protected from moisture
by an inert, tenacious material.
b) The lightning conductor shall be secured at not more than 2 M apart for horizontal run and 1.0
M for vertical run by fasteners resistive to corrosion.
Page 1056 of 1358

1.4.4 Earth Resistance:
The resistance from any part of the lightning protection system to earth shall not exceed 10
Ohm before any bonding has been affected to metal in or on a structure or to services below
ground. If the value obtained exceeds the specified 10 Ohm, it shall be reduced by adding to
the number of earth electrode. In addition, the resistance from the earth electrode to the
nearest test clamps shall not exceed 0.2 Ohm.
E- TELEPHONE WIRING SYSTEM:
1.1 SCOPE:
This section relates to specification for the supply, installation, testing & commissioning of works
included in electrical section for telephone system.
The scope of work included in this section is as follows :

a. Supply and installation of cables/wires G.I. fabricated perforated cable trays for laying
telephone from the telephone exchange room.
b. Providing & installing cable ladders in the telephone vertical duct
c. Providing & installing PVC FR grade HMS conduits run from corridor to Guest room to connect
between cable tray & the telephone tag block.
d. Providing conduits for telephone wiring in the public areas with G.I. fish wire.
e. Providing & installing G.I./PVC moulded boxes including telephone jack RJ11.
f. Providing & installing pipe sleeves for incoming lines into the EPABX room if required.
The electrical contractor shall co-ordinate with P & T and other agencies to finalize the exact
requirement.
1.2 CONDUITING:
a. All concealed /surface installation including the conduit run above the false ceiling space
shall be 16Gauge black enameled MS conduits/ Steel conduit. The specification for materials
& installation shall be same as described in electrical section. All relevant clauses are
applicable for telephone system as well. The conduit for the telephone system shall be
installed minimum 1 feet away from the power conduit. Care shall be taken so that no
telephone conduit is run in parallel to Electrical conduit in close proximity. Wherever
telephone conduits cross power conduits, they shall be at right angle, to each other. All
telephone conduits shall be earthed.
Size of Cable Conduit Size

Up to 5 pair single cable 25 mm
Above 5 pair up to 10 pair Single cable 32 mm
Above 10 pair up to 20 pair Single cable 32 mm
2 Nos. 2 pair 25 mm
3 to 5 Nos, 2 pair 32 mm
6 to 10 Nos, 2 pair cable 32 mm
Page 1057 of 1358

The size of conduit shall depend upon no. of wires to be drawn. However, the minimum size of
conduits shall be 25 mm.
b. All telephone wires shall be 0.71 mm dia annealed tinned copper conductor PVC insulated
and PVC sheathed cables. All telephone cables inside the building shall be unarmored Each
outlet shall be wired with 2 pair cables from final tag unless otherwise specified separately.
From main tag block to sub tag block cabling shall be done with suitable size of telephone
unarmored cable laid in conduit/pipe/ cable trays.
1.3 BOXES & TELEPHONE OUTLETS:
All concealed boxes shall be of G.I. as described in the electrical wiring section & shall match with
electrical wiring accessories. The boxes/main Junction box shall be suitable for wall mounting having
opened for cable/ conduit entry. All PVC cable shall enter the telephone junction box from the bottom
through brass cable glands and enough cable length shall be available for termination. Each PVC cable
serving the telephone socket shall be marked for identification.
Junction boxes shall be fully enclosed, kept tight with lockable hinged doors. Boxes shall be zinc
anodized type & same make as of socket/outlets. Prior to the system installation the contractor shall
consult the telephone department for their requirements and notify the Construction
manager/Consultants on the same. All equipment, like tag blocks, wires shall be Local Authority
approved makes.
F- LT SWITCHGEARS TYPE TESTED MAIN L.T. PANELS & DISTRIBUTION BOARDS:
1.1 SCOPE:
This section shall cover supply, assembly, installation, connection, testing and commissioning of
medium voltage cubicle type MV Switchgear, Type tested Main LT Panel and Distribution boards as
described in these specifications, drawings and schedule of quantities. The distribution boards are
designated as: Main LT Panels, Sub LT Panels Floor Panels, Distribution Board
The unit rate per item shall include design supply, assembly, installation, connection, testing and
commissioning of MV Assembly Distribution boards, with all the components in place, internal wiring,
as specified in this specification, and shown on the drawing, and load schedule complete with supply
and fixing of M.S. channel/ angle iron support on wall/floor etc.
In the case of switchgears and panels issued by the owner for erection the unit rate shall include
inspection, receiving, storage, installation, field testing and commissioning activities including co-
ordination with the suppliers of the switchgears. The rate shall be quoted per set of switchgears/panels
as identified in the BOQ. The details of design/Constructional features of these switchgears are specified
here below.
1.2 GENERAL:
Enclosure manufacturing
1.2.1 Main distribution board enclosure shall be a branded catalogue product from approved
manufacturer. Enclosure shall be made out of electro galvanized steel sheets conforming to
Page 1058 of 1358

international specification. Alu - Zinc coating shall be provided on the sheets, which shall
prevent rust formation during storage and handling for processing, in addition to giving
corrosion protection to the finished product. The sheets have a fine surface finish, which gives
good presentation to the painted components of the enclosure.
1.2.2 The enclosure system shall be modular in nature with bolt on construction.
1.2.3 The enclosure shall be powder coated to an approved colour. The painting process shall
include removal of moisture on the sheet steel surface using and applying thermosetting
polyester powder using automatic guns. Polymerization of the powder shall take place when
the components are cured at about 180ºC, forming a continuous integrated coating. A fairly
uniform coating of at least 70-80 microns shall be provided.
1.2.4 The pretreated and powder coated sheet steel components shall be at least tested randomly
at regular intervals for coating thickness measurement, adhesion test, bend test, impact test,
hardness test, salt spray test etc.
1.2.5 SYSTEM DETAILS:
All the Main Panels/Motor control centers Distribution boards, Sub-Main Distribution boards,
shall be designed and tested with IEC61439-1-2 standard and must be suitable for operation
on three phase/ single phase, 415/230 volts, 50 Hz neutral solidly grounded at transformer
and short circuit level not less than 415 Volts at 25KA or as specified elsewhere.
The Distribution boards shall be designed to withstand tropical condition at site, with
maximum expected ambient temperature of 45ºC and 100 percent humidity and dusty
weather.
Enclosure of the switchboard shall have IP 52 protection for Indoor and IP 55 for outdoor.
1.2.6 STANDARDS AND CODES:
The Distribution boards shall comply with the latest edition of relevant Indian Standards and
Indian Electricity Rules and Regulations. The following Indian Standards shall be complied
with:
IEC 61439-1-2 LV switchgear and control gear assembly

IS 1394 - L.V. switchgear and control gear Part-I - 1993 General rules
IS 5578-85 Guide for marking of insulated conductors.
IS 11353-85 Guide for uniform system of marking and identification of conductors
and apparatus tterminals.
IS 2147-62 Degree of protection provided by enclosures for low voltage switch
gear and control gears.
IS 2675-83 Enclosed distribution fuse boards and cutouts for Voltages not
Exceeding 1000 V.
IS 2551-82 Danger notice plates.
IS 13947-1993 Circuit breakers.(Part-II)
IS 13947-1993 Switches, Disconnectors, switch disconnector (Part - III) and fuse
Combination units.
IS 1818-72 Alternating current isolators (disconnectors) and earthing switches.
Page 1059 of 1358

IS 8623-77 Factory built assembles of switchgear and control gear for voltages up
to and including 1000 V AC & 1200 V DC.
IS 8828 Miniature air break circuit breakers for voltages not exceeding 1000 V.
IS 9926 Fuse wires used in rewirable type Electric fuses up to 1100 Volts.
IS 2208 HRC fuse links
IS 2705 Current Transformers(Part- I,II & III)
IS 3156 Voltage Transformers(Part- I,II & III)
IS 1248 Indicating Instruments
IS 722 Integrating Instruments
IS 13947-93 Control devices and switching elements.(Part - 5)Section-1
IS 13947-93 Contactors and motor starter section 1 (Part - 4) Electromechanical.
Section – 1
Section-1
IS 3231 Relays
IS 375 Marking and arrangement of busbars Indian Electricity Act and Rules.
1.2.7 SHOP DRAWINGS:
Prior to fabrication of the Switchgears, Distribution boards, the contractor shall submit for IIM
Indore/ Authority Engineer approval the shop drawing, and design calculations, indicating
type, size, short circuit rating of all the electrical components used, details & schedule of
components & model Nos. type, rating etc., busbar size, internal wiring size, Distribution board
dimension, colour, mounting detail etc. The contractor shall submit the manufacturer’s
catalogues of the electrical components installed in the distribution.
1.3 INSPECTION:
At all reasonable times during production and prior to transport of the distribution boards to site, the
contractor shall arrange and provide all the facilities at their plant for inspection by IIM INDORE/ MEP
Consultant or authorized representative.
1.4 FIRE INSURANCE APPROVAL
The bidder shall have TAC approval from Tariff Advisory committee & copy of approval shall be enclosed
with bid.
1.5 OPERATION MANUALS
Three sets of operation manuals with the technical leaflets of the components used in the CPC & PBS
are to be provided after completion of the job.
1.6 PERFORMANCE GUARANTEE
All the equipment’s shall be guaranteed for DLP from the date of commissioning or as specified in
GCC/SCC.
2.0 CONSTRUCTION:
Page 1060 of 1358

2.1 CUBICLE TYPE MV SWITCHGEARS & DISTRIBUTION BOARDS:

2.1.1 STRUCTURE:
The MV Switchgears panels and Distribution boards shall be sheet steel enclosed cubicle
pattern, floor mounted free standing, totally enclosed dead front, compartmentalised
multitier formation design. The panels shall be both sides extensible type with provision for
bus bar extensions. Generally, all Switchgears, Panels, MDB's, SMDB's & DB's shall be of front
access only & suitable for top entry of cables unless otherwise specifically specified for bottom
entry.
All M.S. sheet steel used in the construction of Distribution boards shall be 2mm thick and
shall be folded and braced as necessary to provide a rigid support for all components. Sheet
steel shrouds and partitions shall be of minimum 2 mm thickness. Joints of any kind in sheet
steel shall be seam welded, all welding slag grounded off and welding pits wiped smooth with
plumber metal. The height of the panels should not be more than 2200 mm. The operating
levels shall not be more than 1800 mm. The operating level of the lower most cubicle shall not
be less than 450 mm.
The Panels / Distribution boards shall be totally enclosed, completely dust and vermin proof.
Synthetic rubber gaskets (neoprene/DPDM) between all adjacent units and beneath all covers
shall be provided to render the joints dust proof. All doors and covers shall be fully gasketed
and shall be lockable. Doors shall have concealed hinges.
All the doors shall be suitably reinforced by channel to provide rigidity.
All panels and covers shall be properly fitted and secured with the frame, and holes in the
panel correctly positioned. Fixing screws shall enter into holes tapped into an adequate
thickness of metal or provided with bolt and nuts. Self-threading screws shall not be used in
the construction of the panels/DBs etc.
A base channel of 75mm x 40mm x 5mm thick shall be provided at the bottom. A clearance of
300mm between the floor of the Panels/ Distribution Board and the bottom of the lower most
unit shall be provided.
The Panels/ Distribution boards shall be preferably arranged in multitier formation. These
shall be of adequate size with a provision of 20 Percent vacant space to accommodate future
additional switch gear in addition to spare feeders presently provided. The size of the boards
shall be designed in such a way that the internal space is sufficient for hot air movement, and
the electrical component do not attain temperature rise more than 40 degrees Celsius.
Knockout holes of appropriate size and number shall be provided in the gland plate of
Panels/Distribution board in conformity with the number, and size of incoming and outgoing
conduits/cables.
Alternatively, the Panels/Distribution boards shall be provided with removable undrilled gland
plates (3mm thick). The switch boards shall be designed to facilitate easy inspection,
maintenance and repair.
The Panels/Distribution boards shall be sufficiently rigid to support the equipment without
distortion under normal and short circuit condition. They shall be suitably braced for short
circuit duty. Provision shall be made for permanently earthing the frames and other non-
Page 1061 of 1358

current carrying parts of the switchgear by two independent earth connections.
2.1.2 PROTECTION CLASS
All indoor Panels/Distribution boards shall have degree of protection conforming to class IP
42. While outdoor panels shall be weatherproof dust and water tight IP-55.
2.1.3 METAL TREATMENT & FINISH
All sheet steel work used in the construction of switchboard shall undergo a process of
degreasing, pickling in acid, cold rinsing, phosphating, passivating in seven tank metal
treatment plant and shall be powder coated to the specified shade of IS.5 of approved colour.
The total thickness of paint shall not be less than 50 microns. The finished panels shall be
dried in storing ovens in dust free atmosphere to ensure fine quality finish. The paint shall be
Berger Luxol Higloss, with siemens gray color for inside outside.
2.1.4 BUS BARS
The Bus bars shall be of three phases separate neutral and earth bar. The busbars, and
interconnection between busbars and various components shall be of high conductivity, high
strength aluminium alloy with current density 0.8A/sqmm complying with the requirement of
grade E91E of IS 5082. The busbar shall be of rectangular cross section designed to withstand
full load current for phase busbars and half rated current for neutral busbars unless specified
otherwise and shall be extensible on both sides. The bus bar shall be rated for the rating of
the main incoming breaker, but in any case, not less than 200 Amp. capacity. The busbar shall
have uniform cross section throughout the length.
The busbars and interconnections shall be provided with heat resistant and colour coded
sleeves. The busbars shall be supported on unbreakable, non-hygroscopic insulated supports
of SMC supports at sufficiently close intervals to prevent busbar sag and shall effectively
withstand without damage electromagnetic stresses in the event of short circuit. The neutral
as well as earth bar shall also be capable of withstanding the fault level.
The busbars shall be housed in a separate compartment. The busbar shall be shrouded with
3mm thick transparent sheet to avoid any accidental contact. All busbars’ connections shall be
done by drilling holes in busbars and connecting by chromium plated high tensile M.S. bolts,
spring washer and nuts. Additional cross section of bus bars shall be provided in all Panels/
Distribution boards to cover up the holes drilled in the busbars.
Spring and flat washers shall be used for tightening the bolts. All connections between busbars
and circuit breakers/ switches and between circuit breakers/switches and cable terminals shall
be through solid copper strips of proper size to carry full rated current. These strips shall be
insulated with insulating heat resistant paint with colour coding.
2.1.5 CIRCUIT COMPARTMENTS
Each circuit breaker shall be housed in separate compartments and shall be enclosed on all
sides. Sheet steel hinged lockable door shall be duly interlocked with the breaker units in "ON"
and "OFF" positions. Safety interlocks shall be provided for air circuit breaker to prevent the
breaker from being drawn-out when the breaker is in "ON" position. The door shall not form
Page 1062 of 1358

an integral part of the draw out position of the circuit breaker. All instruments and indicating
lamp shall be mounted on the compartment door. Sheet steel barrier shall be provided
between the tiers in a vertical section.
2.1.6 INSTRUMENT COMPARTMENT
Separate and adequate compartment shall be provided for accommodating instruments,

indicating lamps, control contactors/relays, and control fuses etc., these components shall be
accessible for testing and maintenance without any danger of accidental contact with live parts
of the circuit breaker units, bus bars and connections.
2.1.7 TERMINALS
The outgoing terminals and neutral link shall be brought out to a cable alley suitably located
and accessible from the panel front. The current transformers for instruments metering shall
be mounted on the terminal blocks. No direct connection of incoming or outgoing cables to
internal components of the Panels/Distribution board is permitted only one conductor may
be connected in one terminal.
2.1.8 WIREWAYS
A horizontal PVC wire way with screwed covers shall be provided at the top to take
interconnecting control wiring & communication wiring between different vertical sections.
2.1.9 CABLE COMPARTMENTS
Cable compartments of adequate size shall be provided in the Panels/Distribution Boards for
easy termination of all incoming and outgoing cables entering from bottom or top. Adequate
supports shall be provided in the cable compartments to support cables. All outgoing and
incoming feeder terminals shall be brought out to terminal blocks in the cable compartment.
2.1.10 EARTHING
GI earth bars of suitable size but not less than 25 mm x 3 mm shall be provided in the
Panels/Distribution Boards for the entire length of the panel. The framework of the
Panels/Distribution board shall be connected to this earth bar. Provision shall be made for
connection from this earth bar to the main earthing bar coming from the earth pit.
on both sides of the Panels/Distribution board and to take tapping to the outgoing earthing
strips to connect to the main distribution boards.
The earth continuity conductor of each incoming and outgoing feeder shall be connected to
this earth bar. The armour shall be properly connected with earthing clamp, and the clamp
shall be ultimately bonded with the earth bar. CT earthing also shall be connected to this earth
bar.
2.1.11 LABELS
Engraved PVC labels shall be provided on all incoming and outgoing feeders. Single line circuit
diagram showing the arrangements of circuit inside the Panels/DBs shall be pasted on inside
of the panel door and covered with transparent laminated plastic sheet.
Page 1063 of 1358

2.1.12 INTERNAL COMPONENTS
The Panels/ Distribution boards shall be equipped complete with all type of required number
of circuit breakers, contactors, relays, fuses, meters, instruments, indicating lamps, push
buttons, equipment, fittings, busbars, cable boxes, cable glands etc., and all the necessary
internal connections /wiring as required and as indicated on relevant drawings. Components
necessary for proper complete functioning of the Panels/Distribution boards, but not
indicated on the drawings shall be supplied and installed on the distribution boards.
All parts of the Panel/Distribution boards carrying current including the components,
connections, joints and instruments shall be capable of carrying their specified rated current
continuously, without temperature rise exceeding the permissible values as per the relevant
specifications at any part of the Panel/Distribution boards.
All units of the same rating and specifications shall be fully interchangeable.
2.1.13 VENTILATION
Ventilation louvers with removable type welded wire mesh are to be provided on sides of
panel, backside covers of busbar chamber doors. Also, on PCC at top of busbar chamber
welded wire mesh protected ventilation duct with canopy of sheet shall be provided for proper
cooling & to ensure temperature rise within limits as per standards. 3/4" size propeller fan
should be fixed on opening at both ends in all panels including main panel & floor mounted
distribution boards.
2.1.14 HARDWARE/MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS:
The hardware to be used in panels shall be zinc plated & all joints & connections shall be made
with galvanized zinc passivated or cadmium plated high tensile strength steel
bolts/nuts/spring washers etc.. The make of hardware items shall be approved make All
control wires shall be of 1.1KV grade flexible copper of approved make with approved make
copper /Al type lugs. The control fuses /control MCB of approved make shall be provided with
ferrules for identification of wires. PVC gray casing for wires shall be provided in cubicles. All
wire shall be suitably tied with PVC button straps. Appropriate rubber bushes, clamps are to
be crossover of control wiring in cubicles etc.
3.0 MCB DISTRIBUTION BOARDS:
3.1 SCOPE
This section relates to specifications for design supply, assembly, installation, connection, testing and
commissioning of lighting and power distribution boards (LPDB‘s), using Miniature Circuit Breaker
(MCB), Earth Leakage Circuit breaker (ELCB), Contactor, Neutral link, Earthing terminals, control switch
terminals, cubicle of CRCA sheet steel housing and complete the item installation.
3.2 SYSTEM
The MCB distribution boards shall be suitable for operation on 400/440 volt, 3 phase, 4 wire, 50 Hz A.C.
supply system or 220/250 volt, 1 phase, 2 wire, 50 Hz A.C. supply system.
Page 1064 of 1358

3.3 CONSTRUCTION
a) The DB's shall be factory made double door type and preferably of those manufacturers whose
MCBs, ELCB’s are to be used. General arrangement layout of the DB's shall be approved by
the Construction manager/Consultant before manufacture.
b) The DB shall be metal clad duly fabricated from 2 / 1.8 mm (14/16 SWG) thick high quality
CRCA sheet.
c) The DB shall be cubicle, compartmentalized, wall/floor mounted and dead front operated.
d) The DB shall be totally enclosed and made dust, vermin and weatherproof such that it meets
IP 43 of IS 2147 protection classification.
e) A detachable cover plate of 2mm thick CRCA sheet to be provided on front of the board such
that all live parts of the electrical accessories mounted on the board can be accessible only on
removal of the said cover plate. Further, the cover plate shall also, have suitable cut out so
that dolly of the MCB's can be operated even if the cover plate is in position. A transparent
plastic protection cover shall be provided on the cut-out portion of the cover plate.
The cover plate shall also provide right above the respective cut outs a suitable arrangement
to label the electrical circuit details of the MCB's mounted on it as well as to affix a danger
plate in legible manner. The cover plate shall be fixed to the board with adequate size zinc
passivated machine screws. Above the detachable cover plate, one additional hinged door of
2mm thick CRCA sheet covering the MCB's etc., shall be provided with a suitable locking
arrangement. The hinged door shall be provided with a suitable gasket capable of
withstanding corrosive & humid atmosphere and to meet degree of enclosure protection IP
43 as per IS: 2147. The DB's shall undergo the process of painting as described under cubicle
type main/submain distribution boards.
f) The DB shall have top/bottom entry arrangement for incoming and outgoing cables/conduits.
g) All hardware to be used in manufacture of the DB shall either be of mild steel zinc passivated
or otherwise be treated to prevent corrosion due to humid atmosphere.
h) All internal electrical connections shall be carried out using 1100-volt grade, PVC insulated,
Copper conductor of ISI approved make, having rated current carrying capacity to carry
continuous full current of respective switch/MCB rating at operating conditions prevailing at
the project site.
i) The DB internals shall be earthed with use of copper strips running throughout the length. Size
of the earthing strip shall be as shown in the respective drawing.
j) The earthing strip shall be brought out on two sides of the DB's with bolted type earth
terminating arrangement, for connecting to the building earthing grid. The earth terminal shall
be of either brass or zinc passivated mild steel.
k) All non-current carrying metal surfaces of the DB's shall be adequately treated with seven tank
pretreatment process to render it free from grease, oil, oxide, dirt, etc., to make them ready
to receive and hold coats of zinc chromate primer.
l) The DB's shall be provided with electric components and accessories as per the details shown
in the drawing/BOQ for the respective electric distribution board.
3.4 INSPECTION:
3.4.1 The DB's shall be inspected and checked as per inspection manual of the DB manufacturer.
3.4.2 Various electrical components and accessories of the DB's shall be checked as per drawing
for the respective DB’s.
3.4.3 The DB's shall be checked for rigid mounting, earthing connection, proper rating & size of
components, internal wiring etc.,
Page 1065 of 1358

3.4.4 All mechanical fasteners and electrical connections shall be checked and tightened before
installation.
3.5 INSTALLATION:
3.5.1 The DB's shall be assembled and aligned together and be installed at site as per installation
manual/ instruction of the DB manufacturer. The installation shall conform to relevant Indian
Standard specification and requirement of local site conditions.
3.5.2 The DB shall be installed in surface/concealed manner at the location as shown in the
respective drawings.
3.5.3 All minor electrical and mechanical work required to be attended to on the DB shall be
completed in an approved manner after installation but before energizing the DB's.
4. COMPONENTS:
4.1 GENERAL
The type, size and rating of the components shall be as indicated on the relevant drawings. While
selection of the capacity of the components resulting from the prevailing conditions like room
temperature shall be allowed for the thermal and magnetic trip rating shall be compensated for the
ambient temperature. The rating indicated on the drawings are ratings anticipated at prevailing site
condition.
4.2 AIR CIRCUIT BREAKERS:
The air circuit breaker shall comply with the requirements of IS: 13947-2 (1993) and shall have:
i. A service short circuit breaking capacity shall be as specified and equal to short circuit
withstand values. All short circuit ratings shall be Ics values.
ii. A short circuit making capacity of 105 KA.
iii. A short time withstand capacity of 75 KA for 1 second.
iv. Mechanical and electrical endurance for 2000 operating cycles out of which 100 cycles
should be for electrical endurance.
v. Electrical overload performance at 6 times the rated current, 110% of the rated voltage as
recovery voltage and 0.5 power factor.
vi. Dielectric test of 2.5 KV applied for one minute on main circuits. Test evidence from a
recognised independent laboratory/institution shall be furnished for compliance of the
breakers with the above requirements.
vii. Each pole of the ACB's shall be equipped with an inverse time delay thermal over current
trip device and an electromagnetic instantaneous over current trip device. The ACB's shall
be equipped with under voltage trip relay. The trip devices shall be direct acting. ACB shall
be capable of providing short circuit overload and earth fault protection (in absolute values)
if required, thru microprocessor-based control unit sensing the true RMS values to ensure
accurate measurement meeting the EMI/EMS requirement as per the standard.
viii. Disconnecting devices of approved type shall be provided to facilitate the removal of the
circuit breakers from the housing for test and maintenance purposes.
ix. The ACB's shall be fitted with detachable type arc quenching device on each pole. The ACB's
shall have auxiliary contacts for signaling, interlocking etc. The ACB's shall have slow close
facilities for checking contact operation and contact gap adjustment.
x. All contacts subject to arcing shall be tipped with arc resisting material. Main contacts shall
Page 1066 of 1358

be silver plated to ensure reliability in service.

xi. Isolating contacts shall be of the silver plated, multifinger, spring loaded type. Facilities shall
be provided to isolate the circuit breaker for inspection purpose. Feature of contact wear
inspection indicating the life of contacts shall be provided. The ACB shall have double
insulation (class-II) with moving and fixed contacts totally enclosed for enhanced safety and
inaccessibility to live parts. The breaker shall have three distinct positions within the cassette
as follows:
a) `Service Position' - with main and auxiliary contacts connected.
b) `Test Position' - with power contacts fully disconnected and control circuit contacts
connected.
c) Ìsolated position' - With both power and control circuit contacts fully disconnected.
xii. Interlocks shall be provided to :
a) Prevent the breaker from being isolated unless it is in the OFF position.
b) Prevent the breaker from being racked into the service position unless it is in the OFF
position.
c) Prevent the breaker from being accidentally pulled completely OFF the guide rail.
xiii. Safety shutters of an insulation material shall be provided to prevent access to all live
contacts when the breaker is in the inspection position or completely withdrawn.
xiv. Facilities for pad locking the safety shutters when breaker is completely withdrawn shall be
provided. Facilities shall be provided for earthing the circuit breaker.
xv. Air circuit breaker shall be capable of clearing the maximum fault current which can occur.
xvi. All electrical closing of breaker should be with Electrical motor wound stored energy spring
closing mechanism with Mechanical indicator to provide ON/OFF status of ACB.
For all ACBs the operating handle should be provided for charging the spring in continuous action. The
spring shall be released with ON/OFF push button command in one operation at the correct speed
independent of operator speed. A direct mechanical coupling should indicate the ACB in ON to OFF
position thus qualifying to disconnection as per the IS/IEC indicating the true position of all the contacts.
One set of NO/NC potential free contacts to be provided for operation on building management system.
All accessories like shunt, undervoltage motorized mechanism etc shall be front mounted and can be
fitted at site.
4.3 MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS (MCCB):
MCCBs shall satisfy the requirements of IS-13947 Part (II) and shall be of current limiting type. MCCB
shall provide type `C' protection to the contactors as per IEC 158-1B. MCCBs shall be quick make, quick
break, independent manual type with trip free feature with mechanical ON, OFF, and TRIP indications.
A trip button shall be provided for tripping the breaker.
MCCB shall have electro-magnetic release up to 250 Amp. & above 250 A shall be microprocessor based,
under voltage and earth fault releases. Alarm and auxiliary contacts, terminal shrouds, sliding type front
operation kit with facility for door interlocking and pad locking shall be provided (ICS=ICU).
4.4 FUSE SWITCH UNITS
The fuse switch units shall be 3-pole double break type suitable for load break duty, quick make and
break action. Separate neutral link shall be provided in the switch. All fuse switch units shall be provided
with hinged doors duly interlocked with operating mechanism so as to prevent opening of the door
Page 1067 of 1358

when the switch is in "ON" position and also prevent closing of the switch when the door is not properly
secured. All contacts shall be silver plated, and all live parts shall be shrouded. The incoming and
outgoing terminals of switch shall be adequately sized to receive proper size of cables. High rupturing
capacity (HRC) fuse links shall be provided with switch fuse units and shall be in accordance with IS:
2208-1962 and having rupturing capacity of not less than 35 MVA at 415 volts. HRC fuse links shall be
provided with visible indicators to show that they have operated. The switch fuse unit shall be
manufactured in accordance with IS:4047-1967 as amended to date.
4.5 MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKER
Miniature circuit breakers shall be quick make and break type and conform to IS: 8828. The housing of
MCBs shall be heat resistant and having a high impact strength. The fault current of MCBs shall not be
less than 10KA, at 230 volts. The MCBs shall be flush mounted and shall be provided with trip free
manual operating mechanism with mechanical "ON" and "OFF" indications.
The circuit breaker dollies shall be of the trip free pattern to prevent closing the breaker on a faulty
circuit. The MCB contacts shall be silver nickel and silver graphite alloy and tip coated with silver. Proper
arc chutes shall be provided to quench the arc immediately. MCB's shall be provided with magnetic fluid
plunger release for over current and short circuit protection.
The overload or short circuit devices shall have a common trip bar in the case of DP and TPN Miniature
Circuit Breakers. All the MCB's shall be tested and certified as per Indian Standards, prior to installation.
MCB shall be selected as per the application of the load.
4.6 FUSE:
Fuses shall be of high rupturing capacity (HRC) fuse links and shall be in accordance with relevant ISS
and having rupturing capacity of not less than 35 MVA at 415 volts. The back up fuse rating for each
motor/ equipment shall be so chosen that the fuse does not operate on starting of motors/equipment.
4.7 EARTH LEAKAGE CB/RESIDUAL CURRENT CB:
The ELCB/RCCB shall comply with IS:12640-1988/IEC:1008. The ELCB/RCCB shall be current operated
independent of the line voltage. ELCB/RCCB shall work on the principle of core balance transformer.
The ELCB/RCCB shall be rated for current sensitivity of a min of 30mA and a max of 300 mA at 240/415
V AC. The terminals shall be protected against finger contact to IP:20 degree of protection. The
ELCB/RCCB shall have a minimum of 20,000 electrical operations.
Testing Provision
A test device shall be incorporated to check the integrity of the earth leakage detection system and the
tripping mechanism. When the unit is connected to service, pressing the test know shall trip the ELCB
and the operating handle shall move to the ―OFF‖ position.
4.8 CONTACTORS:
The contactors shall meet with the requirements of IS:2959.

The contactors shall be of MN series only.
The contactors shall have minimum making and breaking capacity in accordance with utilization
category AC3 and shall be suitable for minimum class II intermittent duty.
If the contactor forms part of a distribution board, then a separate enclosure is not required, but the
installation of the contactor shall be such that it is not possible to make an accidental contact with live
Page 1068 of 1358

parts.
4.9 VOLTMETER:
Voltmeter shall comply with IS-1248 (Latest edition) requirements. The dial of the meter shall be square
in shape 96 x 96 Sq. size. The voltmeter shall be Network type, flush pattern, with dust and moisture
proof enclosure. The voltmeter selector switch shall be arranged to provide line to line voltage reading
and line to neutral voltage reading.
4.10 AMMETER:
Ammeter shall comply with IS-1248 (Latest edition). The dial of the ammeter shall be square in shape of
96 x 96 Sq. mm size. The Ammeter shall be Network type, flush pattern with dust and moisture proof
enclosure. The range of the ammeter shall be in accordance with 1 to 1.5 times the feeder full load
current. Separate current transformer shall be provided for all ammeters. Three ways ON and OFF
selector switch shall be provided for measuring current in different phases.
4.11 CURRENT TRANSFORMER:

Where ammeters are called for C.T's shall be provided for current measuring. Each phase shall be
provided with separate current transformer of accuracy class-I and suitable VA burden for operation of
associated metering and controls. Current transformer shall be in accordance with IS:2705 as amended
up to date.
4.12 ENERGY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
The system monitor the energy consumption at the individual distribution boards for centralized billing.
The requirements are as follows:
4.12.1 To monitor each supply breaker Line & Phase Voltage, Current, Power, Energy, reactive
power, P.F., Frequency etc. the trend of consumption, maximum demand in KVA time plot with
an accuracy class of 0.5 should be provided with RS 485 port with required open protocol
software.
4.12.2 Should monitor Demand parameter (KVA or KW) instantaneous demand & maximum
demand, Day, Date, Time of MD occurrence.
4.12.3 Each outgoing feeder shall be provided with electric 3 phase 4 wire/1 phase Energy meters
to monitor energy parameter with tamper proof cover. Accuracy class 1.0.
4.12.4 Computer System Data so collected from the incoming and outgoing shall be integrated and
recorded in the PC Pentium-IV, 1.1 GHz, 256 MB RAM, 40 GB HDD, 3.5‖ FDD, CD Drive – 52X,
serial port and parallel port, 17‖ colour monitor, mouse and standard keyboard. Windows-98
version & MS-OFFICE-97. 132 Column Dot Matrix printer, UPS (Min 2 KVA), High speed control
and graphic low loss data communication cable including required software for demand
representative of the same. The required window-based software shall also be provided for
having pre-configured with screens which show mimics, trends, history, alarms and shall
generated MIS reports. Required high speed data cable/control cable and other network
accessories like data converter, repeaters etc shall also be included by the bidder.
4.13 BUS TRUNKING / DUCT:
Bus duct shall be aluminum conductor conventional design suitable for use on 415 volts, three phase
four wire, 50 Hz. A.C. Supply system.
Page 1069 of 1358

4.14 ENCLOSURE
The enclosure shall be a branded catalogue product from approved manufacturer. Enclosure shall be
made out of electro galvanized steel sheets conforming to international specification. Alu - Zinc coating
shall be provided on the sheets, which shall prevent rust formation during storage and handling for
processing, in addition to giving corrosion protection to the finished product. The sheets have a fine
surface finish, which gives good presentation to the painted components of the enclosure.
The enclosures shall be reinforced by using suitable bracing material between the channels. The sheet
metal structure shall be jig assembled to ensure that any one section can fit into other sections without
any difficulty. The sheet metal enclosure shall be of sufficient section, ventilated and designed such that
the temperature rise does not exceed the prescribed limit above ambient of 45oC. Proper ventilation
shall be provided by means of louvres and covered by fine mesh to avoid the ingress of vermin. The
sheet metal work shall be pretreated in seven tank. Metal treatment plant for degreasing, derusting and
phosphating the surface. After phosphating the surface shall be finished. The inside/outside surfaces of
the enclosure shall be powder coated in shade to be specified later or galvanized. Bus bars shall be of
aluminum alloy conforming to IS.S. 5082 – 1969 grade E 91E – WP. The current density not to exceed
0.8A per Sq.mm or as per approved design calculations whichever is less. The bus bars shall be insulated
with Class ‗F‘ insulation material and ensure tight fitting on the conductors. The busbar surface shall be
colour coded by applying Red, Yellow, Blue and Black indications to identify the phases. The joints shall
be bolted using electro galvanized high tensile (HT) M.S. bolts, complete with spring washers to avoid
loosening in service.
Bus bars supports shall be of SMC/FRP and shall have sufficient strength to withstand the effect of a
short circuit. All joints shall be provided with links to ensure earth continuity between sections of bus
trunking / ducts. Flexible joints made of copper shall be supplied as may be necessary for end
termination at DG/Transformer and panel end. Flexible bellows shall also be provided for connection at
D.G. end. The busduct / trunking shall be complete with expansion joints through panel, flexible
connection, first barriers etc.
Note:
The offer of busduct shall be complete with design calculation:
i) Busbar size required based on normal current carrying capacity considering various current
derating factor.
ii) Based on short circuit with-stand capacity.
iii) For electro-mechanical stress analysis for busbars, busbar support and hardware.
In case of switchgears and panels issued by owner for erection the unit rate shall include Design, supply,
inspection, receiving, storage, installation, field testing and commissioning activities including co-
ordination with the suppliers of the switchgears. The rate shall be quoted per set of switchgears/panels
as identified in the BOQ.
4.15 GENERAL:
4.15.1 NSPEICTION:
The panels be inspected and checked as per inspection manual of the PANEL manufacturer.
Various electrical components and accessories of the PANEL's shall be checked as per drawing
for the respective panels.
The PANELs shall be checked for rigid mounting, earthing connection, proper rating & size of
Page 1070 of 1358

components, internal wiring etc.,

All mechanical fasteners and electrical connections shall be checked and tightened before
installation.
4.15.2 INSTALLATION:
The PANELs shall be assembled and aligned together and be installed at site as per installation
manual/ instruction of the PANEL manufacturer.
The installation shall conform to relevant Indian Standard specification and requirement of
local site conditions.
The PANEL shall be installed in surface/concealed manner at the location as shown in the
respective drawings.
All minor electrical and mechanical work required to be attended to on the PANEL shall be
completed in an approved manner after installation but before energizing the PANEL's.
G- CABLES :
1.1 GENERAL SCOPE:
Supply , installation, storing, laying, fixing, jointing / termination, testing and commissioning of Medium
Voltage XLPE insulated extruded PVC inner sheathed PVC overall Sheathed armored aluminum/ copper
conductor cables laid in built up trenches, directly buried underground, on cable trays, in pipes, clamped
directly to wall or Structures etc. as called for in the drawing.
a) Type :
Medium voltage cables shall be circular, multicore annealed copper or aluminum conductor, XLPE
insulated, PVC extended inner sheathed an PVC overall sheathed and steel wire armored or steel tape
armored construction or unarmored. The conductors of cable shall be stranded. Sector shaped
stranded conductors shall be used for cables of 50 sqmm size and above. The cables shall conform to
IS:1554 part-I in all respects.
MV power cables shall be 2, 3, 3.5 or 4 cores, as required and shall have conductors made from electrical
purity aluminum conductors conforming to IS:8130-84.
Conductors shall be insulated with high quality PVC base compound. Insulation and outer sheathing
compounds shall conform to IS:5831 - 84.
A common covering shall be applied over the laid-up cores by an extruded sheath of un-vulcanized
rubber compound.
Armoring of galvanized round steel wires or galvanized flat steel strips shall be provided over the inner
sheath.
Outer sheath of PVC shall be extruded over the armoring cables shall be manufactured and tested in
accordance with IS 1554 Part I.
Unless otherwise specified, all control cables shall be multicore, 1100V grade PVC insulated, armored
and overall PVC sheathed with stranded copper conductors of 2.5 sq.mm, conforming to IS 1554 Part I.
Cores shall be identified by colour scheme of PVC insulation.
b) Rating :
The cables shall be rated for a voltage of 1100 Volts.
c) Core Identifications :
Page 1071 of 1358

Cores shall be provided with the following colour scheme of PVC insulation.
1. Single Core : Green yellow for earthing.
2. Two Cores : Red and Black, Blue & Black, Yellow & Black.
3. Three Cores : Red, Yellow & Blue
4. Four Core : Red, Yellow, Blue & Black
d) Selection of Cable:
1. Cables sizes shall be selected considering the current carrying capacity, voltage drop, maximum short
circuit duty and the period of short circuit to meet the present and future anticipated loads.
2. While deciding cable sizes, the derating factors for type and depth of laying, grouping, ambient
temperature, ground temperature and soil resistivity shall be taken into account.
1.2 STANDARDS:
The following standards and rules shall be applicable.

IS 1554 PVC insulated (heavy duty) electric cables Part I for
working voltages up to and including 1100 V.
IS 8130 Conductors for insulated electric cables and flexible cords.
IS 3961 Recommended current ratings for cables:(Part 2) PVC Insulated and PVC sheathed
heavy duty cables.
IS 5831 PVC insulation and sheath of electric cables.
The individual cores shall have continuous numbering of the core all along its length and also be
provided with identification ferrules at both ends. Individual control cables shall have 20% spare cores.
PVC / XLPE cables shall be used for all electrical works to prevent flame propagation, smoke reduction
and to avoid toxic gas emission in the event of a fire. FRLSH compound shall be tested rigorously for
oxygen index as per ASTM D2863, acid gas generation to IEC 754-1, smoke density to ASTM D 2843 and
flammability SS 424 1475 class F3, IEEE 383 and IEC 332-1.
Manufacturer's name, ISI Mark, cable size and type shall be clearly embossed at regular intervals on all
cables.
1.3 INSPECTION:
All cables shall be tested inspected at manufacturers works. However, upon receipt at site cables shall
be checked for physical damage during transit.
1.4 JOINTS IN CABLES:
The contractor shall take care to see that all the cables received at site are apportioned to various
locations in such a manner as to ensure maximum utilisation and avoidance of straight cable jointing.
This apportioning shall be got approved by the Construction manager/ Consultant before the cables are
cut to lengths.
Where straight joints in cable are unavoidable, the use and location of such straight joints shall be got
approved by Construction manager/Consultant.
1.5 JOINTING BOXES FOR CABLES:
Cable joint boxes shall be of appropriate size, suitable for PVC insulated armored cables of particular
voltage rating.
Page 1072 of 1358

1.6 JOINTING OF CABLES:
All cable joints shall be made in suitable, approved cable joint boxes, jointing of cables in the joint boxes
and the filling in of compound shall be done in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and in an
approved manner. All straight joints shall be done in epoxy mould boxes with epoxy resin (Tropolin/M-
Seal resin or approved equal). All jointing accessories shall be of CCI/INCAB or approved equal. All
terminal leads of conductors shall be heavy soldered up to at least 50mm length.
All cables shall be joined colour to colour and tested for continuity and insulation resistance before
jointing commences. The seals of cables shall not be removed until preparations for jointing are
completed. Joints shall be finished on the same day as commenced and sufficient protection from the
weather shall be arranged. The conductors shall be efficiently insulated with high voltage insulating tape
and by using spreaders of approved size and pattern. The joints shall be completely filled with epoxy
compound and tapped so as to ensure that the box is properly filled.
Epoxy compound shall be filled as follows:
Equal quantities of resin and hardener shall be mixed thoroughly by hand until the mixture is free from
white patches and has uniform colour. No water, oil or any other liquid shall be added to the mixture to
make it soft as this will affect the properties of the compound. The mixture shall be used within 30-40
minutes of mixing. The surface on which epoxy compound is to be used, shall be free from dust, rust,
oil, grease and shall be dry. The joint shall neither be disturbed nor moved till the epoxy compound is
completely hardened. A smooth surface can be made by rubbing a damp cloth smoothly on the
compound before it sets. The joints shall be painted after it has completely hardened.
Alternatively, ready mix of epoxy cable jointing compound may also be used.
1.7 CABLE MARKERS/CABLE TAGS:
Cable Markers:
All underground cables and cable joints shall be marked on the surface by markers generally
manufactured and tested to the requirements of relevant ISS. Approved CI cable markers shall be
provided at every 30m along the route of the cables and at both ends of road crossing, indicating cable
joints and cables as applicable. Special CI markers shall be provided at all buried cable joints indicating
"Electrical Cable Joints". CI plates duly engraved with the size of the cable and the place it serves shall
be tied to the cable at regular intervals of 5m for easy identification of cables.
Cable Tags:
Cable tags shall be made out of 2 mm thick aluminum sheets, each tag 32 mm in dia with one hole of
2.5 mm dia. 6 mm below the periphery shall be provided for clamping the same with cables.
Cable designation are to be punched with letter/number punches and the tags are to be tied to cables
with piano wires of
approved quality and size. Tags shall be tied inside the panels beyond the glands as well as below the
glands at cable entires. Along trays, tags are to be tied at all bends on straight lengths, tags shall be
provided at every 5 meter.
1.8 TERMINATION OF CABLES:
Cable termination shall be done in terminal box or cable end box or distribution boards, or
Page 1073 of 1358

apparatus/equipment. Terminations are to be made with mechanical gland and of the tinned nickel
plated, anticorrosive, three piece improved pattern which is to grip inner and outer PVC sheaths as
well as the armor of the cable. The cable ends or the core conductor are to be connected by solderless
lugs or sockets using crimping tool of approved make for all cables. All cable glands shall be earthed to
body earthing with suitable size of conductors.
All terminations of cable conductors and base conductors shall be mechanically and electrically sound
and shall comply with the requirements of relevant Standards and Indian electricity regulations.
The connectors or connecting sockets are to have such dimensions so as to limit temperature rise.
When required the water tightness of the terminal boxes may be obtained by filling with a compound
preferably plastic flame retarding and non-dripping type within the normal range of temperatures.
When the cable is cut during the course of installation the open ends are to be sealed immediately by
means of self-adhesive non hygroscopic tape over a wax water seal to make an air and watertight joint.
1.9 INSTALLATION OF CABLES:
Cable shall be laid in a manner as indicated on the drawings. Generally, cables are laid in the following
manner.
i. In the underground masonry trench.
ii. On the cable tray/or on cable ladders.
iii. Buried underground.
iv. Through pipe sleeves.
Various installation methods are discussed in the following paragraphs.

Cables shall be laid by skilled and experienced workmen using adequate rollers to minimize stretching
of the cable. The cable drums shall be placed on jacks before unwinding the cable. The cable drums
shall be rotated in a direction as indicated by the manufacturer. Care shall be exercised in laying cables
to avoid forming kinks. The drums shall be unrolled, and cables run over wooden rollers, placed at
intervals not exceeding 2 meters.
General
All cables shall be adequately protected against any risk of mechanical damage to which they may be
liable in normal conditions of service.
When cable pass through holes in metal work, precautions shall be taken to prevent abrasion of the
cables on any sharp edges.
In every vertical cable ladder, channel or duct or trunking or cable trench containing cables and
exceeding three meters in length, internal barriers shall be provided so as to prevent the air at the top
of the unit from attaining an excessively high
temperature. In every vertical cable shaft, cable trench or any passage of cable through wall, ceiling,
floor barriers against
spread of fire and smoke shall be provided for compliance with IEE regulations. `Viper' CABLEMASTIC
fr 903 fire resistant painting shall be applied on all power cables.
Where cable passes through walls, ceiling, floor, it shall run through sleeve of PVC pipes or Hume pipes
of adequate diameter. After pulling the cable through sleeve, both the ends of the sleeve shall be sealed
watertight with fire resistance material to prevent spread of fire and seepage of water.
Generally, along each cable route either in trench or in cable trays/ladders or in pipe separate Two Nos.
of earth strips/wires shall run exposed.
Page 1074 of 1358

Where an installation comprises medium voltage cables as well as extra low voltage circuits, precaution
shall be taken in accordance with relevant regulations and shall be physically separated by minimum of
300mm distance.
Metal sheaths and armor of all cables, metal conduits, ducts, trunking, and bare earth continuity
conductors associated with such cables, which might otherwise come into fortuitous contact with other
fixed metal work shall be effectively bonded there to earth so as to prevent appreciable potential
difference at such possible points of contact.
Underground Installations
The cables shall be laid in an excavated trench. The depth of the trench shall be minimum 750 mm
below the final ground level but shall be decided on the number of cables to be laid in the trench so
that the vertical distance between two adjacent layers of cables shall not be less than 350mm. The width
of the trench shall be decided on the number of cables to be laid in the trench so that the distance
between two adjacent cables shall not be less than one cable diameter.
a) Width of Trench:
i) The minimum width of trench for laying single cable shall be 350 mm.
ii) Where more than one cable is to be laid in the same trench in horizontal formation, the width of
trench shall be increased such that the inter axial spacing between the cables, except whether otherwise
specified shall be at least 200 mm.
iii) There shall be clearance of at least 150 mm between axis of the end cables and the sides of the
trench.
b) Depth of Trench:
i) Where cables are laid in single tier formation, the total depth of the trench shall not be less than 750
mm.
ii) When more than one tier of cables is unavoidable and vertical formation of laying adopted, depth of
trench in
(i) above shall be increased by 300 mm for each additional tier to be formed.
In addition to above, where gradients and changes in depth are unavoidable, these shall be gradual.
The cables shall be protected by placing precast concrete tiles or burnt bricks over the cables on top
layer of sand and for the full length of underground cables. Where more than one cable is running in
the same trench, the concrete tiles/bricks shall cover all the cables and shall project a minimum of
150mm on either side of the cables.
In any case the top layer of the cables shall be minimum 600 mm below the finished level of the ground.
The top of the cable trench shall be well compacted till the finished level of the ground and shall be
approved by the Construction Manager/Consultant. If required a laboratory compaction test shall be
carried out in presence of the Construction Manager/Consultant.
H.V., M.V., cables shall not be laid in the same trench/cable tray and/or alongside of water main.
Cables under road crossings and any surfaces subjected to heavy traffic shall be protected by running
them through Hume pipes of suitable size.
Where cables cross one another, the cables of higher voltages shall be laid at lower level than the cable
of lower voltage.
The relative position of the cables laid in the same trench shall be preserved and the cables shall not
Page 1075 of 1358

cross each other as far as possible. At all changes in direction in horizontal and vertical planes, the cable
shall be bent smooth with a radius of bend not less than 15 times the diameter of the cable. Minimum
3 meters long loop shall be provided at both sides of every straight joint and 5 meters at each end of
the cable. Distinguishing marks shall be made at the cable ends for identification.
1.10 Proximity to Communication Cables:
MV Cables and communication cables shall as per as possible cross at right angles where power cables
are laid in proximity to communication cables the horizontal and vertical clearance shall not normally
be less than 600 mm. Insulation tapes of appropriate voltage and in red, yellow, and blue colors shall
be wrapped just below the sockets for phase identification.
All the excavation and back fill including timbering, shoring, and pumping required for the installation
of the cables shall be carried out as indicated on the drawing and as per requirements laid down
elsewhere or as per Construction manager/Consultant direction. Trenches shall be dug true to line and
grades. Back fill for trenches shall be filled in layers not exceeding 150mm. At each layer compaction
test shall be carried out in presence of Construction manager/Consultant Each layer shall be properly
rammed and consolidated before laying the next layer. The contractor shall restore all surfaces,
roadways, side walls, curbs, walls, landscaping, or other works cut for excavation to their original
condition, the satisfaction of the Construction manager/Consultant. Suitable approved type cable
markers shall be installed along the cable route & wherever change of direction takes place.
Cables Installed Inside the Building
The cables inside the building shall be installed in one of the following manner, as indicated in the
drawing and approved by the Construction manager/Consultant.
Installed in Built-up Trench
The cables laid on the bottom of the structural trenches shall not lay freely upon the trench bottom.
They shall be raised to prevent the possibility of their coming into contact with deleterious materials.
The cables laid in the trench shall be laid on angle iron brackets/cable tray/cable ladder/cable
troughs/cable racks as indicated on the drawings, and as approved by the Construction
manager/Consultant. Where cables are clamped to the wall a minimum clearance of 100mm shall be
maintained between wall and cable and minimum 150mm vertical clearance shall be maintained
between two cables. Where cables are laid on brackets the brackets shall not be fixed more than 500mm
apart to avoid sag in the cables. Where the cables are laid on cable tray/ladder/troughs /racks, minimum
300mm distance shall be observed between adjacent tier of tray/ladder/ troughs/racks, and cable shall
be fixed minimum 25mm away from the wall, and minimum of one cable diameter distance shall be
observed between two adjacent cables. Cables shall be properly fixed with the tray/ ladder/ troughs/
racks with cable tie or saddles or straps.
Cables on Cable Trays/Ladders under the Ceiling or on Wall
Where cables are installed under above suspended ceiling or below ceiling or on wall, they shall be laid
on a ladder/perforated G.I. cable tray and shall be run in such positions that they are not liable to be
damaged by contact with the floor or the ceiling or other fixtures.
The ladder/perforated cable tray shall be properly fixed with channels, angles, tie rod, flats to the ceiling.
The metal inserts for fixing channels, angles, tie rod, flats shall be put in place while casting the slab. If
insert plates are not placed in position, Anchor fasteners shall be used to support cable trays if required.
The cable tray route shall be coordinated with other services to avoid crisscross of all the services. While
laying the cables on the tray minimum one cable diameter distance shall be observed between two
adjacent cables about 20% space shall be kept spare for any future installation.
Cables Installed in the Mechanical Room.
Page 1076 of 1358

The cable reaching the motors in the mechanical room or plant room, or machines room or service area
shall be laid on cable tray except where indicated in masonry underground trenches. The cable reaching
the motors shall be protected by rigid galvanized conduits up to a height of 300mm above the floor.
Above that height, the cable shall be protected by means of oil tight flexible metallic G.I. conduits to the
terminal box of the motor. The connection between the rigid conduit and the flexible conduit shall be
done by a screwed coupling of an approved type. The flexible conduit shall be properly fixed with the
terminal box of the motor by means of double hexagonal check nut.
H - H.T. CABLES
1.1 GENERAL
HT 11 KV XLPE cables shall in all respects conform to IS 7098 part II. Storage handling, installation /
method of laying testing loops mechanical protection jointing and termination ‘s etc. shall be as per
CPWD General Specifications for Electrical Works (Part II External) 1995.
The cables shall be tested and commissioned in accordance with Drawings, Specifications, Indian
Standard Specification IS : 1255 – 1967 and cable manufacturer’s instructions. The cables shall have
reputed make. The recommendations of the cable manufacturer with regard to jointing and sealing
shall be strictly followed. The installation of cable shall be done by an approved, qualified and
experienced person in this trade.
1.2 MATERIAL:
The H.T. cables shall be 11 KV, aluminum conductor CROSS LINKED POLYETHYLENE steel tape armored
cable laid underground and or in RCC Hume pipes as shown on Drawings. The conductor shall be made
of Electrical purity aluminum wires and stranded together and compacted. The cable shall be 3 Core
type. The insulation shall be of high-quality cross-linked polyethylene applied by extrusion process. Both
conductor and the insulator are provided with shielding made of same Conducting compound.
Armoring is applied over inner sheath and shall be of flat steel strips. The outer sheath shall be of heart
resisting Tropodur (PVC) compound. This shall be black colour.
1.3 CABLE TERMINATINS:
Cable termination shall be done in terminal calve box using cable Heat shrinkable termination Kit and
the cable ends sealed with sealing compound. The cable boxes of transformers shall be filled with
bituminous compound of approved make.
1.4 LAYING OF CABLES:
HT. cables shall be laid either buried directly underground or RCC pipes. The cable buried underground
shall be at minimum depth of 1.2 mtr. from the ground level. Sand cushion of not less than 80mm shall
be provided both above and below the cable with a protective concrete slab on the top of the sand layer.
The cable trench shall be back filled and compacted.
1.5 PROTECTION OF CABLES:
The cable shall be protected by placing precast reinforced 50mm, thick (1:2:4) concrete slabs 200mm
wide on the top layer of sand for the length of the cable. Where more than one cable is running in the
Page 1077 of 1358

same trench the concrete blocks shall be cover all the cables and shall project minimum 80mm on either
side of the cables. Cables under road crossing and any surface subjected to heavy traffic, shall be
protected by running them huge pipes of suitable size.
I - CABLE TRAY:
1.1 CONSTRUCTION
The trays shall be made of 1.6mm thick (up to 300mm width) & 2mm thick(above 300mm width )
perforated PRE-GALVANISED MS /Alu Zinc sheet having minimum 75 mm depth. The width of
perforation shall be maximum 10mm spaced at maximum 20mm distance. The width of the cable tray
shall be selected so as to accommodate required number of cables to be laid on it, with minimum
separation of minimum one cable diameter between two adjacent cables. The cables shall be tied with
the cable tray with nylon strip/ Aluminium clamps/GI clamps. The cable trays shall be PRE-GALVANISED
MS /Alu Zink sheet with edge fold construction for preventing of cable tray cutting. All steel work shall
be treated in accordance with the following procedure and in accordance with IS : 6005 "Code of Practice
for Phosphating Iron and Steel".
After completion of fabrication work, complete fabricated structure shall be thoroughly cleaned to
remove traces of grease, rust, scale and dust. The seven-tank process for treatment of fabricated
structure shall be used. After preparation of fabricated surfaces, the panel shall be powder coated with
synthetic enamel paint up to 50 microns thickness. The finished panels shall be dried in storing ovens
in dust free atmosphere to ensure fine quality finish. The paint shall be Berger Luxor High gloss, with
siemens gray color for inside outside. Finish powder coated surface of steel shall present an
aesthetically pleasing appearance free from uneven surface.
The finish powder coating shall be as per ISS or as approved by consultants.
1.2 PRE-GALVANISED MS / ALU ZINC PERFORATED / LADDER TYPE CABLE TRAY –
The cable tray shall be fabricated out of slotted/perforated MS sheets as channel sections, single or
double bended. The channel sections shall be supplied in convenient lengths and assembled at side to
the desired lengths. These may be PRE-GALVANISED MS /Alu Zinc Cable Tray with edge fold
construction for preventing of cable to the desired lengths. Alternatively, where specified, the cable
tray may be fabricated by two angle irons of 50mm x 50mm x 6mm as two longitudinal members, with
cross bracings between them by 50mm x 5mm flats welded/bolted to the angles at 1 m spacing. 2mm
thick MS perforated sheet shall be suitably welded/bolted to the base as well as on the two sides.
Typically, the dimensions, fabrication details etc. are shown in CPWD General Specification for Electrical
Works - Part II -External, 1994.
The jointing between the sections shall be made with coupler plates of the same material and thickness
as the channel section. Two coupler plates, each of minimum 200mm length, shall be bolted on each of
the two sides of the channel section with 8mm dia round headed bolts, nuts and washers. In order to
maintain proper earth continuity bond, the paint on the contact surfaces between the coupler plates
and cable tray shall be scraped and removed before the installation.
The maximum permissible uniformly distributed load for various sizes of cables trays and for different
supported span are as per CPWD General Specification of Electrical Work Part II -1994. The sizes shall
be specified considering the same.
1.3 GENERAL
Page 1078 of 1358

The width of the cable tray shall be chosen so as to accommodate all the cable in one tier, plus 30 to
50% additional width for future expansion. This additional width shall be minimum 100mm. The overall
width of one cable tray shall be limited to 800mm.
Factory fabricated bends, reducers, tee/cross junctions, etc. shall be provided as per good engineering
practice. (Details are typically shown in figure3) of CPWD General Specification of Electrical Work Part II
-1994. The radius of bends, junctions etc. shall not be less than the minimum permissible radius of
bending of the largest size of cable to be carried by the cable tray.
The cable tray shall be suspended from the ceiling slab with the help of 10mm dia MS rounds or 25mm
x 5mm flats at specified spacing as per of CPWD General Specification of Electrical Work Part II -1994.
Flat type suspenders may be used for channels up to 450mm width bolted to cable trays. Round
suspenders shall be threaded and bolted to the cable trays or to independent support angles 50mm x
50mm x 5mm at the bottom end as specified. These shall be grouted to the ceiling slab at the other end
through an effective means, as approved by the Engineer, to take the weight of the cable tray with the
cables.
The entire tray (except in the case of galvanized / powder coated type) and the suspenders shall be
painted with two coats of red oxide primer paint after removing the dirt and rust and finished with two
coats of spray paint of approved make synthetic enamel paint.
The cable tray shall be bonded to the earth Terminal of the switch bonds at both ends.
The cable trays shall be measured on unit length basis, along the center line of the cable tray, including
bends, reducers, tees, cross joints, etc, and paid for accordingly.
J - Deleted
K - IS SPECIFICATIONS:
The following Indian Standard Specifications revised as on date will apply to the equipment and
contract.
a. Switch fuse units on cubicle IS 4047 1967
switch boards
b. Switchgears Bus Bars IS 375 1963
c. Distribution boards IS 2675 1966
d. Enclosure for low voltage IS 2147 1962
switchgears
e. PVC cables IS 1554 1964
f. tubular filament lamps IS 2410 1963
g. Tungsten filament lamps IS 415 1963
h. Ceiling fans IS 374 1966
i. Industrial light fittings IS 1771 1961
j. Watertight electric light IS 3553 1966
fittings
k. Steel boxes for enclosure of IS 5133 1966
electrical accessories
l. Fittings for rigid conduits IS 2667 1964
m. Rigid steel conduits for IS 9537 1984
electrical wiring
n. Accessories for rigid steel IS 3873 1966
conduits for electrical wiring
o. Switch socket outlet IS 4615 1968
p. Three pin plugs and socket IS 1293 1967
Page 1079 of 1358

outlet
q. Switches for domestic and IS 3854 1966
similar purpose
r. PVC wires IS 694 1964
s. Call bell and buzzers IS 2268 1966t.
t. Earthing IS 3043 1966
u. Electrical wiring installation IS 732 1963
v. Switchgears IS 3072 1965
w. Lighting protection IS 2309 1969
Indian electricity rule 1956 amended as on date.
L - INSTRUCTIONS FOR CARRYING OUT ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS
1. The Contractor will have to bring all the necessary and proper tools and tackles for carrying out
the work.
2. The work is to be carried out along with the progress of civil works.
3. All jumpers and connections of ACSR conductor or aluminum busbar are to be taken out by
means of Proper clamps, tees, lugs only.
4. Joining of copper strips shall be done by brazing or by way of butt jointing, bolt, nut, washer
used for jointing shall be either of brass/GI. The size of bolt shall be approved by MEP Consultant
/ Architect.
5. All precautions during slab works shall be taken by the contractor to safeguard electrical pipes.
6. Interlocking, interlocking between air break switch and respective LT breaker shall be done both
electrically or mechanically as required, Contractor shall include the case of interlocking in
installation of HT VCB, isolators, AB switch and LT A.C.B./O.C.B./M.C.C.B.
7. All materials, including civil materials required for electrical items are in the scope of this
contract.
8. All material to be supplied by the Contractor must be of approved quality, make and must be
got/approved by MEP Consultant/Architect before use.
9. The Contractor shall follow all the rules and regulations like factory act, workmen compensation
act and shall be responsible for any injury or accident to persons working at site.
10. The work is to be carried out as per the Indian Electricity Rules &Standard code of practice and
other relevant specifications. Workmanship shall be to the satisfaction of the Authority
Engineer. Preference to the work/items shall be given as per the requirement of Employer and
site situations.
11. The installation shall have to be approved by Electrical Inspector/M.P.E.B./MP regulatory board
and/or any other local authorities, if required, and such approval shall have to be arranged by
Contractor. Any alterations and additions suggested by them shall have to be incorporated by
the Contractor, cost of which shall be considered included in scope of this tender.
12. After getting permission to charge from Electrical Inspector's office it is duty of Contractor to
follow-up for installing energy meter and getting line charged from MPEB as early as possible.
All follow-up expenses shall be considered included in offer.
13. The Contractor shall keep at site of work one engineer having bachelor’s degree in electrical
engineering from recognized university for receiving instruction and shall have to give
satisfactory progress of work .The contractor will have to obtain prior approval of MEP
Consultant by submitting the credentials of the electrical engineer he propose to appoint on
site of work .Even during execution if MEP Consultant/Architect feels that the said engineer
appointed by contractor has failed to perform his duties satisfactorily ,they can instruct the
contractor to appoint another engineer and contractor will have to comply it immediately.
Page 1080 of 1358

14. Any extra items that may crop during the progress of the work shall have to be carried out by
the Contractor,
15. In case of any dispute with setting of claims for extra items, the decision of IIM Indore will be
considered final and binding of the Contractor.
16. If any part or whole of the work or any item is not executed to the entire satisfaction of the
Authority Engineer. The Contractor shall have to demolish and do the same work again without
any extra cost if so ordered by the Authority Engineer.
17. No materials supplied by the employer shall be allowed to be removed from site of work unless
and until ordered so by the Authority Engineer.. The Contractor shall ensure the safety of the
materials from date of receipts from the employer's store till actual installation at the works
and handed over to Employer after connection and testing. The Contractor shall maintain a
proper site order book at the site which remain in the custody of the Authority Engineer.
18. The place after any work is completed should be cleaned by the Contractor. Breaking of walls,
slabs, roads etc. necessary for laying cables, conduits drawing of cables/wires etc. and making
them good to original position will have to be done by the Contractor through skilled workers.
19. The measurement will be taken in presence of Authority Engineer authorized representative
at site.
20. No joint shall be allowed in I-section, MS channel.
21. Whatever material/equipment supplied by the Contractor, he has to supply 4 sets of test
certificates from the manufacturers, like lightning arrestor, AB switch, DO fuse, electrical control
panel, sub distribution boards, ACB, OCB, MCB, MCCB, earth fault relay/earth leakage relay,
ELCB, transformers, wires, cables and other item etc.
22. The quantities as shown in the Tender are approximate and may change or delete according to
site situation/conditions. However, the payment will be made on the actual supply and work
carried out at site and duly certified by the Consultant.
23. On the completion of the work the Contractor shall supply free of charges, completion plan in
triplicate, in blueprints and also in original drawing on tracing cloth. Insulation and earth test
report of the Internal and External electrification installation shall be supplied in 3 copies. These
shall be handed over to the Authority Engineer in good condition by the Contractor before the
finalization of his final bill.
24. Meter connection, MPEB's approval for sanction of power and DG set, Electrical Inspector's
approval for HT yard and DG set, MP regulatory boards approval for DG sets is included in scope
of contract and all such work shall be completed by contractor within time without any extra
cost.
25. All materials brought to the site shall be as approved by the Consultant and if desired so
contractor shall arrange for testing of materials at the laboratory (ERDA, Baroda) for any
electrical parameter checking. All such expenses shall be borne by the contractor and are
included in the quoted rates.
26. General repairs should be done before completion of the work.
27. The guarantee period for all work/supply and complete installation (without tube light and
lamp) will be one year or more from date of completion of work as per manufacturer guarantee.
28. Preparation of final drawing of DG sets, transformer /HT yard layout based on drawings given
by consultants and getting approval from state electricity board and office of chief electrical
inspector’s office to charge transformer is included in scope of contractor. work also include
obtaining complete permission /approval including site visits of officials. All work to be arranged
by contractor and liasioning charges/expenses for above work shall be included in tender cost.
Final permission without pending work remark shall be submitted to Employer. Calibration of
meters / CTs from the state electricity board will also be responsibility of contractor and no
extra payment for these works shall be payable. Only those Challans/bills (which are submitted
in treasury) for Electrical Inspectors office, MPEB office will be reimbursed by employer against
Page 1081 of 1358

production of original challans to employer.
M - TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
Before the lighting/power installation is made alive the Contractor shall carry out tests enumerated
below in presence of Authority Engineer or his authorized representative. All testing equipment
necessary to carry out the tests shall be arranged by Contractor and the tests results recorded on
approved proforma. Nothing extra shall be payable for testing.
1. Before energizing, measure insulation resistance of the cable from phase to phase and that
from phase to ground, Insulation resistance of the busbars at the lighting panel from phase to
phase and from phase to ground shall be measured before energizing the panel and should
comply latest IS.
2. Current and voltage of all phases shall be measured at the lighting panel busbars with all circuits
on with fixture and also in all switchboards. Voltage to be check between Phase, Earth & Neutral
in isolated condition.
3. Check the earth continuity for all sockets outlets. A fixed relative position of the phase and
neutral connection inside the socket shall be established for sockets.
4. The earth electrodes shall be tested for earth resistance by means of standard earth tester. The
resistance between the earthing system and the general mass of earth shall not be greater than
1 ohm.
5. While crossing the expansion joints in building conduits shall be provided with flexible pipe shall
not be more than 250 mm, at both the ends of conduit proper flexible couplings shall be
provided and earth wire shall be properly connected to earthing terminal of coupling.
6. Contractor should quote after site visit only. In the case for cable trench, street light pole pit,
earthing pit etc. or any place where Contractor has to dig the earth in hard strata or rock, he
has to do so at quoted rates only for item. No blasting shall be allowed for such digging.
7. For earthing of street light tubular pole 8 SWG GI wire as per standard specification is used.
8. All testing reports for all equipment shall be generated in the presence of Engineer in charge &
submit along with the handing over documents to the IIM INDORE.
N. Testing / Commissioning Of Conduit Wiring
Before the lighting /power installation is made alive the contractor shall carry out tests enumerated
below in the presence of Authority Engineer or his authorized representative. All testing equipment
necessary to carry out the tests shall be arranged by contractor/the tests results recorded on approved
proforma. Nothing extra shall be payable for testing.
1. Measure insulation resistance of each circuit without lamps being in place / it should not be less
than 5 megaohms to earth.
2. Current / voltage of all phase shall be measured at the lighting panel busbar with all circuits on
with fixture /also in all switchboard.
3. Check the earth continuity for all sockets outlets. A fixed relative position of the phase /neutral
connection inside the socket shall be established for sockets.
4. Load Balancing – Balancing of circuits in three phase installation shall be planned before the
commencement of wiring and shall be strictly adhered to.
5. Fall of potential – The drop in pressure between the main switch terminals and the farthest
current consuming apparatus will not exceed 2% with all devices switched ON. The number of
points controlled per circuit shall be as per I.E . Rules if not specified particularly.
6. Ratings : For purpose of determining sizes of sub mains and controlling switches , the following
Page 1082 of 1358

ratings for points shall be assumed.
i) Ceiling Light Point - 100 Watts.

ii) Conveyance plug points - 100 watts.
iii) Fan Points - 60 watts.
iv) Domestic power plug - 250 watts.
O - Cable Identifications:
1.1 General
For multicore cables, PVC ferrule type indicators or tags shall be provided at both ends for core
identification. For phase identification pf 2,3,3 ½ cables coloured PVC tags shall be used at both ends.
All cables shall be provided with aluminum tags of approved design, spaced not less than 10 meter apart
and these shall contain the following information.
Feeder no.
Size
No. of cores.
1.2 Underground cables :

Cables shall be so laid that they will not interfere with other underground structures. All water pipes ,
sewage line or other structures , which become exposed by the excavation , shall be properly supported
and protected from injury until the filling has been rammed solidly in places under and around the . Any
telephone or other cables coming in the they are to be properly shieled as directed by the IIM INDOREs
. Hume pipe for crossing shall have to be sealed at both ends after cable laying and testing is completed.
P - 11kV (350MVA) HT VCB Switchboards
1.1 General Requirements
This specification covers the design, manufacture, testing, packing and supply of HT Indoor Air Insulated
draw out type switchgear panel (Switchboard) up to 12kV respectively incorporating Vacuum Circuit
Breaker. The Switchboard shall be new which will be specifically manufactured against the enclosed
detailed specification.
1.2 Codes and Standards
The switchgear shall be manufactured and tested in line with the latest revision of the following Indian
as well as International Standards :
IEC62271-200, IS13118, IS3427 : High Voltage Switchgear & Control gear
IS5082 : Material for data for Aluminium busbars
IS9920 : Switches and Switch Isolators for voltages above 1000V
IS9046 : AC Contactors of voltage above 1000V up to and including 11000V
IS13703 : Low voltage fuses
IS2705 : Current Transformers
IS3156 : Voltage Transformers
IS1248 : Electrical indicating instruments
Page 1083 of 1358

IS3231 : Electrical Relays for power system protection

IS6875 : Control switches and push buttons
IS694 : PVC insulated cables for working voltages up to and including 1100V
In case of any conflict between the above standards and this specification, the requirements of the
stringent will prevail.
Only manufacturers regularly engaged in manufacturing of 11kV HT VCB shall be approved as

required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 10 years.
As minimum quality system adherence norms, the vendor shall have ISO 9001 Certification.
1.4 Vendor to Confirm the following

1.4.1 That the offered Panel with all components i.e. Breaker, Cable and Bus Bar
compartment is internal arc withstand tested design for desired current ratings.
1.4.2 That the Vacuum Circuit Breaker is maintenance free.
1.4.3 That the anti-pumping feature is available with confirmation whether the same is in-
built feature or externally wired .
1.4.4 That the offered Breaker Mechanism is designed for the specific interrupter and is
typed tested with that interrupter.
1.4.5 That all operations are carried out behind closed doors.
1.5 Guarantee
Manufacturer shall provide guarantee for work under this section. However, such guarantee shall
be in addition to and in lieu of all other liabilities which manufacturer may have by other provisions
of the contract document.
The HT VCB shall also be guaranteed against trouble free operation, defective workmanship and
materials / parts for a period of 18 months from the date of supply or 12 months from the date of
erection and commissioning, whichever is earlier. In case of any defects during this period
equipment / parts shall be replaced free of cost by the Vendor.
1.6 Submittals
i. Contractor to submit general arrangement diagrams with front, side, top & bottom view
and inside view. General arrangement diagrams shall include outline & dimensions,
voltage, cable / bus capacity, circuit breaker details and their arrangement / sizes. All
drawings shall also indicate location / description of all operating / indicating
components mounted inside VCB.
ii. Typical Control Schematic Diagram.
iii. Terminal block details for all power and control terminals provided for external as well
as internal wiring connections.
iv. Foundation details with necessary dimensions.
v. Bill of Material giving make / rating / catalogue number of all components.
1.7 Delivery, Handling and Storage
All equipment shall be inspected for the followings :-

i) Damage
Page 1084 of 1358

ii) Compliance with specifications

Iii) Quality
This shall be protected from weather, fire or mechanical damage during storage / Shipment.
The switchboard shall be suitable for installation and satisfactory operation in a substation with
restricted natural air ventilation in a tropical, humid and corrosive atmosphere. The switchboard
shall be designed to operate under site conditions as specified in particular specifications.
1.8 Products (General Requirements)

1.8.1 Enclosure and Protection
The Switchgear shall be metal clad and shall comprise of standard pre-fabricated cold
rolled sheet steel units assembled (bolted) to form a rigid, free-standing structure. The
load bearing members shall be manufactured out of minimum 2 mm CRCA sheet steel.
The non-load bearing members such as covers, partition, shutters, explosion covers can
be made of 1.6 mm CRCA sheet steel. Wherever single core cables are used, the
detachable gland plates shall be made of Aluminium sheet.
The Switchboards shall be totally enclosed the vermin proof. If necessary, openings for
natural ventilation such as louvers and ventilation box shall be provided with the wire
mesh from inside. The switchgear panel shall have minimum degree of protection IP43.
Suitable measures such as gaskets shall be provided for doors if required.
Each unit of the switchgear shall be divided into functional individual compartments
such as:
Bus Bar compartment

LT compartment
Circuit Breaker compartment
Cable and instrument transformer compartment
All these compartments shall be segregated from each other by means of earthed
metallic sheet steel. The shutters which are provided for safety purpose shall be also of
earthed metallic sheet steel. Except the busbar compartment, all the compartments of
each cubicle shall be independent from the similar compartment of the adjacent
panels. The bus bar compartment shall run from end to end without any inter panel
barriers so as in the event of internal arc inside the busbar compartment, the arc will
travel along with the length of the switchboard.
The complete switchgear shall be designed with full consideration with respect to the
safety of the operating person in the event of internal arc. All the individual
compartments as explained above shall have independent explosion vents. The Panel
shall be type tested for 1 sec Internal Arc.
The offered switchgear panel shall be with horizontal / vertical isolation and horizontal
draw out Vacuum Circuit Breaker. The switching device shall be mounted on a truck,
which will have distinct positions of Service and Test inside the compartment with the
front door of the chamber closed. Each Circuit Breaker shall be provided with a truck
so that a separate Circuit Breaker handling trolley is not required. All the operations of
the switching device shall be with front door closed.
Following minimum safety interlocks shall be provided so as achieve maximum

operating personal safety :
Page 1085 of 1358

It will not be possible to rack out the withdrawable Vacuum Circuit Breaker trolley from
Service to test position when the breaker is switched 'ON'. Similarly, it will not be
possible to rack in the draw out mechanism from Test to Service position, if the Vacuum
Circuit Breaker is switched 'ON'.
Any attempt to rack out Circuit Breaker from Service to Test position will not result in
switching 'OFF' of the circuit Breaker. Instead, the breaker Service position will be locked
till VCB is 'ON'.
It will not be possible to rack in or rack out Vacuum Circuit Breaker trolley when the
front Vacuum Circuit Breaker chamber door is open. However, a suitable defeat
interlock mechanism shall be provided for emergency purpose.
It will not be possible to rack in Vacuum Circuit Breaker trolley from test to service
position when the low voltage control plug is not in position and locked on the trolley
itself.
It will not be possible to switch 'ON' the earthing switch if provided, when the
withdrawable truck is in Test position. This ensures physical isolation between the truck,
busbar and the cables.
It will not be possible to rack in Vacuum Circuit Breaker trolley from test to service
position in case the cable earthing switch is 'ON'.
Additional electro-magnetic interlock shall be provided for cable earthing switches in
incomers and tie feeders.
Alternately earthing trolleys can be also supplied. Electro-magnetic interlock to be
provide on earthing trolley for incomers and tie feeders.
Automatic metallic safety shutters shall be provided covering the opening for busbar
and cable chambers. The movement of these shutters shall be interlocked mechanically
with the movement of the truck so that these will open only when the movement of the
truck is from service to test position. These automatic safety shutters shall be individual
for cable and busbar openings and also shall be provide with the facility for padlocking.
Suitable danger name plates shall be provided on these safety shutters.
All hardware shall be of zinc passivated, high quality steel. For busbar connections,
Belleville washers shall be used while for structure bolting, contact washers shall be
used.
The complete switchgear from inside as well as from outside shall be powder coated.
The powder shade shall be pebble light grey.
Wherever maintenance is envisaged such as tightening of busbar joints, the design shall
allow easy access for the same. The busbar shall be accessible either from rear or from
top for maintenance purpose. A suitable sheet steel partition shall be provided between
the busbar compartment and the rear cover so that after removing the rear cover direct
access to live busbars will be prevented. A suitable viewing inspection window shall be
provided for the cable compartment.
1.8.2 Busbar Connections, Supports and Busbar Design

The switchgear shall comprise of 3 Phase busbars, which shall extend through all the
units of the switchgear line up. All phases of busbars shall be uniform cross section
throughout the switchgear and shall be sized to carry continuously the current specified
in the Single Line Diagram with respect to site conditions. Busbars shall be housed in a
separate chamber and shall be accessible for inspection only with tools.
Busbar shall be made of electrolytic aluminum / copper. The clearance between the live
busbar and the nearest earth partition / member shall be suitably arranged so as to
Page 1086 of 1358

withstand the 1-minute power frequency withstand voltage and impulse withstand
voltage as specified in IEC62271. The clearance be meant for air insulation.
Busbars shall be suitable at regular intervals by means of cast resin bus support
insulators. The whole system be designed so as to withstand the specified short circuit
level without permanent deterioration.
The busbar shall be prominently marked with phase identification.
1.8.3 Cable Connections
Inside the cubicles, the wiring for control, signaling, protection and instrument circuits
shall be done with PVC insulated conductors. The wiring shall preferably be enclosed in
plastic channels or neatly bunched together. The CT wiring shall be of minimum 2.5 sq
mm and the other control as well as PT wiring shall be of 1.5 Sq mm. The same shall be
multi stranded copper. Each wire shall be identified at both ends by PVC ferrules. All
spare contacts of auxiliary relays timers etc. shall be wired up to terminals, 10% spare
terminals shall be provided on each terminal block. Shorting links shall be provided for
all C.T. terminals.
All inter-panel control wiring including wiring within the same shipping section shall be
done by the switchgear vendor. For difference shipping sections, wires in rolls of the
required length and loose ferrules shall be provided.
1.8.4 Earthing Connections
All cubicles shall be connected to an earth busbar running throughout the length of the
switchboard. All non-current carrying metallic parts shall be earthed to the main busbar
effectively through structure. The movable Vacuum Circuit Breaker truck shall be
provided with scrapping earth connection so that the earthing is done before the power
contacts are engaged and break after the power contacts are dis-engaged. The main
earthing busbar shall run in cable chamber. All doors and movable parts shall be
connected to earth bus with braided copper of suitable size.
1.8.5 Name Plates
Equipment name plates / shall be provided, Suitable danger warning name plates / shall
be provided wherever necessary.
1.8.6 Vacuum Circuit Breaker

The switching device shall be Vacuum Circuit Breaker. The Vacuum Circuit Breaker shall
be maintenance free for a minimum life level of 10,000 electrical operations. The
mechanism shall be of Motor Spring Reserve Drive (MSRD) with gear box shall be sealed
for the lifetime. A suitable mechanical detaching facility shall be provided for the spring
charging mechanism so that in the event of failure of spring charge limit switch, the
drive mechanism will get automatically decoupled. An anti-pumping auxiliary contactor
shall be integral part of the circuit breaker operating mechanism itself. The VCB
auxiliary contacts shall be also mounted in VCB operating mechanism compartment
itself. Shunt Release & Closing Coil shall be suitable for 24VDC control Voltage.
Mechanical ON/OFF push buttons shall be provided for emergency purpose so that the
same can be operated in the event of control supply failure without opening the VCB
compartment front door. Mechanical indication shall be provided for ON/OFF, spring
Page 1087 of 1358

charge indication along with a mechanical operation counter. CBs of same rating shall
be interchangeable however; CBs of different rating shall not be interchangeable.
1.8.7 Instrument Transformers

Instrument Transformers such as current and voltage transformers shall be cast resin
insulated. The current transformers shall conform to IS2705, while the voltage
transformers shall conform to IS3156. The CTs and PTs shall be designed suitable for
required metering and protection equipment. The bus as well as PTs shall be in single
pole version. The draw out bus PT shall be mounted in as separate panel while the Line
PT shall be provided in the breaker panel.
1.8.8 Measuring and Recording Instruments

Ammeters, Voltmeters and other meters shall be provide as indicated in the Single Line
Diagram. The same shall be of 96x96 mm flush mounted digital type.
1.8.9 Protective Relays

All protective relays shall be back connected, draw out type, suitable for flush mounting
and fitted with dust tight covers. Alternatively, "Plug-in" type relays will also be
acceptable. The relay cases shall have a provision for insertion of a test plug at the front
for testing and calibration using an external power supply without disconnecting the
permanent wiring. It shall be possible to short the CTs through the test plug. Non-
protection relays can be in fixed execution. Numerical relays shall be preferred over
electromechanical relays.
All relays shall be mounted on the panel front unless otherwise specified. The current
& voltage coils shall be rated as specified on the relevant approved schematic drawings.
Protective relays shall have hand reset facilities and clear operating indication e.g. flags
for mechanical type relays or light emitting diodes for static type relays. It shall be
possible to reset the flag without opening the relay case. Anti fungus treatment shall be
provided for all relays.
1.9 Packing and Transport

The switchboard shall be shipped to site packed in wooden crates. They shall be wrapped with polythene sheets
before being placed in crates to prevent damage to the finish. Crates shall have skid bottoms for handling. Base
channels required for base frame shall be dispatched 3 months in advance to the dispatch of panels, so that
these can be buried and grouted in the concrete floor.
Q - Oil Cooled Transformer (11/.433 KV)
1.1 General
Work Included
Oil Cooled Transformer
Supervision during Testing & Commissioning of Oil Cooled Transformer
Related Work and Obligations
The general requirements apply to work specified in this section.
Examine all the other sections of the specification for requirements, which may affect work of
thissection.
1.2 General Requirements
Page 1088 of 1358

This specification covers the Design, Manufacture, Testing, Packing and Supply of Oil Cooled
Transformer with Off load Tap Switch as per dwg. The Transformer shall be new which will be
specifically manufactured against the enclosed detailed specification.
1.3 Codes And Standards

The Transformer shall be manufactured & tested in line with the latest revision of the following
Indian as well as International Standards:
IS1180 : Oil Immersed Distribution Transformer
IS10028 : Code of Practice for Selection, Installation & Maintenance of Transformers
IS6600 : Guide for Loading of Oil Immersed Transformers
IS335 : Insulating Oil
IS8468 : On Load Tap Changer
IS1271 : Thermal Evaluation and Classification of Electrical Insulation
IS3637: Gas Operated Relays
IS2099 : Bushing (AC – 1000 Volt and above)
IS3347 : Dimensions of Porcelein Transformer Bushing
IS3639 : Fittings and Accessories
IS5 : Painting
In case of any conflict between the above standards and this specification, the requirements of
thestringent will prevail.
The Vendor shall ensure that all equipment furnished by him under the contract shall meet the
requirements of relevant Indian standards.
Manufacturers regularly engaged in manufacture of 11/0.433 kV Oil Cooled Transformer with Off
load Tap Switch (as per BOQ) respectively shall be approved as required, whose products have
been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 10 years. As minimum qualitysystem
adherence norms, the vendor shall have ISO 9001 Certification
1.5 Guarantee
- Manufacturer shall provide guarantee for supply of equipment under this section.
However, such guarantee shall be in addition to and not in lieu of all other liabilities which
manufacturer may have by other provisions of the contract document.
- The Transformer shall be guaranteed against trouble free operation, defective
workmanship and materials / parts for a period of 18 months from the date of supply or 12 months
from the date of erection & commissioning, whichever is earlier. In case of any defects during this
period equipment / parts shall be replaced free of cost by the Vendor.
1.6 Delivery, Handling and Storage
All equipment shall be inspected for the followings: -
Damage
Compliance with specifications
Quality
This shall be protected from weather, fire or mechanical damage during storage.
The Transformer shall be suitable for installation and satisfactory operation in a substation with
restricted natural air ventilation in a tropical, humid and corrosive atmosphere. The Transformer
shall be designed to operate under site conditions as specified in the data sheets.
1.7 Distribution Transformer (General Requirements)
Page 1089 of 1358

Design Criteria
Transformer is intended to step down incoming 11kV power supply to 0.433 kV (as per dwg.) for
feeding power supply to further distribution network.
The transformer will be installed in hot, humid and tropical atmosphere. All equipment, accessories
and wiring shall be provided with tropical finish to prevent fungus growth.
The transformer shall be capable of withstanding the short circuit stresses due to terminal fault on
one winding with full voltage maintained on the other winding for minimum period of three
seconds.
The transformer shall be free from annoying hum or vibrations. The design shall be such as not to
cause any undesirable interference with radio or communication circuits.
-The safety clearances of all live parts of equipment shall be as per relevant standard.
1.8 Specific Requirements

Oil Tank
Oil Tank shall be of all welded construction and fabricated from good commercial grade low carbon
steel of adequate thickness. All seams shall be properly welded.
The tank wall shall be reinforced by stiffener to ensure rigidity so that it can withstand without any
deformation, mechanical shock during transportation and during oil filling by vacuum.
The transformer tank shall be provided with one set of bi-directional flanged wheels for rolling the
transformer in both directions.
All heavy removable parts shall be provided with eye bolts for ease of handling.
Handholes / Manholes of sufficient size shall be provided for access to leads, winding, bottom
terminals of bushing and taps.
1.9 Core & Coils

The transformer shall be of core type. The core shall be built up with high grade, non-aging, low
loss, high permeability, grain oriented, cold-rolled silicon steel laminations especially suitable for
core material.
The coils shall be manufactured from electrolytic copper conductor & fully insulated for rated
voltage.
Insulating material shall be proven design. Coils shall be insulated such that impulse and power
frequency voltage stresses are Minimum.
Coil assembly shall be suitably supported between adjacent sections by insulating spacers and
barriers. Bracing and other insulation used in assembly of the winding shall be arranged to ensure
a free circulation of the air and to reduce the hot spot of the winding.
All leads from the windings to the terminal board and bushings shall be rigidly supported to prevent
injury from vibration or short circuit stresses. Guide tube shall be used where practicable.
1.10 Radiators
Radiators shall be made from pressed steel.
Radiators shall be detachable and interchangeable type. Top and bottom shut off valve shall be
provided for each radiator.
Each radiator shall be provided with air release plug, drain valve and lifting lugs.
1.11 Insulating Oil

The transformer tank shall be filled with mineral insulating oil suitably inhibited to prevent sledging.
First Filling of oil shall be furnished for each transformer. Oil shall be supplied in non-returnable
containers for outdoor storage.
1.12 Terminal Arrangement
Page 1090 of 1358

HV side shall be provided with cable terminal box and LV side shall be suitable for Bus Duct / Cable
connection as per Bill of Quantity (BOQ) / SLD.
Cable end box shall be self - supporting, weatherproof type with sufficient space inside for
termination and connection of cables as detailed in the particular specifications. In case of Busduct,
same would also be self - supporting, weatherproof type with sufficient space inside for
termination.
Cable end box wherever applicable shall be furnished complete with removable gland plate.
In general, the arrangement shall be such as to permit removal of the transformer without
dismantling the bus duct / cable installation.
A separate L.V. neutral bushing shall be provided for connection to station ground mat. Necessary
insulators shall be provided on transformer body for bringing down the Conductor.
1.13 Marshaling Box

A sheet steel, weatherproof, marshaling box shall be provided for each transformer. The box shall
contain all auxiliary devices except those which must be located directly on the transformer.
All terminal blocks for Owner’s cable connection shall be located in this box. The terminal blocks
shall with minimum size of 4 sq mm.
1.14 Wiring
All control, alarm & indication devices provided with the transformer shall be wired up to the
terminal blocks.
Wiring shall be done with PVC wires in MS Conduit or PVC insulated copper conductor armored
cable. Minimum wire size shall be 2.5 sq.mm. copper. No more than two wires shall be connected
to a terminal. 10% spare terminals shall be provided.
All devices & terminal blocks within the marshaling box shall be identified by symbols
corresponding to those used in applicable schematic or wiring diagram.
1.15 Grounding
Two grounding pads, located on the opposite sides to the sheet steel enclosure, shall be provided
for connection to the station ground mat.
The grounding pad shall have clean buffed surface with two tapped holes, M10-G.I. bolts and spring
washers for connection with G.I. flat.
Ground terminals shall also be provided on marshaling box to ensure its effective earthing.
1.16 Fittings And Accessories

Each transformer shall be equipped with fittings and accessories as listed below:-
Oil Temperature Indicator with Alarm and Trip contacts (for one or all three windings)
Winding Temperature Indicator with Alarm and Trip contacts (for one or all three windings)
Oil Conservator with filler cap, drain plug and magnetic oil level gauge
Silica gel breather with connecting pipe and oil seal
Air Release Plugs
Pressure Release Device, Explosion Vent (Double Diaphragm type)
Thermometer Pockets
Double Float Buchholz Relay with gas release cock, shut-off valve on either side or separate sets of
contacts for Trip & Alarm
Filter Valve with threaded adopter (top and bottom)
Drain Valve with threaded adopter.
Sampling Valve
Marshaling Box for housing control equipment and terminal connections
Page 1091 of 1358

Neutral Bushing
HV Cable Box / LV Cable Box or HV Cable Box / LV Busduct Terminal
On load Tap Charger with +5% and -15% tapping on H.T. Side
Earthing Lugs / Studs
Lifting Hooks
Diagram and Rating Plates
Base Channels (skid type) with Bi-directional Rollers suitable for mounting on Floor and Plinth.
Suitable Enclosure
1.17 Painting
All steel surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned by sand blasting or chemical agents, as required, to
produce a smooth surface free of scales, grease and rust.
The external surfaces, after cleaning, shall be given a coat of high-quality red oxide or yellow
chromate primer followed by filler coats.
The transformer shall be finished with two coats of Siemens Grey Shade RAL 7032 synthetic enamel
paint, oven baked or powder coated.
1.18 Voltage Control (Off Load tap changer)
The transformers shall be provided with voltage control equipment of the off-load tap changing
type for varying its effective transformation ratio while the transformers are on load and without
producing phase displacement.
All operating devices shall be operated correctly at any voltage between the limits specified in the
relevant IS.
The tap changing mechanism shall be mounted in the oil tank in an accessible position on the
transformer.
Any non-oil filled compartment shall be adequately ventilated, Thermostatically controlled heaters
shall be provided in the driving mechanism chamber and in the marshalling box. All contactors &
auxiliary relay coils or other parts shall be suitably protected against corrosion or deterioration due
to condensation, fungi etc.
The whole of the apparatus shall be of robust design and capable of giving satisfactory service
under conditions to be met in service including frequent operation.
1.19 Tests
Routine Tests
During manufacturing and on completion, all transformers shall be subjected to the routine tests
as per relevant Indian Standard.
Type Test
Following type test shall be performed on transformer in accordance with relevant Indian
Standards:
Temperature rise test.
The cost of such a test, if extra, shall be quoted separately by the Bidder.
Test Witness
Tests shall be performed in presence of Owner’s representative, if so desired by the Owner. The
Contractor shall give at least fifteen (15) days advance notice of the date when the tests are to be
carried out.
1.20 SCOPE OF WORK
Page 1092 of 1358

. Design, manufacture, testing and supply of 11/0.433 KV, 2000/1600 kVA, Copper Wound,
Outdoor Type Power Transformer in accordance with IS:2026/1977.
1.21 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (Vendor To be Fill)
. Make of Transformer : Vendor to be filled.
. Type : Outdoor
. No. of Phases : Three
. Voltage Ratio (Primary / Secondary) : 11 / 0.433 kV
. Connection (HV/LV) : Primary-Delta and Secondary-Star
. Vector Group : Dyn 11
. Frequency : 50 Hz
. Primary System : 11 kV, 3 Phase, 3 Wire, 3 Phase Symn.

Fault level 350 MVA
. Secondary System : 433 V, 3 Phase, 4 Wire, Neutral

Grounding Required
. Percentage Impedance at 75 degree Centigrade : Vendor To be filled
. Average Ambient for the day : 45 degree Centigrade
. Maximum Ambient for the day : 45 degree Centigrade
. Type of Cooling : ONAN
. Winding : Copper
. Winding Insulation : Paper Insulation Class 'A'

Radiators
: Detachable
. Terminal Arrangement on HV side : Cable Box suitable to receive 3 cores

300 sq. mm. XLPE Aluminum Cable
Terminal Arrangement on LV side : Cable Box suitable to receive 3200 An
Aluminum Conductor Sandwich
Busduct as per approved drawing.
. Cable termination Kits. Cable Glands and Lugs : By others
Page 1093 of 1358

. Protective CT's on HV side : Not required.
. Protective CT's on LV side : required on LV Side
. Additional bushing for neutral earthing : Required on LV side.
. Temperature rise - Winding : 55 degrees Centigrade
. Temperature rise - Oil : 50 degrees Centigrade
. Insulation Level for impulse test : 75 kV peak for 11 kV Class or 28 kV

RMS
. Tap changer : Off load Tap Changer
. Off load circuit taps : +5% to -10%
. Variation by on load tap changer : In 2.5 steps
. Painting : Epoxy RAL 7032
1.22 PERFORMANCE PARTICULARS
. Iron losses in kW (No - Load Losses) : To be Filled by Vendor
. Copper losses in kW (Load Losses) : To be Filled by Vendor
. Total losses in kW at 50% Load (Restricted to: To be Filled by Vendor

ECBC Guidelines)
. Total losses in kW at 100% Load (Restricted: To be Filled by Vendor

to ECBC Guidelines Level 2)
. Regulation at Full Load (At Unity Power Factor): To be Filled by Vendor
. Regulation at Full Load 0.8 Power Factor : To be Filled by Vendor
. Efficiency at Full Load (at UPF) : To be Filled by Vendor
. Efficiency at 75% Load (at UPF) : To be Filled by Vendor
. Efficiency at 50% Load (at UPF) : To be Filled by Vendor
. Efficiency at Full Load (at 0.8 PF) : To be Filled by Vendor
. Efficiency at 75% Load (at 0.8 PF) : To be Filled by Vendor
. Efficiency at 50% Load (at 0.8 PF) : To be Filled by Vendor
Page 1094 of 1358

. Load at which Maximum Efficiency Occurs at Full Load: To be Filled by Vendor
. Maximum Efficiency at Unity Power Factor Load : To be Filled by Vendor
. No load current at Rated Voltage and : To be Filled by Vendor

Frequency
. Flux Density (Should not be more than 1.75 Tesla): To be Filled by Vendor
R - Specification for 33KV/11KV, 3.5MVA Transformer
1.1 SCOPE:
The Specification covers for Supply, Installation, Testing and Commissioning (SITC) of the 33kV/11kV,
3.5MVA, Oil immersed, Oil Natural Air Natural (ONAN), Outdoor type, Three Phase, 50Hz, Step down
Transformer with On Load Tap Changer (OLTC) and Remote Tap Change Control (R.T.C.C.) panel. The
above equipment's and system as specified in this contract/ Specification shall be strictly as per
MPCB/CPWD specification, rules and regulations; and, not limited to these specifications and guideline.
i. This specification is the minimum requirement and should be read in conjunction with relevant latest
MPCB/CPWD specifications, requirements, rules and regulations.
ii. Any additional requirements as per MPCB/CPWD shall be offered by BIDDER as per MESDCL
specifications, requirements, rules and regulations at no extra cost.
iii. Submission of equipment/ system Detail Engineering drawings, Data sheets, sizing Calculations etc
for review and approval by PURCHASER before execution/procurement and manufacturing; and test
reports, commissioning reports andperformance reports of all electrical system/ equipment for review
& acceptanceby PURCHASER.
iv. Preparation of relevant documents and drawings to the concerned statutory authorities/ agencies in
required quantity/ format for getting clearance and approval for the supplied and installed equipment
under this specification is solely the responsibility of the BIDDER.
v. All SAFETY considerations in design and manufacturing for safe operation & maintenance by
PURCHASER personnel and safe practices during installation at siteshall be in the scope of the BIDDER.
The cost towards accomplishing the same shall beincluded in the BID price and no extra claim shall be
entertained later.
vi. The Construction, Components & Accessories, Testing, Quality, Inspection and warranty terms for
equipment and components shall be as per MPCB/CPWD requirements.
vii. A copy of the complete MPCB/CPWD specifications that is being referred to shall be submitted along
the BID.
viii. Civil works for the preparation of Transformer Foundation, earth pits electrodes, earth grid around
Transformer is excluded from the scope of this specification and shall be accomplished by other
agencies. However, the GA drawings of equipment,their respective foundation, and power & control
cable entry points for same shall be submitted by the BIDDER.
ix. Equipment furnished shall be complete in every respect with all mountings, fittings,and standard
accessories normally provided with such equipment and / or needed forerection, completion and safe
operation of the equipment as required by applicable codes though they may not have been specifically
Page 1095 of 1358

detailed in the Technical Specification unless included in the list of exclusions. Materials and component
not specifically stated in the specification, but which are necessary for commissioning andsatisfactory
operation unless specifically excluded shall be deemed to be included inthe scope of specification and
shall be supplied without any extra cost. All similar standard components/ parts of similar standard
equipment provided shall be interchangeable with one another.
x. The BIDDER shall be responsible for the selection and design of appropriateequipment to provide
the best coordinated performance of the entire system. The design of various components, sub-
assemblies and assemblies shall be so done that it facilitates easy field assembly and maintenance.
1.2 CODES AND STANDARDS:

i. The Transformers shall comply with the Indian Standard Specification IS: 2026 latest or relevant
International Standard such as ANSI, OSA, DIN, IEC etc.., acceptable to purchaser.
ii. All equipment's and its components as a whole shall be Type tested in accordance with the above
standards.
iii. BIDDER shall submit the type test certificates as per MPCB/CPWD requirements of similar equipment
along with the BID.
1.3 SERVICE CONDITION:

1.3.1 System Particulars
i. Nominal System Voltage : 33kV
ii. Highest System Voltage : 36kV
iii. Frequency : 50Hz ±3%
iv. No. Of Phases : 3 Phase
v. Neutral Grounding : Solidly Grounded.
1.3.2 Max Ambient Temperature for design and temperature rise shall be 50ºC.
1.3.3 Equipment Particulars
i. Rated Power : 3.5MVA.

ii. Rated Voltage (HV winding) : 33kV.
iii. Rated Voltage (LV winding) : 11kV.
iv. Cooling : ONAN.
v. Winding Connection : Delta/Star.
vi. Vector Group : Dyn 11.
vii. Tapping : + 10% to – 15 % in steps of 1.25%.
viii. No load voltage ratio : 33/11kV
ix. Winding Temperature over ambient : 55 degºc
x. Top oil Temperature over ambient : 50 degºc
xi. Losses & Impedance : As per latest MPCB/CPWD requirements.
1.3.4 The above requirements are project specific requirements. However, the same shall
stand superseded as per MPCB/CPWD requirements.
The construction, Components & Accessories, Testing, Quality, Inspection and warranty terms
for equipment and components shall be as per MPCB/CPWD requirements.
1.4 Fittings
Page 1096 of 1358

Unless otherwise specified in the order, the following standard fittings shall be provided. The
fittings shall be in accordance with the details to the extent these are specified in latest IS: 2026.
i. Inspection covers. (Thickness of inspection cover shall be same as Top of the tank).
ii. Rating plate to be riveted.
iii. Terminal marking plate.
iv. Two earthing terminals with crimping lugs.
v. Lifting lugs.
vi. Radiators (18 SWG.) The no. of radiators/fins and heat dissipation calculation to justify the
no. of radiators shall be submitted along with the offer.
vii. Explosion vent with equalizer pipe.
viii. Conservator with drain plug.
ix. Dehydrating breather (Silica gel type) for Transformer & OLTC (approx. 3 kg).
x. Thermometer pocket.
xi. Oil level gauge.
xii. Oil filling hole with cap.
xiii. Air release device.
xiv. Gas/Oil actuated relay (Buchholz Relay) with shut off valves on both sides.
xv. Filter valves (lower valve to be also used as drain valve).
xvi. Flanged wheels.
xvii. Jacking lugs.
xviii. Sampling valve.
xix. Marshalling Box.
xx. Oil Temperature Indicator with two contacts for alarm & Trip – 1 No.
xxi. Winding temperature Indicator with two contacts for alarm & Trip –1 No.
xxii. Surge relay for O.L.T.C. with isolating valve.
xxiii. On load tap changer
1.5 INSTALLATION REQUIRMENTS
i. All installation works shall be carried out by Manufacturer’s trained/ skilled personnel and
supervised by Manufacturer Certified/ Approved Engineer as per good and safe engineering
practices and relevant standards for installation of particular components.
ii. All routine and per-commissioning tests shall be carried out by certified engineer of BIDDER
at site and test reports shall be submitted duly signed and stamped. This is included in the scope
and quoted price offered by BIDDER.
iii. All testing equipment and set ups shall be arranged by BIDDER. This is included in the scope
and quoted price offered by BIDDER.
iv. Proper unloading, handling, storage and security arrangement of all the materials/
equipment supplied are included in the scope and the CONTRACTOR shall ensure the same
without any additional extra cost to the PURCHASER.
v. Assembly of the various sections of the equipment, either free issue by PURCHASER or
supplied/ procured by CONTRACTOR, dispatched separately from the factory shall be in the
scope of CONTRACTOR.
vi. Installation shall be considered as being the erection of equipment at its permanent
location. Thus, unless otherwise specified, shall include shifting from place of storage to the
place of erection, unpacking, cleaning, assembly and lifting into position, grouting, levelling,
Page 1097 of 1358

aligning, coupling of or bolting down to previously installed equipment bases/ foundations,

performing the alignment check and final adjustment prior to initial operation, testing &
commissioning in accordance with MANUFACTURER’s tolerances, instructions and the
specifications.
vii. It is expected that equipment/ systems shall be installed as per the best engineering practice
and in strict accordance with the MANUFACTURER’s recommendation(s). A PURCHASER shall
have full authority to reject all/ any portion of the work that is considered bad in quality or
workmanship. The rejected work shall be made good by the contractor free of cost. In this
regard the decision of PURCHASER would be final and binding.
viii. Pre-commissioning checks and final commissioning of the equipment’s being supplied by
the PURCHASER, or the equipment/ system supplied by the CONTRACTOR shall be carried out
as per the provisions of this specification, relevant standards, MPCB/CPWD Guidelines and
MANUFACTURER’s erection / commissioning manual.
ix. CONTRACTOR shall submit site test reports & its test procedures; details of test equipment
used etc. in printed format with sufficient no. of copies along with originals duly signed &
stamped by appropriate authority as may be decided by relevant Statutory Bodies.
x. CONTRACTOR shall maintain necessary co-ordination with the PURCHASER and various other
agencies working at the same site as the CONTRACTOR.
1.6 MAINTENANCE REQUIRMENTS:
i. The construction of the transformer & location of the accessories like CTs, lower ends of bushings,
terminals, tap-changers etc., shall be such as to afford easy access & permit replacement of auxiliaries
without removing the tank cover.
ii. Instruments & wiring in the local marshalling box shall be completely accessible & sufficient working
space shall be made available in the cabinet. Instruments, wiring & accessories in the cabinet shall be
accessible from the front & the rear as well.
iii. Control supply voltage shall be 230V AC/30V DC.
iv. Transformer shall be capable of being used with any make of transformer oil complying with IS: 335.
v. As far as practicable, transformers & accessories shall be so designed that no special tools are
necessary for installation & maintenance. However, if special tools are required, the VENDOR shall
supply one complete set.
vi. The supervision charges shall be lump sum per day including travelling cost of your engineer from
your office to site, lodging, boarding charges, local travel and incidental expenses etc.
1.7 PERFORMANCE TESTS:
i. The bidder shall clearly indicate in his offer, which are the tests included. Also, unit rates shall
be quoted for any price adjustments based on inclusion/ exclusion of any specific tests.
ii. The following routine tests shall be carried out on the transformer as listed below but not
limited to this. These shall be included in the quoted price.
(a) Measurement of winding resistance
Page 1098 of 1358

(b) Measurement of voltage ratio and check of phase displacement

(c) Measurement of impedance voltage / short circuit impedance (principal
tapping) and load loss at 50% and 100% load
(d) Measurement of no-load loss and current
(e) Measurement of insulation resistance
(f) Induced Overvoltage withstand test.
(g) Separate source voltage withstands test
(h) Pressure test
(i) Oil leakage test
(j) Dielectric test
(k) Tests on Off load tap changers
(l) Measurement of acoustic noise level
(m) 2 kV withstand test for all wiring
(n) Zero phase sequence impedance test.
iii. The offer shall be accompanied with the following type test certificates (From CPRI/ERDA) for
equivalent transformers supplied within last five years. In case the type test reports are not
found to be meeting the specification requirements, the Vendor shall conduct all such tests
under this contract free of cost to the Purchaser and submit the reports for approval.
(a) Heat run test with measurement of no load & load losses.
(b) Dissolved gas analysis test of the oil before & after the Heat run test
iv. Bidder shall include for following type tests (If, test report is submitted as asked in Sr. No.
6.3)
(a) Heat run Test with measurement of no load & load losses.
(b) Dissolved gas analysis test of oil before & after Heat run Test.
1.8 SCHEDULE OF SUBMISSION OF BIDDER DRAWINGS:
i. Along with the BID
(a) Data sheets

(b) List of makes for all components including bought out items.
(c) Type test certificates as asked for transformer.
(d) Type test reports of OLTC.
ii. After the Placement of LOI/PO.
(a) General arrangement of Transformer

(b) General Arrangement of Core coil Assembly
(c) Rating & diagram plate
(d) General arrangement of HV & LV cable box.
(e) General arrangement of marshalling box & wiring diagram.
(f) Cable schedule diagram
(g) Bidders need to submit a complete schedule of drawing
approval, manufacturingProgress, Inspection & Dispatch.
(h) CAD Copy of drawings must be shared with IIM Indore/
Authority Engineer with properscale.
Page 1099 of 1358

1.9 INSPECTION:
i. PURCHASER/ MPCB/CPWD shall inspect the all the supply components/ equipment/ systems
at Vendor's works. All types of test certificates of the bought-out items and internal test
certificates shall be furnished at the time of inspection.
ii. Type/ Routine tests according to relevant standards & as per MPCB/CPWD requirements
shall be performed in the presence of PURCHASER/ MPCB/CPWD representative.
iii. Intimation of inspection shall be given to MPCB/CPWD as per their requirements in advance
to make necessary arrangements.
All necessary measuring and testing equipment shall be arranged by the VENDOR or its Sub- VENDOR
at the time of inspection as well as during commissioning at site without any cost implication to the
PURCHASER. All such instruments shall be calibrated from Authorized agencies not older than a year
from date of inspection.
1.10 MAKE LIST:

The tenderer has to provide Transformer and other accessories as per MPCB/CPWD approved make.
1.11 Data sheet for 3.5 MVA Distribution Transformers
Sr.No. Description 3.5MVA, ONAN, Power Transformer

1.0 General
1.1 Make As per MPCB/CPWD
1.2 Application/Designation Step down distribution transformer
1.2 Installation (Indoor/ outdoor) Outdoor
1.3 Reference Standard IS 2026
2.0 Ratings
2.1 Rating 3.5 MVA
2.2 Number of Phase and Frequency 3 phase, 50 Hz
2.3 Type of cooling ONAN
2.4 No Load Voltage Primary 33 kV
2.5 Secondary 11 kV
2.6 Vector Group Ddn11
2.7 Neutral Rating (% of Phase Rating) 100%
2.8 % Impedance at principal tapping As IS 2026
2.9 Losses To be filled by vendor
2.9.1 No Load Loss As per MPCB/CPWD (To be filled by vendor)
2.9.2 Full Load Losses at rated output, rated
frequency & corrected for 75 0C winding
temperature
As per MPCB/CPWD (To be filled by vendor)
3.0 SYSTEM VOLTAGE

3.1 Nominal System Voltage- Primary 33 kV
Secondary 11 kV
3.2 Highest System Voltage-Primary 36 kV
Page 1100 of 1358

Secondary 12 kV
4.0 NEUTRAL EARTHING

4.1 System Neutral
a) Effectively earthed Primary - NA (Delta Connected)
b) Resonant To be filled by vendor
c) Non effectively earthed Secondary- Effectively
d) Isolated
4.2 Transformer Neutral 100% RATED
a) Effectively earthed Primary- NA (Delta Connected)
b) Resonant To be filled by vendor
c) Non effectively earthed Secondary - Effectively Earthed
5.0 INSULATION WITHSTAND

5.1 Impulse
a) Primary 170kV (For 36 kV)
b) Secondary 70 kV ( For 12 kV)
5.2 Power Frequency
a) Primary 75 kV (For 36 kV)
6.0 TEMPERATURE RISE

a) Reference ambient 50 deg
b) Oil by thermometer As per IS 1180: 2014
c) Winding by resistance As per IS 1180: 2014
d) OTI – Alarm / Trip at ambient 80/85 deg
e) WTI – Alarm/ Trip at ambient 85/90 deg
7.0 TAP CHANGING GEAR
a) Taps Required OLTC
b) Total Tapping range + 10% to – 15 %
c) Total Tapping range 1.25%
8.0 BUSHINGS
8.1 Voltage class
a) Primary line end To be filled by vendor
b) Secondary line end To be filled by vendor
c) Primary neutral To be filled by vendor
d) Secondary neutral To be filled by vendor
8.2 Impulse(1.2/50 sec. Wave withstand)
a) Primary line end Vendor to Specify
8.3 Power frequency withstand
8.4 Minimum clearance in air (in mm)
a) Primary phase to phase Vendor to Specify
b) Secondary phase to phase To be filled by vendor
c) Primary phase to earth To be filled by vendor
d) Secondary phase to earth To be filled by vendor
Page 1101 of 1358

8.5 Minimum creepage distance (in mm)

8.6 Neutral CT details
a) CT Ratio To be filled by vendor
b) Class 5P20
c) Burden 15 VA
9.0 TERMINAL CONNECTIONS
9.1 Primary line end bushing/cable box/ AIR INSULATED CABLE BOX WITH AIR INSULATED
cable box with disconnecting chamber DISCONNECTING CHAMBER
9.2 Secondary line end bushing/cable AIR INSULATED CABLE BOX WITH AIR
box/cable box with disconnecting INSULATED DISCONNECTING CHAMBER
chamber/bus duct flange
10. FITTINGS As per MPCB/CPWD
S - SPECIFICATION FOR 33 KV Switchyard
1.1 SCOPE:
This Specification covers the designing, manufacturing, testing and supplying of 33 KV outdoor type
switch yard with 4 Pole structure, Outdoor VCB, Lighting arrester, isolator, insulator etc as require as
per local electricity board requirement with necessary chain link fencing etc.
1.2 SITE CONDITIONS:

Ambient Temperature 45 Deg. C. (Maximum)
Altitude Less than 100 M above MSL.
Humidity 80% (Maximum)
1.3 POWER SUPPLY DETAILS:

Supply Voltage 3 Phase, 33 KV Receiving Substation shall be 33 / 11 KV.
1.4 STANDARDS:
Transformers complete with all accessories shall conform to the latest editions of the following Indian
Standards: -
IS 2026 Power Transformers
IS 3639 Fittings and accessories for Power transformers.
IS 2099 High voltage Porcelain Bushings.
IS 1271 Insulating Materials.
IS 3347 Porcelain and metal parts of bushing.
IS 1666 Copper Conductors for winding.
Transformer shall also meet the requirements of Indian Electricity Rules, Fire Insurance Association and
the Electrical Inspector.
1.5 RATING: As per design
Page 1102 of 1358

1.6 Deleted
1.7 HT RECEIVING STATION

a. OUTDOOR 33 KV receiving station.
b. Complete Outdoor type 33 KV HT yard is required to be installed in premises. The preliminary
details which are required to be taken care of by contractor are:
i) Preliminary consent from MPEB for location of yard.
ii) Preliminary consent for sanction of required KVA
iii) Availability of necessary clearance with respect to adjacent building structures
iv) Drawing details are in line with Electrical Inspectors/IE rules guidelines.
1.8 HT SUBSTATION ERECTION

a. Indoor 11KV YARD
b. Complete Indoor type 11KV HT yard / substation is required to be installed in premises. The
preliminary details which are required to be taken care of by contractor are:
i) Preliminary consent from MPEB for location of yard.
ii) Preliminary consent for sanction of required KVA
iii) Availability of necessary clearance with respect to adjacent building structures
iv) Drawing details are in line with Electrical Inspectors/IE rules guidelines.
T - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR 750 KVA SIELENT TYPE DG SET
1.1 INTENT OF SPECIFICATION:

This specification covers the design, manufacture, assembly, shop testing, packing, dispatch,
transportation, unloading and shifting, supply, erection, testing, commissioning, performance and
guarantee testing of Diesel Gen-Sets at Site complete in all respects with all equipment, fitting and
accessories for efficient and trouble-free operation as specified here under.
1.2 SCOPE OF WORK:
General Scope of this work shall include but not limited to the following: -
i. DG set including diesel engine complete with all auxiliary and accessories, separately excited
Alternator directly coupled to the engine through flexible/ rigid coupling complete with all accessories
for starting, regulation and control, including common base frame, interconnecting piping and
accessories, power and control cable glands and lugs.
ii. DG local (Engine mounted) control Panel complete with interfacing cables between Owners
Local/Remote control panel and bidders’ local equipment including special cables if any. (for caterpillar
engines EMCP, for Cummins PLC 3100)
iii. equipment necessary for fuel storing and distribution including day oil tank, piping, valves, calibrated
990 liters MS tank along with level switch and float with 2 NO/ 2NC contacts for remote use.
iv. Flexible connections, Expansion joints, Residential type silencer, exhaust system including piping,
support and thermal insulation for total exhaust system.
v. Starting batteries with painted Teak wood battery stand, and battery charging equipment, including
their connections as required along with tools & accessories for battery maintenance.
Page 1103 of 1358

vi. Set of Anti Vibration Mountings pad etc.

vii. Properly machined common base frame with grouting bolts & Silent Canopy complying to CPCB
norms.
viii. Operation and maintenance of DG set shall be undertaken by local authority.
Note : Item Nos. b), d), f), g) and h) shall be quoted as part of D.G. Sets and other separately.
ix. Preparing all related shop drawings for approval from IIM Indore/ Authority Engineer and statutory
bodies. e.g.
a) Permission for installation,
b) Pollution control body,
c) Electrical Inspectorate.
x. Assist in obtaining approval of the installation of Diesel Generators by Supply Authority, the Electrical
Inspectorate and Pollution Control bodies and any other statutory bodies for operation of DG Sets.
xi. All civil works like chasing, grouting etc, for execution of jobs.
xii. Carrying out performance and guarantee test as required.
1.3 CODES AND STANDARDS:
The equipment supplied under this specification shall conform to the latest issue of relevant standards,
except where modified or supplemented by this specification.
IS: 5: Colours for ready mixed paints.

IS: 1239 (Part-I & II) : Mild steel tubes and fittings.
IS: 1248 : Specification for electrical indicating instruments.
IS: 1600 : Code for type testing of constant speed IC engines for
general purposes.
IS: 1601 : Performance of constant speed IC engines for general purposes.
IS: 1651 : Stationary cells and batteries lead acid type
(with tubular positive plates).
IS: 2147 : Degree of protection provided by enclosure for
low voltage switchgear and control gear.
IS: 3231 : Specification for Electrical relays for power system protection.
IS: 4540 : Mono-crystalline semi-conductor rectifier assemblies and equipment.
IS: 4722 : Rotating electrical machines.
IS: 7372 : Lead acid storage batteries for motor vehicles.
IS: 10100: Methods of tests for internal combustion engines.
IS: 10102: Specifications for performance requirements for constant speed
compression ignition (Diesel) engine for general purposes
(above 20 KW)
IS: 12065: Permissible limits of noise level for rotating electrical machines.
IS: 12075: Mechanical vibration of rotating electrical machines.
IS: 13703: Low voltage fuse for voltage not exceeding 100V AC or 1500V DC.
IS: 13947: Low voltage switchgear & control gear.
BS: 5000 (Part –3) : Rotating electrical machines of particular type or
for particular applications.
BS: 5514 (Part 1 to 6) : Specification for reciprocating internal combustion engine.
ASME Power Test Code : Internal combustion engines. PTC-17
Codes of Diesel Engine Manufacturer's Association U.S.A.
Page 1104 of 1358

1.3.1 The installation work shall conform to Indian Electricity act and Indian Electricity Rules as
amended up to date.
The fuel oil installation shall meet all statutory requirements of Explosive Department of Govt.
of India as amended up to date. Any approval required from statutory authorities shall be
obtained by the contractor. Nothing in this specification shall be construed to relieve the
contractor of these responsibilities.
1.3.2 The Indian standards mentioned above are available from:

Indian Standards Institution
Manak Bhavan
9, Bahadur Shah Zafar Marg,
New Delhi- 11 002, INDIA.
1.3.3
The Indian Electricity Rules and the Electricity act mentioned above can be obtained from:
Kitab Mahal
State Emporium Building
Baba Kharak Singh Marg
New Delhi - 11 001, INDIA
1.3.4 Equipment conforming to any other National/International Standard which ensures equal or
better quality may be accepted. In such case the bidder shall furnish copies of the standards in
English along with his bid and shall clearly bring out the salient features of comparison with
corresponding listed standards.
1.3.5 The equipment furnished under this specification have to operate in a tropical climate and shall
be given tropical and fungicidal treatment as per relevant specification.
1.3.6 Period of Operation/Duty Cycle:

The sets are intended to supply power upon non availability of gird power and shall be prime
duty rated as standby supply and may be idle for long periods except for periodic routine checks
once in a day. When there is a total failure of main power supply, the sets shall be required to
operate continuously at full load for a period which at times may exceed even 24 hours.
1.4 ENGINE:
1.4.1 Type:
The diesel engine shall be of stationary type four stroke with vertical in line or (V) type cylinder
arrangement, Turbocharged, water cooled.
1.4.2 Rating:
a) Prime Power BHP rating of the engine shall be such that the DG set can continuously deliver
the specified net electrical output while supplying power/driving all electrical and mechanical
auxiliaries connected to alternator terminals and engine shaft at specified site conditions and
ambient temperature of 45 deg C inside the DG room. Rating specified shall be Site rating.
b) It shall also be capable of satisfactorily driving the alternator at 10% overload at the rated
speed for one hour in any period of 12 hours of continuous running.
The successful contractor shall have to furnish :-
Page 1105 of 1358

i) Supporting calculations to arrive at diesel engine rating.

ii) Short circuit calculation.
iii) Back Pressure calculation.
iv) Foundation details drawings.
v) Fuel tank & piping layout.
vi) Exhaust pipe layout up to chimney.
1.4.3 Speed and Vibration Level:

i) Speed shall be 1500 revolutions per minute. Speed governor/over speed protection shall be
provided.
ii) At normal running conditions, speed shall be stabilized at plus or minus 2% nominal speed,
regardless of load. At transient condition, engine speed shall vary not more than 10% plus or
minus.
iii) The engine vibration / noise level shall not exceed 75 db when measured as specified in
relevant
specifications.
1.4.4 Lubrication System:
i) The engine shall have a closed cycle forced & splash lubricating system with positive oil
pressure and a crank chamber for collection/storage of the lubricating oil during circulation. No
moving part shall require lubrication by hand or any other external source either prior to the
starting of the engine or when it is in operation.
ii) The lubricating oil filter shall be suitable for replacement under normal operating conditions.
The minimum operating life of filter shall be more than 250 hours without the necessity of its
replacement or cleaning.
iii) In case lubricating oil coolers are required they shall be of the air cooled/water cooled type
and shall be an integral part of the Diesel Generator Set.
iv) Necessary temperature and pressure gauges and other instruments shall be supplied and
fitted on the lubrication system.
v) A lubricating oil level dipstick suitably calibrated and shall be located in the accessible
position.
vi) In case manufacturer recommends lube oil pump for intermittent priming, the same shall be
provided by the bidder along with its controls.
1.4.5 Fuel System:
i) The engine shall be capable of running and delivering rated load on all types of diesel normally
available in India.
ii) The Guaranteed fuel consumption of the engine at full, three quarters and half of its rated
power output shall be indicated by the Contractor in the bid. The guaranteed fuel consumption
shall be established during acceptance load test at Site.
iii) A fuel day tank with 990 liters capacity shall be provided on a suitably fabricated steel
platform. The tank shall be complete with level indicator marked in liters, filling inlet with
removable screen, an outlet, a drain plug, an air vent and necessary piping. The fuel tank shall
be painted with oil resistant paint. Fuel tank shall be provided with level controller with 2 NO
and 2 NC contacts for alarm & trip shall also be provided by the bidder. All pipe joints should be
brazed.
iv) A hand pump for pumping the fuel into the fuel day oil tank together with necessary pipes
Page 1106 of 1358

or tubing shall be provided. The inlet of the pump shall be provided with 15 meters long
armoured hose with suitable filter.
v) Fuel consumption should be observed in proportion with load and DG vendor should offer
guarantee while execution and during first 5 years of working.
1.4.6 Air Intake System:
The diesel engine shall be provided with special dry type air filters having low resistance to air
passage, high dust retaining efficiency and provision for easy cleaning. Filters shall be suitable
for achieving satisfactory engine operation and ensuring the engine life under tropical humid
conditions, with sulphur dioxide and trioxide fumes, abrasive dust and coal particles of 5 to 10
microns present in the atmosphere. The minimum efficiency of filters shall be 90% down to 5-
micron size.
1.4.7 Engine Exhaust System:
i) Exhaust system should create minimum back pressure.

ii) The exhaust back pressure should be within the limits as specified by DG manufacturer.
However, it should be within the limits suggested by engine manufacturers to suit performance
of the engine. Calculation for back pressure shall be submitted by successful bidder.
iii) Use of thimble is must while passing the pipe through concrete wall. The clearance around
the pipe and wall is must for free movement and expansion/contraction of piping.
iv) Exhaust piping inside the genset room should be lagged LRB wool of proper density along
with aluminum sheet cladding to avoid heat dissipation to engine room. The thickness of lagging
should not be less than 75mm. Exhaust piping shall be suitably supported and padded to avoid
damage to thermal insulation. e) Exhaust flexible shall have its free length when it is installed.
v) The exhaust outlet should be in the direction of prevailing winds & should not allow exhaust
gases to enter air inlet/windows etc.
vi) There should be rain trap to avoid rainwater entry. If rain cap is used the distance between
exhaust pipe & rain cap should be higher than diameter of pipe. It is also recommended that
horizontal run of exhaust piping should slope downwards away from engine towards the
condensate trap. Silencer should be installed with drain plug at bottom.
vi) Residential type silencer should be provided in the engine exhaust pipe. The design and
location of the silencer shall meet the requirement of back pressure.
vii) The flue gases from silencer shall be taken out to atmosphere through metallic, thermally
insulated and cladded chimneys. These chimneys shall be made from M S class ‗B‘piping system
conforming to IS 3589. Required flexible bellows, bends, expansion joints, load support etc. shall
be provided as required.
viii) The exhaust chimney shall be insulated with minimum 75 mm thick thermal insulated glass
wool/mineral wool up to silencer. The portion between flexible connection to silencer shall be
lagged with Asbestos rope. The insulation should be held in position using wire chicken mesh.
24-gauge aluminum cladding sheet should be wrapped over exhaust pipe starting from engine
up to the chimney top.
ix) Calculation for chimney size selection shall be furnished for approval.
1.4.8 COOLING SYSTEM:
The diesel engine should be a Radiator system and suitable size for each DG Set.
Page 1107 of 1358

1.4.9 Engine Governor:
It shall be 100% Electronic fuel controller with electronic fuel injection system conforming to class A1 to
BS:649 and shall be a self-contained unit capable of monitoring speed. It shall be suitable for remote
operation.
Governing Performance Frequency Regulation Synchronous under varying loads from no load to full
load. Frequency Drift
0.5% drift for a 60 F (33 C) change in ambient over 8 hours with temperature stabilization at both points.
1.4.10 Turbo Charger :
It shall be of robust construction, suitable of being driven by engine exhaust having a common shaft for
the turbine and blower. It shall draw air from a filter of adequate capacity to suit the requirements of
the engine.
1.4.11 Quietness of Operation:

i) The engine shall be designed to achieve maximum quietness of operation.
ii) Efficient residential silencer shall be provided for the exhaust as well as the air intake.
iii) Noise level of the set shall be within the limits specified in relevant specifications (to be
specified by bidder).
iv) Engine vibration level shall not exceed the limits specified in the relevant specification. (It is
desired that vibration level do not exceed 250-micron peak to peak). (To be specified by bidder)
1.4.12 Engine Starting:

i) Engine starting shall be by electric starting motor complete with manual/automatic starting
arrangement. The starter motor shall conform to IS-4722 and IS-325 and shall be of adequate
power for its duty and be of inertia or pre- engaged type. The pinion shall positively disengage
when the engine starts up or when the motor is de-energized. The engine cranking shall be only
from the panel both for AMF & DG sets (Manual) and any engine starting devices etc, that are
given as original fitment on the engine-by-engine manufacturers shall be either removed or
padlocking arrangement given for this so that all normal start/stop operations could be done
only from panel whether the set is AMF or manual. The engine wiring shall be appropriately
modified, ferruled to totally match with schematic drawings of the panel.
ii) Time for Run-up to Speed: From the initial operation of the starting device, the engine shall
start, run up to normal speed and be capable of accepting 80% of full load within a maximum
time of 25 seconds, and full load within 5 seconds thereafter.
1.4.13 Starter Battery:

i) The battery shall conform to the requirement of IS-7372. Starting battery sets of 24 V, heavy
duty high performance approved make/quality shall be provided to enable crank & start the
engine even in cold/winter morning conditions. Type/ voltage/AH capacity of same on 20 hour
rated discharge period shall be indicated in the offer. The battery shall be capable of performing
at least (6) six normal starts without recharging.
ii) The Battery shall be provided with good quality teakwood stand painted with acid proof black
paint with min 3 mm thick rubber mat below the battery.
iii) Batteries shall be of lead container type only and not with PVC moulded sealed container so
that each individual cells are available for individual monitoring during its life span. Each cell
shall be provided with electrolyte filling cap with level floats for easy monitoring of electrolytic
level.
iv) For each battery system following accessories shall be provided: -
Page 1108 of 1358

1. PVC Funnel - 1 No.

2. Small PVC mugs with handle - 2 Nos. (Red & white colour)
3. Hydrometer syringe type with float calibrated (not with zero markings only) with one spare
float.
4. Centre zero voltmeter good quality with 3V-0-3V scale.
5. PVC jerry-can white colour with tested quality distilled water, with can clearly marked with
engraved PVC inscription plate "Distilled Water".
6. One tin of petroleum jelly (500 gms).
7. Painter brush 1" wide - 2 nos.
v) The battery shall be provided with 2 nos. cables, min 1.5 m long heavy-duty rubber/PVC
insulated cabling with brazed tinned lug at one end and with brazed tinned brass terminal lug
at battery end - for connecting batteries to cranking system - with 0.25 m long inter battery
connecting cable.
vi) The lugs shall be clearly stamped + or - and positive cable also red sleeved for easy
identification.
vii) The batteries shall be supplied fully filled and first charged ready to use.
1.4.14 Battery Charging System:
i) Float cum quick charging system shall be provided at the DG Aux. panel with appropriate
charger system, LC network, rate selector switch and generously rated charging transformer
and silicon rectifier bridge, so that the cranking battery system can be kept fully charged at all
times from E.B. supply network with quick charging rate limited to 0.8 times rated discharge
current with provision in control transformer and Si rectifier present to enable boost charging
the battery at 2 times rated discharge current in case of emergencies. To this and in the mode
selector switch boost charge position shall be present which however shall be kept
disconnected at mode selector switch normally.
ii) DC ammeters to clearly indicate float charging current and quick/boost charging current shall
be provided.
iii) The float charging ammeter circuit logic shall be so as to bring at in ckt only on demand
through a P.B. provided the R.S.S. (Rat selector switch) in it float charging mode to prevent
damage to the ammeter.
iv) Dropper resistor network on the load side of battery charger system shall be provided so
that higher charger voltages in quick or boost conditions does not get impressed on the I/L and
contactor coils, which voltage shall remain well within +1% of rated voltage.
v) Battery charging subsystem shall be designed for continuous operation at cubicle ambient of
50 deg C corresponding to 45 deg C ambient outside and should be designed to operate at 1.5
times rated maximum current corresponding to boost charge current which can reach in
practice as high as 2.5 times or 3 times rated discharge current.
vi) Any charger dynamo and dynamo charging current network present on the set shall either
have to be removed or made in operative so that both for AMF and manual application the
cranking battery system is kept charged from the charger at the panels at all times during or
shut down periods of the set.
vii) To the above and in case of manual DG Sets, the input to charger subsystem iz., 240 V AC is
foreseen to be provided from customer network from the portion that is normally supplied by
manual DG Set during DG operation or being fed by E.B. System.
1.4.15 Engine Fitments:

The engine shall be provided with but not limited to the following essential basic fitments.
- Crank case breather - Dry type element.
Page 1109 of 1358

- Air cleaner - Dry type mounted

- Corrosion resistor - coolant concentrate premix cooled
- Lubricating oil cooler - -
- Filters - Lub oil & fuel oil, paper element type.
- Coolant Pump
- Fuel Pumps - Priming & transfer
- Governor - Electronic type as specified
- Turbo charger - Exhaust gas driven in case of turbo charged engines.
-Flywheel with flywheel housing - SAE type
- Flexible coupling - Spider type
- Vibration dampers - One set
- Exhaust/Intake manifolds
- Oil sump (crank case) with dip stick
- Engine supports
- Residential type silencer in exhaust system
- Electrical starter 24 V -
Safety controls & instruments
1.4.16 Engine Instrumentation:

The following instruments mounted on instrument panel shall be essentially present as
minimum.
- Engine speed tachometer with service hour counter
- Lub oil pressure gauge
- Cooling water temperature gauge
The instrument panel shall be mounted on engine using rubber dampers for vibration isolation.
The metering shall be electronic digital type.
1.4.17 ALTERNATOR:
i) The alternator shall be brushless type with rotating field and static excitation circuit
(separately excited PMG, MX 321 of Stamford or Leroy Somer make) controlled by field control
unit suitably compounded for voltage and load current.
ii) The alternator shall be in SP-DP enclosure, foot mounted with ball and roller bearings on end
shields.
iii) The alternator shall conform to IS:4722/BS:2613 and shall be suitable for tropical conditions.
The rating of the alternator shall be designed on the basis of 45oC Ambient inside the DG room.
iv) The alternator shall comply with the following specifications:
Rating (site) 750 KVA (Prime duty type) as specified ready to use with AMF (Auto main
failure) (shall be capable of 10% overloading at the rated speed for
one hour for every 12 hours continuous running.
Voltage 415 V
Speed 1500 RPM.
Frequency 50 Hz.
P. F. 0.8 lag
Enclosure IP: 23.
Insulation H (shall be of glass bonded epoxy thermosetting type
but temperature rise limited to class `F').
Excitation Self excited, self-regulated with brushless system and
static Voltage control unit suitably compounded for voltage and
current to maintain terminal voltage constant at 415V ± 5% at all load
Page 1110 of 1358

for p.f. not less than 0.8. lag
Terminal Box shall be suitable for AL Cable termination.
1.4.18 Neutral Point:

The winding of the alternator shall be star-connected, and the leads shall be brought out to a separate
terminal box.
Space provision for neutral CT for REF protection shall be provided as required.
The C.T. Parameters will be as below:
i) Ratio : 1250/1A (for 750 KVA DG Set)
Class : PS
1.4.19 Terminal box and Connection:
The alternator output terminals shall be enclosed in a terminal box mounted in an accessible position
on the alternator frame. As far as possible, connections between the exciter and alternator shall be
contained within the machine frame and connections carrying A.C. and D.C. shall be segregated from
each other. The terminal box shall be of sufficient size to conveniently terminate800 amp TPN Al Bus
Bar. which shall be intimated during detailed engineering. Suitable tinned copper pads shall be provided
for bus bar termination along with all necessary hardware. Glands and lugs shall be provided for control
cables also. For single phase cables, gland plate shall be of non-magnetic material. Gland plates shall be
removable type.
1.4.20
The generator shall be complete with voltage transformers necessary for AVR reverse power protection.
The VT ratio shall be 415/110 V. ____ ____ 3 3
1.4.21
The generating set shall be so designed that it is capable of reaching its full voltage and frequency and
shall be ready to take full load within 30 seconds of a remote starting impulse being received. It shall be
capable of starting the motor load over & above base load as given below.
Rating (KVA) Base load (KW) Starting motor over the base load (KW)
750 ---- ---------
Successful bidder shall submit calculation to prove above requirements.
1.4.22
Suitable space heaters shall be provided for alternators. These space heaters shall be switched on
automatically when DG set is not running.
1.4.23 INSPECTION
The Consultant ‘s representative shall be free to inspect the equipment at several stages to be decided
mutually. The equipment shall be dispatched only after the inspection & successful testing at
manufacturers works.
Page 1111 of 1358

1.4.24 DRAWINGS
Before starting the manufacture of the equipment, the successful bidder shall have to take approval
from the Consultant. Any manufacturing done prior to approval or any change in specification shall be
rectified by the supplier. Minimum two sets of drawings sent for every approval & three sets shall be
furnished after job completion.
1.4.25 OPERATION MANUALS
Three sets of operation manuals with the technical leaflets of the components used in the CPC & PBS
are to be provided after completion of the job.
1.4.26 PERFORMANCE GUARANTEE
All the equipment's shall be guaranteed as per the tender clause from the date of commissioning.
1.4.27 APPLICABLE STANDARDS
The equipment's covered under above specifications shall be designed, fabricated & tested in
accordance with the applicable sections of the latest revisions of relevant Indian standards (IS) & all
International Electrotechnical Commission ‘s recommendations (IEC) As well as specifications given in
this document.
The PCC & PDBS shall generally confirm to the requirement of the following standards amended up to
date :
a) IS-4237 General requirements of switchgear & control gear for voltage not exceeding 1000V
b) IS-375 Arrangement of busbars, main connection, auxiliaries & wiring.
c) IS-2516 Requirement of the circuit breakers not exceeding 1000 V, selection & testing.
d) IS-4047 Specification for heavy duty air break switches & fuses for voltages not exceeding
1000V.
e) IS-2208 Specification for HRC cartridge fuse links up to 650V.
f) IS-2507 Indian standards for current transformers (Part- I/II/III/IV)
IS-4201 Application guide for current transformers.
IS-2959 Specification for AC contractors of voltage not exceeding 1000V.
g) IS-1822 Specifications for motor starters of voltages
not exceeding 1000V.
j) IS-5569 Electrical power connectors.
k) IS-1336 Colour code recommendations for push buttons.
l) IS-1248 Electrical indicating buttons.
m) IS-4483 Preferred panel cutout dimensions.
n) IS-2147 Degree of protection provided by enclosures for LV switchgears.
o) IS-3072 Code of practice for installations & maintenance of switchgear
for system voltages not exceeding 1000V.
p) IES-439 Low voltage switchgear & control gear assembles.
q) IS-2032 Graphic symbols.
r) IS-8623 Factory built assemblies.
1.4.28 ERECTION, TESTING, COMMISSIONING AND PERFORMANCE & GUARANTEE TESTS/ PROCEDURE
AT SITE:
Page 1112 of 1358

i) Installation of DG Set:
The entire work of erection, testing and commissioning of equipment supplied under this package shall
be carried out by contractor and performance and guarantee tests to be conducted at site are also
included under the scope of this specification. For this purpose, the contractor shall depute a suitable
qualified technical supervisor to site on advance intimation to the Owner along with all special testing
equipment required for testing and performance and guarantee tests. The supervisor(s) shall be
responsible for the installation, testing, commissioning checks and performance & guarantee tests
mentioned in relevant clauses of this volume and the checks recommended by the contractor. The
contractor shall provide all tools, equipment and instruments required for installation, testing and
commissioning.
The successful contractor shall submit sufficiently in advance the bio-data of the supervisor giving
details of his experience for Owner's approval.
The contractor shall ensure that the equipment supplied by him are installed in a neat workman like
manner such that they are leveled, properly aligned and well oriented. The tolerances shall be
established in Contractor’s drawings and/or as stipulated by the Owner.
All special tools and tackles and spares required for erection, testing and commissioning of equipment
shall be supplied by the contractor.
Erection, testing and commissioning manuals and procedures shall be supplied, prior to dispatch of the
equipment.
The contractor shall ensure that the drawings, instruction and recommendations are correctly followed
while handling, setting, testing and commissioning the equipment.
ii) Commissioning Check Tests/Performance and Guarantee Test:

In addition to the checks and test recommended by the manufacturer, the contractor shall conduct the
following acceptance tests to be carried out on one unit of each rating at Site. Rate for the load test shall
be on per unit basis to enable owner to opt for load test on one unit of each rating or on all units.
a) Load Test/Performance Guarantee Test (At Site) :
The DG set shall be given test run for a period or 12 hours without exceeding the engine or alternator
capacity followed by 10% overload for one hour as per specification and drawing. The supplier should
make arrangements for load testing on load at site when site loads are ready to use.
This full load test is to be followed immediately by a 10% overload run for one hour. The performance
of the engine, alternator and exciter shall be satisfactory at the end of this overload run.
At the end of the full-load run, and again at the end of the over-load run, tests for temperature rise and
insulation resistance of the alternator as specified shall be taken.
During the load test half hourly records of the following shall be taken :-
a) Ambient temperature
b) Exhaust temp. when exhaust thermometer is fitted.
c) Cooling water temp. at inlet and outlet point adjacent to the water output from the engine
jacket.
d) Lubricating oil pressure
e) Speed
f) Voltage, wattage and current output.
g) Oil tank level
h) Colour of exhaust gas
i) At the end of load test guaranteed fuel consumption figures shall be established and deviation
with
actual and guaranteed figures to be ensured within permissible limit.
j) Winding temperature.
b) Insulation resistance test for alternator:
Page 1113 of 1358

Insulation resistance in mega-ohms between the coils and the frame of the alternator when tested with
a 500 Volts megger shall not be less than 50 mega ohms.
c) Temperature rise test for alternator:

The temperature rise test of the alternator shall be carried out at the end of overload run of the D.G.
Set. The procedure for temperature rise test shall be as follows:
"Just after overload test, the set shall be taken off for measurement of hot resistance of the alternator
winding (stator and rotor) by using a suitable ductor. The cold resistance should also be measured
before start of the DG Set. The temperature rise shall be computed by extra polation method".
d) Regulation Test:
The automatic and manual regulation of the alternator load at half and full rated load shall be tested
for a nominal volts of 240 volts, between phase to neutral and at 0.8 p.f. to verify the requirements of
voltage and frequency variation as per IS:4722.
e) Speed and Governing:

The speed of the engine shall be verified to ensure that it conforms to the requirement of BS:5514.
f) Vibrations:
The vibrations shall be measured during full load test as well as during the overload test and the limit
shall be 10 microns.
g) Check of Fuel Consumption:

A check of the fuel consumption shall be made throughout the test run of full load and overload. This
test shall be Verified thru Level Of Fuel in Fuel Tank.
h) Insulation Resistance of Wiring:

On completion of the engine tests, the insulation of each unit of local wiring in the control cubicles and
other components of the engine set, shall be tested with a 500 V insulation tester. The insulation
resistance shall not be less than one mega-ohm. between wires in a cable and engine set frame of cable
sheath.
i) Functional Tests:
a) Type of starting provided for the engine.
b) Pilot and fault indication lamps.
j) Noise Level:
The equivalent À' weighted sound level measured at a distance of 1 meter horizontally from the base
of any equipment furnished and installed under these specifications expressed in decibels to a
reference of 0.0002 microbar, shall not exceed as per relevant standards.
Note : Tenderer shall specifically indicate the following guaranteed figures :-
a) Fuel consumption - 50% - 75% - 100% load.
b) Lube oil consumption.
c) Engine vibration.
d) Noise level.
e) Winding temperature - 100% load.
1.4.29 ACOUSTIC ENCLOSURE

(Shall be meeting the CPCB norms for testing & commissioning)
Page 1114 of 1358

1.0 CONSTRUCTION
a) The container should be designed for easy access to serviceable parts.
b) Modular construction for easy assembling and disassembling.
c) Fabricated out of CACA sheet of 14 gauge. Base frame shall be made out of ISMC of suitable
sections or made out of sheet steel minimum of thickness 5 mm pretreated for degreasing ,
phosphating , passivation with 7 tank process . All metal parts shall be powder coated for long
lasting life & finish.
d) The hardware shall be of high tensile grade i.e. bolts of 10.9/8.8 grade. Hardware should be
passivated.
e) Fuel tank at the base of silent DG Set should have minimum 12 hours capacity. It should be
provided with breather drain plug. The thickness of fuel tank should be minimum 3 mm.
f) The fuel level shall be measured through a dip stick.
g) There should provision for filling the fuel from outside as in the case of automobiles.
h) Fuel tank shall be connected to engine with wire breaded fuel pipes.
i) Battery should be accommodated in a separate tray in the container.
j) There should be provision for drain plugs for draining mobile oil/Diesel.
k) The doors should be gasketed with high quality EPDN gaskets to avoid leakage sound.
l) The door handles should be lockable type.
1.1 PAINTING
a) The sheet metal components should be hot dip seven tank pretreated.
b) To have long life of container it should be P.P based powder coated (inside as well as outside)
c) Base frame should be epoxy quoted when fabricated.
1.2 ACCOUSTIC ENCLOSURE

a) Sound Proofing of enclosure should be done with quality rock wool/mineral wool confirming
to IS-8183 of 96 Kg/M3 density.
b) The rock wool/Glass wool should further be covered with fiber glass cloth/fiber tissue paper
fire resistive and perforated powder coated sheet of 0.6mm thickness.
c) Residential silencer shall be provided within the DG to control the exhaust noise.
d) Interconnection between silencer and engine should be through stainless steel flexible
hose/pipe.
e) Attenuators should be provided to control sound at air entry to the container and exit from
the container.
1.3 VENTILATION AND AIR CIRCULATION
The system shall be engineered to provide air inlet/exhaust acoustic louvers for efficient air
circulation and shall have
following special features :
a) Adequate ventilation is to be provided to meet air requirement for combustion and heat
removal.
b) The temperature inside the enclosure shall not exceed 5-7dg C than the ambient temperature
near air suction point.
1.4 ELECTRICAL
a) The earthing point shall be isolated through DMC insulator mounted on enclosure.
b) Control panel should be mounted in the container itself. All parameters should be visible
from outside and all push buttons accessible easily.
1.5 GENERAL
a) Engine carries warranty/guarantee of engine manufacturer for the DG set in the enclosure of
Page 1115 of 1358

Silent Diesel Generating Set.

b) Emergency stop Push Button shall be provided outside the container.
c) Minimum insertion loss shall be 25dB(A)
d) Acoustic enclosure shall be approved from Central Pollution Control Board and Fire Nodal
Office.
1.4.30 DATA SHEET FOR D.G. SETS (To be filled by the Contractor)
S.No. Description 750 KVA

1.0 Applicable Standards : BS 5514
2.0 ENGINE :
2.1 Type : To be filled by Vendor
2.2 Make : As per List enclosed
2.3 Model : To be filled by Vendor
2.4 a) BHP :
b) Output at site condition after
derating at 45oC after deducting
auxiliary power. : 750 KVA
2.5 RPM : 1500
2.6 No. of cylinder : To be filled by Vendor
S.No. Description 750 KVA

2.7 Specific Fuel Consumption
(Guaranteed)
a) Full Load : To be filled by Vendor
b) at 75% Load : To be filled by Vendor
c) at 50% Load : To be filled by Vendor
2.8 Lube oil consumption in gm/hr. :
2.9 Cooling
a) Type of cooling : Radiator
b) Maximum period for which
engine can operate without CW
supply. : To be filled by Vendor
2.10 Type of Starting : Electric
3.0 ALTERNATOR :
3.1 Make : As per List Enclosed
3.2 Type of Enclosure : IP – 23
3.3 Mounting : Foot Mounted
3.4 Net KW Rating at 0.8 PF : 600 KW
3.5 kVA Rating
a) Name Plate : 750 KVA
b) After deration as per site condition
of 45oC ambient after deducting
3.6 Insulation : Class ―H‖ Temp rise limited to class F
3.7 Excitation : Separately Excited Brushless
3.8 Terminal Box Provided : 1250A TPN AL
Page 1116 of 1358

3.9 Earthing Studs : To be Provided.

3.10 Temperature rise above ambient (45oC) ;
a) Stator : To be furnished.
b) Rotor :
c) Cores :
3.11 Efficiency
a) at full load : To be filled by Vendor
b) at 75% load : To be filled by Vendor
c) at 50% load : To be filled by Vendor
d) at 25% load : To be filled by Vendor
3.12 AVR type : Digital (Part of Integrated Panel)
3.13 Degree of protection : IP 23
3.14 Full load losses : To be furnished
3.15 Transient & sub-transient reactance : To be filled by Vendor
3.16 Short circuit ratio : To be filled by Vendor
4.0 Dimensions (L x W x H) of DG Set : To be filled by Vendor
5.0 Weight (in Kgs) : To be filled by Vendor
6.0 Anti-vibration pad provided (YES/NO) : Required
7.0 FLOAT CHARGER :
7.1 Type : Rectifier

7.2 Make : As per List enclosed.
7.3 Ampere Rating : ------ Amps.
7.4 Float Charger Panel Details
a) Sheet Steel (Cold Rolled) : To be furnished.
b) Thickness of sheet steel : To be filled by Vendor
c) Type of mounting : Floor mounted
d) Degree of protection for panel : IP – 52
e) Cable Entry (Top/Bottom) : Top/ Bottom
f) Glands/Conduit : Gland.
g) Paint Shade : To be furnished.
8.0 CONTROL PANEL (OPTIONAL)

(Engine Control Panel) :
8.1 Type : Indoor Type.
8.2 Make : As per list enclosed
8.3 Facilities provided (bidder to furnish
details & brief description) covered:
a) Monitoring : Digital.
b) Startup : Auto/Manual.
c) Changeover: Auto Change over.
d) Parallel operation/synchronizing : Yes.
e) Operation : Auto / Manual.
f) Protection & interlocks &
Safeguards: Yes.
8.4 Cable entry : To be furnished.
8.5 Weight : To be filled by Vendor
8.6 Dimensions To be filled by Vendor
U- SYNCHRONIZATION PANEL:
Page 1117 of 1358

1.1 General
a) Enclosure manufacturing
i) Main distribution board enclosure shall be a branded catalogue product from approved
manufacturer. Enclosure shall be made out of electro galvanized steel sheets conforming to
international specification. Alu - Zinc coating shall be provided on the sheets, which shall
prevent rust formation during storage and handling for processing, in addition to giving
corrosion protection to the finished product. The sheets have a fine surface finish, which gives
good presentation to the painted components of the enclosure.
ii) The enclosure system shall be modular in nature with bolt on construction.
iii) The enclosure shall be powder coated to an approved colour. The painting process shall
include removal of moisture on the sheet steel surface using and applying thermosetting
polyester powder using automatic guns. Polymerization of the powder shall take place when
the components are cured at about 180ºC, forming a continuous integrated coating. A fairly
uniform coating of at least 70-80 microns shall be provided.
iv) The pretreated and powder coated sheet steel components shall be at least tested randomly
at regular intervals for coating thickness measurement, adhesion test, bend test, impact test,
hardness test, salt spray test etc.
b) Control panel shall be provided with hidden hinged door(s) with pad locking arrangement and
suitable brackets/channels shall be provided for floor mounting. This should be equipped with
touch screen panels.
c) All doors, removable covers and plates shall be gasketed all around with neoprene gaskets. All
accessible live connections shall be shrouded, and it shall be possible to change individual switches,
fuses, MCCBS without danger of contact with live metal.
d) All live parts shall be provided with at least phase to phase and phase to earth clearances in air
of 25 mm and 20 mm respectively.
e) Adequate interior cabling space and suitable removable cable gland plate shall be provided. The
necessary number of cable glands shall be supplied and fitted on to this gland plate. Cable glands
shall be screwed on type and made of brass.
f) Continuous earth strips of proper size with two number of earthing terminals shall be provided.
g) All sheet steel work shall be degreased, pickled, phosphated and powder coated. Shade to be
specified later.
h) Other technical specifications shall be the same as specified above.
1.2 Operation and Control of Diesel Generating Sets

i) All DG Sets shall be controlled independently.
ii) Diesel Generator shall be capable of being stopped, started and run from syn. Panel either in
isolation or in synchronizing mode, either auto or manual and share the load as per programme of
PLC controlled syn. Panel. The bidder shall also include as an optional item Genop generator control
relay, equivalent to or higher version be considered along with PLC as an extra provision if required.
However, interlock shall be provided in the DG local control panel to prevent shutting down
operations as long as DG circuit breaker is closed.
1.3 Auto Operation

When mains power is available, the healthiness of this power will be monitored through a mains voltage
monitor. If voltage on the 3 phases are within limits, the monitor will send a closing signal to the mains
breaker and mains power will be connected to the load.
Page 1118 of 1358

If the voltage drops on any phase or on all phases, the monitor will sense this drop through a timer, and
if this drop persists for more than a pre-adjusted period of time (say 1 to 20 secs.) a signal is sent to the
engine starting circuit while at the same time opening the mains supply breaker and disconnecting load
from mains as voltage is below acceptable limits. The engine starting control monitor will send a signal
to the D.C. battery supply for starting the engine through the starting solenoid. When the engine is
healthy, it starts up in a few seconds and the generator develops voltage. The generator voltage monitor
monitors the voltage and when the voltage is developed, this gives a signal to the generator breaker
which closes and connects the diesel generator to the load. Simultaneously, it sends a signal to de-
energize the engine starting circuit and the starter motor is disengaged. The engine protection circuits
for high water temperature and low lubricating oil pressure are also energized. The number of units
required shall be determined as per the load condition and sequence of operation as per selection of
master unit. In case the master selected unit fails to start after three successive start is provided with
specified time gap as per manufacturers recommendation, there shall be an audio-visual signal for DG
fails to start and the signal goes to next DG set to start and completes the sequence.
1.4 Resumption of Supply

If voltage from mains is resumed, the main voltage monitor will sense this voltage for healthiness, for a
predetermined period of time (adjustable up to three minutes) and then send a signal to trip the DG
breaker and stop the engine and to change over the breakers from DG to mains and normal supply is
resumed to the load. The solenoid operation and closing and tripping of breakers should be done
through control voltage 24 V.D.C. The DG shall run in a idling mode for some predetermined period (3-
5 minutes) before fuel solenoid is shut-off.
1.5 Failure to Start

A three-attempt starting facility using two impulse timers and a summation timer for engine shall be
provided and if voltage fails to develop within 30 seconds from receiving the first start impulse, the set
shall lockout automatically and a visual and audible alarm shall be given in the control panel. The remote
panel shall receive "DG Trouble Alarm".
The control panel shall have the following provisions for the control of each DG Set :-
1) Master engine control switch for OFF/Auto/Manual (Local/Remote) /TEST with a facility for
starting and stopping of the set. Also master DG selector switch.
2) Voltmeter 96 x 96 Sqmm with selector switches for alternator/Mains/Phases complete with
protection fuses.
3) Fine adjustment of speed.
4) Adjustment of output voltage.
5) Facility to transfer the speed and voltage control to the remote panel of customer including
motorized potentio meters etc as required.
6) Local/Remote selector switch to facilitate remote starting/stopping of the DG Set.
7) Frequency meter 96 Sqmm reed type.
8) Current transformers required for metering.
9) Ammeter 96 x 96 Sqmm with C.T. & 3 phase 4 wire KWH meter, KW meter with MDI.
10) Mains supply, voltage monitor.
11) Engine control monitor.
12) Alternator voltage monitor.
13) D.C. control relays, timers.
14) Engine protection system for low oil lubricating pressure and high water temperature.
15) 12 window Audio/Visual annunciator system complete with hooter, Ack, test & Reset PBs for
annunciation of low lube oil pressure, high water temperature, Engine over speed, electrical
protection trip, Engine fail to start, low fuel level complete with power supply arrangements.
Page 1119 of 1358

16) Engine hours run counter.

17) Field failure relay.
18) Control fuses.
19) Lifting hooks.
20) Gland plates.
21) Electromagnetic Contactor
22) Earthing studs
23) Antivibration pads.
24) In addition to above AMF panel shall have following:
a) Push buttons for DG breaker close/trip in manual mode.
b) Push buttons for mains breaker close/trip in manual mode.
c) Indicating lights to indicate DG ACB open/close /trip.
d) Indicating lights to indicate mains breaker open/close.
The contractor shall supply any other controls & indications for DG Set though not specifically
mentioned here but which the supplier may recommend and are required to make the system
complete for satisfactory operation of DG Sets.
1.6 Indication/Annunciation
Pilot indicating lamps/shall be provided for the following: (The annunciation scheme shall be finalized
later in).
1) Charger - ON/OFF
2) Elect fault
3) Set shutdown due to Èngine overheating'.
4) Set shut down due to `Low oil pressure'.
5) Set shut down due to `Lack of fuel'.
6) Low level of oil' in fuel service tank.
7) Overs peed trip.
8) Alternator fault.
9) High lube oil temperature.
10) AVR fault
11) High inlet water temperature
12) Cooler bank trouble.
The indicating lamp shall be of the panel mounting filament type with series resistors.
The DG Sets would normally be controlled from remote for which following provision shall be
made on the remote-control panel. The necessary control devices/contacts for these external
connections shall be wired out to the DG control panel terminal blocks.
1) Starting and stopping of the DG Set.
2) Speed control of DG Set.
3) Voltage control of DG Set.
4) DG running indication
5) Watt hour meter, Watt-meter, Voltmeter, Ammeter and Frequency meter.
1.7 PLC BASED AUTO SYNCHRONISATION SYSTEM

The SYNCHRONISATION panel shall control the starting/stopping/synchronizing of DG set and give
commands for closing/tripping of DG incomer breaker/contactor and Normal MPEB incomer
breaker/contactor. The detailed scheme of synchronization & changeover shall be as per Dwg. No.
NVB/DBMALL/MEP-1 & NVB/DBMALL/MEP-2.It shall be possible to control operations and monitor all
parameters at touch screen(min 14 row display) provided on panel(Siemens make) or from desktop
system provided by panel manufacturer.
The PLC system shall be programmed for the auto-mains failure for start & running of DG set with the
Page 1120 of 1358

following operation philosophy:

i) The normal power supply shall be constantly monitored by a mains voltage monitors.
ii) When the mains voltage fail or drops below 80% (adjustable & selectable) of the rated voltage,
the PLC shall give a starting signal to the DG set, or alternatively when a potential free NO
becomes closed due to command from remote control panel of the Owner or through SCADA
(Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition System). Operation of the PLC system through
sensing of mains voltage fail or changeover from NO to closed condition of the potential free
contact shall be through an operator selector switch in the AMF panel. The selector switch shall
have LOCAL/AUTO/SCADA/OFF position.
iii) System shall permit 3 attempts for starting the DG set: failing which the annunciation circuit
shall be activated for alarm.
iv) If the engine starts during 3 attempts & the engine reaches its operating speed and the
alternator its operating voltage, the cranking circuits shall be isolated, and the load shall be
transferred to the DG set. Then a second DG Set shall be started & Auto synchronized with this
set.
v) Upon return of the normal supply voltage of 90% (adjustable & selectable) of the rated voltage
for a minute, the load shall be transferred to the normal source. However, the DG set shall
continue running for 3 minutes and then stop.
vi) If the DG set fails to start and reach its operating speed in 25 seconds in three attempts the
DG set shall automatically be disconnected and locked in isolated position.
vii) A clock/ time switch shall be provided for automatic run of lube oil primer pump of the
engine for a specified period of time. The DOL starter of the lube oil priming pump shall be
provided in the DG Auxiliary panel. The control signal as per the preset time shall be used to
start & stop the DOL starter.
viii) The required DC power supply for the AMF PLC system through an independent battery of
requisite capacity shall be in the scope of Vendor. The battery shall be of sealed maintenance
free OR Ni-Cd TYPE of Exide make.
ix) The AMF system shall include a battery charger for trickle/boost charging of AMF panel
battery and DG set battery during DG set idling period. The charger shall have facility for
charging both the batteries simultaneously. The charger shall be of approved capacity to cater
to the battery requirements.
x) The AMF system shall include DG incoming ACB, Bus Coupler for DG , Control signal from AMF
for switch ON/OFF the main & DG incomer in the Owner MCC shall be provided. The breaker in
the Owner ‘s MCC panel are provided with shunt trip‘ facility . Details of the control wiring
scheme shall be firmed up during approval stage.
1.8 PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLER/DG CONTROLLER

i) Programmable logic Controller (PLC) shall be microprocessor-based system with suitable nos. of
I/Os which shall be used for DG set operation and interlocks.
ii) The system shall be able to operate satisfactorily from 5dgC to 50dgC and 5% to 90% humidity.
iii) the system shall be modular in construction and expandable in future by adding additional
modules which shall be easily accessible for maintenance & repair.
iv) The PLC shall have a very high noise immunity in order to ensure safe and reliable operation
when subjected to electrical radio frequency interference and electromagnetic disturbances
expected in a plant.
v) The system shall have programmed as per the logic/ladder diagram prepared by the vendor.
vi) The system shall have extensive set of self-diagnostic hardware and software for easy and fast
maintenance of PLC. Routine checks should run automatically at frequent intervals for identifying
any fault in software or hardware. Diagnostic shall be required at local as well as console level.
Page 1121 of 1358

vii)The vendor shall offer panel etc. in unitized condition complete in all respect.
viii) The power supply required for the PLC operation shall be provided in the panel itself including
DC battery of suitable capacity. The battery voltage shall be suitable for the operation of PLC.
All control fuses shall be of link type (HRC) conforming to ISS. Rewireable fuses shall not be accepted.
All fuses shall be readily accessible for replacement. Fuses shall have an operating indicator which
will be visible without removal of fuses from the service. It shall not be necessary to remove any
piece of equipment or to disconnect any wiring before replacing the fuses. In order to achieve above
, different relaying , protection and monitoring equipment's shall be installed as per bill of quantities
in accordance to technical specifications .
1.9 ACCESSORIES REQUIRED FOR PLC BASED AMF PANEL
S.NO ITEM TYPE/MAKE REQUIRED

1. 1 SET PLC comprising of: Allen Bradley/SIEMENS Yes
1 no. CPU Allen Bradley/SIEMENS Yes
2 nos. BUS unit Allen Bradley/SIEMENS Yes
Input modules 8channel (Min) Yes
Output modules 8channel (Min) Yes
1 no. EPROM
2 Software for PLC with key Siemens/Allen Bradley Yes
3 Mains Voltage Monitor Yes
4 Alternator Voltage Monitor Yes
5 Hooter Yes
6 BATTERY CHARGER with Trickle/Boost charger capable to Yes
cater the charging requirement of batteries of DG set as
well as AMF panel simultaneously.
7 Battery for PLC system (Ni-Cd type) Yes
a) Voltage Yes
b) AH capacity Yes
8 Metering : Yes
a) CTs (as per requirement) Yes
b) Ammeter Yes
c) Voltmeter Yes
d) Power factor meter Yes
e) Frequency meter Yes
f) Ammeter & voltmeter for charging of DG battery. Yes
g) Ammeter & voltmeter for charging of AMF panel battery. Yes
9. 8-point window Annunciator (facia type) Yes
10. Auxiliary contactors (As required) Yes
11. MCBs (As required) Yes
12. 1 no. AUTO/MANUAL/TEST/OFF switch Yes
13. Push buttons (as required) Yes
14. Indicating Lamps (as required) Yes
15. 1 no. cooling fan Yes
16. Reverse Power relay feature Yes
17. Active Power sharing relay Yes
18. Reactive Power sharing relay Yes
Page 1122 of 1358

1.10 ENGINE SAFEGUARDS

Safeguards shall be provided and arranged when necessary to stop the engine automatically by the
following:
a) Energizing a solenoid coupled to the stop lever on the fuel injection pump rack.
b) Deenergizing "fuel on" solenoid or
c)Energizing the "fuel - cut off" solenoid.
The operation of the safeguard shall at the same time give individual warning of the failure by
illuminating an appropriate local visual indicator and remote alarm at generator panel.
The contactors, relays and other devices necessary for signal and control, for the above purposes shall
be provided at Generator panel.
At the set at a easily accessible place an "EMERGENCY STOP" mushroom head stay put type P.B shall be
provided to stop the set in emergency mode.
The safeguards to "STOP THE SET" shall stop the set irrespective of mode selection of the set viz Auto,
Manual or test for following cases, with simultaneous isolation of alternator ckt.
i) Emergency stop P. B’s operation.
ii) Overspeed.
iii) Low lub oil pressure.
iii) Earth fault or restricted earth fault or differential faults of Alternator.
1.11 SYNCHRONISING SEQUENCE DETAILS
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION FOR DG SYNCHRONIZING

System Configuration for each synch panel
i). As per the SLD
ii). Neutral Contactor (NIC Contactor should be ON of running DG ‘s set)
1.12 Operation Philosophy
A. When Power Goes off (MPEB)
i) MASTER DG is to be started first. This master DG is selectable out of four .

ii) Priming Pump of DG1 is to be started first for ½ min duration. (This pump is for lubrication of
bearing, so that before starting DG, bearing is free to rotate. Lubricating film develops around
bearing)
iii) Check the system healthiness (three Attempts) for starting of DG‘s Engine.
iv) After this cranking of DG should be done for around 5 sec to start DG.
V) As soon as voltage develops the cranking have to be stopped irrespective of set time. (i.e. of
Programmable Approx 5 Sec)
Vi) Fuel solenoid should be started to inject fuel while cranking is done simultaneously.
Vii) If DG does not start, make second attempt, similarly if it does not start in second attempt,
make third attempt to start DG, if it fails in third attempt, lock out the system and declare engine
fails to start. And simultaneously turn on command for second DG.
Viii) After developing sufficient voltage (monitoring healthiness of DG supply voltage), the ACB
for DG1 should be turned ON. (Dead bus condition monitored)
ix) After turning on ACB for DG1, Bus coupler should be Made ON. There should be option to
program bus coupler to start after start of two sets.
Page 1123 of 1358

X) Suppose Total load DG1 capacity is 1200KW, and if Load reaches 50- 80% of DG capacity as
per setting (Programmable), then DG2 should be started and synchronized with DG1 through
PLC and GENOP both in Auto and manual mode (Whichever option is selected)
Xi) After Synchronization of DG2 with DG1, again total load should be monitored and if it
exceeds set load say 50-80% of DG1 and DG2.third DG start should be done.
Xii) In Manual Mode After phase and Frequency is Matching, then we can turn on we can turn
on ACB 13. Similarly other DG‘s are turned ON according to load requirement.
B. When Power Requirement decreases.
i) WE need to continuously monitor load, if total load can be managed by 80% loading of the
generators (Running Gen - 1) in this case load should be shifted from DG to be shut off to rest
of running DG‘s and then ACB of that DG is switched off. Giving cool down period to offloaded
DG for about 3 min time (programmable), engine should be stopped. And so on for other DG‘s.
C. When MPEB Power Resume
i) At this time, we have to continuously monitor power for its healthiness for settable time (10
to 30 sec)
ii) If we found its healthiness then we can turn off ACB for all DG ‘s
iii) Then we have turn off Bus coupler.
iv) After getting feedback from all DG ‘s ACB and bus coupler Off feedback then we can turn on
Transformer ACB.
D. WHEN DG POWER IS NOT AVAILABE
EB and BUS coupler breakers are on and load is selected to operate manually as per
requirements.
E. WHEN SYNCHRONISATION FAILS
BUS coupler off can offer scheme for independent load on EB and DG.
V - Testing
All Electrical equipment / system testing should be performed at site as per latest guideline /Electricity
rules in the presence of Authority Engineer as below -
1.1 TESTING OF INSTALLATION of WIRING FOR LIGHT POINT / SWITCH SOCKET:
Before a completed installation is put into service, the following tests shall be complied with.
i) Insulation Resistance:
The insulation resistance shall be measured by applying 500-volt megger with all fuses in
places, circuit breaker and all switches closed. The insulation resistance in megohms of an
installation, measured shall not be less than 50 megohms divided by the number of points on
Page 1124 of 1358

the circuit.
The insulation resistance shall be measured between
Earth to Phase
Earth to Neutral
Phase to Neutral
ii) Earth Continuity Path:

The earth continuity conductors shall be tested for electrical continuity and the electrical
resistance of the same along with the earthing lead but excluding any added resistance or
earth leakage circuit-breaker, measured from the connection, with the earth electrode to any
point in the earth continuity conductor in the completed installation and shall not exceed one
ohm.
iii) Polarity of Single Pole Switches:

A test shall be made to verify that every non linked, single pole switch is connected to one of
the phases of the supply system.
1.2 TESTING OF EARH ELECTRODE / EARTHING:
On the completion of the entire installation, the following tests shall be conducted:
i) Earth resistance of electrodes.
ii) Impedance of earth continuity conductors.
iii) Effectiveness of earthing.
All meters, instruments and labour required for the tests shall be provided by the contractor.
The test results shall be submitted in the prescribed tabulated form in triplicate to the
consultants for approval.
1.3 TESTS TO BE CONDUCTED ON PCCS ON PDBS OF LT SWITCHGEARS TYPE TESTED MAIN L.T. PANELS
& DISTRIBUTION BOARDS:
The Panel shall be subject to standard routine test as per IS-2026 1977 on amended up to date.
a) 2.5 KV highpot test with leakage current measurement.
b) Meggar test.
c) Load test by primary injection test kit at 70% capacity of the incomer.
d) Secondary injection test for relays, meters & CT's.
e) Temperature rise test FOR MEP.
f) Functional test.
The above tests must be conducted in the manufacture premises in presence of Consultant's/IIM
INDORE's representative. The bidder who are not having those testing facility are not entitled to
participate in the bid. Protective relays are to be tested/calibrated at installation prior to
commissioning. Test certificates of the above tests shall be approved by IIM INDORE/Consultant.
The test results shall be recorded on prescribed forms. The test certificates for the test carried out
at factory or at site shall be submitted in six copies to the Construction manager/Consultants for
approval.
1.3.1 TYPE TEST CERTIFICATES:
The main distribution board and the components as applicable shall be type tested in
accordance with the IEC standards to verify the specified fault level withstand capacity from a
Page 1125 of 1358

reputed and approved type testing laboratory and certified by an competent authority.
The following 7 type tests as specified in IEC 60439-1standards to comply with requirements of
TTA equipment shall be carried out at recognized test laboratories and certificates from
approved test witnessing authority shall be provided for each type test:
1. Verification of temperature-rise limits (IEC Clause 8.2.1);
2. Verification of the dielectric properties (IEC Clause 8.2.2);
3. Verification of short-circuit withstand strength (IEC Clause 8.2.3);
4. Verification of the effectiveness of the protective circuit (IEC Clause 8.2.4)
5. Verification of clearances and creepage distances (IEC Clause 8.2.5);
6. Verification of mechanical operation (IEC Clause 8.2.6);
7. Verification of the degree of protection (IEC Clause 8.2.7). Type test certificates shall be
submitted to the consultant engineer for verification.
1.3.2 Routine test
The panel assembler shall perform the routine test and provide the test.
1.4 MCB DISTRIBUTION BOARDS TEST:
Prior to commissioning of the DB's following tests shall be carried out.
i) Mechanical endurance test shall be carried out by closing and opening of all the MCB's,
switches etc.
Ii) Insulation resistance test shall be carried out between phases and between phase to earth
bus, keeping the isolating switch in open position. Similar test shall be carried out keeping the
isolating switch in closed position.
iii) All the interlocks, controls and tripping mechanisms of the switch gears shall be tested for
their proper functioning.
iv) Each panel shall be provided with a thermostatically controlled space heater of adequate
rating and single-phase plug point and cubicle illumination lamp with switch operated at 240V
AC, 50 Hz. Heaters shall have individual ON-OFF switches.
1.5 Testing Provision of Switchgears
A test device shall be incorporated to check the integrity of the earth leakage detection system
and the tripping mechanism. When the unit is connected to service, pressing the test know shall
trip the ELCB and the operating handle shall move to the ―OFF‖ position.
1.6 TESTS ON CABLE:
ROUTINE TESTS
The following tests constitute Routine Tests, which are carried out on each and every length of
cable before it leaves the factory.
i) Conductor Resistance Test: - This test ensures that conductor resistance is within the specified
limit, thereby verifying that the continuity of conductor is maintained throughout the cable
Page 1126 of 1358

length and that the conductor has the required electrical section . D.C. resistance is measured
at room temperature and is then corrected to standard reference temperature of
20 dg C.
ii) High Voltage Test

This test ensures that insulation will safely withstand the rated voltage with permissible
variation in normal operation.
TYPE TESTS
These tests are carried out on samples taken from each production lot. They are carried out to
prove conformity as regards the general qualities and design to the specification of particular
type of cables.
ACCEPTANCE TEST
These tests are again carried out in the presence of the concerned inspecting authority for
testing , approval and release of material offered for inspection.
The above tests must be conducted at site in presence of Consultant's/IIM INDORE's
representative. Test certificates of the above tests shall be approved by IIM INDORE/Consultant.
The test results shall be recorded on prescribed forms. The test certificates for the test carried
out at site shall be submitted in six copies to the Construction manager/Consultants for
approval.
1.7 TEST ON H. T. CABLES:
The cable shall be type tested and routine tested in accordance with IS-7098 (Part – II) 1985.
The following tests shall be carried out as routine tests on every length of cables
a) Conductor resistance test
b) Partial discharge test
c) High Voltage test
TEST VOLTAGES
The test voltage shall be applied between conductor and screen/armored.

VOLTAGE RATING OF CABLES TEST VOLTAGE
19/11 KV (E) cable 48 KV (rms) for 5 Minutes
The above tests must be conducted at site in presence of Consultant's/IIM INDORE's representative.
Test certificates of the above tests shall be approved by IIM INDORE/Consultant. The test results shall
be recorded on prescribed forms. The test certificates for the test carried out at site shall be submitted
in six copies to the Construction manager/Consultants for approval.
1.8 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
Before the lighting/power installation is made alive the Contractor shall carry out tests enumerated
below in presence of MEP Consultant or his authorized representative. All testing equipment necessary
to carry out the tests shall be arranged by Contractor and the tests results recorded on approved
Page 1127 of 1358

proforma. Nothing extra shall be payable for testing.
1. Before energizing, measure insulation resistance of the cable from phase to phase and that
from phase to ground, Insulation resistance of the busbars at the lighting panel from phase to
phase and from phase to ground shall be measured before energizing the panel and should
comply latest IS.
2. Current and voltage of all phase shall be measured at the lighting panel busbars with all
circuits on with fixture and also in all switchboard. Voltage to be check between Phase, Earth &
Neutral in isolated condition.
3.Check the earth continuity for all sockets outlets. A fixed relative position of the phase and
neutral connection inside the socket shall be established for sockets.
4.The earth electrodes shall be tested for earth resistance by means of standard earth tester.
The resistance between the earthing system and the general mass of earth shall not be greater
than 1 ohm.
5.While crossing the expansion joints in building conduits shall be provided with flexible pipe
shall not be more than 250 mm, at both the ends of conduit proper flexible couplings shall be
provided and earth wire shall be properly connected to earthing terminal of coupling.
6.Contractor should quote after site visit only. In case for cable trench, street light pole pit,
earthing pit etc. or any place where Contractor has to dig the earth in hard strata or rock he has
to do so at quoted rates only for item. No blasting shall be allowed for such digging.
7. For earthing of street light tubular pole 8 SWG GI wire as per standard specification is used.
8. All testing report’s for all equipments shall be generated in the presence of Authority
Engineer & submit along with the handing over documents to the IIM INDORE.
1.9 Testing / Commissioning Of Conduit Wiring
Before the lighting /power installation is made alive the contractor shall carry out tests enumerated
below in presence of Authority Engineer or his authorized representative . All testing equipment
necessary to carry out the tests shall be arranged by contractor/the tests results recorded on approved
proforma . Nothing extra shall be payable for testing.
a. Measure insulation resistance of each circuit without lamps being in place / it should not be
less than 5 megaohms to earth.
b. Current / voltage of all phase shall be measured at the lighting panel busbar with all circuits
on with fixture /also in all switchboard.
c. Check the earth continuity for all sockets outlets. A fixed relative position of the phase /neutral
connection inside the socket shall be established for sockets.
d. Load Balancing – Balancing of circuits in three phase installation shall be planned before the
commencement of wiring and shall be strictly adhered to.
e. Fall of potential – The drop in pressure between the main switch terminals and the farthest
current consuming apparatus will not exceed 2% with all devices switched ON. The number of
points controlled per circuit shall be as per I.E . Rules if not specified particularly.
f. Ratings : For purpose of determining sizes of sub mains and controlling switches , the
following ratings for points shall be assumed.
i) Ceiling Light Point - 100 Watts.

ii) Conveyance plug points - 100 watts.
iii) Fan Points - 60 watts.
iv) Domestic power plug - 250 watts.
Page 1128 of 1358

1.10 Testing of HT SWITCHBOARD:

i) Type Tests
Certificates to be provided by HT Switchboard Vendor for the following:
Power frequency withstand
Short time withstand
Duty cycle
Impulse withstand.
Degree of protection
ii) Routine Tests

Following Routine tests in line with IEC62271 shall be carried out at HT Switchboard manufacturer's
factory & tests certificates for the same shall be supplied with dispatch documents :
High Voltage test on LT Circuit
Opening and Closing Time of VCB
Secondary Injection Test for Protective Relays
General Functional Checks
iii) Recommended Tests at Site and Examination of Work

Vendor to list all recommended tests to be conducted at site.
Upon completion of installation of HT VCB and after building circuitry has been energized,
commissioning agency shall apply electrical energy to demonstrate capability and compliance with
requirements. Where possible, correct malfunctioning units at site, then retest to demonstrate
compliance, otherwise, remove and replace with new units and proceed with retesting. In case
commissioning assistance is required, vendor shall depute their engineer for supervision of
commissioning and guidance.
1.11 Testing of Oil Cooled Transformer
Routine Tests
During manufacturing and on completion, all transformer shall be subjected to the routine
tests as per relevant Indian Standard.
Type Test
Following type test shall be performed on transformer in accordance with relevant Indian
Standards:
Temperature rise test.
Test Witness
Tests shall be performed in presence of Owner’s representative, if so desired by the Owner.
The Contractor shall give at least fifteen (15) days advance notice of the date when the tests
are to be carried out.
1.12 PERFORMANCE TESTS:
i) The bidder shall clearly indicate in his offer which are the tests included. Also, unit rates shall be
quoted for any price adjustments based on inclusion/ exclusion of any specific tests.
ii) The following routine tests shall be carried out on the transformer as listed below but not limited to
Page 1129 of 1358

this. These shall be included in the quoted price.
(c) Measurement of winding resistance

(d) Measurement of voltage ratio and check of phase displacement
(e) Measurement of impedance voltage / short circuit
impedance (principaltapping) and load loss at 50% and
100% load
(f) Measurement of no load loss and current
(g) Measurement of insulation resistance
(h) Induced Over voltage withstand test
(i) Separate source voltage withstand test
(j) Pressure test
(k) Oil leakage test
(l) Dielectric test
(m) Tests on Off load tap changers
(n) Measurement of acoustic noise level
(o) 2 kV withstand test for all wiring
(p) Zero phase sequence impedance test.
Page 1130 of 1358

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS- FIRE FIGHTING SYSTEM
FIRE FIGHTING WORKS- FIRE PROTECTIONS

Scope of work shall include design, engineering, supply, installation, testing & commissioning of
firefighting system. All material shall be conforming to relevant IS specifications wherever exists and
subject to approval of the Engineer in charge. The firefighting shall be carried out strictly as per NBC -
2016. Testing, commissioning & getting approvals from various inspection authorities and assist IIM
Indore in obtaining No objection certificate (NOC) for occupation of buildings.
1.1 TENDER DRAWINGS

For guidance of the bidder, drawings (Internal Fire Fighting Layout/External Fire Layout, etc.) are
enclosed with these tender documents. These drawings are broadly indicative of the work to be carried
out. The contractor on award of work will furnish detailed stagewise working drawings as required in
advance for approval of Engineer and assist in getting the same approved by Local Fire Authority/other
statutory bodies. No claim whatsoever shall be admissible on account of changes that may be
introduced by the Engineer/ Local Fire Authority.
1.2 SHOP DRAWINGS/TECHNICAL DATA SHEETS

The contractor shall prepare and furnish all shop drawings including floor plans & Terrace, Schematic
Fire Fighting Layout/External Fire Layout showing sprinklers, Fire Hydrants/First Aid Hose, Zonal Control
Valves, Extinguishers, Signage’s, Terrace layout with OHT. Such shop drawings shall be based on the
Architectural drawings/Tender Drawings and requirements laid down in the Specifications, and as per
site conditions. The manufacturing of equipment shall be commenced only after the shop drawings/GA
Drawings/ technical data sheet along with pump curves are approved in writing by the Engineer. Such
drawings shall be coordinated with other services’ work. These shop drawings will be approved by
Authority which will be considered as base for execution of firefighting work.
1.3 COMPLETION / AS BUILT DRAWINGS

On completion of the work and before issuance of certificate of virtual completion, the contractor shall
submit to the Engineer –in-Charge, General Layout drawings, drawn at approved scale indicating layout
of all Firefighting items, piping and its accessories “As installed”. As built drawings shall be prepared
taking approved shop drawings as base &incorporating all changes/ modifications as per site conditions.
These drawings shall include the following: -
• Firefighting floor layout includes terrace indicating internal hydrants, sprinklers complete
with pipe dia., pipe spacing interval etc.
• Complete schematic as installed.
• UG Sumps, Location of External Hydrants, Fire Hose Cabinet, 2-way/4-way fire brigade inlet
connection, Draw out connection, Fire Extinguishers, Earth pipes, route of earthling
conductors etc.
• The route of all cables and pipes runs along with size details and mode of installation.
• General Layout of Pump House including all details mentioned in Panels and other
equipment/accessories location and their dimensions etc.
1.4 DRAWINGS & DOCUMENTS

The contractor shall submit to the Engineer the following documents on completion of the work and
before issuance of virtual completion.
• Warranty for required equipment installed.
• As Built Drawings
• Material Test Certificates
Page 1131 of 1358

• Catalogues/Brochures
• Operation and Maintenance Manuals
• List of recommended spares and consumables
• All approvals including technical approvals and sanctions.
• NOC from Fire authority before commencement of execution & after completion of entire
work etc.
1.5 SANCTION/ APPROVALS FROM STATUTORY AUTHORITIES/ LOCAL FIRE AUTHORITY

The contractor shall be fully responsible and shall carry out following activities: -
• Preparation & submission of working drawings
• Obtaining the approval of drawings
• Arranging inspection of site by officials of the Authority
• Assist in obtaining the final No objection/ completion certificate after submitting required
documents.
• Assist in any other statutory approvals required.
1.6 MANUFACTURING
The responsibility for ensuring the manufacture of the equipment as per the specifications shall be
solely that of the contractor. The contractor shall be responsible for selection of materials as per agreed
specifications and BOQ.
1.7 MAKE OF MATRIALS/MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTION

Only approved makes as mentioned in our approved make list of tender documents of material shall
be used. The Contractor shall furnish Technical data sheets / GA drawings of all items before placing
P.O. The contractor shall get the samples of required items approved from the Authority as conveyed
by E-I-C before commencing the supply. In case of any discrepancy/anomalies wrt specifications, prior
intimation from Contractor to E-I-C to be given. Final decision lies with Authority for according to
approvals. Any specific instruction furnished by the manufacturer covering the points not mentioned in
the technical specifications of the tender shall be brought to the notice of E-I-C in writing for further
instructions in this regard at appropriate time.
MATERIAL TESTING
The E-I-C shall have full power to get any material of work to be tested by an independent agency at
contractor’s expense in order to prove the soundness and adequacy.
1.8 INSPECTION AND TESTING

• All equipment shall be inspected and tested as per an agreed Quality Assurance Plan
before the same is packed and dispatched from the contractor’s works. The contractor
shall carry out tests as specified/ directed by engineer.
• The contractor shall perform all such tests as may be necessary to meet requirements of
Local Authorities, Municipal or other statutory laws/ bye-laws in force. Nothing extra shall
be paid for these.
• The E-I-C may, at his sole discretion, carry out inspection at different stages during
manufacturing and final testing after manufacturing.
• Approvals or passing of any inspection by the engineer or his authorized representative
shall not, however, prejudice the right of the engineer to reject the plan if it does not
comply with the specification when erected or give complete satisfaction in service.
1.9 TRAINING OF DEPARTMENT PERSONNEL

• The contractor shall train the IIM INDORE personnel to become proficient in operating the
Page 1132 of 1358

equipment installed. Training shall be done before the expiry of the defects liability period.
• The period of training shall be adequate and mutually agreed upon by the Engineer and
contractor.
• The IIM INDORE personnel shall also be trained for routine maintenance work and
lubrication, overhauling, adjustments, testing, minor repairs and replacement.
• Nothing extra shall be paid to the contractor for training IIM INDORE personnel.
1.10 PERFORMANCE GUARANTEE

At the close of the work and before issue of final certificate of virtual completion by the engineer, the
contractor shall furnish written guarantee indemnifying the IIM INDORE against defective materials and
workmanship for a period of one year after completion and handing over. The contractor shall hold
himself fully responsible for reinstallation or replace free of cost to the IIM INDORE.
• Any defective material or equipment supplied by the contractor.
• Any material or equipment supplied by the IIM INDORE which is proved to be damaged or
destroyed as a result of defective workmanship by the contractor.
PIPING FOR WET RISER SYSTEM

2.1 SCOPE
This section covers the details of the requirement of piping used in wet riser system, including the
associated auxiliary equipment.
2.2 GENERAL
The wet riser system shall remain pressurized at all times during operation, and as such the piping work
shall be carried out to withstand the same.
2.3 PIPES AND FITTINGS

Pipes and fittings means tees, elbows, couplings, flanges, reducers etc. and all such connecting devices
that are needed to complete the piping work in its totality. Screwed fittings shall be approved type
malleable or cast iron with reinforced ring on all edges of the fittings suitable for screwed joints. Forged
steel fittings of approved type with "V" groove for welded joints. Fabricated fittings shall be not being
permitted for pipe diameters 50 mm and below. When used, they shall be fabricated, welded and
inspected in workshops whose welding procedures have been approved by the TAC as per TAC rule
4102 for sprinkler system and applicable to hydrant and sprinkler System under the supervision of
Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore. For "T" connections, pipes shall be drilled and reamed. Cutting by gas or
electrical welding will not be accepted. Pipes for Wet Riser system shall be of GI C Class Pipe conforming
to Indian Standards: Specification IS: 1239 (Part-I) 1990 (Light, Medium & Heavy Series) Black&
galvanized shall be malleable iron suitable for welding or tapered screwed threads.
2.4 JOINTING
2.4.1 Screwed (50 mm dia pipes and below)
Joint for GI pipes and fittings shall be metal to metal thread joints. A small amount of red lead
may be used for lubrication and rust prevention. Joints shall not be welded or caulked.
2.4.2 Welded (65 mm dia and above) Joints between GI. pipes and fittings shall be made with
the pipes and fittings having "V" groove and welded with electrical resistance welding in an
approved manner. Butt welded joints are not acceptable.
2.4.3 Flanged
Flanged joints shall be provided on:
Page 1133 of 1358

• Straight runs not exceeding 30 m on pipelines 80 mm dia and above.

• Both ends of any fabricated fittings e.g. bend tees etc. of 65 mm dia or larger diameter.
• For jointing all types of valves, appurtenances, pumps, connections with other type of
pipes, to water tanks and other places necessary and required as per good engineering
practice.
• Flanges shall be as per Table 17 of IS-6392.with appropriate number of G.I. nuts and
bolts, 3 mm insertion neoprene gasket complete.
2.4.4 Unions
Approved type of dismountable unions on pipes lines 65 mm and below in similar places as
specified for flanges. Joint for GI Pipe pipes and fittings shall be metal to screw grid up to 50 mm
dia and above 65 mm dia welded joints. A small amount of red lead may be used for lubrication
and rust prevention in threaded joints. Hold tight will be used for threaded pipes joint. All the
welding shall be radiographically tested. Joints between GI pipes, valves and other
appurtenances, pumps etc. shall be made with GI flanges with an appropriate number of bolts.
Flanged joints shall be made with a 3mm thick insertion rubber gasket.
2.4.5 DIA OF FLANGE AND HOLE CONFORMING

IS: Size of pipe 80 mm 100 mm 150 mm 200 mm Dia of flange 200 mm 220 mm 285 mm 340
mm Flange thickness 20mm 22mm 24mm Dia of bolt 16 mm 16 mm 16 mm 16 mm No. of hole
4 mm 4 mm 8 mm 8 mm.
2.4.6 PIPE PROTECTION

Corrosion protection tape shall be wrapped on Fire pipes to be buried in ground. This corrosion
protection tape shall comprise of coal tar/asphalt component supported on fabric of organic or
inorganic fibre and minimum 4 mm thick and conform to requirement of IS : 10221-Code of
practice for coating and wrapping of underground steel pipe line. Before application of
corrosion protection tape all foreign matter on pipe shall be removed with the help of wire
brush and suitable primer shall be applied over the pipe thereafter. The primer shall be allowed
to dry until the solvent evaporates and the surface becomes tacky. Both primer and tape shall
be furnished by the same manufacturer. Corrosion protection tape shall then be wound around
the pipe in spiral fashion and bounded completely to the pipe. There shall be no air pocket or
bubble beneath the tape. The overlaps shall be 15 mm and 250 mm shall be left uncoated on
either end of pipe to permit installation and welding. This area shall be coated in situ after the
pipe line is installed. The tapes shall be wrapped in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations. If application is done in cold weather, the surface of the pipe shall be pre-
heated until it is warm to touch and traces of moisture are removed and then primer shall be
applied and allowed to dry. Holiday Testing for wrapping and coating is essential. Holiday testing
may preferably be carried by flexible and detachable ring probe, which will enable the entire
360 degree of the surface of the pipe to be scanned.
2.4.7 PIPE SUPPORTS

All pipe clamps and supports shall be galvanized in mild steel. When fabricated from M.S. steel
sections, the supports shall be factory galvanized before use at site. Welding of galvanized
clamps and supports will not be permitted. Pipes shall be hung by means of an expandable
anchor fastener of approved make and design (Dash Fasteners or equivalent). The hangers and
clamps shall be fastened by means of galvanized nuts and bolts. The size/diameter of the
anchor fastener and the clamp shall be suitable to carry the weight of water filled pipe and dead
load normally encountered. For pipe spacing, the stringent of the IS Code- clause no. 10.3.10,
table -11 & below mentioned table should be opted.
Page 1134 of 1358

2.4.8 ORIFICE PLATES

Contractor shall provide orifice flanges fabricated from 6 mm thick SS plates on the branch lines
feeding different zones/ floors (as required) so as to allow required flow of water at 3.5 Kg/
sq.cm. Pressure. The contractor shall furnish design for these orifice flanges. The orifice shall
be plain central hole without burs, diameter not less than half of the internal diameter of pipe
to which it is fitted.
2.4.9 AIR CUSHION TANK AND AIR RELEASE VALVE

Air vessel on top of each wet riser/ sprinkler piping shall be installed before execution for
approval fabricated out of at least 8 mm thick steel to withstand the pressure, with dished ends
and supporting legs. This shall be of 250 mm dia and 200mm high. This shall be completed with
necessary flange connection to the wet riser/ sprinkler piping and air release valve with
necessary piping to meet the functional requirement of the system. The air vessel shall be of
continuous welded construction and painted with Red Color. This shall be tested for twice the
working pressure. The drain arrangement will have 25mm dia GM valve with required
accessories and pressure gauge. ARV shall be of 25 mm of forged brass body & chrome plated
& its components shall be of anticorrosive material. Test Pressure (Hydrostatic) for Shell: 15 bar
(220 psig), Seat: 10 bar (150 psig) & Maximum Working Temperature: 110 degrees
2.4.10 VALVES, GAUGES

Butter-fly, Sluice valves and NRV above 65 mm shall be of cast iron body .They shall conform to
type PN 16 of IS: 13095,780. Valve wheels shall be of right-hand type and have an arrowhead
engraved or cast thereon the direction for turning open and closing. Butterfly valves of various
dia. as per requirements shall be of wafer type, conforming to PN-16 rating with SS disc. It shall
be lever operated. The rubber lining shall be integrally moulded with EPDM/Nitrile rubber. The
O-ring shall be made of nitrile rubber. The lever shall be made preferably of carbon steel. The
test pressure of Shell- 24 Bar, Seat:17.6 bar & maximum working pressure-16 bar, maximum
working temperature :90-degree celcius. In case of any discrepancies between manufacturer’s
standards & above specified values, these parameters shall be in compliance with relevant IS
codes. Non-return valves/ Dual plate check valve of various dia. as per requirements shall be of
cast iron body. It should have Nitrile Rubber/EPDM Seal & Disc of stainless steel. They shall be
swing check type/wafer type in horizontal runs and lift check type in vertical runs of piping. It
should be of min. PN-16 rating. Test Pressure (Hydrostatic) :Shell: 24.50 kg, Seat:16 kg/Sq.cm,
maximum operating temperature- 80 degree C. In case of any discrepancies between
manufacturer’s standards & above specified values, these parameters shall be in compliance
with relevant IS codes. Sluice valve shall be of CI construction. The seat shall be of bronze. Hand
Wheel shall be of cast iron. It should be of min. PN-16 rating. The Ball valve of various dia. Shall
be of forged brass construction & shall have screwed female ends. It shall be lever operated
with quarter turn & shall be provided with forged brass hard chrome plated ball. It shall be
complete with premium quality PTFE gland packing & seating. The ball valve shall be with
chrome finish wherever required. Test Pressure(Hydrostatic): Shell: 25 kg, Seat: 16 kg/Sq.cm,
maximum operating temperature- 220 degree C. In case of any discrepancies between
manufacturer’s standards & above specified values, these parameters shall be in compliance
with relevant IS codes Pressure gauge (Bourdon Type) shall be of suitable range with SS 304/316
Construction, case of 150/100mm diameter. The gauges shall have brass cocks. The accuracy
range of pressure gauge shall be in the range of +- 0.5 % to 1%. It shall conform to IP 67
protection. The dial shall be Aluminium white background with black letters. The windows shall
be made of plain & toughend glass. The suitability of pressure gauge shall be in the temperature
Page 1135 of 1358

range of (-) 20-degree Celcius to 60 degree celcius. The gear mechanism shall be of SS 304 & the
connection material shall be of SS316 L. Pointer shall be of black aluminum. It shall be complete
with all accessories such as siphon, gauge cock, snubber & needle valve etc. Pressure range
shall be between 0 to 20 kg/Sq.cm.
Double flanged MS pot strainers of required dia. With M.S. body and SS 40-grade mesh strainer,
PN 16 shall be provided either at tank suction line or at individual pump suction line. Orifice
plates shall be made of 6mm thickness Brass material to reduce pressure on individual hydrants
to operating pressure of 3.5-kg/ sq.cm. Design of the same shall be given by the contractor as
per location and pressure condition of each hydrant.
2.4.11 EXTERNAL YARD HYDRANTS

External yard hydrants shall be of ‘Stand Post’ type conforming to IS: 908 and comprise stand
post for single or double outlet, duck foot bend, flange riser and single headed brass/ gunmetal
valve conforming type A/ type-B and conforming to IS: 5290.The stand post column shall be of
cast iron, cast in one piece, conforming to grade 20 of IS: 210 or M.S. pipe. The internal diameter
at the top shall be at least 80 mm. The outlet shall be angled towards ground, with
instantaneous spring lock type gunmetal female coupling of 63 mm dia. For connecting to hose
pipe. It shall be with ISI marked with Sl. No. clearly mentioned. The landing valve shall be of
oblique pattern shall be complete with GI twist release chain with cap. The manufacturer’s name
& trademark along with year of manufacture & other details like size & type shall, be clearly
mentioned. Valves shall be provided with one coat of primer & subsequently painted with 2
coats of red paint with shade no. 536 conforming to IS 5. The paint shall conform to IS 2932.
Hand Wheel shall be painted black. It shall be BIS approved. Blank caps shall be made of gun
metal. The hydrostatic pressure test shall be carried out at 21 kg/Sq.cm for 2.5 mins. The flow
test shall be at 7 kg/Sq.cm at 900 lpm. The water tightness seat test shall be at 14 kg/Sq.cm. In
case of any discrepancies between manufacturer’s standards & above specified values, these
parameters shall be in compliance with relevant IS codes. RRL Hose pipe shall be controlled
percolating (CP) type, ISI marked (IS:8423), 63 mm dia x 15 m long (2 Nos.) complete with
instantaneous type gunmetal 63 mm dia ISI marked Male & Female couplings (IS:903) bound
and riveted to hose pipe with copper rivets and 1.5 mm copper wire. Bursting pressure not less
than 22 Kg/Sq.cm. External Hydrant post shall also include standard short size 63mm dia.
Gunmetal branch pipe with gun metal nozzle of 20 mm nominal bore outlet with instantaneous
type 63 mm dia coupling complete & confirming to IS:903. M.S. fire hose weatherproof cabinet
(750x600x250mm 8namele.) made out of 16 gauge M.S. sheet capable of accommodating
landing valve, hose pipes, fittings & accessories. The box shall have a front glass door with lock
and key arrangement & shall be painted with one coat of primer & two coat of finished stove
8nameled post office red colour paint & “FIRE HOSE” written on front isolation wall should be
considered for external hydrant post.
2.4.12 INTERNAL HYDRANTS

The landing valve shall be of oblique pattern shall be complete with GI twist release chain with
cap. The manufacturer’s name & trademark along with year of manufacture & other details like
size & type shall, be clearly mentioned. Valves shall be provided with one coat of primer &
subsequently painted with 2 coats of red paint with shade no. 536 conforming to IS 5. The paint
shall conform to IS 2932. Hand Wheel shall be painted black. It shall be BIS approved. Blank
caps shall be made of gun metal. Hydrostatic pressure test shall be carried out at 21 kg/Sq.cm
for 2.5 mins. The flow test shall be at 7 kg/Sq.cm at 900 lpm. The water tightness seat test shall
be at 14 kg/Sq.cm. In case of any discrepancies between manufacturer’s standards & above
specified values, these parameters shall be in compliance with relevant IS codes. RRL Hose pipe
Page 1136 of 1358

shall be nonoperculate type, ISI marked (IS:8423), 63 mm dia x 15 m long (2 Nos.) complete with
instantaneous type gunmetal 63 mm dia ISI marked Male & Female couplings (IS:903) bound
and riveted to hose pipe with copper rivets and 1.5 mm copper wire. Bursting pressure not less
than 22Kg/Sq.cm. External Hydrant post shall also include standard short size 63mm dia
gunmetal branch pipe with detachable hexagonal nozzle of 20 mm nominal bore outlet with
instantaneous type 63 mm dia coupling complete & confirming to IS:903. Internal hydrant shall
be with fireman axe with heavy rubber handle. Swing type First Aid hose reel in red color with
36 meters long and 20 mm dia heavy duty rubber water hose, 20 mm dia globe valve stop cock,
terminating with SS coupling & nozzle of 5mm outlet with shut off valve confirming to IS 8090 –
1976 complete with drum and brackets for fixing on wall, bolts & nuts conforming to IS:884-
1969 complete as required to be provided SS Double door capable of accommodating fire hose
reel, landing valve, hose pipes, fittings, 1 No. CO2 & 1 No. Dry powder type portable fire
extinguishers & accessories. The door shall have a front glass with lock and key arrangement &
shall be painted with one coat of primer & two coat of finished stove enameled post office red
color paint & “FIRE HOSE” written on front.(Approx. size of door: 2100 mm Height, Width of Door
as per Shaft size)
2.4.13 FIRE BRIGADE INLET CONNECTIONS/ DRAW OFF CONNECTION

One set of 2/4 ways collector head Fire Brigade connection shall be provided at underground
tank, Ring Main, Sprinkler system and individual wet risers as specified conforming to IS 904.The
inlet to the wet riser sprinkler header shall be with 150 mm dia butterfly or sluice valve and non-
return valve. The scope shall include necessary reducers, tees bends and special fittings as
required. It should be provided with M.S. enclosure fabricated from 1.5 mm thick M.S. sheet,
front glass locking arrangement supported on M.S. structural members, painting with two coats
of postal red enamel.
Fire brigade inlet connection (fire department connection) consisting of 4 Nos. 63 mm dia
instantaneous inlet arranged on a 50 mm dia header, 1 No. 150 mm diameter sluice valve, with
in built Non-return valve and wall mounted box of M.S. construction made out of 16 gauge MS
Sheet with glass door to house the above mentioned components. Fire brigade draw out
connection (fire department connection) with suction pipe GI ‘C’ 100 mm dia. & 100 mm dia.
Foot valve & steel chain including wall mounted box M.S. construction made out of 16 gauge MS
Sheet with glass door to house the above mentioned components. Inlet breeching having C.I.
body Two way gun metal 63 mm dia instantaneous inlets conforming to IS 903 fitted with Non-
return valves, 25 mm dia gun metal drain cock, blank cap, brass chains and 150 mm dia flanges
with all accessories suitable for local fire tender complete as required.
PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS:

Portable Fire Extinguishers:
Dry Chemical; Powder type Fire Extinguisher of capacity 6 kg and 9Kg. confirms to IS IS 2190 : 1992,
bearing ISI mark, (OutsideCartridge). CO2 type Fire Extinguisher of capacity 22.5 kg filled with Co2 Gas
as per IS 15222 with controll discharge mechanism fitted with Hose, Horn & Trolley confirms to IS 2878
bearing ISI mark. Co2 Cylinder as per IS 7285. The hydraulic test pressure shall be 250 Bar. The Operating
range shall be between (-) 30-to-55-degree C. It shall be suitable for extinguishing fires of class B &C.
FIRE SIGNAGES: -
Various types of signage are proposed in the complex as per NBC 2016 Part -4. At every floor near Lift
landing diagram showing stairways shall be provided mentioning instructions - 'IN CASE OF FIRE USE
STAIRS UNLESS INSTRUCTED OTHERWISE'. The signage shall be above call button in Lift Lobby. Floor
Signage indicating Exit path will be provided in each floor within the staircase. The Numerical shall be
Page 1137 of 1358

Bold Type of minimum 75 MM height. Each corridor of every floor will have directional signage indicating
Fire Escape route. These Signage may be LED lit with UPS power backup or of photo Luminescent paint.
So that they will be visible in dark in case of power failure. Fire related signages shall be printed on photo
luminescent U1000 aluminum sheet of 1.0 mm (+-10%)/Acrylic Board containing Lumigen II as base
chemical, covered under UV stabilized coating and of appropriate size including fixing on wall, door,
ceiling etc. with proper clamps, hangers, cleats, anchor fasteners etc. complete in all respects. Text shall
be double sided or single sided as per requirements.
INSTALLATION, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING

5.1 SCOPE
This section covers the requirements of installation of the various components of the wet riser system.
A survey of the site of the work shall be made by the contractor before preparation of the detailed
drawings for submission to the department for approval. The installation shall be carried out strictly in
accordance with the approved drawing. The scope of installation work shall include the following, where
or not expressly mentioned in the schedule or work. Filling up the hole in flooring with cement
concrete, after laying the wet riser pipes.
• Necessary supports and camps for wet riser plumbing in the building.
• Excavation of the earth, consolidation and refilling after laying of wet riser piping in ground.
• Provision of necessary brick base or intermediate support as required in approved manner in case
of soils which are no strong enough to support the pipes, thereby likely to case different settlement.
• Necessary anchor block of ample dimensions in 1:2:4 cement concrete at all bends, tee
connections, foot of the wet riser, and other places as required to stand the pressure thrust in
pipes.
• Necessary masonry work/ steel work for supporting hose cabinets near external (yard) hydrants.
• Valve chambers of approved design with external (yard) hydrant.
• Ground level hydrants of approved design, where specified.
• Cutting and making good the damages for the installation work of the riser system
• Orifice plates at individual hydrants as required. Where provision of GI pipe shall below ground
become inescapable, it shall be protected from soil corrosion by two coats of bitumen painting and
wrapped with bituminous Hessian cloth and finish with hot bitumen paint. Each GI pipe shall be
subjected to hydraulic pressure test before installation, in presence of the Engineer or his
authorized representative. External (yard) hydrants shall be located at least 2m away from the face
of the buildings but not more than 15m and be accessible. Distance between the two hydrants
should not be more than 45 meter. Where external hydrants are below ground level , they shall be
enclosed in masonry trenches of size 75Sq.cm and 8cm above ground level. The hydrant shall be
with in 8cm from the top of the enclosure. Landing Valve of Internal hydrant at each floor shall be
located at about 1m above floor level. Valve chambers in ground shall be of 1sqm in size, with
cover.
5.2 PAINTING
Painting of the entire wet riser piping over the ground shall be done with anticorrosive primer and 2
coats of approved paint. The color shall be red to shade No. 536 of IS: 5, Paint shall conform to IS:
2932.The pumps and engine shall be painted after installation with a coat of approved paint to similar
shade as per original supply.
5.3 APPROVAL BY LOCAL BODIES
Page 1138 of 1358

It shall be the responsibility of the contractor to obtain the approval of drawings and to get the
installation inspected and approved by the concerned authorities as may be necessary as per local by-
laws.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR SPRINKLER SYSTEM

All the piping for sprinkler work shall be with GI Class C & shall conform to IS 1239(Part-1) 2004.
6.1 SPRINKLER HEADS

Side wall/Pendant/Upright sprinklers to be provided as per requirements which shall be quick response
type, shall be UL & FM certified, complete with rosette plate, glass bulb temperature rating of 68 degree
Celsius (red color),Quick response type, chrome plated finish & in compliance with NBC 2016 & relevant
IS codes. Wherever false ceiling is there, upright sprinklers to be provided at requisite distance as per
codal provisions.
6.1.1 TYPES
6.1.1.1 CONVENTIONAL PATTERN
• The sprinklers shall be designed to produce a spherical type of discharge with a portion
of water being thrown. The sprinklers shall be suitable for erection in upright position
or pendant position. The designing of installation will be as per IS 15105.
6.1.1.2 SPRAY PATTERN
• The spray type sprinkler shall produce a hemispherical discharge below the plane of
the deflector.
6.1.1.3 CEILING (FLUSH) PATTERN
• These shall be designed for use with concealed pipe work. These shall be installed
pendant with plate or base flush to the ceiling with below the ceiling.
6.1.1.4 SIDE WALL SPRINKLERS
• These shall be designed for installation along with the walls of the room close to the
ceiling. The discharge pattern shall be similar to one quarter of sphere with a small
proportion discharging on the wall behind the sprinklers.
6.1.2 CONSTRUCTION
• BULB: - Bulb shall be made of corrosion free material strong enough to withstand any
water pressure likely to occur in the system. The bulb shall shatter when the
temperature of the surrounding air reaches a predetermined level.
• VALVE ASSEMBLY: - Water passage of the sprinkler shall be closed by a valve assembly
of flexible construction. The valve assembly shall be held in position by the quartzoid
bulb. The assembly be stable and shall withstand pressure surges or external vibration
without displacement.
• YOKE: - The yoke shall be made of high-quality gun metal. The arms of yoke shall be so
designed as to avoid interference with discharge of water from the deflector. The
sprinkler body shall be coated with an approved anti-corrosive treatment if the same is
housed in corrosive conditions.
• DEFLECTOR: - The deflector shall be suitable for either upright or pendent erection. The
deflector shall be designed to give an even distribution of water over the area protected
by each sprinkler.
6.1.3 COLOR CODE

The following color code shall be adopted for classification of sprinkler according to nominal
temperature ratings: Sprinkler Temperature Rating Color of the Bulb68 deg. C Red
Page 1139 of 1358

6.1.4 SIZE OF SPRINKLERS ORIFICES

The following sizes of sprinklers shall be selected for various classes or hazards. Moderate
hazard: 15 mm nominal bore
6.1.5 STOCK OF REPLACEMENT SPRINKLER

The following spare sprinklers shall be supplied along with the system free of cost to be treated
as spare.
Moderate hazard systems: 24 sprinklers
6.1.6 TEMPERATURE RATING

For normal conditions in temperature climates rating of 68 deg. C shall be used. However, the
temperature rating shall be as closed as possible to, but not less than 30 deg. C above the
highest anticipated temperature conditions.
6.1.7 DISTANCE B/W SPRINKLERS, ZONING, LEAKAGE ARRESTING ETC

• Maximum & Minimum Distance between sprinklers, between sprinklers & boundary
wall shall be as per hazard classification of building & relevant IS codes.
• Zoning of sprinklers with ICV to be placed in Plant Room in required buildings to be
done as per relevant IS codes/NBC 2016/CPWD specifications. The sprinkler provision
is to be considered shall be with min. one independent ICV.
• In order to avoid any kind of leakage from sprinklers, it shall be wound with Teflon tape
& any other suitable water-resistant sealing material.
• All measures to be considered so that the sprinkler bulb is cleaned & free from any
blemishes.
• Sprinkler type (pendant/upright/sidewall) shall be conforming to requirements &
relevant IS codes.
6.2 PIPES AND FITTINGS

a. PIPES
• Pipes less than 25mm dia shall not be used and shall be GI conforming to IS: 1239 (Heavy
Class) up to 150mm.
• GI, Heavy Class conforming to IS:3589 for size greater than 150mm.
• Fittings for black steel pipes shall be malleable iron suitable for welding or approved type
cast iron fittings with tapered screwed threads.
b. JOINTING
Joint for GI pipes and fittings shall be metal to metal tapered thread or welded joints. A small
amount of red lead may be used for lubrication and rust prevention in threaded joints. For Pipe
size up to 50mm, Thread Joints are to be considered and for Pipe size above 50mm, Welded joints
are to be considered. Joints between GI pipes, valves and other appurtenances, pumps etc. shall
be made with GI flanges with an appropriate number of bolts. Flanged joints shall be made with a
3mm thick insertion rubber gasket.
c. PIPE PROTECTION
• All pipes above ground and in exposed locations shall be painted with one coat of red oxide
primer and two or more coats of synthetic enamel paint of approved shade.
• Pipes in chase or buried underground shall be painted with two coats of hot bitumen,
wrapped with bituminous Hessian cloth and finished with one coat of hot bitumen paint.
d. PIPE SUPPORTS
All pipes shall be adequately supported from the ceiling or walls from existing inserts by structural
Page 1140 of 1358

clamps fabricated from M.S. structural e.g. rods, channels, angles and flats. All clamps shall be
painted with one coat of red and two coats of black enamel paint. Where inserts are not provided,
the contractor shall provide anchor fasteners.
e. ORIFICE FLANGES
Contractor shall provide orifice flanges fabricated from 6mm thick Brass plates on the branch lines
feeding different zones/ floors so as allow required flow of water at 3.5 kg/ sq.mm pressure. The
contractor shall furnish design for these orifice flanges.
f. Valves
Butterfly or Sluice valves of size 80mm and above shall be double-flanged cast iron conforming to
IS: 780.Check valve shall be of cast iron double flanged conforming to IS: 5312.Valves on pipes
65mm and below shall be heavy pattern gunmetal valves with cast iron wheel seat tested to 20 kg/
sq.mm pressure. Valves shall conform to IS: 778.
g. Drain Valves
Black steel pipe of 50 mm dia conforming to IS: 1239 heavy class with 50 mm gunmetal full way
valve for draining water in the system in low pockets.
6.3 INSTALLATION CONTROL VALVE: -

Installation control valves shall comprise of the following.
• One main stop valve of full way pattern with gunmetal pointer to indicate where open/
shut.
• One automatic alarm valve, fitted with handle and cover.
• One hydraulic alarm motor and gong for sounding a continuous alarm upon out-break of
fire.
• One combined waste and testing valve includes 5 meters of tubing and fittings.
• Alarm stops valve.
• Strainer
• Drain plug.
• Padlock & strap
• Wall box for installation of valve
6.4 ZONAL CONTROL VALVE: -

Zonal Control Valve Assembly shall comprise of the following:
• Butterfly Valve
• Non-Return Valve
• Flow Switch
• Pressure Gauge
• Drain Valve
• Sight Glass
• Necessary MS piping
Flexible connection for sprinklers shall be braided type of various lengths as

per site requirements & shall be UL listed & FM approved.
6.5 ANNUNCIATION SPRINKLER PANEL

The equipment for control panel should be compact neatly wired and enclosed in a suitable 2 mm
M.S. sheet that is suitably treated against corrosion. The control panel should be painted with
Page 1141 of 1358

enamel paint. The panel shall consist of:

a. Panel should be made in a module of suitable nos. of zones e.g. each module will have audible
and visual indications and will monitor the circuit conditions with 24V DC battery.A.C. Power
Supply
Fault and Fire indication lamp Alarm acknowledgment push buttons
b. The circuits provided in the control panel for each zone shall indicate the
following conditions:
i. Open Circuit in zone wiring
ii. Short Circuit in zone wiring
iii. Normal conditions
iv. Power failure
v. Low battery
c. The Automatic annunciation panel shall be suitable for operation on 24V DC and shall be
provided with a power supply unit suitable to operate on A.C. mains of 230 V with a variation of
10%. The system shall be so designed that in case of failure of A.C. main supply it shall
automatically change over to battery supply.
d. Suitable protection may be provided against charging the battery over and above the
specified values.
PRESSURE GAUGES
It shall be provided at the following locations.
a. Just above alarm valve
b. Just below alarm valve, on the installation stop valve
c. On the Wet Riser in every Fire Hose Cabinet Shaft.
d. Any other location as per requirement.
INSTALLATION OF PIPING
A. BELOW GROUND PIPING:
Underground piping should be installed in masonry trenches with cover or reinforced concrete.
The pipe work shall be supported at regular intervals of 2.5m with masonry or RCC supports.
All pipes shall be protected against corrosion with two coats of bituminous painting and
wrapped with pypkote or bitumen Hessian cloth and finish with one coat of hot bitumen paint.
B. ABOVE GROUND PIPING: -

a. All above ground piping shall be installed on suitable pipe hangers/ supports as required.
The hangers shall be made of MS angles, channels, channels etc. and painted to the
required finish (with suitable synthetic enamel paint). The spacing supports shall be as
follows.
i. 25 mm - 50 mm dia. 1.5mtr.
ii. 65mm – 100mm dia. 1.75 mtr.
iii. Above 100mm 2 mtr.
iv. Vertical Piping 2 mtr.
b. Piping shall be screwed type up to 50 mm dia. Welding of joints will be allowed for pipes of
65mm mm of larger diameters.
TESTING & COMMISSIONING: -

7.1 PRESSURE TESTING OF PIPES
During laying of pipes, the same shall be subjected to 10 Kg/cm2 hydraulic pressure for a period of
24 hrs., in sections. After completion of the work, all valves/fittings shall be installed in position and
entire system shall be tested for 24 Hrs. at a pressure of 10 Kg/cm2.The drop of pressure up to 0.5
Page 1142 of 1358

Kg/cm2 shall be accepted. The pressure Testing may be carried out by means of an Electric Driven
Pump or manually operated Test Pump. All leaks and defects in different joints, noticed during the
testing and before commissioning shall satisfaction of engineer. Testing of fittings/ equipment shall
be carried out either at site or at works in the presence of a representative of the engineer. Test
certificates shall also be furnished by the contractor. The automatic operation of the system and
alarms for the various functional requirements, as laid down in this specification, shall be
satisfactory carried out in the presence of Authority Engineer/ IIM Indore.
7.2 INTERNAL HYDRANT/SPRINKLER & EXTERNAL HYDRANT SYSTEM: -

After laying and jointing, the entire piping shall be tested to hydrostatic test pressure. The
pipes/sprinkler heads shall be slowly charged with water so that the air is expelled from the pipes.
The pipes shall be allowed to stand full of water for a period of not less than 24 hours and then
tested under pressure.
The test pressure shall be 12 kg/cm2. The test pressure shall be applied by means of a manually
operated test pump or by a power-driven test pump to be provided by the contractor. The Lines
shall be flushed before completion of building work so that any foreign matter which might have
entered the system is taken out. The Jockey Pump should be operated, and Valves must be open
at different locations. After completion of work, all valves/ fittings shall be installed in position &
entire system shall be tested for 24 hours at a pressure of 10 kg/cm2. The drop of pressure up to
0.5 kg/cm2 shall be accepted.
7.3 FINAL TESTING

After completion, all operation checks shall be carried out for automatic operation of the system
including flow test. The exercise shall be repeated a couple of times to ensure trouble free
operation. COMMISSIONING: - Before commissioning, entire system be flushed properly. As soon
as the work is completed the system shall be commissioned and made available for use. If required,
isolate the system of under construction portion of the buildings. For automatic operation sprinkler
system by using inspection testing valve. In this case annunciation panel of that particular zone and
mechanical gong valve should work. Overhead Tanks shall be designed so that the Pipe Inlet &
Outlet Spout of Tank and the opening lid is not at the same level so as to ensure smooth filling of
Tanks and subsequent overflow. All other testing & commissioning methods to be adopted &
performed as prevalent IS Codes/CPWD Specifications & NBC 2016 norms.
7.4 PAINTING
Painting of the entire wet riser piping & sprinkler piping over the ground shall be done with 1 coat
of anticorrosive primer and 2 or more coats of approved paint till the satisfaction of Authority
Engineer/ IIM Indore ensuring that one coat of paint is done after final painting of the pump house
& buildings. The color shall be posting office stove enameled red with shade No. 536 of IS: 5, Paint
shall also conform to IS:2932. The pumps/ engine shall be painted after installation with a coat of
approved paint to similar shade as per original supply.
Page 1143 of 1358

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR FURNITURE
1. Reception Counter
Structure:
- 19mm thick Ply/ board
- Engineered Quartz /19 mm thick acrylic solid material.
- Counter size as per the drawing and the directions of Competent Authority IIM Indore
- Color of work top shall be approved prior to fabrication (White)
- Counter shall have both sides polished
- All edge shall be chamfered polished as per the design.
- The cable manager on the work top shall be of flexible plastic component for easy and safe passage
ofwires
Top & Front Modesty Panel:

- 19mm thick acrylic solid surface with seamless joints
- Color of acrylic solid surface shall be approved prior to fabrication
- IIM Logo to be provided on the Modesty panel as per the instructions of the competent authority IIM
Indore/ as per the approved drawings.
2. Reception Cabinet below the counter

Structure:
- Cabinet size as per the drawing
- Color of cabinet shall be approved prior to fabrication (Wooden Grain Textured)
- Cabinet shall have both sides laminated
- Outer sides 1mm thick laminates & inner sides 1mm thick laminates
- All edge shall be provided with machine pressed minimum 1mm thick PVC lipping/ edge binding
3. Wall Paneling at Reception

Structure:
- Thickness and size as per the drawing
- Paneling shall have one side with 12 mm engineered quartz and artificial grass.
- Outer sides 1mm thick fire retardant laminate
- Shade and finish of Laminate shall be approved prior to fabrication
Page 1144 of 1358

4. Publication Display Cabinet

Structure:
- Cabinet size as per the drawing
- Color of cabinet shall be approved prior to fabrication.
- Cabinet shall have Engineered Quartz on one side and approved 1mm thick fire-retardant laminate
on the back.
5. Worktable (4x2)/(5x2)
Work Top:
- 19 mm thick ply confirming to IS 5509.
- Work top size as per the approved drawing (600 x 1200)/(600 x 1500)
- Shade and finish of work top shall be approved prior to fabrication (Wooden Grain Textured)
- Work top shall have both side 1mm thick fire-retardant laminate
- Work top edge shall be provided with minimum 1mm thick PVC lipping/ edge binding
Metal Framework:
- Metal legs of Corner table shall be SS chrome finished
- Table frame made from square x 1.2mm thick SS chrome finished Pipe. Welded/ fabricated to high
level of accuracy & finish.
6. Three Drawer Pedestal
- Three drawer pedestals shall be of 19mm thick ply confirming to IS 5509 and with 1mm thick fire
retardant laminate on both sides
- Pedestal shall have adjustable wheel mounted on it
- Drawers shall be of 2 equal size and 1 file drawer duly fitting under the work surface
- Drawers shall have telescopic channel arrangement for smooth operation, with best quality
stainlesssteel handle and latest technology locking system
- Color of Pedestal shall be approved prior to fabrication (Wooden Grain Textured or White finished)
All edges shall be provided with machine pressed 1mm thick PVC lipping/ edge binding
Page 1145 of 1358

Corner Table
Work Top:
- 19 mm thick ply confirming to IS 5509
- Work top size as per the approved drawing
- Color of work top shall be approved prior to fabrication (Wooden Grain Textured)
- Work top shall have both side 1mm thick fire retardant laminate
- Work top edge shall be provided with machine pressed minimum 1mm thick PVC lipping/ edge
binding
Metal Frame work:

- Table frame made from Square x 1.2mm thick SS chrome finished Pipe
8. Study Table
Work Top:
- 19 mm thick ply confirming to IS 5509
- Work top size as per the approved drawing
- Color of work top shall be approved prior to fabrication (Wooden Grain Textured)
- Work top shall have both side 1mm thick fire retardant laminate
binding
Metal Frame work:

- Table frame made from25mm x 25mm Square x 2mm thick SS chrome finished Pipe
Overall Size of Table

- Length 900 mm, Width 600 mm, Height 750 mm
Page 1146 of 1358

9. Storage Cabinet
- Storage Cabinets shall be of 19 mm thick ply confirming to IS 5509.
- The ply shall be laminated on both sides with 1mm thick fire-retardant laminate.
- The shade and finish of laminates shall be approved before fabrication.
- Cabinet shall have one adjustable shelf for effective space utilization
- Cabinet shall be provided with locker of Size 8 Liters with digital lock, fireproof.
- Doors per unit shall be as per drawing
- Cabinet shall have latest technology Locking system
- Color of Cabinet shall be approved prior to fabrication (Wooden Grain Textured or White finished)
- All edges shall be provided with machine pressed 2mm thick PVC lipping/ edge binding
Page 1147 of 1358

10. Chairs
- Medium back rest ergonomically designed revolving chairs
- Chairs should have a hydraulic gas-lift for seat height adjustment.
- Fabric shall be fire retardant. Fabric / Leatherette shade and quality shall be approved prior to
fabrication
- Seat and back should be foam-cushioned
- Chair base should be of Steel / Stainless Steel base
- Chair should have armrest & push-back mechanism
Featherlight Optima Midback Chair Featherlight Optima Highback Chair
Featherlight Highback Chair Featherlight Midback Chair
Page 1148 of 1358

11. Café Chair

- The seat and back should be made up of injection molded high impact strength polypropylene
polymer compound with indoor grade UV resistance.
- The Seat Size should be 52.5 cm (W) x 53.2 cm (D) and Back size 51.6 cm (W) x 40.5 cm (H).
- The tubular frame should be made from dia 2.22± 0.03 cm x 0.12 ± 0.0128 cm and 3.5 ± 0.03 cm x 1.5
± 0.03 cm x 0.12 ± 0.0128 cm Stainless Steel 202 grade tube
- . The tubes should be buffpolished to give shiny finish.
12. Sofa
SPECIFICATIONS FOR ONE SEATER SOFA:
1. DIMENSIONS OF ONE SEATER SOFA:: One Seater Sofa should have total dimension: 1160 mm
(L) x 970 mm (H) x 940 mm (W), Seat Size: 460 mm (L) x 490 mm (H) x 510 mm (W), Arm Size: 650
mm (H) x 350 mm (W), Wooden Leg Size: 90 mm (H) )
2. FRAME CONSTRUCTION, CONSTRUCTION MATERIAL LIST AND DISTRIBUTION: Frame
construction, construction material list and distribution should be as per details given below.
Page 1149 of 1358

Material Used Dimensions Grade
A Non Woven 100 GSM A

B Webbing 48 mm A
C Webbing 68 mm A
D Cotton Belt 68 mm A
E MDF Sheet 2.2 mm A
3. FOAM DETAILS: Foam should be as per details given below
Type DENSITY THICKNESS REMARK
A LD 28 D 10 mm
B Soft 28 D 45 mm
C Soft 28 D 45 mm
D Soft 28 D 22 mm
1 Seater Cushion
Silicon Fiber 15 Danier 64 mm
E _ 5.00 kg Per Arms
(Conjugated fibre) hollow silicon fibre
3+2+1’ 1.00 kg
F Wadding N/A 175 M
4. UPHOLSTERY: Upholstery should be as per details given below
Page 1150 of 1358

TEAR
BREAKIN
STRNGT ELONGATIO
G ADHESIO
H N AT
THICKNES STRENGT N OF
IS:7016 BREAKING
COLOU WEIGH S IN MM H IS:7016 COATING
TYPE (Part- IS:7016
R T g/m2 IS:7016 (Part-2) IS:7016
3A2) (Part-2)
(Part-1) WARP/ (Part-5)
WARP/ WARP/
WEFT KGF/ 5CM
WEFT IN WEFT
KGF/ 5CM
KG
Artifici
Orange
PV al 31.42/ 4.80 KG/ 2.95 KG/
Texas 575 1.0 ± 0.10 52 % / 290 %
C Leathe 18.72 1.92 KG 3.12 KG
Italio
r
5. HARDWARES DETAILS: Hardwares should be as per details given below
QTY HARDWARES REMARK
A 100 X 50 mm big pin Frame assembly

B 80 X 12 mm small pin MDF & Upolstry
C 4 M8 T-nut Leg Fixing
D 12 BOLT M8X 65 MM Arm & Seat Framing
E 12 M8 nut Arm & Seat Framing
F 4 CSK Bolt M8X 40 MM Leg Fixing

G 4 90 MM Wooden leg Leg
H 2 Wooden Facia Facia
I 12 SCREW M6X 32 MM Facia Fixing
SPECIFICATIONS FOR TWO SEATER SOFA:
1. DIMENSIONS OF TWO SEATER SOFA: Two Seater Sofa should have total dimension: 1755 mm
(L) x 970 mm (H) x 940 mm (W), Seat Size: 1040 mm (L) x 490 mm (H) x 510 mm (W), Arm Size:
650 mm (H) x 350 mm (W), Wooden Leg Size: 90 mm (H)
2. FRAME CONSTRUCTION, CONSTRUCTION MATERIAL LIST AND DISTRIBUTION: Frame
construction, construction material list and distribution should be as per details given below
Page 1151 of 1358

Material Used Dimensions Grade
A Non Woven 100 GSM A

B Webbing 48 mm A
C Webbing 68 mm A
D Cotton Belt 68 mm A
E MDF Sheet 2.2 mm A
3. FOAM DETAILS: Foam should be as per details given below
Type DENSITY THICKNESS REMARK
A LD 28 D 10 mm
B Soft 28 D 45 mm
C Soft 28 D 45 mm
D Soft 28 D 22 mm
2 Seater Cushion
Silicon Fiber 15 Danier 64 mm
E _ 7.00 kg Per Arms
(Conjugated fibre) hollow silicon fibre
3+2+1’ 1.00 kg
F Wadding N/A 176 M
Page 1152 of 1358

TEAR
BREAKIN
STRNGT ELONGATIO
G ADHESIO
H N AT
THICKNES STRENGT N OF
IS:7016 BREAKING
COLOU WEIGH S IN MM H IS:7016 COATING
TYPE (Part- IS:7016
R T g/m2 IS:7016 (Part-2) IS:7016
3A2) (Part-2)
(Part-1) WARP/ (Part-5)
WARP/ WARP/
WEFT KGF/ 5CM
WEFT IN WEFT
KGF/ 5CM
KG
Artifici
Orange
PV al 31.42/ 4.80 KG/ 2.95 KG/
Texas 575 1.0 ± 0.10 52 % / 290 %
C Leathe 18.72 1.92 KG 3.12 KG
Italio
r
4. UPHOLSTERY: Upholstery should be as per details given below
5. HARDWARES DETAILS: Hardwares should be as per details given below
QTY HARDWARES REMARK
A 100 X 50 mm big pin Frame assembly

B 80 X 12 mm small pin MDF & Upolstry
C 4 M8 T-nut Leg Fixing
D 12 BOLT M8X 65 MM Arm & Seat Framing
E 12 M8 nut Arm & Seat Framing
F 4 CSK Bolt M8X 40 MM Leg Fixing

G 4 90 MM Wooden leg Leg
H 2 Wooden Facia Facia
I 12 SCREW M6X 32 MM Facia Fixing
13. WINDOW BLINDS (Roller)

- Control unit: The Control unit should be made of high strength reinforced plastic.
- Shall be capable of smoothly raising and lowering the blind to any desired height, and maintaining
thatheight with no slippage
- The clutch shall be nylon construction and available in White. The clutch is of wrap spring design, with
high carbon steel spring.
- Clutch is operated directionally by the use of endless beaded chain, without any need for adjustment
for the clutch.
Page 1153 of 1358

- Idler: Idler is of high strength reinforced plastic, consisting of a Centre shaft, mounted on the bracket
by using a plastic lock. The metal sleeve inside the plastic lock provides bearing surface for the Centre
shaft providing smooth operation.
- End plug shall be a spring loaded for easier installation
- Universal mounting brackets must be capable of mounting inside, outside, or to the ceiling, with
theclutch on either the right or left end of the roller.
- Roller tube shall be extruded aluminum
- Fabric shall be attached to the tube with an adhesive strip, Shade and pattern of the fabric shall be
approved by the competent authority IIM Indore.
- A minimum of one turn of fabric must be placed on the roller before the working section of
fabricstarts
- Fabric used shall be fire retardant
14. Slotted Angle Rack.

- Overall Rack Size: 2400x 900 x 450
- Size of slotted angle 40 x 40 x 1.8 mm MS Powder coated
- Shelves: 1.2. mm thick MS plate powder coated.
- Number Of Panels: Six Number.
- Load carrying capacity: 200 Kg UDL.
15. Boat Convex 8/10 Seater conference table for 8 people(2400x1200x750)/ 10

people(3000x1200x750)
- 19mm thick ply confirming to IS 5509.
- Work top size & shape as per the approved drawing
- Color of work top shall be approved prior to fabrication (Wooden Grain Textured or White finished)
- Work top shall have both side laminated with 1mm thick fire retardant laminate Shade and
finish of the laminate shall be approved by the competent authority IIM Indore.
binding
ofwires
Front Modesty Panel:

- 19mm thick ply confirming to IS 5509,.
- Panel size as per the approved drawing
- Color of panel shall be approved prior to fabrication (Wooden Grain Textured or White finished)
- Panel shall have both side laminated with 1 mm thick fire retardant laminate.
- Panel edge shall be provided with machine pressed minimum 1mm thick PVC lipping/ edge binding
Metal Frame work:

- Metal legs of working table shall be powder coated.
- Table frame made from Rectangular x 1.2mm thick M.S. CRCA hollow Pipe
- Frame finish with desire colour of powder coating.
- Powder Coating should withstand salt spray test & scratch hardness test
- Color of Powder coat shall be approved prior to fabrication
Page 1154 of 1358

- Design of legs shall be approved prior to fabrication.
16. Almirah.
- Size: (Height)1950x(Width) 900 x(Depth) 500/Storewell Plain (1981x916x486) mm
- Plain Made up of multi bend construction with interlocking design and full length over lapping
doors and sides.
- It should have three way bolting mechanism.
- All steel components should undergo eight tank anti rust treatment and oven baked epoxy
polyester powder coated with 50-60 dry film thickness.
- The CRCA steel sheet used for the body is of 20 SWG / guage, as per IS-513 1994. It has 5 shelves
made of 20 SWG / gauge CRCA steel sheet.
- It has six lever Mazak Zinc Plated Godrej Lock.
- It has scratch hardness of 3 Kgs as BS-3900-part E2 1970, IS-101.
- It sustains salt spray test of 1000 hrs. as per IS 101.
- It should have 4 shelves made of 0.8 mm thick CRCA steel sheet.
- It should have six lever Mazak Zinc Plated Godrej or Equivalent Lock.
Page 1155 of 1358

17. Single Bed:

- The bed structure should be of metal frames made of M.S. Square tubes 25x 25 x 2.6 mm
thickness, duly powder coated in shade Mat Black to the thickness of 50 microns (+/-10).
- Horizontal plinths and bottom plinths to be made of 19 mm thick Ply confirming to IS 5509.
Headboard, Tail board, Side rail and Mattresses panel to be made of 19 mm thick plyboard
confirming to IS 5509 with both side laminates (fire-retardant)
- Shade and finish of the laminate shall be approved by the competent authority IIM Indore.
- For MDC Accommodation Bed headboard should have cushion as per approved drawing
- For boys & girls hostel Bed headboard should have laminated ply as per approved drawing
- Top of the Headboard shall be provisioned with Universal switch socket USB ports and charging
points.
- Bed shall be provided with one side drawer in the lower half made up of MS frame and 19 mm
ply confirming to IS 5509 with 1mm thick fire retardant laminate on both sides , with castor
wheels. Size of the drawer shall be Length 1200mm, width 900 mm & height 200mm
- Overall dimensions: L- 2160 mm x W – 960 mm x H – 900 mm.
- For MDC accommodation the mattress shall be spine tech air luxury model of sleepwell or
equivalent mattress of size 1980x915x178.The mattress should be of triple layer support
system, High Resilience Layer for Comfort, Premium Knitted Fabric, Rebounded Layer for
Support, Impression Memory Foam in Top Quilting. two luxury pillows of minimum MRP of
Rs.2500/- of sleepwell or equivalent shall be provided with each mattress
- For Boys & Girls hostel the mattress shall be spine tech air luxury model of sleepwell or
equivalent mattress of size 1980x915x128. The mattress should be of triple layer support
system, High Resilience Layer for Comfort, Premium Knitted Fabric, Rebounded Layer for
Support, Impression Memory Foam in Top Quilting. One luxury pillow of minimum MRP of
Rs.2500/- of sleepwell or equivalent shall be provided with each mattress
18. Bed Side Table:

- Shall be made up of 19mm ply confirming to IS 5509, with 1mm thick fire-retardant laminates
on both sides
- Shade and finish of the laminate shall be approved by the competent authority IIM Indore.
- It shall consist of two drawers of equal size as per the approved drawing. With telescopic slide
Page 1156 of 1358

with smooth operation and 100 mm handles of approved make.

- Edges to be sealed with 2mm thick PVC edge beading tape
- Overall Size of the table shall be: Length 400 mm, Width 400 mm, Height 400mm.
19. Luggage Rack:

- Luggage rack shall be made up of second class seasoned teak wood all four verticals top and
bottom frames shall be made up of 45mm x 45 mm battens,
- Wooden battens of size 22.5 mm x 45mm shall be used to form the top and bottom. The top
battens shall be with SS metal strip.9 Nos of battens shall be used for the Top as well as bottom.
- The finish shall be with PU Polishing as per the approval.
- Overall size of the Luggage rack: Length 800mm, Width 450 mm & Height 600 mm.
20. Shoe Rack:

- Shoe Rack shall be made with 19mm ply confirming to IS 5509, with 1mm thick fire retardant
laminates on both sides, shade.
- Shoe Rack to be provided with top and bottom skirting, shelves (4 Nos) & one drawer at the top.
- Two doors & drawer with hinges, telescopic slides and 150 mm handle of approved make
- Overall Size of Shoe Rack: Length 600 mm x Width 400 mm x Height 900 mm
Page 1157 of 1358

21. Television Unit:

- Television unit shall be made with 19mm ply confirming to IS 5509, with 1mm thick fire-
retardant laminates on both sides, shade.
- Television unit to be provided with top and bottom open shelves (4 Nos) as per the approved
drawing
- Provision for internet, power socket to be done neatly so that no exposed cables are visible.
- Overall Size of Television Unit : Length 1200 mm x Width 1200 mm
22. Classroom Desk:

- Study desk shall be curvilinear/straight as per the layouts approved for the different classroom.
The seating capacity of each desk shall vary from 14-seater to 2-seater as per the seating layout of
each classroom.
- Desks shall be made up of 19mm thick ply confirming to IS 5509 with 1mm thick fire-retardant
laminate on both sides, shade, and finish of the laminate to be preapproved.
Page 1158 of 1358

- The frame for the desk shall be of 32mm x32mm square tube 2.6 mm thick for horizontal and
verticals. The frame shall have a base plate and shall be fixed with chemical fasteners in the
ground. The shop drawing for the framing shall be approved before start of fabrication.
- The frame shall be welded and the joints to be finished properly by grinding and shall be applied
with one coat of zinc primer and two coats of synthetic enamel.
- Adequate provision shall be made to provide the universal power socket, USB port and
microphone for each seat as per the approved drawings/ as mentioned in the DBR of ELV.
- Provision for individual name plate shall also be made for each seat.
23. Talk Pod – 4-Seater Circular

Work Top:
- 19mm thick Ply confirming to IS 5509 with
- Work top shall be circular and size as per the approved drawing.
- 1mm thick fire-retardant laminate of approved finish and shade.(Wooden Grain Textured or White
finished) Work top shall have both sides laminated
binding
ofwires
Front Modesty Panel:

- 19mm thick ply board confirming to IS 5509 with
- Panel size as per the drawing
- Color of panel shall be approved prior to fabrication (Wooden Grain Textured or White finished)
- Panel shall have both sides laminated. I mm thick fire-retardant laminates
- Panel edge shall be provided with machine pressed minimum 2mm thick PVC lipping/ edge binding
Metal Framework:
- Metal legs of working table shall be powder coated,
- Table frame made from rectangular x 1.2mm thick M.S. CRCA hollow Pipe
- Frame finish with desire colour of powder coating.
- Powder Coating should withstand salt spray test & scratch hardness test
- Color of Powder coat shall be approved prior to fabrication
- Design of legs shall be approved prior to fabrication
Page 1159 of 1358

- Base plate shall be heavy weight to avoid the table to topple
24. Four Door Bookcase.

- Size: (Height)1742mmx(Width) 914mm x(Depth) 350 mm
- Four Door with locks and glazed panels 6 lever, 4 shelves
- Body construction with CRCA sheet 0.9 mm thick confirming to IS -513, 1994 and shelves with
0.8mm thick CRCA sheet.
- All steel components should undergo eight tank anti rust treatment and oven baked epoxy
polyester powder coated with 50-60 dry film thickness.
It should have scratch hardness of 3 Kgs as BS-3900-part E2 1970, IS-101.
- It should sustain salt spray test of 1000 hrs., as per IS 101.
Page 1160 of 1358

25. Vertical Sliding Door Unit (VSDU 5/ VSDU 2).

- Construction and material it should be rigid knock down construction.
- Back, sides and door are made from 0.7mm(+/= 0.077mm) high yield strength CRCA D grade as
per IS 513 .
- Rest in o.8mm (+-0.8mm). Sliding door with top hanging arrangement to prevent derailment. It
should have 25 mm thick wooden top made of pre laminated board.
- Each door provided with two plastic rollers having steel ball bearing for smooth movement of door
and less noise.
- Locking and handle- snap on type aesthetically appealing die cast 5 lever cam lock for safe locking
and plastic flush and recessed handle.
- shelving- height wise adjustable self mounting, uniformely distributed load capacity of the self is
40 kg maximum. there should be two no's of adjustable full shelves.
- Finish; epoxy polyester powder coated to the thickness of 50 microns+/- 10.
- VSDU 5 (1192.5x900x450) mm ,Vertical sliding door unit Overall size height 1192.5mm X width
900mm X Depth 450mm
- VSDU 2 (711 X 900 X 450), Vertical sliding door unit Overall size height 711 mm X width 900mm X
Depth 450mm
26. Timeout Eight-Seater PU coated Dining Table .Timeout 8 Seater PU Coated Dinning Table
(2222x1022)
- Dining Table work-Surface PVC foiled 25mm Thick (±1mm) having Base Material - 25mm MDF
board should have PU Coating on top. 8X2mm deep groove on center of the table as graphics.
- Specially profiled edge to prevent striping of foil & comfortable touch shall have Brown laminate
on bottom surface.
- Understructure Bend pipe understructure of MS. Powder coated. Pipe dia 38mm, 2mm thk. Legs
should be MS powder coated for PU top and 38mm dia SS pipe legs should be fixed with
Page 1161 of 1358

understructure and tabletop, knock-down structure. Understructure fitted with top by SS machine
screws.
- Table bottoms have metal insert for better holding of screw.3 Legs 4 Glide Plastic Glide fixed at the
understructure to prevent the damage of table top during stacking.
- Overall dimensions of Table shall be L 2222mm X W 1022 mm X H 750 mm.
27. Timeout Four-Seater PU coated Dining Table . 4-Seater PU Coated Dinning Table (1022x1022),
- Timeout
- Dining Table work-Surface PVC foiled 25mm Thick (±1mm) having Base Material - 25mm MDF
board should have PU Coating on top. 8X2mm deep groove on center of the table as graphics.
- Specially profiled edge to prevent striping of foil & comfortable touch shall have Brown laminate
on bottom surface.
- Understructure Bend pipe understructure of MS. Powder coated. Pipe dia 38mm, 2mm thk. Legs
should be MS powder coated for PU top and 38mm dia SS pipe legs should be fixed with
understructure and tabletop, knock-down structure. Understructure fitted with top by SS machine
screws.
- Table bottoms have metal insert for better holding of screw.3 Legs 4 Glide Plastic Glide fixed at the
understructure to prevent the damage of tabletop during stacking.
- Overall dimensions of Table shall be L 1022mm X W 1022 mm X H 750 mm
Page 1162 of 1358

28. WARDROBE in Type V Residences Wardrobe size (1.65x3.15m)/ size (2.00x2.1m)

- Wardrobe made up of 19 mm thick ply wood confirming to IS -5509 both side laminated (1 mm
thick fire retardant category) top, bottom, side, shelves, vertical, skirting, drawer facia, drawer back
, drawer side etc.
- 19 mm thick door, drawer bottom and back panel including necessary approved soft closing
hinges, telescopic slide, multipurpose lock, hanger rod of 25 mm dia. 16-gauge S.S. pipe, tower bolt
of barrel type having size 150x10 mm, magnetic catcher triple strip vertical type of approved type,
128 mm handle, kd/ minifix, mirror.
- Edges to be sealed with pvc edged bending tape 2 mm thick
- Approved brand fixture and finishing etc.
- Laminates as per approved shade, color, and finish
- Shop drawing to be approved before start of work.
29. Solid Wood – Where specified solid wood Second class seasoned Teak wood to be considered
as per latest CPWD specifications.
Page 1163 of 1358

LIST OF DRAWINGS
CIVIL DRAWING LIST

MASTER SITE PLAN
1 MASTER SITE PLAN MASTER SITE PLAN C-665-LY-E-A-1000
Academic Building
Sr.
Drawing Type Drawing title Drawing Number
No.
1 FLOOR PLANS GROUND FLOOR PLAN C-665-AB-E-A-1100
2 FLOOR PLANS FIRST FLOOR PLAN C-665-AB-E-A-1101
3 FLOOR PLANS PLAN AT 9.90M LVL C-665-AB-E-A-1102
4 FLOOR PLANS PLAN AT 13.050M /13.80M LVL C-665-AB-E-A-1103
5 FLOOR PLANS PLAN AT 17.70 M LVL C-665-AB-E-A-1104
6 FLOOR PLANS PLAN AT 21.60 M LVL C-665-AB-E-A-1105
7 SECTION, ELEVATION SECTION, ELEVATION C-665-AB-E-A-1106
C-665-AB-E-A-1763-
11 CLASSROOM_LAYOUT CLASSROOM_LAYOUT
SHEET2
C-665-AB-E-A-1763-
12 CLASSROOM_LAYOUT CLASSROOM_LAYOUT
SHEET1
13 FURNITURE_DETAIL FURNITURE_DETAIL C-665-AB-E-A-1800
C-665-AB-E-A-1301-
16 GLAZING DETAIL GLAZING DETAIL
SHEET1
C-665-AB-E-A-1301-
17 GLAZING DETAIL GLAZING DETAIL
SHEET2
18 FALSE CEILING DETAIL FALSE_CEILING_LAYOUT C-665-AB-E-A-1750
23 STAIRCASE DETAIL STAIRCASE DETAIL-01 C-665-AB-E-A-1600
C-665-AB-E-A-1602-
25 STAIRCASE DETAIL STAIRCASE DETAIL-02
SHEET1
Page 1164 of 1358

C-665-AB-E-A-1602-
SHEET2
DOOR WINDOW C-665-AB-E-A-1300-
29 DOOR WINDOW DETAIL
DETAIL SHEET1
DETAIL SHEET2
DETAIL SHEET3
32 FLOORING PLAN FLOORING_GF C-665-AB-E-A-1700
33 FLOORING PLAN FLOORING_FF C-665-AB-E-A-1701
34 FLOORING PLAN FLOORING PLAN AT 9.90M LVL C-665-AB-E-A-1702
FLOORING PLAN AT 13.050M /13.80M
35 FLOORING PLAN C-665-AB-E-A-1703
LVL
36 FLOORING PLAN FLOORING PLAN AT 17.70 M LVL C-665-AB-E-A-1704
37 FLOORING PLAN FLOORING PLAN AT 21.60 M LVL C-665-AB-E-A-1705
38 LOBBY DETAIL LIFT_LOBBY_DETAIL C-665-AB-E-A-1761
39 DADO LAYOUT GF DADO LAYOUT C-665-AB-E-A-1720
40 DADO LAYOUT FF DADO LAYOUT C-665-AB-E-A-1721
41 DADO LAYOUT PLAN AT 9.90M LVL DADO LAYOUT C-665-AB-E-A-1722
PLAN AT 13.050M /13.80M LVL DADO
42 DADO LAYOUT C-665-AB-E-A-1723
LAYOUT
43 DADO LAYOUT PLAN AT 17.70 M LVL DADO LAYOUT C-665-AB-E-A-1724
44 DADO LAYOUT PLAN AT 21.60 M LVL DADO LAYOUT C-665-AB-E-A-1725
C-665 - AB - E - A - 1400
45 TOILET DETAIL TOILET DETAIL - 01
SHEET 1 OF 2
C-665 - AB - E - A - 1400
46 TOILET DETAIL TOILET DETAIL - 01
SHEET 2OF 2
47 TOILET DETAIL TOILET DETAIL - 03 C-665 - AB - E - A - 1402
48 RAILING DETAIL RAILING DETAIL - 01 C-665 - AB - E - A - 1740
49 RAILING DETAIL PARAPET + RAILING TYPICAL DETAILS C-665 - AB - E - A - 1741
50 FINSIHES SCHEDULE CLASSROOMS FINISHES SCHEDULE PDF COPY
MDC ACADEMIC + INCUBATION CENTER

S.N Drawing Type Drawing title Drawing Number
1 FLOOR PLANS GROUND FLOOR WORKING PLAN C-665 - MC - E - A - 1100
2 FLOOR PLANS FIRST FLOOR WORKING PLAN C-665 - MC - E - A - 1101
3 FLOOR PLANS SECOND FLOOR WORKING PLAN C-665 - MC - E - A - 1102
4 FLOOR PLANS TERRACE FLOOR WORKING PLAN C-665 - MC - E - A - 1103
C-665 - MC - E - A - 1200
5 ELEVATIONS ELEVATION A & B
SHEET 1 OF 2
Page 1165 of 1358

C-665 - MC - E - A - 1200
6 ELEVATIONS ELEVATION C & D
SHEET 2 OF 2
7 SECTIONS SECTIONS C-665 - MC - E - A - 1201
DOOR WINDOW C-665 - MC - E - A - 1300
8 DOOR AND WINDOW DETAIL
DETAIL SHEET 1 OF 2
DETAIL SHEET 2 OF 2
10 GLAZING DETAILS
DETAIL SHEET 1 OF 2
11 GLAZING DETAILS
DETAIL SHEET 2 OF 2
C-665 - MC - E - A - 1401
12 TOILET DETAIL TOILET DETAIL (MALE & FEMALE)
SHEET 1 OF 2
C-665 - MC - E - A - 1401
13 TOILET DETAIL TOILET DETAIL (MALE & FEMALE)
SHEET 2 OF 2
FALSE CEILING GROUND FLOOR FALSE CEILING
14 C-665 - MC - E - A - 1450
LAYOUT LAYOUT
FALSE CEILING
15 FIRST FLOOR FALSE CEILING LAYOUT C-665 - MC - E - A - 1451
LAYOUT
FALSE CEILING
16 SECOND FLOOR FALSE CEILING LAYOUT C-665 - MC - E - A - 1452
LAYOUT
17 STAIRCASE DETAIL STAIRCASE DETAIL - 01 C-665 - MC - E - A - 1600
18 STAIRCASE DETAIL LIFT DETAIL & STAIRCASE DETAIL - 02 C-665 - MC - E - A - 1601
FLOORING LAYOUT GROUND FLOOR PLAN WITH FLOORING
19 C-665 - MC - E - A - 1700
PLAN LAYOUT
FLOORING LAYOUT FIRST FLOOR PLAN WITH FLOORING
20 C-665 - MC - E - A - 1701
PLAN LAYOUT
FLOORING LAYOUT SECOND FLOOR PLAN WITH FLOORING
21 C-665 - MC - E - A - 1702
PLAN LAYOUT
FLOORING LAYOUT TERRACE FLOOR PLAN WITH FLOORING
22 C-665 - MC - E - A - 1703
PLAN LAYOUT
WALL DADO LAYOUT
23 GROUND FLOOR DADO LAYOUT C-665 - MC - E - A - 1720
PLAN
WALL DADO LAYOUT

24 FIRST FLOOR DADO LAYOUT C-665 - MC - E - A - 1721
PLAN
WALL DADO LAYOUT

25 SECOND FLOOR DADO LAYOUT C-665 - MC - E - A - 1722
PLAN
WALL DADO LAYOUT

26 TERRACE FLOOR DADO LAYOUT C-665 - MC - E - A - 1723
PLAN
27 RAILING DETAIL RAILING DETAIL C-665 - MC - E - A - 1740
MISCELLANEOUS
28 LIFT LOBBY DETAIL - A C-665 - MC - E - A - 1761
DETAIL
MISCELLANEOUS
29 LIFT LOBBY DETAIL - B C-665 - MC - E - A - 1762
DETAIL
MISCELLANEOUS
30 ENTRANCE RAMP DETAIL C-665 - MC - E - A - 1763
DETAIL
Page 1166 of 1358

GROUND FLOOR PLAN FURNITURE

31 FURNITURE LAYOUT C-665 - MC - E - A - 1800
LAYOUT & DETAILS
FIRST FLOOR PLAN FURNITURE LAYOUT
& DETAILS
SECOND FLOOR PLAN FURNITURE
LAYOUT & DETAILS
GIRLS' HOSTEL
1 CENTRE LINE PLAN CENTRE LINE PLAN C-665 - BH - E - A - 1000
2 FLOOR PLANS GROUND FLOOR WORKING PLAN C-665 - GH - E - A - 1100
3 FLOOR PLANS FIRST FLOOR WORKING PLAN C-665 - GH - E - A - 1101
4 FLOOR PLANS SECOND FLOOR WORKING PLAN 665 - GH - E - A - 1102
TYPICAL FLOOR WORKING PLAN ((3rd to
5 FLOOR PLANS C-665 - GH - C - A - 1103
6th) & (8th, 9th, 11th, 12th & 14TH)
TYPICAL FLOOR WORKING PLAN (7TH,
6 FLOOR PLANS C-665 - GH - E - A - 1104
10TH & 13TH)
7 FLOOR PLANS TERRACE FLOOR WORKING PLAN C-665 - GH - E - A - 1105
8 FLOOR PLANS WATER TANK LVL WORKING PLAN C-665 - GH - E - A - 1106
C-665 - GH - E - A - 1200
9 ELEVATIONS FRONT ELEVATION - A
SHEET 1 OF 4
C-665 - GH - E - A - 1200
10 ELEVATIONS REAR ELEVATION - B
SHEET 2 OF 4
665 - GH - E - A - 1200
11 ELEVATIONS RIGHT SIDE ELEVATION - C
SHEET 3 OF 4
C-665 - GH - E - A - 1200
12 ELEVATIONS LEFT SIDE ELEVATION - D
SHEET 4 OF 4
C-665 - GH - E - A - 1201
13 SECTIONS SECTION A-A
SHEET 1 OF 2
C-665 - GH - E - A - 1201
14 SECTIONS SECTION B-B
SHEET 2 OF 2
DOOR WINDOW C-665 - GH - E - A - 1302
15 GLAZING DETAILS
DETAIL SHEET 1 OF 3
16 GLAZING DETAILS
DETAIL SHEET 2 OF 3
17 GLAZING DETAILS
DETAIL SHEET 3 OF 3
18 TOILET DETAIL TYPICAL TOILET DETAIL -T1 C-665 - GH - E - A - 1400
19 TOILET DETAIL TYPICAL TOILET DETAIL - T2 C-665 - GH - E - A - 1401
20 TOILET DETAIL TYPICAL TOILET DETAIL - T3 C-665 - BH - E - A - 1402
22 C-665 - GH - E - A - 1450
LAYOUT LAYOUT
FALSE CEILING
23 FIRST FLOOR FALSE CEILING LAYOUT C-665 - GH - E - A - 1451
LAYOUT
Page 1167 of 1358

FALSE CEILING
24 SECOND FLOOR FALSE CEILING LAYOUT C-665 - GH - E - A - 1452
LAYOUT
TYPICAL FLOOR (3rd to 6th) & (8th, 9th,
FALSE CEILING
25 11th, 12th & 14TH)FALSE CEILING C-665 - GH - C - A - 1453
LAYOUT
LAYOUT
FALSE CEILING TYPICAL FLOOR (7th, 10th & 13th) FALSE
26 C-665 - GH - E - A - 1454
LAYOUT CEILING LAYOUT
FALSE CEILING
27 TERRACE FLOOR FALSE CEILING LAYOUT C-665 - GH - E - A - 1455
LAYOUT
28 STAIRCASE DETAIL STAIRCASE DETAIL-01 C-665 - GH - E - A - 1600
C-665 - GH - E - A - 1601-
SHEET1
C-665 - GH - E - A - 1601-
SHEET2
31 LIFT DETAIL LIFT DETAIL - 1 C-665 - GH - E - A - 1602
32 LIFT DETAIL LIFT DETAIL - 2 C-665 - GH - E - A - 1603
FLOORING LAYOUT
33 GROUND FLOOR FLOORING PLAN C-665 - GH - E - A - 1700
PLAN
FLOORING LAYOUT
34 FIRST FLOOR FLOORING PLAN C-665 - GH - E - A - 1701
PLAN
FLOORING LAYOUT
35 SECOND FLOOR FLOORING PLAN C-665 - GH - E - A - 1702
PLAN
FLOORING LAYOUT TYPICAL (3rd to 6th) & (8th, 9th, 11th,
36 C-665 - GH - C - A - 1703
PLAN 12th & 14TH) FLOOR PLAN
FLOORING LAYOUT TYPICAL FLOOR (7th, 10th & 13th)
37 C-665 - GH - E - A - 1704
PLAN FLOORING PLAN
FLOORING LAYOUT
38 TERRACE FLOOR FLOORING PLAN C-665 - GH - E - A - 1705
PLAN
WALL DADO LAYOUT
39 GROUND FLOOR DADO LAYOUT C-665 - GH - E - A - 1720
PLAN
WALL DADO LAYOUT
40 FIRST FLOOR DADO LAYOUT C-665 - GH - E - A - 1721
PLAN
WALL DADO LAYOUT

41 SECOND FLOOR DADO LAYOUT C-665 - GH - E - A - 1722
PLAN
WALL DADO LAYOUT TYPICAL FLOOR DADO LAYOUT(3rd to

42 C-665 - GH - E - A - 1723
PLAN 6th) & (8th, 9th, 11th, 12th & 14TH)
WALL DADO LAYOUT TYPICAL FLOOR DADO LAYOUT(7TH,

43 C-665 - GH - C - A - 1724
PLAN 10TH & 13TH)
WALL DADO LAYOUT

44 TERRACE FLOOR DADO LAYOUT C-665 - GH - E - A - 1725
PLAN
WALL DADO LAYOUT

45 WATER TANK LVL DADO LAYOUT C-665 - GH - E - A - 1726
PLAN
MISCELLANEOUS
46 LIFT LOBBY DETAIL - A C-665 - GH - E - A - 1761
DETAIL
Page 1168 of 1358

MISCELLANEOUS
47 LIFT LOBBY DETAIL - B C-665 - GH - E - A - 1762
DETAIL
MISCELLANEOUS
48 ENTRANCE RAMP DETAIL C-665 - GH - E - A - 1763
DETAIL
49 FURNITURE DETAIL GROUND FLOOR FURNITURE LAYOUT C-665 - GH - E - A - 1800
TYPICAL FLOOR FURNITURE
50 FURNITURE DETAIL LAYOUT(3rd to 6th) & (8th, 9th, 11th, C-665 - GH - E - A - 1801
12th & 14TH)
BOYS' HOSTEL
1 CENTRE LINE PLAN CENTRE LINE PLAN C-665 - BH - E - A - 1000
2 FLOOR PLANS GROUND FLOOR WORKING PLAN C-665 - BH - E - A - 1100
3 FLOOR PLANS FIRST FLOOR WORKING PLAN C-665 - BH - E - A - 1101
4 FLOOR PLANS SECOND FLOOR WORKING PLAN C-665 - BH - E - A - 1102
TYPICAL FLOOR WORKING PLAN ((3rd to
5 FLOOR PLANS C-665 - BH - C - A - 1103
6th) & (8th, 9th, 11th, 12th & 14TH)
TYPICAL FLOOR WORKING PLAN (7TH,
6 FLOOR PLANS C-665 - BH - E - A - 1104
10TH & 13TH)
7 FLOOR PLANS TERRACE FLOOR WORKING PLAN C-665 - BH - E - A - 1105
8 FLOOR PLANS WATER TANK LVL WORKING PLAN C-665 - BH - E - A - 1106
C-665 - BH - E - A - 1200
9 ELEVATIONS FRONT ELEVATION - A
SHEET 1 OF 4
C-665 - BH - E - A - 1200
10 ELEVATIONS REAR ELEVATION - B
SHEET 2 OF 4
C-665 - BH - E - A - 1200
11 ELEVATIONS RIGHT SIDE ELEVATION - C
SHEET 3 OF 4
C-665 - BH - E - A - 1200
12 ELEVATIONS LEFT SIDE ELEVATION - D
SHEET 4 OF 4
C-665 - BH - E - A - 1201
SHEET 1 OF 2
C-665 - BH - E - A - 1201
SHEET 2 OF 2
DOOR WINDOW C-665 - BH - E - A - 1302
15 GLAZING DETAILS
DETAIL SHEET 1 OF 3
16 GLAZING DETAILS
DETAIL SHEET 2 OF 3
17 GLAZING DETAILS
DETAIL SHEET 3 OF 3
18 TOILET DETAIL TYPICAL TOILET DETAIL -T1 C-665 - GH - E - A - 1400
19 TOILET DETAIL TYPICAL TOILET DETAIL - T2 C-665 - GH - E - A - 1401
22 C-665 - BH - E - A - 1450
LAYOUT LAYOUT
Page 1169 of 1358

FALSE CEILING
23 FIRST FLOOR FALSE CEILING LAYOUT C-665 - BH - E - A - 1451
LAYOUT
FALSE CEILING
24 SECOND FLOOR FALSE CEILING LAYOUT C-665 - BH - E - A - 1452
LAYOUT
TYPICAL FLOOR (3rd to 6th) & (8th, 9th,
FALSE CEILING
25 11th, 12th & 14TH)FALSE CEILING C-665 - BH - C - A - 1453
LAYOUT
LAYOUT
FALSE CEILING TYPICAL (7th, 10th & 13th) FALSE
26 C-665 - BH - E - A - 1454
LAYOUT CEILING LAYOUT
FALSE CEILING
27 TERRACE FLOOR FALSE CEILING LAYOUT C-665 - BH - E - A - 1455
LAYOUT
28 STAIRCASE DETAIL STAIRCASE DETAIL-01 C-665 - BH - E - A - 1600
C-665 - BH - E - A - 1601-
SHEET1
C-665 - BH - E - A - 1601-
SHEET2
C-665 - GH - E - A - 1602
31 LIFT DETAIL LIFT DETAIL - 1
SHEET 1 OF 2
C-665 - GH - E - A - 1602
32 LIFT DETAIL LIFT DETAIL - 2
SHEET 2 OF 2
FLOORING LAYOUT
33 GROUND FLOOR FLOORING PLAN C-665 - BH - E - A - 1700
PLAN
FLOORING LAYOUT
34 FIRST FLOOR FLOORING PLAN C-665 - BH - E - A - 1701
PLAN
FLOORING LAYOUT
35 SECOND FLOOR FLOORING PLAN C-665 - BH - E - A - 1702
PLAN
FLOORING LAYOUT TYPICAL FLOOR (3rd to 6th) & (8th, 9th,
36 C-665 - BH - C - A - 1703
PLAN 11th, 12th & 14TH) FLOORING PLAN
FLOORING LAYOUT TYPICAL (7th, 10th & 13th) FLOORING
37 C-665 - BH - E - A - 1704
PLAN PLAN
FLOORING LAYOUT
38 TERRACE FLOOR FLOORING PLAN C-665 - BH - E - A - 1705
PLAN
WALL DADO LAYOUT
39 GROUND FLOOR DADO LAYOUT C-665 - BH - E - A - 1720
PLAN
WALL DADO LAYOUT

40 FIRST FLOOR DADO LAYOUT C-665 - BH - E - A - 1721
PLAN
WALL DADO LAYOUT

41 SECOND FLOOR DADO LAYOUT C-665 - BH - E - A - 1722
PLAN
WALL DADO LAYOUT TYPICAL FLOOR DADO LAYOUT(3rd to

42 C-665 - BH - C - A - 1723
PLAN 6th) & (8th, 9th, 11th, 12th & 14TH)
WALL DADO LAYOUT TYPICAL FLOOR DADO LAYOUT(7TH,

43 C-665 - BH - E - A - 1724
PLAN 10TH & 13TH)
WALL DADO LAYOUT

44 TERRACE FLOOR DADO LAYOUT C-665 - BH - E - A - 1725
PLAN
Page 1170 of 1358

WALL DADO LAYOUT

45 WATER TANK LVL DADO LAYOUT C-665 - BH - E - A - 1726
PLAN
MISCELLANEOUS
46 LIFT LOBBY DETAIL - A C-665 - BH - E - A - 1761
DETAIL
MISCELLANEOUS
47 LIFT LOBBY DETAIL - B C-665 - BH - E - A - 1762
DETAIL
MISCELLANEOUS
48 ENTRANCE RAMP DETAIL C-665 - BH - E - A - 1763
DETAIL
49 FURNITURE DETAIL GROUND FLOOR FURNITURE LAYOUT C-665 - BH - E - A - 1800
TYPICAL FLOOR FURNITURE
50 FURNITURE DETAIL LAYOUT(3rd to 6th) & (8th, 9th, 11th, C-665 - BH - C - A - 1801
12th & 14TH)
TYPICAL FLOOR FURNITURE LAYOUT
51 FURNITURE DETAIL C-665 - BH - E - A - 1802
(7th, 10th, 13th)
Common For Girls & Boys Hostel

DOOR WINDOW C-665 - GH/BH - E - A -
DETAIL 1300 SHEET 1 OF 2
DOOR WINDOW C-665 - GH/BH - E - A -

3 GRILL DETAILS BALCONY GRILL DETAILS
4 GRILL DETAILS TYPICAL GRILL DETAILS FOR CORRIDOR
C-665 - BH/GH - E - A -
5 DUCT DETAILS TYPICAL DUCT DETAIL
1764
6 FINSIHES SCHEDULE DETAILED FINISHES SCHEDULE PDF COPY
MDC ACCOMMODATION
GROUND FLOOR PLAN AND FIRST C-665 - MDCH - E - A -
1 FLOOR PLANS
FLOOR WORING PLAN 1100
TYPICAL FLOOR WORKING PLAN( 2nd C-665 - MDCH - E - A -
2 FLOOR PLANS
TO 6th, 8th & 9th ) 1101
7th, 10th & TERRACE FLOOR WORKING C-665 - MDCH - E - A -
3 FLOOR PLANS
PLAN 1102
C-665 - MDCH - E - A -
4 FLOOR PLANS WATER TANK LEVEL PLAN
1103
C-665 - MDCH - E - A -
5 ELEVATIONS ELEVATION E1
1200 SHEET 1 OF 4
C-665 - MDCH - E - A -
1200 SHEET 2 OF 4
C-665 - MDCH - E - A -
1200 SHEET 3 OF 4
C-665 - MDCH - E - A -
1200 SHEET 4 OF 4
Page 1171 of 1358

C-665 - MDCH - E - A -
1201 SHEET 1 OF 2
C-665 - MDCH - E - A -
1201 SHEET 2 OF 2
DOOR WINDOW C-665 - MDCH - E - A -



13 GLAZING DETAILS

14 GLAZING DETAILS

15 GLAZING DETAILS
C-665 - MDCH - E - A -
16 TOILET DETAIL TYPICAL TOILET DETAIL - T1
1400
C-665 - MDCH - E - A -
1401 SHEET 1 OF 2
C-665 - MDCH - E - A -
1401 SHEET 2 OF 2
C-665 - MDCH - E - A -
1402
C-665 - MDCH - E - A -
20 TOILET DETAIL TOILET DETAIL - T4
1403
FALSE CEILING C-665 - MDCH - E - A -
21 GROUND FLOOR FALSE CEILING PLAN
LAYOUT PLAN 1450
FALSE CEILING C-665 - MDCH - E - A -
22 FIRST FLOOR FALSE CEILING PLAN
LAYOUT PLAN 1451
FALSE CEILING
23 TYPICAL FLOOR FALSE CEILING PLAN 665 - MDCH - E - A - 1452
LAYOUT PLAN
C-665 - MDCH - E - A -
1600
C-665 - MDCH - E - A -
1601
C-665 - MDCH - E - A -
26 LIFT DETAIL LIFT DETAIL
1602 SHEET 1 OF 2
C-665 - MDCH - E - A -
27 LIFT DETAIL LIFT DETAIL
1602 SHEET 2 OF 2
FLOORING LAYOUT GROUND AND FIRST FLOOR FLOORING C-665 - MDCH - E - A -
28
PLAN PLAN 1700
FLOORING LAYOUT TYPICAL FLOOR FLOORING PLAN( 2nd C-665 - MDCH - E - A -
29
PLAN TO 6th, 8th & 9th ) 1701
Page 1172 of 1358

FLOORING LAYOUT 7th, 10th & TERRACE FLOOR FLOORING C-665 - MDCH - E - A -
30
PLAN PLAN 1702
GROUND & FIRST FLOOR WALL DADO C-665 - MDCH - C - A -
31 WALL DADO LAYOUT
LAYOUT 1720
TYPICAL FLOOR ( 2nd TO 6th, 8th & 9th) C-665 - MDCH - C - A -
32 WALL DADO LAYOUT
WALL DADO LAYOUT 1721
7TH, 10TH TERRACE FLOOR WALL DADO C-665 - MDCH - C - A -
33 WALL DADO LAYOUT
LAYOUT 1722
MISCELLANEOUS C-665 - MDCH - E - A -
34 RAILING DETAIL - 01


37 LIFT LOBBY DETAIL

38 ENTRANCE RAMP DETAILS (1)

39 ENTRANCE RAMP DETAILS (2)
MISCELLANEOUS
40 DUCT DETAIL C-665-MDCH-C-A-1763
DETAIL
41 FURNITURE DETAILS GF FURNITURE DETAIS C-665-MDCH-E-A-1800
42 FURNITURE DETAILS TYPICAL FLOOR FURNITURE DETAILS C-665-MDCH-E-A-1800
43 FINSIHES SCHEDULE DETAILED FINISHES SCHEDULE PDF COPY
TYPE - V RESIDENCES
1 FLOOR PLANS STILT FLOOR WORKING PLAN C-665 - TV - E - A - 1100
2 FLOOR PLANS FIRST FLOOR PLAN C-665 - TV - E - A - 1101
3 FLOOR PLANS 2ND TO 6TH & 8TH FLOOR PLAN C-665 - TV - E - A - 1102
4 FLOOR PLANS 7TH FLOOR PLAN C-665 - TV - E - A - 1103
5 FLOOR PLANS TERRACE PLAN C-665 - TV - E - A - 1104
6 FLOOR PLANS WATER TANK FLOOR PLAN C-665 - TV - E - A - 1105
7 FLOOR PLANS ROOF PLAN C-665 - TV - E - A - 1106
8 ELEVATION ELEVATION B C-665 - TV - E - A - 1200
9 SECTION SECTION 3-3 C-665 - TV - E - A - 1201
DOOR WINDOW C-665-TV-E-A-1300-
DETAIL SHEET1
DETAIL SHEET2
DETAIL SHEET2(2)
13 TOILET DETAIL TOILET DETAIL-01 C-665-TV-E-A-1402
Page 1173 of 1358


16 TOILET DETAIL STILT TOILET DETAIL C-665-TV-E-A-1403
TYPICAL COMMON AREA FLOORING
17 FLOORING PLANS C-665-TV-E-A-1700
DETAIL-03
18 FLOORING PLANS APPARTMENT FLOORING DETAIL C-665-TV-E-A-1701
19 STAIRCASE DETAIL STAIRCASE DETAIL-03 C-665-TV-E-A-1600
20 STAIRCASE DETAIL STAIRCASE DETAIL-03 C-665-TV-E-A-1601
21 GLAZING DETAIL GLAZING DETAIL C-665-TV-E-A-1310
C-665-TV-E-A-1740-
22 Parapet + Grill Detail Parapet + Grill Detail
SHEET1
C-665-TV-E-A-1740-
SHEET2
C-665-TV-E-A-1740-
SHEET3
25 PARKING LAYOUT PARKING LAYOUT-03 C-665-TV-E-A-1708
26 DADO DETAIL STILT FLOOR DADO DETAIL C-665-TV-E-A-1720
27 DADO DETAIL TYPICAL DADO DETAIL C-665-TV-E-A-1721
28 DADO DETAIL WATER TANK LEVEL PLAN DADO DETAIL C-665-TV-E-A-1722
C-665-TV-E-A-1800-
29 FURNITURE DETAIL FURNITURE DETAIL
SHEET2
C-665-TV-E-A-1800-
SHEET3
C-665-TV-E-A-1800-
SHEET4
C-665-TV-E-A-1800-
32 FURNITURE DETAIL MODULAR KITCHEN FURNITURE DETAIL
SHEET5
33 FINISHING SCHEDULE DETAILED FINISHING SCHEDULE PDF COPY
MESS
C-665 - MESS - E - A -
1 FLOOR PLANS GROUND FLOOR WORKING PLAN
1100
C-665 - MESS - E - A -
2 FLOOR PLANS SERVICE AREA WORKING PLAN
1101
C-665 - MESS - E - A -
3 FLOOR PLANS TERRACE FLOOR WORKING PLAN
1102
C-665 - MESS - E - A -
4 ELEVATIONS ELEVATIONS
1200 SHEET 01 OF 02
C-665 - MESS - E - A -
5 ELEVATIONS ELEVATIONS
1200 SHEET 02 OF 02
Page 1174 of 1358

C-665 - MESS - E - A -
6 SECTIONS SECTIONS
1201
DOOR WINDOW C-665 - MESS - E - A -


9 GLAZING DETAIL

10 GLAZING DETAIL

11 GLAZING DETAIL
C-665 - MESS - E - A -
12 TOILET DETAILS TYPICAL TOILET DETAILS T1
1400
C-665 - MESS - E - A -
1401 SHEET 1 OF 2
C-665 - MESS - E - A -
1401 SHEET 2 OF 2
C-665 - MESS - E - A -
15 KITCHEN DETAILS KITCHEN DETAILS
1500
C-665 - MESS - E - A -
1600
C-665 - MESS - E - A -
1601
FLOORING LAYOUT C-665 - MESS - E - A -
18 GROUND FLOOR FLOORING PLAN
PLAN 1700
19 SERVICE AREA FLOORING PLAN
PLAN 1701
20 TERRACE FLOOR FLOORING PLAN
PLAN 1702
C-665 - MESS - E - A -
21 WALL DADO LAYOUT GROUND FLOOR WALL DADO LAYOUT
1720
C-665 - MESS - E - A -
22 WALL DADO LAYOUT SERVICE AREA WALL DADO LAYOUT
1721
C-665 - MESS - E - A -
23 WALL DADO LAYOUT TERRACE FLOOR WALL DADO LAYOUT
1722
C-665 - MESS - E - A -
24 RAILING DETAIL RAILING DETAIL
1740
MISCELLANEOUS C-665 - MESS - E - A -
25 ENTRANCE RAMP DETAIL (A)
DETAIL 1761
26 GAS BANK RAMP DETAIL (B)
DETAIL 1762
27 SERVICE AREA RAMP DETAIL (C)
DETAIL 1763
28 ENTRANCE RAMP DETAIL (D)
DETAIL 1764
Page 1175 of 1358

FURNITURE FLOOR C-665 - MESS - E - A -

29 GROUND FLOOR FURNITURE LAYOUT
PLAN 1800
FURNITURE FLOOR C-665 - MESS - E - A -
30 TERRACE FLOOR FURNITURE LAYOUT
PLAN 1801
Common for all Blocks

MISCELLANEOUS
1 DUCT COVERING & KHURRA DETAILS C-665 - CD - E - A - 1764
DETAIL
MISCELLANEOUS TYPICAL PARAPET & TERRACING DETAIL
2 C-665 - CD - E - A - 1760
DETAIL FOR ALL BUILDINGS
Outer Development/ Landscape

1 LANDSCAPE PARKING 1 C-665 - LA - E - A - 1020
5 LANDSCAPE PARKING 5 WITH SERVICES C-665 - LA - E - A - 1024
LANDSCAPE AREA 1 NEAR ACADEMIC
6 LANDSCAPE C-665 - LA - E - A - 1025
BLOCK 1
7 LANDSCAPE C-665 - LA - E - A - 1026
BLOCK 1
8 LANDSCAPE C-665 - LA - E - A - 1027
BLOCK 1
9 LANDSCAPE C-665 - LA - E - A - 1028
BLOCK 1
10 LANDSCAPE C-665 - LA - E - A - 1029
BLOCK 1
LANDSCAPE ISLAND IN BETWEEN THE
11 LANDSCAPE C-665 - LA - E - A - 1030
BOY'S HOSTEL BLOCK 03 & 04
12 LANDSCAPE ROUNDABOUTS 1 & 2 C-665 - LA - E - A - 1031
TRIANGULAR PLANTING ISLAND NEAR
13 LANDSCAPE C-665 - LA - E - A - 1032
BOY'S HOSTEL
14 LANDSCAPE BOY'S HOSTEL NO-4 C-665 - LA - E - A - 1033
15 LANDSCAPE BOY'S HOSTEL NO-3 C-665 - LA - E - A - 1034
16 LANDSCAPE LANDSCAPE PLAZA NEAR BOY'S HOSTEL C-665 - LA - E - A - 1035
17 LANDSCAPE 9 SQUARE SIT-OUT PLAZA C-665 - LA - E - A - 1036
18 LANDSCAPE SITTING PLAZA NEAR BUS PARKING C-665 - LA - E - A - 1037
19 LANDSCAPE PLANTING ISLAND NEAR BUS PARKING C-665 - LA - E - A - 1038
PLANTING ISLAND FOR MDC ACADEMIC
20 LANDSCAPE C-665 - LA - E - A - 1039
INCUBATION CENTER BLOCK -02
PLANTING ISLAND BETWEEN TYPE - V
21 LANDSCAPE C-665 - LA - E - A - 1040
08 & 09
Page 1176 of 1358

22 LANDSCAPE BENCHES DETAIL C-665 - LA - E - A - 1041

23 LANDSCAPE TYPICAL PAVING DETAIL C-665 - LA - E - A - 1042
24 LANDSCAPE ROAD TYPICAL LAYOUT AND DETAIL C-665 - LA - E - A - 1043
25 LANDSCAPE WATER TANK NO-12 C-665 - LA - E - A - 1044
26 LANDSCAPE O.A.T. C-665 - LA - E - A - 1045
27 LANDSCAPE MDC ACCOMMODATION C-665 - LA - E - A - 1046
HORTICULTURE DETAILED
28 LANDSCAPE PDF COPY
SPECIFICATIONS
IIM _ ELECTRICAL DRAWING LIST

Drawing
S.N Drawing Type Drawing title
Number
Outer Development
Site Plan EXTERNAL ELECTRICAL LAYOUT 665 - LA - E - E
- 1030
1
SINGLE LINE 665 - LA - E - E

2 DIAGRAM ELECTRICAL PANEL SLD - 1031
Academic Building
Ground Plan POINT WIRING CONDUIT LAYOUT FOR GROUND FLOOR (± 665 - AB - E - E
1 0.00 M. LVL.) - 3000
Floor Plan POINT WIRING CONDUIT LAYOUT FOR 1st FLOOR (+6.00 665 - AB - E - E
2 M. LVL.) - 3001
Floor Plan POINT WIRING CONDUIT LAYOUT FOR +9.90 M. LVL. 665 - AB - E - E
3 - 3002
Floor Plan POINT WIRING CONDUIT LAYOUT FOR 13.05 / +13.80 M. 665 - AB - E - E
4 LVL. - 3003
Floor Plan POINT WIRING CONDUIT LAYOUT FOR 17.7 M. LVL. 665 - AB - E - E
5 - 3004
Terrace Plan POINT WIRING CONDUIT LAYOUT FOR +21.6 M. LVL. 665 - AB - E - E
6 - 3005
Ground Plan CIRCUIT WIRING CONDUIT LAYOUT FOR GROUND FLOOR 665 - AB - E - E
7 (± 0.00 M. LVL.) - 3006
Floor Plan CIRCUIT WIRING CONDUIT LAYOUT FOR 1st FLOOR (+6.00 665 - AB - E - E
8 M. LVL.) - 3007
Floor Plan CIRCUIT WIRING CONDUIT LAYOUT FOR +9.90 M. LVL. 665 - AB - E - E
9 - 3008
Floor Plan CIRCUIT WIRING CONDUIT LAYOUT FOR 13.05 / +13.80 M. 665 - AB - E - E
10 LVL - 3009
Page 1177 of 1358

Floor Plan CIRCUIT WIRING CONDUIT LAYOUT FOR 17.7 M. LVL. 665 - AB - E - E
11 - 3010
Terrace Plan CIRCUIT WIRING CONDUIT LAYOUT FOR 21.6 M. LVL. 665 - AB - E - E
12 - 3011
Ground Plan LOW VOLTAGE WIRING CONDUIT LAYOUT FOR GROUND 665 - AB - E - E
13 FLOOR (± 0.00 M. LVL.) - 3012
Floor Plan LOW VOLTAGE WIRING CONDUIT LAYOUT FOR 1st FLOOR 665 - AB - E - E
14 (+6.00 M. LVL.) - 3013
Floor Plan LOW VOLTAGE WIRING CONDUIT LAYOUT FOR +9.90 M. 665 - AB - E - E
15 LVL. - 3014
Floor Plan LOW VOLTAGE WIRING CONDUIT LAYOUT FOR 13.05 / 665 - AB - E - E
16 +13.80 M. LVL. - 3015
Floor Plan LOW VOLTAGE WIRING CONDUIT LAYOUT FOR 17.7 M. 665 - AB - E - E
17 LVL. - 3016
Terrace Plan LOW VOLTAGE WIRING CONDUIT LAYOUT FOR 21.6 M. 665 - AB - E - E
18 LVL. - 3017
Ground Plan ELECTRICAL & LOW VOLTAGE WALL WORKING LAYOUT 665 - AB - E - E
19 FOR GROUND FLOOR (± 0.00 M. LVL.) - 3018
Floor Plan ELECTRICAL & LOW VOLTAGE WALL WORKING LAYOUT 665 - AB - E - E
20 FOR 1st FLOOR (+6.00 M. LVL.) - 3019
Floor Plan 665 - AB - E - E

21 ELECTRICAL & LOW VOLTAGE WALL WORKING LAYOUT
- 3020
FOR +9.90 M. LVL
22 FOR 13.05 / +13.80 M. LVL. - 3021
23 FOR 17.7 M. LVL. - 3022
Terrace Plan ELECTRICAL & LOW VOLTAGE WALL WORKING LAYOUT 665 - AB - E - E
24 FOR 21.6 M. LVL. - 3023
ELECTRICAL PANEL SLD 665 - AB - E - E

25 SINGLE LINE
- 3024
DIAGRAM
ELECTRICAL PANEL SLD 665 - AB - E - E
26 SINGLE LINE
- 3025
DIAGRAM

Ground Plan SLEEVE & EARTHING LAYOUT 665 - MC - E -
1 FOR GROUND FLOOR E - 3000
Ground Plan ELECTRICAL CABLE TRAY & LOW VOLTAGE 665 - MC - E -

2 RACEWAY LAYOUT FOR GROUND FLOOR E - 3001
Ground Plan POINT WIRING CONDUIT LAYOUT 665 - MC - E -

Page 1178 of 1358

Ground Plan CIRCUIT WIRING CONDUIT LAYOUT 665 - MC - E -

Ground Plan LOW VOLTAGE WIRING CONDUIT LAYOUT 665 - MC - E -

Ground Plan ELECTRICAL & LOW VOLTAGE WALL WORKING LAYOUT 665 - MC - E -
Ground Plan ELECTRICAL CABLE TRAY & LOW VOLTAGE 665 - MC - E -

7 RACEWAY LAYOUT FOR 1st FLOOR E - 3006
Floor Plan POINT WIRING CONDUIT LAYOUT 665 - MC - E -

8 FOR 1st FLOOR E - 3007
Floor Plan CIRCUIT WIRING CONDUIT LAYOUT 665 - MC - E -

Floor Plan LOW VOLTAGE WIRING CONDUIT LAYOUT 665 - MC - E -

Floor Plan ELECTRICAL & LOW VOLTAGE 665 - MC - E -

11 WALL WORKING LAYOUT FOR 1st FLOOR E - 3010
Floor Plan ELECTRICAL CABLE TRAY & LOW VOLTAGE 665 - MC - E -

12 RACEWAY LAYOUT FOR 2nd FLOOR E - 3011
Floor Plan POINT WIRING CONDUIT LAYOUT 665 - MC - E -

13 FOR 2nd FLOOR E - 3012
Floor Plan CIRCUIT WIRING CONDUIT LAYOUT 665 - MC - E -

Floor Plan LOW VOLTAGE WIRING CONDUIT LAYOUT 665 - MC - E -

Floor Plan ELECTRICAL & LOW VOLTAGE 665 - MC - E -

16 WALL WORKING LAYOUT FOR 2nd FLOOR E - 3015
Terrace Plan ELECTRICAL CABLE TRAY & LOW VOLTAGE 665 - MC - E -

17 RACEWAY LAYOUT FOR TERRACE FLOOR E - 3016
Terrace Plan POINT WIRING CONDUIT LAYOUT FOR TERRACE FLOOR 665 - MC - E -
18 E - 3017
Terrace Plan CIRCUIT WIRING CONDUIT LAYOU FOR TERRACE FLOOR 665 - MC - E -
19 E - 3018
Terrace Plan LOW VOLTAGE WIRING CONDUIT LAYOUT FOR TERRACE 665 - MC - E -
20 FLOOR E - 3019
Terrace Plan ELECTRICAL & LOW VOLTAGE 665 - MC - E -

21 WALL WORKING LAYOUT FOR TERRACE FLOOR E - 3020
Schematic LOW VOLTAGE DATA WIRING DETAIL 665 - MC - E -

22 E - 3021
Schematic LOW VOLTAGE CCTV CAMERA, TELEVISION 665 - MC - E -

23 AND Wi-Fi WIRING DETAIL E - 3022
Page 1179 of 1358

Schematic LOW VOLTAGE TELEPHONE WIRING DETAIL 665 - MC - E -

24 E - 3023
Schematic LOW VOLTAGE CCTV FIRE ALARM 665 - MC - E -

25 AND PUBLIC ADDRESS WIRING DETAIL E - 3024
ELECTRICAL PANEL SLD 665 - MC - E -

26 SINGLE LINE
E - 3025
DIAGRAM
ELECTRICAL WIRING DETAIL 665 - MC - E -
27 SINGLE LINE
E - 3026
DIAGRAM
Type-V Residences
STILT FLOOR STILT FLOOR SLEEVE & EARTHING LAYOUT 665-TV-E-E-
1 PLAN 3000
STILT FLOOR POINT WIRING CONDUIT LAYOUT 665-TV-E-E-
PLAN FOR STILT FLOOR 3001
2
STILT FLOOR CIRCUIT WIRING CONDUIT LAYOUT 665-TV-E-E-
3
STILT FLOOR LOW VOLTAGE WIRING CONDUIT LAYOUT 665-TV-E-E-
4
STILT FLOOR ELECTRICAL & LOW VOLTAGE 665-TV-E-E-
PLAN WALL WORKING LAYOUT FOR STILT FLOOR 3004
5
Floor Plan POINT WIRING CONDUIT LAYOUT 665-TV-E-E-
FOR 1st FLOOR 3005
6
Floor Plan CIRCUIT WIRING CONDUIT LAYOUT 665-TV-E-E-
FOR 1st FLOOR 3006
7
Floor Plan LOW VOLTAGE WIRING CONDUIT LAYOUT 665-TV-E-E-
FOR 1st FLOOR 3007
8
Floor Plan ELECTRICAL & LOW VOLTAGE 665-TV-E-E-
WALL WORKING LAYOUT FOR 1st FLOOR 3008
9
FOR 2nd FLOOR 3009
10
FOR 2nd FLOOR 3010
11
FOR 2nd FLOOR 3011
12
WALL WORKING LAYOUT FOR 2nd FLOOR 3012
13
FOR 3rd-6th & 8th FLOOR 3013
14
15
Page 1180 of 1358


16
WALL WORKING LAYOUT FOR 3rd-6th & 8th FLOOR 3016
17
FOR 7th FLOOR 3017
18
FOR 7th FLOOR 3018
19
FOR 7th FLOOR 3019
20
WALL WORKING LAYOUT FOR 7th FLOOR 3020
21
Terrace Plan LIGHTNING PROTECTION & DOWN COMER LAYOUT FOR 665-TV-E-E-
22 TERRACE FLOOR 3021
Terrace Plan POINT WIRING CONDUIT LAYOUT 665-TV-E-E-
FOR TERRACE FLOOR 3022
23
Terrace Plan CIRCUIT WIRING CONDUIT LAYOUT 665-TV-E-E-
24
Terrace Plan LOW VOLTAGE WIRING CONDUIT LAYOUT 665-TV-E-E-
25
Terrace Plan ELECTRICAL & LOW VOLTAGE 665-TV-E-E-
WALL WORKING LAYOUT FOR TERRACE FLOOR 3025
26
Terrace Plan ROOF TOP SOLAR SYSTEM 665-TV-E-E-
27 3026
SINGLE LINE ELECTRICAL PANEL SLD 665-TV-E-E-
28 DIAGRAM 3027
LOW VOLTAGE FIRE ALARM WIRING DETAIL 665-TV-E-E-
29 Schematic 3028
LOW VOLTAGE TELEPHONE & DATA WIRING DETAIL 665-TV-E-E-
30 Schematic 3029
LOW VOLTAGE TELEVISION & CCTV ALARM WIRING 665-TV-E-E-
31 Schematic DETAIL 3030
LOW VOLTAGE SPEAKER (PUBLIC ADDRESS) AND WI-FI 665-TV-E-E-
32 Schematic WIRING DETAIL 3031
Electrical point layout for Typical Flat 665-TV-E-E-
33 Schematic 3032
Electrical point detail for Typical Flat 665-TV-E-E-
34 Schematic 3033
MDC Accommodation
Ground Plan GROUND FLOOR SLEEVE & EARTHING LAYOUT 665-MDCH-E-
1 E-3000
Ground Plan POINT WIRING CONDUIT LAYOUT 665-MDCH-E-
FOR GROUND FLOOR E-3001
2
Page 1181 of 1358

Ground Plan CIRCUIT WIRING CONDUIT LAYOUT 665-MDCH-E-

3
Ground Plan LOW VOLTAGE WIRING CONDUIT LAYOUT 665-MDCH-E-
4
Ground Plan ELECTRICAL & LOW VOLTAGE 665-MDCH-E-
WALL WORKING LAYOUT FOR GROUND FLOOR E-3004
5
Floor Plan POINT WIRING CONDUIT LAYOUT 665-MDCH-E-
FOR 1st FLOOR E-3005
6
Floor Plan CIRCUIT WIRING CONDUIT LAYOUT 665-MDCH-E-
7
Floor Plan LOW VOLTAGE WIRING CONDUIT LAYOUT 665-MDCH-E-
8
Floor Plan ELECTRICAL & LOW VOLTAGE 665-MDCH-E-
WALL WORKING LAYOUT FOR 1st FLOOR E-3008
9
FOR 2nd FLOOR E-3009
10
11
12
WALL WORKING LAYOUT FOR 2nd FLOOR E-3012
13
FOR 3rd-6th, 8th & 9th FLOOR E-3013
14
15
16
WALL WORKING LAYOUT FOR 3rd-6th, 8th & 9th FLOOR E-3016
17
FOR 7th & 10th FLOOR E-3017
18
19
20
WALL WORKING LAYOUT FOR 7th & 10th FLOOR E-3020
21
Terrace Plan POINT WIRING CONDUIT LAYOUT 665-MDCH-E-
FOR TERRACE FLOOR E-3021
22
Page 1182 of 1358

CIRCUIT WIRING CONDUIT LAYOUT 665-MDCH-E-

23 Terrace Plan
Terrace Plan LOW VOLTAGE WIRING CONDUIT LAYOUT 665-MDCH-E-
24
Terrace Plan ELECTRICAL & LOW VOLTAGE WALL WORKING LAYOUT 665-MDCH-E-
25
Floor Plan ELECTRICAL CABLE TRAY LAYOUT FOR 1st FLOOR 665-MDCH-E-
26 E-3025
Floor Plan ELECTRICAL CABLE TRAY LAYOUT FOR 2nd FLOOR 665-MDCH-E-
27 E-3026
Floor Plan ELECTRICAL CABLE TRAY LAYOUT FOR 3rd-6th, 8th & 9th 665-MDCH-E-
28 FLOOR E-3027
Floor Plan ELECTRICAL CABLE TRAY LAYOUT FOR 7th & 10th FLOOR 665-MDCH-E-
29 E-3028
Terrace Plan LIGHTNING ARRESTOR LAYOUT FOR TERRACE FLOOR 665-MDCH-E-
30 E-3029
SINGLE LINE ELECTRICAL PANEL SLD 665-MDCH-E-
31 DIAGRAM E-3030
LOW VOLTAGE FIRE ALARM & PUBLIC ADDRESS WIRING 665-MDCH-E-
32 Schematic DETAIL E-3031
LOW VOLTAGE CCTV & DATA WIRING DETAIL 665-MDCH-E-
33 Schematic E-3032
LOW VOLTAGE WI-FI, TELEVISION & TV WIRING DETAIL 665-MDCH-E-
34 Schematic E-3033
Electrical point detail for Typical Hostel Block rooms 665-MDCH-E-
35 Schematic E-3034
Boys Hostel 1 & 2

Ground Plan SLEEVE & EARTHING LAYOUT 665 - BH - E - E
FOR GROUND FLOOR - 3000
1
Ground Plan ELECTRICAL CABLE TRAY & LOW VOLTAGE 665 - BH - E - E
RACEWAY LAYOUT FOR GROUND FLOOR - 3001
2
Ground Plan POINT WIRING CONDUIT LAYOUT 665 - BH - E - E
3
Ground Plan CIRCUIT WIRING CONDUIT LAYOUT 665 - BH - E - E
4
Ground Plan LOW VOLTAGE WIRING CONDUIT LAYOUT 665 - BH - E - E
5
Ground Plan ELECTRICAL & LOW VOLTAGE 665 - BH - E - E
WALL WORKING LAYOUT FOR GROUND FLOOR - 3005
6
Floor Plan ELECTRICAL CABLE TRAY & LOW VOLTAGE 665 - BH - E - E
RACEWAY LAYOUT FOR 1st FLOOR - 3006
7
Floor Plan POINT WIRING CONDUIT LAYOUT 665 - BH - E - E
FOR 1st FLOOR - 3007
8
Page 1183 of 1358

Floor Plan CIRCUIT WIRING CONDUIT LAYOUT 665 - BH - E - E

9
Floor Plan LOW VOLTAGE WIRING CONDUIT LAYOUT 665 - BH - E - E
10
Floor Plan ELECTRICAL & LOW VOLTAGE 665 - BH - E - E
WALL WORKING LAYOUT FOR 1st FLOOR - 3010
11
Floor Plan ELECTRICAL CABLE TRAY & LOW VOLTAGE 665 - BH - E - E
RACEWAY LAYOUT FOR 2nd FLOOR - 3011
12
FOR 2nd FLOOR - 3012
13
14
15
Floor Plan ELECTRICAL & LOW VOLTAGE 665 - BH - E - E
WALL WORKING LAYOUT FOR 2nd FLOOR - 3015
16
ELECTRICAL CABLE TRAY & LOW VOLTAGE RACEWAY
665 - BH - E - E
17 Floor Plan LAYOUT FOR 3rd TO 6th & 8th, 9th, 11th, 12th, 14th
- 3016
FLOOR
POINT WIRING CONDUIT LAYOUT FOR 3rd TO 6th & 8th, 665 - BH - E - E
18 Floor Plan
9th, 11th, 12th, 14th FLOOR - 3017
CIRCUIT WIRING CONDUIT LAYOUT FOR 3rd TO 6th & 8th, 665 - BH - E - E
19 Floor Plan
9th, 11th, 12th, 14th FLOOR - 3018
LOW VOLTAGE WIRING CONDUIT LAYOUT FOR 3rd TO 6th 665 - BH - E - E

20 Floor Plan
& 8th, 9th, 11th, 12th, 14th FLOOR - 3019
ELECTRICAL & LOW VOLTAGE WALL WORKING LAYOUT 665 - BH - E - E

21 Floor Plan
FOR 3rd TO 6th & 8th, 9th, 11th, 12th, 14th FLOOR - 3020
ELECTRICAL CABLE TRAY & LOW VOLTAGERACEWAY 665 - BH - E - E
Floor Plan LAYOUT FOR 7th, 10th & 13th FLOOR
22 - 3021
FOR 7th, 10th & 13th FLOOR - 3022
23
24
25
Floor Plan ELECTRICAL & LOW VOLTAGE WALL WORKING 665 - BH - E - E
LAYOUT FOR 7th, 10th & 13th FLOOR - 3025
26
Terrace Plan ELECTRICAL CABLE TRAY & LOW VOLTAGE 665 - BH - E - E
RACEWAY AND LA LAYOUT FOR TERRACE FLOOR - 3026
27
Terrace Plan POINT WIRING CONDUIT LAYOUT 665 - BH - E - E
FOR TERRACE FLOOR - 3027
28
Page 1184 of 1358

Terrace Plan CIRCUIT WIRING CONDUIT LAYOUT 665 - BH - E - E

29
Terrace Plan LOW VOLTAGE WIRING CONDUIT LAYOUT 665 - BH - E - E
30
Terrace Plan ELECTRICAL & LOW VOLTAGE 665 - BH - E - E
WALL WORKING LAYOUT FOR TERRACE FLOOR - 3030
31
Schematic LOW VOLTAGE DATA WIRING DETAIL 665 - BH - E - E
- 3031
32
Schematic LOW VOLTAGE TELEPHONE WIRING DETAIL 665 - BH - E - E
- 3032
33
Schematic LOW VOLTAGE CCTV CAMERA, TELEVISION 665 - BH - E - E
AND Wi-Fi WIRING DETAIL - 3033
34
Schematic LOW VOLTAGE TELEVISION AND WIFI WIRING DETAIL 665 - BH - E - E
- 3034
35
SINGLE LINE ELECTRICAL PANEL SLD 665 - BH - E - E
DIAGRAM - 3035
36
SINGLE LINE Electrical point detail for Typical Hostel Block rooms 665 - BH - E - E
DIAGRAM - 3036
37
Girls Hostel
Ground Plan SLEEVE & EARTHING LAYOUT 665 - GH - E - E
1
Ground Plan ELECTRICAL CABLE TRAY & LOW VOLTAGE 665 - GH - E - E
RACEWAY LAYOUT FOR GROUND FLOOR - 3001
2
Ground Plan POINT WIRING CONDUIT LAYOUT 665 - GH - E - E
3
Ground Plan CIRCUIT WIRING CONDUIT LAYOUT 665 - GH - E - E
4
Ground Plan LOW VOLTAGE WIRING CONDUIT LAYOUT 665 - GH - E - E
5
Ground Plan ELECTRICAL & LOW VOLTAGE 665 - GH - E - E
WALL WORKING LAYOUT FOR GROUND FLOOR - 3005
6
Floor Plan ELECTRICAL CABLE TRAY & LOW VOLTAGE 665 - GH - E - E
RACEWAY LAYOUT FOR 1st FLOOR - 3006
7
Floor Plan POINT WIRING CONDUIT LAYOUT 665 - GH - E - E
8
Floor Plan CIRCUIT WIRING CONDUIT LAYOUT 665 - GH - E - E
9
Floor Plan LOW VOLTAGE WIRING CONDUIT LAYOUT 665 - GH - E - E
10
Page 1185 of 1358

Floor Plan ELECTRICAL & LOW VOLTAGE 665 - GH - E - E

WALL WORKING LAYOUT FOR 1st FLOOR - 3010
11
Floor Plan ELECTRICAL CABLE TRAY & LOW VOLTAGE RACEWAY 665 - GH - E - E
LAYOUT FOR 2nd FLOOR - 3011
12
13
14
15
Floor Plan ELECTRICAL & LOW VOLTAGE 665 - GH - E - E
WALL WORKING LAYOUT FOR 2nd FLOOR - 3015
16
ELECTRICAL CABLE TRAY & LOW VOLTAGE RACEWAY 665 - GH - E - E
Floor Plan LAYOUT FOR 3rd TO 6th & 8th, 9th, 11th, 12th, 14th - 3016
17 FLOOR
POINT WIRING CONDUIT LAYOUT 665 - GH - E - E
Floor Plan - 3017
18 FOR 3rd TO 6th & 8th, 9th, 11th, 12th, 14th FLOOR
CIRCUIT WIRING CONDUIT LAYOUT 665 - GH - E - E

Floor Plan - 3018
LOW VOLTAGE WIRING CONDUIT LAYOUT 665 - GH - E - E

Floor Plan - 3019
ELECTRICAL & LOW VOLTAGE WALL WORKING LAYOUT 665 - GH - E - E

Floor Plan - 3020
ELECTRICAL CABLE TRAY & LOW VOLTAGE 665 - GH - E - E
Floor Plan RACEWAY LAYOUT FOR 7th, 10th & 13th FLOOR - 3021
22
23
24
25
Floor Plan ELECTRICAL & LOW VOLTAGE WALL WORKING 665 - GH - E - E
LAYOUT FOR 7th, 10th & 13th FLOOR - 3025
26
Terrace Plan ELECTRICAL CABLE TRAY & LOW VOLTAGE 665 - GH - E - E
RACEWAY AND LA LAYOUT FOR TERRACE FLOOR - 3026
27
Terrace Plan POINT WIRING CONDUIT LAYOUT 665 - GH - E - E
28
Terrace Plan CIRCUIT WIRING CONDUIT LAYOUT 665 - GH - E - E
29
Terrace Plan LOW VOLTAGE WIRING CONDUIT LAYOUT 665 - GH - E - E
30
Page 1186 of 1358

Terrace Plan ELECTRICAL & LOW VOLTAGE 665 - GH - E - E

WALL WORKING LAYOUT FOR TERRACE FLOOR - 3030
31
Schematic LOW VOLTAGE DATA WIRING DETAIL 665 - GH - E - E
- 3031
32
Schematic LOW VOLTAGE TELEPHONE WIRING DETAIL 665 - GH - E - E
- 3032
33
Schematic LOW VOLTAGE CCTV CAMERA, TELEVISION AND Wi-Fi 665 - GH - E - E
WIRING DETAIL - 3033
34
Schematic LOW VOLTAGE CCTV FIRE ALARM AND PUBLIC ADDRESS 665 - GH - E - E
WIRING DETAIL - 3034
35
SINGLE LINE ELECTRICAL PANEL SLD 665 - GH - E - E
DIAGRAM - 3035
36
SINGLE LINE Electrical point detail for Typical Hostel rooms 665 - BH - E - E
DIAGRAM - 3036
37
MESS
Ground Plan ELECTRICAL AND SLEEVE LAYOUT & EARTHING DETAIL 665 - MB - E -
E - 3000
1
Ground Plan POINT WIRING CONDUIT LAYOUT FOR GROUND FLOOR 665 - MB - E -
E - 3001
2
Ground Plan CIRCUIT WIRING CONDUIT LAYOUT 665 - MB - E -
FOR GROUND FLOOR E - 3002
3
Ground Plan LOW VOLTAGE WIRING CONDUIT LAYOUT 665 - MB - E -
FOR GROUND FLOOR E - 3003
4
Ground Plan ELECTRICAL & LOW VOLTAGE 665 - MB - E -
WALL WORKING LAYOUT FOR GROUND FLOOR E - 3004
5
POINT WIRING CONDUIT LAYOUT 665 - MB - E -
FOR SERVICE FLOOR E - 3005
6 Service Plan
CIRCUIT WIRING CONDUIT LAYOUT 665 - MB - E -
7 Service Plan
LOW VOLTAGE WIRING CONDUIT LAYOUT 665 - MB - E -
8 Service Plan
ELECTRICAL & LOW VOLTAGE 665 - MB - E -
WALL WORKING LAYOUT FOR SERVICE FLOOR E - 3008
9 Service Plan
ELECTRICAL & LOW VOLTAGE 665 - MB - E -
CONDUIT LAYOUT FOR TERRACE FLOOR E - 3009
10 Terrace Plan
665 - MB - E -
SINGLE LINE
E - 3010
11 DIAGRAM ELECTRICAL PANEL SLD_ WIRING DETAIL
LOW VOLTAGE WIRING DETAIL (PA, CCTV, WI-FI, FAS, 665 - MB - E -
12 Schematic
DATA, TV, TELEPHONE) E - 3011
Page 1187 of 1358

IIM _ PLUMBING DRAWING LIST

Drawing
S.N Drawing title Drawing Number
Type
Type-V Residences
Ground 665 - TV - E - PL -
1 GROUND FLOOR PLUMBING LAYOUT
Plans 4000
Floor Plans FIRST FLOOR PLUMBING LAYOUT 665 - TV - E - PL -
2 4001
Floor Plans SECOND FLOOR PLUMBING LAYOUT 665 - TV - E - PL -
3 4002
Floor Plans TYPICAL FLOOR PLUMBING LAYOUT 665 - TV - E - PL -
4 4004
Floor Plans SEVENTH FLOOR PLUMBING LAYOUT 665 - TV - E - PL -
5 4005
Floor Plans TERRACE FLOOR PLUMBING LAYOUT 665 - TV - E - PL -
6 4006
Terrace TANK LEVEL PLAN PLUMBING LAYOUT 665 - TV - E - PL -
7 Plans 4007
Tolilet TYPICAL TOILET DETAIL-01 665 - TV - E - PL -
8 Details 4008
Schematic DOMESTIC WATER SUPPLY SCHEMATIC LAYOUT 665 - TV - E - PL -
9 4009
Schematic FLUSHING WATER SUPPLY SCHEMATIC LAYOUT 665 - TV - E - PL -
10 4010
Schematic HOT WATER SUPPLY SCHEMATIC LAYOUT 665 - TV - E - PL -
11 4011
MDC Accommodation
Floor Plans GROUND CEILING AND FIRST FLOOR PLUMBING LAYOUT 665 - MA - E - PL -
1 4001
Ground GROUND FLOOR PLUMBING LAYOUT 665 - MA - E - PL -
2 Plans 4002
Floor Plans SECOND AND TYPICAL FLOOR ( 4th, 5th, 6th, 8th & 9th) 665 - MA - E - PL -
PLUMBING LAYOUT 4003
3
Floor Plans 7TH & 10TH AND TERRACE FLOOR PLUMBING LAYOUT 665 - MA - E - PL -
4 4004
Terrace WATER TANK LEVEL PLAN 665 - MA - E - PL -
5 Plans 4005
Terrace DOMESTIC WATER SUPPLY & RO WATER SUPPLY 665 - MA - E - PL -
6 Plans SCHEMATIC LAYOUT 4500
Terrace FLUSHING WATER SUPPLY SCHEMATIC LAYOUT 665 - MA - E - PL -
7 Plans 4501
Terrace HOT WATER SUPPLY SCHEMATIC LAYOUT 665 - MA - E - PL -
8 Plans 4502
Page 1188 of 1358

Boys Hostel 1 & 2

Ground GROUND FLOOR PLUMBING LAYOUT 665 - BH - E - PL -
1 Plans 4000
Floor Plans FIRST FLOOR PLUMBING LAYOUT 665 - BH - E - PL -
2 4001
Floor Plans SECOND FLOOR PLUMBING LAYOUT 665 - BH - E - PL -
3 4002
Floor Plans THIRD FLOOR PLUMBING LAYOUT 665 - BH - E - PL -
4 4003
Floor Plans TYPICAL ( 4th, 5th, 6th, 8th, 9th, 11th, 12th & 14TH)FLOOR 665 - BH - E - PL -
PLUMBING LAYOUT 4004
5
Floor Plans TYPICAL (7th, 10th & 13th) FLOOR PLUMBING LAYOUT 665 - BH - E - PL -
6 4005
Terrace TERRACE FLOOR PLUMBING LAYOUT 665 - BH - E - PL -
7 Plans 4006
Terrace WATER TANK FLOOR PLUMBING LAYOUT 665 - BH - E - PL -
8 Plans 4007
Schematic DOMESTIC WATER SUPPLY & RO WATER SUPPLY 665 - HB - E - PL -
9 SCHEMATIC LAYOUT 4500
Schematic FLUSHING WATER SUPPLY SCHEMATIC LAYOUT 665 - HB - E - PL -
10 4501
Schematic HOT WATER SUPPLY SCHEMATIC LAYOUT 665 - HB - E - PL -
11 4502
Girls Hostel
Ground GROUND FLOOR PLUMBING LAYOUT 665 - GH - E - PL -
1 Plans 4000
Floor Plans FIRST FLOOR PLUMBING LAYOUT 665 - GH - E - PL -
2 4001
Floor Plans SECOND FLOOR PLUMBING LAYOUT 665 - GH - E - PL -
3 4002
Floor Plans THIRD FLOOR PLUMBING LAYOUT 665 - GH - E - PL -
4 4003
Floor Plans TYPICAL ( 4th, 5th, 6th, 8th, 9th, 11th, 12th & 14TH) 665 - GH - E - PL -
FLOOR PLUMBING LAYOUT 4004
5
Floor Plans TYPICAL (7th, 10th & 13th) FLOOR PLUMBING LAYOUT 665 - GH - E - PL -
6 4005
Terrace TERRACE FLOOR PLUMBING LAYOUT 665 - GH - E - PL -
7 Plans 4006
Terrace WATER TANK LVL. PLUMBING LAYOUT 665 - GH - E - PL -
8 Plans 4007
Schematic DOMESTIC WATER SUPPLY & RO WATER SUPPLY 665 - GH - E - PL -
9 SCHEMATIC LAYOUT 4500
Schematic FLUSHING WATER SUPPLY SCHEMATIC LAYOUT 665 - GH - E - PL -
10 4501
Schematic HOT WATER SUPPLY SCHEMATIC LAYOUT 665 - GH - E - PL -
11 4502
Page 1189 of 1358

MESS
Ground GROUND FLOOR PLAN PLUMBING LAYOUT 665 - MESS - E - PL
Plans - 4000
1
Floor Plans SERVICE PLAN PLUMBING LAYOUT 665 - MESS - E - PL
- 4001
2
Terrace TERRACE PLAN PLUMBING LAYOUT 665 - MESS - E - PL
Plans - 4002
3
IIM _ HVAC DRAWING LIST

S. Drawing
Drawing title Drawing Number
N Type
Academic Building
Ground 665 - AB - E - HVAC
1 Ground Floor HVAC Layout (+ 0.00M. LVL.)
Floor Plans - 5000
665 - AB - E - HVAC
2 Floor Plans First Floor HVAC Layout (+ 6.00M. LVL.)
- 5001
665 - AB - E - HVAC
3 Floor Plans PLAN AT (+ 9.90M. LVL.) HVAC Layout
- 5002
665 - AB - E - HVAC
4 Floor Plans PLAN AT +13.050 / +13.800 M. LVL. HVAC Layout
- 5003
665 - AB - E - HVAC
5 Floor Plans PLAN AT +17.700 M. LVL. HVAC Layout
- 5004
665 - AB - E - HVAC
6 Floor Plans PLAN AT +21.60 M. LVL. HVAC Layout
- 5005
665 - AB - E - HVAC
7 Floor Plans VRV PIPING SCHEMATIC LAYOUT
- 5006

Ground 665 - MC - E -
1 GROUND FLOOR HVAC LAYOUT
Plans HVAC - 5000
665 - MC - E -
2 Floor Plans FIRST FLOOR HVAC LAYOUT
HVAC - 5001
665 - MC - E -
3 Floor Plans SECOND FLOOR HVAC LAYOUT
HVAC - 5002
Terrace 665 - MC - E -
4 TERRACE FLOOR HVAC LAYOUT
Plans HVAC - 5003
665 - MC - E -
5 SCHEMATIC VRV PIPING SCHEMATIC LAYOUT
HVAC - 5004
Type-V Residences
665 - TV - E - AC-
1 Floor Plans FIRST FLOOR AC LOCATION PROVISION LAYOUT
5001
665 - TV - E - AC-
2 Floor Plans SECOND FLOOR AC LOCATION PROVISION LAYOUT
5002
Page 1190 of 1358

TYPICAL FLOOR AC LOCATION PROVISION LAYOUT (3rd, 665 - TV - E - AC-

3 Floor Plans
4th, 5th, 6th & 8th) 5003
665 - TV - E - AC-
4 Floor Plans SEVENTH FLOOR AC LOCATION PROVISION LAYOUT
5004
Terrace STAIRCASE & LIFT LOBBY PRESSURIZATION SYSTEM PLAN 665 - TV - E - AC-
5
Plans OF BELOW TERRACE FLOORS 5005
Terrace 665 - TV - E - AC-
6 PRESSURIZATION SYSTEM -TERRACE FLOOR PLAN
Plans 5006
Terrace 665 - TV - E - AC-
7 PRESSURIZATION SYSTEM UPPER TERRACE FLOOR PLAN
Plans 5007
665 - TV - E - AC-
8 SCHEMATIC STAIRCASE PRESSURIZATION SCHEMATIC
5008
665 - TV - E - AC-
9 SCHEMATIC LIFT LOBBY PRESSURIZATION SCHEMATIC
5009
1 665 - TV - E - AC-
SCHEMATIC LIFT WELL PRESSURIZATION SCHEMATIC
0 5010
MDC Accommodation
665 - MDCH- E -
1 Floor Plans GROUND & FIRST FLOOR HVAC LAYOUT
HVAC-5000
TYPICAL FLOOR HVAC LAYOUT (2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th, 6th, 8th 665 - MDCH- E -
2 Floor Plans
& 9th) HVAC-5001
665 - MDCH- E -
3 Floor Plans TYPICAL FLOOR HVAC LAYOUT (7th & 10th)
HVAC-5002
Terrace 665 - MDCH- E -
4 TERRACE & WATER TANK LEVEL HVAC LAYOUT
Plans HVAC-5003
665 - MDCH- E -
5 SCHEMATIC STAIRCASE PRESSURIZATION SCHEMATIC LAYOUT
HVAC-5004
665 - MDCH- E -
6 SCHEMATIC LIFT LOBBY PRESSURIZATION SCHEMATIC LAYOUT
HVAC-5005
665 - MDCH- E -
7 SCHEMATIC LIFT WELL PRESSURIZATION SCHEMATIC LAYOUT
HVAC-5006
665 - MDCH- E -
8 SCHEMATIC CORIDOR SMOKE EXTRACTION SCHEMATIC
HVAC-5007
Boys Hostel 1 & 2
Ground 665 - BH - E - HVAC
1 GROUND FLOOR-HVAC LAYOUT
Plans - 5000
665 - BH - E - HVAC
2 Floor Plans FIRST FLOOR-HVAC LAYOUT
- 5001
665 - BH - E - HVAC
3 Floor Plans SECOND FLOOR-HVAC LAYOUT
- 5002
TYPICAL FLOOR-HVAC LAYOUT (3rd to 6th) & (8th, 9th, 665 - BH - C -
4 Floor Plans
11th, 12th & 14TH) HVAC - 5003
665 - BH - C -
5 Floor Plans TYPICAL FLOOR-HVAC LAYOUT (7TH, 10TH & 13TH)
HVAC - 5004
Terrace 665 - BH - E - HVAC
6 TERRACE FLOOR-HVAC LAYOUT
Plans - 5005
Page 1191 of 1358

Terrace 665 - BH - E - HVAC

7 WATER TANK LVL.-HVAC LAYOUT
Plans - 5006
665 - BH - E - HVAC
- 5007
665 - BH - E - HVAC
- 5008
1 665 - BH - E - HVAC
SCHEMATIC LIFT WELL PRESSURIZATION SCHEMATIC LAYOUT
0 - 5009
Girls Hostel
Ground 665 - GH - E -
1 GROUND FLOOR-HVAC LAYOUT
Plans HVAC - 5000
665 - GH - E -
2 Floor Plans FIRST FLOOR-HVAC LAYOUT
HVAC - 5001
665 - GH - E -
3 Floor Plans SECOND FLOOR-HVAC LAYOUT
HVAC - 5002
TYPICAL FLOOR-HVAC LAYOUT (3rd to 6th) & (8th, 9th, 665 - GH - E -
4 Floor Plans
11th, 12th & 14TH) HVAC - 5003
665 - GH - E -
5 Floor Plans TYPICAL FLOOR-HVAC LAYOUT (7TH, 10TH & 13TH)
HVAC - 5004
Terrace 665 - GH - E -
6 TERRACE FLOOR-HVAC LAYOUT
Plans HVAC - 5005
Terrace 665 - GH - E -
7 WATER TANK LVL.-HVAC LAYOUT
Plans HVAC - 5006
665 - GH - E -
HVAC - 5007
665 - GH - E -
HVAC - 5008
1 665 - GH - E -
SCHEMATIC LIFT WELL PRESSURIZATION SCHEMATIC LAYOUT
0 HVAC - 5009
MESS
Ground 665 - MESS - E -
1 GROUND FLOOR_KITCHEN VENTILATION LAYOUT
Plans HVAC - 5000
Service 665 - MESS - E -
2 SERVICE FLOOR _ AIR COOLING LAYOUT
Plans HVAC - 5001
Terrace 665 - MESS - E -
3 TERRACE FLOOR HVAC LAYOUT
Plans HVAC - 5002
IIM _ FIRE DRAWING LIST

S. Drawing
N Type
Outer Development
Site Plan EXTERNAL FIRE FIGHTING LAYOUT 665 - LA - E - F -
1 1070
Page 1192 of 1358

Academic Building
Ground GROUND FLOOR WORKING PLAN (± 0.00 M. LVL.) 665 - AB - E - F -
1 Plan 6000
Floor Plan FIRST FLOOR WORKING PLAN (+ 6.00 M. LVL.) 665 - AB - E - F -
2 6001
Floor Plan WORKING PLAN AT + 9.900 M. LVL. WORKING PLAN 665 - AB - E - F -
3 6002
Floor Plan WORKING PLAN AT (+13.050 / +13.800 M. LVL.) 665 - AB - E - F -
4 6003
Floor Plan WORKING PLAN AT (+17.700M. LVL.) 665 - AB - E - F -
5 6004
Terrace FIRE LAYOUT PLAN (+21.6M. LVL.) 665 - AB - E - F -
6 Plan 6006
Terrace Schematic Layout 665 - AB - E - F -
7 Plan 6007

Ground GROUND FLOOR WORKING PLAN 665 - MC - E - A -
1 Plan 1100
Floor Plan FIRST FLOOR WORKING PLAN 665 - MC - E - A -
2 1101
Floor Plan SECOND FLOOR WORKING PLAN 665 - MC - E - A -
3 1102
Terrace TERRACE FLOOR WORKING PLAN 665 - MC - E - A -
4 Plan 1103
Shematic FIRE FIGHTING SCHEMATIC LAYOUT 665 - MC - E - A -
5 1104
Type-V Residences
Ground STILT FLOOR WORKING PLAN 665-FH-E-A-1100
1 Plan
2 Floor Plan FIRST FLOOR WORKING PLAN 665-FH-E-A-1101
3 Floor Plan SECOND FLOOR WORKING PLAN 665-FH-E-A-1102
4 Floor Plan TYPICAL (3RD-6TH & 8TH) FLOOR WORKING PLAN 665-FH-E-A-1103
5 Floor Plan SEVENTH FLOOR WORKING PLAN 665-FH-E-A-1104

Terrace TERRACE FLOOR WORKING PLAN 665-FH-E-A-1105
6 Plan
Terrace WATER TANK LEVEL PLAN 665-FH-E-A-1106
7 Plan
8 Shematic FIRE FIGHTING SCHEMATIC LAYOUT 665-FH-E-A-1107
MDC Accommodation
Ground GROUND & FIRST FLOOR WORKING PLAN 665-MDCH-E-FF-
1 Plan 6000
Page 1193 of 1358

Floor Plan SECOND & TYPICAL FLOOR WORKING PLAN 665-MDCH-E-FF-

2 6001
Floor Plan 7th & 10th AND TERRACE FLOOR WORKING PLAN 665-MDCH-E-FF-
3 6002
Schematic FIRE FIGHTING SCHEMATIC LAYOUT 665-MDCH-E-FF-
4 6003
Boys Hostel 1 & 2

Ground GROUND FLOOR FIREFIGHTING LAYOUT 665 - BH - E - FF -
1 Plan 6000
Floor Plan FIRST FLOOR FIREFIGHTING LAYOUT 665 - BH - E - FF -
2 6001
Floor Plan SECOND FLOOR FIREFIGHTING LAYOUT 665 - BH - E - FF -
3 6002
Floor Plan TYPICAL (3th to 6th) & (8th, 9th, 11th, 12th & 14TH) FLOOR 665 - BH - E - FF -
4 PLAN 6003
Floor Plan TYPICAL (7th, 10th & 13th) FLOOR PLAN 665 - BH - E - FF -
5 6004
Terrace TERRACE FLOOR FIREFIGHTING LAYOUT 665 - BH - E - FF -
6 Plan 6005
Terrace WATER TANK FLOOR FIREFIGHTING LAYOUT 665 - BH - E - FF -
7 Plan 6006
Schematic Schematic Layout 665 - BH - E - FF -
8 6007
Girls Hostel
Ground GROUND FLOOR WORKING PLAN 665 - GH - E - FF -
1 Plan 6000
Floor Plan FIRST FLOOR WORKING PLAN 665 - GH - E - FF -
2 6001
Floor Plan SECOND FLOOR WORKING PLAN 665 - GH - E - FF -
3 6002
Floor Plan TYPICAL (3th to 6th) & (8th, 9th, 11th, 12th & 14TH) 665 - GH - E - FF -
4 WORKING PLAN 6003
Floor Plan TYPICAL (7th, 10th & 13th) FLOOR WORKING PLAN 665 - GH - E - FF -
5 6004
Terrace TERRACE FLOOR WORKING PLAN 665 - GH - E - FF -
6 Plan 6005
Terrace WATER TANK LEVEL WORKING PLAN 665 - GH - E - FF -
7 Plan 6006
Schematic Schematic Layout 665 - GH - E - FF -
8 6007
MESS
Ground GROUND FLOOR WORKING PLAN 665 - MESS - E -F -
1 Plan 6000
Service SERVICES FLOOR WORKING PLAN 665 - MESS - E -F -
2 Plan 6001
Page 1194 of 1358

Service TERRACE FLOOR WORKING PLAN 665 - MESS - E -F -

3 Plan 6002
STRUCTURAL DRAWING LIST

Academic Building
Sr. Drawing
No. Type
CENTER LINE OF COLUMN AND FOUNDATION
1 STRUCTURE C-665 - AB - E - S - 2000
PLAN
C-665 - AB - E - S - 2100
2 STRUCTURE GROUND FLOOR BEAM AND SLAB PLAN
SHEET 1 OF 2
C-665 - AB - E - S - 2100
3 STRUCTURE GROUND FLOOR BEAM AND SLAB PLAN
SHEET 2 OF 2
4 STRUCTURE FIRST FLOOR BEAM AND SLAB PLAN (+6.00 M LVL) C-665 - AB - E - S - 2101
5 STRUCTURE FLOOR BEAM & SLAB PLAN AT +9.900 M LVL C-665 - AB - E - S - 2102
FLOOR BEAM & SLAB PLAN AT +13.050 / +13.800 M
6 STRUCTURE C-665 - AB - E - S - 2103
LVL.
7 STRUCTURE FLOOR BEAM & SLAB PLAN AT +16.050 M LVL. C-665 - AB - E - S - 2104
FLOOR BEAM & SLAB PLAN AT +17.700 / +21.600 M
8 STRUCTURE C-665 - AB - E - S - 2105
LVL AND MUMTY LVL.
OVERHEAD WATER TANK DETAIL PLAN AT +13.050
9 STRUCTURE C-665 - AB - E - S - 2106
M LVL.
OVERHEAD WATER TANK DETAIL PLAN AT +24.600
10 STRUCTURE C-665 - AB - E - S - 2107
M LVL
11 STRUCTURE GROUND FLOOR LINTEL BEAM PLAN C-665 - AB - E - S - 2200
12 STRUCTURE FIRST FLOOR LINTEL BEAM PLAN (+6.00 M LVL) C-665 - AB - E - S - 2201
13 STRUCTURE LINTEL BEAM PLAN AT +9.900 M LVL C-665 - AB - E - S - 2202
14 STRUCTURE LINTEL BEAM PLAN AT +13.050 / +13.800 M LVL. C-665 - AB - E - S - 2203
15 STRUCTURE LINTEL BEAM PLAN AT +17.700 M LVL. C-665 - AB - E - S - 2204
16 STRUCTURE LINTEL BEAM PLAN AT +21.600 M LVL. C-665 - AB - E - S - 2205
MDC ACADEMIC + INCUBATION CENTER

Drawing
Type
1 STRUCTURE C-665 - MC - E - S - 2000
PLAN
C-665 - MC - E - S - 2100
2 STRUCTURE GROUND FLOOR BEAM & SLAB PLAN
SHEET 1 OF 2
C-665 - MC - E - S - 2100
SHEET 2 OF 2
C-665 - MC - E - S - 2101
4 STRUCTURE FIRST FLOOR BEAM AND SLAB PLAN
SHEET 1 OF 2
C-665 - MC - E - S - 2101
5 STRUCTURE FIRST FLOOR BEAM AND SLAB PLAN
SHEET 2 OF 2
6 STRUCTURE SECOND FLOOR BEAM AND SLAB PLAN C-665 - MC - E - S - 2102
7 STRUCTURE TERRACE FLOOR BEAM AND SLAB PLAN C-665 - MC - E - S - 2103
Page 1195 of 1358

MUMTY FLOOR BEAM AND SLAB PLAN AND

8 STRUCTURE C-665 - MC - E - S - 2104
STAIRCASE SECTION DETAIL
9 STRUCTURE WATER TANK PLAN AND SECTION DETAILS C-665 - MC - E - S - 2105
C-665 - MC - E - S - 2200
10 STRUCTURE GROUND FLOOR LINTEL BEAM PLAN
SHEET 1 OF 2
C-665 - MC - E - S - 2200
11 STRUCTURE GROUND FLOOR LINTEL BEAM PLAN
SHEET 2 OF 2
C-665 - MC - E - S - 2201
12 STRUCTURE FIRST FLOOR LINTEL BEAM PLAN
SHEET 1 OF 2
C-665 - MC - E - S - 2201
13 STRUCTURE FIRST FLOOR LINTEL BEAM PLAN
SHEET 2 OF 2
14 STRUCTURE SECOND FLOOR LINTEL BEAM PLAN C-665 - MC - E - S - 2202
15 STRUCTURE TERRACE FLOOR LINTEL BEAM PLAN C-665 - MC - E - S - 2203
GIRLS' HOSTEL
Drawing
Type
1 STRUCTURE C-665 - GH - E - S - 2000
PLAN
2 STRUCTURE SHEAR WALL AND COLUMN SCHEDULE C-665 - GH - E - S - 2001
C-665 - GH - E - S - 2100
SHEET 1 OF 2
C-665 - GH - E - S - 2100
SHEET 2 OF 2
5 STRUCTURE FIRST FLOOR BEAM & SLAB PLAN C-665 - GH - E - S - 2101
6 STRUCTURE SECOND FLOOR BEAM & SLAB PLAN C-665 - GH - E - S - 2102
TYPICAL(3rd to 6th) & (8th, 9th, 11th, 12th & 14TH)
7 STRUCTURE C-665 - GH - E - S - 2103
FLOOR BEAM & SLAB PLAN
TYPICAL (7TH , 10TH & 13TH) FLOOR BEAM & SLAB
8 STRUCTURE C-665 - GH - E - S - 2104
PLAN
9 STRUCTURE TERRACE FLOOR BEAM & SLAB PLAN C-665 - GH - E - S - 2105
10 STRUCTURE MUMTY FLOOR BEAM & SLAB PLAN C-665 - GH - E - S - 2106
11 STRUCTURE WATER TANK PLAN AND DETAIL C-665 - GH - E - S - 2107
12 STRUCTURE GROUND FLOOR LINTEL BEAM PLAN C-665 - GH - E - S - 2200
13 STRUCTURE FIRST FLOOR LINTEL BEAM PLAN C-665 - GH - E - S - 2201
14 STRUCTURE SECOND FLOOR LINTEL BEAM PLAN C-665 - GH - E - S - 2202
TYPICAL (3RD TO 6TH & 8, 9, 11, 12, 14TH) FLOOR
15 STRUCTURE C-665 - GH - E - S - 2203
LINTEL BEAM PLAN
TYPICAL(7TH, 10TH & 13TH) FLOOR LINTEL BEAM
16 STRUCTURE C-665 - GH - E - S - 2204
PLAN
17 STRUCTURE TERRACE FLOOR LINTEL BEAM PLAN C-665 - GH - E - S - 2205
BOYS' HOSTEL
Drawing
Type
1 STRUCTURE C-665 - BH - E - S - 2000
PLAN
2 STRUCTURE SHEAR WALL AND COLUMN SCHEDULE C-665 - BH - E - S - 2001
Page 1196 of 1358

C-665 - BH - E - S - 2100
SHEET 1 OF 2
C-665 - BH - E - S - 2100
SHEET 2 OF 2
5 STRUCTURE FIRST FLOOR BEAM & SLAB PLAN C-665 - BH - E - S - 2101
6 STRUCTURE SECOND FLOOR BEAM & SLAB PLAN C-665 - BH - E - S - 2102
TYPICAL(3rd to 6th) & (8th, 9th, 11th, 12th & 14TH)
7 STRUCTURE C-665 - BH - E - S - 2103
FLOOR BEAM & SLAB PLAN
TYPICAL (7TH,10TH & 13TH) FLOOR BEAM & SLAB
8 STRUCTURE C-665 - BH - E - S - 2104
PLAN
9 STRUCTURE TERRACE FLOOR BEAM & SLAB PLAN C-665 - BH - E - S - 2105
10 STRUCTURE MUMTY FLOOR BEAM & SLAB PLAN C-665 - BH - E - S - 2106
11 STRUCTURE WATER TANK PLAN AND DETAIL C-665 - BH - E - S - 2107
12 STRUCTURE GROUND FLOOR LINTEL BEAM PLAN C-665 - BH - E - S - 2200
13 STRUCTURE FIRST FLOOR LINTEL BEAM PLAN C-665 - BH - E - S - 2201
14 STRUCTURE SECOND FLOOR LINTEL BEAM PLAN C-665 - BH - E - S - 2202
TYPICAL (3RD TO 6TH & 8, 9, 11, 12, 14TH) FLOOR
15 STRUCTURE C-665 - BH - E - S - 2203
LINTEL BEAM
TYPICAL(7TH, 10TH & 13TH) FLOOR LINTEL BEAM
16 STRUCTURE C-665 - BH - E - S - 2204
PLAN
17 STRUCTURE TERRACE FLOOR LINTEL BEAM PLAN C-665 - BH - E - S - 2205
MDC ACCOMMODATION
Drawing
Type
CENTER LINE OF COLUMN AND FOUNDATION C-665 - MDCH - E - S -
1 STRUCTURE
PLAN 2000 SHEET 1 OF 2
CENTER LINE OF COLUMN AND FOUNDATION C-665 - MDCH - E - S -
2 STRUCTURE
PLAN 2000 SHEET 2 OF 2
C-665 - MDCH - E - S -
2100 SHEET 1 OF 2
C-665 - MDCH - E - S -
2100 SHEET 2 OF 2
C-665 - MDCH - E - S -
5 STRUCTURE FIRST FLOOR BEAM & SLAB PLAN
2101
C-665 - MDCH - E - S -
6 STRUCTURE SECOND FLOOR BEAM & SLAB PLAN
2102
TYPICAL ( 3RD TO 6TH, 8TH & 9TH ) FLOOR BEAM & C-665 - MDCH - E - S -
7 STRUCTURE
SLAB PLAN 2103
C-665 - MDCH - E - S -
8 STRUCTURE 7TH & 10TH FLOOR BEAM & SLAB PLAN
2104
C-665 - MDCH - E - S -
9 STRUCTURE TERRACE & MUMTY FLOOR BEAM & SLAB PLAN
2105
C-665 - MDCH - E - S -
10 STRUCTURE WATER TANK PLAN & SECTIONS
2106
C-665 - MDCH - E - S -
11 STRUCTURE GROUND & FIRST FLOOR LINTEL BEAM PLAN
2200
Page 1197 of 1358

2ND FLOOR & TYPICAL ( 3RD TO 6TH, 8TH & 9TH ) C-665 - MDCH - E - S -
12 STRUCTURE
FLOOR LINTEL BEAM PLAN 2201
C-665 - MDCH - E - S -
13 STRUCTURE 7TH , 10TH & TERRACE FLOOR LINTEL BEAM PLAN
2202
TYPE - V RESIDENCES
1 STRUCTURE C-665 - TV - E - S - 2000
PLAN
C-665 - TV - E - S - 2100
2 STRUCTURE STILT FLOOR BEAM & SLAB PLAN
SHEET 01 OF 02
C-665 - TV - E - S - 2100
3 STRUCTURE STILT FLOOR BEAM & SLAB PLAN
SHEET 02 OF 02
C-665 - TV - E - S - 2101
SHEET 01 OF 02
C-665 - TV - E - S - 2101
SHEET 02 OF 02
6 STRUCTURE SECOND FLOOR BEAM & SLAB PLAN C-665 - TV - E - S - 2102
TYPICAL (3RD TO 6TH & 8TH) FLOOR BEAM & SLAB
7 STRUCTURE C-665 - TV - E - S - 2103
PLAN
8 STRUCTURE SEVENTH FLOOR BEAM & SLAB PLAN C-665 - TV - E - S - 2104
9 STRUCTURE TERRACE FLOOR BEAM & SLAB PLAN C-665 - TV - E - S - 2105
10 STRUCTURE MUMTY FLOOR BEAM & SLAB PLAN C-665 - TV - E - S - 2106
11 STRUCTURE WATER TANK DETAILS C-665 - TV - E - S - 2107
12 STRUCTURE STILT FLOOR LINTEL BEAM PLAN C-665 - TV - E - S - 2200
13 STRUCTURE FIRST FLOOR LINTEL BEAM PLAN C-665 - TV - E - S - 2201
14 STRUCTURE SECOND FLOOR LINTEL BEAM PLAN C-665 - TV - E - S - 2202
TYPICAL(3RD TO 6TH & 8TH) FLOOR LINTEL BEAM
15 STRUCTURE C-665 - TV - E - S - 2203
PLAN
16 STRUCTURE SEVENTH FLOOR LINTEL BEAM PLAN C-665 - TV - E - S - 2204
17 STRUCTURE TERRACE FLOOR LINTEL BEAM PLAN C-665 - TV - E - S - 2205
MESS
Drawing
Type
1 STRUCTURE C-665 - MESS - E - S - 2000
PLAN
C-665 - MESS - E - S - 2100
SHEET 1 OF 3
C-665 - MESS - E - S - 2100
SHEET 2 OF 3
C-665 - MESS - E - S - 2100
SHEET 3 OF 3
5 STRUCTURE SERVICE AREA BEAM & SLAB PLAN C-665 - MESS - E - S - 2101
6 STRUCTURE TERRACE & MUMTY FLOOR BEAM & SLAB PLAN C-665 - MESS - E - S - 2102
7 STRUCTURE GROUND FLOOR LINTEL BEAM PLAN C-665 - MESS - E - S - 2200
8 STRUCTURE SERVICE AREA LINTEL BEAM PLAN C-665 - MESS - E - S - 2201
Page 1198 of 1358

9 STRUCTURE TERRACE FLOOR LINTEL BEAM PLAN C-665 - MESS - E - S - 2202

10 STRUCTURE TYPICAL DETAIL OF LINTEL BEAM & SECTIONS C-665 - MESS - E - S - 2203
RETAINING WALL
Drawing
Type
1 STRUCTURE OUTER DEVELOPMENT RETAINING WALL C-665 - RE - E - S - 2200
Page 1199 of 1358

APPROVED MAKELIST
Page 1200 of 1358

LIST OF APPROVED MAKES (CIVIL)

S.
NO ITEM/MATERIAL MAKE/MANUFACTURER AS PER CONSULTANT
.
AAC BLOCK (only for Light weight
1 AEROCON, E-CREATE
filling)
ANUTONE, CELENIT, ACOUSTICS INDIA AND
2 ACOUSTICAL PANELING
SPIGOTEC , NLF, ANAKON , HUNTER DOUGLAS
ANUTONE, CELENIT, ACOUSTICS INDIA AND
3 ACOUSTICAL FALSE CEILING
SPIGOTEC, NLF, ANAKON
4 ALUMINUM COMPOSITE PANEL WONDER ALU BOARD, ALUTECH, ALCOBOND
5 ADHESIVE FOR CERAMIC TILES MYK Laticrete,BAL JOHNSON ENDURA, UNISTONE
6 Adhesive for Woodwork Fevicol, Vamicol, Dunlop
7 ADMIXTURE FOR CONCRETE WORK MYK ARMENT,BASF, Pidilite, Sika, Foscroc
ADMIXTURE FOR WATER PROOFING
8 MYK ARMENT, BASF, Pidilite, Sika, Foscroc
WORK
ALUMINUM ACCESSORIES AND
9 CLASSIC, CROWN ,EBCO ,EARL BIHARI,ARGENT
HARDWARE
ALUMINUM DIE-CAST HANDLES &
10 GIESSE , SECURISTYLE , ALU – ALPHA
TWO POINT LOCKING KIT
11 ALUMINUM EXTRUSION SECTIONS HINDALCO , JINDAL
12 ANCHOR FASTENER ,DASH FASTENER HILTI , FISCHER
ANTI-TERMITE TREATMENT AGENCY
BAYER (PREMISE) APPROVED BY IGBC CERTIFIED
13 (PRE-CONSTRUCTION AND POST
IMIDA CLOPRID 30.5%
CONSTRUCTION
14 BECKER ROD SUPREME INDUSTRY OR EQUIVALENT
15 BALL COCK L&T,AUDCO, ZOLOTO , LEADER

16 BALL VALVES WITH FLOATS ZOLOTO , LEADER , AUDCO
SHALIMAR TAR PRODUCTS, MATHURA OIL

17 BITUMEN
REFINERY
18 BAFFLE CEILING PROMINANCE, HUNTER DOUGLAS, ANAKON

19 CEMENT ACC, ULTRA TECH,JK CEMENT,AMBUJA,LAFARGE
20 CEMENT: WHITE BIRLA WHITE , JK OR EQUIVALENT
CLEAR GLASS ,CLEAR FLOAT GLASS, SAINTGOBAIN(SG), MODI, ASAHI INDIA SAFETY
21
MIRROR GLASS LTD
SAINTGOBAIN(SG), MODI,ASAHI INDIA SAFETY
22 TOUGHENED GLASS
GLASS LTD
23 CONCRETE ADMIXTURE MYK ARMENT, ULTRATECH, BULWARK
CONBEXTRA AS MANUFACTURED BY M,S FOSROC

24 COVER , SPACER BLOCK
CHEMICALS INDIA LTD. OR EQUIVALENT
CURTAIN ROD, DRAPERY ROD,
25 HUNTERDOUGLAS, LUTRON, VISTA
VENETIAN BLINDS
Page 1201 of 1358

26 WINDOW BLINDS HUNTERDOUGLAS, LUTRON, VISTA

27 DOOR: FLUSH DOOR MERINO ,GREENPLY
28 DOOR: PVC DOOR SINTEX, POLYEX, RAJSHRI
29 DOOR: FRP DOOR HICON, NAVAIR,SUKRITI
30 DOOR: ACOUSTICAL WOODEN DOOR SAMCEIL ,ANAKON
31 DOOR CLOSER, FLOOR SPRING OZONE, HAFFLE, GODREJ
32 DOOR LOCKS OZONE, HAFFLE, GODREJ
33 DOOR SEAL ANAND REDDIPLEX, ENVIROSEAL
34 DOORS FIXTURES, FITTING. EVERITE, CLASSIC,CROWN,EARL BIHARI, , HAFFLE
AUTOMATIC DOOR ,HYDRAULIC
35 OZONE, CHASE, GODREJ, HAFFLE
DOOR CLOSER ,FLOOR SPRING
36 STONE TEXTURE FINISH UNISTONE, KADSHIP (Guj), MYK
37 DOOR FITTINGS OZONE, HAFFLE, GODREJ
38 D.I. water type check valve NVR, Leader,IV, Zoloto
CRYSTALLINE WATERPROOFING
39 BULWORK, XCHEM, MYK ARMENT
COMPOUND
40 EPOXY FLOORING WEBER-SAINTGOBAIN, MYK ARMENT, XCHEM
41 EXPANSION JOINTS CS, VEXOCOLT, VEDAFRANCE, MYK ARMENT
42 GYPSUM PLASTER BULWARK, JK, XCHEM
GYPSUMBOARD,GYPSUMFALSE
43 USG-KNAUF GYPSUM, AEROLITE, SAMCEIL
CEILING, GYPSUM PARTITIONS
44 CALCIUM SILICATE BOARD , TILES AEROLITE, SAMCEIL, ANAKON
FALSECEILING–METAL
45 HUNTER-DOUGLAS, ARMSTRONG
,ALUMINUM,PUFF
HUNTER DOUGLAS, USG KNAUF, AEROLITE,
46 MINERAL FIBER CEILING
SAMCEIL,
47 GFRG CEILING KNAUF DANOLINE, ANAKON, PROMINANCE
48 GFRC UNISTONE, EVEREST COMPOSITES
FIRE RATED WOODEN,METALLIC,
49 SUKRITI, NAVAIR,HICON
GLASS DOORS &FRAMES
SAINTGOBAIN(SG), GUARDIAN SUNGUARD,ASAHI
50 FIRE RATED GLASS
INDIA SAFETY GLASS LTD
51 FIRE RETARDANT PAINT VIPER FRS 881, NULLIFIER, BERGER
FIRE:DOOR CLOSURES,MORTICE
52 OZONE, HAFFLE
DEAD LOCKS
53 FIRE:D-TYPE PULL HANDLES OZONE, HAFFLE
54 FIRE:HINGES, OZONE, HAFFLE
55 FIRE:PANIC EXIT DEVICES OZONE, HAFFLE
56 FIRE:SEAL SEALZ , ALSTROFLAM, ABACUS,MARSHAL
57 FIRE:SEALANT HILTI , FISCHER , RAWLPLUG
58 FIRE:TOWER BOLTS OZONE, HAFFLE
59 FLOORING: CARPET FLOORING HERTAGE,CARUS,SHANHUA,ROSETTA,MODULYSS
60 FLOORING: PVC,VINYL FLOORING Vibrant, FORBO ,EBACO,
61 FLOORING: WOODEN FLOORING KAINDL, PERGO, INOVAR, SPAN
62 Floor Hardener Pidilite , SIKA, BASF
Page 1202 of 1358

63 Foam Concrete Valifoam,Salifoam,PD projects

64 Formwork Release Agent Fosroc,Sika,Choksey,BASF
SAINTGOBAIN(SG), ASAHI INDIA SAFETY GLASS
65 LOW E,REFLECTIVE GLAZING
LTD
SAINTGOBAIN(SG), ASAHI INDIA SAFETY GLASS
66 WINDOWS,STRUCTURAL GLAZING
LTD
67 GLASS WOOL,INSULATION BOARDS ROCKWOOL , UP TWIGA , LLOYD INSULATION
68 GLASS PARTITION SYSTEM ALLEGION, OZONE
69 GFRC JALI UNISTONE, SANDERSON, EVEREST COMPOSITES

70 WPC JALI SAMCEIL, ANAKON, UNISTONE
71 GROUT:NON-SHRINK WEBER-SAINTGOBAIN, MYK ARMENT
72 GROUTING COMPOUND WEBER-SAINTGOBAIN, MYK ARMENT, XCHEM
LAMINATES,VENEERS, FIRE
73 GREENLAM, MERINO, CENTURY
RETARDENT LAMINATE
74 HIGH PRESSURE LAMINATES GREENLAM, MERINO , WONDER ALU BOARD
75 LOGO, SIGN, NAMEPLATES D- LINE, SIGN SUTRA,SAMEER
76 MELAMINE POLISH ICI DULUX, TIMBERSTONE MELAMINE COATING
MODULAR GRAB BARS AND
77 OZONE, GROHE, KOHLER
DISABLED HARDWARE
78 MODULAR SS RAILING SYSTEM OZONE, CHASE
79 PAINTS- CEMENT BASED NEROLAC, ICIDULUX, ASIAN, BERGER
80 PAINT– FIRE RETARDANT VIPER FRS 881, NULLIFIRE
81 PAINTS- EPOXY PAINT NEROLAC, ICIDULUX, ASIAN, BERGER
82 ACRYLIC WASHABLE DISTEMPER NEROLAC(SUPERACRYLIC), ICIDULUX, ASIAN
83 PAINTS-OTHER PAINTS,PRIMER NEROLAC, ICIDULUX, ASIAN
84 PAINTS-ACRYLIC EMULSION PAINT NEROLAC, ICIDULUX, ASIAN
ICIDULUX, ASIAN, NEROLAC - (PREMIUM QUALITY
85 PAINTS-SYNTHETIC ENAMEL PAINTS
FOR ALL)
86 PAINTS- TEXTURE PAINT ICIDULUX, SPECTRUM , UNILITEHERITAGE,ASIAN
87 PAINTS-POLYURETHANE PAINT MRF,NEROLAC,TEXFIN, ICIDULUX
88 PATCH FITTINGS AND SPIDER SADEV, STANLEY, OZONE
UNI STONE PRODUCTS (INDIA) PVT. LTD,SOMANY,

89 GFRC COBBLE STONE
NITCO
90 PLYWOOD,BLOCKBOARD,PLYBOARD GREENPLY, MERINO
91 POLY CARBONATE SHEETS DANPALON OR EQUIVALENT
92 POST TENSIONING UTRACON,TECH 9,UCON
PRE-COATED GALVANISED STEEL TATA BLUESCOPE , LLYOD INSULATIONS INDIA

93
SHEET LTD
94 PRE-LAMINATED PARTICLE BOARD MERINO, GREENLAM
PVC CONTINUOUS FILLET FOR
95 ROOP , ANAND , FOREX PLASTIC, NAGALIA
PERIPHERY PACKING OF GLAZINGS,
Page 1203 of 1358

96 RAISED,FALSE ACCESS UNITE, UNIFLOOR, TATE
REINFORCEMENT STEEL,STRUCTURAL
97 SAIL, TATASTEEL LTD., JSW , RINL
STEEL
98 SEALANT: POLY-SULPHIDE PIDILITE , FOSROC , MYK ARMENT
99 SFRC,RCC MANHOLE COVERS KK MANHOLES , SK PRECAST CONCRETE, HIMALYA
100 PERFECT RCC GROUTING KRYTONITE, MYK ARMENT, XCHEM
SILICON SEALANTS,WEATHER
101 SEALANT,STRUCTURAL GLAZING GE- SILICON , PIDILITE , FORSOC , CICO
SEALANT
102 STAINLESS STEEL SALEM STEEL, JINDAL, TATA OR EQUIVALENT
103 STRUCTURAL STEEL SECTIONS SAIL, VIZAG, TATA

STAINLESS STEEL BOLTS, SCREWS,
104 HILTI, TATA
NUTS & WASHERS
105 STAINLESS STEEL CLAMPS HILTI , INTELLOTECHKONCEPT ,RAWLPLUG
106 STAINLESS STEEL CP GRATING CHILLY , CAMRY, NEER OR EQUIVALENT
107 STAINLESS STEEL D-HANDLES HAFELE, OZONE, CHASE
108 STAINLESS STEEL FRICTION STAY EARL BIHARI , SECURISTYLE , EBCO
109 STAINLESS STEEL HINGES HAFELE , OZONE, CHASE
110 STONE ADHESIVES WEBER-SAINTGOBAIN, XCHEM, MYK
111 STONE SEALER FERROUS CRETE, BALENDURA
112 SUNKEN PORTION TREATMENT WEBER-SAINTGOBAIN,MYK ARMENT
113 SUPER PLASTICIZER CICO, MYK ARMENT, PIDILITE, SIKA, FOSCROC
114 TILES: CERAMIC TILES JOHNSON,SOMANY, KAJARIA
115 TILES: GLASS MOSAIC TILES JOHNSON,SOMANY, KAJARIA
116 TILES:GLAZED (CERAMIC)TILES JOHNSON, SOMANY, KAJARIA
TILES:HEAT RESISTANT TERRACE
117 THERMATEK,SOMANY,OR EQUIVALENT
TILES
118 TILES: CHEQUERED , TACTILE TILES JOHNSON,SOMANY, KAJARIA
TILES: GLAZED VITRIFIED TILES
119 (DOUBLE,MULTICHARGED,GVT), JOHNSON,SOMANY, KAJARIA
GERM FREE
120 TILES: ANTI SKID TILES JOHNSON ENDURA, SOMANY, KAJARIA
121 TOILET CUBICLES MERINO, GREENLAM , CENTURY
122 UPVC DOOR, WINDOW PROMINANCE, FENESTA , REHAU
123 VENEERED PARTICLE BOARD MERINO, GREENPLY, INDIANA
124 WALL PUTTY J.K,BIRLA,PEARLCON
125 WATER PROOFING MATERIALS XCHEM, MYK ARMENT, SIKA, PIDILITE, FOSCROC
126 EPDM WATER PROOFING MATERIALS XCHEM, MYK ARMENT, SIKA, PIDILITE, FOSCROC
127 SILICON SEALANTS DOW CORNING, WACKER, GE SILICON
128 KITCHEN EQUIPMENT HARMAN-MILLER OR EQUIVALENT
OUTDOOR FURNITURE (SITTING
129 NEELKAMAL, CANE INDIA , ARIHANT,GEEKEN
BENCH, DUSTBIN)
Page 1204 of 1358

HUNTER DOUGLAS, ALUCOIL, REYNOBOND,

130 METAL FACADE
ANAKON
131 REBARRING CHEMICAL HILTI , FISCHER OR EQUIVALENT
132 ARTIFICIAL GRASS TURFS MOLDO SPORTS OR EQUIVALENT

KONSTRUKTIONCHEMIEPVT. LTD. OR
133 ROOF ENVELOPE
EQUIVALENT
HERMITICALLY SEALED
134 PERFORMANCE GLASS & SAINTGOBAIN, MODI OR EQUIVALENT
TOUGHENED GLASS
135 METAL CEILING, GRID CEILING HUNTER DOUGLAS OR EQUIVALENT
WALL GUARDS, CORNER GUARDS,
136 INPROCORP, ANAKON
HAND RAILS, RIGID SHEETS
137 ROOFING KINGSPAN, INTERFLAZ, SANKO
138 AUDI-CHAIRS STEELCASE, GEEKEN, NLF, IMPRESSION
KADSHIP INTERIOR & STONES (GUJ) , CLASSIC
139 NATURAL STONE
SURFACES & URBAN CLAD
140 GARBAGE SHUTE JRK Corporation (India),Green Planet Solution
141 Executive & Classroom Chairs Featherlite, Godrej, HARMAN MILLER
Sleepwell (Spintech air luxury model), Kurlon or
142 Mattress
equivalent
Serge Ferrari Flexlight advanced 902 S2 or
143 Tensile roofing material
equivalent with 15 years warranty.
Note – Engineer in Charge reserves the right to select above approved brands or equivalent make
without compromising with the output criteria in view of the availability in the time bound manner,
harmonizing the development with existing one and in the interest of the work and delivery.
Page 1205 of 1358

LIST OF APPROVED MAKE ELECTRICAL

SR.
MATERIAL APPROVED MAKE
NO.
PVC CONDUITS FR GRADE HMS
1 POLYCAB/ AKG/ PRECISION/ BEC
2MM THICK & ACCESSORIES
MS CONDUITS 16GAUGE HGMS &
2 AKG/ NIC/ BEC
ACCESSORIES
MODULAR SWITCHES, SOCKETS,
LEGRAND (ARTEOR)/ SIEMENS / ABB / CRABTREE/
3 TELEPHONE & TV OUTLET BOXES
SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC / HAGER
ETC
4 POP-UP BOX LEGRAND / SIEMENS / ABB / SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC
WIRES –PVC INSULATED FRLSH
5 COPPER CONDUCTOR FLEXIBLE FINOLEX / RR KABEL/ HAVELLS/ POLYCAB
TYPE
6 TV / TELEPHONE CABLE FINOLEX / RR KABEL/ HAVELLS / LAPP / D-LINK
7 INDOOR LED LIGHTING FIXTURE PHILIPS / CROMPTON / HAVELLS
8 OUTDOOR LED LIGHTING FIXTURE PHILIPS / CROMPTON/ HAVELLS
9 CELLING FANS / WALL FANS CROMPTON/ BAJAJ/ USHA/ ORIENT/ HAVELLS / PHILIPS
CROMPTON/ BAJAJ/ ALMONARD/ USHA / ORIENT/

10 EXHAUST/ WALL/ CABIN FANS
HAVELLS / PHILIPS
A O SMITH/ HAVELLS / RACOLD / BAJAJ / CROMPTON/
11 GEYSER
PHILIPS
12 UPVC/ CPVC/ HDPE PVC PIPE SUPREME / ASTRAL / AASHIRWAD
13 GI PIPE B CLASS TATA/ JINDAL
14 HT PANEL ABB / SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC / SIEMENS / BHEL
ABB / SCHNEIDER / SIEMENS / L&T / LEGRAND /

15 LT PANEL
TRICOLITE
COMMUNICATION CABLES / LAPP/POLYCAB/RR KABEL/FUSION POLYMERS /

16
SIGNAL CABLE FINOLEX / D-LINK
COPPER CONDUCTOR CONTROL LAPP/POLYCAB/RR KABEL/FUSION POLYMERS /

17
CABLE FINOLEX
18 COLOUR MONITOR SAMSUNG/DELL/LG/PHILIPS / SONY

19 STEEL STRUCTURE JINDAL/ SAIL / TATA
LIGHTINING CONDUCTOR AND
20 CAPE/ ELTECH / FURSE (ABB)
EARTHING SYSTEM
21 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS FIREX/ CEASE FIRE / SAFEX / SUPREMEX
22 XLPE INSULATED LT CABLES HAVELLS / POLYCAB / KEI/ RR CABLES
Page 1206 of 1358

LEGRAND/ BCH/ ABB/ SCHENIDER ELECTRIC /

23 INDUSTRIAL POWER SOCKET
CRABTREE/ HAGER
HARDWARE (BOLTS, NUTS,
24 TATA / HILTI
SPRING, WASHER ETC.)
SIEMENS / LEGRAND/ ABB / L&T / SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC
25 MCB DISTRIBUTION BOARD
/ CRABTREE / HAGER
SIEMENS / LEGRAND/ ABB/L&T / SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC
26 MCB 10KA, RCBO, ISOLATOR
/ CRABTREE / HAGER
ALU ZINC CABLE TRAYS WITH
EDGE FOLD CONSTRUCTION LEGRAND / OBO BETTERMAN / AXYZ TECHNOLOGIES /
27
(LADDER/ PERFORATED) INDIANA / PROFAB/ MEM/ RMCON/ JETCOTECH
28 POWER SUPPLY MRE/ LUTRON/ ERD

29 PANIC SWITCH ETC/INSYN/HAMILTON
30 RESIN CAST CT LT & HT AE/ RECO / KAPPA
KAYCEE/ SALZER/RASS/ LEGRAND / L&T / SIEMENS/
31 SELECTOR SWITCH
SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC
PUSH BUTTONS/INDICATING SIEMENS/ MIMIC/ TECNIK/ABB / LEGRAND/ L&T /
32
LAMPS (LED TYPE) SIEMENS/ SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC
ABB/ SIEMENS(3WL) / L&T / SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC /
33 ACB MICROPROSSESOR LSIG
LEGRAND
ABB/ SIEMENS(3VL)/ L&T / SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC /
34 MCCB
LEGRAND
35 SFU ABB/ SIEMENS/ L&T / SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC / HAVELLS
36 STARTERS/ CONTACTORS ABB/ L&T/ SIEMENS / SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC / HAVELLS
ENGLISH ELECTRIC/ EASUN REYROLLE / SCHNEIDER

37 RELAYS
ELECTRIC / L&T / LEGRAND
38 CONNECTORS ELMEX/ WAGO/ CONNECTWELL /SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC
39 ANNUNCIATION WINDOWS MINILEC/EAPL / SYNERGY / SELEC
40 APFCR RELAY (40MA SENSITIVITY) DUKATI/ EPCOS / SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC
DUKATI / EPCOS (SUPER HEAVY DUTY)/ L&T /

41 CAPACITORS
SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC
42 CHANGE OVER SWITCHES SOCOMEC/ ABB / HAGER / ASCO/ HAVELLS / C&S
43 FLAMEPROOF SWITCH & SOCKETS SUDHIR / MENNEKES

BELDONE/ SYSTEMAX/ COMMSCOPE / D-LINK /
44 CAT - 6 A Wire
FINOLEX / LAPP
45 LUGS & GLANDS COMET / CELLPACK / AXIS / JAINSON / DOWELL
OBO BETTERMAN / PROFAB / MEM / RMCON /

46 RACEWAY & ACCESSORIES
JETCOTECH
Page 1207 of 1358

CURRENT TRANSFORMER &

47 AE / NEWTEK/RECO/ KAPPA
POTENTIAL TRANSFORMER
CAPE/ OBO BETTERMAN / AXIS / DEHN / SCHNEIDER
48 SURGE ARRESTER
ELECTRIC
49 TERMINAL STRIP ELMEX / CONNECTWELL / WAGO
ABB/ SIEMENS / L&T / SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC /
50 MPCB
LEGRAND
L&T / SIEMENS/ SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC / HAVELLS /
51 CONTROL MCB
LEGRAND
52 PLC L&T / SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC / SIEMENS / ALLENBRADLY
53 HOOTER MINILEC / SYNERGY / SELEC

HT CABLE TERMINATION KIT, HT
54 3M / RAYCHEM / CELL PACK
STRAIGHT THROUGH JOINT
RR CABLE /POLYCAB / HAVELLS / HAVELLS / POLYCAB
55 XLPE INSULATED HT CABLES
/ KEI
ATLAS (BOMBAY) / GK ELECTRIC / AS PER STATE

56 33 KV AIR BREAK SWITCH
ELECTRICITY BOARD
57 33 KV LA ELPRO / CGL / AS PER STATE ELECTRICITY BOARD
58 33 KV DROP OUT FUSE ATLAS (BOMBAY) / AS PER STATE ELECTRICITY BOARD
ABB / SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC / HONEYWELL /

59 SCADA SYSTEM
ALLENBRADLY
60 RTU ABB / SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC / SIEMENS

AMARA RAJA (AMARON) / EXIDE / RS POWER /
61 POWER PACK
ELECTROMOTIVE
62 ISOLATION TRANSFORMER BELDON / DATSONS
63 UPS EMERSON/ SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC / APC/ EATON
64 INVERTER (FULL SINE WAVE) MICROTECH/ SU-KAM / LUMINOUS
65 CHEMICAL EARTHING ELECTRODE ASHLOK/ GEL/ UES/ FAST EARTH

66 STEEL TUBULAR POLE BAJAJ / PHILIPS / VALMONT / JETCOTECH / TRANSRAIL
67 OCTAGONAL POLE BAJAJ / PHILIPS / VALMONT / JETCOTECH / TRANSRAIL
68 HIGH MAST BAJAJ / PHILIPS / VALMONT
69 ORNAMENTAL POLE BAJAJ / DWARKA / HOMDEC/ VALMONT

AMMETER,VOLTMETER,
70 FREQUENCY, KWH , MFM PANEL ELMEASURE /NEPTUNE / SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC
METERS
71 PHENOLIC LAMINATED SHEETS HYLUM / ANCHOR
72 PIN INSULATOR PORCELAIN ATLAS/ WSI / JAYSHREE
Page 1208 of 1358

73 LED/LCD DISPLAY SAMSUNG/LG/SONY
VOLTAMP/ KIRLOSKAR /CROMPTON / UNIVERSAL

74 TRANSFORMERS
TRANSFORMERS / SIEMENS
WSI / JAYSHREE / RASHTRIYA/ AS PER ELECTRICITY

75 INSULATOR POLYMER BOARD APPROVAL
BUS TRUNKING SYSTEM

76 LEGRAND / L&T/ SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC / SIEMENS / C&S
SANDWICH
77 TAP OFF BOXES LEGRAND / L&T/ SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC / SIEMENS / C&S
78 END FEED UNIT LEGRAND / L&T/ SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC / SIEMENS / C&S

SUBMERSIBLE /OPENWELL
79 KIRLOSKAR / CROMPTON /SIEMENS / GRUNDFOS/ ABB
/CENTRIFUGAL MOTOR PUMP SET
80 CHEMICAL EARTHING ELECTRODE ASHLOK/ GEL/ UES/ FAST EARTH
81 LCD TV SAMSUNG/ LG/ SONY
82 LIFTS OTIS/ KONE/ SCHIENDLER / MITSUBISHI
DG SETCOMPLETE WITH ENGINE,
ATERNATOR, COOLING SYSTEM,
83 CUMMINS / CATER PILLAR/ KIRLOSKAR
FUEL PIPING, EXHAUST SYSTEM &
OTHER REQUIRED ACCESSORIES.
84 SMF BATTRIES ROCKET/ AMAR RAJA/ EXIDE
85 BATTERY CHARGER CHAVI/ HERTZ ELECTRONICS / BCH / MAHAMAI
GAS SUPPRESSION AND GAS

86 HONEYWELL/SLEX/KIDDE/ UL APPROVED
CYLINDER
87 ELECTRIC CONTROL HEAD HONEYWELL/SLEX/KIDDE/ UL APPROVED
88 DISCHARGE NOZZLES HONEYWELL/SLEX/KIDDE/ UL APPROVED
89 SOLAR PV SYSTEM & ACCESSORIES GENUS / RENEWSYS / TATA / ADANI / U SOLAR
90 INVERTERS FOR SOLAR PV SYSTEM FUJI / VERTIVE (EMERSON) / NEOWATT
91 CABLES (AC, DC & CONTROL) RR CABLE / HAVELLS / POLYCAB / FINOLEX
92 DECORATIVE LIGHT FIXTURE HAVELLS / PHILIPS / TRILUX
93 FACADE LIGHTING HAVELLS / PHILIPS / TRILUX
94 DISCHARGE HOSE HONEYWELL/SLEX/KIDDE / UL APPROVED
95 CYLINDER STRAP FOR CYLINDER HONEYWELL/SLEX/KIDDE / UL APPROVED

96 GAS RELEASE PANEL AGNI/RAVEL/ UL APPROVED
GAS RELEASE MCP AND ABORT
97 RAVEL/AGNI/HONEYWELL/ UL APPROVED
SWITCH
98 VESDA DETECTOR XTRALIS/ NOTIFIER / HONEYWELL/ UL APPROVED
99 BATTERY 12V/7AH. EXIDE/AMAR RAJA
100 MS SEAMLESS PIPES JINDAL/TATA
Page 1209 of 1358

101 CPVC PIPES AND FITTINGS SUPREME/ POLYPACK/ASTRAL/DURALINE
LIGHTING
102 CONTROLLERS/SOFTWARE/ ATLONA / AMX / CRESTRON
KEYPADS
LIGHTING / SHADES PROCESSOR
103 LUTRON / DYNALITE / HONEYWELL
AND SOFTWARE
DAY LIGHT SENSORS /
104 LUTRON / DYNALITE / HONEYWELL / LEGRAND
OCCUPANCY SENSORS
105 Washing Machine L.G./Samsung/Whirlpool/IFB
106 Microwave Oven L.G./Samsung/IFB
Technical Qualifications &
107
Crieteria for Panel Manufacturer:-
1 Panel & Bus Duct Manufacturer should have IEC61439-1-2 approvals.
Panel Manufacturer should have inhouse Team of Design Engineer(B.E.) with 10years of
2
experience , Fitters , Fabricators & Testing Engineers.
Panel Manufacturer should have In house CNC Based machines for Cutting , bending , profile
3
making, Shearing , Fabrication, Bus Bar bending facilities.
Panel Manufacturer should have In house Seven/Eight Tank Treatment plant for metal finish
4
& Inhouse Powder Coating Plant.
Panel Manufacturer should have Certification from Switch Gear Manufacturer for their
5
Authenticated Assembler.
Panel Manufacturer should have Mimimum Turnover of Rs. 10 crore (Rupees Ten Crore) for
6
last 3 years.
Panel Manufacturer should have execute AMF & Synchronization Jobs for at least 5 big
7
projects valuing Rs. 3 crore(Rupees Three Crore).
NOTE :
All The materials to be ISI marked/ as per standard specifications.
The Contractor shall submit samples of all the makes as specified in this list and the competent
authority of IIM Indore shall have the power to select any of them. competent authority of IIM
Indore decision in this regard shall be binding on the Contractor.
Engineer in Charge reserves the right to select above approved brands or equivalent make
manner, harmonizing the development with existing one and in the interest of the work and
delivery.
Page 1210 of 1358

LIST OF APPROVED MAKES FOR IBMS SYSTEM

S. Nos. MATERIAL APPROVED MAKE
HONEYWELL WEBS / CYPHER / TRENDS /
1 BMS SOFTWARE
SIEMENS
HONEYWELL WEBS/ALC/ABB/TRENDS /
2 BMS UNITARY DDC CONTROLLER
SIEMENS
3 BMS SERVER PC/WORKSTATIONS IBM/DELL/HP/WIPRO/LENOVO
WEB BASED ROUTER / NETWORK AREA HONEYWELL WEBS/ALC/ABB/TRENDS /
4
CONTROLLER SIEMENS
HONEYWELLEBS / ALC / ABB / HONEYWELL /
5 BMS SENSORS AND FIELD DEVICES
OMICRON / SIEMENS
QUALCOMM / SCHNEITECH / OMICRON /
6 BTU METER
HONEYWELL / SIEMENS
LONWORKS BASED COMMUNICATING HONEYWELL / JOHNSON / SIEMENS /
7
THERMOSTATS FOR FCUS OMICRON / SIEMENS
VOLTAGE / CURRENT / POWER FACTOR ENERCON / CONZERV / ELECTREX / RISHABH /
8
TRANSDUCER OMICRON
ENERCON / CONZERV / ELECTREX / RISHABH /
9 23 FREQUENCY TRANSDUCER
OMICRON
10 PRINTER EPSON / NEC / TVSE
11 ENERGY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM ELMEASURE / CONZERVE
12 WATER LEVEL CONTROLLER (4 PROBE TYPE) MINILEC/ GALCO
13 COMPUTER SYSTEM LENOVO/ DELL / HCL/ HP
Note- Engineer in Charge reserves the right to select above approved brands or equivalent make
Page 1211 of 1358

LIST OF APPROVED MAKES FOR FIRE FIGHTING SYSTEM

S.NO MATERIAL APPROVED MAKES
1 Fire Pumps Grundfos/Kirloskar/M&P
2 Jockey Pumps Grundfoss/Kirloskar/M&P
3 Motor Kirloskar / Siemens / Crompton / ABB
4 Diesel Engine Clarke/Caterpillar/Kirloskar /Cummins
5 MS / GI Pipes Tata Steel /Jindal (Hisar)/Zenith
6 G.I / M.S fitting Unik/ Zoloto/Jainsons / sanjay forge
7 Forged Steel Fittings True Forge/VS Forge/Diecast/ sanjay / Forged
8 Butterfly Valve (C.I.) Audco/Sarkar/Leader / Zoloto

Dual Plate type NRV
9 Sarkar/Venus/LeaderAdvance
(C.I.)
10 Non Return Valve (GM) Leader/Zoloto/RB/Sarkar
11 Gun metal Gate valves Leader/Zoloto/RB/Sarkar
12 Ball Valve (SS or CS) Audco/Leader/Zoloto/KSB
Gun Metal/C.I. Air
13 Leader/Oven Trop/Zoloto/Newage
release valve
GM Landing Valve(ISI
Fire Shield/Winco/Minimax/Newage/Safe
Mark)
14
(Single Outlet/Double
Guard/Firex/Shah Bhogilal/Venus/Sarkar
Outlet)
Gun Metal Branch Pipe
15
with Nozzle
Guard/Firex/Shah Bhogilal/Vinus/Sarkar
Male/Female
16 Fire Shield/Winco/Minimax/Newage / Guard/Firex /Safe
Coupling(GM)
17 Hose Reel Drum
Guard/Firex/Shah Bhogilal/Vinus/Sarkar
18 Shut off Nozzle Fire Shield/Winco/Minimax/Newage Guard/Firex /Safe
19 Fire Man Axe Fire Shield/Winco/Minimax/Newage Guard/Firex /Safe
20 GM Two Way/Three Fire Shield/Winco/Minimax/Newage Guard/Firex /Safe
Page 1212 of 1358

Way/Four
Way Collecting Head

GM Draw out
Connection (Suction
21 Fire Shield/Winco/Minimax/Newage /Safe Guard/Firex
Hose Coupling)
20 mm dia rubber pipe
22 Fire Shield/Dunlop/Good year/Jyoti/Padmini
for hose reel
23 Pressure switch Danfoss/Switzer/Indfoss/System Sensor
24 Pressure Gauges Fiebig / H Guru./Waree
25 Suction Strainers Emerald/ Zoloto /Castle / Sant
Fire Extinguishers (ISI Fire Shield / Winco/Minimax / Cease Fire/ Kidde / Firex/
26
Marked only) Safex
Anti corrosive pipe
treatment (As per
27 Pypkote (IWL)/Coatek/ Rustfire
IS:10221 – 1982)
28 RRL Hose/ C.P.Hose Fire Shield/Newage /Safex/CRC/Padmini/Jayshree
29 Mechanical Seal Sealol / Burgman / Hindustan
30 Foot Valve Kirloskar/Sarkar/Kalpana/Venus

Antivibration
31 mounting/Flexible Resistoflex/Dunlop/Kanwal/Welcom Engg
coupling
Dash Fasteners/ Pipe
32 Hilti / Fisher/ HiraWalraven
support
33 Paint Primer Asian / Goodlac / Nerolac / Jenson Nicholson / ICI / Berger
Enamel Painting of
34 Asian / Goodlac / Nerolac / Jenson Nicholson / ICI / Berger
pipes etc.
35 Welding Electrodes Advani Oerlikon/ Esab/D & H Secheron

Installation control
36 HD/Viking/Tyco
valve
37 Deluge Valve HD/Viking/Tyco
Pendant/Upright /
Powder coated
Pendant Sprinkler
38 Tyco/ Viking/HD.
Heads / Spray Nozzle
(UL Listed)/water
curtain nozzle and
Page 1213 of 1358

accessories
Powder coated
39 Tyco/ Viking/HD / Equivalent.
sprinkler rosette
40 Concealed Sprinkler Tyco/ Viking/HD.
41 Flow Switch Switzer/SystemSensor/ Potter/Honeywell
42 Exit Sign Glow Light/ Prolite / Equivalent

Annunciator Panel for
43 PCD/Safeway/Agni
Sprinkler Panel
Gas Suppression
44 System/System Tyco(Ansul),Minimax,Rotarex,Firetrace
Integrator
Electrical Panel Gas
Suppression
45 Tyco(Ansul),Minimax,Rotarex,Firetrace
System/System
Integrator
Kitchen Hood
Suppression
46 Tyco(Ansul),Minimax,Rotarex,Firetrace
System/System
Integrator
47 Flexible Hoses Gunebo/Tyco,Viking
48 Wet Alarm Valve HD/Viking/Tyco
Pressure Reducing
49 Honeywell/Danfoss/Zoloto
Valve
50 Grooved Fittings Victaulic / Tyco / Gruvlok
51 DI Fittings Sant, Jainsons, New
52 Fire Sealant 3M,Hilti,Pormat
Intumescent Paint
53 Nullifire, Jotun, Asian
(2hrFirerating)
Fire/smoke Curtain for Coopers, Pacific Fire Control, Omfire
54
compartmentation curtain, Orient fire curtains
NOTE :
Engineer in Charge reserves the right to select above approved brands or equivalent
make without compromising with the output criteria in view of the availability in the time
bound manner, harmonizing the development with existing one and in the interest of the
work and delivery.
Page 1214 of 1358

LIST OF APPROVED MAKE FOR HVAC

S.No. Details of equipment/ material Make/Manufacturer
1 VRV/VRF TOSHIBA/BLUESTAR/Daikin/MITSHUBISHI/ Midea-
Kubic/ Voltas/LG
2 M.S. / G.I. Pipes Jindal Hissar / Tata /Sail
3 Pre-Insulated Pipe Perma/Lloyd/ 7 Star
4 UPVC Pipes Astral/Ashirwad/Supreme/Duraline/Jain/Prince
5 Copper Refrigerant Piping SS Pipes/Rajco/Totaline/MANDEV
6 Ball valves Sant/Leader/Zoloto/Anergy/ Emerald/Rapid cool /

Midea-Kubic/
Rapid valve
7 Ball valve with YST Sant/Advance/Zoloto/Anergy/ Emerald/Rapid cool /
Midea-Kubic/
Rapid valve
8 Thermometer/ Pressure Gauge Emerald/Fiebig/H.Guru
9 Auto Airvent Anergy/Flemco/Castle/Honeywell
10 Air & Dirt Separator Anergy/Reflex/Sevcon/Emerald/Spirovent
11 AHU Edgetech/ Zeco / Nutech / Systemair/VTS
12 AHU Coils AHRI Approved

13 Air Filter Camfri/ AAF/ Airtech/ Dyna/ Pyramid
14 Pre-filters Anfilco/ Thermodyne/ Mechmark /Spectrum
15 VAV Boxes Cosmos/Conaire/Systemair/Ruskin Titus/Trox
16 VFD Danfoss/ABB/Siemens/Allen Bradly/ Fuji Electric /

Delta/
Schneider
17 G.I. Sheet for Ducting Tata/Sail/Jindal
18 Aluminium Sheet for Ducting Indalco/Hindalco/Balco
19 Prefab Ducts Zeco/Rollastar/Ductofab/EcoDuct
20 Class O/FM Approved Nitrile ArmaFlex/ALP Aeroflex/ K-flex

Rubber
Thermal Insulation
Antimicrobial Open Cell Nitrile ArmaFlex/ALP Aeroflex/ K-flex
Rubber
21 Acoustic Insulation
22 Grills/Diffuser/Dampers/Louvers/ Caryaire/Mapro/Systemair/Ruskin
Motorized Fire Dampers Titus/Cosmos/Dynacraft/ Green Heck
Page 1215 of 1358

23 Actuator Siemens/Belimo/Johnson/Honeywell
24 Tube Axial/Vane Axial Fans Kruger/Nicotra/Comfri/Airflow/Green Heck/Maico/

Nicotra
25 Propeller Fan Nicotra/Caryaire/Kruger/Khaitan/Crompton/GEC/
26 Cabinet Type Fan Kruger/Nicotra/Airflow/Systemair/Edgetech/Citizen/

Green Heck
27 Vibration Isolator/Rubber Easyflex/Resistoflex/Dunlop/Gerb
Pad/Duct
Support/Flexible Pipe Connection
28 Anti-Vibration Mounts Dunlop/Resistoflex/Ewren

29 Fastener Hilti/Fisher/Wurth
30 Paint Nerolec/Asian/Berger
31 Welding Rod Adon/Ejab/Essar/Advani/ L&T
32 Grooved Fitting/Coupling Victaulic/Tyco/Gunnel/Rapid
33 Sequence Controller Application/Siemens/Proton
34 Adhesive (Pipe/Duct etc.) Pidilite/Paramount/Cisbond

35 UV Coating & Treatment Pidilite/Paramount/ Cisbond
36 Reinforcement Steel / Structural SAIL/Tata Steel Ltd./ RINL/ Jindal Steel & Power Ltd.
Steel / JSW Steel Ltd.
/ Steel plates
37 Electrical Motor(IE-3) Siemens/ABB/Crompton/NGEF/Havells / BBL
38 Fan Coil Unit Midea , York, Trane/ Midea-Kubic/ Caryaire
39 Chilled water HI-wall & cassette Midea , York, Trane / Midea-Kubic/ Voltas/ Caryaire
units
40 Hi-wall Split units TOSHIBA/BLUESTAR/Daikin/MITSHUBISHI/ Midea-
Kubic/LG
41 Jet Fans Krugger/Nicotra/ Airovient / Flowline
india/Maico(dyna)
42 HVLS Fan Caryaire/ Ecoair / Airspin/ Maico(dyna)
43 Air Purifier Caryaire / Eloficairpurifier / Klairon
44 MCS/IDEC (Indirect Evoperating Caryaire/ ATE HMX / VENTECH SYSTEM//Roots
Cooling System)
45 EC Inline fans Caryaire / Nicotra / Nadi Airtechnics / Dynamic/
Maico(dyna)
46 EC Hybrid Plug Fan / EC DIDW Nicotra/ Kruger / Caryaire /
Flowlineindia/Mico(Dyna)
Centrifugal Fans
47 Sound Attenuator Caryaire/ Kanvacool / Hsengineers
Page 1216 of 1358

48 Air Monitoring System VS Enviropure/Eflow/Ultrapure
49 Heat Pump Clivet/Climavenata/AO Smith
50 Precision AC Units Blue Box/Stuls/Climaveneta/Verties-

Emerson/Liebert
51 Electrostatic Precipitartors (ESP) Honeywell/Trion/Rydair/Pureovyan/ Magneto
/Carbon Panel Filters
52 Micro Electrostatic Filter Damcohappel/Eflow/Ultrapure/Vsenviropure
53 FDV Unit (Forced Draft Edgetech/ RCS / Eflow / Humidin / Fanair / Zeco /
Ventilation) Waves / JPC / Caryaire (Nicotra) / Kruger /
Mico(Dyna)/ Airflow
54 Dehumidifier Unit Bryair / DRI / Rehoboth / Dry Solution / Munter(US) /
55 Factory Fabricated Ducts Ductofab / Fanair / Identity / Eflow / Betaflo / Zeco /

Maruti HVAC
56 AOP Cells VS Enviropure/Eflow/Ultrapure
57 UVGI System
Ruks / Sterileair/Sanuvax/ Steril-aire /Trimmed
58 Malanpurentech / Shanti / Alska / Mulyiproducts /
PUF Pipe Supports Bestplastroniks
59
Flow Switch (Bellow Type) Rapid control/Anergy / Johnson
60
Air-Curtains Mitzvah / Euronics / Acme air / Beacon / Sam
61
Flexible Duct Pineair / Kaal Flex / Carryair / Gpspira
62 DP Switch Dwyer / Equilant
63
Freezers Bluestar / Voltas / Samsung
NOTE :
Engineer in Charge reserves the right to select above approved brands or equivalent make
manner, harmonizing the development with existing one and in the interest of the work
and delivery.
Page 1217 of 1358

Approved Makes for Plumbing Work

Sl.
Materials Approved Makes
No.
1 Sanitary Fixtures & Concealed HINDWARE / CERA / PARRYWARE / KEROVIT (KAJARIA)
cistern ( For Hostel’s, Type V &
Mess Block)
2 Sanitary Fitting & Concealed cistern ( TOTO, KOHLER, GROHE, AMERICAN STANDARD
For Academic, Incubation &
Accommodation Block)
3 S. Sink NIRALI,CARYSILL,HAFELE/ CHASE
4 WC connector NIRALI,CARYSILL,HAFELE
5 Auto Urinal Flush System JOHNSON, SOMANY, TOTO, KOHLER, GROHE
6 Hand Drier EURONICS, ASKON, UTEC SYSTEM
7 CP Fittings TOTO, KOHLER, GROHE, PARRYWARE
8 Gl pipe(IS:1239,Part-I) Tata, Jindal, Hissar, SAIL
9 Gl Fittings(IS:1239,Part-ll) Unik, Zoloto, KS
10 Gl pipe sealent Henkel-LOCTITE55,Superbond,Sealtite
11 GI/MS Pipe protection Wrapping IWL–Pypkote, Rustech–Coatek,KIMPL
&Coating
12 TEFLONTAPE As per approval of Engineer In charge
13 Floor Drain Fixture, High speed Kessel,ACO, Viega
channels & SS Gratings
14 Anchor Fastener HiraWalraven,Hilti,Fisher
15 Supporting Material for piping HiraWalraven,Hilti,Fisher
16 D. I. Pipes ElectroSteel,JindalSaw,LancoKalahasthi
17 UPVC pressure Pipes and Astral,supreme,prince, FINOLEX, ASHIRWAD
Fittings(IS:4985)
18 CPVC Pipes and Fittings Astral,supreme,prince, FINOLEX, ASHIRWAD
19 RCC Pipe Indian hume pipe, Jain spun, Pragati concreteudyog
20 HDPE Pipe Astral,supreme,prince, FINOLEX, ASHIRWAD
21 PPR Pipes and Fittings Astral,supreme,prince, FINOLEX, ASHIRWAD
22 Poly propelene (PPE) Pipe & Fittings SFMC, Astral, Wavin
23 Pre-Fabricated HDPE Manholes SFMC, Wavin Vectus, Astral
24 Centrifugal Spun Cast Iron Pipes and SKF,NECO,HEPCO,EVERCREST PROJECTS PVT. LTD
Fittings(IS:3989)
25 Centrifugal Cast Iron Hub less pipe SKF,NECO,HEPCO,EVERCREST PROJECTS PVT. LTD
IS:15905
26 CI LA Pipes and Fittings(IS:1536) NECO, Jindal, Supreme
27 D.I. Manhole Covers & Frames Neco, RajIron Foundry Agra,Kartar,GMGR,SKF

(Double Seal)
28 GM/Forged Brass Ball Valves CIM, Danfoss, Castle, Honeywell, Sant, leader, zoloto
Page 1218 of 1358

29 Sluice Valves Kirloskar, Sant, Zoloto, Leader, Castle

30 Motorized Valve KIRLOSKARS, Zoloto, L&T, Audco, Sant
31 Butterfly Valve Advance,Zoloto,Kirloskar,Castle, Audco
32 Check Valve–Wafer Type Advance,Zoloto,Kirloskar,Castle,
33 Check Valve- Dual Plate Advance,Zoloto,Kirloskar,Castle
34 Check Valve Forged Screwed Advance,Zoloto,Kirloskar,Castle,
35 Cast Iron Non Return valve Advance,Zoloto,Kirloskar,Castle,
36 NRV - Ball type - Sewage application Advance,Zoloto,Kirloskar,Castle,Sant
37 Pressure Reducing Valve CIM,Honeywell,Danfoss,Castle

38 Three Way / Two Way Motorized CIM,Honeywell,Danfoss,Castle,
Valve
39 Air Release Valve Advance,Danfoss,Kirloskar,Castle,
40 Ball Float Valve Advance,Danfoss,Kirloskar,Castle
41 Air Vent CIM,Advance,Honeywell, Castle
42 Y Strainer CI Emerald, Sant, SKS,Castle
43 Back flow preventer Supreme, Kessel, ACO
44 Drinking Water Cooler/Bottling BlueStar, Voltas,Oasis,WAE
Plant/RO Plant/Glass filling stations
45 Hydro pneumatic System Wilo,Grundfos,KSB,Kirloskar,Xylem,Ebara

46 Submersible Sump Pump Wilo,Grundfos,KSB,Kirloskar,Xylem,Ebara
47 Domestic Hydro pneumatic transfer Wilo,Grundfos,KSB,Kirloskar,Xylem,Ebara
pump
48 Mechanical Seal Burgmann,Sealol,Leakpack
49 Anti-Vibration Mounting &Flexible Resistoflex,Dunlop,Flexionics
connections
50 Pressure Gauge FIEBIG,H-GURU,Emerald,WIKA
51 Water Meter (Mechanical Type) Kent,Capstan,Kranti
52 Electronic Flow Meter Rockwin, Peltek,ManasMicrosystems,WIKA
53 Level Controller & Technika,Minilec,ElegentControls
Indicator(Water)/Pressure
Transmitter
54 Hot water pipe Insulation Armacell/Kaiflex/Armaflex/Eurobatex(Italy)
55 Hot water Geyser Racold,Havells,Venus/ AO Smith
56 Grease Trap/Separator ACO,Wade, Kessel, Supreme
57 Welding Rods Advani, ADOR, Esab
58 Fire Sealant 3M,Hilti, Promat, RAWALPLUG
59 Temperature Sensor/Gauge Forbes Marshall,Danfoss,Wika
60 Water Treatment Vessel Astral,Pentair, SimaLabs
Page 1219 of 1358

61 Ultra Violet Water Purifier(WTP AlfaUV -Mumbai/EurekaForbes/Pentair

/STP)
62 Dosing Pumps FluidControls,Grundfos,KSB
63 Siphonic Roof Drainage System Geberit,Hydromax,Valsir
64 Ozonisation System Oraipl,Ozonics,Voltas
65 SFRC Manhole Cover KGM,KK, Nutek
66 MH/Water Tank Plastic Steps NECO,Patela,KGM
67 M.S. Steel (Angle. Channel, Strip, Tata,Sail, JindalHissar
sheet)
68 Paint Berger,Asian,Nerolac
69 Rain Water Harvesting Ashwath Infratech Pvt. Ltd. Delhi.,
RETASEnviroSolutions,Bantair
70 Solar Water heater Panel Tatapowersolar, Kotakurja,Emmvee
71 PVC Water tank Sintex,Supreme,Vectus
72 SS Pipe & Fittings Rhinox,Viega,Victaulic
73 Self-Priming Pumps Johnson,Kirloskar,KSB,Xylem
74 SS prefabricated tank Rostfrei,Purever,Neropure
75 Anti-VibrationMounting& Flexible Dunlop/Flexionics/Kanwal/IndustrialCorporation/Resistoflex
Connections
76 Heat Pump Bluebox/Climaveneta/Midea/ AO Smith
Note - Engineer in Charge reserves the right to select above approved brands or equivalent make
Page 1220 of 1358

Approved Makes for Sewage Treatment Plant, Water Treatment Plant & RO Plant
Sl.
Descriptions Makes
No.
Sewage Treatment Plant, Water Thermax, Optima Water Solutions, Ion Exchange, Premier
Treatment Plant & Hot Water tech Aqua, JRK Corporation (India)
1
Generator: System
Integrator
2 Water Treatment Vessel Astral,Cetrikin,Structural
Ultra Violet Water AlfaUV–Mumbai, EurekaForbes,Pentair
3
Purifier(WTP/STP)
4 MBR Membrane Mitsubishi/DOW/GE/Hydromantic/Suez/Qua
Sewage Handling Sump Pumps/ Xylem,Willo,KSB,Grundfos
5
Clear Water Pumps
6 Self-Priming Pumps Johnson, Kirloskar,KSB,Grundfos,Wilo
7 Recording Type Flow Meter Krone,Marshal,Rockwin
8 Air Compressor IngersolRand, ELGI, AtlasCopco,Kaeser
9 Air diffusion system Everest/kay/Swam
10 Electromagnetic type Flow Meter Adept/ABB/E&H
Non-clog type air dispersion Scogen/Rehau/OTT
11
system
Air Blower Atlas Copco, Ingersol Rand, Gardener
12
Denver,Robuschi,Everest/ kay
13 D.O. Meter cum Controller E-Merck,KrohneMarshal,Hanna
14 Multi-Disk plate Screw Press TranscendCleantec/Quasys/C-Tech/Ecologix
Stainless Steel Mechanical Fine Transcend Cleantec/Quasys/C-Tech/Ecologix
15 Screen, Drum Fine Screen with
automatic self
Page 1221 of 1358

Approved Makes for Irrigation Works

S.
Descriptions Makes
No.
Irrigation Agency Aditi irrigation, Hunter irrigation, Automatindustries
1
2 UPVC Pipes and Fittings SFMC,WAVIN, Astral,supreme,prince

Polyethylene Pipes and Fittings. SFMC , WAVIN ,Astral
3
4 Solenoid Valves Hunter, Senninger, Weathermatic
5 Gate Valves Kirloskar, Leader, Zoloto

6 Check Valves Kirloskar, Leader, Zoloto
Electrically Operated Butterfly Honeywell, Danfoss ,L&T, Lehry
7
Valve
8 Air Relief Valve CIM, Zoloto, RB
9 Pressure Gauges FIEBIG,H-GURU, Emerald
10 Bubblers Hunter, Senninger, Weathermatic

11 Emitters Hunter, Irritec, Jain Irrigation, Weathermatic
12 Pop-up Sprayers Hunter, Toro, Weathermatic
13 Rotor Sprinklers Hunter, Toro, Weathermatic, Newage (Gujarat)

14 Irrigation Pumps Kirloskar, KSB, Grundfos, Xylem, Wilo
15 Main Pumps Kirloskar, KSB, Grundfos, Xylem, Wilo
16 Sump Pumps Kirloskar, KSB, Grundfos, Xylem, Wilo
17 Pressure Vessels Pentair, IonExchange, Thermax
18 Filters( Mesh Type) Pentair, IonExchange, Thermax
19 Filters(Disk Type) Pentair, IonExchange, Thermax

20 Basket Strainers Zoloto, Sant, Hunter
21 Irrigation Control System Hunter, Griswold, Motorola, Weathermatic

22 Valve Boxes Carsons, Applied Engineering, Jain Irrigation, Cepex
23 PPR PIPE SFMC, SAFE, WAVIN
Page 1222 of 1358

Technical Compliance
Page 1223 of 1358

ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT DATA SHEET
A. TECHNICAL Data sheet for 33/ 11 KV, 3.5 MVA Power Transformers
Sr.No. Description 3.5MVA, ONAN, Power Transformer

1.0 General
1.1 Make As per MPCB/CPWD
1.2 Application/Designation Step down distribution transformer
1.2 Installation (Indoor/ outdoor) Outdoor
1.3 Reference Standard IS 2026
2.0 Ratings
2.1 Rating 3.5 MVA
2.2 Number of Phase and Frequency 3 phase, 50 Hz
2.3 Type of cooling ONAN
2.4 No Load Voltage Primary 33 kV
2.5 Secondary 11 kV
2.6 Vector Group Ddn11
2.7 Neutral Rating (% of Phase Rating) 100%
2.8 % Impedance at principal tapping As IS 2026
2.9 Losses To be filled by vendor
2.9.1 No Load Loss As per MPCB/CPWD (To be filled by vendor)
2.9.2 Full Load Losses at rated output, rated
frequency & corrected for 75 0C winding temperature As per MPCB/CPWD (To be filled by
vendor)
3.0 SYSTEM VOLTAGE

3.1 Nominal System Voltage- Primary 33 kV
Secondary 11 kV
3.2 Highest System Voltage- Primary 36 kV
Secondary 12 kV
4.0 INSULATION WITHSTAND

4.1 Impulse
a) Primary 170kV (For 36 kV)
4.2 Power Frequency
a) Primary 75 kV (For 36 kV)
5.0 TEMPERATURE RISE

a) Reference ambient 50 deg
b) Oil by thermometer As per IS 1180: 2014
c) Winding by resistance As per IS 1180: 2014
d) OTI – Alarm / Trip at ambient 80/85 deg
e) WTI – Alarm/ Trip at ambient 85/90 deg
Page 1224 of 1358

6.0 TAP CHANGING GEAR

a) Taps Required OLTC
b) Total Tapping range + 10% to – 15 %
c) Total Tapping range 1.25%
7.0 BUSHINGS
7.1 Voltage class
8.2 Impulse(1.2/50 sec. Wave withstand)

a) Primary line end Vendor to Specify
8.3 Power frequency withstand
8.4 Minimum clearance in air (in mm)
a) Primary phase to phase Vendor to Specify
b) Secondary phase to phase To be filled by vendor
c) Primary phase to earth To be filled by vendor
d) Secondary phase to earth To be filled by vendor
8.5 Minimum creepage distance (in mm)
9.0 FITTINGS As per MPCB/CPWD
10.0 PERFORMANCE PARTICULARS
.Iron losses in kW (No - Load Losses) : To be filled by vendor
.Copper losses in kW (Load Losses) : To be filled by vendor
.Total losses in kW at 50% Load (Restricted to : To be filled by vendor

ECBC Guidelines)
.Total losses in kW at 100% Load (Restricted : To be filled by vendor

.Regulation at Full Load (At Unity Power Factor) : To be filled by vendor
.Regulation at Full Load 0.8 Power Factor : To be filled by vendor
Page 1225 of 1358

.Efficiency at Full Load (at UPF) : To be filled by vendor
.Efficiency at 75% Load (at UPF) : To be filled by vendor
.Efficiency at Full Load (at 0.8 PF) : To be filled by vendor
.Efficiency at 75% Load (at 0.8 PF) : To be filled by vendor
.Load at which Maximum Efficiency Occurs at Full Load : To be filled by vendor
.Maximum Efficiency at Unity Power Factor Load : To be filled by vendor
.No load current at Rated Voltage and : To be filled by vendor

Frequency
.Flux Density (Should not be more than 1.75 Tesla) : To be filled by vendor
Oil Capacity (In Ltr.) : To be filled by Vendor
A. Transformer : To be filled by Vendor
B. OLTC chamber : To be filled by Vendor
Dimensions (L x W x H) of Transformer : To be filled by Vendor
Weight (in Kgs) - Total : To be filled by Vendor

A. Transformer Body : To be filled by Vendor
B. Radiator : To be filled by Vendor
B . TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS OF 11/.433 KV TRANSFORMER (Vendor To Fill)
. Make of Transformer : To be filled by vendor

` Capacity : As per Design Vendor to be fill
. Type : Indoor
. No. of Phases : Three
. Voltage Ratio (Primary / Secondary) : 11 / 0.433 kV
. Connection (HV/LV) : Primary-Delta and Secondary-Star
. Vector Group : Dyn 11
. Frequency : 50 Hz
. Primary System : 11 kV, 3 Phase, 3 Wire, 3 Phase Symn.

Fault level 350 MVA
. Secondary System : 433 V, 3 Phase, 4 Wire, Neutral
Page 1226 of 1358

Grounding Required
. Percentage Impedance at 75 degree Centigrade : Vendor To be filled
. Average Ambient for the day : 45 degree Centigrade
. Maximum Ambient for the day : 45 degree Centigrade
. Type of Cooling : ONAN
. Winding : Copper
. Winding Insulation : Paper Insulation Class 'A'

Radiators : Detachable
. Terminal Arrangement on HV side : Cable Box suitable to receive 3 core

300 sq. mm. XLPE Aluminium Cabl
Terminal Arrangement on LV side : Cable Box suitable to receive suitable

size Aluminium Conductor Sandwich
Bus duct as per approved drawing
. Cable termination Kits. Cable Glands and Lugs : By others
. Protective CT's on HV side : Not required
. Protective CT's on LV side : required on LV Side
. Additional bushing for neutral earthing : Required on LV side
. Temperature rise - Winding : 55 degree Centigrade
. Temperature rise - Oil : 50 degree Centigrade
. Insulation Level for impulse test : 75 kV peak for 11 kV Class or 28 kV

RMS
. Tap changer : Off load Tap Changer

. Off load circuit taps : +5% to -10%
. Variation by on load tap changer : In 2.5% steps
. Painting : Epoxy RAL 7032
PERFORMANCE PARTICULARS
.Iron losses in kW (No - Load Losses) : To be filled by vendor
.Copper losses in kW (Load Losses) : To be filled by vendor
Page 1227 of 1358

.Total losses in kW at 50% Load (Restricted to : To be filled by vendor

ECBC Guidelines)
.Total losses in kW at 100% Load (Restricted : To be filled by vendor

.Regulation at Full Load (At Unity Power Factor) : To be filled by vendor
.Regulation at Full Load 0.8 Power Factor : To be filled by vendor
.Efficiency at Full Load (at UPF) : To be filled by vendor
.Efficiency at Full Load (at 0.8 PF) : To be filled by vendor
.Load at which Maximum Efficiency Occurs at Full Load : To be filled by vendor
.Maximum Efficiency at Unity Power Factor Load : To be filled by vendor
.No load current at Rated Voltage and : To be filled by vendor

Frequency
.Flux Density (Should not be more than 1.75 Tesla) : To be filled by vendor
Oil Capacity (In Ltr.) : To be filled by Vendor

Dimensions (L x W x H) of Transformer : To be filled by Vendor
Weight (in Kgs) - Total : To be filled by Vendor
A.Transformer Body : To be filled by Vendor
B. Radiator : To be filled by Vendor
C. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR 750 KVA D.G. SETS (To be filled by Vendor)
SNo. Description 750 KVA
1.0 Applicable Standards : BS 5514

2.0 ENGINE :
2.1 Type : To be filled by Vendor
2.2 Make : As per List enclosed
Page 1228 of 1358

2.3 Model : To be filled by Vendor

2.4 a) BHP :
b) Output at site condition after
derating at 45 C after deducting
2.5 RPM : 1500
2.6 No. of cylinder : To be filled by Vendor
2.7 Specific Fuel Consumption
(Guaranteed)
a) Full Load : To be filled by Vendor
b) at 75% Load : To be filled by Vendor
c) at 50% Load : To be filled by Vendor
2.8 Lube oil consumption in gm/hr. :
2.9 Cooling
a) Type of cooling : Radiator
b) Maximum period for which
engine can operate without CW
supply. : To be filled by Vendor
2.10 Type of Starting : Electric
3.0 ALTERNATOR :
3.1 Make : As per List Enclosed
3.2 Type of Enclosure : IP – 23
3.3 Mounting : Foot Mounted
3.4 Net KW Rating at 0.8 PF : 600 KW
3.5 kVA Rating
a) Name Plate : 750 KVA
b) After deration as per site condition
of 45 C ambient after deducting
3.6 Insulation : Class ―H‖ Temp rise limited to class F
3.7 Excitation : Separately Excited Brushless
3.8 Terminal Box Provided : 1250A TPN AL
3.9 Earthing Studs : To be Provided.
3.10 Temperature rise above ambient (45oC) ;
a) Stator : To be furnished.
b) Rotor :
c) Cores :
3.11 Efficiency
a) at full load : To be filled by Vendor
b) at 75% load : To be filled by Vendor
c) at 50% load : To be filled by Vendor
d) at 25% load : To be filled by Vendor
3.12 AVR type : Digital (Part of Integrated Panel)
3.13 Degree of protection : IP 23
3.14 Full load losses : To be furnished
3.15 Transient & sub-transient reactance : To be filled by Vendor
3.16 Short circuit ratio : To be filled by Vendor
4.0 Dimensions (L x W x H) of DG Set : To be filled by Vendor
Page 1229 of 1358

5.0 Weight (in Kgs) : To be filled by Vendor

6.0 Anti-vibration pad provided (YES/NO) : Required
7.0 FLOAT CHARGER :

7.1 Type : Rectifier
7.2 Make : As per List enclosed.
7.3 Ampere Rating : ------ Amps.
7.4 Float Charger Panel Details
a) Sheet Steel (Cold Rolled) : To be furnished.
b) Thickness of sheet steel : To be filled by Vendor
c) Type of mounting : Floor mounted
d) Degree of protection for panel : IP – 52
e) Cable Entry (Top/Bottom) : Top/ Bottom
f) Glands/Conduit : Gland.
g) Paint Shade : To be furnished.
8.0 CONTROL PANEL (OPTIONAL)

(Engine Control Panel) :
8.1 Type : Indoor Type.
8.2 Make : As per list enclosed
8.3 Facilities provided (bidder to furnish
details & brief description) covered:
a) Monitoring : Digital.
b) Startup : Auto/Manual.
c) Changeover: Auto Change over.
d) Parallel operation/synchronizing : Yes.
e) Operation : Auto / Manual.
f) Protection & interlocks &
Safeguards: Yes.
8.4 Cable entry : To be furnished.
8.5 Weight : To be filled by Vendor
8.6 Dimensions To be filled by Vendor
D . TECHNICAL DATA SHEET FOR 11 KV HT BREAKERS
Make & Catalogue No
Sr. No Description Unit Tender Confirmation

specifications from Bidder
1. Switchgear
1.1 Type VCB
1.2 Voltage (System/Rated) kV 11
1.3 Phase/Frequency HZ 50
1.4 Short Circuit Rating
Rated SC breaking current kA 26.3 for 1 sec
Rated short circuit kAp 50
making current
Insulation level (KV rms/KVp) 28 \ 75
Page 1230 of 1358

1.5 Closing Coil Voltage V 110 V for Sub

1.6 Shunt trip Coil Voltage V station
1.7 Electric Spring Charging V (from Item 1.5
device Voltage to 1.9)
1.8 Protection relays & Control V
Supply voltage.
1.9 Indicating lamps, V
annunciation
window panel,
hooters etc supply
voltage.
2 Construction
2.1 Draw out feature for Circuit Required
Breaker with Service , test &
disconnected
2.2 Draw out feature for Potential Required
Transformer (PT)
2.3 PT HT side fuse failure relay Required
2.4 Overall dimension ( L x W x H) To be filled by Vendor
mm
2.5 Operating weight KG To be filled by Vendor
3 Bus Bar
3.1. Material & grade Copper
3.2 Continuous current amps Rated current –
at 45 deg C 630A
3.3 Max temp rise over for deg C 40
45 deg C
3.4 Min clearance of bare bus
bar & Connection (in Air)
a. Phase to phase (mm) mm Shall be as per
b. Phase to ground (mm) mm IEC 62271
4.0 Breaker operating features \
accessories \ indications
Mech. Safety interlocks Required
Automatic safety shutter Required
Emergency manual trip Required
Mech. ON/OFF indicator Required
Operation counter Required
Spring charge/discharge Required
indications
Manual spring charging facility Required
Mechanical Antipumping Required
5.0 Degree of ingress protection. IP 4X

6.0 Enclosure Paint Shade Siemens Grey
RAL 7032
Page 1231 of 1358

7.0 Integral Earth Switch Required
Note :-
1. All Data Sheets to be read in conjunction with SOQ, Tender Specifications and Drawings.
Discrepancy if any should be brought to the notice of IIM / Authority Engineer immediately.
2. All statutory standard to be follow latest revision.
E . TECHNICAL DATA SHEET FOR LT PANEL
S.No. Description Recommended Specification
1 Type of Panel a. ACB EDO type with draw out

compartmentalized.
b.MCC non draw out type
compartmentalized.
c.AHU Panels non draw out type, non
compartmentalized
2 Type of Mounting Free standing Floor Mounted
3 Fault kA __kA -1 Sec for MCC
__kA – 1 Sec for AHU Panels
4 Thickness of CRCA sheets
a Structural members 3mm
b Covers and doors 2mm
c Base channel MCC - ISMC 100
d Gland plate 3mm
5a Painting/ Process Powder Coated
As per seven tank process
Oven baked.
B Paint shade;
a. Inside RAL – 7032
b. Outside RAL - 7032
6 Details of busbars Electrolytic grade Copper of specified
rating for details see constructional
features mentioned in specifications
7 Cable Entry Top / Bottom
8 Enclosure Protection / For MCC – IP -42 with louvers for
Ventilation Ventilation.
9 Control Wiring / Power Wiring Insulated 1100 Volts Cu FRLS wire.
a. Voltage Circuit 1.5 sq mm
b. Current Circuit 2.5 sq mm
c. Minimum size of Power wiring CKt 16 sq mm
10 Maximum Operating Height 2100

11 Mounting height of Relays/Meters Range 350mm to 1900mm
Control Switches
12 BMS Compatibility RS 485 port with license for all meter’s
Page 1232 of 1358

& relays.
13 BMS Status ON / OFF / TRIP status of all breakers
Constructional Features for MCC
S.No. Description Recommended Specification
AHU Panels
1. Accessibility front accessible only
2. Overall Depth 300 mm
3. Overall Height 700 mm
4. Incoming compartment Individually one module of

600mm wide with direct entry
of incoming cables with cable
busbars for terminating
multiple incoming cable.
incoming metering units and
outgoing cables as per SLD.
5 BMS Compatibility RS 485 port with license for all

meter’s & relays.
6 BMS Status ON / OFF / TRIP status of all
breakers & motors.
F . TECHNICAL DATA SHEET FOR BUSDUCTS
Make & Catalogue No
Sr. No Description Unit Tender

specifications
1 Current Rating Amps As per design

2 Bus bar material: Electrolytic grade
Aluminium
3 Class of insulation : Class F
4 Material of insulation : Epoxy \ Mylar
5 Maximum bus bar Deg C 40˚C above ambient
temperature at metal temperature
surfaces @ full load
under steady state
condition
Page 1233 of 1358

6 Resistance in ohm To be filled by bidder

per meter, R20
7 Reactance in ohms To be filled by bidder
per meter, X20
8 Degree of protection for bus IP52
Duct including all joints
9 Degree of protection for IP52
cable flange end boxes.
10 Short circuit withstand kA 65\ 50
time for 1 sec.
11 Pole of bus bar and 3 P+ 1N
12 External Earthing conductor. As per Standard
13 Rated Operating Voltage Volts 415
14 Installation (Indoor/Outdoor) Indoor
15 Type of Bus duct Sandwich bus bars
16 Finish of the Bus enclosure Electro-galvanized
(exterior and interior) sheet steel, with an
epoxy powder coated
paint finish.
17 Thickness of epoxy powder Minimum 50 Micron.
coating over enclosure
G . TECHNICAL DATASHEETS TO BE FILED UP \ CONFIRMED BY BIDDERS

( To be filled, signed & Submitted by vendor along with Technical Bid)
A. UPS SYSTEM DETAILS
Sr. No. Parameters Requirements as per

specification
1 Make As per approved list of the
specification
2 Model As per bidder’s standard
2.1 Type Hot Swappable Type
3 Capacity As given in Dwg /DBR / BOQ
4 Input short circuit level To be confirmed by bidder
5 Rating Continuous
6 Ambient 40 deg C
7 Overload withstand
capacity
110% of normal rating 30 minutes
125% of normal rating 15 minutes
150% of normal rating 10 seconds
8 Converter
8.1 Nominal Voltage 415V, 3 Phase, 4 Wire
230V, 1 Phase, 2 Wire
8.2 Voltage Range. + 10% / - 15% AC
8.3 Normal Frequency 50 Hz + 8 %
8.4 Frequency Range + 8% (+ 4 Hz)
Page 1234 of 1358

8.5 Input Power Factor 0.95 lagging or more at full load

(PF improvement)
8.6 Input terminal Harmonic 3% typical at 100% load
Current THD at complete 6% maximum at 50% load
non linear load Both can be complete non-linear.
8.7 Duty Continuous at 40 deg.C
8.8 Cooling Forced cooling using fans with
thermal relays using a latched
cut out for re-setting as
protection for cooling fans.
Each individual fan shall have its
own thermal relay.
8.9 Ambient operating Operating - 0 to 40 deg.C
temperature range maximum.
Storage & Transport -20 C to
70 C
8.10 Operating Relative 0-95% non-condensing.
Humidity
8.11 Operating Altitude Altitude Operating: to 3,000 ft.
(1,000 meters) above Mean Sea
Level. Derated for higher
altitude applications.
Storage/Transport: to 40,000 ft.
(12 200 meters) above Mean
Sea Level
8.12 Magnetized sub-cycle Typically 8 times normal full load
in rush current current
8.13 Converter Walk-in time 1 through 60 seconds (every 1
second selectable, (0 to 100%
rated load)
8.14 Input terminals Suitable terminals shall be
provided for termination of
cables from the AC distribution
Board.
9 Metering Parameters on Control panel

9.1 Input AC voltage line- to -line
and line – to -neutral for each
phase To be provided
9.2 Input AC current for each
9.3 Input frequency To be provided
9.4 Battery voltage To be provided
9.5 Battery charge/discharge
current To be provided
9.6 Output AC voltage line -to
line and line -to- neutral for
each phase To be provided
9.7 Output AC current for each
Page 1235 of 1358

9.8 Output frequency To be provided
9.9 Percent of rated load being
supplied by the UPS To be provided
9.10 Battery time left during
battery operation To be provided
9.11 Bypass power available To be provided
10 Alarms / Indications on Control panel

10.1 Input power out of tolerance To be provided
10.2 Input phase rotation incorrect To be provided
10.3 Incorrect input frequency To be provided
10.4 Charger in reduced current
mode To be provided
10.5 Battery Charger Problem To be provided
10.6 Battery failed To be provided
10.7 Low battery warning
(adjustable 1 to 99 minutes) To be provided
10.8 Low battery shutdown To be provided
10.9 DC bus overvoltage To be provided
10.10 Bypass frequency out of
range To be provided
10.11 Load transferred to bypass To be provided
10.12 Excessive retransfers
attempted To be provided
10.13 Static switch failure To be provided
10.14 UPS output not synchronized
to input power To be provided
10.15 Input power single phased To be provided
10.16 Input voltage sensor failed To be provided
10.17 Inverter leg over current in
X- phase To be provided
10.18 Output under voltage To be provided
10.19 Output overvoltage To be provided
10.20 Output over current To be provided
10.21 System output overloaded To be provided
10.22 Load transferred to bypass
due to overload To be provided
10.23 Overload shutdown To be provided
10.24 Control Error To be provided
10.25 Critical power supply failure To be provided
10.26 Load transferred due to
internal protection To be provided
10.27 External shutdown (remote
EPO activated) To be provided
10.28 Fan failure To be provided
10.29 Over temperature shutdown
impending To be provided
10.30 Over temperature shutdown To be provided
10.31 Lamp test To be provided
Page 1236 of 1358

11 GENERAL
11.1 Noise Max. 65 dBA at 1 M
11.2 Data communication interface
with PC To be provided
11.3 Clearance required at rear
and on both sides To be given by bidder
11.4 Overall dimensions To be given by bidder
11.5 Total weight in kgs. To be given by bidder
11.6 Overall Efficiency at, 93 %
100% load (min) Bidders to confirm efficiencies
75% load on part load
50% load
25% load
11.7 Heat Dissipation
a)UPS system at
100% load To be given by bidder
b) Batteries To be given by bidder
11.8 Crest Factor To be given by bidder
11.9 Total losses for the complete To be provided
UPS system.
100% load
75% load
50% load
25% load
11.10 BMS Compatibility - Type of
Protocol To be given by bidder
H. TECHNICAL DATASHEETS TO BE FILED UP \ CONFIRMED BY BIDDERS FOR INVERTER
Sr. No. Parameters Requirement as per

specification
1.1 INVERTER
1 Voltage Input Three Phase UPS :
Nominal 360 V DC (Range
290 V to 414 V DC to
maximum DC bus voltage
during charging the batteries).
Single Phase UPS :

Nominal 200 V DC (Range
200 V to 235 V DC to
maximum DC bus voltage
during charging the batteries).
Page 1237 of 1358

2 Nominal Voltage Output 415 V + 1% AC 3 Phase, 4 Wire

230 V + 1% AC 1 Phase, 2 Wire
3 Inverter Capacity To be given by bidder
4 Voltage Regulation (As per

IEC/EN 62040-3 Class I)
a. For 0 to 100% loading <+ -1%
b. Inverter DC input voltage <+- 1%
vary from maximum to
minimum
c. Environmental conditions <+- 1%
given below
5 Transient Voltage Regulation
a. AT 100% step load
change <+- 3%
b. At loss or return of AC
input <+- 1%
c. At load transfer from
bypass to inverter <+- 3%
6 Time to recover from
transient to normal voltage 20 milli seconds
7 Wave form
a. Normal frequency 50 Hz
b. Frequency regulation for ± 1Hz/sec.
all conditions of input
supplies, loads and
temperature occurring
simultaneously or in any
combination
(automatically controlled)
c. Synchronization limits for 49 Hz to 51 Hz.
synchronism between the
inverter and standby AC
source.
d. Field adjustment range
for above 50 + 1 Hz to 50 + 2 Hz
8 Total voltage harmonic < 2% THD for 100% linear load
distortion < 4% THD for 100% non-linear load
9 Output power factor 0.9 or better
10 Duty Continuous
11 Cooling Forced cooling using fans.
12 Ambient operating 0 to 40deg.C maximum
temperature range continuous.
13 Operating relative humidity 0-95% non-condensing.
14 Operating altitude. 6 meters above sea level (approx.)
15 Output Terminals Suitable terminals are provided

for termination of cables for
connecting inverter output to AC
Page 1238 of 1358

distribution board.
16 Max. permissible unbalance
of loads on Inverter during
parallel operations of UPS ±5% Max.
17 Output Voltage THD in case
of linear loads To be provided
18 Output Voltage THD in case
of non linear loads To be provided
1.2 BY PASS
1 Nominal bypass input voltage 415 V / 240 V, 3 phase, 4 wire
2 Voltage Range + 10% of nominal
3 Nominal Frequency 50 Hz
4 Frequency range + 2%
5 Output Fault Clearing :
Current 1000%
Duration 10-250 milli seconds
6 Ambient operating 0 to +40 degree C continuous
temperature
7 Operating relative humidity 0-95% non-condensing
8 Operating altitude Sea level to 1000 meters
9 Cooling Natural Convection
10 Duty Continuous
11 Max. number of UPS that can
be safely paralleled. To be provided
12 Phase displacement at 100 %
unbalance load. ± 2 deg.
13 Phase displacement at 100 %
balance load. Shall be as per IEC 62040-3
1.3 Metering Parameters on Control panel

1 Input AC voltage line- to -line
and line – to -neutral for each
2 Input AC current for each
3 Input frequency To be provided
4 Battery voltage To be provided
5 Battery charge/discharge
current To be provided
6 Output AC voltage line -to
line and line -to- neutral for
each phase To be provided
7 Output AC current for each
8 Output frequency To be provided
9 Percent of rated load being
supplied by the UPS To be provided
10 Battery time left during
Page 1239 of 1358

battery operation To be provided

11 Bypass power available To be provided
1.4 Alarms / Indications on Control panel

1 Input power out of tolerance To be provided
2 Input phase rotation incorrect To be provided
3 Incorrect input frequency To be provided
4 Charger in reduced current
mode To be provided
5 Battery Charger Problem To be provided
6 Battery failed To be provided
7 Low battery warning

(adjustable 1 to 99 minutes) To be provided
8 Low battery shutdown To be provided
9 DC bus overvoltage To be provided
10 Bypass frequency out of
range To be provided
11 Load transferred to bypass To be provided
12 Excessive retransfers
attempted To be provided
13 Static switch failure To be provided
14 UPS output not synchronized
to input power To be provided
15 Input power single phased To be provided
16 Input voltage sensor failed To be provided
17 Inverter leg over current in
X- phase To be provided
18 Output under voltage To be provided
19 Output overvoltage To be provided
20 Output over current To be provided
21 System output overloaded To be provided
22 Load transferred to bypass
due to overload To be provided
23 Overload shutdown To be provided
24 Control Error To be provided
25 Critical power supply failure To be provided
26 Load transferred due to
internal protection To be provided
27 External shutdown (remote
EPO activated) To be provided
28 Fan failure To be provided
29 Over temperature shutdown
impending To be provided
30 Over temperature shutdown To be provided
31 Lamp test To be provided
1.5 GENERAL
Page 1240 of 1358

1 Noise Max. 65 dBA at 1 M

2 Data communication interface
with PC To be provided
3 Clearance required at rear
and on both sides To be given by bidder
4 Overall dimensions To be given by bidder
5 Total weight in kgs. To be given by bidder
6 Overall Efficiency at, 93 %
100% load (min) Bidders to confirm efficiencies
75% load on part load
50% load
25% load
7 Heat Dissipation
a)UPS system at
b) Batteries To be given by bidder
8 Crest Factor To be given by bidder
9 Total losses for the complete To be provided
UPS system.
100% load
75% load
50% load
25% load
10 BMS Compatibility - Type of
Protocol To be given by bidder
Note – Please submit separate data sheets for different UPS / Inverter systems.
I . TECHNICAL DATASHEETS TO BE FILLED UP \ CONFIRMED BY BIDDERS FOR BATTERIES
Sr. No. Parameters Requirement as per

specification
1 Make As per approved list
2 Model To be given by bidder
3 Capacity (15% ageing at full load and at rated voltage
factor) & backup time
4 Type 12 volt, SMF ( AGL – GEL) type
5 Cell voltage To be given by bidder
6 PF considered for To be given by bidder
Battery calculation
7 Lead content in battery To be given by bidder
8 Overall dimensions of To be given by bidder
battery rack / panel
9 Total weight To be given by bidder
10 Battery life of AGM Minimum 10 years
– GEL VRLA batteries
11 Discharge limits for To be given by bidder
Deep discharge type
Page 1241 of 1358

batteries.
J .TECHNICAL DATASHEETS TO BE FILED UP \ CONFIRMED BY BIDDERS FOR ELEVATORS
TECHNICAL DATA SHEET FOR ELEVATOR SYSTEM
S. Elevator's Desired Feature

Nos. Specification Passenger Elevator Passenger Elevator Stretcher Elevator
Elevators in Academic Block
A. Planned details
2 Nos. (02 Nos. group 2 Nos. (02 Nos. group
1 no. independent
operation with two operation with two
operation. Attendant
elevators in one elevators in one
control for
1 Nos. of Lifts group, Second group group, Second group
independent
comprising of 02 nos. comprising of 02 nos.
operation as & when
passengers passengers
required.
elevators) elevators)
Microprocessor Microprocessor Microprocessor
2 Operation based Duplex based Duplex based simplex full
collective - selective collective - selective collective - selective
2 Lift Designation As per GFC As per GFC As per GFC
3 Lift Shaft Layout Kindly refer arch. GFC Kindly refer arch. GFC Kindly refer arch. GFC
16 P (1088 Kgs.) + 250 16 P (1088 Kgs.) + 250 16 P (1088 Kgs.) + 250
Kgs. as provision for Kgs. as provision for Kgs. as provision for
Capacity (Nos. of
4 flooring considering flooring considering flooring considering
Pax / Kgs.)
marble / granite / Tile marble / granite / Tile marble / granite / Tile
flooring. flooring. flooring.
5 Speed (MPS) 1 1 1
6 Nos. of Stops G+4(5) G+1(2) G+4(5)

Nos. of opening
7 5 2 5
at Front
Nos. of opening
8 Nil Nil Nil
at rear
9 Floor Served Level 0 to Level 4 Level 0 to Level 1 Level 0 to Level 4
Travel Height
10 24.6 24.6 24.6
(In mtr.)
Overhead Height Supplier need to Supplier need to Supplier need to
11
(In mm.) confirm confirm confirm
Pit depth Supplier need to Supplier need to Supplier need to
12
(In mm.) confirm confirm confirm
Lift CAR Size min.
13 2000 x 1300 2000 x 1300 2400 x 1300
(In mm.) clear
Page 1242 of 1358

height under
false ceiling
Clear Entry Size

min. (In mm.)
14 clear height 2100 2100 2100
under false
ceiling
15 Machine Room Machine Room less Machine Room less Machine Room less
Min. 1 Lift should be Min. 1 Lift should be

Should be operate in
operate in case of operate in case of
16 Fire Lift case of Fire oeration
Fire oeration as per Fire oeration as per
as per logic.
logic. logic.
415 V 3 Phase 50 Hz 415 V 3 Phase 50 Hz 415 V 3 Phase 50 Hz
+-10% voltage & +- +-10% voltage & +- +-10% voltage & +-
Power 5% frequency 5% frequency 5% frequency
17
characteristics variation with Online variation with Online variation with Online
Servo voltage Servo voltage Servo voltage
stabilizer stabilizer stabilizer
B. Equipment Specification & desired safety / Performance features
AC gearless Traction AC gearless Traction AC gearless Traction
1 Hoise Machine
VVVF type VVVF type VVVF type
Levelling 3 mm +- at all load 3 mm +- at all load 3 mm +- at all load
2
accuracy conditions conditions conditions
3 Speed variation +- 1% of rated speed +- 1% of rated speed +- 1% of rated speed
Stretcher Elevator
2 car group collective 2 car group collective
should have
selective operations selective operations
Type of attendant control for
(02 Nos. of groups) (02 Nos. of groups)
4 Operation independent
with all related with all related
control operation as & when
features & with features & with
required refer
group logic control. group logic control.
specification.
Car & landing Two Panel centre Two Panel centre Two Panel centre
5
doors opening opening opening
Door Size min.
6 1000 x 2100 1000 x 2100 1000 x 2100
(W x H) in mm.
2D infra-red door 2D infra red door 2D infra red door
detector covering full detector covering full detector covering full
Door Protection height & width of height & width of height & width of
(For CAR door as entrance with entrance with entrance with
7
well as Shaft minimum 150 cross minimum 150 cross minimum 150 cross
Door) beams with LEDs on beams with LEDs on beams with LEDs on
edges & with variable edges & with variable edges & with variable
timing. timing. timing.
Polished hard Polished hard Polished hard
CAR & landing aluminium extrusion aluminium extrusion aluminium extrusion
8
sills with non-slip with non-slip with non-slip
grooves. grooves. grooves.
Page 1243 of 1358

Cast iron filters fitted Cast iron filters fitted Cast iron filters fitted
in steel channel in steel channel in steel channel
frame of size and frame of size and frame of size and
9 Counterweight
numbers as per numbers as per numbers as per
manufactures manufactures manufactures
standard. standard. standard.
Machined guide rails Machined guide rails Machined guide rails
CAR & Counter
10 of suitable size and of suitable size and of suitable size and
weight guide rail
fish plates. fish plates. fish plates.
Provision for Provision for Provision for
manually releasing of manually releasing of manually releasing of
Emergency
11 brake and winding brake and winding brake and winding
Manual release
wheel / handle built wheel / handle built wheel / handle built
in to hoist machine. in to hoist machine. in to hoist machine.
Flexible guide rails Flexible guide rails Flexible guide rails
12 CAR safety
clamp type. clamp type. clamp type.
Counter Weight Flexible guide rails Flexible guide rails Flexible guide rails
13
Safety clamp type. clamp type. clamp type.
Over Speed Over speed governor Over speed governor Over speed governor
14
Protection at top of car. at top of car. at top of car.
Energy Efficient
15 Required Required Required
Lift motor
Emergency door Emergency door Emergency door
Landing door
16 unlocking device with unlocking device with unlocking device with
Lock safety
Key Key Key
Landing door
17 Electromechanical Electromechanical Electromechanical
Lock
Door Fire
18 Two ( 2 ) Hours Two ( 2 ) Hours Two ( 2 ) Hours
Protection (min.)
Hydraulic buffers
19 Safety Buffers Hydraulic buffers Hydraulic buffers
C. Operating Features
02 Nos. COP in 3 mm. 02 Nos. COP in 3 mm. 02 Nos. COP in 3 mm.

thick SS plate consist thick SS plate consist thick SS plate consist
of : of : of :
Vandal resistant Vandal resistant Vandal resistant
micro press self micro press self micro press self
illuminating floor illuminating floor illuminating floor
markings using LED's markings using LED's markings using LED's
Vandal resistant Vandal resistant Vandal resistant
1 CAR
micro press door micro press door micro press door
close / open button close / open button close / open button
vandal resistant vandal resistant vandal resistant
micro press door micro press door micro press door
alarm button alarm button alarm button
Attendant / Normal Attendant / Normal Attendant / Normal
with removable key & with removable key & with removable key &
Switch Switch Switch
Page 1244 of 1358

Voice announcement Voice announcement Voice announcement

system system system
Inter communication Inter communication Inter communication
switch / button switch / button switch / button
Inbuilt speaker & Inbuilt speaker & Inbuilt speaker &
microphone microphone microphone
Capacity Plate & Capacity Plate & Capacity Plate &
Emergency display Emergency display Emergency display
Digital LCD type CAR Digital LCD type CAR Digital LCD type CAR
position indicator of position indicator of position indicator of
size 10.5" diagonally size 10.5" diagonally size 10.5" diagonally
and with directional and with directional and with directional
arrows arrows arrows
Lockable concealed Lockable concealed Lockable concealed
service control service control service control
buttons / Switch box buttons / Switch box buttons / Switch box
2 Call Stations
2 mm thick SS 2 mm thick SS 2 mm thick SS
Hairline finish of Hairline finish of Hairline finish of
grade 304 cover plate grade 304 cover plate grade 304 cover plate
Lobby terminal with LCD panel of with LCD panel of with LCD panel of
landing size as approved by size as approved by size as approved by
Competent authority Competent authority Competent authority
& for UP Button & for UP Button & for UP Button
(Braille Type) (Braille Type) (Braille Type)
2 mm. thick SS 2 mm. thick SS 2 mm. thick SS
Hiarline finish of Hiarline finish of Hiarline finish of
Intermediate with LCD panel of with LCD panel of with LCD panel of
Floor landing Size as approved by Size as approved by Size as approved by
& for UP & DN & for UP & DN & for UP & DN
buttons (Braille type) buttons (Braille type) buttons (Braille type)
2 mm thick SS 2 mm thick SS 2 mm thick SS
Hairline finish of Hairline finish of Hairline finish of
Top Floor with LCD panel of with LCD panel of with LCD panel of
Landing size as approved by size as approved by size as approved by
& for DN Button & for DN Button & for DN Button
(Braille Type) (Braille Type) (Braille Type)
Clearly visible Clearly visible Clearly visible
horizontal digital LCD horizontal digital LCD horizontal digital LCD
type position type position type position
Hall Position
indicator of size as indicator of size as indicator of size as
3 indicator at all
approved by approved by approved by
Floors
and combined with and combined with and combined with
hal lanterns. hal lanterns. hal lanterns.
Page 1245 of 1358

D. Proposed Finish
SS 304 grade hairline SS 304 grade hairline SS 304 grade hairline
finish or as directed finish or as directed finish or as directed
CAR Insider by Competent by Competent by Competent
1
Panels authority with half authority with half authority with half
mirror above hand mirror above hand mirror above hand
rail on rear panel. rail on rear panel. rail on rear panel.
CAR & Landing finish or as directed finish or as directed finish or as directed
2
Door Panels by Competent by Competent by Competent
authority authority authority
35 mm. dia Stainless 35 mm. dia Stainless 35 mm. dia Stainless
Steel on three side - Steel on three side - Steel on three side -
min. 16 gauge grade min. 16 gauge grade min. 16 gauge grade
3 Hand rails 304 at 3 side not less 304 at 3 side not less 304 at 3 side not less
than 600 mm. long at than 600 mm. long at than 600 mm. long at
900 mm. above floor 900 mm. above floor 900 mm. above floor
level. level. level.
25 mm recess for 25 mm recess for 25 mm recess for
4 Flooring
marble / granite / Tile marble / granite / Tile marble / granite / Tile
finish and final finish and final finish and final
5 False Ceiling
design as directed by design as directed by design as directed by
6 Lighting LED LED LED
E. Other Desired Features

Three-way Three-way Three-way
communication communication communication
Communication
1 between car and 24 between car and 24 between car and 24
system
hours security desk hours security desk hours security desk
and lift machine and lift machine and lift machine
Located on Car top Located on Car top Located on Car top
Car Top
easily accessible with easily accessible with easily accessible with
2 inspection
common / Up / Down common / Up / Down common / Up / Down
control
/ stop buttons. / stop buttons. / stop buttons.
Light Fitting with Light Fitting with Light Fitting with
Car top / Bottom
3 guard and 5 Amp. guard and 5 Amp. guard and 5 Amp.
light
socket with switch. socket with switch. socket with switch.
On three sides of car On three sides of car On three sides of car
Car Top safety
4 top to height of 800 top to height of 800 top to height of 800
Barrier
mm. to as protection. mm. to as protection. mm. to as protection.
Battery Packs Battery Packs Battery Packs
(battery & Battery (battery & Battery (battery & Battery
Emergency Car
5 chargers) emergency chargers) emergency chargers) emergency
Light
light with min. of 30 light with min. of 30 light with min. of 30
min. charging. min. charging. min. charging.
Page 1246 of 1358

Auto visual signal in Auto visual signal in Auto visual signal in

6 Overload signnal car with door open car with door open car with door open
feature. feature. feature.
80% Loaded car 80% Loaded car 80% Loaded car
Load nonstop
7 travelling not to travelling not to travelling not to
feature
respond hall calls. respond hall calls. respond hall calls.
2 nos. centrifugal 2 nos. centrifugal 2 nos. centrifugal
Car ventilation
8 blower type with side blower type with side blower type with side
fan
vents in false ceiling vents in false ceiling vents in false ceiling
To bring car to the To bring car to the To bring car to the
nearest landing and nearest landing and nearest landing and
9 Safe landing open door at slow open door at slow open door at slow
speeding the event of speeding the event of speeding the event of
any malfunctioning. any malfunctioning. any malfunctioning.
In case door fails to In case door fails to In case door fails to
open during normal open during normal open during normal
stop, lift should move stop, lift should move stop, lift should move
10 Next Landing
to immediate next to immediate next to immediate next
floor and open floor and open floor and open
doors. doors. doors.
Provide CCTV Provide CCTV Provide CCTV
provision of all cars provision of all cars provision of all cars
with necessary with necessary with necessary
arrangement in arrangement in arrangement in
11 CCTV provision
travelling cable for IP travelling cable for IP travelling cable for IP
based system and based system and based system and
provision for provision for provision for
mounting of camera. mounting of camera. mounting of camera.
Provide wiring and Provide wiring and Provide wiring and
piping / harness piping / harness piping / harness
12 Remote wiring
between lift shaft between lift shaft between lift shaft
and security Room. and security Room. and security Room.
RS 485 with licence RS 485 with licence RS 485 with licence
BMS for all software for all software for all software
13
Compatibility compatibility for compatibility for compatibility for
EMS. EMS. EMS.
Provide Automatic Provide Automatic Provide Automatic
Rescue device to Rescue device to Rescue device to
bring car and open bring car and open bring car and open
ARD /
door at nearest door at nearest door at nearest
14 EMERGENCY
landing in the event landing in the event landing in the event
LANDING
of power failure with of power failure with of power failure with
maintenance free maintenance free maintenance free
battery. battery. battery.
Page 1247 of 1358

Potential free contact Potential free contact Potential free contact

to accept the fire to accept the fire to accept the fire
Integration with alarm signal from alarm signal from alarm signal from
Fire detection & Fire alarm panel Fire alarm panel Fire alarm panel
15
Alarm system / provided by FAS to provided by FAS to provided by FAS to
FRD automatically ground automatically ground automatically ground
the elevator on the elevator on the elevator on
receipt of this signal. receipt of this signal. receipt of this signal.
Provide Fully Provide Fully Provide Fully
automatic operation automatic operation automatic operation
& manual of the & manual of the & manual of the
CAR Ventilator
16 ventilator fan inside ventilator fan inside ventilator fan inside
fan control
the car interlocked the car interlocked the car interlocked
with the car with the car with the car
movement. movement. movement.
Main Floor
17 To be provided To be provided To be provided
Parking
Emergency
Alarm and Stop
18 To be provided To be provided To be provided
Push button
inside car
Overload
19 Required Required Required
warning
Elevator's Desired Feature

S. Nos.
Specification Passenger Elevator Stretcher Elevator
Elevators in MDC Academic & Incubation Block
A. Planned details
01 no. independent 01 no. independent
operation. Attendant operation. Attendant
1 Nos. of Lifts control for independent control for independent
operation as & when operation as & when
required. required.
Microprocessor based Microprocessor based
2 Operation simplex full collective - simplex full collective -
selective selective
2 Lift Designation As per GFC As per GFC
3 Lift Shaft Layout Kindly refer arch. GFC Kindly refer arch. GFC
16 P (1088 Kgs.) + 250 Kgs. 16 P (1088 Kgs.) + 250 Kgs.
Capacity (Nos. of Pax as provision for flooring as provision for flooring
4
/ Kgs.) considering marble / considering marble /
granite / Tile flooring. granite / Tile flooring.
5 Speed (MPS) 1 1
Page 1248 of 1358

6 Nos. of Stops G+2(3) G+2(3)

Nos. of opening at
7 3 3
Front
Nos. of opening at
8 Nil Nil
rear
9 Floor Served Level 0 to Level 2 Level 0 to Level 2
Travel Height
10 13.5 13.5
(In mtr.)
Overhead Height
11 Supplier need to confirm Supplier need to confirm
(In mm.)
Pit depth
(In mm.)
Lift CAR Size min.
13 (In mm.) clear height 2000 x 1300 2400 x 1300
under false ceiling
Clear Entry Size min.
14 (In mm.) clear height 2100 2100
under false ceiling
15 Machine Room Machine Room less Machine Room less

Should be operate in case
16 Fire Lift of Fire operation as per
logic.
415 V 3 Phase 50 Hz +- 415 V 3 Phase 50 Hz +-
10% voltage & +- 5% 10% voltage & +- 5%
17 Power characteristics frequency variation with frequency variation with
Online Servo voltage Online Servo voltage
stabilizer stabilizer
AC gearless Traction VVVF AC gearless Traction VVVF
1 Hoise Machine
type type
3 mm +- at all load 3 mm +- at all load
2 Levelling accuracy
conditions conditions
3 Speed variation +- 1% of rated speed +- 1% of rated speed
Stretcher Elevator should
have attendant control
Type of Operation for independent
4
control operation as & when
required refer
specification.
5 Car & landing doors Two Panel centre opening Two Panel centre opening
Door Size min. (W x
6 1000 x 2100 1000 x 2100
H) in mm.
2D infra-red door 2D infra-red door
Door Protection (For detector covering full detector covering full
7 CAR door as well as height & width of height & width of
Shaft Door) entrance with minimum entrance with minimum
150 cross beams with 150 cross beams with
Page 1249 of 1358

LEDs on edges & with LEDs on edges & with

variable timing. variable timing.
Polished hard aluminium Polished hard aluminium

8 CAR & landing sills extrusion with non-slip extrusion with non-slip
grooves. grooves.
Cast iron filters fitted in Cast iron filters fitted in
steel channel frame of steel channel frame of
9 Counterweight
size and numbers as per size and numbers as per
manufactures standard. manufactures standard.
CAR & Machined guide rails of Machined guide rails of
10 Counterweight guide suitable size and fish suitable size and fish
rail plates. plates.
Provision for manually Provision for manually
Emergency Manual releasing of brake and releasing of brake and
11
release winding wheel / handle winding wheel / handle
built in to hoist machine. built in to hoist machine.
Flexible guide rails clamp Flexible guide rails clamp
12 CAR safety
type. type.
Counterweight Flexible guide rails clamp Flexible guide rails clamp
13
Safety type. type.
Over Speed Over speed governor at Over speed governor at
14
Protection top of car. top of car.
Energy Efficient Lift
15 Required Required
motor
Landing door Lock Emergency door Emergency door
16
safety unlocking device with Key unlocking device with Key
17 Landing door Lock Electromechanical Electromechanical

Door Fire Protection
18 Two (2 ) Hours Two (2 ) Hours
(min.)
02 Nos. COP in 3 mm. 02 Nos. COP in 3 mm.

thick SS plate consist of: thick SS plate consist of:
Vandal resistant micro Vandal resistant micro
press self-illuminating press self-illuminating
floor markings using floor markings using
LED's LED's
1 CAR Vandal resistant micro Vandal resistant micro
press door close / open press door close / open
button button
vandal resistant micro vandal resistant micro
press door alarm button press door alarm button
Attendant / Normal with Attendant / Normal with
removable key & Switch removable key & Switch
Page 1250 of 1358

Voice announcement Voice announcement

system system
Inter communication Inter communication
switch / button switch / button
Inbuilt speaker & Inbuilt speaker &
microphone microphone
Capacity Plate & Capacity Plate &
Emergency display Emergency display
Digital LCD type CAR Digital LCD type CAR
position indicator of size position indicator of size
10.5" diagonally and with 10.5" diagonally and with
directional arrows directional arrows
Lockable concealed Lockable concealed
service control buttons / service control buttons /
Switch box Switch box
2 Call Stations
2 mm thick SS Hairline 2 mm thick SS Hairline
finish of grade 304 cover finish of grade 304 cover
plate with LCD panel of plate with LCD panel of
Lobby terminal
1 size as approved by size as approved by
landing
Competent authority & Competent authority &
for UP Button (Braille for UP Button (Braille
Type) Type)
2 mm. thick SS Hiarline 2 mm. thick SS Hiarline
Intermediate Floor
2 Size as approved by Size as approved by
landing
for UP & DN buttons for UP & DN buttons
(Braille type) (Braille type)
3 Top Floor Landing size as approved by size as approved by
for DN Button (Braille for DN Button (Braille
Type) Type)
Clearly visible horizontal Clearly visible horizontal
digital LCD type position digital LCD type position
Hall Position indicator of size as indicator of size as
4
indicator at all Floors approved by Competent approved by Competent
authority and combined authority and combined
with hal lanterns. with hal lanterns.
D. Proposed Finish
SS 304 grade hairline SS 304 grade hairline
finish or as directed by finish or as directed by
1 CAR Insider Panels Competent authority with Competent authority with
half mirror above half mirror above
handrail on rear panel. handrail on rear panel.
Page 1251 of 1358


CAR & Landing Door
2 finish or as directed by finish or as directed by
Panels
Competent authority Competent authority
35 mm. Dia Stainless 35 mm. Dia Stainless
Steel on three side - min. Steel on three side - min.
16-gauge grade 304 at 3 16-gauge grade 304 at 3
3 Handrails
side not less than 600 side not less than 600
mm. long at 900 mm. mm. long at 900 mm.
above floor level. above floor level.
25 mm recess for marble 25 mm recess for marble
4 Flooring
/ granite / Tile / granite / Tile
finish and final design as finish and final design as
5 False Ceiling
directed by Competent directed by Competent
authority authority
6 Lighting LED LED
Three-way Three-way
Communication communication between communication between
1
system car and 24 hours security car and 24 hours security
desk and lift machine desk and lift machine
Located on Car top easily Located on Car top easily
Car Top inspection
2 accessible with common / accessible with common /
control
Up / Down / stop buttons. Up / Down / stop buttons.
Light Fitting with guard Light Fitting with guard
Car top / Bottom
3 and 5 Amp. socket with and 5 Amp. socket with
light
switch. switch.
On three sides of car top On three sides of car top
Car Top safety
4 to height of 800 mm. to to height of 800 mm. to
Barrier
as protection. as protection.
Battery Packs (battery & Battery Packs (battery &
Battery chargers) Battery chargers)
5 Emergency Car Light
emergency light with min. emergency light with min.
of 30 min. charging. of 30 min. charging.
Auto visual signal in car Auto visual signal in car
6 Overload signal
with door open feature. with door open feature.
Load nonstop 80% Loaded car travelling 80% Loaded car travelling
7
feature not to respond hall calls. not to respond hall calls.
2 nos. centrifugal blower 2 nos. centrifugal blower
8 Car ventilation fan type with side vents in type with side vents in
false ceiling false ceiling
To bring car to the To bring car to the
nearest landing and open nearest landing and open
9 Safe landing door at slow speeding the door at slow speeding the
event of any event of any
malfunctioning. malfunctioning.
Page 1252 of 1358

In case door fails to open In case door fails to open

during normal stop, lift during normal stop, lift
10 Next Landing should move to should move to
immediate next floor and immediate next floor and
open doors. open doors.
Provide CCTV provision of Provide CCTV provision of
all cars with necessary all cars with necessary
arrangement in travelling arrangement in travelling
11 CCTV provision
cable for IP based system cable for IP based system
and provision for and provision for
mounting of camera. mounting of camera.
Provide wiring and piping Provide wiring and piping
12 Remote wiring / harness between lift / harness between lift
shaft and security Room. shaft and security Room.
RS 485 with licence for all RS 485 with licence for all
13 BMS Compatibility software compatibility for software compatibility for
EMS. EMS.
Provide Automatic Provide Automatic
Rescue device to bring Rescue device to bring
car and open door at car and open door at
ARD / EMERGENCY
14 nearest landing in the nearest landing in the
LANDING
event of power failure event of power failure
with maintenance free with maintenance free
battery. battery.
Potential free contact to Potential free contact to
accept the fire alarm accept the fire alarm
Integration with Fire signal from Fire alarm signal from Fire alarm
15 detection & Alarm panel provided by FAS to panel provided by FAS to
system / FRD automatically ground the automatically ground the
elevator on receipt of this elevator on receipt of this
signal. signal.
Provide Fully automatic Provide Fully automatic
operation & manual of operation & manual of
CAR Ventilator fan
16 the ventilator fan inside the ventilator fan inside
control
the car interlocked with the car interlocked with
the car movement. the car movement.
17 Main Floor Parking To be provided To be provided
Emergency Alarm
18 and Stop Push To be provided To be provided
button inside car
19 Overload warning Required Required

S. Nos.
Page 1253 of 1358

Elevators in Type V Block

A. Planned details
required. required.
selective selective
16 P (1088 Kgs.) + 250 Kgs. 16 P (1088 Kgs.) + 250 Kgs.
4
5 Speed (MPS) 1.5 1.5
6 Nos. of Stops G+8(9) G+8(9)

Nos. of opening at
7 9 9
Front
Nos. of opening at
8 Nil Nil
rear
Travel Height
10 30 30
(In mtr.)
Overhead Height
(In mm.)
Pit depth
(In mm.)
Lift CAR Size min.
under false ceiling
under false ceiling

16 Fire Main operation of Fire operation as per
logic.
415 V 3 Phase 50 Hz +-10%
415 V 3 Phase 50 Hz +-10%
voltage & +- 5% frequency
voltage & +- 5% frequency
17 Power characteristics variation with Online
variation with Online
Servo voltage stabilizer
Servo voltage stabilizer
Page 1254 of 1358


1 Hoise Machine
type type
2 Leveling accuracy
have attendant control for
Type of Operation
4 independent operation as
control
& when required refer
specification.
5 Car & landing doors Two Panel center opening Two Panel center opening
Door Size min. (W x
6 1000 x 2100 1000 x 2100
H) in mm.
2D infra-red door 2D infra-redred door
detector covering full detector covering full
Door Protection (For height & width of height & width of
7 CAR door as well as entrance with minimum entrance with minimum
Shaft Door) 150 cross beams with 150 cross beams with
LEDs on edges & with LEDs on edges & with
variable timing. variable timing.
Polished hard aluminum Polished hard aluminum
8 CAR & landing sills extrusion with non-slip extrusion with non-slip
grooves. grooves.
9 Counterweight
Machined guide rails of Machined guide rails of
CAR & Counterweight
10 suitable size and fish suitable size and fish
guide rail
plates. plates.
11
12 CAR safety
type. type.
Counter Weight Flexible guide rails clamp Flexible guide rails clamp
13
Safety type. type.
14
motor
16

18 Two ( 2 ) Hours Two ( 2 ) Hours
(min.)
Page 1255 of 1358


thick SS plate consist of : thick SS plate consist of :
press self-illuminating press self-illuminating
LED's LED's
button button
1 CAR
system system
2 Call Stations
Lobby terminal
size as approved by size as approved by
landing
Type) Type)
2 mm. thick SS Hairline 2 mm. thick SS Hairline
Intermediate Floor
Size as approved by Size as approved by
landing
Page 1256 of 1358


Top Floor Landing size as approved by size as approved by
Type) Type)
indicator of size as indicator of size as
Hall Position
3 approved by Competent approved by Competent
indicator at all Floors
authority and and authority and and
combined with hal combined with hal
lanterns. lanterns.
D. Proposed Finish

half mirror above hand half mirror above hand
rail on rear panel. rail on rear panel.
CAR & Landing Door
Panels
35 mm. dia Stainless Steel 35 mm. dia Stainless Steel
on three side - min. 16- on three side - min. 16-
gauge grade 304 at 3 side gauge grade 304 at 3 side
3 Handrails
not less than 600 mm. not less than 600 mm.
long at 900 mm. above long at 900 mm. above
floor level. floor level.
25 mm recess for marble / 25 mm recess for marble /
4 Flooring
granite / Tile granite / Tile
5 False Ceiling
authority authority
6 Lighting LED LED
Three-way Three-way
1
Car Top inspection
control
3 Car top / Bottom light and 5 Amp. socket with and 5 Amp. socket with
switch. switch.
Page 1257 of 1358


Car Top safety
4 to height of 800 mm. to as to height of 800 mm. to as
Barrier
protection. protection.
6 Overload signal
7
To bring car to the nearest To bring car to the nearest
landing and open door at landing and open door at
9 Safe landing
slow speeding the event slow speeding the event
of any malfunctioning. of any malfunctioning.
11 CCTV provision
RS 485 with license for all RS 485 with license for all
EMS. EMS.
Provide Automatic Rescue Provide Automatic Rescue
device to bring car and device to bring car and
ARD / EMERGENCY open door at nearest open door at nearest
14
LANDING landing in the event of landing in the event of
power failure with power failure with
maintenance free battery. maintenance free battery.
signal. signal.
Page 1258 of 1358


operation & manual of the operation & manual of the
CAR Ventilator fan
16 ventilator fan inside the ventilator fan inside the
control
car interlocked with the car interlocked with the
car movement. car movement.
Emergency Alarm
button inside car

S. Nos.
Elevators in Boy's Hostel - 1, 2 & Girl's Hostel Block
A. Planned details
required. required.
selective selective
16 P (1088 Kgs.) + 250 Kgs. 16 P (1088 Kgs.) + 250 Kgs.
4
5 Speed (MPS) 1.5 1.5
6 Nos. of Stops G + 14 ( 15 ) G + 14 ( 15 )
Nos. of opening at
7 15 15
Front
Nos. of opening at
8 Nil Nil
rear
Travel Height
10 45 Approx. 45 Approx.
(In mtr.)
Overhead Height
(In mm.)
Page 1259 of 1358

Pit depth
(In mm.)
Lift CAR Size min.
under false ceiling
under false ceiling

logic.
415 V 3 Phase 50 Hz +-10% 415 V 3 Phase 50 Hz +-10%
voltage & +- 5% frequency voltage & +- 5% frequency
17 Power characteristics
variation with Online variation with Online
Servo voltage stabilizer Servo voltage stabilizer
1 Hoise Machine
type type
2 Leveling accuracy
Type of Operation
control
specification.
Door Size min. (W x
6 1000 x 2100 1000 x 2100
H) in mm.
2D infra red door detector 2D infra red door detector
covering full height & covering full height &
Door Protection (For width of entrance with width of entrance with
7 CAR door as well as minimum 150 cross minimum 150 cross
Shaft Door) beams with LEDs on beams with LEDs on
edges & with variable edges & with variable
timing. timing.
8 CAR & landing sills extrusion with non slip extrusion with non slip
grooves. grooves.
9 Counter Weight
CAR & Counter
weight guide rail
plates. plates.
Page 1260 of 1358


11
12 CAR safety
type. type.
Counterweight Flexible guide rails clamp Flexible guide rails clamp
13
Safety type. type.
14
motor
16

(min.)

press self illuminating press self illuminating
LED's LED's
button button
1 CAR
system system
Switch box. Switch box
Page 1261 of 1358

2 Call Stations
Lobby terminal
landing
Type) Type)
Intermediate Floor
landing
Top Floor Landing size as approved by size as approved by
Type) Type)
Hall Position indicator of size as indicator of size as
3 indicator at all approved by Competent approved by Competent
terminal Floors authority and and authority and and
lanterns. lanterns.
D. Proposed Finish

CAR & Landing Door
Panels
on three side - min. 16 on three side - min. 16
3 Hand rails
Page 1262 of 1358


4 Flooring
5 False Ceiling
authority authority
6 Lighting LED LED
E. Other Desireed Features
Three way Three way

1
Car Top inspection
control
switch. switch.
Car Top safety
Barrier
6 Overload signnal
7
9 Safe landing
11 CCTV provision
Page 1263 of 1358


EMS. EMS.
14
signal. signal.
CAR Ventilator fan
control
Emergency Alarm
button inside car

S. Nos.
Elevators in MDC Accommodation Block
A. Planned details
required. required.
selective selective
Page 1264 of 1358

16 P (1088 Kgs.) + 250 Kgs. 16 P (1088 Kgs.) + 250 Kgs.
4
5 Speed (MPS) 1.25 1.5
6 Nos. of Stops G + 10 ( 11 ) G + 10 ( 11 )
Nos. of opening at
7 11 11
Front
Nos. of opening at
8 Nil Nil
rear
Travel Height
10 33 Approx. 33 Approx.
(In mtr.)
Overhead Height
(In mm.)
Pit depth
(In mm.)
Lift CAR Size min.
under false ceiling
under false ceiling
logic.
415 V 3 Phase 50 Hz +-10% 415 V 3 Phase 50 Hz +-10%
voltage & +- 5% frequency voltage & +- 5% frequency
17 Power characteristics
variation with Online variation with Online
Servo voltage stabilizer Servo voltage stabilizer
1 Hoise Machine
type type
2 Leveling accuracy
Type of Operation
control
specification.
Page 1265 of 1358

Door Size min. (W x
6 1000 x 2100 1000 x 2100
H) in mm.
2D infra red door detector 2D infra red door detector
covering full height & covering full height &
Door Protection (For width of entrance with width of entrance with
7 CAR door as well as minimum 150 cross minimum 150 cross
Shaft Door) beams with LEDs on beams with LEDs on
edges & with variable edges & with variable
timing. timing.
8 CAR & landing sills extrusion with non slip extrusion with non slip
grooves. grooves.
9 Counter Weight
CAR & Counter
weight guide rail
plates. plates.
11
12 CAR safety
type. type.
Counter Weight Flexible guide rails clamp Flexible guide rails clamp
13
Safety type. type.
14
motor
16

(min.)

1 CAR
press self illuminating press self illuminating
LED's LED's
Page 1266 of 1358


button button
system system

2 Call Stations
Lobby terminal
landing
Type) Type)
Intermediate Floor
landing
Top Floor Landing
Page 1267 of 1358

Type) Type)

indicator of size as indicator of size as
Hall Position
3 approved by Competent approved by Competent
indicator at all Floors
authority and and authority and and
lanterns. lanterns.
D. Proposed Finish

CAR & Landing Door
Panels
on three side - min. 16 on three side - min. 16
3 Hand rails
4 Flooring
5 False Ceiling
authority authority
6 Lighting LED LED
Three way Three way

1
Car Top inspection
control
switch. switch.
Page 1268 of 1358


Car Top safety
Barrier
6 Overload signnal
7
9 Safe landing
11 CCTV provision
EMS. EMS.
14
signal. signal.
Page 1269 of 1358


CAR Ventilator fan
control
Emergency Alarm
button inside car
K .TECHNICAL DATASHEETS TO BE FILED UP \ CONFIRMED BY BIDDERS FOR SOLAR PV SYSTEM
TECHNICAL DATA SHEET FOR SOLAR PHOTOVOLTIC SYSTEM
Sr. No. Parameter To be Filled by Bidder
PV Module Manufacturer name

1
& Country
2 PV Module type
3 No. of PV cells per Module
Mounting arrangement for

4
Solar module
5 Solar module frame material
6 Module dimensions
Cable gland at module Junction

7
Box
Weather resistant Junction
8
Box(IP55)
Temperature rise of solar cells
under severe working
9
conditions over Max. Ambient
Temp.
10 Nominal voltage
Operating voltage of solar

11
module
Peak power voltage(Vmp) at 50
12
Deg C
Page 1270 of 1358

Peak power current (Imp) each

13
module.
14 Open circuit Voltage(Voc)
15 Short circuit current (Isc)
16 Weight of each module
Standard / Approvals from

17
International Agencies
NOTE Bidders should not consider Approved Make Originated from "China"
TECHNICAL DATA SHEET FOR PCU
Sr. No. Parameter To be Filled by Bidder
A. AC Side
1 Nominal AC Power
2 Output AC Voltage
3 Frequency
4 Total harmonic distortion
AC over / under voltage over voltage / under

5
frequency protection.
6 Phase SIFT (COS Phi)
B. DC Side
7 PV Power
8 Maximum DC Voltage
9 MPPT Voltage range
10 Maximum DC Current
11 DC voltage ripple
12 DC over voltage protection
C. OTHER PARAMETERS
Page 1271 of 1358

13 Minimum efficiency (CE)
14 Ambient temperature
15 Humidity (Non Condensing)
16 Quiescent Power
17 Degree of protection for enclosure
18 Dimension / Weight
19 Noise level
20 Cooling
21 Input Range
Power Factor Input / Output cable

22
Termination
L . TECHNICAL DATASHEETS TO BE FILED UP \ CONFIRMED BY BIDDERS FOR SOLAR HOT WATER

SYSTEM
S Nos. Description As per Tender To be Filled by

Bidder
1 System Make Sudarshan, Saur
2 Solar ETC collectors
3 Properly insulated Required
Stainless Steel hot water
storage tank and various
other components
4 HDPE cold water tank As and where required
5 Collectors / Tank stand Required
assembly
6 Necessary piping for cold Required
and hot water
7 Instrumentation Required
8 Brass valves Required
9 Five years
guarantee/warrantee
10 Accessories item Included as require for
commissioning of the system.
Solar Evacuated Tubes:
11 Capacity 1500 LPD
12 Tank shape Capsule
Page 1272 of 1358

13 Tank material minimum 2mm thick tank capsule

shape special grade steel
14 Insulation coating glass lined nonstick CFC
free Puf insulation with 38 to 42
kg/cm2 density, min 50mm
insulation thickness, waterproof
cladding material UV stabilized
pure polyester pre-coated GI cover,
min 0.35mm UV stabilized pure
polyester pre coated GI cover
15 System 0.3kg/cm2
Working pressure
16 Internal circulation thermo-Siphon, inner silicon
sealing, outer sealing EPDM
Grommet, Tube resting caps UV
stabilized ABS plastic, support
structure GI material, chloride
hardness<600PPM. Silicate glass
vacuum tube, AIN/ SS-AIN CU three
absorber coating, absorvity >92%,
stagnation temperature > 200°C,
weight of tube 2.3KG (min.), glass
thickness 1.6MM.
Solar Evacuated Tubes:

18 Length (In mm.) 1800+100
19 Diameter (in mm.) 55-60
20 Selective coating content Copper-Aluminium
21 Selective coating Type Triple layer
22 Thickness of coating 350 nm (minimum)
23 Glass Silicate glass
24 Thickness of Glass Tube 1.6 nm (minimum)
25 Thermal expansion of 3.3x10-6 deg C
glass tube:
26 Vacuum Jacket Pressure: 5x10 – Pa
27 Solar absorption >0.9

28 Insulation Vacuum Jacket
29 Gaskets for Tubes EPDM
30 Number of tubes As required with respect to SWH
capacity and as per manufacturer
specifications/standard.
Tanks:
31 Capacity 100/500/1000 LPD
32 Type Natural flow/Thermocyphon
33 Configuration Horizontal (or vertical for some
locations ,if required)
34 Test pressure 1 Bar
Page 1273 of 1358

35 Inner Container: Stainless Steel

36 Outer cladding: Aluminium / GI Precoated Sheets
37 Inner Body Material Stainless Steel 304 best anti-
corrosion performance Tank
38 Inner / Outer Body As per manufacturer specifications
diameter
39 Frame material M.S. with PU paint/ Steel board
plating with Zinc
40 Fixture Stainless Steel
41 Inner Tank Thickness 0.6 mm (Min)
42 HDPE cold water tank Cold water storage tank should be
of any ISI marked HDPE tank with
Gun metal float valve (ISI marked).
43 Piping for hot and cold Polyethelene-Aluminium-
water Polyethelene (PE-AL-PE) Composite
Pressure Pipes conforming to IS –
15450.
44 Temperature gauge As and where required
45 Valves Two brass valves ISI marked are to
be supplied: one for inlet, one of
outlet.
46 strainer ISI mark Gun metal strainer of
standard make should be fitted in
the main cold water supply line
before the system.
47 Clamp properly supported and fixed with
clamp with the help of suitable size
stand/civil structure (cement
concrete ratio 1:4)
TECHNICAL DATA SHEET FOR FIRE FIGHTING SYSTEM
To be filled by
S. No. Description As per Specification
Contractor
FIRE FIGHTING SYSTEM
1 FIRE PUMPS & MOTOR
1.1 Electrical Driven Main Fire & Sprinkler Pumps
Make / Manufacturer
Mather + Platt / Kirloskar / Grundfos
Quantity
2 no. For Hydrant + 2 no. for Sprinkler
Rated Discharge 2280 LPM

Rated Head 108 mtr
pump type
End suction top discharge
Page 1274 of 1358

Model Data by bidder

Speed / No. of Stages 2900 RPM
Efficiency at Rated
Data by bidder
Capacity & Head
KW required at rated
140kw
capacity & head
Shut Off Head 115mtrs max.
Material of
Construction
Pump Casing CI
Impeller Bronze
Pump Shaft SS-410/431
Shaft Sleeve SS 410
Casing Wearing Ring Brass
Base Plate MS
Type of sealing Gland packing
Whether pumps is
capable of discharging
150% of rated capacity at
a head not less than 65% Yes
of rated head and power
required at 150%
discharge condition
1.2 Electrical motor for fire pumps
Make ABB / Siemens / Kirloskar
Type Squirrel cage induction motor
Speed (RPM) 2900 RPM

Rated Capacity (Power) 110kw
Full load current Data by Bidder
Enclosure TEFC
Class of Insulation F
1.3 Diesel Engine Driven Pump
Make / Manufacturer Kirloskar / Mather + platt / Grundfos
Quantity 1
Rated Head 108 mtr
Pump type End suction top discharge

Efficiency at Rated Data by bidder
Capacity & Head
Page 1275 of 1358

KW required at rated data by bidder

capacity & head
Shut Off Head 115mtrs
Material of
Construction
Pump Casing CI
Impeller Bronze
Pump Shaft SS-410
Shaft Sleeve SS-410
Base Plate M.S.
Wheather pumps is Yes
capable of discharging
150% of rated capacity at
a head not less than 65%
of rated head and power
required at 150%
discharge condition.
Description of Engine
Make KIRLOSKAR / CUMMINS
Type Data by bidder

Rated Capacity (Power) Data by bidder
Full load current Not applicable
Enclosure Not applicable
No of Cylinder Data by bidder
Engine Cooling & Oil Radiator cooled
System
Diesel Oil tank capacity Data by bidder
Fuel Oil storage shall 4hrs
ensure working of pump
for number of hours
1.4 Jockey Pump
(Please submit separate data sheet for each type of pump)
Make Kirloskar / Mather + platt / Grundfos

Rated Head 108 mtr
Model Data by bidder
Horizontal / Design End suction top discharge

Impeller Dia (Maximum) Data by bidder
Page 1276 of 1358

Suction / Delivery Size Data by bidder

Efficiency at Rated Data by bidder
Capacity & Head
KW required at rated Data by bidder
capacity & head
Shut Off Head Data by bidder
Material of
Construction
Pump Casing CI
Impeller BRONZE
Pump Shaft SS -410
Shaft Sleeve SS -410
Base Plate M.S.
Description of Motor
Make KIRLOSKAR / ABB / SIEMENS
Type Squirrel cage induction motor

Rated Capacity (Power) Data by bidder
Full load current Data by bidder
Enclosure TEFC
1.5 PIPING
MAKE TATA up 300mm dia / Jindal above 300mm
dia
15 NB TO 50 NB GI Heavy IS1239
15 TO 50 NB Fittings Forged steel Socket welded/Screwed
65 NB TO 150 NB Pipes GI Heavy IS1239

65 NB TO 150 NB Fittings Cast carbon steel
200 NB ONWARDS Pipes GI Heavy IS3589
200 NB ONWARDS Butt weld Fabricated
Fittings
Flanges IS 6392
Gaskets Data by bidder
MOC GI heavy class
1.6 HYDRANT VALVES
1.6.1 Technical
Specifications :
Make
Working Pressure 10kg/cm2
Page 1277 of 1358

Code for Design Mft. IS 5290

1.6.2 Construction Features
Type of Inlet Flanged
Type of Outlet Instantaneous Coupling
Flange Drilling IS 6392

1.6.3 Material of
Construction
Body and Bonnet SS
Stop Valve, Valve Seat Forged Brass
Check nut & gland nut GUNMETAL
1.7 PRESSURE GAUGE
1.7.1 Technical
Specifications :
Make
Working Pressure 10kg/cm2
Code for Design Mft. Data by bidder
Scale range 0-15kg/cm2
1.7.2 Construction Features
Case Die cast aluminum
Pointer Standard
Dial Size 150mm
Dial Lettering Standard
Process Connection 1/2 NPT MALE THREADED
Weather protection class IP65

1.7.3 Material of
Construction
Case Die cast alluminium
Movement SS-316 Bourdon type
Block Data by bidder
Accessories if any snubber and SS-316 isolation ball valve
1.8 PRESSURE SWITCHES

Make Indfos / Switzer / Danfoss
Working Pressure 0 to 10 kg/cm2

Scale range 0-15kg/cm
Model no. Data by bidder
Protection IP 65
Cable Entry Bottom entry
Process Connection 1/2"NPT
Repeatability Consistent
Switch Data by bidder
Page 1278 of 1358

Type Diaphragm
No. of contacts Data by bidder
Contact Rating Data by bidder
Enclosure IP65
Pressure element SS316
Wetted Parts SS316
Accessories if any Isolation ball valve
1.9 Flow Switch
Make Switzer / Levcon / System Sensor/ Potter
Enclosure IP 65
Pressure rating 0 - 15 kg/cm2
Range 0 - 15 kg/cm2
Switch
Type paddle type
No. of contacts 2 Minimum
Contact rating Data by bidder
Process rating Data by bidder
Process connection Data by bidder
Dimensions Data by bidder
1.1 BUTTERFLY VALVE
Make AUDCO/CRANE
Material CI
Pressure Rating PN 15
1.11 GATE VALVE
MAKE LEADER/CRANE/ZOLOTO
Material CI
1.12 BALL VALVE

MAKE Leader/Crane/ zoloto
Material forged brass

1.13 INSTALLATION CONTROL VALVE
MAKE HD/Tyco/Viking/Kidde
Material CI
1.14 NON RETURN VALVE
MAKE H Sarkar/Kirloskar
Page 1279 of 1358

Material CI
1.15 SULICE VALVE
MAKE H Sarkar/Kirloskar
Material CI
1.16 SPRINKLER HEAD
Make Tyco/Viking /Kidde
Type Pendent/ Sidewall/ Upright
K factor k(5.6) or k(8.0)

Body Finish Chrome
Temperature rating 68 or 79 cetigrade
Response type Standard
End connection 1/2 N.PT.
1.17 FLEXIBLE PIPE
Make Easy flex /Tyco/U. LlLlisted
ApprovaL U.L/FM
Support Accessories BIDDER
Length 1000,1500 MM
Material specification Steel Braided Hose
2 ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES
2.1 MAKE OF THE FOLLOWING
Fire fighting panel Pragati Controls / Load Controls / Bright
engg. / Elins / Lotus controls
MPCB Siemens / ABB / Areva / GE (Imported) /

L&T
MCCB Siemens / ABB / Areva / GE (Imported) /

L&T
MCB Hager L&T / Legrand / Schneider/ Siemens
Rotary switch Kaycee / L&T / Siemens
Auto transformer starter Data by bidder

Automatic star delta Siemens
starter
Direct online starter Siemens / Equivalent
Page 1280 of 1358

Contractor Schneider/L& T /SIEMENS / ABB
All makes shall be as per

approved list attached
here with
Current Transformer Kalpa/ Voltamps/kappa
(cast resin type)
Single phase preventer Minilec /AE
Push button Vaishno /schnieder/Technik/Siemens/L&T
Change over switch Jay/ Equivalent

Ammeter & Voltmeter Schneider/L& T /Rishab
KWH meter
Relay L& T /SIEMENS
Indication lamp Siemens / Vaishno /schnieder / Technik /
L&T
cable Finolex / Polycab / Universal / RPG /

Teracom
wires Polycab / finolex

2.1 FOR FIRE FIGHTING PANEL
Type of Panel MCC, Indoor
Type of Mounting Floor Mounting
Fault kA 50KA
Thickness of CRCA sheets 2mm thick provided
Structural members
Covers and doors
Base channel
Gland plate
Painting/ Process
Paint shade; Post Office Red
a. Inside
b. Outside
Details of busbars Alluminium
Cable Entry Top
Enclosure Yes provided
Protection/
Ventilation
Control Wiring/ Data by bidder
Power Wiring Data by bidder
Voltage Circuit Data by bidder
Page 1281 of 1358

Current Circuit Data by bidder

Minimum size of Power 1.5sqmm
wiring CKt
Maximum Operating 2.2mtr
Height
Mounting height of
Relays/Meters
Control Switches Data by bidder
VRF TECHNICAL SHEET

Sr.
No Description As per Design
.
VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW (VRF)
1
SYSTEM
General
a. Country of origin India
b. Refrigerant R 410 A
Remote control for each indoor unit
c. Yes
included (Y/N)
d. Number of zone/floor control panels
e. BMS compatible (Y/N) Yes
Centralized control for VRF unit, (I
Yes
f. manager software)
2 Indoor unit and Treated fresh air unit
Type
4-way flow VRV/VRF Cassette Type
Cassette unit
2.1 Indoor ceiling mounted unit
External static pressure VRF/VRV
FCU Unit ceiling mounted ductable type
2.2 Indoor unit
VRV/VRF Based double skin draw
TFA Unit
2.3 Treated fresh air
Casing material
b. Coil section with DX copper coil
Air quantity (cfm)

c. As per Design
External static pressure

d. As per Design
Fan motor rating (kW)

e. As per OEM
f. Cooling capacity at design conditions (TR) As per Design
Page 1282 of 1358

g. Drain pump provided (Y/N) Yes

h. Overall size (mm) As per OEM
i. Operating weight (kg) As per OEM
3 Outdoor unit
Modular type Variable Refrigerant

Flow/Variable Refrigerant Volume
a. Type (Top / side discharge) air cooled Outdoor units.
Note : Top discharge type
condensing unit(s)
b. Casing material Hermetically sealed inverter type
Heat rejection capacity at design
c. As per OEM
conditions (Btu/hr)
d. Type of compressor / model number Scroll Compressor(s)
Min 2 nos of compressors for above
e. Number of compressors
14 HP modules
Saturated suction temperature to
f.
produce designed indoor conditions (0C)
Saturated condensing temperature to
g. produce designed ambient conditions
(0C)
h. Cooling capacity at above conditions (TR)
i. Type of condenser fans
j. Number of condenser fans
k. Motor rating of condenser fans
Sound pressure level in dBA at 3m
l.
distance
m
Overall dimension of unit (mm) As per OEM
.
n. Operating weight (kg) As per OEM
Duct Technical sheet
Sr. No. Description As per Design
1 GALVANISED SHEETS FOR FACTORY FABRICATED DUCT

a. Make As per make List
Thickness of 0.63 mm,
0.80 mm, 1.00 mm,
b. Thickness/Gage 1.25 mm sheet
Page 1283 of 1358

Insulation Technical Sheet

1 INSULATON
Manufacturer As per make list

25 mm. Thick density 32 kg/cu.m
resin bonded glass fiber
insulation friction fixed in 610mm
x 610 mm frame work made of
Acoustic lining on wall and
25X50X50X50X25 mm made out
a. ceiling of AHU rooms material &
of 0.6mm thick GI sheet U shaped
density
channel and covered with
reinforced fiber glass tissue and
finished with 0.80 mm perforated
aluminum sheet etc.
25 mm thick resin bonded glass
wool having density of 32 kg/m³,
with 25 mm X 25 mm GI section
of 1.25 mm thick, at 600 mm
center to center covered with
Acoustic lining of supply air
b. Reinforced Plastic tissue paper
duct and plenum
and 0.5 mm thick perforated
aluminum sheet fixed to inside
surface of ducts with cadmium
plated nuts, bolts, stick pins,
CPRX compound etc
9/ 19 / 25 mm. Thickness duly
laminated aluminum foil of mat
finish closed cell Nitrile rubber
(Class "O") insulation on existing
duct after applying suitable
adhesive for Nitrile rubber. The
joints shall be sealed with 50 mm
wide and 3 mm thick self
c. Duct insulation material
adhesive nitrile rubber tape
insulation complete as per
specifications
Open cell Nitrile rubber (Class
"1") insulation For Acoustic
purpose on existing duct after
applying suitable adhesive for
Nitrile rubber.
Page 1284 of 1358

50 MM Thk Pre-Insulated PIR

Panel with Washers, G.I. Crossed
50 mm wide patty, Joints selaed
with Hot / Cold Bitumen etc .As
Specified. Density of insulation
Underdeck insulation material shall be 48 ± 2 KG/m3. both side
d.
& density shall be with aluminum foil .
Thermal Conductivity of
insulation shall be 0.021 (W/m⁰K).
Insulation shall be Fire
Classification with BS 476 Class O,
Part 6&7.
Propeller Fan Technical Sheet
1 PROPELLER FANS
a. Manufacturer As per make list

b. Motor HP As per Design
c. Capacitors provided. As per OEM
d. Speed Regulator for single phase fans As per Design
e. Gravity louvers Required
f. Single phase preventor for 3 phase fans Required
g. Back draft damper. As per Design
h. Bird Screen Required
ji. Wire guard Required
VFD Technical Sheet
1 VARIABLE SPEED FREQUENCY DRIVE FOR AHU / FANS
a. Make / Country of Origin As per make List

b. Model No. As per OEM
Page 1285 of 1358

c. Type As per Design

d. Motor Rating As per Design
e. Rated Current As per OEM
f. Maximum Output As per OEM
g. PID Controller Required
h. Interface with BAS. Required
i. Hormonic filter builtin (Confirm) Required
j. Fault Indication. Required
k. Dimensions (mm) As per OEM
l. No. of Steps As per OEM
m. Operating Weight As per OEM
tor Technical Sheet
Sr. No. Description As per Tender
1 VIBRATION ISOLATION SYSTEM
a. Manufacturer As per make list

b. Type
c. Stiffness coefficient and Deflection
d. Vibration isolation efficiency (%)
e. Material of flexible connection at
i. Pumps Required
iii. Expansion Joints Required
AHU Technical Sheet

Sr Bidder’s
Description Units As per Tender
No. Response
A General Information :
1 Manufacturer As per make list
2 Item Tag No. As per OEM
3 Model As per Design
Based on site
4 Type of Mounting (Floor / Ceiling)
condition
5 Outdoor design condition :
46 deg C / 28.6
a Summer DBT/WBT Deg C
deg. C
32.2 deg C / 27.77
b Rainy DBT/ WBT Deg C
deg. C
Page 1286 of 1358

c Winter DBT/WBT Deg C

6 Indoor design condition : Deg C / % As per Design
7 Type of duty operation hours
8 Total cooling capacity TR
9 Total sensible cooling capacity TR
10 Total latent cooling capacity TR
11 Total Volume flow rate CMH
12 Ventilation air quantity CMH
13 Coil ADP Deg C
14 Application
15 Installation Location
16 Area Classification (Safe / Hazardous)
17 Quantity Nos.
B Cooling Coil :
1 No. of cooling coil bays
2 No. of coils per bay 6 row deep
3 Coil Design Pressure
B1 1st Bay Coil :

1 Finned length mm As per OEM
2 Fin height mm As per OEM
3 Coil depth mm As per OEM
4 Number of rows Nos As per OEM
5 Coil by pass factor As per OEM
6 Number of circuits Nos As per OEM
7 Total coil face area per bay m2 As per OEM
8 Header diameter & MOC mm As per OEM
9 Tubes MOC As per OEM
10 Tubes wall thickness mm As per OEM
11 Tube diameter mm As per OEM
12 Fin MOC As per OEM
13 Fin thickness mm As per OEM
14 Fin spacing FPF As per OEM
15 Whether TUBE TURBULATOR installed Yes/No As per OEM
16 Air Inlet conditions: As per OEM
17 DBT / WBT Deg. C As per OEM
18 Air Outlet conditions: As per OEM
19 DBT / WBT Deg. C As per OEM
20 Air velocity m/s As per OEM
21 Pressure drop on air side mm of WG As per OEM
22 Water flow rate m3/Hr As per OEM
23 Water Velocity inside tube m/s As per OEM
24 Pressure drop on water side mm of WG As per OEM
25 Entering chilled water temperature deg .C As per OEM
26 Leaving chilled water temperature deg .C As per OEM
27 Total sensible capacity of coil TR As per OEM
Page 1287 of 1358

28 Total latent capacity of coil TR As per OEM

29 Coil inlet/outlet nozzle size mm As per OEM
30 Size of Coil By pass mm x mm As per OEM
B2 IInd Bay Coil :

1 Fin length mm As per OEM
2 Fin height mm As per OEM
3 Coil depth mm As per OEM
4 Number of rows Nos As per OEM
5 Coil by pass factor As per OEM
6 Number of circuits Nos As per OEM
7 Total coil face area per bay m2 As per OEM
8 Header diameter & MOC mm As per OEM
9 Tubes MOC
10 Tubes wall thickness mm
11 Tube diameter mm
12 Fin MOC
13 Fin thickness mm
14 Fin spacing FPF
15 Whether TUBE TURBULATOR installed Yes/No
16 Air Inlet conditions:
17 DBT / WBT Deg.C
18 Air Outlet conditions:
19 DBT / WBT Deg.C
20 Air velocity m/s
21 Pressure drop on air side mm of WG
22 Water flow rate m3/Hr
23 Water Velocity inside tube m/s
24 Pressure drop on water side mm of WG
25 Entering chilled water temperature deg .C
26 Leaving chilled water temperature deg .C
27 Total sensible capacity of coil TR
28 Total latent capacity of coil TR
29 Coil inlet/outlet nozzle size mm
30 Size of Coil By Pass mm x mm
C Centrifugal Blower :
Double Skin
Cabinet fan with
Forward Curved
1 Type DIDW Centrifugal
Blower, as per
specifications of
Pressurisation fan
2 Make & Model No. As per make list
3 Certification
4 Fan Casing MOC
5 Volume flow rate m3/h
Page 1288 of 1358

6 Outlet velocity m/s

7 Wheel diameter mm
8 AHU internal pressure drop mm of WG
9 External static pressure mm of WG
10 Outlet velocity head mm of WG
11 Total pressure mm of WG
12 Rated Speed: RPM
13 Critical speed
14 Static efficiency %
15 Mechanical efficiency %
16 Absorbed power: Bkw
17 Type of vibration isolator
18 Vibration isolation efficiency %
19 Noise level at 1m distance dBA
20 Vibration level ( Axial & Radial) microns
21 Type of painting/coating & thickness microns
UV Lamp with controller for Air
22
Purifier
D Blower Motor : (IE2 - Eff 1 Type)

1 Make As per make list
2 Type As per OEM
3 frame size As per OEM
4 supply by
5 Installed power kw As per OEM
6 Maximum speed Rpm As per OEM
7 Voltage volts 415 ± 10% volts
8 frequency Hz 50Hz
9 Phase Nos 3 Phase AC supply
10 Motor insulation class IE4
11 Motor whether protection level
12 VFD Compatible Yes/No
13 Fan & Motor pulleys 1 set
14 V-Belts 1 set
15 Vibration isolators 1 set
16 Bearing for blower 1 set
17 Inlet guard for blower 1 set
18 Flexible canvass for blower 1 set
E Filters :
1 Prefilter, media MERV-8
Washable
2 Type / Washable synthetic
type air filters
filters shall be
% Down to
3 Efficiency & Particle size with 90%
Micron
efficiency down to
Page 1289 of 1358

10 microns, and
the design velocity
across the filter
shall not exceed
2.5 meters per
second.
Thickness - 50
4 Size, thickness & quantity mm / No
mm.
filters shall be
with 90%
efficiency down to
10 microns, and
5 Pressure drop, initial mm of WG the design velocity
across the filter
shall not exceed
2.5 meters per
second.
6 Pressure drop, final mm of WG
7 Total cross sectional filter area m2
8 Total Air Flow m3/hr
9 Air velocity m / sec
F Casing :
thickness of 0.8
1 Inner skin thk. mm
mm
thickness of 1.0
2 Outer skin thk. mm
mm
polyurethane
Thermal insulation material / Thk. / foam (PUF) 40±2
3 mm / kg/m3
Density kg/m3 density
insulation
4 Frame work
5 Base frame MOC
6 Painting DFT
Drain pan thickness & MOC &
7
Insulation thickness
8 Continuous rubber sealing
9 Access window mm x mm
Flanges / counter flanges and all
10 1 set
hardware for Chilled water service
11 Matching Flanges for plenum
Thermal break between support /
12
panel
G Accessories :
1 Flexible canvass for Blower 1 set
2 Vibration isolators 1 set
3 Inlet guard for blower 1 set
4 Fan & Motor pulleys 1 set
Page 1290 of 1358

5 V-Belts 1 set
Flanges / counter flanges and all
6 1 set
Hardware for Chilled water service
7 Electrical control panel - Local 1 set
8 Starter / VFD 1 set
9 Marine light
H Dimensional Details :
1 Length mm As per OEM
2 Width mm As per OEM
3 Height mm As per OEM
4 Weight Kg As per OEM
I Scope of work :
1 Installation of AHU Yes
2 Commissioning of AHU Yes
3 Testing of AHU at site Yes
4 Loading & Unloading of AHU at site Yes
Shifting the AHU at site to exact
5 Yes
location
Transportation of AHU from factory to
6 Yes
site
Equipment handling machineries &
7 Yes
scaffolding
Supervision of erection &
8 Yes
commissioning of AHU
J Analysis :
kw/(1000cfm
1 Sp. Power consumption
X ESP)
2 Sp. Wheel diameter mm/1000cfm
K Performance Check :
1 Sensible Heat TR
2 Latent Heat TR
3 Total Heat TR
4 Water Side Heat Gain TR
Legend
MOC : Material Of Construction
Damper Technical Sheet

Sr.N As per Bidder’s
Description Units
o. Tender Response
A GENERAL INFORMATION
1 Vendor
Page 1291 of 1358

2 Type
3 Quantity
4 Model
5 Make
6 Application
B DAMPER
1 MOC of Frame / Blabes As per OEM
mm/m
Frame / Blade thickness As per OEM
2 m
The damper
shall be
motorized
and spring
return so as
to close the
damper in
3 Damper connection type the event of
power failure
automatically
and open the
same in case
of power
being
restored.
Second
Time to open the damper
4 s
Open
damper status in Normal Mode
5 condition
6 Bearing type
7 Bearing MOC
Minute
Fire Rating
8 s
9 Mechanical position Indicator
10 Number of partition for required sizes As per OEM
Temperature rating of damper & acuator
oC
11 combined
12 Degradation test temperature oC
13 Blade profile As per OEM
14 Type of Blade arrangement As per OEM
15 Blade operation As per OEM
The damper
shall be
Blade movement mechanism motorized
and spring
16 return
17 Rubber sheath on blade tip yes/no
18 Damper minimum leakage class
19 Certification for CBRI/UL
Page 1292 of 1358

20 Pressure Drop in full open position mm Wg
C ACTUATOR
1 Make
2 Model number
3 Mode of Operation
4 Type
5 Torque of the actuator Nm
6 Torque required for damper Nm
7 Number of actuators per damper Nos.
8 Power supply requirement
9 Class of the actuator motor
10 Earthing bolt
11 Motor protection
D SCOPE
1 GA drawings of the dampers Yes
2 Supply of damper to RIL stores Yes
3 Shifting of damper from stores to site Yes
4 Installation of damper at site Yes
5 Commissioning / Testing of damper Yes
an Technical Sheet
Sr. As per Bidder’s
Description Units
No. Tender Response
A General Information
1 Manufacturer
2 Model
3 Make
4 Type
5 Capacity CFM
6 Total Qty nos
7 Size (L X W X H) mm
8 Arrangement
9 Service
10 Application
11 Fan rotation from motor driven end
B Operating Conditions / Performance

1 Capacity CMH
2 Density Kg/m3
3 Temperature °C
mm of
4 Static pressure @ inlet wg
Page 1293 of 1358

mm of
5 Static pressure @ outlet wg
6 Power @ temperature Kw
7 Fan speed RPM
8 Inlet damper / vane position
9 Fan static efficiency %
C Fan control
1 Fan control furnished by
Method - inlet damper/outlet damper/inlet guide
2 vanes/variable speed
3 Starting method
D Drive (Motor IE 2 EFF -1 Type)

1 Type
2 Make
3 Rated power Kw
4 Speed RPM
5 Electrical area classification
V / Hz /
6 Voltage / Frequency / Phase Ph
E Construction Features
1 Housing material
2 Thickness mm
3 Split for wheel removal
4 Blades type
5 Diameter mm
Nos /
6 No of blades / thickness mm
7 Blade material
8 Guide vanes
9 Hub material
10 Shrink fit / keyed
11 Shaft material / Length mm
12 Diameter @ Bearings
13 Shaft sleeves material mm
14 Fixing
15 Bearings type
16 Lubrication
17 Couplings type
18 Make / Model
19 Service factor
F Pre-Filter :
1 Prefilter Media
2 Efficiency & Particle size % &
Page 1294 of 1358

microns
3 Size, Thick & Qty mm
4 Type
mm of
5 Pressure drop, initial wg
mm of
6 Pressure drop, final wg
7 Total cross sectional filter area Sqmt
8 Filter casing material
9 Total Air Flow CFM
10 Air Velocity FPM
G Plenum box
1 Material
2 Size mm
H Miscellaneous
1 Common base plate for fan & driver
2 Bearing pedestals / soleplates
3 Coupling guard material
4 Noise level @ 1 mt distance dbA
5 Testing of fans
6 Transportation of fans from factory to site
7 Transportation of fans from site stores to location
8 Installation & Commissioning of fans
I Dimensions
1 Length mm
2 Width mm
3 Height mm
4 Weight (Fan+Motor+Filter+Base plate) Kg
mmxm
5 Inlet size / Outlet size m
mmxm
6 Wall opening required for fans m
J Analysis:
Kw/100
1 Specific power consumption 0CFM
Sqft/10
2 Specific cross section 00CFM
K Site and Available utility data

1 Elevation (Mean sea level) mt
2 Temperature - Max / Min Deg C
3 Atmospheric pressure bar
4 Relative humidity : Max / Min %
5 Unusual conditions - dust/fumes/other
Page 1295 of 1358

6 Area classification -safe/unsafe

7 Location -outdoor/under roof
L NOTES :
1 Gravity louvers should be provided at discharge.
2 Inlet cowl and bird screen should be provided.
3 Prefilter should be sliding type.
Supplier should supply frame for mounting along with the
4 assembly.
5 Support arrangement to be provided by vendor.
6 Starter to be provided by vendor.
7 Cabling from starter to fan motor by vendor.
Trip signals will be tapped in the customer DCS. Vendor to
8 provide potential free contacts for the same
Vendor has to provide potential free contacts for F&G
9 purpose
10 Anti Sparking Impeller Rubbing Ring to be Provided
All required drawings & documents to be submitted by
11 vendor like GA drawing, data sheet, wiring
diagram, Operation & maintenance manual, spare parts list
etc
TECHNICAL DATA SHEET FOR PLUMBING SYSTEM
To be filled by
S. No. Description As per Specification
Contractor
1 HYDROPNEUMATIC PUMPS (VFD)
Pump:
Make
Type & Model
Discharge in LPS / GPM
Head (Meter in WC)
Shut off Head (Meters of WC) 140%
Efficiency
No. of Stages
Suction End I.D.
Delivery End I.D.
Detail of N.P.S.H.
Vibration Isolation Detail
Skid Detail
Operating Weight
Overall dimension
Cartridge Mechanical
Mechanical Seal Detail
Seal
Material:
Page 1296 of 1358

Body SS304
Impeller SS304
Type of Impeller Closed
Shaft
Shaft SS316
Is it suitable for direct coupling
2 Motor
Make
Model
Power requirement (HP / KW)
R.P.M. 2900
Rating IP55
Overload capacity
Details of Additional protection in Temperature Sensors
winding (PTC)
Motor Efficiency
It is suitable for direct coupling to pump?

Clockwise
Types of rotary movement
(From Top)
Method of Starting DOL
Size and type of cable for connections.
02 Nos.
Number of variable frequency drive
Detail of VFD
PRESSURE VESSEL
Make
Model
MS
Material of construction (Vessel/Bladder)
Dimension
Overload capacity
Cut-in/Cut-out setting
Capacity at specified cut-in/cut-out

Overall dimension of skid mounted
system
Weight (Static/Dynamic)
3
VARIABLE SPEED PUMPING SYSTEM
3.1 ADJUSTABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE
Make / Country of Origin
Page 1297 of 1358

Model
Type Variable Speed Drive
Motor Rating
Rated Current -
Maximum Output -
PID Controller -
Interface with BAS -
Fault Indication Yes
Dimensions (mm) -
No. of Steps -
Operating Weight -
3.2 AUTOMATIC AFD BY PASS:
Make / Country of Origin
Model No.
Type
Motor rating
Rated Current -
Rating of Power disconnect switch.

Type of Enclosure
4 TRANSFER PUMPS
Pump
Make
Type & model
Discharge in LPS / GPM
Head (Meters of WC)
Shut off Head (Meters of WC)
Efficiency (%) -
No. of Stages -
Suction End I.D. -
Delivery End I.D. -
Details of N.P.S.Ha. -
Details of NPSHr -
Vibration Isolation Detail -
Skid Details -
Operating Weight -
Overall Dimension (MM) -
Mechanical Seal Detail Cartridge Mechanical Seal
MATERIAL
Body SS 304
Impeller SS 304
Type of Impeller Closed
Shaft SS 304
Is it suitable for direct coupling Yes
Page 1298 of 1358

Motor
Make
Model
Power requirement (HP / KW)
2900 (High Eff. & Low
R.P.M.
noise level)
Rating IP55
Overload capacity 20%
Details of Additional protection in Temperature Sensors
winding (PTC)
Motor Efficiency Min. As per IE2
It it suitable for direct coupling to pump?

Clock-wise
Types of rotary movement
(From Top)
Method of Starting DOL
None
Number of variable frequency drive
Detail of VFD
5 WATER FLOW SWITCHS
Manufacturer -
Country of Origin -
Local Agent (Certification) UL Listed
Type Vane Type
Model As per Selection
Body Construction Material -
Stem Construction Material -
Flapper Construction Material -
No. of Contacts NO, NC, COM
Type of Contacts
10 Amps at 125 / 250 VAC
Connections -
3 Amps @ 250 VAC / 5
Power Supply
Amps @ 125 VAC
Switch Rating SPDT
Degree of Protection (IP) IP 55
6 PRESSURE SWITCHS
Manufacturer : -
Country of Origin : -
Local Agent : -
Type : KPI
Page 1299 of 1358

Model : -
Construction Material : Diecasting
Dimensions (mm) : -
Backplate /
Mounting :
Wall mounted
Switch Rating : SPDT
Body Construction Material : Die Cast aluminum
Ag / AY (Gold Plated
Sensing Element Material : Silver)
Fill Material : Tin Bronze
Sensing Range : G-28 bar
Over Range Protection : 20%
Maxm. Static Pressure on one side :

No. of Contacts :
Type of Contacts : SPDT
Power Supply : 10 A, 440 V
Degree of Protection (IP) : IP 33 / 44
7 WATER TREATMENT
Pump :
Make :
Type & Model :
Discharge in LPS/ GPM :
Head (Meters of WC) :
Shut off head (Meters of WC)
Efficiency (%) :
No. of stages :
Suction end I.D. :
Delivery end I.D. :
Details of N.P.S.H. :
Vibration Isolation Detail :
Skid Details :
Operating Weight
Overall Dimension
Mechanical Seal Detail
MATERIAL
Body :
Impeller :
Shaft :
Type of Impeller :
Is it suitable for direct coupling :
MOTOR :
Make :
Model :
Page 1300 of 1358

Power Requirement (HP/KW)

R.P.M :
Rating :
Over Load Capacity :
Class of Insulation :
Details of additional protection in
winding :
Motor efficiency :
If it suitable for direct coupling to
pump ? :
Type of rotary movement :
Method of starting :

7.2 FILTERS
Description
Material of Construction :
Diameter :
Height on straight :
Filtering media :
Shell thickness :
Dish end thickness :
Service flow rate :
Design pressure :
Back wash duration :
Back wash flow rate :
Pressure drop across the filter :
Maximum inlet turbidity (NTU) :
Turbidity in filtered water
7.3 DOSING SYSTEM
PUMP:
Pump model
Pump Type
Make
Material of construction
Flow rate
TANK:
Capacity
Material of Construction
7.4 CLRONINATION SYSTEM
PUMP:
Pump model
Pump Type
Make
Page 1301 of 1358

Flow rate
7.5 U.V. STERLIZATION
System Make
Model
Type
Capacity
Qty. of U.V. Lamps
8 R.O. SYSTEM
8.1 RO Feed Water Pumps:
Pump make
Type
Material of construction :
Casing
Impeller
Shaft
Service flow rate :
Head
Motor
Electrical Supply
Motor makes
Starting current
Full load current
NPSH Details
Details of VFD
8.2 REVERSE OSMOSIS MODULES
Membranes make :
Material
Percentage recovery :
Feed flow rate
Product flow rate :
Reject flow rate
Feed Pressure for high pressure pump

8.3 Micron Cartridge Filter Unit:
Quantity offered :
Type :
Operating Flow rate :
Operating Pressure. :
Micron Rating. :
Type of cartridge. :
M O C. :
8.4 CIP SYSTEM
CHEMICAL PREPARATION TANK
Page 1302 of 1358

Quantity offered :
Capacity of tank. :
M O C of tank. :
CHEMICAL CLEANING PUMP. :
Make. :
Capacity :
Head :
Type :
Material Of Construction. :
Pump Motor.
Electrical Supply.
Motor Make.
Micron Cartridge Filter Unit:
Quantity offered :
Type :
Operating Flow rate. :
Operating pressure :
Micron Rating :
Type of cartridge :
8.5
RO Feed Water Limiting Conditions
Turbidity :
SDI:
Heavy Metal :
Organics and bacteria. :
Oil & Grease. :
Residual chlorine :
COD :
BOD :
Oxidizing Agents. :
Temperature :
Colour / Odour :
PH at the feed of RO :
8.6 RO Plant Operating Data
No. of Streams offered :
Feed flow rate :
Average recovery :
Product flow rate :
Operating Pressure :
Type of operation :
Operating Hours :
Treated Water Per Day
Page 1303 of 1358

Safety Manual & Practices

General Contract Clauses - Occupational Health and Safety –
Purpose
To outline occupational Health & Safety basic requirements to be performed while executing the work
on construction site. To achieve a workplace where nobody gets hurt, everyone goes home safe and
the environment is preserved, in the successful operation of the project with the objective and target.
ZERO NEAR MISS & INCIDENTS.

ZERO ACCIDENTS.
ZERO IMPACT ON THE ENVIRONMENT.
The contractor shall be fully responsible for the adequacy, stability, and safety of all Site operations
and methods of construction and for ensuring that the execution of the Works in compliance
with all applicable Laws, standards, consents, and good industry practices. Any safety measures
required to be taken by the Contractor, including but not limited to the provision of any safety works,
procurement of any materials, equipment etc. shall be deemed to be part of the scope of Works.
Contractor shall not be entitled to any additional costs for implementing any of the preventive steps
required to ensure safety of life and limb of all personnel within the site and the safety of life and
limb of all persons inside or outside the site who may be exposed to any risk due to any
of the construction and/or transportation methods employed by the Contractor.
1. Key Basic Requirement - Contractor / Vendor liability: -
1.1 Contractor / vendor to submit the following within one week after getting the letter of
intent for review and approvals.
✓Project Specific Safety Plan.
✓ Project Risk Assessment.
✓ Site Logistic Plan in line with OHS requirements.
✓ Emergency Management Plan.
✓ Electrical & Illumination Plan.
✓ PPE Samples to review and confirmation. (Comply with IS / BS standards) same to
be displayed in the PPE Park)
1.2 The Contractor / Vendor to deploy qualified / certified (in line with BOCW Act & Rule)
safety officer along with Safety Steward / Supervisors in the ratio of 1: 50 workers prior to start
project. Safety officers’ profiles to be shared for review and confirmation.
1.3 The following records to be maintained at site:
✓ Medical fitness certificates of workers.
✓ Screening of Workers.
✓ Induction training record.
✓ Daily Toolbox talk records.
✓ Inventory of Plant & Equipment.
✓ Pre-Inspection check / examination of power tools, equipment’s, hand tools etc.
✓ Daily work-hour report.
✓ First aid register.
✓ Inspection reports.
✓ Incident report.
Page 1304 of 1358

✓ MSDS Records
1.4 Laminated Photo ID card for all operatives must be there and to be shown during gate
check.
1.5 Presence of Project In charge along with Safety Officer is mandatory in every weekly
Safety meeting.
1.6 Third party certification is mandatory for all lifting tools and tackles, compressor
machines.
1.7 Safe Work Method Statement / Job Safety Analysis to be provided for all critical activities.
1.8 The vehicles playing inside construction premises shall comply by the requirements of
“Central Motor vehicles Rules” & Site safety rules and to be confirmed prior to deployed on site.
1.9 Child labour (below 18 years age) and elderly are prohibited at site.
1.10 The contractor / vendor is fully responsible and accountable for any incident at
construction premises.
1.11 Contractor/Vendor shall immediately inform Project Manager when an incident/near
miss occurred at site. A brief accident report to be submitted within 24 hours and a detailed
investigation report within 48 hours.
1.12 Work Permit System: The work permits system to be followed for following activities:
✓ Hot work (welding, open burning of bitumen, grinding).

✓ Confined space entry.
✓ Working at heights/ fragile roofs.
✓ Earth excavation.
✓ Shifting / Hoisting / Lifting.
✓ Electrical installation, commissioning & testing work
✓ Work at high-risk areas (such as fuel yards, licensed premises, chemical stores,
Hazardous process etc.
Any other work as decided by Colliers / Client.
Display of work permits at the place of work is mandatory.
1.13 The following key welfare facilities at site to be provided and maintained
✓ Rest Shelter
✓ Toilet & Urinal separately for male & Female as per the standard.
✓ Drinking Water Facility (potable water).
✓ First Aid Centre with qualified first aider.
✓ Local Hospital tie up letter to manage emergency cases.
✓ Ambulance with dedicated paramedic staff.
✓ Canteen facility, wherein more than two hundred and fifty workers are ordinarily
employed
✓ Crèches facility in case of more than 30 female workers.
1.14 Safety Helmet, Safety shoe, reflective vest is mandatory for all working at site and
additional job specific PPE’s to be provided by contractor / vendor as per standards.
1.15 Full Body Harness with Double Lanyard of 1.5m length and Snap Hook of 50mm dia to
be provided for work at height above 2m.
1.16 Penalty will be imposed to the vendor/contractor for non-adherence to EHS norms as
structured in briefed bellow.
1.17 Contractor / vendor must comply with all applicable statutory requirements as listed
below.
1.18 Any specific requirement of client/Colliers to be included and followed at site.
Page 1305 of 1358

2. Safety Rules to be implemented at Site:
2.1 Smoking within the Construction premises is strictly prohibited. Bringing matchbox or
lighter inside the Construction premises is restricted.
2.2 Cell phones usage and listening to music while working within construction premises is
strictly prohibited.
2.3 Ignition key to be carried along with the driver when vehicle is parked.
2.4 Side walls and adjacent property to be secured against collapse during excavation.
2.5 Fall Protection guard / safety net to be used as a protection measure when person is
working at height.
2.6 Roof and floor openings to be guarded.
2.7 No one to come underneath suspended load.
2.8 Drug and Alcohol is strictly prohibited at site.
2.9 All personals to have food only at designated places.
2.10 Contractor/Vendor must be aware of the hazards associated with the job.
2.11 Any work beyond normal working hours (6:00PM onwards) needs permission from the
Project in Charge. Extended hours of work to be planned well in advance and work permit to
be obtained.
2.12 Always walk; never run at work site unless specifically instructed during emergency.
Contractor/Vendor employees shall use regular aisles & gangways without making any
shortcuts. They should confine themselves to the designated workplace.
2.13 In case of emergency, contractor/Vendor employees must assemble at the nearest safe
assembly point and wait for the instructions.
2.14 Contractor/Vendor employee shall not indulge in horseplay or make any loud and
unusual noises as it may distract the attention of others.
2.15 Contractor/Vendor employee shall not use compressed air for cleaning their clothes or
body.
2.16 Contractor/Vendor employee shall not tamper with machinery, guards, safety devices or
interlocks.
2.17 All tools and tackles shall be in safe working condition and the tampered instruments
/equipment shall not be used.
2.18 Contractor/vendor must ensure required calibration/test certificates of the instruments/
equipment's/ lifting tools & tackles.
2.19 Automobiles used for transportation of employees/materials/equipment/wastewater
/fresh water etc. must have all the statutory permissions and shall be in safe working
conditions.
2.20 Good housekeeping to be maintained at the site with dedicated housekeeping team.
2.21 In case of any unsafe conditions prevailing at the site or unsafe acts by individuals, the
same must be brought to the notice of site in charge.
2.22 It is the responsibility of contractor/vendor’s supervisor to conduct daily toolbox talk for
their employees highlighting safety requirements for that day’s job. Also, during toolbox talks
the lessons learnt from near misses, incidents and accidents are to be shared with the workers.
2.23 As a means of creating awareness, signage’s & posters on good and bad practices for
different high-risk activities to be displayed at prominent locations.
Page 1306 of 1358

2.24 Equipment’s like ladder, welding machine, scaffolding, gas cylinders and other tools must
comply to the safety standards,
2.25 General illumination to be provided throughout the site with a minimum Lux level of 150
- 200. Task lighting to be provided to the job specific.
2.26 Wooden ladder and scaffold not permitted.
2.27 A – Type Ladder not permitted. In place of A -type ladder only Airport ladder to be allowed
2.28 All panel boards must have 30mA RCCB / ELCB & MCB
2.29 All electrical sockets must be industrial and fiber cladding.
2.30 Use of LPG restricted at site.
2.31 PPE to be inspected on Daily Basis prior to execution of the work.
2.32 Female workers are restricted to work at site beyond 18.00Hrs.
2.33 Any specific instructions by Colliers / Client to be followed.
3. Escalation in case of noncompliance:
Escalation in case of noncompliance/violations of EHS requirements by the Contract

Companies, contractor employees and subcontractors:
3.1 In the case of the first instance of noncompliance during the activities, warning is given
to both the contractor employee and his company.
3.2 In the case of the second instance, penalty is imposed on the contractor company.
3.3 Safety notice along with the details of noncompliance and penalty is issued to the
contractors after the second instance.
3.4 Fine is decided based upon the degree of noncompliance and damage done as per the
table defined below.
3.5 In case of repetition of noncompliance for the third time the contract company can be
blacklisted, and contract can be terminated
4. Occupational Health and Safety Standard Practices Adopted / to be Implemented on Sites

(Pictorial).
4.1 Site Logistic, electrical and water layout plan: Site Logistics plan to be finalized prior to start
of the activity in line with OH&S requirements. Once the site logistics are finalized, the enabling
activity to be completed prior to start of the main construction activity as listed above.
Page 1307 of 1358

4.2 Fencing, Site Security, Entry & Gate Check Process. The boundaries of the project shall be
fitted with a secure perimeter fence/hoarding that is adequate for the risks associated with the
work being undertaken on the project. Workers are to be provided with Photo ID card (RFID)
and to be checked prior to entry to site.
4.3 Overhead Protection for Safe Access for Man & Vehicle Moment from falling objects. - An
overhead protection system to be provided based on the project risk over the sidewalk and
around the exterior of a building, while work is occurring, to protect pedestrians from falling
debris, also called “sidewalk shed”.
4.4 PPE Park & Safety Performance Board: PPE Samples to be approved prior to start of the
activity and the same to be displayed in the PPE park. Regular HSE performance board to be
updated on site followed with display of emergency contact number in strategic locations.
Page 1308 of 1358

PPE: PPE samples to be approved at the starting of the project and all employees are provided
with minimum PPE of hard hat. Safety shoe Cut level – 3 Hand gloves and Hi-Vis Jacket. Job
specific PPE to be provided to the workers based on the risk.
4.5 Trainings: Workplace safety training is a process that aims to provide your workforce with
knowledge and skills to perform their work in a way that is safe for them and their co-workers.
Workplace safety training plan includes Induction, Daily Toolbox talk / PEP talk, Job Specific
trainings for all employees on identifying hazards and guidelines to report them, and deal with
incident.
Page 1309 of 1358

4.5 Smoking, Drugs, Pan Masala and Alcohol prohibited. It must ensure that
use/consumption of the following is strictly prohibited inside the site.
4.6 Heath Check Up, First Aid & Medical Facility and Hospital tie Up:
 First Aid Center to be organized at site with qualified first aider, first aid Box to be maintained
at site with marking & showing the location. No tablets allowed to store in the first aid box.
 Workers to be deployed on the first day of the site with medical fitness certificate.
 Emergency Vehicle to be posted at site during working 24 X 7, it should not be miss used for
any other purpose.
 Hospital fully equipped with the appropriate emergency medical service facilities, training and
equipment in the accident and emergency department to help the victims of accident.
4.7 Peripheral Safety Net & Edge Protection for Fall Prevention:
 Safety nets must be installed as close as practicable under the surface on which employees
are working, but in no case more than 20 feet below. Safety nets must extend outward from the
Page 1310 of 1358

outermost projection of the work surface.

 Safety nets and their installations must be capable of absorbing an impact force equal to the
drop test.
 Provide edge protection on all the exposed edges of a roof, including the perimeter of
buildings, skylights or other fragile roof materials, and any openings in the roof. This also applies
to openings and edges of floor areas.
 The Edge Protection to be designed as per standard and considering the risk on the project
to prevent people during working.
4.8 Signage’s and Posters: Adequate number of Safety Posters and Signage’s to be displayed
at the strategic locations of site with Hindi and local language to convey a clear and powerful
message to all employees deployed on project.
Page 1311 of 1358

4.9 Excavation: All excavation activity to be carried out as per the approved standard and
agreed SWMS. Each and every excavation area to be barricaded as per the standard
requirements
4.11 Material Handling: Manual & Engineering Controls:

 As far as possible manual material handling to be restricted. Only equipment is to be used for
material handling.
 Shifting of material on the head is forbidden.
 Shifting of heavy weight, long size length material on stairs is restricted
Page 1312 of 1358

4.12 Welfare Facilities.

 Adequate number of toilets & urinals to be provided at site, both for male & female worker
with appropriate signage’s.
 Full time scavenger to be deployed to maintain it.
 Drinking water facility to be provided at strategic location of the site.
 Drinking water test reports to be submitted.
 Lunchroom /rest area to be identified from day one for all and to be maintained hygienic all
the duration of the project.
4.13Construction Plant & Equipment’s:
Plant and equipment shall be inspected prior to use on site, inspected daily by the operator and
serviced as per the manufacturer’s recommendations. Records of plant inspections must be
maintained on a daily / weekly basis or as otherwise required.
All plant must be used and maintained in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendation(s).
Page 1313 of 1358

4.14 Diesel Generator (Enclosed DG):
Only enclosed DG to be provided on project. The DG sets should be provided with integral
acoustic enclosure. The maximum permissible sound pressure level for DG sets with rated
capacity up to 1000 KVA shall be 75 dB(A) at 1 meter from the enclosure surface.
Emission certificate to be provided for the DG along with relevant certificates as per MoEF rule
and regulations.
Page 1314 of 1358

4.15 Fabrication Yard:
Fabrication Yards should be maintained with decent material stacking, Housekeeping and to be
maintained free from all possible hazards.
4.16 Gas Cutting:
 Cylinders are very heavy and must be securely fastened at all times.
 Cylinder valves or valve guards should never be loosened
 Check the regulator is rated for the pressure in the cylinder Store the cylinders in a well-
ventilated area, preferably in the open air.
 The regulator connected with to the Hosepipe must be fixed with flash back arrester.
 The storage area should be well away from sources of heat, sparks, and fire risk
 Cylinders should be stored upright and well secured
 Oxygen cylinders should be stored at least 3m from fuel gas cylinders or separated by a 30-
minute fire resisting barrier.
 The store area should be designated 'No Smoking'
4.17 Electrical Safety:

 Dedicated license electrician (certified with B or C license holder) to be deployed at site. 
Three wire Double Core cable only permitted to use at site. Single core cable is not permitted.
 Cables to be transmitted over 6ft height. It should not be routed through the ground.
 Joints in the cables are not permitted.
 Only Industrial socket and Plug tops are to be used at site.
 General illumination should connect with separate source with circuit breaker.
 RCCB / ELCB of 30mA is only provided in the panel boards.
 Panel board samples to be provided and once approved to be arranged on site.
Page 1315 of 1358

4.18 Material Storage:

 Logistics needs to be followed for stacking of materials at site.
 Materials to be stacked as per the standard.
 It should not be thrown haphazardly at site.
 Before unloading & loading any material on the floor, the safe load carrying capacity of the
slab to be checked and the signage to be displayed.
 MSDS to be followed before stacking material.
Page 1316 of 1358

4.19 Fall Protection on Openings:

Robust physical barriers such as screens, guard rails & net systems must be provided to prevent persons
or materials falling any distance likely to cause injury, during work at height.
4.20 Working with Mortar Mixing and Carpentry.

 To maintain a neat and clean working environment on site, mixing cement and sand to be carry out
in a tray.
 To maintain the ergonomics, the carpenters should have the carpentry yard with working table to
carry out the job safely.
4.21 Height Work.

 All height work must be approved through the SWMS and to be carried out with Height Work Permit.
 As per risk mitigation control measures, engineering control to be adopted as 1st priority of working
at height.
 Height Work is not permitted in outdoor environments during bad weather days
Page 1317 of 1358

4.22 Scaffolding / Working Platform / Shuttering.

All scaffold erected must be certified by a qualified scaffolder, that the erection of the scaffold
complies with relevant Rules & Regulations, Codes of Practice, standards and guidelines.
Scaffolds shall be inspected daily prior to use, to ensure the scaffold has not been altered or
damaged by inclement weather or some other event.
All formworks must be supplied, designed, constructed, erected, used, maintained, inspected
and tested in accordance with relevant IS standard, Codes of Practice and guidelines.
A Design engineer’s Certificate must be obtained to verify the structural adequacy of every
formwork deck or load bearing structure prior to a concrete pour.
Page 1318 of 1358

4.23 Welding Activity:

Inspecting welding equipment and electrode holder before proceeding to work. Welders should
not touch the metal parts of the electrode holder with skin or wet clothing. Wearing appropriate
PPE like welding helmet and goggles to protect workers' eyes and head from hot slag, sparks,
intense light, and chemical burns. weld screens are to provide to protect employees from
welding arc and flash.
4.24 Lockout & Tag out: Locking-off and tagging-out LOTO will be employed on the site.
Working on live accessible equipment will not be permitted under any circumstances. Danger
tagging and required areas/ cases mechanical lock out shall be implemented to ensure the
safety of personnel working on plant and equipment. This is to prevent inadvertent use or
tenderisation by unauthorised persons during maintenance or repair processes or to ensure
isolated equipment is secure prior to work. Out of Service Tagging is to be used to prevent
inadvertent use of defective plant and equipment that requires service or repair.
4.25 Fire Fighting Devices: All site amenities, offices, plant and storage facilities shall have a
suitable category and adequate number of fire extinguishers should be provided and readily
available for use in the event of a fire.
Page 1319 of 1358

4.26 House Keeping, Debris Management & Environment Pollution:

 Housekeeping to be maintained regularly on site. Daily Basis the debris to be cleared from work
locations followed with periodically removing from the debris yard. Waste bins to be provided at
strategic locations at sites.
 Debris chute to be provided for removal of debris from the upper level to ground floor level if any.
 A housekeeping to be deployed at site with identification mark. The House keeping Gang should not
be deployed/engaged for shifting of material or for any other work except Housekeeping.
 Mechanical equipment to be provided for housekeeping.
 Dust pollution be controlled with spraying water frequently.
4.27 Debris Management: Debris management to be carried out as per the Waste
management Plan India
4.28 Batching Plant Standard: Batching plant set up inside the site locations need to meet the
safety standards as per MOEF rules and regulations.
Page 1320 of 1358

4.29 Temporary walkway / Access / Protect: Safe Access to be provided to all work locations
free from hazards.
4.30 General Illumination: General illumination to be provided throughout the site with
minimum Lux level of 150 to 200. Task lighting to be provided to the job specific. The
illumination plan should be finalized prior to start of the work activity and reviewed and updated
based on the work progress.
4.31 Diesel Yard: Storage of diesel on site to be followed with petroleum rules and regulations
along with MOEF regulations.
Page 1321 of 1358

4.32 Testing and Fitness Certificate. Where plant or equipment in use on the project requires
a certified operator, the operator shall provide evidence of a current certificate of competency
at the project specific induction and prior to operation of the plant or equipment. Relevant
certificate of registration, testing certification must be provided for all Plant & Equipment’s.
4.33 PPE and Equipment Inspection: All project personnel to wear appropriate personal
protective equipment (PPE) relevant to the work task or site situation whilst on the site. The PPE
will comprise as a minimum
✓ Certified protection helmet
✓ High visibility vest / jacket
✓ Cut Resistance level 3 gloves always on site.
✓ Safety Shoes / Protective boots.
PPE to be inspected regularly prior usage by individual followed with weekly inspection by safety
department.
Page 1322 of 1358

4.34 Pest Control: Maintaining the health and safety of employees the, pest control, fogging to be
carried out regular intervals.
4.35 Management EHS Review – Weekly / Fortnight on-site management review to be carried out by
site management consist of Project Managers and safety officers.
5. GENERAL SITE HSE REQUIREMENTS
Minimum Standard Requirements
PPEs. (Safety Helmet, Safety Shoes, Hi-vis Everyone at site, including drivers, crane operators and
Jacket). visitors to site. Refer color coding of individuals PPE in
the bellow table.
Full Body Safety Harness with fall Any person working more than 1.8meters without
arresters and soft stitches or shock standard scaffolding.
absorber.
Page 1323 of 1358

Full-face shield, helmet, apron and All Grinder / Welder.

anklets.
Welder’s hood with welding glass having All welders.
appropriate shades
Face masks (Safe Breathing). All workers working with cement and as directed by
Project Manager team.
Ear Plugs / Safety Goggles. As directed by project manager. Goggles, gloves, dust
mask etc. need to replaced time to time or as per advice
of site safety personnel.
Cut Resistance Hand gloves. (cut All riggers, excavators, electricians, Bar benders or any
resistance no 3) other person working in field.
Safety caution and warning sign boards. As per the Required standards based on the work
activity on project.
Valve guards. All gas cylinders empty, full and in use cylinders.
Cylinder trolleys with safety chains or All gas cylinders, empty, full and in use.
safe arrangement to keep gas cylinders
vertical.
DA for any gas cutting operations. LPG or any other gas not allowed.
Flash back arresters. For all cutting torches and cylinder’s regulator.
Covered cylinder storage. All empty or full cylinders. No direct exposure to sun.
Cutting torch lighters. Proper lighters ONLY for igniting the cutting torches
to be used.
Steel working platforms and ladders. Minimum 2’ wide steel working platform for height jobs,
with handrails, mid rails and toe guards. Only steel or
Aluminum ladders are allowed unless permitted in
writing as per Risk Assessment.
Fiber clad industrial plugs with metal clad All extension boards and power distribution
tops. boards. No
Domestic electrical socket is allowed in construction
or industrial works
No Power distribution and welding cables All cables to be laid 3m high. No cable joints in the
on ground. distribution cables.
Termination Lugs. For all cable terminations including welding cables.
Area lighting on all sides of working All sides of the working areas or as required ensuring
areas. good illumination.
Certified electricians with B/C Licensed. All electricians.
ELCBs 30mA, leak current, rating. All power distribution circuits. It should be approved by
project manager representative
Seamless Safety gloves for electricians. For any panel work which is charged or in service.
Electrical panels Rubber mats in front of each panel.
Page 1324 of 1358

Double Earthing for panels. All construction power panels and distribution boards.
Equipment guards. All grinding, drilling machines, all pulleys, gearboxes and
drive belts to be covered with proper metal sheet work.
Vehicles. To be parked outside the working areas unless specific
permission is taken.
Height Works. Medical examination of the workmen and supervisors
designated to work at heights shall be taken as directed.
Fire. Fire extinguishers (ABC Type with pressure meter) and
fire buckets as directed by project manager to be
installed at site.
Cranes, Lifting tools and tackles. AIR All cranes to have valid load test certificates, load charts,
Compressor Machines etc. licensed operators and tested/certified lifting tools.
House Keeping. One or more persons to be employed regularly for
housekeeping only.
Maintenance and upkeep. All safety gadgets like regulators, guards, etc. to be
conditioned regularly.
Statutory requirements. All staff and workmen shall be covered under PF, ESI and
Workmen compensation policy as applicable. The
documentary proofs of these shall be submitted to
Project manager team as and when required.
General requirements. All height work shall be carried out on safe platforms. All
hazardous work needs Risk Assessment/JSA/ work
permit. All work needs contractor/Sub-contractor
supervision with efficient supervisor. Personnel not
following safety norms may be removed from site. All
safety guideline in available EHS Plan need strict
compliance.
PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT (ISI / CE Standard or as approved)
Safety Helmets as per the color code and safety shoes

All employees working at with steel toe for all and as per the colour coding
1
construction sites / Units. mentioned as per bellow table.
Workers mixing asphalt material Gum boots with steel toe. Safety goggles for all effected
cement, lime mortar, concrete site personnel and contractor/Sub-contractor must
2
and using such hazardous replace it periodically to make clear vision for their
materials. workers.
Welder Apron, Welding shield, safety shoes and leather

3 Welder, Cutter, Grinder
hand gloves, goggles, face shield, Nose mask etc.
Page 1325 of 1358

Jack hammer, DG Set and

Earmuffs /. Plugs, hand gloves and Safety Goggles.
4 Compressor etc, operator.
Rubber Electrical hand gloves & non-conductive Safety

5 Electrician
shoes.
Workers engaged in insulation or

Dust mask and leather hand gloves, goggles, etc.
6 similar works.
Full body harness with shock absorber. Two lanyards

Worker working at height. are compulsory with safety harness for the working
7
crew who needs to move at height works.
White Helmet (Visitor With “V” Symbol), Green Jacket, Safety Shoe, Mask,
Engineer, Visitor
Goggles.
HSE Officer Green Helmet, Green Jacket, Safety Shoe, Mask, Goggles.
Supervisor Blue Helmet, Blue Jacket, Safety Shoe, Mask, Goggles
Worker Yellow Helmet, Yellow Jacket, Safety Shoe, Hand Gloves, Mask, Goggles
Electrician, P&M Staff Red Helmet, Red Jacket, Safety Shoe, Electrical Hand Gloves, Mask,
(Specific) Goggles.
Housekeeper Grey Helmet, Yellow Jacket, Safety Shoe, Mask, Goggles, Hand Gloves
6. HSE Compliance to be adhered to.
The Factories act – 1948

The Building and other construction workers act 1996
The Electricity Act, 2003 & Indian Electricity Rules 1956
The Petroleum Act, 1934
The Energy Conservation Act, 2001
National Building Code
National Fire Protection Act
The Motor Vehicles Act, 1988
The Disaster Management Act, 2005
The Mines Act, 1952
The Atomic Energy Act, 1962
The Dock Workers (Safety, Health & Welfare) Act, 1986
The Indian Boilers Act, 1923
The Dangerous Machines (Regulation) Act, 1983
Page 1326 of 1358

The Motor Transport Workers Act, 1961

The Water (Preventions Control of Pollution) Act, 1974
The Air (Prevention & Control of Pollution) Act, 1981
The Public Liability Insurance Act, 1991
The Inflammable Substances Act, 1952
The Environment (Protection) Act, 1986
The Manufacture Storage and Import of Hazardous Chemicals Rules, 1989
The Noise Pollution (Regulation & Control) Rules, 2000
The Construction and Demolition Waste Management Rules, 2016
The National Green Tribunal Act, 2010
The Explosives Act, 1884
Gas Cylinders Rules, 2016
The Static and Mobile Pressure Vessels (unfired) Rules, 1981
The Ammonium Nitrate Rules, 2012
Bureau of Indian Standards.
• Not Limited to…………
Detailed HSE compliance as per Act & Rule.
Topic / Title Standard Requirement Applicable Act / Applicable

Rule Section / Rule /
Clause
Registration Registration of establishment BOCW Act Section 7
Registration Registration of building workers as BOCW Act Section 12
beneficiaries
Registration Register of beneficiaries BOCW Act Section 15
Registration Manner of making application for BOCW - Central Rule 23
registration Rules
Registration Grant of certificate of registration BOCW - Central Rule 24
Rules
Safety Safety committee and safety officer BOCW Act Section 12
Committee
Accident
Notice of certain accidents BOCW Act Section 12
Reporting
Page 1327 of 1358


Clause
Notice of Notice for commencement of building and
BOCW Act Section 12
Commencement other construction work
Display policy in English, Hindi and Local
BOCW - Central
Safety Policy Languages at prominent places at the Rule 39 (2)
Rules
project site
Safety Form a safety committee, conduct safety BOCW - Central Sec 38 (1) & Rule
Committee committee meetings at least once a month Rules 208
Every operator of lifting appliances or
Restriction from cranes including any scaffolding winch, or BOCW - Central
Rule 81
employment those deployed to give signals to operator Rules
shall be above the age of 21 years.
Any person with found to have impaired
Restriction from vision, hearing or reflex shall be prohibited
BOCW Act Section - 31
employment from deployment for any job at construction
site.
Personal
Provide and ensure Safety Helmets & Safety BOCW - Central
Protective Rule 46, 54
Shoes for all persons at the project site. Rules
Equipment
Personal
Industrial Safety helmet shall conform to IS
Protective BIS IS 2925:1984
2925:1984
Equipment
Safety shoes for protective and occupational
footwear for professional use shall conform
IS 15298:2002,
Personal to IS 15298:2002 Leather safety footwear
IS 11226:1993
Protective with direct mold rubber sole shall conform BIS
and
Equipment to IS 11226:1993 and Leather safety
IS 14544:1998
footwear with direct mold PVC soles shall
conform to IS 14544:1998
Personal Workers required to work in water or in wet
BOCW - Central
Protective concrete or in other similar work shall be Rule 46(2)
Rules
Equipment provided with suitable waterproof boots
Suitable eye protective devices shall be
Personal provided to all persons engaged in
BOCW - Central
Protective operations like welding, cutting, chipping, Rule 45
Rules
Equipment grinding or similar operations, which may
cause hazard to eyes.
Page 1328 of 1358

Personal Worker required to work in rain or in similar

BOCW - Central
Protective wet condition shall be provided with Rule 46(3)
Rules
Equipment waterproof coat
Workers engaged in handling sharp objects
Personal or engaged to handle materials at a building
BOCW - Central
Protective or other construction work, which may Rule 46(5)
Rules
Equipment cause hand injury, shall be provided with
suitable hand-gloves
Personal Workmen handling deformed steel bars,
Protective barbed wire, expanded metal and the like IS 7969: 1975 Clause 3.7.4
Equipment shall be required to wear gloves.
Adequate overhead protection needs to be
Overhead erected along the periphery of the building BOCW - Central Rule 41 (1) & 41
Protection which is at least 2 meter wide and not more Rules (2)
than 5 meter height.
Any area exposed to risk of falling material
Overhead is adequately cordoned off or otherwise BOCW - Central
Rule 41 (3)
Protection guarded adequately to prevent inadvertent Rules
entry of persons.
All passages, platforms and workplaces
Slip and trip must be kept free from accumulation of BOCW - Central
Rule 42
hazard debris or other materials that may cause Rules
tripping
All sharp projections or protruding nails etc.
Slip and trip BOCW - Central
need to be removed or otherwise made safe
hazard Rules
in a suitable manner
Slip and trip Stairways, walkways, scaffolds, and access IS 7969: 1975
hazard ways shall be kept free of materials, debris BIS Clause
and obstructions 7.1
Every floor opening and other openings
Guardrails &
through which persons, equipment or
Toe BOCW - Central
vehicle may fall need to be covered, Rule 42
Guard for Fall Rules
protected or guarded suitably as per the
Prevention
national standards to prevent such falls
Page 1329 of 1358


Clause
All floor openings or platforms shall be
Guardrails &
guarded by guard railing (both TOP RAIL &
Toe
MID RAIL) and with TOE GUARDS at not less BIS IS 4912:1978
Guard for Fall
than a height of 150 mm from the floor/
Prevention
platform surface
Guardrails &
Toe Every temporary wall opening shall have
BIS IS 4912:1978
Guard for Fall adequate guards.
Prevention
All guard rails shall consist of TOP RAIL, MID-
Guardrails & RAIL (or intermittent rail) and VERTICAL
Toe POSTS where the height of the upper surface
BIS IS 4912:1978
Guard for Fall of TOP RAIL shall not be less than 90cm from
Prevention the surface of floor / platform/ runway /
ramp level.
Guardrails & All railings shall be designed with adequate
Toe posts capable enough to withstand a point
BIS IS 4912:1978
Guard for Fall load of at least 90 kg applied in any direction
Prevention at any point on the top rail
Guardrails &
Ends of TOP RAILS shall not overhang the
Toe
terminal post in such way that it constitutes BIS IS 4912:1978
Guard for Fall
projection hazard
Prevention
Guardrails & TOE GUARD shall be not less than 150 mm
Toe vertical height and the gap between TOE
BIS IS 4912:1978
Guard for Fall GUARD and floor / platform / tread shall not
Prevention exceed 60mm
Guardrails & Extension platform into which materials may

be hoisted for handling shall be provided
Toe
with side rails or equivalent guards of BIS IS 4912:1978
Guard for Fall
standard specifications and it
Prevention shall be of full length of the platform size
Every floor openings and other openings
Guardrails &
through which persons may fall shall be
Toe BOCW - Central
provided with suitable equipment (such as Rule 42 (6)
Guard for Fall Rules
full body harness, fall arrestor etc.) to
Prevention
prevent such falls
Page 1330 of 1358

Guardrails & Provision of gates for hoists and wire nets on

Toe each floor/landing should be made to IS 13416: 1992 -
BIS
Guard for Fall prevent fall of workers. Clause 4.1.2
Prevention
All workers / supervisors working at
elevation should be provided with safety
Fall Prevention belts conforming to the national standards,
BOCW - Central
& all workers / supervisors to be trained and Rule 178
Rules
Protection wear safety belts.
Issue of safety belt to all employees who are
working at elevations
Wherever workers are exposed to hazards of
Fall Prevention falling from height shall be provided with
BOCW - Central
& adequate fall prevention equipment (like Rule 42 (6)
Rules
Protection Safety belt anchored with Fall arrestor, work
positioning system etc.)
Fall Prevention Every open side or opening through which a
BOCW - Central
& person, equipment may fall shall be covered Rule 42 (5)
Rules
Protection or guarded suitably to prevent such falls.
Safety net of adequate strength made of
Fall Prevention sound material conforming to national
BOCW - Central
& standards is used at site and safe fixing of Rule 179
Rules
Protection such safety nets with sufficient anchorage is
served
Wherever there is a possibility of fall of
person or any material or equipment, Safety BOCW - Central
Safety Net 42 (7)
Net shall be provided by employer in Rules
accordance with national standards (IS)
Safety net of adequate strength made of
sound material conforming to national
BOCW - Central
Safety Net standards is used at site and safe fixing of Rule 179
Rules
such safety nets with sufficient anchorage is
served
Safety Nets shall be made with square or
IS 11057: 1984 -
Safety Net diamond mesh and the length of the mesh BIS
Clause 4.1
size not greater than 100 mm (4 inches)
Life of safety net is 2 years, unless certified
Safety Net BIS IS 11057: 1984
by the manufacturer
Page 1331 of 1358


Clause
Initial sag at the center of safety net erected
IS 11057: 1984 -
Safety Net shall be between one fifth to one fourth of BIS
Clause 4.4
the length of shorter side
When more than 250 KW of electric load is
connected, periodic inspection of such
installation, testing and ensuring safety
Indian Electricity Act
Electrical Safety provisions, as specified, is to be done by a Section 3 (6)
1910
person authorized by the management.
Record of such inspection and testing is to be
maintained.
Indian Electricity Act Section 3/ Rule
Electrical Safety Grant / Application for license
1910/ Rules 1956 11(1)
Indian Electricity Act Section 3/ Rule
Electrical Safety Notice and Intimation of accidents
1910 11(1)
All electrical appliances and current carrying
equipment used at site are made of sound
material and are properly and adequately
BOCW - Central Rule 47 (4) & 47
Electrical Safety earthed. No wiring shall be left on the
Rules (5)
ground or floor at a building or other
construction site, where there is a possibility
of mechanical damage or contact with water.
DO not use copper wire as IS 5216:1982 -
Electrical Safety substitute for fuse wire BIS Clause
2..1.1
IS 5216:1982 -
Place rubber mats in front of electrical
Electrical Safety BIS Clause
switchboards
2..1.2
IS 5216:1982 -
Electrical Safety Do not use wires with poor insulation BIS Clause
2..1.3
Do not touch an electric circuit when your IS 5216:1982 -
Electrical Safety hands are wet, or bleeding from a cut or an BIS Clause
abrasion 2.1.4
All temporary electrical installations at the
construction site are provided with Earth BOCW - Central
Electrical Safety Rule 47 (6)
Leakage Circuit Breakers (ELCB) or Residual Rules
Current Circuit Breakers (RCCB)
Page 1332 of 1358

When using electric vibrators, it should be

earthed, heavily insulated and line switched BOCW - Central
Electrical Safety Rule 103
off when vibrators not in use - Inspection by Rules
Site electrical team and ensure.
All materials are stacked / stored safely
Material BOCW - Central
orderly without obstructing passages and Rule 51
Stacking Rules
ensuring stability
No material or equipment shall be stored
Material upon any floor or platform which is more BOCW - Central
Rule 51
Stacking that the safe carrying capacity of the floor / Rules
platform
Materials or equipment shall be placed at a
safe distance from the edge of the floor /
Material platform and shall not be stored in such a BOCW - Central
Rule 51
Stacking way that it may endanger the safety of Rules
persons working below or those in the
vicinity
Bricks shall be stacked on dry firm ground in
Material stacks of 50 bricks long X 10 bricks high X 4 IS 4082: 1996 -
BIS
Stacking bricks in width. Clear distance between Clause 4.5.4
adjacent stacks shall not be less than 0.8 m.
The height of stack shall not be more than
10 bags to prevent the possibility of lumping
up under pressure. The width of the stack
shall be not more than four bags length or 3
Material IS 4082: 1996 -
meters. In stacks more than 8 bags high, the BIS
Stacking Clause 4.2.2.3
cement bags shall be arranged alternately
lengthwise and crosswise so as to tie the
stacks together and minimize the danger of
toppling over.
Stack of hollow and solid concrete
blocks shall not be more than 1.2 m. The
length of the stack shall not be more than 3.0 BIS
Stacking Clause 4.6.2
m, as far as possible and the width shall be
two to three blocks.
Page 1333 of 1358


Clause
‘Timber shall be stored in stacks upon well
treated and even surfaced beams, sleepers
or brick pillars to be above the ground level
Material by at least 150 mm. The most suitable width IS 4082: 1996 -
BIS
Stacking and height of a stack are recommended to Clause 4.12.1
be about 1.5 m to 2.0 m. Distance between
adjacent stacks is recommended to be at
least 450 mm.
The glass sheets shall be lifted and stored on
its long edges against a vertical wall or other
support with the first sheet so placed that its
bottom edge is 25 mm from the vertical
support. The stacks shall be of not more
than 25 panes and shall be supported at two
points by fillets of wood at 300 mm from BIS
Stacking Clause 4.19
each end. The whole stack shall be as close
and as upright as possible. The glass sheets
of different sizes, thickness and type shall be
stacked separately. The distance between
any two stacks shall be of the order of 400
mm.
In excavations a berm of not less than 1 m
shall be maintained to keep excavated soil
where adequate shoring is designed to
carry the load is provided. In case no
IS 3764:1992 -
shoring is provided, a clear berm of width
Excavation BIS Clause
not less than one third final depth of
excavation need to be provided. 7.1 & 7.1.1
In all such cases substantial toe-boards shall
be provided to prevent ‘roll backs’ into the
trench.
No material or load shall be placed or
stacked or handled near the edge of any
excavation as it may cause injury to the
persons employed below. Tools or IS 3764:1992 -
Excavation materials, such as wheel barrows, shovels, BIS Clause
picks, tile, cement, lumber and other 8.1 & 8.2
materials far enough from the edge of the
trench to prevent their being
inadvertently knocked into the trench.
Page 1334 of 1358

Roads shall be identified and demarcated to IS 3764:1992 -

Excavation restrict vehicles being driven close to the tip/ BIS Clause
edges of excavation pits. 9.3
Excavations shall be provided with one
IS 3764:1992 -
ladder per 30 m of length and fractions
thereof. In case of hazardous works, ladders
10.3
shall be provided at every 15 m of length.
At every part of the excavation to be
IS 3764:1992 -
barricaded properly and maintained at all
times to prevent persons or materials or
11
livestock from falling into the excavation.
Excavations shall be provided with adequate IS 3764:1992 -
Excavation illumination, adequate warning lights and BIS Clause
warning signage. 12.1
Air shall be considered unfit for workmen to
breath if it contains any of the following:
i. Less than 19 percent of oxygen by
volume, or ii. More than 1 percent of
carbon dioxide by volume, or
iii. More than 0.01 percent of carbon IS 3764:1992 -
Excavation monoxide by volume, or iv. More than BIS Clause
0.002 percent of hydrogen Sulphide gas by 15.2.1
volume, or
v. More than 0.002 percent of nitrous oxide
by volume. Adequate precautions need to be
taken in case air is found to be unfit for
breath.

Clause
Pile rigs / attachments / reinforcement cages
shall not be erected or handled in dangerous
Piling proximity to electric conductors and no two BIS IS 3764:1992 - 3.1
pile rigs shall be erected at a distance less
than longest leg in either rigs.
Where electricity is used as power for piling IS 3764:1992 -
Piling rig, only armored cable conforming to the BIS Clause
relevant Indian Standard shall be used and 3.17
Page 1335 of 1358

the cable shall be thoroughly waterproofed.
Piles shall be prepared at a distance at least

equal to twice the length of the longest pile IS 5121: 1969 -
Piling BIS
from the pile driver Clause 4.2
/ rig.
All holes which are left unattended shall be
adequately and securely covered or shall IS 5121: 1969 -
Piling BIS
have an effective barrier placed as close to Clause 7.1
the edge as is practicable.
Adequate measures to ensure safety,
including planning of appropriate mode of
IS 5121: 1969 -
Piling driving and operation, is done during driven BIS
Clause 9.1
piles as the vibrations may cause damage to
adjoining structures or service lines
Person responsible for the concreting work
shall supervise the erection of form work
and other supports and carries out thorough
inspection of every formwork after erection
as well as during concreting to ensure that
Form Work the same is safe. Any unsafe condition
Supervision identified needs to be immediately rectified. BOCW Central Rules Rule 104 (a) to 104
(e)
and inspection Such records of inspection to be maintained
(i) Supervision of all formwork during
erection (ii). Inspection after erection and
during concreting.
(iii). Unsafe conditions to be rectified
immediately. (iv). Records to be maintained
Scaffolds shall be provided with longitudinal IS 3696: 1987
Scaffolds brazing (diagonal bracing or zig-zag bracing) BIS (Part 1)
at a spacing not exceeding 10 metres - Clause 4.2.2.1
Railings should be considered as an essential
part of every scaffold and should be
provided for all working platforms higher
than 2 m above the floor level. Standard
IS 3696: 1987
railings may be constructed of MS pipe or
Scaffolds BIS (Part 1)
any other suitable metal sections.
The railings shall consist of a top rail from - Clause 5.1 & 5.2
900 mm to 1050 mm above the platform
level and mid-rail halfway between the top
rail and the platform.
Page 1336 of 1358

To protect workers on lower platform

against falling objects from higher levels,
overhead protection should be provided on IS 3696: 1987
Scaffolds the scaffold. BIS (Part 1)
This protection should be not more than 3 m - Clause 5.3
above the platform/floor and should be
planking or other suitable material.
Minimum width of platforms above a height
of 2 metres shall not be less than 900mm. IS 3696: 1987
Scaffolds BIS
Width of platforms at a height of 2 metres or (Part 1)
less shall or be less than 500 mm
The use of barrels, boxes, loose tile blocks or
IS 3696: 1987
other unsuitable objects as supports
provided as makeshift arrangements for
- Clause 9.3
working platforms shall not be permitted.
Care shall be taken to see that no
IS 3696: 1987
uninsulated electric wire exists within 3 m. of
the working platform, gangways, runs, etc.,
- Clause 10.1.1
of the scaffold.
Step ladders are self-supported 'A' shape IS 3696: 1991 Part
Step Ladders ladders with a maximum allowed length of BIS 2-
6m Clause 4.2.1.4

Clause
Minimum inside width of step shall not be IS 3696: 1991 Part
Step Ladders less than BIS 2-
300 mm Clause 6.3.2
Metal ladders shall not be used around
electrical equipment or circuits of any
kind where there is a possibility of coming IS 3696: 1991 Part
Step Ladders in contact with the current. Metal ladders BIS 2-
shall be marked with reading “CAUTION: Clause 7.2.11
DO NOT USE NEAR ELECTRICAL
EQUIPMENT”.
Manual When materials need to be handled
IS 7969: 1975 -
Material manually each workman shall be instructed BIS
Clause 2.2
Handing about proper lifting method.
Page 1337 of 1358

Maximum permissible weight load allowable

to be carried by an adult man is restricted as
Manual
55kg and for an adult woman it is 30 kg. BOCW - Central
Material Rule 38
Any load more than the mentioned weight Rules
Handing
needs to be handled as a group or by
mechanical aid.
Workmen handling bulk cement, lime or fine
pozzolana shall wear protective clothing,
respirators, and goggles, shall be instructed
Manual
in the need of cleanliness to prevent IS 7969: 1975 -
Material BIS
dermatitis; Clause 3.3.1
Handing
They shall be provided with hand cream,
petroleum jelly, or similar preparation for
protection of exposed skin.
Housekeeping Debris shall not be thrown inside or outside
BOCW - Central
& from any height of the building or other Rule 52
Rules
Debris Disposal construction work.
Accumulation of debris in such a way that it
Housekeeping
may constitute hazard, needs to be avoided BOCW - Central
& Rule 52
and debris needs to be kept moist to bring Rules
Debris Disposal
down the dust
Housekeeping Glass, Nails, Screws, etc should be removed IS 13416: 1994
& first and stacked separately so that these do BIS (Part
Debris Disposal not injure workers or pedestrians. 3) - Clause 3.1.1
Nails and screws may be extracted or
Housekeeping IS 13416: 1994
hammered in and blunted before disposal.
& BIS (Part
Loose nails and screws may be removed by
Debris Disposal 3) - Clause 3.1.1
the use of magnet.
Housekeeping The area on ground where debris is likely to IS 13416: 1994
& fall should be barricaded and appropriate BIS (Part
Debris Disposal warning boards and danger signs displayed. 3) - Clause 6(a)
& Water sprinkled to prevent dust nuisance BIS (Part
Debris Disposal 3) - Clause 6(b)
From safety point of view, carrying of debris
on head through stairs should be avoided as
Housekeeping far as possible, by adopting mechanical IS 13416: 1994
& meat&&folding for conveyance of debris. BIS (Part
Debris Disposal However, if it is unavoidable, carrying of 3) - Clause 6(d)
debris on head may be permitted in case of
three floor constructions
Page 1338 of 1358

Workmen should be provided with suitable

protective gears for personal safety during
& BIS (Part
works, like safety helmets, boots, hand
Debris Disposal 3) - Clause 6(n)
gloves, goggles, special attire, etc.
Floor Each Floor to be numbered legibly BOCW - Central Rule 53
Numbering Rules
Ensure adequate illumination of workplace, BOCW - Central
Illumination Rule 50
passages, staircases, excavated areas etc. Rules
Illumination at passages, stairs, corridors etc.
Illumination Factories Rules Rule 31
should not be less than 22 lux at all times.
For work during the night lighting of at least IS 5121: 1969 -
Illumination 150 lux intensity shall be provided at the BIS Clause 2.2
work site.
Illumination at workplace should not be less
than 65 lux measured 90 cm above
Illumination horizontal floor surface. Factories Rules Rule 31 & 32
Adequate care needs to be taken to avoid
glares.

Clause
All dangerous and moving parts of
Machine machineries, chains, gears etc need to be BOCW - Central
Rule 37
Guards adequately fenced / guarded and lubrication Rules
prohibited when parts are moving
It is the DUTY OF THE EMPLOYER not to allow
Lifting
Lifting Appliances, Lifting Gears & Devices,
Appliances
Transport equipment, vehicles or any other BOCW - Central
& Lifting Rule 5 (8)
device or equipment to be used which does Rules
Tackles /
not comply with the legal requirements of
Gears
BOCW Act / Rules
Lifting Ensure that lifting appliances are tested and
Appliances examined ANNUALLY by a Govt. authorized
BOCW - Central
& Lifting competent person. Records of such Rule 56, 73 & 74
Rules
Tackles / periodical test and examination prepared
Gears with Test certificates documented.
Lifting Marking / tagging / other means of clear
BOCW - Central
Appliances legible display of lifting appliances and loose Rule 61
Rules
& Lifting gear for its Safe Working Load (SWL)
Page 1339 of 1358

Tackles /
Gears
Lifting Ensure that the chains are examined once at

Appliances least every month. Identify the responsible
BOCW - Central
& Lifting person and ensure that Inspection is carried Rule 70
Rules
Tackles / out every month and records of such
Gears inspections maintained
Lifting Ensure that wire ropes of lifting appliances
Appliances or lifting gear is inspected by a responsible
BOCW - Central
& Lifting person at least once in every 3 months Rule 71 (a), 71 (b)
Rules
Tackles /
Gears
Lifting No wire rope is used if the total visible
Appliances broken wires exceed 10 percent of total
BOCW - Central
& Lifting number of wires in a length of 8 times the Rule 71 C
Rules
Tackles / diameter
Gears
Manner of Test and Examination for Lifting
Appliances with its accessory gears:
Lifting
i) SWL up to 20 Tonnes - Test load shall
Appliances Schedule I as per
be 25% in excess of SWL BOCW - Central
& Lifting Rule 56(a), 71(a) &
ii) SWL 20 to 50 Tonnes - Test load 5% Rules
Tackles / 72
in excess of SWL
Gears
iii) SWL above 50 Tonnes - Test load
10% in excess of SWL
Manner of Test and Examination of Lifting
Lifting Gears like ring, shackles, hook, chain, eye-
Appliances bolt, clamp, pulley block etc: Schedule I as per
BOCW - Central
& Lifting i) SWL Up to 25 Tonnes - Test load shall be Rule 56(a), 71(a) &
Rules
Tackles / TWO times the SWL ii) SWL above 25 72
Gears Tonnes - Test load shall be [20 + 1.22 x SWL]
Tonnes
Manner of Test and Examination for
Container buckets, Concrete buckets,
Material lifting tub, Lifting frames etc :
Lifting
i) SWL Up to 10 Tonnes - Test load
Appliances Schedule I as per
shall be TWO times the SWL BOCW - Central
& Lifting Rule 56(a), 71(a) &
ii) SWL 10 to 160 Tonnes - Test load Rules
Tackles / 72
shall be [9.6 +
Gears
(1.04 times SWL)] Tonnes
iii) SWL above 160 Tonnes - Test load
shall be 10% in excess of SWL
Page 1340 of 1358

Reverse Horn Every vehicle or earth moving equipment at

& General a construction site is equipped with
BOCW - Central
Condition of Silencers, Tail lights, Rule 95
Rules
Vehicles & Power & Hand brakes, Reversing Alarm and
Eqpt. head lamp / search light
Adequate measures need to be taken to
Dust, Gas, BOCW - Central
control concentration of dust, gases or Rule 43
Fumes etc Rules
fumes within the permissible limits
First Aid First Aid BOCW Act Section 36
First Aid Ensure availability of first aid boxes at each BOCW - Central Sec 36 & Rule 231
project site Rules

Clause
Ensure that an ambulance van is provided at
the project or an agreement is made with a
nearby hospital for providing an ambulance BOCW - Central
First Aid Rule 227
van for transportation of serious cases of Rules
accident or sickness of the building workers
to the hospital promptly
Page 1341 of 1358

Ensure that the contents of the first aid box

is as per the BOCW Act/ Rules:
1. Eye wash bottles filled with distilled water
2. 4% xylocaine eye drops and Boric eye
drops
3. Small sterilised dressings - 24 nos
4. Medium size sterilised dressings - 12 nos
5. Large size sterilised dressings - 12 Nos
6. Burn dressings Large size - 12 nos
7. At least 200 ml bottle of antiseptic lotion
8. 15cm sterilised cotton wool - 12 pkt
9. 2% solution of Mercurochrome - 200 ml
bottle
10. Salvolatile - 120 ml
11. Scissors - 1 pair
BOCW - Central
First Aid 12. Adhesive plaster (6cm width) - 1 roll Sec 36 & Rule 231
Rules
13. Adhesive plaster (2cm width) - 2 rolls
14. Sterilised eye pad in separate packets - 12
pcs
15. Aspirin or analgesic tablets - 100 tablets
16. Roller bandage (10 cm wide) - 12 nos
17. Roller bandage (5cm wide) - 12 nos
18. One tourniquet
19. Supply of suitable splints
20. Safety Pins - 3 pkts
21.Kidney tray - 1 no
22. Snake bite lancet - 1
23. Potassium permanganate crystals
24. Triangular bandages - 6 nos
25. Sterilised, latex hand gloves - 2 pairs
26. First-Aid leaflet - 1 copy
Ensure that First Aid register is maintained at BOCW - Central

First Aid
the project site and all injuries are recorded. Rules
Ensure that sufficient number of stretchers BOCW - Central
Stretchers Rule 228
available at the project to meet emergency. Rules
Ensure that essential lifesaving aids and
appliances required to handle head injuries,
Emergency BOCW - Central
bleeding, fractures, dislocations, shock, Rule 232
Medical Care Rules
dehydration, burn, sunstroke, insect bite,
bee sting etc. as stipulated in the rule
Page 1342 of 1358

Accidents resulting in (i) loss of life and (ii)

injuries resulting in absence of worker from
duty for 48 hours or more needs to be
reported in 'Form XIV' within 4 hours
through telegram, telephone, fax or other
means including special messenger to:
Report of Labour Commissioner BOCW Act & BOCW
1. Sec 39 & 210
Accidents 2. Chief inspector, Directorate of Central Rules
Factories
3. The next of kin or other relative of
the person involved in accident.
4. BOCW beneficiary board, in case the
worker is a beneficiary.
Any accident causing disablement
subsequently resulting in death needs to be
communicated within 72 hours to:
1. The Labour Commissioner
Report of BOCW Act & BOCW
2. The Chief inspector, Directorate
Accidents Central Rules
of Factories 3. The next of kin or other
relative of the person involved in accident.
4. BOCW beneficiary board, in case the
worker is a beneficiary.

Clause
Noise levels need to be monitored regularly
to identify high noise areas. Ensure that
noise levels not to exceed limits in Schedule
VII of BOCW
At any work, continuous noise level shall not
exceed:
Permissible 90 dB(A) – 8hours
Noise 92 dB(A) – 6 hours BOCW Central Rules Rule 34
Limit 94 dB(A) – 4 hours
95 dB(A) – 3 hours
j) dB(A) – 2 hours
100 dB(A) – 1 hour
110 dB(A) – 30 minutes
Exposure to noise level in excess of 115 dBA
is not permitted
Page 1343 of 1358

Noise limit for generator sets up to 1000 kVA

Permissible Environment
manufactured after 1st Jan 2005 shall not
Noise Protection Rule 94 (1)
exceed 75 dB(A) at 1 metre from the
Limit Rules, 1986
enclosure surface
Permissible Diesel gensets should be provided with Environment
Noise integral enclosure at the manufacturing Protection Rule 94 (1)
Limit itself Act
Drinking Water Drinking water BOCW Act Section 32
• pH shall be between 6.5 and 8..5 •
Odour & Taste - Agreeable
• Sulphide – Below traceable limits
• Iron – 0.3 mg/l
• Ammonia – 0.5 mg/l
• Nitrate – 45 mg/l
• Chloramines – 0.2 mg/l
• Mercury – 0.001 mg/l
• Cadmium – 0.003 mg/l
• Lead – 0.01 mg/l
• Nickel – 0.02 mg/l
Drinking Water • Chloroform – 0.1 mg/l BIS IS 10500
• Bromoform – 0.1 mg/l
• Cyanide – 0.05 mg/l
• Total Chromium – 0.05 mg/l
• Turbidity – 1 NTU *
• Dissolved Solids – 500 mg/l *
• Total Hardness – 200 mg/l *
• Total Alkalinity – 200 mg/l *
• Total Arsenic – 0.01 mg/l *
* Relaxation allowed if alternate source

absent
Adequate water to be provided for washing
Water for other and toilet use. The same needs to be
BOCW Rules Rule 244
uses arranged close to the bathing / washing /
toilet facility
Temporary accommodation facility shall
Labour have separate cooking, bathing, washing &
BOCW Act Sec 34 (1) & (2)
Accommodation lavatory facilities and be either within the
site or as near as possible.
Page 1344 of 1358

Sufficient latrine and urinal provided

separately for male & female workers. The
same shall be ensured to have privacy.
Requirement of Latrines & Urinals:
At least One Latrine per 25 male workers and
Labour Toilets One BOCW Act Sec 33
Latrine per 25 female workers separately
and, One urinal for 25 male workers and
One Urinal for 25 female workers
separately in addition to the latrines
provided
It is the DUTY OF THE EMPLOYER to keep Sec 33 & Central
BOCW Act & BOCW
Labour Toilets latrines, urinals, washing facilities and Rule
Central Rules
canteen in a clean and hygienic condition 243
Latrines & urinals shall be adequately
Labour Toilets lighted and shall be maintained in a clean BOCW Central Rules Rule 243 (d)
and sanitary condition.
Welfare Latrines and urinals BOCW Act Section 33

Clause
Welfare Accommodation BOCW Act Section 34
Welfare Canteens etc BOCW Act Section 37
Paints, varnishes, lacquers, thinners and
other flammable materials shall be kept in a
IS 7969: 1975
properly sealed or closed containers. The
Fire Safety BIS Clause
container shall be kept in a well-ventilated
3.9.1
location, free from excessive heat, smoke,
sparks or flame.
Any spillage during measurement and IS: 13416 (Part 5):
Fire Safety dispensing of liquid fuel should be caught in BIS 1994 – Clause
large leak-proof tray or pan 5.3.2
Inflammable liquids, gas cylinders and
IS: 13416 (Part 5):
explosive substances should be stored
Fire Safety BIS 1994 – Clause
separately at a distance not less than 15 m
4.4.1
from buildings, plants and stores.
Approach roads should be planned to
IS: 13416 (Part 5):
Fire Safety facilitate firefighting operations and shall be BIS
1994 – Clause 6.8
at least 5m wide maintained free from
Page 1345 of 1358

blockage.
Establish fire points with adequate number

of fire extinguishers by estimating the
Fire Safety BOCW Central Rules Rule 35 (a), (i)
requirements of fire extinguishers. Provide
training on the operation.
Class A Fire with Light hazard (which
includes offices, assembly halls, canteen
etc.): ONE 5kg Dry Powder (ABC) type or
water type extinguisher for every 600 square
metres and ONE DRY SAND or WATER
BUCKET at every 100 square metres with a
minimum of ONE Extinguisher and TWO
Buckets at a reach of 25 metres
Class A Fire with ordinary hazard (which

includes carpentry shop, small yards etc.):
ONE 5k Dry Powder (ABC) type fire
extinguisher for every 600 square metre of
floor area and ONE DRY SAND BUCKET or
Fire Safety WATEr BUCKET for every 100 square metre Factories Rules Rule 62 (A)
of floor area, with at least 2 extingusihers and
4 buckets (either dry sand or water bucket) per
compartment at a travel distance of not more
than 15metres.
Class B Fire (petrol, kerosene, diesel, paint,

flammable solvents etc.): ONE 5 kg Dry
Powder or 9 litre Foam type or 9 kg Carbon
dioxide type extinguisher and ONE DRY
SAND POWDER provided in addition to the
requirements laid for CLASS A Fire with
ordinary hazard.
Class C Fire (Gases eg. LPG, Acetylene etc)

Fire Safety Ensure adequate water supply at ample BOCW Central Rules Rule 35 (a), (ii)
pressure
Persons are trained to operate the fire
Fire Safety BOCW Central Rules Rule 35 (a), (iii)
extinguishing equipment
Maintain & inspect fire extinguishers
Fire Safety annually and display the date of inspection BOCW Central Rules Rule 35 (b)
and due date on the extinguishers
Hydraulic pressure testing of fire
Fire Safety extinguishers shall be carried out in 3 years BIS 2190: 2010 Annex E
for all gas cartridge type extinguishers
Page 1346 of 1358

Life span of fire extinguisher is maximum 10

years from D147the date of manufacture,
Fire Safety BIS 2190: 2010 Annex F
after which the extinguishers need to be
replaced with new ones

Clause
Prepare Emergency Action Plan for the
following in case number of total number of
workers exceed 500 on any working day and
obtain approval from the Directorate of
Factories:
(a) Fire & Explosion
(b) Collapse of Lifting Appliances &
Emergency Transport equipment BOCW Central Rules Rule 36
Plan © Collapse of building, sheds or structures
etc
(d) gas leakage or spillage of dangerous
chemicals etc.
(e) Drowning, sinking of vessels etc.
(f) landslides, floods, storms and other
natural calamities.
Emergency Prepare Emergency Preparedness Plan and
BOCW Central Rules Rule 36
Plan display the same at prominent places
Emergency Prepare & Display Emergency Preparedness
BOCW Central Rules Rule 36
Plan Group at various prominent places at site
Bathing Water Quality:
i) pH between 6.5 and 8.5 ii) Dissolved

oxygen not less than 5mg/litre iii) Environment
Water quality Biochemical oxygen not more than Protection Rule 94 (1)
3mg/ litre iv) Fecal coliform – Rules, 1986
Maximum 2500 MPN/ 100ml
v) Fecal steptococco – Maximum 500 MPN/
100ml
Emission limits:
Nitrous oxide (Nox): 9.2 g/kW-hr Environment
Diesel
Hydrocarbon (HC): 1.3 g/kW-hr Protection Ruile 95 (1)
Generator
Carbon Monoxide (CO): 3.5 g/kW-hr Rules, 1986
Particulate Matter (PM): 0.3 g/kW-hr
Page 1347 of 1358

Smoke limit of Diesel gen set is 0.7 at full Environment

Diesel
load (light absorption coefficient) Protection Ruile 95 (1)
Generator
Rules, 1986
All welding sets used are of adequate BOCW Rules –
Arc Welding Rule 163
capacity and suitable type Central
Frame of the welding machine shall be IS 818-1968 –
Arc Welding grounded/ earthed BIS Clause
4.1.2
IS 818-1968 –
Arc Welding Work leads should be as short as possible BIS Clause
4.1.2
Electrodes shall be removed from holders
IS 818-1968 –
when not in use to eliminate danger of
Arc Welding BIS Clause
electrical contact with persons or conducting
4.1.3 (B)
objects
Welders and welding supervisors shall check
IS 818-1968 –
their equipment regularly to see that
electrical connections and insulation on the
4.1.3 ©
holders and cable are in good order
All arc-welding equipment shall be IS 818-1968 –
Arc Welding maintained in safe working order at all times. BIS Clause
Periodic inspection shall be conducted 4.4.1.1
AC Transformers shall conform to IS: 1851- IS 818-1968 –
Arc Welding 1966 and dc arc-welding generator sets shall BIS Clause
conform to IS : 26411964* 4.2.2.1 & 4.2.3.2
All welding sets and control apparatus shall IS 818-1968 –
Arc Welding be enclosed except for the operating wheels, BIS Clause
levers or handles; 4.2.3.3
Input terminals shall be completely enclosed
and accessible only by means of tools. IS 818-1968 –
Arc Welding Welding (secondary) terminals shall be so BIS Clause
arranged that no current-carrying parts are 4.2.3.5 & 4.2.3.6
exposed to accidental contact.
IS 818-1968 –
All welding cables shall conform to IS: 434
(Part I): 1964
4.2.5.1
The cable shall be free from repair or splices IS 818-1968 –
Arc Welding up to a minimum distance of 3.0 m from the BIS Clause
electrode holder 4.2.5.2
Page 1348 of 1358


Clause
Welding equipment used in the open shall be IS 818-1968 –
Arc Welding protected from inclement weather BIS Clause
conditions 4.4.1.5
Work lead cable and electrode lead cable IS 818-1968 –
Arc Welding shall be adequately insulated at all times BIS Clause
4.4.2.1
A welder or helper working on platforms,
scaffolds or runways shall be protected
against falling. This may be accomplished by
IS 818-1968 –
the use of railings, safety belts, life lines, or
such other equally effective safeguards. Life
7.1.3
belts and similar devices shall be of a type
that will permit quick escape of the
workman
All electric welding operations shall be
IS 818-1968 –
screened to prevent the rays of the arc from
affecting other persons working in the
7.2.3.3
neighborhood.
Welding shield or goggles of adequate
IS 818-1968 –
shading shall be used to protect the eyes of
persons from rays and other small flying
7.2.3
pieces of slag while chipping
Gas Cutting & IS 818: 1968 –
Cylinders shall be kept away from sources of
Gas welding BIS Clause
heat.
3.1.2
Gas Cutting & Fuel-gas cylinders shall be placed with valve- IS 818: 1968 –
Gas welding end up whenever they are in use. BIS Clause
3.7.3.2 – ©
Cylinders shall be stored in a well-protected,
well ventilated, dry location, well away oil, IS 818: 1968 –
Gas Cutting &
diesel, petrol, kerosene paint, turpentine or BIS Clause
Gas welding
other highly combustible or flammable 3.7.1.2
items.
Cylinders containing oxygen and
combustible gases, such as acetylene, LPG, IS 818: 1968 –
Gas Cutting &
hydrogen etc. should not be stored in the BIS Clause
Gas welding
same room. 3.7.1.3
However, if stored in the same room under
Page 1349 of 1358

unavoidable circumstances, they should be

kept far apart and stored upright.
Gas Cutting & Acetylene shall not be utilized above a gauge IS 818: 1968 –
Gas welding pressure of 0.14 kg/cm2 BIS Clause
3.7.1.2
Cylinders shall be kept sufficiently far away
IS 818: 1968 –
Gas Cutting & from the actual welding or cutting operations
BIS Clause
Gas welding so that sparks, hot slag, or flames might not
3.7.2.9
reach them.
Empty cylinders shall be marked ‘empty’ or ‘
MT ’ segregated from full cylinders and IS 818: 1968 –
Gas Cutting &
promptly returned to the supplier with valve BIS Clause
Gas welding
protection caps in place. All valves shall be 3.7.2.13
closed.
Inside a building cylinder storage shall be
limited to a gas capacity of 56 cubic meter or IS 818: 1968 –
Gas Cutting &
112 kg of liquefied petroleum gas, unless BIS Clause
Gas welding
special grants obtained from regulating 3.7.3.2 – (A)
authorities.
Oxygen cylinders, cylinder valves, couplings,
regulators, hose and apparatus shall be kept IS 818: 1968 –
Gas Cutting &
free from oily or greasy substances. Oxygen BIS Clause
Gas welding
cylinders or apparatus shall not be handled 3.7.4.1 – (B)
with oily hands or gloves.
Oxygen cylinders shall not be stored near
(a) highly combustible material,
especially oil and grease; IS 818: 1968 –
Gas Cutting &
(b) reserve stocks of calcium carbide, BIS Clause
Gas welding
and acetylene or other fuel-gas cylinders; 3.7.4.2
(c) any other substance likely to cause
or accelerate fire
Gas Cutting & Hose for welding and cutting operations IS 818: 1968 –
Gas welding shall conform to IS : 4470 -1964 or IS : 3572- BIS Clause
1966 3.10.1
Red is the generally recognized colour for IS 818: 1968 –
Gas Cutting &
acetylene and other fuel-gas hose and green BIS Clause
Gas welding
or black for oxygen hose. 3.10.1.1
Page 1350 of 1358


Clause
Where more than 50 female workers are
employed a room maintained in clean and
sanitary condition shall be provided for
children under than age of six years which Section – 35 (1) &
Creches BOCW Act
shall be adequately ventilated and (2)
illuminated. Such room/ crech shall be under
the charge of women trained in the care of
children and infants.
Licensing of
Central Motor
drivers of
Renewal of driving license Vehicles 18
motor
Rules, 1989
vehicles
Licensing of
Central Motor
drivers of
Duration of a license and renewal thereof Vehicles 25
motor
Rules, 1989
vehicles
Registration of Central Motor
Motor Vehicles Renewal of certificate of registration Vehicles 52
Rules, 1989
Motor Vehicles Validity of certificate of fitness Vehicles 62
Rules, 1989
Pollution under control certificate for the
Motor Vehicles Vehicles
vehicles
Rules, 1989
Gas Cylinder Gas Cylinder rules
Possession, and transport of cylinders 3
Safety 1989
Safety relief devices 5
Safety 1989
Marking on cylinders 6
Safety 1989
Markings on valve 7
Safety 1989
Identification colors 8
Safety 1989
Labelling of cylinders 9
Safety 1989
Page 1351 of 1358

Gas Cylinder Prohibition of smoking, fires, lights and Gas Cylinder rules
14
Safety dangerous substances 1989
Handling and use 18
Safety 1989
Gas Cylinder Loading, unloading and transport of Gas Cylinder rules
20
Safety cylinders 1989
Storage of cylinders 21
Safety 1989
No person shall handle any radioactive
Atomic material, or operate any radiation generating
Atomic Energy Rules,
Radiation / equipment except in accordance with the 3
2004
Energy terms and conditions of a license and an
authorization shall be necessary.
Atomic Atomic Energy Rules,
Radiation / (8) Issuance of license 2004 8
Energy
Radiation / (9) Period of validity of License 2004 9
Energy
Radiation / Restrictions on use of sources 2004 12
Energy
Radiation / Radiation symbol or Warning sign 2004 14
Energy
Safety Standards and Safety Codes: The
competent authority may issue safety codes
and safety standards, from time to time,
prescribing the requirements for radiation
Atomic
installation, sealed sources, radiation Atomic Energy Rules,
Radiation / 17 (1)
generating equipment and equipment 2004
Energy
containing radioactive sources, and
transport of radioactive material and the
licensee shall ensure compliance with the
same.
Page 1352 of 1358


Clause
Prohibition of employment of persons below
certain age:
1) No person under the age of 18 years
Atomic
shall be Atomic Energy Rules,
Radiation / 17 (2)
employed as a worker 2004
Energy
2) No person under the age of 16 years
shall be taken as trainee or employed as an
apprentice for radiation work
The maximum permissible sound pressure
level for new diesel generator (DG) sets with
rated capacity up to 1000 KVA,
Environmental
Diesel manufactured on or after the 1 July 2004
Protection Rules,
Generator shall be 75 dB(A) at 1m from the enclosure
Amendment 2003
surface. The diesel generator sets should be
provided with integral acoustic enclosure at
the manufacturing stage itself.
Environmental
Diesel Noise limits for diesel generator sets not
Protection Rules,
Generator covered above, shall be as follows:
Amendment 2003
1) Noise from DG set shall be controlled by Environmental
Diesel providing an acoustic enclosure or by Protection Rules,
Generator treating the room acoustically, at the users Amendment 2003
end.
2) The acoustic enclosure or acoustic
treatment of the room shall be designed for
minimum 25 dB (A) insertion loss or for
meeting the ambient noise standards,
Environmental
Diesel whichever is on the higher side. A suitable
Protection Rules,
Generator exhaust muffler with insertion loss of 25 dB
Amendment 2003
(A) shall also be provided. The measurement
of Insertion Loss shall be done at different
points at 0.5 m from the acoustic
enclosure/room, and then averaged.
3) A proper routine and preventive
maintenance procedure for DG Set shall be
Environmental
Diesel set and followed in consultation with DG
Protection Rules,
Generator manufacturer which would help to prevent
Amendment 2003
noise levels of DG Set from deteriorating
with use.
Page 1353 of 1358

Environmental
Diesel 4) DG Set shall be operated only in case of
Protection Rules,
Generator power failure
Amendment 2003
If the quantity of Class B Petroleum products
(eg diesel) in the possession at any one place
Fuel / exceeds
Petroleum Rules,
Petroleum 2500 litres and it is contained in a receptacle 7
2002
Use and store exceeding 1000 litres in capacity, storage
license from Chief Controller of Explosives is
to be obtained.
All due precautions shall be taken at all times
Fuel /
to prevent escape of petroleum into drain, Petroleum Rules,
Petroleum 9
sewer, harbour, river or watercourse or over 2002
Use and store
any public road or railway line.
Fuel / No person shall smoke and no matches,
Petroleum Rules,
Petroleum fires, lights or articles or substances capable 11
2002
Use and store of causing ignition shall allow at any time.
The Company shall give notice of an accident
involving petroleum attended loss of human
Fuel /
life or injury to person or property, if any, to Petroleum Rules,
Petroleum 27
the nearest Magistrate or to the officer-in- 2002
Use and store
charge of the nearest police station and to
the Chief Controller of Explosives.
Waste Ensure collection, storage and disposal of
Hazardous Wastes
Management hazardous wastes such as Spent Lubricating
Act, 4
and Oil, Oily Cotton Waste as per the provisions
1989
Disposal of the rules
Waste Maintain records of waste generation,
Hazardous Wastes
Management collection, storage, transportation and its
Act, 4A
and disposal in the specified form (Form 3)
1989
Disposal

Clause
No child shall be employed or permitted to
Child Labour / Child Labour
work in any of the occupations set forth in
Prohibition of (Protection and
Part B of the Schedule (Building and
Employment construction industry). Regulation) Act, 1968
Page 1354 of 1358

"Child' means a person who has not

completed his fourteenth year of age.
1 Persons handling insecticides shall

be adequately protected with appropriate
clothing
2 The protective clothing shall be
made of materials which prevent or resist
the penetration of any form of insecticides
formulations. The materials shall also be
washable so that the toxic elements may be
Use of removed after each use.
insecticide A complete suite of protective The Insecticide Act,
3 39
/ Pest control clothing shall consist of the following 1968
measures
dresses, namely:
(a) protective outer
garment/overalls/hood/hat (b) rubber
goves or such other protective gloves
extending half-way up to the fore-arm,
made of materials impermeable to
liquids
(c) dust-proof goggles
(d) boots
1 It shall be the duty of pest control

operator to dispose packages or surplus
materials and washing in a safe manner so
Use of
as to prevent environmental or water
insecticide/ The Insecticide Act,
pollution 44
Pest control 1968
2 The used packages shall not be left
measures
outside to prevent their re-use
3 The packages shall be broken and
buried away from habitation
Page 1355 of 1358

Financial Bid For
“Appointment of EPC Contractor for Construction of Group VIII Projects comprising of multi-
storey hostel blocks, academic building, faculty offices & apartments and other associated
infrastructure at IIM Indore.”
Financial Bid is available on e- procurement website of MoE having URL-

Note:
1. The Financial Bid is to be filled through e-procurement portal namely CPP through
2. Any other mode of bid submission will not be accepted.
Page 1356 of 1358

INDIAN INSTITUTE OF MANAGEMENT INDORE

Prabandh Shikhar, Rau-Pithampur Road, Indore – 453556 (M.P.), India
Financial Bid
Name of work: "Appointment of EPC Contractor for construction of Group VIII Projects comprising of multi-storey
hostel blocks, academic building, faculty offices & apartments and other associated infrastructure at IIM Indore.
NIT No. IIMI/Project/15/2023/150 File No.497

Bidders Name:
Consolidated
Amount In TOTAL
TOTAL
Sl. Figures To be AMOUNT
Description Quantity Units AMOUNT
No. entered by the in Rs.
In Words
Bidder (in Rs.) (Excl. GST)
(Excl. GST)
EPC Contract for construction of Group VIII
Projects Comprising of multi-storey
hostel blocks, academic building, faculty
offices & Apartments and other associated
Infrastructure at IIM Indore & other
1 requisite as per this RFP. 1.00 LS
(Important Instruction for interpretation -
Due to format constraint the quantity
mentioned in the column of Quantity as
1.00 which should be read as "as Detailed
in this RFP")
Note: -
1.The Consolidated Price shall be for the
total Scope of works as detailed in the RFP.
The Bidders are required to quote a
consolidated amount quoted for the entire
scope of this RFP excluding GST. GST, PF &
ESIC would be reimbursed, as applicable at
actuals during currency of this contract.
PF,ESIC shall be reimbursed as per Clause
1.01 9.71 of SCC. GST shall be reimbursed as
per Clause 9.67 of SCC.
2. The price shall remain firm during the

currency of the contract subjected to
Clause 17.8 of GCC “Price adjustment for
Works” read with other terms and
conditions of this RFP.
Note Continued.....
Page 1357 of 1358

Consolidated
Amount In TOTAL
TOTAL
Sl. Figures To be AMOUNT
Description Quantity Units AMOUNT
No. entered by the in Rs.
In Words
Bidder (in Rs.) (Excl. GST)
(Excl. GST)
3. The quoted amount shall be deemed to
include inter alia the cost of necessary
Plant & equipment, Qualified Technical
staff, Expert technical consultants, third
party structural audit for project health by
IIT, third party proof check by IIT, skilled &
un skilled labours, necessary liaisoning
approvals, insurances, policy, labour
compliances, CAR Policy, WCP policy,
BOCW, Labour Cess and all other
expenditures, which the EPC Contractor
may incur in the course of the execution of
the contract. The EPC Contractor shall not
be entitled to any payment or
remuneration, whatsoever, over and
above the Agreed Contract Price, only GST,
PF & ESIC shall be reimbursable as per
1.02
actual and “Price adjustment for Works”
vide Clause 17.8 of GCC read with other
terms of this RFP.
4. All necessary statutory deductions as

per laws of the Local Bodies / State
Government/ Government of India shall be
made from the bills payable to the EPC
Contractor and No extra payment / claim
will be entertained in this regard.
5. In the event of delay attributable to the

EPC Contractor & if there is an increase in
GST, PF & ESIC , then the reimbursement
towards GST, PF & ESIC may be restricted
to the rate as prevailing during currency of
the original contract.
INR Zero
Total in Figures 0.00
Only
Quoted Rate in Words INR Zero Only
Page 1358 of 1358

Group Viii Projects Final R FP 497221223

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Group Viii Projects Final R FP 497221223

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Group Viii Projects Final R FP 497221223

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

RFP FOR EPC_GROUP VIII PROJECT AT IIM INDORE

भारतीय प्रबंध संस्थान इं दौर

Tender Notice No. IIMI/Project/15/2023/150 File No.497

REQUEST FOR PROPOSAL

GROUP VIII PROJECTS

Chapter No. Description Page No.

9.30 Preventive Maintenance 249

भारतीय प्रबंध संस्थान इं दौर

ईपीसी ठे केदार की टनयुक्ति

ब ली फॉमा और अन्य जववरण ई-प्र क्य रमेंर् प र्ा ल वेबसाइर् https://eprocure.gov.in/eprocure/app.या

INDIAN INSTITUTE OF MANAGEMENT INDORE

APPOINTMENT OF EPC CONTRACTOR

Invitation of RFP &

Invitation of RFP & Instruction to Bidders

A.1 Information Related to Bid

A.1.1 NIT No.: IIMI/Project/15/2023/150 File No.497

“Appointment of EPC Contractor for Construction of Group VIII

A.1.3 Estimated cost Rs. 458 Crore (excluding GST)

27 Calendar Months, including monsoon periods (1 month for

• Provided always that the total amount of compensation for

• Provided that compensation during the progress of Work

Only On-Line mode

A.1.7 Bid Security

• if the successful bidder, after being awarded the contract, fails

A.2 Key Events and Dates

A.2.1 Publishing Date 09:00 AM on 24th December 2023

11:00 AM on 4th January 2024, at Conference Hall,

A.2.4 Uploading of clarifications on By 8th January 2024, on IIM Indore website.

A.2.5 Last date and time of Up to 03:00 PM on 16th January 2024

A.3 Other Important Information Related to Bid

5 % of accepted tendered value (Awarded Value) to be

Deposit will be released.

A.3.2 Performance Guarantee 5 % of accepted tendered value (Awarded Value) on

i. Time allowed for submission of Performance

2. Performance Guarantee shall be forfeited.

A.3.4 Method of Selection Quality and Cost Based Selection.

A.3.5 Indemnity Bond Bidder to submit professional indemnity insurance policy

Note: General Information and bid submission

C. Other Information and terms & conditions

C.1 Time schedule

C.2 Technical Bid

C.3 List of Documents for Technical Bid to be uploaded on CPP Portal

I. Technical Bid Stage-1:

i. Letter of transmittal (form-01)

ii. Technical bid (RFP duly signed and sealed to be uploaded)

iii. E-payment details towards cost of bid security.

ix. Certificate(s) in respect of LEED/GRIHA/IGBC certified projects.

x. PAN (Permanent Account Number).

xii. GST (Goods & Services Tax) Registration Certificate.

xiii. EPF/ESI registration certificates.

xvii. Bank details for refund of bid security (format attached).

II. Technical Bid (Stage-2) (Presentation) –

Copy of presentation proposed to be made before jury (time limit – within or

III. Financial Bid

C.4 Signature of Bidder

C.6 The bid submitted shall become invalid if:

i. The Bidder is found ineligible.

ii. The bidder does not submit the bid security.

v. If the bidder is found irresponsive at any stage of evaluation.